Skip to main content

Full text of "Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales"

See other formats 


DBBBEBHOOMIMIWHI 


ROLL  OF  HONOUR 

accf.df:re    fontks    integros 

MEMBERS  OF  THE  LINNEAN 
SOCIETY  OF  NEW  SOUTH  WALES 
WHO  SERVED  IN  THE  GREAT 
WAR      -      1914    -    I9I8       '       A. a 

KILLED     IN     ACTION 

D.  B.  FRY    '^     H.   STEPHENS 

ACTIVE     SERVICE 

M.AUROUSSEAU.  .'n.C.  »  CBADHATH 
E.  1.  BICKFORD  t  R.W.  BRETNALL 
PROF.  R.  BROOA\  -  W.  M.  CARNE 
PROF.  T.W.E.- DAVID,  D.S.O.  "  A\.  HENRY 
E.W.FERGUSON  -  G.  A\.  GOLDFINCH 
C.O.HAMBLIN  -  L.M.HARRISON 
C.F.LASERON  ^  W.  R  .  B.  O  L  1  VER 
F.H.KENNY  "    D.S. NORTH  -   E.S.STOKES 

MUNITION     WORK    ETC. 

E.GRIFFITHS  ^  SIR.D.MAWSON  '^  C.E.TILLEY 


■  imi«imimimi«imimimimimjmimim[mi«i»i»imi«im;«imi«wii 


PROCEEDINGS       fe  ' "—  )'i 

OF    THE  X^     #      K/ 


LiMMEnM  Society 


OF 


New    South    Wales 

For  the  Year 

1920 

Vol.  XLV. 


WITH     THIRTY-TWO     PLATES 

And  138  Text-figures. 


StdNB Y : 
PRINTED  AND   PUBLISHED   FOR    THE   SOCIETY    BY 

THE  SYDNEY  AND  MELBOURNE  PUBLISHING  CO.,  LTD, 
11    Wilmot   Street,   Sydney, 

AND 

SOLD  BY  THE  SOCIETY. 


192a21 . 


lU. 


C0NTE/NT5  OF  PROCEEDINGS.  1920. 

PART  I.  (No.  177). 

{Issued  25th  June,  1920.) 

Pages. 

Presidential  Address,  delivered  at  the  Foi-ty-fifth  Annual  Meeting,  31st 

March,  1920,  by  J.  J.  Fletcher,  M.  A.,  B.Se.    (Plates  i.-viii.)   ....  1-47 

Ropiness    in    Wattle    Bark    Infusions.      By    R.    Gi-eig-Suiith,    D.Sc, 

Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the   Society.      (Plate  ix.)    ..  ■ 52-89 

Australian  Syllidae,  EusylUdae,  and  Auiolytidae.  By  W.  A.  Haswell, 
M.A.,  D.Sc,  F.R.S.,  Emeritus  Professor  of  Biology,  the  Univer- 
sity of  Sydney.      (Plates  x.-xiii.) 90-112 

The  Carabidae  of  Tasmania.      By  Thomas  G.    Sloane.      (Four  Test- 

flgures. ) '. 113-17S 

A  New  Genus  of  Australian  Delphacidae  (Homoptera) .  By  F.  Muir, 
F.E.S.  (Commwfiicated  by  E.  W.  Ferguson,  M.B.,  Ch.M.)  (One 
Text-figure.) 181-182 

An  Undescribed  Species  of  Clytocosmus  Skuse.  By  C.  P.  Alexander, 
Ph.D.  (Communicated  bi)  R.  J.  Tilh/ard,  M.A.,  D.Sc.  F.L.S., 
F.E.S.) ,  ..    .; 183-184 

Hon.  Treasurer's  Balance  Sheet 48-50 

Elections  and  Announcements 47,  51,  179 

Notes  and  Exhibits 179-180 


PART  II.    (No.  178). 
{Issued  16th  August,  1920). 

Descriptions  of  Australian  FUes  of  the  family  Asilidae  (Diptera),  with 

synonyms  and  notes.     By  G.   H.  Hardy.      (Sixteen  Text-figures.)     185-202 

Report  on  the  Neuropteroid  Insects  of  the  Hot  Springs  Region,  N.Z., 
in  relation  to  the  problem  of  Trout  Food.  By  R.  J.  Tillyai-d, 
M.A.,  D.Sc,  F.L.S.,  F.E.S.,  Linnean  Macleay  Fellow  of  the 
Society  in  Zoology.      (Two  Text-figures.) 205-213 

The  Panorpoid  Complex.  Additions  and  Corrections  to  Part  3.  By 
R.  J.  Tillyard,  M.A.,  D.Sc,  F.L.S.,  F.E.S.,  Linnean  Macleay 
Fellow  of  the  Society  in  Zoology.     (One  Text-figure.) 214-217 


C\   }^    l-\    i 


IV.  CONTENTS. 

Pages. 

Notes  on  Some  Australian  Tenehrionidae,  with  descriptions  of  new 
species; — also   of   a   new   genus   and   species   of    Buprestidae.      By 

H.   J.   Carter,  B.A.,  F.E.S.      (Fourteen  Text-figures.) 222-249 

On  the  male  Genitalia  of  some  Kobber-flies  belonging  to  the  sub-family 

Asilinae  (Diptm-a) .     By  G.H.Hardy.      (Twelve  Text-figures. ).  .     250-259 
Notes  from  the  Botanic  Gardens,  Sydney.     By  A.   A.   Hamilton  ..    ..     260-2G4 
The  Atrypidae  of  New  South  Wales,  with  references  to  those  recordetl 
from  other  States  of  Australia.     By  J.   Mitchell  and  W.   S.  Dun, 

(Plates  xiv.-xvi.,  and  Five  Text-Figau-es.) 266-27G 

Note  on  certain  variations  of  the  Sporocyst  in  a  species  of  Saprolegnia. 
By   Marjorie   I.    Collins,   B.Sc,   Linnean   Macleay   Fellow   of  the 

Society  in  Botany.      (Eleven  Text-figures.) 277-284 

The  Geology  and  Petrology  of  the  Great  Serpentine  Belt  of  New  South 
Wales.  Part  ix.  The  Geology,  Palaeontology  and  Petrography 
of  the  Currabubula  District,  with  notes  on  adjacent  regions.  By 
Professor  W.  N.  Benson,  B.A.,  D.Sc,  F.G.S.,  W.  S.  Dun,  and 
W.    R.    Browne,   B.Sc.     Section   A. — General   Geology    (W.    N. 

Benson).     (Plates  xvii.-xviia^  and  Nine  Text-figures.) 285-317 

Special  General  Meeting  (Macleay  Centenary) 218-223 

Elections  and  Announcements 203,  221,  2G5 

Notes  and  Exhibits 203-4,  221,  265 


PART  III.    (No.   179). 
(Issued  8th  November,  1920). 

A    List   of   the    Species   of   Australian    Carabidae   which    range   beyond 

Australia  and  its  Dependent  Islands.      By  Thomas  G.    Sloane   ..     320-323 

On    dental    incrustations    and   the    so-called    "Gold-Plating"    of    Sheep's 

Teeth.     By  Thos.  Steel 324-328 

On  the  Structure  of  the  Resin-secreting  Glands  in  some  Australian 
Plants.  By  Marjorie  T.  Collins,  B.Sc,  Linnean  Macleay  Fellow  of 
the  Society  in  Botany.      (Twelve  Text-fig\ires. ) 329-336 

The  Geology  and  Petrology  of  the  Great  Serpentine  Belt  of  New  South 
Wales.  Part  ix.  The  Geology,  Palaeontology  and  Petrography 
of  the  Currabubula  District,  with  Notes  on  Adjacent  Regions.  By 
Professor  W.  N.  Benson,  B.A.,  D.Sc.  F.G.S..  W.  S.  Dun.  and 
W.  R.  Browne,  B.Sc. 
Section  B. — Palaeontology.  (W.  S.  Dun  and  W.  N.  Benson).  Ap- 
pendix by  r.    Chapman,   A.L.S.      (Plates  xviii.-xxiv.,  jmd  eight 

Text-figures. ) 337-374 

Section   C . —Petrography .    (W.    R.    Browne).      (Plate  xxv.)    ....     405-423 

Descriptions  of  New  Species  of  Australian   Cnleoptera.     Part  xvi.     By 

Arthur  M.  Lea,  F.E.S 375-403 

The  Chemical  Examination  of  Macrozamia  spiralis.  By  .Tames  1\I. 
Petrie,  D.Sc,  F.T.C.,  Linnean  Macleay  Fellow  of  the  Society  in 
Biochemistry 424-442 


CONTENTS.  V. 

Pages. 

Two  New  Hymenoptera  of  the  Superfamily  Proctotrypidae  from  Aus- 
tralia. By  Alan  P.  Dodd.  (Commmiicated  by  W.  W.  Froggatt, 
F.L.S.) 443-446 

Cyanogenesis  iu  Plants.  Part  iv.  The  Hydrocyanic  Acid  of  Hetero- 
dendron — A  Fodder  Plant  of  New  South  Wales.  By  James  M. 
Petrie,  D.Sc,  F.I.C.,  Linnean  Macleay  Fellow  of  the  Society  in 
Biochemistry 447-459 

Notes  on  Australian  Tabanidae.    By  Eustace  W.  Ferguson,  M.B.,  Ch.M., 

and  Gerald  F.  Hill,  F.E.S.  " 460-467 

Descriptions  of  New  Forms  of  Butterflies  from  the  South  Pacific.   By 

G.  A.  Waterhouse,  B.Sc,  B.E.,  F.E.S 468-471 

Elections  and  Announcements 318,  404,  472 

Notes  and  Exhibits 318-9,  404,  472 


PART  IV.    (No.    180). 
{Issued  7th  March,  1921.) 
Revision     of     Australian     Lepidoptera — Liparidae.        By    A.     Jefferis 

Turner,  M.D.,  F.E.S ". 474-499 

A  new  Avian  Trematode.  By  Eleanor  E.  Chase,  B.Sc,  Demonstrator 
in  Zoology,  University  of  Sydney.  {Communicated  by  Professor 
S.  J.  Johnston,  B.A.,  D.Sc.)  (Plate  xxvi.,  and  one  Text-figure.)  ..  500-504 
Studies  in  Life-histories  of  Australian  Diptera  Brachycera.  Part  i. 
Stratiomyiidae.  No.  1.  Metoponia  rubriceps  Macquart.  By 
Vera  Irwin-Smith,  B.Sc,  F.L.S.,  Linnean  Macleay  Fellow  of  the 
Society  in  Zoology.  (Plates  xxvii.-xxviii.,  and  Twenty-three  Text- 
figures.)  '. 505-530 

A  Revision  of  the  Chiromyzini  (Diptera).     By  G.  H.  Hardy.     (Plates 

xxix .  -XXX . ) 532-542 

Some  new  Brachiopods  from  the  Middle  Palaeozoic  Rocks  of  New  South 
Wales.     By  John  Mitchell,  late  Principal  of  the  Technical  College 

and  School  of  Mines,  Newcastle.      (Plate  xxxi.) 543-551 

Nematode  Parasites  of  the  Domestic  Pigeon   {Cohimba  livia  domestica) 

in    Australia.      By   Vera    Irwin-Smith,    B.Sc,     F.L.S.,    Linnean 

Macleay  Fellow  of  the  Society  in  Zoology.     (Nineteen  Text-flgaires. )     552-563 

A  Few  Notes  on  the  Botany  of  Lord  Howe  Island.     (Sixth  Paper. )     By 

J.    H.    Maiden,  I.S.O.,  F.R.S.,   F.L.S.,   Government  Botanist   and 

Director  of  the  Botanic  Gardens,  Sydney 564-566 

The  Society's  Heritage  from  the  Macleays.     Address  by  the  President, 
J.  J.  Fletcher,  M.A.,  B.Sc,  at  the  Special  General  Meeting,  14th 

June,  1920 ..   ..     567-635 

Donations  and  Exclianges 636-648 

List  of  Members,  1920 649-653 

Notes  and  Exhibits 473,  531 

Elections  and  Announcements 53I 

Title-page j 

Contents ;;; 

Corrigenda Yi_ 

List  of  New  Tribal  and  Generic  Names vi. 

List  of  Plates vii. 

Index i.-xri. 


yi. 


CONTENTS. 


LIST  OF  NEW  TRIBAL  AND 
IN   THIS   V 

Page. 

Agoniea  (Agonicini) 130 

Agonifiui   (Carabidae  uniperfor- 

atae) 1^9 

Amygdalophyllum  (Coelenterata : 

Actinozoa) 339 

Atrypoidea  (Atrypidae)  ..  ..  'Ill 
Boreoides      ( C'birouiyzini,     Dip- 

tera) 539 

Calyptogonia  (Migadopiui)  ..  121 
Cephaloslrungylus             ( Tricbo- 

stroiigylidae) 553 

Chylnus   (Broscinij 1-9 

Cycloidotrypa    (Polyzoa,    Cyclo- 

stomata) 366 


GENERIC  NAMES  PROPOSED 
GLUME    (1920). 

Cyriuides    ( Chrysot-broinae) 
Habrophylla    (Liparidae)    .  . 
llemilexomyia   (Diapriidae) 
Menearch us    ( Tenebrioninae ) 
Merizodini     (^  Carabidae     unipe 

foratae )    

Molungia    ( Spirif  eridae )     .. 

Oligeria  (Liparidae) 

Percodermus  ( Meiizodini )    . 
Pseudembulophora  (Homoptera 
Pterocyrtus    (Merizodini)    .. 
Pterugmim    (Pterosticbiui) 


Page. 

222 
482 
443 
229 

139 
546 
480 
14(1 
181 
140 
155 


CORRIGENDA. 

Page  43,  for  line  48   (fourtb  from  bottom)    read  whether,  if  one  pair  of  piunae 
persists  at  a  certain  stage,  that  pair  is  always  the 
190,  line  16—  1 

198,  explanation  of  text-flg.   12-— [   for  vwrgites,  read  margitis. 

199.  lines  11.  12.  19—  ) 


Page 
Page 
Page 
Page 


198,  line  24 


(third  from  bottom)    for  little  beyond   discal   cell,   read  little 


Page 
Page 
Page 
Page 


Page 
Page 
Page 
Page 
Page 
Page 
Page 

Page 


beyond  the  middle  of  the  diseal  cell. 
199,  line  10 — for  paratype,  read  allotype. 
265,  line  32 — (tifth  from  bottom)   for  artica,  read  arctica. 
267,  line  27 — for  fig.  13,  read  fig.   6. 

line  27 — for  Ptycomphalu-s,  read  Ptychomphalus. 


290, 


read     Phanerotrema    hurindia, 


line   30 — for    Phanerotrema     aitslralis, 

the  former  name  being  preoccupied. 

line  35 — for  Hyolites,  read  Hyolithes. 
291,  line  26 — for  resting,  read  rest. 
309,  line  41 — for  western,  read  ea.stern. 
356,  lines  37.  38 — for  Ptiicomplialux,  read  Ptychoniphalufi. 
359,  lines  8,  28 — for  Phnrierotr.ema  au-MraJh,  read  P.  hurindia. 
363,  line  1 — for  Hyolites,  read  Ilyolithes. 
365,  line  11 — for  Torryourn,  read  Torryburn. 
374,  lines  26,  28,  31 — for  PhoMerotremu  anntralitt,  read  P.  hurindia. 

lines  30,  32 — for  Ptycomphalii.<i,  read  Ptycliomphaliis. 
404,  line  23 — for  Canyza  read  Conyza. 


CONTENTS.  VU. 

LIST  OF  PLATES. 

PROCEEDINGS,  1920. 

Frontispiece  (issued  with  Part  iv.) — The  Society's  Honour  RolL 

i. — Leaves  of  Reversion-Foliage  of  Acacia  suaveolenti. 

ii. — Euphyllcde  and  Seedling  of  Acacia  implexa  (?). 

iii. — Caesalpinia  Gilliesii,  Acacia  discolor,  and  Revei-sion  Shoots  of  A.  implexa  ('?). 

iv. — Acacia  Baileyana  and  Reversion  Shoots  oi-A.  implexa  (?) . 

v.-vii. — Reversion  Shoots  of  Acacia  im^plexa  (?). 

viii. — Acacia  podalyriaefolia,  A.   myrtifolia,  A.  discolor,  A.  decurrens  and  Jac- 

aranda. 
IX. — Bacteria  causing  Ropiness  in  Wattle  Bark  Infusions, 
x.-xiii. — Australian  SylUdae  and  EusylUdae. 
xiv.-xvi. — Atrypidae  of  New  South  Wales. 
xvii. — Geological  Map  of  the  Currabubula  District, 
sviia. — Topographical  Map  of  the  Currabubula  District, 
xviiii — Amygdalophyllum  etheridgei,  n.gen.  et  sp. 

xix.-xxiii. — Lower  Carboniferous  Fossils  from  the  Currabubula  District, 
xxiv. — Lower  Carboniferous  Fossils  and  Glaciated  Pebbles. 
XXV. — Carboniferous  Rocks  from  the  Currabubula  District, 
xxvi. — Holostomum  repens,  n.sp. 

sxvii . -xxviii . — Metamorphosis  of  Metoponia  rubrieeps. 
xxix. — Metoponia  gemina,  n.sp.,  M.  rubrieeps  and  Chiromyza  prisca. 
Jcxx. — Chiromyza  auetralis  and  Boreoides  subulata,  n.sp. 
xxxi. — Middle  Palaeozoic  Brachjopods  from  New  South  Wales. 


PHOCEEDINaS 

i*  *  \i 


LINNEAN    SOCIETY 


OP 


ISrEA\^    south:    ^Vi^LLES. 


WEDNESDAY,  MARCH  31.st,  1920. 

The  Forty-fiith  Annual  General  Meeting,  together  with  the  Ordinary  Monthly 
Meeting  was  held  in  the  Linnean  HaJl,  Ithaca  Road,  Elizabeth  Bay,  on  Wednesday 
evening,  March  31st,  1920. 

ANNUAL  GENERAL  MEETING. 


Mr.  J.  J.  Fletcher,  M.A.,  B.Sc,  President,  in  the  Chair. 
The  Minutes  of  the  preceding  Annual  General  Meeting   (March  26th,  1919) 
were  read  and  confirmed. 


PRESIDENTIAL  ADDRESS. 
(Plates   i.-viii.) 

Once  again,  after  live  years,  we  hold  our  jVnnual  Meeting  under  the  fegis  of 
Peace.  The  interval  since  our  last  Annual  gathering  has  been  a  very  eventful 
period,  a  year  crowded  with  stirring  events.  This  has  been  due  in  part  to  the 
fact  that  so  many  of  them  have  brought  reminders  of  the  "eternal  verities"  in 
their  train .  First  of  all,  we  have  had  the  Proclamation,  and  then  the  Ratification 
of  Peace,  and  the  prospect  of  a  League  of  Nations.  But  the  War  ended  by 
armistice  and  not  by  surrender,  and  the  Peace  which  followed  was  a  peace  by 
negotiation  and  not  a  peace  after  surrender;  and  so  many  nations  had  been  drawn 
into  the  War,  that  the  problems  for  consideration  and  settlement  were  so  numerous 
and  so  difficult,  that  the  preliminaries  were  protracted,  and  sometimes  lacked 
unanimity.  Now  the  war  has  ended,  the  return  to  a  peace-footing  has  not  come 
about  quite  so  soon,  or  in  quite  the  same  way  as  perhaps  was  ■  expected,  so  pro- 
foundly have  world-affairs  'become  involved,  and  been  upset.  For  example,  the 
belief  that  high  prices  for  food  and  clothing  would  come  down  when  the  war- 
purchases  ceased,  has  not  been  realised . 

Not  less  eventful  or  moving  to  us  has  been  our  witness  of  the  epilogue  of  the 
story,  which  began  "Australia  ivill  be  there" ;  then,  in  due  time  attained  the  clearer 
note,  "Australia  was  there";  and  then  the  epilogue  "Australia  is  here  again" — 
but  not  all,  by  about  fiO.OOO.      This  story  has  been  a  telling  illustration   of  what 


2  president's  address. 

the  enemy  quite  failed  to  realise,  namely,  bow  great  moral  issues  eoukl  stir  and 
iinite  tree  democracies  in  a  great  crisis.  The  return  of  Anzacs  and  Diggers,  as 
well  as  of  those  who  whole-heartedly  co-operated  with  them  in  all  sorts  of  capaci- 
ties, and  of  the  men  of  the  Australian  Navy,  has  demonstrated  to  us  the  charac- 
teristic modesty  of  the  modest  man,  who,  thrice  armed  because  the  quarrel  into 
which  he  was  drawn  was  just,  then  did  liis  bit,  and  idayed  the  game,  but  is  loth 
to  talk  about  his  deeds.  We  are  glad  to  know  that  the  repatriation  and  de- 
mobilisation of  the  Australian  troops  has  been  almost  completed;  and  that  the 
problem  of  their  return  to  civil  life  is  receiving  the  attention  and  consideration 
which  it  deserves. 

One  of  the  most  moving  events  of  the  year  was  tlie  simple  but  very  effective 
ceremony  observed,  by  the  wish  of  His  Majesty,  on  the  eleventh  day  of  the 
eleventh  month,  at  the  eleventh  hour,  when,  standing  with  uncovered  heads,  all 
business  suspended  and  traffic  stopped,  our  hearts  took  charge  of  us,  and  we  paid 
our  silent  and  sincere  homage  to  the  memory  of  the  honoured  and  mighty  Dead, 
who,  though  dead,  yet  speak  to  very  many.  I  think  we  all  hope  that  the  observ- 
ance of  this  simple  and  touching  ceremony,  "the  King's  Great  Silence,''  as  it  has 
been  aptly  termed,  so  appealing  in  its  directness  and  in  its  naturalness,  will  be- 
come an  annual  fixture;  and  that,  in  unison,  we  shall  continue  to  hold  these  real 
and  legitimate  stop-work  Meetings,  not  only  "Lest  we  forget,"  but  also  to  show 
that  we  have  not  forgotten. 

Another  stiri-ing  event  in  the  early  part  of  the  year,  not  without  its  lessons, 
was  a  severe  epidemic  of  influenza  of  a  virulent  type,  which,  as  in  other  countries, 
not  only  upset,  from  top  to  bottom,  the  home-life,  the  educational  life,  the  business- 
life,  the  industrial  life,  and  every  other  grade  of  our  community  life,  but  brought 
bereavement  to  many  households  and  aggregates.  Nevertheless,  the  blackness  of 
the  calamitous  cloud,  which  overshadowed  us  for  so  long,  was  not  without  some 
silver  streaks  of  lining,  in  the  shape  of  the  unselfishness  and  self-sacrifice,  heroic 
as  often  as  circumstances  required,  on  the  part  of  doctors,  nurses,  and  volunteers 
of  both  sexes,  intent  on  doing  their  utmost,  at  all  risks,  for  the  relief  of  the  pros- 
trated and  the  helpless,  and  the  succour  and  comfort  of  the  bereaved. 

Another  great  event  was  the  memorable  visit  of  the  Triumphant  Four,  re- 
gardless of  Father  Neptune's  approval,  descending  upon  Australia  like  a  "bolt 
from  the  blue."  It  was  a  great  achievement,  which  justly  evoked  appreciative 
words  and  deeds.  But  have  we,  as  a  community,  appreciated  the  real  significance, 
and  the  inner  meaning  of  this  much-needed  object  lesson?  Sir  Ross  Smith  did 
not  tell  us  how  many  strikes  there  were  on  the  aerial  \-oyag'e;  or  how  tlie  mechanics 
held  a  stop-work  meeting  aloft,  and  said — "Our  mates  produced  this  machine; 
therefore,  we  are  entitled  to  all  the  products  of  this  stunt.  If  you  don't  concede 
that,  we  will  hitch  the  wagon  to  a  star,  and  go  on  strike."  Of  course,  we  know 
why  Sir  Ross  Smith  did  not  mention  the  subject  of  strikes.  So  having  shown 
very  great  entliusiasm  and  appreciation  over  a  very  successful  cnter]>i-ise,  because 
the  organisation,  co-operation,  co-ordination,  concentration,  single-mindedness, 
unity  of  purpose,  were  about  as  I'erfect,  and  as  perfectly  proxided  for  as  tliey 
could  be,  in  a  very  ■  limited  space,  under  very  strenuous  and  exacting  conditions, 
waste  of  every  kind,  including  energy  potential  and  otherwise,  eliminated,  and 
friction  reduced  to  a  minimum — what  more  did  the  sequel  amount  to  than  revenovs 
a  nos  moutonn,  strikes,  discord,  ebullitions  of  accentuated,  vituperative  party- 
feeling  on  the  eve  of  two  elections,  &c.,  &c.  "Man  is  a  scholar  eager  imlecd  to 
learn,  but  most  forgetful  having  learned.'' 


PRESIDENTS   ADDRESS.  3 

Other  events  that  have  come  home  to  us  by  the  experience  of  a  shortage  of 
bread,  or  a  shortage  of  sugar,  and  the  interruption  of  communications  with  tlie 
distant  vStates  or  New  Zealand,  or  in  some  other  way,  are  the  numerous  Strikes 
which  have  interfered  with  what  we  are  accustomed  to  call  our  normal,  every-day 
social  and  business-life  and  activities.  Fortunately  the  meeting  oi  the  Austral- 
asian Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science  was  due  next  year,  and  not 
this,  or  it  must  have  lapsed. 

We  have  also  had  the  disturbing  experiences  of  a  Federal  Election  and  a 
State  Election,  both  carried  out  with  a  great  deal  of  friction,  and  personal  as 
well  as  party-bitterness  and  recrimination. 

June  13th,  ensuing,  will  be  the  centenary  of  the  birth  of  the  Society's  bene- 
factor. Sir  William  Macleay.  The  Council  is  arranging  for  a  Special  Meeting, 
to  be  held  on  June  14th,  the  actual  day  of  the  anniversary  being  Sunday  this 
year.  Further  particulars  will  be  furnished  to  Members  in  the  Abstract  of  Pro- 
ceedings after  the  Meeting  to  be  held  on  26th  May. 

Since  the  last  Annual  Meeting,  more  of  our  Soldier-Members,  or  Members 
•who  volunteered  for  war-work  abroad,  have  returned  to  Australia;  and  we  have 
had  the  pleasure  of  personally  welcoming  some  of  them  at  one  or  other  of  our 
Meeting's.  We  are  now  able  to  compile  a  complete  list  of  those  who  have  served 
the  Nation  or  the  Commonwealth  abroad,  in  some  capacity  or  other  as  follows : — 

Active  Service. 

Aurousseau,  M.,  M.C.  Ferguson,  E.   W.  Laseron,  C.  F. 

Badham.  C.  *Fry,  D.   B.  North,  D.   S. 

Bickford,  E.   I.  Goldfinch,  G.    M.  Oliver,  W.  R.  B. 

Bretnall,  R.   W.  Hamblin,  C.  O.  "Stephens,  H. 

Broom,  Prof.  R.  Harrison.  L.   M.  Stokes,  E.  S. 

Carne,  W.  M.  Henry,  M. 

David,  Prof.  T.  W.  E.,  D.S.O.  Kenny,  F.    H. 
*  Killed   in  action . 

MuxiTiON"  Work,   etc. 
Griffiths,   E.  Mawson,  Sir  D.  Tilley,  C.   E.  ' 

A  special  Honour  Roll  is  in  contemplation,  of  such  a  character  that  coloured 
copies  of  it  can  be  prepared  for  insertion  in  the  Parts  of  the  Proceedings,  so 
that  every  Member  may  have  one,  especially  those  Members  who  live  at  a  distance. 
It  is  proposed  that  the  original  shall  be  displayed  in  a  conspicuous  place  in  the 
Hall;  and  that  it  shall  be  formally  unveiled  in  a  becoming  manner,  as  part  of 
the  programme  of  the  Special  Meeting  for  the  celebration  of  the  William  Macleay 
Centenary,  on  June  14th.  It  is  to  be  a  permanent,  memorial  record  of  the  names 
of  those  Members  of  the  Society,  who  represent,  to  the  rest  of  us,  the  great  aggre- 
gate of  comrades  who  successfully  strove  to  save  the  rest  of  the  world  from  Might 
as  against  Right.  The  Council  thinks  that  Members  would  like  to  have  a  direct, 
personal  interest  in  this  appropriate  memorial;  and  it  accordingly  invites  us  to 
contribute,  according  to  our  means,  a  share  of  the  cost  of  providing  it,  as  a  tribute 
to  the  great  aggregate  which  our  Soldier-Members  represent,  as  well  as  to  them 
collectively.     I  commend  the  proposal  to  your  favourable  consideration. 

The  concluding  Part  of  Volume  xliv.,  of  the  Society's  Proceedings  was  is- 
sued on  the  15th  instant.  The  complete  volume  (912  and  sxsii.  pp.,  47  Plates, 
and  212  Text-figures)    contains  thirty-four  papers,   ten  of  which  were  contributed 


4  PRESIDtXr  S  ADDRESS. 

by  members  of  the  Society's  research  staff.  These  cover  a  representati\-e  series 
cf  the  subjects  in  which  the  Society  is  directly  interested. 

Our  exchange-relations  with  Societies  and  Institutions  outside  the  Common- 
wealth have  begun  to  show  gratifying  signs  of  recovery.  The  Bureau  of  inter- 
national E.xchanges  at  Washington  has  been  able  to  resume  its  despatches  to  this 
part  of  the  world,  after  suspension  brought  about  by  war-conditions;  and  this 
means  a  great  deal  to  the  Society.  Postal  communications  have  improved  some- 
what, though  still  not  altogether  normal.  Consequently,  Scientific  Societies  in 
neutral  and  other  countries  are  seeking  to  fulfil  the  obligations  which  were  inter- 
fered with  by  abnormal  conditions.  But  it  affords  me  very  special  pleasure  and 
satisfaction  to  be  able  to  announce,  that,  after  the  turmoil  of  war,  five  out  of 
the  seven  Belgian  Scientific  Societies  with  which  we  liave  exchanged  publications 
for  so  many  years,  and  from  whom  we  were  so  abruptly  cut  oft'  in  1914,  have 
succeeded  in  getting  into  touch  with  us  again.  These  are  I'Aeademie  Royale  des 
Sciences  des  Lettres  et  des  Beaux-Arts  de  Belgique,  Societe  Entomologicjue  de 
Belgique,  Societe  Geologique  de  Belgique,  Societe  Royal  de  Botanique  de  Bel- 
gique, and  Societe  Royal  Zoologiqvie  et  Malacologique  de  Belgique.  I  gladly 
avail  myself  of  this  opportunity  of  offering  to  them  the  Society's  cordial  greet- 
ings on  the  resumption  of  their  scientific  activities,  its  sj-mpathy  with  them  in 
the  anxieties  and  trials  which  they  have  endured,  as  well  as  any  help  that  we 
can  give,  if  it  be  necessary.  The  total  number  of  exchanges  received  during  the 
Session  1918-19  amounts  to  799  additions  to  the  library,  received  from  132  Socie- 
ties, Institutions.  &c.,  and  ten  private  donors,  as  compared  with  687,  846,  1243, 
1028,  and  1285  for  the  five  preceding  Sessions.  Effort  has  been  made,  on  the 
Society's  part,  to   bring   its  despatches  as  far  as  possible  up  to  date. 

Six  Ordinary  Members  were  elected,  five  have  resigned  during  the  year;  we 
have  lost  one  of  our  older  members  by  death;  and,  in  addition,  news  came  to 
us  of  the  decease  of  one  of  our  soldier-members  some  time  ago. 

Harrt  Stephens,  like  Dene  Try,  was  a  very  promising  young  biologist, 
whose  career  ended  ]>rematurely  amid  the  havoc  of  battle.  After  leaving  school, 
he  entered  the  Department  of  Agriculture  as  a  cadet;  later  on  he  took  the  degree 
of  B.Sc,  in  Agriculture;  and  was  subsequently  appointed  to  a  Walter  and  Eliza 
Hall  Agricultural  Fellowship  with  the  object  of  doing  research-work  upon  Cereal 
Rusts.  He  had  made  some  progress  in  this  work,  when  war  was  declared,  and 
he  enlisted  for  active  service  in  1915.  He  left  for  the  front,  as  Second  Lieu- 
tenant, in  February,  1916,  and  spent  some  time  in  Egy]5t.  Thence  he  pro- 
ceeded to  Salisbury,  where  he  was  promoted  to  First  Lieutenant ;  later,  he  ac- 
companied his  battalion  to  France,  where,  in  May,  1917,  he  became  Captain. 
On  the  night  of  18th  November,  1917,  three  weeks  after  his  twenty-seventh  birth- 
day, he  luid  just  entered  the  trench  to  which  he  was  allotted,  when  he  was  killed 
instantaneously  by  a  bursting  shell.  Captain  Stephens  was  elected  a  Member 
in  1915,  Init,  in  conse(|uonce  of  the  pressure  of  his  I'niversity  and  other  work,  we 
never  had  the  pleasure  of  welcoming  him  to  our  Meetings.  Professor  Watt,  with 
whom  he  liad  most  to  do  at  the  University,  as  well  as  Mr.  Maiden,  speak  of  him 
in  the  highest  terms  as  possessing  in  a  marked  degree  the  qualities  which  go  to 
make  a  successful  investigator,  as  well  as  a  keen  sense  of  honour  and  of  duty. 
His  University  course  was  higlily  creditable,  as  he  gained  the  Belmore  Scholai-ship 
for  Chemistry  and  Geology  in  his  first  year,  and  l^fr.  Maiden's  jirize  for  Agri- 
cultural Botany;  and  first  class  lioiioui's  and  a  I'niversity  medal  at  grailuation. 
Biological  ivsearch  in  Australia  has  suffci-cd  a  groat  loss  by  the  untimely  deaths 
of  the  only  two  of  our  Sohlicr-Mcnibers  wlio  liavc  nut   n>tnriu'd  to  us. 


PKESIDEXT  S  ADDRESS.  O 

WiLLiAii  Joseph  Rainbow,  elected  a  Member  in  1893,  migTated  from  Eng- 
land to  New  Zealand  iu  1873,  and  ten  years  later  eame  to  Sydney.  While  en- 
gaged in  journalistic  work,  he  became  enthusiastically  intei'ested  in  natural  his- 
tory; and,  in  1895,  he  was  appointed  entomologist  to  the  Australian  Museum, 
and  continued  to.  hold  that  position  until  his  death  on  21st  November,  1919 .  He 
was  especially  interested  in  the  Araiieidae;  and  his  numerous  contributions  to  a 
knowledge  of  this  and  other  groups,  include  seventeen  papers  in  the  Society's 
Proceedings  for  the  years  1892-1902 ;  and  others  in  the  Records  of  the  Australian 
Museum,  and  in  the  "Australian  Naturalist."  He  was  also  the  author  of  two 
useful  additions  to  our  popular  science  manuals,  namely  "A  Guide  to  the  Study 
of  Butterflies,"  and  "Mosquitoes:  their  Habits  and  Distribution."  Mr.  Rainbow 
was  personally  known  to  many  of  us  as  a  kindly,  earnest,  upright  man,  very 
keenly  interested  in  his  work,  and  very  desirous  of  helping  others  to  realise  the 
attractiveness  and  the  interest  of  the  wonderful  Australian  fauna.  One  of  his 
sons  enlisted  soon  after  the  outbreak  of  war,  and  was  killed  at  the  Dardanelles 
on  May  24th,  1915.  This  sorrowful  event  hastened  the  death  of  his  wife  soon 
afterwards.  Another  son  also  enlisted,  and  returned  a  few  days  after  his  father's 
decease . 

Recent  events  have  brought  about  some  changes  directly  or  indirectly  affect- 
ing the  scientific  life  of  the  community.  Their  decease  has  deprived  it  of  two 
of  our  scientific  veterans — Sir  Thomas  Anderson  Stuart,  Professor  of  Physiology 
in  the  University  of  Sydney;  and  Robert  Etheridg-e,  .Tunr.,  Director  and  Curator 
cf  the  Australian  Museum,  both,  at  one  time,  Meml)ers  of  this  Society,  and  the 
latter,  tor  some  years,  a  Member  of  Council. 

Several  of  our  Menibeis  have  retired  from  acti\e  work  after  [lutting  up  long 
records  of  faithful  and  productive  service. 

Professor  Anderson  Stuart,  Dean  of  the  Facidty  of  Medicine  of  the  Uni- 
versity of  Sydney,  and  Chairman  of  Directors  of  the  Royal  Prince  Alfred  Hos- 
pital, has  been  a  very  prominent  figure  in  the  educational  and  public  life  of  the 
State  ever  since  his  arrival  in  1883.  The  development  of  the  Medical  School 
and  its  growing  infiuence  as  a  factor  in  medical  education,  aft'ord  abundant  testi- 
mony to  his  organising  capacity  and  his  forceful  character.  His  death,  on  Feb- 
ruary 29th,  1920,  at  the  age  of  61,  closes  an  impressive  chapter  of  personal  his- 
tory, as  well  as  a  very  important  stage  in  University  history  on  the  medical  side. 

Robert  Etheeidge,  June.,  was,  I  think,  the  oldest  scientific  worker  in  liarness 
iu  Australia.  His  first  contribution  to  scientific  knowledge,  a  geological  ([uarter- 
sheet  map  of  the  Yan  Yean  district  of  Victoria  (2  N.E.),  embodying  the  results 
of  his  field-work  during  the  preceding  year,  was  published  in  1869.  His  last, 
the  second  of  two  papers  on  the  early  history  of  the  Australian  Museum,  was 
issued  on  4th  December,  1919,  about  a  month  before  his  decease;  so  that  his  pub- 
lished work  covers  a  period  of  fully  fifty  years.  He  was  the  son  of  Roljert 
Etlieridge,  Senr.,  to  whom  there  is  a  vei-y  interesting  reference  in  Geikie's  "Life 
of  Sir  Roderick  Murehison"  (1875)  (Vol.  ii.,  p.  259)  to  this  effect— "Early  in 
July,  1856,  Murehison  betook  himself  into  Gloucestershire  to  see  some  of  his  old 
Silurian  haunts.  Mr.  Ramsay  joined  him,  and  some  time  was  spent  by  them 
among  the  Silurian  and  Oolitic  rocks  of  the  Tortworth  district,  where  they  en- 
joyed the  hospitality  of  Loi-d  Ducie,  who  accompanied  them  iu  their  excursions." 
"Among  the  Cotteswold  liills,"  Murehison  records  in  his  journal,  "we 
made  various  excursions  in  the  range  of  the  Lower  Oolites,  and  were  accom- 
panied by  a  very  intelligent  person  who  had  been  in  Imsiness  in  Cheltenham,  and 


6  president's  address. 

hail  i|Uitted  It  fur  the  hammer.  Thi.s  was  Kobert  Etheriilge.  Judging  from  his 
celerity,  liis  quickness  in  finding  shells  and  naming  them,  and  in  drawing  sec-tions, 
I  said  to  Ramsay  •This  is  the  man  we  must  have  to  put  our  Jermyn  Street  ^Museum 
in  order.'"  Geikie  adds,  in  a  footnote, — "Mr.  Etheridge.  whose  merits  were  al- 
ready known  to  Lord  Ducie,  had  been  asked  by  his  Lordship  to  meet  the  geologists 
at  Tortworth.  He  was  soon  after  appointed  Assistant  Naturalist  to  the  Geo- 
logical Survey;  subsequently,  on  the  resignation  of  Mr.  Salter,  he  became  Palae- 
ontologist, and  siuee  that  time  has  gradually  risen  to  hold  a  foremost  place  among 
the  palaeontologists  of  this  country."  Roliert  Etheridge,  Junr.,  was  a  boy  about 
nine  years  old  at  this  time;  and  he  seems  to  have  inherited  his  father's  interest 
in  geolog-y,  and  especially  in  pal8et>ntology ;  for,  about  1868,  as  field-geologist,  he 
joined  the  staff  of  the  Geological  Survey  of  Victoria,  so  ably  organised  in  1852 
and  conducted  for  seventeen  yeai-s  by  Dr.  Alfred  Selwyn,  with  the  eo-operation 
of  men  like  Richard  Daintree.  C.  s'  Wilkinson,  C.  D'Oyley  H.  ApHn,  H.  Y. 
L.  Browii,  and  others,  who  not  only  left  their  mark  on  tlie  records  of  Victorian 
geology,  but  subseijuently  occupied  important  official  positions  in  Queensland, 
New  South  Wales,  South  Australia,  or  elsewhere  in  the  Commonwealth,  or  in 
New  Zealand .  R .  Etheridge,  Junr.,  on  severing  his  connection  with  the  Geo- 
logical Survey  of  Victoria,  became  palieontologist  to  the  Geological  Surrey  of 
Scotland,  and  afterwards  senior  assistant  in  the  Geological  Department  of  the 
British  Museum.  In  1887,  he  came  back  to  Australia  to  fill  the  position  of 
palaeontologist  to  the  Geological  Survey  of  New  South  Walet  and  to  the  Aus- 
tralian Museum,  of  which,  in  1895,  he  became  Curator,  and  later  on  Director. 
The  list  of  his  contributions  to  seientifle  knowledge,  and  especially  those  I'elating 
to  the  palaeontology  and  anthropology  of  Australia  is  very  voluminous  and  valu- 
able. Thirty-six  of  his  papei-s,  together  with  six  joint  papers,  are  to  be  found 
in  the  Society's  Proceedings  for  the  years  1888-1915,  together  with  one  in  the 
Macleay  Memorial  Volume.  One  needs  to  be  a  palfpoutologist  to  appreciate  the 
merits  of  his  long-sustained  work;  but  I  think  that  it  may  l)e  said  of  him,  that 
he  did  very  much  for  Australian  palaeontology,  what  his  father  did  for  British 
paliBontology.  But  over  and  above  this,  in  connection  with  the  Australian 
Museum,  he  has  left  a  good  record  as  an  able  organiser  and  director.  His  laboure 
ended  on  January  5th,  1920,  in  his  seventy-third  year,  while  he  was  away  for  a 
holiday  at  ]\rittagong.  We  may  hope  for  a  more  extended  biography  written  by 
one  who  was  a  colleague,  and  had  a  direct  interest  in  his  work. 

The  untimely  death  of  Dr.  T.  M.  Gellatly,  Director  of  the  Commonwealth 
Institute  of  Science  and  Industry,  at  the  early  age  of  40,  is  much  to  be  deplored . 
He  was  appointed  Chairman  of  Directors  of  the  future  permanent  Institute,  only 
so  recently  as  June,  1918,  with  the  object  of  organising  the  industrial  scientific 
investigations  of  the  Commonwealth.  He  possessed  some  special  (jualifications 
for  the  work  to  which  he  was  apiminted;  l)ut  an  attack  of  pneumonic  infiuenza 
prematurely  ended  his  pi'omising  career  on  24th  September,  1919,  and  deprived 
the  Commonwealth  of  an  able  officer  for  whom  it  will  be  difficult  to  find  a  sub- 
stitute with  like  (|ualifications. 

Several  of  our  Membei's,  including  Mr.  J.  E.  Carne,  Mr.  T.  Steel,  Mr.  C. 
T.  Musson,  Mr.  A.  G.  Hamilton,  and  our  Corresponding  Member,  Sir  Baldwin 
Spencer,  of  Melbourne,  have  recently  retired  from  active  official  work,  but  happily 
without  losing  their  interest  in  scientific  work  generally.  Mr.  Carne's  connection 
with  the  Department  of  Mines  dates  from  1879,  and,  on  his  retirement  at  the  end 
of  the  \ear,  he  had  been  Gt)vernment  Geologist  for  about  four  yeai-s.      His  con- 


PRESIDENT  S  ADDRESS.  < 

tributions  to  a  knowledge  of  the  geology  of  New  South  AVales  are  numerous  and 
important;  and  all  he  knows  is  not  yet  on  record.  Mr.  Steel  has  been  associated 
for  many  years  with  an  institution  which  provides  one  of  our  necessary  food- 
stuffs, and,  at  the  same  time,  is  notable  for  its  appreciation  of  the  importance  of 
the  application  of  science  to  industry,  and  for  its  regard  for  the  status  and  wel-; 
tare  of  its  scientific  officers.  Mr.  Musson  has  been  a  member  of  the  scientific 
staff  of  the  Hawkesbury  Agricultural  College  ever  since  its  foundation  in  1891. 
Mr.  Hamihon  has  been  connected  with  the  Department  of  Education  for  many 
years,  and  latterly  a  member  of  the  staff  of  the  Teachers'  Training  College. 
Professor  Baldwin  Spencer,  by  his  professorial  work,  his  zoological  and  anthro- 
pological contributions,  and  the  scientific  records  of  his  travels  in  Australian  out- 
of-the-way  places,  has  deservedly  come  to  the  front  as  one  of  Australia's  repre- 
sentative men  of  science.  Those  of  the  younger  generation  who  are  coining  on, 
nowadays  more  than  ever,  need  the  encouragement,  the  help,  and  a  share  of  the 
fruit  of  the  long  experience  of  veterans  such  as  these;  and  we  may  be  sure  that 
it  will  not  be  withheld  when  the  opportunity  offers.  The  Society  is  fortunate 
in  having  three  of  them  still  on  the  Council. 

To  Mr.  E.  C.  Andrews,  who  has  been  appointed  to  succeed  Mr.  Carne,  I 
would  offer,  on  behalf  of  ^itlembers,  our  cordial  congi-aiulations,  not  only  on  his 
appointmen*^^  to  the  important  position  of  Government  Creologist,  but  also  on  his 
ha\ing  such  worthy  predecessors  to  follow,  in  carrying  on  the  development  of  tlie 
geological  knowledge  of  New  South  Wales. 

To  Dr.  .J.  B.  Cleland.  who  has  recently  been  appointed  to  the  newly  estab- 
lished Chair  of  Pathology  in  the  University  of  Adelaide,  our  congratulations  are 
due.  We  regret  that  his  removal  to  another  State  deprives  us  of  an  active 
Member,  and  also  a  Member  of  Council.  But  we  know  that  his  <iualiflcatious 
include  much  'valuable  experience,  and  that  his  appointment  to  Adelaide  means 
an  opportunity  of  undertaking  effective  work  in  a  new  field.  We  wish  tliat  he 
may  be  very  successful. 

To  Dr.  T.  Storie  Dixson,  too,  one  of  our  senior  Members,  I  would  like  to 
offer,  on  behalf  of  Members,  our  congratulations  on  the  recent  announcement  in 
the  newspapers,  that  His  Gracious  Majesty  the  Iving.  as  Patron,  has  conferred 
upon  him  the  honour  of  Ivnight  of  Grace  of  the  Order  of  St.  John  of  Jerusalem 
in  England,  in  recognition  of  his  long  and  enthusiastic  services  m  connection  with 
the  St.  John  Ambulance  Brigade,  of  which  he  is  Commissioner  in  New  South 
Wales . 

A  change  of  printers  became  necessary  during  the  year,  and  I  am  glad  to 
say  that  our  new  printer  is  giving  satisfaction.  The  cost  of  printing  of  every 
kind,  however,  has  increased  considerably.  Taking  advantage  of  the  opportunity 
of  making  fresh  arrangements,  the  Council  has  decided  to  enlarge  the  size  of  the 
Proceeding's,  from  demy  octavo  to  crown  quarto,  retaining  the  same  size  type, 
commencing  with  the  volume  for  1920.  This  will  not  only  give  more  room  for 
illustrations,  but  will  simplify  the  work  of  supphdng  the  reprints,  which,  by 
arrangement  with  the  University,  are  furnished  to  Linnean  ]\Iacleay  Fellows,  who 
carry  out  their  research-work  in  the  University  laboratories,  under  the  Regulations 
for  Research  Students.     These,  hitherto,  have  had  to  be  specially  printed. 

The  issue  of  the  Monthly  Abstracts,  which  was  temporarily  suspended,  under 
war-conditions,  after  July,  1916,  was  resumed  after  the  Jleeting  in  October  last, 
and  will  be  generally  appreciated,  because  it  keeiis  distant  Members  and  Societies 
in  touch  with  what  the   Society  is  doing  in   the   intervals  bet'^een   the  issues  of 


8  president's  address. 

the  successive  Parts  of  the  Proceedings.  I  would  remind  Members  of  the  Coun- 
cil's injunction  that  the  notices  of  exhibits  at  Meetings  should  be  as  brief  as  pos- 
sible, and  confined  as  far  as  possible  to  the  scientific  aspec*.  of  the  specimens 
shown.  Members  are  asked  also  not  to  exhibit  too  great  a  variety  of  different 
exhibits  at  the  same  Meeting,  as  this  is  likely  to  necessitate  too  complicated  and 
too  lengthy  entries  in  indexing  them. 

Concomitantly  with  the  growth  of  the  Society's  library,  and  of  the  natural 
accumulation  of  its  reserve-stock  of  publications,  we  have,  foi-  some  yeai-s  past, 
felt  a  pressing  need  for  more  shelf-room,  and  more  storage-room.  During  the 
]-eeess,  the  Council  has  provided  for  some  imjaortaut  structural  alterations  in  the 
Society's  Hall,  to  meet  these  and  other  requirements,  together  with  the  installation 
of  the  electric  light,  and  for  some  necessary,  new  lavatory  arrangements.  These 
have  been  completed  in  a  very  satisfactory  manner  by  the  contractor,  Mr.  James 
Leckie,  under  the  able  superintendence  of  the  architect.  Mr.  A.  W.  "Warden,  in 
time  for  the  Annual  Meeting. 

The  year's  work  of  the  Society's  research-staff  may  be  summarised  thus. 
Dr.  R.  Greig  Smith,  Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the  Society,  contributed  two  papers 
on  "The  Germicidal  Activity  of  the  Eucalyptus  Oils,"  which  appeared  in  Parts 
i.  and  ii.  of  the  Proceedings  for  1919.  He  has  also  completed  a  paper  '"Ropi- 
ness  in  AVattle-bark  Infusions,"  which  will  be  communicated  at  this  month's  Meet- 
ing. 

Dr.  J.  M.  Petrie,  Linnean  Macleay  Fellow  of  the  Society  in  Biochemistry, 
lias  carried  out  an  elaborate  examination  of  the  leaves,  and  also  of  the  nuts,  of 
Macrozamia  spiralis,  but,  in  both  cases,  the  extracts  failed  to  yield  evidence  of 
the  presence  of  any  poisonous  substance,  which  was  detrimental  when  fed  to 
animals.  A  considerable  amount  of  experimental  work  has  been  carried  out 
with  lleterodeiidrcm  oleaefolia,  in  order  to  obtain  the  eyanogenetic  glucoside  which 
is  contained  in  the  leaves.  The  active  principle  can  be  concentrated  into  viscous 
syrup,  but  hitherto  all  attempts  to  induce  it  to  yield  a  crystalline  compound 
have  failed.  The  results  of  these  two  investigations  will  be  communicated  to  the 
Society,  at  an  early  date,  in  two  papei-s,  entitled,  "The  Chemistry  of  Macm- 
zamia."  and  "The  Stock-poison  Heterndendron,  including  experiments  on  the 
Hydrocyanic  acid  Content."  In  addition  to  the  foregoing,  woi'k  is  in  progress 
on  the  Native  Pomegranate  {Capparis  Mit.chelli).  which  has  proved  to  be  an- 
other cyano-genetic  plant,  though  not  hitherto  known  to  be,  or  even  suspected  of 
being  poisonous.  Also,  a  continuous  series  of  cjuantitative  experiments  has  been 
made,  to  determine  the  amounts  of  hydrocyanic  acid  evolved  from  Zieria  Smithii 
under  various  conditions. 

Dr.  R.  J.  Tillyard,  Linnean  Macleay  Fellow  ot  the  Society  in  Zoology, 
conti-ibuted  seven  papers  during  the  year,  all  of  wlii(^h  have  been  pub- 
lished .  These  include — "On  the  Morphology  and  Systematic  Position  of  the 
Family  Micropterygidae  (sens,  lat.),  Introduction  and  Part  i.;  "Mesozoic  Insects 
of  Queensland,"  Nos.  5,  6,  and  7;  "A  Fossil  Insect  Wing  belonging  to  the  new 
Order  Paramecoptera,  ancestral  to  the  Triclio])(('ra  and  Lepidoptcra,  from  the 
Upper  Coal  Measui-es  of  Newcastle,  N.S.W.";  "Studies  in  Australian  Neurop- 
tera,"  No.  8;  and  "The  Panorpoid  Complex.  Part  iii.''  Dr.  Tillyard  intenils  to 
continue  woiking  upon  the  life-histories  of  Australian  Neuropteroid  Insects,  and 
to  make  an  attempt  to  bring  the  systematic  knowledge  of  certain  groups  up  to 
date  in  order  to  facilitate  his  morphological  work.  In  October,  the  Council 
granted  him  porinissiim  to  visil    New  Zc;danil.    in   (ir<lci'  to  obtain   imiiortant  ma- 


PRESIDEXT  S  ADDRESS.  9 

terial  for  the  i'urtlier  working-out  of  the  phylogeny  of  the  Panorpoid  Orders, 
and  especially  the  Faiuily  Micropteri/giclae,  which  has  its  head(iuarters  there;  and 
also  to  collect  material  in  all  Neuropteroid  groups,  in  order  to  study  it  in  con- 
junction with  the  closely  allied  Australian  fauna.  Good  results  were  obtained, 
except  in  the  Rotorua-Taupo  district,  where  the  rainbow-trout  introduced  into 
the  lakes  had  exercised  the  first  call  on  the  insect-fauna  in  which  he  was  mainly 
interested.  But  this  visit  to  Xew  Zealand  opened  the  way  for  an  offer  of  the 
position  of  Biologist  at  the  Cawthron  Institute,  about  to  be  established  at  Nel- 
son, which  Dr.  Tillyard  has  decided  to  accept;  and,  after  to-day,  we  part  with 
our  Senior  Fellow  next  to  Dr.  Petrie.  He  has  been  a  member  of  the  Society's 
research-staff  for  ti\e  years;  and  his  papers  during  that  period  have  been  a 
prominent  feature  in  the  Society's  Proceeding's.  He  has  not  only  studied  the 
Australian  aspect  of  world-problems,  but  he  has  tried  to  open  up  world-problems 
from  the  Australian  standpoint;  which  is  my  idea  of  what  Australian  workers, 
as  far  as  possible  and  according  to  their  oppoiiunities  and  resources,  should  aim 
at  doing.  In  losing  Dr.  Tillyard,  what  we  regret  is  not  so  much  that  we  are 
losing  him  as  a  Fellow  of  the  Society,  but  that  Australia  is  losing,  him ;  and 
that  our  hopes,  that  an  opening  for  doing  what  he  is  about  to  undertake  in  New 
Zealand,  would  be  available  for  him  in  Australia,  have  Ijeen  without  result.  Con- 
sequently, it  merely  remains  for  me  to  voice,  on  behalf  of  the  Council  and  of  the 
Society,  our  apjjreciation  of  the  importance  of  the  work  which  he  has  been  doing 
so  enthusiastically  for  so  long;  of  expressing  our  sincere  regret  at  losing  him, 
not  only  as  a  Fellow  of  the  Society,  but  most  of  all  as  a  scientific  worker  resi- 
dent in  Australia;  and  of  wishing  him  every  success  in  the  new  sphere  of  work 
which  he  is  about  to  enter.  At  any  rate,  I  think  he  will  l)e  ready  to  acknowledge 
that  his  official  connection  with  the  Society  has  been  helpful  to  him  as  a  research- 
worker:  and  that  the  fruits  of  his  work  are,  in  some  measure,  his  tribute  to  the 
memory  of  the  Ijenevolent  and  far-seeing  man  who  made  the  Society's  Fellowships 
possible. 

Dr.  H.  S.  Halcro  Wardlaw,  Linnean  Maeleay  Fellow  in  Physiology, 
utilised  the  opportunity  afforded  liy  the  outbreak  of  ]ineumonic  influenza,  in  the 
early  part  of  the  year,  of  making  an  important  investigation  in  connection  there- 
with. Measurements  of  the  oys'gen-capacity  and  other  properties  of  the  Ijlood 
of  influenza  patients  were  made;  and  the  results  were  embodied  in  a  paper  en- 
titled "The  Venous  Oxygen-content  and  the  Alkaline  Reserve  of  the  Blood  in 
Pneumonic  Influenza,"  which  was  published  in  Part  iii.  of  the  Proceedings  for 
]919.  The  work  on  the  reciprocal  dialysis  of  blood  and  milk  has  been  con- 
tinued. The  effect  on  the  total  solid  matter,  ash,  chlorine,  phosphoric  acid,  and 
calcium  has  been  examined.  It  has  been  found,  contrary  to  expectation,  that, 
when  milk  is  dialysed  against  the  blood  of  the  same  species,  certain  of  the  in- 
organic constituents  of  the  milk  pass  into  the  blood  in  considerable  quantity. 
The  further  surprising  result,  that  the  presence  of  the  red  corpuscles  of  the  blood 
materially  diminishes  (his  effect  has  also  been  obtained.  An  interpretation  of 
these  pheno.nena  has  not  yet  been  arrived  at,  and  will  need  further  consideration ; 
as  do  also  some  other  incompleted  investigations.  Dr.  Wardlaw  resigned  his 
Fellowship  in  September,  in  order  to  take  up  a  University  appointment  as  Lec- 
turer and  Demonstrator  in  Physiology;  and,  in  this  capacity,  he  is  taking  part  in 
the  work  of  the  Commission  appointed  to  investigate  the  prevalence  of  disease 
among  mine-workers  at  Broken  Hill.  While  regretting  the  Society's  loss  of  Dr. 
Wardlaw   as  a   Linnean  Jlacleav  Fellow,   I  would  offer  to  him,  on  behalf  of    the 


ID  president's  address. 

Council  and  of  Members,  cordial  congratulations  on  his  appointment  to  the  staff 
of  the  University,  and  of  wishing  him  every  success.  His  five  papers  contributed 
to  the  Society's  Proceedings,  as  a  Fellow  for  more  than  three  years  and  a  half, 
are  important  additions  to  the  volumes,  and  bear  testimony  to  his  ability  to  do 
liigh-chiss  rescarcii-W'jrk . 

Miss  V.  Irwin  Smith,  Linneau  Macleay  Fellow  of  the  Society  in 
Zoology,  has  devoted  her  time  tc  the  study  of  Nematodes,  and  of  the  life-histories 
of  the  Braehyeerous  Diptera.  Considerable  progress  has  been  made  with  both 
groups,  in  collecting  material,  in  looking  into  the  literature  of  the  subject,  and 
in  the  examination  and  drawing  of  specimens;  and  the  results  are  already  very 
promising . 

Six  applications  for  Linneau  Macleay  Fellowships,  1920-21,  were  received 
in  response  to  the  Council's  invitation  announced  on  October  29th,  1919;  I  have 
now  the  pleasure  of  making  the  first  public  announcement  of  the  Council's  re- 
appointment of  Dr.  J.  M.  Petrie  and  Miss  V.  Irwin  Smith  to  r^llowships  in 
Biochemistry  and  Zoology;  and  of  the  appointment  of  Miss  M.  I.  Collins,  B.Sc. 
to  a  Fellowship  in  Botany  from  1st  proximo;  and,  on  behalf  of  the  Society,  as 
war-conditions  have  given  place  to  something  approaching  a  normal  state  of 
things,  I  have  much  pleasure  in  wishing  them  every  success  in  carrying  out  their 
investigations.  Dr.  Tillyard  was  also  re-appointed;  but,  as  already  mentioned, 
in  consecjuence  of  his  contemplated  removal  to  New  Zealand,  he  resigned  his 
Fellowship  as  from  31st  March,  192(1. 

Miss  Collins  has  <|ualifications  wliicli  justify  our  expectation  of  an 
enlargement  of  the  Society's  scope  of  work  in  a  very  desirable  direction.  She 
has  an  excellent  University  record,  supplemented  in  an  important  way  by  some 
experience  of  research-work  and  of  teaching.  She  won  the  Deas  Thomson 
Scholarship  and  Professor  David's  Prize  for  Geology  in  1914,  and  graduated  in 
Science  in  1915,  with  First  Class  Honours  in  Botany.  Miss  Collins  was  awarded 
a  Science  Research  Scholarsliip  in  191(i  and  the  following  year,  up  to  the  time 
of  her  appointment  as  Demonstrator  in  Botany  in  the  University  of  Adelaide 
under  Professor  T.  G.  B.  Osborn.  For  some  time  she  has  been  actively  in- 
terested in  the  effect  of  certain  climatic  factors — especially  drought  and  excessive 
sunliglit — upon  the  distribution  and  structure  of  Australian  plants.  This  is  a 
very  characteristic,  imi^ortant,  comjirehensive,  and  promising  Australian 
problem.  Her  paper  "On  the  Leat'-anatomy  of  Scaecola  crarisifolin," 
with  special  reference  to  the  "Epidermal  Secretion,"  which  was  \n\h- 
lished  in  the  Proceedings  for  1918,  was  the  starting-point .  In  several  papers 
almost  ready  for  publication,  the  condition  of  leaf-lacf|uering  and  the  glandular 
structures  responsible  for  the  same,  have  l)een  investigated  in  plants  of  other  genera 
available,  some  of  which  were  obtained  from  the  Broken  Hill  district.  Miss 
Collins  will  now  have  time  to  comjilete  these,  and  still  further  to  develop  the 
subject  in  hand .  Two  branches  of  Science  in  which  the  Society  is  s|)ecially  in- 
terested, and  in  which  jjrogress  has  lagged  behind,  are  the  morphology  of  Aus- 
tralian phanerogams,  and  Australian  soil-bacteriology  and  the  bionomics  of  soil- 
organisms,  especially  in  the  arid  parts  of  Australia.  Our  old  member,  Mr.  A. 
G.  Hamilton,  with  only  such  laboratory- facilities  as  a  ]irivate  individual  can 
extemporise,  and  in  his  wearied  leisure,  has,  for  years,  manfully  striven  to  ac- 
complish some  morphological  and  pollination-work;  and,  considering  his  draw- 
backs, his  labours  liave  not  been  in  vain.  The  great  hindrance  to  progress  in 
this  particular  l)ranch    lias  been  that,  until  1913,  there  was  no  Botanical   Depart- 


president's  address.  11 

ment  at  tbu  Uni\ersity,  and  no  properly  equipped  botanical  laboratory  in 
this,  the  Mother-State  of  the  Commonwealth.  The  Professor  of  Botany  has  been 
carrying  out  important  investigations  on  Australian  Cryptogams  since  its  estab- 
lishment. But  Australian  Phanerogams  offer  a  no  less  attractive  and  importc.nt 
field  for  morphological  research  work.  We  cannot  but  hail,  with  great  satisfac- 
tion, the  appointment  of  JNIiss  Collins,  because  this  is  not  only  the  firet  time 
that  a  Linnean  Macleay  Fellow  in  Botany  has  been  appointed,  but  it  is  the  first 
time  that  a  botanical  candidate  has  offered.  Moreover,  she  is  interested  in  Aus- 
tralian problems;  and  it  is  the  investigation  of  characteristic  Australian  problems 
that  is  urgently  needed,  to  the  exclusion  of  purely  academic  biological  problems 
■which  can  be  carried  out  au\-vvhere  else  on  the  habitable  globe;  and  which  may 
be  left  to  those  who  lack  the  opportunity  or  the  resources  for  othei-wise  getting 
to  work.  Anotlier  source  of  satisfaction  is  that  the  systematists  may  now  hope 
for  some  of  that  needful  co-operation,  without  which  they  have  had  to  work,  as 
best  they  could,  for  so  long. 

Dr.  A.  B.  Walkom,  who  succeeded  me  as  Secretary,  to-day  completes  his 
fii'st  year  of  service.  As  a  Memher  of  the  Society  since  1909,  and  as  a  Linnean 
Macleay  Fellow  in  Geology,  1912-13,  he  began  with  some  preliminary  knowledge 
of  the  Society  and  its  work,  and  was  not  a  stranger  to  us.  As  Hon.  Secretary 
of  the  Royal  Society  of  Queensland  for  tour  years,  and  as  President  for  one  year 
before  bis  removal  to  Sydney,  he  had  the  opportunity  of  gaining  experience  which 
has-been  very  useful  to  him  and  to  the  Society.  He  was  Lecturer  in  Geology  in 
the  University  of  Queensland  for  six  years,  and  was  selected  by  the  Council  out 
of  thirteen  candidates.  As  I  have  co-operated  with  him  in  preparing  an  up-to- 
date  catalogue  of  the  serial  publications  in  the  Society's  library;  and,  in  other 
ways,  have  been  in  close  touch  with  him  ever  since  his  appointment,  it  affords  me 
much  pleasure  to  bear  my  testimony  to  his  capacity  for  taking  u|)  and  carrying 
out  his  duties,  as  well  as  to  his  zeal  and  efficiency. 

The  Council  has  also  been  able  to  jirovide  for  an  assistant;  and  I  have  plea- 
sure in  saying  that  Miss  Watson  is  very  efficiently  carrying  out  her  duties. 

One  of  the  lessons  which  the  War  has  forced  upon  the  attention  of  the  British, 
as  well  as  other  nations,  is  the  importance  of  Science  in  the  conduct  of  human 
affairs,  and  especially  the  need  of  a  more  satisfactory  organisation  of  scientific 
effort .  Scientific  experts  in  Great  Britain  are  expressing  the  \'iews,  not  only  from 
the  purely  British  standpoint,  but  also  from  the  British  national  or  imperial  stand- 
point. Through  their  representati\-e,  the  Royal  Society  of  London,  they  are  ask- 
ing the  Dominions  not  only  to  co-operate  with  the  mother-country  to  this  end,  and 
for  this  purpose;  but  also  to  join  with  the  mother-country  in  an  International  co- 
operative effort  with  which  it  is  associated,  and  for  the  establislnnent  of  which, 
some  progress  has  already  been  made,  as  the  result  of  two  Inter- Allied  Conferences 
on  the  future  conduct  of  scientific  work  of  an  international  character,  held  in 
Paris,  November  26-29,  1918;  and  in  -July,  1919.  Accoi-dingly.  early  in  the  year, 
the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  as  the  senior  Scientific  Society  of  the 
Commonwealth,  was  a.sked  by  the  Royal  Society  of  London  "to  take  the  necessary 
steps  to  establish  some  organisation  in  Australia  which  could  act  as  a  National 
Research  Council  and  nominate  National  Committees  of  such  Associations  as  you 
may  desire  to  join." 

The  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales  accordingly  communicated  with  the 
Scientific  Societies  in  the  different  States  of  the  Commonwealth,  asking  them  to 
appoint  delegates;   and  when   this  had  been   carried   out,  it  arranged   for  a   Con- 


12  president's  address. 

ference  of  the  delegates  to  consider  the  proposal  to  form  an  Australian  National 
Research  Council.  The  Conference  was  held  on  21st  August.  1919,  when  certain 
Resolutions  were  unanimously  passed.  As  it  is  desirable  that  publicity  shoidd 
be  given  to  these  before  the  next  Meeting  of  the  Australasian  Association,  in 
January,  1921,  thej'  are  accordingly  included  herewith.  1  may  say  that,  in  the 
appointment  of  representatives,  the  effort  was  made  to  have  all  the  States  repre- 
sented, as  far  as  it  was  possible.  To  save  space,  only  the  representatives' of  the 
branches  of  Science  in  which  the  Society  is  directly  interested  are  given. 

1.  That  this  meeting  proceed  to  nominate  a  provisional  Australian  National 
Research  Council. 

2.  That  each  important  branch  of  science  in  Australia  be  represented  on  the 
Council . 

3.  That  the  branches  of  science  to  be  represented  include:  Agriculture,  An- 
thropology', Astronomy,  Botany,  Chemistry,  Engineering,  Geograpliy,  Geology, 
Mathematics,  ^Meteorology,  Pathology,  Physics,  Phj'siologv,  Veterinary  Science, 
Zoology . 

4.  That  there  be  two  representatives  of  each  of  these  sciences,  on  the  National 
Council . 

5.  That  the  representatives  of  the  provisional  Australian  National  Researih 
Council  be:— 

1.  Agrici'ltcrk^ 

A.  E.  V.  Richardson,  M.A.,  B.Sc.    (Victoria). 
Professor  R.  D.  Watt,  M.A.,  B.Sc.   (New  South  Wales). 
2.  Anthropology — 

C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.    (New  South  Wales). 

Sir  Baldwin  Spencer,  K.C.M.G.,  M.A..  D.Sc.  F.R.S.   (Victoria). 

4.     BOTAXY 

J.  H.  Maiden,  I.S.O.,  F.R.S.,  F.L.S.    (New  South  Wales). 
Professor  T.  G.  B.  Osborn,  M.Sc.  (South  Australia) . 
8.   Geology — 

Professor   T.   W.   E.    David,   C.:\r.G.,    D.S.O.,  r,.A.,   D.Sc.    F.II.S. 

(New  South  Wales) . 
Professor  E.  W.  Skeats,  D.Sc,  F.G.  S.  (Victoria).. 

13.  Physiology' — 

Professor  H.   G.   Chapman,  M.D.,  B.S.   (New  South  Wales'). 
Professor  W.  A.   Osborne,  D.  Sc,  M.B.    (Victoria). 

14.  Veterinary  Science — 

Professor  ,J.  D.  Stewart,  B.V.Sc,  M.R.C.V.S.  (New  South  Wales) . 
Prof.  H.  A.  Woodruff,  :\r.R.C.V.S.,  M.R.C.S..  L.R.C.P.  (Victoria). 

15.  Zoology — 

Professor  W.  J.  Dakin,  D.Sc.  F.Z.S.,  F.L.S.   (Western  Australia). 
Professor  W.  A.  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc,  F.R.S.  (New  South  Wales) . 

6.  That  Mr.  R.  II.  Cambage,  F.L.S.  (New  South  Wales)  be  a  member  of 
the  Australian  National  Research  Council  and  also  its  Honorary  Secretary. 

7.  That  the  provisional  Council  hold  office  until  the  new  Council  shall  have 
been  appointed  at  the  next  meeting  of  the  Australasian  Association  for  the  Ad- 
vancement of  Science,  in  I  .January,  1921 . 

8.  That  the  election  of  the  new  Australian  National  IJcscarch  Council  l)e 
entrusted  to  the  Council  of  the  Australasian  Association  for  the  Advancement  of 
Science  at  its  meeting  in  .Tnnnarv,  1021  . 


president's  address.  13 

9.  That  at  least  ten  of  the  retiring  members  of  the  Council  shall  not  be 
eligible  for  re-election,  but  that  this  provision  shall  not  operate  at  the  election  of 
the  first  Australian  National  Research  Council  in  January,  1921. 

10.  That  a  provisional  Executive  Committee  consisting  of  a  Chairman,  an 
Honorary  Secretary,  and  three  other  members  be  appointed  to  act  at  once  in  all 
matters  considered  urgent,  and  that  the  members  of  such  Executive  Committee 
be :— Professor  David  (Chairman),  Mr.  E.  H.  Cambage  (Hon.  Secretary), 
Professor  Chapman,  Mr.  J.  H.  Maiden,  and  Professor  Pollock. 

11.  That  it  be  recommended  to  this  provisional  Executive  Committee  that 
the  Commonwealth  Government  be  requested  to  make  the  financial  provisions 
necessary  for  carrying  on  the  work  of  the  Australian  I^ational  Research  Council, 
and  that  for  this  purpose  representations  be  made  to  the  Prime  Minister. 

12.  In  the  event  of  any  of  the  members  of  ;  the  provisional  Council  or  the 
Executive  Committee,  declining  to  accept  office,  that  the  Executive  be  empowered 
to  fill  the  vacancies . 

The  International  Research  Council  has  already  provided  for  the  establish- 
ment of  (1)  An  International  Astronomical  Union  to  promote  and  co-ordinate  the 
study  of  Astronomy  and  Astrophysics;  (2)  An  International  Union  of  Geophysics, 
to  promote  the  study  of  the  various  branches  of  the  Physics  of  the  Earth;  and 
(3)  An  International  Chemical  Council,  to  promote  international  co-operation  in 
chemistry.  Steps  will  be  taken  to  establish  cognate  Unions  for  other  branches  of 
Science.  In  the  meantime,  the  Australian  National  Council  has  asked  its  repre- 
sentatives of  Zoology  to  report  on  the  desirability,  or  otherwise,  of  joining  the 
International  Union  of  Biological  Science  (when  it  snail  have  become  established), 
more  particularly  as  regards  the  section  of  Zoology;  and  they  are  inviting  others 
to  confer  with  them.  The  object  aimed  at  in  forming  an  International  Union  of 
Biological  Science  is  "to  encourage  the  study  of  Biology  in  its  various  branches, 
and  more  especially" : — 

(a)  "To  initiate  and  organise  the  conduct  of  researches  which  depend  on, co- 
operation between  countries. 

(b)  "Ta  provide  for  their  scientific  discussion  and  publication." 

(c)  "To  encourage  the  establishment  and  improvement  of  Research  Labora- 
tories which  are  accessible  to  students  of  all  nationalities." 

(d)  "To  promote  the  organisation  of  International  Congresses." 

(e)  "To  facilitate  the  preparation  and  issue  of  bibliographical  publications." 
The  sections   proposed  are — General  Biology,  Physiology,   Zoology,  Botany, 

Medical  Sciences,  Applied  Biology. 

Now,  theoretically,  what  is  proposed  as  above  is  admirable,  and  no  one  can 
gainsay  the  need  for  it,  or  at  least  for  something  of  the  sort,  if  the  resources  for 
carrying  it  out  are  forthcoming.  But  there  is  also  another  side  to  the  question, 
which  is  not  less  important  for  us,  and  that  is.  the  question  of  more,  and  better 
organisation  of  scientific  effort  from  the  purely  Australian  point  of  view.  How 
are  we  to  provide  for  this?  At  present  men  of  Science  in  Australia  are  but  a 
handful,  occupied  with  official  duties,  centralised  in  the  capital  city  of  each  of  the 
States,  at  considerable  distances  apart,  with  few  opportunities  for  personal  inter- 
course. The  only  comprehensive,  unifying  organisation  in  the  branches  of 
Science  in  which  this  Society  is  directly  interested,  is  the  Australasian  Association 
for  the  Advancement  of  Science.  As  a  private  individual,  interested  in  Science, 
I  venture  to  express  the  hope,  that,  after  the  next  Meeting,  to  be  held  in  Hobart 
in  January,  1921.  the  Association  will   give  up  entirely  the  practice  of  reading 


14  prestdext's  address. 

papers  in  the  different  Sectiuns,   with   a   view   to  restricting  its  activities   in   the 
following   manner — to    jjroviding   opportunity,    (1)    for    personal    intercourse    be- 
tween the  Members;    (?.)    for  Presidential  Addresses  as  at  present;   (3)    for  dis- 
cussing prearranged  scientific  problems  of  Sectional  or  general  interest;    (4)   for 
discussing  matters  relating  to   the  organisation   of  scientific   effort   in   Australia; 
and  for  doing  what  it  can  to  accomplish  it .      In  other  words,  that  it  should  leave 
to  the  Australian  Scientific  Societies  the  matter  of  reading  and  publishing  scientific 
papers;  and  assume  the  functions  ol  an  Australasian  Parliament  of  Science,  in  the 
interest  of  promoting  co-operation,  and  a  better  organisation  of  scientific  effort. 
As  an  example  of  one  of  many  Australian  problems — a  •world-problem  in 
process  of  being  opened*  up  from  the  Australian  standpoint,  under  Australian 
conditions — wliich  is  being  carried  out  in  the  right  way,  namely  by  organised  team- 
work, and,    not  in    Sydney,  but  at  a  remote    country  centre,  where  the  problem 
takes  its  origin.     I  call  your  attention  to  a  scientific  investigation  which  is  being 
carried  out  at  Broken  Hill,  under  the  direction  of  one  of  our  Alembers,  Professor 
Chapman.      A   Technical   Commission   of  Inquiry   has   been   appointed   recently, 
under  the  State  Board  of  Trade,  to  investigate  the  prevalence  of  disease  among-st 
mine-woikers   at  Broken   Hill.      The  investigations  will   occupy  six  months,   and 
£15,000  has  been  allotted  for  the  work.     Professor  Chapman,  one  of  our  ]\Iem- 
bers,   has   been   appointed   Chairman   of   the   Commission,   and   was   asked  by   the 
Premier  to  associate  with  himself  in  the  Commission  such  gentlemen  as  would  be 
competent  to  take  charge  of  different  phases   of    the  investigation.        The  Com- 
mission is  making  medical   examinations   of   as   many   of   the   mine   workers   at 
Broken  Hill  as  are  available,  with  the  object  of  ascertaining  the  degree  of  preval- 
ence  of   miner's   phthisis,   lead-poisoning,   and   anchylostomiasis.      It   is   hoped  to 
study  4500  men  who  will  form  about   60   %  of  those  employed  along  the  lode. 
Two  large  X-ray  machines  have  been  installed  and  radiograms  are  made  of  each 
man's  chest  by  Dr.   W.   A.    Edwards.      Six  medical  practitiono.'S,  working  under 
the  direction  of  Dr.  S.  A.   Smith,  are  carrying  out  a  thorough  medical  examina-  ' 
tion  of  each  man.     When  needed  special  bacteriological  and  chemical  and  cytol- 
ogical  tests  are  performed.        Through  the  courtesy  of  the  Commonwealth   Clov- 
ernment.   the  services  of  Dr  W.    A.    Sawyer  of  the  International  Healtii   ISoard 
have   been   made  available    to   the    Commission    for   the    investigation   of   the    oc- 
currence of  hookworm.      As  a  lesult,  a  complete  working-unit,  comprising  four 
microscopists   and  two  assistants  under  the  control   of  Dr.    Rosenthal,   has  been 
transferred  to  Broken  Hill  from  Queensland.     The  staff  concerned  in  this  medical 
in\estigatiou   comprises  seven   medical   practitioners,    four   mici'oscopists,    five   as- 
sistants, and  four  statistical  clerks,  together  with  four  members  of  the  Commission. 
The  Conunission  will  endeavour  to  establish  a  relation  between  the  sign  and  symji- 
toms  of  disease  noted  in  the  mine  worker,  the  appearance  of  the  radiographic 
picture  of  the  lungs  and  the  pathological  changes  which  can  be  observed  in  the 
lungs  of  dead  miners.     As  the  Commission  has  been  asked  to  report  on  the  con- 
ditions antecedent  to  the  occurrence  of  ill-health  among  mine-workers,  investiga- 
tions are  being  made  into  the  chemical  and  physical  charactei-s  of  the  dust  pro- 
duced in  the  various  operations  of  mining.      Some  analyses  are  being  performed 
upon  the  ash  of  the  lungs  of  mine-workers  in  the  hope  of  adding  to  the  store 
of  our  knowledge  about  the  dust  present  in  the  lung-s.     Samples  of  the  dust  float- 
ing in  the  air  of  the  mines   are   also  being  subjected   to   chemical   and    physical 
examination.      This    part   of   the   work    of   the    Ccmunissiou    has    been    under   the 
control  of  Dr.   II.   S.   H.  Wardlaw,  who  is  assisted  bv  four  chemists.     We  look 


president's  address.  15 

forward,  with  gj-eat  interest,  to  the  results  of  this  well-organised,  well-equipped, 
co-ordinated  effort,  the  most  notable  in  these  respects  that  we  have  yet  had  in 
New  South  Wales. 

One  of  the  events  of  the  year  has  been  the  oulinination  of  a  disastrous 
drought ;  and  though  there  has  been  relief  in  some  districts,  other  localities  are 
still  much  in  need  of  rain.  It  has  been  a  costly  visitation  to  the  State.  The 
returns  of  the  approximate  number  of  live  stock  in  New  South  Wales  on  31st 
December,  1919,  as  compared  with  those  of  the  corresponding  period  of  1918, 
show  that  there  has  been  a  decrease  of  72,434  horses,  partly  due  to  very  little 
breeding  on  account  of  low  prices  and  small  demand,  and  in  part  to  the  drought 
conditions  experienced  in  many  districts  for  the  greater  part  of  the  year;  of 
399,378  cattle,  attributable  mainly  to  the  effects  of  the  drought,  namely,  to  death 
from  starvation,  conditions  not  favourable  to  breeding,  and  the  forwarding  of 
cattle  to  market  on  account  of  the  holdings  not  being  able  to  carry  large  stock; 
and  of  7,028,852  sheep,  attributable  almost  wholly  to  the  droughty  conditions, 
which  have  been  very  severe  on  breeding-ewes,  so  that  over  the  greater  part  of 
the  State,  the  lambing  was  a  failure.*  in  addition  to  the  pecuniary  loss  repre- 
sented by  the  depreciation  of  the  State's  flocks  and  herds  by  drought,  it  is  neces- 
sary to  take  count  of  the  fact  that  the  Government  is  raising  a  loan  of  £1,000,000 
by  the  issue  of  Treasury  Bills  bearing  interest  at  the  rate  of  5J  per  cent.,  with  a 
currency  of  two  years  from  March  1st,  1920,  for  the  purpose  of  providing  funds 
to  finance  advances  to  distressed  farmers,  and  also  to  meet  payments  for  seed- 
wheat  purchased  by  the  Government  for  issue  to  farmers,  and  for  other  purposes. 
The  drought,  therefore,  has  not  only  been  another  expensive  intimation  that  Aus- 
tralia has  still  some  lessons  to  learn  about  the  solution  of  drought-problems ;  but 
that  Australia  has  not  learnt  all  there  was  to  learn  from  previous  similar  ex- 
periences, particularly  the  drought  which  culminated  in  1902,  and  was  responsible, 
among  other  losses,  for  the  reduction  of  the  flocks  of  the  State  from  forty-three 
to  about  twenty  millions.  "Prevention  is  better  than  cure,"  but  as  periodical 
droughts  have  a  legitimate  place  in  Nature's  scheme  of  things  in  Australia,  Man 
cannot,  therefore,  prevent  their  occurrence.  But  is  it  impossible  to  learn  how  to 
mitigate,  if  not  to  prevent,  at  any  rate  in  some  measure,  the  periodical  levy  on 
the  wealth  of  the  State  by  droughts?  Why  is  it,  for  example,  that  it  is  left  to 
droughts  to  cull  the  flocks  and  herds  in  the  exacting  way  in  which  it  is  done  by 
every  serious  drought?  Answers  to  these,  or  other  cognate  questions  are  not 
bard  to  find.  What  Australia  especially  needs  to  learn  is  how  to  cope  successfully 
with  drought-problems;  and  to  learn  that,  it  is  necessary  to  understand  and  take 
to  heart,  that  droughts  are  teachers,  and  not  a  curse;  since  they  are  a  legitimate 
factor  in  Nature's  scheme  of  things  in  this  quarter  of  the  globe.  Rabbits  and 
Prickly  Pear,  &c.,  may  be  curses;  but  Nature  is  not  responsible  in  any  way  for 
their  foothold  in  Australia.  A  recent  writer  has  diagnosed  the  state  of  Britain, 
before  her  eyes  were  opened  by  the  War,  in  the  following  wordsf — "We  have 
sloughed  our  besetting  sins  in  many  mental  processes.  Before  the  War,  men  of 
science  were  grossly  academic  and  individual :  often  abstract  to  the  point  of  per- 
verted mysticism;  and  the  line  they  took  encouraged  the  men  of  commerce  to  the 
contempt  of  pure  knowledge.  Men  of  science,  merchants,  the  banks,  and  the 
Government  were  all  in  watertight  compartments,  working  apart,  and  more  than 

*  For  further  details  see  the  Sydney  Morning  Herald,  February  26,  1920,  p.  5  to  which 
I  am  indebted  for  the  particulars  quoted. 

tThomas,  W.  B.,  "A  Better  England — Not  a  Worse,"  Nineteenth  Century,  No.  514, 
December,  1919,  p.  1013. 


Id  president's  address. 

this,  contemning  one  another.  The  result  was  tliat,  from  the  nation's  point  of 
view,  the  brains  of  the  chemist  were  wasted,  tlie  activities  of  the  merchants  handi- 
capped, the  wealth  of  the  hanks  locked  up,  and  politicians  a  vain  lu.xury.  The 
British  brain  was  working;  but  was  a  mileh-cow  for  other  astuter  nations."  What 
is  here  said  or  implied  about  the  importance  of  the  co-operation  of  men  of  science 
with  commercial  men  and  with  Governments,  and  about  the  national  lack  of  the 
appreciation  and  practice  of  it,  before  the  War,  is  only  too  true.  But  the  men 
of  science  are  not,  equally  with  others,  to  blame  for  it.  For,  from  time  to  time, 
their  representative  spokesmen  have  pointed  out  what  was  needed,  but  their  warn- 
ings and  their  recommendations  have  too  often  failed  to  arouse  attention  or  elicit 
any  response.  Or  if  noticed,  their  views  have  been  dubbed  "counsels  of  perfec- 
tion," or  "arm-chaii-"  advice,  which  the  "practical"  man  can  well  afford  to  ridicule, 
or  neglect  altogether.  Now,  in  the  case  of  Australia,  there  is  great  need  for  a 
closer  and  more  effective  co-operation  of  Science  with  the  primary  producer,  the 
man  on  the  land.  With  the  manufacturer  also,  but  in  this  case,  the  need  can  be 
easily  provided  for,  since  all  he  has  to  do  is  to  make  the  necessary  provision  for 
increasing  his  staff  by  the  addition  of  such  scientific  experts,  chemists  or  what- 
ever they  may  be,  as  circumstances  require.  But  the  ease  of  the  primary  pro- 
ducer is  different,  and  it  requires  the  most  earnest  consideration.  It  is  necessary 
for  him  to  learn  and  understand,  what  he  is  apt  to  overlook,  or  fail  to  realise  the 
importance  of — small  blame  to  him,  under  the  circumstances  which  have  encour- 
aged it — that  there  is  a  theoretical  side  to  his  practical  acti\ities,  which  needs  to 
be  taken  into  account ;  that  in  his  case,  as  in  others,  the  theoretical  side  and  the 
practical  side  are  complementary,  since  true  theories  are  merely  the  generalisations 
upon  which  practice  is  to  proceed.  Now  a  lack  of  appreciation  of  this  need  of 
the  recognition  of  the  complementary  relations  of  science  and  jiractice  in  rela- 
tion to  di'ought-problems  is  jilaiuly  in  evidence  in  books  and  in  newspa;ier  records ; 
and  I  shall  refer  to  some  of  them  presently.  One  imperative  reason  for  taking 
account  of  them  henceforth  is,  what  is  implied  in  the  statement  that  "Australia's 
bid  for  greatness  rests  upon  her  agricultural  possibilities'' ;*  and  that  considerable 
progress  has  been  made  in  this  direction  since  these  words  were  recorded,  with 
more  to  follow  in  the  immediate  future.  The  imperativeness  of  the  reason  re- 
ferred to  arises  in  this  way.  In  the  earliest  days  of  settlement  in  the  inland 
districts,  the  man  on  the  land  was  a  pastoralist  solely.  But  now  that  he  is  de- 
voting more  and  more  attention  to  agriculture,  it  is  necessary  to  remember  that 
this  means  a  steadily  increasing  removal  of  the  natural  covering  of  the  soil — in 
the  shape  of  forest,  or  scrub,  or  gTasses,  or  whatever  it  may  be — and  that  his 
operations  necessitate,  over  a  steadily  increasing  area,  a  profound  disturbance  of 
the  soil-organisms  and  of  their  relations  to  the  indigenous  plants,  which  have  come 
about  as  the  result  of  Natu7-e's  long-standing  arrangements.  Now  these  are  mat- 
ters which  cannot  be  treated  with  absolute  indifference;  for  they  mean  nmi-h :  ;iiid 
what  they  may  do  or  mean,  it  is  necessary  to  leam. 

When  Australia  was  colonised  in  1788,  the  first  settlers  found  everything 
very  diffei-ent  from  what  they  had  been  accustomed  to.  In  due  time,  a  spokes- 
num  took  it  upon  himself  to  voice  the  strangeness  of  the  land  to  which  they  had 
migrated.  This  was  ]\rr.  Barron  Field,  a  Supreme  Court  Judge  in  Sydney  from 
1810-2.3.  To  him,  the  colonists  were  the  antipodes  of  the  old  folks  at  home. 
Consequently  Australia  not  oidy  was,  but  ought  to  be,  the  Land  of  Upside  Down . 
It  was  the  great  Freak-Land.     The  plants  were  freaks,  the  animals  were  freaks, 


•Gullett,  H.  S.,  ".\ustralia's  Development:  the  Coming  of  the  Farmer,"  Chambers' 
.Tiiurnal,  .Tanuarv,  1909. 


PRESIDENT  S  ADUKESS.  17 

the  climate  wiw  freakish,  the  euii.steUations  were  unfamiliar.  He  not  only  set 
about  cataloguing  the  freaks — "But  this  is  New  Holland  .  .  .  where  the 
swans  are  black  and  the  eagles  are  white;  where  the  kangaroo,  an  animal  be- 
tween the  squirrel  and  the  deer,  has  five  claws  on  its  fore-paws,  and  three  talons 
on  its  hind-legs,  like  a  bird,  and  yet  hops  on  its  tail;  where  the  mole  (Ornithor- 
hynchus  paradoxus)  lays  egg-s,  and  has  a  duck's  bill,"  &c.,  &e.*  But  he  also  pro- 
ceeded to  account  for  them  on  the  supposition  that  other  countries  were  created 
in  the  beginning,  whereas  the  fifth  Continent  was  an  after-bii'th.  not  conceived 
in  the  beginning,  but  which  emerged  at  the  first  sinning,  and  was,  tiieref ore,  curst ; 
and  the  freaks  were  the  fruit  of  it. 

At  a  later  date  (1884),  another  spokesman,  Marcus  Clark,  expressed  his 
views  about  Australia  thus — "Europe  is  the  home  of  knightly  song,  of  bright 
deeds  and  clear  morning  thought.  ...  In  Australia  alone  is  to  be  found 
the  Grotesque,  the  Weird,  the  strange  scribblings  of  Nature  learning  how  to  write. 
Some  see  no  beauty  in  our  trees  without  shade,  our  flowere  without  perfume,  our 
birds  who  cannot  fly,  and  our  beasts  who  have  not  yet  learned  to  walk  on  all 
fours."!  These  and  similar  effusions  are  not  to  be  regarded  simply  as  nonsense. 
On  the  contrary,  they  are  most  instructive  and  precious  landmarks  in  the  progress 
of  a  knowledge  of  Australia  in  Australia,  in  the  daysi  when  Science  was  too  un- 
developed to  offer  the  real  interjiretation.  The  spokesmen  were  educated  men, 
but  men  of  a  too  literary  education,  for  whom  science-teaching  was  not  available 
in  their  youth ;  but  what  they  said  was  untainted  with  the  idea  that  gives  birth 
to  what  is  apt  to  be  regarded  as  the  only  thing  worth  while,  "That's  the  way  to 
make  money." 

In  Barron  Field's  time,  even  scientific  men  thought  that  species  were  created 
as  such.  If  the  animals  and  jilants  of  Austi'alia  were  freaks,  then  that  was  what 
they  were  intended  to  be.  Marcus  Clark  might  have  read  Darwin's  ''Origin  of 
Species,"  but,  if  so,  it  failed  to  impress  him.  But  to-day,  scientific  men  can 
explain  the  supposed  f reakishness .  Some  of  it  was  due  to  the  fact  that  Aus- 
tralia was  a  sort  of  "Noah's  Ark"  for  "living  fossils" ;  some  of  it  had  no  particular 
significance,  but  much  of  it  was  the  outward  and  visible  sign  of  successful  adapta- 
tion to  periodically  arid  conditions,  whereby  the  supposed  freaks  were  enaljled 
to  survive  droughts,  and  to  live  in  harmony  with  a  variable  and.  at  times,  exact- 
ing environment.  Mwtntis  iiititdnditi,  just  what  the  man  who  goes  on  tlie  laud 
needs  to  know. 

At  a  still  later  period,  only  sixteen  years  ago,  another  spokesman,  another 
kind  of  spokesman,  expressed  his  views  about  life  on  the  land  in  Australia.  These 
deserve  caustic  criticism,  not  merely  because  what  the  writer  has  to  say  is  non- 
sense, l)ut  because  it  is  pernicious  nonsense.  I  refer  to  a  leading  article,  en- 
titled "Australian  Pessimism,"  in  the  Evening  News  for  April  4th,  1903.  After 
remarking-  upon  the  absence  of  poems  of  a  fresh,  joyous  nature  written  by  an 
Australian;  of  successful  attempts  to  write  on  the  two  topics  which  engross 
writers  of  most  other  nations — viz.,  lo\e  and  home-life,  the  writer  proceeds  to 
say — "The  secret  is  to  be  found  in  the  conditions  of  existence  here :  life  in  the 
Australian  bush  is  one  long  weai-y  gamble  with  malignant  fate;  no  man  feels  sure 
of  his  return  for  his  labour  and  money;  that  incomprehensible  deity  known  as 
'luck'  i-ules  everything.     The  greatest  care  may  be  wasted,  the  greatest  preeau- 

'  Geographical   Memoirs   of  New   South   Wales.      Edited  by   Barron   Field   (1825), 
pp.  mi,  494. 

tPrefaoe  to  "Poems  of  the  late  Adam  Lindsay  Gordon"  (1884). 


IS  PRESIDENT  S   AUUHESS. 

tious  come  to  naught  against  the  breath  ol'  tlrought  or  thu  ravage  of  the  bush-fiie. 
Lite  becomes  a  long  watching,  with  as  much  cynicism  and  fortitude  as  the  watcher 
can  avail  himself  of,  the  turning  of  the  great  wheel  of  fortune,  which  deals  out 
failure  to  one  man,  and  success  to  another,  quite  irrespeetivi.  of  their  merits. 
Under  these  circumstances,  it  is  no  wonder  that  a  tone  of  cynical  le\ity  towards 
life  is  the  dominant  note  of  Australian  literature.  'Home'  is  just  a  place  wher^ 
one  makes  money  or  loses  it,  as  the  case  may  be,"'  and  so  on.  Xow  the  most 
oppropriate  label  for  this  diatribe  is  just — "The  Squeaker  has  squoken.''  Aus- 
tralia surely  offers  no  locus  standi  to  such  an  undesirable  alien  as  fatalism.  But 
fatalism  harnessed  to  ignorance  is  a  hopeless  combination,  which  deserves  no 
(juarter  from  Science.  Is  there  one  returned  soUiier  who  would  deliberately  say, 
of  the  recent  terrible  war,  that  the  incomprehensible  deity  known  as  "luck"  ruled 
everything  in  connection  with  it,  the  only  drawback  being  that  the  huge  armies 
of  the  two  sets  of  opponents  had  to  engage  in  a  death-struggle,  in  order  to  find 
out  which  side  the  incomprehensible  deity  favoured,  and  intended  to  win .'  Xo 
wonder  that  Australia  has  never  been  in  a  position  to  export  a  snigU-  hale  of 
wo<j1  or  of  sheepskins,  a  single  hide,  or  a  frozen  carcase!  No  wonder,  also,  that 
Australian  bush-cliildren  have  never  learned  to  sing  "Home,  Sweet  Home;  tliere 
is  no  place  like  Home" !  And  how  delightful,  by  comparison,  it  must  be  for  a 
man  on  the  land  to  live  in  a  country  where  the  thermometer  is  often  down  to  zero 
or  lower,  for  weeks  or  longer  at  a  stretch,  and  the  culled  stock  need  to  be  housed 
and  fed  for  about  five  months,  more  or  less,  out  of  the  twelve ! 

Another  writer,  in  reference  to  the  190'J  drought,  speaks  of  it  as — "the 
struggle  of  man  against  a  relentless,  cruel  environment ;  the  sweeping  away  by 
overwhelming  odds  of  fortunes,  won  by  years  of  toil ;  of  the  barren  mockery 
of  'what  has  been,'  of  disaster,  desolation  and  ruin ;  of  men  stripped  and  wounded 
fighting  to  the  end  with  enduring  pluck.""  Why  not  emigrate  to  Siberia,  Russia, 
or  Canaila.  which  are  not  troubled  with  droughts,  but  merely  have  luird  winters? 

"Old  Saltbush"  (Walter  Smith)  in  liis  poem  entitled  "Drought:  written  in 
1877,  when  the  Drought  was  at  its  worst,"t  furnishes  another  example.  This  is 
really,  though  it  is  not  what  it  was  intended  to  be,  the  story  of  a  squatter  who, 
after  a  run  of  good  seasons,  thought  he  would  take  a  sporting  chance  for  just  one 
year  more,  at  any  rate;  or  perhaps  he  tossed-up  over  it.  But  the  drought  came 
when  he  was  not  expecting  it,  and  caught  him  wholly  uniirepared,  with  a  full 
complement  of  .stock  ami  sheep.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  starving  animals  are 
not  spoken  of  as  crawling  around  the  empty  siloes,  or  the  dricd-up  dams,  or  about 
the  artesian  bore,  which  is  on  strike,  but  only  along  the  banks  of  the  empty 
"great  stream-beds,"  where  the  "rotting  carcasses''  are.  The  following  is  portion 
of  whJit  the  poet  has  to  say  about  it: — 

lu  the  great  streain-beils,  nniddy  hules 

Where  once  was  water  deep. 
Ave  filled  with  rotting  carcasses 

Of  cattle  and  of  sheep ; 
Aloni;  the  hanks  in  ghastly  groups 

(FuU  half  their  number  gone) 
The  starving  stock  all  feelily  craw  1. 

Poor  wrecks  of  skin  and  bone. 

Oh  !   Demon  Drought !  that  sweeps  away 
The  hard-earned  wealth  of  years,  etc. 


•Sydney  Morning  Herald,  November  17th,  1908,  in  "On  the  Land"  column. 
fAustrallan  Ballads  and  other  Poems,  selected  and  edited  by  D.  Sladen,  p.  2(il. 


president's  address.  lit 

still  auutlier  quotatiou.  this  time  a  cliai-ai'ter-sketch  from  an  artiflf  entilic-il 
"The  Man  Out  Back,"  published  in  the  Sydney  Daily  Telegraph  of  December 
29th,  1900.  '•Times  have  changed,  and  a  certain  type  of  the  old  Australian 
pioneer  has  well-nigh  gone.  He  was  one  who  did  things  in  a  large  way,  and 
usually  made  his  fortune.  He  was  an  interesting  character,  and  his  methods,  if 
primitive,  were  eft'eetive.  Rough  in  speech,  jjlain  of  dress,  fond  of  hard  work, 
with  long  hours  and  simple  food,  he  was  yet  genial  in  company.  In  business, 
he  was  usually  hard  and  stern,  and  he  was  especially  noted  for  his  shrewd  dealings 
in  money-matters.  He  lived  to  make  money,  and  any  hindrance  that  stood  iu 
his  way  was  brushed  aside  by  his  strong  personality.  'A  pound  saved  is  as  good 
as  two  pounds  made,'  one  that  I  knew  used  to  say.  He  succeeded,  and  accumu- 
lated money,  and,  what  is  more  to  the  point,  stuck  fast  to  it.  'You'll  have  to  leave 
your  wealth  behind  you,  and  whoever  gets  it  will  probably  spend  it  recklessly," 
I  said  to  him  once,  with  a  frankness  that  did  not  displease  him.  'Well,'  he 
answered  with  a  hard  laugh,  'if  those  who  come  after  me  get  lialf  as  much 
pleasure  in  spending  it  as  I  have  had  in  making  the  money,  I'll  be  pierfectly 
satisfied.'  When  he  took  up  '250,000  acres  in  the  back  country,  he  was  content 
with  a  poor  dwelling-place.  A  shelter  from  the  rain  was  almost  the  main  con- 
sideration. He  dill  not  believe  in  making  improvements.  'Eat  out  the  country, 
and  then  move  elsewhere,  was  bis  motto.  'If  they  want  you  to  make  improve- 
ments, throw  up  the  country,'  he  said.  In  time  of  drought  his  sheep  were  dying 
for  want  of  water  and  feed.  'Let  them  <lie;  it  doesn't  pay  me  to  feed  them.  I 
can  buy  plenty  more  when  the  rain  comes.     That's  the  way  to  make  money.'  " 

What  is  amiss  with  the  sentiments  expressed  in  the  extracts  quoted?  They 
are  wrong  in  at  least  two  I'espects.  Firstly,  they  are  views  of  Man's  relation  to 
Nature  based  ui)on  self-interest,  that  is  upon  his  money-making  in.stinct — the  idea 
that  it  may  l)e  cheaper  and  less  trouble  to  take  chances,  even  if  it  results  in 
drought  culling  the  flocks  and  herds,  than  it  is  to  learn  how  to  prevent  it;  and 
that  "That's  the  way  to  make  money."  And,  secondly,  they  take  no  account 
whatever  of  the  complemental,  scientific  side  of  what  droughts  are,  of  what  they 
mean,  and  of  the  part  they  play  in  the  economy  of  Nature,  and  of  Man's  concern 
with  them  from  this  point  of  view. 

Man  needs  rest  after  strenuous  work,  whether  physical  or  mental;  and  I  he 
physiologist  can  give  a  scientific  explanation  of  the  need  of  it,  and  of  the 
result  of  it. 

The  land  also  periodically  needs  a  rest  or  sweetening,  and  the  biologist  can 
give  a  scientific  explanation  of  the  need  of  it,  as  well  as  of  the  result  of  it.  It 
is  a  matter  of  expeiience,  that  the  year  after  a  drought  breaks  np.  is  a  bumper 
year  for  crops  and  herbage. 

Nature  has  adopted  two  ways  of  resting  and  sweetening  the  land,  and.  at  the 
same  time,  of  generally  clearing  up  and  putting  things  in  order,  getting  rid  of 
weaklings  and  undesirables,  and  putting  species,  that  have  got  out  of  bounds,  back 
into  their  proper  places.  These  are,  (1)  annually  recurring,  hard  winters,  as  in 
the  extra-tropical  countries  of  the  Northern  Hemisphere,  the  hardness  varying  with 
the  latitude.  This  may  be  distinguished  as  the  winter-sleep  or  resting  of  the 
land.  And  (2)  periodical  droughts  in  the  subtropical  countries  of  the  Southern 
Hemisphere,  like  Australia,  Subtropical  South  America,  and  South  Africa,  which 
liave  mild  winters,  not  severe  enough  to  give  the  land  a  thorough  rest  or  sweetening. 
The  arrears  accumulate  imtil,  sooner  or  later,  the  drought  comes,  puts  things 
straight  again,  strikes  a  balance,  and  makes  way  for  a  new  start,  the  onset  of 


20  president's  address. 

tbe  bumper  year.  This  may  be  distrnguishetl  as  the  drought-sleep  or  resting 
or  sweetening  of  the  laud.  The  dittereuce  between  Nature's  two  methods  of  doing 
the  same  kind  of  thing  depends  on  geographical  position,  aiul  on  cosmical  condi- 
tions of  high  and  low  pressure  areas,  sun-spots  perhaps,  and  so  on ;  and,  of 
these,  the  meteorologist  and  the  astronomer  can  give  a  scientific  account. 

Therefore,  to  rail  at  droughts,  to  call  them  a  curse,  to  sjieak  of  them  as  re- 
sponsible for  a  relentless,  cruel  environment  for  the  man  who  goes  on  the  land  in 
Australia,  or  as  a  Demon  who  robs  the  squatter  of  his  hard-earned  wealth,  some 
of  it  earned  simply  by  allowing  Nature  to  convert  grass,  her  own  grass,  into  wool 
and  mutton,  is  to  be  as  ignorantly  foolish  as  to  say,  night,  the  need  of  sleep 
and  recreation,  the  Sabbath-day's  rest,  and  holidays  are  curses,  unfriendly 
Demons,  because  they  nightly,  weekly,  or  periodically  interrupt  his  money-making 
activities.  And  it  might  be  supplemented  by  lamenting  that  Jian  is  such  an  im- 
perfect creature,  because  a  perfect  man  should  have  an  iron  constitution,  which 
would  enable  him  to  dispense  with  sleep  and  rest,  so  that  he  might  uninterrupt- 
edly be  making  money,  twenty-four  hours  per  diem,  seven  days  per  week,  three 
hundred  and  sixty-tive  days  per  annum,  year  in  and  year  out .  That  would  be 
the  way  to  make  money ! 

The  man  on  the  land  in  tlie  Northern  Hemisphere,  after  sreiierations  of  ex- 
perience, has  learned  his  lesson,  and  is  able  to  live  in  harmon>'  with  iiis  environ- 
ment. The  severity  of  the  annually  recurring  winters  compels  him  to  house  and 
feed  his  stock;  therefore,  he  must  grow  enough  fodder  to  provide  for  them,  and 
he  must  cull  his  flocks  and  herds,  so  that  the  demand  for  fodder  shall  not  exceed 
the  supply.  What  helps  him  to  learn  his  lesson  is,  that  the  recurrence  of  winter- 
conditions,  on  the  whole,  is  so  regular,  that  he  can  arrange  his  programme 
of  work  by  the  almanac;  and,  not  less,  that  he  certainly  knows  that  he  will  be 
ruined,  if  he  does  not  come  up  to  the  mark.  So,  knowing  exactly  what  he  has 
to  do,  and  how  to  do  it,  and  what  will  happen  if  he  fails  to  do  it,  he  makes 
good ;  and  abstains  from  talking  nonsense  and  heresy  about  his  relentless,  cruel 
environment,  even  when  the  thermometer  goes  below  zero;  or  about  winter  being 
a  curse.  In  a  word,  lie  Ijccomes  a  ]>hilosopher,  in  the  primary  sense  of  the 
word;  and  the  idea  of  a  long,  weary  gamble  with  malignant  frost  and  ice  finds 
no   place  in  his  mind. 

The  man  on  the  land  in  Austi-alia,  Subtropical  S..uth  America,  and  South 
Africa,  has  to  carry  out  his  work  on  a  ditferent  basis,  inasmuch  as  he  lias  to  learn 
how  to  adapt  himself  to  Nature's  arrangements  for  giving  the  land  its  needed 
rest  and  sweetening,  juot  by  a  regularly,  annually  recurring  winter-sleep,  but  by 
a  periodical  but  not  regularly  lecurring  drought-sleep.  Nature,  in  Austi'alia, 
has  proWded  a  genial  climate,  with  splendid  natural  jiasture-grasses  and  fodder- 
plants;  with  no  hard,  annually  recurring  winter,  recjuiring  the  man  on  the  land 
to  house  his  stock,  and  grow  crops  to  feed  them  under  those  circumstances,  as 
well  as  to  cull  out  all  but  what  he  can  feed;  and,  in  many  cases,  with  procurable 
water,  tiiough  it  may  not  always  be  visible  on  the  sui'face.  Nevertheless,  he  ha.s 
not  yet  learned  to  live  in  harnumy  with  his  enviroinncnt,  so  successfully  as  his 
representative  in  the  Northern  Hemisphere,  because,  though  he  knows  from  ex- 
perience or  from  historical  recoi-ds,  that  droughts  are  certainly  to  be  looked  for 
from  time  to  time,  lie  cannot  tell  from  the  almanac  exactly  when  to  exiiect  them. 
This  recunence  of  dro\ights  at  uncertain  intervals,  which  he  cannot  calculate. — 
and  Science  cannot  definitely  ]iel]>  him  in  that  respect  at  ])rcsent — is  a  dis- 
turbing factor,  wliich  )iei  indically  makes  Ids  environment  erratic,  and  ]nits  him  out 


president's  address.  21 

of  harmony  with  it.  This  iinfertaiuty  introduces  the  teinj^tation  to  take  chances, 
which  may  l)e  disastrous,  and  underlies  the  idea  of  the  "Gamble  out  West." 

What  Australia  needs  to  learn,  by  the  guidance  and  co-operation  of  Science 
— and  there  is  no  Ijetter  way  of  doing'  it — is,  how  to  insure  against  damage  by 
droughts.  That  is: — (1)  How  to  prevent  the  production  of  "necessitous  farm- 
ers,'' re<]uiring  St&te  aid,  to  the  amount  of  about  £1,000,000,  in  order  to  re- 
habilitate themselves  after  a  visitation  of  drought.  The  State  Trea^surer  reports 
that,  already,  £600.000  has  been  disbursed  for  this  purpose.  Do  hard  winters 
in  the  Northern  Hemisphere  ever  or  often  produce  "necessitous  farmers"  re(|uir- 
ing  to  be  relieved  l)y  the  State,  to  such  an   amount  ? 

(2)  How  to  prevent  droughts  from  cuUing  the  herds  and  Hocks,  on  the 
customary  colossal  scale ;  and  from  obliterating  the  promise  of  harvests . 

This  can  be  expressed  in  another  way — How  can  the  man  on  the  land  in 
Australia,  with  the  aid  of  Science,  learn  to  solve  the  following  questions? 

1.  In  attempting  to  in.sure  against,  or  to  cope  with  droughts,  is  he  at- 
tempting to  accomplish  the  impossible;  or  is  he  only  in  some  districts,  or  in 
some  cases,  trying  to  accomplish  the  impossible? 

2.  Or  is  he  attemjiting  to  accomplish  the  possible  (a)  in  the  right  way;  or 
( b )  with  good  intentions,  l)ut  with  insufficient  knowledge  or  equipment,  or  with 
inadequate  resources? 

From  time  to  time,  especially  on  festive  occasions,  important  j'ersonages  in- 
dulge in  forecasting  the  future  population  of  Australia  as  100  millions,  or  even 
200  millions,  and  in  descanting  upon  the  necessity  of  filling  up  the  empty  spaces 
of  the  continent,  but,  in  the  reports  of  their  speeches  in  the  newspapers,  as  far 
as  I  have  seen,  without  insisting  on  the  very  necessary  stipulation — if  and  when 
Australia  learns,  or  is  going  to  learn,  or  has  learned,  how  to  cope  with  drought 
problems.  The  strengfh  of  a  chain  is  the  strength  of  the  weakest  link.  The 
population  that  Australia  can  support,  is  the  population  that  she  can  safely  carry 
when  droughts  come.  The  State  is  recovering  in  part  from  a  very  severe  ex- 
perience of  drought.  Great  activity  is  lieing  displayed  in  all  the  States  in  the 
way  of  facilitating  the  settlement  of  returned  soldiers,  and  immigrants  on  the 
land.  This  Meeting  seems  to  me  to  Ije  an  opportune  occasion  for  asking  what,  I 
think,  is  a  proper  and  a  ]>ertinent  question,  because  drought  problems  are 
primarily  scientific  problems,  and,  therefore,  the  guidance  and  co-operation  of 
Science  is  needeil  for  their  solution.  The  question,  I  would  ask,  is  the  twofold, 
neglected  question — How  is  it,  seeing  that  drought-problems  are  so  very  important, 
that  we  ha\e  no  Handbook,  or  Manual,  or  fade  mecum  of  Australian  Drought- 
Problems;  and  if  not,  why  not;  and  how  soon  may  we  look  forward  to  having 
one?  We  have  manuals  of  the  flora,  of  the  fauna,  of  the  birds,  of  the  fishes,  of 
the  fungi,  of  the  fodder-plants  and  gi'asses,  of  the  minerals  and  fossils,  and  so 
on :  and  we  know  them  to  be  of  fundamental  importance,  and  to  be  most  helpful 
and  suggestive,  in  the  investigation  of  problems  to  which  thej'  relate.  In  antici- 
pation of  the  visit  of  Members  of  the  British  Association  for  the  Advancement 
of  Science  in  1914.  an  admirable  series  of  Handbooks,  one  for  each  of  the  older 
States,  and  one  for  the  Commonwealth  as  a  whole,  was  published.  These  served 
not  only  for  the  enlightenment  of  the  visitors,  but  are  standard  works  of  reference 
to-day.  Wliat  I  have  in  view  is  something  different  from  these,  and  something 
which  is  not  intended  in  any  way  to  clash  with,  or  supersede  the  publications  of 
the  State  Department  of  Agi-iculture,  for  example,  some  of  which  contain  articles 
bearing  upon  some  aspect  or  other  of  drought-problems.     It  is  not  to  be  a  l)Ook 


-I  PRESIDEXT  S  ADDRESS. 

to  teach  the  man  on  the  huul  how  to  grow  crops,  or  how  to  raise  stock,  primarily, 
or  how  to  accumulate  shekels,  or  anythinir  of  that  sort.  Jt  is  to  be  a  book  solely 
for  the  purpose  of  setting  forth  the  complemental,  theoretical  side  of  the  practical 
activities  of  the  man  on  the  land,  esjjecially  in  relation  to  drouaht-iJroblems.  with 
tlie  object  of  enabling  him  to  understand  what  it  is  he  needs  to  learn  in  order  to 
make  the  most  of  his  resources  in  providing  against  disaster;  that  is  how  to  live 
and  keep  in  harmony  with  his  somewliat  erratic  environment:  and  tu  understand 
that  drought  is  not  a  curse,  and  that  he  is  not  called  on  to  fight  droughts,  but 
to  fight  his  ignorance  about  how  to  cope  with  them,  which  ought  to  be.  sooner 
or  later,  enlightenaljle,  provided  that  Science  is  afforded  an  opportunity  of  helping 
him. 

Apart  Ironi  the  fact  that  no  such  book,  as  1  have  i>roposed.  is  available  at 
]>resent,  the  need  nt  such  a  book  is  not  that  nothing  at  all  is  known  al)out 
drought-problems,  hut  that  so  much  of  what  is  known  is  to  lie  found  in  back 
numbers  of  newsijapers  or  in  scientific  .journals,  where  it  is  not  accessible  to 
those  who  want  it,  and  could  make  use  of  it;  and  that  tliese  contributions  to 
knowledge  deal  only  with  jiarticular  aspects  or  cases,  and  not  eomijrehensively 
witli  the  subject  in  its  entirety.  What  is  wanted,  as  I  think,  is  a  selfcontained 
Handbook  of  the  complementary,  theoretical  side  of  drought-problems.  I  give 
a  sketch  of  the  ground  that,  in  my  opinion,  nught  l)c  covered  by  it,  just  as  some- 
thing for  consideration  and  discussion: — ■ 

Synopsis. 

Nature  and  Man,  Nature's  Insurgent  Son---Disturbance  of  Nature's  Balance 
by  Settlement,  and  what  that  involves;  the  reckless  or  careless  introduction  of 
undesirable  Aliens,  lil^e  Rabbits,  Prickly  Pear,  &c. ;  and  the  reason  why  they 
flourish  in  tlicir  new  environment — Droughts:  their  Histoi-y  and  Periodicity  in 
Australia — Droughts  in  South  Africa,  and  Subtropical  South  America — Their 
Cause  and  ]\reaning  in  the  Economy  of  Nature:  Nature's  two  ways  of  resting 
or  sweetening  the  land,  and,  at  the  same  time,  of  clearing  up.  putting  thing's 
in  order,  and  striking  a  balance,  by  (1)  severe  cold,  or  (2)  more  or  less  intense 
aridity — The  year  after  a  drought,  the  bumper  year  for  crops  and  lierbage.  and  the 
scientific  explanation  of  the  resting  and  sweetening  of  the  land — The  Lessons  to 
be  learned  from  the  high  level  and  low-level  Flood-plains  of  the  Hawkcsbury  River 
Valley,  as  in  evidence  at  Richmond;  and  from  the  desiccated  Lake  Eyre  Basin  of 
Central  Australia,  called  by  Gregory  "The  Dead  Heart  of  Australia" — The  Adap- 
tations of  the  indigenous  Plants  and  Animals  to  arid  conditions,  and  the  lessons 
to.be  learned  from  them — The  Man  on  the  Land  in  the  Northern  Hemisphere,  with 
an  annually  recurring  liard  winter,  in  harmony  with  his  environment — The  Man 
on  the  Land  in  the  Southern  Ileniisjjhere.  witli  mild  winters  hut  periodical 
droughts,  whose  ]ieriodicity  cannot  at  present  be  calculated,  not  yet  wholly  in 
harmony  with  his  environment — The  need  to  conserve  the  fertility  of  the  Soil,  and 
the  indigenous  grasses  and  fodder-plants — Disturbance  of  the  Soil-organisms,  and 
of  their  long-standing  association  with  the  indigenous  Plants,  especially  the 
Acacias  and  Eu<alypts;  the  Bionomics  of  Soil-organisms  in  the  arid  portions  of 
the  Continent;  and  the  risks  from  strong,  dry.  Westerly  Winds,  in  the  absence 
of  a  covering  of  Snow,  when  the  natural  covering  of  the  ground  has  been  re- 
moved— Lessons  from  Droughts;  and  the  Application  of  the  Lessons — Bibliography, 
as  a  guide  to  more  detailed  consideration  of  special  subjects — Index,  &c. 

Hap)>ily  there  have  been  and  are  men  on  the  land  in  Australia,  who  have 
leariicil  tlijit  droughts  are   not  a    cui'se,  tliough   rabbits  and  prickly  pear  may  be; 


PRESIDEXT'.S  .iDDRESS.  23 

fliat  the  land  needs  a  periodical  rest  or  sweetening;  that  it  is  the  dry  climate  and 
(he  high-class  uutritixe  native  grasses  and  herbage,  wiiieh  are  largely  responsible 
for  the  excellence  of  Australian  wools;  that  if  every  season  were  a  good  one,  the 
stock  and  sheep  would  suffer  severely  from  parasites,  and  from  diseases;  and, 
best  of  all,  men  who  do  not  believe  that  Nature's  great  scheme  of  tilings,  which, 
by  flow  degrees,  has  evolved  from  the  womb  of  Time,  has  arrived  at  its  present 
advanced  state  of  development,  for  the  sole  and  only  purpose  of  gratifying  the 
money-making  instincts  of  the  Get-rich-quick  Dollarton  Shekelf ords,  just  as  and 
how  they  would  like  to  be  able  to  order  it.  Records  of  the  actual  experience  of 
intelligent  and  enlightened  men  of  this  kind,  are  among  tlie  things  wanted ;  and 
some  of  it  is  already  on  record  in  the  files  of  old  newspapers.  They  are  men 
who  can  appreciate  the  words  of  Mr.  Roosevelt,  when  President  of  the  United 
States,  in  his  opening  Address  to  the  American  Forest  Congress,  held  at  Washing- 
ton, January,  1905 — "All  of  you  know  that  there  is  opportunity  in  any  new 
country  for  the  development  of  the  type  of  temporary  inhabitant  whose  idea  is 
to  skin  the  country  and  go  somewhere  else.  .  .  .  That  man  is  a  curse  and 
nut  a  l)lessing  to  the  country.  The  prop  of  the  country  must  be  the  business 
man  who  intends  so  to  run  his  business  that  it  will  be  profitable  to  his  children 
after  him.  ...  I  ask,  with  all  the  intensity  I  am  capable  of,  that  the  men 
of  the  West  will  remember  the  sharji  distinction  1  have  just  drawn  between  the 
man  who  skins  flie  land,  and  the  man  who  develops  the  country." 

Tile  book  should  not  be  a  one-man  book,  but  a  team-work  book,  supervised 
by  a  capable  editor.  It  should  lie  simply  but  scientifically  written  by  specialists 
in  the  different  branches,  after  the  manner  of  the  Handbooks  ])repared,  at  dif- 
ferent times,  for  the  Meetings  of  the  Australasian  and  of  the  British  Associa- 
tions for  the  Advancement  of  Scienece.  But,  for  the  chapters  to  which  they 
relate,  and  especially  those  on  the  lessons  of  droughts  and  their  application,  from 
the  practical  man's  side,  the  files  of  tlie  newspapers,  at  least  as  far  back  as 
the  drought  which  began  in  1888,  should  he  systematically  looked  up.  Some  of 
the  articles  therein  are  excellent,  for  they  are  often  the  records  of  actual  experi- 
ence and  first-hand  knowledge;  and,  as  such,  they  are  of  historical  interest.  The 
cream  of  all  these  should  be  skimmed,  sup]ilemented  as  may  be  required,  and 
put  into  the  Handliook;  and,  if  desirable,  referred  to  in  the  Bibliography.  Papers 
in  scientific  journals  should  lie    utilised  in    a  similar  manner. 

But  the  pnblicati(m  of  a  Handbook,  in  the  way  of  pro])aganda,  is  not 
enough .  Tlie  annual  output  of  books  is  so  enonnous,  that  any  particular  book  is 
apt  to  lie  ]iut  on  the  shelf,  and  perhaps  forgotten.  Therefore  some  propagandists 
are  needed .  A  good  way  of  providing  for  these,  I  think,  would  be  the  endow- 
ment of  a  course  of  three  annual  lectures.  One  lecturer  always  to  be  a  scientific 
man;  another  always  to  be  a  man  on  the  land;  and  the  third  always  to  be  a 
business  man  callable  of  dealing  with  the  statistical  and  financial  aspects  of 
drouglit-probleras.  The  lecturers  to  be  appointed  annually,  a  year  in  advance, 
so  that  they  may  have  time  for  the  preparation  of  their  lectures.  The  lecturers 
to  be  allowed  to  choose  the  subjects  of  their  lectures,  provided — and  this  is  to  tie 
a  sine  qua  )ion — that  the  aim  and  object  thereof  is  to  elaborate,  to  expound,  to 
make  clear,  and,  if  possible  or  necessary,  to  amplify  tlie  Handbook.  The  lec- 
tures sometimes  to  be  delivered  in  Sydney  when  the  primary  jiroducers  come  to 
hold  their  annual  Congresses;  and,  sometimes  in  one  or  other  of  the  centrally 
situated  and  accessible  country  towns,  as  may  be  decided .  In  this  way,  attention 
would  periodically  be  focussed  on  the  Handliook,   and  on    tlie  subject  with  which 


24  president's  address. 

it  lias  to  do.  Discussion  tliereon  would  be  promoted.  If  taken  up  and  entered 
into  entliusiastically,  tlie  subject  of  drought-problems  should  become  a  live  sub- 
ject, as  it  ougbt  to  be,  ami  as  it  needs  to  be;  and  then  we  may  expect  to  make 
some  progress. 

Next  only  to  the  need  of  righteousness,  and  of  the  maintenance  of  tlie  in- 
tegrity and  welfare  of  the  Empire,  the  question  of  how  to  cope  successfully  with 
droughts  in  Australia,  stands  second  to  none  in  its  importance.  For  Australia's 
bid  for  greatness  rests  upon  this,  inasmuch  as  her  agriculture  and  other  possi- 
bilities can  only  be  imperfectly  realised  without  it. 

(Kv    TlIK    CORRKCT    I  XTKRPKET.iTlOX    OP    TH  !•;    SO-CALLKU    PhYI.LODES    OF    THE 
AUSTRALIAX     PhVI.LOUIXEOUS     AcAt'IAS. 

(Plates   i.-viii.  ) 

The  Australian  Hora  furnishes  numerous  examples  of  plant-structures,  which, 
as  one  usually  sees  them,  are  difficult  to  understand,  jiartly  because  they  repre- 
sent secondary  developments  which  have  been  superimposed  on  the  primal  y, 
natural  order  of  things;  and  partly  because  one  commonly  meets  with  complicated 
adult  structures,  of  which  the  early  stages  are  not  always  readily  obtainable.  The 
so-called  phyllodes  of  Australian  Acacias  are  one  of  the  most  common  and 
familiar  examples  of  these  plant-puzzles.  These  have  been  regarded  as  the 
'•classical''  examples  of  phyllodes,  because  there  are  so  many  species  of  pliyllo- 
dineous  Acacias,  and  they  are  so  widely  distributed .  Nevertheless,  strictly  sjieak- 
ing.  they  are  not  "phyllodes"  within  the  meaning  of  the  recognised  definition  of 
these  leaf-substitutes.  For  example,  in  the  Glossary  of  Terms  prefixed  to  the 
first  volume  of  the  Flora  Australiensis  (p.  xxxix.)  will  be  found  the  definition — 
"Pli,\llodiuin  -  a  flat  petiole  with  no  blade."  Asa  Gray  defines  a  phyllodium  as 
"a  petiole  usurping  the  form  and  function  of  a  leaf-blade."  In  both  cases,  these 
definitions  are  intended  to  apply  to  the  flattened  leaf-suljstitutes  of  the  Australian 
phyllodineous  Acacias.*  Bentham  says  of  Division  i.,  PIn/llodiiieae — "Leaves  all 
(except  on  young  seedlings  and  occasionally  one  or  two  on  young  branches')  re- 
duced to  phtjllodia,  that  is  to  the  petiole  either  terete  or  angular  or  more  or  less 
vertically  dilated  so  as  to  assume  the  appearance  of  a  rigid  simple  leaf,  with 
an  upper  and  a  lower  edge  or  margin,  and  two  lateral  simifar  surfaces,  and 
either  sessile  or  contracted  at  the  base  into  a  short  petiole,  the  upper  edge  often 
bearing  1,  2,  or  rarely  3  or  more  sliield-shaped  or  tubercular  or  depressed 
glands."   (Fl.  Austr.,  ii..  p.  319.) 

But  the  so-called  phyllodes  of  the  Australian  phyllodineous  Acacias  are  not 
simply  Hattened  petioles  which  have  lost  their  blades.  The  current  statements 
about  them,  such  as  those  f|uoted  above,  are  imperfect  generalisations  based  upon 
inadequate  material.  On  the  contrary,  they  are  the  flattened,  primary  leaf-axes 
or  common  petioles  of  bipinnate  leaves  which  ha\e  lost  their  iiinuiv;  and  it  is 
the  fiirmer  which  have  usurped  the  forui  and  I'unctiou  of  the  latter;  and  not 
fiatteneil  petioles  which  have  usurped  the  form  and  function  of  leaf-blades. 
The  so-called  phyllodes  of  Au.stralian  Acacias  may  be  long,  or  short,  or  very 
short.  If  long,  they  are  the  flattened  primary  axes,  or  common  petioles,  (.f 
potentially  long  bipinnate  leaves,  with  numerous  pairs  of  lunnir.  If  short,  or 
very  short,  they  are  the  flattened  primary  axes,  or  common  petioles,  of  potentially 


•tiray's  Botanical  Text-book  (18871.  pp.  110.  426. 


PRESIDENT  S  ADDRESS.  -3 

short,  bipiimatc  loaves,  with  several,  or  only  one  pair  of  pinnse,  whose  pinnae 
have  vanished.  Tlierel'ore,  as  the  so-called  phyllodes  of  the  Australian  phyllo- 
dineous  Aeaeias  are  not  e.xaetly  eomparable  with  the  phyllodes  of  other  plants, 
and  are  not  phyllodes  witliin  the  meaning  of  the  current  definitions  thereof,  they 
should  be  distinguished  from  ordinary  phyllodes,  and  also  have  a  distinctive  name. 
As  they  are  neither  cladodes  nor  phylloclades,  within  the  meaning  of  the  current 
definitions  of  these  stru<;tures,  I  propose  to  call  them  Euphyllodia  or  euphyllodes, 
in  tlie  sense  that  they  are  something  more  than  is  implied  in  the  accepted  defini- 
tion of  phyllodes;  and.  therefore,  something  more  than  simply  flattened  i^etioles; 
inasmuch  as  they  really  are.  as  1  shall  show,  in  what  follows,  vertically  flattened, 
primary  leaf-axes  or  common  petioles,  whose  pinna?  have  been  suppressed,  which 
have  usurped  the  form  and  function  of  lea\es.  Instead  of  Phyllodinea!  and 
phyllodineous  Acacias.  T  propose  to  use  the  terms  Eupliyllodines  and  euphyllo- 
dineous  Acacias,  in    order  to  be   consistent. 

Several  more  detailed  interpretations  of  the  phyllodes.  so-called,  of  Aus- 
tralian Acacias  are  on  record.  One  was  offered  by  Morren.  in  1852.*  Unfor- 
tunately, no  copy  of  this  paper  is  available  in  Sydney,  and  I  do  not  know  on 
what  kind  of  evidence  he  based  his  views.  But  two  authore,  Maxwell  Masters 
and  Baron  von  Mueller,  have  given  the  substance  of  Morren 's  hypothesis.  Mas- 
ters says§ — "When  the  blade  of  the  leaf  is  suppressed  it  often  happens  that 
the  stalk  of  the  leaf  is  flattened,  as  it  were,  by  cimipensation,  and  the  petiole 
has  then  much  the  appearance  of  a  flat  ribbon  (phyllode).  This  happens  con- 
stantly in  certain  species  of  Acacia,  Oxalis,  &c..  and  has  been  attributed,  but 
doubtless  erroneously,  to  the  fusion  of  the  leaflets  in  im  early  state  of  develop- 
ment and  in   the  position  of  rest." 

Baron  von  Mueller  seems  to  have  acceiited  Morren's  hypothesis,  but  without 
mentioning  the  author  of  it.  In  his  "Introduction  to  Botanic  Teachings"  (p. 
25.  1877),  he  says  of  the  Australian  Acacias — "This  enormous  number  of  con- 
generic plants  [about  .300  species]  can  conveniently  be  separated  into  two  main 
groups,  according  to  the  structure  of  their  leaves,  whetiier  consisting  of  a  simple 
blade,  or  whether  formed  by  distinct  leaflets.  The  first  of  this  primary  division 
is  called  that  of  the  Phyllodineje,  from  a  Greek  word  implying  leaf-like  form, 
because  the  supposed  simple  leaves  are  in  reality  formed  by  the  confluence  of 
leaflets,  stalldets  and  stalks  into  one  leaf-like  mass,  or  according  to  the  more 
generally  adopted  but  less  accurate  views  simply  dilated  leaf-stalks  (piiyllodia )  ; 
this  metamorphosis  is  most  readily  demonstrated  and  proved  by  observing  the 
apparently  simple-leaved  Acacias  in  early  growth,  when  the  first  leaves  developed 
by  the  young  seedling  will  be  found  to  be  compound,  consisting  of  leaflets  ar- 
ranged in  two  rows,  thus  forming  iiinnae,  several  again  of  these  pinn<B  forming 
the  bipinnate  leaf,  the  axes  along  which  the  leaflets  are  placed  being  also  ar- 
ranged in  a  pinnate  manner.  What  in  the  phyllodineous  division  of  the  genus 
Acacia  is  noticed  only  on  the  leaves  of  the  young  plant,  becomes  normal  through- 
out for  the  second  group,  that  of  the  Bipinnatse." 

A  second  interpretation  is  current  in  Textbooks  of  Botany.  This  is  not 
less  unsatisfactory  than  the  Baron's.  It  is  frequently  presented  as  a  brief, 
definite,  and  apparently  authoritative  statement — an  axiom  or  a  postulate,  as  it 
were,  which  the  student  is  to  accept  in  faith.  For  example.  Bentliam,  in  his 
generic  description  of  Acacia,  says — "Leaves  twice  pinnate  or  reduced  to  a  simple 


•0.  Morren,  Bull.  Acad.  Beltf.,  18.52,  t.xix.,  p. 444. 
SMasters,  Vegetal)Ip  Teratology,  p.329,  18(i9. 


26  i'HP:slUh'NT'.S  ADDRE.<S. 

jiliyllodiuiii  oi-  (lilattMl  j)cliiilc"  (Fl.  Aiist.,  ii..  p.  301).  Kciiut  says* — "It  lias 
already  been  mentioiieil  on  p.  335  [(|Uoteii  later  on  t'oi  another  reason]  that  a 
like  nioditieation  of  function  oeeurs  in  many  Australian  Aeaeias,  the  foliage- 
leaves  of  whieli  are  de\oid  of  green  blades  whilst  the  leaf  stalks  are  developed  as 
gi'een,  flattened,  outspread  organs,  the  so-called  phyllodes."  These,  and  similar 
statements  are  based  on  no  more  logical  argument  than  this — The  phyllodiiieous 
Acacias  have  phyllodes;  phyllodes  are  flattened  petioles,  &c.;  therefore  the  idiyl- 
lodes  of  Acacias  are  flattened  petioles,  which  have  lost  iheir  l)lades.  The  fallacy 
of  the  argument  lies  in  the  fact,  that  the  so-called  |)lyil(MUneous  Acacias  have 
not  i)hyllodcs  in  the  accei)ted  meaning  of  the  term. 

Sometimes  however,  authors  venture  to  give  an  explanation.  Hut  the  ex- 
planations known  to  me  are  not  less  fallacious  than  the  definitions  of  the  phyl- 
lodes, so-called,  of  Australian  Acacias.  For  example,  Lubbock,  in  his  "Flowers, 
Fiuit.s,  and  Leaves"  (p.  120,  %.  75:  1880)  gives  an  explanation,  together  with 
an  illustration  of  a  seedling — the  liret  ever  )niblished,  as  far  as  1  know,  lie 
says — "The  ly])ical  leaves  of  Acacias  are  pinnate,  with  a  numbei-  of  leaflets. 
On  the  other  liand,  many  of  the  Australian  Acacias  have  leaves  (or.  to  sjieak  more 
correctly,  jihyllodes)  more  or  less  elongated  or  willow-like.  But  if  we  raise 
them  from  seed  we  tind,  for'instance.  in  Acacia  mlicina,  so  called  from  its  le- 
semlilance  to  a  Willow,  that  the  lirst  leaves  are  pinnate  (Fig.  75),  and  ditlVr 
in  nothing  from  those  characteristic  of  the  genus.  In  the  later  ones,  however, 
the  leaflets  are  I'educed  in  number,  and  the  leafstalk  is  slightly  compressed 
laterally.  The  fifth  or  sixth  leaf,  perhaps,  will  have  the  leaflets  reduced  to  a 
single  )iair,  and  the  leaf-stalk  still  more  flattened,  wliilc  when  the  jilant  is  a  little 
older,  nothing  remains  excejit  the  flattened  ]>etiole."  Xow  the  passage  (juoted  is 
very  remarkable,  liul  hardly  more  so  than  others  of  similar  import  to  be  found 
in  <ither  books.  Such  statements  are  im|)erfect  generalisations  baseil  upon  in- 
ade(|uate  niateilal.  Though  jiiit  forward  in  good  I'aith,  they  are  nevertheless 
pitfalls  and  stumbling-lilocks.  lioth  for  teachers  and  students.  The  first  state- 
ment that  "the  tyi)ical  leaves  of  Acacias  are  pinnate"  is  faulty.  There  are  no 
Acacias  with  jiinnate  leaves.  On  the  contrary,  the  typical  Acacias  have  twice 
))innate  or  bi])innate  leaves.  Xext,  "I'lit  it  we  raise  them  from  seed  we  fliul, 
for  instance,  in  Acacia  saliciiui  .  .  .  that  the  Hrst  leaves  are  pinnate  (Fig. 
75),  and  differ  in  nothing  from  those  characteristic  of  the  genus."  The  seedling 
shown  in  Fig.  75  has  no  pinnate  leaf  or  leaves.  The  first  is  a  liipinnate  leaf 
with  one  jjair  of  pinn;B,  the  second  is  also  a  bipinnate  leaf  with  one  i)air  of 
jiinnie.  and  with  an  indication  of  the  so-called  phyllode  on  the  ii])per  .side:  the 
third  is  also  l)ipinijate  with  one  ])air  of  inniia'.  and  indications  of  the  so-called 
))liyllo<le  on  both  upper  iind  lower  siilcs;  while  the  luurlli  niiil  fifth  are  complete 
phyllodes.  so-called. 

Lulibock's  descrii)tion  and  figure  of  a  seedling  of  .1.  saliciiia  are  the  mdv 
ones  of  this  s))ecies  yet  iiublished.  But  if  the  seedling  figured  was  not  an 
anomalous  (jiie,  it  was  an  incomplete  specimen;  and  Lubbock  ilid  not  notice  that 
the  first  leaf,  which  should  have  been  a  simply  pinnate  leaf,  or  i)erhai)s  a  pair 
of  opposite  simiily  pinnate  leaves,  was  missing.  But  what  one  particularly 
wants  to  know,  is.  why  Lubbock  calls  the  structure,  to  which  the  single  pair  of 
jiinna'  of  his  bipinnate  leaves  is  attached,  the  "leaf-stalk,"  which  is  firstly  slightly 
compressed  laterally,  and  then  finally  become  the  flattened  petiole  or  phyllode? 
Tn  other  words,  on  what  gTounds  is    it  taken    for  granted  that  the  iiinna?  of  the 

'Natural  History  of  Plants,  En<;lish  TiT.nslation,  Vol.  i..  |i.ii:f7. 


PRESIDENT  S   AHUDESS. 


bipiiinate  leaves  of  Aeaeia-seedlings  with  only  a  single  pair  of  theiu,  which  ap- 
pear sueeessively  after  the  first  simply  pinnate  leaf,  or  in  some  cases  after  an 
opposite  pair  of  them,  represent  a  pair  of  pinnae  at  the  node  immediately  above 
the  leaf-stalk  or  petiole  ?  I  have  not  yet  met  with  any  description  of  Acacia 
seedlings  or  Acacias  in  which  this  question  is  answered,  or  even  considered, 
except  by  Preston,  referred  to  later  on .  As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  pair  of  pinnae 
of  bipinnate  leaves,  with  only  one  pair,  such  as  successively  make  their  appear- 
ance after  the  first  simply  pinnate  leaf,  or  a  paii-  of  them,  represents  the 
apical  pair;  and  what  is  below  them  is  the  entire  primary  leaf -axis  or  common 
petiole,  and  not  simply  the  ordinary  petiole.  That  is  to  say,  the  succession 
of  the  pairs  of  pinna?  in  the  development  of  a  bipinnate  leaf  with  several  pairs 
cf  pinnae,  of  an  Australian  Acacia,  is  basipetal:  and  not  basifugal,  as  tacitly 
assumed,  and  taken  for  gi-anted. 

It  is  interesting  to  note,  therefore,  how  two  eminent  liiologists,  like  von 
Mueller  and  Lubbock,  independently  came  to  the  conclusion  that,  not  merely  the 
same  sort  of  evidence,  but  the  selfsame  evidence — the  evidence  afforded  by  the 
"first  leaves"  of  phyllodineous  Acacia-seedlings — demonstrated  and  proved  two 
divergent,  and  irreconcilable  hypotheses:  the  metamorphosis  of  liipinnate  leaves 
into  phyllodes  by  the  confluence  of  leaflets,  stalklets  and  stalks  in  the  one  case; 
and  by  the  flattening  of  the  petioles  and  the  disappearance  of  the  blades,  in  the 
other.  AVhat  is  wrong  with  these  two  discordant  conclusions  is  not  that  one  is 
correct,  and  the  other  incorrect;  but  that  neither  of  them  is  wholly  correct,  and 
that  both  are  partially  iucoiTect.  Mueller's  hypothesis  is  incorrect  in  so  far  as 
the  leaflets  and  stalklets,  that  is  the  pinnae,  are  concerned ;  for  these  abort  entirely, 
and  take  no  part  whatever  in  the  formation  of  the  so-called  phyllodes.  The 
e^'idence  on  that  point  is  clear  and  conclusive;  and  one  is  at  a  loss  to  under- 
stand how  Morren  and  he  were  led  to  think  that  the  leaflets  and  stalklets  con- 
cresced  with  the  stalks  or  axes.  But  the  stalks,  that  is  the  primary  axes,  or 
common  petioles  of  the  actual  or  potential  bipinnate  leaves,  the  ordinary  petioles 
together  with  the  rhachises,  do  flatten  to  form  the  so-called  phyllodes,  and  are 
the  only  components  thereof;  and,  to  that  extent,  his  hypothesis  is  correct.  But 
Fupposing  that  there  is  a  confluence  of  leaflets,  stalklets  and  stalks,  why  was 
Mueller  content  to  call  such  structures  phyllodes,  when,  by  the  current  definition, 
phyllodes  are  flattened  petioles,  which  have  lost  their  blades — neither  more  nor 
less? 

On  the  other  hand,  Lubbock's  hypothesis  is  incorrect  in  supposing  that,  in 
the  formation  of  Acacia  phyllodes,  so  called,  "nothing  remains  except  the  flat- 
tened petiole";  whereas,  in  truth,  everything  remains  except  the  iiinn*.  But 
it  is  correct  in  so  far  as  the  pinnae  are  concerned,  for  these  vanish  entirely. 

T\'hile  lack  of  adequate  material,  and  of  personal  knowledge  of  the  plants 
as  they  grow  under  natural  conditions,  are  the  ultimate  reasons  for  the  long- 
standing, incorrect,  current  ideas  about  the  phyllodes,  so-called,  of  Australian 
Acacias,  there  ai-e  three  main  proximate  reasons : — 

(1)  The  ambiguous,  because  too  general,  statements  about  the  "first  leaves" 
of  the  seedlings  of  the  Australian  phyllodineous  Acacias ;  and  the  neglect  to  deter- 
mine the  mode  of  the  succession  of  the  pairs  of  pinnae  in  the  development  of  the 
bipinnate  leaves. 

(2)  Either  the  non-recognition  of  the  jiresence  of  tlie  "seta  teriiiiiialis"  of 
Bentham,  or  "the  recurved  point,"  or  the  "excurrent  point"  of  the  common  petiole 
or  of  its  distal  component,  the  rhachis;  or,  if   noticed    pnd  mentioned,    the  disre- 


28  presidext's  address 

r 

gard  of  its  meaiiiiiy:  aiu!  siguificaiife.  when  discussing  tho  nature  aiul  iiitcrpret- 
tion   of  Acaeia-pbyllodes,  so-called. 

And  (3)  The  omission  to  take  into  account  the  siiiiiilc  but  very  significant 
fact,  that  the  ])etioles,  or  apparent  petioles  of  all  the  known  Australian  bipinnate 
Acacias,  of  which  twenty-two  species  are  described  by  Benthaui  in  the  Flora 
Australicnsis,  are  short  or  even  very  short,  relatively  to  the  leugfh  of  the  entire, 
primary  leaf-axes,  or  common  petioles;  whereas  some  Acacia-phyllodes,  so- 
called,  are  not  only  much  longer  than  the  petioles  of  any  existing  bipinnate 
Australian  Acacia,  being  as  long  as  12  to  20  inches  in  some  species ;  but  are  even 
longer  than  the  couunon  petioles  of  the  longest  leaves  of  any  known,  bipinnate, 
Australian  Acacia. 

I  propose,  therefore,  to  consider  these  three  questions  seriatim,  and  in  .some 
detail,  because  it  is  time  the  real  nature  of  the  so-called  phyllodes  of  Australian 
Acacias  was  recognised  and  taken  into  account.  The  current  belief  about  them 
is  a  barren  conception,  which  has  obstructed  the  progress  of  knowledge,  and 
leads  one  into  the  wilderness.  If  the  so-called  phyllodes  of  Australian  Acacias 
are  simi)ly  flattened  petioles  which  have  lost  their  blades,  there  is  nothing  more' 
to  be  said  al)out  them  that  is  of  any  importance.  But  when  one  knows  what 
they  really  are,  it  is  a  simple  matter  to  reconstruct  the  euphyllodineous 
Acacias,  and,  then  having  done  this,  to  find  corresponding  analogues  among  the 
existing,  bipinnate  species.  And  not  only  so,  but  when  one  knows  where,  when, 
and  how  to  look  for  reversion-foliage  and  reversion-shoots  of  the  right  sort,  one 
can  find  Nature  actually  reconstructing  them,  as  T  sliall  presently  show.  Having 
arrived  at  this  stage,  the  study  of  the  euphyllodineous  Acacias  takes  on  an  en- 
tirely  new,  and   extremely  interesting  and  )iromising  aspect. 

Thk  "First  Lkaves"  of  the  Seedlings  of  ArsTRALiAX  Acacias. 

From  the  extracts  given  above,  it  is  eviilent  that,  by  the  expression  the  "first 
leaves'"  of  Acacia-seedlings,  Mueller  and  Lubltuck  mean — and  the  same  remark 
will  apply  to  other  authors  who  express  themselves  similarly — the  earUest  leaves 
which  successively  develop  on  young  seedlings;  and  that  neither  of  them  takes 
account  of  the  simply  pinnate  leaf,  or  sometimes  a  i^air  of  opposite,  simply 
pinnate  leaves,  which  is,  or  which  are,  actually  the  fii'st  to  appear. 

The  foliage  of  the  young'  seedlings  of  the  Bipinnata-  is  similar  to  that  of 
other  plants  with  bipinnate  foliage,  in  that  the  earliest  leaves  to  make  their 
appearance  are  of  a  simpler  type  than  those  ^\•luch  follow  them  in  later  stages 
of  the  development  of  the  complete  hipiMnatc'  leaf.  Tlie  march  of  progi'ess,  as 
is  usual,  is  from  simple  to  complex. 

The  very  first  leaf  is  an  abruptly  pinnate  leaf,  with  sevei-al  pairs  of  leaflets, 
or  there  may  lie  an  opposite  pair  of  them.  The  second  is  an  abruptly  bipinnate 
leaf  witii  oiu'  pair  of  pinn;p  and  more  or  less  numerous  pairs  of  leaflets.  Now 
this  leaf,  and  others  like  it.  which  follow,  represents  and  corresponds  to  a  leaf 
like  the  first,  in  which  the  ajiical  pair  of  leaflets  has  been  replaced  liy  an  apical 
pair  of  pinna;;  while  the  lower  pair,  or  pairs,  of  leaflets,  counting  from  above, 
have  been  suppressed.  That  tiiis  is  the  correct  view  to  take  is  shown  by  the 
presence  of  the  seta  terminalia,  or  terminal  seta,  in  which  the  primary  leaf-axis 
lerminntes  in  l)oth  cases.  Tliis  is  the  renuiant  of  a  terminal  leaflet  in  the  flrst, 
al)ruptly  pinnate  leaf;  and  the  remnant  of  a  terminal  pinna  in  the  .abi-uptly  bi- 
pinnate second  leal',  and  in  others  like  it.  as  will  be  discussed  more  in  detail 
later  on. 


president's  address.  29 

lu  seedliugs  ul'  ,i.  disculur,  one  of  the  very  eomuiuu  l)ipmuate  Acacias  of  the 
Sydney  district,  for  example,  the  first  leaf  is  abruptly  pinnate  with  about  six 
pairs  ot  leaflets;  tlie  second,  third,  and  fourth  may  be  bipinnate  with  seven  pairs 
of  leaflets  on  the  second  and  third,  and  twelve  pairs  on  the  fourth.  The  iifth, 
sixth,  and  seventh  may  be  bipinnate,  with  two  pairs  of  pinnre  ;  these  correspond 
to  a  leaf  like  the  first,  in  which  the  apical  pair  of  leaflets,  and  the  pair  next 
below,  have  been  replaced  by  pairs  of  pinna'.  The  eighth  leaf  may  have  three 
pairs  of  piuna;;  this  corresponds  to  a  leaf  like  the  fiist,  in  which  the  apical  pair 
of  leaflets,  and  two  pairs  next  below,  have  been  replaced  by  pinnae.  After  the 
eighth  the  number  ot  pinnae  may  increase  by  one  pair  more  or  less  consecutively 
in  succeeding  leaves,  until  something  approaching  the  maximum  is  attained.  In 
one  seedling  however,  and  the  only  one  seen,  the  third  leaf  had  two  pairs  of 
pinnffi.  In  seedliug-s  of  other  species,  the  number  of  pairs  of  pinnae  increases 
sometimes  a  little  sooner,  sometimes  a  little  later,  much  in  the  same  manner  as 
described  above  in  A.  discolor.  The  terminal  seta,  unless  accidentally  missing, 
terminates  the  common  petiole  of  every  leaf,  at  every  stage  of  growth.  There- 
fore, the  mode  of  succession  of  the  pairs  of  pinnae  in  the  gradual  development 
of  the  bipinnate  leaf  is  basipetal,  and  not  basifugal,  as  has  hitherto  been  tacitly 
assumed  and  taken  for  granted  in  every  case  that  has  come  under  my  notice. 

The  primary  leaf-axis  of  the  tii-st,  abruptly  pinnate  leaf  may  be  slightly 
longer  than  that  of  the  second  bipinnate  leaf  with  one  pair  <  f  pinnae,  but  the 
latter  have  uiore  than  twice  as  many  leaflets.  As  the  number  of  pinnae  increases, 
the  axis  lengthens  proportionally,  until  it  reaches  its  final  dimensions.  When 
the  maximum  number  of  pairs  have  been  developed  it  will  be  noticed  that  the 
petiole  is  relatively  short. 

Young  seedlings  of  the  Euphyllodineie,  old  enovtgh  to  show  the  transition 
from  bijjinnate  leaves  to  euphyllodes,  are  very  interesting  and  insti'uctive.  They 
are  the  embodiment,  and,  at  the  same  time,  the  visible  presentment  or  picture  of 
an  intense  struggle  between  two  antagonistic  tendencies  or  forces.  On  the  one 
hand,  the  hereditary  tendency  to  produce  the  ancestral  type  of  foliage  makes  a 
start  in  the  normal  way.  The  first  leaf  is  an  abruptly  pinnate  leaf,  or,  in  some 
species,  there  may  be  an  opposite  pair  of  them.  The  second  leaf  is  an  abruptly 
bipinnate  leaf  with  one  pair  of  piiinae,  just  as  in  the  seedlings  of  the  Bipinnatfe. 
Very  soon,  somewhat  sooner  in  some  species  than  in  others,  the  antagttnistic  ten- 
dency, the  euphyllode-producing  tendency,  nowadays  also  an  inherited  tendency, 
manifests  itself,  and,  after  a  few  preliminary  stages,  the  usurper  succeeds  in 
swamijing  tlie  natural  tendency  to  continue  tlie  production  of  bipinnate  foliage. 
This  commonly,  but  not  always,  happens  before  the  seedlings  are  strong  enough 
to  enable  the  biijinnate  leaves  to  develop  a  second  pair  of  pinnte;  and,  in  such 
species,  the  second,  third,  fourth,  fifth  leaf  or  some  later  one  may  be  the  earliest 
complete  euphyllode . 

The  ol)ject  of  the  struggle  is  to  get  rid  of  the  pinnae,  whose  leaflets  are  the 
transpiring  and  assimilating  organs  proper,  and  to  substitute  for  them  the  ver- 
tical, flattened,  leaf-like  leaf-axes  or  common  petioles,  or  euphyllodes,  capable  of 
taking  over  and  carrying  out  the  functions  of  the  leaflets  on  a  more  economical 
basis  for  regulating  the  water-supply  and  expenditure.  It  is  important  to  realise 
this;  and  that  the  contest  is  not  between  flattening,  ordinary  petioles,  and  leaf- 
Wades,  which  are  to  vanish.  Now  a  substitutional  structure,  and  a  structure  for 
which  a  substitute  is  being  provided,  cannot  comjjletely  coexist  and  function  in 
all  respects  simultaneously.     In   the  case  of    the  substitution    of  euphyllodes  or 


30  .  prksiijkxt'.s  aui)1;k.>s. 

flattened  leaf-axes  lor  pairs  of  jiiuuie,  irom  the  nature  ot  the  case,  the  suhstitu- 
tion  or  ruplaeeuient  caiiuot  take  place  iustautaneously  in  a  flash,  but  only  by 
gradual,  intermediate  stages.  It  necessarily  follows,  therefore,  that  some  indi- 
cation of  both  can  and  may  be  present  at  the  same  time,  but  in  an  invei-sely  pro- 
portional ratio.  If  the  pinnse  are  strongly  in  evidence,  after  the  struggle  be- 
gins, the  euphyllode  will  be  only  slightly  indicated;  wiiereas  if  the  euphylloiie 
is  strongly  in  the  ascendant,  but  not  yet  complete,  the  pinnas  will  show  signs 
of  some  kind  ur  other  that  they  are  on  the  wane.  Tiie  swamping,  euphyllode- 
producing  tendency  usually  acts  too  promptly  in  young  seedlings  to  show  the 
inversely  proportional  relations  between  the  two  contestants  very  satisfactorily. 
But  good  examples  of  reversion-foliage,  and  the  leaves  of  reversion-shoots  sliow 
them  most  beautifully  and  convincingly. 

Sir  Jolin  Lubbock,  afterwards  Lord  Avebiuy,  in  his  great  book  "On  Seed- 
lings" (18i)2),  mentions  or  describes,  or  describes  and  figures  seedlings  of  se\en 
species  of  Acacia.  But  his  material  was  very  limited,  and  sometimes  lestricted 
to  a  single  seedling.  It  is  remarkable  that  the  species,  whose  seeds  he  was  able 
to  get,  are  all  out-of-the-way  or  inland  species,  and  do  not  include  a  single 
example  of  our  common  and  familiar  species.  Lubbock  was  interested  in  them 
as  seedliug-s  merely;  and  it  was  not  his  object  to  discuss  the  nature  of  the  euphy- 
lodes  of  those  that  were  euphyllodineous  species.  Having  complete  seedlings  at 
his  disposal,  he  was  able  to  recognise,  this  time,  that  the  flrst  of  six  of  them  was 
an  abrujitly  pinnate  leaf.  But  of  two  species,  not  tigured,  A.  Oswaldi  and  A. 
aeanthocarpa  he  says — ''Leaves  compound  and  abruptly  pinnate  or  reduced  to 
phyllodes,"  and  "First  leaves  compound,  abniptly  pinnate";  but  as  he  makes  no 
mention  of  the  presence  of  bipinnate  lea\es  in  either  case,  one  does  not  know 
how  to  take  these  statements,  since  his  descriptions  of  the  seedling's  of  these  two 
species  are  all  that  are  available  at  present.  On  the  other  hand,  he  describes  I  he 
flrst  six  leaves  of  a  seedling  of  A.  Burkitti  as  bipinnate.  This  is  the  oidy 
Acacia-seedling,  without  an  abruptly  pinnate  flrst  leaf,  or  a  pair  of  them,  yet 
recorded.  Lubl)o(k  also  recognises  the  presence  of  Hentiiam's  terminal  seta  in 
the  seedlings  of  two  species,  but  unfortunately  he  locates  it  on  the  petioles. 
Thus,  of  the  flrst  six  leaves  of  .^1.  Burkitti,  all  bipinnate  with  one  pair  of  pinn;e, 
he  says  "petiole  excurrent  between  the  pinn;e,  with  a  subulate  slender  point." 
Also  of  A.  vertieillata  he  say.s — "Leaves  at  flrst  pinnate  then  bipinnate,  then 
reduced  to  phyllodes  .  .  .  petioles  laterally  compressed  .  .  .  and  ]>ni- 
jecting  beyond  the  pinnw  with  a  subulate  acute  aristate  point."  The  petiole  of  a 
comjxiund  leaf  is  tiie  portion  of  the  common  petiole,  or  primary  leaf-axis,  below 
the  lowest  pair  of  piniia»;  therefore,  all  the  ])inna3  are  attached  to  the  rhachis; 
consequently  it  is  the  common  petiole,  or  its  distal  couipcment,  the  rhachis,  which 
terminates  in  an  excurrent  point  or  terminal  seta.  If  the  petiole  terminates  in  an 
"excurrent  i)oint,"  then,  since  the  latter  is  above  the  pair  of  pinnw.  these  nuist 
be  attached  to  the  petiole — whidi  is  absurd.  He  correctly  adds,  however — • 
"rhachis  of  pinna-  excurrent  in  the  form  of  a  small  subulate  point."  And  lie 
sliould  have  said — common  petiole,  or  the  rliachis  which  is  its  distal  component, 
with  an  excurrent  point.  But,  accepting  the  current  idea,  tliat  the  phyllodes  of 
Acacias  are  simply  flattened  petioles,  he  tacitly  assumed  and  took  for  granted, 
as  he  did  in  the  earlier  passage  quoted  above,  that  the  single  pair  of  pinnae  of 
his  bipinnate  leaves  was  the  lowest  or  basal  pair,  whereas  it  is  the  apical  or 
uppermost  pair  which  appears  first;  and  that  the  stalk  to  which  the  pinnffi  were 
aflaclied  was  the  petiole,  whereas  it  was  the  common  i>etioh>  or  primary  leaf- 
axis,  as  is  proved  by  its  lerminating  in   an  excurrent  point  or  terminal  seta. 


phesidext's  address.  31 

Mr.  K.  H.  Canibage  has  recently  taken  up  the  study  of  Acacia-seedlings 
where  Lubbock  left  off;  and,  from  his  extensi\-e  knowledge  of  the  Australian  flora, 
sud'  of  Acacias  growing  under  natural  conditions,  he  is  eminently  tjualifled  to 
undei'take  it.  Since  1915,  lie  has  iiublished  live  instalments  of  a  monograph  on 
"Acacia-Seedlings."  which  include  descriptions  and  excellent  photographs  of  the 
seeds,  pods,  and  young  seedlings  of  fifty-five  species.  This  is  an  excelfent  be- 
ginning of  a  very  important  contribution  to  knowledge,  which  can  only  be  done 
properly  as  he  is  doing  it,  with  personal  knowledge  of  the  jslants  under  natural 
conditions,  and  with  adequate  material.  As  it  is  necessarily  a  leisure-time  study, 
he  deserves,  in  an  especial  manner,  all  the  encouragement  and  help  that  we  can 
give  him.  If  he  will  take  into  consideration  the  evidence  I  am  now  bringing 
forward,  and  will  modify  his  terminology  accordingly,  1  venture  to  predict  that 
liis  work  will  become  more  inspiring  and  interesting  even  than  it  has  been. 

Cambage's  papers  and  illustrations  show  admirably,  how  promptly  the 
swanii)ing  effect  of  the  usurping,  euphyllode-produeing  tendency  takes  place  in  all 
the  eupliyllodineous  sjiecies  he  has  described,  with  the  exception  of  .1.  Dielatioxtjlon. 
This  is  one  of  a  small  group'  of  exceptional  species,  which  includes  ^1.  ruhida, 
and  apparently  also  the  non-Australian  species,  A.  heterophi/lla,  that  is  in  need 
of  special  and  detailed  study  of  good  series  of  gradational  stages. 

The  transition  from  an  abruptly  pinnate  leaf,  or  more  usually  from  a  bi- 
pinnate  leaf  with  one  pair  of  pinnae,  or  sometimes  two  pairs,  to  the  first  complete 
euphyllode,  of  seedlings  of  the  euphyllodineous  Australian  Acacias,  may  take 
place  on  any  leaf,  from  the  second  to  the  ninth,  or  even  later,  according  to  the 
species,  and  according  to  circumstances.  The  difference  in  seedlings  of  the  same 
species  is  mainly  due  to  the  absence  or  the  presence  of  lingering  stages  of  the 
dwindling  pinnae.  It  is  usually,  but  not  invariably,  complete  before  the  seedlings 
are  able  to  develoji  leaves  with  two  pairs  of  pinn».  Cambage  has  found  it  to 
be  the  second  leaf  in  A.  alata  (not  counting  the  members  of  the  opposite  first 
pair  of  simply  pinnate  leaves  separately),  in  about  a  dozen  specimens,  so  that 
no  bipinnate  leaves  with  one  pair  of  pinnae  had  a  chance  to  develop.  He  has 
also  found  it  to  be  the  third  leaf  sometimes  in  A.  excelsa.  In  the  seedling  figured 
by  me  (PI.  ii.,  fig.  2)  it  is  the  fourth  leaf.  This  is  the  seedling  of  the  species 
(prol)ably  A.  implexa,  as  Mr.  Cambage  has  been  good  enough  to  advise  me) 
which  has  furnished  me  with  my  best  and  most  instructive  reversion-shoots  and 
suckers,  because  the  euphyllodcs  are  so  long,  up  to  about  9  inches.  I  was  not 
interested  in  the  plants  before  they  were  scorched,  and  the  portions  of  the  plants 
above  ground  killed,  but  without  damage  to  the  root-system,  by  a  bush-fire,  or  in 
some  cases  injured  in  other  ways;  and  there  has  not  been  time  yet  for  the  new 
shoots  to  flower;  and  I  have  been  unable  to  find  adult,  uninjured  plants  in  a 
condition  suitable  for  exact  identification  of  the  species.  In  the  seedling  shown, 
the  first  abruptly  jjinnate  leaf  had  three  pairs  of  leaflets,  but  the  apical  pair,  and 
one  of  the  next  i)air  below,  were  missing,  when  I  got  the  sjiecimen.  The  second, 
third,  and  fourth  are  bipinnate,  with  only  one  pair  of  pinnae  in  all  of  them. 
One  pinna  of  the  second  is  damaged,  and  is  represented  by  one  leaflet  and  a 
portion  of  its  fellow.  Above  what  remains  of  the  damaged  pinna  in  the  position 
shown,  the  terminal  seta  at  the  apex  may  be  seen  in  the  photogTaph  of  the  com- 
mon petiole,  projecting  to  the  left.  Tlie  fiftli  is  a  short,  relatively  broad,  com- 
plete euphyllode,  23  inches  long;  the  sixth  is  longer  but  narrower;  the  seventh  is 
still  longer;  the  eighth  (bent  in  the  photo)  is  7  i  inches  long.  An  average 
sample  of  a  complete  euphyllode  from  a  reversion-shoot,  8J  inches  long,  is  shown 


32  "  president's  address. 

beside  tbe  seedling  on  the  left.     My  leveision-sboots  show   fifteen  later  stages 
that  are  skipped  in  this  seedling,  to  be  referred  to  later  on. 

Of  sixteen  bush-seedling's  of  .1.  falcata,  the  tirst  comijlete  euphyllude  was  the 
fifth  leaf  in  nine,  tlie  sixth  in  sis,  and  the  seventh  of  one;  the  leaf  immediately 
preceding  the  first  comijlete  eviphyllode  in  each  of  two  seedlings  had  two  pairs 
of  pinnw.  Of  sixteen  bush-seedlings  of  A.  myrtifolia,  the  tirst  complete  euphyl- 
lode  was  the  fifth  of  two,  the  sixth  of  seven,  the  seventh  of  six,  and  the  eighth 
of  one;  seedlings  of  this  species  also  sometimes  have  one,  and  occasionally  two 
leaves  with  two  pairs  of  pinnse.  Seedlings  of  A.  lini folia,  of  which  tbe  first 
complete  eupbyllode  may  be  the  sixth-ninth,  may  also  have  one  leaf,  or  two 
leaves,  or,  as  in  one  of  my  specimens,  three  leaves,  with  two  pairs  of  pinna?. 
The  leaves  of  seedlings  of  A.  suaveolens  often  sliow  most  interesting  lingering 
stages  of  dwindling  pairs  of  pinnse,  the  last  of  which  may  be  represented  by 
only  a  single  pair  of  leaflets,  with  the  terminal  seta  at  the  apex  of  the  rhaehis; 
and  this  is  quite  as  conspicuous  at  the  apices  of  tbe  succeeding  euphyllodes. 
Further  details  will  l)e  found  in  Cambage's  papers.* 

Thk  Terminal  Seta  or  Recurved  Point  of  the  Bipixnate  Le.-isks  and 
El'phyllodes  op  Australian  Acacias. 

No.  3  of  the  definitions  given  in  Bentham's  paper  on  the  Jlimosea\  referred 
to  later  on,  is  very  important,  namely — "A  small  point  terminates  the  petioles 
whether  common  or  partial,  in  all  or  nearly  all  Mimoseae.  It  is  usuaUy  setifoi'm, 
though  sometimes  short  and  thick,  and  occasionally  almost  foliaceous,  sometimes 
apparently  continuous  with  the  jjetioles  [i.e.,  the  common  or  partial  petioles  as 
defined  on  p  324;  but  not  petioles  in  the  sense  in  which  some  later  authors  use 
the  term,  foLuwing  Kunth],  at  other  times  falling  readily  oflE.  This  point  has 
by  some  been  termed  a  gland;  but,  it  would  appear,  erroneously.  It  may  pos- 
sibly be  the  rudiment  of  a  terminal  i)inna  or  leallet ;  but  as  there  is  no  evidence 
beyond  its  position  [i.e.,  terminating  the  common  or  partial  petioles]  to  show 
that  it  is  so,  I  have  been  unwilling  to  give  it  any  other  name  than  seta  termiiialis.'' 

Now  this  was  written  some  seventeen  years  before  the  publication  of  Dar- 
win's "Origin  of  Species."  Chapter  xiii.,  of  the  "Origin"  deals,  in  part,  with  the 
subject  of  Rudimentary  Organs.  Darwin's  treatment  of  the  subject  gave  an 
altogether  new  view  of  the  imjjoi'tanee  and  significance  of  rudimentary  organs 
and  vestigial  structures.  To-day,  remnants  and  \estigial  structures  mean  very 
much  more  to  the  morphologist  than  they  did  seventy-eight  yeare  ago.  Then, 
Bentham  knew  of  "no  evidence,  beyond  its  position,"'  to  say  more  than  that  the 
seta  terminalis  was  possibly  "the  rudiment  of  a  terminal  pinna  or  leaflet."  To- 
day, I  imagine,  no  one  qualified  to  speak,  will  take  exception  to  the  statement 
that  it  really  is,  what  Bentham,  seventy-eight  years  ago,  said  it  possibly  might  be. 
The  setn  terminalis  of  the  pari-pinnate  leaf  of  (a.-ysia  Candotleana.  for  example, 
a  common  garden  plant,  or  of  the  pari-pinnate  first  leaf  of  Acacia-seedlings, 
undoubtedly  represents  the  remnant  of  an  aborted  terminal  leaflet,  corresponding 
to  the  terminal  leaflet  present  in  Rohinia  pseudacaeia,  for  example:  just  as.  in 
the  bipinnate  foliage  of  seedlings  or  of  the  adult  i)lants  of  tiie  Bii)innatae,  or  in 
the  bipinnate  foliage  of  seedlings,  on  the  young  euphyllndes,  and  frequently  on 
the  adult  eui)hyllodes  of  the  Euphyllodiueae.  unless  accidently  missing,  it    repre- 


*  Cambage,  "Acacia  Seedlings."    Parts  i.-v.  Jouvn.  Proc.  K.  Soo.  N.S.Wales,  Vols, 
xlix  -liii.,  191,")-19. 


president's  address.  33 

sents  tbe  remuaut  uf  a  vanished  terminal  pinna  corresponding  to  the  terminal 
pinna  of  the  impari-bipinnate  leaves  of  Caesalpinia  &illiesii.     (PI.  ii.,  fig.  1) . 

Moreover  the  setae  terminales  of  the  reversion-foliage  of  A.  suaveolens  are 
sometimes  green  and  foliaceous,  like  incomplete  leaflets  or  a  pair  of  leaflets  (PI. 
i.,  fig-s.  4,  8,  9,  10)  ;  and  the  leaves  of  reversion-shoots  of  A.  implexa  (?)  and  A. 
podalyriae folia  sometimes  have  thread-like  rudiments  of  the  axes  of  the  terminal 
pinna  present,  without  leaflets,  but  with  a  terminal  seta  at  the  apex   (PI.  viii.  5,  6). 

Admittedly,  the  seta  terminalis  is  of  no  practical  importance  to  the  describer 
of  species.  Nevertheless,  in  his  paper  on  the  Mimoseae,  almost  aU  the  species 
of  which  have  bipinnate  leaves,  Bentham  took  the  trouble  to  discuss  what  he 
conceived  to  be  its  meaning  and  significance.  It  was  unfortunate,  therefore,  that, 
when  he  came  to  deal  with  the  Australian  Acacias  in  the  second  volume  of  the 
Flora  Australiensis,  especially  as  the  euphyllodineous  species  far  outnumber  the 
bipinnate  species,  he  took  no  account  of  the  seta  terminalis,  as  defined  in  the 
paper  on  Mimoseas,  or  of  its  significance,  except  that  he  merely  mentions  its 
occurrence,  under  another  name,  the  "recurved  point,"  in  two  only  of  the  twenty- 
two  species  of  Bipinnatas  which  he  describes,  as  if  these  were  the  only  two  species 
in  which  it  was  to  be  found.  Thus  of  A.  polyhotrya  he  says — "the  rhachis  ter- 
minating in  a  recurved  deciduous  point''  (p.  414)  ;  and  of  A.  leptoclada — "Pinnje 
3-5  pairs,  3-4  lines  long,  on  a  common  petiole  of  1  to  A  in.,  ending  in  a  recurved 
point"   (p.  416). 

But  the  recurved  point,  or  seta  terminalis,  unless  it  is  accidentally  missing,  is 
usually  e(|ually  constant  and  significant,  not  only  in  other  bipinnate  Acacias  in 
which  no  mention  is  made  of  its  presence;  but  also  on  the  leaves  of  seedlings 
of  the  EuphijUodineae,  and  at  the  apices  of  euphyllodes,  especially  in  the  young 
stages.  Bentham  furnished  descriptions  of  271  species  of  ""euphyllodineous 
Acacias.  It  is  remarkable,  therefore,  that  the  setae  terminales  of  some  of  them 
did  not  attract  his  notice,  or  arouse  his  suspicion  that  the  so-called  phyUodes 
of  Acacias  were  something  more  than  merely  flattened   petioles. 

Kerner  is  the  only  author  known  to  met  who  rightly  recognises  that  there  is 
3  vestigial  stracture  at  the  apex  of  the  so-called  phyllodes  of  Acacias,  which,  in 
reality,  is  Bentham's  seta  terminalis,  in  which  the  common  petiole,  or  the  rhachis. 
its  distal  component,  terminates;  but  not  the  petiole,  as  Lubbock  expressed  it. — 
Thus  he  says — "In  many  of  the  vetches  of  the  Southern  European  flora  (Lathyrus, 
Nissolia,  Ochrus)  but  especially  in  a  large  number  of  Australian  shnibs  and  trees, 
principally  acacias  (Acacia  longifolia,  falcata,  myrtifnlia,  armata,  cultrata,  Mela- 
noxylon,  decipiens,  etc . )  it  is  the  leaf -stalks  which  are  extended  like  leaves  placed 
vertically,  and  then  the  development  of  the  leaf-lamina  is  either  entirely  arrested, 
or  has  the  appearance  of  an  appendage  at  the  apex  of  the  flat,  green  leaf -stalk  or 
"phyllode"  as  it  is  called."*  As  far  as  the  Acacias  are  concerned,  the  appendage 
at  the  apex  of  the  "phyllodes."  here  referred  to,  is  simply  Bentham's  seta  ter- 
minalis, or  recurved  point,  the  rudiment  of  an  arrested  terminal  pinna,  in  which 
the  common  petiole,  or  its  distal  comjionent,  the  rhachis,  terminates.  It  is  not, 
as  Kerner  supposes,  under  the  influence  of  the  current  dogma,  that  Acacia- 
phyllodes,  so-called,  are  simply  flattened  leaf-stalks  or  petioles,  the  remnant  of  an 
arrested  leaf-lamina.  The  pinnse  only  have  been  arrested,  and  not  the  rhachis 
as  well.  Consequently,  the  tenninal  seta  retains  its  normal  position  at  the  apex 
of  the  rhachis,  that  is,  the  apex  of  the  common  petiole,  or  the  primary   axis  of 


•Natural  History  of  Plants,  English  Edition,  Vol.  i.,  p.  335. 
fBut  see  the  reference  to  Goebel's  views  f>ostea,  p. 44. 


34  president's  address. 

the  leaf.  But  that  Kerner  should  be  the  only  author,  so  far  as  I  can  learn,  to 
liave  recognised  the  occurrence  of  an  apical,  vestigial  structure  on  the  so-called 
phyllodes  of  the  Australian  Acacias,  is  both  surprising  and  interesting.  His 
mistake,  like  the  mistakes  of  others,  was  attributable  to  a  lack  of  adequate  ma- 
terial for  study.     Nevertheless,  his  obseixation  is  notable. 

The  meaning  and  significance,  and  in  some  cases  the  occu.Tcnce,  of  the  ter- 
minal seta  or  recur\ed  or  excurrent  point,  or  rudiment  of  tiie  terminal  pinna, 
of  the  leaves  of  the  Australian  Acacias,  whether  in  the  seedling-stage  or  otherwise, 
have  received  such  scant  eonsideratiou  from  authors,  that  a  comparison  of  the 
leaves  of  Acacias  with  those  of  other  genera  with  remarkable  bipinnate  leaves  is 
not  only  very  instructive,  but  wliat  can  be  learned  in  this  way  needs  to  be  em- 
phasised and  allowed  for. 

For  comparative  purposes,  the  most  satisfactory  material  is  afforded  by  the 
leaves  of  three  plants  belonging  to  exotic  genera,  more  or  less  common  in  gardens 
in  Sydney.  I  am  unable  to  find  anything  about  them  in  any  books  available  to 
me,  from  the  particular  standpoint  in  which  T  am  interested  in  them.  These 
are  Caesalpinia  GiUiesil  Wall.,  native  of  La  Plata  States,  which  is  of  interest 
because  the  leaves  have  a  terminal  pinna,  but  the  i)inn»  lack  a  terminal  leaflet ; 
Jacaranda  ovali folia  R.Br.,  native  of  Brazil,  which  is  remarkable  because  the 
leaves  have  a  fugacious  terminal  pinna  which  is  wanting  in  the  mature  leaves,  the 
pinnas  have  a  terminal  leaflet,  and  the  mode  of  succession  of  both  the  pinnae  and 
the  leaflets  in  the  development  of  the  bipinnate  leaf  is  basifugal;  and  the  West 
Indian  Calliandra  portoricensis,  whose  leaves,  like  those  of  the  bipinnate  Acacias, 
have  neither  a  terminal  pinna,  nor  have  the  pinna?  a  terminal  leaflet;  but,  in  both 
cases,  especially  in  the  young  leaves,  vmless  it  is  accidentally  missing,  the  ter- 
minal setae  are  conspicuous. 

C.  Gilliesii  has  leaves  up  to  nearly  7  inches  long,  to  the  base  of  the  terminal 
pinna;  witli  twelxe  or  thirteen  pairs  of  short  pinnae,  with  about  eight  to  ten  pairs 
of  leaflets.  As  in  the  Acacias,  the  leaves  present  anomalies.  Some  of  the  pinnae 
are  alternate  instead  of  opjjosite;  one  of  a  pair  is  sometimes  missing;  the  ter- 
minal pinna  is  occasionally  missing;  the  number  of  pairs  of  leaflets  of  tiie  idnnai 
is  variable.  The  leaves  show: — (1)  that  the  internodes  are  about  as  long  as  the 
spread  of  an  expanded  pair  of  leaflets,  measured  from  tip  to  tip  across  the  partial 
rhachis;  (2)  that  the  pinnae  of  the  lower  pairs  are  fairly  at  right  angles  to  the 
axis,  but  that  the  ajiical  pair  and  several  paire  next  below  do  usually  move  in- 
wards slightly,  so  that  there  may  be  some  slight  overlapping  of  the  lower  leaflets 
of  the  ajiical  pair  and  the  terminal  pair,  even  though  the  latter  has  a  longer 
petiole  tlian  the  others;  (3)  and  that  the  petiole  uuiy  lie  no  longer  tlian  tiie  lowest 
internode,  or  half  as  long  again ;  but  however  mucli  it  may  be.  it  is  liut  a  small 
fraction  of  the  length  of  the  entire  axis  or  conmion  [letiole.  Fig.  1  of  PI.  iii.. 
represents  the  upper  portion  of  a  leaf,  in  which  the  pinna?  of  the  apical  \r.\\v 
are  at  right  angles  to  the  .axis;  and  this  was  chosen  for  illustration  because  the 
terminal  pinna  was  fully  displayed.  Lubbock  figures  a  very  young  seedling  of 
this  species,  with  only  the  first  leaf,  which  is  nliru|illy  lunnatc.  but  no  I'urthcr  ]iar- 
ticulars  are  given . 

The  longest  .Tacai'anda  leaf  that  1  liavc,  without  (lortion  of  the  ti]),  which  is 
missing,  is  211  inches  long,  petiole  2if,  with  .32  pairs  of  pinna\  some  of  which 
are  alternate.  Longer  leaves  may  be  seen  on  some  trees.  Mature  leaves  rarely 
show  anything  at  the  ajicx,  but  the  basal  scar  of  something  which  is  missing.  1 
figure  a  small  leaf  from  a  young  plant  Si  inches  long,  which  should  have  eighteen 
pairs  of  ])inna'  and  a  terminal  ))inna:  l)ut  tlic  terminal  i>inna,  and  four  pairs  of 


presidext's  address.  35 

piiuife  are  represented  by  large  leaflets,  some  of  them  with  serrated  edges.  I 
have  also  other  leaves  showing  more  advanced,  but  still,  incomplete  transforma- 
tions. On  the  other  hand,  one  can  get  examples  in  which  the  terminal  pinna  is 
jH-esent,  Ijut  the  leaHets  are  not  expanded.  In  this  condition,  it  is  apt  to  be 
fugacious;  and  one  often  tinds  only  a  withered  or  broken  remnant  of  it.  The 
basifugal  succession  of  both  the  pinna!  and  the  leaflets  in  the  development  of  the 
bipinnate  leaves  is  vei-y  interesting.  The  pinna  in  the  basal  region  are  usually 
short;  in  the  middle  region  they  are  very  long,  with  numerous  pairs  of  pinnae,  and 
s  tei-minal  leaflet.  The  internodes  may  be  as  long  as,  or  shorter  than  the  spread 
of  an  opposite  pair  of  expanded  leaflets.  The  petiole  is  relatively  very  short, 
as  long  as  about  two  or  three,  or  more,  internodes,  if  some  of  the  possible  lowest 
pinna'  do  not  develop.  The  variable  length  of  mature  leaves  on  the  same  plant, 
that  is  the  variable  number  of  the  pairs  of  pinnae  present,  is,  I  think,  attributable 
to  accidents,  at  different  stages  of  gi-owth,  to  the  apical  portion  of  the  leaves 
before  the  basifugal  development  of  the  full  number  of  pinnae  is  complete. 

The  leaves  of  CalUandra  have  up  to  six  or  seven  pairs  of  pimiffi.  As  in  the 
bipinnate  Acacias,  the  terminal  pinna,  as  well  as  the  terminal  leaflet  of  the  pinnae, 
has  been  arrested;  but,  in  Iwth  cases,  their  remnants,  the  terminal  seta3,  are  pre- 
sent, unless  accidentally  missing,  and  are  esjieciully  noticeable  in  young  leaves. 
Of  a  leaf  with  six  pairs  of  pinnae,  the  length  of  the  common  petiole  was  34  inches; 
Ihe  spread  of  a  pair  of  opposite  expanded  leaflets  11,  or  about  the  length 
of  two  internodes;  and  the  length  of  the  petiole  2-1.  The  petioles  of  these 
leaves,  proportionately  to  the  length  of  the  common  petioles,  are  the  longest  I 
have  met  w^th;  and  the  length  of  the  internodes  is  less  than  the  spread  of  an 
opposite  pair  of  leaflets ;  but  this  causes  no  overlapping  .as  the  apical  pair  of 
pinnie,  and  one  or  two  pairs  below  them  move  upwards  and  inwards,  and  the 
basal  pair  move  downwards  and  inwards. 

The  youngest  leaves  of  .1.  discolor  that  one  can  get,  siiow  excellently  the  ter- 
minal setae  both  of  the  common  petiole  and  of  the  pinnae  (PI.  viii.,  fig.  2).  Also 
that  there  is  no  addition  of  pinnae  at  the  apex  of  the  leaf,  after  the  lowest  pinna? 
are  developed,  as  in  Jacaranda.  All  the  pinnae  that  are  to  be  present  in  the  mature 
leaf,  are  represented  in  the  primordium  of  the  leaf;  and  when  the  pinucP  of  the 
young  leaves  move  into  place,  and  the  leaflets  expand,  the  iiinnfe  are  all  equally 
developed .  Similar  statements  are  applicable  to  the  very  young  leaves  of  A. 
decurrens. 

Fig.  2  of  PI.  iii.,  shows  the  leaf  of  a  seedling  of  this  speciei*,  with  three  pairs 
of  pinnae,  the  middle  pair  of  which  illustrate  the  incomplete  ba-sipetal  development 
of  the  leaflets. 

Due  recognition  of  the  meaning  and  significance  of  the  terminal  setcB  of  the 
leaves  of  the  bipinnate  Acacias,  and  especially  of  the  leaves  of  seedling's  with 
only  one  pair  of  pinnae,  is  the  key  to  the  understanding  of  euphyllodes.  What- 
ever else  may  be  wanting,  the  apical  pair  of  pinnae-  is  always  present,  unless  acci- 
dentally missing,  except  in  decadent  stages  such  as  are  shown  in  Plate  vii. 

The  Petioles  or  the  Lea\'es  of  Bipinx"ate  Australiax  Acacias 

The  euphyllodes  of  some  Australian  Acacias  are  very  long,  from  12-20  inches. 
In  considering  the  nature  of  such  remarkable  developments  as  these,  it  is  neces- 
sary to  consider  some  of  the  characters  of  the  leaves  of  the  bipinnate  Acacias. 
and  especially   of  their  petioles. 


36  •  president's  address. 

Seventy-eight  years  ago,  Mr.  Bentbam  monographed  the  species  of  Mimosa. 
He  began  his  paper  by  formulating  some  definitions."  Thus  he  said — "Before 
entering  into  descriptive  details,  some  preliminary  explanations  may  be  necessary 
relating  to  some  of  the  terms  used  in  characterising  Mimoseoe,  and  applied  by 
different  writers  in  different  senses.  ...  I  have  uniformly  adopted  the 
phraseology  usually  followed  by  De  Candollc,  giving  the  name  of  pinnae  to  the 
primary  divisions,  and  of  foliola  to  the  ultimate  divisions  [of  the  bipinnate  leaf]. 
I  have  also  designated  by  petiolus  communis,  the  xi-hole  of  the  stalk 
to  which  the  pinnae  are  affixed,  not  (as  is  done  by  Kunth),  that  part  only  which 
is  below  the  lowest  pair  of  pinnae,  and  by  petiolus  partialis  I  have  meant  the 
whole  of  the  stalk  to  which  the  foliola  are  attached."  Accordingly,  in  this  paper, 
Bentham  refrains  altogether  from  using  the  terms   petiole  and  rhacbis. 

The  adoption  of  the  term  common  petiole,  in  the  sense  defined,  has  the  ad- 
vantage of  avoiding  a  possible  difficulty — namely,  if  the  portion  of  the  common 
petiole  of  a  bipinnate  leaf  below  the  lowest  pair  of  pinnae,  the  petiole  in  the 
Kuuthian  sense,  is  longer  than  the  internode  immediately  above,  how  is  one  to  be 
cjuite  sure  that  at  least  one  pair  of  pinnse,  below  the  lowest  pair  present,  has  not 
been  suppressed;  and  that,  consequently,  the  supposed  petiole  is  only  ap- 
parently, and  not  really,   the  actual  petiole? 

When  Bentham  came  to  deal  with  the  Acacias  in  the  second  volume  of  the 
Mora  Austrabensis  (18G4),  he  adopted  a  somewhat  different  and  mixed  termin- 
ology, partlj-  as  defined  above  for  the  Mimoseae  proper,  and  partly  in  accordance 
with  the  definitions  given  in  the  Introduction  and  Glossary  prefixed  to  the  de- 
scriptive matter  in  the  first  volume.  While  stiU  using  the  term  common  petiole 
for  the  whole  of  the  stalk  to  which  the  pinnae  are  affixed,  he  also  uses  the  term 
petiole,  in  the  Kunthian  sense,  for  that  part  which  is  below  the  lowest  pah-  of 
pinucB;  and  he  also  uses  the  term  rhachis.  But  I  do  not  understand  Bentham  to 
use  the  term  common  petiole  as  synonymous  with  the  term  rhacliis.  as  defined  in 
the  Introduction- — "39.  The  common  stalk  [of  a  compound  leaf]  upon  which  the 
leaflets  are  inserted  is  called  the  common  petiole  or  the  rhachis." 

If  one  examines  the  impari-pinnate  leaves  of  Tecoma  capensis  (4  pairs), 
T.  radieans  (4-5  pairs),  Rohinia  pseudacacia  (8  pairs),  Ailanthus  glanduhi!<a 
(up  to  14  or  more  pairs) — all  common  garden-plants,  with  leaves  of  the  same 
type,  varying  considerably  in  length  according  to  the  number  of  the  pairs  of 
leaflets,  with  fairly  large  leaflets,  much  about  the  same  breadth — it  may  be 
noticed:  (1)  that  the  length  of  the  intemodes  corresponds  to,  or  is  a  little  longer 
"than  the  greatest  breadth  of  the  leaflets,  so  that  these  may  be  fully  exposed  to  the 
light  without  any  overlapping;  (2)  that  the  leaflets  are  fairly  at  right  angles  to 
the  axis  to  which  they  are  attached;  (3)  that  by  the  leng-thening  of  the  petiole  of 
the  terminal  leaflet,  this  also  is  fairly  displayed  without  overlapping  the  leaflets 
of  the  pair  next  below;  and  (4),  that  the  petioles — the  portions  of  the  common 
petioles  below  the  lowest  pair  of  pinnje — are  relatively  short  or  very  short,  no 
longer  sometimes  than  the  lowest  internode,  or  half  as  long  again,  or  a  little 
longer . 

If,  next,  one  examines  the  pari-pinnate  leaves  of  Cassia  C andolleana.  also 
common  in  gardens,  with  four  pairs  of  leaflets,  it  may  be  noticed: — (1)  that  the 
intemodes  are  about  as  long  as,  or  a  little  longer  than,  the  greatest  width  of  the 
leaflets;  (2)  that,  in  the  absence  of  the  terminal  leaflet,  the  leaflets  of  the  first 
pair,  or  of  the  first  and  second  pairs  next  below,  usually  move  slightly  inwards, 

•  Bentham,  "Notes  on  Mimoseae,  with  a  short  Synopsis  of  Species."    Hooker's  Journal 
of  Botany,  Vol.  iv.,  p.  342,  1842, 


PRESIDENT'S  ADDRESS. 


37 


while  the  two  still  lower  pairs  are  more  or  less  at  right  angles  to  the  axis;  (3) 
that  there  is  a  terminal  seta  representing  a  remnant  of  the  missing  terminal 
leaflet,  unless  it  is  accidentally  wanting,  as  it  often  is  in  the  full-grown  leaves, 
■which  is  green  and  very  conspicuous  in  quite  young  fresh  leaves; 
and  (4)  that  the  petiole,  real  or  apparent,  is  somewhat  variable  in  length  in 
different  leaves,  and  may  be  about  half  as  long  again  as  the  lowest  internode,  or 
even   a  little  more. 

In  the  pari-bipinnate  leaves  of  the  Australian  Acacias,  it  will  be  noticed — {!) 
that,  in  the  absence  of  the  terminal  pinna,  represented  by  the  terminal  seta,  the 
pinnfe  of  the  apical  pair  invariably,  as  far  as  I  have  seen,  move  inwards  so  as 
almost  or  actually  to  touch  or  even  slightly  overlap;  that  those  of  a  few  pairs 
below,  if  the  pairs  are  numerous,  may  also  move  inwards,  but  that  some  of  the 
lowest  pairs  may  be  more  or  less  at  right  angles;— (2)  that  the  internodes  are 
about  as  long  as  the  spread  of  an  opposite  pair  of  expanded  leaflets  measured 
from  tip  to  tip,  but  may  be  slightly  longer;  the  internodes  of  the  same  leaf  may 
also  vary  slightly  in  length— and  (3)  that  the  petioles,  apparent  or  real,  are 
short  if  the  leaflets  are  short,  excessively  short  sometimes  as  in  A.  Bailey  ana,  and 
A.  Jonesii,  but  nnich  longer,  though  still  relatively  short,  if  the  leaflets  are  long 
as  in  A.  prulnosa,  or  very  long  indeed,  as  in  A.  elata.  Following  are  the  mea- 
surements of  the  leaves  of  the  five  species  available : — 

A.  Baileyana — 4  pairs  of  pinnae;  common  petiole,  IJ;  lowest  internode,  i; 
petiole,  i  inch.  (PI.  iv.,  fig.  1).  The  lai-gest  number  of  pinnae  noticed  is  five 
pairs.      The  leaflets  of  this  species  are  not  sensitive. 

A.  discolor — 9  pairs  of  pinnae;  common  petiole,  4J ;  lowest  internode,  A; 
petiole,  1  inch.  In  another  leaf  on  the  same  branch,  tlie  petiole  was  no  longer 
than  the  internode  above. 

A.  decurrens — 17  pairs  of  pinna;;  common  petiole.  51;  lowest  internode,  ^; 
petiole,  I  inch. 

A.  pruinosa — G  pairs  of  pinnse;  common  petiole,  Hi;  leaflets  up  to  5;  lowest 
internode,  J;  petiole,  If  inch. 

A.  elata — 5  pairs  of  pinnae;  common  petiole,  9f ;  leaflets  up  to  1|  (Bentham 
gives  up  to  2  inches);  lowest  internode.  If;  petiole,  2|  inches.  Three  other 
leaves  have  the  petioles  somewhat  shorter.  This  species  has  very  long  pinnas, 
up  to  more  than  8  inches. 

Bipinnate  leaves  may  be  short,  or  long,  or  of  intermediate  length,  according 
to  the  number  of  pairs  of  pinnae  present;  that  is,  according  to  the  number  and 
length  of  the  internodes,  and  the  length  of  the  apparent  petiole.  The  number 
of  pairs  of  pinnae  present  in  a  given  length  depends  on  the  length  of  the  leaflets, 
and  this  is  a  very  variable  quantitj'. 

The  bipinnate  leaves  of  A.  elata  and  A.  pniiiiosa,  of  all  the  twenty-two 
species  described  in  the  Flora  Australiensis,  and  as  described  therein,  have  the 
longest  leaflets.  Therefore,  they  may  be  expected  to  have,  as  they  actually  have, 
the  longest  internodes,  and  the  longest  petioles,  real  or  apparent.  No  seedlings 
of  euphyllodineous  Acacias  have  as  yet,  been  described  by  Cambage,  with  leaflets 
promising  to  be   anytliing  like  as   long   as  those  of  A.   elata. 

Allowing  about  3  inches  as  the  maximum  length  of  the  petioles  of  the  Aus- 
tralian bipinnate  Acacia  with,  by  far,  the  longest  leaflets  known,  what  valid 
ground  is  there  for  supposing,  if  the  so-called  phyllodes  are  simply  flattened 
petioles  which  have  dropped  their  blades,  that  they  can  attain  lengths  of  "from 
P   in.  to  1  ft."   (.1.  macradenia),  "above  a  foot  long,  the  upper  ones  A    ft."    (A. 


38  president's  address. 

cyanophylla),  "lower  phyllodia  (i  I(j  Id  iu.  long"  (.1.  LiiuUeiji),  '"3-10  in.  loag 
or  even  more''  {A.  iiachycarpa),  and  others,  as  describcil  by  Bentliani?  1  have 
euphyllodes  of  .1.  lonyifolia  up  to  13J  inches  long,  and  lA  broad;  and  Maiden 
has  recorded  a  variety  of  this  species  with  phyllodes,  so-called,  up  to  20  inches 
Jong.  Allowing  one-third  of  the  total  length  for  that  of  the  petioles,  euphyllodes 
l'2-"20  inches  long — if  they  are  simply  thittened  petioles  which  have  lost  their 
blades — should  belong  to  potential  bipinnate  leaves  3  to  5  feet  long! 

The  euphyllodes  of  Australian  Acacias  may  be  short  or  they  may  i)c  long. 
If  very  short,  they  are  the  Hattened  axes  of  species,  which,  if  they  had  not  be- 
eonic  euphyllodineous,  would  have  only  a  few  (1,  '2,  or  3)  pairs  of  pinua^.  If 
long,  under  similar  circumstances,  they  should  liavc  numerous  pairs  of  piimse,  as 
sliown  in  my  i)hotograplis  |Pls.  v.-vii.)  of  leaves  of  reversion-shoots  of  a  species 
with  long  eupliyllodes,  up  to  8|  (PI.  ii.,  fig.  1)  inches  long,  or  even  longer.  But 
flattened  petioles  of  leaves  of  Anstralian  Acac'ias,  which  have  lost  their  blades,  as 
long  as  12-20  inches,  are  mythical  structures;  and  the  idea  that  there  are,  or  may 
be  such  is  nothing  less  than  fantastic  I 

The  current  idea  that  the  euphyllodes  ol'  Australian  Acacias  are  simiily 
flattened  petioles  which  have  lost  their  blades,  is  a  barren  conception  which  has 
retarded  the  progress  of  knowledge.  If  that  is  all  they  are,  one  is  ])reclu(led 
from  discussing  the  question  of  what  sort  of  bipinnate  Acacias  the  eu])hvlhMlineous 
Acacias  would  or  might  be  if  they  did  not  develop  euphyllodes. 

But  when  it  is  realised  that  the  euphyllodes  are  the  Hattened,  ]iriniary  leaf- 
axes  or  common  petioles  of  bipinnate  leaves  which  liave  lost  their  pinn;e,  it  be- 
comes possible  to  reconstruct  them  theoretically  in  a  very  simple  way,  and  then 
to  find  analogues  of  them  among  the  existing  Bipinnatfe,  since  these  itu-lude 
Acacias  of  wiiich  the  adult  leaves  have — one  pair  of  i)innie  only,  "on  a  common 
petiole  of  about  I  inch  long,"  as  Bentham  records  of  .1.  Gilberti,  or  "1  or  2  pairs, 
the  common  ])etiole  about  1  incli"  (.1.  suliemsa).  or  any  number  of  pairs  up  to 
"usually  10  to  20  i)air.s"  (.1.  deulbatu,  length  of  coMuiion  jietiole  not  stated),  or 
"15  to  20  pairs,  the  common  i)etiole  2  to  3  in<-iies"  (,1.  BidwilV),  or  piissil)ly 
even  more,  if  one  were  to  search  carefully  oxer  abiuidance  of  material. 

The  simple  method  of  reconstructing  them  is,  to  nu'asure  with  a  pair  of  com- 
passes the  length,  from  tip  to  ti])  across  the  partial  iliachis,  of  a  good  ])air  of 
op])osite,  expanded  leaflets  on  the  l)ii)innate  leaves  of  a  seedling.  Tiiis  will  give 
approximately  the  length  of  an  internode.  Then  measure  off  the  internodes  on 
a  eujiliyllode,  beginning  at  the  apex,  and  what  is  over,  regard  as  the  iietiole. 
This  will  enable  one  to  calculate  approximately  the  ])ossible  number  of  jiairs  of 
pinnas  tiiat  could  be  present.  If  one  can  get  a  scc<lling  with  a  leaf  with  two 
pairs  of  pinnae,  one  can  comimrc'  the  leniilli  of  tlic  intei-nodc  with  llie  length 
of  an  opi>ositc  jiair  of  leaflets.  Hax'ing  done  tliis,  then  look  tor  the  bipinnate 
analogue  among  the  l)ipinnate  s])ecies  described  by  Rent  ham,  or  others,  and 
figured  in  Mueller's  "Iconoi;ra|)hy  of  the  Acacias,"  or  elsewhere.  But.  of  course, 
reversion-foliaiie.  and  es])ecially  i-cversion-shoots.  if  one  can  get  good  S|)ecimen.s, 
will  show   N'alurc's  method   of  actually   doing  it. 

Hk\HRS10\-1''0I,IAGK,    KeVKRSI0N-Si1(X)TS,    .\NI)    SrCKKRS. 

Textbooks  sometimes  nu'ution,  in  an  in<leHnite  way.  the  occurrence  of  rever- 
sion-foliage on  euphyllodineous  Acacias  which  have  lieen  pruned  or  otherwise  in- 
jured, Lubbock  and  Tiiom<5"s  figure  si)rays  of,!,  melunoxylon,  with  bolli  eu))hyl- 
lodes  and   bipinnate  leaves:   and  other  authors   menti(m  similar  peculiarities.    This 


president's  address.  39 

species  is  an  exceptioual  one,  in  need  of  special  investigation.  It  is  a  species 
which  I  have  not  had  the  opportunity  of  e.xamining.  A.  lonyi folia  is  much  in- 
fested by  borers,  and  one  can  iind  plants  which  have  l)een  broken  by  people  in 
getting  the  flowers,  but  I  have  never  met  with  revei-sion-foliage.  Seedlings  of  .-1. 
falcata  are  often  so  badly  attacked  by  insect  gall-makers,  that  the  growing  point 
may  be  killed,  but  I  have  not  found  that  it  induces  the  production  of  reversion- 
foliage.  Plants  of  A.  myrti folia  often  show  a  disorganised  production  of  crowd- 
ed euphyllodes,  apparently  due  to  fungoid  attacks,  but  I  have  failed  to  find  re- 
version-foliage . 

Quite  the  most  satisfactory  species  for  foliage  vt  tiiis  kind  is  A.  suaveolens, 
because  one  can  get  it  in  abundance.  Adxanced  seedlings  up  to  5  feet  high,  seem 
to  be  particularly  liable  to  fungoid  attacks,  which  sometimes  seriously  interfere 
with,  or  e\-en  kill  the  growing-point,  often  resulting  in  large  excrescences  of  ab- 
noiTiial  growth  on  the  summit.  If  this  happens,  not  too  close  to  the  ground, 
it  frequently  results  in  an  outburst  of  reversion-foliage  along  a  portion  of  the 
stem,  or  on  the  proximal  portions  of  any  branches  that  may  be  present.  This 
will  often  supi)ly  most  instructive  stages  in  the  transition  from  bininnate  leaves 
to  euphyllodes,  whicli  are  not  shown  in  normal  seedlings. 

Eleven  examples  of  remarkable  leaves  (nat;  size)  are  shown  in  Plate  i.  These 
are  of  interest  because,  in  addition  to  the  ordinary  apical  pair  of  pinna,  or  this 
and  the  second  ])air  next  below  it,  some  of  them  show  pairs  of  reduced  pinnae,  or 
single  reduced  jiinna'.  ]>airs  of  leaflets  or  single  leaflets,  at  different  levels,  on  the 
margin  of  the  developing  euphyllode  or  half-euphyllode,  instead  of  on  the  mid- 
rib; other's  show  foliaceous  terminal  setae;  and  two  have  three  leaves  at  a  node. 
Figs.  1,  3,  and  11  have  no  or  but  slight  development  of  the  lower  side  of  the 
euphyllodes.  All  three  have  an  odd  pinna  below  the  first  jsair  of  iiinnse,  or  just 
below  the  second  pair  (the  leaflets  missing  in  Fig.  3);  and,  at  a  lower  level, 
a  pair  of  pinnae  with  a  reduced  numlier  of  leaflets,  on  tlie  margin  of  the  euphyl- 
lode. A.  suaveolens  is  remarkable  in  this  respect,  namely,  for  the  transference  of 
the  leaf -buds  to  the  margin  of  the  eujihyllode,  instead  of  their  remaining  on  the 
midrib . 

Figs.  2  and  6  show  two  pairs  of  pinnae  (one  pinna  missing  in  Fig.  0)  and  a 
single,  small  pinna,  with  but  few  leaflets,  on  the  edge  of  the  euphyllode.  They 
are  figured  especially  to  show,  what  I  have  seen  only  in  the  reversion-foliage  of 
this  species,  in  which  it  is  common — the  occurrence  of  three  leaves  at  some  of  the 
nodes,  of  which  the  middle  one  is  always  the  most  developed.  In  the  examples 
given,  the  two  lateral  leaves  of  the  trio  are  simjjly  pinnate.  But,  sometimes,  one 
or  both  may  be  bipinnate ;  or  the  middle  one  may  be  a  complete  large  euphyllode, 
while  one,  at  least,  of  the  lateral  ones  may  be  a  smaller  euphyllode.  The  two 
lateral  leaves  probably  develop  from  reserve-buds.  Lubbock  describes  and  figures 
a  seedling  of  ^1.  i-erticillata,  of  which  the  sixtli  leaf  was  represented  by  a  single 
euphyllode.  but  some  of  the  succeeding  ones  by  broken  or  complete  whorls  of 
euphyllodes.  Other  species  may  also  have  whorled  or  verticillate  or  grouped 
euphyllodes;  but,  as  far  as  I  know,  nothing  analogous  to  it  is  known  in  bipinnate 
Acacias.  Fig.  2  shows  the  terminal  seta;  and  the  retarding  effect  of  the  pre- 
sence of  the  second  jiair  of  pinn^  on  the  flattening  of  the  internode,  and  for  some 
distance  below. 

Figs.  4,  5,  and  7  show  a  pair  of  leaflets,  or  two  odd  leaflets,  on  the  margins  of 
the  euphyllode  at  different  levels.  Sometimes  a  jiinna,  or  a  leaflet  or  leaflets, 
may  be  quite  close  to  the  base,  indicating  that  the  petiolar  portion  of  the  euphyl- 


40  president's  address. 

lode  is  relatively  very  short.  I  liave  two  examples  of  nearly  complete  eupbyl- 
lodes,  one  of  which  has  an  apical  pair  of  pinnae,  and  a  large  leaflet  with  an  op- 
posite pair  of  small  ones,  on  the  margin  |  inch  from  the  base;  while  the  other 
has  an  apical  pinna  with  two  pairs  of  leaflets,  and  a  marginal  pinna  with  two 
l)airs  of  leaflets,  §  inch  from  the  base.  Another  specimen  has  one  pair  of  pinn<e, 
of  which  one  has  a  terminal  leaflet.  I  have  one  leaf  with  three  complete  pairs  of 
pinna;. 

Figs.  4,  8,  9,  10  show  foUaeeous  terminal  setae.  Two  of  them  have  mar- 
ginal leaflets,  and  in  one  case,  a  pinna  which  shrivelled  in  drying. 

I  am  indebted  to  Mr.  C.  T.  Musson  for  some  very  interesting  reversion- 
shoots  from  a  shrub  of  A.  podahjriaffolia,  which  had  been  cut  back.  These  are 
particularly  interesting,  because  this  species  has  sliort  enphyllodes,  which  are 
nearly    as   broad  as   they   are   long,  up  to   IJ    x    1%  inches.     Seventeen  leaves 

16 

show  no  flattening  on  the  lower  side,  and  fifteen  of  these  have  two  pairs  of  pinnai. 
Three  of  these  are  figured.  ( Plate  vii.,  figs.  1-3. )  They  all  show  much  flattening 
of  the  upper  side  of  the  leaf-axis  up  to  the  level  of  the  lower  pair  of  piunae, 
and  some  flattening  of  the  internode.  But  the  lower,  broad,  flattened  portion  has 
a  loose  end.  The  presence  of  the  lower  pair  of  pinnae,  by  retarding  the  flatten- 
ing of  the  internodal  contribution  to  the  complete  euphyllode  and  blocking  the 
■way,  left  the  portion  below  the  lower  pair  of  pinnae  in  the  lurch,  in  all  three 
eases;  and  I  have  others  more  or  less  like  them.  Two  examples,  with  one  pair 
of  pinnae  (PI.  vii.,  figs.  -1-5)  show  very  well  the  rudiment  of  the  terminal  pinna, 
without  leaflets,  with  the  terminal  seta,  which,  in  this  species,  unless  accidentally 
missing,  is  usually  conspicuous  on  the  early  euphyllodes,  and  particularly  on  the 
young  ones.  It  is  so  long  sometimes  that,  when  dry,  it  twists.  It  is  obvious 
that,  in  this  case,  the  euphyUode  comprises  two,  or  at  the  most,  three,  internodes, 
and  the  petiole.  If  it  were  not  euphyllodineous,  this  species  would  be  a  bipin- 
nate  Acacia  with  three  pairs  of  pinna?,  occasionally,  perhaps,  four  at  the  most . 
Cambage  has  recently  described  and  figui'ed  the  seedling  of  this  species  [Part  v. 
of  his  papers]  . 

The  finest  examples  of  reversion-shoots  and  suckers,  I  have  yet  seeu,  are  two 
lots  of  A.  implexa  (?),  which  I  quite  casually  met  with  in  March,  1919:  One 
lot  comprises  specimens  from  two  plants,  8-10  feet  high,  growing  close  together, 
that  had  been  badly  scorched  by  a  l)ush-flre,  which  killed  the  parts  above  gTound, 
but  without  injury  to  the  root-system.  Reversion-shoots  from  the  base  of  the 
stems,  and  suckers  from  some  of  the  roots  came  up  freely.  T  fortunately  found 
them  in  the  early  stages;  and  specimens  were  taken,  from  time  to  time,  over  a 
period  of  six  months,  until  what  were  left  had  only  euphyllodes,  or  a  few  bipinnate 
leaves  of  no  importance.  The  second  lot  was  procured  from  some  half  dozen 
plants  at  the  side  of  a  country-road,  which  had  been  miscliie\ii\islv  broken  or  cut 
off  a  little  above  the  ground . 

From  the  complete  collection,  I  have  been  able  to  select  a  sequence  of  leaves, 
which  include — (1)  simply  pinnate  leaves,  present  on  two  suckers,  but,  if  de- 
veloped, missing  on  the  reversion-shoots;  (2)  bipiniuite  leaves  with  from  one  to 
eleven  actual  or  potential  pairs  of  pinna;,  some  of  the  lowest  pairs  being  repre- 
sented by  leaflets;  and  (3)  the  five  late  stages  of  the  waning  pinna?,  and  the  wax- 
ing flattening  of  the  long  conniion  petioles  or  primary  leaf-axes,  shown  in  Plate 
vii.  The  entire  se(|uenee  is  not  shown,  my  main  object  being  to  show  as  many  as 
possible  of  the  best  examples  illustrating  the  inversely  projiortional  ratio  in 
which  the  two  antagonists  are  represented  at  various  stages.  The  sul)stitution  of 
flattening  axes  for  piuu;e  is  not   a  case  of  "walk   in.  walk  nut."     It  is  an   intense 


president's  address.  41 

struggle  between  them.  The  potentially  heavyweight  euphyllodes  knoek-out  the 
bantam  pinnje  very  promptly  in  weak  seedlings.  But,  in  reversion-shoots,  with 
a  weU-established  root-system  to  back  them  up,  they  put  up  a  much  better  fight, 
and  are  able  to  prolong  the  strugglel,   hopeless  though  it  is. 

These  specimens  are  most  interesting  because  the  euphyllodes  are  so  long,  up 
to  about  9  inches,  and  yet  not  too  narrow.  This  means  that,  if  they  were  not 
euphyllodes,  they  would  be  bipiunate  leaves  with  numerous  pairs  of  pinniB,  up  to 
15-20.  Therefore,  they  contrast  admirably  with,  and  supplement  the  two  cases, 
one  with  very  short  and  the  other  with  euphyllodes  of  medium  length,  already  con- 
sidered. Nevertheless,  they  show  only  another  phase  of  the  same  kind  of  thing. 
The  three  ^re  not  special  cases,  but  only  those  of  which  I  have  been  able  to  get 
adequate  material. 

The  illustrations  (Plates  ii.-vii.)  need  little  explanation,  if  it  is  kept  in 
mind : — 

(1)  That  the  succession  of  the  pinna?,  in  the  development  of  the  compound, 
bipinnate  leaves  of  the  Australian  Acacias  is  basipetal,  not  basifugal,  as 
in  the  leaves  of  Jacaranda.  In  seedlings,  the  first  leaf,  or  a  pair  of 
them,  is  simply  pinnate,  a  simpler  type  of  those  which  come  after  it. 
Then  follows  an  abruptly  bijtinnate  leaf  with  one  pair  of  pinnae,  repre- 
senting the  replacement  of  the  apical  pair  of  leaflets  of  the  first  pinnate 
leaf,  without  any  representatives  of  the  other  pairs  of  leaflets.  That  it 
is  the  apical  pair,  is  shown  by  the  presence  of  the  terminal  seta  at  the 
apex  of  the  common  petiole  of  every  leaf,  from  start  to  finish,  unless  it 
is  accidentally  missing.  Then,  in  due  course,  in  the  seedlings  of  the 
Bipinnatae,  of  some  of  the  EujjhyllodineaB,  and  in  reversion-foliage  and 
reversion-shoots  of  any  of  them,  follow  leaves  with  two.  three,  or  more 
up  to  the  complete  number,  or  approximating  thereto.  These  represent 
always  the  apical  pair  and  one,  two,  three,  or  more  pairs,  as  the  case 
may  be,  up  to  the  full  number,  of  successive  pairs  of  pinnse,  in  order 
next  below  the  apical  pair.  The  apical  pair  is  always  present  in  every 
leaf,  however  many  pairs  of  pinnje  may  be  present,  except  in  the  de- 
cadent stages  of  the  outgoing  pinnae,  as  illustrated  in  Plate  vii. 

(2)  Therefore,  if  the  full  possible  number  is  not  present,  the  shortage  is  in 
the  lower  portion  of  the  series.  Also,  the  good,  well-developed  pinnae,  if 
all  of  tliem  are  not  equally  well-developed,  when  a  number  of  pairs  are 
present,  are  those  attached  to  the  upper  jiart  of  the  common  petiole ;  and 
the  poor  specimens,  sometimes  only  represented  by  leaflets,  are  attaciied 
to  the  lower  part  of  the  leaf-axis,  as  is  shown  in  figs.  1-4  of  PI.  vi.,  and 
figs.  4  and  6  of  PI.  vii . 

(3)  This  provides  an  opening  for  the  flattening  of  the  axis  to  make  a  start 
on  tlie  proximal  portion  of  the  leaf-axis,  where  pinnae  are  absent  or 
poorly  developed.  If  only  one  pair  of  pinnae  is  present  at  the  apex,  the 
surviving  apical  pair,  as  shown  by  the  presence  of  the  terminal  seta,  the 

entire  leaf-axis  may  flatten  from  top  to  bottom    (PI.  iii.,  fig.  5;  PI.  vii.. 
fig.  4) .     Illustrations   of  flattening  axes  with  an   apical  pair  of  pinnae, 
more  or  less  resembling  my  examples,  are  commonly  shown  in  textbooks, 
as  confirmation  of  the  statement,  that  the  so-called   phyllodes  of  Acacias 
are  flattened  petioles  which  have  lost  their  blades! 
The  figures  of  Plates  iv.-v.,  and   fig.  5   of  PI.   vi.,  show  a  few  pairs   (2-5)    of 
strong  pinnae  attached  to  the  upper  part   of  the  leaf-axis ;   well-marked  flattening 
of  the  axis  in  the  lower  part;  but  retarded  flattening  where  the  pinn»  are  situated. 


42  president's  address. 

though  there  may  be  unmistakable  indications  of  it.  Fig.  3  of  PI.  iv.,  and  lig.  5  of 
PI.  vi.,  show  the  damping  effect  of  the  presence  of  good  pinniB  e.xcellently. 

Fig-s.  1-4  of  PI.  vi.,  sbow  the  retarding  influence  of  the  presence  of  pinnse  on 
the  flattening,  in  the  leaves  with  the  ma.ximum  number  of.  pairs  of  pinna",  that  I 
have  succeeded  in  landing.  These  are  very  instructive.  Leaves  with  7-9  pairs 
are  not  shown,  only  for  want  of  space,  and  because  they  do  not  show  anything 
more  than  these  do. 

Plate  vii.  shows  the  last  stages  of  the  decadent  pinn<e,  correlated  with  a 
maximum  of  flattening  of  the  leaf-axis.  Figs.  1,  2.  4  and  6,  rei)resenting  the 
pinnae  on  their  last  leg-s,  are  the  only  ones  of  the  entire  series  wliich  lack  the 
apical  pair  of  pinnse.  Figs.  4  and  5  are  particularly  instructive,  because  they 
show  a  minimum  amount  of  flattening  in  the  proximal  part  of  the  leat-axis,  where 
the  forlorn  surviving  pinn®  or  leaflets  are  stranded ;  and  then,  distad  of  them,  the 
flattening  soon  increases.  Fig.  4  has  but  two  single  pinnie  with  a  reduced  number 
of  leaflets ;  unfortunately  the  upper  portion  of  the  euphyllode  was  missing  when  I 
got  it.  Fig.  6  shows  the  lowest  pair,  and  the  one  next  above,  represented  by 
leaflets;  and  then,  altove  these,  a  pair  of  reduced  pinnae,  and  a  distal  better  pair. 
The  portion  of  the  axis  below  the  lowest  leaflet,  the  real  or  apparent  petiole,  is 
longer  than  the  internode  above  it — even  allowing  that  it  may  be  the  real  petiole — 
but  it  is  relatively  very,  short.  In  the  face  of  such  evidence  as  this,  can  anyone 
still  believe  that  the  so-called  phyllodes  of  the  Australian  Acacias  are  merely  flat- 
tened leafstalks  or  petioles  which  have  lost  their  blades'? 

An  interesting  paper  by  Dr.  C.  E.  Preston,  on  "Peculiar  Stages  of  Foliage 
in  tiie  Genus  Acacia,"  is  contained  in  the  American  Naturalist,  Vol.  xxxvi.,  p. 
727,  September,  1902.  This  is  worth  attention,  because  what  is  so  often  tacitly 
assumed  and  taken  for  granted,  is  discussed  in  this  jjaper;  namely,  to  which  pair 
of  leaflets  of  the  fii'st  simply  pinnate  leaf  of  a  seedling  does  the  single  pair  of 
pinnae  of  the  next  bipinnate  leaf  correspond?  Preston  says:  "A  peculiar  tran- 
sition-stage between  the  singly  pinnate  and  the  bii)innate  is  sometimes  found  in 
seedlings  of  A.  leprosa  Sieber,  when  growing  under  cultivation.  The  shadow- 
prints  (Figs.  1  and  2)  annexed  sliow  the  nature  of  this  peculiarity.  The  lower 
pair  of  leaflets  only  is  replaced  by  a  pair  of  strongly  developed  jiinna-,  while  the 
rest  of  the  axis  runs  on  singly  i)iimate  and  rather  weak  in  structure.  As  a  I'ule, 
no  such  continuation  of  the  main  axis  is  to  be  found."  Shadow-prints  of  two 
young  seedlings  are  given,  showing  an  '"abnormal  third  leaf"  in  each  ease;  the 
first  being  simply  pinnate,  the  second  bipinnate,  and  the  third  apparently  tripin- 
nate.  With  all  due  deference  to  the  author,  and  simply  on  the  ba.sis  of  nia/jna 
est  i-eritcix  et  preraleat,  T  venture  to  express  the  ojiinion  that,  having  inadcquats 
material,  he  completely  missed  the  significance  of  his  abnormal  leaves,  and  mis- 
interi^reted  them . 

From  my  standpoint,  tlii'V  arc  one  of  two  thing's — (1  )  cither  exani]des  of 
tripinnate  leaves,  an  apical  pair  together  with  a  terminal  pinna  (the  middle  one)  ; 
or,  what  is  more  probable,  a  complete,  apical  pair  (the  middle  one,  and  one  of  the 
lateral  ones),  and  an  incomplete  |iair  next  below  (the  other  lateral  one.  its  fellow, 
missing),  the  internode  which  should  have  separated  the  pairs  (complete  or  in- 
complete) not  having  lengthened.  One  cannot  decide  which  view  is  correct,  be- 
cause the  terminal  seta  is  not  mentioned ;  and  it  is  not  recognisable  in  the  small 
shadow-prints.  In  lioth  cases,  the  stalk  l)elow  the  three  pinnae  is  the  common 
petiole  or  primary  leaf-axis,  and  not  the  petiole  only,  as  the  author  suiiposos;  as 
is  suggested  by  the  length  of  it. 

Tambagc  has  examined  seedlings  of  more  species  than  ;iny  other  writer; 
descrii)tions  and  illustrations  of  fifty-five  have  already  been  published.  He  has 
not  so  far  found  a  leaf  of  a  seedling  with  the  terminal  pinna   present,  but  he  has 


president's  address.  43 

met  with  one  instauce  of  it  in  the  leaf  of  a  sucker.  1  have  had  the  opportunity 
of  looking  over  several  thousand  wild  seedling-s,  representing:  about  twelve  species, 
in  the  hope  of  finding  anomalies,  but  with  little  sueeess.  I  have  not  yet  seen  u 
leaf  of  any  Aoacia.  seedling  or  adult,  which  had  a  complete  terminal  pinna;  but 
a  leafless  thread-like  representative  of  its  axis,  with  a  terminal  seta,  is  sometime* 
to  be  found  in  the  leaves  of  reversion-shoots  (PL  iii.,  figs  5.  6;  PI.  viii..  figs.  5-6). 
1  have  also  one  bipinnate  leaf  of  a  seedling,  of  wliich  one  pinna  has  a  terminal 
leaflet.  J.  leprosa  is  an  Australian  species,  but  no  other  descriptions  of  seedlings 
have  been  published.  If  the  leaves  of  Preston's  two  seedlings  really  represent 
tripinnate  leaves  (that  is  the  apical  i>air,  together  with  a  terminal  ]>inna),  thev 
are,  as  yet,  the  first  to  be  recorded . 

What  I  believe  to  be  tlie  correct  explanation  of  them  is,  that  they  are  merely 
examples  like  the  three  shown  in  ray  PI.  iii.,  fig.  3;  and  PI.  viii.,  figs.  9-10.  The 
first  of  these  is  the  leaf  of  a  reversion-shoot.  I  have  others  like  it;  and  otliei-s 
with  the  two  pairs  complete,  but  separated  by  a  very  short  internode.  The 
second  is  a  leaf  of  a  seedling  of  .1.  my rti folia,  and  the  only  specimen  I  have.  But 
Cambage  has  figured  similar  leaves  of  A.  huxifolia  and  A.  pycnantha  [Acacia 
Seedling's.  Part  iii.,  p.  393] .  When  the  termisal  seta  is  taken  account  of,  there  is 
no  dilliculfy  in  interin-efing  them.  The  third  is  a  leaf  of  .1.  decurreiis,  which  is 
comjiarable  with  the  others. 

I  have  failed  to  find  any  e^-idence  whatever  that  the  lowest  or  proximal  i)air  of 
leaflets  of  the  first  simply  pinnate  leaf  is  ever  replaced  by  a  pair  of  strongly 
developed  pinnae,  while  the  rest  of  the  axis  runs  on  simply  pinnate,  and  rather 
weak  in  structure.  On  the  contrary,  the  apical  pair  of  leaflets  is  replaced  by  an 
apical  pair  of  jsmnsp;  and  there  is  no  replacement  at  all  of  the  lower  leaflets  of 
the  first  pinnate  leaf  before  the  transition  of  complete  euphyllodes  in  seedlings 
of  many  species,  though  there  is  in  others,  as  in  the  Bijiinnatse.  Tlierefore,  in 
every  leaf,  at  every  stage  -of  development,  whatex'er  else  may  be  present  or  absent, 
the  apical  pair  is  normally  present,  and,  in  the  very  early  stages,  it  is  the  only 
pair.  The  succession  of  the  pinnae  in  the  development  of  the  bijiinnate  leaf  is 
basipetal. 

The  leaf  of  A.  decurretis  figured  by  Preston  as  '"showing  a  tendency  towards 
a  triple  pinnation,"  that  is,  "showing  clearly  the  third  degree  on  some  of  the  l)asal 
leaflets  of  the  jjinnas,"  is  a  remarkable  Ijut  rare  aberration.  This  species  is  a  very 
common  one  in  the  Sydney  district,  and  I  have  examined  many  leaves;  but  T  have 
not  succeeded  in  fuiding  specimens  of  this  or  any  other  Acacia  which  sliow  it. 
But  I  have  collected  three  leaves  of  Jacaranda,  which  have  a  few  of  the  liasal 
leaflets  of  the  lowest  pinnae  exemplifying  a  tendency  toward  a  triple  pinnation. 

But  what  Preston  has  to  say  about  the  leaves  of  A.  heteroplii/lln,  of  which 
he  gives  illustrations,  is  very  important.  Tliis  is  a  si)ecies  indigenous  t^o  the 
Island  of  Bourbon  and  Mauritius,  or  both  of  them,  T  believe;  and  T  cannot  liear 
that  it  is  cultivated  in  Sydney  gardens.  It  is  sometimes  mentioned  in  textbooks, 
and  it  appears  to  be  a  remarkaljle  species,  like  A.  melanoryJon,  A.  nibida.  and 
])erhaps  some  <ithers,  all  of  which  are  worthy  of  a  detailed  study  of  gradational 
series  of  plants  of  various  ages.  Preston  says — "There  was  also  found  a  fairly 
large  number  of  stages  [of  .4.  heterojjJii/na]  which  lead  one  to  doubt  greatly  whe- 
ther in  all  cases  it  is  the  petiole  only  which  is  transformed  to  the  phvllode,  ana 
pinnae.  They  illustrate  ^•ery  well  the  inversely  projiortional  ratio  in  which  the 
proximal  one.  The  prints  which  follow  may,  to  be  sure,  represent  mere  anomalies, 
but  from  their  numlier,  at  least,  they  cannot  but  raise  in  one's  mind  a  certain  hesi- 
tation   to    consider  the  existence  of  a  law  as  to  method  in    any  way   establislied . 


44  president's  address. 

Here  the  flattening  appears  in  ^ome  cases  entu-ely  on  the  distal  jjortions  without 
attecting  the  petiole,  in  othei-s  both  petiole  and  rhachis  are  involved  to  varied 
extents.  How  these  are  to  be  interpreted  under  one  general  law  seems  incompre- 
hensible." 

Preston  does  not  say  whether  the  seven  leaves  figured  are  such  as  are  to  be 
found  on  ordinary  plants,  whose  growth  has  not  been  interfered  with  by  pruning 
or  othei'wise.  In  the  absence  of  descriptions  of  the  plants  or  of  seedlings,  and  of 
personal  knowledge  of  the  species,  or  of  any  other  like  it,  I  cannot  settle  the 
point.  But  they  are  certainly  comparable  with  some  of  the  leaves  of  reversion- 
shoots,  as  shown  in  my  Plates,  especially  PI.  iii.-vi.  They  are  pictures  of  the 
contest  between  the  flattening  common  petioles,  or  leaf-axes,  and  the  pairs  of 
pinna;.  They  illustrate  very  well  the  inversely  proportional  ratio  in  which  the 
two  antagonists  are  present  in  any  particular  leaf;  and  how,  if  pinnae  are  present, 
no  matter  where  they  may  be  located,  the  flattening  of  the  leaf-axis  is  retarded 
where  they  are  situated ;  and  how,  if  they  are  absent  on  some  part  of  the  axis,  no 
matter  where,  the  flattening  of  the  axis  is  correspondingly  favoured  in  that  parti- 
cular region.  The  localised  damping  or  retarding  effect  of  the  presence  of  the 
pinna?  on  the  flattening  of  the  leaf-axis  is  very  well  shown  in  some  of  his  figures. 

But  the  idea  that  the  so-called  phyllodes  of  some  Acacias  are  flattened  petioles 
which  have  lost  their  blades,  and  of  others,  that  they  are  flattened  axes  which 
have  lost  their  pinnae,  is  erroneous.  There  are  not  two  kinds  of  phyllodes.  so- 
oalled,  of  Acacias.  The  two  hypotheses,  that  there  are,  cannot  be  harmonised. 
Therefore.  I  am  prepared  to  go  further  than  Preston,  and  say  that  the  attempt  to 
interpret  them  under  one  definite  law  not  only  seems,  but  is,  incomprehensiltle, 
inasmuch  as  it  is  not  possible.  The  so-called  phyllodes  of  Australian  Acacias  ai-e 
not  flattened  petioles  which  have  lost  their  blades,  as  both  seedlings,  when  they  are 
correctly  interpreted,  and  reversion-foliage  and  reversion-shoots  demonstrate. 
Therefore,  they  have  been  improperly  called  phyllodes;  and  consequently  any 
attempt  to  interpret  them  in  terms  of  something  which  they  are  not.  cannot  b\it 
be  futile.  But  when  it  is  realised  that  the  euphyllodes  of  all  the  Acacias  of  which 
we  have  sufficient  knowledge,  are  flattened  leaf-axes  or  common  petioles,  which 
have  lost  their  pinnae,  then  it  becomes  possible  to  say,  that  there  is  but  one  definite 
law  which  applies  to  all  that  are  known,  and  that  it  is  a  readily  comprehensible 
law. 

I  regret  that  I  am  unable  to  consult  Reinke's  paper,*  referred  to  by  Preston. 
It  is  not  available  in  Sydney.  The  abstract  of  it  in  the  Journal  of- the  Royal 
Microscopical  Society  (1897,  p.  549)  does  not  include  Reinke's  views  about 
phyllodes.  Under  the  circumstances,  Preston  supplies  what  one  chiefly  wants  to 
know,  namely — "-1.  ruhida  A.  Cunn.  and  .1.  IteteroplniUa  Willd.,  have  aireaily 
been  described  by  Reinke,  and  in  his  article  one  stage  in  the  transition  as  it 
occurs  in  -I.  helerophylla  is  figured.  According  to  tliat  author,  the  change  is 
merely  a  gradual  flattening  of  the  petiole,  accompanied  by  the  reduction  of  parts 
more  distal."  It  is  not  surprising  that  Preston  was  unable  to  reconcile  tlie  views 
here  stated,  with  the  characteristics  of  the  leaves  which  he  figures. 

Goebel,  in  liis  "Organogi'aphy  of  Plants"  (Vol.  i.,  p.  166,  fig.  10'2  I  remarks^ 
"The  best  known  and  most  frequently  quoted  are  the  species  of  Acacia  which  pro- 
duce phyllodes.  The  phyllodes  arise  by  the  l)roadening  in  a  vertical  direction  of 
the  leaf-stalk,  sometimes  also  of  the  leaf-midrib,  whilst  the  lamina  aborts.  Seed- 
ling plants  (Fig.  102).  however,  have,  without  exception,  so  far  as  they  have  been 
examined,    leaves    which  are    like    those  of    the  species — possessing    a  bipinnate 


*  Reinke,    J.,    "  TTntersuchnngen    iiher  die    Assimilationsorgane   der  Ijeguminosen." 
Pringrsheim's  Jahrb.  f.  wiss.  Bot.  Brl.  xxx.,  1896. 


PRESIDENT'S  ADDRESS.  45 

lamina  aud  a  normal  leaf -stalk.  As  successive  leaves  are  formed,  the  leaf -stalk 
gi-aduaUy  broadens,  whilst  the  lamina  is  reduced  until  the  form  of  the  phyllodg 
is  attained,  in  some  species  foliage-leaves  may  again  appear  after  the  phyUodes, 
for  instance  in  A.  heterophylla." 

Also,  in  Vol.  ii.,  p.  355  he  adds — "The  best  examples  of  the  formation  of  phyl- 
lodes  are  to  be  found  in  a  number  of  Australian  species  of  Acacia."  It  is  usually 
said  that  in  the  phyllode  of  Acacia  the  lamina  is  entirely  wanting.  This  is  incor- 
rect, for  the  lamina  can  always  be  seen  upon  the  priniordium.  ...  In  some 
species,  for  example  A.  floribunda,  A.  melanoxylon,  and  A.  unoinata,  there  are 
transition-forms  which  show  that  the  rhachis  may  have  a  share  in  the  formation 
of  the  phyllode." 

Inadequate  material,  and  the  disregard  of  the  presence,  the  meaning,  and  the 
significance  of  the  terminal  seta,  as  in  so  many  other  cases,  are  herein  responsible 
for  the  misinterpretation  of  seedlings.  What  Goebel  calls  the  primordium  of  the 
lamina,  which  is  always  present  upon  the  phyllode,  I  should  term  the  terminal 
seta  merely,  or  sometimes,  in  the  young  or  early  euphyllodes  (but  not  in  late  ones), 
juvenile  stages  of  a  pair  of  pinnae,  always  the  apical  pair,  together  with  the  ter- 
minal seta,  at  the  apex  of  the  flattened  common  petiole.  His  suspicion  that,  in 
some  species,  the  so-called  phyUodes  are  something  more  than  flattened  leaf -stalks, 
is  interesting.  I  regret  that  I  have  not  been  able  to  make  more  use  of  Goebel's 
important  treatise.  I  have  been  unable  to  purchase  or  borrow  it;  and  there  are 
so  few  copies  in  Sydney,  that  one  can  consiilt  them  only  under  time-consuming 
conditions. 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES   i.-viii. 


KEFEEENCE    LETTERS. 


a.  i.  p.,  leafless,  thread-like  axis  of  the  terminal  pinna-^.  t.  5.,  foliaceous  ter- 
minal seta — /.  />.,    terminal  pinna — t.  s.,  terminal  seta 

Plate  i. — A.  suaveolejis    (reversion-foliage). 

Figs.  1-7  and  11  show  leaves  with  two  pairs  or  one  pair  of  good  pinnae  on  the 
•upper  part  of  the  common  petiole  or  primary  leaf -axis;  and  poorer  pinnse  with  a 
reduced  number  of  leaflets,  or  a  pair  of  leaflets  or  odd  leaflets  on  the  margin  of  the 
lower  part  of  the  flattening  leaf-axis  below  the  second  good  pair  (when  there  are 
two  pairs),  that  is,  on  the  developing  half-euphyllode  (the  flattening  on  the  upper 
side  of  the  axis  only),  or  euphyllode.  Note  the  inversely  proportional  ratio  in 
which  the   two  antagonists  are   present. 

Figs.  2  and  6  show  also  three  leaves  at  a  node,  the  two  lateral  ones  simply 
pinnate. 

Figs.  4,  7,  9,   10  show  green,  foliaceous,  terminal  setae. 

Plate  ii — A.  implexa  (?). 

Fig-   1 — An  average  complete  euphyllode. 

Fig.  2. — K  seedling  showing  the  transition  from  a  bipinnate  leaf  with  one  pair 
of  pinnae  (the  apical  pairl  to  a  complete  euphyllode  on  the  fifth  leaf.  The  fourth 
leaf  is  a  portrait  of  the  two  juvenile  antagonists — a  pair  of  pinnae  (bantam),  and 
the  leaf-axis  or  common  petiole  to  which  they  are  attached  (the  potential  heavy- 
weight, which,  after  the  tussle  is  all  over,  attains  the  dimensions  of  the  example 
shown  in  Fig-  1) . 


46  president's  address. 


Plate  iii. 


Fif.  1. — Upper  portion  of  a  leaf  of  Caesalphiia  Gilliesii  to  show  th;  terminal 
pinna  present  in  this  species.  This,  in  the  Acacias,  aborts,  and  is  represented  by 
a  remnant,  the  terminal  seta. 

Fig.  2. — Leaf  of  a  seedling  of  A.  discolor,  showing  the  basipetal.  incomplete 
developments  of  the  leaflets  of  the  middle  pair. 

Figs  3-6. — Leaves  of  Reversion-shoots  of  .,•/.  iutf<texa  (?). 

Fig.  3. — Back  view  of  a  leaf  with  what  appears  to  be  a  terminal  pinna.  The 
middle  one  and  the  one  on  the  right  constitute  the  apical  pair,  as  indicated  by  the 
presence  of  the  terminal  seta  (discernible  with  a  lens  in  the  photo>.  The  one 
on  the  left,  whose  fellow  did  not  develop,  represents  an  incomplete  second  pair 
next  below,  very  close  to   the  apical  pair  because   the  internode  did  not  lengthen. 

Fig.  4. — Leaf  with  one  pinna  of  the  second  pair  missing.  Two  alternate,  or 
perhaps  odd  pinnae  below,  represented  by  large  leaflets. 

Fig.  .5. — Leaf  with  the  apical  pair  of  pinnae  only,  and  a  terminal  pinna  repre- 
sented by  a  leafiless  thread-like  axis,  and  a  terminal  seta.  The  whole  of  the  axis 
is  more  or  less  flattened. 

Fig.  6. — Another  leaf  with  three  pairs  of  good  pinnae,  and  a  rudimentary,  leaf- 
less, terminal  pinna,  and  a  terminal  seta.  Some  flattening  of  the  axis  throughout, 
but   retarded    where  the  pinnas  are. 

Plate  iv. 

Fig.  1. — Complete  leaf  (back  view)  of  A.  Baileyaiia,  with  four  pairs  of  pinnae, 
and  a  terminal  seta,  visible  with  a  lens.     Note  the  excessively  short  petiole. 

Figs.  2. — Leaves  of  reversion-shoots  of  A.  implexa,  including  two  complete 
euphyllodes.  The  branchlet  shows  the  order  of  the  succession.  Xote  the  inversely 
proportional  ratio  in  which  the  two  antagonists  are  present — good  pinnae  on  the 
upper  part  of  the  axis:  much  flattening  on  the  lower  part,  extending  upwards,  but 
retarded  where  the  pinna  are  (especially  in  Fig.  31.  Also  the  termmal  seta  at  the 
tip  of  the  larger  phyllode :  rudimentary  pinnae  in  the  smaller  one. 

Plate  V — Leaves  of  Reversion-shoots  of  A.  iviplexa  (?). 

Figs.  1-5. — Most  interesting  stages  of  the  contest  when  the  antagonists  are  fairly 
equally  matched.  Good  pinnae  on  the  upper  part  of  the  axis:  flattening  most 
marked  on  the  lower  part,  extending  upwards,  but  retarded  where  the  pinnae  are. 
Note  the  terminal  setae,  with  some  indication  of  the  developing  pinnae  of  the  apical 
pair  in  the  youngest  euphyllodes,  and  the  terminal  seta  alone  in   the  largest  one. 

Plate  vi — Leaves  of   Reversion-shoots  of  A.  implexa  (?). 

Figs.  5-6  supplement  the  series  shown  in  Plate  v.,      and  are  fine  specimens. 

Figs.  1-3.  with  11  and  10  pairs  of  pinnae,  the  maximum  number,  as  yet  seen, 
show  the  pinnae  doing  their  very  best.  Some  of  the  lowest  pinnae  show  reduction 
in  the  number  of  leaflets.  The  lowest  pinnae  in  all  three  are  represented  by  leaflets. 
The  presence  of  so  many  pinnae  has  obviously  put  the  brake  on  the  flattening  of 
the  axes.  Note  the  short  petiole  in  Fig.  3.  and  the  terminal  seta  in  Fig.  5.  Also, 
that,  in  the  leaves  of  this  species,  the  pinnae  are  attached  to  the  midrib,  and  not 
to     the  margin,  as  in   A.  suaveoletis  (PI.    i.). 

Plate  vii. — Leaves  of  Reversion-shoots  of    A.  implexa   (?). 

Figs.  1-7.— Six  decadent  stages  of  the  waning  pinnae,  variou.sly  located,  and  a 
complete  euphyllode.  The  common  petioles  or  primary  leaf-axes  show  more  or  less 
flattening  from  base  to  apex.  TTie  distal  portion  of  No.  4  is  missing:  but  note 
the  retardation  of  the  flattening  in  the  lower  portion  of  this  and  No.  6.  where  the 
reduced  pinnae,  or  leaflets  are:  and  how  the  flattening  increases  distad  of  the 
distal  pinna  or  pair  of"  them.  Note  also  the  short  petiolar  portion  of  No.  6.  in  which 
the  two  proximal  pairs  of  pinnae  are  represented  by  leaflets. 


president's  address.  47 


Plate   viii 


Figs.  14. — Four,  developing  half-euphyllodes  of  A.  podalyriaefolia  with  two 
pairs  of  pinnae;  some  flattening  of  the  internode;  and  the  broad  flap-Uke  flattening 
of  the  axis  below  the  second  pair  of  pinnae,  with  a  loose  end,  which,  but  for  the 
presence  of  the  lower  pair  of  pinns,  would  be  joined  up  with  the  apex  by  the  fully 
flattened,  internodal  portion. 

Figs.  5-7. — One  half-phyllode,  and  one  nearly  complete,  with  one  pair  of  pinnae, 
and   a  rudimentary,   leafless,  terminal  pinna  and  terminal  seta,   of  the  same   species. 

Fig.  7.— Young  euphyllodes  of  the  same  species,  showing  the  conspicuous  ter- 
minal setae. 

Fig.  8. Three  very   young  leaves  of  A.  discolor,   showing   the  terminal    setse  of 

both  the  rhachis,  and  of  the  partial  rhachises. 

Fig.  9. — Upper  portion  of  seedling  of  A.  myrtifolia  with  the  fifth  leaf  apparently 
tripinnate.  TTie  middle  one  and  the  one  on  the  right,  with  the  terminal  seta  be- 
tween but  behind  them,  are  the  apical  pair.  The  one  on  the  left  represents  an 
incomplete  second  pair  next  below,  the  internode  not  having  lengthened. 

Fig.  10. — Upper  portion  of  a  leaf  of  A.  decurrens,  showing  the  same  sort  of 
thing,  the  middle  pinna  and  the  one  on  the  left  being  the  apical  pair.  The  rest  of 
the  leaf,   together  with  eight  pairs  of  pinnae  have  been  removed. 

Fig,  11. Upper  portion  of  a  not  mature  remarkable  leaf  of  Jacaranda   (the  rest 

of  the  leaf,  with  eleven  pairs  of  pinnae  having  been  removed!,  showing  four  pairs 
of  pinnse  towards  the  apex,  and  the  terminal  pinna,  all  represented  by  leaflets,  some 
with  serrated  edges;  and  the  pinna:  with  terminal  leaflets. 


Mr.  J.  H.  Campbell,  Hon.  Treasurer,  presented  the  balance  sheets  for  the 
year  1919,  duly  signed  by  the  Auditor,  Mr.  F.  H.  Rayment,  F.C.P.A.,  Incor- 
porated Accountant;  and  he  moved  that  it  be  received  and  adopted,  which  was 
carried  unanimously. 

No  valid  nominations  of  other  Candidates  having  been  received,  the  President 
declared  the  following  elections  for  the  ensuing  Session  to  be  duly  made : — 

president:  Mr.  J.  J.   Fletcher,  M.A.,  B.Sc. 

MEMBERS  OF  COUNCIL  (to  fill  six  vacancics)  : — Messrs.  J.  E.  Carne,  F.G.S., 
H.  J.  Carter,  B.A.,  F.E.S.,  Prof.  T.  W.  E.  David,  C.M.G.,  D.S.O.,  D.Sc, 
F.R.S.,  Prof.  W.  A.  Haswell,  M.A.,  D.Sc,  A.  H.  S.  Lucas,  M.A.,  B.Sc,  and 
J.  H.  Maiden,  I.S.O.,  F.R.S. 

auditor:  Mr.  F.  H.  Raj-ment,  F.C.P.A. 

It  was  resolved,  on  the  motion  of  Miss  S.  Hynes,  seconded  by  Mr.  A.  G. 
Hamilton,  "that  it  is  the  opinion  of  Members  of  this  Society  that  in  the  interests  of 
Science,  the  Rowan  Collection  of  paintings  should  be  retained  in  this  the  Mother 

State." 

On  the  motion  of  Mr.  A.  G.  Hamilton,  a  very  cordial  vote  of  thanks  to  the 
retiring  President,  Mr.   J.   J.   Fletcher,  was  carried  by  acclamation. 


48 


o  o 
o  o 


00 

to 


•^J<  O  CD 

05  — I  (N 


O  O  O 

o  o  o 

■  O  O  Q 

■^  o  o 
o_  o_  en 


W 

'SI 

< 


0 

o 


Si 

a 

w 
» 

CO 


0^ 


o 


CO  o 
(O  o 


w  to 


=**  25 


^  c 


OJ   ?  C 

aj  r  rt 

+J   .  • 

4)  J3 

'S  2  - 

o  "  ■ 


o 


O  O  00 

o  o  to 

o  o  o 
o  t^  to 
o" 


_5        =  O 

A        O  o 

V)        o  o 

-^'  CD 


2i^  «1 

'  3  E~  >^ 

'-'  -O  K»  " 
>  C  -1^ 
lU   ^  U 

§^  s 

°    «    3 


CJ 

■*-> 

U5    C3 


•H  a 

s  ^ 

o  e 


O  O  CO  O  O  CI 

O  iC  t^  CO  o  o 

1^  O  (M  CC  CD  t^ 

Tt<         (M  -rp  r^  Oi 

«         O  — '         CO 


<I> 

.o 

a 

^ 

5 

« 

u 

o 

Q 

cq 

O    d)  ' 

a 

c 


c 

<u  O 

as  5 

w         O 

0)    MO 


<  p. 


u< 


„  °  c  S  rt.i^ 
^  i_  m  o  4J  o 


« 


T^       •  CO  o 
">      .  O!  -si" 


CO  to 
•  (M  -- 


"  O  00 
05  O  CO 


CO  o  o 
en  CO  -- 

^         CO 


CO  o 

10  t>. 

co 


CO  0  0  Tf  0 

0  — 

c  0 

to  >0  ^  CO  ^ 

0  (M 

0-- 

10  "O  rt  CO  'O 

— '  -■ 

10  »o 

< 


T3    C 
CO 

Co    3  X 

'^^  2 

w  c  ta 

■  -  +J  -*J 

b  c  ''^ 

O      -  . 


■•fi 

o  t 

>,  c 

S  2 
a' '5 

a.  « 

C  —    t-. 

.22  .s  5 

^    ^   D. 


^ 


m 


CJ 


C 
«    3 


^      .Sex 


C 


c  „,  « 

oj  2      -^ 


^  i/i 


O'l- 


3  S)  ra  1j  J«       a  V       <u 


■T3 
C 

g 

3 

W  OS 

0 

aj-- 

^ 

"C  0 

•c 

I. 

3 

c  -^^ 

C 
a 

T3 

^•S 

C 

p^ 

0  « 
opa 

a 

►J  o 
Wffi 

oa 

Oh 

o 


•0 

3 

< 

< 

u 

CX 

3 

u 

'*3 
n 

fc 

v~ 

u 

H 

t/i 

^ 

w 

t- 

§ 

:3 

>" 

< 

c/; 

« 

p.fo 


w 


49 


H 

SS 

^ 

o 

O 

0> 

Q 

«< 

M 

X 

« 

ti! 

O 

)J 

H 

o 

u 

03 

o 

u 

<! 

o 

« 

15 

<! 

hJ 

< 

« 

— ;  o 

yj  O 


O 


< 


00  o  -^ 
CO  o  cc 

-H  to  05 
■-*  -^ 
— <         (M 


pa 


■"  S  " 


Ci3  t^  ^~* 


c 

c 

m 

p 

K 

9 

■" 

3 

!D  j:; 

U 

k- ( 

o 

>     Ul 

C  01 

^u 

c 

*H 

E" 

o  c 

W 

i  o 

g 

Ss 

u 

OJ    0) 

Q 

PShh 

« 

>!        . 

^ 

CQ     ■ 

■2 

■a 

c! 

yi  O  O  CC  O  I-»  00  I^ 


8g 

o  c 

CO 

^ 

TJ< 

v> 

oo 

oo 

t-H 

s 

!3 


■a      - 

_^  :  ft 

rt    .  " 
<v    . 

Hi 

S  ^"^ 

o    SS 

5:2-2 
<  —  - 

I  < 

a 

01 


S 


o 

O 

u 


cu 


nj  a>  01  ^  ^  nj  01 

ctj  oi  OJ  Ki;  cu  c  ra 


o 
K 

w 
m 

< 


K 


•p 


3 


3    I* 
O    U 

ft     fL, 


ffi 


■c   Bj 


3  CM 

c      2 


■a 
c 


H. 


o 


w      ',:: 


so 


0  =  0 
000 

10  to  o 

irs  i-<  CO 
o^  CD  05 


en 


H 

^ 

0 

0 

u 

2 

u 

o> 

•a! 

tH 

tT 

xn 

0 

Pu 

A 

M 

2 

» 

1 

09 

^ 

Q 

0 

-«A 

»J 

1^ 

eo 

H 

-*3 

h 

ca 

t« 

H 
H 

<! 

U 

0 

<! 

H 

S 

u 

iz; 

!z; 

1! 

<! 

1-1 

U 

< 

13 

n 

ca 


5S 


1)  .      •  c 


_;  <= 


«8 


s 


>,oo 

nl 

00 

u 
rt 

0  0 

(M  t^ 

P 

0  --' 

rt 

^ 

C/3 

w 

J 

5 


Si 


<U 


3  +j  ■»-> 

'^  o 


13   3   " 

■a  3 
Ocn 


1 


•a 


iz; 
o 

u 

u 

< 

O 
u 


m 


;  o  00  CO  o  w 


ui  o  00  — '  o  o 


o  c^  o  o  i^ 

i:*^  O  'O  ^-  O  05 

■*  O)         C^l  CO 


O     K 

n 
c«  . 
CD   o 

g  C.S 
^^   3<^ 

B  o  4)  cii  «; 

o    .    -    -    - 

H    -    -    " 


c 
o 

a 
►J 

n 
< 


S 
C 

ca 


c 
•a 
>^ 
w 


y^ 

W 

0 

0 

e 
S 

•a 
3 

(N 

W 

.    • 

•s< 

0     • 

3&. 

"C  ,  ; 

oCJ 

u      • 

p.  ft. 

Vl 

CJ 

■^H 

■C/'. 

3K 

as 

M;^ 

< 

rtf 


^^ 

3 
O 

T3 

C 

ca 


fl- 


ea 
•A 
W 


31 


ORDINARY  MONTHLY  MEETING. 

31st  MARCH,  1920. 

Mr.  J.  J.  Fleteher,  M.A..  B.Sc,  President,  in  the  Chair. 

Tlie  Donations  and  Exchanges  received  since  the  ]3revious  monthly  meeting 
(26th  Novemher.  1919),  amounting  to  40  Vols.,  480  Parts  or  Nos.,  51  Bulletins, 
18  Reports  and  15  Pamphlets,  received  from  106  Societies  and  Institutions  and  5 
l)rivate  donors,  were  laid  upon  the  table. 


52 


HOPJXESS   IN    WATTLE    BARK  INFUSIONS. 

By  R.   Greig-S-mith,  D.Sc,  Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the  Society. 

(With   Plate  ix.) 

The  development  of  i-opiness  in  tan  liquors  is  oeeasionally  met  with  and  \n-o- 
Ijably  would  be  of  more  conunon  occurrence  but  for  the  fact  that  tanners  have 
learnt  by  experience  how  to  treat  their  liquors  in  order  to  avoid  this  objectionable 
fermentation.  The  phenomenon  does  not  appear  to  have  been  examined,  or  at 
least  no  information  about  such  rojiiness  has  been  published.  Doubtless  the  rea- 
son for  this  lies  in  the  difficulty  of  isolating  an  organism,  capable  of  producing 
ropiness,  from  such  a  population  of  diverse  organisms  as  must  be  present  in  a 
fluid  with  the  history  of  tan. liquor.  But,  beyond  this  fact,  there  is  something 
about  the  subject  that  is  peculiar,  as  was  shown  before  this  investigation  was 
begun.  A  tan  li(|uor  claimed  to  be  ropy  was  sent  to  the  laboratory  and  upon 
being  examined  no  ropiness  could  be  detected.  It  was  (uiite  limpid  and,  upon 
being  tested  for  viscosity,  showed  a  water  ratio  of  1.0714  at  19°.  When  allowed 
to  flow  through  a  tine  capillary,  100  e.e.  of  the  reputed  ropy  liquor  ran  through 
in  210  seconds  as  against  196  seconds  for  distilled  water.  The  liquid  was  plated 
and  the  bacteria  examined,  but  no  ropy  organisms  could  be  detected. 

The   Isolation    of    the   Bacteria. 

On  account  of  the  diversity  of  the  tan  liquor  fliu'a  and  the  difficulty  of  ob- 
taining a  good  specimen  of  ropy  liquor  at  the  time,  the  writer  considered  that  the 
]>roblem  could  best  be  attacked  from  the  side  of  the  wattle  bark.  There  promised 
to  be  more  chance  of  obtaining  an  organism  capable  of  causing  the  ropy  fermen- 
tation of  raw  bark  infusions  than  of  isolating  a  similar  organism  from  a  ropy 
tan  liquor.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  during  some  experimental  work,  ropiness  did  de- 
velop in  a  bark  infusion  and  a  search  showed,  among  many  colonies,  one  pos- 
sessing a  ropy  consistency  upon  a  plate  of  dextrose  medium.  The  organism 
also  caused  a  fluid  medium  containing  dextrose  to  become  ropy.  It  was  reserved 
until  occasion  permitted  its  further  examination . 

Some  months  later,  it  was  decided  to  isolate  fresh  races  of  the  ropy  organism. 
FragTiients  of  wattle  bark  (Acacia  p/ionnitha)  were  jiut  into  boltles  and  covercil 
with  water  and  sometimes  with  nutrient  li(|uids.  Two  bottles  out  of  many  showed 
ropiness.  One  of  them  had  received  raw  tap  water,  the  other  boiled  tap  water 
with  0.25  %  meat-extract.  It  was  evident  that  the  bacterium  was  to  be  found 
in  the  bark  and  was  not  derived  from  an  outside  source  such  as  the  tap  water  and, 
from  the  great  number  of  bottles  that  were  prepared,  it  was  shown  that  the 
liacteria  were  not  to  be  found  on  every  bit  of  bark.  A  further  test  as  to  the 
.absence  of  the  bacteria  in  tap  water  was  made  by  filtering  a  (piantity  of  water 
and  using  the  sli'ne  that  adhered  to  the  candle  in  conjunction  with  sterilised  and 
raw  baiks.     No  ro]iiness  developed  in  either  case. 


BY    n.    GREICi-^^MITiI. 


53 


It  was  noted,  but  this  may  be  of  no  importance,  that  the  ropy  infusions  were 
slow  to  show  gi-owths  of  moukls  on  the  surface  of  the  fluids,  while  all  the  non- 
ropy  tests  soon  became  covered  with  mould.  Possibly  the  ropy  bacterium 
utilised  all  the  available  carbohydrate. 

The  ropy  fluids  in  both  of  the  positive  tests  contained  many  bacteria  capable 
of  forming  slime  on  dextrose  media,  but  only  one  of  the  numerous  forms  pro- 
duced ropy  colonies  and  the  same  organism  was  found  in  both  positive  tests.  It 
gave  a  canary-coloured,  loose,  slightly  raised  growth  on  nutrient  agar,  and  under 
the  microscope  appeared  as  a  round  yellow  colony  with  central  granules  and 
homogeneous  periphery.  The  bacterium  was  gi-own  in  bouillon  and  after  some 
time  another  bacterium  of  identical  form  but  with  different  cultural  characters 
appeared.  This  was  at  first  supposed  to  be  an  impurity  in  the  original  colony 
but  the  same  supposed  impurity  appeared  in  both  races  and  in  others  obtained 
at  a  later  date  from  bark.  The  supposed  impurity  was  subsequently  recognised 
as  a  phase  of  the  original  organism.  Al . 

The  ropy  organism  first  isolated  and  set  aside  for  future  examination  will  be 
referred  to  as  B.,  the  most  active  phase  of  which  is  P>2.  The  organism  isolated 
later  and  obtained  several  times  from  wattle-bark  will  be  called  A.  Both  bacteria 
exist  in  phases  best  recognised  by  the  appearance  of  the  colonies  growing  on  the 
surface  of  nutrient  agar.  There  is  the  primary  phase,  such  as  Al,  a  weak  rope- 
produeer,  which  can  be  altered  into  the  strong  rope-producer,  A2 .  The  change  of 
phase  is  not  abrupt  and  transition  phases  are  met  with.  Some  of  these,  generally 
yellow  in  colour  by  transmitted  light,  are  closer  related  to  Al,  others,  grey  or 
smoky,  are  nearer  akin  to  A2.  The  phase  Bl  was  occasionally  noted  but,  as  com- 
pared with  A2.  B2  is  remarkably  stable. 

The  ropy  bacterium,  mixed  i)ossibly  with  the  altered  phase,  readily  developed 
ropiness  in  nutritive  solutions  containing  dextrose,  but  did  not  have  any  apparent 
acti(m  upon  a  sterilised  infusion  of  wattle  bark.  In  case  the  infusion  had  been 
altered  by  the  sterilisation  and  become  unsuitable  tor  tlie  development  of  the  ropy 
substance,  the  bacteria  were  grown  in  pasteurised  infusion,  then  in  infusion 
stei-ilised  by  filtration  through  porcelain  and  finally  in  raw  infusion,  but  in  none 
of  these  was  there  any  trace  of  ropiness.  This  was  rather  aggTavating  but  cjuite 
in  keeping  with  certain  earlier  attempts  to  transfer  the  ropiness  of  the  original 
infusion  to  bottles  containing  healthy  infusions.  Unless  a  mass  infection  were 
made,  the  ropine-ss  could  not  be  transferred,  and  one  had  the  suspicion  that  the 
ropy  substance  had  not  increased,  but  had  simply  become  more  diffuse. 

The  explanation  of  the  apparent  anomaly  was  found  after  it  had  been  shown 
that  the  slime  or  ropy  material  was  coagulated  by  tannic  acid.  It  follows  from 
this  observation  that  in  the  original  case  the  ropiness  had  developed  liefore  much 
tannin  had  passed  into  the  water,  otlierwise  the  slime  ])roduced  by  the  bacteria 
would  have  been  coagiilated  upon  the  bodies  of  the  bacteria,  and  would  have  pie- 
vented  them  becoming  distributed  in  the  bulk  of  the  liquid.  To  prove  the  rea- 
soning, wattle  bark,  sterilised  at  130°.  was  covered  with  water,  seeded  with  the 
bacterium,  B2,  and  incubated  at  28°.  In  sixteen  hours  a  ropy  infusion  was  ob- 
tained.     A  repetition  gave  the  same  result. 

So  far  we  have  arrived  at  the  stage  that  ropiness  is  developed  in  weak  in- 
fusions of  bark  substance  and  not  in  strong,  and  it  remained  to  determine  the 
amount  of  tannin  wliich  would  permit  or  prohibit  the  production  of  slime. 

On  account  of  the  inability  to  obtain  a  pure  tannin,  tannic  acid  was  employed 
in  the   experimental    wdik    with  s^Tithetic   media.     TVattle    bark  infusion    contains 


54  ROPINESS    IN    WATTLE    BARK    INFUSIONS 

tanuiu  with  certain  nutritive  substances.  These  consist  partlj-  of  salts,  partly  of 
nitrogenous  bodies,  probably  amido-aeitls  akin  to  asparagin  and  pai-tly  of  sugar. 
The  latter  is  either  free  or  so  loosely  combined  with  the  glucosidal  tannin  as  to 
be  readily  fermentable  by  yeasts  or  by  B.  eoli  communis. 

A  saline  solution  containing  2  <"<-  dextrose,  0.2  %  asparagin  and  mixed  salts 
was  treated  with  increasing  quantities  of  tannic  acid  and  portions  were  seeded 
with  the  phase  B2.  The  portion  with  5  %  of  tannic  acid  showed  a  gi-owth  of 
bacteria  but  there  was  no  evidence  of  ropiness.  The  portions  with  2  %  and  less 
were  ropy  in  16  hours.  Twenty-five  days  afterwards,  the  portion  with  1  %  was 
ropy,  the  others  were  not  and  contained  fiocculent  sediments.  This  experiment 
mdi'-ated  tliat  the  organism  could  develo)i  ropiness  in  fluids  containnig  dextrose 
and  up  to  2  %  of  tannic  acid.  This  amount  seemed  to  be  the  limit,  as  in  coui-se 
of  time  it  slowly  coagulated  the  ropy  substance. 

Experiments  with  Infusions  of  Bark. 

An  infusion  of  wattle  bark  was  sterilised  by  filtration  through  porcelain.  It 
had  a  Sp.G.  of  1.026  at  22°  which  is  roughly  equivalent  to  5%  of  tannin. 
Portions  of  this  infusion  were  diluted  and  seeded  with  bacterium  A.  subsequently 
tound  to  be  a  mixture  of  Al  and  A2.  Ropiness  appeared  in  16  houi-s  with  the 
quarter  streng-th  while  the  half  strength  was  unaltered .  An  extension  of  this  ex- 
periment with  more  graduated  strengths  was  made  with  the  results  as  shown  in 
the  table. 

Table  i. — "Diluted  Infusion  of  Bark. 


Days  at  28" 


3 


Bark  infusion,  diluted.    Sp.  G.,  1.026. 


10  to  ion 

1.5  tc  100 

20  to  100 

2.5  to  ion 

;io  to  100 

35  to  100 


s 

s 

o 

0 

- 

- 

s 

0 

- 

+ 

+ 

o 

0 

s 

+ 

0 

0 

s 

^ 

o 

0 

« 

+ 

o 

•In  this  and  subsequent  tables,  "S"  indicates  a  slight  ropiness,  the 
Huiil  t^ivint;  threads  varying  from  oue-sixti'eutli  to  one-eighth  of  an 
inch  in  length.  "4-"  indicates  tlireads  of  one  quarter  of  an  inch  or 
longer.  ■•O"  means  no  apparent  ropiness  and.  in  some  cases,  no 
groivth. 

The  small  amount  of  ropiness  obtained  with  water  containing  10  ^'c  of  the 
infusion  may  have  been  due  to  ihe  paucity  of  nutrients  and  the  slower  appear- 
ance of  the  ropiness  with  25  <"(  and  over  was  possibly  caused  by  the  retarding 
action  of  the  tannin  which  appeared  to  hfive  coagulated  the  ropy  material  liy  the 
6th  day.  The  disappearance  of  the  ropiness  may  not  iiave  been  entirely  due  to 
the  coagulation  of  the  ropy  substance,  for  other  experin.ents  with  acids  and  with 
salts,  wliich  will  be  descrit)cd  later,  gave  indications  of  a  digestion  or  solution 
taiing  place. 

Some  time  afterwards,  eighty  days  to  be  exact,  the  filtered  extract  which  luid 
thrown   a   deposit    was   dihilid    with   water   in   the   proportion   of  three   parts   of 


BY  R.   GEEIG-SMITH.  55 

extract  to  seventeen  oi  water,  thus  briugmg  the  original  approximately  5  %  of 
tannin  down  to  about  |  %.  The  solution  was  divided  into  three  sets,  each  set 
containing  a  control  and  two  other  portions,  one  with  0.2  %  and  one  with  0.4  % 
of  calcium  lactate.  The  sets  were  seeded  with  phases  Al,  A2  and  B2.  Phase  Al 
did  not  become  ropy.  Phase  B2  developed  ropmess  in  the  control  only,  while 
phase  A2  showed  ropiness  in  all  tests .  In  these,  the  ropiness  did  not  appear  until 
the  third  day  at  28°  and  it  had  disappeared  by  the  sixth,  giving  place  to  cob- 
webby growths  consisting  of  bacteria  emmeshed  in  coagulated  slime.  The  ex- 
periment showed  that  ropiness  may  develop  in  dilutions  of  old  extract  of  wattle- 
bark  and  that  it  soon  disappears.  It  also  seemed  to  sliow  that  calcium  lactate,  a 
substance  probably  occurring  in  old  tan  liquors,  has  little  or  no  influence  in  as- 
sisting the  ropy  fermentation. 

During  the  investigation  the  bacteria  were  tested  to  see  if  they  retained  the 
power  of  making  infusions  of  wattle  bark  ropy.  Their-  physiological  activities 
were  being  tested  in  sj'nthetic  solutions,  and  in  these  the  characteristic  ropiness 
was  being  produced,  but  it  -vras  considered  advisable  to  prove  that  this  also  hap- 
]iened  in  bark  infusions.  Thirty  gram  portions  of  raw  bark  were  put  into  sterile 
4-oiince  bottles  and  50  e.c.  portions  of  sterile  water  were  added.  The  water 
just  covered  the  bark.  The  liquids  were  seeded  with  the  bacteria  and  incubated 
at  28°.  Upon  the  first  occasion  of  this  routine  testing,  phase  Al  produced  the 
characteristic  ropiness  in  a  day  and  phases  B2  and  A2  in  two  days. 

Twelve  days  later  the  test  was  repeated.  Phases  B2  and  A2a  developed  the 
ropiness  in  two  days,  a  duplicate  race  of  B2  in  three  days.  By  the  fourth  day, 
phase  A2  had  developed  ropiness.  Phase  Al,  which  had  given  a  positive  result 
twelve  days  before,  was  negative. 

Other  tests  made  from  time  to  time  showed,  like  the  above,  a  certain  varia- 
bility in  the  activity  of  the  phases.  Tliis  was  to  be  expected,  for  a  stock  culture 
could  not  be  kept  on  account  of  the  alteration .  of  one  phase  into  another.  The 
bacteria  were  carried  over  from  colony  to  colony,  that  is,  plates  were  smeared 
every  few  days  and  from  these,  colonies  were  picked  out  and  seeded  into  bouillon. 
It  was  only  by  proceeding  in  this  way  that  the  phases  Al  and  A2  could  be  main- 
tained in  a  pure  state. 

When  infected  bark  is  covered  with  water  and  allowed  to  stand,  the  bacteria 
gr-ow  and  produce  the  ropy  substance,  while  the  solution  increases  in  strength. 
The  bacteria  apparently  grow  in  clumps  of  slime,  that  is  to. say,  they  form  a 
coherent  sHrne  and  remain  imbedded  in  this  slimey  environment.  This  is  demon- 
strated when  the  bacteria  are  gTown  in  saccharine  nutrient  solutions  containing 
chalk ;  the  blobs  of  cohesive  slime  can  be  seen  upon  rotating  the  flask,  and  they  are 
meapable  of  being  broken  up  by  the  rotation  of  the  flask.  Once  the  blob  of 
slime  around  the  bacteria  is  admitted,  it  becomes  a  matter  of  question  as  to  the 
diffusive  speed  of  the  tannins  and  non-tannins  through  the  slimes,  just  as  it  is 
a  question  about  the  diffusive  speed  of  the  non-tannins  and  tannins  from  the  bark. 

If  in  making  an  extract,  the  non-tannins,  which  we  will  presume  are  chiefly 
bacterial  nutrients  are  the  first  to  diffuse,  or  preponderate  in  the  initial  diffusion, 
the  bacteria  will  grow  and,  in  doing  so,  form  a  protective  slime  envelope  which 
may  be  protective  until  the  tannins  become  sufficiently  concentrated  to  coagulate 
it.  Such  a  coagulation  occurs  experimentally  in  dilute  infusions  of  bark,  but  it 
has  not  been  observed  to  occur  in  cases  where  the  bark  has  been  covered  with 
water,  and  the  infusion  allowed  to  remain  in  contact  with  the  bark. 

In  an  endeavour  to  throw  some  light  upon  this  matter,  portions  of  raw  bark 
were  treated  with  water  in  the  ratio  of  three  of  bark  to  five  of  water,  and  after 


56  ROPINESS    IX    WATTLE    BARK    INFUSIONS 

contact  for  varying  times,  the  infusions  were  filtered.  Tlie  following  were  the 
Specific  Gravities  of  the  extracts : — 15  minutes,  1.010 ;  30  minutes,  1.013 ;  1  hour, 
1.016;  2  hours,  1.020;  3  hours,  1.024;  4  hours,  1.027;  5  hours,  1.029;  1  day, 
1.048;  3  days,  1.052.  The  infusions  were  portioned  into  tubes  and  seeded  with 
phases  of  the  bacteria. 

Phase  Al:  no  ropiness  in  any  of  the  extracts. 
A2:  ropiness  in  all  up  to  three  hours. 
B2:  ropiness  in  all  up  to  24  hours. 

The  experiment  was  repeated  with  new  extracts  i\\>  to  ti\e  hours. 
Phase  Al :  no  ro]>iness  in  any  of  the  extracts . 
A2 :   ropiness  in  al!  extracts. 
B2 :   ropiness  in  all  extracts . 

From  the  earlier  tests  with  bark  extract,  it  appeared  pi'obable  that  tannin 
when  present  in  excess  will  prohibit  the  formation  of  the  ropy  substance.  But 
we  are  in  doubt  as  to  just  hnw  much  will  constitute  an  excess.  Tannic  acid 
seemed  to  act  differently  t'nnn  tlie  tannin  in  bark  extract,  and  it  is  possil)le  that 
ropiness  occui's  when  there  is  a  balance  between  the  tannins  and  non-tannins  of 
the  extracts.  Several  experiments  were  made  with  the  idea  of  feeling  the  way 
in  this  direction. 

A  quantity  of  bark  was  infused  for  two  days  at  28°  with  twice  the  weight  of 
water.  The  infusion  had  a  Sp.  G.  of  1.053.  Portions  were  seeded  with  the 
various  phases  of  the  bacteria  and  in  no  case  was  ropiness  obtained.  The  extract 
was  probably  too  rich  in  tannin  to  permit  the  formation  of  the  slime.  It  was 
then  jn'ogressively  diluted  down  to  one-tenth  the  strength  and  seeded  with  phases 
A2  and  B2.  No  ropiness  became  apparent.  Bearing  in  mind  the  earlier  ex- 
periment with  the  tamed  infusions  of  bark,  in  which  the  live  hours'  infusion  having 
a  Sp.  G.  of  1.029  became  ropy,  it  seems  that  this  longer  infusion,  after  dilution 
to  an  approximate  Sp.  G.  of  1,005,  failed  to  produce  ropiness  because  the  tan- 
nins overwhelmed  tlie  activity  of  the  nutrients. 

In  another  experiment  bark  was  treated  for  two  hours  with  twice  its  weight 
of  water  and  filtered.  A  i|uantity  of  water  equal  to  that  removed  was  added 
to  the  residual  bark  and  allowed  to  remain  in  contact  for  22  hours.  The  tivo 
infusions  were  callei 
of  solids  and  0.232 

The  two  infusions  were  mixed  in  descending  and  ascending  proportions  from  5 
to  0  and  from  0  to  5  and  seeded  with  A2  and  B2.  The  tests  witli  B2  did  not 
become  ropy. 

Table  ii. — Medium  and  Stronu-  Infusion  of  Hark. 


Phase 

A2 

Days 

at  28" 

1 

2 

3 

"A" 

1              ( 

•B" 

0 

+ 

5 

0 

+ 

4 

1 

o 

— 

s 

:i 

'J 

o 

S 

s 

'f 

:i 

o 

s 

0 

1 

4 

0 

0 

0 

0 

5 

0 

0 

0 

BY    R.    GREIG-SMITH. 


57 


The  experiment  seems  to  indicate  that  as  the  water  lies  in  contact  witii  the 
bark,  tlie  nutrients  and  tannins  diffuse  out  and  the  proportion  of  these  is  such 
that  ropiuess  can  develop.  But  after  a  time,  the  tannins  begin  to  preponderate 
and  the  development  of  ropiness  is  prevented . 

Infusion  "A"  was  treated  with  increasing  amounts  of  tannic  acid  and  seeded 
with  A2.  Ropiness  developed  in  the  ccatrol,  but  not  in  the  portions  containing 
_0 . 5   %  and  over . 

The  Change  in  Reaction. 

During  the  growth  in  synthetic  media,  the  bacteria  prc.duce  a  small  but 
definite  amount  of  acid  from  the  sugar.  In  the  presence  of  gljcerine  the  medium 
may  remain  unaltered  or  it  may  become  less  acid.  For  example,  a  ropy  dextrose 
fluid  showed  -4-3.4°  while  the  control  was  -(-1.7°.  A  bulk  culture  with  glycerine 
had  at  the  start  -\-2°  to  methyl  red,  -f5.5°  to  litmus  and  -(-8.5  to  phenolphth- 
alein .  On  the  6th  and  12th  days,  when  ([uite  ropy,  the  same  respective  acidities 
were  determinl-d .  This  however  is  unusual,  for  in  other  cases  the  glycerine  me- 
dium became  alkaline,  as  will  be  seen  in  some  experiments  given  in  the  pages 
that  follow. 

The  effect  of  varying  the  original  acidity  upon  the  development  of  ropiness 
was  tested  in  a  few  expei'iuients. 

A  fluid  containing  glycerine,  meat  extract  and  salts  was  divided  into  50  c.e. 
portions,  and  these  were  given  progressive  quantities  of  phosphoric  acid  before 
being  seeded  with  the  bacterium  A  which  was  probably  a  mixture  of  the  phases 
Al  and  A2.  Ropiness  appeared  on  the  fourth  day  at  28°  in  the  portions  con- 
taining originally  an  acidity  of  from  -3°  to  methyl-red  (=-(-2.5°  to  phenolphth- 
alein)  to  -(-6°  (=11.5°)  but  not  in  those  containing  -(-16°  (=21. f°)  and  over. 
The  conditions  were  unchanged  on  the  sixth  day. 

A  similar  test  was  made  with  dextrose  in  place  of  glycerine .  After  sterilisa- 
tion the  fluid  showed  -9°  to  methyl-red  and  -[-6°  to  phenolphthalein .  The  por- 
tions were  acidified  progressively  and  seeded  with  the  mixed  phases,  Al  and  A2. 

Table  iii.  -Dextrose  with  increasing  acidity. 


Phase 

K1  + 

A2 

Days  at  28° 

1 

2 

.3 

4 

7 

Acidity  to  methyl-ved 

H- 

+ 

S 

-1°  and  under 

0 

0 

-fl°               

0 

-(- 

+ 

4- 

O 

+5°                

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

s 

-f-8°                

0 

-f 

+ 

4- 

4- 

4-12°             

J- 

4- 

4- 

+ 

0 

4-15°  and  over 


flocciiles 


Portions  in  which  the  phosphoric  acid  was  replaced  by  sulphuric  and  hydro- 
chloric acids  gave  similar  results. 

The  experiment  shows  that  there  is  a  certain  range  of  original  acidity  from 
about  -(-5°  to  -(-12°  as'  shown  by  methyl-red  which  conditions  a  rapid  production 


58 


ROPINESS    IN    WATTLE    BARK    IXFVSIONS 


of  ropiness.  When  tbe  acidity  is  greater  the  ropy  material  assumes  the  tloeculent 
condition.  In  most  cases  the  ropiness  was  evanescent  and  soon  disappeared,  a 
circumstance  which  was  subsequently  traced  to  the  presence  of  the  phase  Al. 
The  acidity  in  the  presence  of  dextrose  probably  increased,  for  the  portions  with 
-f-15°  of  original  acidity  showed  -(-20°  at  the  end  of  the  experiment. 

Another  test  was  made  with  glycerine,  using  0.5  %  of  the  hydrated  phosphate 
of  soda  instead  of  the  usual  mixture  of  salts.  The  medium  as  prepared  was 
neutral  to  methyl-red  and  portions  were  acidified  with  jiliosjihoric  acid. 

Table  iv. — Glycerine  with  increasing  acidity. 


Phase 

Al 

A2 

Acidity  to  methyl-red 

Days  at  28° 

2 

4 

11 

2 

i 

11 

17 

Acidity  to  methyl-red 

o 

1 

, 

+ 

+ 

-f5=           

+3° 

+7.5°        

s 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

— 

—  10°         

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

T-5° 

-1-12.5°      

+ 

+ 

+ 

-X- 

- 

- 

— 

+  15°          

0 

s 

+ 

+ 

+ 

-r 

— 

+20°         

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

s 

+ 

+7° 

On  the  eighth  day  the  portions  infected  with  phase  Al  showed,  in  the  case 
of  the  12.5°  and  of  the  15°,  the  presence  of  transition  forms.  The  original 
acidity  decreased  as  time  went  on;  on  the  seventeenth  day,  the  test  with  an 
original  acidity  of  -|-5°  had  become  +3°.  -|-1()°  had  become  -|-5°.  and  -|-2n°  had 
become  -\-7°  to  methyl-red. 

The  original  acidity  of  a  glycerine  medium  does  not  seem  to  liave  much  in- 
fluence upon  the  production  of  ropiness,  but  this  may  be  explained  by  the  fact 
that  the  acidity  is  reduced  during  the  growth  of  the  organism. 

The  acidity  of  spent  tan  liquors  seems  to  vary  from  -|-12.5°  to  -(-20°  by 
Proctei''s  lime  water  test,  and  one  which  was  tested  showed  -|-10.4°  by  this  test 
and  -(-5°  by  methyl-red.  So  far  as  mere  acidity  is  concerned,  the  organism 
should  produce  ropiness  in  such  an  end-liquor,  but  when  tested  it  did  not  do  so. 

The  Disappearance  of  Ropiness. 

The  disappearance  of  the  ropiness  in  cultun'  fluids  was  noted  first  in  the 
case  of  B2  when  growing  in  a  medium  containing  saccliarose  2^r.  meat  extract 
0.5  %  and  mixed 'salts  (KH.l'O^,  0.2  %:  MgSO+  Aq.  0.1  %;  CaCIo,  0.02  %) 
made  neutral  to  methyl-red.  The  fluid  was  ropy  on  the  fourth  day  at  28°  and 
quite  limpid  on  the  6th  when  the  acidity  had  risen  to  -)-8° .  Again  the  experiment 
with  varying  amounts  of  acid  noted  on  p.  57  showed  a  solution  or  digestion  of  the 
ropy  material  in  the  case  of  A.  a  mixture  of  Al  and  A2. 

The  speed  in  the  digestion  of  the  ropy  substance  was  tested  up(in  several  oc- 
casions by  growing  tlie  phases  of  the  bacteria  in  medium  containing  2  ''c  of 
dextrose  witli  meat  extract  and  mixed  salts  at  28°.  The  bacterial  phases  had 
been   picked   fi-om   agar   plates   and   were   typical,   that    ij   to   say,   they  were   the 


PV   R.   (iREIG-SlIITH.  59 

pliases  known  as  Al,  A2  and  A2a.  From  the  plates  they  were  seeded  into 
nutrient  broth  and  transfers  were  made  daily.  In  tliis  medium  they  doubtless 
altered  in  the  one  direction  or  the  other,  but  the  change  was  very  much  slower 
tlian  when  a  sugar  or  glycerine  was  present.  The  first  test  with  the  dextrose 
medium  was  made  one  day  after  isolation  from  the  plate,  and  during  the  growth 
the  medium  became  ropy  and  then,  after  an  inter\al,  the  ropiness  disappeared 
and  the  liquid  became  limpid. 

Al  became  lini|)icl  mi  the  3rd  day. 
A2  15th  day. 

A2a  2()th  day. 

The  second  test  was  made  six  days  after  the  isolation  of  the  phase. 
Al  became  limpid  on  the  3rd  day. 
A2  20th  day. 

A2a  was  still  ropy  on  the  26th  day. 
The  tliii'd  test  was  made  thirteen  days  after  the  isolation. 
Al  Ijecame  limjiid  on  the  6th  day. 
A2  was  limpid  on  the  22nd  day. 
A2a  was  still  ropy  on  the  22nd  day. 
Al  -\-  A2  was  limpid  on  the  8th  day. 
Al  -)-  A2a  was  limpid  on  the  8th  day. 
In  this  test  the  purity  of  the  phases  was  examined  in  a  few  eases.      On  the 
12th  day,  Al  contained  a  few  pure  typical  colonies,  and  on  the  19th  day  no  bac- 
teria were  found  in  a  large  loop  of  the  culture.     The  digestion  of  the  slime  is 
apparently  a  prelude  to  the  disintegration  or  death  of  the  bacteria.     On  the  12th 
day  both  A2  and  A2a  contained  bacteria  which  grew  as  colonies  ■^ith  the  tint  of 
Al  but  much  more  granular;    the    granular   lumps    radiated   to    the    margin    and 
became  larger  as  they  appi'oached  the  edge.      This  was  the  transition  stage  be- 
tween phase  Al  and  A2.      On  the  same  day,  large  loops  taken  from  the  mixed 
growths  of  Al  with  A2  and  A2a  were  found  to  l)e  sterile.      Phase  A2  consisted 
of  Al  with  a  few  of  A2. 

Other  instances  of  the  solution  of  tlie  ropy  material  will  bo  seen  in  the  ex- 
periments dealing  with  the  saline  and  carbonaceous  nutrients. 

The  phase  A2a  gives  a  more  ropy  colony  on  nutrient  agar  than  A2  which 
is  somewhat  gelatinous  and  is  not  so  elastic  when  touched  with  the  needle.  It  is, 
however,  difficult  to  discriminate  between  the  two  as,  when  free  to  grow,  the 
phase  A2  often  preponderates.  That  is  to  say,  a  plate  when  smeared  with  a 
reputed  culture  of  either  A2  or  A2a  may  show  a  preponderance  of  A2a  in  the 
comparatively  thickly  sown  parts  and  A2  in  the  areas  with  few  colonies.  At 
times,  the  two  phases  seemed  to  be  I'emarkably  consistent  in  remaining  true  to 
phase.  In  the  majority  of  the  experiments,  A2a,  has  been  classified  under  the 
phaSe  A2  foi<  the  sake  of  simplicity  but  where  both  A2  and  A2a  have  been 
simultaneously  tested,  the  original  designations  have  been  retained  to  indicate  a 
duplicate  test. 

The  earlier  observations  led  to  the  belief  that  the  disappearance  might  result 
from  the  formation  of  acid  from  the  sugar  but  this  was  negatived  by  an  experi- 
ment made  with  tlie  idea  of  determinhig  the  nature  of  the  acids  formed  in  the 
presence  of  sugar.  The  medium  contained  dextrose,  meat-extract,  potassium 
chloride  and  chalk;  it  was  seeded  w^th  a  mixture  of  Al  and  A2  then  known  as 
Bact.  A.  The  liquid  never  became  acid  and  the  particles  of  chalk  were  freely 
suspended  when  the  fla.sk  was  rotated.     It  was  first  incubated  at  37°,   at  which 


(iO  ROPINESS    IX    WATTLK    HARK    IXFUSIONS 

temperature  uo  ropiness  developeil.  Then  the  fiask  was  trausf erred  to  au  iu- 
cubator  at  28°  and  the  culture  became  strongly  ropy,  the  brownish  ropy  blobs, 
one  (it  which  was  about  two  inches  iu  diameter,  were  clearly  shown  against  the 
milky  chalk  suspension.  The  flask  was  returned  to  the  incubator  at  37°  when 
the  ropiness  disappeared.  Once  more  the  ropiness  appeared  at  "28°.  These  ob- 
servations clearly  show  that  a  digestion  of  the  ropy  substance  occurs  at  37°  in  a 
neutral  solution.  An  acid  reaction  of  the  medium  is  not  essential  for  the  diges- 
tion of  the  slime  but  it  is  possible  that  it  may  assist. 

That  the  temperature  has  mucli  to  do  with  the  speed  of  the  digestion  of  tlie 
slime  was  shown  in  a  test  in  whicii  jihase  Al  was  grown  at  22°  and  at  28°. 
Both  were  ropy  on  the  second  day.  the  28°  test  was  limpid  on  the  5th  and  the  22° 
test  on  the  8th  day. 

The  experiment  with  chalk  suggested  the  secretion  of  a  slime-dissolving  enzyme 
by  the  i>hase  Al.  Prolmbly  this  is  so  but  when  experiments  were  made  in  which 
old  fluid  cultures  of  Al  were  added  to  lumps  of  the  purified  gelatinous  slime  of 
A2  in  presence  of  an  antiseptic,  no  solution  of  the  slime  was  ol)tained. 

It  became  evident  that  phase  Al  was  capable  of  forming  and  eventually 
digesting  the  ropy  substance.  It  also  rapidly  dies  out  and  it  may  be  noted  in 
this  connection  that  it  jn-oduces  a  more  rapid  liquefaction  of  gelatine.  If  the 
A2  phase  is  used  originally,  the  ropy  substance  may  j)ersist,  while  if  a  mixture 
of  the  phases  is  initially  present,  digestion  occurs,  but  at  a  later  period  than  in 
the  case  of  the  pure  Al  phase.  It  seemed  to  be  entirely  a  question  of  the  rela- 
tive numbers  of  the  two  phases  during  the  period  of  bacterial  growth.  Instances 
of  the  autodigestion  of  the  ropy  material  will  be  found  in  tlic  exiiciiments  with 
the  various  svfgars  and  salts. 

Change  uf  Phase. 

These  observations  led  to  testing  the  reversion  or  alteration  of  the  pha,ses. 
It  had  been  noted  that  glycerine  favoured  the  production  of  ropiness  from  phase 
Al  and  that  dextrose  did  not  or,  if  it  did,  the  ropy  fluid  subsequently  became 
limpid.  This  was  confirmed  in  experiments  subsequently  recorded  with  sugars, 
etc.,  where  i-opiness  slowly  developed  and  persisted  in  the  presence  of  glycerine 
but  did  not  persist  when  other  sources  of  carbon  were  used. 

-V  specific  test  was  made  with  cultures  of  the  phases  Al  and  A2  taken  from 
]iuic  colonies  and  grown  in  broth  for  one  day  before  being  seeded  into  tlie  test 
bottles.  Phase  Al  was  .sown  in  a  fluid  containing  glycerine,  meat-extract  and 
sodimu  phosphate  while  phase  A2  was  grown  in  dextrose  with  mixed  salts  as  on 
p.  .58.  Rotli  tests  were  ropy  on  the  third  day,  and  on  tile  thirteentli  day,  phase 
Al  in  the  glycerine  was  quite  ropy,  while  phase  A2  in  the  dextrose  was  limpid. 
Plates  were  piepared  on  the  thirteentli  day  and  these  showed  that  piiase  Al  con- 
sisted of  a  mixture  of  typical  colonies  of  phases  Al  and  A2,  and  that  iiha.se  A2 
hail  licen  altered  into  more  or  less  vacuolated  colonics  of  phase  Al  . 

The  experiment  conclusively  slmwed  that  the  phases  were  reversil)h'. 

The  Action   uf    I'lnniic  Acid. 

The  bacterium  B2  was  peculiar  in  giving  iiroiKJunced  riqiy  solutions  when 
seeded  into  infusions  of  wattle  l)ark  of  increasing  strength  and  little  ropiness  in 
synthetic  liiiiiids.  The  reason  for  this  could  only  he  explained  liy  testing  tlie 
various  nutrients  in  tlie  presence  of  the  nearest  approach  to  the  tannins  avail- 
able.  niiiMch    laiiriic  acid.     It    imiv   lie   that   the  tannins   in   wattle  bark  infusions 


BV    R.    GREIG-SIIITH.  61 

behave  dili'ereatly  to  commercial  tannic  acid  and  this  should  be  kept  in  mind 
when  interpreting:  the  results  obtained  in  testing  the  commercial  acid. 

A  solution  of  dextrose,  meat  extract  and  mixed  salts  was  prepared,  and  to 
portions  quantities  of  tannic  acid  rising  from  zero  up  to  0.6  %  were  added 
before  the  addition  of  B'2.  That  with  0.1  <'f  gave  a  faint  ropiness  and  those 
with  0.2  %  to  0.5  Sc  contained  slimey  striug-s.  There  was  no  pronounced  ropi- 
ness in  any  of  them. 

As  meat  extract  forms  a  precipitate  with  tannic  acid,  it  was  replaced  by 
asparagin.  In  this  solution,  B2  produced  ropiness  in  the  presence  of  0.1  % 
and  0.2  %  of  tannic  acid.  The  control  test  and  those  with  quantities  greater 
than  0.2  %  ga\e  a  good  growth  of  bacteria  but  no  slime. 

The  experiment  was  repeated  with  a  slightly  greater  percentage  of  asparagin 
(0.2  %)  and  dextrose  (3  %)  with  mixed  salts.  Phase  A2  gave  ropy  liquids 
with  the  control  and  0.1  %  of  tannic  acid,  but  not  with  larger  quantities.  Phase 
B2  only  produced  feebly  gelatinous  surface  ring's  with  quantities  of  tannic  acid 
up  to  0.2  Si:- 

A  medium  containing  levulose,  3  %,  asparagin,  U.2  r^  and  potassium  citrate, 
0.1  %,  was  prepared  and  .seeded  with  phases  A2  and  B2.  The  former  was  a  very 
active  sUme  producer  when  used  and  produced  ropiness  in  the  presence  of  quan- 
tities of  tannic  acid  up  to  0.5%  and  a  slight  ropiness  with  1  %.  Phase  B2 
gave  an  evanescent  ropiness  in  the  flask  containing  0.5  per  cent  only,  and  not  in 
any  of  the  others. 

The  influence  of  the  original  acidity  of  the  medium  was  tested  by  means  of 
a  solution  containing  dextrose,  asparagin  and  mixed  salts.  One  set  had  an 
acidity  to  phenulphthaleiu  of  -|-17°,  another  was  neutralised  until  the  acidity  was 
-|-2.5°.  Both  were  seeded  with  phase  B2.  That  with  -(-17'-  gave  no  ropiness 
in  the  control,  a  slight  ropiness  with  1  %  of  tannic  acid  and  a  distinct  ropiness 
with  0.2  % ;  larger  amounts  were  negative.  With  -|-2.5°,  ropiness  developed  in 
the  control  test  only.  Thus  the  production  of  ropiness  was  irregular.  Phase  B2 
gave  ropiness  in  the  control  with  -(-2.5°  and  not  with  -[-17°;  with  -(-17''  and  a 
small  cjuantity  of  tannic  acid  it  produced  a  ropy  fluid. 

In  these  experiments  with  tannic  acid,  either  dextrose  or  levulose  had  been 
used  and  with  them  a  certain  irregularity  of  effect  had  been  obtained.  It  was 
therefore  deemed  advisable  to  test  the  effect  of  other  sources  of  carbon.  As  will 
be  seen  later,  the  experiment  with  nitrogenous  nutrients  seemed  to  indicate  that  a 
maximum  amount  of  ropy  substance  would  be  formed  in  the  presence  of  asparagin 
or  ammonium  sulphate.  Similarly,  the  saline  experiments  indicated  that  sodium 
succinate  was  a  favourable  salt.  Accordingly,  media  were  prepared  containing 
asparagin  or  ammonium  sulphate  0.25  %,  sodium  succinate  0.2  %  and  a  source 
of  carbon  2  %.  Tannic  acid  to  the  extent  of  0.5  %  was  added  to  each  flask  after 
infection,  by  which  procedure  a  coagulation  of  the  infecting  droplet  was  avoided. 
When  a  drop  of  infected  bouillon,  is  added  to  a  solution  of  tannic  acid,  the  drop 
is  coagulated  and  the  contained  bacteria  are  probably  prevented  from  being  dis- 
persed freely  in  the  liquid.  It  is  possible  that  much  of  the  irregularity  in  the 
previous  experiments  may  have  been  due  to  this  imprisonment  of  the  bacteria. 

The  gToups  of  flasks  were  seeded  with  A2  and  B2.  Another  group  was 
seeded  with  Bl  but  as  a  plate,  smeared  at  the  time  of  infection  showed  that  the 
phase  had  become  altered  to  B2,  the  group  became  a  duplicate  of  B2.  Phase  B2 
was  pure,  while  A2  at  the  time  of  seeding  contained  90  %  of  A2  and  10  %  of  Al. 


62 


ROPINESS    IN    WATTLE    BARK    IXPUSIONS 

Table  v. — Sugars,  etc.  with  0-5%  Tannic  Acid. 


Phase 


A2 


B2 


Source  of  Nitrogen         Asparagin 


Ammonium 
Sulphate 


Asparagin 


Ammonium 
Sulphate 


Days  at  28° 


6  i  10 


6     10 


6     10 


6     10 


1.  Dextrose 

2.  Levulose 

3.  Saccharose 

4.  Maltose 
o.  Galactose 

6.  Raifinose 

7.  Mannit 

8.  Control 


(0 


O       O 


0 
O 

s 
o 


o 

0 

s 
o 


o 

0     (  o 

o    i  o 

i.     (  o 

^    is 


- 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

0 

0 

o 

- 

^ 

+ 

-l- 

-r 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

- 

+ 

_1_ 

- 

0 

0 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

- 

- 

0 

o 

0 

0 

o 

+ 

0 

s 
o 


0 

4- 
o 

0 

o 


0 

o 

o 

o 

s 

s 

o 

0 

s 
o 

o 


o     o     o 
o     o     s 

0  10      o 


On  the  4tLi  tlav,  the  ammonium  sulphate  tests  of  A2  were  phited  to  see  how 
far  the   pliases  liad   altered. 

Table  va. — Percentage  of  Phase  A2  in  Ammonium  Sulphate  at  28° 


Start. 

4  Days. 

10  Days. 

Mannit            

90 

90 

13 

Saccharose     ... 

90 

6.5 

15 

Maltose 

90 

:?5 

25 

Raffinose 

90 

30 

5 

Galactose       

90 

20 

-0 

Dextrose 

90 

10 

0 

Levulose  ^ 

Control    )      

90 

0 

0 

In  all  oases,  except  mannit,  the  cohesive  pha.se  A2  had  become,  by  the  fourtli 
day,  more  or  less  altered  to  the  ditt'use  phase  Al,  and  it  is  rather  c-vtraordinary 
that  those  with  a  maximum  proportion  of  the  diffuse  ])liase  should  have  been  ropy. 
It  is  possible  tiiat  the  ropy  substance  was  formed  before  the  alteration  to  the  dif- 
fuse phase  occurred  and  the  gradual  suppression  of  the  phase  A2  as  shown  by 
the  relative  numbers  on  the  10th  day,  bears  out  this  idea.  Another  jieculiarity 
is  that  while  the  maltose  test  with  asparagin  gave  no  ropiness,  and  with  ammonium 
sulphate  a  jjronounced  ropiness  <m  the  4th  day,  smears  made  on  that  day  showed 
the  same  proportion  of  A2,  viz.  35  %.  From  these  proportions  it  would  appear 
tliat  ropiness  has  less  to  do  with  tho  phase  of  the  organism  than  the  previous  tests 
had  led  one  to  believe,  but  as  on  the  10th  day,  the  asparagin  tost  contained  1  % 
of  A2,  and  the  ammonium  sulphate  test  25  %.  there  is  still  the  suspicion  that 
some  relation  exists. 


BV  R.    GEEIG-SMITH. 


63 


The  diiplictite  tests  ut'  phase  B2  were  lairly  cuiieonhmt;  ditt'erences  were  ob- 
tained with  levulose  and  saccharose  in  conjunction  with  ammonium  sulphate. 
With  asparagin,  a  slight  difference  occurred  in  the  case  of  levulose. 

Phase  IVi,  in  this  experiment,  was  shown  to  possess  considerable  activity  in 
producing  ropiness  in  tlie  presence  of  tannic  acid  as  compared  with  the  prelimin- 
ary tests,  liut  it  is  possible  that  the  saline  constituents  had  much  to  do  with  the 
ditt'erences  obtained . 

In  the  experiment  the  media  contained  0.5  of  tannic  acid  and,  as  ropiness  was 
obtained  with  this  percentage,  it  was  deemed  advisable  to  see  to  what  extent  the 
most  active  phase  could  tolerate  this  acid.  A  medium  containing  dextrose  2  %, 
asparagin  or  ammonium  sulphate  0.25  %  and  sodium  succinate  0.2  %  was  por- 
tioned out  and  seeded  with  phase  A2  taken  from  a  colony  two  days  previously. 
Then  the  various  quantities  of  tannic  acid  were  added. 


Table  vi. — Dextrose  with  increasina;  Tannic  Acid. 


Phase 

A2 

Source  of  Nitrogen. 

Aspai 

agin. 

Ammonium  Sulphate. 

Days  at  28° 

1 

3 

6 

10 

1 

3 

6     1     10 

Tannic  Acid 

per  cent. 

0-2 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

- 

+ 

+ 

0-4 

+ 

+ 

+ 

-1- 

1 

+ 

+ 

- 

+ 

0-6 

+ 

+ 

-f 

+ 

S 

O- 

+ 

+ 

0-8 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

S 

- 

+ 

+ 

1-0 

S 

s 

+ 

s 

s 

+ 

s 

o 

1-5 

s 

s 

S 

0 

o 

0 

0 

0 

2-0 

-0 

o 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

On  the  6th  day  certain  of  the  cultures  were  smeared  on  agar.  With  0.2  % 
and  0.6  %  of  tannic  acid,  in  the  presence  of  asparagin,  the  colonies  were  of  a 
novel  type.  They  appeared  as  round,  raised,  glistening,  buff-coloured  colonies 
with  a  glutinous  consistency.  Microscopically  they  had  dark  centres  from  which 
dark  tufted  fibres  radiated  through  a  yellow  matrix  to  near  the  margin.  In  10 
%  of  the  colonies  this  structure  blended  into  that  of  phase  A2,  part  of  the  colony 
showing  the  fibrous  structure  at  one  side  and  that  of  A2  at  the  other.  They  were 
clearly  a  transition  phase  of  A2  more  nearly  related  to  A2  than  to  Al.  With 
1  %  and  2  %  of  tannic  acid  the  colonies  consisted  entirely  of  the  phase  Al . 

By  the  12th  day,  the  medium  containing  asparagin  with  0.2  %  of  acid  showed 
96  %  "of  Al,  2  %  of  the  fibrous  transition  form  of  A2,  and  2  %  of  A2.  With 
larger  amounts  of  acid  the  cultures  contained  very  few  living  bacteria  but  they 
were  of  the  kinds  noted  on  the  6th  day. 

The  cultures  containing  ammonium  sulphate  w^ere  tested  on  the  12th  and  16th 
days.  They  contained  few  bacteria;  with  0.2  %  of  acid,  they  consisted  of  the 
introduced  phase  A2  an<l.  with  larger  quantities,  they  were  the  Al  phase. 


64 


liOPIXESS    IN    WATTLK    BARK    INFUSIONS 


The  teiideney  of  the  tannic;  acid  is  to  alter  the  phase  A2  to  Al  but  this  pro- 
bably occurs  alter  the  ropy  substance  has  been  formed  in  the  medium. 

The  experiment  showed  that  a  fairly  active  culture  of  the  phase  A2  could 
produce  ropiness  in  the  presence  of  <iuantities  of  tannic  acid  up  to  1  %  with 
ammonium  sulphate,  and  up  to  1.5  %  with  asparagin. 

The  sugar  test  with  0.5  %  of  tannic  acid  showed  that  galactose  was  a  useful 
sugar  for  inducing  the  formation  of  ropiness,  and  an  experiment  was  made  to 
see  the  effect  of  increasing  quantities  of  tannic  acid  in  the  presence  of  this  sugar. 
The  medium  contained  galactose  2  %,  asparagin  0.25  %,  sodium  succinate  0.1  %, 
and  sodium  jiliospliate,  anhydrous.  0.2  %.  The  phases  were  plated  at  the  start 
and  found  to  be  pure. 


Table  vii 

— Galactose  with  increasing 

Tannic  Acid. 

Phase 

Al 

A2 

B2 

Days  at  28° 

2 

4 

6 

9 

13 

2 

4 

« 

9 

13 

2 

4 

6 

9 

13 

Tannic  Acid 

per  cent. 

0-2.5 

0 

0 

0 

0 

o 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

S 

s 

o 

0 

0-5 

0 

0 

S 

s 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

s 

0 

0 

0 

0-75 

0 

0 

s 

s 

s 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

S 

s 

s 

s 

o 

l-O 

s 

s 

s 

s 

s 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

s 

s 

s 

1-25 

s 

s 

s 

s 

s 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+  . 

s 

s 

s 

s 

s 

1-5 

o 

0 

0 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

47 

s 

s 

s 

s 

0 

1-75 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+■ 

0 

0 

S' 

s 

0 

20 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

o 

s 

s 

s 

0 

0 

s 

s 

s 

0 

2-25 

0 

0 

0 

0 

o 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

s 

0 

2-5 

0 

0 

o 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

o 

0 

0 

0 

0 

'I'he  flasks  with  0.5  %  and  1  %  of  tannic  acid  were  examineil  sexeral  limes  by 
the  plate  method  on  nritrient  agar  with  fhc  following  results: — 


Table  viirt. — Change  of  Phase. 


Phase 

Al 

A2 

O-o'/r 

B2 

Tannic  Acid 

0-5% 

i'/" 

1% 

0.5% 

1% 

Start 

Al 

Al 

A2 

A2 

m 

B2 

Four  days 

Al 

Al 

A  2 

A2 

K2 

B2 

Nine  days 

Al  with  5%  A2 

Al 

A2,  40%  ;  A2,  trans,  m^/e  ; 
Al,  -.iO'/r 

Al 

B2,  trims. 

B2,  trans. 

Fourteen  days 

- 

Al 

A2,  30%  ;  A2,  trans.  «0%  ; 
Al,  10% 

Al 

B2 

B2 

BY   R.   GREIG-SMITH. 


65 


It  is  clear  from  the  experiment  that  tlie  phase  Al  is  capable  of  producing- 
ropiness  in  the  presence  of  from  0.5  %  to  1.25  %  ofi  tannic  acid  in  a  medium 
containing  galactose.  With  0.25  %  there  was  no  ropiness  formed,  and  as  the 
acid  increased,  so  did  the  viscosity.  Tannic  acid  or,  possibly,  acidity  seems 
therefore  to  be  a  sine  qua  non  for  the  foi-mation  of  ropiness  by  this  phase  of  the 
.  liacterium  A. 

The  phase  A2  at  the  time  of  the  experiment  was  a  strong  slime-foi-mer,  and 
gave  a  pronounced  ropy  solution  in  the  presence  of  amounts  of  tannic  acid  up  to 
]  %.  The  ropy  substance  had  been  formed  in  the  early  days  of  the  experiment, 
and  it  did  not  alter,  although  the  phase  in  the  ease  of  0.5  %  of  tannic  acid 
changed  to  a  mixture  of  phases,  and  in  the  case  of  1  %  it  changed  to  Al. 

The  phase  B2  gave  ropiness  in  amounts  of  tannic  acid  up  to  2.25  %,  but  the 
viscosity  of  the  solutions  was  never  so  pronounced  as  in  the  ease  of  A2.  The 
most  viscous  solution  was  obtained  in  the  presence  of  1  %  of  tannic  acid. 

The  experiment  shows  that  the  three  phases  which  were  tested  produced 
ropiness  in  synthetic  media  when  the  tannic  acid  varied  in  amount  up  to  1.25  % 
or  2.25  %,  and  that  the  tendency  of  the  bacterial  phase  A2  is  to  change,  in  the 
presence  of  tannic  acid,  to  Al,  and  for  the  bacterial  phase  B2  to  remain  constant. 

The  same  galactose  medium  was  used  to  determine  the  comparative  amounts 
of  tannic  acid  and  of  phosphoric  acid  necessary  to  prevent  the  formation  of  ropi- 
ness by  phase  A2. 

Table  viii.  —Tannic  and  Phosphoric  Acids  compared. 


Phase 

A2 

.Days  at  28° 

1 

3 

7 

1 

3 

7 

1     Tannic  Acid 
j         per  cent. 

Phosphoric  Acid 
in  decfrees. 

1 

0-0 

4- 

+ 

+ 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

2 

0-2.-, 

+ 

+ 

+ 

3 

+ 

+   • 

+ 

3 

0-5 

+ 

+ 

+ 

6 

+ 

+ 

+ 

4 

0-7.5 

+ 

+ 

+ 

9 

+ 

+ 

+ 

o 

1-0 

S 

+ 

+ 

12 

+ 

+ 

+ 

6 

1-2.5 

S 

+ 

+ 

15 

S 

+ 

+ 

7 

1..5 

s 

+. 

+ 

18 

s 

+ 

+ 

8                1-75 

s 

+ 

+ 

21 

s 

4- 

+ 

9                20 

0 

0 

0 

24 

s 

+ 

+ 

10                2-25 

0 

0 

0 

27 

s 

+ 

+ 

11 

2-5 

0 

0 

0 

30 

0 

0   . 

0 

Certain  of  the  cultures  were  examined  at  the  end  of  the  first  day,  and  they 
were  found  to  contain  the  introduced  phase,  A2,  in  pure  culture.  They  were 
again  examined  on  the  seventh  day  and  it  was  found  that  the  phase  had  altered 
to  Al. 


BC 


UOPIXESS    IN    WATTLE    liAKK:   INFUSIONS, 

Talile  viiiiz.  -Percentage  Composition  of  the  Phases  (Seventh  day). 


Tannic  Acid 

Phosphoric  Acid 

Al 

A2 

A2  trans. 

Al 

A2 

A2  trans. 

1 

35 

25 

40 

80 

10 

10 

•4 

n 

90 

10 

70 

20 

10 

.') 

80 

3 

15 

85 

15 

0 

9 

SterUe 

75 

15 

10 

Tlie  indication  that  a  moderate  quantity  of  tannic  acid  tended  to  maintain 
the  stability  of  tlie  introduced  phase  A2,  led  to  the  tannic  acid  tests  being  again 
examined  on  the  10th  day,  when  the  following  percentage  counts,  of  the  kinds  of 
colonies  were  noted. 

Table  viiiA. — Percentage  Composition  of  the  Pliases  with  Tannic  Acid  (Tenth  day) 


Al 

A2 

A2  (transition) 

1 

70 

m 

0 

2 

(1 

1).') 

5 

:i 

(1 

.■)0 

.50 

4 

2.") 

().") 

10 

5 

100 

0 

0 

6* 

90 

10 

o 

•Scanty  growth. 

It  appears  that  from  0.25  %  to  0.5  %  of  tannic  acid,  when  added  to  a  syn- 
thetic medium  such  as  was  used,  maintains  the  stability  of  the  A2  phase  and 
tliat  smaller  or  larger  quantities  bring  about  its  conversion  to  the  less  cohesive 
l)liase  Al.  In  contrast,  phosphoric  acid  does  not  appear  to  have  much  influence  ni 
maintaining  the  stability,  for  on  the  7tli  day  there  was  a  70  to  85  %  conversiou, 
irrespective  of  the  amount  of  acid  added. 

The  limiting  amount  of  tannic  acid  in  this  syntlietic  medium  for  the  phase  A2 
at  the  (iuic  of  making  the  experiment  was  2  ""r  and  of  phosphoric  acid  -|-30° 
(equivalent  to  30  c.c.  of  normal  acid  ]ier  litre). 

The  two  last  experiments  with  tannic  acid  in  synthetic  media  indicated  that 
2%  of  the  acid  prohibited  the  formation  of  the  ropy  substance.  It  aiipcared  to 
l)c  advisable  to  extend  tlic  line  of  experimentation  and  obtain  some  information 
vegai-ding  the  action  of  tannic  acid  when  added  to  an  infusion  of  wattle-bark 
capable  of  giving  ropiness.  With  this  object  in  view  an  infusion  was  prepared  by 
mixing  three  parts  of  water  with  two  parts  of  bark,  and  filtering  the  li(|uid  at  the 
end  of  two  hours.  Portions  were  seeded  with  .\2  and  B2,  and  were  treated  with 
progressively  increasing  (|uantities  of  tannic  acid.  The  portions  seeded  with  A2 
did  not  develop  ropiness  and  when  examined  on  the  4th  day  they  were  found  to 
contain  from  85  %  to  05  %  of  Al.     The  portions  seeded  with  B2  developed  a  pro- 


BY  R.   GREIG-SMITH. 


67 


noiinced  ropiness  with  ((uantities  of  tannic  acid  up  to  0.4  %  and  a  slight  ropiuoss 
with  0.7%.     On  the  4tli  and  9th  days  these  contained  a  pure  culture  of  B2. 

The  experiment  was  repeated  a  fortnight  later  with  a  similarly  prepared  in- 
fusion. It  had  a  Sp.  G.  1.023  at  21°  and  an  acidity  of  +24°  by  Procter's 
lime  water  test.  A  similar  infusion  made  on  the  following-  day  at  21°  had  a  Sp.  Gr. 
1.022.  -|-22.5°  by  Procter's  test  and  -|-7°  to  methyl-red.  Procter's  test  seems  to 
indicate  the  acids  other  than  tannic  acid  that  are  present,  for  tannic  acid- in  pur-i 
solution  is  precipitated  at  once  by  the  lime  water. 


Table  ix. — Bark  infusion  with  Tannic  Acid. 


Phase 

Al 

A2 

B2 

Days  at  28° 

2 

3 

5 

9 

2 

3 

5 

9 

2 

3 

5 

9 

Tannic  Acid 

per  cent. 

0-0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

-t- 

s 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0.1 

0 

0 

0 

O 

0 

0 

s 

s 

s 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0-2 

0 

0 

0 

O 

o 

0 

0 

0 

s 

+ 

+ 

-f- 

0-t 

o 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0-fi 

o 

o 

o 

o 

0 

0 

o 

0 

o 

0 

0 

o 

AVe  see  that  an  infusion  of  wattle-bark  having  a  Sp.  G.  of  1.023  is  immune 
to  the  phase  Al  and  that  the  derived  phase  A2  is  able  to  develop  ropiness,  but  the 
addition  of  a  small  quantity  of  tannic  acid,  0.2  %,  prevents  the  formation.  A 
.smaller  quantity,  0.1  %,  permits  a  slight  ropiness  to  appear.  Phase  B2  is  more 
tolerant  of  tannic  acid,  the  limiting  amount  of  which  lies  between  0.4  %  and  0.0  %. 

Larger  amounts  of  tannic  acid  were  used  but  these  are  omitted  from  the  table. 
The  i^ortions  containing-  over  0.4  %  showed  cobwebby  growths,  doubtless  consist- 
ing of  bacteria  bound  up  with  coagulated  slime. 

As  a  bark  liquor  o'f  Sp.  G.  1.010  may  contain  1.8  %  of  tannin  and  0.5  % 
to  0.7  %  of  e.xtractives  (non-tannins),  the  infusion  of  Sp.  G.  1.023  presumably 
contained  about  4  %  of  tannin.  The  experiments  show  that  this  reputed  4  %  of 
tannin  had  much  the  same  effect  in  prohibiting-  the  formation  of  ropiness  as  1.75  % 
of    pure    tannic  acid. 

A  stronger  infusion  of  wattle  bark  of  Sp.  G.  1.054  wh^n  seeded  with  A2 
and  B2  did  not  develop  ropiness,  even  when  the  infusion  was  streng:thened  by 
quantities  of  dextrose  and  ammonium  sulphate  rising-  to  5%  and  0.5%  respect- 
ively. This  seems  to  indicate  that  the  tannins  are  the  iiroliibiting-  agents,  and  when 
they  are  present  in  sufficient  amount,  Ijacterial  nutrients  have  little  influence  in 
assisting-  the  development  of  ropiness . 

A  few  tests  had  been  made  in  the  earlier  part  of  the  research  to  see  if  the 
quantity  of  sugar  in  synthetic  media  had  any  effect  in  increasing  the  formation  ut 
ropiness,  Imt  it  was  not  definitely  shown  that  the  amount  of  ropiness  was  in-o- 
portional  to  the  sugar  in  the  medium,  or  that  any  advantage  would  be  gained  by 
increasing  the  quantity  over  the  usual  2  %.  It  seemed  possible,  however,  that 
sugar  miglit  to  some  extent  modify  the  action  of  tannic  acid,  and  that  an  increase 


08 


KOPIXESS   IN   WATTLE   BARK   IXFUSIONS, 


in  the  sugar  content  might  enahle  the  organism  to  withstand  a  higher  amoimt  of 
tannic  acid.  To  test  the  matter  portions  of  fluid  containing  asparagin  0.5  %, 
and  sodium  succinate  0.2  %,  were  given  increasing  amounts  of  dextrose  and  of 
tannic  acid.  The  portions  were  seeded  with  a  drop  of  a  bouillon  culture  of  A2 
which  at  the  time  of  inoculation  contained  A2,  85  %,  and  Al,  15  %,  as  shown 
by  plate  culture. 


TiiVile  X. — Increasing  Dextrose  and  Tannic  Acid. 


Dextrose  % 

2 

4 

6 

Days  at  28° 

3 

7 

11 

3 

7 

11 

3 

7 

11 

Tannic  Acid 

1-0 

S 

- 

+ 

-f" 

+ 

4- 

+ 

+ 

t- 

1-25 

s 

S 

s 

s 

+ 

s 

+ 

+ 

s 

1-5 

s 

s 

0 

s 

s 

o 

s 

+ 

0 

1-75 

s 

0 

0 

s 

s 

0 

s 

4- 

0 

20 

o 

0 

0 

s 

s 

o 

s 

s 

o 

2-25 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

The  portions  with  1.5  %  of  tannic  acid  were  examined  on  the  8th  day.  Tliat 
with  2  %  of  dextrose  contained  Al  with  5  %  of  A2,  with  4  %  of  dextrose  had  A I 
with  20  %  of  A2,  and  6  %  of  dextrose  had  Al  with  25  %  of  A2. 

To  judge  by  the  pronouncedly  ropy  tests,  an  increase  in  the  sugar  does  appear 
to  mask,  to  some  extent,  the  action  of  the  acid,  for  on  the  3rd  and  7th  days  tlie 
"-(-"  indications  rise  with  the  amount  of  acid,  but  so  far  as  slight  ropiness  is 
concerned,  thei-e  is  little  difference  between  the  4  %  and  the  6  %.  The  increased 
sugar  also  prevents,  or  rather  hinders,  the  convei-sion  of  the  phase  A2  to  Al,  and 
thus  masks  the  action  of  the  acid  by  enabling  more  ropy  substance  to  be  formed 
Ijy  the  cohesive  phase. 

Sources  of  Nitrogen. 

An  early  attempt  to  determine  the  most  favorable  source  of  nitrogen  was 
made  witli  solutions  of  dextrose  and  mixed  salts  containing  amounts  of  nitrogen 
approximately  equivalent  to  0.2%  of  asparagin.  On  the  sixth  day  a  mixture  of 
phases  Al  and  A2  had  produced  I'opiness  to  a  greater  or  loss  degree  with  as- 
paragin, meat-extract,  peptone,  and  ammonium  sulphate,  but  potassium  nitrate 
gave  little  growth  and  no  ropLness.  A  second  test  using  one-sixth  the  f|uantili.« 
of  nitrogen  and  replacing  the  dextrose  by  glycerin  showed  that  ropiness  had  de- 
veloped by  the  fiftli  day  in  the  presence  of  all  the  above  sources  of  nitrogen,  and 
also  of  potassium  ferrieyanide.  Thus  in  the  presence  of  glycerin  and  mixed  salt'< 
any  of  these  sources  of  nitrogen  will  serve. 

At  a  later  date,  a  more  comprehensive  experiment  was  made  with  jihiuses  Al, 
A2  and  B2,  using  2  %  of  dextrose  or  glycerin,  0.3%  of  potassium  cifrnte  and 
0.25  %  of  the  various  nitrogenous  substances. 


BV   R.   GREIG-SIIITH. 
Table  xi. — Sources  of  Nitrogen. 


69 


Phase 

A2 

B2 

Carbon  source 

Dextrose 

Glycerin 

Dextrose 

Glycerin 

Days  at  28° 

3 

6 

9 

13 

19 

3 

.6 

9 

is!  19 

3 

6 

9 
O 

13 
O 

19 
0 

3 
0 

6 
O 

9 
0 

13 
0 

19 

Meat-exti'act 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+    + 

+ 

+ 

O 

Peptone 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

0 

+ 

+  +    s 

s 

0 

o 

0 

S 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

Asparagin 

+ 

+ 

.+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+  !s 

+ 

+ 

+ 

s 

0 

s 

+ 

+ 

+   s 

Ammonium 

sulphate 

_L 

+    + 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

S 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

-L 

-t- 

+  + 

Potassium 

nitrate 

+ 

0 

0 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

o 

o 

<) 

o 

o 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0     0 

Potassium 

ferricyamde 

o 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+  ;S 

0 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

0    o 

Phase  Al  is  omitted  from  the  table  as  all  the  tests  were  negative  with  the 
exception  of  peptone  plus  glycerine  which  became  ropy  on  the  13th  and  was  stiU. 
ropy  on  the  24th  day.  On  tlie  19th  day  a  smear  showed  that  the  liquid  contained 
95  %  of  A2  and  5  %  of  Al. 

On  the  11th    (B2)  and  13th   (A2)  days  the  fluids  were  smeared  on  plates  of 
nutrient  agar  and  counts  were  made  of  the  approximate  proportions  of  the  phase?. 

Table  xi(7. — Percentage  Proportion  of  Phases. 


Phase  added 

A2 

B2 

Source  of  Carbon 

Dextrose 

Glycerin 

Dextrose 

Glycerin 

Phases  determined 

Al 

Al  (tr.) 

A2 

Al 

Al  (tr.) 

A2 

Bl 

Bl  (tr.) 

B2 

Bl 

Bl  (tr.) 

B2 

Meat-extract    , 

- 

100 

— 

— 

90 

10 

dead 

10 

25 

65 

Peptone 

30 

70 

25 

40 

25 

_ 

100 

75 

— 

25 

Asparagin 

— 

25 

75 

— 

65 

35      15          — 

85 

~ 

— 

100 

Ammonium  sulphate 

80 

10 

10 

— 

90 

10 

—  .     100 

— 

70 

30 

— 

Potassium  nitrate 

dead 

— 

45 

55 

no  growth 

20 

10 

70 

Pot.  ferricyanide 

10  j       80 

10 

— 

— 

100 

nearlj'  dead  100 

— 

— 

— 

It  is  dilHcult  to  see  any  relation  between  the  rojiiuess  as  determined  ou  Table 
xio.  -with  the  proportion  of  the  phases.  Even  when  the  transition  phases  of 
Al=Al(tr.)  and  of  Bl^Bl(tr.)  are  included  with  the  cohesive  phases,  there  ap- 
pears to  be  no  reason  for  connecting  ropiness  with  a  particular  phase  of  the 
organisms.  One  is,  therefore,  inclined  to  the  idea  that  in  most  cases  the  ropy  sub- 
stance is  formed  first  and  the  alteration  of  phase  occurs  subsequentl3^  (compare 
p.  64 1  .  The  altered  phase  may  in  some  cases  digest  the  preformed  ropy  substance. 
The  untabulated  tests  with  phase  Al  showed  that  the  nature  of  the  infecting  phase 
largely  determines  the  formation  of  ropiness. 


70 


HOPIXESS    IX    WATTLE    BAKK    UJPCSIOXS, 


Confirmatory  tests  were  made  witli  phase  Al,  a  mixture  of  Al  with  A2.  and 
with  A2  using-  levuh)se  2  9c  an<i  sodium  chloride  0.3  '"f .  They  t)ore  out  the  results 
obtained  witli  dextrose  and  citrate. 

The  work  has  sliown  that  the  jduise  A2  can  produce  ropincss  from  de.xirnse  it 
glycei'in  in.  the  presence  of  meat-extract,  peptone,  asparagin  or  ammonium  sul- 
phate, and  from  glycerin  with  nitrate  bnt  not  from  dextrose  with  nitrate.  Doubt- 
less this  is  due  to  the  formation  of  an  acid  reaction  in  the  mediuui  cuntaining 
sugar  and  the  concomitant  jiroductiou  of  free  nitric  acid.  Ferncyanide  produced 
ropiness,  but  the  (|uantity  was  scanty  as  compared  with  the  otlu'r  sources  of 
nitrogen . 

The  phase  B2  acted  best  witli  asparagiu  and  ammimium  sulphate.  Meac- 
extract  gave  an  evanescent  ropiness  with  dextrose,  but  none  at  all  with  glycerin. 
The  behaviour  with  nitrate  was  much  the  same  as  with  A2  and  proliidily  I'nr  the 
same  reason.     Ferricyanide  was  an  unsuital)le  source  of  nitrogen. 

'ihe  liifluenci    of  I'oni/d.b-  .Vdyar.s,,  etc. 

The  acti\ity  of  the  bacteria  in  the  presence  of  various  sources  of  carbon  was 
tested  with  a  saline  asparagin  solution  containing  various  sugars,  etc.  liojiiness 
was  jirotluced  in  the  presence  of  saccharose,  dextrose,  levulose,  galactose,  glycerin 
and  mannit.     It  was  not  produced  from  maltose,  lactose,  dextrin  or  gum-acacia. 

In  testing  the  most  suitable  amount  of  glycerin,  a  solution  ccmtaining  1% 
sliowed  ropiness  first,  but  in  time  the  higher  percentages  made  headway.  On  the 
eighth  day  the  order  of  ropiness  seemed  to  be  5  %,  1  %,  10  %  and  2  ' ,  when  tiie 
slimes  were  coagulated  and  weighed.  With  1  %,  100  c.c.  of  media  gave  80  milli- 
gi-ams,  2  %  gave  04,  5  '^i  gave  88,  and  10  %  gave  90  inilligrauis.  The  2  %  te-t 
was  ]irobabIy  low,  in  which  case  all  <|uaiitities  gave  much  tlie  same  juikiuuI  id'  fii|)v 
substance. 

The  ropiness  seemed  to  become  more  ahundiuit  when  grown  in  deep  layers  of 
fluid;  in  shallow  layers  there  aiipears  In  be  a  greater  growth  cd'  cells  ami  hss 
slime. 

An  e.xpei'iment  was  made  with  carbohydrates  when  considering  the  subject 
of  acidity.  A  solution  containing  sugar  or  glycerin  2'~/c.  KII.,P(|j  0.2 '^f, 
MgSO.jAq.  0.1  9r,  €a('l20.02%  was  made  nrutrnl  to  methyl-red  and  seeded  wi;  h 
a  mixture  of  Al  +A2  and  with  B2. 

Talili>  xii.     Chauge  of  Kcactiuii  with  Siigar.«  iind  (xlvfci-iu. 


Phase 

Al  +  A2 

B2 

Eiul  acidity  to 
inethyl-recl 

End  aciility  to 
methyl-red 

Days  at  28° 

1 

2 

3 

4 

4 

1 

2 

•A 

4 

4 

Dextrose 
L(;vulose 
Saccharose 
Glycerin 

0 
O 

s 

s 

■(- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

-4- 

4- 
4- 

4-8° 

4-9° 
4-6-.5° 
— 9-5° 

0 
0 

o 

0 

0 

o 
s 

0 

0 
0 

s 

0 

0 

0 

o 

0 

4-9-,5° 
4-9° 
+-8° 
6-5° 

nV    R.    GREIG-SMITH. 


71 


The  eNpfi'iment  showed  a  distinet  advance  of  I'roiH  +0°  to  -(-9°  in  the  acidity 
with  the  sugai-s  iind  a  reduction  of  about  the  same  number  of  degrees  with  glycerin 
during'  the  four  days'  growth  at  28°. 

A  more  comprehensive  test  was  iiiaik'  into  the  effect  of  various  sources  of 
carbon  upon  the  jiroduction  of  ropiness.  A  medium  containing  2  %  of  sugars,  etc., 
0.25%  meat  extract  and  0.5%  of  crystalline  sodium  phosphate  was  prepared 
and  portions  were  seeded  with  the  phases. 


Table  xiii. — Sources  of  Carbon  (1). 


Phase 

\1 

A2 

A2a 

B2 

Days  at  28° 

li2 

4 

6i9 

1 
d 

2 

+ 

4 

+ 

6 

+ 

9 
O 

1 

0 

2 
0 

4 
S 

6 
0 

9I1 

0|0 

2 
0 

4 
0 

6 
0 

9 

Dextrose     ... 

0   S 

0 

0 

0 

0 

Levulose     ... 

0 

+  S[0 

0 

o 

+ 

+ 

+ 

s 

o 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+:o 

0 

s 

0 

0 

Saccharose 

0 

o 

0 

0 

o 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

Glycerin      

0 

0 

s 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

Lactose 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

o 

s 

s 

B 

s 

0 

S 

+ 

s 

00 

1 

0 

0 

0 

0 

Galactose  ... 

0 

s 

s 

s 

0 

o 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

s 

s 

0 

Mannit 

0 

0 

0 

o 

o 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+. 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+■ 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

Maltose       

0 

s 

o 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

+ 

S 

s 

s 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

Dextrin       

o 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

o 

0 

0 

o 

0 

0 

0 

0^0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

Gum  acacia 

<^ 

o 

oio  0 

0 

0 

o 

o 

0 

0 

0 

o 

0 

0  0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

Control 

0 

0 

0  o 

0 

0 

o 

o 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0  0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

When  the  experiment  was  well  undi-r  way,  it  was  found  tnat  ])hase  A2  and 
(A2a)  had  altered  and  contained  more  oi-  less  of  Al,  a  fact  that  should  be  taken 
into  account  in  considering  the  disapi)earauce  of  the  ropiness.  It  had  also  been 
discovered  that  the  growth  of  phase  Al  in  glycerin  caused  some  of  the  bacteria 
to  assume  the  phase  A2,  possibly  on  account  of  the  medium  beeoming  alkaline  in 
contrast  to  the  acidiiication  in  the  presence  of  sugars.  The  results  of  this  ex- 
l)eriment  engender  the  belief  that  glycerin  is  the  only  substance  of  those  tested 
wliich  can  alter  Al  into  A2  and  that  dextrose  can  rapidly  alter  A2  into  Al.  The 
role  these  sulistances  play  is  presumably  in  the  suppre.ssion  or  exaltation  of  the 
]>ower  of  the   bacteria  to  secrete  a  slime  dissolving  enzyme. 

Meanwhile  it  had  been  determined  that  the  saline  constituents  of  the  medium 
had  an  influence  in  the  production  of  the  ropiness,  especially  with  i)hase  H2.  la 
a  saline  test,  Table  xvi.,  Al  gave  a  ropy  medium  in  the  pi-esence  of  sodium 
chloride  and  with  no  other  salt,  while  pota-ssium  citrate  was  most  favotirable  wirli 
phase  B2  and  as  good  as  several  others  with  phase  A2  (A2a).  A  nieilium  was 
accordingly  prepared  containing  2  '^c  of  carboliydrate  or  other  nutrient,  0.25  % 
meat  extract  and  0.2  %  of  common  salt  for  phase  Al  and  of  potassium  citrate  for 
the  others.     The  bacteria  had  been  pickeil  from  plates  three  days  previously. 


72 


ROPIXESS   IN   WATTLE    BARK   INFUSIONS, 


TiiliU)  xiv. — Sources  of  Carbon  {2). 


Phase 

Al   (NaCl) 

A 

2  (Citrate) 

n 

2  (Citrate) 

Days  at  28° 

1 

2 

^ 

5 

n 

1 

2 

4 

5 

7 

11 

1 

2 

4 

5 

7 

11 

1.    Dextrose 

0 

0 

0 

o 

0 

o 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

^ 

-t- 

+ 

S 

s 

0 

o 

2.    Levulose 

0 

0 

^ 

- 

4- 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

-f 

o 

0 

+■ 

+ 

+ 

- 

3.    Saccharose 

0 

0 

+ 

s 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+  ■ 

+ 

+ 

4- 

o 

s 

+ 

+ 

+ 

- 

4.    Glycerin 

s 

+ 

+ 

_{- 

+ 

+ 

s 

J- 

4- 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0' 

5.    Lactose 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

o 

0 

o 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

o 

0 

0 

0.    Galactose 

-^ 

o 

0 

o 

+ 

+ 

-f 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

_L 

_i_ 

7.    Mannit 

0 

0 

^ 

J- 

+ 

s 

+ 

+ 

- 

-~ 

-4- 

0 

s 

+ 

+ 

+ 

-r 

8.    Maltose 

o 

o 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

9.    Raftinose 

o 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

s 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

10.    No  Sugar 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

o 

0 

0 

0 

0 

o 

o 

0 

o 

0 

0 

0 

o 

'  Confirmed  by  a  separate  test. 

On  the  first  clay  of  the  experiment,  Al  (6),  when  plated,  showed  a  pure  cul- 
ture of  phase  Al.  On  the  eleventh  day,  B2  (1)  contained  no  living  bacteria  in  a 
large  loop  of  the  medium ;  tests  Al  (2,1  and  7)  contained  a  mixture  of  the  two 
phases,  Al  and  A2,  as  well  as  transition  colonies. 

A  consideration  of  the  last  two  experiments  leads  to  the  conclusion  that  in 
the  presence  of  glycerin  the  phase  Al  tends  to  become  A2  irrespective  of  whether 
the  salt  is  present  a.^  a  phosphate  or  a  chloride.  With  phosphate  of  soda  and 
the  various  sugars  the  teudoncy  is  for  it  to  remain  unaltered.  The  case  is  differ- 
ent with  sodium  chloride,  for  levulose,  and  mannit  (and  also  glycerin)  change  the 
phase  to  A2,  the  predominance  of  which  gives  a  permanent  ropiness  within  the 
limiting  time  of  the  experiment. 

The  phase  A2  tends  to  change  to  Al  in  the  presence  of  dextrose  and  phos- 
phate, but  not  so  mucli  with  the  other  sugars,  while  in  the  presence  of  citrate  it 
seems  to  remain  unaltered. 

Phase  B2  (Table  xiv.)  is  peculiar  in  giving  no  ropmess  in  the  presence  of 
glycerin  and  in  the  ropiness  dissohing  in  the  presence  of  dextrose.  Dextrose  ap- 
pears to  have  caused  the  reversion  to  a  phase  T?l  akin  to  Al  before  assisting  in 
the  death  of  the  organism. 

Tiie  (|uantity  of  sugar  has  an  influence  in  determining  the  ropiness  of  fluid 
media.  For  cxaniple  a  solution  containing  0.25%  each  of  meat  extract  and 
sodium  pluisphate  and  1 .  2  and  5  %  of  dextrose  showed  the  following 
with  two  cultures  of  Al.  Phase  Al(l)  showed  a  colony  with  a  granular  centre, 
Pha,se  Al(2)  had  a  stipi)lcd  centre.  These  had  been  picked  from  a  jilate  thirteen 
days  previous  1o  tlic  licninniug  of  the  experiment,  and  had  been  transferred  daily 
in   bouillon. 

Tt  is  clear  that  2  %  and  5  %  of  dextrose  are  best  for  obtaining  roi>y  solutions 
with  rai-es  of  Al  sliowing  colonies  with  granular  centres.  The  colonies  with 
stippled  centres  liave  lost   much  of  their  slime-forming  power.     The  stippling  is 


Vr   R.   GREIO- SMITH. 
Table  xv. — Increasing  Amounts  of  Sugar. 


V3 


Dextrose 

1 

% 

2 

% 

5 

% 

Days  at  28° 

1 

2 

3       i 

6 

9 

1 

2 

3 

4 

6 

9 

1 

2 

3 

4 

6 

9 

Phase  Al(l) 

S 

S 

0      0 

0 

O 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0      0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

-1- 

+ 

O 

Phase  Al  (2) 

0 

o 

0 

0 

0 

O 

o 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

O 

O 

+ 

+ 

0 

O 

Acidity  to 
methyl-red 

+.S° 

+4° 

-1-6° 

caused  l)y  the  preseuce  of  dusters  of  microscopic  crystals  of  magnesium  am- 
monium phosphate  and  these  are  not  in  evidence  in  the  granular  colonies.  Large 
crystals,  however,  develop  slowly  in  the  agai-.  and  are  found  in  the  old  plates.  It 
would  appear  that  the  development  of  ammonia  runs  pari  passu  with  the  forma- 
tion of  slime-digestive  fennents,  for  it  seems  reasonalile  to  consider  that  the  ropy 
fubstance  was  digested  as  soon  as  it  formed  in  the  case  of  phase  Al(2)  with  1  % 
and  2  %  of  sugar.  With  5  %,  the  increased  sugar  resulted  in  the  slime-forming 
power  temporarily  overbalancing  the  slime-digesting  power  of  the  bacterium. 

A  synopsis  of  tables  v.,  xiii.,  and  xiv.  gives  a  dearer  view  of  the  effects  of 
the  various  sources  of  carbon  than  a  detailed  reference  to  the  tables  themselves. 
In  this  sjTiopsis  dextrin  and  gum-aeacia  have  been  omitted  because  under  no 
circumstances  did  they  ever  assist  in  the  formation  of  ropiness. 

Table  xiv;?.  -Synopsis  of  Sugar,  etc.,  Experiments. 


Phase 

Al 

A2 

B: 

1 

Meat   Extract 
with 

Tannic  Acid 
with 

Meat  Extract 
with 

Tannic  Acid 
with 

Meat  Extract 
with 

phos- 
phate 

chlor- 
ide 

ammon. 
sulph. 

aspara- 
gin 

phos- 
phate 

citrate 

ammon. 
sulph. 

aspara- 
gin 

phos- 
phate 

citrate 

Galactose 

S 

+ 

-       '      "- 

-L 

- 

^ 

+ 

S 

-r 

Levulose 

+ 

_i_ 

- 

~^ 

+ 

+ 

S 

S 

+ 

Saccharose 

s 

+ 

+ 

-L. 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

s 

+ 

Mannit 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

-r 

+ 

S 

+ 

+, 

4- 

Dextrose 

s 

O 

+ 

-!- 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

-f- 

Glycerin 

4- 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

— 

0 

0 

Lactose 

0     '      0 

- 

- 

O 

— 

— 

0 

0 

Maltose 

s 

o 

+      j     0 

+ 

o 

0 

o 

0 

0 

Raffinose 

— 

0 

0            0 

— 

S 

0 

0 

_^_ 

o 

Of  all  the  sources  of  carbon,  galactose  seems  best  fitted  to  produce  the  ropy 
material.  This  is  to  be  expected  since  the  ro])y  substance  is  essentially  a  galac- 
tose anhydride  and  one  would  naturally  think  that  the  bacteria  could  form  it  most 
easily  from  this  sugar.     But  the  other  sugars  are  not  far  behind  in  their  capacity 


74  ROPIXESS    IX    WATTLE    BARK    INFI'SIOXS^ 

for  assisting  in  the  production.  Levuldsc  and  saccharose  aic  .yoodseconds.  There 
is  a  suggestion  that  suerase  or  invertase  is  secreted  by  tlie  bactci-ia  as  saccharose 
is  the  only  biose  that  is  utilised  to  any  extent,  but  a  search  for  this  en/.ynie  did 
not  show  its  existence. 

It  is  curious  that  the  hexatomic  alct)hol,  manuit,  should  l)e  so  good,  but  it 
seems  to  be  peculiarly  suitable  for  the  i)roduction  of  many  kinds  of  slime  and  is 
ver\'  frequently  used  in  bacteriology  for  the  nutrition  of  slime-forming  bacteria. 

Dextrose  probably  acts  (|uite  as  well  as  the  other  substances,  but  it  seems  to 
be  specially  adajited  to  form  a  slime  dissolving  enzyme  and  on  this  account  the 
rope-producing  action  of  the  stigar  is  not  so  clearly  shown. 

Glycerin  is  peculiar.  It  acts  as  a  source  of  carbon  for  tne  phase  A'2  and 
alters  Al  to  this  phase,  it  does  not  seiTe  as  a  favourable  nutrient  for  B2;  in- 
deed, it  is  not  only  unfavourable,  but  it  also  slowly  changes  B2  to  the  jihase  Bl, 
■ind  therefore  acts  in  op]Josite  directions  with  the  two  bacteria.  Like  mannit,  it  is 
a  general  nutrient  for  the  production  of  .slime  from  the  majority  of  slinie-formiu^ 
bactei-ia,  as  will  be  seen  from  a  perusal  of  my  papers  upon  slime-forming  bac- 
teria. 

Maltose,  raffinose  anil  lactose  may  be  considered  as  being  ineapable  of  utilisa- 
tion by  the  bacteria  A  and  B.  It  is  true  that  A2  can  utilise  them  to  some  exten'^. 
I)ut  this  phase  is  very  active,  and  is  able  to  make  bouillon  ropy,  a  fact  which 
should  be  considered  in  connection  with  the  production  of  ropiness  in  the  presence 
of  meat-extract. 

It  is  probable  that  with  suitable  nitrogenous  and  saline  nutrients  and  suitable 
conditions  as  regards  acidity,  the  liacteria  A  and  B  are  capable  of  fonning  ropy 
solutions  from  any  source  of  carbon,  and  that  the  absence  of  the  bacteria,  rather 
than  an  unsuitable  pabulum,  sho\dd  lie  the  object  aimed  at  in  preventing  ropiness 
in  wattle  bark  infusions. 

'///(■    fiifliD'nce   (if   Salts. 

It  is  customary  to  add  salts  to  bacteriological  Ihuds  for  tlie  |)urp(ise  of  sup- 
plying all  those  that  may  be  necessary  for  the  nutritiim  of  the  bacteria  and  of 
raising  the  osmotic  pressure.  The  ordinary  nutrient  bouillon,  agar  and  gelatine 
contains  J  %  of  common  salt  together  with  the  salts  that  may  be  contained  in 
the  meat-extract  used  in  the  jireparation  of  the  media.  With  this  amount  of 
saline  matter,  the  ordinary  bacteria  grow  very  well,  but  it  does  not  I'olhiw  that 
this  amount  is  best  for  all  bacteria.  Water  and  soil  bacteria,  for  example,  exist 
upon  nuich  less,  and  it  is  a  matter  of  common  knowledge  to  the  bacteriologist  that 
the  saline  content  of  bacteriological  (luids  can  be  raised  or  lowered  considerably 
without  harming  the  bacteria  to  any  great  e.xtent. 

In  the  earlier  experiments  the  saline  matter  had  been  \isually  added  to  the 
extent  of  ()..S  %>  ••"'!  generally  consisted  of  pota.ssium  ])iiosphate  0.2  %.  mag- 
nesium sulphate,  0.1  ''/c,  and  calcium  chloride.  0.02  %.  As  these  may  or  may  not 
be  good  for  assisting  the  bacteria  in  the  production  of  the  roiiy  substance,  a  num- 
ber of  tests  -were  made  to  get  some  information  upon  the  matter. 

In  ah  early  experiment,  a  solution  of  glycerin,  2  %,  and  meat-extract, 
0.25  %,  was  divided  into  portions,  and  each  received  0.1  %  of  certain  salts. 
They  were  seeded  with  A.  a  mixture  of  Al  and  A2.  Tiiat  with  calcium  nitrate 
seemed  to  give  the  most  slime  on  the  second  day.  After  twenty  days'  incubjition 
the  slimes  were  coagulated  with  alcohol  and  weighed.  The  inilliai'anis  nl'  ash-free 
slime   ficr  100  c.c.  of  li(|uiil  are   given  below:— 


BY    B.    GRBKi-SMITH. 


75 


Calt'ium  iiitrati'.    a(| 2()() 

'Jalcium  i-hlorkle 175 

Caleium  lactate 152 

Magnesium  sulphate.  a(| 132 

Potassium  mondliydiotjeii  ])hospliate   .  .    .  .   105 

Sodium  acetate 88 

No    salt 85 

Sodium  succinate 82 

Sodium  lactate 80 

Potassium-sodium  tartrate,  acj 57 

The  influence  of  the  salts  of  the  earths  in  promoting-  the  formation  of  the 
ropy  substance  is  clearly  shown.  Potassium,  as  represented  by  the  phosphate,  has 
more  influence  than  the  indifferent  salts  of  sodium.  The  weights  of  slime 
obtained  from  the  media  containing  the  lactates  of  caleium  and  sodium  show  that 
the  base  and  not  the  acid  is  the  active  component  of  the  salt,  but  that  the  acid 
has  some  influence  is  indicated  by  the  slime  obtained  in  the  presence  of  sodium- 
potassium  tartrate. 

These  results  were  obtained  in  a  medium  containing  glycerin,  which  in  other 
tests  had  been  found  to  maintain  the  original  reaction  or  to  bring  about  an  alka- 
line condition  of  the  medium.  Dextrose  and  other  sugars  produced  an  acid  eoti- 
dition  and  as  wattle  bark  extracts  are  acid  and  as  the  carbohydrate  in  such  ex- 
tracts is  probably  of  the  nature  of  dextrose,  possibly  as  a  glucoside,  it  was  con- 
sidered advisable  to  test  the  activity  of  the  bacteria  in  media  containing  this  sugar 
with  various  salts.  Accordingly  a  fluid  containing  dextrose  1  %,  meat-extract 
0.25  %,  was  prepared,  .and  portions  of  it  received  0.1  %  of  anhydrous  salt. 
After  sterilisation  the  sets  were  infected  with  bacteria  which  had  been  (aken  from 
pure   colonies   upon   the  previous  day. 

Table  xvi. — Salts  with  Dextrose  1%. 


Phase 

Al 

A2 

A2a. 

B2 

Days  at  28° 

1 

3 

5 

1 

3 

5 

7 

13 

1 

3 

o 

7 

13 

1 

3 

13 

Magnesium  sulphate 

S 

o 

0 

s 

+ 

+ 

S 

0 

+ 

0 

0 

0 

o 

0 

0 

o 

Calcium  lactate 

0 

o 

0 

0 

s 

s 

s 

s 

+ 

s 

o 

0 

0 

o 

o 

0 

Calcium  chloride 

o 

0 

0 

s 

+ 

_l_ 

-1- 

0 

+ 

4- 

s 

o 

6 

o 

0 

0 

C:ilciui]i  nitrate 

o 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

SdiMuiii  chloride 

+ 

0 

0 

s 

+ 

-r 

o 

0 

+ 

0 

0 

0 

o 

0 

0 

o 

Sodium  acetate 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

Sodium  phosphate 

o 

0 

o 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

s 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

o 

0 

s 

0 

Sodi  im  liictate 

o 

0 

0 

s 

0 

0 

o 

0 

+ 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

o 

Pot.  sotlium  tartrate 

0 

0 

0 

s 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

s 

0 

+ 

o 

o 

Potiibsium  citrate 

0 

o 

0 

s 

4- 

+ 

-1- 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

-f 

0 

+ 

s 

0 

Potassium  nitrate 

0 

0 

o 

o 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

o 

0 

o 

0 

0 

0 

No  salt 

o 

o 

o 

s 

0 

0 

0 

o 

+ 

0 

0 

o 

0 

0 

0 

0 

76 


ROPIXESS   I.\-   WATTLE    BARK  IXFUSIONS, 


Certain  of  the  tests  were  examined  by  plate  cultui'e  from  time  to  time,  and  it 
was  found  that  Al  was  pure  on  the  1st  and  4th  days.  Phase  B2  was  pure  on 
the  12th  daj-.  Phase  A2a  appeared  to  be  a  mixture  of  Al  and  A2.  Phasj  A2 
seemed  to  \k-  influenced  in  its  persistence  by  the  salt.  In  the  sodium  lactate  test 
it  was  pure  on  the  12th  day,  in  the  citrate  it  contaLued  a  few  of  Al  tm  the  7th 
day  and  on  the  same  day  the  sodium  chloride  test  consisted  chiefly  of  Al. 

In  the  presence  of  sodium  acetate  and  of  calcium  nitrate,  not  only  was  1  here 
no  sUme  formed,  but  there  was  a  complete  absence  of  growth,  a  circumstance 
which  led  to  the  examination  of  the  influence  of  the  acetate  ujiou  the  production 
of  ropiness  in  bark  extracts  infected  with  rope-producing  organisms. 

The  quantity  of  dextrose  in  the  medium  did  not  seem  to  affect  the  results  to 
any  degTee,  for  the  medium  was  strengthend  with  3  ^r  of  dextrose  and  seeded 
with  Al.  Calcium  chloride  gave  a  slight  and  fugitive  ropiness  on  the  1st  day 
and  citrate  gave  a  fugitive  ropiness  on  the  2nd  day.  All  the  other  tests  were 
negative . 

As  the  activity  of  the  saline  constituents  appeared  to  be  of  importance,  espe- 
cially in  regard  to  the  nmtation  of  the  organism,  another  test  was  made.  In  this 
the  dextrose  was  used  in  2  %  strength  with  meat-extract  0.2.5  %,  and  the  salts  as 
before,  viz.,  0.1  %  of  the  anhydrous  salt.  The  infecting  phases  liad  been  taken 
from  typical  colonies  two  days  before  the  experiment  was  started. 


a . . 

Table 

xvii.- 

—Salts  with  De.xtrose 

2%. 

Phase 

Al 

A2 

A2a. 

B2 

Days  at  28° 

1 

2 

3 

+ 

7 
0 

10 
0 

1 
0 

2 

+ 

3 

+ 

7 

+ 

10 
0 

17 
0 

1 
+ 

2 

+ 

3 

+ 

7 
0 

10 
0 

17 
0 

1 

s 

2' 

+ 

3 

+ 

7,10 

17 

1.  Magnesium 

S 

+ 

O 

0 

0 

snlphato. 

2.  Calcium 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

s 

Si 

0 

+ 

-f 

+ 

s 

s 

lactate. 

'^.  Calcium 

s 

+ 

s 

0 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

o 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+  ,- 

0 

chloride. 

4.  Calcium 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

o 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0  0 

0 

nitrate. 

5.  Calcium 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

s 

0 

sulphate, 

6.  Sodium 

0 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

s 

0 

chloride. 

7.  Soflium 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

4- 

+ 

_L 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

-1- 

+ 

+ 

0 

phosphate. 

8.  Soclium 

0 

0 

-1- 

0 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

0 

s 

_t- 

+ 

0 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

lactate. 

9.  Sod.  Pot. 

0 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

s 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

o 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

o 

tartrate. 

10.  rotassium 

o 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

o 

citrate. 

11.  Sodium 

0 

+ 

+ 

0, 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

4- 

succinate. 

12.  No  salt. 

0 

+ 

+ 

0  0 

+ 

+ 

± 

+ 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

± 

+ 

0 

0 

On  the  seventh  day  some  of  the  tests  were  plated  with  the  Inllciuitig  results: — 
Al  (succinate),  typical  colonies  of  Al. 
A2  (sod.  lactate),  colonies  of  Al  with  stippled  centres. 
A2a  (control),  a  mixture  of  colonies  of  Al  and  A2. 
B2   (magn.  sulph.).  colonies  of  Bl,  some  with  stippled  centres. 


BY   R.   GREIG-SMITH. 


77 


On  the  teuth  day  other  tests  were  plated. 

A2  (phosphate),  typical  colonies  of  Al  as  well  as  transition  colonies 

ol'  the  same. 
A2a  (citrate),  typical  colonies  of  Al. 
B2  (cale.  sulph.),  colonies  of  Bl  with  2  %  of  B2. 
B2  (phosphate),  colonies  of  Bl. 
B2    (citrate),  colonies  of  Bl. 
The  disappearance  of  the  ropiness  in  the  test  with  magTiesium  sulphate  iirst 
suggested  the  possibility  of  there  being  a  phase  of  B2  secreting  a  digestive  sub- 
stance akin  to  Al,  and  the  actual  presence  of  this  phase  Bl  upon  the  plates  led 
to  the  examination  of  the  stock  culture.     The  latter  was  found  to  be  pure  B2  and 
the  conclusion  was  reached  that  bacterium  A  was  not  peculiar  in  alone  possessing 
phases  or  conditions  with  less  physiological  stability  than  races. 

Part  of  expei-iment  xvii.  was  repeated  to  confirm  the  changeability  of  phase 
B2,  in  media  containing  1  %  of  dextrose,  0.25  %  of  meat-extract,  and  0.1  %  of 
anhydrous  magnesium  sulphate,   sodium   chloride  or  sodium  lactate. 


Tabic 

xvii] 

■- 

-Change 

of  Phase. 

Phase 

Al 

A2 

A2a 

B2 

Days  at  28° 

1 

2 

3 

6 

8 

1 

2 

3 

6 

+ 

8 

S 

1 

+ 

2 

-f- 

3 

+ 

6 

+ 

8 
0 

1 

+ 

2 

+ 

3 

+ 

6 

+ 

8 

1.  Magnesium  sulphate 

0 

S 

s 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

-f 

0 

2.   Sodium  chloride 

O 

0 

s 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

3.   Sodium  lactate 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

S 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

s 

Plates  were  prepared- on  the  eighth  day. 

A2   (magn.  sulph.),  Al,  coarsely  granular  as  well  as  transition  fonns. 

A2  (sod.  chloride),  Al  with  stippled  centre. 

B2  (mag-n.  sulph.),  Bl,  some  with  stippled  centres. 

B2   (sod.  chloride),  phase  Bl. 

The  experiment  confirms  the  previous  one,  and  shows  the  alteration  of  phases 
A2  and  B2  into  phases  Al  and  Bl,  in  the  presence  of  dextrose,  some  aid  being 
possibly   given  by  the  salt. 

Typical  colonies  of  phase  B2  wei'e  ])ut  into  l)ottles  containing  dextrose  with 
mixed  salts  and  into  s-lycerin  with  sodium  phosphate,  both  with  meat  extract  as 
a  nitrosi'enous  nutrient.  No  ropiness  had  occurred  by  the  third  day  when  plates 
were  prepared .  The  glycerin  contained  phase  Bl  and  B2  with  transition  colonies . 
The  dextrose  did  not  alter  phase  B2. 

Tyijical  colonies  of  phase  B2  were  seeded  into  fluid  media  containing  3  %  of 
levulose  or  dextrose  with  0.2  %  of  potassium  citrate  and  0.25  %  of  meat- 
extract.  In  four  days  the  dextrose  medium  was  ropy,  while  the  levulose  was 
not,  and  both  contained  the  introduced  phase  in  pure  culture.  By  the  seventh  day 
the  ropiness  had  disappeared  in  the  dextrose  flask,  but  plate  cultivation  showed 
that  it  contained  the  introduced  cohesive  phase  B2  only.  The  levulose  meHum 
contained  the  cohesive  and  introduced  phase  B2,  together  with  25  %  of  the  diffuse 
pha.se  Bl.  The  diffuse  phase  is  akin  to  Al,  but  differs  in  being  brownish  or  pale 
buff  instead  of  yellowish  or  pale  straw.     Furthermore,  there  is  the  suggestion   of 


7g 


ROPINESS    IN    WATTLK    BARK    IMFDSIONS, 


a  wavy  structure  as  it'  the  tlatteued  colony  lia<l  an  undulating'  surfaci'.  No  further 
change  hail  occurred  by  the  sixteenth  day. 

The  diffuse  phase,  Bl,  was  grown  in  a  glycerin  phosphate  medium  to  see  in 
which  dircclion  an  alteration  would  occur.  On  the  17th  day,  H'J  was  present,  but 
it  had  disappeared  l)y  the  23rd.  In  another  test  tiie  bacteria  on  the  Otli  day 
were  all  transition  forms  of  B2,  and  on  the  12th  there  were  75  %  of  Bl,  15  % 
of  B2,  and  10  %  of  the  transition  form  noted  on  the  Gth. 

The  results  seem  to  show  that  dextrose  tends  to  maintain  the  phase  112  and 
glycerin  the  phase  Bl,  but  this  is  influenced  by  the  nature  of  the  salt. 

Ordinary  bouillon  maintains  the  phase  B2  and  that  is  why  the  existence  of 
a  phase  lil  was  not  suspected  for  a  loiii;'  time.  II  is  ilit'lVvent  with  A2  which  is 
slowly  changed  to  Al  in  bouillon. 

After  finding  that  levulose  favoured  the  production  of  the  ropy  substimce 
more  than  dextrose,  the  experiment  with  the  various  salts  was  repeated  upon  two 
occasions  using  levulose  as  the  carbohydrate.  The  jihases  Al,  A2  and  B2  were 
tested,  and,  for  the  sake  of  com]iaiison.  a  further  set  of  salts  with  dextrose  was 
used  for  B2.  The  experiments  duplicated  one  another,  and  the  salient  points  of 
both  are  embodied  in  the  table.  Both  sets  of  Al  (levulose)  and  B2  (dextrose) 
are  omitted  because  they  were  almost  entirely  negative;  the  second  set  of  A2 
was  the  same  as  the  first  set. 

After  sterilisation,  the  dextrose  medium  in  the  first  experiment  bad  a  reaction 
of  — 1.5°  to  methyl-red  and  -(-3°  to  phenolphthalein,  and  this  was  sufficiently 
{•Ikaline  to  give  precipitates  in  the  tubes  containing  the  salts  of  lime.  In  the 
course   of  the   experiment,   the  reaction  was  tested  on  the  seventh  day  in   tests   4 


Table  xix. — Levulose  ivith  Various  Salts. 


■phase 

A2 

B2 

B2  (Second 
Experiment) 

Sugar 

Levulose 

Levulose 

Days  at  28° 

1 

« 

12 

.3 

5 

7 

10 

12 

3 

5 

9 

+ 

14 

1.     Magnesium 

S 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

s 

+ 

+ 

1- 

+ 

S 

sulphate 

2.     Calcium 

s 

+ 

4- 

0 

o 

0 

0 

0 

O 

0 

+ 

+ 

lactate 

:!.     Calcium 

0 

+ 

4- 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

s 

s 

+ 

+ 

chloride 

4.     Potassium 

0 

+ 

+ 

s 

s 

+ 

+ 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

-f 

sulphate 

.'5.     Sodium 

o 

+ 

+ 

s 

s 

s 

o 

0 

+ 

+ 

H~ 

+ 

chloride 

(i.     Calcium 

s 

+ 

+ 

+ 

s 

s 

s 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

4- 

sulphate 

7.     Sodium 

o 

+ 

+ 

o 

s 

0 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

phosphate 

8.     Soflium 

0 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

0 

0 

o 

■  + 

+ 

+ 

+ 

lactate 

9.     Sodium  Potas. 

0 

+ 

+ 

s 

s 

■s 

o 

0 

s 

s 

+ 

+ 

tartrate 

10.     Potassium 

0 

+ 

+ 

0 

s 

s 

s 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

j- 

citrate 

11.     Sodium 

0 

+ 

+ 

0 

s 

s 

s 

s 

+ 

+ 

+ 

s 

succinate 

12.     No  salt 

0 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

4- 

O- 

0 

+ 

+' 

+ 

4- 

By    l;.    GREIG-SMITH.  79 

and  5.  Piiase  A'2  with  levulose  showed  -{-3°  to  methyl-red  and  -j-9-5°  to  phen- 
( Iphthalcin,  while  B2  with  dextrose  showed  -(-11°  and  -}-14.5°  respectively. 
Thus  there  was  an  ap]>roximate  increase  in  the  acidity  during  the  seven  days'  incu- 
bation of  -|-5°  with  levulose  and  -j-12°  with  dextrose.  It  is  possible  that  the 
greater  development  of  ropiness  with  levulose  may  be  traced  to  the  lesser  produc- 
tion of  acid  favouring  the  stal)ility  of  the  cohesive  phases  of  tlie  bacteria. 

Phase  Al,  in  the  tirst  experiment,  showed  no  ropines.s  in  any  of  tlie  tests  luilil 
the  10th  day,  when  that  with  succinate  was  ropy,  and  contained  a  mixture  of 
jihases  Al  and  A2a.  In  the  second  exiK'riment,  the  tests  were  negative  until  llie 
5th  day,  when  the  phosphate  gave  a  positive  result.  On  the  13th  day,  the  phos- 
phate contained  A2  with  a  few  transition  forms  of  Al .  On  the  same  day  the 
potassium  sulphate  and  sodium  chloride  tests  contained  the  phase  Al  with  a  few 
ivansition  forms.  On  the  19th  day,  the  ropiness  had  disappeared  in  the  phos-' 
l>halc  test,  and  the  medium  contained  A2,  2.5  %,  Al,  5  %  and  transition  forms  70 
% .  In  this  case  the  pliosphate  ajiparently  altered  the  phase  to  A2,  which  pro- 
duced the  ropy  substance  and,  as  the  i)r(jportion  of  A2  decreased,  the  ropy  sub- 
stance dissolved.     Al  has  been  omitted  from  the  table. 

Phase  A2  produced  ropiness  witli  all  the  salts  as  well  as  in  tlie  control.  It 
wa-s  api)areiitly  too  active  to  reijuire  any  assistance  from  the  saline  constituents. 
On  the  1 2th  day,  the  tests  containing  the  salts  of  lime  were  gelatinous  as  well 
as  ropy,  and  the  media  flowed  like  a  soft  jelly.  In  the  second  experiment,  ])ha.se 
A2a  was  used,  and  all  the  tests  were  ropy  on  the  2nd  day,  and  the  ropiness 
persisted  to  the  end  of  the  experiment  on  the  19tli  day.  Thus  A2a  duplicated 
A2. 

Phase  H2  with  dextrose  gave  a  slight  ro])incss  on  the  first  day  with  tartrate 
and  succinate,  but  it  liad  vanished  by  the  Si'd  day.  Then  all  tests  were  negative 
until  the  12th  day,  when  the  citrate  test  became  ropy.  In  the  second  experi- 
ment no  ropiness  was  obtained  with  any  of  the  salts. 

Phase  B2  with  levulose  gave  more  favourable  results,  but  there  was  a  derided 
(iitt'erence  lietween  the  two  experiments.  Tlint  made  on  the  later  date  gave  a 
greater  ara<iunt  of  ropiness  which  the  control  test  seemed  to  indicate  as  being 
due   to    n    more  active    condition  of    the  infecting  organism. 

On  the  whole  the  saline  tests,  and  especially  those  in  the  last  two  experi- 
ments, seem  to  indicate  that  given  a  suitable  source  of  carbon  and  an  active 
bacterium,  tlie  salts  employed  in  the  tests  have  little  influence  in  ))i-oducing 
lopiness.  When  the  bacterium  is  not  active,  the  salt  may  alter  the  jihase,  and 
thus  assist  in  the  ]iroduction  of  a  ropy  lif(uid . 

Acetates  mnl  Nitrates  ('lii'rk  /I'ojjmesx. 

The  saline  tests  showed  that  nitrates  and  acetates  prevented  the  development 
of  ropiness  in  artificial  media,  and  naturally  this  led  to  testing  the  influence  of 
the  acetate  in  hark  infusions  to  see  if  the  same  jirohibition  occurred. 

One  part  of  bark  was  added  to  two  ])arts  of  water  and  varying  amounts 
of  sodium  acetate  were  added  to  the  portions  lief'ore  seeding-  with  B2.  Ropiness 
develo])ed  in  the  control,  but  not  in  the  jiortion  containing  0.03  %,  i.e.,  3  parts 
per  10,000. 

Another  test  was  made  with  bark  and  water  containing  0.02  '^/r  of  acetate, 
iiortions  being  seeiled   with   ))iiases  Al.   A2  and   P>2 .      The   controls  became  ropy. 


80  ROPINESS  DT  WATTLE    BARK   INFUSIONS, 

and  so  did  phase  A2  with  the  acetate.  The  phases  Al  and  B2  with  the  acetate 
did  not  become  ropy. 

From  these  two  tests,  it  appears  that  the  limiting  strength  of  the  acetate  for 
cheeking  ropiness  in  bark  infusions  lies  between  2  and  3  parts  per  10,000. 

Still  one  more  test  was  made  with  bark  and  water  containing  1.  2,  3  and  4 
parts  of  acetate  of  sodium  per  10,000,  the  liquids  being  seeded  with  phases  Al, 
A2,  and  B2.  Ropiness  developed  in  the  tests  seeded  with  phases  A2  and  B2 
containing  one  part  per  10,000  but  not  in  the  stronger  solutions.  Phase  Al  did 
not  produce   ropiness  in  the  weakest    solution. 

The  conclusion  that  we  come  to  from  al  consideration  of  all  the  tests  is  that 
crystalline  sodium  acetate,  when  added  to  the  water  used  for  extracting  wattle 
bark,  in  the  proportion  of  three  parts  of  salt  to  10,000  of  water  or  3  pounds  to 
1,000  gallons  will  prevent  the  formation  of  ropiness  in  wattle  bark  extract. 

The  Natuie  of  the  Eopt/  Substance. 

An  attempt  was  made  to  obtain  the  slime  in  bulk  by  growing  the  bacterium 
A  in  fluid  media  containing  dextrose  or  glycerin,  but  the  quantities  of  slime  were 
very  small.  This  may  possibly  have  been  caused  by  autodigestion  as  noted  in 
the  various  experiments  with  sjoithetic  media,  but  of  this  I  have  no  definite  in- 
formation to  offer.  More  successful  results  were  got  by  gi-owing  the  organism 
on  solid  agar.  Several  drojis  of  a  broth  culture  of  the  organism  was  smeared 
on  plates  of  a  medium  containing  glycerin  5  %,  meat-extract  1  So  potassium 
nitrate  0.1  %  and  sodium  phosphate  0.2  %.  The  first  gi-owth  obtained  in  a 
few  days  was  yellow,  loose,  and  was  easily  scraped  off.  The  second  growth  that 
came  up  was  translucent  and  elastic.  It  adhered  w^th  more  or  less  tenacity  to 
the  agar,  and  some  bits  could  not  be  removed.  It  was  noted  that  the  toughness 
increased  with  time,  and  the  reason  for  this  was  explained  later  when  it  was 
learned  that  glycerin  caused  the  phase  Al  to  alter  progressively  to  A2,  the  more 
insoluble  phase. 

The  collection  of  films  was  treated  with  alcohol  and  filtered ;  the  coagulum 
was  treated  with  water  in  which  it  simply  swelled  up;  there  was  no  solution. 
The  swollen  slime  was  heated  in  an  autoclave  at  three  atmospheres'  pressure  for 
half  an  hour  when  a  solution  and  a  sediment  were  obtained.  The  liquid  was  fil- 
tered with  the  aid  of  aluminiimi  hydrate,  and  the  filtrate  was  concentrated  by 
evaporation.  A  portion  sufficiently  dilute  to  enable  light  to  pass  through  was 
tested  in  the  polariscope  and  found  to  give  a  reading  of  -|-2.i2''  in  a  200  mm. 
tube.  Thus  the  gum  was  dextro-rotatory.  The  solution  was  further  evaporated 
to  a  mucilaginous  consistency  and  tested  dropwise  with  various  reagents. 

Coagulation  was  effected  with  alcohol,  basic  lead  acetate,  ammoniacal  lead 
acetate,  ferric  chloride  and  phosphotungstic  acid,  but  the  following  had  no  act-on: 
lead  acetate,  baryta  water,  lime  water,  milk  of  lime,  copper  sulphate,  the  same 
followed  by  sodium  hydrate.  Fehling's  solution,  iodine,  tannic  acid,  sodium  hydrate 
or  sulphuric  acid.  These  are  the  general  reactions  with  the  autoclaved  slimes, 
i.e.,  slimes  which  by  the  autoclave  treatment  have  l)een  separated  into  a  soluble 
gummy  matter  nn<l  into  coagulated  proteid.  The  natural,  uncoagulated  ropy  sub- 
stance would  behave  i|uite  differently.  In  one  case  where  a  slime  was  autociaved 
for  five  and  a  half  houi-s.  coagulation  was  effected  only  with  basic  lead  acetate 
and  by  phosphotungstic  acid. 


BY   R.   GRElG-SMITii. 


81 


The  sohible  condition  of  the  gummy  matter  does  not  appear  to  be  stable,  for 
when  it  was  evaporated  to  dryness  it  became  insoluble,  and  did  not  again  form 
a   solution  with   water. 

The  thickened  mucilage  which  did  not  contain  any  reducing  sugars,  was 
boiled  for  ten  hours  with  5  %  sulphuric  acid  under  an  aerial  condenser,  and 
during  the  hydrolysis  it  was  noted  that,  like  all  the  bacterial  gums  that  I  have 
examined,  furfural  was  given  off.  The  solution  was  neutralised  with  barium  car- 
bonate, filtered,  treated  with  basic  lead  acetate,  filtered,  treated  with  sodium  car- 
bonate, again  filtered,  acidified  with  acetic  acid,  and  evaporated.  The  solution 
ivas  dextro-rotatory . 

The  osazone  was  prepared  in  the  usual  manner,  and  the  bulk  of  the  tar 
was  removed  by  percolating  the  dried  crystals  with  chloroform,  then  by  a  mix- 
ture of  chloroform  and  alcohol,  and  finally  with  chloroform.  The  crystalline 
mass  was  dissolved  in  alcohol  and  allowed  to  stand.  Successive  crops  of  crystals 
deposited,  and  were  removed,  dried  and  tested  for  their  melting  points.  These 
ranged  from  202°  to  193°.  The  intermediate  crops  were  again  crystallised,  but 
in  no  case  could  crystals  with  a  m.p.  higher  than  202°  to  203°  be  obtained. 
Doubtless  they  were  a  mixture  of  glucosazone,  m.p.  205°,  and  galactosazone,  193°, 
but  the  quantities  were  always  too  small  to  enable  the  pure  glucosazone  to  be 
obtained.  It  is  possible  that  the  small  quantity  of  glucose  was  present  in  the 
hydrolysed  gums  as  an  impurity.  In  testing  the  gum  previous  to  hydrolysis  for 
sugar,  no  positive  indication  was  obtained,  but  it  must  be  remembered  that  only 
a  small  portion  was  used  and,  while  the  impurity  may  not  have  been  detectable 
in  a  small  portion,  it  may  show  itself  in  the  bulk  after  hydrolysis. 

As   an   example   of  the  relative  amounts   of  crystals    obtained,    the  following 
weights  from  a  half  portion  of  the  hydrolysed  gum  are  given. 
1st  crop —  12  milligrams,  201° 


2nd  , 

,  —170 

195° 

3rd  , 

,  —138 

193° 

4th  , 

.  —  50 

193° 

5th  , 

,  -  27 

193° 

6th  , 

.  -  2 

190° 

Mother-liquor  evaporated  and  treated  with  chloroform,  which  dissolved  a 
brownish-yellow    tarry   matter. 

residue   . .   . .  22  milligrams,  181° 

The  second  bacterium,  B2,  was  grown  on  plates  of  levulose  asparagin  tannin 
agar  and  yielded  a  number  of  tough  skins  which  Avere  easily  pulled  from  the  agar 
surfaces.  It  was  not  always  possible  to  get  the  ropy  material  upon  this  medium 
for  several  later  attempts  failed.  The  slime  of  A2  is  uuich  more  readily  obtained. 
There  was,  however,  sufficient  slime  to  enable  a  detennination  of  the  hydrolytic 
li-cduets  to  l)e  made.  The  rather  thick  emulsion,  for  the  gum  after  solution  by 
the  autoclave  treatment  became  partly  coagulated  upon  evaporation,  was  unsuit- 
>  lie  for  testing  the  rotary  power.  The  osazones  were  precisely  similar  to  those 
furnished  by  A2.  and  yielded  similar  fractional  crops  of  crystals  melting  at  tem- 
peratures ranging  from  202°  to  193°,  showing  that  the  hydrolytic  products  of  the 
sHme  of  B2  were  precisely  similar  in  composition  to  those  of  A2. 

The  evidence  goes  to  show  that  the  ropy  substance  is  essentially  a  dextroro- 
tatory galactan. 

A  crop  of  films  of  the  B2  slime  of  B2  was  subsequently  obtained  upon  im 
agar   medium  containing   agar   2  %,   saccharose  5    %,   ammonium  sulphate  1   %, 


82  ROPIXESS  IJf  WATTLE   BARK   INFUSIONS, 

potassium  citrate  0.3  <^-r  with  0.1  St  <'t  taunic  aciil  atlded  at  tlie  time  of  poiiriiig 
the  jilates.  After  17  clays  at  22°,  the  tihiis  were  jiicked  off.  suspeiuled  in  water 
overnight,  and  coagulated  with  alcohol.  The  water  and  alcohol  treatment  was 
repeated.  The  films  suspended  ill  water  were  heated  in  the  autoclave  fo'"  15 
minutes  at  three  atmospheres  pressure,  l)ut  tlie  treatment  did  not  liquefy  them. 
The  water  was  acidified  with  two  c.c.  of  normal  sulplnnic  acid  wliich  produced  an 
acidity  of  -)-5°,  and  the  suspension  was  again  autoclaved  for  an  liour.  The 
films  liad  dissolved.  The  solution  was  carefully  evaporated  to  smaller  volume, 
and  a  ijoi'tion  was  clarified  with  alumina  cream  and  the  rotation  of  the  fluid 
observed.  The  ash-free  solids  had  a  specific  rotation  of  [a]D  =  -|-0.017°.  The 
solution  gave  a  yellow  precipitate  with  Fehling's  .solution,  and  it  apjieared  that 
the  treatment  had  partly  hydmlysed  the  gum.  It  was  treated  witli  alcohol,  and 
the  unaltacked  gum  was  filtered  off.  The  ash-free  solids  in  the  filtrate  had  a 
specific  rotation  of  [,i]ji  ^=-|-0.002°.  The  ditlcrence  between  these  two  rota- 
tions shows  that  the  gum.  ]ireci|>itabl('  by  alcohol  is  slightly  dextro-rotatory. 

Tlie  Aciih  fiiriiicd  hij   the  Biirleriii. 

In  the  routine  testing,  the  bacteria,  A  and  B,  were  found  to  produce  acid 
and  gas  from  dextrose  and  saccharose  when  these  sugars  were  present  in  broth. 
The  nature  of  the  acids  was  further  examined.  Tlie  bacteria  were  grown  in  a 
medium  containing  5  %  of  dextrose,  1  %  of  meat-extract,  and  0.5  %  of  sodium 
jihosphate  with  the  addition  of  chalk  from  time  to  time.  The  bacterium  B2  used 
up  the  carbonate  more  quickly  than  Al  or  A2,  and  naturally  yielded  a  greater 
quantity  of  acids  when  tlie  cultures  were  worked  up  at  the  end  of  a  month's 
inculiation. 

Tlie  methoil  followed  in  determining  the  nature  of  the  acids,  etc.,  was  es.sen- 
tially  that  described  in  these  Proceedings* 

Ethyl  alcohol  was  found  in  small  amount  in  the  cultures  from  both  bacteria. 
It  was  proved  by  giving  the  iodoform  test,  by  burning  with  a  blue  flame  and  by 
having  aB.P.  of  79°. 

A  small  quantity  of  insoluble  fatly  acid  was  ohlaiiicd  fnim  the  culture  of  each 
bacterium.  That  from  A  melted  at  37°,  and  from  B  at  32°.  Both  were  pro- 
bably mixtures,  but  the  quantities  were  too  small  to  separate.  The  softer  acids 
of  B  were  spread  on  a  piece  of  filter  paper  and  incubated  at  28°.  when  the 
more  fluid  portion  was  absorbed,  leaving  a  resid\ie  which  melted  at  40°,  and  be- 
came clear  at  42.5°. 

The  volatile  acids  did  not  contain  formic  acid.  The  solutions  were  neutralised 
with  baryta  water,  and  after  evaporation  were  dried  at  140°.  The  A  salts  con- 
tained .52.36  %  of  barium,  the  B  salts  53.8  %.  As  barium  acetate  contains 
53.73  %  of  l)ariiuu.  it  is  clear  that  the  volatile  acids  in  both  ceases  consisted 
entirely   of   acetic  acid. 

The  non-volatile  acids  contained  a  small  (|uantity  of  an  acid  giving  a  lime 
salt  insoluble  in  70  9r  alcohol.  After  aciilification  and  extraction  with  ether, 
monoclinic  prisms,  melting  at  182°,  were  ol)tained.  Succinic  acid  under  the 
same  conditions  melted  at  the  same  temperatnre,  and  thus  it  was  proxcil  that 
botli  bacteria  form  a  small  (|uantity  of  succinic  acid. 

The  only  other  non-volatile  acid  was  lactic.  The  zinc  salt  of  lactic  acid  was 
jircpared    from  two    cultures  of  the  A    bacterium  originally   seeded    with  Al  and 


•/.or.  cit.,  1901,  606;  190.%  114. 


r>Y  K.   GREIG-SMlTIi.  83 

A2.  The  ihst:  Al.  was  separated  as  the  lime  salt  t'vom  the  non-volatile  acids; 
the  second  was  prepared  directly  t'nim  the  total  acids.  Al  contained  18.12  % 
ot  water  of  crystallisation,  and  A2  contained  18.42  %.  The  latter  showed  a 
specific  rotation  ot  [Jp  --=  — 3.35°,  and  upon  being  acidified  with  hydrochloric 
acid  in  the  proportion  of  2  c.c.  of  strong  acid  to  20  c.c.  of  solution  it  showed  no 
rotation.  The  acid  was  theiefore  inactive  lactic  acid  with  a  laevo-rotatory  zinc 
salt,  and  this  was  apparently  the  only  form  of  acid  present. 

In  preparing  the  zinc  salt  of  the  B2  acid,  three  crops  of  crystals  were  obtained. 
The  first  weighed  2.02  grams,  and  contained  13. 2G  %  of  water  of  crystallisation. 
Zinc  jjaralactate  contains  12.9  %,  equivalent  to  two  molecules.  The  zinc  salt 
when  dissolved  in  water  had  a  specific  rotation  of  [aJD  ^  — 5.18",  and  with 
the  adilition  of  2  c.c.  of  strong  hydrochloric  acid  to  20  c.c,  the  rotation  became 
[Jd  =  -(-2.74°.  The  firet  crop  of  crystals  therefore  consisted  of  paralactate. 
This  acid  is  said  to  be  contained  in  meat-extract,  but  in  this  ease  it  was  the  result 
of  tile  bacterial  activity,  because  it  was  not  found  in  the  cultures  from  Bacterium 
A  which  was  grown  in  media  prepared   fiom  the  same  formula. 

The  second  croj)  of  crystals  weighed  0.8  grams,  and  contained  15.18  %  of 
water  of  crystallisation,  showing  it  to  be  a  mixture  of  two  forms  of  acid.  The 
third  crop  weighed  0.30  grams,  and  contained  18.75  %  of  water.  The  zinc  salt 
of  ordinary  ethylidene  or  fermentation  lactic  acid  contams  18.18  %,  equivi-.lent 
to  three  molecules  of  water,  and  this  was  undoubtedly  the  form  of  acid  in  the 
third  crop  of  crystals. 

The  calcium  salt  was  prepared  from  a  portion  of  the  non-volatile  acids.  It 
containc<l  26.50  %  of  water,  equivalent  to  4J  molecules  (26.2  %),  and  was* 
either  a  mixture  of  the  calcium  salts  of  the  two  forms  of  acid,  or  it  was  the 
more  insoluble  paralactate,  as  was  indicated  by  the  comparative  (fuantity  obtained 
(2.0  grams).  The  calcium  salt  of  the  ordinaiy  :i<-i<l  would  probal)ly  have  been 
in  the  mother  liquor  from  the  crystals. 

The  acids  formed  by  the  two  bacteria,  A  and  B,  from  dextrose  in  the  pre- 
sence of  chalk  have  been  shown  to  consist  chiefly  of  lactic  and  acetic  acids  with 
small  quantities  of  succinic  acid  and  mixed  insoluble  fatty  acids.  Ethyl  alcohol 
was  also  formed  in  small  amount,  and  it  may  be  that  this  was  the  source  of  the 
acetic  acid.  There  was  a  difference  in  the  nature  of  tiie  lactic  acids.  Both 
bacteria  formed  the  ordinary  fermentation  lactic  acid,  but  B2,  in  addition,  ]iro- 
duced  the  dextro-rotatory  paralactie   acid. 

A  Glucoside  may  he  formed. — When  the  A2  culture  was  acidifle<l  witli  sul- 
phuric acid  and  extracted  with  ether,  a  quantity  of  fllras  was  carried  uji  by  the 
&ther  and  conveyed  to  the  distillation  flask.  At  the  end  of  the  extraction,  the 
fther  was  shaken  up  with  water  and  the  sui)ernatant  ether  containing  the  acids 
wa.s  used  for  their  identification.  The  yellowish  watery  liquid  was  evaporated, 
and  yielded  a  syrup  which  was  assumed  to  be  glucose  carried  over  with  the 
films.  Upon  ta-sting  it.  however,  it  was  found  to  be  intensely  bitter.  The  syrup 
was  diluted  with  water,  acidified  with  acid  and  shaken  up  with  chloroform.  The 
chloroform  was  evaporated  off,  and  a  yellow  bitter  syrup  obtained.  The  acid 
solution  was  treated  with  ammonia  in  excess  and  again  extracted  with  chloro- 
form. Upon  evaporating  the  chloroform,  a  small  quantity  of  a  colourless  bitter 
syrup  remained.  Tl)e  presence  of  a  glucoside  is  therefore  indicated,  and  should 
this  prove  to  be  correct,  the  further  examination  will  be  dealt  with  in  a  future 
paper. 


84  KOPINESS   IN   WATTLE   BARK   IXIXSIOXS, 

Cultural  Cluiructers. 
BACTERiUil  A,  witb  phases  Al  ami  A'J.  A2a. 
Morpholo(jij.—A.  Gram-negative,  motile,  short  rod  with  rouudod  ends.  It 
appears  generally  as  a  rod  0.5  X  1/^j  but  varies  from  an  apparent  coccus  to 
rods  up  to  2/i  in  leng-th.  Spores  were  never  observed.  The  flagella  are  long 
and  vary  in  number.  They  are  frequently  single,  and  polar,  but  more  often  they 
are  peritrichous.     Up  to    five  have  been    observed. 

Nutrient  ac/ar  stroke.— X  raised,   glistening,  .canary-coloured  growth  of  loose 
consistency.     The  cohesive  phase  A2  grows  as  a  dry  rough  expansion. 

Nutrient  agar  colonies.— Xiter  a  day's  incubation  at  28°  there  is  little  dis- 
tinction between  the  phases  beyond  the  tints  under  the  microscope.  Al  is  yel- 
lowish, A2  is  gTey,  and  all  phases  are  either  homogeneous  or  have  a  finely  granu- 
lar centre.  Differences  are  readily  seen  on  the  second  day,  when  Al  is  circular, 
slightly  raised  and  yellowish,  while  A2  and  A2a  are  milky  white  and  dome- 
shaped.  A2a  maintains  the  dome  shape,  bvit  A2  has  developed  or  will  develop 
a  more  or  less  flattened  and  corrugated  base,  so  that  the  whole  colony  has  a 
nipple-shape.  In  consistency  Al  is  quite  loose,  A2  and  A2a  are  ropy  or  tough, 
and  adhere  firmly  to  the  agar  from  which  the  colony  has  to  be  dug  away.  A2a 
is  more  ropy  than  A2.  Microscopically,  Al  is  canary-coloured,  A2  and  A2a 
are  smoke-coloured  or  gi-ey.  Al  has  a  granular  centre  witTi  homogeneous  outer 
portion.  A  ring  of  egg-shaped  granules  is  frequently  seen  around  the  centre 
among  the  smaller  granules  which  become  finer  and  ultimately  vanish  in  the 
homogeneous  portion.  The  granulation  may  be  replaced  by  a  stippling  due  to 
'the  presence  of  small  clusters  of  crystals  of  triple  phosphate.  In  old  plates, 
four  or  five  days,  the  agar  becomes  studded  with  comparatively  large  aggregates 
of  the  same  crystals.  A2a  is  round,  has  a  dark  centre  and  a  cog-wheel  struc- 
lure  at  the  margin.  In  some  cases  the  centre  is  lighter,  and  a  rosette  structure 
can  be  maae  out.  A  marginal  ring  shows  protrusions  which  alternate  with  tlie 
points  of  the  rosette  giving  rise  to  the  cog-wheel   appearance. 

A2  is  not  rounded  or  circular  like  A2a,  but  is  more  or  less  roughly  dentate. 
There  are  usually  from  five  to  seven  lobes,  more  or  less  roughly  pointed,  and 
the  rough  points  consist  of  frog-s]iawn-like  masses  of  gi-anules.  The  internal 
stnicture  is  not  visible,  but  there  is  an  occasional  suggestion  of  a  rosette  or 
radial  structure. 

Divergences  from  these  phases  have  been  noted  as  transition  forms.  The 
main  difference  between  Al  and  A2  is  in  the  colour,  the  difference  between  a 
canary  colour  and  a  smoke  tint.  The  yellow  transition  colonies  range  from  the 
more  or  less  pitted  forms  of  the  stippled  or  granular  colonies  of  Al  to  those  in 
which  the  wliole  colony  is  gTanular  with  the  grannies  radiating  to  the  edge  and 
becoming  more  and  more  coarsely  granular  as  tiie  margin  is  approached.  The 
smoke-coloured  transition  colonies  show  a  fibrous  structure,  the  coarse  f.bres 
stretching  from  a  dark  centre  to  near  the  margin.  Some  colonies  have  been 
seen  with  this  fibrous  striicture  at  one  side  and  the  A2  structure  at  the  other. 

The  difference  in  microscopical  structip-r  is  closely  associated  with  tiie  flat, 
dome  or  nipiilc-shaited  macroscopical  structure  of  the  colony. 

"Wlien  the  bacteria  have  been  quiescent  for  some  time,  as,  for  example, 
when  they  have  been  existing  iipon  agar  or  in  brotli  for  a  month  or  two  without 
transfer,  these  differences  may  not  be  noted.  Raised,  flat-topped  colonies  may 
form,  and  these  do  not  show  any  characteristic  markings. 

Ntdrient-gelatin  stnh. — Tn  three  days.  Al  showed  a  filiform  canal  and  sunken 
nail-head.     In  five  days  there  was  a  liiiuefied  saccate  area  at  the  top  of  tlie  canal. 


BY   E.   GREIG-SMITH.  83 

A2  and  A2a  showed  a  filiform  canal  with  an  npper  portion  waved  and  hearing'  a 
flat  nail-head.     In  five  davs  the  nail-head  had  become  a  napiform  softened   area. 

Nutrient  tjelatin  eoloires. — Al  gave  colonies  showing  an  irregular,  granular, 
ivy-leaf-like  structure  in  a  shallow  depression  of  softened  gelatin.  By  the  fifth 
day  the  gelatio  had  H(|ueflcd  and  the  growth  had  broken  up  into  irregular  scat- 
tered grannies.  A2  and  A2a  liquefied  the  medium  slowly,  and  the  colonies  re- 
jnained  as  moruloid  or  frog-spawn-like  masses  of  irregular  gi'anules. 

Glucose  gelatin  colonies. — The  phases  were  all  much  the  same,  and  this  ap- 
plies to  all  media  with  sugar.  Al  gave  pale  yellow  colonies  with  i-aised  centres 
and  raised  circular  margins  (button-shape)  ;  they  were  about  7  mm.  diameter  in 
four  days.  A2  grew  as  irregular  moruloid  masses,  3-5  mm.  in  diameter.  Both 
phases  softened  the  gelatine. 

Dextrose  agar. — Al  gTew  as  a  smooth  raised  colony  of  ropy  consistency;  A2, 
dome-shaped,  with  or  without  a  rugose  margin,  and  the  consistency  wa.s  rubber- 
like rather  than  ropy. 

Bouillon. — A  pronounced  surface  film  and  slightly  turbid  medium  with  a 
faint  deposit  excepting  when  a  film  has  fallen  down.  A2  causes  the  upper  layers 
of  medium  to  be  ropy.  Nitrates  are  reduced  to  nitrites,  indol  is  formed  and 
anmionia    is  produced. 

Potato. — A  scanty,  glistening,   pale  buff  growth. 

Starch. — Faint  saccharification  occurred. 

Litmus-milk. — The  medium  was  unaltered. 

Litmus  broth  icith  sugars,  etc. — Saccharose  and  dextrose  gave  acid  and  gas. 
Mannit  showed  a  bleaching  only,  lactose  was  unaltered. 

Classification    number. — 221  .131.3523. 

Bacterium  B2. 

Morphologg. — As  A2,  but  a  little  stouter  rod,  0.(1^. 

Nutrient   Agar   Stroke. — As   A2. 

Nutrient  Agar  Colonies. — A  corrugated,  dome-shaped  colony  smaller  than  A2, 
in  appearance  like  a  minute  white  raspberry.  Microscopically,  the  colonies  on 
thickly  sown  ]ilates  show  a  granular  central  area  bounded  by  an  irregular,  dark, 
ivy-leaf  shaped  band  outside  which  and  half  way  to  the  edge  there  is  a  dark 
circular  ring;  otherwise  the  colony  structure  is  coarsely  granular.  The  freely- 
growing  colonies  have  often  rosette  or  spoke-like  marking's  extending  from  the 
centre  to  the  repand  edge,  but  the  typical  structure  is  mesenteric. 

Nutrient  gelatin  stab. — As  A2,  but  the  liquefaction  is  very  slow. 

Nutrient  gelatin  colonies. — As  A2. 

Glucose  gelatin  colonies. — As  A2,  but  Ihey  do  not  liquefy  the  medium. 

Dextrose  Agar. — As    A2. 

Bouillon. — As   Al,   but   the   film   is   flakey. 

Potato. — A  glistening  white  growth. 

Starch. — As  A. 

Litmus  milk. — As  A. 

Litmus  broth  with  sugars,  etc. — As  A. 

Classification,  number. — As   A. 

The  two  bacteria  have  some  resemblance  to  Bac.  Atherstonei,  the  variable 
galactan  bacterium  described  by  me  as  having  been  obtained  from  the  tissues  of 
Strgchnos  Atherstonei.*  That  organism  exhibited  two  phases.  The  colonies  in 
glucose-gelatin  grew  as  brittle  transparent  masses,  apparently  containing  a  brittle 


•These  Proceedings,  1904,  442. 


8G  ROPIXESS   IX   WATTLE   BARK   INFUSIONS, 

transparent  ^lun.  anil  as  loose,  yellow,  sliiucy  gi'owtlis.  Tlic  cohesive  ])liase  was 
rapidly  cliangetl  to  the  ilittuse  phase  by  growinj;-  in  s^hieose-selatin  at  30°.  The 
gum  was  a  galaetan,  hut  was  liydrolysed  witli  difficulty,  while  tlie  reactions  oT  the 
mucilage  were  clitt'eretit   from  those  noted  with  the  wattle-hark  hacreria. 

( 'iixri.rsioxs. 

The  imcstigation  was  undertaken  with  the  idea  of  endeavouring  to  eluciilate 
one  of  the  i)roblenis  that  is  occasionally'  met  hy  tlie  tanner.  It  is  possil)le  that 
every  case  of  ropiness  may  not  he  bacterial,  hut  it  may  be  granted  that  in  the 
great  majority  of  cases  it  is  a  Ijacteriological  phenomenon,  and  any  infornuitiim 
regarding  it  sliould  lie  of  value. 

To  attack  the  problem  from  the  side  of  the  tannery  would  he  a  matter  of 
nnich  dilliculty,  for  one  cannot  always  get  cases  of  ropiness  at  suital)lc  times, 
and,  when  rojiiness  does  occur,  circumstances  may  not  be  sucli  as  to  facilitate  the 
investigation.  That  it  is  not  an  easy  ])roblem  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  up  to  {he 
present  it  has  not  been  investigated,  and,  doubtless,  tliis  may  be  traced  to  the 
nudti]iiicity  of  organisms  swarming  in  the  tan-li(jUors  and  tlie  habit  whicli  slime 
bacteria  have  of  growing  in  cliiin])s.  while  most  of  the  other  bacteria  diffuse 
themselves.  It  apiieared  to  be  an  easier  way  to  attack  tlie  problem  from  another 
aspect,  that  of  the  ropiness  that  occurs  in  wattle  bark  infusions,  and  there  is 
every  reason  to  believe  that  the  results  obtained  with  the  infusiims  will  he  laiucly 
applicable  to  tanning  li(|uors. 

In  the  bark  of  wattle  trees,  many  bacteria  may  he  capable  of  producing  ropy 
infusions,  but  so  far  only  two  have  been  found.  They  are  closely  allied  to  one 
another  and  differ,  not  so  much  in  their  bacterioscoi>ic  characters  as  in  their  phy- 
siological properties,  that  is,  in  their  ])ower  of  forming  the  ropy  substance  under 
different  conditions,  especially  as  regards  nutrition.  The  bacteria  lia\'e  been  pro- 
visionally named  A  and  B.  Like  several  gum-formiug  bacteria  which  have  been 
descrilied  by  the  writer,*  each  bacterium  can  show  two  phases,  one  forming'  a 
comparatively  soluble  slime,  the  other  giving  a  viscous  slime. 

The  pos.session  of  two  phases  is  not  unique  and  possibly  a  double  phase  may 
be  expected  to  occur  with  many  slime-forming  bacteria.  The  alteration  of  phase 
is  possibly  associated  with  the  presence  or  comparative  absence  of  a  gum-digesting 
enzyme.  The  soluble  phase  certainly  possesses  a  larger  amount  id'  a  gelatine- 
dissolving  en/.yme,  and  one  can,  at  will,  by  altering  the  incubation  temi)erature, 
obtain  a  mobile   or  a   viscous  fluid. 

There  appears  to  be  something  in  liark  infusions  that  induces  the  snliilile 
phase  to  become  the  insoluble  phase  and  gives  rise  to  ropiness. 

The  tannins  of  hark  infusions  liave  a  prohibiting  action  upon  the  formation 
of  ropiness,  cm  account  of  their  property  of  co.ag'ulating  the  slime,  and  for  this 
to  occur  a  certain  concentration  is  necessary.  For  Racterium  .\  this  is  e(|uiva- 
lent  to  a  specific  gravity  of  1.024,  and  for  Bacterium  B,  1.048.  Pure  tannic 
acid  is  more  active,  for  the  prohibiting  amount  is  much  under  the  (|iianlities  of 
tannin  represented  by  the  gravities  of  the  infusions.  In  synthetic  media.  2  '^ r  of 
tannic  acid  prevents  the  formation  of  ropiness  by  coagulating  the  slime,  as  it  is 
formed,  upon   the  bodies  of  the  bacteria. 

In    view  of  this  differenti.nl    action    of   tannin   as    compared    with    tannic   .-ii-id. 

'Tlie  liaotei-iii  rusponsible  for  tlic  |iv<iiluctiou  tif  the  soIuMe  :iud  uisolulile  wattle 
gums  were  uained  /I.  ticaciae  aud  /?.  iiiitunihiiniiii,  and  it  was  shown  tliat  the  one  form 
could  lie  nlterc'il  ti)  the  other.  //.  .U/irrsloiiei  fthese  Proceedings,  liKH.  H'i)  exists  as 
two  phases,  .me  tunning  a  sqlulilc  sliuie.  the  .■tlu-r  ]iroducing  !in  insoluble  gelatinous 
gabictau. 


BY  R.   UREIG-SillTH. 


87 


tlu'  lial)ilit.v  oL'  weak  taiining'  cud  liiiuors  to  become  ropy  \vill  depend  ui(u:i  the 
taunie  acid,  for  the  tannins  will  have  become  liydrolysed  by  bacterial  action  to 
glucose  and  tannic  acid.  Thus  afresh  liquor  with  asp.  g.  of,  say,  1.02-i,  con- 
taining about  5'^r  of  tannin  will  be  quite  different  in  its  action  to  an  old  liquui 
of  the  same  gra\ity  containing  perhaps  5  %  of  tannic  acid.  Again,  it  has  been 
shown  that  certain  salts,  notably  acetates,  prohibit  the  growth  of  the  rope- 
forming  l)aeteria.  Acetic  acid  is  a  very  common  by-product  of  bacterial  activity, 
and  may  follow  up  the  alcoholic  fermentation  should  yeasts  become  active  in  the 
liciuors.  If  acetates  are  present  in  the  spent  liquors  they  will  have  a  decided 
influence  in  preventing  the  development  of  ropiness.  The  matter  is  therefore 
complicated;   so   much  will   depend  upon  the  composition  of  the   li(|uoi'. 

Once  the  ropiness  is  formed  in  infusions  still  in  contact  with  the  bark,  it 
does  not  disappear  even  although  the  concentration  of  tannin  becomes  greater 
than  that  necessary  to  coagulate  the  slime.  Under  similar  conditions  in  synthetic 
media,  or  in  infusions  out  of  contact  with  (lie  bark,  tlie  riipiness  disappears  either 
through  coagulation  or  digestion. 

The  acidity  of  the  infusion  doubtless  jilays  a  part  in  promoting  ropiness. 
This  was  the  case  with  synthetic  media  which  with  some  phases  of  the  organisms 
gave  most  ropiness  when  the  acidity  varied  from  -|-8  to  -|-12°,  or  when  it  con- 
tained from  0.75  %  to  1  %  of  tannic  acid.  In  opposition  to  thi^,  the  bacteria  when 
grown  in  the  presence  of  chalk  and,  thei-efore,  in  a  neutral  medium,  produced 
ropiness  at  28°,  and  not  at  37° . 

But  the  main  condition  is  the  presence  of  a  sugar  and  of  tlie  many  that  were 
tested,  galactose  was  the  most  efficient  in  promoting  the  formation  of  uuieus. 
Levulose,  saccharose,  dextrose  and  the  non-sugars,  matniit  and  glycerin  were 
nearly  as  good,  while  maltose,  lactose  and  raffinose  wei-e  iucaiiable  of  assisting 
the  slime-forming  function. 

The  nature  of  the  salts  did  not  ajjpeaa'  to  have  nuu-li  lutluence  when  sufh- 
cient  sugar  was  present.  But  with  a  detieieney  of  sugar  (1  %)  or  with  a  feeble 
bacterium,  the  salt  may  play  a  part.  Acetates  and  nitrates  prevented  the  j;rowth 
of  the  acti\-e  bacteria,  and  they  give  us  a  means  of  preventing  the  development 
of  ropiness  in  bark  infusions  and  presumably  in  tanning  liq»iors.  Three  poimds 
of  acetate  of  soda  to  1,000  gallons  of  the  water  used  in  making  the  extract  will - 
prevent    the  development    of    ropiness. 

So  far  as  the  nitrogenous  food  is  concerned,  it  did  not  seem  to  matter  much 
wnetber  meat-extract,  peptone,  asparagin  or  ammonium  sulphate  was  used. 
Nitrates  in  alkaline  solution  will  also  serve,  but  in  the  presence  of  acid  or  what 
comes  to  the  same  thing,  in  the  presence  of  sugar,  they  prohibit  growth. 

The  ropy  substance  itself  is  a  galactan,  and  by  the  hydrolytie  action  of  sul- 
phuric acid  is  converted  to  galactose.  The  insoluble  slime  swells  u]i  enormously 
with  water,  and  in  common  with  most  insoluble  gums,  can  be  liquefied  by  heat- 
ing under  pressure  in  contact  with  a  small  quantity  of  sulphuric  acid    (-\-5°). 

Certain  l)y-producfs  are  formed  l)y  the  bacteria  when  growing  in  solutions  of 
dextrose  and  saccharose  in  the  presence  of  chalk.  These  consist  of  ethyl  alcohol, 
succinic  acid,  a  mixture  of  fatty  acids,  all  in  small  amounts,  and  acetic  and  fer- 
mentation lactic  acids.  The  lactic  acid  preponderates.  In  addition  to  these, 
which  are  formed  by  both  bacteria,  Bacterinm  B  produces  paralactic  acid. 

Other  differences  between  the  bacteria  A  and  B  are  that  B  does  not  seem  to 
Ite  able  to  utilise  glycerin,  and  its  insohible  phase,  as  compared  with  A.  is  verv 
stable . 


88  nOPINESS    IX    WATTLE    BARK    INFUSIONS, 


SUMSIARY. 


Two  closely  allied  bacteria  were  isolated  from  ropj'  infusions  of  wattle  bark. 
Tbey  caused  the  mucinous  fermentation  of  bark  infusions  and  of  synthetic  media 
containing  sugar. 

Fresh  infusions,  of  Sp.G.,  1.024  and  less,  were  made  ropy  by  A,  and  of  1.048 
and  less,  Ijy  B. 

The  bacteria  exist  in  two  phases  which  can  bo  altered  at  will.  One  jiroduces 
a  soluble  slime,  the  other  an  insoluble  mucus.  The  rojiiness  Ls  produced  chiefly 
by   the   insoluble   phases. 

The  utilisal)le  sugars  are  galactose,  levulose,  saccharose  and  dextrose,  the 
non-sugars  are  mannit  and  glycerin. 

The  sources  of  nitrogen  include  meat-extract,  peptone,  asparagin.  ammonium 
sulphate,   and  potassium  nitrate    in    alkaline    solution. 

The  saline  constituents  have  little  influence  in  presence  of  sufficient  sugar. 

A  slight  acidity  favours  the  production  of  ropincss,  the  optimum  ranging 
from  -|-  8°  to  -|-  12°.  The  optimum  amount  of  tannic  acid  runs  from  0.75  %  to 
1  %.     The  limiting  amounts  are  -|-30°  and  2  %  of  tannic  acid. 

The  mucus  is  a  galactan,  and  is  hydrolysed  to  galactose. 

The  by-prodiK'ts  from  sugar  are  chiefly  inactive  lactic  and  acetic  acids.  Ethyl 
alcohol,  succinic  acid  and  a  mixture  of  non-volatile  fatty  acids  are  produced  in 
small  amounts.      In  addition  to  these,  bacterium  B  produces  paralaetic  acid. 

I  have  to  thank  Mr.  F.  A.  Coombs  for  information  regarding  the  iise  of 
wattle-bark  and  for  obtaining  the  opinions  of  some  tanners  upon  the  occurrence 
of  ropiness.  I  am  also  indebted  to  Mr.  "W.  W.  L'Estrange  for  nnicli  valuable 
assistance  given  during  the  course  of  the  investigation. 

Appendix: — Opinions    tijj(i)i    I!op>)iess. 

Mr.  F.  A.  Coombs,  Lecturer  upon  Tanning  in  the  Sydney  Technical  College, 
circularised  a  number  of  master  tanners  asking  their  experieuee  regarding  the 
occurrence  of  ropiness  in  wattle  bark  liquors,  and  the  replies  are  thus  summarised. 

Kopiness  does  occur  in  wattle  bark  liquors,  but  as  to  its  frequency  in  barks 
from  particular  places  or  from  young  or  old  trees  no  inforin%tion  could  be  ob- 
tained. 

It  occurs  in  liquoi-s  prepared  from  immature  or  freshly-stripped  liark. 

It  is  met  with  most  frequently  during  the  Summer  months,  January,  Febru- 
ary, and  March,  but  may  also  occur  in  the  Spring. 

Ropiness  may  develop  in  weak  or  .strong  liquors. 

If  the  liquors  stand  for  a  fairly  long  time  without  handling  they  may  become 
ro|iy. 

It  may  not  be  attributed  to  the  constant  use  of  spent  colouring  li(|uors,  but 
this  presumes  that  they  have  been  treated  in  some  way.  One  tanner  was  definite 
in  stating  that  the  trouble  starts  with  the  use  of  weak  colouring  liquors  that 
ought  to  be  run  away,  and  added  tliat  ixissibly  some  fanners,  wlien  strengthening 
the  six'nt  li(|uor.'.,   let  the  bark   ferment. 

Kopiness  occurs  in  liquoi-s  other  than  wattle-bark  li(|Uors. 

The  weak  or  sjjent  liquors,  when  not  run  away,  are  either  steamed,  boiled,  or 
treated  with  disinfectant,  and  in  these  ways  tlio  development  of  ropiness  in  the 
liquors  is  prevented. 


BY   R.   GRBIG-SMITH.  89 


EXPLAN'ATiON  OF    PLATE   IX. 

Colonies  growing   on  the    surface  of   Nutrient   Agar. 

1.— Cobny   of  Al. 

2. — Colonies    of  Al    and  A2a    growing    side    by  side.       The     almost     homogeneous 

character  of  Al   and  the  cog-wheel  structure  of  A2a  are   brought   out. 
3. — Colony  of   A2.      This  was    a  specially    translucent  colony.      They    are    generally 

opaque,  except  at    the    margm. 
4,- — Colonies  of   B2.    Thickly   sown  colonies,   showing   the  ivy-leaf   structure. 
5. — Colony  of   B2.     Mature   colony,  showing   the  r.nesenteric  structure. 
6. — Ropy    Bark    infusion,  flowing   siphon-wise. 

(Photographed  by  Mr.    W.  W.    L'Estrange.) 


90 


AUSTHALiAX  SYLLIDAE.    /■:CS)  J.I.I OAl-J  AXi!)  AUIOLYTIUAE. 
llv   W.  A.  Haswki.l,  yi.X..  D.Si'..   I'Mi.S..  K.mkritus  Professou  oi'  liioLOuv, 

UnIVKRSITV    (II-     SvilXEY. 

(Witii    i'hilcs   x.-xiii.) 

INTHdHrcTIOX. 

This  paper  deals  with  the  faiuilies  Sjiiliiluc,  EuaiiUidac  and  Aulolijtidac  of 
the  section  Syllidea  (Polychaeta  Phanerocephala),  and  is  to  some  extent  a  con- 
tinuation of  one  on  the  Exoc/onea  recently*  published.  Unlike  the  latter,  how- 
ever, it  is  entirely  systematic  and  descriptive,  structural  and  developmental  jjoints 
bein":  reserved  for  separate  treatment.  The  material  consists  almost  exclusi\-ely  of 
specimens  collected  by  the  author  al)out  low-water  mark  in  Port  Jackson  atul 
examined  in  the  living  condition  in  the  Hrst  instance.  The  types  of  the  species 
described  as  new  have  been  deposited  in  the  Australian  Museum. 

In  1885  I  published  descriptions  of  six  uieml)ers  of  the  family  Si/llidar  I'ound 
in  Port  Jackson.  The  original  specimens  jiave  been  lost,  but  the  identity  of  Ave 
of  the  six  species  is  definitely  determined  as  a  result  of  Aus^-ener's  study  of  the 
Polychaeta  collected  by  the  Ilamburj;'  Expedition  to  South-western  Australia  (1), 
together  witli  the  present  contribution.  There  remains  in  doubt  Giiutliosi/llis 
sonata  niihi.  This  was  founded  on  a  solitary  specinuni  obtained  with  the  dredge. 
There  are  indications  that  Auyener's  identification  with  this  of  a  TjipoiiiiUis  in  liis 
collection  is  incorrect. 

The  general  classification  here  followed  is  that  ol'  IMalaquin,  and,  witliin  the 
extensive  genus  StiUh.  the  division  into  sul)-gcnera  proposed  by  Langerlians  and 
followed  by  various  recent  writers  (De  Saint-. Joseph,  Gravier,  Augener)  lias  l)een 
adopted . 

1  have  found  some  dilficulty  in  dealing  with  the  uenus  PidimsiiUis.  Mahn- 
gren's  original  diagnosis  (41,  p.  3i))  comprises  the  following  points — a  single 
pharyngeal  tootli;  compound  setae  with  long  slender  bidentate  appendages;  capil- 
lary setae  on  I  lie  middle  and  posterior  segments;  other  characters  as  in  St/llis. 
The  type  species,  P.  compacta,  has  '"palpi  ilistantes,"'  "tentacula  indistincte  arti- 
culata"  and  "cirri  dorsuales  vix  articulali." 

In  the  classification  of  the  S/iUidca  clalxirated  by  Langerlians  (3f)).  Piono- 
syllis  is  characterised  as  having  the  palpi  not  fused,  the  tentacles  and  dorsal  cirri 
not  articulated,  and  as  having  the  |iliarynx  aniicd  with  a  single  tooth  which  is 
situated  anteriorly. 

In  Malaquin's  scheme  (-10).  I'iniKisiillis  is  grouped  among  the  EunyUidae— 
Syllidea  possessing  ventral  cirri,  having  the  jialpi  fused  at  the  base  only,  the 
tentacles  and  dorsal  cirri  indistinctly  articulated,  and  reproducing  only  directly 
without  schizogainy.  From  the  other  geiicia  of  that  family  it  is  distinguished  by 
the  single,  anterior \  pharyngeal  tooth. 

,Joiu\  Linn.  Soo.  Lond.,  xxiv.,  No.  227. 


BV   W.    A.    HASWELL. 


91 


The  following  suggi'steil  iliaguosis  of  Plo)iosyUis  assuiiios  that  the  type  species, 
P.  compacta,  has  tlie  palpi  united  at  the  base. 

Syllidea  witli  ventral  cirri,  the  palpi  luiiteil  at  the  bases  only,  tlie  tentacles 
ami  cirri  devoid  of  segmentation  or  incompletely  segmented,  tl'e  compound  setae 
bidentate.  The  pharynx  with  a  single  tooth  situated  anteriorly;  no  schizogamy, 
This  would  exclu<le  species  such  as  iSi/llix  e.iili.'i  Gra\ier,  S.  m((croceras  Grube, 
-S'.  hyaUiia  Grube,  ,S'.  moniliformis  Savigny,  and  a  nuni))er  of  otliers,  which  ap- 
proach Pionosyllis  in  having  the  palpi  fused  at  the  base,  or  the  tentacles  imper- 
fectly segmented  or  in  the  union  of  both  of  these  cliaracters,  if  reproduction 
is  accompanied  by  scliizogamy. 

Family    SYLI.IDAK. 

Genus  S  v  i,  i.  i  s   Savigny. 

Sub-genus  Ttpostllis  Langerhans. 

Syllis  (Typosvllis)  VARiKiiATA  Orube.      (Plate  X..  tigs.  1  and  2). 

Sijllis  variegata,  Grube,  (19),  p.  85,  Taf.  3,  fig.  ti. 

Syllis  hexayoHiferti,  Claparede,  (5),  p.  73,  PI.   5,  tig.   2. 

?  Thoe  fu^iiformis,  Kinberg,  (31),  p.  249. 

?  Thoe  fusiformis,  Kinberg,   (32),  p.  til.  Tab.  51,  flg.  4-8. 

Syllis  nigropimetutu,  Haswell,   (25),  ]).  12,  PI.  .52,  flg-s.  1-3. 

t<yllis  compacta,  Gravier,   (16),  p.   lt)5,  PI.   9,  fig.  11. 

Syllis  (TyposylUs)  rarieyata,  Gravier,  (10),  p.  158,  tigs.  24  to  27,  PI.  9.  tig.  8. 

Syllis  {TyposylUs)  variegata,  De  St.   Joseph,   (48).  p.   22  (146). 

Syllis  variegata,  Marenzeller,  (42),  2  Beitrag,  p.  19,  PI.  2,  fig.  2. 

Syllis  variegata,  Langerhans,   (36),  p.   532. 

Syllis  variegata,  Marion  et  Bobretzky,   (45),  ]).   22. 

Syllis  [TyposylUs)    variegula,   Augener,    (1),   ]).    190. 

Syllis  closterobranchia  var.,  Ehlere,  (10),  1,  p.  20,  Taf.  3,  flg.  1-4. 

Syllis  (TyposylUs)  variegata  is  the  commonest  species  of  Syllis  in  Port  .Jack- 
son, and  in  some  situations,  as  among  the  roots  of  oar-weeds  (Eklonia),  it  is  ex- 
tremely abundant,  by  far  the  most  numerous  of  the  larger  Polychaeta.  It  also 
occure  in  Poit  Stephens.  It  gTows  to  a  large  size,  being  often  two  or  even 
three  cm.  in  length  in  the  living,  fully-extended  condition;  but  coidiacts  to  al)out 
half  its  length  when  fixed  by  any  of  the  ordinary  methods.* 

Such  large  specimens,  and  the  majority  of  the  smaller  ones,  are  readily 
recognisable  owing  to  the  very  characteristic  ])attern  of  the  pigment  on  tlie  dorsal 
sui-face.  The  main  feature  of  this  pattern  wliich  was  figured  liroadly  by  Maren- 
zeller (42),  is  the  arrangement  of  black  or  brown  pigment  on  the  dorsal  surface  of 
each  segment,  in  snch  a  way  as  to  leave  two,  somewhat  irregular,  transversely 
elongated,  colourless  spaces  (spectacle  pattern) .  This  pigment  pattern  is  most 
pronounced  in  front,  the  pigment  fading  away  towards  the  posterior  end.  An 
almost  invariable  featui'e,  so  far  as  the  Sydney  specimens  arc  concerned,  is  the 
alternation  of  darker  and  lighter  segments,  the  latter  always  being  the  segments 
bearing  the  larger,  dorsally  directed  pairs  of  cirri,  the  more  ventrally  directed 
shorter  pairs  which  alternate  with  them  being  borne  on  the  darker  segments ,  f 


'  By  pourinsj  over  well-extended  live  speeiuiens.  water  warmed  to  70°C.  iiiniu-diate 
paraly.sis  is  produced  and  fixation  can  be  effected  with  little  contraction. 

+  This  arrangenii'ut  is  most  protialily  connected  witli  the  exceptional  seu.'<iti\enes.s  to 
hright  light  shown  liy  this  species. 


92  AUSTRALIAN      SYLLIDAE^     EUSYLLIUAE     AND      ArTOIATIUAE, 

CompaiativL'l}-  rare  are  specimens  in  which,  though  the  dorsal  surface  is 
darkly  pigmented,  it  wants  the  characteristic  pattern  described  aI)o\e,  the  pigment 
being  disposed  in  transverse  bands,  lr\vo  on  each  segment;  here  too  there  is  an 
alternation  of  darker  and  lighter  segments  with  the  alternation  of  the  shorter 
and  longer  cirri. 

^lany  of  the  smaller  specimens  however,  are  devoid  of  the  dark  pigment. 
Many  of  these  have  a  light  red  colour  due  to  the  presence  of  diffused  particles 
of  red  pigment,  some  are  gTeenish,  others  orange  or  yellow. 

Apart  from  markings  and  colouration,  the  following  points  seem  to  be  dis- 
tinctive of  a.   varieyata: — 

Palpi  in  the  living  animal  elongated,  lo-iger  than  the  prostomiuni,  their  inner 
edges  in  contact  at  the  base  for  about  a  fourtli  of  their  length,  narrowing  distally 
with  rounded  ends,  with  a  deep  hollow  on  the  inner  part  of  the  ventral  surface. 
Tentacles  and  cirri  elongated,  with  numerous  well-defined  segments  filled  with 
twisted  unicellular  (vermiculate)  glands.  Dorsal  cirri  alternately  longer  and 
shorter,  with  from  twenty  to  thirty-five  segments.  The  anal  cirri  are  simOar  to 
the  dorsal :  between  them  is  a  median  narrow  process . 

As  in  other  species  of  Si/llis,  the  i:iara podium,  when  viewed  from  above  or 
below,  though  not  deeply  cleft,  appears  divided  into  two  lobes  at  the  end.  In 
anterior  or  posterior  view  these  lobes  are  found  to  represent  broad  vertical  Haps, 
anterior  and  posterior.  Close  to  the  latter  on  its  dorsal  side  are  the  points  of 
the  acicula;  between  the  flaps  or  lobes  is  the  irregular  surface  through  which  Ihe 
s?tao  protrude. 

The  compound  setae  (Plate  x.,  fig.  1)  8  (o  12  in  number  in  each  parapodium, 
are  of  uniform  character  throughout;  they  all  have  the  appendage  (falx)  straight, 
bidentate  terminally,  and  with  a  strong  fringe  of  some  20  pieces  along  the  cutting 
edge  of  the  blade. 

The  length  of  the  falx  is  greater  in  the  setae  of  the  anterior  region  of  the 
body  than  in  those  of  the  segments  behind,  but  the  difference  is  not  great,  and  the 
transition  from  one  form  to  the  other  is  very  gradual. 

As  pointed  out  by  Augener,  each  parapodium  in  the  extreme  posteiior  region 
has,  as  in  most  species  of  SylUs,  a  simple  seta  in  addition  to  tht  compound.  This, 
which  is  always  dorsal  to  all  the  latter,  is  in  ,s'.  var'ieguta  of  the  gently  curved,  ter- 
minally bidentate  type  which  is  the  commonest  foim  of  these  simple  setae  in  tlie 
majority  of  the  sijecies  of  Syllis  which  1  have  seen.  The  acicuhi  (Plate  x.,  tig.  2) 
arc  fairly  characteristic.  Usually  there  are  three  in  each  parapodium;  hut 
sometimes  there  are  four  or  five.  When  three  are  present  one — the  most  anterior 
and  ventral — is  almost  always  very  slightly  l;ent  at  the  end,  and  slightly  knobbed ; 
the  other  two,  which  are  very  stout,  are  straight  to  the  end  and  olrfusely  or 
acutely  pointed. 

The  position  o!  the  parts  of  tlie  i)roboscis  in  the  usual  iTlraclcd  state  is 
usuiiUy  regarded  as  important  in  the  diagnosis  of -the  species  of  Si/llis:  it  is 
fairly  constant  in  the  individuals  of  a  species,  but  is  subject  to  some  modification 
owing  to  the  occasional  occurrence  of  states  of  incomplete  retraction .  More  im- 
portant is  the  loifjih  of  the  pharynx  and  jnoventriculus  in  terms  of  the  number 
of  segments  through  wliich  each  runs.  Within  a  limited  range  of  variation  this 
appears  to  be  constant  for  each  species — except  in  (h<'  coiniinvntivcly  rare  in- 
^tanees  of  regeneration. 

In  S.  variegata  both  iiharynx  and  iirovciitiicuhis  arc  comparatively  long,  each 
running  througli  eight.  Iwolvc  oi-  fourteen  segments. 


BY  W.   A.   HASWELL.  93 

Syllis  (TyposYLLis)  PECTiNAN'.s,  11 . sp .    (Plate  X.,  tig.  3-6). 

AVIic'u  alive  and  fully  extended  this  is  a  slender,  almost  thread-like  worm, 
measuring,  in  the  case  of  the  larger  specimens,  about  1.5  to  2  cm.  in  length.  The 
colour  varies  considerably,  the  differences  being  due  mainly  to  differences  in  the 
colour  of  the  intestine  as  described  below.  The  body-wall  may  be  transparent  and 
colourless,  but  usually  there  are  widely-diffused  minute  particles  of  reddish-brown 
pigment,  most  abundant  in  the  dorsal  integument  in  the  anterior  region,  where, 
in  some  cases,  they  tend  here  and  there  to  become  arranged  m  very  irregular 
transverse  lines  stronger  towards  the  anterior  and  posterior  limits  of  the  segment. 
The  pigment  may  be  scattered  also  through  the  tentacles,  palpi  and  cirri,  but 
sometimes  these  appendages  are  completely  colourless. 

The  tentacles  and  cirri  contain  numerous  sausage-shaped  glands  which  are 
usually  extremely  bright  and  conspicuous  in  the  living  animal.  Sensory  cilia  are 
abundant  on  the  tentacles,  palpi  and  dorsal  cirri,  less  abundant  on  the  ventral 
cirri.     Vibratile  cilia  run  along  the  sides  of  the  segments  between  the  parapodia. 

The  prostomium  is  broader  than  long,  elliptical  in  general  outline.  The  pig- 
ment which  it  usually  bears  dorsally,  is  irregularly  distributed.  The  eyes  are 
always  comparatively  small,  and  a  frontal  pair  is  rarely  present.  The  palpi  are 
entirely  separate,  though  in  close  contact  in  their  basal  portions.  The  median 
tentacle  is  the  longest — about  five  times  the  length  of  the  prostomium,  with  about 
35  well-defined  joints;  the  lateral  about  thrice  the  lengfh  of  the  prostomium,  with 
about  25  joints. 

The  peristomium  appears  on  the  dorsal  surface  for  a  narrow  space  only. 
The  dorsal  peristomial  tentacles  are  about  equal  in  length  to  the  median,  and  have 
about  the  same  number  of  joints;  the  ventral  are  a  little  shorter. 

There  are  about  60-70  segments  in  the  body  before  stolonisation  begins. 

The  parapodia  (Plate  x.,  fig.  4)  are  not  very  prominent,  less  than  half  the 
breadth  of  the  body,  slightly  bilobed,  the  anterior  lobe  much  the  more  prominent. 
Each  contains  about  10  or  12  compound  setae  (Plate  x.,  fig.  5)  which  vary  little 
in  character  throughout.  Their  falces  are  all  relatively  short,  unidentate,  with  a 
fringe  of  unusually  strong,  pointed  processes  along  the  cutting  edge,  those  to- 
wards the  apex  becoming  very  rudimentary.  There  is  a  simple  seta  (Plate  x., 
fig.  6)  on  the  dorsal  side  of  the  compound  in  all  the  posterior  parapodia:  in  a 
specimen  of  67  segments  without  definite  stolonisation  these  begin  on  the  26th 
segment,  and  are  continued  to  the  posterior  end ;  in  a  female  specimen  of  about 
60  segments  with  a  stolon,  they  begin  four  segments  in  front  of  the  stolon  (on 
the  40th  segment)  ;  in  another  similar  specimen  they  begin  nine  segments  in  front 
of  the  stolon.  They  are  similar  to  the  simple  setae  of  ,9.  variegata — gently  curved 
towards  the  free  end,  pointed,  obscurely  bidentate,  and  with  four  or  five  cilia  on 
the  concave  edge  of  the  terminal  curved  region.  In  three  or  four  of  the  last 
segments  a  simple  bidentate  seta  occurs  on  the  ventral  side  of  the  bundle  of  com- 
pound setae :  this  is  finer  and  shorter  than  the  dorsal  simple  seta,  and  does  not 
seem  to  be  always  present. 

In  specimens  with  mature  stolons,  bundles  of  capillary  setae  occur  on  all 
the  segments  of  the  stolon;  when  fully  developed  these  are  twice  or  thrice  the 
length  of  the  compound  setae. 

There  are  four  acicula  (Plate  x.,  fig.  4)  in  each  of  the  most  anterior  para- 
podia, three  or  two  in  the  rest;  all  are  knobbed  at  the  ends  with  the  knob  usually 
sharply  bent,  but  towards  the  dorsal  side,  so  that  the  bend  is  not  readily  per- 
ceptible. 


94  AUSIRALIAN      SYLLIDAE,     EUSyl-MDAK     AND     ACTOLYTIDAE. 

Of  tiie  tlorsal  cirri  there  is  an  alteniation  oJ'  longer  and  sliortcr.  tin-  longer 
in  the  anteiior  region  more  than  twice  as  long  as  the  breadtli  of  the  body,  and 
composed  of  about  forty  segments.  Tlie  ventral  cirri  are  short,  not  extending 
as  far  as  the  ends  of  the  parapodia.  The  anal  cirri  are  similar  to  the  larger 
dorsal;  between  them  is  a  well-dexclopcd,  narrow  median  process. 

The  pharynx,  -which  is  brownisii  or  reddish,  extends  as  far  as  the  9th  seg- 
ment. An  important  feature  is  that  the  tooth  is  situated  some  little  distance  be- 
hind tlie  anterior  mai'gin  of  the  pharynx  (Plate  x.,  fig.  3)  .  The  proventriculus 
is  rather  variable,  lying  in  the  lOth  to  14th  or  15th  or  9th  to  14th  or  10th  to  18th 
segments — five  to  eight  segments.  Brown  pigment  runs  in  the  raphes  and  the 
annular  bands  of  non-striated  muscles,  of  wliich  there  arc  about  35.  The  vcntri- 
culus,  light  Ijrown  or  red  in  colour,  has  the  usual  T-shaped  caeca,  tlie  anterior  branch 
the  larger.  The  intestine  is  deeply  constricted,  usually  of  a  dark  grciii  colour, 
or  yellow    or  orange  mixed  with  green,  or  orange  throughout. 

In  ripe  females,  the  ovaries,  purple  in  colour,  are  developed  from  about  the 
30tli  to  the  40th  segments,  l)ackwards — the  stohm,  of  about  "20  to  25  segments, 
beginning  about  the  40th  or  50th.  In  the  nuile,  the  ripe  stolon  is  of  a  bright 
red,  pink  or  scarlet  colour,  and  consists  of  about  20  segments  witli  dilated  nei>,hridia 
packed  with  sperms  in  roiuidetl  groups. 

T.  pectinans  occurs  veiy  abundantly  between  tide-marks  in  Port  Jackson, 
and  is  particularly  numerous  among  the  tulics  ol'  the  common  Sorpulid.  Cideolaria 
hystrlx. 

Relying  on  Langerhans's  account  (30,  ]>.  5.'30,  Taf.  31,  fig.  3)  of  the  species 
wliich  he  identified  with  S.  prolij'era  Krohn,  I  was  at  first  indmed  to  regard  the 
form  above  described  as  referable  to  that  species.  One  of  the  chief  reasons  for 
thi.i  view  was  the  exceptional  position  in  both  of  the  pharyngeal  tooth.  A  care- 
ful comparison  showed,  however,  that  such  a  determination  could  not  be  main- 
tained. Langerhans  refers  to  the  compound  setae  in  5.  prnlifera  as  "bidentate" 
without  any  qualification.  jMoreocer,  .V.  armutidi,  wliich  Langerhans  regards  as 
identical,  is  described  liy  Claparede  (5,  p.  70)  as  having  setae  with  bidentate 
appendages;  and  the  same  holds  good  of  .v.  lussincnsis  Grubo  (20,  p.  40).  also 
regarded  by  Langerhans  as  synonymous  with  the  sai\ie  species.*  Mcintosh's 
figures  (39)  of  the  coiniiound  setae  in  ,s'.  (Pioiios/iUis)  prolifera  also  all  represent 
them  as  strongly  bidentate.  On  the  whole  the  evidence  .seems  to  be  in  favour 
of  the  conclusion  that  the  Australian  sjiecies  is  a  hitherto  undescribed  s])ecies  of 
T/iposi/His,  characterised  by  llic  combination  of  two  unusual  characters — the  back- 
ward position  of  the  tooth  and  the  ]>i('sciic('  of  unidcntate  compound  setae. 

Svi.i.is   (Ti-posVLLis)   TitcxcATA.  n.s|i.     (Plate  x.,  Iig;.  7-14.) 

Tliis,  like  7'.  jiecHindis,  is  a  slender  eloiigafcd  Si/lli^,  wliicli.  when  alive  and 
fully  extended,  becomes  a  narrow  thread.  There  are  over  a  hundred  segments 
(110-120)  in  a  I'ldl-grown  siiecinien .  The  general  colour  is  reddish  Avithout 
definite  markings,  darkened  behind  liy  the  intestine.  The  length  is  from  1  to  2 
cm.  The  tentacles  and  dorsal  cirri  are  full  of  twisted  (vermionlate)  unicellular 
glands  similar  to  those  of  S.   rnrinidla. 


•Langerhans  regards  S.fiuvieiisis  of  Elders  i»«  also  identical  with  .s'.  firoliffnt :  if 
that  view  bo  woll-finmilcil.  Ehlers's  figure  (fi,  Taf.  ix..  fig.  4)  of  a  coinpoiinil  seta  must  he 
incorrect . 


BV   W.   A.   IIASWELL. 


95 


The  prostoiiiium  is  nearly  twice  as  Ijioad  as  Jong,  with  four  very  small  eyes. 
The  median  tentacle  is  about  thrice  the  length  of  the  ijrostomium.  with  about  25 
joints;  the  lateral  a  little  shorter,  with  about  17  joints.  The  palpi  are  ovate,  veiy 
little  narrower  at  the  apex,  with  the  inner  edges,  in  close  contact  with  one  another 
at  the  base  Init  not  fused,  diverging  very  slightly  distally. 

The  dorsal  peristomial  tentacle  is  nearly  as  long  as  the  median,  with  about 
18  joints;  the  ventral  a  little  shorter. 

The  parapodia  are  relatively  long;  nearly  half  the  breadth  of  the  body  in 
length,  and  in  general  outline  resemble  those  of  ,S'.  pectinans.  Each  has  about 
8-10  compound  setae.  These  (Plate  x.,  figs.  8  and  9)  are  all  of  the  same  type, 
the  only  ditt'erence  between  them  being  a  gradual  reduction  in  length  of  the  falx 
from  the  dorsal  to  the  ventral  side;  all  are  bidentate  with  a  small  secondary 
tooth  and  a  row  of  tine  cilia  along  the  cutting  edge.  A  simple  seta  (  Plate  x., 
fig.  10)  lies  on  the  dorsal  side  of  the  compound  seta  in  a  variable  number  of  the 
most  posterior  segments.  It  differs  from  the  simple  setae  of  S.  variegata  and 
S.  pectinans  in  being  truncate.  A  shorter,  simple,  pointed  seta  lies  on  the  ven- 
tral side  in  the  last  two  or  three  segments.  There  is  sometimes  a  single  aciculum 
in  each  parapodium,  sometimes  two  or  three:  they  are  sharply  bent  forwards  at 
the  ends.      (Plate  x.,  figs.  11-14.  ) 

The  dorsal  cirri  are  long  and  thick,  the  first  being  the  longest,  with  about  28 
segments.  The  rest  are  alternately  longer  and  shorter,  the  longer  (about  25 
joints)  longer  than  the  breadth  of  the  body,  the  shorter  (about  17  joints)  about 
e(iual  to  it.  The  ventral  cirri  scarcely  reach  as  far  as  the  ends  of  the  parapodia. 
The  anal  cirri  have  about  16  joints.  There  is  a  narrow  median  process  between 
them  as  in  S.  pectinans. 

The  pharynx  is  red  in  colour.  When  the  proboscis  is  fully  drawn  back  it  is 
long  and  narrow,  extending  from  the  fourth  segment,  in  which  the  tooth  is  situ- 
ated, to  tlie  thirteenth.  The  proventriculus  is  relatively  short,  extending  through 
only  about  four  to  six  segments. 

Syllis  tricncata  has  been  found  in  Port  Stephens  as  well  as  Port  .Jackson. 

Many  specimens  of  S.  truncata  bear  either  one  or  two  white  spots  on  the 
dorsal  surface  over  the  proventriculus  or  its  junction  with  the  intestine.  When 
two  are  present  they  may  occur  on  the  16th  and  17th  or  on  the  17th  and  18th 
segments ;  when  one  only  occurs  it  is  usually  found  on  the  18th  segment .  These 
white  bodies  lie  in  the  substance  of  the  dorsal  body-wall  between  the  ejiidermis 
and  the  muscular  layers,  and  extend  across  a  considerable  part  of  the  breadth 
of  the  segment.  Contained  in  each  are  a  large  number  of  rounded  masses  of  an 
average  diameter  of  about  .05  mm.,  each  made  up  of  innumerable  minute  cor- 
puscles of  an  approximate  diameter  of  0.002  mm. 

That  these  bodies  are  encysted  Sporozoa  appears  to  admit  of  little  doubt . 
The  constancy  of  their  position  would  appear  to  be  accounted  for  by  the  position 
of  the  ventriculus  and  caeca^ — the  walls  of  the  latter  being  comparatively  tliin  and 
easily  traversed  by  the  trophozoite  in  its  migration  outwards  from  the  lumen  of 
the  alimentary  canal. 

In  liis  description  of  the  Polycliaeta  of  the  Canaries  Langerlians  (35)  gives 
an  account  of  a  species  of  Ti/posi/llis,  which  he  calls  T.  pulvinata,  characterised 
by  the  presence  of  cushion-like  elevations  of  the  dorsal  surface  of  the  18th,  19th, 
and  20th  segments.  There  can  be  little  doubt  that  in  this  species  the  swellings 
are  due  to  the  same  cause  as  in  T.  truncata.     T.  pulvinata  is  described  as  having 


96  AUSTRALIAN     SYLLIDAE,     KUSYLLIDAE     AND     AUTOLYTIDAE^ 

the  setae  distinctly  iinidentate,  and  tlius  aijpoars  to  differ  in  a  definite  way  from 
2".  truncata. 

Syllis   (Ttposyllis)   punctulata,    u.sp.    (Plate  xi.,  figs.  1-lG.) 

The  length  of  this  very  well-marked  species  is  about  1  cm.  and  the  breadth 
.75  mm.  There  are  about  70  segments  in  all.  The  prevailing  colour  of  the 
dorsal  surface  is  dark  red,  usually  lighter  behind,  with  innumerable  minute  colour- 
less dots  marking  the  position  of  integumentary  glands.  The  prostomium  and 
peristomium  are  much  lighter  than  the  body,  of  a  bright  orange,  the  prostomium 
with  an  irregular  pattern  of  a  darker  colour  concentrated  in  front  in  the  position 
in  which  frontal  eyes  usually  occur.  Vibratile  cilia  occur  on  the  sides  of  the 
segments  between  the  parapodia. 

The  prostomium  (Plate  xi.,  tig.  1)  is  broader  than  long;  the  presence  of 
frontal  eyes  is  inconstant :  the  ordinary  eyes  are  rather  small,  the  posterior  neaier 
together  than  the  anterior.  The  palpi  are  divergent  from  the  base,  slightly  nar- 
rowed distally,  longer  than  the  prostomium.  The  median  tentacle  is  more  than 
twice  the  length  of  the  prostomium,  of  about  20  to  30  segments;  the  lateral  ten- 
tacles are  twice  the  length  of  the  prostomium,  of  about  12  to  20  segments.  Of 
the  peristomial  tentacles  the  dorsal,  which  is  slightly  the  longer,  is  of  about  the 
same  length  as  the  median.  All  the  tentacles  are  very  distinctly  segmented,  as 
are  also  the  dorsal  and  anal  cirri. 

The  parapodia  (Plate  xi.,  fig  2)  are  not  deeply  divided.  There  are  10-12 
compound  setae  (figs.  3  and  4),  all  of  one  type,  with  bidentate  falces,  which  are 
slightly  longer  in  proportion  in  the  more  anterior  segments.  There  are  two 
simple  setae  in  all  the  posterior  parapodia.  One  of  these  (figs.  5  to  10)  is 
dorsai  to  the  compound  setae :  it  first  appears  about  the  twenty-eighth  segment 
and  continues  to  the  posterior  end;  it  is  obscurely  bidentate;  the  other  (fig.  11) 
which  occurs  only  on  the  last  few  segments,  is  ventral  to  the  compound  setae  and 
is  very  strongly  bidentate,  its  extremity  closely  corresponding  to  the  end  of  the 
appendage  of  one  of  the  compound  setae.  The  acicula  (figs.  12-16).  of  which 
there  are  three  or  four  in  each  parapodium,  vary  a  little  in  shape,  but  one  (the 
most  anterior,  (figs.  12  and  13)  is  always  strongly  bent  forwards  at  the  end,  and 
another  (fig.  16)  symmetricallj-  pointed. 

The  dorsal  cirri  are  very  distinctly  articulated.  The  first  are  the  longest,  as 
long  as  the  median  tentacles,  with  about  25  to  35  segments.  The  remainder  are 
shorter  than  the  breadth  of  the  segments  and  contain  18  to  35  segments:  there  is 
no  regular  alternation.  The  ventral  cirri  are  short,  not  extending  beyond  the 
ends  of  the  parapodia.  The  anal  cirri  are  of  about  the  same  length  as  the  aver- 
age dorsal.  The  pharyngeal  tooth  is  not  quite  anterior.  The  pharynx  extends 
to  the  7th  segment;  the  proventriculus  lies  in  the  8th  to  the  13th. 

One  specimen  has  a  buff-colouri'd  female  stolon;  the  ova  extend  forwards 
several  seguicnts  in  front  of  the  head  of  the  stolon. 

S.  piiiictulnta  occurs  about  the  liases  of  Algae  growing  on  rocks  about  low- 
water  mai-k  in  Port  .Jackson  and  P.o(nny  Pay. 

SVI.I.IS     (TVPOSVLLIS)     Ci.OSTEROBRAXC'lIIA      Schuiiivda. 

Syllis  closlerohranchla,  Sclnnarda.   (40).  2  Tlieil,  p.   72. 

Siillis  clnsterobraiichia,  Ehlers   (10),  I.,  p.  19.  Taf.  iii.,  fig.  1-4. 

St/llis  (Ti/po.'iiillis)  dosterohranchiii,    Augener.   (1).  ii.  201.    Text-fig.  23. 

(For  some  additional  synonyms,  see  Augener.) 


BY    W.    A.    HASWELL.  97 

Ehlcrs  ill  1904  identified  specimeiis  of  a  iSyllis  received  from  New  Zealand 
with  Schmarda's  ^'.  cloaterobranchia,  the  types  of  which  (from  S.  Africa)  he  had 
the  opportunity  of  examining. 

Augener  found  specimens  in  the  collection  from  S.W.  Australia,  and  gives 
some  additional  particulars.  The  species  thus  defined  is  quite  common  a  little 
below  low-water  mark  in  Port  Jackson.  The  largest  specimens  measure  4  cm. 
in  length  and  1.5  mm.  in  breadth. 

A  simple,  pointed  seta,  obscurely  bidentate,  is  present  on  the  dorsal  r-ide  of 
the  compound  setae  in  the  last  nine  or  ten  parapodia,  disappearing  at  the  point 
where  the  characteristic  thick,  "pseudoypsiloid,"  compound  setae  begin  to  make 
their  appearance.  A  very  similar  simple  seta  lies  on  the  ventral  side  in  a  few 
of  the  terminal  segments. 

In  a  male  specimen  of  147  segments,  the  segments  are  filled  with  sperms  from 
the  120th  backwards,  but  there  is  no  definite  indication  of  a  stolon.  Another 
specimen  of  95  segments  had  no  sign  of  gonads. 

Syllis  (Typosyllis)  gracilis  Gravier.   (Plate  x.,  fig.  15.) 

Syllis  gracilis,  Gravier,  (16),  p.  150,  PI.  9,  figs.  4-6. 

(?)    Syllis  longissima,  Gravier,  I.C.,  p.  154. 

Syllis   (Typosyllis)  gracilis,  Augener   (1),  p.   206. 

For  further  synonymy,  see  Langerhans  (36)   and  Mcintosh   (39)  . 

This  widely-distributed  form,  found  by  Augener  in  the  Hamburg  collections 
froiii  South-west  Australia,  occurs  frequently  among  Algae  etc.  brought  ap  from 
below  low-water  mark  in  Port  Jackson. 

Dorsal  simple  setae,  pointed  and  obscurely  bidentate  like  the  corresponding 
.=ietae  in  /S*.  closterobranchia,  occur  on  a  few  of  the  last  segments.  The  acicula 
(Plate  X.,  fig.  15)  are  peculiar,  each  having  a  slight  rounded  terminal  enlarge- 
ment from  which  a  peg-like  process  projects   obliquely. 

Syllis  (Typosyllis)  parturiexs,  n.sp.     (Plate  xi.,  figs.  17,  18.) 

This  small  Syllis,  of  which  I  have  only  obtained  a  single  specimen,  differs 
from  all  the  other  members  of  the  group,  with  the  exception  of  S.  vivipara,  in 
being  viviparous. 

It  is  only  4-5  mm.  in  lengfh,  and  colourless  but  for  a  mottling  of  bluish  green 
in  the  epithelium  of  the  middle  part  of  the  intestine.  There  are  32  segments. 
The  prostomium  is  slightly  broader  than  long,  and  bears  four  very  small  eyes 
in  addition  to  a  minute  frontal  pair.  The  palpi  are  about  equal  in  length  to 
the  prostomium;  they  are  sub-conical,  divergent  from  near  the  base,  where  they 
are  in  contact  for  a  short  distance.  The  median  prostomial  tentacle  is  about  six 
times  the  length  of  the  prostomium,  and  lias  about  35  segments;  the  lateral  about 
four  times.  The  dorsal  peristomial  tentacle  is  much  longer  than  the  ventral, 
nearly  as  long  as  the  median  prostomial.  All  the  tentacles,  with  the  dorsal  cirri, 
are  very  distinctly  segmented.  The  parapodia  are  not  deeply  divided.  Each 
bears  about  10  compound  setae  with  bidentate  falces.  In  a  few  of  the  last  seg- 
ments there  is  a  single  simple  seta  on  the  dorsal  side  of  each  parapodium.  There 
is  a  single  aciculum  which  is  slightly  enlarged  and  slightly  oblique  at  the  end. 

The  dorsal  cirri  are  alternately  longer  and  shorter,  the  longer  containing 
about  35  segments,  and  their  length  much  exceeding  the  breadth  of  the  body. 
The  ventral  cirri  are  slender,  and  scarcely  extend  as  far  as  the  extremity  of  the 
parapodia.      The  anal  cirri  resemble  the  longer  dorsal. 


98  ^U.STKALIAS'      SYLI.IDAK,     Kl'SYLLIDAE     AND     At'TOIATIDAE, 

The  pharynx  extends  tu  the  5th  segment,  the  pro\eutiiculus  to  the  9th. 

There  are  two  advaiu-eil  embryos,  one  in  the  14th  ami  the  other  in  the  loth 
segment.     In   the   l'2th  and  13th  segments   there  is  a  single   ovum   on    either  side. 

Hitherto,  as  already  stated,  Hyllis  viiipara  Ivrohn  has  been  the  only  vivi- 
parous Syllid  known.*  From  that  species  the  jiresent  form  differs  in  the  b.den- 
tate  fharaeter  of  the  compound  setae,  as  well  as  in  the  piesenee  of  frc>ntal  eyes 
and  the  greater  lengfh  of  the  dorsal  cirri. 

Though  it  seems  probable  that  .s'.  partiirieiis  is  hermaphrouite,  and  that  te.stes 
are  present  in  most  of  the  segments,  the  specimen  does  not  afford  conclusive  evi- 
dence of  this. 

SVLLIS    (TyPOSYLLIS)      AUCiEXKRl,  U.SJl.     ( Phitc  xi..   tigs.   1!)   to  22.) 

Syllis  (Typosi/Uis)  kinhei(jiaiia  Haswell.  Augeiiei-,  (1).  |>.  197,  Text-fig.  22. 
Taf.  iii.,  tig.  38. 

Si/Uis  (Typosi/Uis)  Kinberyiaiia  Haswell,  Fauvel,  (13),  p.  194. 

The  species  of  iSyllis  which  Augener  described  under  the  name  of  S. 
kinbergiana  Haswell,  while  expressing  some  doubts  as  to  the  correctness  of  the 
determination,  is  not  very  rare  in  Port  Jackson,  and.  as  it  appears  to  be  unnamed, 
I  have  given  it  the  above  name.  Augener's  -wrong'  determination  is  doubtless 
partly  due  to  my  having  given  insufficient  data;  but  theii-  are  at  least  two  points 
given  in  my  original  account  which  are  entirely  inconi])atible  with  Augener's  eou- 
elusiou — viz  the  very  indistinctl.v  articulated  cirri  and  the  transverse  intraseg- 
mental  lines.  Augener's  description  is  verj'  ade(]uatc.  juid  I  will  merely  add  the 
following  brief  notes : — 

There  are  frecjueutly  no  markings,  but  sometimes  theie  is  a  pair  of  grey 
transverse  lines  on  the  doreal  surface  of  each  segment  in  the  anterior  region. 
Frontal  eyes  are  present  in  most  if  not  all  cases,  but  they  are  sometimes  repre- 
sented by  minute  dots  which  may  not  be  symmetrically  placed. 

The  ordinary  compound  setae  resemble  those  of  ^■.  variegata  in  shape,  but  the 
fringe  of  processes  along  the  cutting  edge  of  the  fals  is  less  developed.  These 
are  the  only  compound  setae  in  the  posterior  region.  But  in  the  anterior  and 
middle  regions  the  two  most  dorsally  placed  in  each  parapodium  (Plate  xi.,  fig. 
20)  have  the  appendage  relatively  long  and  narrow — longer  and  narrower  than 
is  represented  in  Augenei-'s  fig.  22a.  The  obscurely  bidentate  simple  setae  of 
the  posterior  region  which  are  similar  to  those  of  6'.  variegata,  may  extend  for- 
wards as  far  as  about  the  20th  segment  from  the  anterior  end.  The  acicula  (figs. 
21  and  22)  are  one  to  four;  when  there  are  two,  the  more  anterior  (fig.  21)  is 
very  slightly  bent  fonvard  at  the  end,  with  an  oblique  terminal  (posterior)  face 
which  is  slightly  concave:  the  more  posterior  (fig.  22)  nearly  symmetrically  point- 
ed. When  only  one  aeiculum  is  present  it  is  of  the  former  typo:  when  there  are 
three  or  four,  two  or  three  are  of  the  latter. 

Syllis    (Typosyllis)    KtSBERGiANA  Haswell.     (Plate   xi.,   figs.   2.3-27:    IMate  xii., 

figs.  1  and  2  )  . 

Syllis  kinbergiana,  Haswell,  (25),  p.   7,  PI.  51,  figs.  1-3. 

Nnti  Syllis  (Tyjjosyllis)  kivherc/iana  Ilasw..  Auircner.  (1).  ]>.  107,  Taf.  iii., 
fig.  38,  Text-fig.  22  a-c. 

Nee  Syllis  {Typosyllis)   kinbergiana,  Fauvel,   (IS),  ji.   194. 


•  See  Goodrich  (14),  and  Potts  (47). 


BY   ^•.  A.   HASWELL.  99 

In  the  living-  condition  the  eolouring  of  thi.s  species  renders  it  readily  capable 
of  recognition.  In  preserved  specimens  in  which  the  colour  is  lost,  the  most 
striking  features  are: — (1)  the  presence  in  the  anterior  region  of  the  body  of  an 
impressed  line  or  narrow  groove  running  transversely  across  the  dorsal  surface  of 
each  segment;  (2)  the  deeply  bi-lobed  character  of  the  parapodia;  (3)  the  imper- 
fect segmentation  of  the  dorsal  cirri. 

In  the  living  condition  the  body  is  greenish-yellow  or  light  yellow  with 
greenish  transverse  lines.  On  the  doi-sal  surface  just  behind  the  head  is  a  patch 
of  white,  and  on  each  segment  is  a  pair  of  very  light  yellowish-  or  greenish-white 
dots.     The  head  and  the  palpi  are  red,  the  eyes  crimson. 

The  length  of  the  largest  specimens  is  6  cm.,  the  breadth  in  the  uncontracted 
state  only  2-3  mm.  In  all  the  anterior  part  of  the  body,  as  far  back  as  the  be- 
ginning <.)f  the  intestine,  are  tlie  transversa  grooves  above  refen-ed  to,  appearing 
in  contracted  specimens  as  notches  in  the  lateral  edges  of  the  segments  (Plate 
sdi.,  flg.  1). 

Sensory  cilia  are  present  on  the  tentacles  and  cirri  and  the  ends  of  the 
palpi . Vibratile  cilia  occur  on  the  palpi  and  on  the  sides  of  the  segments.  The 
■whole  integument  is  full  of  small  oval  glands. 

The  peristomium  is  bilobed,  the  lobes  ,-ounded  on  the  dorsal  aspect.  The 
eyes  are  rather  small,  the  posterior  much  the  smaller.  The  palpi  are  twice  the 
length  of  the  prostomium  when  fully  extended;  they  are  fused  together  at  the 
base  for  a  short  distance.  The  prostomial  tentacles  are  usually  sub-equal,  a 
little  longer  than  the  palpi,  segmented,  but  not  very  distinctly. 

The  parapodia  (Plate  sii.,  fig.  2)  are  very  deeply  divided  into  anterior  and 
posterior  lobes.  There  are  about  20  compound  setae  (Plate  xi.,  figs.  23  to  26), 
all  with  long  and  rather  narrow  falees  which  are  bidentate  and  have  extremely 
minute  teeth  along  the  cutting  eclge.  On  the  posterior  segments  there  is  a  very 
tine,  truncate,  simple  seta  on  each  parapodium  dorsal  to  the  compound  setae. 
Theie  are  two,  sometimes  three,  acieula  of  which  one,  the  most  anterior  (tig.  27), 
is  sharply  bent  foi-wards  at  the  end  and  the  others  are  obliquely  truncate  or 
obliquely  pointed.  No  capillary  setae  have  been  seen.  The  dorsal  cirri  are 
rather  short,  very  imperfectly  segmented. 

The  pharynx  runs  through  only  three  to  six  segments,  the  proventriculus 
usually  only  through  three  or  four. 

Stilis    (Typosyllis)    coru.scans   Haswell.     (Plate   xi.,   figs.   28-31). 

Syllis  corruscans,  Haswell,  (25),  p.  734,    PL  1.,  fig.  1-3.  and  Iv.,  fig.  5. 

?  Syllis  corruscans  Hasw.,  Augener,  (1),  p.  208. 

This  is  the  largest  of  the  Australian  Syllids,  attaining  a  lengih  of  as  much  as 
14  em.  with  a  maximum  breadth  of  about  5  mm.  There  are  150  to  200  segments. 
The  colour  of  the  dorsal  surface  is  usually  dark  green,  sometimes  dark  brown; 
that  of  the  ventral  surface  and  of  the  parapodia  and  cirri  light  red  or  orange. 
The  prostomium  is  bright  crimson.  On  the  dorsal  surface  of  the  peristomium  ap- 
pears a  bright  green  spot  or  band. 

The  integ-umentary  glands  are  so  arranged  and  developed  as  to  give  a  corru- 
gated appearance  to  the  darkly-pigmented  dorsal  surface,  the  eoiTugations  being 
sometimes  arranged  in  transverse  rows,  two  or  three  on  each  segment  with  narrow 
furrows  between. 

The  breadth  of  the  prostomium  is  nearly  twice  the  length.  It  becomes  partly 
withdrawn  under  the  prostomium  when  the  animal  is  touched  or  irritated.     The 


100  AUSTRALIAN     SYLLIDAE,     EUSYLI.IDAK     AND     At'TOI-YTIDAE, 

palpi  are  broad  at  the  l)ase,  fused  with  oue  another  lor  a  shoi't  distance, 
longer  thau  the  prostomium,  usuaUy  directed  downwards,  hollowed  out  lielow 
and  internally.  The  eyes  are  rather  small,  those  of  the  anterior  pair  larger 
and  wider  apart  than  those  of  the  posterior.  The  three  prostomial  tentacles  are 
feubequal,  a  little  longer  than  the  palpi,  indistinctly  segmented  or  entirely  unseg- 
mented.  The  peristomial  tentacles  which  are  also  indistinctly  ringed,  are  subei|iial, 
the  dorsal  a  little  longer  than  the  ventral,  shorter  than  the  prostomial. 

The  parapodia  are  relatively  short.  Each  bears  15  to  20  compound  setae. 
These  (Plate  xi.,  figs.  29-31)  are  all  of  the  same  essential  character,  with  bideatate 
falces,  but  the  most  dorsally  situated  (fig.  29)  have  the  falces  long  and  slender, 
a  gradual  transition  taking  place  towards  the  most  ventral  setae  which  have  the 
falces  short  and  comparatively  broad.  In  a  few  of  the  most  posterior  segments 
tliere  are  also  simple  setae — one  dorsal  to  the  comi^ound  setae  of  each  jjarapodium. 
slender  and  hair-like,  the  other  ventral,  very  short,  terminating  like  the  compound 
setae  but  without  the  articulation.  There  are  5  to  7  or  more  pointed  acicula  in 
each  parapodium,  one  sharply  bent  forwards  at  the  end.  The  dorsal  cirri  are 
alternately  longer  and  shorter,  about  equal  in  length  to  the  breadth  of  the  body, 
not  very  distinctly  segmented,  smooth  and  unsegmented  at  the  base,  indistinctly 
segmented  towards  the  apex. 

In  the  original  description  I  stated  that  in  this  species  male  stolons  are  given 
off  from  a  female  stock.  In  my  more  recent  notes  I  can  find  no  confirmation  of 
this.  Female  stolons  are  very  rare,  but  they  occur.  In  the  case  of  the  female, 
as  in  that  of  the  male,  stolon,  sexual  elements  similar  to  those  in  the  stolon  occur 
also,  as  in  other  species  of  Syllis,  in  the  posterior  region  of  the  stock.  It  may 
be  that  in  certain  circumstances,  or  at  certain  seasons,  the  formation  of  a  female 
stolon  may  so  rapidly  follow  that  of  a  male  that  the  posterior  region  of  the  stock 
contains  well  formed  ova  before  the  male  zooid  becomes  detached.  But  I  have 
been  unable  to  find  any  such  case  among  recently  examined  specimens,  which  all 
show  evidence  of  normal  schizogamy  without  hermaphroditism.* 

S.  eoruscans  is  far  from  being  a  typical  Syllis.  Structurally,  in  fact,  it  is 
closely  connected  with  various  species  of  Eusyllis,  and  it  might  quite  well  be 
described  as  a  Eusyllis  which  i-eproduces  with  schizogamy.  Apart  from  the  super- 
ficial features  of  connection  between  the  palpi  at  theu-  bases  and  imperfect  seg- 
mentation of  the  tentacles  and  dorsal  cirri,  S.  eoruscans  is  Eusyllis-M^n  in  having 
the  rim  of  the  cuticle  of  the  pharynx  ocea-sionally  divided  in  an  iiTegular  way  into 
a  number  of  lobes,  which  can  hardly  be  termed  teeth. t  Moreover  the  arrangement 
of  the  radial  muscles  of  the  wall  of  the  pro  vent  riculus  corresponds  completely 
with  that  which  characterises  Eusyllis,  and  differs  from  that  which  occurs  gener- 
ally, if  not  universally,  in  typical  sjiecies  of  Syllis. 

Sub-geniis  Haplosyllis  Langerhans. 

Syli.is   (Haplosyllis)   spoxgicola  Grube. 

Syllis  sponyicola,  Grube,  (18),  p.  104,  PI.  4,  fig.  4. 
Syllis  djiboutiensis,  Gravier,  (Ki),  p.  147,  PI.  9,  fig.  3,  lOOO. 
Syllis  djiboutiensis,  Augener,  (1),  p.  213. 
(For  additional  synonymy  see  Mcintosh,  (39),  p.  197.) 

'Sec  F.  A.  Potts  (47).  '  ' 

tDo  Saint-Joseph  (48)  states :— "Chez  beauccup  de  liiisylli.':,  et  cola  indiifi'reinnieut 

dans  chaque  esp^ce,  lo  bord  de  la  trompe,   au  lieu  d'i-tro  donti'h'   nVst  ijiic  cli'cliiijuctr  et 

s'^loigne   peu   du  bord   uni   et   quelquefois   aussi   an   jieu   di'chiquetc'    de   la  tronipo  dos 

Pionosyllis. ' ' 


BV  w.  A.  haswf:ll.  101 

I  have  only  obtained  in  Poii  Jackson  two  or  three  small  specimens  of  this 
very  Avidely-distributed  species . 

Sub-tfcuus    Eh  l  e  u  s  i  a    Lancjerhans. 
Syllis    (Ehlkhsia)    ferrugixea  Langerhans.      (Plate  xii.,  figs.  3-10. ) 

Ehlersia  ferruginea,  Langerhans,   (35),  p.  104,  fig.  10. 

SylUs  (Ehlersia)  ferruginea,  Augener,   (1),  p.  211,  Text-tig.  2(J. 

The  two  sijecimens  from  Port  Jackson  which  I  refer  to  this  species  were  not 
seen  alive;  in  the  preserved  condition  they  have  a  dull  yellowish-grey  colour.  Their 
length  is  about  8  mm.,  and  each  contains  some  ninety  to  a  hundred  very  short 
segments  the  leng-th  being  less  than  a  tenth  of  the  breadth. 

The  prostomium  (Plate  xii.,  tig.  3)  bears  six  pairs  of  eyes — the  frontal  mere 
dots  of  pigment,  the  others  also  very  small.  The  palpi  are  sub-triangular  when 
viewed  from  above;  behind  thej'  bulge  out  beyond  the  lateral  edge  of  the  pros- 
tomium. The  median  tentacle  is  over  four  times  the  length  of  the  prostomium 
and  is  made  up  of  about  forty-five  articuli ;  the  lateral  are  three-fourths  of  the 
length  of  the  median.  Of  the  peristomial,  the  dorsal,  as  usual  the  longer,  is  a 
little  longer  than  the  lateral  prostomial.  The  parapodia  are  not  deeply  divided. 
In  the  anterior  region  there  are  in  each  parapodium  dorsally  three  or  four  com- 
pound setae  (fig.  4)  of  the  Ehlersia  type  with  long  and  slender  falces,  feebly 
bidentate:  ventrally  the  rest  of  the  compound  setae  (figs.  5-7),  about  ten  in  num- 
ber, have  relatively  short  bidentate  falces  with  the  secondary  tooth  more  strongly 
developed  than  the  terminal.  Posteriorly  the  setae  of  the  latter  type  become 
gradually  replaced  by  setae  (fig.  7)  with  very  short,  strongly  curved  falces  with 
the  secondary  tooth  much  larger  than  the  terminal.  In  the  posterior  segments 
there  is  a  simple  seta  with  a  rounded  extremity  dorsal  to  the  compound  setae  in 
each  parapodium .  In  the  last  two  or  three  segTiients  there  is  alfio  a  ventral  simple 
seta  (fig.  8)  in  each  parapodium,  similar  to  the  adjoining  compound  setae,  but 
without  the  joint.  There  arc  usually  two  acicula  (figs.  9  and  10),  slightly 
knobbed  and  bent  forwards  at  the  end,  in  each  parapodium. 

The  anterior  dorsal  cirri  are  distinctly  segmented,  but  in  both  specimens 
segmentation  completely  disappears  before  the  middle  of  the  body  is  reached. 
The  first  is  longer  than  the  rest,  rather  longer  than  the  breadth  of  the  liody.  The 
ventral  cirri  are  cylindrical  and  not  as  long  as  the  parapodia. 

The  pliarynx  extends  to  the  10th  segment;  its  tooth  is  anteriorly  situated. 
The  proventriculus  extends  to  the  eighteenth  segment;  it  contains  about  30  an- 
nular bands. 

Genus  T  r  v  r  a  x  0  s  y  l  l  i  s   Clajiarede. 

Trypaxosvi.lis  ZEiiRA  ftrube. 

Syllis  zebra,  Grnbe,   (19),  p.    80,  Taf.  iii.,  fig.   7. 
Triipanostjllis  krohnii,  Claparede,   (5),  p.   98. 
T.  krohnii,  Be  St.-Joseph,  (48),  p.  56  (.180). 

T.  ^ebra,  Mcintosh,  (39),  p.  169,  PI.  1..  fies.  9  and  10:  PI.  li.,  fig.  1;  PI.  Ixx., 
fig.  8:  PI.  Ixxix.,  fig.  18. 

;'  Eurymedusa  picta,  Kinbcrg,   (31),  iion  Elders,   (10). 
Syllis  taeniae formis,  Haswell,  (25),  p.  9,  PI.  1.,  figs.  4  and  5. 
Trypanosyllis  Eichardi,  Gravier,  (16),  p.  168,  PI.  ix.,  figs.  12,  13. 
Trypanosyllis  taeniaeformis,  Augener,   (1),  p.   230. 


102  AUSTIJALIAX      SYLLIDAE,     EUSYLI,IU.VE     AXD     AUTOLy'IIDAE, 

Whether  Kinberg's  Eury medusa  pieta  is  the  same  as  Trypanosi/llis  zehra  must 
remain  somewhat  uncertain  until  the  type  sjjecimen  has  l)een  re-examined.  The 
original  diagnosis  of  the  former  is  not  very  adequate;  nor  are  the  figures  of  it  in 
the  "Eugenies  Resa"  of  much  value  in  distinguishing  the  species.  But  the  name, 
and  the  locality  afford  some  indication  "Port  Jackson,  Novae  Hollandiae,  summa 
aqua."  On  the  other  hand,  the  New  Zealand  and  South  Australian  species  whieh 
Ehlers  put  down  as  Eurymedusa  picta  Kinberg,  after  examining  Kinberg's  ori- 
ginal specimen,  is  quite  distinct,  and  has  been  determined  by  Benham  as  a  si^eeies 
of  Odontosyllis   (see  Odontosi/Uis  suteri  Bonhain)  . 

T.  zebra  is  not  at  all  rare  a  little  below  low-water  in  Port  Jackson,  frequent- 
ing especially  the  roots  of  the  Laminarian  Eklonia  radiata.  It  is  one  of  the  larger 
iSyllids,  attaining  a  length  of  as  much  as  6  or  7  cm.  Both  male  and  female 
stolons  are  white  with  two  pairs  of  red  eyes. 

The  mode  of  stolonisation  in  the  Port  Jackson  form  is  that  des^cribed  by 
Marion  and  Bobretsky  (45),  and  De  St.-Josoph  (48)  as  characterising  T.  zebra 
[See  Potts  (47),  p.  13] .  When  the  stolon  is  ready  for  separation  tlie  stuck  hears 
ventrally  a  small  prolongation  terminating  in  a  pair  of  anal  ciiri. 

Family    EITSYLLIDAE. 
Genus  S  y  l  l  i  d  e  s    Oersted. 
Syi.lides   L0XGICI17HATA      Oersted. 

Syllides  longicirrata,  Oersted,   (46),  p.  11,  Tab.  ii.,  fig.  2  a-h. 

Syllides  longicirrata,  Malmgren,  (41),  p.  39. 

Syllides  longocirrata,  Langerhans,  (36),  p.  548. 

AnoplosylUs  ftdva,  Marion  et  Bobretzky,   (45),  p.  28,  PI.  ii.  and  iii..  fig.  8. 

?  Syllis  ochracea,  Marenzeller,   (42),  p.  27,  Taf.  iii.,  fig.   1. 

Syllides  longocirrata,  De  Saint-Joseph,  (48),  p.  165  (41). 

Syllides  longocirrata,  Augener,   (1),  p.   229. 

The  three  specimens  of  Syllides  which  I  have  obtained  in  Port  Jaeksor 
agree  very  closely  with  Marion  and  Bobretzky's  description  and  figure  of  Anoplo- 
sylUs fulva  except  in  one  point,  which  may  be  of  some  importance.  My  speci- 
mens have  well-developed  lenses  in  the  frontal  eyes — a  condition  rarely  met  with. 
The  posterior  eyes  have  no  lenses.  I  have  not  been  able  to  see  the  ventral  simple 
setae  referi-ed  to  by  Langerhans.  The  dorsal  simple  setae,  which  are  gently  curved 
find  blunt,  occur  singly  on  all  the  pai-apodia  except  the  first  tlu-ee. 

The  yellow  corpuscles  which  are  distributed  over  the  whole  dorsal  surface  ol' 
the  peristomium  correspond  very  closely"  with  the  constituent  elements  of  the 
"yellow  bodies"  of  the  Exogoneae.  In  a  female  specimen  ovaries  occur  from  the 
ninth  setigerous  segment  backwards. 

Genus  E  T'  r  y  s  t  l  l  i  s  Ehlers. 

EORYSYLLIS    TUBERCULATA    EhlcrS. 

Eurysyllis  tuhercuhihi,  Ehlers,   (0),  p.  264.  Taf.  11,  fig's.  4-7. 
Polymasttis  paradoxus,  Claparede,   (5),  p.   109,  PI.   viii.,  fig.  3. 
I  have  seen   only  two   sjiecimens  of  this   remarkable  form,  obtained    a1    Point 
Piper,  Port  Jackson.  aiiKnig  Algae. 


BY    W.    A.    IIASWELL.  103 

Genus  Pionosyllis  MaluigTcn . 
PioxosYLM.s   iielakmixki'jii;a,     n.sp.    (Plate  xii.,  figs.  ]l-l(j;  Plate  xiii.,  fls,'.  1.) 

Complete,  sexually  mature  specimens  reach  a  length  nL'  about  1.4  cm.  with  a 
breadth  of  about  1  mm.,  and  contain  05  to  75  segments.  But  many  specimens 
show  evidence  of  having  lost  a  part  of  the  fragile  posterior  region,  which  has 
become  imperfectly  regenerated .  Thus  a  number  of  specimens  contain  only  about 
25  to  50  segments  of  nornud  character,  with  or  without  a  narrow  posterior  con- 
tinuation of  3  to  12  sundl  segments,  obviously  formed  by  a  process  of  regenera- 
tion . 

The  general  groun<l-colour  in  the  living  animal  is  yellowish,  or  greenish,  or 
light  pink.  On  the  jn-ostomium,  just  behind  the  eyes,  is  a  transverse  black  line  con- 
cave forwards;  this  sends  forwards  a  median  longitudinal  ban<l  .vhich  bifurcates  in 
front  between  the  eyes.  Usually  the  dorsal  surface  of  the  palin  is  dark  with  a  narrow 
obliciue  light  line.  Each  of  the  first  few  segments  has  a  simple  transverse  black 
band  across  its  dorsal  surface.  On  a  few  segments  (usually  the  fifth  to  the 
eighth,  sometimes  a  larger  number)  there  is  a  second  transvei-se  black  band. 
Further  back  again  each  segment  has  a  single  band,  broad  iu  the  middle,  nar- 
rowing laterally.  These  bands  become  shorter  posteriorly  and  disappear  alto- 
gether towards  the  middle  of  the  body — the  posterior  part  being  either  devoid  of 
markings  or  with  lighter  grey  transverse  lines.  Some  black  pigment  also  occurs 
on  the  ventral  surface  of  a  few  of  the  most  anterior  segments  of  the  body- 
Similar  pigment  is  also  present  in  the  pharynx,  in  the  proventriculus  and  in  the 
walls  of  the  nephridia. 

Vibratile  cilia  are  present  on  the  palpi,  on  the  lateral  liorders  (.if  the  seg- 
ments and  in  groups  on  the  parapodia.  Non-motile  (sensoi-y)  cilia  are  abundant 
on  the  tentacles  and  cirri. 

The  prostomium  (Plate  xiii.,  fig.  1)  is  broader  than  long.  The  peri.stomium 
is  visible  dorsally  for  a  short  distance  only.  The  eyes  Aary  greatly  in  develop- 
ment, but  are  usually  large  and  may  touch  or  overlap :  small  frontal  eyes  are  pre- 
sent. The  palpi  are  large,  entirely  separate,  divergent  from  close  to  the  base, 
with  an  almost  oblong  outline:  but  frequently  their  shape  is  disguised  by  various 
degrees  of  flexion.  In  the  active  living  animal  they  are  usually  extended  almost 
vertically  downwards  and  folded  inwards  at  the  ends,  so  as  fre(|uently  to  touch 
one  another  ventrally  in  front  of  the  mouth.  The  prostomial  and  peristomial  ten- 
tacles are  segmented,  Imt  the  segmentation  is  less  distinct  towards  the  base.  The 
median  prostomial  tentacle  is  longer  than  the  lateral,  longer  than  the  prostomium 
and  palpi  together.  The  dorsal  peristomial  tentacle,  longer  thai^  the  ventral, 
is  about  equal  in  length  to  the  median  prostomial. 

The  long,  narrow,  pointed  para]iodia  are  about  e(|ual  in  length  to  half  the 
breadth  of  the  segments.  At  about  the  23rd  segment,  a  distinct  notopodial  rudi- 
ment with  a  small  aeiculum  makes  its  appearance,  and  persists  throughout  the 
rest  of  the  segments.  Each  neuropodium  has  one,  two,  or  sometimes  three, 
aeicula  and  about  fifteen  to  twenty  long  and  slender  compound  setae.  The 
acicula  (Plate  xii.,  fig.  16)  have  a  conical  extremity  surrounded  at  the  base  by 
a  ring-like  thickening.  In  the  compound  setae  of  the  anterior  region  (Plate  xii.. 
fig.  11),  the  falces,  very  long  and  narrow  in  the  case  of  the  most  dorsal,  decrease 
in  length  ventrally,  becoming  quite  short,  but  ai'e  all  of  the  same  essential  charac- 
ter: bidontate  with  the  two  terminal  teeth  nearly  equal,  the  cutting  edge  convex, 
finely  ciliated.     Posteriorly    (Plate  xii.,   figs.   12-15)    a   change  takes  place:   the 


104  AUSTRALIAN-     SYLLIDAE,     EUSYLLIDAE     AXD     AVTOLTTIDAE, 

fak-es  become  shorter,  and  the  secontlary  tooth  comes  to  preponderate  over  the 
tenninal.  In  the  parapodia  of  the  most  posterior  region  there  are  two  sets  of 
simple  setae,  one  of  the  fli'st  set  on  the  dorsal  side  of  each  bundle  of  compound 
setae,  and  one  of  the  second  set  on  the  ventral  side.  The  dorsal  simple  setae  are 
slender  liairs  like  the  capillary  swimming  setae;  the  ventral  resemble  the  sliortest 
and  most  ventral  of  the  compound  setae  except  in  the  absence  of  the  articulation. 
In  scxiuiUy  mature  specimens  the  seg-meuts  containing  the  ripe  genital  products, 
and  usually  a  few  in  front  of  them,  have  notopodial  Ijundles  of  capillary  setae; 
but  these  are  very  sliort,  much  shorter  than  the  compound  setae. 

The  dorsal  eii-ri  are  alternately  longer  and  shorter;  the  longer  are  in  general 
about  as  long  as  the  breadth  of  the  body  or  a  little  longer;  all  are  verj-  slender 
i'nd  indistinctly  segmented.  The  ventral  cirri  are  short,  rarely  extending  as  far 
as  the  ends  of  the  parapodia,  and  usually  falling  far  short  of  it.  in  shape  they 
are  elongated  compressed  cones,  the  terminal  portion  comparatively  slender. 
These  ventral  cirri  are  mobile  to  a  quite  unusual  degree,  the  slender  tip  moving 
about  freely.     The  anal  cirri  are  entirely  unsegmented. 

When  the  proboscis  is  retracted,  the  ring  of  phar^-ngeal  papillae  lies  in  the 
fifth  segment.  In  the  eighth  seg-mcnt  lies  the  single  dorsal  tooth,  which  is  thus 
well  behind  its  usual  position,  though  it  is  still  in  front  of  the  middle  of  the 
pharynx.  The  pharynx  extends  back  as  far  as  the  thirteenth  segment;  the  pio- 
ventrieulus  lies  in  the  fourteenth  to  the  twentieth.  The  latter  has  about  twenty- 
five  rows  of  muscle-columns. 

There  is  no  trace  of  schizogamy.  Mature  males  have  the  segments  full  of 
sperms  from  about  the  twentieth  segment  backwards,  except  in  a  limited  regit  n 
at  the  posterior  end.  The  females,  when  mature,  have  numerous  small  ova  in 
each  of  the  segments  from  about  the  twenty-third  to  about  tlie  fifty-fifth.  Gesta- 
tion apparently  does  not  occur. 

The  nephridia  are  very  conspicuous  in  most  specimens  owing  to  their  walls 
containing  much  black   pigiuent. 

In  spite  of  the  fact  that  the  union  between  tiie  palpi  is  absent,  and  in 
spite  of  the  presence  of  the  limited  degree  of  segmentation  in  the  tentacles  and 
dorsal  cirri,  this  species  seems  to  find  its  nearest  allies  in  the  members  of  the  genus 
Piotiosi/llis.  The  position  of  the  tooth,  though  it  is  not  further  back  than  in 
certain  species  of  Si/Uif',  such  as  S.  prolifera,  seems  to  separate  it  from  the  other 
described  species  of  Pimiosiilli^ ■  Apparently  it  comes  nearest  to  P.  u-eissmanni 
Langerhans  [(3G).  ji.  24G,  fig.  11]  and  P.  ireissmainioides  of  Augeuer  [(1),  p. 
223.  text-fig.  30] . 

P.  melaenoncphra  is  not  rare  among  the  roots  of  oar-weeds  (Eklonia  radiatii) 
in  Tort  .Tackson.  It  is  very  alert  and  active  and  very  fragile,  so  that  complete 
s|)(Mimens  are  not  easily  obtained. 

PioxosTi.iJS   DIVARICATA  Keferstcin.     (Plate  xiii..   figs.   2   and  3). 

SijUift  divaricalri.  Kefersteiu.   (30).  ]> .    111. 

Si/llis  nnrmamiica,  Claparede,  (4),  ]>.  40,  Taf.  xiii..  fig.  24. 

PinnosyUis  dh-aricrita.  Langerhans,    (SO.  p.    .54.5. 

Piotwsiillis  ?  diriiriraln.  ^fclntosh,  (38).  p.  llU.  PI.  lix.,  fig.  12;  PI.  Ix.,  fig. 
7;  PI.  Ixxix.,  fig.  17. 

Tlu'  only  specimen  of  this  species  which  T  have  obtained  is  about  8  mm.  in 
lengtli  in  tlic  preserved  condition  and  less  than  1  mm.  in  greatest  breadth.  It 
'\a.s  almost  colourless  in   I'roiit    when  alive,   but    for  black   pigment  in  the  proto- 


BT   V^^  A.   HASWELL.  105 

plasmic  cores  of  the  radial  muscle-fibres  of  the  proventriculus;  but  throughout 
the  greater  part  of  its  leng-th  it  was  strongly  coloured  with  dark  browu,  almost 
black,  pigment,  not  collected  into  transverse  lines,  but  distributed  over  the  dorsal 
surface  and  the  parapodia,  with  a  tendency  to  the  formation,  in  places,  of  irregu- 
lar longitudinal  lines.  There  are  43  segments,  but  some  have  been  lost.  To- 
wards the  middle,  where  the  body  is  broadest,  the  length  of  the  segments  is  about 
one-fourth  of  the  breadth. 

The  prostomium  is  a  little  broader  than  long,  and  bears  lour  rather  large 
eyes,  the  twiy  of  each  side  in  close  contact.  The  tentacles  and  dorsal  cirri  are 
entirely  devoid  of  segmentation.  The  median  tentacle  is  about  three  to  four 
times  the  length  of  the  prostomium,  the  lateral  scarcely  twice  that  length.  The 
palpi  diverge  widely  from  one  another,  and  their  basal  junction  is  of  very  slight 
extent.  The  dorsal  peristomial  tentacle  is  longer  than  the  median  prostoniial, 
about  five  times  the  length  of  the  prostomium. 

The  dorsal  cirri  are  longer  than  the  breadth  of  the  segments  in  front ;  shorter 
behind.  The  parapodia  are  simple  and  undivided,  much  shorter  than  the  breadth 
of  the  segments. 

The  setae  (Plate  xiii.,  figs.  2  and  3)  usually  about  12  in  each  parapodium, 
are  very  long  and  slender,  and  are  all  of  one  type,  though  decreasing  as  usual  in 
the  length  of  the  fals  from  the  dorsal  towards  the  ventral  side.  The  falx  ter- 
minates in  two  teeth  situated  close  together,  the  secondary  tooth  rather  more  pro- 
nounced than  the  terminal,  and  strongly  hooked.  No  simple  setae  are  present, 
but  this  may  be  due  to  the  loss  of  the  posterior  segments.  The  acicula,  two  or 
three  in  number,  are  simple  and  straight  and  sharp-pointed  or  blunt.  The  ven- 
tral ein-i  are  shorter  than  the  parapodia,  long,  conical,  but  with  a  suddenly  nar- 
rowing terminal  part. 

The  phar^Tix  extends  to  the  tenth  segment :  its  median  tooth,  which  is  blunt, 
lies  just  Ijehind  its  anterior  margin  in  the  5th  segment .  The  proventriculus  ex- 
tends to  the  15th  segment,  and  has  about  30  rows  of  muscle-columns. 

Though  there  are  one  or  two  points  (such  as  the  absence  of  frontal  eyes)  in 
which  the  single  specimen  does  not  agree  with  the  description  of  the  European 
species,  the  correspondence  on  the  whole  is  very  close. 

Genus  Odoktosyllis  Claparcde. 

Odontosyllis    detecta  Augener. 

Odontosyllis  detecta   Augener  (1),  p.  236,  Taf.  iii.,  fig.  33  and  text-tig.  34. 

I  have  obtained  five  specimens  which  seem  to  be  referable  to  this  species — • 
three  mature  males  and  two  mature  females.  Since  Augener  had  only  a  single 
incomplete  specimen  before  him,  I  am  able  to  supplement  his  account  with  sundry 
additional  particulars. 

The  largest  specimens  are  about  6  mm.  in  lengtli  and  contain  35  to  40 
segments.  There  is  no  definite  colouration  apart  from  the  colours  of  the  int,rnal 
organs.  Vibratile  cilia  are  widely  distributed  on  the  surface — on  the  palpi,  on 
the  prostomium,  on  the  peristomium,  on  the  borders  of  the  segments,  and  on  the 
parapodia.  Non-motile  (sensory)  cilia  are  also  abundant,  and  are  sjiecially  elon- 
gated on  the  inner  borders  of  the  palpi. 

In  the  males  the  enonnous  eyes  occupy  a  large  part  of  the  dorsal  portion 
of  the  prostomium,  and  posteriorly  those  of  opposite  sides  are  only  separated  by 
a  very  narrow  interval ;  in  one  specimen  they  bulge  out  beyond  the  normal  limits 


106  AUSTKALIAX      tYLLIliAf,,     KUSYLLIHAE     AXD      AVTOLYTIDAE, 

of  the  prostomiiim .  In  the  specimen  last  referred  to  there  is  no  clear  indication 
that  there  are  two  eyes  on  each  side,  and  only  one  lens  is  distinguishable;  Imt  in 
the  remaining  males  the  anterior  and  [losterior  eyes,  though  intimately  united,  are 
to  be  distinguished  by  their  sei)arate  lenses  and  by  slight  fissures.  In  the  female, 
on  the  other  hand,  the  eyes  are  quite  small  and  separate;  in  front  of  each  an- 
terior eye  is  a  small  frontal  eye  which  appears  to  have  a  small  lens. 

The  palpi  are  Cjuite  conspicuous  both  in  the  living  and  fixed  specimens, 
'i'heir  basal  parts  are  fused  to  form  a  transverse  bridge  in  front  of  the  mouth. 
From  this  bridge,  the  anterior  edge  of  which  is  slightly  in  front  of  the  anterior 
border  of  the  prostomium,  s(>parated  from  one  another  by  a  wide-  interval,  arise  the 
free  portions  of  the  palpi  as  uvate  processes  projecting  forwards  in  front  of  the 
prostomium,  or  doubled  back  on  the  ventral  side.  There  is  no  trace  of  a  nuchal 
prominence . 

The  tentacles  and  cirri  present  no  trace  of  definite  segmentation,  though  ir- 
j-cgularly  annulated.  Tlie  median  tentacle  is  about  twice  the  length  of  the  pros- 
tomium, the  lateral  a  little  shorter  than  the  median.  Of  the  peristomial  tentacles 
the  dorsal  is,  as  usual,  the  longer,  and  is,  approximately,  of  the  same  length  as 
the  lateral  prostomial.  Of  tlie  dorsal  cirri  the  first  is  much  longer  than  the 
others,  and  is  about  the  lengtli  of  the  median  tentacle  or  a  little  longer.  The 
rest  are  alternately  longer  and  shorter:  on  the  average  tlieir  length  is  about  ('(lunl 
to  half  the  breadth  of  the  body. 

Tlie  ])arapodia  are  bilolinl,  the  poslerinr  (d.irsal)  lobe  being  the  larger. 
There  are  ten  or  twelve  compound  setae  in  each  ])arapodium.  These,  which  are 
figured  by  Augener  (Text-fig.  34),  have  short,  unidentate  f aloes.  On  the  dorsal 
.side  of  the  compound  setae  in  each  parapodium  there  is,  in  all  but  the  first  8  to  IG 
segments,  a  very  fine  capillary  simple  seta;  no  ventral  simple  setae  were  found. 

Capillary  swimming  setae  are  present  in  one  of  the  male  specimens  from  the 
14th  segment  backwards,  absent  in  the  others.  There  is  a  single  aciculum  with  a 
.slightly  knobbed  extremity  which  is  distinctly  bent  backwards.  The  ventral  <-irri 
are  broad,  ovate,  shorter  than  the  parapodia. 

The  pharynx  extends  as  far  Ijack  as  the  6th  segment;  the  proventriculus  to 
the  10th.  The  pharyngeal  teeth  are  somewhat  difficult  of  analysis.  But  tliere 
seem  to  be  six  teeth  and  two  jaw-pieces,  two  of  the  teeth  being  closely  connected 
with  the  latter,  and  the  remaining  four  free  between  them.  This  is  very  near 
what  is  described  and  figured  by  IMarenzcller  [(42).  Taf.  iv.,  fig.  2D]  for  Odoiiio- 
syllis  virescens  (O.  ctenostoma). 

In  the  females,  ovaries  nccui'  from  the  (ith  or  7th  segments  backwards.  In 
the  male,  testes  begin  about  the  lith  segment.  A  limited  region,  comprising  the 
11th  to  the  14th  segments,  is  in  mU  lliiee  specimens  specially  developed,  with  large 
testes  in  the  13th  and  14tli,  and  tlie  body-cavities  distended  with  ripe  speniiatozoa 
which  are  absent  in  the  rest  of  the  body. 

The  specimens  were  found  among  Algae  at  AVatson's  Bay,  Port  Jackson . 

Augener,  on  the  strength  of  the  enlarged  eyes,  compares  his  Q.  detrcta  with 
().  hiialina  (xrube;  but  there  seems  to  be  sufficient  evidence  to  prove  that  the 
teature  in  (|uestion  is  a  sexual  and  not  a  specific  character.  Apart  from  this,  the 
affinities  of  0.  rletecta  are  much  more  with  0.  ctenostoma,  with  Which  Augener 
makes  no  comparison .  In  faet,  the  only  differences  to  be  detected  are  the  ab- 
sence of  the  nuchal  lobe,  and  also  of  the  dorsal,  simple,  hooked  setae,  which,  ac- 
cording to  Langerhans  [(36).  p.  55(').  fig.  l.'jrt.  /i.l  and  St.-.Toseph  [(47).  p.  .53, 
177],  occur  on  the  more  posterior  jiarajiodia  in  the  latter  species. 


EV    W.   A.    HASWELL.  107 

Odoxtosylli.s     rrLGURANs   And.  et   Edw. 
Odontosyllis  fulgurans,  Audouin  et  Edwards,  Ann.  Sci.  nat.,  t.  xxix.,  p.   229 
Odontosylli^  fulgurans,  Mcintosh,   (39),  p.  178,  PI.  xlix.,  fig.  5;  PI.  lix.,  figs. 
15  and  15  a  and  6;  PI.  Ixx.,  fig-.  11;  PI.  Ixxx.,  fig.  4. 
For  i'urtlier  synonymy  see  Mcintosh. 

I  have  obtained  only  two  specimens  of  an  Odvntosyllis  which,  if  not  identical 
with  the  European  and  North  American  species  above  named,  is  very  nearly 
related  to  it.  0.  fulgurans  seems  to  be  characterised  lay  the  great  length 
of  the  proventriculus,  running  through  ten  or  eleven  segments,  the  hooked  falces 
of  the  compound  setae  with  a  minute  tooth  near  the  middle  of  the  cutting  edge, 
and  the  absence  of  nuchal  or  occipital  lobe. 

In  the  living  condition  the  Port  Jackson  specimens  were  of  a  brownish  colour 
with  iiregular  whitish  flecks;  the  eyes  were  red.  The  only  complete  specimen  is 
about  7  mm.  long',  with  about  50  segments.  In  one  the  pigment  of  the  two  eyes 
on  either  side  is  to  some  extent  coalescent;  in  the  other  the  two  are  close  to- 
gether but  clearly  separated ;  in  the  former  a  pair  of  frontal  eyes  are  represented 
by  a  pair  of  veiltrally  placed  minute  specks  of  pigment. 

The  teeth  in  the  retracted  condition  of  the  proboscis  lie  in  the  fourth  seg- 
ment. As  far  as  can  be  made  out  they  are  sis  in  number.  A  striking  feature 
is  the  presence  in  the  wall  of  tlie  pharynx,  just  l)ehind  the  teeth  and  immediately 
in  front  of  the  anterior  end  of  the  proventriculus,  of  an  opaque  ring  wliich  ap- 
pears fjuite  black  in  the  cleared  specimen.  A  similar  appearance  on  a  smaller 
scale  is  observable  at  the  posterior  end  of  the  proventriculus.  These  two  dark 
bodies  are  evidently  the  proventricular  glands,  anterior  and  posterior,  wliich  I 
described  in  the  Exogoneae.  They,  or  at  least  tlie  anterior,  occur  in  all  Sgllidea 
bo  far  as  I  have  observed ;  but  they  ai'e  usually  very  inconspicuous  and  only  recog- 
nisable in  sections*  or,  in  the  case  of  some  of  tlie  Exogoneae,  in  favourably  stained 
entire  specimens. 

Odontosyllis  suteri  Benham. 
Odontosylhs  suteri,  Benham,  (2),  ]).  161,  figs.  1  and  2. 
Euryrnediisa  picta,  Ehlers,  (10).  p.  21. 
Non  Eiiry medusa  picia,  Kinborg,  (.31)  . 

Odontosylhs  suteri  has  been  found  )jy  Benham  at  various  points  on  the 
coast  of  the  South  Island  of  New  Zealand,  and  also  occurs  at  the  Kennadec 
Islands.  I  have  only  hitherto  found  two  specimens  in  Port  Jackson.  Ehlers's 
confusion  of  this  s|iecies  with  Eurymedusa  jricta  of  Kinberg  is  referred  to  under 
Trypanosyllis  zebra. 

0.  suteri  is  characterised  (1)  by  the  presence  of  a  wellmarked  nuchal  lobe, 
(2)  by  the  falx  of  tlie  compound  setae  tei-niinating  in  a  single  tooth,  but  having  a 
"secondary  tooth"  about  the  middle  of  the  concave  edge,  and  (3)  by  the  very 
long  proventriculus  running  through  15  segments.  As  in  0.  fidgitrans  the  pro- 
ventricular  glands  are  very  consjjicuous  in  the  cleared  specimen. 

I  am  indebted  to  Professor  Benham  for  New  Zealand  specimens. 

Odoxtostllis  feeycinetensis  Augener. 
OdontosyUis  freycinetensis,  Augener,   (1),  p.  234,  PI.  ii.,  flg.  7;  text-fig.  .33. 
I   have   obtained   only   one   specimen   of  an    OdontosyUis   which   is    certainly 
identical  with  Augener's  0.  freycinetensis  from  Western  Australia.     It  is  4  mm. 


*A  trace  of  the  anterior  crlands  is  distingiiishable  in  Auirener's  fiffnre  of  O.   "landir 
losa  (Taf.  iii.,  fig.  :?7).  ^  m  ., 


108  AUSTRALIAN-   SYLLIDAE,  EUSYLLIDAE  AXD  ACTOLYTIDAE, 

lonjr.  and  eorup rises  only  24  segments,  but  is  obviously  incomplete.  It  is  of  a 
general  gi-ey  colour,  darker  in  the  region  behind  the  proventriculus  than  in  front. 
The  colouration  proves  under  the  microscope  to  be  due  to  the  presence  of  irreguhir 
patches  of  black  pigment  partly  arranged  in  broken  transverse  lines.  This  occurs 
not,  as  is  usually  the  case,  in  the  dorsal  integument,  but  deep  within  the  muscular 
layers — presumably  in  the  peritoneum. 

The  pharynx  and  proventriculus  are  displaced  owing  to  rupture:  tlie  teeth 
and  jaw-pieces,  so  far  as  they  can  be  seen,  closely  resemble  those  of  0.  detectn. 
The  acicula  do  not  end  in  a  simple  point,  but  are  sharply  bent  forwards  at  tl.c 
extremity . 

Genus  A  ii  B  L  y  o  s  y  l  L  I  s  Grube. 

AiiBLYOSYLLis  SPECTABiLis  Johnston.     (Plate  xiii.,  figs.  -I-IO). 

Pterosyllis  (Gattiola)  spectabilis,  Johnston,   (29),  p.  195,  PL  xvia.  figs.  1-7. 

Pterosi/llis  formosa,  Claparede,   (4),  p.  46,  PI.  xiii.,  figs.  30-34. 

Pterosyllis  plectorlnjncha,  Marenzeller  (42),  p.  47,  PI.  5,  fig.  3. 

Amblyosyllis  Madeirensis,  Laugerhans.  (3G|,  p.  561,  PL  32,  fig.  19. 

Pterosyllis    (Gattiola)    spectabilis,  St.-Joseph,   (48).  p.  63,  PL   9,  figs,  64-67. 

This  small  Syllid  occurs  sparingly  among  the  roots  of  Eklonia  a  few  feet 
below  low-water  mark  in  Port  Jackson. 

The  length  is  about  1  cm.  iind  the  number  of  segments  14  to  30.  Some 
specimens  are  colourless  or  nearly  so,  or  have  only  the  dorsal  cirri  pigmented ; 
others,  in  addition  to  the  pigment  in  the  cirri,  have  an  elaborate  pattern  formed 
of  dark  pigment  on  the  dorsal  surface  of  the  segments;  others  have  a  systom 
of  transverse  violet  lines.  In  some  female  specimens,  two  longitudinal  wolet 
lines  run  throughout  the  intestinal  region.  In  some  the  only  internal  colouration 
is  due  to  the  orange  intestinal  epithelium.  The  tentacles  and  eim,  including  the 
ventral,  are  full  of  mulbeiTy-shaped  glands  which  discharge  fine  thread-like  bodies. 
All  the  tentacles  and  the  dorsal  ciiTi  are  alike  in  not  being  distinctly  segmented 
at  their  bases.  The  prostomium.  (Plate  xiii..  fig.  4)  rounded  in  outline,  bears 
two  pairs  of  eyes  of  variable  size  dorsally  and  a  third,  very  minute,  pair  in  front 
of  them,  but  on  the  ventral  surface,  and  therefore  directed  downwards.  The 
median  tentacle  is  about  ten  times  the  lengtii  of  the  prostomium,  the  lateral  about 
four  or  five  times.  The  palpi  (PL  xiii.,  fig.  5)  are  very  short,  scarcely  visible  from 
above,  united  together  for  a  short  distance  in  front  of  the  mouth  to  form  a  sort 
of  upper  lip  with  a  median  suture;  laterally  each  extends  outwards  so  as  to  pro- 
ject slightly  beyond  the  lateral  border  of  the  prostomium. 

The  peristomium.  small  and  closely  united  to  the  prostomium,  bears  dors- 
ally  and  laterally,  widely  separated  from  one  another,  a  pair  of  ciliated  lol)es 
which  represent  the  "ailerons  occipitaux"  or  nuchal  wings  of  other  spe<'ies.  'I'hese 
may  be  short  and  globular,  or  may  be  elongated  so  as  to  extend  back  over  the 
first  setigerous  segment.  The  dorsal  iierisfnmial  tentacle  is  longer  than  the 
ventral,  about  the  lengtii  of  the  lateral  iirostmiiial. 

The  parapodia  (fig.  fi)  have  a  very  distinct  anterior  lobe  or  lingula.  Each 
bears  some  5  to  12  stout,  bidentatc.  compound  setae  (figs.  7  and  8)  witli  very  fine 
i;nd  short  cilia  on  the  cutting  edge.  The  acicula,  usually  five  or  six  in  each 
]iarapodiuni,  are  straiglii  and  iiointed.  The  dorsal  cirri  are  much  longer  than 
the  breadth  of  the  body  in  tlie  living  and  active  condition;  tliey  are  not  definitely 
segmented  towards  the  base.  The  })road  ventral  cirri  are  longer  than  the  para- 
podia.    The  penultimate  segment   has  two  pairs  of  jointed  cirri,  the  dorsal  the 


BY   W.  A.   HASWELL.  109 

longer,  cousiderably  longer  than  the  breadth  of  the  segment,  the  ventral  composed 
of  only  two  or  three  joints.     The  anal  cirri  are  similar  to  the  dorsal. 

The  oral  end  of  the  pharynx  i^  provided  with  a  circlet  of  six  well-separateil 
teeth  (figs.  9  and  10),  each  of  which  is  divided  into  five  sharp  cusps,  the  central 
one  larger  than  the  othex-s. 

The  Port  Jackson  Amblyosyllis  is  very  nearly  related  to  that  found  at  Dinar<l 
by  St.-Joseph  and  regarded  by  him  as  being  identical  with  Gattiola  spectabili^: 
of  Johnston  (29),  Pterosyllis  plectorhyncha  of  Marenzeller  (42),  and 
P.  madeirensis  of  Langerhans  (36) .  The  apparent  greater  lateral  ex- 
tension of  the  palpi  in  the  Australian  form,  together  with  the  varia- 
bility in  the  length  of  the  nuchal  wings  and  the  presence  of  the  ventral 
eye-spots,  are  probably  not  of  crucial  importance,  while  the  correspondence  of  the 
setae  and  acicula  and  the  peculiar  glands  in  the  tentacles  and  cirri,  with  the 
threads  which  they  discharge,  correspond  closely  with  St.-Joseph's  descriptions. 
The  only  discrepancy  that  appears  to  be  of  importance  is  with  regard  to  the  teeth. 
Marenzeller's  figure  [(42),  Taf.  v.,  fig.  3D]  of  the  teeth  of  his  Pterosyllis  plector- 
hyncha is  much  nearer  what  is  to  be  seen  in  the  Port  Jackson  specimens  than  St. 
Joseph's  description  and  figures  [(48),  p.  65,  PI.  9,  fig.  66].  In  spite  of  these 
apparent  differences  it  appears  probable  that  the  European  and  Australian  forms 
will  prove  to  be  identical. 

Augener  (1)  found  only  fragments  of  an  Amblyosyllis  in  the  Hamburg  Ex- 
pedition's eolleetiou.  These  he  considered  to  agree  well  with  Ehlers's  A.  granosa 
from  Magellan   (7). 

Family  AUTOLYTIDAE. 
Genus  Autolytus. 

AUTOLVTUS     PACHYCERUS   Aug. 

Autolytus  paehycerus,  Augener,  (1),  p.  257,  fig.  11  and  12;  Text-fig.  40. 

The  Port  Jackson  species  of  Autolytus  which  I  refer  to  the  above  species  is 
characterised  by  its  extremely  brilliant  colouration,  but  alcohol-jireserved  speci- 
mens after  a  time,  comjiletely  lose  all  ti'ace  of  this,  and  Augener's  statement  "Die 
Farbung  ist  eintonig  gelblich  weiss  ohne  besondere  zeichnung"  becomes  applicable 
to  themi 

The  most  striking  superficial  feature  of  thee  living  worm  is  the  presence  in 
the  middle  of  the  dorsal  surface  of  each  segment  of  a  bright  blue  or  purple  spot, 
usually  rounded,  but  sometimes  produced  into  a  transverse  streak.  This  occurs 
both  in  the  stock  and  in  the  stolons  at  all  stages.  The  ground  colour  is  red  or 
orange . 

The  stock  is  about  5  mm.  iu  length  and  contains  about  50  segments.  The 
proventrieulus  lies  in  the  7th  and  8th,  or  8th  and  9th  segments;  in  one  specimen 
it  was  more  elongated,  extending  from  the  8th  to  the  12th.  The  first  stolon  is 
produced  by  sehi^ogamy.  Later  a  chain  results  from  gemmation.  The  separated 
off  female  stolons  containing  each  about  30  segments  at  first  swim  about  actively 
and  are  provided  with  capillary  swimming  setae  on  all  the  segments  except  the 
first  seven  or  eight.  Aftei-wards  the  capillary  setae  become  lost,  and  a  little 
before  or  shortly  after  this  takes  place  the  ova  are  discharged,  to  be  subsequently 
carried  about  enclosed  in  a  capsule  on  the  ventral  surface  of  the  parent. 

A  male  stolon  has  about  the  same  number  of  segments  as  the  female  and  ha:; 
capillary  setae  on  all  the  segments  except  the  first  three. 

In  all  stages  the  first  pair  of  dorsal  cirri  are  much  longer  than  any  of  the 
rest  except  the  second  which  approaches  it  in  length. 


110  AUSTRALIAN  STLLIDAE,  EUSYLLIDAE  AND  AUTOLTTIDAE, 

LITERATURE. 

1.  AuGEXER,  H.— PolycLaeta.  i.  Eirantia.  Die  Fauiia  Sudwest  Australiens .     4 

Bd.,'o  Lief,  1913. 

2.  Bexham,  W.   B. — Notes  uu  some  Xew  Zealand  Polychaetes.     Trans.  N.Z. 

Inst,  VoL  17,  1914. 

3.  Claparede,    R. — Annelidas    chetopodes     du    Golte    de    Naples.     Mem.     Soc. 

Phys.  Hist.  nat.  Geneve,  tome  19,  1868. 
4_   .— Beobaclitungen   uber   Anat.    und    Eutwickeliingsgeschielite   wirbel- 

loser  Thiere.    1803. 
5. . — Glanures    zootomiques     parmi    les     Aimelides    de    Port     \'eudres. 

Mem.  Soc.  Phys.  Hist.  nat.'Geneve,  tome  17,  1804. 
6.   Ehlers,  E. — Die  Borstenwurmer.    Leipzig,  1864. 
7     . Ergebnisse  der  Hamburg-Magalhaens  Sammebreise,  iii.,  Bd.,  Poly- 

chaeten,   1897. 
g_ . Die  Polyi-liaeten-Sammlung  der  deutschen  Sudpolar  Exped.  1901- 

1903.     1917. 
9.  •. — Siboga  Polj-chaeten . 

10. . — Xeuseelandisehe  AnneUden.    1904  and  1907. 

11.  EisiG,  H. — Ueber  das  Vorkommen  eines  Sehwimmblasenabnlichen  Organ  l.ei 

Anneliden.     Mittheil.  Zool.  Stat,  zu  Neapel,  ii.  Band,  1881. 

12.  Fauvel,  p.— Annelides   polychetes   des   Hes  Falkland.     Arch.    Zool.  esp.    et 

gen.,  tome  55,  1916. 

13.  . — Annelides     polychetes    de    I'Australie    meridionale.     Arch.    Zool. 

exp.  et  gen.,  tome  56,  1917.  , 

14.  Goodrich,   E.    S. — Observations  on    SyHis   vivipara    Krohn.     Journ.    Linn. 

Soc.   Lond.,  Vol.  28,  p.  105,  Pl.  13.    1900. 

15.  Gravier,  C. — Les  annelides  polychetes.     Deux.  Exped.  antarct.  franc. 

IG. . — Annelides   polychetes   de   la  Mer  Rouge.     Nouv.    Arch,   du  Miis. 

d'Hist.  nat.,  4  serie,  tome  2.    1900. 

17.  Grtjbe.  E.— Die  Fanulien  der  Anneliden.   Ai-ch.   f.   Naturg.,  16  Bd.    1850. 

18.  . — Besehreibungen  neuer  oder  wenig  bekannter  Anneliden.     A'ierter 

Beitrag.   Arch.   f.   Xaturg.,  Jahrg.   1855. 

19 .  . . . — Beschr.  neuer  oder  wenig  bekannter  Anneliden.     Funf  ter  Beit- 

rag.  Arch.   f.   Naturg.,  Jahrg.    1800. 

20.   . — Beschr.  neuer  oder  wenig  bekannter  Anneliden.    Seehster  Beitrag. 

Arch.  f.  Xaturg.,  29  Band,  1863. 

21.  . — Annulata  Oerstediana  Af.  Xaturbist.     Foren.     Yidensk.     Meddel- 

ser.    1857. 

22.  . — Die  Insel  Lussin  und  ihre  Meeresfauna.    Breslau,  1864. 

23. . — Besehreibungen    neuer    oder     wenig    bekannter    Anneliden     des 

Rothen  Meeres.     Monatsb.  der  Kgl.   Akad.   der  Wiss.     Berlin.     1869. 

24.  . — Annulata  Semperiana.   Mem.   Acad.   Imp.    Sciences.  St.  Peters- 

bourg,  7e.  serie,  tome  25,  Xo.  8.  1878. 

25.  Haswell,  W.    a. — Observations  on   some   Australian   Polychaeta.        Proc. 

Linn.  Soc.  X.S.Wales.  Vol.  10,  1885. 

26 .  . — On  the  structure  of  the  so-called  glandidar  ventricle  of  Syllis . 

Quart.  Journ.  Micro.   Sci.,  (n.s.)  Vol.  20,  1886. 

27.  . — A  comparative  study  of  striated  muscle.     Quart.   .Jour.  ^licro. 

Sci.,  (n.s.)  Vol.  30,  1889." 


BY   W.  A.   HASWEIA.  Ill 

28.  IzcKA,   A. — En-antiate   Polychaeta   of   Japan.    Juuiu.    College   of   Science, 

Imp.   Uuivei-sity  ul'  Tokyo,  Vol.  xxx.,  1912. 

29.  JOHXSTOX,  G. — Catalogue  of  British  non-parasitieal  Woriu.-.    London,  1865. 

30.  IvEFERSTElx. — Zeitscher .   f.   wiss.   Zool.,  12  Band,  p.   111. 

31.  KixBERG,  J.   G.   H. — Annulata  nova:  continuatio.  Ofvers.  af  K.Vet.  Akad. 

Forh.,  1865,  No.  2. 

32.  . — Fregatt.   Eugen.   Kesa,  vii.,  Annulata,  1857. 

33.  Kr(ihx. — Ueber     eine    lebendig-geberende     Syllis-Art.     Ai-ch.    f.    Xaturg..    35 

Bd.,  1869. 

34.  •. — Ai-ch.   f.   Naturg.,  18  Band,  1852. 

35.  Laxgerhaxs,  P. — Ueber  einige  Canarische  Anueliden.    Xova  Acta  der  Karl 

Leopold-Carol.  Deutscher  Akad.  der  Natnrf.  Halle,  42  Bd.,  1881. 

36.  . — Die  AVii rm-f auna  von  Madeira.    Zeitscbr.  f.  wiss.   Zool.,  32  Bd., 

1879. 

37.  McIxTOSH,   W.    C. — The   Polychaeta.     Reports   of   ChaUenger  Expedition. 

Zoolog}-,  Vol.  12,  1885. 

38.  . — Marine  Annelids  (Polychaeta)  of  South  Afi-ica.  :^ra^ne  In- 
vestigations in  South  Africa.  Dep.  of  Agi-iculture,  Cape  Town,  Yol.  iu., 
1903^; 

39.  . — A  Monograph   of  the  British   Annelids,  Yol.    2.   part   1.     Ray 

Society.    1908. 

40.  Malaqcix,  a. — Recherches  sur  les   S.vllidens.  ^lem.  Soc.  Sci.  Lille,  1893. 

41.  Malmgrex",  a.  J. — Annulata  Polychaeta   Spetsbergiae.   Greenlandiae,   Island- 

iae  et  Scandinaviae  hactenus  cognita.    Helsingfors,  1867. 

42.  Marexzeller,  E.   von. — Zur  Kenntniss  der  Adi-iatischen  Anneliden.    Sitzb. 

der  K.   Akad.  der  Wissensch.  Wien.  69  and  72  Bande.  1874  and  1875. 

43.  . — Sudjapaniiche   Anneliden.    Denkschr.    K.    Akad.   Wien.  41   Bd., 

1879. 

44.  Mariox.  a.  F. — Draguages  an  large  de  Marseille.  .\nn.   Sc.  nat.,  t.  8,  1878. 

45.  Mariox,   A.  F.  et  Bobretzkt,  N. — Etude  des  annelides    du    Golfe    de  Mar- 

seille.  Ann.    Sci.  nat.,  tome  2,  1875. 

46.  Oersted,  F. — Fortegnelse  over  d.vr  samlede  i  Christianiafjord  ved  Urobak. 

Copenhagen. 

47.  PoTT.'s,  F.   A. — Methods  of  reproduction  iu  the  Syllids.  Ergebnisse  u.   Fort- 

schritte  der  Zoologie,  3  Bd..  1911. 

48 .  St.- Joseph,  Barox"  de. — Les    annelides  polychetes  des  cotes  de  Dinard .  Ann  . 

Sci.   nat..  7e.  serie,  t.   1,  1887. 

49.  ScHlTAEDA,  L. — Xeue  wirbellose   Thiere.  II.    Theil,  1861. 

50.  SorTHERX",  R. — Archiannelida  and  Polychaeta.   Clare  Island   Survey.    Pror 

R.   Irish  Acad.,  Yol.  31.  1914. 

51.  YioriER. — Etudes  sur  les  animaux  Lnferieurs  de  la  baie  d' Alger.  Arch.  Zool 

Exp.,  2e  serie,  t.  2,  1885. 

52.  TTiLLEV,  A.— Polvchaeta  of  the  "Southern  Cross,"  1902. 


112  AUSTRALIAN     SYLLIDAE,     El'SYLLIDAE     AND     AUTOLYTIDAE. 

EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES. 
Plate  X. 

Fig.  1.     Svllis  c'<^i'iegala.     Oue  of  the  compound  setae,      (x  1500). 

Fig.  2.     Syl/is  Viiriegaia.     Acicula.     (x  t40). 

Fig.  3.     Svllis  peclinans,  n.  sp.    Dorsal  view  of  head  and  anterior  region  of  body,    (x  80). 

Fig.  4.     S.  pcctiiidiis.     Outline  of  parapodium  in  the  anterior  region  seen  from  the  dorsal 

side,  with  the  acicula. 
Fig.  5.     S.  pectinans.     One  of  the  compound  setae,     (x  1040). 
Fig.  6.     S.  pecliiians.     Dorsal  simple  seta,      (x  1040). 
Fig.  7.     S.  Iruncala,  n.  sy.      Dorsal  view  of  anterior  region,      (x  100). 
Figs.  8-9.     S.  truncata.     Compound  setae,      (x  1040  and  1400). 
Fig.  10.     S.  triiiica/a.     Dorsal  simple  seta,     (x  1400). 
Figs.  11-14.     5.  truncata.     Acicula.     (x  1400). 
Fig.  15.     S.  gracilis.     Acicula.     (x  1040). 

Plate  xi. 

Fig.  1.     Syllis  punrtiilata,  n.  sp.     Dorsal  view  of  anterior  region,  magnified. 

Fig.  2.     S.  puncticlata.     Outline  of  parapodium  fioui  above. 

Fig.  3.     S.  punctulata.     Compound  seta  of  the  anterior  region,      (x  1040). 

Fig.  4.     S.  punctulata.      Compound  seta  of  the  posterior  rtgion.      (x  1040). 

Figs.  5-10.     S.  punctulata.     Dorsal  simple  setae,      (x  1040). 

Fig.  11.     S.  punctulata.     Ventral  simple  seta,      (x  1040). 

Figs.  12-16.     S.  punctulata.     Acicula  (x  1040). 

Fig.  17.     S.  parturiens,  n.  up.     Anterior  region,     (x  140). 

Fig.  18.     .S".  parturiens.     Most  dorsal  compound  seta. 

Fig.  19.     .9.  augeueri,  n.  sp.     Dorsal  view  of  parapodium  (x  440). 

Fig.  20.     S.  augeneri.     Most  dorsal  compound  seta,     (x  1400). 

Figs.  21-22.     ..S.  augeneri.     Acicula.     (x  1400). 

Figs.  23-26.     5.  kinbergiana  Haswell.     Compound  seta  (x  1040). 

Fig.  27.     S.  kinbergiana.     Acicula.     (x  1000). 

Fig.  28.     S.  corus,cans  Haswell.     Head,  magnified. 

Figs.  29-31.     S.  coruscans.     Compound  setae,     (x  (iOO). 

Plate  xii. 

Fig.  1.     Syllis  kinbergiana.     Anterior  region,  dorsal  view. 

Fig.  2.     .S".  kinbergiana.     Outline  of  parapodium  as  seen  from  above,      (x  240). 

Fig.   3.     .S.  ferrugifiea  Laugerhans.     Dorsal    view  of  anterior  extremity,  magnified. 

Fif.  4.     S.  ferruginea.     One  of  the  most  dorsal  of  the  compound  setae,      (x  104tl). 

Figs.   5-7.     S.  ferruginea.     More  ventraUy  situated  compound  setae,      (x  1040). 

Fig.  8.     5.  ferruginea.     Ventral  simple  seta,      (x  1040). 

Figs.  9-10.     5.  ferruginea.     Acicula.     (x  lOiO). 

Fig.  11.     Pionosyllis  nielaenonephra,  n.  sp.     One  of  the  most  dorsal  compound  setae  of 

the  anterior  segments,      (x  1040). 
Fig.  12.     P.  luelaenonephra.     One  of  the  most  dorsal  setae  of  the  posterior    segments. 

(X  1040). 
Figs.   13-14.     P.   inelaenonep/ira.     Compound  setae  of  posterior  segments,      (x  1040). 
Fig.  15.     /'.  nielaenonephra.     Ventral  simple  seta  of  posterior  segments,     (x  1040). 
Fig.   16.     /'.  nielaenonephra.     Aciculuiu. 

Plate  xiii. 

Fig.  1.  Pionosyllis  melaenonephra.     Anterior  region,  magnified. 

Pig.  2.  /-".  divaricata  Keferstein.     Most  dorsal  of  the  compound  setae,     (x  1040). 

Fig.   3.  P.  divaricata.     More  ventral  compound  seta,      (x  1040). 

Fig.   4.  .■\niblvosyllis  spectabilis  Johnston.     Anterior  region,   dorsal  view. 

Fig.   5.  A.  spectabilis.     Ventral  aspect  of  heail  in  outline   to    show    the    palpi  and  Uic 

ventral  eyes. 

Fig.  6.  .1.  spectabilis.     Outline  of  parai>odium  from  above,      (x  240). 

Fig.  7.  ,-/.  .•ipcctabilis     Most  dorsal  compound  seta,     (x  1040). 

Fig.   8.  .-/.  spectabilis     More  ventrally  situated  compound  seta,     (x  1040). 

Fig.  9.  .1.  .spectabilis.     Circlet  of  six  coniposile  teeth  round  the  rim  of  the  pharynx. 
Fig.  10.     >■/.  spectabilis.     One  of  the  teeth,     (x  10-W). 


113 


THE    CARABIDAE    OF  TASMANIA. 
By   Thomas   G.  Sloane. 
(With  four  text -figures.) 

Tliis  paper  is  founded  on  the  Carabidae  from  the  collection  of  the  late  Mr. 
Augustus  Simson,  of  Launeeston,  which  has  recently  been  acquired  by  the  Trus- 
tees of  the  South  Australian  Museum.  In  addition,  I  have  been  able  to  examine 
the  large  collection  of  Carabidae  made  by  Messrs.  H.  J.  Carter  and  A.  M. 
Lea  in  northern  and  western  Tasmania  dui-ing  the  month  of  January,  1918,  which 
consisted  of  51  species;  14  of  these  were  new  species,  of  which  11  were  not 
represented  in  the  Simson  collection.  The  Tasmanian  species  in  my  own  collec- 
tion, some  belonging  to  Mr.  Lea,  and  some  sent  by  Mr.  F.  M.  Littler  from 
Launeeston  have  also  been  seen. 

The  type  specimens  of  the  new  species  described  in  this  paper  have  been 
sent  to  the  South     Australian   Museum. 

I  Synopsis  of     Paper. 

(1)  Introduction. 

Scutellar  stride  of  the  Carabidae. 
Tarsal  vesture  of  the  Carabidae. 

Umbilicate  punctures  of  the  elytra  of  the  Carabidae. 
Anterior   cotyloid  cavities   of  the   Carabidae. 
,  Middle   cotyloid  cavities  of  the  Carabidae. 

Anterior  tibiae  and  tibial  spurs  of  the  Carabidae. 
Components  of  the  Tasmanian  Carabideous  fauna. 
Key  to  tribes  of  Carabidae  in  Australia  and  Tasmania. 

(2)  The  Carabidae  of  Tasmania  and  islands  of  Bass  Straits. 

(3)  Appendix.     List  of  species  not  dealt  with  in  the  body  of  the  paper. 

Introduction. 

Scutellar  striole.  In  the  Carabidae  the  elytra  have  usually  nine  striae  and  a 
short  striole  at  the  base  of  the  first  or  second  stria  known  as  the  scutellar  striole.* 
There  are  many  variations  from  this  normal  pattern;  bometimes  the  elytra  are 
without  any  striae,  while  in  Planetes  australis  Macl.,  there  are  twenty-five  striae; 
probably  every  number  from  one  to  twenty-five  occurs,  but  I  only  know  of  more 
than  seventeen  as  occurring  in  some  species  of  Planetes  and  in  the  genus  Polij- 
stichus.  Only  the  scutellar  striole  will  be  considered,  in  order  to  obtain  an  idea 
of  its  taxonomic  value;  for,  though  it  has  been  used  as  a  classificatory  character, 
its  morphology  and  origin  do  not  seem  to  have  been  given  attention.  The 
Carabidae  must    originally  have  had  the    elytra    10-striate,    the    scutellar  striole 


*  Sometimes  in  the  tribe  Pterostichini  a  well  developed  tenth  stria  occurs,  but 
in  such  cases  the  series  of  umbilicate  punctures  is  found  in  the(  usual  position  on 
the  ninth  interstice,  so  that  in  these  cases  it  seems  evident  that  the  extra  stria  has 
been  developed  on  the  ninth  interstice. 


114 


THE    CARABIDAE   OF    TASJIAXIA, 


beiug  the  rudiment  of  a  stria  now  more  or  less  lost.  The  clue  to  the 
original  striation  of  the  elytra  may  be  found  in  tlie  tribe  Migadopiui  of  tlie 
Southern  Hemisphere,  and  in  the  Holarctic  genus  Pelophila,  where  an  extra 
second  stria  is  found  basad  from  the  apical  declivity.  The  text  figures  given 
below  show  the  four  distinctive  forms  of  the  normal  Carab  striation  with  regard 
to   the  scutellar  striole. 

Fig.  1  is  the  pattern  of  the  striation  in  Calyptogunia  ater  SI.,  a  Migadopid 
from  Tasmania,  viz.,  ten  striae  on  the  basal  two  thirds,  and  nine  towards  the 
apex  as  a  result  of  the  abbreviation  of  the  second  stria. 

Fig.  2  shows  the  junction  of  the  first  stria  with  the  remnant  of  the  second 
stria  as  exemplified  by  Dicrochile   ventralis  Blackb. 

Fig.  3  gives  the  second  stria  reduced  to  a  striole  at  the  base  of  the  second 
interstice  as   occurring  in  Gtiathaphunus  herhaceus   SI. 

Fig.  4  is  drawn  from  the  elytra  of  Culadromus  elseyi  to  show  the  commonest 
form  of  striation  in  the  Carabidae;  here  the  base  of  the  first  stria  has  become  the 
scutellar  striole  owing  to  the  capture  of  the  first  stria  by  the  second. 

It  may  be  assumed  that  a  strong  tendency  towards  the  reduction  of  the  ori- 
ginal second  stria  by  shrinking  away  from  the  apex  must  have  developed  very 
early  in  the  history  of  the  Carabidae,  and  that  in  many  cases  the  reduced  st;cond 
stria  became  united  with  the  first;  this  union  of  the  first  and  second  striae  has 
then  been  the  means  of  the  tendency  for  the  elimination  of  one  stria  having  been 
transferred  to  the  basal  part  of  the  first  stria.  Often  the  second  stria  has  been 
completely  lost  where  the  reduction  has  continued  on  the  second  interstice,  but 
it  is  very  rarely  that  when  the  base  of  the  first  stria  has  become  the  striole,  it 
has  been  altogether  atrophied. 


Fig.  1.   Calyp/os^oaia  atcr  Sloane. 

Fig.  3.  (iiiat/uiplianus  herbaceus  Sloane. 


Fig.  2.  Dicrochile  r'eiilicilis  Blackliurn. 
Fig.  4.  Catadromiis  elseyi  White. 


BY    THOMAS  G.    SLOANE.  115 

Vesture  beneath  joints  of  anterior    tarsi    tn  <S.     The  vesture    of    the    u:.ider- 
surfaee  of  some  of  the  joints  of  the  anterior  tarsi  (also  of  the  middle   tai-si  in 
feome  cases    where   the  anterior  tarsi    are    clothed  beneath)    has    long  been   recog- 
nised as    an    important    character  for  the  classification  of    the    Carabidae,    tut  I 
have  seen  no  notice  of   its  probable  course  of  development.     To    have  the  under- 
side of  some  joints  of  the  tarsi  clothed  beneath  is  essentially  a  character  of  the 
male;  very  rarely  the  basal  joint  of  the  female  is  dilatate  and  clothed  beneath,  e.g., 
in  the  American  genus  Stenomorphus,  and  in  the  Australian  species  Xotonomus 
cques    Cast.,   and  N.    parallelomorphus    Chaud.     The   vesture   assumes   two   main 
forms,  viz.,  the    spongiose    and    the    biseriate    forms.       The  spongiose    vesture  is 
older  than  the  biseriate  \esture,  and   is  that  from  which  the   latter  is  derived;  it 
alone  is  found  in   the  Carabidae-disjuuctae ;   the  tribes  Migadopini   and  Hiletini 
of  this  division    have    four  anterior    tarsi    dilatate  and   clothed    beneath.       Most 
of  the  tribes   of  the   Carabidae-conjunctae  have  the  biserate  form  of   the  tarsal 
vesture,   but  spongiose  vesture  occurs  in  the  Broscini   and   Pelecini  of   the   (^ara- 
bidae-uniperforatae,  and    in   the   Chlaeniini,    Oodini,   Licinini.   Agi'iini,    Dryptini, 
and  Brachynini  of  the  Carabidae-biperforatae.       The  Harpalini  are  the  only  tribe 
known  to    me   in  which   both  the  spongiose  and  biseriate   types   of  tarsal  ve^.ture 
occur,  and  here  is   found  the    clue  to  the    derivation    of  the    biseriate    from  the 
spongiose   vesture.     In  the  genus  Amblystomus   the  brushes   of  squamae  beneath 
the  joints  of  the  four  anterior  tarsi  are  dense  with  a  longitudinal  line  dividing 
them   in  the  middle,  so  that  actually  the  squamae   are   arranged  bilaterally.     Any 
bilateral  form  would  have  an  equal  number  of  rows  of  squamae   on   each  side   of 
the  joints;  this    can   be  seen    in    the  American  genus    Anisotarsus,  and    in    some 
species   of  Diaplwromerus.     At  any  decrease  in  the   number  of  rows  of   squamae 
which  occurred,   one  row  would   go  off   on   each   side,   and  so   the  biseriate  type 
of    vesture  would    develop.     That   this  might  be    the  case  may  be    seen    by    ex- 
amining   Anisodactylus    discoidetis    Dej.,    a    North  American  species,  which    has 
eight    rows  of   squamae  on  the  second  joint   of   the  anterior  tarsi,  but  only    four 
on  the  second   joint  of  the    middle    tarsi.     If    this    view    of    the   origin    of  the 
biseriate  type   of   tarsal  vesture  be  accepted,  the  fact  that   thjs    form    occurs   in 
one  division  of  the  tribe   Harpalini   and  in   the  tribe   Pterostichini,   is  to  be  con- 
sidered  a  case  of  analogous   variation,  and   not  as  any  evidence   of  affinity;  the 
occurrence  of  spongiose  tarsal    vesture    in  the  Harpalini    suggests  that  this   tribe 
is  more    ancient    than  the    Pterostichini,    a  tribe    with   only  the'  biseriate   form. 
Seeing    that     the    tendency    to    reduction     has    only     to     be    carried    one     step 
beyond  the   biseriate  fonn  of   vesture  to   result   in  the  tarsi  becoming   naked   be- 
neath, it  is  not  astonishing  that  naked  tarsi  in  the  male  appear  in  all  directions 
throughout  the   Carabidae;  genera  have  been  proposed  only  on  the  character  of 
unclothed  tarsal  joints   but  it  may  be  confidently  asserted  that  this  negative  char- 
acter is  not  of  generic  value. 

Umbib'cate  piunctures  of  elytra.  It  seems  evident  that  the  interstices  of  the 
elytra  represent  the  longitudinal  veins,  and  the  striae  the  interspaces  of  the  upper 
wings  of  the  insect-gToup  from  which  the  Coleoptera  are  derived.  In  the  Cara- 
bidae, on  one  or  more  of  the  odd  interstices  of  the  ordinary  9-striate  elytron, 
may  be  found  sensitive  setae  rising  from  umbilicate  punctures.  Dr.  G.  H.  Horn 
has  used  the  terms  "ocellate"  or  "dorsal  punctures"  for  these  setigerous  punc- 
tures; but,  seeing  that  they  have  often  considerable  taxonomic  value  in  the  fitniily 
Carabidae,  it  seems  necessary  to  have  one  definite  and  unvarying  term  for  them: 
the  name  umbilicate  punctures,  which   has  been   applied  to  them  already,   might 


116  THE    CARABIDAE   OF    TASMANIA, 

with  advantage  be  restricted  to  them  wlieu  describing  Carabidae.  Umbilicate 
punctures  are  often  wanting  from  all  the  odd  irterstices  except  the  ninth..  Dr. 
G.  H.  Horn  has  said  that  they  are  wanting  from  the  ninth  interstice  in  the 
genera  Panageus,  Micrixys,  and  Apotomns,  but  I  am  not  sure  that  sucli  is  the 
case;  in  Panageua  and  Micrixys  they  seem  to  be  hidden  by  the  setosity  of  the 
interstice,  but  I  considered  I  detected  umbilicate  punctures  in  Panageus;  Apoto- 
mus  shows,  in  fresh  specimens,  at  least  one  long  sensitive  seta  near  the  base 
and  another  near  the  apex  of  the  ninth  stria;  if  these  setae  are  not  rubbed  off, 
the  punctures  from  which  they  rise  may  be  discerned.  I  regard  these  sensitive 
setae  of  the  odd  interstices  of  the  elytra  as  honiologous  with  the  "macrotrichia'' 
found  by  Dr.  Tillyard  on  the  wings  of  the  Meeoptera;  and  this  gives  a  leason 
for  their  position  and  taxonomic  value. 

Anterior  cotyloid  cavities.  In  the  first  division  of  the  Carabidae.  or  sub- 
family Carabinae  (here  called  Carabidae  disjunctae)  the  anterior  coxal  ca\ities 
have  one  opening  inwards;  in  the  second  division,  or  subfamily  Harpalinae  (here 
called  Carabidae  conjunctae)  there  may  be  either  one  or  two  openings  inwards; 
therefore  I  have  further  divided  the  Carabidae  conjunctae  by  this  character  into 
Carabidae  uniperforatae  and  Carabidae  biperforatae.  The  division  of  the  in- 
ward opening  of  the  anterior  cotyloid  cavities  iijto  two  foramina  is  caused  by 
.■i  chitinous  crosspiece  which  extends  at  right  angles  from  each  .?ide  of  the  cntf^ 
I'urca . 

Attention  may  be  drawn  to  an  aberrant  modification  of  the  biperforate  form 
of  the  cavities  found  in  the  genus  Silphomorpla,  where  the  point  of  each 
epimerum  has  moved  forward  and  become  attached  on  each  side  to  the  ehitmous 
crossbar  of  the  cavity;  this  results  in  Silphomorpha  showing  but  one  opening  in- 
wards, which  is  not  homologous  with  the  single  opening  of  the  uniperiorate 
cavity,  but  with  the  anterior  foramen  of  the  biperforate  cavity.  Silphomorpha 
has  the  antefurca  very  short,  the  posterior  part  of  the  anterior  coxae  more  ex- 
posed than  usual,  and  the  posterior  opening  of  the  ordinary  biperforate  cavity 
completely  lost  owing  to  the  shifting  forward  of  the  epimera.  Our  othei'  Pseu- 
domoi-phid  genus  Adelotopus  has  the  ordinary  biperforate  form  of  the  cotyloid 
cavities,  and  the  antefurca  of  usual  length.  It  may  be  noted,  as  a  case  of  analo- 
gous variation,  that  the  anterior  coxal  cavities  in  the  family  Hydrophilidac  re- 
semble those  of  Silphomorpha. 

The  results  obtained  by  the  use  of  the  different  forms  of  the  anterior  coty- 
loid cavities  in  the  classification  of  the  Carabidae  are  satisfactory,  and  a  gi-eat 
help  in  determining  the  position  and  afTinities  o^  many  genera  in  the  family; 
but  their  use  causes  the  arrangement  of  the  tribes  to  differ  greatly  from  the 
system  now  generally  recognised.  Taking  the  "Catalogus  Coieoptei-orum 
Europae  "(1906)  as  a  standard  of  the  present  arrangement  of  the  tribes  the 
plan  here  adopted  brings  about  the  following  changes  of  position.  The  Scari- 
tinae,  Elaphrinae  and  Lorocerinae  would  come  first,  followed  by  the  Omonhro- 
ninae  and  the  Carabinae;  the  position  of  the  tribes  from  Morioninae  to  Pori- 
goninae  would  remain  the  same;  Granigcrinne,  Harpalinae,  Zabrinae,  Amarinae. 
Pterostichinae,  Masoreinae.  and  Odacanthinao  would  follow  as  members  of  the 
Carabidae  uniperforatae  (but  my  arrangement  of  the  tribes  of  this  division 
would  not  be  the  same  as  in  the  Catalogus).  Apotominae.  Panageinae,  Chlae- 
iiiinae,  Oodinae,  Licininae,  Lebiinae,  Dryptinae,  and  Brachyninae  would  be  placed 
in  the  Carabidae  biperforatae.  The  position  of  the  following  tribes  in  my  sys- 
tem may  be  indicated :— Anchonderini  and    Egini  to   be   included  in  the  Otiacan- 


BY    THOMAS  G.    SLOANE.  117 

tiiiiii  as  suggested  by  Sc-liaum;  Cratoceriiii  (as  typified  by  the  genus  Basolia) 
comes  into  the  Carabidae  uniperforate ;  Mormolyeini,  Agriini,  Anthiini,  Graph- 
ipterini,  and  Oithogonini,  all  of  which  I  have  examined,  belong  to  the  Carabidae 
biperforatae. 

With  regard  to  the  plan  of  having-  names  for  the  six  great  sections  into  which 
the  system  here  advocated  divides  the  Carabidae,  it  has  seemed  to  me  that  an 
undoubted  benefit  of  definiteness  results  from  its  use,  therefore  I  hope  ii  will 
prove    acce]3table    to   Carabophiles. 

Middle  co.ral  cavities.  As  a  matter  of  some  interest  it  may  be  placed  on 
record  that  in  the  Carabidae  generally  (inclnding  Metrius)  the  middle  coxal  cavi- 
ties are  confluent,  the  mesosternum  being  arched  to  cover  the  opening  between 
the  cavities  by  its  meetins;  with  the  metasternum  between  the  coxae;  but,  m.  the 
tribe  Ozaenini.  as  far  as  I  have  observed,  each  coxal  cavity  is  completely  de- 
fuied,  and  separated  from  the  other  by  a  chitinous  partition,  as  a  result  of  the 
close  and  continuous  attachment  of  the  mesosternum  and  metasternum.  Further 
investigation  on  this  subject  is  required,  both  in  the  Carabidae  generally,  and  in 
the  Ozaenini,  where  my  observations  have  been  confined  to  two  species,  viz., 
Pseudozaeua  orientalis  Klug.,  and  Mystropomus  subcostatus  Chaud. 

Anterior  tibiae. — The  spurs  and  their  position.  Hitherto  authors  seem  to 
have  recognised  practically  only  two  plans,  as  far  as  the  position  of  the  two 
spurs  of  the  anterior  tibiae  are  concerned,  viz,  (1)  both  terminal  (as  in  Cara- 
6ms),  (2)  one  above  the  other  (as  in  the  Scaritini)  ;  but  there  is  a  want  of  exact- 
ness about  this  statement  of  the  case,  as  may  be  readily  seen  Ijy  anyone  who 
will  examine  the  position  of  the  spurs  in  the  tribes  Ozaenini,  Carabini,  and  Scari- 
tini,  not  to  mention  others.  One  of  the  spurs  never  varies  in  its  position 
throughout  the  Carabidae,  it  is  always  at  the  inner  side  of  the  apex  of  the 
tibia ;  in  the  tribes  Metriini  and  Ozaenini,  the  other  spur  is  opposite  the  inner 
one  at  the  outer  side  of  the  apex;  here  there  can  be  no  question  as  to  both 
spurs  lieing  terminal,  nor  as  to  which  is  the  inner,  and  which  the  outer.  An  ex- 
amination of  any  member  of  the  tribe  Carabini  will  show  that  it  is  the  spur 
corresponding  to  the  outer  one  in  the  Ozaenini  that  is  the  one  which,  by  a 
change  in  position,  becomes  placed  on  the  lower  side  of  the  tibia,  a  little  ob- 
liquely above  the  inner  spur;  it  is  far  moi'e  distant  from  the  apex  in  the  Scari- 
tini  and  other  tribes.  Dr.  G.  H.  Horn  habitually  used  the  term  "inner"  for 
the  spur  which  varies  in  position;  this  is  evidently  an  erroneous  term,  and  seeing 
that  in  e\ery  case,  where  it  is  not  opposite  the  inner  spur  at  the  outer  side  of 
the  ajiex.  it  is  more  or  less  above  the  apex,  the  term  upper  would  seem  more 
suitable  for  it ;  also  I  think  the  words  "both  spurs  terminal"  can  only  accurately 
be  applied  to  the  tibiae  in  the  tribes  Metriini  and  Ozaenini.  AVhether  the  posi- 
tion of  the  spurs  in  Metriini  and  Ozaenini  implies  any  relationship  between  these 
tribes  T  am  not  prepared  to  say,  but  I  believe  the  form  of  the  anterior  tibiae 
found  ill  these  two  tribes  is  the  most  archaic  now  existing,  and  I  attach  a  high 
value  to  it. 

CO-MPONENTS    OF    THE    TaSMAXIAN    CARAB-FAUNA. 

Tile  Carab-faura  of  Tasmania  includes  18  tribes,  60  genera,  and  183  species 
[and  there  are.  besides,  1  tribe  (Chlaeniiiii),  1  genus  {Chlaeiiins)  and  9  species  re- 
ported from  the  islands  of  Bass  Strait;  also,  the  introduced  Laemostenwi  eoni- 
planati(s  Dej.]  Two  tribes,  8  genera,  and  59  species  have  not  yet  been  found 
on    the  mainland    of    Australia;    this    endemic    part    of  the   fauna  is    essentially 


118  THE    CARABIDAE   OF    TASMANIA, 

Antarctic.  On  tbe  whole  the  Carab-lauua  of  Tasmania  is  an  Australian  one 
modified  by  the  presence  of  a  greater  proportion  of  Antarctic  forms  than  occur 
in  the  fauna  of  the  continent,  and  by  the  absence  of  the  numerous  oriental 
tribes,  genera  anil  species  that  are  such  a  conspicuous  clinracter  of  the  C;i.<ibidae 
of  Australia. 

Keejiiug  in  view  accepted  jieological  opinions,  it  is  evident  there  may  well 
be  tiiree  component  parts  in  the  insect  fauna  of  Tasmania,  viz.,  (1)  an  original 
Mesozoic  fauna  similar  to  that  of  Australia  in  the  Mesozoie  era ;  ( 2 )  an  Antarc- 
tic element  introduced  along  with  the  Marsupials  not  later  than  the  Miocene; 
(3)  an  inflow  of  immigrants  from  Australia  in  late  Pliocene  and  Pleistocene 
times.  Of  these,  the  Antarctic  will  be  the  most  easily  discernible,  for  tlie  other 
two  components  are  parts  of  one  fauna,  as  it  apjieared  before  and  after  the  long 
Eocene-Miocene  separation  between  Australia  and  Tasmania.  It  is  obvious  that 
the  glaciation  of  Tasmania  during  the  Koscuisko  epoch  (Pleistocene)  must  have 
profoundly  affected  both  the  original  (Pre-Tertiary )  and  Antarctic  (E'icene- 
Miocene)  faunas,  for  only  on  the  low  lands  fciuld  any  insects  have  survived. 
This  glacial  period  must  also  have  prevented  the  access  to  Tasmania  of  many 
warmth-loving  Australian  groups  during  the  la.st  union  of  Ta.smania  with  Aus- 
tralia, and  it  will  hive  lielped  the  spread  of  Antarctic  species  along  the  cord'llera 
of  Eastern  Australia. 

I  take  the  present  opportunity  to  draw  attention  to  a  striking  fact  which  is 
disclosed  by  studying  the  present  distribution  of  dragonflies.  In  the  list  of  genera 
of  dragonflies  given  by  Dr.  R.  J.  Tillyard  in  his  book,  ''The  Biology  of  Dr:igon- 
flies,"  ]i.  300,  he  enumerates  for  the  order  Odonata,  36"2  genera  Iselonging  to  the 
different  zoogeographical  regions  of  the  world.  These  are  distributed  between 
the  different  regions  in  the  following  numbers: — Neotropical  region.  Ill  cenera; 
Nearctic,  24;  Palaearctic,  14;  Ethiopian,  70;  Oriental,  82;  Australian,  1.  Theso 
figures  show  242  genera  in  the  three  southern  lanl  masses  of  the  globe,  as  against 
120  genera  in  the  three  nortliern  land  masses.  In  1806  I  obtained  a  simihii'  re- 
sult for  the  tiger  beetles,  my  figures  showing  30  genera  found  in  the  three  so;ilhern 
land  areas,  as  against  8  in  the  three  northern  areas.  This  question  requires  to  be 
treated  in  a  similar  way  for  other  orders  and  families  of  insects  before  any  in- 
ferences of  value  can  be  drawn  from  it,  but  the  results  obtained  from  these  two 
widely-separated  groups  of  insects  have  led  me  to  suppose  (1)  that  the  present 
distribution  of  insects  may  have  been  mainly  from  the  south,  and  (2)  that  the 
present  distribution  of  animals  may  be,  even  in  such  an  ancient  class  as  the 
Insecta,  largely  a  matter  of  tlie  Tertiary  period ;  this  latter  inference  would 
mean  that  the  northern  lands  had  undergone  more  vicissitudes  in  the  destruction 
of  their  animal  life  during  the  Tertiary  period  than  southern  lands,  and  had 
been  since  the  l)eginning  of  Tertiary  limes  largely  stocked  from  the  south. 

Family  CARATUnAE. 

Table   of   Tribes    found    in    .Australia   and   Tasmania. 

1.  (101   Middle   coxal    cavities    not    entirely    enclosed    by    the    sterna,    epimera 

of  the  mesosternum  attaining  the  coxae.         Carabidae  disjunctae. 

2.  (7)     Anterior  coxal  cavities  closed  behind Carabidae  clausae. 

3.  (41     Anterior  tibiae  emarginate  on  inner  side,  both  spurs  tenninal  .Oz.\kxini. 

4.  (3)     Anterior  tibiae  emarginate   on   inner  side,  one  spur  above  apex 


BY    THOMAS  G.    SLOANE.  119 

5.  (6)     Body  not  pedunculate,  bases  of  prothorax  and  elytra  in  contact  with 

one  another.      (Elytra  10-striate  basad  from  apical  declivity.) 

MiGADOPlNl. 

6.  (5)     Body    pedunculate,    bases   of   prothora.x:   and   elytra    remote    from   one 

another Scaritini. 

7.  (2)     Anterior  coxal  cavities  open  beh'nd Cakabidae  apketae. 

8.  (91     Mandibles  strongly  dentate  on   inner  side.      Outer  apical  angle  of  an- 

terior tibiae  prolonged Pamboeini. 

9.  (8)     Mandibles  unarmed  on  inner  side.     Outer  apical  angle  of  anterior  tibiae 

not  prolonged Carabini. 

10.  (1)     Middle  coxal  cavities  entirely  enclosed  by  the  sterna,  epimera  of  the 

mesosternum  not  attaining  the  coxae   . .    .  .    Cakabidae  conjunctae. 

11.  (32)  Anterior  coxal  cavities  with  a  single  opening  inwards 

Cakabidae  unipekforatae. 

12.  (17)   Head   with   one   supraorbital   seta   on   each    side.      Posterior   marginal 

.seta  of  piothorax,  if  present,  distant  from  basal  angle.  Anterior 
tarsi  in  c?,  if  with  vesture  beneath,  usually  with  fourth  joint  clothed 
— often  intermediate  tarsi  also  with  vesture  beneath 

13.  (16)   Posterior  marginal  seta  of  prothora.x  present,  distant  from  basal  angle. 

14.  (15)   Antennae  with  three  basal  joints  glabrous;   also  fourth  joint,  at  least 

near  base.     Vesture  of  tarsi  in  c?,  if  present,  spongiose        Broscini. 

15.  (14)   Antennae  with  three  basal  joints  glabrous;  fourth  joint  setulose.   Four 

joints  of  anterior  tarsi  in  d  biseriately  squamose  beneath.  Agonicini. 

16.  (13)   Posterior  marginal  seta  of  prothorax  wanting,     c?,  if  with  tarsal  ves- 

ture, usually  with  fourth  joint  clothed  (vesture  either  spongiose  or 
biseriate) Harpalini. 

17.  (12)   Hiead   normally   with   two   supraorbital   setae   on   each  side.      Posterior 

marginal  seta  of  prothorax,  if  present,  near  basal  angle.  Anterior 
tarsi  in  d,  if  with  vesture  beneath,  never  with  more  than  three  basal 
joints  clothed — intermediate  tarsi  never   with  vesture   beneath. 

18.  (231   Mandibles   with    a   sensitive   seta   in    scrobe   of   outer   side.     Antennae 

with  not  more  than  two  basal  joints  glabrous.  Anterior  tarsi  in  cJ 
not  clothed  beneath  on  more  than  two  basal  joints. 

19.  (22)   Palpi  not  subulate. 

20.  (21)   Elytra  with  margin  interrupted  posteriorly  by  an  internal  plica.   Maxil- 

lary palpi  with  penultimate  joint  setulose.      (Tarsi  hairy  above.) 

Merizodini. 

21.  (201   Elytra  with  margin   not   interrupted  posteriorly  by  an   internal  plica. 

Maxillary  palpi  with  penultimate  joint  glabrous Trechini. 

22.  (19)   Palpi  subulate Bembidiini. 

23.  (18)   Mandibles  usually  without  a  sensitive  seta  in  scrobe  of  outer  side.  An- 

tennae with  three  basal  joints  glabrous.  (If  mandibles  with  a  sensi- 
tive seta  in  scrobe,  then  three  joints  of  antennae  glabrous — except 
genus  Pteroginiis  with  third  joint  setulose,  but  with  three  basal 
joints  of  anterior  tarsi  biseriately  squamose  beneath  in  c?-) 

24.  (25)   Prosternum   with   intercoxal   declivity   of  prosternum   projecting  back- 

wards in  the  form  of  a  wedge.  Paraglossae  corneous,  small,  tri- 
angular, much  shorter  than  ligula.  (Large  black  species  29-34  mm. 
in  length.) Cuneipectini. 

25.  (24)   Prosternum  with  intercoxal  declivity   not  triangularly  produced  back- 

wards.    Paraglossae  membranous 

26.  (27)   Elytra   with   an   inner   plica   near   each   side,   usually   visible  at   apical 

sinuosities , Pterostichini. 


120  TIIK    C.U^ABIDAE   OF    TASMANIA, 

27.  (26)   Elytra  without  an  inner  plica. 

28.  (29)   Head  not  constricted  at  base  to  a  condyliform  neck.     Prothorax   de- 

pressed, wider  than  head.  (Pro-episterna  not  \-isible  at  sides  from 
above.) Anchomenini. 

29.  (28)   Head — except  very  rarely — narrowed  behind  eyes.     Prothorax  narrow, 

very  rarely  wider  than  head. 

30.  (31)   Tarsi  with  ungues  simple Odacanthini. 

31.  (30)   Tarsi  with  ungues  pectinate Ctenodacttlini. 

32.  (11)  Anterior  co.xal  cavities  with  two  openings  inwards 

Carabidae  biperforatae. 

33.  (58)   Head  without  antennal  grooves  beneath. 

34.  (37)   Mandibles  with  a  sensitive  seta  in  scrobe  of  outer  side, 

35.  (36)   Elytra  truncate.     Prothorax  bordered  at  sides;   sutures  of  prosternum 

visible .' Bkachynini. 

36.  (35)   Elytra    entire    at    apex.     Prothora.x    constricted    to    a    narrow    base; 

lateral  border  and  sutures  of  prosternum  not  visible.  (Body 
pedunculate,  scutellum  on  peduncle.  Maxillary  palpi  very  long 
and  narrow.) Apotomini. 

37.  (34)  Mandibles  without  a  sensitive  seta  in  scrobe  of  outer  side 

38.  (39)  Clypeus  emarginate,  or  excised,  exposing  basal  membrane  of  labrum. 

39.  (38)  Clypeus  entire,  not  exposing  basal  membrane  of  labrum.  Licinini. 

40.  (45)   Elytra  with  an  inner  plica  near  each  side  visible  at  apical  sinuosities. 

41.  (42)   Head    with    two    supraorbital    setae    on    each    side.      Apical    joint    of 

maxillary  palpi  obliquely  set  on  to  penultimate  joint  . .    Panaoeini. 

42.  (41)   Head    with    one    supraorbital      seta    on    each    side.      Apical    joint    of 

ma.xillary  palpi  normally  set  on  to  penultimate  joint. 

43.  (44)   Elytra  with  ninth  interstice  variable  in  width,  never  linear  or  situated 

in  a  furrow  below  plane  of  eighth  interstice Chlaeniini. 

44.  (43)  Elytra  with  ninth  interstice  linear  and  placed  in  a  furrow   . .     Oodini. 

45.  (40)  Elytra  without  an  inner  plica  on  each  side. 

46.  (47)  Tibial  spurs  long,  serrulate  on  lower  edge  of  outer  side.    Tetragonoderini. 

47.  (46)  Tibial  spurs  short,   not  serrulate. 

48.  (51)  Penultimate  joint  of  labial  palpi  bisetose  on  anterior  margin. 

49.  (50)  Mentum  supported  at  base  by  a  raised  submentum Lkbiini. 

50.  (49)  Mentum  not  divided  from  gulae  by  a  raised  submentum.  Pentaoonicini. 

51.  (48)  Penviltimate  joint  of  labial  palpi  plurisetose  on  anterior  margin. 

52.  (55)  Antennae  with  basal  joint  ver.v  long,  longer  than  two  succeeding  joints 

together. 

53.  (54)   Mentum   narrowly   united   to   submentum.   base   of  maxillae   unusuallv 

exposed.  Prothorax  not  bordered.  Elytra  without  usual  bordtr 
and  infiexed  margin _ Dryptini, 

54.  (531   Mentum    widely   united   to    submentum.      Prothorax    and   elytra   with 

lateral  borders Zupijni. 

55.  (52)   Antennae  with  basal  joint  not  of  unusual  length,   not  as  long  as  two 

succeeding  joints  together. 

56.  (57)   Ligula  corneous;   paraglossae   well   developed,   free,   membranous 

Physocratophini. 

57.  (56)   Ligula  wide  corneous:   paraglossae  adherent   to  ligula,  often  rudiment- 

ary        Helluonini. 

58.  (33)   Head  with  distinct,  usually  long  antennal  grooves  beneath 

PsSUDOMORPHlNI. 


V.Y    THOMAS   (j.    SLOANE.  121 

CABABIDAE   DISJUNCTAE. 

CARABIDAE    CLAUSAE. 

Tribe  Migadopini. 

Form  elongate ;  prothorax  subquadrate,  widest  before  middle,  anterior  angles  ob- 
tuse, not  prominent;  head  not  deeply  set  m  prothorax  ..  ..  Calyptogonia. 
Form  short  oval;  prothorax  widest  at  base,  anterior  angles  acute,  projecting 
forward  to  base  of  eyes;   head  deeply  set  in  prothorax Stichonotus. 

C  A  L  Y  P  T  0  G  O  N  I  A,   gen.    IIOV. 

Apterous.     Head  large,   convex,  not  narrowed   behind  eyes,   one  supraorbital 
seta  on  each  side;  eyes   round,  convex,  not  inclosed  behind,   distant   from  buccal 
fissure;    gular   sutures   wide  apart.     Labrum  wide,  emarginate,  6-setose.     Clypeus 
wide,  truncate;  ano'les   rounded;   sides  covering  upper  basal  angles   of   mandibles. 
Mandibles  short,  wide,  strongly   rounded    externally;  scrobe    short,  asetose;  inner 
side  with  a  triangular  denticulate  prominence  behind  middle;  apex  acute.     Maxil- 
lae with  outer  lobe   2- jointed,  stout;  inner  lobe   slender,   strongly   falcate,   apex 
acute,  inner  side  pluridentate  (about  six  or  eight  teeth  equally  distant  from  one 
another,  the  odd  teeth    spiniform).     Maxillary   palpi   rather    long;   second    .joint 
stout;  two  apical  joints  slender,  apical  a  little  longer  than  penultimate,  truncate. 
Mentum  short,    trisinuate,  median  sinuosit.y  wids,  shallow;  sinus  strongly  bordered 
in  middle;  lobes  rounded  at  apex.     Lignila  corneous,  wide,  convex,  truncate,  bise- 
tose :    paraglossae  cartilaginous,  of  same    length    as  and  adherent  to    ligula ; '  ex- 
ternal angles  rounded  and  bearing  about  four  minute  setules.     Labial  palpi  with 
penultimate  joint  rather  short,    bisetose;   apical  joint    long    (a    half    longer  than 
penultimate  joint),  club-shaped,  compressed,  truncate.     Antennae   setaceous;   four 
basal  joints  glabrous,  first  stout,  hardly  as  long  as  second  and  third  together,  uni- 
setigerous.  second  a   little   shorter   than  fourth,  third    a  little   longer  than    se.^ond 
and   fourth;  joints   5-11   about  equal,  longer   than   third.     Prothorax  transverse; 
base  emarginate,  wider  than   apex;  lateral  margins  asetose;  lateral  border  thick. 
Elytra  connate,  truncate-oval,  convex,  bordered  at  base,  striate;  ten   striae  before 
apical   declivity,   second    stria    extending   backwards   to    beginning  of  apical    de- 
(livity;  no  dorsal    iimbilicate  punctures;   apical  margin    rounded,    not  sinuate;    or 
interrupted  by  an  internal   plica  on  each   side.     Scutellum   short,   wide.     Proster- 
uum  with   anterior  coxal  cavities  closed;   intercoxal  declivity  not   proininent,  nar- 
row.    Mesosternum  with  epimera  reaching  coxae.     Metasternum  short ;    episterna 
short,  wide,  posterior  margin   oblique;   epimera  not  visible.     Legs   moderate:  pos- 
terior coxae  contiguous;   anterior  tibiae  short,  incrassate,  two  short  stout  spinules 
externally  at  apex,  inner  side  strongly  emarginate,  inner  spur  distant  from  apex; 
posterior   tibiae  elongate,  slender.     Tarsi:    posterior   long,   slender;  anterior  in  c? 
with  four  basal  joints  dilatate  and  with  spongiose  tissue  beneath,  second  and  third 
joints   much   wider   than  first  and   fourth;  intermediate  about    as  long  as    tibiae, 
two  basal  joints  dilatate  and  spongiose  beneath.     Genotype,  C.  ater  SI. 

Calyptogonia   ater,     sp.  nov. 

Oblong,  convex,  black.  Head  large,  convex  (2.7  mm.  across  eyes),  without 
sculpture.  Prothorax  broader  than  long  (2.7  x  3.6  mm.),  widest  about  middle, 
lightly  narrowed  to  base,  smooth;  sides  lightly  arcuate;  apex  (2.5  mm.)  narrower 
than  base    (3  nun  '.    truncate,  bordered  on  each  side,  angles  obtuse,   hardly   prom- 


122  THE    CARABIDAE   OP    TASMANIA,  , 

inont;  base  emarginate,  not  Vjordered,  angles  obtuse;  lateral  border  thick,  shnrply 
defined  by  a  narrow  sulcus;  median  line  lightly  impressed.  Elytra  ovate  (7  X 
4.8  mm.),  convex;  ten  well  marked  striae  on  each  elytron  becoming  obsolescent 
just  before  apex,  second  obsolete  on  apical  decl'vity;  interstices  lightly  convex, 
lateral  interstice  seriate-punctate.  Under  surface  impunctate.  Length  11 — 13.5. 
breadth    4.15 — 5.2  mm. 

JIab. — Magnet  (Lea),  Cradle  Mountain,  Strahan  (Carter  and  Lea).  A 
numerous  series  of  specimens  has  been  examined,  collected  by  Messrs.  Carter  and 
Lea  in  January,  1918,  but  Mr.  Lea  fii-st  found  this  species  at  Magnet  many  jcars 
ago. 

Genus  Stichonotus. 

Stichonotus  piceus    Sloane. 

llab. — Mount  Wellington  (Lea),  Cradle  Mountain  (Carter  and  Lea). 

Two  specimens  from  Cradle  Mountain,  sent  by  Mr.  Carter,  are  of  shorter 
and  more  oval  form  than  the  others,  resembling  in  shape  S.  leai  SI.  more  Ihan 
S.  piceux,  with  which  I  consider  it  eonspeeific. 

Stichonotus  leai  Slr.ane. 

Hub. — Magnet    (Lea),   Waratali   (Carter). 

Tribe  Scaritini. 

Ligula  small,  prolonged,  narrow  and  bisetose  at  tip;  paraglossae  tree,  small, 
t;arrow,  pointed.  Base  of  ma.\illae  not  covered  by  mentum.  Basal  joint  of  an- 
tennae unisetose Group  Clivinidks. 

Ligula  broad,  corneous;  paraglossae  corneous,  ciliate  at  apex.  Mentum  broad 
and  concealing  at  sides  base  of  maxillae.     Basal  joint  of  antennae  asetose 

Ci-oup  Caeenides. 
Group  Clivinides. 

Genus  C  l  i  v  i  x  a. 

Table  of  Tasmanian  species. 

1.  (2)   Elytra  with   four  inner  striae   free  at  base,  fifth  joining   sixth   at   base. 

(Elytra  with  a  black  sutural  stripe.  I suturalis  Piitz. 

2.  (ll   Elytra  with  three  inner  striae  free  at  base,  fourth  joining  fifth  at  base. 

3.  (4)   Clypeus  with  median  part  projecting  beyond   lateral     parts,   angular  at 

sides.     Anterior   tibiae   4-dentate    externally    . .    . .    heterogena  Putz. 

4.  (31   Clypeus  with  anterior  margin  emarginate.  lateral  parts  not  divided  from 

median   part.     Anterior   tibiae  3-dentate   externally. 

5.  (6)  i.     Upper  external  tooth  of  anterior  tiliiae  w«ll  developed.     Prosternuni 

without  pectoral  nodules vagans  Putz. 

6.  (5)   J.    Upper  external  tooth  of  anterior  tibiae  obsolete.      Prosternum   with 

a  distinct  pectoral  ridge  on  each  side  ending  anteriorly  in  a  nodule 

diliitipcs  Putz.  var.  tasmanitiisis  SI. 

Clivixa  suTlHALis  Putzeys. 

[=  a.  verticalis  Putz.;  =  C.  dursalis  Blackb.  (1889).] 
My  view  is  that  the  three  names  mentioned  above  have  all  been  given  to  one 
species.     By  an  error  I  cited  it  as  C.  rlincoidnlis  Blackb.  in  1904, 

Hab. — Hobart,  Sandford    (Lea).      Also  found  in    Southern    and    S.W.    Aus- 
tralia, 


BY    THOSIAS  G.    SLOAXE.  123 

Clivixa  heterogexa  Piiizeys. 

{■■=  C.  angustula  Putz. ;  =  C.  (Jcplanata  Putz. ) 

7/a6.— Swansea  (Simson);  Latrobe  (Lea).  Widely  spread  in  S.E.  Aus- 
tralia. 

Clivixa  vagaxs  Putzeys. 

In  1904  I  applied  the  name  ('.  ratjans  Putz.,  to  a  specimen  from  Tas!;iania 
sent  to  me  by  Blackbnrn,  and  I  still  support  this  identification.  It  differs  Irom 
C.  dilutipes  Putz.,  var.  tasmniiiensis  SI.  by  c?  with  anterior  tibiae  more  str.  ngly 
dentate,  prosternum  without  pectoral  nodules. 

Ha().— Strahan   (Lea). 

Clivixa  dilutipes  Putzeys,  var.   ta'JMAXIexsis    Sloane. 

In  1896  I  wrongly  identified  C.  dilutipes  and  C.  lepida;  my  C.  lepida  w'as  C. 
dilutipes  Putz.,  and  my  C.  dilutipes  of  1896  is  now  C.  misella  SI.  The  variety 
tasmaniensis  differs  from  the  typical  C.  dilutipes  of  the  mainland  by  the  shape  of 
the  anterior  tibiae  in  c?; — the  digitations  are  more  reduced,  the  upper  very 
feeble  (practically  obsolete),  the  penultimate  greatly  reduced:  apical  spur 
longer  and  more  obtuse  at  apex;  in  $  (as  in,  ('.  dilutipes)  the  digitations  are 
moi-e  developed  than  in  c?,  and  tJie  apical  spur  is  pointed.  The  prosternum  in  c? 
bears  on  each  side  before  the  coxae  a  well  developed  ridge,  ending  anteriorly  in  a 
small  nodule;  this  nodule  is  not  found  in  ?. 

Hab. — Launceston,  East  and  West  Tamar,  Great  Lake,  Swansea,  Evandale 
(Simson,  No.  2620);  Latrobe  (Lea). 

Group   Carenides. 

Clypeus  with  intermediate  angles  obtuse :  not  marked ;  lateral  seta  placed  in- 
wards from  intermediate  angles.  Anterior  tibiae  with  penultimate  external  tooth 
placed  distad  from  apical  spur Scaraphites. 

Clypeus  with  intermediate  angkg  prominent,  triangular;  later  seta  placed  out- 
wards from  intermediate  angles.  Anterior  tibiae  with  penultimate  external  tooth 
placed  basad  from  apical  spur Carenum. 

Scaeaphites   rotuxdipexxis  Dejean. 

Hah. — Kelso,  Swansea,  Georgetown  (Simson,  No.  1791);  King  Is.,  S.E. 
Australia,  Lord  Howe  Is. 

Carenum  morosum  Sloane  (1907). 

A  species  with  anterior  tibiae  bidentate,  ard  elytra  impunctate.  It  suits 
'neither  the  description  nor  the  figure  of  C.  politulum  Westw.,  which  was  described 
as  coming  from  Tasmania,  it  has  not  the  posterior  angles  slightly  emarginate. 
Both  the  description  and  figure  of  C.  politidum  suggest  a  species  closely  resemb- 
ling C.  laeviyutum  Macleay,  but  having  the  elytra  impunctate,  so  that  it  may  be 
an  impvmctate  form  of  C.  laevigatum;  I  have  seen  a  Carenum  from  the  mainland 
with  impunctate  elytra  that  I  could  not  distingaiish  from  C.  laevigatum. 

Hob.— George's  Bay  (Simson,  No.  2313). 

Note. — C.  morosiun  is  very  close  to  C.  laevipenne  Mac!.,  but  has  the  border 
of  the  prothorax  much  more  raised  at  the  posterior  angles. 

Carexum  laevigatuji    Macleay. 

A  specimen  not  differing  from  the  form  of  C.  laevigatum   found  in   Victoria. 
Hah. — Launceston    (Simson). 


124  THE    CARABIDAE   OF    TASMANIA, 

CAEABIDAE  APERTAE. 

Tribe  Carabini. 

Calosojia  ^chayeki  Eriflison. 
(?  =  C.  australe  Hope;  =  C.  grandipenne  Castelnau  J 

The  description  of  C.  australe  Hope  reads  as  if  founded  on  a  rather  dis- 
coloured specimen  of  C.  schayeri. 

Hah. — Launeeston,  Flinders  Is.  (Simson)  ;  King  Is.  (Lea);  widely  distributed 
in  Australia. 

Note. — C.  oceaiiiciiiii  Perroud  [^  C.  a-ullcri  Waterhouse  (1898)].  I  cannot 
differentiate  C.  ualkeri  (X.W.  Australia)    from  C.   oceauicum    (Kew   Caledonia). 

CARABIDAE  COX.JUXCTAE. 

CARABIDAE      UXIPERFORATAE. 

Tribfi  Broscini. 

Table  of  Tasmanian   genera. 

1.  (2)  Suborbital  cicatrix  present    (obsolete  only  in  Tasmanian   species  of  the 

P.  iastnanicus  group).  Elytra  with  four  lateral  punctures,  penul- 
mate  puncture  giving  off  a  short  stria  (sides  pluripunctate  only  in 
P.  viridiaeneus).   (Mandibles  with  a  ssta  in  scrobe  of  outer  side.' 

Promecodervs. 

2.  (1)   Suborbital  cicatrix  wanting.      Elytra  pluripunctate  along  sides. 

3.  (6)   Head    transversely    impressed    behind    eyes    and    with    strong    divergent 

frontal  impressions;  one  supra-orbital  seta  on  each  side:  antennae 
moniliform;    mandibles    short.         Mes-episterna  narrow. 

4.  (5)   Mandibles  with  a  seta  in  scrobe  of  outer  side Eurtltchnvs. 

5.  (4)  Mandibles  without  a  seta  in  scrobe  of  outer  side   ..  Chtlnus  (nom.  nov.) 

6.  (3)  Head    very    large,    transverse    and    frontal    impressions    obsolete:    three 

supra-orbital  setae  and  one  or  two  punctures  on  vertex  on  each  side; 
antennae  long,  slender.  Mes-episterna  wide.  S-  Anterior  femora 
not  protuberant  on  lower  side Pekcosoma. 

Genus  P  r  o  it  e  c  o  d  e  r  r  .s. 

Table  of  Tasmanian  species. 

1  (2)     Elytra   pluripunctate    along   sides; — about   eight   or   ten   punctures   ex- 

tending from  shoulders  to  apex viridiaeneus  SI. 

2  (1)     Elytra    quadripunctate     on     sides: — one    puncture      posthumeral,      the 

others   on  apical  third,  penultimate  strioliform. 

3  (14)   Head  with  a  distinct  suborbital  cicatrix. 

4  (5)     Apex  of,  abdomen  in  c?  with  three  setigerous  pores,  set  in  a  triangle, 

in  $  with  two  setigerous  pores  on  each  side  of  apex.  S- — Anterior 
femora  strongly  and  suddenly  dilatate  basad  from  middle  of  lower 
side;  ventral  segments  3 — 5  piliferous.     Length,  13-1.5  mm. 

bfuiinicornis  Dej. 

5  (4)    .Apex  of  abdomen  in      S  with  one,  in  S  with  two  setigerous  pores  on 

each  side  of  apex.  c?. — Anterior  femora  not  suddenly  dilatate; 
ventral  segments  with  only  the  two  usual  ambulatorial  setae. 

6  (13)   Legs  dark. 

7  (12)   Dorsal  surface  convex,     c?- — Two  or  three  basal  joints  of  middle  tarsi 

with  vesture  beneath. 


BY    THOMAS  G.    SLOANE.  125 

S  (9)  Impressions  of  ventral  segments  linear.  Posterior  tarsi  with  apical 
joint  wide  at  base,  subparallel  on  sides,  c?. — Twxd  basal  joints  of 
middle  tarsi  with  vesture  beneath.     Length,  13-16  mm. 

gibbosus  Gray. 

9  (S)  Impressions  of  ventral  segments  foveiform.  Posterior  tarsi  with  apical 
joint  elongate,  narrow  at  base.  <S. — Three  basal  joints  of  middle 
tarsi  with  vesture  beneath. 

10  (11)   Prothorax  with   border  subsinuate  before  basal   angles,   these   subrecfc 

angular,  very  slightly  obtuse .     Length,   15  mm.   . .  cordicollis  SI. 

11  '(10)   Prothorax   with  border  arcuate   to   base,  basal   angles   open.      Length, 

12-13  mm bassi  Cast. 

12  (7)     Dorsal   surface    depressed.        <S ■ — Intermediate    tarsi     naked     beneath; 

anterior   tarsi   with   four   joints   clothed   beneath.      (Head   strongly 
impressed    across    vertex;    c?. —  Posterior  tibiae   curved.)      Length, 
12-14  mm curvipes  SI. 

13  (6)     Legs    testaceous.       (Cupreous.        S- — Middle     tarsi     naked'     beneath.) 

Length,  7.. 5 — 9  mm aiprescfiis  SI. 

l-l  (3)  Head  with  suborbital  cicatrix  obsolete.  6- — Middle  tarsi  naked  be- 
neath. 

15  (16)  <S . — Four  joints   of   anterior   tarsi   with     vesture  beneath.     Length,  11 

mm longus  SI. 

16  (15)   S- — Three  joints  of  anterior  tarsi  with  vesture  beneath. 

17  (18)   Prothorax   with   sides   roundly   curved    to   base,    basal    angles    open. 

Length,  10  mm tasmanicus  Cast. 

IS  (17)  Prothorax  with  sides  obliquely  cur\-ed  to  base,  basal  angles  obtuse 
but  marked.      Length,  S.5-10.5  mm. plehius  SI. 

Phojiecoderus  subdepeessus  Guer. 

I  only  kuow  P.  elegans  Cast.,  from  the  Melbourne  district,  as  a  species  which 
suits  Putzeys'  description  of  P.  subdepressiis  Guer.  Putzeys'  treatment  of  the 
two  sjjecies  P.  subdepressus  and  P.  elegans  in  his  "Revision"  of  1873  leaves  the 
impression  on  my  mind  that  only  one  species  was  before  him.  I  have  not  seen 
any  species  from  Tasmania  that  is  P.  subdepressus  Guer. 

Promecodeeit.?  modestus  Cast. 

This  species  is  said  by  Castelnau  to  be  from  Tasmania.  Castelnau's  descrip- 
tion might  ajiply  to  P.  longus  SI.,  but.  in  his  Revision.  Putzeys,  with  Castelnau's 
single  specimen  (?)  before  him,  says  it  has  the  basal  angles  of  the  prothorax 
rectangidar.     I  have  not  seen  it  from  Tasmania,  or  the  mainland. 

Promecoderus  viridiaeneus  Sloane    (1915). 

Ha!).— Stanley,  Zeehan  (Simson,  No.  3465) ;  Cradle  Mountain,  Strahan, 
Waratali    (Carter  and  Lea). 

PROMEC0DERU.S  BECXNIOORNTS  Dejean. 

(^  P.  degener  Guer.) 

A  variable  species  in  size  and  appearance.  I  attribute  to  it  all  Tasmanian 
specimens  with  the  basal  angles  of  the  prothorax  very  wide  (open),  and  which 
have  in  the  c?  the  following  characters: — Ventral  segments  3 — 5  plurisetose  in 
middle,  apical  segment  with  three  setigerous  punctures  on  each  side,  placed  tri- 
angularly (two  of  the  punctures  marginal)  ;  anterior  femora  suddenly  dilatate  on 


120  THE    C'ARABIDAE   OF    TASMANIA, 

lower  side  (usuallj'  armed  with  a  denticule)  ;  posterior  trochanters  very  long  aud 
obtusely  pointed;  anterior  tarsi  with  four,  intermediate  with  two  joints  clothed 
beneath.     Leng1:h,   11 — 14.5  mm. 

Hah. — Denison  Gorge,  Ben  Lomond  (Simson  No.  3052);  Strahan  (Carter  and 
Lea);  Marrawali.  Wilmot,  Sheffield,  Burnie,   Devonport.  Ulverstone    (Lea). 

Var.  ovicoLLis  Cast.  I  can  only  regard  P.  ovicollis  Cast.,  as  a  variety  of 
P.  brunnicornis  Dejean,  from  which  it  differs  by  its  more  convex  form,  reddish 
antennae,  c?  with  anterior  femora  less  swoUen  beneath,  and  with  the  denticule 
obsolete;  posterior  femora  less  ampliate  on  lower  side,  posterior  trochanters 
stouter  and  shorter. 

Hab.—Laxmceston.  Great   Lake  (Simson,  No.  .3091);  Hobart   (Lea). 

PROiiEcoDERUs  GiBBO.su.s  Gray. 

(=  p.    mastersi  Macleay.) 

Distinguished  by  its  convex  form,  sharply  marked  ba.sal  angles  of  prothorax, 

strongly  striate  elytra,  fourth  and  fifth  ventral  segments  with  a  trausvei-se  linear 

impression  on  each  side.     Length,  13 — 16  mm.     I  cannot  now  differentiate  P.  moii- 

tersi  MacL,  of  the  mainland  from  the  Tasmania-i  P.  gibhosus. 

Ilab. — Launceston,  Brighton,  Avoea,  Hobart  (Simson,  No.  1166);  Ulver- 
stone (Lea). 

Promecoderus  curvipes,  sp.  nov. 

Elongate-oval,  depressed;  head  transversely  impressed  across  vertex;  pro- 
thorax  oval,  depressed,  abruptly  declivous  to  basal  angles,  these  open;  elytra 
oval,  depressed  on  disc,  lightly  striate,  interstices  depressed,  a  little  undulate; 
ventral  segments  4- -6  foveolate  on  each  side.  Bronzed — or  aeneous — black;  liead 
and  prothorax  nitid,  rather  virescent;  inflexed  margins  of  elytra  rather  cupreous; 
undersurface  and  femora  nitid,  virescent;  tibiae,  tarsi,  and  antennae  piceous 
brown. 

Head  large  (2.75  mm.  across  eyes);  vertex  convex;  eyes  round,  convex; 
postoeular  part  of  orbits  well  developed,  about  one  half  size  of  eyes.  Protiiorax 
rather  oval  (4  X  3.9  mm.),  widest  about  anterior  third;  sides  lightly  rounded; 
apex  wide,  lightly  emarginate ;  anterior  angles  a  little  prominent,  not  near  neck : 
disc  depressed;  a  wide,  shallow,  transverse  impression  before  base;  basal  angles 
obtuse,  placed  beneath  a  lateral  declivity;  border  narrow,  wider  anteriorly  than 
posteriorly,  obsolete  on  middle  of  base;  median  line  lightly  impressed.  Elytra 
oval  (7.5  X  4.5  mm.),  depressed  (but  not  flat)  on  disc,  a  little  declivous  to 
peduncle,  wide  across  base,  lightly  rounded  on  sides;  striae  light,  rather  erenulate, 
seventh  and  eighth  obsolete.  Apical  ventral  seginent  in  c?  witli  one.  in  2  with 
two  setae  on  eacli  side  of  apex. 

c?. — Anterior  femora  club-shaped,  not  suddenly  inflated  or  dentate  on  lower 
•side;  posterior  tibiae  arcuate  on  lower  side,  wide  at  apex,  densely  fringed  with 
setae  on  apical  half  of  lower  side :  anterior  tarsi  with  four  joints  wide  and 
spongiose  beneath;  intermediate  tarsi  narrow,  not  clothed  beneath.  Lerisrtli. 
12—14,  breadth,  4.2—4.5  mm. 

TTah. — Tasmania    (Simson,  No.    3111)  . 

Fourteen  specimens  have  been  examined.  In  ajipearance  it  resembles  P. 
hrinnvcornif:  Dej.;  l)ut  differs  by  basal  angles  of  prothorax  more  overlapped  by 
tlie  sides  of  the  segment,  and  less  widely  open;  and  by  the  following  very  distinct 
characters  of  the  male : — anterior  femora  not  suddenly  and  greatly  dilatate  and 
dentate   on    lower  side;    posterior  trochanters   shorter;  posterior  tibiae   bent    in- 


BY    THOMAS  G.    SLOANE.  127 

wards  and  fringed  witli  hair  on  lower  side;  intermediate  tarsi  narrow,  not 
spongiose  beneath;  ventral  segments  not  pilose  in  middle.  It  is  allied  to  P. 
tongtis  SI.,  from  which  it  differs  by  size  larger,  curvature  and  hair-fringe  of  lower 
side  of  posterior  tibiae  in  male. 

Promecoderus  cuprescens^  sp.  nov. 

Elongate-ovijl,  rather  depressed;  prothorax  oval-eordiform,  lateral  border 
narrow,  obsolescent  near  base ;  elytra  oval,  finely  crenulate-striate ;  anterior  f wnora 
not  greatly  swollen  on  lower  side;  c?,  anterior  tarsi  with  four  joints  dilatatc  and 
spongiose  "beneath,  intermediate  tarsi  without  spongiose  tissue  beneath.  Cupreous, 
under  surface  aeneous;  legs  ferruginous,  femora  darker  than  tibiae;  antennae 
fuscous,   base   testrx-eous. 

Head  cupreous,  eyes  convex,  prominent,  lightly  inclosed  behind;  temporal 
cicatrix  distinct.  Prothorax  broader  than  long  (2.3  X  2.5  mm.),  depressed,  more 
or  less  subfoveate;  base  strongly  bordered  on  fach  side;  lateral  border  narrow, 
reduced  and  almost  obsolete  just  before  base ;  sides-  very  declivous  to  basal  angles, 
these  rectangular.  Elytra  oval  (5X3  mm.),  lightly  convex;  striae  distinct  (less 
so  near  sides),  a  little  crenulate;  interstices  depressed,  more  or  less  feebly  undu- 
late; three  posterior  lateral  impressions  foveiform,  penultimate  one  not  gi^-ing 
off  a  striole.  Ventral  segments  3—5  without  lateral  foveae  or  sulci;  apical  seg- 
ment in  d'  1-,  in  ?  2-setose  on  each  side  of  apex.  Length,  7.5 — 9,  breadth, 
3—3.25  nun. 

Hah. — Cradle  Mountain,  Waratah  (Carter  End  Lea).  A  good  series  of 
specimens. 

A  very  distinct  species,  differing  from  all  others  by  the  following  characters 
in  conjunction: — small  size,  coppery  colour,  and  light-coloured  legs.  Prom  P. 
tasmanicus  Cast,  (which  also  has  the  intermediate  tarsi  naked  beneath  in  d),  it 
differs  by  colour,  prothorax  less  transverse,  less  rounded  on  sides,  basal  angles 
much  lower  down  on  sides,  and  not  so  obtuse,  elytra  less  convex.  There  are  some 
foveae  on  the  prothorax  which  vary  in  number  and  distinctness;  usually  four  are 
more  or  less  distinct :  two  about  equidistant  from  median  line  and  border  at  widest 
part  of  segment,  and  two  others  behind  these  aliout  level  with  end  of  median  line 
— sometimes  two  otlier  foveae  may  be  noticed,  one  on  each  side  of  the  median 
line  at  the  middle  of  its  length. 

Promecoderus  loxgus,  sp.  nov. 

d. — Depressed,  elongate.  Upper  surface  aeneous  or  nigro-aeneous ;  undei  sur- 
face nitid,  of  a  gTeenish  bronzy  colour,  inflexed  margins  of  elytra  aeneous;  tarsi, 
palpi,  and  antennae  reddish. 

Head  with  suborbital  cicatrix  obsolete;  eyes  pi-ominent;  post-ocular  part  of 
orbits  about  one  third  length  of  ej'e,  curving  continuously  with  eye.  Prothorax 
depressed,  as  long  as  broad  (3.1  X  3.1  mm.),  lightly  rounded  on  sides,  lightlv  and 
widely  transversely  impressed  near  base,  declivous  to  basal  angles,  these  obtuse; 
a  light  rounded  impression  on  each  side  a  little  before  middle.  Elytra  oval  (6.5 
X  4  mm.),  depressed,  lightly  striate,  discal  striae  crenulate,  lateral  striae  obsolete; 
humeral  angles  marked.  Ventral  segments  3 — 5  witli  a  lightly  impressed  rounded 
fovea  on  each  side ;  -apical  segTiient  with  one  seta  on  each  side  at  apex.  Anterior 
femora  club-shaped,  lower  side  not  sharply  inflated  or  dentate;  anterior  tarsi  with 
four  joints  wide  and  spongiose  beneath;  interm;Hliate  tarsi  narrow,  not  clothed 
beneath.     Length.  11;  breadth,  4  mm. 

Hah. — Launceston.  Zeehan    (Simson). 


128  THE    CARABIDAE   OF    TASMANIA, 

There  were  two  specimens  in  the  Simson  Coll.  without  number.  It  is  of 
evidently  larger  size  and  narrower  form  than  the  species  which  I  identify  as  P. 
tasmanicus  Cast.;  both  prothorax  and  elytra  much  less  strongly  rounded  on  sides; 
anterior  tarsi  in  male  with  four,  not  three,  joints  clothed  beneath.  It  cannot  be 
P.  subdepressus  Guer.  by  basal  angles  of  prothorax  not  rectangular — as  said  by 
Putzeys . 

Promecoderus  tasmanicus    Casteluau. 

I  attribute  the  name  P.  tasmanicus  to  a  species  given  to  me  by  the  late  Mr. 
George  Masters,  ticketed  "Tasmania" ;  this  specimen  evidently  represents  the  ^orm 
with  a  wide  prothorax  referred  to  by  Castelnau.  The  following  description  will 
enable  it  to  be  recognised: — 

Nigro-virescent ;  inflexed  margins  of  elytra  aeneous ;  under  surface  with  slight 
viridescent  reflections;  anterior  tarsi  and  palpi  reddish.  Elliptical-oval,  rather 
depressed.  Head  with  suborbital  cicatrix  obsolete;  eyes  convex,  prominent;  post- 
ocular  part  of  orbits  about  one  third  length  of  eye.  Prothorax  broader  than 
long  (2.7  X  3  mm.),  cordiform-oval,  strongly  rounded  on  .sides,  lightly  transversely 
depressed  across  base,  declivous  to  basal  angles,  these  obtuse.  Elytra  oval, 
declivous  to  peduncle,  rather  strongly  and  roundly  declivous  to  apex;  disc  lightly 
striate;  humeral  angles  marked.  Anterior  tarsi  with  three  joints  clothed  beneath; 
intermediate  tarsi  not  clothed  beneath.     Length,  10.2,  breadth,  3.7  mm. 

Specimens  received  from  Mr.  Lea  ticketed  "Mount  Wellington"  only  differ 
slightly,  as  under:-— c?,  colour  black;  form  narrower;  both  prothorax  and  elytra 
less  strongly  rounded  on  sides.  Length,  10.5;  proth.,  2.75  x  2.85;  breadth.  3.6 
mm.  This  is  probably  the  narrow  form  referred  to  by  Castelnau.  P.  tasmanicus 
was  not  represented  in  the  Simson  Coll. 

Promecoderus  plebius,  sp.  nov. 

Elliptical-oval,  lightly  convex;  head  with  suborbital  cicatrix  obsolete;  pro- 
thorax with  basal  angles  obtuse,  but  marked ;  elytra  oval,  convex,  striate  on  disc. 
Black;  legs  piceous;  tarsi  and  antennae  piceous  red. 

Head  ordinary  (2  mm.  across  eyes).  Prothorax  lightly  convex,  subcordate, 
as  long  as  broad  (2.7  X  2.7  mm.),  widest  about  anterior  third,  lightly  rounded  on 
sides;  sides  narrowed  in  a  gentle  curve  to  base;  basal  area  with  a  shallow,  riither 
rounded  impression  on  each  side;  border  narrow,  well  developed  on  each  side  of 
i'pex  and  base;  basal  angles  set  low  down,  open  but  marked.  Elytra  oval  (5.5  x 
3.5  mm.)  ;  striae  well  marked  on  disc,  obsolete  on  sides.  Ventral  segments  4 — 6 
with  a  shallow  impression  on  each  side.  (?. — Anterior  tarsi  with  three  joints 
clothed  beneath;  intermediate  tarsi  not  clothed  beneath.  Length,  8.5—10, 
breadth.  3.3—3.8  mm. 

Hub. — Ben  Lomond,  5000  feet   (Siinsmi).       Six  specimens. 

I  separate  P.  plebius  from  P.  tasmanicus  Cast.,  by  shape  more  conNcx.  espe- 
cially of  prothorax,  which  is  less  strongly  rounded  on  sides,  and  with  basal  angles 
set  lower  down,  and  more  marked,  though  obtuse;  even  should  it  be  regarded  as  a 
variety  of  P.  tasmanicus,  .its  separation  under  a  varietal  name  seems  advisable. 

Genus  E  u  R  Y  L  y  c  H  N  r  .s. 
EuRTLTCHNUS  FEMORALis  Sloane  (1915). 

A  black  species  apparently  only  differing  from  the  genus  Chiihiiis 
(=  Li/chnus  Putzeys)  by  the  presence  of  a  mandibular  seta.  Prothorax  sinuate 
on  sides  before  base,  basal  angles  marked.     Length.  14  mm. 

//aft.— Benisim   Gorge    (Simson  No.  .3413);  Mount   Horror    (Lea). 


BY    THOMAS  0.    SLOANE.  129 

Genus  C  H  y  l  n  u  s,  uom.  uov. 
Lychnus  Putzeys. 

The  name  Lychnus  was  already  in  use  when  Putzeys  proposed  it  in  1868;  I 
now  suggest  Chylnus  (formed  by  a  rearrangement  of  the  lettera  in  Lychnus)  to  re- 
place it. 

Chylnus  ater     Putzeys. 

{^=  Lychnus  striatuhis   Bates,   =   L.   stranrjulahis   Bates.) 

1  have  idcntifled  a  specimen  in  my  eoUection  as  Lychnus  ater  Putz..  with 
every  likelihood  of  the  identification  being  correct,  seeing  that  a  comparison  with 
specimens  in  the  Howitt  Coll.  named  "Mecodema  tasmanicum  Castelnau"  snowed 
it  to  be  the  same  species;  Putzeys  in  his  "Revision"  of  1873  notes  that  there  were 
liine  specimens  in  the  Castelnau  Coll.  under  the  name  Mecodema  tasmauicmn 
— a  cabinet  name.  I  conclude  that  Chylnus  ater  Putzeys  =  Lychnus  striatuhis 
Bates,  and  that  L.  strangulatus  Bates  (numbered  3051  in  the  Simson  Coll.)  is  a 
larger  and  smoother  form;  specimens  in  the  Simson  Coll.  (No.  3084).  and  also 
taken  by  Jlessr-s.  Carter  and  Lea  at  Wilmot  and  Waratah,  evidently  represent  the 
convex  tliird  species  alluded  to  by  Bates  (Cist.  Ent.,  1878,  p.  318),  but  I  am 
not  prepared  to  distinguish  it  from  Chylnus  atei,  nor  can  I  separate  Lychnus 
strauyulatus  Bates  by  any  definite  characters.  The  species  seems  a  variable  one 
in  size  and  appearance,  the  sides  of  the  prothorax  have  one  or  two  setae  just 
before  the  middle,  and  from  two  to  six  setae  near  the  anterior  angles.  Length, 
16 — 20,  lireadth,  5.5 — 0.6  mm.     One  dwarfed  specimen,  15.5  X  -1.7  mm. 

Hab. — Launeestou,  Denison  Gorge,  Ben  Lomond,  4000  feet  (Simson  No. 
3051);  Zeehan  (Simson),  Wilmot,  Waratah  (Carter  and  Lea)  [Simson,  No. 
3684];  Great  Lake   (Simson). 

Genus  P  e  r  c  o  ,s  o  :.[  a. 

The  genus  Percosoma  is  a  distinct  one  characterised  by  head  large,  mandibles 
long,  decussate;  antennae  elongate,  second  joint  longer  than  fourth;  prothorax 
plurisetose  along  sides,  lateral  border  not  attaining  base;  elytra  with  fifth  inter- 
stice punctate;  mes-epimera  wide;  posterior  tarsi  a  little  compressed,  fifth  joint 
narrow,  vertical  on  sides  (this  character  occurs  also  to  a  more  marked  degree  in 
some  genera  of   Searitini,  e.g.,  Scaraphites). 

Elytra  sub-striate,  interstices  flat.     Length,  25 — 27  mm.    ..    .    carenoides  White. 
Elytra  strongly  striate,  interstices  convex  on  sides.      Length,  24-35  mm. 

sulcipenue  Bate?. 
Percosoma    cauenoides  White. 

ffab.^Mount   AA'^ellington  (Simson,  No.  2727). 

Percosoma  sulcipenxk  Bates. 

Jlah. — Denison  Gorge,  Wynyard  (Simson,  No.  3463);  Cradle  Mountain, 
Waratah  (Carter  and  Lea). 

Tribe  Agonicini,  trib.  nov. 

I  place  between  the  tribes  Broscini  and  Harpalini  a  new  tribe  which  is  re- 
quired for  two  Tasmanian  species  in  the  Simson  collection;  the  following  will  be 
the  definition   of  this  tribe. 

Head  with  one  sui)ra-orbitai  puncture  on  carh  side;  mandibles  long,  decu.ssate; 
serol)e    of    outer  si>'e    asetose.     Antennae    inserted  under  a  latei'al  ridge,  slender; 


130  THE    CARABIDAE  OF    TASMANIA^ 

l;asal  joint  long,  scapiform;  three  basal  joints  glabrous.  Labriiin  emargiiiate, 
4-setose.  Mentum  toothed.  Palpi  elongate;  apical  joints  setose,  ot  labial  .securi- 
form. Prothorax  suboval;  basal  angles  obtuse;  two  marginal  punctures  on  each 
side,  anterior  at  apical,  posterior  at  basal  third.  Elytra  convex,  oval,  striate; 
disc  impunctate;  scutellar  striole  very  short,  nt  base  of  first  in'^erstice;  margiL 
not  interrupted  posteriorly  by  an  inner  plica.  Anterior  eoxal  cavities  with  a 
single  opening  inwards.  Mes-epimera  not  reaching  eoxal  cavities;  inet-episterna 
iiuadrate,  not  divided  from  epimera.  Legs  long:  anterior  tibiae  emarginate  be- 
neath; upper  spine  at  inner  side  of  emargination.  d'. — Anterior  tarsi  with  four 
joints  dilatate  and  biseriately  squamosa  beneath;  fourth  joint  of  anterior  and  in- 
termediate tarsi  emarginate;  posterior  tarsi  long,  narrow,  fourth  joint  triangular, 
simple. 

A  G  O  N  I  c  A,  gen.  ncv. 

Head  narrow ;  front  depressed,  smooth,  lightly  bi-impressed ;  one  seta  above 
middle  of  eye  on  each  side;  eyes  prominent,  hemispherical,  not  inclosed  at  base, 
distant  from  buccal  fissure  beneath.  Labrum  wide,  short,  emarginate,  4-setose. 
Clypeus  not  divided  from  front  by  a  visible  suture,  bisetose.  Mandibles  long, 
acute,  decussate,  without  a  seta  in  scrobe  of  outer  side.  Mentum  with  a  pro- 
minent triangular  median  tooth.  Palpi  elongate:  labial  with  penultimate  joint 
long,  slender,  bisetose;  apical  joint  widely  securiform,  setulose:  maxUlary  long, 
slender;  two  apical  joints  setose;  terminal  joint  fusiform,  stouter  and  a  little 
longer  than  penultimate,  compressed,  blunt  at  apex.  Antennae  sttaceous,  rising 
at  apex  of  a  marginal  ridge;  basal  condyle  visible;  basal  joint  long,  nearly  as 
long  as  three  succeeding  joints  together;  three  basal  joints  glabrous;  second 
and  fourth  joints  much  shorter  than  third.  Pi-othorax  oval,  depressed;  basal 
angles  rounded;  two  marginal  setae  on  each  side,  anterior  at  apical  third,  pos- 
terior at  basal  third.  Elytra  oval,  convex,  not  bordered  across  base,  lightly 
striate ;  striae  well  marked  on  disc,  faint  towards  sides ;  margin  not  interrupted 
posteriorly  by  an  internal  plica.  Body  shortly  pedunculate;  seutellum  on 
jjeduncle.  Prosternum  with  eoxal  cavities  closed  behind ;  mes-epimera  not  reach- 
ing coxae;  met-episterna  quadrate,  no  visible  suture  between  eiiisternum  and 
epimeron.  Anterior  eoxal  cavities  with  one  opening  inwards.  Ventral  segments 
without  transverse  sulci;  apical  segment  in  c?  with  two  marginal  setae  on  each 
side.  Legs  long:  femora — anterior  a  little  con.pressed,  swollen:  interme<lia;e 
roundly  swollen  on  lower  side  about  anterior  thiid;  posterior  lightly  swollen  on 
lower  side;  tibiae — anterior  emarginate  beneath,  a  sharp  spur  above  emargin:;tion, 
apical  spur  short,  stout;  posterior  slender,  spurs  short,  c?. — Anterior  tarsi  with 
i'our  basal  joints  dilatate,  biseriately  squamulosc  beneath;  fourth  joint  of  four 
anterior  tarsi  short,  emarginate,  of  posterior  tarsi  triangular,  simple:  ujiper  sur- 
face of  tarsi  sparsely  setose. 

AnoNiCA  .SIM.SONI,  sp.  nov. 

Elliptical,  convex;  mandibles  promiuenK  decussate;  liibrum  s-hort,  emargin- 
ate, 4-s('tose;  antennae  with  basal  joint  elongate  (hmger  than  two  succc((ling 
joints  together);  front  strongly  l)i-im]iressed ;  eyes  convex,  distant  I'roui  Imccal 
fissure  beneath.     Black. 

Head  narrow  (1.3  mm.  across  eyes);  frontal  impressions  wide;  hittial  setae 
of  clypcus  at  anterior  extremity  of  frontal  impressions;  clyjical  suture  obsolete. 
Prothorax  hardly  broader  than  long    (2    X    2.1  mm.),  not  declivous   to  base   in 


BV    THOMAS   G.    SLOANU.  131 

nuiliUf.  laevigate  (some  faint  transverse  striolae  crossing  median  line)  ;  anterior 
angles  wide,  liartlly  prominent ;  sides  arcuate ;  base  truncate,  angles  rounded ; 
border  narrow,  marginal  channel  narrow;  lateral  basal  foveae  short,  shallow. 
Elytra  oval  (4  ><  2.8  mm.),  convex,  strongly  declivous  to  apex,  striate;  five  ^nner 
striae  well  marked  on  disc ;  striae  6 — 8  obsolescent  on  sides,  eighth  deeply  impressed 
posteriorly ;  intei'stices  not  convex,  third  impunctate ;  lateral  border  narrow, 
reaching  peduncle  Length,  7.5.  breadth.  2.8  nun. 
Hdb. — Zeehan    (Simson).     Unique. 

Agoxica  ovalipexxis,  sp.  nov. 

Elliptical-oval ;  head  bi-impressed ;  prothorax  quadrate-oval,  basal  angles 
obtuse,  jjosterior  marginal  seta  at  basal  third;  elytra  oval,  striate  on  disc,  lateral 
striae  obsolete,  two  inner  interstices  convex  near  base,  third  impunctate.     Blark. 

Head  narrow  (0.8  mm.  across  eyes);  vertex  convex;  front  depressed,  bi- 
impressed;  impressions  extending  on  to  clypeus;  clypeus  declivous  to  anterior 
margin;  lateral  seta  very  near  outer  angle,  outside  (not  in)  anterior  extremity  of 
frontal  impression.  Prothorax  as  long  as  broad  (1.2  X  1.2  mm.),  laevigate; 
anterior  angles  wide,  hardly  advanced;  sides  evenly  and  lightly  arcuate;  base 
truncate,  angles  rounded  off;  border  narrow,  extending  round  basal  angles;  mar- 
ginal channel  narrow;  median  strongly  impressed.  Elytra  oval  (2.6  X  1.8 
n»m.),  lightly  convex;  humeral  angles  rounded:  apical  curve  subsinuate  on  each 
side:  four  inner  striae  well  marked,  fifth  faint,  6 — 8  obsolete  on  sides,  eighth 
deeply  impressed  posteriorly.     Length,  4.5,  breadth,  1.8  nmi. 

ifab.— Lottah  (Simson  No.  3120). 

A  single  specimen  was  in  the  Simson  collection;  it  differs  from  A.  simsoni  SI.. 
by  smaller  size,  less  convex  form,  lateral  setae  of  clypeus  not  in  frontal  impres- 
sions, &c. 

Tribe  HarpaUni. 
Table  of  Tasmanian  genera. 

1  (81     Labial  palpi  with  penultimate  joint  plurisetose.      (Elytra  fully  striate, 

eyes  distant  from  buccal  fissure  beneath,  c?. — If  with  four  anterior 
tarsi  squamosa  beneath,  then  four  joints  clothed  with  dense  tissue 
beneath. ) 

2  (5)     Posterior  tarsi  long;  first  joint  as  long  as,  or  longer  than  two  succeed- 

ing joints  together. 

3  (4)     Elytra  with   at  least   third   interstice   pluripvinctate    . .   Gnathaphanus. 

4  (3)     Elytra   with   third   interstice   unipunctate Diaphokomebds. 

5  (2)     Posterior  tarsi  short:   first  joint  short,  not  as  long  as  two  succeeding 

joints  togeUier. 

6  (7)     Sinus  of  mentum  with  a  median  tooth Hyphabpax. 

7  (6)     Sinus  of  mentum   without  a  median   tooth Cenogmus. 

8  (1)     Labial  palpi  with  penultimate  joint  bisetose.      (In   Ainblystoinus   some 

other  feebly  developed  setules  also.) 

9  (12)   Labium  with  paraglossae  overlapping  one  another  in  front  of  ligula; 

mentum  edentate. 

10  (11)   Elytra  with  first  stria  present,  or  interrupted  near  base,  or  obsolete, — 

if  present,  bent  outwards  near  base  and  a  scutellar  striole  present 
on  first  interstice, — if  interrupted,  scutellar  striole  obsolete  or  nearly 
so.     c? — Four  anterior  tarsi  either  with  or  without  vesture  beneath. 

AsiBLTSTOJinS. 

11  (10)   Elytra  with  first  stria  bent  inwards  near  base,  scutellar  striole  wanting. 

c?. — Anterior  tarsi   without  vesture  beneath Haplaneb. 


132  THE    CARABIDAE  OF    TASMANIA, 

12  (9)     Labium    with    paraglossae    free    at    apex;    mentum    dentate.      (Elytra 

fully  striate.) 

13  (14)   \'entral   segments    (including   basal    fovea    in    d'l    glabrous.      Posterior 

tarsi  long,  first  joint  muth  longer  than  se(?ond.     S- — Four  anterior 
tarsi  with  joints  24  wide,  clothed  with  dense  tissue  beneath 

XemAiSLOSSA. 

14  (131   Ventral  segments  (including  basal  fovea  in  c?)  satulose.     Posterior  tarsi 

short,   first  joint    not   as   long   as   two   succeeding   joints   together. 
(J. — Four  anterior  tarsi   with  squamae   disposed  biseriately  at  sides 

of    joints EUTHENARUS. 

Genus  Gnathaphanus. 

Gnathaphanu.s    adelaidak    Castelnau. 

Hah. — Launceston,  Brighton,  Great  Lake,  Avoca,  Hobart,  Flinder.-:  Is. 
(Siinson  No.  2481). 

Genus  Diaphorojierus. 

Table  of  Tasmanian  species. 

1  (8)     Elytra  with  humeral  angles  marked  and  dentate,  third  interstice  uni- 

punctate. 

2  (7)     Legs    black,    or    with    tibiae    and    tarsi    piceous;     antennae     black,     or 

infuscate  with  basal  joint  ferruginous. 

3  (4)     Prothorax    with    sides    not    sinuate    posteriorly,    basal    angles    obtuse 

(Colour   bronze,    or   viridiaeneous)     cdwart/si    Casteln. 

4  (31     Prothorax  with  sides  sinuate  posteriorly,  basal  angles  square. 

5  (61     Colour  virescent.     Length,  7  mm reilaii^s^itlus  ChawX. 

6  (5)     Colour  black.      Length,  S  mm quadi-icollis  Ohaud. 

7  (21     Tibiae,  tarsi,  and  antennae  ferruginous.    (Scutellar  stride  punctifonni. 

Length,  6.5  mm viridipennis  St. 

S  (1)  Elytra  with  humeral  angles  not  dentate,  third  interstice  impuncta,te. 
(Prothorax  densely  punctate  on  each  side  of  base,  sides  strongly 
sinuate   to  base,   basal   angles   rectangular.     Length,   9.7-10.5  mm. 

pcratcr  SI. 

Xote. — D.  amaroides  Casteln.  (=  Ilarpalut:  patnicloides  Castelu.  =  //.  raii- 
diemensis  Casteln.  =  11.  illawarensis  Casteln.,  according  to  Chaudoir)  is  al.so  re- 
ported from  Tasmania ;  but,  not  having  seen  it  from  the  island,  I  liave  thought  it 
better  not  to  include  it  in  the  table  from  sjieciuicns  of  the  mainiami.  It  i>  dis- 
tinguished by  its  ferruginous  tibiae   and  tarsi. 

DlAI'HOROJIERrS  KUWARDSI       Ca^tl'luau. 

I'.i'onzi'd,  or  bronzy-green;  legs  black;  basal  joint  of  anlcnnac  testaceous. 
Length,  8.5  mm.  1  consider  this  species  to  l)e  conspecitic  with  />.  edward.^i 
Casteln.,  a  species  about  which  little  is  yet  known. 

Hid). —  Falmouth   (Simson),   Stonor  (Lea).      Also  occurs   in  X'icturia. 


Dl.MMIOlIllMKlilS     HEC'TAXCULUS     Chaui 


i)ir. 


A    viridcseent   s]>iM-ics  with    basal  angles    of    pi.itlinrax     i-cclniii;iilMr.      Length, 
6.5 — 7  nnn. 

Ilab. —  Bi'ighton    (  Siuison,    uniiiuc).       Also  found  in  south-ea^tcni    Austrrdia. 


BY    THOMAS   G.    SLOANE.  133 

D1APHOROJIERU.S  QUAiiRicOLLis  Cliaudoir. 

A  specimen  which  I  identify  as  I),  quadricollis  Chaud.,  from  the  description, 
iiiis  been  sent  to  me  by  Mr.  Lea  for  examination. 

Dee])  black;  prothorax  with  sides  lightly  sinuate  before  base,  basal  angles 
square  but  obtuse  at  summit,  lateral  ba-sal  impressions  imininctate;  elytra  with 
puncture  of  third  interstice  more  distant  from  apex  than  usual.     Length,  8.5  mm. 

Ilah. — Zeehan    (Lea). 

DiAPiioiiOJiKitus  viRiDiPEXXiSj  sp.  nov. 

Oval,  convex;  head  large,  eyes  prominent,  lightly  inclosed  at  base,  mentuni 
toothed;  prothorax  transverse,  wider  across  base  (2  mm.)  than  apex  (1.5  mm.), 
basal  angles  obtuse;  elytra  ovate,  convex,  strongly  and  fully  striate,  second  inter- 
stice with  a  very  short  striole  at  base,  third  interstice  with  a  puncture  about 
posterior  third,  humeral  angles  dentate;  undersurface  glabrous;  abdomen  in  (? 
with  a  well  marked,  median,  basal,  shallow  impressicm ;  point  of  prosternum 
sinirsely  setulose;  tirst  joint  of  hind  tarsi  long,  about  as  long  as  two  succeeding 
joints  together;  6- — Four  anterior  tarsi  dilatate,  joints  1 — i  densely  clothed  with 
squamae  beneath,  the  squamae  arranged  in  longitudinal  rows.  Black,  nitid;  elytra 
bluish  green;  femora  piceous;  tibiae,  tarsi,  antennae,  and  palpi  ferruginous. 

Head  convex,  not  narrowed  behinil  eyes  (1.5  mm.  across  eyes);  post-ocular 
part  of  orbits  small,  rising  obliquely  but  abruptly  from  head.  Prothorax  laevi- 
gata, convex,  broader  than  long  (l.ti  x  2.2  mm.),  roundly  and  decidedly  narrowed 
to  apex,  very  lightly  and  obliquely  narrowed  to  base;  apex  lightlx'  emargiuate, 
angles  obtuse ;  base  truncate,  angles  obtuse  but  marked ;  median  line  obsolescent ; 
border  entire.  Elytra  shortly  truncate-oval  (4  X  2.8  mm.),  convex,  strongly  de- 
clivous to  apex;  ai^ical  curve  short,  hardly  sinuate  on  each  side;  interstices  sub- 
convex,  narrow  and  convex  at  apex;  ninth  interstice  wide  and  with  a  double  row 
of  punctures  towards  apex.     Lengih,  fi.5,  breadth.  2.8  mm. 

Hab. — Hobart  (Lea).  The  type  specimen  belongs  to  Mr.  Lea,  and  another 
is  in  my  collection,  given  to  me  by  Mr.  H.  J.  Carter,  who  found  it  at  Hobart. 

A  small  species,  not  like  any  other  species  of  the  genus  Bktphoromerus;  in 
general  appearance  it  resembles  a  species  of  Hypharpa.r,  but  is  at  once  distin- 
guished from  the  species  of  that  genus  by  the  form  of  the  posterior  tarsi,  \ihich 
have  the  basal  joint  much  longer — longer  than  tKe  elongate  inner  apical  .spur  of 
the  tibiae. 

DiAPHOROMERU.S   PERATER,    Sp.    nOV. 

Oval,  cou\ex.  form  robust;  head  large;  prothorax  trans\erse,  strongly  sinuate 
on  sides  posteriorly,  basal  half  closely  punctate  on  each  side,  basal  angles  rec- 
tangular; elytra  strongly  striate,  interstices  convex,  third  inqiunctate.  humeral 
angles  marked   but  not   dentate.     Black. 

Head  large  (2.(35  across  eyes),  convex;  front  obli(|uely  de])ressed  to  anterior 
margin;  clypeus  transversely  impressed  behind  anterior  margin  between  lateral 
setae;  clypeal  suture  distinct,  linear,  giving  off  at  each  end  an  oblic|ueIy  divergent 
line  extending  across  frontal  depression  towards  eye;  left  mandible  hooked,  pro- 
jecting beyond  labrum.  right  mandible  folded  under  labrum  and  left  mandible. 
Prothorax  broader  than  long  (2.3  X  3.4  mm.)  ;  base  truncate,  wiiler  (3  mm.)  than 
apex  (2.7  mm.);  sides  rounded  anteriorly,  sinuate  posteriorly  and  meeting  base 
at  right  angles;  anterior  angles  a  little  prominent,   obtuse;   Ijasal  angles  rectangu- 


134  THE    CARABIDAE  OF    TASMANIA, 

lar;  upper  surface  depressed  and  with  a  light  wide  concavity  on  each  side  of  oase, 
closely  and  finely  punctate  towards  base  and  along  sides  to  marginal  seta;  a  dis- 
tinct curved  anterior  transverse  line  distant  from  anterior  margin;  median  line 
short,  not  deep;  marginal  channel  wide;  border  reflesed  on  sides,  entire  on  base, 
extending  almost  to  middle  on  each  side  of  apex.  Elytra  ovate  (6.2  x  4.5  nun.), 
lightly  convex;  base  wide,  trancate;  apical  curve  lightly  sinuate  on  each  fide; 
striae  deep;  .stride  at  base  of  second  interstice  elongate;  interstices  convex, 
strongly  so  on  apical  declivity.  Posterior  tarsi  with  basal  joint  almost  as  long 
as  two  succeeding  joints  together.     Length,  9.7 — 10.5,  breadth.  4.2 — 4.5  mm. 

Hab. — Tasmania  (Simson  Coll.  No.  3686);  Hobart,  Huon  River.  B-,rnie 
(Lea);   "Warburton,  Victoria    (Sloane). 

A  very  distinct  species,  whicli  it  seems  only  necessary  to  compare  witli  Har- 
23alus  moestits  Dej.,  a  species  which  I  refer  to  Kijpharpax  on  account  of  its  short 
posterior  tarsi.  Compared  with  H.  moestus,  it  is  larger;  head  more  depressed 
anteriorly;  prothorax  with  basal  angles  more  sharply  rectangular,  anterior  angles 
more  prominent,  lateral  channel  wider,  base  more  depressed  on  each  side,  punctura- 
tion  of  basal  parts  finer,  denser,  and  oversjn-eadiug  more  of  the  surface;  elytra 
less  convex,  basal  border  much  less  prominent  at  shoulders,  striae  deeper,  scutellar 
striole  much  longer,  interstices  more  convex,  third  impunctate  ( in  H.  moestus 
unipunctate  above  apical  declivity)  ;  posterior  tai-si  longer;  first  joint  of  antennae 
black — not  ferruginous. 

Genus  H  y  p  H  A  R  p  A  x. 

Table  of  Tasmanian  species. 

1  (2)     Elytra  with  third  interstice  unipunctate  on  apical  declivity.     J. — Pos- 

terior femora  strongly  and  sharply  dilatate,  dentate  or  subdentate 

on  lower  side .      (Prothorax  with  basal  angles  very  obtuse. ) 

peroni  Cast. 

2  (V\     Elytra    with    third     interstice     unipunctate     above     apical    declivity. 

c?. — Posterior  femora  not  strongly  dilatate  on  lower  side. 

3  (4)     Prothorax    with    basal    angles   obtuse    (though    a    little     marked),    not 

punctate  on   each  side  of  base,  except  in  bottom   of  basal   impres- 
sions.     (Tibiae   dull   red    with   apex   piceous) .     Length,   5.7-7   mm. 

australis  Dej . 

4  (31     Prothorax   with   basal   angles   well   marked,   punctate   on    each   side   of 

base. 
•"i     (6)     Prothorax  with  sides  oblique  to  base.     Elytra  lightly  convex;  humeral 
angles    not    dentate.     Colour    obscure,    bronze:     tibiae    ferruginous. 

piceous  at  apex.     Length,  6.5 — 7  mm aereus  Dej. 

6     (5 1     Prothorax  with  sides  sinuate  before  base,  basal  angles  square.     Elytra 
very  convex;   humeral  angles  dentate.     Colour  black,  legs  black   .. 

moestus    Dej . 
HvpiiARPAX  PERONI  Castclnau. 

{=  77.  novae-hollandiae  Cast.,  ^  H.  inoniatits  Blackb.    (uon  Gerniar). 

=  H.  latiuscultis  Chaudoir,  ^  H.  puntticauda  Bates.]* 

I  identify  specimens  from  Launceston  in  the  Simson  collection  as  Riipliarpax 
peroni  Cast ,  a  sjiecies  which  Blackburn,  from  South  Australian  specimens,  identi- 


•  I  am  indebted  to  Mr.  H.  E.  Andrews.of  London,  for  the  information  that  Chaudoir'® 
name  was  published  before  Bates's. 


BY    THOMAS   G.    SLOANE.  135 

fled  as  Ilarpahts  inornatus  Germ.,  though  Chauiloir  had  in  1878  put  H.  inornatus 
Germ.,  as  a  synonym  of  Harpalus  australis  Dej.  I  believe  that  on  this  question 
Chaudoir  was  right.  The  Simson  collection  contains  specimens  which  are  evi- 
dently H.  puncticauda  Bates,  by  their  heavier  form,  prothorax  more  rounded  on 
sides,  and  trochanters  obtuse  at  apex  (not  almost  straight  on  outer  side  nearly  to 
apex  and  truncated  in  a  curve  from  inner  side)  ;  this  is  the  same  thing,  from 
description,  as  H.  latiusculus  Chaudoir,  but  seems  to  rne  conspecific  with  a  speci- 
men from  Lannceston,  which  I  cannot  differentiate  from  H.  peroni  of  the  main- 
land; therefore,  I  feel  unable  to  consider  //.  puncticauda  Bates  as  a  variety,  but 
this  is  a  point  that  can  only  be  settled  by  careful  collecting  throughout  Tasmania. 
The  sharpness  of  the  angulation  of  the  lower  side  of  the  femora  in  c?  varies  in 
degree  in  Tasmanian  specimens,  as  in  other  species  of  the  genus;  in  the  specimen 
from  Launceston  referred  to  above,  it  is  shortly  dentate.  In  length  Tasmanian 
specimens  vary  from  6.7  to  8  mm.,  and  vary  in  colour  from  a  dull  copper-c.:lour 
to  almost  black.  Tt  was  numbered  2478  and  2483  in  Simson  collection,  but  I 
cannot  differentiate  the  specimens  so  numbered. 

Hab. — Launceston,  Brighton,  Evandale,  Longford,  Interlaken  (Simson)  :  Par- 
attah,  Stonor,  Hobart  (Lea).      Widely  spread  in  Australia, 

Hypharpax  australis  Dejean. 

Hab. — Launceston,  Evandale,  Great  Lake  (Simson,  No.  2484)  ;  Stonor.  ]\Iount 
Wellington  (Lea)  ;  Lord  Howe  Island  (Lea).     Widely  spread  in  S.E.   Austr.iha. 

Hypharpax   aereus  Dejean. 

Ilab. — Hobart    (Lea).     Southern  coastal  districts  of  Australia. 

Hypharpax  moestus  Dejean. 

Hab. — Brighton  ( Simson,  No.  2881 )  ;  Hobart  ( Lea ) .  Also  reported  I'rom 
Melbourne. 

Genus  C  E  N  0  G  M  D  s. 

Cenogmus  rotundicollis  Castelnau. 

Hab. — Tasmania   (Lea).     Very  widely  distributed  over  Australia. 

Genus  A  m  b  l  t  s  t  o  Ji  u  s. 

Erichson,  Kaf.  Mark.  Brandb.,  i.,  p.  59,  1837;  Hispalis  Rambur,  Faun.  A)idal., 
p.  135,  1842;  Megaristerus  Nietner,  Ann.  Mag.  N.H.,  1858,  p.  427;  Notopk-ilus 
Blackburn,  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  S.  Aust.,  1887,  p.  185;  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.  Wales, 
1889,  p.  1250;  Thenarotidius  Sloane,  op.  cit.  1898,  p.  461;  Psilonothus  Sloane, 
op.  cit.,  1899.  p.  557. 

All  authoi-s  have  not  been  in  agreement  as  to  the  position  of  the  genus  Ambly- 
stomus;  for  Erichson,  Lacordaire,  Bates,  Ganglbauer,  and  Tschitscherine  its  jjlace 
was  in  the  tribe  Harpalini;  for  Schaum,  in  the  Lebiini;  for  Bedel  and  Apfelbeck 
in  the  Licinini;  in  the  European  Catalogue  of  1906  it  is  placed  in  a  special  tiibe; 
I  believe  it  to  represent  a  group  in  the  tribe  Harpalini.  The  genus  is  here  used  in  a 
wide  sense,  the  genera  Notophihis,  Thenarotidius  and  Psilonothus  being  included  in 
it.  Of  these,  Thenarotidius  is  unquestionably  a  synonym,  and  I  do  not  know 
definite  reasons  foi'  maintaining  yotophilus  and  Psilonothus  as  distinct.  Koto- 
philus   has   the  clypeus    and  lalirum    symmetrical,  but  the  want  of  symmetry    in 


13()  THK    CARABIDAE   OF    TASMANIA, 

Ambh/stomus  varies  so  considerably  that  I  do  not  tliink  this  a  character  on  which 
the  genus  should  be  founded.  The  clypeus  and  labrum  cannot  be  said  to  be 
as_\inmetrical  in  Psilonothus,  and  Ps.  ovalis  SI.,  has  naked  tarsi  in  d',  but  a  species 
described  below,  ,1.  convexus,  is  evidently  congeneric  with  Ps.  orafo,  yet  has  the 
four  anterior  tarsi  in  c?,  lightly  dilatate  and  squamulose  beneath. 

Table  of  Tasmanian  species. 

1  (4i     Met-episterna   elongate:    elytra   striate    near   suture,   puncture   of   third 

interstice  before  apical  declivity ;   eyes  near  buccal  fissure  beneath- 
Winged. 

2  (3 1     Prothora.x  arcuate  to  base,  basal  angles  rounded,  not  marked.   Leilgth, 

3.3-3.5  mm iiiger   Blackb. 

3  (21     Prothorax  decidedly  and  obliquely  narrowed  to  base;  basal  angles  ob- 

tuse, but  marked.     Length,  2.3--2.5  mm.      ..    ..         parvus.  Blackb. 

4  (li     Met-episterna     (excluding   epimeral     quadrate;     elytra    without    striae 

on  disc,  puncture  of  third  interstice  on  apical  declivity;  eyes  distant 
from  buccal  fissure  beneath.     Apterous. 

5  (6)     c?  with   four  anterior  tarsi   squamulose  beneath.      Length.   \-A.h   mm. 

couie.xus  SI. 

6  (5 1     (S  with  anterior  tarsi  naked  beneath.     Length,  2.5 — 3mm.         ovalis  Si. 

AilBLYSTOiirs    (NoTOPillLCS)     xic.F.R     Blackburn. 

Hah. — Evandale  (Simson  No.  3122);  Latrobe,  Jordan  River.  Strahan,  j\Iount 
Wellington  (Lea).     Common  in  South-eastern  Australia. 

A:wBLYSTOMU.s    (NoTOPHiLis)    PARVUS  Blackburn. 

Hah. — Launceston,  Evandale.  Zeehan  (Simsuu.  Xo.  2877);  Jordan  River 
(Lea).     South  Australia. 

AlIBLTSTOlirs    CONVEXUS,    SJl.    nov. 

Apterous,  oval,  convex;  prothorax  with  lateral  margin  narrow;  elytra  smooth, 
a  fine  puncture  at  position  of  third  interstice  near  apical  fifth ;  met-cpis(erna 
wide,  short,  quadrate — including  epimera  longer  than  broad;  posterior  tarsi  with 
first  joint  as  long  as  three  succeeding  joints  together.  <S. — Abdomen  at  apex 
bisetose  on  each  side;  four  anterior  tarsi  with  joints  1 — 4  lightly  dil.atate  and 
sr|uamnlose  beneath.  Olivaceous-black;  liasal  joint  of  antennae  ..nd  tibiae  testa- 
ccniis-lirown. 

Head  sniootli;  labrum.  clypeus  and  front  sliagreened,  and  sliowing  some 
miiuite  punctures  under  a  lens;  eyes  round,  convex,  distant  from  buccal  fissure 
beneath;  mentuni  edentate.  Prothorax  smooth,  convex,  transver.se — cordate  (1.1 
X  1.4  mm.)  ;  base  wide;  basal  angles  obtuse;  lateral  border  narrow,  more  strongl.v 
reflexed  at  basal  angles,  entire  on  base.  Elytra  smooth,  convex,  oval  (2.6  ^  2 
mm.)  ;  eighth  stria  obsolete;  submargina!  punctures  wantiui;'  on  niiddle  of  sides. 
Length,  4.1—4.4,   breadth,   1.75—2  mm. 

Hah. — Brighton  (Simson.  No.  2858).  Also  fimnd  l)y  .Mr.  Lea  at  Liu-irdale 
and  Port  Lincoln,  S.  Australia. 

A  distinct  species  much  larger  tlian  .L  {Psihniothu.f)  ovalis  SI.  Compared 
with  Amhliignathns  minutux,  a  species  I  also  refer  to  Amhli/stomus.  r.nd  to  v, hicli 
it  is  allied,  the  prothorax  narrowly  bordered  at  once  distinguishes  it 


BY    THOMAS  G.    SLOAXE.  '  137 

Amblystojius  (Psilonothus)  ovalis  Sloane. 

Hab. — Strahan  (Carter  and  Leal.  This  species,  which  extends  from  N.S. 
Wales  to  Western  Australia,  was  represented  in  the  Simson  collection  by  one 
specimen,  without  exact  locality. 

Genus  H  A  p  l  a  n  e  r. 

Haplaner  velox  Castelnau. 

Hnh. — Wedge  Bay  (Hardy).  H.  velox  was  sent  to  me  by  Mr.  H.  .1.  Cprter, 
as  having-  been  found  at  Wedge  Bay  by  Mr.  Hardy.  It  is  found  in  the  southern 
coastal  districts  of  Australia  from  Perth  to  Melbourne. 

Genus  N  e  ji  a  (;  l  o  8  s  a. 

Sober,  Gay's  Hist.  Chili:  Zool.,  iv.,  p.  215,  .1848;  Lecanonherus  Chaudoir, 
Bull.  Soc.  Imp.  Nat.  Mosc,  1850.  p.  446;  Theiiarotes  Bates,  Cist.  Ent..  1878,  p. 
320. 

I  have  examined  a  specimen  of  Nemar/Iosfia  hrevis  Sober  (^  Lecatminerus 
maryinatus  Reed)  from  Chili;  and  do  not  know  how  to  distinguish  the  genus 
Lecanomerus  from  Nemaglossa,  nor  do  I  think  that  Thenarotes  is  (even  on  Bates's 
own  showing)  separable  from  Lecanomerus,  except  by  trivial  characters  that  are 
not  of  generic  value ;  therefore  thess  three  genera  are  considered  as  one  here. 

Table  of  Tasmanian  species. 

1  (4)     Form    stout;    upper   surface   black,    rarely    with    a    virescent   tinge    on 

elytra. 

2  (31     Size  major,  6.5--7  mm.      Elytra  nitid  in  J.  opaque  in  2 

Z'fr/ifa/is  Erichs- 

3  (2)     Size  minor,  4. .5  mm.     Form  oval,  convex;  elytra  nitid  in  both  sexes 

Diastcrsi  Macl. 

4  (1)     Form  narrow;  prothorax  at  least  reddish. 

5  (S)     Head  black;   antennae  infuscate  after  second  joint. 

6  (7)     Elytra  red  at  base;  each  elytron  with  a  piceous  plaga  extending  over 

interstices  2-8.     Length,  5  mm bico/or '61. 

7  (6>     Elytra   piceous;    first   interstice,    apex,     and    lateral    margin     reddish. 

Length,  3.8-4.1  mm oh/usa^l. 

S     (o)     Colour    (including  head   and    antennae)    reddish:   each   elytron   with   a 
piceous  plaga  extending  over  interstices  2-5.     Length,  5  mm 

tnsuianica  Bates. 

Nemaglossa    (Harpalus)  verticalis  Erichson. 

if«6.— Launceston  (Simson,  No.  2480),  West  Tamar  (Simson.  No.  3105); 
Devonport,  Zeehan,  Hobart  (Lea).  Common  in  the  coastal  districts  of  N.S. 
Wales  and    Victoria 

Nemaglossa  mastersi  Macleay. 

(^Acupalpus  mastersi  Macl.,  =  Lecanomerus   nitidus  Blackb.) 
Hab. — Stanley,   Stonor,    King  Is.    (Lea).     Also    found  over  a   large    area   of 
S.E.    Australia. 

NEM.i(;LOSSA   (Thenarotes)   bicolor  Sloane. 

Hnh. — Launceston,  Beaeonsfield  (Simson,  No.  2492).  Also  found  in  Victoria 
and   S .    Australia. 


138  THE    CARABIDAE   OF    TA.SJIAXIA, 

Nemaglossa  obtcsa^  »p.  nov. 

Elongate-oval;  head  bifoveate;  prothorax  laevigate,  punctate  on  each  side 
of  basal  foveae;  elytra  tiuneate-oval  (2.5  X  1.8  mm.),  convex,  fully  striate,  second 
interstice  without  striole  at  base,  third  interstice  unipunctate  a  little  before  apical 
third.  Head  black ;  prothorax  ferruginous,  middle  of  anterior  margin  and  disc 
vaguely  infuseate;  elytra  piceous-black,  first  interstice,  lateral  margins  and  apex 
reddish;  legs  testaceous;  antennae  infuseate,  two  basal  joints  testaceous;  man- 
dibles and  labrum  reddish. 

Head  laevigate;  each  frontal  fovea  giving  off  an  oblicjue  line  running  towards 
middle  of  eyes;  vertex  convex;  eyes  prominent,  lightly  inclosed  behind.  Pro- 
thorax broader  than  long  (0.9  X  1.2  mm.),  widest  before  middle;  sides  lightly 
rounded,  roundly  and  strongly  narrowed  to  apex,  decidedly  narrowed  to  base; 
apex  truncate;  angles  rounded,  not  marked;  base  tnmcate  in  a  curve,  angles 
obtuse,  not  marked;  lateral  basal  foveae  wide,  shallow,  punctate;  median  line 
distinct.     Length.  3.8 — i.l  mm.,  breadth,   1.8  mm. 

Hab. — Evandale   (Simson,    No.    2494);    Launceston,  Latrobe,    Strahau    (Lea). 

This  is  the  species  whicli  is  entered  as  Thenarotes  discoidalis  Blackb.  in  Lea's 
"List"  of  1902,  but  I  believe  it  to  be  a  distinct  species.  Compared  with  .Y. 
atriceps  (^  Trechus  id  Macleay),  it  differs  by  prothorax  more  strongly  narrowed 
to  base,  basal  angles  more  rounded  off.  I  am  not  sure  that  I  know  X.  minor 
Blackb.,  which  may  not  be  different  from  N.  atriceps  Mad. ;  the  same  differences 
should  separate  A',  olitusa  from  N.  minor  as  from  X.  atriceps.  It  seems  to  me 
better  to  consider  the  Tasmanian  species  as  distinct,  rather  than  attach  it  to  any 
of  the  described  species  of  the  mainland  as  a  variety.  All  the  allied  forms  known 
to  me  from  the  mainland  differ  from  A'^.  ohtusa  by  having  the  prothorax  less 
strongly  narrowed  to  base,  and  witli  the  basal  angles  more  marked. 

Two  small  specimens  belonging  to  Mr.  Lea,  ticketed  "Launceston"  are 
smaller  than  the  typical  form  (3.5  mm.)  and  have  the  elytra  almost  wholly 
black,  only  the  first  interstice  towards  apex,  lateral  margins  posteriorly,  and  apex 
narrowly  reddish;    it  may  be  a   variety. 

Nemaglcssa    (Thenarotes)  tasjianica  Bates. 

Hab. — Launceston  (Simson,  No.  249]).     Also  cimmion  in  S.E.  Australia. 

Genus  E  u  t  ii  e  n  a  r  u  s. 

Prothorax  with  basal  angles  rectangular:  legs  yellowish   ..         //ow/i/zw Erichs. 
Prothorax   with   basal   angles   obtuse;    legs  black nii^r/his  B\. 

Euthexarus    (Harpalu.s)     PRo:HPTrs  Erichson. 

Ilab. — Launceston,  Beaconsfield,  Kelso,  Zeehan  (Simson,  No.  2859);  Latrobe, 
Strahan.   King  Is.    (Lea).     Common  in   S.E.    Australia. 

Euthexarus  xigellus,   sp.  nov. 

Elongate-oval;  prothorax  laevigate,  sparsely  punctate  in  ba.sal  impressions; 
elytra  convex,  fullv  striate,  second  interstice  without  striole  at  base,  third  inter- 
stice unipunctate  near  posterior  third.  Black;  antennae  piceous  with  basal  .loint 
reddish ;  legs  black ;   tarsi  ferruginous-brown,  posterior  darker  tlian   anterior. 

Head  laevigate-  frontal  im])ressions  well  nuirkcd,  ()l)li(me.  anterior  extremi- 
ties connected  by   clypeal    suture;    eyes   not   prominent.     Prothorax  broader    thaa 


BT    THOMAS   G.    SLOAXE.  139 

long-  (1  >^  1.3  mm);  sides  rouutled,  angnstate  to  base;  base  areuate-tnmeate, 
angles  obtuse;  border  thick,  extending  round  basal  angles  on  each  side;  lateral 
basal  fovea  wide,,  shallow,  punetulate.  Elytra  wider  than  prothorax  (2.65  X 
1.75  mm.),  strongly  declivous  to  apex;  inner  humeral  angles  widely  obtuse; 
apical  curve  short,  without  lateral  sinuosities;  striae  entire,  fine  but  well  defined, 
Eeeond  rising  from  a  rather  large  puncture;  interstices  depressed.  Length,  4.2, 
breadth,  1.75  mm. 

Hah. — Strahan    (Lea).     Unicjue. 

Allied  to  E.  comes  SI.,  from  which  it  presents  the  following  differences: — 
legs  black;  eyes  less  convex;  protliorax  more  strongly  narrowed  to  base,  less 
densely  punctate  along  base,  ])articularly  near  angles. 

Tribe  Merizodini,  trib.   nov. 

Antennae  with  second  and  third  joints  setulose;  mandibles  with  a  seta  in 
groove  of  outer  side;  maxillary  palpi  with  penultimate  joint  setiferous,  apical 
joint  glabrous.  Elytra  -with  margin  interrupted  posteriorly  by  an  inner  plica, 
eighth  interstice   carinate   towards  apex. 

I  have  formulated  this  tribe  for  the  Australasian  siaeeies  hitherto  put  in  the 
genus  Oopterus.  Dr.  R .  Jeannel,  of  Toulouse,  has  examined  the  genotype,  Oopte- 
rus  elivinoides  Guerin,  and  ha.s  kindly  communicated  to  me  the  fact  that  not  only 
is  it  not  congeneric  with  the  New  Zealand  species  hitherto  refen-ed  to  as  Oopterus, 
but  actually  belongs  to  another  tribe  of  the  Carabidae;  this  leaves  the  South 
American  Merisodus  as  the  first  described  genus  of  this  tribe,  and  therefore  the 
one  from  which  the  tribal  name  must  be  taken.  The  characters  given  above 
differentiate  this  tribe  from  the  Treehini.  The  only  extra- Australasian  genus  of 
the  tribe  known  to  me  is  Merizodus,  the  genotype  of  which,  1/.  angusticolUs  Solier 
from    Chili,    I  have  examined. 

Table  of  genera. 

Eyes  large,  prominent. 

Head  with  two  supra-orbital   setae  on  each  side. 

Elytra  bordered  on  base;  prothorax  without  a  submarginal  carina. 

Facies  Oodes-WV-e.     Prothorax  with  posterior  marginal  seta  present. 

Bb.\chtdema. 
Facies  Hnrpa!iis-\'\Ve.      Prothorax   without   posterior   marginal    seta 

Pebcodebmus. 

Elytra   not   bordered   on   base;    prothorax   with    a   submarginal   carina 

near  basal  angles,  posterior  marginal  seta  present   . .    .  .  Merizodus. 

Head   with  one   supra-orbital   seta   on   each   side.      [Prothorax  with   a 

submarginal  carina  and  a  marginal   seta  near  basal   angles:    elytra 

with  border  obsolete  except  beside  humeral  angle.]    . .  Pteroctbtus. 

S     (Ii     Eyes  small,  depressed.      [Prothorax  narrow,  near  basal  angles  concave 

and  without  submarginal  carina;   legs  unusually  long.)    Idacababus. 

Genus    B  E  A  c  H  V  D  E  II  a. 

Brac'HYDema  TASMAXiAE  SI.      (^  B.  cictorioe  SI.) 

I  now  believe  I  was  wrong  in  trying  to  differentiate  the  Tasmanian  and  Vic- 
torian forms  from  one  another. 

Hab. — Denison  Gorge  (Simson  No.  3126),  Hobart  (Lea);  Warburtim.  Vic- 
toria   (Sloane). 


1 

(8) 

2 

("1 

3 

(61 

4 

(.51 

5 

(4) 

6 

(31 

7 

(21 

140  THK    CARABIDAE   OF    TASIIAXIA. 

P  E  R  C  0  D  E  R  II  r  S,  gen.  nov. 

Head  small;  froutal  impressions  obsolete;  two  supra-orbital  setae  ou  each 
side;  eyes  hemispherical,  hardh-  inclosed  at  base,  distant  from  buccal  fissure  be- 
neath. Labrum  truncate,  G-setose.  Clypeus  with  a  seta  on  eaeli  side.  Man- 
dibles with  a  seta  in  scrobe  of  outer  side.  Palpi  stout :  maxillary  with  penulti- 
mate joint  obconic,  setose;  apical  joint  stout,  short,  obtusely  pointed,  glabious; 
labial  short;  penultimate  joint  bisetose;  apical  joint  short,  stout,  obtusely  pointed. 
Antennae  long,  slender;  second  and  third  joints  setulose.  Prothorax  depressed, 
subquadrate,  wider  across  base  than  apex,  lightly  and  roundly  ampliate  at  widest 
part,  bi-impressed  on  each  side  of  base;  basal  angles  rectangular,  obtuse  at  sum- 
mit ;  border  nan-ow,  passing  round  basal  angles ;  submarginal  basal  carina  not 
developed;  jjosterior  marginal  seta  wanting.  Elytra  rather  depressed:  base  bor- 
dered; humeral  angles  marked,  not  dentate;  striae  lightly  marked  on  disc,  obso- 
lete on  sides;  first  interstice  with  a  very  short  striole  at  base,  third  4-])unctate 
fceside  third  stria,  eighth  cariuate  at  apex,  obsolete  in  middle.  c?. — Anterior  tarei 
with  two  basal  joints  lightly  dilatate  and  squamose  beneath. 

The  position  of  this  genus  is  near  Pterocyrtus,  but  it  differs  by  f(irm  more 
depressed ;  head  with  froutal  impressions  obsolete,  two  supra-orbital  setae  on  each 
side;  prothorax  without  a  submarginal  basal  carina,  seta  at  ba.sal  angles  wanting. 
The  genotype  is  a  small,  jet-black,  rather  nitid  beetle. 

Percodkrjius  xiiiKii,  sp.  nov. 

Elli|)tieal-oval,  sulidepressed.  Black,  nitid ;  legs  and  antennae  piceous  or 
piceous  red,  femora  darker  than  tibiae,  base  of  antennae  reddi.sh.  Head  short  (1.3 
mm.  across  eyes);  front  wide;  eyes  large,  round,  prominent.  Prothorax  sub- 
quadrate  (1.5  X  2  mm.),  widest  just  before  middle,  depressed:  apex  narrow 
(1.2  mm.),  angles  not  prominent,  rounded;  sides  arcuate  anteriorly,  subsiimate 
to  liase;  base  wide  (1.7  mm.),  tnincate,  angles  rectangular,  summit  obtuse:  l)order 
narrow,  passing  round  Ijoth  anterior  and  basal  angles,  very  narrow  in  middle  of 
apex,  obsolete  in  middle  of  ba.se;  basal  impressions  shallow,  inner  one  well 
marked,  outer  one  short,  distinct;  space  between  these  imjiressions  wide,  depressed. 
Elytra  with  disc  lightly  striate;  sides  smooth;  third  interstice  4-punctat<.',  eighth 
carinate  at  apex,  obsolete  in  middle;  a  short  striole  at  base  of  first  interstice. 
Tarsi  seto.se  on  ujiper  surface;  basal  joint  of  posterior  tarsi  as  long  as  three  suc- 
ceeding joints   together.     Lengfli,  6,  breadth,  2.3  mm. 

Hab. — Great  Lake    (Simsonl.     Three  specimens. 

P  T  E  r  (I  c  v  R  T  r  s.  gen.   nov. 

Head  bi-impressed:  impressions  not  di\ergeiit  posteriorly:  one  sa)>ra-orl)itaI 
seta  on  each  side;  eyes  distant  from  buccal  tissure  beneath.  L:ibrum  truncate, 
fi-setose.  Mandibles  with  a  seta  in  scrobe  of  outer  side.  Mentum  with  sinus 
moderately  deep,  oblicjiic  on  sides;  a  wide  prominent  median  tootii.  Ligula  cor- 
neous, narrow,  rounded  at  apex,  bisetose  in  middle  of  ajiex:  [laragiossae  narrow, 
free,  hardly  extending  beyond  ligula.  Palpi  stout;  labial  sliort;  penultimate 
joint  2-setose  in  front,  ai>ical  joint  comjirt-ssed,  rather  wide  behind  middle;  ni.ixil- 
lary  with  two  apical  joints  short,  wide  at  point  of  union:  penultimate  joint 
obconic,  narrow  at  base,  .setose;  apical  joint  angustate,  obtuse  at  apex.  Maxillae 
hooked,  sparsely  setose  on  inner  side,  outer  lobe  biarticulate.  Antennae  slender, 
not    long:  joints   short,  second    and  third  about  eiiual    (third   Iiardly    longer    than 


BY    THOMAS  0.    SLOANE.  '       141 

second);  joints  4 — 10  oval,  monilifonu,  e(|ual;  basal  joint  only  glabrous.  Pro- 
tliorax  broader  than  long;  two  short  impressions  on  each  side  of  base;  border 
narrow,  terminating  at  basal  angles;  two  marginal  setae  on  each  side,  posterior 
seta  at  basal  angle.  Elytra  convex;  base  not  bordered;  humeral  angles  marked; 
lateral  channel  terminating  at  humeral  angle;  margin  interrupted  posteriorly  and 
with  an  internal  plica;  eighth  interstice  carinate  at  apex,  an  apical  striole  along 
inner  side  of  carina.  Metepisterna  short;  metepiraera  narrow,  not  distinct. 
^'entral  segments  corneous,  tirst  narrowly  dividing  posterior  coxae;  segments 
3 — G  with  an  ambulatorial  seta  on  each  side  near  middle;  apical  segment  in  d 
unisetose,  in  ?  bisetose  on  each  side.  Tarsi  with  a  few  setae  on  upper  surface; 
<?. — Anterior  short;  two  basal  joints  triangular,  a  little  dilatate,  triangularly  pro- 
duced at  inner  apical  angle,  squamose  on  lower  side.'  Genotype,  P.  globosus 
Sloane. 

I  am  not  sure  whether  the  New  Zealand  species  whicli  are  now  referred  to 
Oopteriis  are  actually  congeneric  with  Ptcrnci/rtus,  but  they  are  certainly  very 
closely    allied. 

Table  of  Species. 

1  (6)     Eyes   convex,    prominent:    elytra   strongly    convex    on    disc. 

2  (5)     Prothorax    widest   before   middle;    sides   lightly   sinuate    near   base;    a 

prominent,  narrow,  submarginal  ridge  at  base. 

3  (4)     Size    major.     Elytra    decidedly    striate    on    disc.     Length,    .5--5.5   mm. 

striatiilus  SI. 

4  (3)     Size  miner-     Elytra  smooth.     Length,  3.3 — 4  mm.    ..     tasiuanicus  Cast. 

5  (21     Prothorax   widest  at  middle:   sides  obliquely  njaitrowed  to  base   (base 

wide);   submarginal  basal  ridge  short,  wide,  lightly  raissd.   Length, 
4.3-5  mm globosus  %\. 

6  (1)     Eyes  small,  round,  not  prominent:  elytra  not  strongly  convex  on  disc. 

(Colour  reddish,  elytra  strongly  striate  on  disc).     Length,  4  mm. 

rubescens  SI. 

PTEROCyRTUS    STBIATULUS,  Sp.    noV. 

Apterous,  oval,  robust,  convex;  head  wide,  front  with  tw^o  elongate,  rather 
irregular,  parallel  depressions;  prothorax  subquadrate,  wider  across  base  (1.4 
mm.)  than  apex  (1.1  mm.),  a  submarginal  carina  on  each  side  of  base;  elytra 
oval,  convex,  punctate-striate  on  disc,  striae  5 — 7  faint.  Black,  with  a  narrow 
reddish  margin  at  apex;  legs  and  antennae  pieeous  red. 

Head  large  (1.15  mm.  across  eyes);  frontal  impressions  parallel,  not  out- 
turned  posteriorly;  one  supra-orbital  seta  on  each  side  behind  the  convex  lateral 
space;  ej'es  convex,  rather  prominent.  Prothorax  broader  than  long  (1.3  ><  1.7 
mm.),  widest  before  middle,  strongly  angustate  to  apex,  obliquely  narrowed  to 
base;  sides  subsinuate  just  before  ba.se;  basal  angles  rectangiilar ;  basal  foveae 
deep,  bi-impressed ;  base  truncate,  slojting  slightly  forward  on  each  side;  sub- 
marginal  carina  narrow,  well  developed ;  lateral  channel  narrow  and  deep  towards 
base ;  a  seta  in  channel  at  basal  angle ;  border  narrow,  reflexed.  Elytra  much 
wider  than  prothorax  ( 3 .  .5  X  2.7  mm. ) .  strongly  rounded  on  sides ;  humei'al 
angles  prominent,  shortly  subdentiform ;  basal  border  obsolete,  but  closing  lateral 
channel  at  humeral  angles;  scutellar  striole  wanting;  four  inner  striae  well  marked 
im  disc,  weaker  on  apical  declivity,  eighth  strongly  impressed;  interstices  a  little 
convex  on  disc,  third  finely  3-puiictate  beside  third  stria,  eighth  carinate  tow  ards 
apex,  ninth  narrow,  depressed.     Length,  5 — 5.5,  breadth,  2.4 — 2.7  mm. 


142  THE    CARADIDAE   OF    TASIIAXIA, 

Hab. — Cradle   Mountain    (Carter  and  Lea).     Several   specimens. 
Note. — A  specimen  in  the  Simson  collection  from  the  Blue  Tier  is  4.8  mm.  iu 
length,  and  has  a  similar  prothorax,  but  the  eljtra  less  strongly  striate. 

PTEROcrRTUs    (DRiiiosTOiiA)   TA.siiANicu.s  Castslnau. 

Brown;  head,  prothorax  and  margin  of  elytra  reddish.  Length,  3.2,  breadth, 
1.5  mm. 

Ilab. — Blue  Tier   (Simson,  No.  3121).     Two  specimens. 

This  is  likely  Drimostoma  tasmanica  Cast.,  but  seems  smaller  than  the  type 
form.     Bates  referred  it  to  Oopterus. 

Three  specimens  were  in  the  Simson  Coll.  under  No.  3121,  which  are  a  little 
larger  and  black  in  colour.  Length,  3.6 — 4  mm.  I  believe  they  must  go  under 
P.  tasmanica. 

Pterocyrtus  globosds,  sp.  nov. 

Apterous,  subglobose;  head  large,  lightlj'  bi-impressed ;  prothorax  transverse, 
wider  across  base  (1.5  mm.)  than  apex  (1.1  mm.);  eljftra  subglobose,  subs'.,riate 
on  disc,  smooth  towards  sides.  Black;  ehira  with  narrow  lateral  and  wide  apical 
testaceous   margin ;  leg's  and    antennae  reddish. 

Head  wide,  convex  (1.2  mm.  across  eyes)  ;  frontal  impressions  parallel,  short; 
eyes  convex,  prominent.  Prothorax  convex,  broader  than  long  (1.3  ^  1.7  wm.), 
broadest  just  before  middle,  strongly  angnistate  to  apex,  gently  obliquely  narrow- 
ed to  base;  basal  angles  rectangular;  base  tnmcate;  two  short  basal  impressions 
on  each  side  (inner  foveiform,  outer  narrow) ;  a  short  rather  wide  submargiual 
carina  near  each  basal  angle;  posterior  marginal  seta  in  lateral  channel  at  basal 
angle.  Elj^ra  subrotundate  (3  X  2.6  mm.);  three  inner  striae  marked  towards 
base,  tii'st  entire,  eighth  strongly  impressed;  third  interstice  finely  3-punctate  along 
third  stria,  eighth  shortly  carinate  at  apes,  ninth  narrow,  placed  at  bottom  oi  the 
lateral  channel.     Length,  4.3 — 5,  breadth  2.3 — 2.6   mm. 

Hah. — Cradle  Mountain,  TVaratah  (Carter  and  Lea).  A  good  series  of  speci- 
mens. 

Differs  from  the  black  species  in  the  Simson  Coll.,  which  T  have  referred 
above  to  P.  taamanicus  Cast.,  by  form  shorter;  prothorax  shorter,  more  trans- 
verse, more  ampliate  at  widest  part,  wider  across  base,  latei-al  basal  impressions 
not  so  deep  and  more  distinctly  divided  into  two  foveae,  lateral  basal  carina 
shorter,  more  distant  from,  and  less  parallel  to  the  margin;  elytra  more  ampliate, 
inn(>r  striae  more  distinct,  sides  and  apex  with  a  much  more  distinct  ferruginous 
margin.  From  P.  striatulm  SI.,  it  differs  almost  by  the  same  characters  as  from 
P.  tas7)ia)iicus,  and  has  the  elytra  much  less  strongly  striate. 

Pterocyrtus  rubescens,  sp.  nov. 

Oval,  convex;  head  with  frontal  channels  not  divergent  posteriorly:  jjixi- 
thorax  sub(|iiad7-ate,  basal  angles  rectangular;  elytra  oval,  convex,  crenulate-striate 
on  <lisc,  hunu^ral  angles  marked,  scutellar  striole  wanting,  basal  border  obsoiete 
inwards  from  fifth  interstice.  Reddish,  sometimes  becoming  brownish  on  disc  of 
elytra. 

Head  convex  (0.7  mm.  across  eyes);  frontal  channels  wide,  parallel,  ex- 
liniling  backward  In  level  with  base  of  eyes,  not  out-turned  at  j)osterior  extremity; 
eyes  not  prominent,  small,  round,  lightly  convex;  a  narrow  lateral  sulcus  passing 
al)ove  eye  and    extending   behind   eyes  on  each   side  of   head.     Prothorax  broader 


BT    THOMAS  G.    SLOANE.  143 

than  Ion,?  (1  X  1.'2  mm),  broadest  before  middle,  wider  across  base  than  apex; 
sides  obIi(|uely  narrowed  to  base;  apex  truncate;  base  bisinuate  (lightly  rounded 
in  middle,  sti-aig-ht  on  each  side)  ;  basal  angles  marked,  rectangular,  with  summit 
blunted;  border  narrow;  lateral  basal  impressions  well  marked;  a  short  carina 
near  each  basal  angle  on  inner  side  of  marginal  channel.  Elytra  oval  (2.5  x 
1.75  mm.),  convex;  five  inner  striae  well  marked  on  disc,  becoming  faint  (ex- 
cept first)  on  apical  declivity,  lateral  striae  more  feeble,  eighth  near  ma-gin; 
eighth  interstice  strongly  carinate  at  apex,  wide  and  declivous  beneath  this  carina. 
£?. — Tarsi  with  two  basal  joints  dilatate,  triangular  at  inner  apical  angle.  Length, 
4,  breadth,  1.75  mm. 

Hub. — Waratah  (Carter  and   Lea). 

Distinguished  from  other  known  Tasmanian  species  by  eyes  smaller,  more 
depressed ;  form  less  roljust ;  elytra  much  less  convex  and  ampliate ;  colour  reddish 

brown,    &e. 

Tribe  Trechini. 

Genus  T  r  e  c  h  u  s. 

(Sporades  Fauvel  =  Trechodes  Blackburn.) 

Table  of  Australian  and  Tasmanian  species. 

1  (32)   Prothorax  with  base  truncate. 

2  (3)     Head  narrow,   hardly  constricted  behind  eyes;    eyes  small,   depressed. 

Black.      Length,  5  mm leai  SI. 

3  (2)     Head   decidedly   constricted   behind   eyes;    eyes   convex,    more   or   less 

prominent. 

4  (19)   Elytra  with  third  puncture  of  third  interstice  on  apical  dechvity. 

5  (14)   Form  depressed,  or  subdepressed.     Colour  black,  or  with  indeterminate 

pattern. 

6  (9)     Elytra  with  punctures  of  third  interstice  not  interrupting  the  interstice. 

(Apical  striole  continuous   with  fifth   stria.      Black.) 

7  (8)     Elytra    with    border    extending    inwards    on    base    to    first    interstice. 

Length,  5.7  mm '      fiacijicus   SI. 

S  (7)  Elytra  with  border  not  extending  inwards  on  base  past  third  interstice. 
Length,  6.5--7  mm robustus  SI. 

9  (6)  Elytra  with  anterior  puncture  of  third  interstice  interrupting  the  in- 
terstice, or  beside  fourth   stria. 

10  (11)   Elytra  with  interstices  depressed.      Piceous.      Length,   5 — 5.5  mm. 

dieiiienetisis    Bates. 

11  (10)    Elytra  with  interstices  convex.     Bicolorous  species. 

12  (13)   Prothorax    with    basal    angles    acute,    preceded    by    a    short   sinuosity; 

elytra  with  basal  border  reaching  first  interstice.     Length,  5.5  mm. 

victor iae  Blackb. 

13  (12)   Prothorax   with  basal  angles  subrectangular,   obtuse,   not   preceded  by 

a  sinuosity;   elytra  with  basal  border  not  reaching  inward   beyond 
fourth   interstice.      Length,   3.8   mm castelnatd  SI. 

14  (5)     Form   convex,   elytra   oviform.   Black,   elytra  with   a   transverse   fascia 

of  testaceous  maculae  on  posterior  half,  sometimes  also  a  testaceous 
post-humeral  lunule. 

15  (16)   Elytra  without  post-humeral  maculae.      Length,  4.3  mm 

s.ubornatellus  Blackb. 

16  (15)   Elytra  with  post-humeral  maculae. 

17  (18)   Elytra  strongly  striate  on  disc,  striae  2-4  strongly  impressed  on  apical 

declivity;    anterior   discal   puncture   near   third   stria.     Length,   3.3 
mm carter i  ^\. 


144  THE    CARABIDAE   OF    TASIIAXIA, 

IS  (17)  Elytra  substriate.  striae  2-4  obsolete  on  apical  declivity;  anterior  discal 
puncture   near   fourth   stria.      Length,   4.2   mm.    ..    ..  coxi  SI. 

19  (41  Elytra  with  third  puncture  of  third  interstice  distant  from  apsx,  not 
on  apical  declivity. 

20  (231   Elytra  with   striae  1 — "  deeply  impressed;   interstices  convex. 

21  (221  Colour  black,   legs  piceous.      Length,  4  mm aiistriniis  SI. 

22  (21)  Colour  piceous-testaceous.  femora  testaceous,  tibiae  light  brown. 
Length,  3.8  mm sitnsotii  'BXa.cV.h. 

23  (201  Elytra  striate  on  disc,  striae  becoming  obsolete  towards  sides;  inter- 
stices depressed. 

24  (27)  Elytra  piceous-black,  with  a  testaceous,  post-humeral  macula  on  each 
elytron . 

25  (26)  Prothorax  with  basal  angles  acute,  preceded  by  a  sinuosity.  Length, 
3.4  mm longinoiatus   SI. 

26  (25)  Prothorax  with  basal  angles  obtuse,  not  preceded  by  a  sinuosity. 
Length  3.7  mm brevinotalns  SI. 

Elytra  black,  without  post-humeral  maculae. 

Prothorax  with  sides  obliquely  narrowed  to  base;  basal  angles  marked 

and  with  border  prominent. 
Elytra  subdepressed,  sides  lightly  rounded.      Length,  3  mm, 

tiitens  Putzeys. 
(29)   Elytra  convex,  sides  strongly  rounded.     Length,  3.8  mm 

blackburni  SI. 
Prothorax  with  sides  evenly  rounded  to  base;  basal  angles  obtuse,  not 
marked  nor  with  border  prominent.     Length,  3  mm, 

tasiiianiae  Blackb. 
Prothorax  with  base  lobate. 

Prothorax    with    basal    angles    prominent,     triangular,    base    truncate 
.behind  them  on  each  side  of  lobe;   each  elytron  with  six  punctate 

striae.       Length,  4  mm baldieiisis   Blackb. 

3-1  (331  Prothorax  with  basal  angles  not  prominent  and  triangular,  base  sloping 
behind  them  on  each  side  of  lobe :  elytra  with  not  more  than  three 
simple  striae  on  each  side  of  suture. 

35  (36)   Elytra  with  three  inner  striae  marked.     Length,  4  mm.        inac/eayi  SI. 

36  (35)   Elytra  unistriate  on  each  side  of  suture. 

37  (38)   Head  wide;  prothorax  transverse,  depressed,  lateral  margin  and  channel 

wide,  elytra  depressed.     Length,  3.5 — i  mm.       bipartitiim  Macleay. 

3S     (37)   Head  narrow;   prothorax  globose,  lateral  margin  and  channel  narrow; 

elytra    convex,    a    deep    transverse-oblique    foveiform    impression    at 

.  position    of   anterior   discal   puncture.      Black,    nitid.      Length.   2.8 

mm gibbipennis  Blackb. 

I  sent  specimens  of  Benibidiiim  bipartilum  Mad.,  to  Dr.  R.  Jeannel,  of  Tou- 
louse, tile  ])resent  authority  on  the  tribe  Trechini,  and  liave  been  infonued  b.v 
liiiu  that  it  l)elongs  to  ."^pdrades  of  Fauvel  (.genotype,  ^'.  sejpiDictatus  Fauv..  New 
Caledonia),  a  genus  which  Dr.  Jeaunel  informed  me  has  also  been  found  in  tlie 
Oriental  Region,  and  in  East  Africa.  Tlie  genus  Trechodes,  founded  by  Hiaek- 
burn  on  his  Benibiditim  aecuhiides,  must  become  a  synonym  of  Sporades,  for  tlie 
only  difference  I  can  note  between  Bemhidium  hiparliliim  Macl..  and  B.  gernidides 
Blackl).,  is  one  of  colour  (B.  bipartitum,  el.vtra  piceous,  head  and  prothorax  red; 
B.  secaloides^  ujiper  surface  wholly  piceous).  Tlie  genus  Trechus  as  used  in  this 
paper  will  include  Spontdeti  as  a  subgenus. 

Blackburn  has  tahulate<l  the  Australian  and  Tasmanian  species  of  Trechus 
known  tn   liiiii   (Trans.  Roy.  Sor.   S.   Aust.,  lOfll.  p.   117).     My  idea  of  tlie  genus 


27 

(24) 

28 

(31) 

29 

(30) 

30 

(29) 

31 

(28 1 

32 

(1) 

33 

(341 

l!V    THOMAS   G.    SLOAXE.  1-15 

is   wider   than  his.   as  including   his  Trechodes,   and  the    table  given    above  is  on 
quite  dilferent  lines  from  his. 

.Maeleay  has  described  as  belonging  to  the  genus  Trechus,  four  species  whicli 
must  be  excluded  from  it.  These  are  T.  ater,  T.  atricepfi,  and  T.  concolor^  which 
are  Harpalids,  and  T.  rufilahris  which  is  a  species  of  Perigona. 

To  render  my  work  more  complete  I  have  included  in  the  table  the  species  of 
the  mainland,  and  have  described  a  new  species   (T.  castelnaui)   from  Victoria. 

Trechus  leai,  sp.  nov. 

Elongate-oval,  convex ;  liead  narrow,  eyes  small,  depressed ;  prothorax  broader 
than  long,  base  truncate,  basal  angles  obtuse;  elytra  oval,  fully  striate,  eighth 
interstice  narrow  and  raised  at  apex.  Black;  legs,  antennae,  and  mouth-parts 
reddish. 

Head  convex,  elongate  (0.9  mm.  across  eyes),  hardly  narrowed  behind  eyes; 
frontal  impressions  long,  parallel,  deep;  eyes  small,  round,  depressed;  post-ocular 
parts  of  orbits  very  little  swollen,  longer  than  eyes.  Prothorax  convex,  sub- 
quadrate  (1.3  X  1.5  mm.),  broadest  before  middle,  wider  across  base  than  apex; 
sides  lightly  rounded,  obliquely  narrowed  to  base,  border  wide,  reflexed,  prominent 
at  basal  angles;  lateral  Ijasal  impressions  short,  rather  narrow,  separated  from 
marginal  channel  by  a  raised  space.  Elytra  strongly  convex,  oval  (3.2  x  2.2 
mm. ) ;  interstices  convex  on  disc,  third  with  a  f oveif orm  puncture  about  anterior 
third,  and  another  puncture  b^ide  second  stria  on  posterior  declivity.  Length, 
5,   breadth,   2.2  mm. 

Hah. — Cradle  Mountain    (Carter  and  Lea).     Uni(iue. 

This  species  is  very  distinct  from  all  other  described  Tasmanian  species.  By 
the  form  of  its  head,  prothorax,  and  elytra  it  is  allied  to  T.  subornatellus  Blfickb.. 
but  can  be  distinguished  easily  from  that  species  l)v  laiger  size;  head  narrower 
with  less  prominent  eyes;  elytra  without  a  pattern,  etc. 

Trechus  pacificus,    sp.  nov. 

Elongate-oval,  subconvex;  head  ordinary,  eyes  prominent;  protliorax  short, 
wide  truncate  at  base,  basal  angles  obtuse  but  marked;  elytra  oval,  fully  striate, 
apical  striole  continuous  witli  fifth  stria,  basal  border  extending  inwards  to  scu- 
tellum.     Deep  black,  nitid ;   femora  pieeous ;  tibiae  and  tarsi  reddish. 

Head  wide  (1.2  mm.  across  eyes),  front  strongly  bi-impressed ;  lateral  and 
median  spaces  convex ;  eyes  prominent ;  post-ocular  parts  of  orbits  about  half 
the  length  of  eyes;  labrnm  emarginat«.  Prothorax  transverse  (1.2  x  l.g  mm), 
widest  at  middle,  a  little  wider  across  base  (1.45  mm.)  than  apex  (1.3  mm.)  ; 
apex  lightly  emarginate;  anterior  angles  rounded;  sides  evenly  rounded;  border 
reflexed,  prominent  at  basal  angles;  lateral  basal  impressions  shallow,  wide. 
Elytra  oval  (3.5  X  2.3  mm.),  strongly  striate;  striae  simple,  eighth  distinct; 
interstices  depressed  third  3-punctate  (two  anterior  punctures  foveiform,  beside 
tliird  stria,  third  on  apical  declivity  beside  second  stria)  ;  interstices  6 — 8  united  at 
apex  to  f onn  a  narrow  pointed  ridge.     Length,  5.7,  breadth,  2 . 3  mm . 

Hab. — Strahan    (Carter    and    Lea).     Unique. 

Allied  to  T.  robustus  SI.,  Init  smaller;  colour  dee|ier  black;  femora  pieeous; 
eyes  more  prominent;  post-ocular  part  of  orbits  smaller;  prothorax  proportion- 
ately wider,  evenly  rounded  on  sides,  widest  at  middle,  less  emarginate  on  base, 
basal  foveae  shallower;  elytra  less  convex,  more  decidedly  bordered  on  base,  bc:rder 
extending  inwards  past  fourth  interstice — (it  is  tlie  only  Tasmanian  species  siiow- 
ing  this  character). 


14G  THE    CARABIDAE   OP    TASMANIA, 

Trechus  robustus,  sp.  nov. 

Elongate-oval,  subeonvex;  head  large,  eyes  prominent;  prothoiax  short,  wide, 
truncate-emarginate  at  base,  basal  angles  obtuse;  elytra  oval,  fully  striate,  apical 
stride  eontinuous  with  fifth  stria.  Piceous,  elytra  rather  iridescent:  reflexed  and 
inflexed  margins  of  elytra,  leg's,  antennae,  and  mouth-parts  reddisli. 

Head  wide  (1.5  mm.  across  eyes);  vertex  convex;  front  bi-impressed ;  lateral 
and  median  spaces  convex ;  eyes  roundly  prominent ;  post-ocular  i)art  of  orbits 
large,  two-thirds  length  of  eyes;  labrum  emarginate.  Prothorax  transverse  (1.5 
X  2  mm.),  broadest  before  middle,  a  little  wider  across  base  (l.li  mm.)  than 
apex  (1.5  mm.);  apex  emarginate;  anterior  angles  obtuse;  sides  lightly  rounded; 
border  wide,  reflexed ;  lateral  basal  foveae  wide,  short,  strongly  impressed,  bor- 
dered along  posterior  margin.  Elytra  oval  (4  x  2.5  mm),  rather  convex;  striae 
simple,  third  3-punetate  (two  anterior  punctures  beside  third  stria,  third  beside 
second  stria  just  below  beginning  of  apical  declivity)  ;  interstices  (i — 8  united  at 
apex  to  form  a  narrow  ridge;  border  not  extending  on  base  inwards  past  fourth 
interstice.     Length,  6.5 — 7,    breadth,    2.5 — 2.7  mm. 

Hab. — Zeehan   (Coll.  Simson,  type);  Waratah  (Carter). 

Two  specimens  have  been  examined;  it  is  the  largest  Australian  species  of 
the  genus,  and  is  allied  to  T.  pacificus  SI.;  under  the  description  of  T.  pacificuft 
will  be  found  a  note  of  the  most  obvious  differences  between  these  two  species. 

Trechus  diemenensis   Bates. 
[=  T.  soUdior  Blackburn    (1901).] 

Hab. — Launceston,  St  Mary's  (Simson,  No.  3045);  Waratnh  (Carter  and 
Lea).     "In  moss  and  lichens,"  Lea. 

I  obtained  specimens  of  a  species  of  Trechus  m  a  damp  decaying  log  at 
MarysvLlle,  Victoria,  in  January;  it  agreed  with  the  description  of  T.  soiidior 
Blackb. ;  but  to  me,  it  seems  couspeeitic  with  T.  diemenensis ;  specimens  from 
Dorrigo,  N.S.W.,  are  larger,  more  shining,  and  smoother  towards  sides  of  elytra, 
but  do  not  seem  specifically  distinct. 

Trechus  castel.vaui,  sp.  nov. 

Uroad,  oval,  subdepressed ;  head  strongly  bisulcate;  prothorax  traiisv.-rse. 
wide  across  base;  elytra  fully  striate,  striae  deep,  disc  bifoveohUe  on  course  ol 
fourth  stria,  a  hooked  striole  on  each  side  of  apex,  marginal  furrow  and  bnrder 
not  extending  inwards  along  base  bej'ond  fourth  interstice.  Piceous;  ]>rotlH)ra\ 
brown  with  disc  piceous;  elytra  piceous,  a  lateral  space  and  apex  brownish  testa- 
ceous (the  lateral  testaceous  marking  is  a  stripe  occupying  that  i)art  of  se\enth 
interstice  ojiposite  the  interval  between  the  discal  foveae,  and  sending  off  a  nai-- 
row  transverse  branch  across  sixth  and  fifth  interstices  just  behind  the  level  of 
the  posterior  fovea);  femora  Ijrowiiish  testaceous;  tibiae,  tarsi,  and  antennae 
brown;  palpi  testaceous. 

Head  large  (0.8  across  eyes);  frontal  furrows  deep,  curving  outwards  an- 
teriorly and  posteriorly;  median  sjiace  convex;  eyes  round,  convex,  coarsely 
faceted,  orbits  small  behind  eyes.  Prothorax  transvei-se  (0.8  X  1.2  mm),  sub- 
depressed,  wider  iicro.ss  base  tiian  apex;  sides  lightly  rounded,  sliglitly  olili(,uely 
narrowed  to  base;  basal  angles  obtuse,  subrectangular;  base  slightly  obli(|uely  trun- 
cate on  each  side,  a  little  produced  backward  in  middle;  marginal  channel  wide; 
margin  wide,  explanate  and  reflexed  at  basal  angles;  basal  foveae  dee|),  divided  from 
margin  by  a  narrow  ridge;  median  line  deeply  impressed.  Elytra  widely  oval 
(2.2   X   1.8  mm.),   depressed   on    disc,  decidedly    declivous    on    siiles.    roundeil    at 


Ur    THOMAS   G.    SLOANE.  147 

sliuuldi'i-s;  striae  deep,  simple,  first  entire,  curving  round  apex  and  extending 
forward  opposite  jiosterior  extremity  of  sixth  stria  in  a  short  deeply  marked 
course  hooked  at  extremity  (about  apical  fifth);  interstices  rather  irregidar,  con- 
vex towards  sides,  second  wdde  towards  apex,  third  ended  considerably  before 
apex  by  the  union  of  third  and  fourth  striae,  interrupted  by  posterior  discal  fovea, 
fourth  interrupted  about  l)asal  fifth  by  anterior  fovea.  Length,  3.8.  breadth,  1.8 
nun . 

JJiib. — Victoria:  IVIarysville   and  Warburton   (Sloaue). 

One  specimen  obtained  by  me  at  Warburton,  and  another  at  Marysville  in 
January,  in  damp,  heavily  wooded  gullies. 

Allied  to  T.  victoriae  Blackb.,  but  differing  by  smaller  size;  darker  colour; 
head  less  swollen  at  eyes;  prothorax  less  rounded  on  sides,  not  sinuate  before 
basal  angles,  these  not  acute;  elytra  similar,  but  with  sculpture  of  the  apical  de- 
clivity different  {T.  victoriae  without  a  hooked  sublateral  striole),  marginal  border 
not  extending  along  ba-se  to  peduncle  as  in  T.  victoriae.  It  is  altogether  different 
from  T.  sim.ioni  Blackb.,  by  fades;  prothorax  more  transverse  (not  cordate),  more 
\^'idely  mai-gined;  elytra  more  depressed,  humeral  angles  more  marked  (in  T. 
gimsoni  quite  rounded  off),  anterior  discal  puncture  interrupting  fourth  inter- 
stice, etc. 

Trechus  carteri,  sn.  nov. 

Oval,  convex;  head  large,  eyes  convex,  orbits  small  behind  eyes;  prothorax 
subquadrate.  base  truncate,  basal  angles  rectangular  (a  little  blunted  at  summit)  ; 
elytra  oval,  disc  strongly  striate,  striae   fainter  towards  sides. 

Black:  leg's  (tibiae  darker  than  femora),  base  of  antennae,  and  mouth-i>arts 
testaceous;  prothorax  piceous,  reddish  towards  basal  angles;  elytra  with  yellowish 
markings  as  under: — (1)  on  apical  margin  and  first  interstice  on  apical  dechvity, 
(2)  a  post  humeral  oblique  macula  extending  from  fourth  stria  behind  anterior 
discal  puncture  to  margin,  and  reaching  base  at  shoulder,  (3)  a  small  discal  spot 
on  third  interstice  at  second  puncture,  (4)  an  irregular  arcuate  fascia  from 
fourth  stria  to  margin  above   apical  declivity. 

Prothorax  Ijroader  than  long  (0.7  x  0 .  85  mm. ) ,  widest  before  middle,  hardly 
wider  acro.ss  base  than  apex;  sides  lightly  rounded,  obliquely  narrowed  to  l)ase; 
lateral  border  not  wide  anteriorly,  strongly  reflexed  towards  base.  Elytra  widely 
oval  (2  X  1.5  mm.),  convex,  four  inner  striae  strongly  impressed,  eighth  obsolete 
on  sides,  third  interstice  3-punctate  (two  anterior  punctures  beside  third  stria, 
third  on  apical  declivity  beside  second  stria)  ;  eighth  interstice  carinate  at  apex, 
defined  on  inner  side  by  the  well  marked  apical  striole.  Length,  3.3,  Ijreadth, 
1.5  mm. 

Hab. — Cradle  Mountain  (Carter  and  Lea).  Many  specimens.  "In  moss  and 
lichens,"  Lea. 

Allied  to  T.  fiuhornatellus  Blackl).,  from  whicli  it  can  be  readily  differentiated 
by  size  smaller:  prothorax  more  strongly  narrowed  to  base,  border  narrower; 
elytra  witli  post-humeral  maculae.  From  T.  coxi  SI.,  which  it  resembles  in  pat- 
tern of  elytra,  it  can  be  distinguished  by  smaller  size;  eyes  smaller  and  less  con- 
vex; prothorax  much  less  transverse,  more  narrowed  to  base;  elytra  with  striae 
strongly   impressed    on  disc. 

Trechus    austrixus,  sp.  nov. 

Elongate-oval,  convex.  Head  rather  wide,  strongly  arcuately  bisulcate;  pro- 
thorax subcordate,  apex  and  base  of  about  equal  width,   basal  angles  almost   rec- 


148  THE    CARABIDAE   OF    TA.S3IAXIA. 

tangular;  elytra  oval,  strongly  striate,  seventh  and  eighth  striae  weak,  interstices 
1 — 5  convex,  third  interstice  3-punctate  beside  third  stria.  a]>ical  striole  in  line 
with  fifth  stria.     Black,  legs  and  antennae  reddish. 

Head  large  (0.8  mm.  across  eyes),  obliquely  narrowed  l)ehiiid  eyes  (continu- 
ously with  slope  of  eyes);  vertex  convex;  frontal  sulci  curved,  decidedly  diver- 
gent and  defining  orbits  posteriorly;  eyes  prominent;  mandibles  prominent; 
labrum  emarginate.  Prothorax  broader  than  long  (0.85  ^  1.15  mm.);  apex 
lightly  emarginate;  anterit)r  angles  obtuse,  a  little  prominent;  sides  lightly 
rounded;  base  truncate,  sloping  lightly  forward  at  each  side;  Ijasal  angles,  sulrect- 
angiilar.  summit  obtuse;  border  strongly  reflexed,  not  wide,  liardly  wider  towards 
base;  lateral  channel  curving  round  at  basal  angles  and  uniting  with  bottom  of 
basal  impressions,  these  deep;  median  line  strongly  impressed.  Elytra  oval  (2.5 
X  1.6  mm.),  convex;  humeral  angles  rounded  off,  not  marked;  interstices  (i — 8 
uniting  to  form  a  narrow  carina  at  apex,  this  carina  defined  on  inner  side  by  a 
strongly  impressed  apical  striole;  posterior  puncture  of  third  interstice  level  with 
anterior  end  of  apical  striole.     Leng'th.  4.  breadth,  l.fi  nun. 

Hah. — Great  Lake.     Unique  in  the  Simson  Coll. 

A  very  distinct  species,  not  nearly  allieil  to  any  other  yet  found  in  Tasnmnia. 
If  the  sides  of  the  prothorax  are  viewed  from  straight  above  they  ajijH'ar  to  be 
lightly  sinuate  before  the  basal  angles;  but.  if  looked  at  from  the  o|)posite  side 
across  the  segment,  this  sinuosity  (which  is  caused  by  a  sliyht  lioi-i/.ontal  curve 
of  the  border)  disappears. 

Trechu.s  siiisoxi  Blackburn    (1894). 

Hah. — Thonias    Plains   (Simson,  No.    3506). 

Trechcs  loxginotatus,  sp.  nov. 

Oval,  robust;  head  large,  arcuately  bisulcate;  prothorax  cordate,  narrower 
across  base  than  apex,  sides  sinuate  posteriorly,  basal  angles  acute;  elytra  widely 
oval,  weakly  striate,  third  interstice  3-punctate,  posterior  puncture  above  apical 
declivity.  Black;  elytra  with  a  humeral  lunule,  inflexed  margin,  apex,  a  .small 
ante-apical  spot,  and  apical  part  of  first  interstice  lurid-testaceous;  antennae  in- 
fuseate,  base  reddish ;  legs  testaceous,  tibiae  and  tarsi  brown. 

Head  finely  shagreened.  large  (0.7  mm.  across  eyes),  strongly  narrowed  be- 
hind eyes)  ;  vertex  convex;  frontal  sulci  curved,  strongly  divergent  posteriorly; 
eyes  convex,  rather  small,  a  little  prominent;  post-ocular  part  of  orbits  about  as 
long  as  eyes,  curving  continuously  with  eyes  to  head.  Protliorax  broader  tlian 
long  (0.7  X  1  mm.)  ;  apex  liglitly  emarginate;  anterior  angles  obtuse,  bordered, 
a  little  prominent;  sides  lightly  rounded  anteriorly,  shortly  sinuate  before  base; 
basal  angles  acute;  base  truncate;  border  narrow,  refie.ved,  very  little  wider  at 
Itasal  angles;  lateral  channel  curving  round  at  basal  angles  to  form  bottom  of 
basal  impressions,  these  well  marked;  median  line  well  marked  (m  disc.  Elytra 
oval  (2  X  1.4  inin.l  subconvex;  base  wide;  basal  curve  .short;  diseal  striae  lightly 
impressed,  first  only  entire;  striae  6 — 8  obsolescent;  recurved  apical  striole  nanow. 
Length,  3.4,  brcadlh,  1.4  mm. 

Tlab. — Ben    Lomond,    5(1(11)   fi'et    (Simson).     rnique. 

With  T.  hrerinniatus  SI.,  this  species  forms  a  distinct  group.  Cniiqiaring 
these  two  species  with  T.  monolobus  Putz.,  and  T.  scapularis  Putz.,  from  Cliili, 
species  which  also  have  post-humeral  maculae,  it  is  at  once  seen  that  there  is  iittle 
affinity  towards  the  riiilian  species.     The  Tasmanian   species   have   the   liciul   uar- 


BY  THOMAS  G.    SLOANE.  149 

riiwer.  moi-o  (lee])ly  bisuleate,  eyes  smaller  and  less  proininent ;  elytra  more  striate, 
third  pimeture  of  the  third  interstice  above  the  apical  declivity.  In  T.  longino- 
tatits  the  elytra  have,  on  each,  a  lurid  testaceous  humeral  lunule  extending-  from 
the  sixth  interstice  at  the  humeral  angle  and  curving  inwards  liehind  the  anlerior 
puncture  of  third  interstice  on  to  the  fourth  interstice,  and  there  is  au  indistinct 
macula  of  a  duller  colour  on  the  apical  declivity  beside  the  recurved  striole. 

TrECIIUS  BREVINOTATU.S,  sp.   nOV. 

Oval;  head  large,  arcuately  bisuleate;  prothorax  cordate,  hardly  narrower  at 
base  than  apex,  sides  roundly  narrowed  to  base,  basal  angles  obtuse;  elytra  oval, 
lightly  striate,  interstices  depressed,  third  3-punctate  beside  third  stria,  posterior 
puncture  above  apical  declivity.  Pieeous-black ;  vertex,  sides  and  base  of  pro- 
thorax  (narrowly),  border,  inflexed  margin,  and  tirst  intei-stiee  (especially  behind 
niiddlel  reddish;  apex  (rather  widely),  and  a  rotundate  humeral  spot  outside  fifth 
interstice  lurid-testaceous;  antennae  infuscate,  l)ase  reddish;  legs  testaceous;  tiliiae 
and  tarsi  brownish. 

Head  largi'  (0.7  across  eyes)  ;  vertex  convex;  frontal  sulci  deep,  lightly  diver- 
gent posteriorly;  post-ocular  part  of  orbits  small  (not  half  size  of  eye),  strongly 
raised  from  head;  eyes  large,  convex.  Prothorax  broader  than  long  (0.7  X 
1  mm.)  ;  apex  truncate;  angles  obtuse,  not  prominent;  sides  lightly  rounded;  base 
truncate;  angles  obtuse;  lateral  border  narrow  anteriorly,  a  little  wider  near  base ; 
lateral  channel  wide;  lateral  basal  impressions  well  marked;  median  line  distinct. 
Elvira  oval  (2.2  -^  1.5  ram.),  convex  (a  little  depressed  near  suture)  :  base  wide; 
striae  1 — 5  lightly  impressed,  6 — 8  obsolescent.     Length.  3.7,  breadth.  1.5  mm. 

Hah. — Great    Lake    (Simson).     Unique. 

Allied  to  T.  loucjinotatus  SI.,  from  which  it  differs  decidedly  b\'  eyes  larger 
and  more  convex,  orbits  less  developed  behind  eyes,  frontal  sulci  less  divergent 
jiosteriorly;  iirothoi'ax  with  anterior  angles  less  prominent,  sides  not  sinuate 
before  basal  angles,  these  obtuse;  elytra  witli  shoulders  more  rounded  off,  post- 
humeral  maculae  shorter,  not  reaching  backwards  as  far  as  anterior  puncture  of 
third  interstice.  The  apical  decli^'ity  is  of  a  rather  lurid-testaceous  colour,  bul  the 
dark  ground  coloui'  extends  well  down  the  declivity. 

Trechus  xitens  Putzeys. 

T  have  identified  T.  nitens  Putz.,  from  the  description.     Length,  3  mm. 

Hab. — Mount  Wellington  (Lea);  "in  roots  of  grass  at  summit.''  Mr.  Lea 
sent  it  to  me,  ticketed  T.  tasmaniae  Blackb.,  which  I  believe  to  be  an  allied,  bvtt 
distinct,  species. 

Trechus  blackburxi,  sn.  nov. 

Oval;  head  large;  prothorax  cordate;  elytra  rotundate-oval,  convex.  Black; 
inflexed  margins   of  elytra,  legs,  mouth-parts,   and  antennae   reddisli. 

Head  ordinary  (0.8  mm.  across  eyes).  Prothorax  cordate  (0.8  x  1  mm.), 
widest  before  middle;  base  and  apex  of  about  equal  width;  sides  rounded,  oblique- 
ly narrowed  to  base;  basal  angles  marked,  obtuse;  border  strongly  reflexed  at 
basal  angles;  lateral  basal  impressions  foveiform.  Elytra  widely  oval  (2.3  x  1.7 
mm.),  convex;  base  rotundate;  disc  striate;  striae  faint  towards  sides;  apical 
striole  in  line  with  fifth  stria  (but  not  quite  uniting  with  it)  ;  third  inteistiee 
3-punctate  beside  third  stria,  posterior  puncture  above  apical  declivity;  interstices 
f) — 8  uniting  to  form  a  ridge  at  apex.     Length,  3.8,  breadth,  1.7  mm. 

Hah. — Cradle  Mountain    (Carter  and  Lea). 


150  THE    r.VRAUIDAE   OF    TASMANIA, 

Allied  to  T.  nitens  Putz.,  which  it  closely  resembles,  but  laraor:  inothovax 
more  cordate;  elytra  more  convex,  wider,  more  strongly  rounded  on  sides,  )tiore 
anipliate  on  each  side  of  peduncle  in  a  more  evenly  rounded  curve.  The  wider, 
more  convex,  and  more  rotundate  elytra  are  Ihe  most  conspicuous  differences.  Tt 
differs  from  7.  Utsmaniae  Bhickb.  by  size  larger;  prothorax  less  njunded  on  sides, 
border  promincht   at  l)asal  angles,  etc. 

Trechus  tasmaxiae  Blackburn. 

This  species  (as  included  in  the  table  of  species  given  above)  ha-*  liecu  identi- 
fied from  the  description. 

Hab. — Cradle  Mnuntain    (Carter  and  Lea). 

Trechus  baldikxsis  Blackburn. 

T/ab.— Cleveland,    fJreat   Lake   (Sirason,   No.  3312). 

Trechus  macleayi,  sp.  nov. 

Subdepressed ;  head  wide,  arcuately  bisulcate,  eyes  prominent ;  protliorax  sub- 
quadrate,  base  sliortly  lobate,  posterior  angles  obtuse;  elytra  witli  tliree  inner 
striae  marked,  othei-s  (including  eighth)  obsolete,  recurved  apical  striole  distinct, 
third  interstice  3-pnnetate  (two  anterior  punctures  beside  third  stria,  third 
puncture  on  apical  declivity  beside  second  stria),  an  elongate  striole  at  base  of 
first  interstice,  liasal  border  reaching  scutelhun.  Piceous;  elytra  witli  latei'al 
channel,  infiexe<l  margin,  and  apex  ferruginous;  femora  hirid-testacemis;  til)iae 
and  tarsi  brown ;  antennae  infuscate,  basal  joint   reddish. 

Head  large  (0.8  across  eyes);  frontal  sulci  deep,  curved,  strongly  divergent 
posteriorly;  median  frontal  space  convex,  not  as  wide  as  lateral  spaces,  these 
convex;  sui)ra-(>rl)ital  ])nnctures  near  eye,  anterior  set  in  a  foveifonn  puncture; 
eyes  hemisiiherical,  large,  prominent;  postocular  part  of  orbits  laminate,  strongly 
and  aliruptly  raised  from  head.  Prothorax  liroiuler  than  long  (0.8  X  1  nmi. ),  a 
little  wider  across  basal  angles  than  apex;  anterior  angles  wide,  rounded;  apex 
truncate;  sides  lightly  rounded;  basal  curve  between  posterior  angles  wide,  bisinu- 
ate,  curving  forward  from  sinuosity  to  posterior  angle  on  each  side;  basal  lolw 
short,  wide,  rounded;  lateral  l)order  narrow,  rather  widely  vellexed  beside  basal 
angles;  anterioi-  transverse  imjjression  faint:  b;\se  (le<-livous  on  each  side  towards 
margin;  posterior  marginal  seta  on  edge  of  border  at  posterior  angle.  Elytrn 
subde|>ressed  (2.5  X  1.7  mm.),  laevigate  outside  discal  foveae,  wide  at  oase; 
humeral  angles  rounded;  sides  subparallel  (hardly  rounded);  two  inner  slriae 
well  marked,  second  not    reaching  apex,  third  faint.     Lo'ng'th,  4.  breadtli.  1.7  mm. 

TTrih. — Cleveland  ( Simson,  No.  3504).  T^'nique.  Orampian  Mountains,  ^'ic■- 
toria  (Mr.    Ejnar   Fischer). 

A  very  distinct  species  allied  to  T.  hiparlitum  ~S\m\..  from  wliicli  it  differ-  liy 
larger  size;  clarker  ciilcnir;  jirotliorax  with  jiosterior  angles  far  less  marked;  elytra 
with  more  than  nne  stria  cm  each  side  of  suture. 

TRKCirus   laiiUii'KN'N'is   P>hu-kburn   {Tm-hinhs   i'l.  Rlackb. ) 

Tlab. — Lake  District  (Blackburn),  Orampian  Moimtains,  Victoria.  Mr. 
Ejnar  Fischer  has  o-jvon  me  a  specimen  which  T  consider  to  be  7'.  nilihiiKiniis 
Blackb.     Tt  is  jdtogether  different    from   any   other  s|iec-ies  knovii   to  uie. 


BY   THOMAS   (1.    SLOAXE.  151 

Tribe  Bembidiini. 

Table  of  Tasmanian  genera. 

1  (41     Elytra   with   a  scutellar    striole    at    base    of    first   interstice;    anterior 

tibiae  not  oblique  at  apex. 

2  (3 1     Clvpeus  decidedly  obliquely  narrowed  to   apex Behbidium. 

3  (21     Clypeus    short,    wide,    hardly    narrowed    to    apex Cillenum. 

■i     (1)     Elytra  without  a  scutellar  striole:   anterior  tibiae  oblique  above   apex 

externally Tachys. 

Genus  B  e  m  b  i  d  i  u  ii. 

Bembidium  dubium  Blaekburn. 

)/a6.— Cleveland    (Simson,   No.   3505). 

Genus  C  i  l  l  e  x  u  m. 

CiLLEXuir  MA.STERSI  Sloane. 

I  cannot  differentiate  specimens  in  the  Simson  collection  from  specimens  from 
Sydney.     Ilfracombe   ("on  beach,"  Simson). 

Genus  T  a  c  h  t  s. 
Table  of  Tasmanian  .species. 

1  (4)     Elytra  with  a  submarginal  stria  on  middle  of  sides  (indicated  by  some 

punctures  in  Tasmanian  species  1. 

2  (3)     Elytra  6-striat6:  prothorax  strongly  rounded  on  sides.     Length.  2—2.2 

mm sni/is/ria/iis  Blackb- 

3  (2)     Elytra  5-striate:  prothorax  lightly  rounded  on  sides.     Length,  2.2  mm. 

tlindersi   Blackb. 

4  (1)     Elytra  with  submarginal  stria  obsolete  on  sides. 

5  (6)     Form  short,  oval,  very  convex;  prothorax  not  perceptibly  narrowed  to 

base;  elytra  lae-vigat?,  unistriate  on  each  side  of  suture,  unipunctate 
on  disc,  apical  striole  well  developed.     Length,  2.2  mm. 

hifoveatui    Ma:l. 

6  (51     Depressed;    prothorax   evidently   narrowed   to  base;    elytra  bipunctate 

on  disc,  apical  striole  obsolete.     Length.  1.5-1.7  mm. 
,  t  apt  lis   Blackb. 

All  these  species  also  occur  on  the  mainland. 

Tachts    semisthiatus  Blackburn. 

llah. — Stralian  (Simson),  Latrobe,  Jordan  River,  Hobart,  Kina   Is.  (Lea). 

Tachy.s  flixderst  Blackburn. 

//('/). — Jordan  River  (Leal. 

Tachys  bifoveatus   Alacleay. 

Hah. — West  Tauiar  (Simson). 

Tachys  captus  Blackburn. 

Allied  to  T.  (Pohjderis)  brevicornis  Cbaud.,  of  the  northern  hemisphere.  I 
have  not  seen  it  from  Tasmania,  but  Mr.  Lea  has  recorded  it  in  his  "List"  of 
1902. 


152  THE    CAHADIDAK    OF   TASJIANIA. 

Tribe   Pterostichini. 
Table  of  Tasmanian  genera. 

1  (S)     Mandibles   with    a   seta   in   scrobe   of   outer   side.        (Xomiini,    Sloane, 

olim.) 

2  (3)     Elytra  with  eighth  interstice  not  carinate  at  apex.    .  . Mectclothorax. 

3  (2)     Elytra  with  eighth  interstice  carinate  near  apex. 

4  (5)     Intercoxal   part   of   mesosternum    narrow    and    excised    at    apex;    met- 

episterna  elongate Amblytelus. 

5  (4)     Intercoxal   part   of   mosostsrnum   wide   and   emarginate   at   apex;    met- 

episterna  short,   quadrate. 

6  (7,1     Antennae   with    third   joint   bearing   a   few   fine   setules    besides    usual 

apical  setae Ptkroqmus. 

7  (6)     Antennae  with  third  joint  glabrous    (except  usual  apical  setaei    ..    .. 

Pher-sita. 
S     (1)     Mandibles    without    a    seta    in    scrobe    of    outer    side.       (Pterostichini, 

sensii  siricto.) 
9     (24)   Antennae  with   three  basal  joints  glabrous. 

10  (13)   Ventral    segments    4 — 6     transversely     sulcate.        (Scutellar     striole    of 

elytra,  if  present,  at  base  of  second  interstice.     Apterous.  I 

11  (12)   Head   with   frontal   sulci   obsolete.      (Elytra    with    three   punctures   on 

third  interstice — all  beside  third  stria.  I Simodontus. 

12  (11)   Head  with  strongly  impressed  divergent  frontal  sulci   ..    PRosopoaMUS. 

13  (lU)   \'entral  segments  without  transverse  sulci. 

14  (21)   Elytra  w^ith  scutellar  striole  at  base  of  first  interstice. 

1.")     (IS)   Apterous.      (Elytra    with    third    interstice    punctate:    met-episterna    in 
Tasmanian   species   short.) 

16  (17 1   Prothorax  depressed  across  base,  basal  impressions  wide,  extending  to 

lateral  border Rhabdotus. 

17  (16 1   Prothorax  with  basal  impressions  narrow,  distant  from  lateral  border. 

NoTOSOMDS. 

18  (15)   Winged.      (Met-episterna  elongate.) 

19  (20)   Elytra  with  third  interstice  3-punctate   (Two  anterior  punctures  beside 

second  stria,  posterior  puncture  beside  third  stria  i    . .  Pskcdoceneus. 

20  (191   Elytra  with   third  interstice  impunctate Chlaenioidius. 

21  (14)   Elytra  without  scutellar  striole.     Winged. 

22  (23)   Elytra    with    third    interstice    unipunctate    near    middle,    pro-episterna 

laevigate Loxandrus. 

23  (22)   Elytra  with   third   interstice   impunctate:    pro-episterna  striolate 

Rhytisternus. 

24  (9)     Antennae  with  four  basal  joints  glabrous.     (Length  exceeding  26  mm.) 

Catabromus. 

I  am  now  unable  to  sup]inrt  the  separation  of  the  aeiicra  with  a  seta  in  tlie 
outer  scrohe  of  the  mandibles  from  the  great  tribe  Pterostichini:  in  the  tribe 
Mig-adopini  there  is  the  genn.s  Tthi/tidnfjnathus  with  a  mandibular  seta,  though 
usually  it  is  wanting  in  the  tribe,  and  many  Broscides  of  Australia,  Tasmania, 
and  New  Zealand  are  without  the  ordinary  mandibular  seta  of  the  tribe  Bro.;eini. 

Loxantlrus  ijaniitimts  C'astelnau  was  deserihed  from  Tasmania,  but  I  have 
not  seen   it. 


BY    THOMAS   G.    SLOANE.  153 

Genus  M  e  c  y  c  l  o  t  ii  o  r  a  x. 

Mecyclothorax  ambiguus  Erichson. 

J/rt(;.— Launceston,  AVest  Tamar,  Evandale,  Great  Lake  (Simson.  Nos.  2493, 
2(U2.  3473);  King  Is.  (Lea);  Cradle  Mountain,  Waratah  (Carter  and  Lea). 
Occurs  also  in  Australia   (widely  spread),  and   Xew  Zealand. 

Genus  A  m  b  l  y  t  e  l  u  .s. 

Table  of  Tasmanian  species. 

1  (81     Upper  surface  unicolorous. 

2  ("I     Prothorax  with  basal  angles  obtuse,  anterior  marginal  seta  present. 

.3     (6)     Prothorax   with   margin   widely   reflexed   and   bearing   a   seta   at   basal 
angles . 

4  (5)     Elytra  with  third,  fifth,  and  seventh  interstices  seriate-punctate;   striae 

strongly  crenulate.      Length,   7.5   mm siria/iis  SI. 

5  (4)     Elytra  with  third  and  fifth  interstices  punctate,   seventh   impunctate; 

striae  finely  crenulate.     Length.  8  mm sinisoiii  S\. 

6  (3)     Prothorax   with  margin   narrow   and   without   a  seta   at   basal  angles. 

(Elytra     with     striae    faint,    or    obsolete;     third      interstice      only 
punctate).     Length  7-8  mm iiiger  S\. 

7  (2 1     Prothorax  with  basal  angles  marked,  anterior  marginal  seta  wanting. 

(Third  interstice  of  elytra  impunctate.)     Length,  4.5 — 5.5  mm. 

placidus  Lea. 

S     (1)     Elytra  black  with  two  discoidal  vittae  and  lateral  margins  testaceous. 

(Third,   fifth   and   seventh   interstices   punctate,   sutural   black   area 

reaching  base. I     Length,  8 — 11   mm cur/us   Fabr. 

My  conception  of  the  genus  Amhhjtelus  includes  Di/ntricliothurar  of  Black- 
burn, which  I  believe  to  have  been  differentiated  generically  from  Amblytehis  on 
insuffieient  grounds.  I  do  not  know  Dyscolus  australls  Erichs.,  and  /).  dilotatus 
Erichs.,  in  nature. 

AmULYTELU.S    STRI.\TUy,    Sp.   UOV. 

Oval;  prothorax  a  little  wider  at  base  (1.5  mm.)  than  apex  (1.35  mm.), 
rounded  on  sides,  basal  angles  obtuse,  two  marginal  setae  on  each  side;  elytra 
oval,  wide,  strongly  punetate-striate,  interstices  3,  5,  and  7  bearing  a  series  of 
setiferous  punctures.  Black ;  femora  reddish  piceous ;  tibiae,  tarsi ,  antennae,  and 
palpi    ferruginous. 

Head  large  (1.5  mm.  across  eyes),  obliquely  narrowed  behind  eyes,  convex 
posteriorly;  occiput  a  little  swollen  behind  eyes  (beside  posterior  supra-orbital 
seta)  ;  front  depressed;  eyes  large,  protuberant.  Prothorax  l)roader  than  long  (1.5 
X  2.1  mm.),  widest  before  middle,  strongly  roundly  narrowed  to  apex,  narrowed 
to  base  in  a  light  curve;  apex  very  lightly  emarginate,  bordered;  anterior  angles 
widely  obtuse,  not  near  neck;  base  arcuate,  lightly  sinuate  on  each  side,  bordered; 
lateral  border  wide,  bearing  a  few  fine  setules  near  anterior  angles  besides  two 
usual  marginal  setae.  Elytra  oval  (5  x  3.5  mm.),  convex;  apical  curve  wide, 
sinuate  at  extremity  of  ninth  interstice ;  border  wide,  reflexed ;  striae  strongly 
crenulate.  Tarsi  with  fourth  joint  of  anterior  wide,  deeply  excised;  of  inter- 
mediate deeply  excised,  lobes  short,  outer  more  prominent  than  inner;  of  posterior 
small,  emarginate  (not  bilol)ed),  outer  side  a  little  more  prominent  than  inner. 
Length,  7.5,  breadth,   3 — 3.5  mm. 

Hah. — Great  Lake    ( Simson  1.     Three    specimens. 


154  THE    CAKABIDAE  OF    TASMANIA, 

In  size  and  shape  resembling  A.  simsoni  SI.,  but  distinct  by  colour  black; 
bead  larger;  elytra  more  strongly  striate,  the  striae  more  coareely  erenulate, 
seventii  interstice  well  defined  and  seriate-punctate.  It  may  be  allied  to  Dy<coliis 
australis  Erichs.,  but  does  not  agree  with  tlie  description  of  that  species  by  colour; 
lonn  of  prothorax  (also  basal  angles  and  lateral  basal  impressions)  ;  elytra  evi- 
dently far  more  strongly  striate,  etc.;  in  all  the  characters  just  mentioned  it 
differs  even  more  from  the  description  "f  O.  iJilatatus  Erichs. 

Amblytelu.s  simsoxi,  sp.  no\-. 

Oval;  inothorax  cordate,  rounded  on  sides;  basal  angles  obtuse,  two  maigmal 
setae  on  each  side;  elytra  oval,  wide,  liglitly  punctate-striate  (sixth  and  seventii 
striae  faint  or  obsolete),  third  interstice  with  three  punctures,  fifth  interstice  with 
one  or  two  fine  punctures  on  disc,  seventh  interstice  impunctate.  Brown  (iiead 
and  prothorax  piceous  brown,  elytra  reddish  brown)  ;  legs,  antennae,  palpi,  and 
abdomen  fenniginous  (tibiae  darker  than  femora)  ;  prosternum  and  mesostcnum 
reddish    piceous. 

Head  large  (1.7  mm.  across  eyes),  lightly  angustate  behind  eyes;  vertex  con- 
vex; front  depressed;  eyes  prominent.  Prothorax  broader  than  long  (1.7  X  2.1 
mm.);  apex  (1.5  mm.)  a  very  little  narrower  than  base;  base  arcuate,  very 
lightly  sinuate  on  each  side ;  lateral  border  wide,  cut  obliquely  behind  basal  angles ; 
lateral  basal  impressions  well  developed,  short,  wide;  median  line  lightly  im- 
pressed. Elytra  oval  (5.4  X  3.5  mm.),  convex;  five  inner  striae  well  marked, 
fine,  erenulate;  interetices  depressed.  Met-episterna  (without  epimera)  about  a.s 
broad  as  long.  Tarsi  with  fourtli  joint  of  anterior  wide,  deeply  excised;  of  inter- 
mediate bilobed  (outer  lobe  a  little  longer  than  inner);  of  posterior  wide,  imar- 
ginate,  outer  side  produced  into  a  short  lobe.     Leng-tli,  8,  breadth,  3.5 — 3.8  mm. 

Hob. — Tasmania  (Simson,  No.  3314).  Three  specimens.  A  fourth  speci- 
men is  darker  in  colour,  proportionately  a  little  wider,  and  more  decidedly  striate, 
but  seems  conspecific.     Ben  Lomond,  4000  feet  (Simson). 

In  tlie  Simson  collection  this  species  was  named  Di/scohis  dilatatus  Erichson, 
but  it  does  not  at  all  suit  the  description  of  that  siiecies;  attention  may  be  drawn 
to  the  following  differences  from  Eriehson's  description  of  D.  dilatatus : — Colour 
not  "subaneomicans" ;  antennae  and  prosternuiu  not  testaceous;  basal  angles  of 
prothorax  not  "deiiticiili  iiistar  subprominulis" ;  elytra  not  "subtiUissime  obsole- 
tpifue  striatic."  Erichson  makes  no  mention  of  jiunctures  on  the  third  and  fiftli 
interstices  in  the  descri))tion  of  I),  dilatatus,  and  in  all  his  descriptions  of  otiier 
Tasmanian  Carabs  these  punctures  are  carefully  recorded,  when  present.  It  may 
be  near  D.  australis  Erichs.,  l)ut  I  cannot  think  it  agrees  with  that  si>ecies  in 
colour — "metallico-nilidus" ;  it  has  not  the  basal  angles  of  prothorax  ^'promiiiulif: 
aubrectis" ;  and  the  elytra  are  t(io  decidedly  striate  to  be  described  as  "siibl'litrr 
nbsolete<iue  purictiito-striatis." 

AilliLVTKLrs    NIGER,    Sp.    nOV. 

A])terous,  oval;  jirothorax  of  about  equal  width  at  base  and  apex,  rounded  on 
sides,  basal  angles  not  marked,  anterior  marginal  seta  present,  basal  seta  wanting; 
elj-tra  oval,  wide,  feebly  striate,  striae  obsolete  towards  sides,  eighth  entire. 
Black;  tibiae  reddish  piceous;  tarsi  and  antennae  reddisli. 

Head  convex  (1.5  across  eyes),  depressed  between  eyes,  liglitly  and  obli(|uely  nar- 
rowed behind  eyes;  frontal  impressions  feeble;  eyes  jirotuberant.  Prothorax  broader 
tiian  long  (1.5  X  2  mm.),  widest  before  middle,  subdepressed ;  apex  lightly  eniaryin- 


BY    THOMAS  G.    SLOANE.  155 

ate.  finely  bordered ;  anterior  angles  obtuse,  not  near  neck;  lateral  border  narrow; 
lateral  basal  impressions  wide,  sliallow.  Elytra  oval  (4.4  x  3.5  mm.) ,  eonve.x ;  apical 
"urve  wide,  a  little  sinuate  at  extremity  of  ninth  interstice;  sides  a  little  narrowed 
to  base;  bolder  rather  wide,  reflexed;  interstices  depressed,  third  with  two  or  three 
fine  punctures  on  disc.  Met-episterna  (without  epimera)  about  as  long  as  broad. 
Leno-th.  7—8.  breadth,  2.0— .3.5  mm. 

//(//a— -Mount  Wellingion  ("Summit,"  Lea).  Ten  specimens  have  been  ex- 
amined.    Mr.  Lea  informed  me  it  was  found  on  trunks  of  trees. 

A  distinct  species  differino;  from  all  others  described  by  the  followinj;-  charac- 
ters in  conjunction :  colour  black ;  jirothorax  rounded  on  sides,  narrowly  bordered ; 
posterior  margiiial  seta  wanting;  in  no  other  species  of  Amblfitelus  known  to  me 
does  tins  occur.  Compared  with  .1.  cnrttix  Fabr..  the  fourth  .ioint  of  the  tarsi  is 
less  strongly   bilobed. 

AiiBLYTELUs   (Dystrichothorax)  PLAt'iors   Lea   (1008). 

It  is  a  distingiiisliing  character  of  this  species  to  have  the  legs  testaceous  with 
the  middle  part  of  the  femora  black;  the  lobes  of  the  fourth  joint  of  the  tarsi  are 
equal.     Length.   4.5 — 5.5  mm. 

Hub. — Cradle  Mountain,  Waratah  (C'arter  and  Lea);  King  Is.  ( Lea)  A 
large  series  of  specimens  was  obtained  by  Messi-s.  Carter  and  Lea.  some  of  whicli 
Mr.  Lea  recorded   as  found  "on  King  William  Pine." 

AiiBLYTELUs   CL'RTUS  Fabricius. 

A  specimen  (?)  from  Launceston,  0.5  ram.  in  h-ng-tli,  with  the  sutural  black 
stripe  of  the  elytra  reaching  the  base.  I  cannot  differentiate  from  the  tyiiical  form 
of  the  mainland.  Six  other  specimens  (c?)  are  in  the  Simson  collection,  which, 
though  smaller  (6  7 — 8.5  mm.),  must  be  taken  to  be  eonspecitic  with  the  larger 
specimen,  from  which  they  only  differ  by  their  smaller  size;  it  would  seem  that 
Tasmanian  specimens  of  A.  eurtiis  are  of  smaller  average  size  than  those  of  the 
mainland. 

Hub. — Launceston,  Brighton   (Sir)ison,  No.   1368);  Exeter    (Carter). 

Var.  vittata  Motschulsky. — A  numerous  series  of  si)ecimens  (16.  c?,  V.)  in 
the  Simson  collection  seem  to  represent  A.  vittatus  Motsch. ;  these  specimens  only 
differ  from  .1.  curtus  Fabr.,  by  having  the  eighth  interstice  black,  as  well  as  the 
sixth  and  seventh,  leaving  only  a  narrow  testaceous  margin — the  ninth  interstice. 
It  is  doubtful  whether  this  slight  colour  variety  is  deserving  of  a  varietal  name. 
Length.  8.5 — 11  mm. 

Hub. — Launceston.  Bi'igliton.  St.  Patrick's  Hiver.  Turner'-^  Marsli.  .\voca.  In- 
terlaken   (Simson  No.  1368). 

P  T  E  K  0  f i  M  u  .s^  gen.   niiv. 

Head  convex^  laevigate;  frout<il  imjtressions  strongly  impressed,  short,  obli'Uiely 
divergent  backwards ;  two  supraorbital  setae  on  each  side ;  a  longitudinal  ))or<ler  above 
base  of  antennae;  eyes  convex,  strongly  inclosed  at  base,  distant  from  buccal 
fissure  beneath.  Labrum  truncate,  6-setose.  Clypeus  with  a  setiger(5us  foveiform 
puncture  on  each  side.  Mandibles  stout,  hooked,  a  seta  in  outer  serobe.  Maxillae 
short;  inner  lobe  hooked,  not  densely  spinulose  on  inner  side;  outer  lobe  witii  two 
joints,  apical  joint  stout.  Maxillary  paljii  rather  long;  penultimate  joint  short, 
obconic,  very  sparsely  setulose:  apical  joint  stout,  fusiform,  sjiarsely  setulose. 
Mentum  with  a  short  triangular  median  tooth.     Lignla  small,   c<irneous.  bisetose. 


150  THE    CARABIDjVE  OF    TASMANIA, 

Labial  palpi  short;  penultimate  joint  bisetose;  apical  joint  short,  subt'usifonn, 
rather  ampliate  at  basal  third,  obtuse  at*  apex,  sparsely  setulose.  Antennae  slen- 
der, compressed,  not  long;  two  basal  joints  glabrous;  thii-d  joint  one-half  longer 
than  second,  longer  than  fourth,  sparsely  setulose.  Prothorax  lightly  trans\erse, 
rounded  on  sides,  subsinuate  just  before  base;  basal  angles  rectan.gular ;  posterior 
marginal  seta  wanting;  a  few  tine  punctures  on  each  side  of  base.  Elytra  convex, 
fully  striate;  third  interstice  3-punctate  beside  third  stria;  eighth  interstice  ^ub- 
carinate  towards  apex;  base  bordered;  margin  interrupted  by  an  internal  plica 
towards  apex.  Met-episterna  short,  quadrate  (including  epinun-a  hardly  longer 
than  broad).  Ventral  segments  without  a  transverse  sulcus;  ai^cal  segment  bise- 
tose on  each  side  in  both  sexes  (in  ?  also  with  two  other  anteapieal  setae).  An- 
terior tarsi  in  c?  with  three  basal  joints  lightly  dilatate  and  biseriately  squamulose 
beneath. 

Though  the  third  joint  of  the  antennae  is  spar.?ely  setulose,  and  the  penulti- 
mate joint  of  the  maxillar>-  {'alpi  has  some  minute  setules,  this  genus  cannot  be 
placed  in  the  tribe  Merizoduii  on  account  of  the  anterior  tarsi  in  c?  having  tliree 
joints  dilatate  and  biseriately  squamulose  beneath.  I  believe  its  jiosition  is  beside 
Phersita. 

Pterogmus  rufipes,  sp.  nov. 

Oval,  convex;  head  strongly  bi-impressed ;  prothorax  sub(iuadratc,  punctulate 
and  without  a  submarginal  carina  near  basal  angles,  posterior  marginal  seta 
wanting:  elytra  strongly  striate,  bordered  on  base,  third  interstice  3-punctate  be- 
side third  stria.     Black ;  margin  of  elytra,  legs,  and  antennae  reddish. 

Head  wide  (1.2  mm.)  across  eyes;  vertex  laevigate:  frontal  impressions  deep, 
strongly  divergent,  attaining  margin  at  middle  of  eyes,  connected  in  front  by  a 
strong  transverse  line;  spaces  between  bolder  and  frontal  sulci  convex;  anterior 
supra-orbital  seta  situated  at  posterior  extremity  of  frontal  sulci.  Prothorax 
laevigate,  broader  than  long  (1.4  x  2  mm.),  widest  just  before  middle,  a  little 
wider  across  liase  (1.5  mm)  than  apex  (1.3  mm.);  sides  roundeil.  shortly  sinuate 
before  ba.se:  border  narrow,  continued  strongly  along  base  on  each  side;  ba.sal 
angles  a  little  prominent,  summit  obtuse,  inner  angle  well  marked;  median  line 
distinct;  lateral  basal  impressions  narrow,  well  marked.  Elytra  oval  (3.()  ><  2.6 
mm.),  convex;  humeral  angles  obtuse  but  marked  (basal  border  a  little  r.-iis^'d 
above  lateral  border  at  junction)  ;  interstices  a  little  convex,  more  strongly  so  on 
apical  declivity;  eiglitli  inteistice  wide,  strongly  raised  above  ninth  iind  with  a 
narrow  edge  near  apex  ,  ninth  narrow.  seriate-|>unctate.  Length.  5.. 5 — 6.5, 
breadth,  2.5 — 2.G  mm 

Hah.— Ben  Lomond,  4000  feet  (Simson  Xo.  3124):  Waiatali  (Carter  and 
Lea) .      A  good  series  of  specimens  was  in  the  Simson  Coll. 

Resembles  a  species  of  Abacetus,  or  a  rather  convex  species  of  Simodiintits 
in  general  aiijicai'ance.  No  marginal  seta  is  present  near  the  b.asal  angles  in  any 
of  the  eight  s]>ccimens  before  mc. 

Geiuis    P  11  K  u  s  1  T  A. 

Believing  thai  the  validity  of  Castelnau's  genus  Teraphis  cannot  be  main- 
tained under  tlie  laws  ol  nomenclature,  owing  to  the  previous  use  of  Therapis 
(1810),  and  Tcrnplni^  (1804).  I  adhere  to  the  change  of  name  I  proposed  in 
1903.  T  now  prefer  to  consider  Drimostoma  mnntanum  Cast.,  as  the  type  of  a 
section  in  the  genus  Phemila  rather  than  to  fornnilate  a  new  genus  for  its  recep- 


BY    THOMAS  G.    SLOANE.  157 

tion;  it  does  not  belong  to  the  genus  Drimostoma.  Drimostoma  helmsi  SI.,  also 
represents  a  section  of  the  genus  Phersita;  but  if  we  examine  many  other  genera 
we  will  find  variations  among-  the  species  as  great  as  those  between  Teraphis  mel- 
boiinieiiais  Cast.,  Drimostoma  montanum  Cast.,  and  Z>.  helmsi  SI. 

Table  of  Australian  and  Tasmanian  species. 

1  (6)     Antennae    increasing    in    thickness    to    apex,    joints    5 — 11    moniliform, 

compressed;  elytra  with  humeral  angles  dentate;  met-episterna 
(with  epimera)   longer  than  broad   (epimera  long). 

2  (5)     Prothorax  with  outer  basal  impression  strongly  impressed,  third  inter- 

stice of  elytra  bipunctate  beside  third  stria. 

3  (4)     Prothorax  with  sides  obhquely  subsinuate   to  base,   basal   angles  rect- 

angular, not  denticulate inelbourrtensis  Cast, 

4  (3)     Prothorax    with    sides    arcuate    posteriorly,    very    shortly    sinuate   just 

before  base,  basal  angles  denticulate tasinanica  SI. 

5  (2)     Prothorax  with  outer  basal  impressions  obsolescent;   elytra  with  third 

interstice   impunctate helmsi   SI. 

6  (1)     Antennae  setaceous,  slender,  joints  5 — 11  oblong;   elytra  with  humeral 

angles  marked  but  not  dentate;  met-episterna  (with  epimera) 
quadrate  (epimera  very  short).  (Forni  very  convex,  elytra  with 
third   interstice  impunctate.) 

7  (10)   Prothorax    with   outer   basal   impression    shallow    and    separated   from 

inner  impression. 
S     (9)     Form  larger,  less  convex;  elytra  less  ampliate  on  sides. .  .Length,  7.5 — 

8.5  mm montana   Cast. 

9     (S)     Form  smaller,  more  convex;   elytra  more  ampliate  on  sides.     Length, 

5.6 — 6.3  mm aus/nilis  Cast. 

10     (7)     Prothorax  with  outer  basal  impression  deep,  not  separated  from  inner 

impression.     Length,  6.7  mm coiivexa    SI. 

Note. — Teraphis  melbournensis  Cast.  {=  T.  argutoroides  Cast.,  from  speci- 
mens in  Howitt  Coll.).  Drimostoma  montanum  Cast.  (^=  D.  alpestris  Cast.)  1 
feel  sure  the  synonymy  given  here  is  correct. 

Phersita  ta.smanica,  sp.  uov. 

Oblong-oval;  prothorax  wide,  wider  at  base  (1.7  mm.)  than  apex  (1.5  mm.)  ; 
elytra  ovate,  strongly  crenulate-striate,  eighth  interstice  carinate  towards  apex, 
first  interstice  with  a  well  marked  short  striole  at  base,  third  interstice  bipunctate 
beside  third  stria,  basal  border  acutely  denticulate  at  shoulders.  Ferruginous- 
brown. 

Front  stmngly  bi-impressed,  impressions  divergent  backwards;  eyes  (with 
orbits)  reniform;  postocular  part  of  orbits  rather  more  than  half  the  length  of 
eyes,  slojaing  obliquely  to  neck.  Prothorax  large  (l.G  ^  2.2  mm.),  rather  de- 
pressed; sides  rounded,  very  shortly  sinuate  beside  basal  angles;  anterior  angles 
obtuse,  bordered;  base  truncate,  angles  acute,  subdentate;  lateral  margin  rather 
wide,  especially  posteriorly;  lateral  basal  impressions  wide,  sparsely  punctidate. 
Elytra  truncate-oval  (4  X  2.6  mm.),  lightly  convex;  interstices  a  little  convex, 
seventh  stria  present  a.s  a  row  of  closely  placed  punctures.  Length,  7,  breadth, 
■2.6  mm. 

Hah. — Tasmania     (Simson  No.   3119).     Several    specimens. 

Allied  to  Ph.  melbournensis  Cast.,  but  eyes  less  globose  and  prominent,  post 
ocular  part    of    orbits    longer,  less  abruptly  raised    from  head;    protliorax  more 


158  THE    CARABIDAE   OF    TASMANIA, 

rounded  on  sides,  more  depressed  posteriorly,  sinuosity  of  sides  luueli  shnrter, 
denticle  at  basal  angles  more  sharply  marked;  elytra  with  humeral  tooth  mure 
l)rominent. 

Phebsita  AUSTPans  Cast. 

Ilab. — Tasmania    (Simson,  No.  3()90).     Unifiue. 

Phersita  convexa,  sp.  nov. 

Uval,  convex;  pruthorax  broader  than  long,  roundly  ampliate  at  middle,  sides 
sinuate  l)etore  basal  angles,  base  deeply  c(mcave,  punctate;  elytra  very  convex, 
strongly  erenulate-striate;  scutellar  striole  wanting,  interstices  convex,  third  im- 
punctate,  eighth  strongly  raised  above  seventh  stria  and  subcarinate  at  apex,  ninth 
narrow,  seriate  punctate.     Black;  legs,  antennae,  and  palpi  red. 

Head  convex  (1.5  mm.  across  eyes);  frontal  impressions  parallel,  wide, 
shallow;  eyes  prominent,  distant  from  buccal  fissure  beneath,  lightly  inclosed  at 
base.  Prothorax  broader  than  long  (1.8  x  2.3  nun.),  convex,  declivous  to  base; 
sides  rounded,  shortly  (but  evidently)  sinuate  to  base;  basal  angles  rectangular, 
subdentate;  base  truncate  above  peduncle,  sloping  slightly  forward  on  each  side; 
basal  area  depressed,  punctate;  two  impressions  on  each  side,  outer  impression 
shorter  than  inner,  space  between  these  impressions  depressed;  median  line  dis- 
tinct. Elytra  oval  (4  x  3.2  mm.),  declivous  to  base,  strongly  declivous  to  apex; 
base  wide,  emarginate,  bordered ;  humeral  angles  marked,  not  dentate ;  sides 
rounded.     Length.    6.7,    breadth,    3.2    mm. 

Ilab. — Zeehan  (Simson,  No.  2123);  Strahau  and  Waratah  (Carter  and  lea). 
Eleven   specimens  have   been  examined. 

Very  closely  allied  to  Ph.  australis  Cast.,  from  which  it  differs  by  larger  size, 
more  convex  form;  the  concavity  formed  by  the  bases  of  prothorax  and  elytra 
deeper  and  (on  prothorax)  more  punctate;  prothorax  more  ampliate  on  sides, 
basal  impressions  deeper,  margin  more  strongly  raised  above  the  outer  impression. 

Genus  S  i  Ji  o  d  o  N  T  u  s. 

Xote. — I  have  identified  with  confidence  S.  orthomoides  Chaudoir,  as  synony- 
mous with  S.  {.Irgutor)  hulomelanus  Germ.  {Hah. — Mount  Lofty  Ranges,  S. 
Aust.).  S.  elongatus  Chaudoii-,  I  believe  to  be  a  species  found  about  Sydney,  and 
in  the  Blue  Mountains  [cf.  Sldane.  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.,  1899,  p.  573);  I 
have  not  seen  it  from  Tasmania. 

Table  of  Tasmanian  species. 

1  (4)     Metepisterna  elongate. 

2  (3)     Prothorax  hardly  narrowed  to  base;   interstices  of  elytra  depressed 

austral  is   Dej . 

3  (2)     Prothorax  evidently  narrowed  to  base;   elytra  lightly  striate 

transfuga  Chaud. 

4  (li     Met-episterna  short aeneipennis  Chaud. 

SiMODOXTUs  AUSTRALIS  Dejean. 

7.5  '^  3.1  iniii.  This  species  was  not  in  the  Siiuson  Coll.,  but  speci;nens 
ticketed  "Ta-s."  were  sent  to  me  from  the  Soutii  Australian  Museum. 

iVo/f. — Two  specimens  (c?)  from  Mr.  Lea's  collection  ticketed  "llobart''  are 
more  elongate  than  .S'.  australi.'<,  and  have  the  elytra  more  strongly  striate;  more 
.specimens  would  be  needed  to  enable  it  to  be  properly  studied. 


BY    THOMAS  O.    SLOANE.  159 

Two  spcfimens  (c?)  from  Green  Island  are  in  the  Simsou  Coll.  num oerert 
2482;  these  have  altogether  the  facies  of  .9.  convexus  Chaud.,  but  have  the  basal 
angles  of  the  prothorax  more  marked.  It  seems  conspecific  with  S.  convexus,  but 
I  am  not  prepared   to  determine  it. 

SiMODONTUS  TRANSFUGA  Chaudoir. 

I  identify  as  S.  transfuga,  specimens  in  the  Simson  Coll.  ("No.  3479")  ;  it 
differs  from  A',  amtralis  Dej.  by  shape  more  elongate,  more  parallel;  prothorax 
less  transverse,  more  narrowed  to  base,  more  shortly  narrowed  to  apex  (in  S.  aub- 
tralis  the  prothorax  is  widest  about  middle,  in  S.  transfuga  a  little  before  middle')  ; 
el>i;ra  with  humeral  denticule  more  prominent,  more  opacjue  in  9-  S.  murraiianus 
Blaekb.,  very  closely  resembles  S.  transfuga.  but  has  the  humeral  denticule  of  the 
elytra  less  developed. 

//ob.^Brighton,  Flinders  Is.   (No.  3479)  . 

.  SiMODONTUS   AENEiPEXNis  Chaudoir. 

Hab. — Brighton.  Devonport  (Simson):  Stanley,  King  Is.  (Lea).  Also  lound 
in  Victoria   (Portland). 

Genus  Prosopogmus. 

My  idea  of  the  genus  Prosopogmus  includes  Chaudoir's  subgenera  Ceneus, 
Uiirnwchihis,  and  Ophrijosternus. 

Table  of  Tasmanian  and  Australian  species. 

1  (22)   Elytra  with  eighth  interstice  free  at  apex,  fifth  and  seventh  inclosing 

sixth. 

2  (19)   Elytra  with  third  interstice  3-punctate  (anterior  puncture  beside  third, 

two  posterior  punctures  beside  second  stria). 

3  (14)   Legs  red.  femora  sometimes  piceous. 

4  (9)     Size  large.  10.5—13.5  mm. 

5  (8)     Prothorax   with   basal   angles   well  marked;    elytra   depressed  on   disc. 

6  (7)     Black.     Length,   12—13.5  mm. hoisdiivali  C&st. 

7  (6)     Head  and  prothorax  bright  green,  elytra  with  eighth  and  ninth  inter- 

stices green.     Length,  10.5  mm harpaloides  ChauA. 

8  (5)     Prothorax   with   basal   angles   obtuse;    elytra   lightly   convex   on   disc. 

Length.  11.5  mm. leai  SI. 

9  (4)     Size   smaller,   not  exceeding  8.5  mm. 

10     (13)   Prothorax    with    basal    angles    rectangular;    elytra    with    seventh    ,md 
eighth  interstices  narrow,  convex,  subequal  in  width  with  ninth. 

II  (12)   Elytra    with    punctures   of    third    interstice     punctiform.     Length,    7.5 

mm austritius   SI. 

12  (11)   Elytra  with  punctures  of  third  interstice  foveiform.     Length,  6.5  mm. 

riihicornis   81. 

13  (10)   Prothorax    with    basal    angles    obtuse;    elytra    with    eighth    interstice 

much  wider  than  ninth.     Length,  7 — 8  mm tasmanicus  SI. 

14  (3)     Legs  testaceous. 

15  (16)   Elytra  with  interstices   (including  lateral  ones)   depressed.   (Olivaceous, 

shagreened;  prothorax  not  punctate  near  base;   dorsal  punctures  of 
elytra  interrupting   the   narrow   third   interstice.)      Length,   7   mm. 

yarrensis  SI. 

16  (15)   Elytra  with  lateral  interstices  convex. 

17  (18)   Prothorax   strongly   punctate   on   each    side   of   base.      Pioeous,   elytra 

reddish  near  sides  and  on  apical  declivity.     Length,  6.5  mm 

punctiferus  SI. 


160  THE    CARABIDAE  OF  TASMANIA. 

IS  (17)  Prothorax  minutely  punctate  in  lateral  basal  impressions.  Piceous, 
elytra  with  sides  (widely)  and  apex  brownish  yellow.  Length, 
7 — 8  mm foveipennis  Macl. 

19  (2!     Elytra  with   one  or   two  punctures  beside  .second  interstice,    (anterior 

puncture  wanting) . 

20  (21)   Prothorax   hardly   narrowed   to   base,   sides  not  subsinuate  posteriorly. 

basal  impressions  wide  and  shallow ;   elytra  with  only  one  puncture 
on   third  interstice    (the   posterior  one).     Length.    10.5   mm. 

sitspfcta   Chaud. 

21  (201   Prothorax   decidedly   narrowed   to   base,    sides    subsinuate   posteriorly, 

two  deep  basal  impressions  on  each  side ;  elytra  with  two  punctures 
on   third  interstice   beside   third   stria.   Length,  8.5 — 10  mm. 

moiiochroHs  Chaud. 

22  (1)     Elytra  with  seventh  interstice  inclosed  at  apex  by   sixth   and  eighth. 

(Met-episterna  elongate.) 

23  (26)   Elytra  with  interstices  nitid  and  strongly  convex  in  both  sexes. 

24  (25j   Prothorax  with  basal  impressions  impunctate.     Length,   10 — 11.5  mm. 

coraciniis  Erichs. 

25  (24)   Prothorax  with  basal  impressions  punctate.     Length,  7 — 8  mm. 

occidentalis  Macl. 

26  (23)   Elytra  with  interstices  opaque  in  5^. 

27  (28)   Prothorax  evidently  narrowed  to  base;  striole  at  base  of  second  elytral 

interstice  short.     Colour  atrous.     Length,  9  mm.  nainoyensis  SI- 

28  (27)   Prothorax  not  evidently  narrowed  to  base;   striole  at  base  of  second 

interstice  elongate.     Colour  of  a  somewhat  bronzy  or  greenish  tint. 

29  (30)  Antennae   and   tarsi   ferruginous.      Colour  atrous,   with   slight   metallic 

bronzed  tint  on  elytra.     Length.  7.5 — 9  mm.  oodifortnis  JVIacl. 

30  (29)   Antennae  and  tarsi  infuscate.      Upper  surface  bluish  green.      Length, 

7 — 8.5  mm (/eV/Vfl/^/wi  Tschitsch. 

Note. — P.  (Arijutor)  nitidipennis  MaeL,  is  a  species  of  Prosopogmii^.  but  uo 
specimen  is  avaihvble  to  me  at  present.  P.  (Ahax)  reichei  Cast-  is  likel.v  con- 
specific  with  P.  boi.sdurali  Cast.  P.  {Ilar2jalut')  qaudraticollis  Cast.,  I  liave  not 
identified.  P.  inaperatus  Sloane  is  not  now  available  tor  reference;  the  type  is 
missin.n'.  All  the  sj)ecies  known  to  me  as  occurring-  in  Tasmania  are  noted  liere- 
iimler.  ' 

PROsoroi;.\n's  lkai,  sp.  nnv. 

?. — Elliptical,  lii;litly  convex;  prothorax  >ulii|u:ulrntc,  liase  (3.2  nun.)  much 
wider  than  apex  (2.5  nun.),  basal  angles  oljtusc;  elytra  strongly  striate,  inter- 
stices not  convex  except  towards  ajiex,  third  interstice  3-punctatc,  shouMci-s  den- 
tate; met-episterna  (with  e]>imera)  longer  than  antcri(n-  lircadlh;  jirostcniuia  boi-- 
dered  at  point.     Black    nitid. 

Head  convex  (2.2  mm.)  across  eyes;  frontal  iiiiiircssions  not  decii.  diveigent 
hackwards;  eyes  inclosed  beliind.  renifonn  (with  orbits).  Prothorax  trans\ er.se 
C2.75  X  3. .5  nun.),  widest  before  middle,  strongly  narrowed  to  apex,  liglitly 
iibli(|uely  narrowed  to  base,  impunctate  near  base;  anterior  margin  bordered, 
liardly  eniai'ginale;  base  lightl.y  emarginate  in  middle,  truncate  on  each  side; 
lateral  border  narrow;  median  line  lightly  impressed;  inner  basal  imiircssicm 
shallow,  sulciform,  outer  impression  obsolete;  posterior  marginal  puncture  fovei- 
form,  a  little  distance  from  liase.  Elytra  oval  ((i.7  x  4  mm.);  third  interstice 
with  anterior  ))unctnre  beside  third  stria,  two  jiosterior  jniuctures  beside  second 
stria;  eiglith  interstice  free  at  apex,  fifth  and  seventh  inclosing  sixth,  ninth  seriate- 


BY    TH05IAS  11.    SLOAXE.  ,  lljl 

punctate,  the  punctnivs  not  interrujJted  in  middle ;  sthole  at  base  of  seeon<i  inter- 
stice linear.     Length,  11.5,  breadth,  4  mm. 

Hab. — Tasmania   (Lea).     Unique. 

In  size  and  general  appearance  more  resembling  P.  coracinus  Erichs.  than 
any  other  species;  Ijut  differing  decidedly  by  frontal  impressions  weaker,  eyes  less 
convex,  more  strongly  inchised  at  base  by  orbits;  prothorax  with  basal  angles 
obtuse,  outer  basal  impression  obsolete;  elytra  with  striae  shallower,  interstices 
much  less  convex,  lit'th  and  seventh  inclosing  sixth  at  apex,  eighth  free  at  apex, 
punctures  of  ninth  not   interrupted  in    middle. 

Prosopogmtjs  tasmanicus,  sp.  nov. 

d. — Parallel-elliptical;  prothorax  subquadrate,  wider  at  base  (2.1  mm.)  than 
apex  (1.7  mm.),  bi-impressed  on  each  side  of  base,  basal  angles  obtuse,  but 
marived;  elytra  striate,  interstices  depressed,  third  interstice  3-punctate,  eighth  free 
at  apes;  met-episterna  (with  epimera)  longer  than  broad.  Black;  tibiae  piteous 
red;  tarsi  and  antennae  red. 

Head  ordinary  (1.6  across  eyes),  lightly  bi-impressed.  Prothorax  broader 
than  long  (2  ><  2.5  mm.)  ;  sides  ai'cuate  to  apex,  oblique  to  base;  inner  basal  im- 
pression sulciform,  outer  foveiform;  pore  of  joosterior  marginal  seta  distinct,  be- 
tween outer  basal  impression  and  basal  angle.  Elytra  truncate-oval  (4.5  X  3 
mm. )  ;  humeral  angle  strongly  marked,  shortly*  dentate ;  interstices  a  little  eon- 
vex  towards  apex,  third  with  anterior  puncture  beside  third  stria,  two  posterior 
punctures  beside  second  stria,  fifth  and  seventh  inclosing-  sixth  at  apex;  strioie  at 
base  of  second  interstice  short.  Prostei-num  bordered  at  point,  ventral  segnients 
smooth;  d"  with  two,  ?  with  four  setigerous  submarginal  punctures  at  apex. 
Length,  7 — 7.7,  breadth,  2.15 — 3  mm. 

9. — A  little  wider  than  c?;  prothorax  with  basal  angles  a  little  more  obi  use; 
elytra  slightly  duller. 

Hah. — Denison  Gorge,  Lottah,  Zeehan,  Mount  Wellington  (Simson,  No. 
3118);  Devonport,  Sheffield,  Hobart  (Lea). 

The  type  is  from  Denison  Gorge;  two  specimens  (5)  in  the  Simson  Coll.  from 
Mount  "Wellington,  have  the  prothorax  with  basal  angles  more  obtuse  than  in  the 
specimen  ($)  from  Lottah,  and  a  specimen  (?)  from  Zeehan  has  the  second, 
fourth,  and  sixth  interstices  of  the  elytra  evidently  wider  than  the  third,  fifth, 
and  seventh;  two  specimens  in  Mr.  Lea's  collection  from  Devonport  and  Sheffield 
have  the  elytra  more  strongly  striated  than  in  the  type.  I  believe  all  these 
specimens  are  refei-able  to  one  species,  but  a  good  knowledge  of  numerous  speci- 
mens from  many  localities  in  Tasmania  is  necessary  before  the  question  of  its 
variations  can  be  dealt  with. 

Prosofogmus  punctiferus,  sp.  nov. 

(?. — Elliptical-oval,  subdepressed ;  prothorax  subquadrate,  wider  at  base  (1.7 
mm.)  than  apex  (1.5  mm.),  bi-impressed  and  punctate  on  each  side  of  base,  basal 
angles  almost  rectangular;  elytra  strongly  striate,  interstices  convex  on  lateral 
and  apical  declivities,  third  3-punctate,  eighth  free  at  apex;  met-episterna  (with 
epimera)  longer  than  broad,  without  epimera  hardly  as  long  on  inner  side  as  at 
anterior  margin.  Head  and  prothorax  shining  bronzed-black;  el.vtra  piceous  with 
faint  bronzy  tints  on  disc ;  lateral  margin  from  seventh  interstice  and  some  obscure 
maculae  on  apical  declivity  brownish;  undersurf ace  black  (including  posterior  coxae 
and  base  of  posterior   trochanters)  ;    antennae    and   palpi    ferruginous;  mandibles 


162  THE    CARABIDAK   OF    TASMANIA, 

piceous  red;  tour  anterior  coxae,  temora,  and  apex  of  posterior  trochanters  testa- 
ceous; tibiae,  tarsi,  and  four  anterior  troclianters  ferruginous;  extreme  a]K-x  of 
femora  and  tibiae   infuseate. 

Head  ordinary  (1.3  mm.  across  eyes),  lightly  bi-impressed.  Proti.orax 
transverse  (1.5  ^  2  mm.),  widest  before  middle;  sides  lightly  curved  to  apex, 
oblique  to  base ;  apex  lightly  emarginate ;  base  lightly  emargiuate  in  middle ;  basal 
angles  marked,  almost  rectangular,  obtuse  at  summit;  base  depressed,  bi-impressed 
and  covered  with  a  decided  puucturation  on  each  side;  a  posterior  marginal  seta 
present  just  within  basal  angle.  Elytra  truncate-oval  (3.6  X  2.3  mm.),  lightly 
convex;  second  and  fourtli  interstices  wider  than  third;  seventh  and  eighth  inter- 
stices equal,  convex,  narrower  than  ninth ;  striole  at  base  of  second  interstice  elon- 
gate; punctures  of  third  interstice  interrupting  its  course.  Length,  6.5,  breadth, 
2.3  mm. 

Hab. — Waratab    (Lea).     Unique. 

A  distinct  species  dift'ering  from  all  others,  except  P.  yarre)isi.'<  SI.,  and  P. 
foveipennis  MacL,  by  its  testaceous  leg's;  from  P.  yarrensis  it  differs  greatly  by 
I  olour ;  prothorax  strongly  punctate ;  elytra  with  interstices  more  convex,  especially 
the  narrower  eighth.  The  specimen  before  me  has  a  foveiform  depression  on  the 
fifth  interstice,  half-way  between  the  two  posterior  punctures  of  the  third  inter- 
stice. 

Prosopoghus  monochrous  Chaudoir. 

(^  Hormochiliis  id.,  =  Eccoptogenius  feronoides  Castelnau.) 

ffa&.— Launceston  (Simson  No.  2477);  Hobart  (Lea).  Also  found  in  the 
coastal  districts  of  Victoria  and  N .  S .  Wales. 

Prosopogmus  coracinds  Erichson, 

(=  Pterostichus   id.,  =  Ceneus  chali/beipennis    Chaudoir,  =  Feroiiia   vili^.) 

Castelnau). 
Prosopogmus  delicatulus  Tschitscherine   (1898).   (Feronia  (Ophryosternus)    ea.) 

Its  most  apparent  differences  from  P.  oodiformis  Macl,,  a  common  species  on 
the  mainland,  are  its  bluish-green  colour,  and  infuseate  tarsi  and  antennae. 
Hab. — Launceston,  East  Tamar   (Simson). 

Genus  R  h  a  b  d  o  t  u  s. 
RiiABOOTUS   EEPLEXUS   Chaudoir. 

Pterostichus  diemenensis  Cast.,  is  synonymous  witli  1!.  rcflexus  Chaud., 
and  I  would  reduce  E.  floridus  Bates  to  a  variety.  Chaudoir  descritied  R. 
reflcxus  as  black,  sides  of  prothorax  subsinuate,  basal  angle  rectangular;  ir. 
jloridus  Bates  has  similar  angles,  but  is,  as  Bates  says,  "distinguished  from 
JV.  reflexiis  by  the  rich,  uniform,  purple  colour  of  the  elytra."  A  specimen 
from  Zeehan  has  head  black,  prothorax  nigro-vireseent,  elytra  jniiitle; 
jirothorax  wider  than  usual  at  base,  basal  angles  rather  obtuse,  sides  curving  very 
lightly  to  base.  AVith  the  large  series  of  specimens  I  have  befm-e  me  1  cannot 
draw  any  defuiite  line  dividing  P.  flaridus  from  R.  reflexus;  there  seems  every 
degree  of  variation  of  colour  from  the  l)lack  specimens  to  the  most  highly  coloured. 

Ilab. — K.  reflexus,  typical  form :  Mount  Wellington,  Ben  Lomond,  4000  feet, 
Forester  River  (Simson).  Var.  floridu:  Zeehan,  Strahan  (Simson,  Nos.  3040 
3317,  3464);  Cradle  Mountain,  Waratah,  Mag-net,  Devonport  (Lea). 


BY    THOMAS   G.    SLOANE.  163 

Genus  N  o  t  o  n  o  m  u  s. 

Table  of  Tasmanian  species. 

1  (4)     Elytra    deeply    and    fully    striate,    interstices    convex,    particularly    at 

apex. 

2  (31     Elytra   with   apical   sinuosities   obsolescent.      Length,  .  15 — 20   mm. 

politulus  Chai'.d. 

3  (2)     Elvtra   with   apical   sinuosities    well   marked,    (third   interstice   inflated 

near   apex,    in    ?    protuberant;    a    triangular    projection    on    lateral 
border  on  each  side   of  apex  in  S).     Length,   16.5 — 18  mm. 

ttiberiiaudiis   Bates. 

4  (1)     Elytral    striae     (excepting    eigh-th)     faint    or    obsolete,    interstices    de- 

pressed. 
5     (61     Elvtra   with   lateral   border   narrow   near  base,   basal   border   forming   a 
blunt  protuberance  at  humeral  angles.     Length,   13 — 16  mm. 

chalybeus  Dej. 

6     (5)     Elytra   with   lateral   border   strongly   refiexed   near   base,    .basal   border 

uniting   with   lateral   border   at   humeral   angles   without   a  marked 

prominence.      Length,    16.5 — IS   mm. philippi  Newm. 

NoTONOMUS  POLITULUS  Chaudoir. 

This  species  is  widely  distributed  in  Tasmania;  specimens  are  in  the  Simson 
Coll.  from  Launceston,  Denison  Gorge,  Ben  Lomond  (4000  feet),  Forester  River, 
Wynyard,  Straban,  Zeehan,  Mount  Wellington  (Nos.  3056,  3090),  Flinders  Is. 
(No.  2728).  It  occurs  at  Cradle  Mountain,  Waratah,  Straban  (Carter  and  Lea). 
In  the  long  series  of  specimens  brought  from  Waratab  by  Mr.  Lea  in  January, 
1918,  the  number  of  punctures  on  the  third  interstice  of  the  elytra  varies  from  two 
to  four;  some  specimens  had  the  protborax  a  little  more  narrowed  to 'the  base,  and 
the  elytra  more  rounded  on  the  sides  than  usual,  but  all  were  evidently  of  one 
species . 

NoTONOMUS  TUBERic'AUDUS  Bates. 

It  is  easy  to  distinguish  the  ?  of  this  species  from  the  $  of  iV.  politulw! 
Chaud.,  by  the  ante-apical  protuberance  of  the  third  interstice  of  the  elytra,  and 
the  triangular  projection  on  the  border  near  the  apex;  but  to  separate  the  t?  is 
not  so  easy;  the  third  interstice  is  a  little  swollen  at  apex,  and  the  fourth  interstice 
curves  round  the  extremity  of  the  third  in  a  way  it  does  not  do  in  N.  jiolitulus; 
the  lateral  apical  sinuosities  also  are  more  decided. 

ilof).— Denison  Gorge,  Ben  Lomond,  4000  feet   (Simson,  No.  3112). 

NoTONOMUs  CHALYBEUS  Dejean. 
Hub. — Stanley   (Simson    No.    3466);    Straban    (Carter  and  Lea);  King    Is. 
(Lea). 

NoTONOJius  PHILIPPI  Newman. 

Hah. — Flinders  Is.    (Simson  3478).     Also  common  about  Port  Phillip. 
Genus   P  S  E  r  D  0  C  E  N  E  u  s. 
PsEUDOCENEUS  sonciTUs    Erichson. 
(?  =  Po.ecilus  iridipennis  Cast.,  1  ^    P.  iridescens  Cast.) 
Hab. — Launceston,  Kelso,  Evandale,  Avoca,  Great  Lake   (Simson  No.  2896). 
Small  specimens  (length  8.5  mm.)   from  the  Great  Lake  were  numbered  "3693,"  as 
distinct  from  P.   solicitus;   this    form   is    more  convex;    protborax    shorter,    more 


1(J4  THE    CARABIDAE  OF    TASMANIA, 

rounded  on  sides;  eljira  more  strongly  striate,  interstices  convex;  there  are,  how- 
ever, iu  the  Simsou  Coll.  specimens  which  link  this  slightly  diflferentiated  race 
with  the  typical  foi-m  of  the  species;  one  would  need  to  be  more  confident  of  the 
value  of  these  apparent  differences  than  I  am  to  give  a  distinctive  name  to  No. 
3693  of  the  Simson  Coll. 

Genus  C  H  l  a  e  x  i  o  i  d  u  s. 

Chlaexioidus  prolixus  Erichson. 

ifo!).— Flinders  Is.  (Simson  No.  2487). 

Genus  Rhytisternus. 

Table  of  Tasmanian  species. 

1  (4)     Prothorax   sinuate,   or   subsinuate   before   basal   angles,   these   marked. 

2  (3)     Elytra   with   all   striae    distinctly   marked,   interstices   convex   at   apex 

(seventh    stria    faint    or    obsolete    for    two  thirds  of    its  length). 
Length,   10—12  mm iiiiser  Chaud. 

3  (2)     Elvtra  with  five  inner  striae  well  marked,  sixth  and  seventh  faint  or 

obsolete,  except  near  apex.     Length,  15 — 17  m.m.  liopkiinis  Chaud. 

4  (1)     Prothorax  with  sides  arcuate  to  base,  basal  angles  not  marked.  (  Four 

inner  striae  wsll  marked,   striae   5 — 7   faint   or   obsolete,   except   to- 
wards  apex.)     Length,   14 — 17  mm na//ioderus  ChavtA. 

All  these  species  are  common  and  widely  spread  on  the  Australian  mainland; 
only  R.  cijathoderus  (No.  2476)  was  in  the  Simson  Coll.  The  others  are  included 
here  on  the  authority  of  Jlr.  Lea's  "List"  of  :i.)02. 

Genus  Catadroixus. 
C'atadromus  lacordairei  Castelnau. 
Hall. — Macquarie  River,  Tasmania    (Simson).     Generally   distributed   in  Aus- 
tralia. 

Tribe  Anchomenini. 

Table   of   Tasmanian   genera. 

1  (4)     Mentum    dentate;    prothorax    with    a   marginal    seta   at    basal    angles; 

outer  lobe  of  maxillae  biarticulate. 

2  (31     Elytra   with    third   interstice   punctate;    tarsi    glabrous   above,    ungues 

simple Anchomenus. 

3  '(2j     Elytra   with    third   interstice   impunttate:    tarsi   setose   above,   ungue.': 

serrulate Laemostenus. 

4  (1)     .Mentum  edentate;  prothorax  without  a  marginal  seta  at  basal  angles; 

outer  lobe   of  maxillae   uniartiiulate Homothks. 

Anchomenus  jiargixellus    Erichson 
Hah. — Evandalc,    East    Ta)nar,    Great   Lake     (Simsou,    No.    2876);    Strahan, 
Waratah  (Carter  and  Lea). 

Laemostenu.s  COMPI.AXATU.S  Dejean. 
//((/.I.-— Lauuceslun   (Simson).     Intruchiccd. 

Genus  H  0  M  0  T  ii  E  s. 
I   now   consider  this  genus  to   belong  to  tlic  tribe  Anchomenini,   which  is   the 
position  assigned  to  it  by  Erichson.     It  is  certainly  not  a  Lebiid,  the  anterior  coxal 
cavities  liaving  a  single  o])cning  inwards;  the  tarsal  vesture  of  tlie  c?  is  as  in  the 
.Vnchtimenini,  not  as  in  the  Odacanthini. 


BV    THOMAS  G.    SLOANE.  165 

Note. — I  would  delete  from  the  genus,  and  from  the  Australian  fauna, 
Homothes  emarginatus  Chaudoir,  which  I  have  recognised  from  the  description  as 
a  species  of  Celebes  and  Borneo ;  it  requires  a  new  genus. 

Table  of  Tasmanian   species. 

1  (4)     Prothorax  arcuate-angustate   to  base,   and  with  an  evident  juxta-basal 

sinuosity. 

2  (3 1     Elytra  sericeous-black,  inflexed  margins  piceous;  antennae  with  seventh 

and   eighth   joints   albescent elegavs  N'ewm, 

3  (2 1     Elytra  sericeous-brown,   lighter-coloured  near  margin,   inflexed  margins 

testaceous:   antennae  brownish    .    (Punctures  of  third  and  ninth  in- 
terstices set  in  testaceous  spots.) i^uttifer   Germ. 

4  (li     Prothorax     obliquely     angustate    to   base    without   evident    juxta-basal 

sinuosity.      (Punctures  of  third  interstice  not  testaceous.) 

5  (61     Elytra    with    interstices    flat,    striae    shallow;     elytra    sericeous-black' 

femora  testaceous  with  apex  infuscate sericeiis  Erichs. 

6  (5)     Elytra  with  interstices  rather  convex,  striae  deep;  elytra  black,  opaque; 

femora  piceous nii^er  SI 

HoiioTHE'-;   ELEOAN.s    Newuian. 

(?^  II.  micans  Germ.).) 
ITob.— Brighton,  Roseberry,    Strahan    (Simson.    No.    2613);  Waratah,    Bruni 
Is.   (Lea).     Common  in   S.E.    Australia. 

HbMOTHES   GUTTiFER  Germar. 

iJ(j6.— Launccston,  Brighton  (Simson,  No.  2964).  Very  widely  distributed 
on  the  mainland. 

Homothes  sericeus  Ericlison. 

(=  n.  jjarricollis  Blackburn,  =  H.  vicinus  Sloane).  I  feel  confident  about 
this  synonym>-. 

Hab. — Strahan  (Simson).     Ranges  from  Sydney  to  Perth  on  the  mainland. 

HoirnTirRs  xiOEr;,  sp.  nov. 

Black,  oiiaque;  tibiae  lurid. 

Depressed.  'Head  convex  (1.5  mm.  across  eyes),  lightly  obliquely  narrcwed 
behind  eyes.  Prothorax  shagreened,  wider  than  head,  cordate  (1.4  X  1.7  mm,), 
widest  and  angulate  at  marginal  seta,  obliquely  naiTowed  to  base;  sides  not  situate 
before  base.  Elytra  oval  (5  X  3.3  mm.),  suljsinuate-truncate  at  apes,  deeply 
crenulate-striate;  interstices  opaque,  shagreened,  subeonvex,  a  little  transversely 
wrinkled,  especially  towards  sides;  third  interstice  5-punctate.  Length,  8.2, 
breadth,  3.3  mm. 

Hab. — Cradle  Mountain    (Carter).     Unique. 

A  very  distinct  species  differentiated  from  all  others  by  colour  coal-black; 
femora  black:  elytra  more  strongly  striate,  etc.  Its  prothorax  resembles  that  of 
H.  sericeus  Erichs.,  but  is  wider,  and  the  sides  are  obliquely  angustate  to  the 
base  with  a  faint  outward  curve,  not  an  inward  curve  as  in  H.  sericeus. 

Tribe  Ctenodactylini. 
This  tribe  has  not  hitherto  been  recognised  as  entering  the  Australian  fauna, 
but  Plagiotehim   opalescens  Ollifif,  is  certainly  a  member  of  it,  as  is  also  Plagio- 
telnm  iriiiiim  Solier:  these  two  species  are.  from  comparison,  truly  congeneric 


Ki"!  THE    CARABIDAE  OF    TASMANIA, 

Plagioteluji  opalescens  Olliff. 

Protliorax  with  a  fine  marginal  seta  just  before  middle,  no  seta  near  basal 
ang-les;  elytra  with  two  shallow  discal  impressions  alono;  course  of  third  inteistire 
(anterior  impression  consideral)ly  before,  posterior  just  behind  middle)  :  anterior 
coxal  cavity  with  a  single  opening  inwards;  mesosternum  unusually  narrow  be- 
tween middle  coxae;  apex  of  abdomen  in  c?  6-setose,  in  2  plurisetuse;  tarsi  more 
or  less  setulose  beneath  in  both  sexes,  particularly  the  bilobed  fourth  joint;  (?, 
anterior  tarsi  chithed  beneath  with  long,  not  dense,  griseous  hairs,  this  setosity  on 
second  and  third  joints  most  developed  towards  sides,  in  middle  of  these  joints  two 
narrow  rows  of  ])nl villi;  ungues  pectinate. 

Hab. — Waratah  (Carter  and  Lea).  Not  unconnuon  on  thiwcrs  of  Li'pto- 
spermuni. 

(AHA  HI  DAE     BU'ElUOh'ATAE. 

Tribe  Licininii. 
Table  of  Tasmanian  genera. 

1  (41     Mentum  joining  gula   without  support  at  base.     Penultimate   ioint  of 

labial  palpi  bisetose. 

2  (31     Antennae  with  tv/o  basal  joints  glabrous LESTiGNATHrs. 

3  (2i     .\ntennae  with  three  basal  joints  glabrous Lacordairi.\. 

4  (11     Mentum    supported   at  base   by   a   submentum.     Penultimate   joint   of 

labial   palpi   plurisetose Dickochilk 

Genus  L  K  S  T  I  G  N  A  T  IT  V  S. 
Table  of  species. 

1  (4)     Elytra  with   two  fine  punctures  on   third  interstice. 

2  (31     Size  major;   elytra  with  apical  curve   even.     Length,   13. .5 — 1.5..')  mm. 

iitisor  Erichs. 

3  (2i     Size  minor;    elytra   with   apical   curve   strongly   sinuate  on   each   side. 

Length,  9.. 0  mm simsoni  Bates. 

4  (1)     Elytra    with    three    or    four    foveiform    punctures    on    third    interstice. 

Length,   7.5  mm. foveatiis  SI. 

LE.STiGNATHrs  cfRSOR      Ericlison. 

This  species  is  widely  spread,  and  varies  a  good  deal  in  size  and  ai>pcaranc(', 
some  specimens  being  proportionately  broader  than  others;  the  lengtli  varies  trom 
13.5  to  15.5,  and  the  brea<lth  from  5  to  (5. 2  mm.;  the  protliorax  varies  from  3  >< 
3.1  to  3.3  X  3.5  mm.  (in  these  measurements  the  length  of  the  prothorax  has 
.  been  measured  between  anterior  and  basal  an.gles,  i.e.,  at  place  of  greatest  k'ngth). 
The  greater  breadtli  of  the  prothorax  and  elytra  in  some  specimens  as  compared 
with  others  is  evidently  not  altogether  a  sexual  difference,  thougli  generally  narrow 
specimens  are  females.  The  specimens  from  the  AVest  Coast  seem  usually  smaller 
than  those  from   Dcnison  Gorge  ami   Ben  Lomond. 

Hah. — Dcnison  Gorge,  Ren  Lumond,  Zeelian,  Slialiaii  (Simsnn.  No.  Ii114); 
Waratah,  Mount  Magnet    (Ijca). 

IjKSTinx'.VTius  SIMSONI  Batcs. 

(Simson  No.  3115.) 

'  LesTIGNATHUS  FOVEATTJS,  sp.  linv. 

Oval;   prothiuax    bisetose  on  each   side,   posterior   seta  on    edge   of   liorder   a 

little  before   basal  angle;  elytra  lightly  striate,  interstices  flat,  third   witli  tiiree  or 

four     foveae;     antennae     with     two    basal     joints     glabrous,     tliiril    setulose;    met- 


BY    THOMAS   G.    SLOANE.  107 

episterna  short,  transverse.  Pieeous  black ;  lateral  channel  and  inflexed  miirgin 
of  elytra  testaceous;  legs  pieeous;  four  anterior  coxae,  posterior  trochai-ters, 
apex  and  base  of  femora,  and  tarsi  lurid-testaceous;  antennae  infuscate. 

Head  small  (12  mm.  across  eyes);  labrum  emarginate,  with  four  submar- 
ginal  setae.  Prothorax  broader  than  long  (1.6  ^  2  mm.),  widest  at  anterior 
third,  depressed,  flat  on  each  side  of  base;  lateral  basal  inqiressions  narrow,  dis- 
tant from  lateral  margin ;  sides  rounded,  strongly  roundly  narrowed  to  apex,  nar- 
rowed in  a  gentle  curve  to  base;  apex  feebly  emarginate  in  middle;  angles 
rounded  off;  border  narrow,  hardly  more  strongly  retlexed  at  basal  angles  than 
on  middle  of  sides,  entire  along  anterior  margin,  obsolete  only  on  middle  of 
base.  Elytra  ovate  (4.6  ^  3.1  mm.);  apical  curve  short,  oblique,  not  pereeiitibly 
bisinuate;  inner  striae  more  or  less  interruj)ted  near  lia-se;  disc  with  a  row  of  four 
equally  spaced  foveiform  punctures  on  third  interstice.  Penultimate  joint  of 
maxillary  paljji  proportionately  shorter,  and  terminal  joints  of  both  maxillary 
and  labial  palpi  stouter  than  in  L.  cursor  Erichs.      Length,  7.5,  breadth,  3.1  mm. 

Hab. — Zeehan    (Simson,  type),  Waratah,    Strahan    (Carter   and    Lea). 

A  distinct  species,  which  differs  decidedly  from  the  other  two  species  o:  the 
genus  by  the  four  large  discal  punctures  of  the  third  interstice  of  the  elytra.  As 
in  L.  simsoni  Bates,  the  posterior  marginal  seta  of  the  prothorax  rises  from  a 
pore  on  the  edge  of  the  border  a  little  before  the  basal  angle;  in  L.  cursor  the 
post-marginal  seta  and  its  pore  are  obsolete.  The  prothorax  is  flatter  and  sh(.rtcr 
than  in  L.  cursor,  therefore  more  resembling  that  of  L.  simsoni. 

Genus  L  a  c  o  r  d  a  i  r  i  a, 

Lacordairia   CALAThoides  Castelnau. 

Oval,  de])ressed  Head  small  (1  mm.  across  eyes);  antennae  with  three 
basal  joints  glabrous;  labrum  deeply  triangularly  excised,  4-setose;  clypeus  emar 
ginate.  Prothorax  depressed,  transverse  (1.5  x  2.2  mm.),  evidently  wider  across 
base  than  apex ;  derm  finely  shagreened ;  sides  lightly  rounded  ■  apex  lightlv 
emarginate;  angles  obtuse;  base  truncate,  curving  lightly  forward  on  each  side, 
angles  obtuse;  basal  area  flat  on  each  side;  lateral  basal  impressions  short,  dis- 
tinct; border  entire,  narrow  on  sides,  bearing  at  basal  angle  a  setigerous  jiore. 
Elytra  ovate  (4.2  X  2.9  mm.),  depressed  on  disc,  lightly  declivous  to  basal  border 
on  each  side  of  base,  rather  strongly  declivous  to  apex,  finely  striate;  interstices 
flat,  third  impunctate,  eighth  very  wide;  apical  curve  short,  even.  Black,  nitid; 
antennae,  tibiae,  and  tarsi  ferruginous.     Leng-th,   7,  breadth,  2.0. 

Hab.— St.  Marys    (Simson,  N,,.  3643).     Unique. 

I  feel  confident  in  identifying  this  species  as  L.  caJathnides  Cast.,  and  offer 
the  above  description  to  record  some  characters  of  importance  not  noticed  by 
Castelnau.  It  diffei-s  from  the  Victorian  species  L.  argutoroides  Cast,  (which  also 
has  the  third  interstice  of  the  elytra  impunctate)  by  femora  pieeous;  form  wider; 
prothorax  broader  with  sides  more  evenly  rounded ;  elytra  much  wider,  more  finely 
striate,  eighth  interstice  wider,  etc. 

Genus  D  i  c  r  o  c  ii  i  l  e. 

Table  of  Tasmanian   species. 

1  (2)  Prothorax  with  a  deep  concavity  on  each  side,  base  bordered  externally 
by  the  strongly  upturned  margin,  basal  angles  marked;  third  inter- 
stice of  elytra  3-punctate.  Length,  15.5  mm.  ..         quadricollis  Cast. 


168  THE    CARABIDAE   OF    TASIIANIA, 

2  (1)     Prothorax  flat  on  each  side  of  base,  the  depressed  area  bordered  ex- 

ternally by  the  lateral  border,  basal  angles  rounded:  third  interstice 
of  elytra  2-punctate. 

3  (6)     Prothorax   very   broad:    elytra   with   interstices  convex,   nitid   in    both 

sexes. 

4  (5)     Elytra   with  striae  crenulate.     Length.    14 — 1.5  mm.  goryi  Guer. 

5  (4)     Elytra  with  striae  simple.     Length.  12  mm.    ..    .  brez'icollix  Chdi-ad. 

6  (3)     Prothorax  lightly  transverse:  elytra  with  interstices  depressed,  opaque 

in  ?.     Length,  12  mm '      miniita   Cast. 

yote. — Bates  reported  T).  ptinctipennis  Cast.,  as  a  Tasmanian  species  received 
from  Mr.  Simson ;  perlia])s  tliis  may  be  the  same  speeies  which  I  have  identified 
as  D.  qtiadricollis  Cast. 

DlCKOt'HILE     QUADRICOLLIS    Cast. 

c?.  Black.  Head  large.  Prothorax  subtiuadrate  (2.5  X  3.G  mm.),  widest' 
before  middle;  base  and  apex  of  equal  width  (3  mm.);  sides  subsinuate  pos- 
teriorly; basal  angles  marked;  a  concavity  on  each  side  of  base  extending  to  the 
strongly  upturned  margins.  Elytra  -wide,  strongly  striate;  striae  simple;  mter- 
stices  hardly  convex,  third  3-punctate.  "\^entral  segments  3 — 5  setigero-piuictate. 
Length,  15,  breadth.  6  mm. 

Hob. — Flinders  Is.    (Simson,  No.  2375).     Also  found  in  Victoria. 

I  unhesitatingly  identify  this  species  as  I).  quacJricollis  Cast. ;  it  is  conspecific 
with  specimens  in  my  collection  from  Mooroolbark  (eastward  of  IMelbourne).  In 
the  ?,  the  ventral   segments  ai-e   without   setigerous  punctures. 

DiCROCHiLE  GORYi  Guerin. 

jl„h. — Falmouth  (Simson).     Very  widely  spread  in  Australia. 

DiCROCiTiLE  BREVicOLLis  Chaudoir. 

jiab. — Great  Lake  (Simson).     Widely  spread  in  Australia. 

DiCROCHiLE  MiNUTA  Castelnau. 

Jfob .—Hobart  (Lea);  Epping  (Griffith).  In  a  note.  Mr.  Lea  says,  "I'ound 
by  Mr.  Gritlith  flying  plentifully  in  Eppin.g  Forest  at  dusk."  Common  and  wide- 
ly spread  on  the  mainland.  It  may  be  noted  that  in  all  the  specimens  I  liavc  ex- 
amined, only  two  punctures  have  been  present  on  the  (liivd  interstice  of  tlic  elytra, 
though  Castelnau  gives  the  number  as  three. 

Tribe  Oodini. 
Genus  0  o  d  e  s. 
OODEs  MODESTl's  Casteliiau. 
//«!-.— Evandale    (Simson,  No.  3502). 

Genus  C  0  p  t  o  c  A  r  p  u  s. 
C0PT0CAi!PUS  AUSTRALis    Dejcan. 
Hah. — Launceston.  Ea.«t  Tamar.  Evandale  (Simson). 
Tribe  Tetragonoderini. 
Genus  S  a  r  o  t  ir  n  «  c  r  e  p  i  s. 

Lebionwrphn   (fjeii.  itied.)  Chaudoir.     Eetrnma  (nom  praeor.)   Blackburn. 

T  have  found  the  characters  on  which  Blm-kburn  sought  to  establish  his  cenus 


r,Y    THOMAS  G.    SLOANE. 


169 


Ectroma  elusive;  and,  tlioug-h  the  species  on  which  Blackburn  founded  this  genus 
(genotype,  Lehia  civica  Newm.),  might  be  put  in  Chaudoir's  suggested  genus 
Lebiomorpha  (genotype,  L.  civicn  Newm.),  as  has  been  done  by  me  in  the  past,  it 
now  seems  better  to  follow  Macleay  and  refer  them  to  Sarothrocrepis,  sensu  lato. 

Table  of  Tasmanian  species. 

1  (10)   Fourth  joint  of  all  tarsi  bilobed. 

2  (7)     Size  large.     Length.  7.o  mm.,  or  over. 

3  (6)     Prothorax  testaceous. 

4  (5)     Elytra    with    interstices   6 — 8    infuscate    to    base,    base    also   infuscate. 

Length,  9 — 10  mm at/icftrNevim. 

5  (4)     Elytra  testaceous  on  basal  third,  and  with  a  large,  ante-apical,  black 

area.     Length,  7.5 — 8  mm posticalis  Guar. 

6  (3)     Prothorax  and  elytra  piceous   (or  black)   with  wide,  testaceous,  latere.! 

margins.     Length,  7 — 8  mm /uc/i/osn  ^ewm 

7  (2)     Size  small,  less  than  6  mm.  in  length. 

S  (9)  Head  testaceous,  elytra  black  with  post-basal  plagae,  lateral  margins, 
and  apex  testaceous benefica  Newm. 

9  (8)  Head  and  prothorax  black,  elytra  black  with  testaceous  post-basal 
plagae r/z'/ra  Newm. 

10  (1)     Tarsi   with   fourth   ioint   bilobed  on  four  anterior  tarsi,  simple  on  pos- 

terior tarsi. 

11  (12)   Elytra    testaceous,    four   basal    black   spots   and    a   wide,    post-median, 

black  area  extending  across  elytra — only  lateral  border  and  inflexed 
margins  excepted grm<is  Blackb. 

12  (11)   Elytra  testaceous,  two  basal  black  spots  on  fourth  and  fifth  interstices, 

and  a  narrow  irregular  black  fascia  above  apical  declivity  (its 
anterior  margin  deeply  emarginate) .  (Sometimes  the  fascia  con- 
tinuous across  six  inner  interstices,  sometimes  it  is  obsolete  on  fifth 
interstice  and  its  usual  apex  appears  as  a  small  black  spot  just 
before  the  middle  of  the  length  of  the  sixth  interstice — typical  form.) 

inquinala   Erichs. 
Sarothrocrepis  calida  Newman. 

(=  S.  !nfnscata  Sloane,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.  Wales,  1916,  p.  206.) 
Mr.  H.    E.   Andrewes,  to  whom  I  sent  specimens,  has  compared  S.  infuscata 
with  the  type  of  Lebia  calida,  in  the  British  Museum,  and  has  informed  me  that  it 
is  the  same  species.     I  believe  it  is  distinct  from  S.  corticalis  Fabr. 

Hab. — Launceston,  Brighton.  St.  Patrick's  River,  Mole  Creek  (Simson,  No. 
■2486)  ;  Burnie,  Sheffield  (Carter  and  Lea).  Also  found  in  the  mountains  of  S.E. 
Australia. 

Sarothroorepis  posticalis  Guerin. 

[=  S.  suavis  Sloane    (non  Blackburn),   Proc.   Linn.  Soc.  N.S.  Wales,   1917, 

p.  423.] 

I  formerly  took  this  species  for  S.  suavis  Blackb.,  from  which  it  differs  by  the 
sharply  marked  basal  angles  of  the  prothorax.  Testaceous,  with  a  large  black 
patch  on  the  apical  half  of  the  elytra.     Length,  7.5 — 8  mm. 

Hah. — Tyannceston,  Brighton.  Beaconsfield,  West  Taniar  (Simson  No.  267.5). 
Also  found  in  the  mountains  of  S.E.   Australia. 

Sarothrocrepis  luctuosa  Newman. 
Hah. — Brighton    (Simson,  No.  2676).     Widely    spread  in    the    mountains    of      y^^\  C 
South-eastern  Australia.  /v  ^      _„ 

LU    LIBRA 


170  THE    CARABIDAE  OF    TASMAXIA, 

Sarothrocrepis  benefica  Newman. 

Hah. — Launoe^ton,  St.  Patrick's  River,  Ejiping  (Siinson,  No.  2490).  Widely 
spread  in  Australia. 

Sarothrocrepis  'civica  Newman. 

TIab. — Laimceston,  West  Tamar,  Kareola  (Simson,  No.  3311).  Widely  >preiid 
iu  Australia. 

Sarothrocrepis  gravis  Blackburn. 

Hah. — Denison  Gorge    (Simson).     Mountains  of  Victoria  and  N.S.  Wales. 

Sarothrocrepis  ixqvix.vta  Eriehson. 

Hab. — Kelso   ''beach''    (Simson). 

Tribe   Lebiini. 
Table  of  Tasmanian   genera. 

1  (41     Tarsi  with  fourth  joint  bilobed. 

2  (3)     Labial  palpi  with  apical  joint  stout,  but  not  triangularly  securiform 

Xanthoph.iea. 

3  (2)     Labial  palpi  with  apical  joint  securiform.      (Tarsi  glabrous.) 

Triqonothops. 

4  11)     Tarsi  with  fourth  joint  simple. 

.5     (10)     Mesosternum   narrow   between   intermediate   coxae. 

()     (9)     Tarsi   setulose  on   upper   surface.     Interstices   of  elytra   setulose-punc- 

tate,  third  bearing  at  least  three  setifsrous  punctures. 
7     (8)     Palpi   with   penultimate  joint  long:    intermediate   tarsi   in  c?  with   two 

or  three  joints  squamose  beneath Philophloeu.s. 

5  (7)     Palpi   with   penultimate   joint   short;    intermediate   tarsi    in   c?  without 

squamae  beneath Aoonochila. 

9  161  Tarsi  glabrous  on  upper  surface.  Interstices  of  elytra  laevigate,  third 
bipunctate  (anterior  puncture  on  basal  third  beside  third  stria, 
posterior  puncture  about  apical  third  beside  second  stria* 

DiAB.lTICrs. 

Mesosternum  wide  between  intermediate  coxae. 

Eyes   not   enclosed   at   base   in   s-voUen    orbits Microlkstes? 

Eyes  enclosed  at  base  in  swollen  orbits Anomotarvs. 

Genus  X  A  X  t  H  o  p  h  a  k  a. 
Table  of  Tasmanian  species. 

Tarsi  with  upper  surface  setose :  antennae  with    basal  joints  setulose. 
Form  narrow,  elongate   (elytra,  5X3  mm.)  ;  elytra  testaceous  with  a 

piceous  vitta  along  sixth  and  seventh  interstices.  infuscata  Chaud. 
Form  oval  (elytra,  4  X  3.2  mm.);  upper  surface  piceous  ..  .  .sc/osa  Si- 
Tarsi   with   upper   surface  glabrous;    antennae   with   three   basal   joints 

glabrous.     Testaceous fintr/iinodcnis  Chaud. 

Xan'TIIOpiiaka   ikfuspata    (~'liaudoir. 

Hub. — Launccston,  Bri.u:hton,  Beaconsfleld,  George  Town   (Simson,  No.  2488). 

Xanthophaea  setosa,  sp.  nov. 

Oval;  lieail  obli(|ucl.v  and  .strongly  narrowed  behind  eyes,  antennae  with  three 
ba-sal  .ioints  sparsely  setulose;  prothorax  transverse,  lateral  margins  explanate, 
reflc.xod,  b.isal  angles  a<'Ute,  surface  s])ai'sel.v  setose,  several  long  setae  on  anterior 


10 

(5) 

11 

(12) 

12 

(11) 

1 

(4) 

2 

(3) 

3 

(2) 

4 

(1) 

BY    THOMAS  r,.    SLOASE.  171 

part  of  sides;  elytra  wide,  ovate,  interstices  sparsely  setigero-piinctate;  tarsi 
fcetose  on  upper  surface,  fourth  joint  deeply  emarginate,  ungues  pe<'tinate.  Piceons; 
antennae  and  palpi  ferruginous;  leg's  feriiiginous-yello-w. 

Head  wide  across  eyes  (1.5  mm.);  vertex  convex,  setose;  front  wide,  sub- 
depressed;  labrum  rounded  at  angles,  apex  emargrinate  in  middle,  6-setose,  the 
setae  submarginal ;  palpi  stout,  labial  with  apical  joint  stout,  obliquely  trvirieate 
from  inner  side,  strongly  rounded  on  external  side ;  raentum  with  a  strong  median 
tooth.  Prothorax  broader  than  long  (1.3  x  i.g  mm.),  widest  at  anterior  third, 
wider  at  base  (l.-l  mm.)  than  apex  (1.2  mm.)  ;  apes  lightly  emai-ginate ;  anterior 
angles  rounded;  sides  rounded  on  anterior  two-thirds,  subsinuate  posteriorly  and 
meeting  base  at  right  angles;  basal  angles  acute,  denticulate;  base  truncate  on 
each  side  behind  margins,  a  little  produced  liackwards  and  truncate  in  middle; 
median  line  strongly  impressed,  the  setae  of  the  surface  rising  from  punctures. 
Elytra  ovate  {-i  ^  3.2  mm.),  lightly  convex,  widest  a  little  behind  middle,  -Tiore 
narrowed  to  base  than  to  apex,  rounded  on  sides;  apex  emarginate  at  suture;  outer 
angles  widely  rounded ;  setae  of  interstices  sparsely  and  rather  irregularly  placed, 
rising  from  conspicuous  punctures;  striole  at  base  of  first  interstice  i-hort. 
Abdomen  setigero-punctate.  in  c?  with  one,  in  2  with  two  setae  on  eadi  side  of 
apex.     Length,  7 — 8,  breadth,  3.2 — 3.4  mm. 

Hab. — Mount   Wellingfon    (Lea).     Five  specimens  have  been  examined. 

Thoroughly  distinguished    from  all    other  species  except    X.  pilosula  Chaud., 

.by  its  setose  upper  surface.      X.  pilosula  is  unknown  to  me  in  nature,  but  X.  setosa 

differs  greatly  from  the   description  of  that   species  which   is  described   a.s  having 

the  elytra  narrower  and   more  elongate     than   X.    vittata   Dej. ;   in   X.  setosa  the 

elytra  are  much  wider  and  more  oval  than  in  X.  rittata. 

Xanthoph.vea  beachinoderu.s  Chaud. 

Ilah. — Launceston  (Littler).  Also  from  Western  Australia.  South  Australia, 
Victoria,  and  Xew  South  Wales. 

Genus  T  r  i  r,  o  x  0  t  h  o  p  .s. 

Trigoxothops  pacifica  Erichson. 

I  have  seen  only  this  one  species  from  Tasmania;  it  is  a  species  which  varies 
considerablv  in  size  and  appearance;  alwavs  in  T.  pacifica  the  base  of  the  elvtra  is 
black. 

Tfnb.— Launceston,  Brighton,  St.  Patrick's  River.  Mole  Creek  ( Simsun.  No. 
2489). 

Genus  PniLOPHLOEUfi. 
Idiiis  Chaudoir. 

Table  of  Tasmanian   species. 

1  (6)     Prothorax    with    more    than    one    marginal    seta    anteriorly.     Apex    of 

abdomen  plurisetose. 

2  (3^     Prothorax  narrow,  usually  with  three  setae  on  each  side   (very  rarely 

with  two  or  four  setae) .     Intermediate  tarsi  in  c?  with  three  joints 
squamose  beneath distinguendtis  Chaud. 

3  (21     Prothorax   wide.     Intermediate   tarsi    in   S   with   two  joints   squamo:-<e 

beneath. 

4  (.5)     Size   major    (12   mm.  I.      Prothorax    lightly   emarginate,    three    to   five 

setae  anteriorly  on  each  side eticalvp/i  Germ . 


172  THE    CARABIDAE  OF    TASMAXIA, 

5  (41     Size  minor   (S.5 — 9  mm.  I.     Prothorax  deeply  emarginate.  two  strong 

setae  on  each  side  distant  from  apex,  several  fine  setules  at  apical 
angles.     (Apex  of  abdomen  in  J  4-setose  on  each  side.' 

viyitiiecophilus  Lea 

6  (li     Prothorax  with  one  marginal  seta  anteriorly. 

7  (Si     Black.     (Apex  of  abdomen  plurisetose. ) inoesliis  Chaud. 

8  (7»     Picsous:  head,  prothorax  (sometimes  disc  infuscatei.  margins  of  elytra, 

a  discoidal  plaga  on  each  elytron,  antennae,  and  legs  testaceous. 

9  (12)   Prothorax  deeply  emarginate. 

10  (111   Prothorax  with  basal  angles  rounded  oft:  elytra  3-maculate.     Apex  of 

abdomen  in  both  sexes  4-setose  on  each  side sivisoni  SI. 

11  (10'   Prothorax  with  basal  angles  marked,  though  obtuse:   elytra  bivittate, 

vittae  uniting  at  apex,  narrow  or  interrupted  at  apical  third.   Apex 
of  abdomen  in  ?  2-setose  on  each  side oh/iisiis  Chaud.r 

12  (9i     Prothorax  lightly  emarginate.      (Elytra  with   two  narrow  pointed  dis- 

coidal vittae.     Apex  of  abdom.en  in  V  2-setose  on  each  side.^ 

hhittiitiis  SI. 

yote. — I  take  the  present  opportunity  of  leeording  that  on  examining  the 
type  specimen  of  P.  ornati(i<  Blackl).,  it  was  evident  tliat  P.  tnaicatiis  SI.  was  the 
same  species. 

Philophloeus  nisTiXGrEXDUS  Chaudoir. 

This  species  is  distinguished  by  haWng  the  eljiral  vittae  usually  short  and 
pointed,  rarely  extending  to  the  second  puncture  of  third  interstice;  the  tyineal 
form  lias  generally  three  anterior  marginal  setae  on  the  prothorax,  rarely  four, 
and  in  one  Tasmanian  specimen  only  two  setae  on  each  side. 

Hah. — Turner'.^   Jlarsh,    St.    Patrick's  Plains.   ]\Iole   Creek   iSimsonl. 

Philophloeus  EfCALYPTi  Genuar. 

It  can  hardly  be  distinguished  from  P.  auxtralis  Dej..  except  by  the  inter- 
mediate tarsi  of  J  having  two.  not  three  joints  squamosa  beneath;  this  char;ieter 
I  have  found  con.stant  in  P.  eucah/pti  and  P.  distitifjiiendus  Chaud.  I  do  not  .see 
any  reasons  for  distinguishing  the  Tasmanian  fonn  by  the  varietal  name  ''tas- 
tiMitica,"  as  suggested  by  Blackburn. 

Hah. — Launceston,  Brighton    ( Simson,  Xo.  2485 ) .  • 

Philophloeus    JiYRiiECOPniLU.s   Lea. 

Hub. — ^fole  Creek.  Karoola    (Simson). 

FHiLOPin.OErs   hoestcs  Chaudoir. 

(=  Tdius  id.  Cliaud.) 

Il(d>. — Great  Lake  (Simson). 

PhILOPHLOEUS  SIMSOXI,  SJ).  nov. 

Oval,  depres.sed ;  head  depressed;  prothorax  deeply  emarginate,  postc'rior 
angles  rounded  off,  two  marginal  setae  on  each  side;  elytra  biplagiate  on  basal 
half;  apical  ventral  segment  in  c?  3-  or  4-setosp.  in  $  4-  or  5-setosc  on  each  side; 
intermediate  tarsi  in  c?  with  two  basal  joints  si|uamose  beneath.  Head,  disc  of 
prothorax.  tibiae,  tarsi,  palpi,  antennae,  and  undei-surface  more  or  less  ferru- 
ginous:   femora  and    margins    of  prothorax  testaceous;  eh-tra  piceous,    a    large 


BY    THOMAS   G.    SLOAXE.  173 

elongate  plaga  extentling'  from  base  to  about  half  the  length  on  interstices  3 — 5  of 
each  elytron,  a  rather  large  common  apical  mark  on  intei'stices  1 — 1  (emarginate 
on  anterior  margin),  and  a  narrow  lateral  margin  testaceous. 

Head  wide  (1.8  mm.  across  eyes),  strongly  obliquely  narrowed  behind  eyes, 
finely  shagreened  and  punctiilate ;  eyes  very  prominent.  Prothorax  transverse 
(1.5  X  2.7  mm.);  surface  covered  with  fine  setulose  punctures;  lateral  margins 
wide,  depressed ;  sides  strongly  rounded ;  base  shortly  lobate.  Elytra  (juadrate- 
oval  (4.6  >^  3.8  mm.);  striae  obsolescent;  base  arcuate  on  each  side,  emarginate 
in  middle.     Length    8.5.  breadth,  3.8  mm. 

Hab. — Launeeston,  Kelso,  Mole  Creek  (Simson,  No.  2847). 

I  know  of  no  described  species  attributed  to  Philophloeus  which  has  the  pat- 
fern  of  the  elytra  similar  to  that  of  P.  simsoni.  It  is  allied  to  P.  sydneyensis 
Blackb..  with  which  it  agrees  in  apical  emargination  of  the  prothorax.  and  the 
two  marginal  setae;  apex  of  abdomen  4-setose  on  each  side  in  S;  intermediate 
tarsi  with  two  joints  squamose  beneath ;  but  the  pattern  of  the  elytra  is  different ; 
in  P.  sydneyensis  the  \)a\.e  vittae  reach  the  apex,  where  they  unite.  Compared 
with  P.  myrmecophilus  Lea,  the  prothorax  has  the  anterior  angles  less  rotimdate, 
not  plurisetulose.  the  sides  not  with  two  or  three  setae  anteriorly;  eh'tra  with 
shorter  plagae,  and   apex  testaceous   in  middle. 

Philophloeus  obtu.sus  Chaudoir? 

Two  specimens  (?,  No.  2674)  are  in  the  Simson  collection  without  exact 
locality,  which  I  identify  as  P.  ohtusus  Chaud.  Prothorax  with  two  setae  on 
each  side;  apex  of  abdomen  in  ?  bisetose  on  each  side;  it  resembles  P.  simsoni  in 
pattern,  but  the  testaceous  plagae  are  more  elongate,  in  one  specimen  attaining 
the  apical  macula,  the  prothorax  is  differently  shaped,  being  less  oblique  and 
arcuate  on  each  side  of  base,  basal  angles  marked,  but  obtuse  at  summit  and  pre 
ceded  by  a  light  sinuosity.     Length,  7 — 8,  breadth,  3.5 — 3.7  mm. 

Philophloeus  bivittatu.s,  sp.  no\ . 

Oval,  depressed;  ])rothorax  transverse,  two  lateral  marginal  setae  on  each 
side,  basal  angles  obtuse;  elytra  bivitt ate,  the  vittae  long,  pointed,  apex  and  ninth 
interstice  piceous;  apex  of  abdomen  (t?)  2-setose  on  each  side.  Piceous;  mai-- 
gins  of  prothorax  (widely),  vittae,  lateral  channel,  border  and  inflexed  margins  of 
elytra,  femora,  middle  of  prosternum,  and  metasternum  testaceous;  head,  an- 
tennae;  mouth-parts,  tibiae,  and  tarsi  ferruginous;  abdomen  infuscate. 

Head  wide  (1.65  mm.  across  eyes),  shagTcened,  sparsely  punctulate.  Pro- 
thorax transverse  (1.3  X  2.5  mm.);  apex  lightly  emarginate;  sides  rounded, 
widely  and  obtusely  subangulate  at  anterior  marginal  seta,  oblique  to  base;  basal 
angles  obtuse ;  basal  lobe  short ;  base  obliquely  truncate  on  each  side.  Elytra  oval- 
quadrate  (4.3  X  3.4  mm.),  finely  and  closely  setulose-punetate,  faintly  striate; 
inner  apical  angles  obtuse;  base  not  roundly  prominent  on  each  side.  Leugth, 
7.5.  breadth,  3.4  mm. 

Hob. — Launeeston   (Simson).      Two   specimens. 

Nearly  allied  to  P.  confertus  Blackburn.  From  the  Western  Australian 
species  which  I  identify  as  P.  confertus  it  differs  by  <S  with  tarsal  vesture  on  under 
side  of  three  basal  joints  of  intermediate  tarsi ;  colour  darker,  especially  pro- 
thorax not  wholly  testaceous;  prothorax  less  transverse,  less  roundly  narrowed 
anteriorly,  anterior  angles  a  little  indicated,  not  so  roundly  obtuse.  P.  confertus 
has  the  apex  of  abdomen  in  both  sexes  bisetose  on  each  side. 


174  THE    CARABIDAE  OF    TASMANIA, 

Genus  A  G  o  x  o  c  h  i  l  a. 
Table  of  Tasmanian  species. 

1  (10)   Prothorax  transverse,  strongly  ampliate  behind  anterior  angles.    (Head 

short,  eyes  hemispherical.) 

2  (5)     Elytra  with  discal  spots  transverse,  greatly  reduced  in  length  beyond 

fifth  interstice. 

3  (4)     Prothorax   with   sides  oblique   to   base,   basal   angles   obtuse.     Length, 

5.0 — 6.5  mm ciirtula  Erichs. 

4  (3)     Prothorax  with  sides  sinuate  to  base,  basal  angles  rectangular.   Length, 

5  mm bhnaculaia     SI. 

5  (2)     Elytra  with   discal  spots  variable,   but   not  greatly   reduced   in   length 

beyond  fifth  interstice. 

6  (9)     Prothorax  ampliate  and  strongly  rounded  at  widest  part,  evidently  nar- 

rowed to  base;   sides  subsinuate  before  base. 

7  (8)     Size  major  (7 — 7.5  mm.).     Prothorax  with  one  or  two  marginal  setae 

before  middle ,   ..    ..  plagiata   SI. 

8  (7)     Size  minor   (4.5 — 5  mm.).     Prothorax  with  one  seta  before  middle 

sinuosa  Chaud. 

9  (6)     Prothorax  lightly  rounded  at  widest  part,  obliquely  narrowed  to  base. 

(Base  wide;    basal  angles  obtuse.)     Length,   5 — 6  mm. 

binoiata    White. 

10  (1)     Prothorax    lightly    ampliate    behind    anterior    angles.       (Form    rather 

elongate;  elytra  with  narrow  discal  spots.) 

11  (12)  Size  minor    (4.5 — 5  mm.).      Head   short,   eyes   hemispherical 

/e>!  est  rata  Blackb. 

12  (11)   Size    major    (5.5 — 6    mm.).      Head    longer,    eyes    prominent,    but    less 

than  hemispherical. 

13  (14)   Prothorax  with  basal  angles  obtuse;  anterior  margmal  seta  at  anterior 

third.     Length,  5.5 — 6  mm bigiitiata  Cha.u6.. 

14  (13)   Prothorax  with  basal  angles  sharply  marked,  anterior  marginal  seta  be- 

hind  anterior  third.     Length,   5.5   mm Jlindersi 'SX. 

Agonochila  cuetola  Erichson. 
(=  A.   corticalis  Chaudoir.) 

Ilab. — Launeeston,  Kelso,   Beaconsfleld,  Avoca,  Turner's   Marsh,  Epping,   In- 

torlakon    (SiiiLSon,   No.   2487);  Wilmot,  Waratali   (Carter  and  Lea).     Common  in 
R.E.  Australia. 

Agonochila  hi.aiaci^lata,  sp.  nov. 

Depressed ;  i)rothorax  transverse,  lightly  emarginate  at  apex,  sides  strongly 
ampliate  at  widest  part,  sinuate  posteriorly,  basal  angles  reftangular,  lateral 
margins  explaiiate.  wide  anteriorly;  elytra  widest  behind  middle,  decidedly  nar- 
rowed to  base,  i>uneturation  rather  coarse.  Piceous;  elytra  3-uiaculate,  nmeulae 
testaceous,  discal  pair  irregularly  oval,  extending  across  interstices  3 — 6,  apical 
spot  connuon  to  both  elytra,  wide,  extending  forward  on  third  and  fnnrtli  inter- 
stices. 

Head  pimehdale,  dejiressed  (1.25  mm.  across  eyes);  eyes  hemispliern-al. 
Prothorax  widely  transverse  (1  ^  1.65  mm.);  sides  strongly  rounded,  suban.gu- 
late  beside  anterior  marginal  seta;  sides  strongly  sinuate  posteriorly,  meeting 
base  at  right  angles;  apex  lightly  and  widely  emarginate;  base  shortly  lohate,  cut 
sharply  on  each  side;  basal  angles  sliarp,  almost  rectangular;  disc  a  little  convex, 


BY    THOMAS   G.    SLOANE.  175 

covered  with  small  setuluse  puuftures;  margins  wide,  ruguloso-puiictate.  Length, 
5,  breadth,   2.3  mm. 

Hah. — Launceston   (Bimson). 

Only  the  specimen  on  whit-h  the  description  is  founded  suits  it  in  regard  to 
the  sharply  rectangular  basal  angles  of  the  prothorax;  a  second  specimen 
(gummed  on  the  same  card  with  the  type)  has  the  prothorax  similar,  except  that 
the  ante-basal  sinuosity  of  the  sides  is  less  developed,  and  the  summit  of  the 
angles  is  a  little  obtuse;  a  third  specimen  (c?)  resembling  the  second  was  num- 
bered 3688;  the  pattern  of  the  elytra  in  these  three  specimens  is  the  same. 

Agonochila  plagiata  Sloane. 

Tlab. — Sheffield.  (Carter).  I  originally  found  this  species  on  the  trunks  of 
Eucalyptus   curiacea   in    N.S.    Wales 

Agonochila  sinuo.sa  Chaudoir. 

Depressed ;  protliorax  transverse,  lightly  emarginate  at  apex,  base  and  spex 
of  about  equal  width  (LI  mm.),  basal  angles  obtuse,  lateral  margins  explmate 
posteriorly,  narrow  anteriorly;  elytra  widest  behind  middle,  a  little  narrowed  to 
base,  puncturation  fine.  Head  rather  dark  red;  prothorax  ferruginous,  some- 
times slightly  infuscate  on  disc;  elytra  piceous  with  testaceous  markings,  some- 
times bimaculate  on  anterior  half,  and  with  an  apical  mark  common  to  both  eJsrtra 
(trimaculate  form),  sometimes  the  two  discal  marks  reach  the  apical  one  along 
the  fourth,  or  fourth  and  fifth  interstices  (bivittate  form)  ;  tibiae  and  antennae 
ferruginous,  femora  and  basal  joint  of  antennae  testaceous.  Length,  4.5 — 5  mm. 
The  measurements  of  a  specimen  are: — Length,  5,  proth.,  1  x  1.5,  el.,  2.8  X  2.2 
mm. 

Hah. — Launceston  (Carter);  Hobart   (Lea). 

I  have  identified  A.  sinuosa  Chaud.,  from  the  description  of  that  author,  w  hich 
is  insufficient.  In  pattern  of  elytra  it  is  variable,  so  much  so  that  it  seems  to 
me  very  probable  that  A.  ritlula  Chaud.,  will  prove  to  be  the  same.  It  was  num- 
bered 3315  in  the  Simson  Coll..  and  under  that  number  there  was  also  a  second 
specimen  having  the  elytral  pattern  of  the  trimaculate  form,  but  with  the  three 
spots  much  larger,  prothorax  with  margins  wide  anteriorly;  I  believe  this  repre- 
sents an  undescribed  species,  but  it  could  not  be  satisfactorily  dealt  with  on  a 
single   specimen . 

Agonochila  binotata  White. 

After  comparison  of  Tasmanian  specimens  with  one  from  New  Zealai'.d,  I 
consider  the  species  the  same ;  it  has  not  yet  been  found  on  the  mainland  of  Aus- 
tralia. 

Hab.— Mole  Creek  (Simson,  No.  2610). 

Agonochila  fenestrata  Blackburn. 
Hab. — Tasmania    (Simson,  No.   2898).     Widely  spread   on  the  mainland. 

Agoxochila  biguttata  Chaudoir. 

Hab. — Launceston   (Simson,  No.  2735)  .     Widely  spread  on  the   mainland. 

Agonochila  flinders:,  sp.  nov. 

Elongate.  Prothorax  subquadrate  (1  X  1.4  mm.);  sides  lightly  sinuate 
posteriorly;    basal  angles  subrectangular.  obtuse  at   summit.     Elytra   much    wider 


176  TUE    CARABIDAE   OF    TASMAKIA,. 

tliiiii  piothorax  (3  X  2.3  mm.),  resembling  those  of  A.  higuttata,  but  a  little 
wide)-,  veiy  flnely  setulose-punetate.  Head,  inothorax,  tibiae,  tarsi,  and  ant'-nnae 
ferruginous;  elytra  piceous-brown,  a  nebulous  elongate  spot  on  disc  of  eacii 
elytron  between  anterior  and  second  setiferous  puncture  of  third  interstice. 
Length,  5.5,  breadth,  2.3. 

Hab. — Flinders  Is.   (Simson,   No.  3491).     Two  specimens. 
Allied   to  -1.  higuttata  Chaud.,  but  differing  by  head  and  prothora.x    reddish; 
prothorax  wider,  anterior    marginal  seta  further    from    apex,    basal    angles    more 
decidedly   marked;  elytra  proiuirtionately  wider,  diseal  spots    less  clearly   defined, 
tlie  apical,  light-coloured  s]iot   is  wanting,  ))ut   tliis  often  occurs  in  A.   higuttata. 

Genus  D  I  a  B  a  T  i  c  T.'  s. 

DiABATicus  austrai.is  ErichsoH. 

Hah. — Launceston,  St.  Marys,  Flinders  Is.   (Simson,  No.  2609). 

Genus  Microlestes  f. 

Table  of  Tasmanian  Species. 

Elytra  piceous,  shoulders  and  usually  an  apical  .spot  testaceous  /iiaiuralis   Macl. 

Upper  surface  black,  elytra  shining yamie   Blackb. 

MiCROLESTE.s   (f)  HUMERAi.i.s  Macleay. 
7/«^.— Hobart   (Lea). 

MiCROLESTES    (?)  YARKAE  I?lackburn. 
2/a6.— New  Norfolk  (Lea). 

Genus  A  n  o  m  o  t  a  r  u  s. 
Anomotabus  aeneu.s  Macleay. 
Huh. — Hrightun,  East  Tamar  (Simson.  Xii.  2908). 
Tribe  Pentagonicini. 

Neck  condyliform;    eyes  of  ordinary   size Pkntagonica- 

Neck  wide;  eyes  unusually  largo  and  prominent Scopodes. 

Genus  S  c  o  P  o  ij  E  .s. 
Table  of  Tasmanian  species  . 

1  (10)   Prothorax  with  two  marginal  setae  on  each  side. 

2  (3)     Prothora.x  with  posterior  marginal   seta  at  posterior  anglts,  the&;   not 

dentiform.     Length,  6.3  mm iasmaiiicus  BuX&s 

3     (21     Prothorax    with    posterior   marginal    seta   on   an   ante-basal,    triangular, 

dentiform  prominence. 
•1     (9)     Head   with   frontal   declivity   depressed,   strongly  shagreened;    clypeus 
strongly  shagreened,   not  divided   from   front  by  a  deep  transverse 
impression. 
5     (6i     Black    (including    legs    and    upper    side    of    basal    joint    of    antennae). 

Length,  5  mm. boops  ^lichi. 

Rather  metallic,  legs  lurid  or  fiavous. 

Legs  lurid;  antennae  infuscate  after  third  joint.     Length,  4 — 4.5  mm. 

sig^ Hiatus    Germ . 
Legs  and   antennae  testaceous;     (tarsi    and    sometimes    antennae    to- 
wards apex  rather  infuscate).     Length,  5 — 5.5  mm.     Jiavipcs  Bla^-k, 
Head    with    frontal    declivity    convex,    not    shagreened;    clypeus    with 
basal  part  raised  into  a  convex  transverse  ridge,  di\-ided  from  front 
by   a  deep   transverse  impression.      (Black,   each   elytron   deeply   3- 

foveate.)     Length,  3.6—5.5  mm alerrimu.s  Chaud. 

10     ( 1 )     Prothorax   strongly   angustate   to   base   without  ante-basal   prominence 
or  posterior  marginal  set.-..     Length,   6  mm griffilhi  SI. 


6 

(5) 

* 

(8) 

s 

(7) 

9 

(4) 

BY   THOMAS  G.    SLOANE. 


177 


SOOPODES  TASMANICUS  Bates. 
iTab.— Laimceston,    Deiiison    Gorge,  George's  Bay,    Deloraine,  Strahau    (Sim- 
sou,  No.  311(i);  Wilmot  (Carter  and  Lea).     Also  found  in  Gippsland. 

SCOPODES  BOOP.s  Erichson. 
Haij.— Laimceston,  West  Tamar,  Ben  Lomond  (5000  feet),  Strahan   (Simson, 
Nos.  3117,  3691);  Cradle   Mountain    (Carter  and  Lea).     Widely  spread   in  Aus- 
tralia. 

ScoPODES  SIGILLATUS  Gcruiar. 

{=  S.  intermedius  Blackburn.) 
7fof,._Evanda!e,    Epping'.    Flinders  Is.    (Simson,   No.  2971).     Widely  spread 
in  Australia. 

I  think  there  is  no  doubt  but  that  No.  2971  of  the   Simson  Coll.  is  S.  inter- 
medins Blac'kl).,   hut  I   eannot  differentiate  it  from  .S'.  sigillatus  Germ. 
ScoPODES  PLAViPES  Blackburn. 
(=  S.   lineatii.s  Lea.) 
Hab. — Launeeslon,    Golconda    (Simson.    No.    .3507);     Waratali    (Carter     and 
Lea);   Iving  Is.   (Lea). 

I  have  in  my  collection  a  specimen  of  ,S'.  flavipes  Blackb.,  sent  to  me  under 
that  name  by  Mr.  Blackburn,  and  a  cotype  of  .S'.  lineatus  Lea,  received  from  Mr. 
Lea.  also  several  specimens  from  near  Melbourne.  With  these  materials  before 
me  I  cannol  diflVrentiatc  S'.  flarijies  iind  N.  IhieiitKs.  therefore  have  felt  compelled 
to  unite  them. 

ScOPODES  ATERBiMU.s  Chaudoir. 

(==  S.  sydneyensis  Sloane.) 
Specimens  which  I  obtained  at  Albany  are  the  same  as  my  6'  sydneyensis; 
other  specimens  which  I  took  in  South-western  Australia  are  the  form  with  the 
head  more  rug-ulose,  which  I  considered  ,s'.  aterrimus  in  1903:  one  of  these  speci- 
mens measures  5.5  mm.  in  leni;th.  Witli  the  data  now  availahle  1  consider  one 
name  sufficient   for  the  species. 

Hah. — Great   Lake    (No.    11940,    South    Australian     Museum)-     Launeostoii 
(Littler). 

ScoPODES  GRIPFITHI    Sloane. 

Hah. — Mount  Welling'ton    (Lea  and  Griffith). 
Tribr  Pseudomorphini. 

Antennae  short Adelotopus. 

Antennae  long,  slender Silphomobpha 

Genus  A  d  e  l  o  t  o  p  u  .s. 
Table  of  Tasmanian  species. 

1  (4)     Prosternum  not  carinate. 

2  (3)     Prothorax   with   anterior   angles   prominent,    triangular;    upper   surface 

impunctate.     Elytra    without    post-basal    pores.     Length    7.5 — S.5 
mm haemorrhoidalis  Erichs, 

3  (2*     Prothorax  with  anterior  angles  not  prominent,  widely  obtuse;   upper 

surface  minutely  punctate.      Elytra  with  two  post-basal  pores  near 

scutellum.     Length,   5.5 — 6.5   mm scolytides  Newm. 

i     (1)     Prosternum  carinate.     Length.  5,6  mm.     (After  Blackburn.) 

tasvumi  Blackb. 


178  THE   CARABIDAF.    OF    TASMANIA. 

Adei.otopus  hakxiorrhoidalis   Eriehson. 
(=  ,1.  inqtiinatus  Newman.) 
Hab. — Kelso    (Simson,  No.  '2(ill).     Widely  spread  in  Australia. 

Adelotopus  scolytides  Newman. 
What  I  consider  the  typical  form  has  the  elytra  with  a  very  narrow  reddish 
apical    eilge    (Strahan.  Zeehan.    Simson);   other  specimens  are    coloured    like    ^1. 
haemorrhoidalis   Erichs.        [Brighton    (Sirason);  Parattah,    Hobart    (Lea).]     Also 
found  on  the  mainland. 

Genus    S  I  L  P  H  0  M  o  R  P  H  A. 

Tasmanian  species. 
Black,  prothorax  and  elytra  with  a    narrow  reddish  margin.     Length,  8 — 9  mm. 

decipiens   Westw. 
Black.     Length,  12— 15  mm tasmanica     Cast. 

Only  S.  decipiens  Westw.,  was  in  the  Simson  Coll.,  numbered  2812,  but  with- 
out exact  locality.  S.  dubia  Cast.,  is  conspecitic  with  .s'.  tasmanica,  as  I  have 
ascertained  from  named  specimens  in  the  Howitt  Coll.  S.  decipiens  and  S.  las- 
manica  have  a  wide  range  on  the  mainland. 


APPENDIX. 

List  of  species  now  attributed  to  Tasmania,  but  of  which  I  have  not  seen 
specimens  from  that  island,  or  which  have  not  been  dealt  with  in  this  paper. 

Species  marked  with  an  asterisk  are  only  known  to  me  by  description. 

Species  marked  with  a  note  of  interrogation  are  those  which  I  believe  to  be 
doubtfully  Tasmanian,  and  which  might  be  deleted  from  the  list  of  Tasmanian 
species  till  they  are  ilctinitely  reported  from  tliere. 

'!('liri>ia  lepiila   Putz.  ^Simo(lonliis  urtlionioides  Cliaud. 

*C((r,enutH  pnlitidiim  Westw.  *Lo.ta)idrus  gai/utitius  Cast. 

"Promecoderus  modeslus  Cast.  ILeptopodiis  subgaijatinus  Cast. 

•p.  subdepressus  Guer.  'Ilomothes  rotundatiis  Blackb. 

Diaphnromencs  amaroides  Cast.  *Lucordairei  anchomenoides  Cast. 

?/).    australasiae  Dej.  *L.   erichsoni  Cast. 

I.Thenarotes  discoidalis  Blackb.  *Dicniciiile  piaictipeiniis  Cast. 

*Harpalus  vestigialis  Erichs.  "Xanthophaea  anijustula  Chaud. 

''Bembidinm  hobarti   Blackb.  *Trir/()iiothops  lineata  Dej 

*Dyscolus  (?)   a M»(rafo  Erichs.  T.  longiplaija  Cham\. 

'Vpscolns   (?)  dilatatus  Erich-s.  *T)iabaticus  pauper  Blackb. 

'Idacarabus  flavipes  Lea.  Ct/mindis  iUauarrae  Mad. 

/.  truglodi/les  Lea.  Pentaijonica  vittipeiniis  Chaud. 

ISimodotitus  ehmpatus  Chaud.  *Adclcit(ipiis  tasmaiii  Blackb. 

Three  other  sjjecies  recorded  from  King  Island  by  Mr.  Lea  are  not  dealt  with 
in  tills  paper,  viz.,  Amblf/lelus  breris  Blackb.,  Chlaenius  australis  DeJ.,  and  Trig- 
onothops  vittipeinii''   SI. 


179 


ORDINAEY  MONTHLY  MEETING. 
28th  April,  1920. 
Mr.  J.   J     Fletcher,  M.A.,  B.Sc-.  President,  in  the  Chair. 

Messrs.  William  Faris  Blakely,  Butanie  Gartlens,  Sydney;  Arthur 
Neville  St.  George  Handcock  Burkitt,  B.Sc,  M.H.,  Lecturer  in  Anatomy,  The 
University  of  Sydney,  H.4rry  Flocktox  Clarke,  The  Hillside,  View  St.,  Chats- 
wood;  Rt.  Rev.  JO.SEPH  Wilfrid  Dwyer,  R.C.  Bishop  of  Wagga;  Albert  H. 
Elston,  50  Lefevre  Terrace,  North  Adelaide;  Anthony  Musghave,  Wycombe 
Road,  Neutral  Bay;  Torrington  Hawke  Pincombe,  B.A.,  Public  School,  May- 
field,  Waratah;  and  Augustus  Selwyn  Taylor,  Geological  Survey  of  N.S.W., 
Sydney,  were  elected  Ordinary  Members  of  the  Society. 

The  President  announced  that  the  Council  had  elected  ]\Iessrs.  C.  Hedlev, 
F.L.S.,  W.  W.  Froggatt,  F.  L.S..  A.  G.  Hamilton,  and  Professor  H.  G. 
Chapman,  M.D.,  B.S.,  to  be  Vice-Presidents;  and  Mr.  J.  H.  Campbell  (Royal 
Mint,  Sydney)   to  be  Hon.  Treasurer  for  the  current  Session,  1920-21. 

Tiie  President  announced  that  a  Special  General  Meeting  of  the  Society  will 
be  held  on  Monday,  14th  ,Iune,  for  the  purpose  of  celebrating  the  centenary  of  the 
birth  of  Sir  William  Macleay. 

The  President  reminded  members  of  the  Council's  invitation  to  subscribe  to- 
wards the  cost  of  the  Honour  Roll. 

The  President  also  reminded  members  of  the  Council's  request  tiiat  notices  of 
exhibits  should  be  curtailed  and  confined  to  the  scientific  significance  of  the  objects 
exhibited . 

The  Donations  and  Exchanges  received  since  the  previous  Monthly  Meeting 
(31st  March,  1920),  amounting  to  9  Vols.,  49  Parts  or  Nos.,  7  Bulletins,  4  Reports, 
and  8  Pamphlets,  etc.,  received  from  46  Societies  and  Institutions,  and  one  private 
donor,  were  laid  upon  the  table. 

notes  and  exhibits. 

Mr.  Fred  Turner  exhibited  a  specimen  of,  and  offered  observations  on,  Amar- 
antvs  macrocarpiis  Bentli..  which,  after  the  January  and  February  rains  of  this 
year,  covered,  with  Boerhuavia  diffusa  Linn.,  thousands  of  acres  of  Wootton  Sta- 
tion, Upper  Hunter,  to  the  exclusion  of  all  other  herliage,  including  many  noxious 
exotic  weeds  which  previously  had  been  abundant.  The  first-named  plant,  locally 
known  as  "Boggabri,"  has  Ijeen  used  for  salad,  for  which  it  is  considered  superior 
to  "water  cress." 

Several  years  ago  the  late  Honble.  G.  H.  Cox,  M.L.C.,  brought  to  the  exhibitor 
for  identification  from  his  station  on  the  Liverpool  Plains  a  specimen  of  Stipa 
iiristirjliimis  F.  v.  M.,  that  was  nine  feet  six  inches  tall.  That  growtii  had  resulted 
from  heavy  summer  rains,  and  had  completely  suppressed  thistles  which  had  pre- 
viously occupied  thousands  of  acres  on  his  property. 


180 

lu  Uie  Brewaiiina  district  souu'  years  ago,  after  suinnier  raius,  twenty-five 
tliousand  acres  of  land  became  densely  covered  with  Anisacantha  muricata  iloq.; 
where  only  a  few  plants  of  this  species  had  previously  been  seen.  During  Mr. 
Turner's  extensive  travels  over  the  country  he  had  made  a  number  of  similar 
observations  on  the  indigenous  and  acclimatised  flora,  and  he  purposed  publishing 
these  when  time  permitted. 

Mr.  J.  L.  Froggatt  exhil)iled  a  spc'cimeii  of  Marlijiiia  lulca  which  has  heconie  a 
noxious  weed  in  some  country  districts  owing  to  the  seeds  becoming  caugiit  in  the 
wool,  or  getting  round  the  hocks  of  sheep  or  horses  t)r  cattle.  Men  employed 
in  cutting  the  plants  become  extremely  dizzy  in  ihe  head  after  working  on  it  for 
any  lengfh  of  time  It  is  known  locally  as  the  "Ram's  Horn''  or  "Devil's  Oriii.  ' 
The  specimen  came  from  live  miles  south  of  Dalby,  (Queensland. 

Mr.  Walter  W  Froggatt  exiiibited,  and  read  a  note  im,  thi'  identiticatioii  nl  ihe 
Thrips  damaging  the  tobacco  in  the  Tamworth  District  as  TItripa  striatu-s,  the 
"Grass  Thrips"  of  the  United  States,  not  previously  recorded  from  Australia;  also 
other  small  Hemiptera  infesting  the  leaves. 

Mr.  E.  ('heel  exhibited  a  leaf  and  fruits  of  Pisonia  Bruiiotiiana,  together  with 
an  abstract  from  a  letter  received  by  Mr.  Hugh  Dixson,  of  ''Abergeldie,"  Summer 
HiU,  from  Mr.  K.  E.  Shaw,  of  Austinmer,  as  follows: — "A  young  lady  was  in  tlie 
scrub  yesterday,  and  noticed  a  little'  bird  fluttering  and  bemg  held  captive,  she 
tbiDking  a  large  spider 'had  caught  it,  but  found  it  hopelessly  stuck  fast  to  the 
leaves  of  a  tree  by  the  gum  exuded  from  the  flower  seed  bud.  She  did  her  best 
to  free  the  little  creature,  but  some  of  the  tail  feathers  held  fast,  and  it  got  away, 
somewhat  the  worse  for  the  encounter." 

For  previous  records  of  this  species  trapping  birds,  etc.,  by  the  exudation  ot 
a  viscid  substance  on  the  ribs  of  the  fruits,  see  these  Proceedings,  1915,  p.  029. 


181 


A  NEW  GENXTS   OF  AUSTRALIAN   DELrilACIDAE  (HOMOPTERA). 

By  1'\   UiiR.  F.E.S. 

(Communicated  hi/  E.    IP.   Feriiicoii,  31. B.,   Ch.M.) 

(Witli   iiiu'  trx(-li};iirf. ) 

Very  little  is  known  of  the  Australian  Ddphacidae,  and  most,  if  not  all,  of 
the  species  recorded  are  from  the  Eastern  States.  The  finding  of  an  undescribed 
species  from  Kins;'  George's  Sound,  South-west  Australia,  in  the  Macleay  Collec- 
tion at  the  Sydney  University  is  therefore  of  interest. 

T  have  proposed  a  new  genus  for  this  species  for  reasons  stated  Ijelow,  and 
consider  that  it  is  entogenic.  Of  the  fourteen  genera,  containing  about  fifty  species, 
recorded  as  Australian,  I  consider  only  one.  with  one  species  (Proterosydne 
arhorea  Kirk.)  can  be  regarded  as  entogenic,  all  the  others  being  genera  whose 
centres  of  density  are  situated  outside  of  Australia,  or  they  are  so  nearly  allied  to 
such  genera  as  to  demonstrate  their  origin  clearly. 

The  character  of  the  tibial  spur  places  tliis  genus  in  the  Tropidocephalini. 
From  Tropidocephalus  it  differs  in  having  the  head  much  more  elongate  and  flat- 
tened laterally  instead  of  horizontally.  The  Hawaiian  genus  DictiiophorodelriJm.r 
Swezey  is  superficially  like  it,  but  belongs  to  the  Alohini ;  the  head  is  not  fiattened 
laterally  and  the  tegniina  are  truncate  at  apex.  The  South  African  genus  Embo- 
lophora  Stal,  I  only  know  by  the  description.  Stal  sank  it  into  Libuniia  Stal,  st) 
tor  the  present  we  must  consider  that  it  belongs  to  the  Delphacini.  The  head  is 
not  so  long  a.s  in  Pseudemholophora. 

PSEUDEMBOLOPHORA,  n.g. 

Type,  Pseudemholophora  macleayi. 

Head  very  long  and  flattened  lateraUy,  three  times  as  long  as  the  pro-  and 
meso-nota  together;  vertex  narrower  at  apex  than  at  base,  a  median  carina  on 
basal  third  after  which  it  fades  out;  median  frontal  carina  entire  from  base  to 
apex,  lateral  carinae  from  base  to  eye,  and  another  from  near  the  eye  to  apex,  a 
transverse  carina  on  gena;  eye  oblong  with  a  slight  antennal  emargination ;  clypeus 
in  profile  produced  into  a  strong  point  in  middle,  tricarinate;  antennae  terate 
reaching  slightly  beyond  apes  of  face,  fii'st  joint  about  as  long  as  wide,  second 
joint  twice  the  length  of  first,  slightly  enlarged  to  apex,  arista  apical.  Pronotum 
Iricarinate,  lateral  carinae  very  slightly  diverging  posteriorly,  reaching  the  hind 
margin;  mesonotum  tricarinate.  Hind  femora  short,  reaching  one-foiu'th  from 
apex  of  abdomen  in  male  and  about  one-half  in  female ;  tibiae  longer  than  femora ; 
tarsi  shorter  than  tibiae,  first  tarsal  joint  sube(|ual  to  the  other  two  together; 
spur  slightly  shorter  than  first  tarsus,  cultrate,  thick,  slightly  concave  on  inner 
surface,  a  strong  tooth  at  apex  but  none  on  hind  margin.  Teginina  long  and 
nan-ow,  the  apex  produced  to  an  acute  point. 


182 


A    NEW    GENUS  OF  ADSTRALIAX   bKLPHACIDAE     (HOMOPTERa), 


PSEUDEMBOLOPHORA    MACLEAYI^  D.Sp. 

Male. — Brachypterous ;  ocliraceous  or  light  brown,  earinae  of  bead  and  thorax 
ligbtcr;   cloi-sum   of    abdomen  dark  brown.     Tegnnina   hyaline,  veins    and  apex  of 
tegmina  brown,  the  brown  veins  broken  by  small  white  dots.     The  pygofer  cannot 
be   made   out  very  well   as  the  specimen  is   carded  and   too  old   to  relax    and    re 
mount.     Tlie  ventral  edge  of  opening  straight,  the  sides  angTdar  and  curved  in- 


n 


J 


Pstudt'inbo/op/ioia  iinnUayi.  ii.sp. 

1.  Left  tegmen. 

2.  Head  and  pronotum,   lateral  view. 

3.  The   same,   dorsal   view. 

ward;  anal  segment  large  with  large  anal  style;  genital  styles  small,  slightly  curved 
and  gi-adually  narrowed  to  a  point.     Lengfh,  5.5  mm.;  tegmen,  3  mm. 

Female. — Macroi)terous  and  V)rachypterous ;  similar  in  colour  to  the  male. 
Pygofer  large,  ovipositor  small,  reaching  about  half  way  along  pygofer;  anal  seg- 
ment large,  wider  than  deep,  anal  style  large,  nanowly  oblong.  Leng-th.  (i  mm.; 
tegmen,  4  mm. 

Hub. — King  George's   Sound,   South-west   Australia. 

The  material  consists  of  one  carded  male  in  good  condition  witli  tegmina  b\it 
no  wings,  as  is  generally  the  condition  of  brachypterous  Homoptera;  two  females, 
one  on  a  pin  in  fairly  good  condition  with  teginina  and  no  wing's,  and  one  female 
on  card  with  no  tegmina  but  witli  wing-s  present,  l)ut  in  a  bad  condition.  'I'his  in- 
dicates that  tliere  are  l)oth  macropterous  and  bracliyplerous  forms,  at  least  in  the 
lemale  .sex.  Whether  the  macropterous  forms  liave  a  different  shai)ed  legmen  I 
am  unable  to  say.  There  is  also  one  nearly  full  grown  nymph  carded;  the  liead 
is  not  so  long  projiortionately  and  the  tegmina  jiads  are  pointed  at  ai>ex.  All  the 
material    is   in  the  Macleay    Collection. 


183 


AN    UNDESCKIBED    SPECIES    OF  CLYTOCOSMUS    SKUSE. 

(Tipuliilae,   Dipti'i'ii. ) 
ISv  C"n.u!i,Ks  P.    Alkxaxder.  Pii.D.,  Ukuana,  Illinois,  U  S.A. 
{Communicated  hij  It.  J.  Tillyanl.  M.A.,  D.Sc,  F.L.S.,  F.E.S.) 

The  gemis  ('liitocoNmii.y  was  erecteil  by  Skuse*  to  receive  the  reinarkablv 
beautiful  new  species  of  crane-fly,  Clytocofimits  helmsi,  from  Mt.  Kosciusko,  New 
South  Wales.  The  senus  has  remained  monotypic  until  the  present  day.  Through 
the  kindness  of  Dr  R.  J.  Tillyard,  I  am  now  able  to  describe  a  second  species,  a 
superb  fly  from  the  Dorrigo  Tableland,  about  three  hundred  miles  north  of  Syd- 
ney. Some  time  ago  Dr.  Tillyard  wrote  me  that  he  had  once  found  a  magnificent 
crane-fly  in  the  Northern  scrubs  with  much  the  general  appearance  of  a  great 
robber-fly.  The  only  specimen  then  in  his  possession  was  an  injured  female  in 
rather  poor  condition  to  be  made  a  type.  An  effort  was  made  to  secure  additional 
specimens  during  March  and  April,  1919,  when  the  insect  was  due  to  appet^r  on 
the  wing,  but  a  prolonged  drought,  followed  by  floods,  badly  damaged  the  habitat 
frequented  by  this  fly,  and  it  was  impossible  to  secure  more  material  at  this  tune. 
Dr.  Tillyard  has  kindly  sent  me  the  unique  specimen  above  discussed,  and  it  is 
made  the  type  of  tiie  new  species  descrilied  herewith.  It  is  with  great  ple.'jsure 
that  this  exquisite  creation  is  dedicated  to  Dr.  Tillyard,  through  whose  kindlv 
interest  the  species  was  first  made  known  to  science.  The  type  has  been  returned 
to  Dr.  Tillyard.  and  will  ultimately  be  placed  in  the  Australian  Museum  w'ith  the 
Skuse  types. 

The  two  known  species  of  Chjtocosmiis  may  be  separated  by  means  of  the 
following  key: — 

Prothorax  black;  mesonotal  praescutum  orange  with  a  black  spot  anteriorly; 
pseudosutural  foveae  black;  scutellum  and  postnotum  velvety  black;  thoracic  pleura 
velvety  black  with  brown  and  white  spots;  abdomen  velv'jty  black  with  white  spots, 
only  the  genital  segment  reddish  fulvous helmsi  Skuse. 

Prothorax  orange;  mesonotal  praescutum  orange  without  black  markings;  pseu- 
dosutural foveae  orange;  concolorous  with  the  remainder  of  the  praescutum;  scu- 
tellum and  postnotum  orange;  thoracic  pleura  orange  with  white  spots;  abdomen 
orange  with  tergites  one,  the  caudal  part  of  three,  and  segments  four  to  seven  black 
with  white  spots tillyardi  n.sp. 

Clytocosjius  tillyardi,  n.sp. 

General  colouration  fiery  orange,  the  thoracic  pleura  spotted  with  white',  legs 
black;  wings  yellow  the  posterior  and  anal  cells  with  paler  centres;  abdomen  with 
the  basal  tergite  black  with  lateral  white  spots;  intermediate  tergites  (three  to 
six,  and  the  caudal  part  of  two)  similar  to  the  basal  tergite;  remainder  of  the 
abdomen  orange. 

?■ — Length,  33  5  mm.;  wing,  22  mm.;  head  alone,  5  mm.;  thorax  alone,  7.5 
mm.;  abdomen  alone,  21  mm.;  hind  leg,  femur,  13  mm.;  fore  leg,  femur,  fl  mm.; 
tibia,  9.2  mm. 

Frontal  i)rolongation  of  the  head  bright  orange,  long  and  slender  (2.3  mm.), 
with    no  indication    of  a  nasus;    dorsal  surface    with   small,    scattered,  erect    or 


•Proc.  Linn.  See,  N.  S.  Wales,  2nd.  Ser.,  V.,  1890,  pp.  74-76, 


184  AX    UMiESCRIIiED    SPECIES    OF      CLYTOOOiSSrUS   SKUSE. 

slightly  proclinate  hairs,  the  lateral  and  ventral  surfaces  glabrous;  palpi  and 
mouth-parts  dark  brown.  Antennae  with  the  tirst  segment  orange,  stout,  nnrrow 
at  base,  with  two  or  three  pale,  transverse  rings  beyond  midlength ;  seeond  segment 
dark  brown,  the  base  obscure  yellow;  flagellum  broken.  Summit  of  the  vertex  im- 
mediately behind  the  antennal  bases.  Head  fiery  orange  with  numerous  short 
black  setae  that  become  very  long  and  dense  on  the  curiously  baccate  post-genae. 
Eyes  relatively  small  with  fine  ommatidia. 

Pronotum  narrow,  flattened,  dull  orange.  Mesonotal  praescutuni  fiery  oningo, 
the  margin  with  a  moderately  broad  white  line;  interspaces  pale  with  numerous, 
short,  erect  setae;  the  broad  median  stripe  is  split  by  a  capillary  white  line; 
scutum  orange,  the  lobes  fiery  orange,  margined  prosimally  and  caudally  and  less 
distinctly  laterally  with  white;  seutellum  moderately  projecting,  orange,  with  a  large 
whitisi]  spot  on  either  side;  postnotum  orange.  Pleura  orange,  spotted  with  wiiite; 
a  s]iot  on  the  mesepisternum,  immediately  behind  the  anterior  spiracle;  anotlier  on 
the  mesepimeron  immediately  beneath  the  wing-base;  three  others  surrounding  the 
posterior  spiracle;  a  large  blotch  on  the  sides  of  the  mesosternum  between  the 
fore  and  middle  coxae.  Halteres  with  the  base  of  the  stem  orange,  the  remainder 
of  the  halteres  broken.  Legs  with  the  coxae  orange,  more  or  less  whitish  on  the 
outer  face,  least  distinct  on  the  ]iosterior  coxae;  coxae  clothed  with  delicate  liairs. 
shortest  on  the  posterior  coxae:  trochanters  blackish,  indistinctly  margined  dis- 
l.illy  with  red;  femora  and  tibiae  black;  tarsi  broken;  fore  legs  much  shorter  than 
tlie  hind  legs.  Wing's  with  a  strong  yellowish  tinge,  darkening  into  fulvous  blown 
in  the  apical  and  caudal  portions;  veins  conspicuously  yellow;  centres  of  cells 
M,  Ut  Mi,  .2nd  M2,  Mi,  Cm,  1st  A  and  2Hd  A  paler.  Venation:  Sci  lacking, 
Sc2  ending  in  Ih  just  before  r;  cell  B->  narrowed  at  its  inner  end;  cell  Jst  M\i 
large,  pentagonal;  iietiole  of  cell  Mx  short,  about  one-half  of  m.  Macrotrichiae 
on  the  veins  lacking  or  very  sparee. 

Abdomen  with  the  first  tergite  narrowly  margined  with  orange,  the  disk  deep 
black  with  a  large  rounded  white  spot  near  each  cephalic — lateral  angle;  suture 
between  tergites  one  and  two  ill-defined;  tergite  two  with  the  basal  half  orange 
with  a  small,  median,  basal,  black  mark,  the  caudal  half  black  witli  a  rouiuled, 
lateral,  white  spot  and  much  fainter  submedian  sjiots;  tergites  three  to  six  black, 
each  with  the  conspicuous,  rounded,  lateral,  white  spot,  the  third  and  fifth  also 
with  fairly  distinct,  submedian,  white  markings;  each  of  these  black  tergites, 
jtroximad  and  caudad  of  the  lateral  white  s|iots,  have  about  six  or  seven  small, 
lens-shaped  silvery  dots  arranged  in  a  roughly  oblique  group;  on  each  of  the 
second  and  thii-d  tergites,  cephalad  of  the  lateral  wliite  spots  is  a  small,  transverse, 
'moressed  area  as  in  many  other  Tipuline  ci'ane-flies;  seventh  to  ninth  tergites 
orange.  Sternites  uniformly  orange.  On  the  ventral  surface  of  the  abdomen, 
nine  distinct  and  approximately  subequal  sternites  are  visible;  on  the  dorsal  sur- 
face, however,  there  are  ten  tergites  visible  unless  we  consider  the  first  tergite  as 
fused  with  the  very  long  second  tergite  as  above  described ;  in  this  latter  case,  the 
basal  tergite  is  as  long  as  the  basal  three  sternites;  tergites  three  to  seven  are 
approximately  e(|ual  in  length,  but  the  last  two  are  greatly  narrowed.  Ovipositor 
horn-coloured,  the  tergal  valves  long,  straiglit  and  very  slender;  sternal  valves 
much  shorter,  compressed,  the  tips  obliquely  truncated, 
mi?;.— New  South  Wales. 

[fiihitiipe,  9,  Ulong,  on  tlie  spurs  of  the  Dorri'io  Talilejand.  nltiludc  aliout  2<ll'll 
reel,   .Vpril.  1017    (W.    Heron). 
Typo  returned  to  Dr.  Tillyard. 


I'nor.  Lixy.  Sor.  X.S.W.  lO'JO. 


'liATR  r. 


Leaves  of  Reversiou-Foliage  of  Acacia  suaveoleiis.     (Nat.  size). 


Proc.  Linx.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1920. 


Plate  ii. 


■  t.'. 


EuiJhyllode  and  SeeiUing  of  A.  iinple.xa  (/).    (Nat.  Size). 


04 


r  j^ 


7^  >r« 


'ROC.  Lixx.  Soc.  N  S.W.  1920. 


PlATK    IV. 


1.  lieai  oi  A.  Baileyaiui.  2-5.  Leaves  of  Reversion-Shoots  of  W.  /w/Z^".™  ('.■^'j.     (Nat.  size). 


I'KOC.  LiNX.  Sdc.  N.S.W.  1920. 


Plate  vii. 


Leaves  of  Reversion-Shoots  of  A.  iinplexa  (/)  -,  last  stages.     (Nat.  ■■*'zf 


pRO(\  I.ixx    Soc.  N.8.W.  1020. 


Plate  viii. 


1-7.  A.  podalyriaefolia.      8.  .1.  iiivrtifolia.      \^.  .i.  discolor.      10.  Jacaraiida.       11.  A.  deairrens.     (Nat.  size). 


I'liuv.  Li.w.  Soc.  N.S.W.   U)20. 


Pl.ATi;    IX, 


.#"■ 


Hnctpria  eausinu;  Kopiness  in  Wattln  Baik   Int'iusions. 


PROC.  Lixx,  Soc    N.S.W.  1920. 


Pla'ii:  X. 


1-2.   Sv/Zi's  c'arif'-a/a. 


.3-6.  S.  pti'finiDis. 


"-1-t.  .?.  /riiiica/a.  15.  S.  gracilis. 


Vi:oc.  Lix.v.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1920. 


Plate  xi. 


31       30 


1-16.  Syllis piou-tiihi/a.       17-18.  S.  fnulKrifiis.       W-ii.  S.  iiugenrri.       23-27.  S.  tiiibfixiniia .       28-31.  S.  coriiscans. 


I'KOc.  Li\x.  Soc.  N.S.W.  19-.MI. 


Platk  XII. 


A    A 


a 


91 
I 


110 


1-2.  S.  kiiibi'i-giiiim.  3-10.  S./erriiginea. 


11-16.  J^ioiiosyl/is  iiulacnoiU'l>hra. 


i;(ir.   Linn    Sor.   N.S.W.    I'.llid. 


Plate  xiii. 


1.  PioiiosyHis  tnelacnoncphra. 


-3.   P.  divarkata.  4-10.  AinblyosylUs  spec/abilis. 


185 


DESCRIPTIONS  OF  AUSTRALIAN   FLIES  OF  THE   FAMILY  ASILIDAE, 
[Diptera]  with  synonyms  AND  NOTES. 

By  G.    H.  Hardy. 

In  this  paper  synonyms  are  recorded,  and  two  new  species  of  the  genus  Xeoi- 
tamus  are  described.  Other  species  of  the  g-enus  Neoitamus  are  given  a  l)etter 
taxonomic  treatment  than  has  hitherto  been  attempted. 

Australian  species  of  the  family  Asilidae  were  revised  by  Miss  Ricardo  in 
1912-13,  but  a  number  of  descriptions  were  left  outstanding,  as  the  types  were 
either  missing  or  net  in  a  condition  suitable  for  recognition.  Since  then,  consid- 
erable attention  has  been  given  to  the  Tasmanian  Asilidae,  chiefly  by  the  late 
Arthur  White,  and  as  Tasmania  is  the  type  locality  of  much  of  the  described 
material,  it  has  become  possible  to  establish  the  identity  of  many  of  the  out- 
standing descriptions  of  species  recorded  from  there. 

Sydney  is  also  an  important  type  locality,  but  the  Asilidae  of  this  district  re- 
quire further  attention  and  a  number  of  common  species  have  yet  to  be  described. 
Only  a  few  of  the  i  utstanding  descriptions  of  species  recorded  from  this  locality, 
and  from  New  South  Wales  generally,  have  been  identified. 

Considerable  further  knowledge,  accumulated  since  Miss  Ricardo's  work,  re- 
quires to  be  incorporated  with  a  new  revision  founded  upon  a  better  taxonomic 
treatment  of  the  species. 

I  am  indebted  to  Dr.  E.  AV.  Ferguson  for  the  loan  of  his  collection  of  the 
genus  Neoitamus.  which  contains  many  specimens  identified  by  Miss  Ricardo  and 
Arthur  White. 

Subfamily  DASYPOGONINAE. 

Cabasa  pulchella  Macquart. 

Dasypogon  pukhellus,  Macquart,  Dipt.  Exot.,  suppl.  1,  1846,  p.  (j2,  PI.  7,  fig.  9 

(wing) . 
Cabasa    pulchella,   Walker,    List  Dipt.  Brit.   Mus.,  vi.,    suppl.  2,  185-1,  p.    499; 

Ricardo,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (8),  ix.,  1912,  p.  479;  White,  Proc.  Roy. 

Soc.  Tas.,  1916,  p.  155. 
Dasypogon  veniio.  Walker,  List  Dipt.  Brit.  Mus.,  ii.,  1849,  p.  359. 
Cabasa  venno,  Walker,  List  Dipt.  Brit.  Mus.,  vi.,  suppl.  2,  1854,  p.  500. 
Cabasa  rufithorax.  Walker,   Ins.    Saund.  Dipt.,   i.,   1850,   p.   100,  PI.    iii.,  fig.   5; 

Walker,  List  Dipt.  Brit.  Mus.,  vi.,  suppl.  2,  1854,  p.  499. 
Dasypogon    rubrithorax,    Macquart,    Dipt.   Exot..  suppl.   4,   1850,    p.   66,   PI.   vi., 

fig.  10. 
Cabasa  rubrithorax   Ricardo,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.   (8),  ix.,  1912,  p.  480;  Wliite, 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.,  1916,  p.  "155. 
Synonymy. — Miss    Ricardo   has     identified    Cabasa    rufithorax    Walker   with 
Cabasa   pulchella  Macquart,   and  also    Cabasa  venno   Walker  with    Cabasa  rubri- 
thorax Macquart.     All  the  types  are  described  from  Tasmania. 


18G  AUSTRALIAN    FLIES  OF   THE   FAMILY    ASILIDAE, 

A  long  series  of  Tasmanian  specimens,  collected  by  Mr.  C.  E.  Cole,  shows  a 
complete  merging  of  Cabana  rubrithorax  Walker  into  C'abasa  pulchella  Macquart, 
and  establishes  beyond  dispute  this  long  suspected  synonymy. 

Hab. — Tasmania,  Victoria,  New  South  Wales  and  Queensland. 

A  specimen  with  semi-hyaline  wings  was  taken  at  Blackheath,  New  South 
Wales,  on  the  27th  November,  1919. 

Subfamily   ASILINAE. 

The  outlines  for  the  elassitication  of  Australian  genera  of  the  subfamily  Asi- 
I'niac  were  laid  down  by  White  in  1917.  White's  scheme  offers  the  only  practi- 
cal solution  for  the  present  treatment  of  Australian  species  of  the  genus  Neoitamus, 
under  which  group  he  includes  species  placed  previously  in  this  and  allied  genera. 

White's  scheme  for  the  classification  of  the  Asillnae  is  accepted  here  for  the 
genera.  The  subgenera  of  the  genus  Neoitamus,  however,  are  not  satisfactory, 
and  for  further  remarks  see  under  the  genus  Neoitamus  below. 

Ommatius  pilosus  White. 

Ommatius  pilosus,  White,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.,  191G,  p.  169. 
Ommatius  levis,  White,  ibid.,  p.  170. 

The  holotype  of  0.  levis  White  is  in  the  Australian  Museum.  A  long  series 
of  specimens  shows  that  this  form  completely  merges  into  O.  pilosus  White,  and 
therefore  it  cannot  be  considered  distinct. 

Genus  Neoitamus  Osten-Sacken. 

Itamus,  Loew,  Lin.  Ent.,  iv.,  1849,  p.  84  (preoccupied). 

Neoitamus,  Osten-Sacken,  Cat.  Dipt.  N.  America,  edit.  2,  1878,  pp.  82,  235; 
Ricardo,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (8),  xi.,  1913,  p.  431;  White,  Proc.  Roy. 
Soc,  Ta-s.,  1913,  p.  274;  191(j,  p.  173;  1917,  p.  91. 

Under  the  genus  Neoitamus  a  number  of  diverse  Australian  species  which 
have  a  similar  general  appearance  are  grouped.  The  generic  name  is  used  for 
convenience,  and  the  species  do  not  necessarily  conform  to  the  description  of  the 
genus  given  by  Loew. 

When  structural  characters  of  the  described  species  are  published,  and  a  gen- 
eral survey  is  made  of  the  allied  genera  of  the  world,  it  will  become  possible  to 
give  this  group  of  Asilids  an  adequate  treatment  for  generic  and  subgeneric  divi- 
sion. 

White  proposed  the  three  following  subgenera: — Trichoitamus  White  (type, 
Dysviaehus  rudis  Walk.),  Neoitamus  Loew  (type,  .Y.  cyanurus  Loew),  and  Rhab- 
dotoitamus  White  (type,  N.   brunn<eus  White). 

Neoitamus  cyanurus    Loew  is    a  European  species. 

The  type  species  of  Rhabdotoitamus  was  not  fixed  by  White,  but  E.  bnmneus 
White  {^=  N.  vittipes  Macquart)  conforms  best  to  the  subgenus  as  White  describ- 
ed it,  and  also  it  has  the  advantage  of  being  widely  distributed  and  common. 

In  the  present  paper  the  species  are  dealt  with  as  belonging  to  one  genus 
Neoitamus,  so  as  to  avoid  the  confusion  that  w<iuld  otherwise  arise,  due  to  tlie 
species  being  placed  in  arbitrary  subgenera  (hat  have  unsatisfactory  or  even  no 
structural  differences;  and,  moreover,  the  collection  shows  a  number  of  species 
that  could  be  divided  into  subgenera,  or  even  genera,  ujion  apparently  sound  struc- 
tural characters.  It  is  premature,  however,  to  subdivide  the  genus  until  adequate 
study  has  been  made  of  all  the  described  forms. 


BY  G.    H.    HARDY.  187 

The  exoskeleton  jsIiows  dififerenees  oi  specific  value  in  the  characters  disciissed 
below . 

Head. — On  the  face  there  is  a  tubercle  varying  in  size  in  the  different  species, 
and  on  this  is  situated  the  moustache  which  varies  in  density  approximately  in  re- 
lation to  the  size  of  the  tubercle.  N.  claripes  White,  N.  volaticus  White,  and  iV. 
aKstralis  Ricardo  have  a  very  small  tubercle  and  moustache,  whilst  the  other  spe- 
cies   have  these  characters  generally   much    more    pronounced. 

A  row  of  bristles  is  situated  behind  the  eyes  in  most  of  the  species,  but  in  a 
few  apparently  undescribed  forms  they  are  absent.  Some  species  have  these 
bristles  arranged  in  two   rows   or  more. 

Thorax. — The  presutural  bristles  are  those  lateral  bristles  situatefl  anterior 
to  the  transverse  suture;  they  are  always  two  in  number  close  to  the  suture,  and 
anterior  to  these  there  are  sometimes  one  or  more  further  bristles . 

The  sviperalar  bristles  are  those  situated  above  the  wing's,  between  the  trans- 
verse suture  and  the  postalar  callus.  They  may  be  one,  two,  or  three  in  number, 
rarely  more. 

The  postalar  bristles  are  those  situated  on  the  postalar  callus,  and  may  he 
from  one  to  four  in  number. 

The  dorsocentral  bristles  are  confined  to  two  rows  on  the  dorsum  placed  on 
each  side  of,  at  some  little  distance  from,  and  parallel  to  the  median  line.  1  hese 
bristles  are  usually  regularly  placed  and  alternate  with  a  row  of  hairs  placed  in  a 
closely  adjacent  or  a  contiguous  line;  if  one  of  the  bristles  is  suppressed  or 
obsolete,  the  hair  on  each  side  of  it  becomes  much  stronger  and  bristle-like.  When 
counting,  allowance  must  be  made  for  these  suppressed  bristles,  but  sometimes 
specimens  will  be  found  too  irregular  for  the  alternating  hair  and  bristle  character 
to  be  seen. 

As  these  dorsal  thoracic  bristles  appear  to  have  a  definite  limit  of  variation 
in  each  species,  they  afford  important  characters  for  identifying  female  specimens. 

The  metapleural  bristles  are  situated  below  the  halteres ;  these  are  erect  and 
are  arranged  in  a  vertical  line.  Below,  above  the  hind  coxae,  and  continuing  in 
the  same  line,  are  also  erect  hypopleural  bristles.  The  metapleural  bristles  are 
invariably  present,  but  sometimes  the  hypopleural  bristles  are  reduced  to  depi-cssed 
hairs,  or  are  completely  missing.  Both  sets  of  bristles  are  very  thin  and  hair- 
like,  but  as  they  stand  erect  on  an  otherwise  bare  surface  they  are  very  con- 
spicuous . 

Scutellmi.  The  seutellar  bristles  are  situated  on  the  margin  of  the  seutellum, 
and  are  from  two  to  six,  rarely  more,  in  number. 

Abdomen.  A  row  of  bristles  may  be  present  on  most  of  the  abdominal  seg- 
ments. These  bristles  are  generally  in  a  complete  line  on  the  first  segment,  but 
are  interrupted  bv  a  bare  space  on  the  dorsum  of  the  other  segments;  they  are 
placed  parallel  and  anterior  to  the  posterior  margins;  they  are  smallest  towards 
the  centre,  and  become  longer  laterally,  where  they  are  often  erect  and  conspienous. 

Legs.  The  femur  is  more  or  less  oval  in  cross  section,  and  when  the  legs  are 
at  right  angles  to  the  thorax,  that  flattened  surface  which  faces  towards  the  head 
is  known  as  the  anterior  side;  the  other  three  sides  are  called  the  dorsal,  posterior 
and  ventral  sides. 

The  anterior  femur  is  generally  spineless,  but  occasionally  a  spine  is  to  l)e 
found  towards  the  apex  of  the  posterior  side,  and  A^.  armatus  Macquart  has  four 
spines  on  the  ventral  side. 

A  complement  of  spines  on  the  intermediate  femur  appears  to  consist  of  n 


188  AUSTRALIAN    FLIES  OF    THE    FAMILY    ASILIDAE, 

row  on  the  anterior  side,  one  subapical  spine  on  the  posterior  side,  and  a  ventral 
i-ow.  The  row  on  the  anterior  side  niaj'  vary  in  the  number  of  spines,  and  may 
even  be  reduced  to  one  or  two ;  this  row  often  runs  on  to  the  dorsum,  and,  in  !-uch 
a  case,  if  the  last  spine  is  isolated  with  a  bare  space  between  it  and  the  other  re- 
maining spines,  it  will  appear  to  be  a  subapical  dorsal  spine. 

A  complement  of  spines  on  the  posterior  femui-  consists  of  two  rows  on  the 
anterior  side  and  one  ventral  row.  Besides  these  there  are  a  few  suba]iical 
spines . 

In  a  long  series  of  specimens  a  wide  range  of  variation  will  geueraliy  be 
found,  but  in  a  few  species  the  variation  is  limited. 

Wings.  The  wings  are  hyaline,  or  more  or  less  tinted  with  fuscous,  and 
fuscous  spots  are  present  in  a  few  species.  The  venation  is  constant  with  regard 
to  the  veins  and  cells,  but  slight  variations  occur  in  the  relative  '5hape  and  length 
of  some  of  the  cells. 

Male  genitalia.  The  exposed  genital  forceps  of  the  male  aft'ord  the  only 
satisfactory  characters  for  identifying  a  species.  This  organ  lias  a  wonderful 
variety  of  characters  that  have  been  all  but  overlooked  by  earlier  authors,  and 
it  is  the  purpose  of  the  present  paper  to  utilise  them  as  the  main  objective  for 
establishing  species.  The  females  in  such  a  system  of  classification  are,  neces- 
sarily, of  secondary  consideration ;  nevertheless,  thej'  can  generally  be  identified 
by  other  characters  by  comparison  with  their  respective  males. 

The  male  genitalia  contain  a  pair  of  upper  forcepa,  between  the  two  branches 
of  which  is  situated  the  dorsal  msdian  lamella,  and  a  pair  of  lower  forceps — in 
all,  five  visible  parts 

The  upper  forceps  vary  considerably  in  shape  in  the  various  species,  and 
may  contain  a  terminal  process,  or  may  be  simple  and  without  a  process,  and, 
finally,  may  contain  bristles. 

The  genitalia  of  ^i.  exilis  ^Macquart,  il.  filiferus  Maccjuart  and  Cerdistus 
australis  Ricardo  are  described  as  having  bristles. 

Female  ovipositor.  Few  descriptions  convey  any  real  idea  of  the  length  of 
the  ovipositor,  yet  sometimes  females  of  closely  related  species  can  be  separated 
by  the  comparative  length  of  this  organ.  White  refers  to  the  ovipositor  as  being 
long  in  all  his  species  except  .Y.  abditiw;,  where,  he  states  in  the  original  descrip- 
tion, it  is  rather  short,  and  in  1917  he  refers  to  it  as  unusually  short.  This 
species,  however,  has  a  very  distinctive  ovipositor,  and,  on  the  strength  of  this 
organ,  it  should  be  placed  in  a  separate  genus;  it  is  somewhat  compressed  ven- 
trally,  but  has  a  conspicuous  dorsal  surface  which  decreases  posteriorly,  and  at 
the  apex  there  is  a  pair  of  small,  separated,  conical  lamellae.  All  the  other 
species  in  the  collection  contain  one,  more  or  less  cylindrical,  stylilorm  lam- 
ella at  the  apex  of  the  eighth  abdominal  segment  which  is  usually  entirely  com- 
pressed. Sometimes  the  seventh  abdominal  segment  is  black,  shining,  and  com- 
pressed on  the  dorsal  surface,  but  shows  a  ventral  area ;  this  character  is  called 
subcompressed  in  the  descriptions  given  below.  In  two  species,  one  described 
below  as  new,  the  sixth  abdominal  segment  is  also  black,  shining  and  subcom- 
pressed . 

Both  White  and  ]\Iiss  Eicardo  refer  to  those  subcompressed  segments  as 
forming  part  of  the  female  ovipositor,  but  as  gradations  in  the  various  species 
make  the  line  of  demarcation  difficult  to  determine,  it  is  not  advisable  to  interpret 
the  character  in  that  manner. 


BY   G.    H.    HAEDT.  189 

There  are  forty-seven  specific  names,  all  of  which  probably  belong  to  the 
group  of  species  here  classed  as  the  genus  Neoitamus,  and  in  this  paper  twenty 
of  these  names  are  distributed  among  twelve  species,  and  two  new  specific  names 
are  proposed.  Twenty-seven  further  specific  names  require  more  adequate  de- 
scription than  has  yet  been  given  to  them;  these,  under  their  respective  authors, 
are  given  in  the  following  Ust: — 

Macquart:  Asilus  acutangulattis,  A.  australis,  A.  exilis,  A.  feriferus,  A.  julvi- 
puhesceiice,  A.  lo'iigiventris,  A.  nigrinus,  A.  rufocoxatus,  A.  rufometatarsis,  A. 
varifemoratns  and  finally  A.  laticornis,  which  does  not  conform  to  any  known  spe- 
cies, and  Jliss  Ricardo  states  that  the  ovipositor  is  short  and  conical. 

Walker:  J.si7)/.<  coedicius,  A.  elicit  us,  A.  maricus,  A.  ohumbratus,  A.  cilicatus 
and  Dysmachus  rudis. 

Sehiner:  Glaphyropyga  australiasiae. 

Ricardo :  C'erdistus  aitstralis  and  Neoitamus  australis  (both  of  which  specific 
names  are  preoccupied  by  Macquart's  .1.  australis),  N.  gibbonsi  and  X.  hi/ali- 
jieiinis ;  the  S]iecies  described  as  N.  hyalipennis  by  White  may  not  be  identical  with 
Miss  Ricardo's  species. 

White:  Neoitamus  divaricatus,  Rliabdotoitcimus  lautus,  B.  lividus.  H.  rusti- 
canus  and  B.  volaticus. 

There  are  four  other  outstanding  descriptions  belonging  to  the  Asilinae  and, 
judging  from  the  described  characters,  they  cannot  belong  to  the  group  dealt  with 
here.  These  must  be  retained  in  the  Asilits  group  sensu  lato,  and  are  as  follows : — 
Asilus  ferrugiiieiventris  Maeqnart,  A.  alligans  Walker,  A.  behebulb  Wiedemann 
and  A.  regius  Jaennicke. 

■  Asilus  crabroniformis  Meigen  is  cancelled  from  the  Australian  list.  This  is 
a  well  known  European  species  that  was  erroneously  recorded  from  Tasmania  by 
Macquart   in   1847. 

Key  to  the  species  of  the  genus  Neoitamus    described  below,  of  which  both  sexes 

are  known- 

1.  The  female  ovipositor  short,  with  two  small  separated  lamellae.     Male  genitalia 

without  an  apical  process.     Two  super-  and  one  post-alar  bristles 

ahditus    White. 
The  female  ovipositor  with  one  styliform  lamella.     Male  genitalia  with  or  with- 
out an  apical  process 2. 

2.  The  upper  forceps  of  the  male  genitalia  with  a  terminal  process 3. 

The  upper  forceps  of  the  male  genitalia  without  a  terminal  process 6. 

3.  The  male  genitalia  short  and  globular,  th«  apical  process  is  above  the  centre  of 

and  more  or  less  at  right  angles  to,   the   outer   margin.     Female   ovipositor 

short.     Two  super-  and  three  post-alar  bristles xydiuyeiisis  SchineT. 

The  male  genitaha  elongate,  the  apical  process  rarely  at  right  angles  to  the 
apical  border:  if  at  right  angles,  it  is  situated  below  the  centre  of  the  apical 
border 4. 

4.  The  seventh  segment  of  the  female  abdomen  black,  shining  and  subcompressed, 

and  as  long  as  the  moderately  long  ovipositor.  Seen  laterally,  the  apical  half 
of  the  male  genitalia  is  more  swollen  than  the  basal  half.  Super-  and  post- 
alar  bristles  three  each  (?) flavicinctits  White. 

The  seventh  segment  of  the  female  abdomen  normal.  Seen  laterally,  the  apical 
half  of  the  male  genitalia  is  not  swollen.     Female  ovipositor  short 5. 

5.  The  dorsal  and  ventral  surfaces  of  the  male    genitalia  are  more  or  less  parallel. 

Super- and  post-alar  bristles  two  each fiaternus   Macquart. 


190  AVSTRALIAX    FLIES  OF  THE    FAMILY   ASILIDAE, 

The  dorsal  and  ventral  surfaces  of  the  male  genitalia  taper     towards    the    apex 
which  is  truncate.     Two  super-  and  one,  rarely  two,  post>alar  bristles 

vUtipes  Macquart. 

6.  The  male  genitalia  with  bristles 9. 

The  male  genitaUa  without  bristles 7. 

7.  The  anterior  femora  with      a   conspicuous   row    of   ventral   spines.     Female   ovi- 

positor very  long.     Two  super-,  one,  rarely  two,  post-alar  bristles 

armatHS   Macquart. 
The  anterior  femora  without  ventral  spines.     Female  ovipositor  short 8. 

8.  The  female  ovipositor  entirely  compressed.    Super-  and  post-alar  bristles  one  each 

claripes  White. 

The  female  ovipositor  compressed  ventrally,  but  with   a  dorsal  surface.       Two 

super- and  one  or  two  post-alar  bristles maculatoidcs,  n.sp. 

9.  The  upper  forceps  of  the  male  genitalia  wHth  a  row  of  about  ten  slender  dorsal 

bristles.     Female  ovipositor  short.     Two  super-,one  or  two  post-alar  and  two 

scutellar  bristles iiiargi/es  Walker. 

The  upper  forceps  of  the  male  genitalia  with  one  long,  ventral,  subapical  bristle, 
and  a  row  of  ventral  bristles  on  the  lower  forceps.  The  female  ovipositor  is 
short,  and  the  sixth  and  seventh  abdominal  segments  of  the  female  are  sub- 
compressed,  black  and  shining.  Two  or  three  superalar,  three  or  four  postalar 
and  four  scutellar  bristles se/osus,   n.sp. 

Neoitamus  ABDiTtJS  White.     (Text-figs.   1-3.) 

Neoitamus  abditus.  White,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.,  1916,  p.  178,  text-fig.  29  (wing) ; 
and  1917,  p.  93   (in  key). 

Synonymy.  Outstanding  descriptions  of  the  AsiUnae  are  not  sutlicient  i'or 
N.  abditus  White  to  be  identified  as  one  of  them,  but  it  is  possible  that  A. 
acutangulatus  Macquart  may  belong  here. 

Description.  The  species  will  be  readily  recognised  by  the  small  separated 
lamellae  of  the  female  ovipositor. 

d".  The  face  has  a  large  tubercle  containing  black  hairs  which  increase  in 
length  towards  the  centre;  the  centre  of  the  tubercle  contains  six.  shorter,  black 
bristles;  below  these  bristles  there  are  slender  white  hairs  which  are  sometimes 
bordered  laterally  by  a  row  of  very  fine  l^laek  hairs.  Behind  the  eyes  there  is  a 
row  of  black  bristles. 

The  dorsal  bristles  of  the  thorax  are  disposed  on  each  side  of  the  median 
line  as  follows: — two  presutural ;  two  sujieralar.  one  of  which  is  weak;  one  post- 
alar;  about  six  dorsocentral,  between  each  of  which  there  is  a  thin  bristle-like  iiair. 

The  hypopleural  and  metapleural  bristles  are  present,  and  the  scutellar 
bristles  are  two  or  four  in  number.  All  the  bristles  of  the  thorax  and  scutellum 
are  black. 

The  bristles  towards  the  apex  of  the  abdominal  segments  are  mostly  white, 
but  black  bristles  occur  on  the  posterior  se,gments.  The  second  to  fifth  segments 
have  two  conspicuous,  erect,  lateral  white  bristles.  The  upper  forceps  of  the  male 
genitalia  are  .simple  and  moderately  hairy;  seen  laterally,  they  yre  more  or  less 
parallel-sided. 

The  le.gs  have  the  anterior  femora  without  spines;  the  intermediate  femora 
have  a  row  of  spines  on  the  anterior  side,  but  this  row  is  often  reduced  in  num- 
ber to  two  spines:  the  subapical  spine  tm  the  posterior  side  is  present;  the  pos- 
terior femora  have  only  one  row  of  spines  present  on  the  anterior  side;  there  is 
one  stihnpical  dorsal  spine  and  a  ventral  row  of  spines. 


BY    G.    H.    HARDY. 


191 


The  wings  have  a  normal  venation;  the  intermediate  crossvein  is  situated 
about  the  middle  of  the  discal  cell;  the  second  posterior  cell  is  long  and  consider- 
ably constricted  subapically. 


Text-figs.  1-3. — Neoitamus  abditus.     1,  female  ovipositor  seen  dorsally; 
2,  the  same  seen  laterally ;   3,  the  male  genitalia  seen  laterally,   (x  25) . 
Text-fig.  4. — Neoitamus  sydneyensis.     Tlie  male  genitalia,     (x  25). 

?.  The  female  differs  from  the  male  in  having  the  abdouiinal  bristles  obso- 
lete. The  ovipositor  is  short,  compressed  ventrally  only,  the  dorsal  portion  taper- 
ing apically  and  terminating  in  a  pair  of  small,  more  or  less  conical,  separated 
lamellae. 

Hah. — Tasmania   and   Victoria.      (February  to   April.) 

Type- — White  only  described  the  female  of  this  species.  The  holotype  female 
was  purchased  by  the  British  Museum  with  White's  collection.  The  allotype  male, 
described  above,  is  in  the  Australian  Museum.     There  are  five  paratype  males. 

'Note. — The  collection  under  revision  contains  six  males  and  seven  females. 
One  of  the  females  was  originally  identified  by  White,  and  two  paii's  were  taken 
in  copula  at  Hobart  and  Melbourne  respectively,  thus  establishing  the  sex  rela- 
tionship.    All  the  specimens  were  taken  by  the  writer. 

Neoitamus  sydnetensis  Sehiner.     (Text-fig.  4.) 

Cerdistus  sydneyensis,  Sehiner,  Reise  Novara,  Dipt.,  1868,  p.  187;  Ricardo,  Ann. 
Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,   (8),  xi..  1913,  p.  43C:  and  (9).  i..  1918,  p.  (53. 

Description.  S-  The  face  has  a  moderately  large  tubercle;  the  moustache  is 
composed  of  stiff  black  bristles,  with  black  hairs  aljove  and  on  each  side;  below, 
there  are  longer  white  hairs  bordered  hiterally  by  a  row  of  very  fine  black  hairs. 
There  is  a  row  of  black  bristles  behind  the  eyes. 

The  dorsal  bristles  of  the  thorax  are  disposed  on  each  side  of  the  median 
line  as  follows: — two  presutural;  two  superalar;  three  postalar,  composed  of  one 
long  bristle  in  the  centre  and  one  hair-like  bristle  on  each  side  of  it;  four  to 
six  dorsocentral ;  all  the  above  bristles  are  black.  The  metapleural  bristles  are 
black  and  the  hypopleural  bristles  are  usually  white.  There  are  two  black  scu- 
tellar  bristles. 


192 


AUSTRALIAN    PLIES   OF   THE    FAIIILY    ASILIDAE, 


■J"he  abdominal  bristles  aie  long,  mostly  black,  and  verj-  pronounced  as  tar 
as  the  fifth  segment.  The  upper  forceps  of  the  male  genitalia  are  short,  and  have 
a  process  situated  slightly  above  the  middle  of  the  outer  border  and  turning  at 
right  angles  to  it. 

The  leg-s  have  the  anterior  femora  without  spines;  the  intermediate  femora 
have  the  system  of  spines  more  or  less  complete,  but  the  spines  on  the  anterior 
sides  are  usually  reduced  to  two  or  three;  the  posterior  femora  have  a  complete 
system  of  bristles  but  the  upper  row  on  the  anterior  side  is  reduced  in  number. 
The  bristle  system  is  explained  in  the  introduction. 

The  wings  have  a  normal  venation.  The  intermediate  crossvein  is  situated 
about  the  middle  of  the  discal  cell  and,  beyond  this  vein,  there  is  a  conspicuous 
hyaline  area.     The  second  posterior  cell  is  short  and  normal. 

?.  The  female  is  similar  to  the  male.  The  ovipositor  is  short,  compressed, 
and  contains  a  cylindrical  styliform  lamella. 

Hab. — New  South  Wales :  Sydney,  IMilson  Island,  Palm-beach,  and  Blackheath. 
(October  to  December.) 

yote. — In  the  collections  under  revision,  tliere  are  seventeen  males  and  fifteen 
females.  One  of  the  females  is  labelled  Cerdistns  sydneyensis  Schiner  in  JfOss 
Ricardo's  handwi'iting 

NTeoitamus  flavicinctus  White.     (Text-figs.  5,  6.) 
Neoitamus  flavichictus.  White,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.   Tas.,  1913  (1911).  p.  275;  1916, 
p.  174;  1917,  p.  92  (in  key). 
Description.     >?.     The    face   1ms   a    large   tubercle    and    a    black    moustache 
There  is  a  row  of  black  bristles  behind  the  eyes. 

The  thorax  has  abundant  black  bristles  which  extend  towards  the  anterior 
margin,  gradually  diminishing  in  size.  Besides  the  usual  two  presutural,  there 
are  four  more  bristles  situated  between  the  humeral  angle  and  the  transverse  su- 
ture.    Above  the  wings   there  are  three   or  four  bristles,  referred  to   here   as   the 


Text-figs.  b-Q.—NeoilatiiHS  Jiavicinclus.     o,  fcMii:iIi'  m-ipositor;  (1.  male  genitalia.   (.\  25). 


BY    G.    H.   HAliPY.  193 

superalar.  The  postalar  bristles  are  three  in  niuuber,  aud  tlie  dorsocentral 
bristles  are  represented  by  a  complete  line  of  mixed  hairs  and  bristles  that  do 
not  conform  to  the  usual  alternating  hair  aud  bristle  order.  The  scuteUum  has 
six  marginal  bristles.  All  the  bristles,  including  the  hypopleural  and  mctapleural, 
are  black. 

The  bristles  on  the  abdmnen  are  lung  aud  umstly  white;  they  are  very  pruiu- 
inent  as  far  as  the  iifth  segment.  The  upper  forceps  of  the  male  genitalia  are 
long,  and  seen  laterally  the  apical  half  is  swollen,  and  terminates  in  a  digitate 
process  which  branches  about  the  middle  of  the  apical  border. 

The  legs  have  the  anterior  femora  w-ithout  spines;  the  intermediate  femora 
have,  besides  the  complete  sj'stem  of  spines,  a  second  row  of  spines  on  the  an- 
terior side.  The  posterior  femora  have  a  complete  system  of  spines.  These 
spine  systems  are  explained  in  the  introduction. 

The  wings  have  a  normal  venation;  the  intermediate  crossvein  is  situated  at 
about  half  the  lengih  of  the  discal  cell;  the  second  posterior  cell  is  I'ather  long 
and  slightly  constricted  subapically. 

2.  The  female  api)ears  to  l)e  similar  to  the  male,  but  the  bristles  arc  some- 
what flattened  aud  broken.  The  sixth  abdominal  segment  is  partly  bare  of  to- 
mentum,  and  appears  to  be  slightly  compressed.  The  seventh  abdominal  segment 
is  sub-compressed,  bare  and  shining,  and  as  long  as  the  moderately  long  ovipositor 
which  has  a   terminal  stj^le-like  lamella. 

Hab. — Tasmania:  Cradle  Mt.     (January,  1917,  1  male,  1  female.) 

Note. — The  collection  under  revision  contains  only  two  specimens  that  can 
be  referred  to  this  rare  species.  The  identification  is  probably  correct,  as  the 
specimens  agree  entirely  with  White's  description.  The  female  ovipositor  (text- 
flg.  5)  is  drawn  as  it  appears  on  the  insect,  and  it  seems  probable  that  the  sixth 
abdominal   segment   is  distorted  at  the  aj^ex. 

Xeoitamus  fraternus  Macquart.     (Text-figs.  7  and  8.) 

Asihis  fraternus,  Macquart,   Dipt.  Exot.,  suppl.  1,  1846,  p.  91;  Walker,  List  Dipt. 

Brit.   Mus.,  vii.,   suppl.  3,   18.55,  p.    738;    White,  Proc.    Rov     Soc.  Tas., 

1913,  pp.  274  (in  key)  and  275. 
Asiliis  luctificiis,  Walker,  Ins.  Saimd.  Dipt.,  i.,  1851,  p.  144;  Ricardo,  Ann.  Mag. 

Nat.  Hist.,  (8),  x-i.,  1913,  p.  447. 
Neoitamus  varius,  Ricardo    {nee  Walker),  Ann.    Mag.    Nat.  Hist.,   (8),    xi.,    1913; 

p.  431  (part). 
Neoitamus  vulgatus,  White,  Proc.  Roy.   Soc.  Tas.,  1913  (1914),  p.  276;   1916,  p. 

177,  text-fig.  28  (wing),;  1917,  p.  93  (in  key)  . 
Synonymy.  The  types  of  A.  fraternus  Macquart,  A.  luctificus  Walker,  and 
N.  vulgatus  White  are  from  Tasmania.  Miss  Ricardo  placed  A.  fraternus,  female 
as  a  synonym  of  N.  varius  Walker,  a  New  Zealand  species,  but  this  is  probably 
not  correct.  Miss  Ricardo  also  suggests  that  A.  luctificus  Walker  should  be  ex- 
punged from  the  Hot  of  species  as  the  type  is  lost,  but  the  description  conforms 
well  with  this  common  Tasmauiau  species. 

According  to  his  key  characters.  White  took  his  description  of  N.  fraternus 
JIacquart  from  Miss  Rieardo's  description  of  N.  varius  Walker,  and  he  further 
states  that  he  did  not  meet  with  any  species  agreeing  with  Maeqnart's  description. 
It  is  possible,  however,  that  White  did  not  refer  to  Macquart's  description,  as 
there  is  not  a  copy  of  Macquart's  "Dipteres  exotique"  in  Tasmania,  and  moreover, 
if  he  had  had  access  to  this  w^ork,  he  \vould  not  have  overlooked  so  many  species 
of  Diptera  described  from  Tasmania. 


194 


AUSTRALIAN   FLIES  OF  THE    FAMILY    ASLLIDAE, 


In  the  eolleeticn  under  revision,  there  is  a  male  cotype  of  N.  vulgatus  Whitf, 
and  this  is  identical  with  a  male  of  a  pair  taken  in  copula,  and  thus  establishes 
the  sex  relationship;  the  female  has  a  short  o\-ipositor,  not  long,  as  stated  by 
White  in  his  description. 

New  South  Wales  specimens  identified  by  White,  and  represented  by  various 
specimens  in  the  collection  under  revision,  have  longer  ovipositors,  and  there- 
fore N.  vulgatus  var.  White  cannot  belong  to  the  same  species,  and,  moreover,  N. 
vulgatus  White  is  only  known  from  Tasmania,  although  White's  description 
covers  more  than  one  species  occurring  on  the  mainland  of  Australia. 

Description,  d".  The  tubercle  of  the  face  is  large,  and  the  moustache  con- 
sists of  white  hail's  below,  and  black  liaii-s  above:  sometimes  there  is  a  lateral 
row  of  small  black  hairs  bordering  the  white  hairs.  Behind  the  eyes  there  is  a 
row  of  black  bristles. 

The  dorsal  thoracic  bristles  are  disposed  on  each  side  of  the  median  line  as 
follows: — two  presntural,  two  superalar  and  two  postalar,  and,  besides  these, 
there  may  be  one  or  two  extra  presntural  and  superalar  bristles  present,  and  also 
an  extra  postalar  l^ristle;  about  six  doi-socentral  bristles  alternating  with  black 
hairs;  all  bristles  black.  The  two  scutellar  and  the  metaplonral  bristles  are  black, 
the  hypopleural  bristles  are  mostly  white. 


THxt-tigs.  7-8. — Neoitamiis  fratfruits. 
7,  male  genitalia ;  8,  female  ovi- 
positor,     (x  2.5). 


Text-fig.  8. — Neoiiamus   vitiipes, 
male  genitalia,     (x  25). 

Text-fig.  10. — Neoilaiitiis  aniia/iis, 
male  genitalia,      (x  25). 


The  bristles  of  the  abdominal  segments  are  mostly  white,  and  there  are  two 
erect,  white,  lateral  bristles  on  the  second  to  fifth  segments.  The  upper  forceps 
(if  the  male  genitalia  arc  elongate,  and  have  a  digitate  apical  proiess  which 
branches  about  the  middle  of  the  apical  border;  seen  laterally  they  are  more  or 
less  parallel-sided. 

The  legs  have  the  anterior  femora  without  spines;  the  intermediate  and  pos- 
terior femora  have  the  system  of  spines  more  or  less  complete;  these  spine  systems 
are  explained  in  the  introduction. 


BY   G.    H.     HARUY.  195 

The  wings  have  a  normal  venation;  the  intermediate  erossvein  is  situated 
at  about  half  the  length  of  the  diseal  cell,  and  the  second  posterior  cell  is  short. 

S.     The  female  is  similar  to  the  male  and  the  ovipositor  is  short. 

Hub. — Tasmania. 

Note. — The  collection  under  revision  contains  twenty  males  and  eighteen 
.females,  all  Tasmanian.  Other  specimens,  labelled  N.  vulgatus  by  White  belong 
to  widely  different  species,  and  are  dealt  with  under  their  respective  names. 

Neoitamus  vittipes  Macquart.     (Text -fig.  9.) 

Asilus  vittipes,  Macquart.  Dipt.  Exot.,   suppl.  2,   1847.  p.   43;  Walker,   List    Dipt. 

Brit.  Mus..  vii..  suppl.  3,  1855,  p.  741. 
Asilus  cognatus,  Macquart,  Dipt.  Exot.,  suppl.  4,  1850,  p.  94. 
Asilus  alicis,  Walker,  List.,  Dipt.  Brit.  Mus.,  vii.,  suppl.  3,  1855,  p.  738. 
Neoitamus  brunneus,  White,  Proe.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.,  1913    (1914),  p.  279,  1916,  p. 

180. 
Bhabdotoitamus  brunneus,  White,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.,  1917,  p.   100. 

Synoiujmy.  Mac(|nart's  types  of  A.  vittipes  and  A.  cognatus  are  from  Tas- 
mania, and  their  descriptions  conform  to  two  colour  forms  of  White's  variable 
species,  N.  brunneus,  which  is  the  genotype  of  the  subgenus  Rhdbdotoitamus. 

Walker's  type  of  .4.  aMcis,  from  Australia,  is  recorded  as  lost  by  Miss  Ricardo, 
and  was  therefore  placed  by  her  amongst  the  species  she  proposed  to  cancel  from 
the  list,  but  the  description  conforms  to  Australian  specimens  of  White's  geno- 
type, and  in  this  way  establishes  its  probable  identity  with  A.   vittipes  Macquart. 

Description,  d.  The  moustache  is  white,  and  occupies  a  moderately  large 
tubercle;  occasionally  there  at-e  one  or  two  black  hairs  above.  There  is  a  row  of 
white  bristles  behind  the  eyes. 

The  dorsal  thoracic  bristles  are  disposed  on  each  side  of  the  median  line  as 
follows: — two  presutural,  two  superalar,  one,  rarely  two,  postalar,  and  al)out  four 
dorsocentral ;  all  the  bristles  black.  There  are  two  black  scutellar  bristles,  and 
the   metapleural  and    hypopleural  bristles   are  white. 

Both  sides  of  each  abdominal  segment  from  the  second  to  the  fifth  contain 
two  long,  erect,  white  bristles;  the  other  abdominal  bristles  are  black. 

The  upper  forceps  of  the  male  genitalia  are  short,  tapering  apically.  and 
terminating  in  a  digitate  process  which  branches  from  the  ventral  jiosterior  angle. 
The  upper  and  lower  forceps  are  reddish-brown  in  colour,  and  are  partly  dark- 
ened with  fuscous. 

The  legs  have  the  anterior  femora  without  spines;  the  intermediate  and  pos- 
terior femora  have  their  system  of  spines  more  or  less  complete. 

The  wings  have  a  normal  venation;  the  intermediate  erossvein  is  situated  at 
a  little  beyond  the  middle  of  the  diseal  cell,  and  the  second  posterior  cell  is  sliort. 

?.     The  female  is  similar  to  the  male;  the  ovipositor  is  short. 

TLab. — 'Tasmania.  Victoria,  and  New   South  Wales.      (January  to  March.) 

Note. — The  collection  under  revision  contains  thirteen  specimens,  four  males 
and  one  female  from  Tasmania,  three  males  and  four  females  from  New  South 
Wales,  and  one  male  without  locality.  A  female  from  Sydney  was  labelled  by 
White  as  his  N.  brunneus. 

Nkoitajius  armatus  Macquart.     (Text-fig.  10.) 

Asilus  armatus.  Macquart,  Dipt.  Exot.,  suppl.  1,  1846,  p.  91,  PI.  8,  fig.  17;  Walker, 

List  Dijit.  Brit.  Mus.,  vii.,  suppl.  3,  1855,  p.  737. 
Asilus  setifemoratus,  Macquart,  Dipt.  Exot.,  suppl.  5,  1854,  p.  65. 


J  96  AUSTRALIAN-    FLIES  OF   THE   FAMILY    ASILIDAE. 

Asilus    aniilco,  Walker,  List     Dipt.  Brit.  Mus.  ii.,    1849,   p.    458;  vii.,   suppl.  3, 

1855,  p.   737. 
Machimus  antilco,  Ricardo,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  (S),  xi.,  1913,  p.  423. 
Itamus  planiceps,  Schiiier,  Reise  Novara,  Dipt.,  1868,  p.  189. 
Neoitamus    planiceps,    Ricardo,  Ann.    Mag.    Nat.    Hist..    (8),    xi.,  1913.  p.  434; 
White,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.,  1913,  p.  275. 

Synonymy. — Asilus  armatus  Macquart  is  described  from  Tasmania,  but 
Walker  gives  Australia  and  Tasmania  for  Macquart's  species.  A.  setifemorata 
Macquart  is  from  Adelaide.  A.  antilco  Walker  is  from  Port  Stephens.  N. 
planiceps  Schinei'  is  from  Sydney.  lu  the  collection  under  revision  there  are 
specimens  from  Sydney  and  Tasmania  which  cannot  be  separated  from  each  other 
or  from   the  various   descriptions. 

In  describing  /.  planiceps,  Schiner  states  that  his  species  does  not  agree  with 
the  descriptions  of  Macquart's  A.  setifemorata  and  A.  rufotarsis;  Schiner's  de- 
scription, however,  appears  to  agree  with  A.  setifemorata  in  spite  of  his  state- 
ment to  the  contrary. 

The  reference  to  A.  rufotarsis  Macquart  is  not  traceable;  A.  rufometalarsis 
Macquart  is  not  described  as  ha\'ing  spines  on  the  anterior  femora,  and  therefore 
A.  rufotarsis  evidently  is  not  a  misprint  for  that  name. 

In  describing  the  male  genitalia,  Schiner  states  that  the  posterior  border  is 
serrated;  as  this  does  not  conform  to  the  illustration  of  the  male  genitalia  given 
here,  it  is  necessary  to  point  out  that  when  the  two  obtuse  points,  one  at  the 
apex  of  each  branch  of  the  upper  forceps,  are  seen  laterally,  one  above  the 
other,  the  posterior  border  of  the  genitalia  has  a  bi-toothed  serration. 

A.  armata  Macquart  is  described  with,  and  the  drawing  shows,  four  ventral 
spines  on  the  anterior  femora.  There  can  be  little  doubt  but  that  the  Tasmanian 
specimens  in  the  collection  belong  to  this  species,  and  specimens  from  Sydney  are 
identical,  making  I.  planiceps  Schiner  an  undoubted  synonym. 

A.  setifemorata  Macquart  and  A.  antilco  Walker,  from  their  descriptions,  are 
referable  here. 

Description,  (i  The  tubercle  of  the  face  is  large;  the  moustache  is  mostly 
black,  but  there  are  about  six  white  bristles  in  the  centre.  There  is  a  row  of 
black  bristles  behind  the  eyes. 

The  dorsal  thoracic  bristles  are  disposed  each  side  of  the  median  line  as  fol- 
lows : — two  presutural ;  two  superalar ;  one  postalar,  but  sometimes  a  second, 
very  thin,  postalar  bristle  is  also  present ;  about  six  dorsoceutral ;  all  these  bristles 
black . 

There  are  two  black  scutellar  bristles.  Tiie  metapleural  bristles  are  black 
or   white,  and   the  hypopleural  bristles  are  white    and  not   very  prominent. 

The  abdominal  bristles  are  mostly  white.  The  upper  forceps  of  the  malo 
genitalia  are  simple,  and  without  a  process;  they  broaden  apically,  and  the  pos- 
terior margin   is  obliquely   .Tugled  or  rounded. 

The  anterior  femora  have  four  conspicuous,  thick,  black,  ventral  spines;  the 
intermediate  and  posterior  femora  have  their  respective  spine  systems  sometimes 
complete,  but  the  rows  generally  have  a  reduced  number  of  spines. 

The  wings  have  a  normal  venation ;  the  intermediate  crossvein  is  situated  at 
nearly  two-thirds  the  length  of  the  discal  cell,  and  the  second  posterior  cell  is 
long  and  slightly  constricted  subapically. 

2.  The  female  is  similar  to  the  male,  but  the  moustache  and  abdominal 
spines  are  very  variable  in  colour.     The  ovipositor  is  very  long  and  ril)bon-l!ke. 


BY  G.    H.    HARDY.  197 

Hab. — New  South  Wales  and  Tasmania.  (October  to  January,  April.) 
Note. — In  the  collection  under  revision  there  are  twenty  specimens;  two  males 
and  eight  females  from  Sydney,  one  female  from  Milson  Island  which  is  labelled 
by  White  as  his  N.  vulgatus;  two  males  and  four  females,  in  the  Maeleay  Museum, 
from  New  South  Wales,  and  three  females  from  Tasmania,  one  of  which  was  laken 
in  April. 

Becker*  described  a  species  from  British  East  Africa  under  the  name  N. 
armatus.  This  appears  to  be  a  true  Neoitamiis  for  which  a  new  specific  name 
will  be  required  if  Macquart's  species,  described  above,  is  allowed  to  remain  within 
this  genus. 

Neoitasius  claeipes   White.     (Text-fig.  11.) 

Bhahdotoitamus  claripes.  White,  Proc.  Roy.  Soe.  Tas.,  1917  (1918),  p.  98. 

Description.  <S.  The  face  has  a  small  tubercle.  The  moustache  is  small,  and 
composed  of  about  twenty  bristles  and  hairs.  There  is  a  row  of  small,  thin,  yel- 
lowish bristles  behind  the  eyes. 

The  dorsal  thoracic  bristles  are  disposed  on  each  side  of  the  median  line  as 
follows: — one  black  a  second  yellow  or  black,  presutural;  one  yellow,  rarely 
black,  superalar  and  sometimes  a  second  yellow  or  black  bristle  is  present;  from 
two  to  five  dorsocentral,  of  which  the  two  posterior  are  always  yellow,  the  others, 
if  present,  are  black.  There  are  two  yellow  scutellar  bristles;  the  metapleural 
bristles  are  yellow,  and  the  hypopleural  bristles  are  suppressed. 

The  abdominal  bristles  are  mostly  black  on  the  first  segment,  and  long,  pro- 
minent and  yellow  on  the  second  to  fifth  segments.  The  upper  forceps  of  the 
male  genitalia  are  rather  long,  and  thin;  they  curve  upwards  apieally,  and  are 
without    a    process. 

The  legs  have  the  anterior  femora  without  spines;  the  intermediate  feinora 
with  only  three  spines,  one  of  which  is  placed  about  one-third  and  the  second  about 
two-thirds  the  length  of  the  anterior  side;  the  third  is  placed  subapicaUy  on  the 
posterior  side;  the  posterior  femora  have  the  spines  on  the  anterior  side  reduced 
to  two  or  three  representing  the  lower  row,  and  one  or  two  representing  the 
upper  row;  there  is  a  complete  ventral  row.  but  the  spines  are  often  reduced  in 
size  to  bristles. 

The  wings  have  a  normaj  venation ;  the  intermediate  crossvein  is  situated  a 
little  beyond  the  middle  of  the  discal  cell,  the  second  posterior  cell  is  long  and 
slightly  constricted  subapicaUy. 

5.     The  female  is  similar  to  the  male,  and  the  ovipositor  is  rather  short. 

Hab. — New  South  Wales:  Sydney  and  Blackheath. 

Note. — The  collection  under  revision  contains  nine  males  and  eleven  females 
from  Blackheath,  taken  from  the  14th  to  the  25th  November,  1919,  and  one 
female  from  Sydney  taken  on  the  30th  March,  1919;  there  are  also  two  females 
from  New  South  Wales  in  the  Maeleay  Museum.  They  agree  in  every  respect 
with  White's  description. 

Nfoitamus  maculatoides,    n.sp.      (Text-fig.  13.) 

Description.  A  black  species  with  a  superficial  resemblance  to  N.  maculata 
White,  but  the  female  ovipositor  is  shorter  and  only  slightly  compressed.  There 
is  no  description  amongst  the  Australian  species  of  Neoitamus  that  can  in  any 
way  be  associated  with  this  species. 


'Bull.   Mus.   Paris,  1909,  p.   144,  and  Ann.  Soc.   Ent.   France,  Ixxix.,  1910,  p.22. 


198 


AUSTRALIAN    PLIES  OF   THE   FAMILY    ASILIDAE, 


Text-fig.  11. — Neoitamus  claripes,  male  genitalia,     (.x  2.j). 
Text-fig.  12. — Neoitaiims  margites,  male  genitalia,     (x  25). 
Text-fig.  VA. ^Neoitaiims  iiun-ulaloides,  n.sp.,  male  genitalia. 


(x25). 


d.  The  front,  face  and  most  of  the  tubercle  are  brownish;  from  the  oral 
margin  to  behind  the  eyes,  the  head  is  covered  with  a  light  grey  tomentum.  The 
hair  on  the  front  is  black.  The  tubercle  is  large,  and  contains  a  large  moustache 
of  mostly  black  hairs,  but  at  the  oral  margin  the  hairs  are  white.  The  beard  is 
white.  There  is  apparently  a  double  row  of  bristles  behind  the  eyes.  The  an- 
tennae are  black,  the  first  joint  is  twice  the  length  of  the  second,  the  third  is 
elongate  and  tapering,  and  without  any  apparent  differentiated  style,  and  this  is 
longer  than  twice  the  length  of  the  two  ba-sal  joints  united.  The  eyes,  proboscis 
and  palpi  are  black,  the  latter  has  white  hairs. 

The  thorax  is  black,  with  traces  of  four  darker,  thin,  median  stripes  and  light 
grey  tomentum  stripes  and  spots.  The  dorsal  thoracic  bristles  are  disposed  each 
side  of  tlie  median  as  follows: — two  presutural;  two  superalar:  two  postalar;  and 
about  seven  dorsocentral .  There  are  also  numerous  bristle-like  hairs  on  the 
dorsum.  All  the  liristles  including  the  two  seulellar,  the  mctapleural  and  hypo- 
pleural  are  l)lack.  The  hairs  on  the  thorax  are  mostly  black,  but  there  are  long, 
thin,  white  hairs  posteriorly  and  on  the  shoulder  tubercles. 

The  abdomen  is  black,  with  the  incisions  and  sides  dark  grey.  The  hair 
above  and  below  is  white.  The  bristles  are  long,  black  and  prominent  as  far  as 
the  sixth  segment.  The  upper  forceps  of  the  male  genitalia  are  long,  naiTow 
and  .without  a  process. 

The  legs  have  the  anterior  femora  without  spines,  and  tiie  intermediate  and 
posterior  femora  with  their  respective  spine  systems  more  or  less  complete. 

The  wings  have  a  normal  venation;  the  intermediate  crossvein  is  situated  a 
little  beyond  the  discal  cell,  and  the  second  posterior  cell  is  short.  The  lower 
brancli  of  the  cubital  fork  is  rather  strongly  curved  ujiwards.  and  there  are 
fuscous  spots  situated  at  the  usual  positions,  one  each  at  the  apices  of  the  mar- 


BY  G.    H.    HARDY.  199 

ginal,  first  and  second  posterior,  and  the  discal  cells,  and  also  one  at  the  cubital 
fork . 

S.  The  female  is  similar  to  the  male;  the  ovipositor  is  very  short  and  only 
subcompressed ;  it  shows  a  ventral  surface  as  linear,  but  the  dorsal  surface  is 
convex  and  tapers  apically  and  in  transverse  section  a  "V"  is  formed  by  the  two 
sides. 

Length. — Male,  14  mm.;  female,  18  mm. 

Hab. — New  South  Wales :  Sydney ;  holotype  male  and  allotype  female,  31st 
March,  1918 ;  one  paratype  male,  29th  March,  1918. 

Type. — The  holotype  and  paratype  are  in  the  Australian  Museum. 

Neoitamus   maegites  Walker.      (Text-fly:-   1-) 

Asilus  margites,  Walker,  List    Dipt.  Brit.   Mus.,  ii.,  1849,  p.   461;    vii.,   suppl.   3, 

1855,  p.  737;  Ricardo,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  (8),  xi.,  1913,  p.  448. 
Nieoitamus   caUginosus,   White,  Proc.  Roy.   Soe.    Tas.,  1913   (1914),  p.  277;    1916, 
p.  176;  1917,  p.  93  (in  key). 

Synonymy. — Walker's  type  is  from  Melbourne,  and  White's  type  is  from 
Tasmania.  In  the  collection  under  revision  there  are  specimens  from  Sydney 
identified  by  White  as  his  N.  caliginosus;  these  agree  with  the  Tasmanian  speci- 
mens, and  also  with  Walker's  description  of  A.  margites. 

Description,  d.  The  face  has  a  large  tubercle,  and  a  moustache  composed 
of  mostly  white  hairs.     There  is  a  row  of  black  bristles  behind  the  eyes. 

The  dorsal  thoracic  bristles  are  disposed  on  each  side  of  the  median  as  fol- 
lows:— two  presutural;  two  superalar;  one  postalar;  five  dorsocentral.  The  num. 
her  of  bristles  appears  to  be  constant,  and  normally  they  are  black.  There  are 
two  scutellar  bristles  which  are  normally  black,  but  often  one  or  both  are  white. 
The  metapleural  bristles  are  black  and  the  hypopleural  bristles  are  white  and  weak 
or  obsolete. 

The  abdominal  bristles  are  mostly  black,  small  and  not  very  conspicuous. 
The  upper  forceps  of  the  male  genitalia  are  simple  and  without  a  process,  but  they 
have  a  row  of  about  ten  long,  slender,  dorsal  bristles  which  somewhat  conceal  the 
median  lamella. 

The  legs  have  the  anterior  femora  without  spines;  the  intermediate  femora 
with  the  row  on  the  anterior  side  usually  reduced  to  two  spines,  a  subapical 
spine  on  the  posterior  side,  and  the  ventral  row  of  spines  complete ;  the  posterior 
femora  with  the  system  of  spines  complete. 

The  wings  have  a  normal  venation ;  the  intermediate  erossvein  is  situated  aliout 
the  middle  of  the  discal  cell,  and  the  second  posterior  cell  is  short.  Sometimes 
fuscous  spots  are  present  on  the  wing. 

?.  The  female  is  similar  to  the  male  and  generally  has  a  few  black  hairs 
above  the  white  in  the  moustache ;  the  ovipositor  is  short. 

Rab. — Tasmania  and  New  South  Wales. 

Note. — In  the  collection  under  revision  there  are  twenty-five  specimens;  three 
males  and  four  females  from  Tasmania,  and  five  males  and  thirteen  females  from 
New  South  Wales.  One  female  from  Sydney  and  one  from  the  Hawkesbury  River 
are  labelled  by  White  as  his  N.  caliginosus. 

Neoitamus  setosus,  n.sp.     (Text-figs.  14,  15.) 

Description,     c?.     The    tubercle  of   the    face   is  large,    the    moustache  is  mostly 
white,  and  the   hairs   above  and   laterally   are  black.     The   front  is  black,  covered 


200 


AUSTRALIAN    PLIES  OF    THE    FAHILY    ASILIDAE, 


with  grey  tomentum,  and  contains  some  long  black  hairs  on  the  ocelli;  these  hairs 
extend  in  two  rows  parallel  to  the  eyes.  The  antennae  are  black ;  the  first  joint 
contains  some  short  black  bristles  and  some  long  black  ventral  hairs;  the  second 
segment  is  half  the  length  of  the  first  and  contains  some  short  black  bristles;  the 
third  segment  is  as  long  as  the  second  and  tapers  into  an  apparently  unjointed 
arista,  the  whole  length  of  the  joint  and  arista  is  slightly  longer  than  the  two 
basal  joints  united.  The  proboscis  is  black,  and  the  palpi  are  black  with  black 
hairs.     The  beard  is  white.     Behind  the  eyes  there  is  a  double  row  of  black  bristles. 

The  thoracic  markings  are  of  the  usual  form  containing  a  pair  of  median 
stripes  and  an  interrupted  lateral  stripe  on  each  side.  The  dorsal  thoracic 
bristles  are  disposed  on  each  side  of  the  median  as  follows: — two  presutural; 
two,  rarely  three,  superalar;  three,  rarely  four,  postalar;  seven  dorsocentral.  All 
these  bristles,  the  four  scutellar  bristles,  the  metapleural  and  hypopleural  bristles 
are  black.     The  thorax  ventrally  is  covered  with  grey  tomentum   and  white  hairs 

The  abdominal  bristles  are  yellowish,  long,  and  conspicuous  from  the  third  to 
the  sixth  segments  only.  The  segments  are  black  dorsally,  with  mostly  black 
hairs;  the  incisions,  sides  and  ventre  are  grey,  with  grey  tomentum  and  lon^-  yel- 
lowish hairs.  The  upper  forceps  of  the  male  genitalia  widen  apically,  and  each 
branch  has  a  long,  strong,  ventral  bristle  placed  subapically,  and  anteriorlv  to 
these  there  are  a  few  long  hairs.  The  lower  forceps  have  a  row  of  eight  \entral 
bristles  each ;  the  first  and  eighth  bristles  are  weakest . 


Text-tigs.  14-1.'5. — Neoilamiis  setosus,  n.sp.  It,  female  ovipositor; 
15,  male  genitalia,     (x  25). 


The  legs  have  the  coxae  covered  with  gi'ey  tomentum  and  hairs,  and  the  irter- 
mediate  coxae  have  two  black  bristles;  the  femora  are  black  with  white  pub- 
escence. Tlic  anterior  femora  are  without  spines;  the  intermediate  and  posterior 
femora  have  their  respective  system  of  spines  more  or  less  complete. 


BY   G.    H.    HARDY. 


201 


The  tibiae  are  reddish  with  the  apical  hith  blaek,  all  bristles  black.  The 
larei  are  black,  with  black  bristles  and  reddish  pubescence  beneath. 

The  mng-s  are  slifjiitly  infumed  and  have  a  normal  venation;  the  inter- 
mediate crossvein  is  situated  before  the  middle  of  the  discal  cell  and  the  second 
posterior  cell  is   rather   long  and  slightly  constricted  subapically. 

$.  The  female  is  similar  to  the  male;  the  abdominal  bristles  are  smaller;  the 
ovipositor  is  short,  and  contains  a  cylindrical  styliform  lamella.  The  sixth  and 
seventh  abdominal  segments  are  black,  shining  and  subcompressed ;  sometimes  the 
seventh  segment  is  quite  compressed,  and  both  the  sixth  and  seventh  segments  are 
as  long  as  the  ovipositor. 

Length. — Males,  15 — 16  mm.;  females,  13 — 19  mm. 

Hab. — New  South  Wales:  Sydney  and  Katoomba.     (November  to  .Januaiy.) 

Type. — The  holotype  male  and  the  allotype  female  were  presented  to  the 
Australian  Museum  by  Dr.  E.  W.  Ferguson.  They  were  taken  in  Sydney,  at 
Eoseville,  on  the  17th  and  8th  November,  1919;  respectively.  There  are  eleven 
paratypes,  four  males  and  three  females  from  the  type  locality,  also  taken  by 
Dr.  Ferguson;  one  male  taken  at  Katoomba  during  1912,  by  Mr.  E.  Green,  a 
pair  taken  by  Mr.  F.  H.  Taylor  in  Sydney,  and  one  in  the  Macleay  Museum. 

Note. — This  species  cannot  be  made  to  agree  with  any  description  so  far 
published.  A.  exilis  Macquart  has  bristles  on  the  apex  of  the  male  genitalia,  but 
differs  according  to  its  description  in  several  respects  and  is  from  Kangaroo 
Island.  Asilus  villaticiis  Walker  from  New  South  Wales,  and  Cerdistus  austraUa 
Ricardo  also  do  not  conform  to  this  species,  although  the  latter,  and  probably  tlie 
former,  have  bristles  on  the  male  genitalia.  The  females  of  both  these  are  known 
to  Miss  Ricardo,  and  it  is  taken  for  granted  that  no  species  known  to  that  author 
has  the  sixth  abdominal  segment  of  the  female  ovipositor-like.  Both  Miss 
Ricardo  and  White  state  that  the  sixth  abdominal  segment  does  not  form  part  of 
the  ovipositor  in  Australian  species.  Asihis  Jillferus  Macquart,  from  Sydney 
Island,  has  also  filaments  to  the  male  genitalia,  but  Maequart's  drawing  of  this 
organ  differs  considerably  from  that  of  the  species  described  above. 

Neoitamus  jiaculatus  White.     ( Text-%.  16 . ) 

Neoitamus  maculatm,  White,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.,  1913  (1914),  p.  278;  1917.  p. 
93  (in  key). 
Description      9.     The  face  has   a  large  tubercle;  the   moustache   is   composed 
chiefly  of  long  black  hairs,  but  there  are  white  iiairs  along  the  oral  margin.     Tliere 
appears  to  be  a  double  row  of  black  bristles  behind  the  eyes. 


Text-fig.  16. — Neoitaiiins  inacuhitus,  female  ovipositor,  ch'awn  from 
the  holotype.      (x  25) . 


202  AUSTRALIAN'    FLIES  OF   THE   FAMILY    ASILIDAE. 

The  dorsal  thoracic  bristles  are  disposed  on  each  side  of  the  median  line  as 
follows: — two  superalar,  and  anterior  to  these  there  is  a  third  but  very  weaK 
bristle;  the  postalar  are  represented  by  three  in  the  holotype  and  two  in  the  para- 
type;  about  live  dorsocentral;  all  these  bristles  are  black.  The  two  scutellar  and 
the  metapleural  and  hypopleural  bristles  are  black. 

The  abdominal  bristles  are  mostly  black,  but  some  white  occur  laterally.  The 
ovipositor  is  short  and  compressed;  the  lamella  is  cylindrical,  stylifonn,  and 
slightly  longer  than  usual  in  the  genus. 

The  leg's  have  the  anterior  femora  without  spines;  the  intermediate  femora 
have  about  four  conspicuous  black  spines  on  the  anterior  side  and  one  subapical 
spine  on  the  posterior  side;  the  posterior  femora  have  about  three  subapical  si>ines 
and  a  few  black  spines  on  the  anterior  side,  and  also  a  row  of  white,  ventral, 
bristle-like  spines. 

The  wings  have  a  normal  venation ;  the  intermediate  crossve'n  is  situated  at 
about  two-thirds  the  length  of  the  discal  cell  and  the  second  posterior  cell  is  rather 
short  and  slightly  constricted  subapically.  Fuscous  spots  are  present  in  the  usual 
positions ;  one  each  at  the  apices  of  the  marginal,  first  and  second  basal,  and  the 
discal  cells,  and  also  one  at  the  cubital  fork. 

(3.     The  male  is  unknown. 

Hob. — Western  Australia:  Armidale  and  Darlington,  near  Perth;  King 
George's  Sound. 

Type. — The  holotype,  in  the  Australian  Museum,  was  taken  at  Armidale  on 
1st  October,  1912.  The  paratype  is  smaller  and  was  taken  at  Darlington  on  7th 
October,   1912. 

Note. — Two  female  specimens,  from  King  George's  Sound,  are  in  the  Aus- 
tralian Museum  collection,  and  agree  with  the  type.  This  makes  four  specimens 
so  far  known,  l)ut  it  is  jii'obably  quite  a  common  species. 

Neoitamus  mistipes   Macquart. 

AsiJus  mistipes,  Macquart,  Dipt.  Exot.,  suppl.  4,  1850,  p.  94.  PI.  9,  fig.  3  (wing). 
Neoitamus  graminis,  White,  Proc.    Roy.    Soc.   Tas.,    1913    (1914),  p.    278;   1916, 

p.  179. 
Rhtibdotoitamus  graminis,  White,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.,  1917,  p.  99. 
Jf Neoitamus  mistipes,  Ricardo,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.    Hist.,    (8),   xi.,  1913,    p.    433; 

White,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.,  1913,  p.  275  (in  key). 
ffRhabdotoitamus  mistipes,  White,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.,  1917.  j>.  100. 

Syiwni/mi/. — Asilus  m>isti2Jes  Macquart  is  described  from  Tasmania,  and  the 
description  agrees  with  White's  R.  graminis. 

Miss  Ricardo  described  a  species  from  Mt.  Gambier,  South  Australia,  and 
refen-ed  it  to  Macquart's  name.  White  overlooked  Macquart's  locality,  and  in  his 
references  he  refers  to  Miss  Ricardo's  description  only,  using  the  locality  given 
there.     It  is  doubtful  if  Miss  Ricardo's  species  is  the  same  as  Macquart's. 

Unfortunately  there  is  not  a  specimen  of  7?.  graminis  White  in  the  collection 
under  revision,  nor  a  specimen  of  N.  mistipes  Ricardo  from  Soutii  Australia, 
nevertheless  the  above  synonymy  appears  to  be  convincing  enough  from  a  com- 
parison of  their  respective  descriptions. 


203 


ORDINARY  MONTHLY   MEETING. 
26th  May,  1920. 

Mr.  J.  J.  Fletcher,  M.A.,,  B.Sc,  President,  in  the  Chair. 

Mr.  Robert  Jacksox  Noble,  B.Sc,  Biological  Branch,  Dept.  of  Agriculture, 
Sydney,  was  elected  an  Ordinary  Member  of  the  Society. 

The  President  offered  the  congratulations  of  Members  to  Dr.  L.  A.  Cotton 
(in  absentia)   on  attaining  the  Doctorate  of  Science. 

A  circular  was  read  from  the  Hon.  Secretaries  of  the  Institute  of  Pathological 
Research  of  New  South  Wales,  calling  attention  to  the  establishment  of  the  Insti- 
tute, and  appealing  for  funds. 

The  Donations  and  Exchanges  received  since  the  previous  Monthly  Meeting 
(28th  April,  1920).  amounting  to  8  Vols,  65  Parts  or  Nos.,  20  Bulletins,  1  Report 
and  3  Pamphlets  etc.,  received  from  41  Societies  and  Institutions  and  three 
private  donors,  were  laid  upon  the  table. 

NOTES    AND  EXHIBITS. 

Mr.  F.  H.  Taylor  exhibited  specimens  of  Lucilia  fucina  Walker,  Neopollenia 
papua  Walk., — both  recorded  for  the  first  time  from  Australia,  the  former  being 
originally  described  from  S.  Africa,  the  latter  from  Papua.  L.  fucina  is  one  of 
the  sheep  maggot-flies  in  Queensland,  and  probably  in  other  States,  and  seems 
to  have  been  confused  with  L.  sericata. — CJiri/som/jia  rnfifacies  (Macq),  C.  varipes 
(Macq.),  and  Ophyra  analis  Macq.,  also  sheep  pests,  C.  dux  Esch.,  Lucilia  solain 
Walk.,  PyreUia  naronea  Walk.,  and  Chaetodacus  tryoni  (Frogg.),  a  fruit  fly 
which  breeds  in  grenadillas  in  North  Queensland;  also  Binellia  tayloriana  Bezzi 
and  Euprosopia  piinctifaeies  Bezzi. 

Mr.  E .  Cheel  exhibited  specimens  taken  in  October  last,  from  a  cultivated 
plant  of  a  so-called  double  flowering  peach-tree  (Pruniis  persica  var.  dianthiflora) 
showing,  in  addition  to  the  ordinary  flowers  with  an  increased  number  of  sepals 
and  corresponding  number  of  petals  and  single  pistils,  quite  a  number  of  flowers 
with  two,  three  and  four  carpels  distinct  from  the  calyx  and  from  each  other  in 
the  one  flower.  An  illustration,  together  with  a  note,  is  published  by  M.  J. 
Berkeley  in  the  Gardener's  Chronicle  for  18.52,  p.  452,  of  a  similar  occurrence  in 
a  "Golden  Drop  Plum,"  but  the  number  of  carpels  according  to  the  drawing  was 
usually  two,  or  occasionally  three,  in  the  one  flower.  Kemer  and  Oliver  ("Vol. 
ii.,  p.  548)  refer  to  this  peculiar  growth  under  the  term  "Antholysis,"  whilst 
Berkeley's  drawing  and  note  is  quoted  by  Masters  (Teratology,  p.  365,  fig.  186), 
under  the  term  Polyphylly  of  the  flower.  Worsdell  (The  Principles  of  Plant 
Teratology,  vol.  2,  p.  93,  1916)  mentions  that  in  dovible  flowers  of  the  cherry,  two 
carpels  are  almost  invariably  present.  Daydon  Jackson  defines  the  term  "Antho- 
lysis" as  a  loosening  or  a  retrograde  metamorphosis  of  a  flower. 

Mr.  A.  R.  McCulloch  exhibited  a  small  collection  of  fishes  recently  presented 
to  the  Australian  Museum  by  Mr.  David  G.  Stead,  general  manager  of  the  State 
Trawling  Industry.  These  had  been  trawled  in  150  fathoms,  East  of  Sydney,  on 
the  edge  of  the  continental  shelf,  and  included  several  species  not  hithei-to  recorded 
from  New  South  Wales  waters. 


204  XOTES   AND    EXHIBITS. 

Mr.  A.  A.  Hamilton  exhibited  a  series  of  speeiniens  of  Aroids  from  the 
National  Herbarium,  illustrating  Chromatism,  Vireseence  and  Multiplication  of 
Spathes.  (1)  Anthurium  chelseiensis  Hort.,  Botanic  Gardens,  Sydney  (E.  N. 
Ward,  April,  1914).  (2)  .4.  AiKlreaniim  Linden,  "Uralla,"  Concord  (J.  H. 
Horton,  July,  1917).  In  both  examples  tlic  highly  coloured  pigfment.  which  under 
normal  conditions  covers  the  spathe,  is  only  partially  developed.  On  a  portion  of 
the  surface  the  chlorophyll  is  disclosed  (vireseence)  indicating  the  leafy  origin  of 
the  spathe.  In  the  example  of  A.  Andreanum  the  spadix  is  suppressed  and  the 
spathe  slightly  malformed.  (3)  Bichardia  africana  Kunth.,  Manly  (W.  Ellison, 
August,  1914),  showing  (o)  a  coloured  leaf  (chromatism)  on  the  flower  stem  simu- 
lating the  spathe,  (b)  drawing  by  Miss  M.  Flockton  of  a  flower  grown  at  Sum- 
mer Hill  by  Mrs.  W.  H.  Hughes,  depicting  a  supernumerary  spathe  enfolding 
the  normal  floral  envelope.  (4)  Bichardia  Elliottiana  ><  Pentlandii,  Sydney 
Botanic  Gardens  (C.  Woolnough,  January,  1920)  from  a  seedling  raised  b.\-  H. 
H.  B.  Bradley.  In  this  example  the  colouring  pigment  of  the  spathe  is  partially 
developed  in  the  supporting  leaf.  Worsdell  (Prin.  of  Plant  Teratol.,  i.,  PI.  xvii.) 
figures  a  similar  example  of  chromatism  in  B.  Elliottiana,  and  it  is  interesting  to 
note  that  a  seedling  of  this  stock  raised  in  Australia  ha-s  perpetuated  the 
abnormality. 

Jlr.  Fletcher  eyhibited  a  remarkable  leaf  of  Jacaraiida  ovalifolia,  12i  inches 
long,  apparently  bifurcated  apically  for  3  inches,  one  branch  having  9A,  and  the 
other  8i  pairs  of  jjinnae,  with  13A  pairs  of  pinnae  on  the  undivided  pro.fimal 
portion;  and  he  raised  the  (juestion  whether  it  was  really  a  case  of  division  of  the 
gi-owing  point;  or,  seeing  that  the  apparent  bifurcations  have  pairs  of  pinnae, 
whether  it  was  a  ease  of  the  incomplete  fusion  of  two  leaves.  He  showed  also 
flowering  branches  of  .1.  discolor  with  leaves  with  one  pair,  two  paii-s,  and  three 
pairs  of  pinnae;  leaves  of  advanced  seedlings  which  had  not  yet  flowered,  with 
ten  and  eleven  pairs  of  pinnae;  and  reversion-shoots  and  seedlings  of  euphvllo- 
dineous  Acacias,  to  illustrate  the  importance  of  taking  account  of  the  terminal 
setae. 


205 


REPORT  ON   THE    NEUROPTEROID  INSECTS  OF    THE  HOT  SPRINGS 
REGION,  N.Z.,   IN  RELATION   TO   THE    PROBLEM   OF  TROUT  FOOD. 

By  R.J.  TiLLVARu,  M.A..  D.Sc,  F.L.S.,  F.E.S.,  Lixxeax  Macleay  Fkllow 
OF  THE  Society  ix  Zoology. 

(With  two   Text-figures.) 

On  arrival  at  Auckland  from  Sydney  on  November  5tli  of  last  year,  I  was 
met  by  Mr.  D.  Miller,  Government  Entomologist,  and  Mr.  H.  Hamiltoi.,  Zoolo- 
gist to  the  Dominion  Museum,  and  proceeded  with  them  to  Rotorua,  where  I  met 
Mr.  Moorhouse,  in  charge  of  the  Fish  Hatchery  in  Lake  Rotorua,  and  Mr.  Hill, 
Head  of  the  Tourist  Department.  All  these  gentlemen  offered  me  every  assist- 
ance in  carrying  out  my  investigations,  and  I  desire  to  thank  them  very  sincerely 
for  their  aid. 

Three  weeks  were  spent  in  the  Hot   Springs  Region,  the   following'  being  the 
itineraiy : — 
Nov.     7tb-10th:     Rotorua.     Yisit(?d  Te  Wairoa,  Whakarewarewa  and  portions  of 

the  Lake. 
Nov.  llth-17th:     Te  Wairoa  and  Lake   Tarawera. 
Nov.  18th-19th:     Rotorua.     Visited    Fairy  Spring,    Hamurana    Spring,    Lake  Ro- 

toiti  and  Okere  Rapids. 
Nov.  20th-21st :     Wairakei  and  Taupo. 
Nov.  22nd-26th :     Tokaanu. 
Nov.  27th  :  Lake  Roto-Aira. 

Nov.  28th :  Wairaarino. 

It  was  hoi)e<l  that  a  return  visit  might  have  l)een  arranged  later  in  the  seascm 
(February)  in  order  to  see  the  other  lakes  and  streams  of  this  region,  and  to 
study  the  insects  in  the  height  of  summer.  Circumstances,  however,  made  it  im- 
possible to  carry  out  this  plan. 

The  work  done  in  the  field  may  be  divided  into  two  parts : — 
(i.)    Examinations  of  the  contents  of  trout-stomachs. 

(ii.)    Collection  of  the  larvae  and  imagines  of  Nenropteroid  Insects  from 
the  streams  and  lakes. 

'  (i.)   The  Contexts  op    Trout-Stomachs. 

An  examination  of  a  considei'able  number  of  trout-stomachs  during  the 
month  of  November  showed  a  great  diversity  of  food  eaten.  The  Green  Mauuka- 
Beetle,  Pyronota  festira,  was  found  to  be  the  most  abundant  food.  This  beetle 
visits  the  Manuka  bushes  fringing  the  lakes  and  streams,  and  frequently  falls  or 
is  blown  off  into  the  water,  when  it  is  at  once  seized  and  swallowed  by  the  trout. 
Next  in  importance  to  this  were  found  to  be  the  larvae  of  the  Caddis-flies  of  the 
family  Leptoceridae.  which  form  their  cases  of  the  green  weed  Nitella.  The 
stomachs  of  a  number  of  trout  were  found  to  be  filled  with  this  green  weed,  which, 
on  being  placed  in  a  basin    of  water    was  seen    to    consist   entirely  of  caddis-fly 


206  XEUROPTEROID    IXSECTS    OF     THE     HOT    SPRINGS     REGION,     X.Z., 

cases,  many  of  the  larvae  being  still  ali\e  within  the  trout's  stomach.  Another 
important  food  was  a  small  Mollusc,  Potamopyrrjus  sp.,  of  which  no  less  than  140 
■were  counted  in  the  stomach  of  a  "slab"  taken  at  Rotorua.  Other  foods  found 
Jess  commonly  were  the  laiTae  of  Dragonflies,  Mayflies,  Stonefiies  and  the  other 
families  of  Caddis-flies,  occasional  remains  of  the  Crayfish,  small  fish,  and  a 
number  of  insects  of  various  kinds  which  may  be  considered  to  have  no  definite 
value  as  trout-food    being  only  chance  captures. 

Besides  these,  it  is  important  to  note  that  some  trout-stomachs  were  found 
containing  nothing  but  pebbles,  and  several  were  quite  empty. 

A  considerable  number  of  the  trout  examined  were  definitely  "slabs."  The 
slabby  condition  appeared  to  be  due,  not  only  to  the  usual  poor  health  of  the  fish 
for  some  months  after  spawning  had  taken  place,  but  more  definitely  to  both 
semi-starvation  and  indigestion.  It  was  not  surprising  to  find  that  fish  with 
their  stomachs  empty,  or  only  filled  with  pebbles  were  in  poor  condition.  But 
there  were  also  cases  in  which  the  slabby  condition  appeared  to  have  been  caused 
by  the  indigestibility  of  the  food.  In  one  case  the  large  claws  of  a  crayfish  were 
found  fixed  inside  the  stomach  of  a  trout  in  such  a  way  as  to  block  the  passage 
of  other  food ;  and  they  had  evidently  been  there  a  considerable  time,  seeing  that 
all  the  rest  of  the  animal  had  been  completely  digested.  This  led  me  to  conclude 
that  the  crayfish  is  only  a  good  food  for  trout  when  it  is  of  not  too  large  a  size. 
Consequently  the  introduction  of  any  larger  or  more  ^ngorous  species  of  crayfish 
than  the  one  endemic  in  the  region  ought  not  to  be  encouraged. 

(ii.)   The  Neuropteroid  Faux  a  of  the  Streams  axd  Lakes. 

The  Neuropteroid  Insects  inhabiting  the  streams  and  lakes  of  the  Hot  Springs 
Region  may  be  divided  into  .six  Orders,  three  of  which  belong  to  the  more  primi- 
tive division  of  the  winged  insects,  viz.,  those  that   have  no  true  j>ui)al   or   resting 
stage  (Hemimetabola)  and  three  lielong  to  tlie  more  higlily  evolved  division,  pos- 
sessing a  true  pupal  stage   (Hok)nietabola).     Tliey  may  be  classified  as  follows:— 
Division  Ilemimetdhola:    (Winged  insects  without  a  true  |)ui>al  or  resting  stage). 
Order  1.     Perlaria  or  Stone-flies. 
,,     2.     Plectoptera  or  May-flies. 
,,     3.     Odonata    or  Dragonflies. 
Division  Uohniietabolu:      (Winged  insects   iiossessing   a   true   pupal   stage). 
Order  4.      Megaloptera  or  Alder-Hies. 
,,     5.     Planipennia   oi-  Lacewings. 
„     6.      Trichoptera  or  Caddis-flies. 
(^Xote. — The    Scorpion-flies,    Order   Meooptera.    ai-c    not     reiiresented     in     the 
Region  under  discussion.) 

Of  the  six  Orders  enumerated  we  may  omit  from  the  discussion  Order  5 
(Lacewings)  Avhose  larvae  are  either  terrestrial,  or  else  lurkers  along  the  moist 
borders  of  streams.  They  attack  the  larvae  of  the  other  Orders  wliich  are 
of  value  as  food  for  trout.  Thus,  in  so  far  as  they  affect  the  problem  at  all, 
they  act  detrimentally  to  the  food-supply.  But  they  are  exceedingly  rare  in  the 
Hot  Springs  Region,  and  were  only  found  by  me  in  two  localities,  viz.:  Hanniiana 
Spring,  and  the  waterfall  at  Wahi,  near  Tokaanu. 

Order  4  (Alder-flies)  is  only  repi'esented  in  New  Zealand  by  a  single  species, 
Arclmcliauliodes  dubitatm,  an  insect  of  large  size,  whose  fat,  succulent  larva  is 
found  under  rocks  in  streams,  and  forms  an  excellent  food  for  trout.  This  larva 
is  called  the  "Black  Creeper,"  or  sometimes  the  "Toe-biter."     Though   very  nbun- 


BY    R.   J.    TILLY ARD.  207 

dant  in  most  parts  of  New  Zealand,  it  appears  to  have  been  exterminated  by  the 
trout  in  most  parts  of  the  Hot  Springs  Keaion,  thouali  it  is  still  fairly  al)undant 
on  the  Tongariro  Biver  and  tributaries. 

The  other  four  Orders,  Stone-flies,  May-flies,  Dragon-flies  and  L'adilis  flies, 
are  of  the  gi-eatest  importance  as  trout-food,  and  we  liave  to  consider  them  in 
somewhat   greater  detail. 

The  Stone-flies. 

These  insects  confine  themselves  to  running  watei-,  preferring  rocky  streams, 
with  a  fairly  fast  current.  Their  larvae  live  on  rocks  and  stones,  where  they 
wander  freely  in  search  of  food.  The  perfect  insects,  or  imagines,  are  sluggish, 
and  seldom  fly,  preferring  to  sit  about  on  the  vegetation  overhanging  the  streams. 
Nevertheless,  they  frequently  fall  into  the  water,  and  are  eagerly  seized  by  the 
trout.  Both  larvae  and  imagines  are  soft-bodied  insects  with  a  plentiful  supply  of 
fat,  and  form  an  ideal  and  easily  digested  food  for  trout. 

Except  along  the  Tongariro  River  and  its  tributaries,  where  the  Stone-By 
fauna  is  still  abundant,  these  insects  are  very  rare  in  the  Hot  Springs  Region ; 
and  it  is  very  clear  that  they  have  been  greatly  I'educed  in  number  by  the  trout. 

The  large  green  Stone-fly,  Stenoperla  prasiiia,  generally  abundant  tlirough- 
out  New  Zealand,  and  one  of  the  best  of  trout-foods,  was  only  to  be  found  in 
streams  above  high  waterfalls,  where  trout  were  absent.  It  has  been  almost 
completely  annihilated  in  the  Hot  Springs  Region. 

The  Black  Stopc-fly,  Austrnperhi  ci/re>ie,  the  most  abundant  Stone-lly  through- 
out New  Zealand,  has  likewise  been  almost  eliminated  by  the  trout.  A  colony  of 
larvae  was  discovered  at  the  extreme  head  of  one  of  the  small  streams  at  Hamu- 
rana.     There  are  also  a  few  larvae  left  here  and  there  in  the  Tongariro  River. 

Of  the  slender  Stone-flies  (family  Leptoperlidae)  a  number  were  found  on 
the  Tongariro  River  and  its  tributaries.  Some  of  these  are  new  to  science,  and 
will  be  described  later.  But,  generally  speaking,  it  may  be  said  that  these  valu- 
able flies,  like  the  rest  of  the  Perlaria.  are  on  the  verge  of  extinction  in  the  Hot 
Springs  Region. 

It  would,  I  think,  be  well  within  the  mark  to  estimate  that  more  than  80  % 
of  the  original  Stone-fly  fauna  of  the  Region  has  already  been  destroyed  by  the 
trout. 

The  May-flies. 

These  insects  inhabit  both  streams  and  lakes.  In  all  parts  of  the  world  they 
form  one  of  the  most  important  articles  of  diet  for  the  trout.  Both  the  larvae 
and  the  imagines  are  soft-bodied  and  easily  digested.  In  the  Northern  Hemi- 
sphere, where  the  evolution  of  the  May-flies  has  taken  place  alongside  that  of  the 
native  trout,  the  larvae  have  resorted  to  many  cunning  devices  in  order  to  escape 
their  rapacious  enemies.  Those  of  the  larger  species  mostly  burrow  into  the 
banks  of  streams,  and  thus  secure  immunity  from  attack;  while  the  smaller  forms 
hide  under  rocks  and  stones,  and  evade  attack  by  their  quick  running  powers. 
Thus  the  trout  only  secure  the  May-flies  in  their  winged  stages  (subiniago  and 
imago ) . 

In  New  Zealand,  the  native  May-fly  fauna  has  been  evolved  without  exposure 
to  the  attacks  of  rapacious  fish  such  as  the  trout.  There  is  only  one  large  species 
whose  larva  burrows  into  the  river-banks,  viz.,  Ichthybotus  hudsoni;  and  it  is 
clear,  for  many  reasons,  that  this  May-fly  did  not  evolve  this  habit  in  New  Zea- 
land, but  migrated   thither    long  after  the  adoption  of    it.     All    the    rest    of  the 


208  XEUROPTEROID    INSECTS    OF     THE     HOT    SPRINGS     REGION',     X.Z., 

large  May-flies,  forming  together  a  magnificent  fauna  unequalled  in  any  other 
part  of  the  world,  have  evolved  little  or  no  protective  habits  against  such  a 
fish  as  the  trout.  The  larvae  of  Oniscif/a-ster,  one  of  the  finest  May-Hies  in  the 
world,  sit  about  on  rocks  or  on  the  gravelly  Ijottoms  of  streams;  and.  when  at- 
tacked, they  only  wriggle  foi-ward  like  a  shrimp.  Consequently  they  have  become 
un  easy  prey  to  the  introduced  trout,  whicli  gorged  themselves  for  some  years  on 
this  large  supply  cf  choice  food.  This  magnificent  genus  is  now  quite  extinct 
throughout  the  Hot  Springs  Region,  and  also  in  the  streams  around  Christchurcli, 
though  still  to  be  found  here  and  there  in  out-of-the-way  places  in  both  Ishmds. 
Anotlier  fine  genus.  Ameletus,  has  larvae  capable  of  quicker  movement,  and  is 
therefore  still  fairly  abundant  in  most  parts  of  New  Zealand.  But  these  larvae 
are  also  on  the  verge  of  extinction  in  the  Hot  Springs  Region.  I  did  not  dis- 
cover a  single  Ameletus  larva  throughout  my  investigations,  though  I  caught  a  fine 
imago  of  a  new  species  belonging  to  this  genus  above  the  high  waterfall  at  Wahi, 
near  Tokaanu.  where  trout  are  absent.  A  third  May-fly  genus  of  great  import- 
ance is  Coliibrtrisciis.  The  larvae  have  a  certain  amount  of  protection  against  the 
trout,  owing  to  their  bizarre  form,  their  gills  being  arranged  so  that  they  look  like 
a  small  piece  of  tangled  moss  or  weed.  They  are  very  sluggish  and  hide  under 
rocks  and  stones  in  running  water.  Coloburiscus  humeralis  is  one  of  the  most 
abundant  May-flies  in  New  Zealand;  yet  it  has  been  practically  eliminated  fr<im 
all  parts  of  the  Hot  Spring's  Region,  except  only  on  the  Tongariro  River  and  its 
tributaries,  and  on  those  small  streams  where  trout  are  absent,  from  some  cause 
or  other,  such  as  the  intervention  of  a  high  waterfall,  as  at  Wahi. 

Besides  the  larger  May-flies  mentioned  above,  there  are  two  genera  of  smaller 
■\[ay-flies,  Atalophlehia  and  Deleatidium,  containing  numerous  species  whicli  are 
very  abundant  all  over  New  Zealand.  The  larvae  live  under  rocks  and  stones  in 
streams  and  lakes,  and  are  fairly  active.  Most  of  them  are  vegetable  feeders, 
but  a  few  are  carnivorous.  A  number  of  species  of  these  genera  were  collected, 
some  of 'them  new  to  science.  These  latter  will  be  described  later.  Througlioui 
the  Hot  Springs  Region,  a  very  considerable  diminution  of  the  supply  of  the 
small  ]\ray-flies  is  noticeable;  and  this  cannot  fail  to  exercise  a  serious  effect  upon 
the  future  of  the  trout. 

To  svmi  up  the  position,  we  may  say  tluit  tlie  largest  May-flies,  which  lorm 
the  very  finest  possible  food  for  trout,  ha\-e  been  ])ractically  exterminated,  v.hile 
the  smaller  forms  Iiave  been  reduced,  at  a  moderate  estimate,  by  over  50  '"f . 

Tlie  Dmgon-flies. 

New  Zealand  is  poor  in  species  of  Dragonflies.  but  most  of  them  are  common. 
Seven  species  are  found  very  commonly  throughout  the  Hot  Springs  Region.  Of 
these  the  largest  {Uropetala  carovei)  is  of  no  importance  as  trout  food,  the  larva 
dwelling  in  holes  in  the  moss  and  peat  of  swamps.  The  larvae  of  the  bright  red 
Diplacodes  bipunctata,  dwelling  in  still  back-waters,  may  also  be  left  out  of  ac- 
count. The  larvae  of  the  other  five  were  all  found  by  me  in  the  stomachs  of 
trout,  tlie  most  fref|uently  occurring  being  those  of  Procordulia  smitliii,  Pr.  r/rai/i 
and  X(()itliiic»emis  celandica.  No  doubt,  later  on  in  the  season,  the  trout  would 
also  feed  upon  tiie  imagines,  as  in  Tasmania. 

In  certain  parts  of  New  Zealand.  T  found  Dragonfly  larvae  to  he  the  principal 
food  of  the  trout.  In  the  Hot  Springs  Region,  the  trout  seem  to  have  consider- 
ably diiiiinislied  the  number  of  larvae,  and  they  do  not  form  so  important  an 
article  nf  diet,  perhaps  because  they  are  more  protected  by  their  peculiar  colour- 


BY    n.   J.    TILLYARD.  209 

ation  and  habits  than  are  some  other  aquatic  insect  larvae,  such  as  those  of  May- 
flies. It  seems  clear  that  their  numbers  have  been  much  decreased  since  the  trout 
were  freed  in  these  lakes  and  rivei-s,  although  I  am  unable  to  estimate  this  reduc- 
tion as  clearly  as  in  the  cases  of  Stone-fiies  and  May-flies. 

TJie   Caddis-flies. 

Observations  in  other  parts  of  the  world,  as  well  as  in  other  parts  of  New 
Zealand,  show  that  Caddis-fly  larvae  foi-m  one  of  the  most  important  articles  of 
diet  for  the  trout.  Most  of  these  larvae  construct  cases  for  themselves  out  of 
weeds,  sticks,  sand  or  small  pebbles;  and  one  would  imagine  that  such  habits  as 
these  would  serve  as  eflicient  protection  for  them.  But  this  is  not  the  case.  The 
trout  know  well  the  habits  of  the  Caddis  larvae.  They  watch  carefully  for  any 
suspicious  movement  amongst  the  weeds,  sticks,  etc.,  that  strew  the  bottoms  of  the 
lakes  and  streams,  and  they  pounce  upon  the  larvae  and  swallow  them  whole  in 
their  cases.  The  substance  of  the  case  is  usually  indigestible;  but  the  larva  itself 
is  a  succulent,  fat  morsel,  and  an  excellent  food  for  the  fish.  Those  most  sought 
after  are  the  elongated,  more  or  less  cylindrical  eases  of  the  Leptoeerid-ae  and 
Sericostomatidae,  the  former  usually  made  from  weeds,  pieces  of  leaves  or  sticks, 
the  latter  from  grains  of  sand  or  a  thin  transparent  substance  secreted  by  the 
iarva  itself.  In  the  Leptoceridae,  the  genera  Notanatolica,  Triplectides  and 
Oecetis  are  abundant  throughout  New  Zealand;  in  the  Sericostomatidae  the  same 
is  true  of  Olinga  and  Piicnocentria.  Throughout  the  Hot  Springs  Region  the 
trout  have  most  seriously  diminished  the  number  of  these  and  other  Caddis-flies. 
Only  two  species  now  remain  at  all  common,  viz.,  Oecetis  unicolor,  whose  larva 
is  still  common,  feeding  in  the  green  NitellaAj^As  in  the  lakes,  and  Ilydropsyche 
colonica,  whose  larvae  form  fixed  houses  of  small  pebbles  attached  to  rocks.  This 
latter  species  still  exists  in  great  numbers  in  such  places  as  the  Okere  Rapids, 
where  the  rush  of  water  is  too  swift  for  the  trout  to  search  for  it.  Its  comparative 
absence  in  other  parts  is  strong-  evidence  of  the  reduction  of  the  Caddis-fauna, 
due  to  the  trout. 

The  most  striking  instance  of  the  almost  complete  loss  of  the  original  rich 
Caddis-fauna  is  afforded  by  the  condition  of  the  Te  Wairoa  stream,  flowing  into 
Lake  Tarawera.  Except  in  the  rough  water  below  the  Falls,  where  no  trout 
exist,  it  is  almost  impossible  to  oI)tain  any  caddises  in  the  stream.  But  a 
short  distance  off  there  is  a  nuich  smaller  stream,  rising  from  a  hill 
near  the  lake.  This  stream  has  been  dammed  off  by  boards,  and  the  water 
drawn  off  close  to  its  exit  into  the  lake  by  a  force-pump.  No  trout  pass  up 
this  small  stream.  On  examining  it  I  found  that  it  was  swarming  with  caddis- 
larvae  under  every  stone  and  stick,  and  upon  the  gravelly  bed  and  sides  of  the 
stream  these  little  creatures  were  most  abundant.  Yet  a  day's  search  in  the  Te 
Wairoa  stream  yielded  far  less  than  I  was  able  to  ]iick  out  in  the  course  of  ten 
minutes  in  this  tiny  stream  a  mile  away  from  it. 

It  would  not  be  overestimating  the  depredation  caused  by  the  trout  amongst ' 
the  Caddis-fauna  of  the  Hot  Springs  Region,  if  the  loss  were  put  at  90  %  of  the 
original  fauna. 

TirE  St.\tk  of  the  Insect  Food  Supply. 

My  survey  of  the  insects  of  the  Hot  Spring-s  Region  quickly  convinced  me 
that  the  balance  of  nature  has  been  completely  upset  by  the  introduction  of  the 
trout.     By  comparison  with  the  state  of  affairs  in  most  parts  of  the  South  Island, 


210  XEUROPTKROID    IN.SEC'TS    OF     THE      HOT    SPRIXGS     REGION,     X.Z., 

where  the  fauna,  though  seriously  reihu'eil  in  many  places,  is  usually  found  to 
be  more  abundant  than  it  is  in  this  Region,  it  appears  certain  that  the  Rainbow 
Trout  has  had  a  gi'eater  share  in  the  eating-out  of  the  insect  fauna  than  has  the 
slower  and  less  greedy  Brown  Trout.  The  histt)ry  of  the  Trout-flslieries  of  the 
Region  may  be  briefly  stated  as  follows : — 

(i.)   Before  the  introduction  of  the  trout  the  rivers  of  New  Zealand  swarmed 
with  an  aquatic  insect  fauna  as  abundant  as  that  to  be  found  in  any 
part  of  the  world.     The  lakes  carried  a  less  abundant   fauna  of  fewer 
species, 
(ii.)   The    great  majority    of  these  insects,    having  evolved  to    their    present 
state  without    the   stimulus    of  the   predatory    action  of  any   rapacious 
fish,  possessed  no  means  of  defence  against  the  trout  when  they  were 
introduced. 
(iii.)   The  introduced  trout,  and  especially  the  Rainbow,  gorged  themselves  at 
leisure  upon  the  rich  food ;  so  tliat,  in  the  course  of  a  few  years,  trout 
of  record   size  were  being  caught,   and   the  fisheries  obtained  a  world- 
wide   reputation. 
(iv.)   No  scientific   attempts  have  been  made   to   conserve   or  renew  the  food- 
supply.     On  the  contrary,  the  only  idea  seemed  to  be  to  put  in  more 
and  more  fry. 
(v  )   As   soon    as   the  food  supply  began    to  fail,    some   of  the    trout  became 
weakened;     "slabbiness"  became  noticeable;  and  disease  in  the  form  of 
thread-worm  and   fungoid  growths  appeared.     There   is  also  consider- 
able evidence  of  actual  starvation  of  trout  in  certain  streams. 
(vi.)    Rome  attempts  liave  been  made  of  late  years   to   reduce  the   nunil)er   of 
trout   by   netting    and   trawling.     These  efforts    may   be   said    to   have 
tjrouglit  about   some   slight  improvement   in   the   condition  of  the  fish. 
At   the   same   time,   the  destruction  of  shags  has  diminished    the  pre- 
valence of  the  thread-worm  (of  which  the  shag  is  said  to  be  the  inter- 
mediate host).     But  the  disease  is  by  no  means  stamped  out.  and  most 
certainlv  recjuires  further  careful  study. 
The  present  ]iosition  of  the  trout-fislieries  of  the  Hot  Spring's  Region  is  that 
there  is,  throughout  most  of  the  Region,   not  enough   food  for  the   trout   present. 
Many  of   the  streams,   especially    those  in    which  the  fish  spawn    legularly.    are 
almost  totally  "eaten-out,"  and  the  amount  of  food  in  the  lakes  is  woefully  defi- 
cient.   The  only  part  of  the  Region  in  which  the  state  of  affairs  can  be  described  as 
at  all  hopeful,  so  far  as  my  investigations  go,  is  the  Tongariro  River  and  its  tri- 
butaries, where  the  supply  of  food  is  still  fairly  abundant. 

One  might  sum  up  the  position,  somewliat  caustically,  t)y  comparing  it  with 
that  of  a  gi-azier  who  put  10,000  head  of  cattle  into  a  very  rich  1000-acre  paddock, 
left  the  animals  to  feed,  and,  when  the  food  supply  began  to  fail,  prepared  to 
remedy  it  by  putting  in  a  fresh  supply  of  calves  every  year,  without  making  any 
attempt  to  improve  the  impoverished  food  supply ! 

(iii.)    Recommexiwtions. 

It  is  clear  that  improvement  in  the  Trout  fisheries  of  the  Hot  Springs  Re- 
gion can  be  effected  along  two  distinct  lines,  \nz.: — improvement  of  the  food  supply 
and  reduction  in  the  numh^r  of  trout.  No  considerations  of  the  attractions  to  to\irists 
or  anglers,  from  a  super-ubundant  supply  of  trout,  should  be  allowed  to  cloud 
the  main  issue,  which  is  this    that,  unlesx  a  natural  balance  can  he  brought  about 


BY    R.  J.    TILLYAKD.  211 

between   the  iiitradiiced  tntnt  mid  the  fnod  f^itpidii,  the  fislierief:  are  sooner  or  later 
doomed  to  failure. 

With  regai'il  to  the  improvement  of  tlie  food  supply,  the  position  is  at  pre- 
sent a  very  serious  one,  in  so  far  that  the  balance  has  been  so  greatly  upset,  that 
no  measures  for  the  introduction  of  fresh  types  of  food  can  be  expected  to  suc- 
ceed, unless  such  food  is  most  carefully  protected  until  it  becomes  well  established. 
It  is,  therefore,  necessary  to  adopt  at  once  measures  which  will  not  only  help  to 
conserve  the  remnant  of  the  food  supply  still  existing,  but  will  also  give  the 
afiuatic  fauna  a  chance  of  multiplying  and  approximating  towards  its  original 
abundance.  To  bring  this  about  I  would  make  the  following  recommendations: — 
1.  A  badly  impoverished  stream  should  be  selected,  and  should  be  completely 
blocked  by  means  of  specially  designed  trap-nets,  so  as  to  prevent  any  trout  jtass- 
ing  up  it  to  spawn;  also  any  trout  at  present  in  it  should  be  taken  out.  Aquatic 
insects  should  then  be  introduced  from  neighbouring  small  streams  where  no 
trout  exist  (e.g.,  such  parts  of  streams  as  lie  above  high  waterfalls),  and  a 
■:-areful  record  kept  by  means  of  annual  or  biennial  visits,  upon  the  progi'ess  of 
the  aquatic  insect  life  in  the  stream.  I  estimate  that  it  will  take  at  least  three 
years,  possibly  five,  for  such  an  impoverished  stream  to  return  to  its  original  con- 
dition. If,  at  the  end  of  two  or  three  years,  it  becomes  evident  that  the  aquatic 
fauna  is  increasing,  steps  should  then  be  taken  to  block  off  in  the  same  way  each 
spawning  stream  in  turn;  so  that,  in  any  given  year,  there  will  only  be  certain 
streams  open  to  the  trout  for  spawning,  wliile  the  rest  will  be  given  a  chance 
cf  recuperation. 

For  this  purpose  I  would  recommend  either  of  the  following  two  streams : — 
(a)  The  Te  TTairoa  stream,  from  the  waterful  to  the  outlet  of  Lake  Tarawera. 
(There  is  an  abundant  supply  of  aquatic  insects  in   the  small  creek   on   the  left- 
hand  side  of  the  road  leading  down  to  the  wharf,  about  a  mile  from  the  Te  Wniroa 
stream) . 

(6)  The  Tokaanu  stream.  (Aquatic  insects  are  abundant  in  the  small  streams 
around  Wahi,  two  miles  away.) 

In  both  cases,  the  nature  of  the  river-bed  (pumice)  and  frequency  of  flood 
water  make  it  impossible  to  block  the  stream  by  means  of  stake  or  pile-nets.  I 
would,  therefore,  recommend  that  the  nets  be  strung  on  strong  supports  driven 
into  the  banks,  and  that  their  lower  ends  should  hang  freely  into  the  stream,  and 
cari-y  lead  weights  at  short  intervals.  The  accompanying  diagrams  (p.  212).  show 
the  type  of  net  to  be  used. 

If  at  the  end  of  three  years  there  is  no  sign  of  the  native  aquatic  insect 
fauna  reasserting  itself,  I  would  i-ecommend  that  an  attempt  be  made  to  intro- 
duce the  English  "Oreen  Drake"  Mayfly.  Ephemera  daiiiea,  or  such  other  species 
as  are  known  to  be  of  great  value  as  food  ior  trout.  These  could  be  set  fi'ee  in 
the  larval  condition  in  the  streams  selected  as  a  sanctuary  under  recommenda- 
tion (2)  following  this  below. 

2.  It  is  of  the  gTeatest  importance  that  one  lake,  together  with  the  streams 
flowing  into  it,  should  be  set  aside  as  a  sanctuary  for  the  natural  food-supply. 
Most  unfortunately,  this  aspect  of  the  f|uestion  was  not  considered  when  the 
stocking  of  the  streams  with  trout  was  undertaken.  The  result  is  that  there  is  at 
present  no  lake  in  the  Rotorua  District  which  does  not  contain  trout.  In  the 
Taupo  District,  an  undertaking  was  given  by  the  Government  to  the  Maoris  that 
Lake  Roto-Aira  should  be  kept  free  from  trout.  Unfortunately,  trout  were  sur- 
reptitiously introduced  into  this  lake  two  years  or  more  ago,  and  have  grown  to  a 


212  XElIiOPTEROID    IXSKCTS    OF     THK      HOT    SPRIXd.S     IffXlIOX,     X.Z., 


B. 


.1 


/>'. 


Double  trap-net  with  leaded  bottoms,  suitable  for  river  with  unstable 

pumice  bed,  and  set  so  as  to  catch  trout  running  (foztiisiream. 
Tlie  same  net,   set  with  two  extra  pairs  of  steel-rope  liraces,   so  as  to 
catch  trout  running  !ipslrea)ii. 

Tlie  arrows  indicate  the  courses  taken  ))y  the  trout. 
fj. — The  nets  should  be  so  designed  that  xilenty  of  "  slack"  is  sillowed 
for  above  the  leaden  weights,  so  that,  if  a  flood  washes  the  pumice 
liottom  out,  the  slack  will  allow  the  net  to  sink  without  lifting 
the  weights  from  the  bottom. 


considerable  size.     Roto-Aira   is  at   pi'esent'  tlic   only  possible    lake   that    i-duld    be 
maintained  as  a  sanctuary. 

I  would  therefore  recommend  that  this  Lake,  tosetlier  witii  all  streams  Hew- 
ing into  it,  and  the  Pouto  River  flowing  out  of  it.  to  within  a  mile  of  its  entry 
into  the  Tongariro  River  (or  to  such  point  as  will  be  suitable  for  the  erection  of 
nets  to  ))revent  access  of  trout)  should  be  jiroclaitned  a-«  a  Kaneliiari/  for  the  native 
aquatic  fauna,  and  that  immediate  steps  should  be  taken  to  eliminate  from  this 
area  any  of  the  trout  that   were  surreptitiously  introduced. 


BY    R.   J.    TILLYARD.  213 

3.  Following  upou  (2),  steps  should  be  taken  to  have  an  exhaustive  scietititic 
survey  made  of  the  natural  trout-food  existing  within  the  bounds  of  the  sanetuary, 
and  experiments  made  with  a  view  to  improving  it.  1  think  this  could  be  done 
by  erecting  a  small  Biological  Station  in  a  convenient  locality  near  the  sanctuary 
lake,  and  either  placing  it  under  the  charge  of  a  competent  biologist>,  or  else 
affording  facilities  for  leading  scientists  to  visit  the  station  and  study  the  fauna. 
In  this  connection  I  should  like  to  point  to  the  Cass  Biological  Station,  which  is 
under  the  charge  of  Prof.  C .  Chilton,  and  is  owned  by  Canterbury  College,  as  an 
excellent  example  of  what  can  be  accomplished  in  this  direction  at  a  very  mod- 
erate cost. 

With  respect  to  methods  for  reducing  the  number  of  trout,  I  would  point  out, 
in  particular,  that  over-sized  lish  are  a  serious  menace  to  the  success  of  a  trout- 
flsherj',  because  they  not  only  consume  far  more  food  than  do  their  equivalent 
weights  of  smaller  fish,  but  they  also  take  possession  of  the  best  feeding  grounds, 
prevent  the  younger  fish  from  obtaining  an  adequate  food  supply,  and  frequently 
themselves  make  inroads  upon  the  smaller  trout.  "With  the  maximum  possible 
native  food-supply,  a  New  Zealand  fishery  ought  not  to  be  expected  to  prodtiae 
anything  beyond  a  steady  and  assured  supply  of  reasonable-sized  fish;  and  it 
should  be  one  of  the  chief  aims  of  a  scientific  directorate  to  produce  tliis  very 
desirable  result.  Consetiuently  means  must  be  devised,  not  only  for  reducing  the 
general  very  obvious  conditions  of  overstocking  in  the  lakes  wliich  I  \-isited.  but 
also  for  removing  "pirates"  and  over-sized  fish  wherever  possible. 

4.  A  more  vigorous  policy  of  netting  the  trout,  either  by  the  use  of  trawlers 
or  small  launches,  on  Lakes  Taupo,  Rotorua,  and  Tarawera.  The  money  realised 
by  the  sale  of  such  trout,  either  fresh  or  smoked,  should  be  devoted  to  objects 
which  might  further  the  scientific  study  and  direction  of  the  fisheries;  as,  for  in- 
stance, the  provision  of  a  Biological  Station  advocated  under  Recommendation   (3). 

5.  The  adoption  of  the  regulations  generally  in  use  in  the  South  Island  con- 
cerning permis.sible  baits;  i.e.,  besides  the  artificial  fly,  it  should  be  allowable  to 
take  trout  on  the  natural  fly.  grasshopper,  etc.  I  am  well  aware  that  all  true 
sportsmen  abhor  anything  but  the  artificial  bait;  but  it  is  time  that  they  realised 
that  every  inducement  must  now  be  offered  to  get  a  marked  reduction  from  the 
present  seriously  over-stocked  condition  of  the  lakes. 

6.  Limitation  of  spawning  to  certain  selected  streams,  which  should  be 
changed  from  year  to  year  when  practicable.  This  has  already  been  dealt  witli  in 
connection  with  Recommendation    (1). 

The  above  recommendations,  if  adopted,  may  be  expected  to  show  good  re- 
sults, in  the  case  of  the  Taupo  fisheries,  within  a  few  years'  time.  The  fisheries 
of  Lakes  Rotorua  and  Tarawera  are  a  more  formidable  problem;  and  it  would  be 
advisable  to  attempt  the  solution,  in  these  cases,  only  in  the  light  of  the  experi- 
ence gained  from  the  treatment  of  the  Taupo  fisheries. 


314 


THE  PANORPOID  COMPLEX. 

Additions  and  Corrections  to  Part  3. 

By  E.  J.  Tillyard.  M.A.,  D.Sc,  F.L.S.,   F.E.S.,  Linnean  Madeay  Fellow  of  the 

Society  in  Zoology. 

(With  one  Text-figaire. ) 

During  my  recent  %'isit  to  Xew  Zealand,  I  was  fortunate  in  <:)l)tainiiig'  fairlv 
plentiful  supplies  of  the  larvae  and  pupae  of  a  Tiiyridid  moih.  Mora ra  {Siciilodes) 
subfasciata  (Walk.).  The  dissection  of  the  pupal  wings  of  this  species  has 
enabled  me  to  fill  in  one  of  the  gaps  in  the  evidence  in  Part  3  of  this  work. 

This  moth  lays  its  eggs,  which  are  flat,  circular,  fringed  discs,  somewhat  simi- 
lar to  the  Tortricid  type,  on  the  stems  of  the  Parsonsia  vines  which  are  found  com- 
monly in  the  bush  throughout  both  North  and  South  Islands.  The  young  larva 
bores  into  the  stem,  and  feeds  there,  causing  a  noticeable  swelling  in  it.  It 
pupates  in  its  own  tunnel  in  the  stem. 

The  imago  is  not  unlike  Bhodoneura  scitaria  in  appearance,  but  the  fore- 
wings  are  distinctly  falcate  at  their  tips.  The  genus  Morova  differs  from  Rho- 
doneura  in  having  Mi  of  the  hindwing  not  directly  connected  with  Rs,  but  joined 
to  it  through  the  cross-vein  m-r,  while  in  the  forewing  it  has  Rs  and  R4  anasto- 
mosing, the  cross-vein  ir  being  absent.  In  these  characters,  as  Dr.  A.  J.  Turner 
has  pointed  out  to  me,  this  genus  resembles  the  Australian  genus  Addaea  very 
closely. 

In  view  of  the  al)ove  differences,  it  seems  scarcely  necessary  to  figure  the 
imaginal  venation  of  Morova  siibfasciata  here.  Reference  should  be  made  to 
Text-fig.  98  on  p.  677  of  Part  3  (these  Proceedings,  xliv.,  1919.  part  3),  where 
the  imaginal  venation  of  Bhodoneura  scitaria  is  shown. 

Text-fig.  113  shows  the  pupal  tracheation,  as  drawn  by  me  from  dissections 
made  from  pupae  taken  on  January  1st  of  this  year  in  the  Woodhaugh  Gardens, 
Dunedin.  For  help  in  obtaining  these  specimens  I  am  much  indebted  to  my 
friends,  Mr.  G.  Howes  and  Mr.    C.    Clarke,  of  that  city. 

The  chief  point  of  interest  in  the  forewing  is  the  condition  of  the  radius  and 
its  sector,  which  is  shown  enlarged  in  Text-fig.  113  b.  There  is  only  a  single 
radial  sector,  which  forks  in  the  normal  Heteroneurous  manner;  the  radial  cell, 
or  areole,  is  present,  but  exceedingly  narrow,  and  is  not  closed  distally.  The 
condition  in  the  imago,  in  which  R4  anastomoses  with  Rs,  is  evidently  due  to  the 
suppression  of  the  main  stem  of  R4i:i.  and  the  non-development  of  the  cross- 
vein  ir.  Comparing  the  imaginal  conditions  of  this  region  in  Moroni  and 
Rhodoueura,  we  are  able  to  deduce  from  this  that,  in  Rliodoneura  pupal  wings, 
the  condition  of  the  radial  sector  of  the  forewing  would  be  the  typical  one  found 
in  the  Tortricina  and  many  Tineina,  viz.,  a  single  Rs  with  an  areole  formed 
between  its  two  branches,  this  areole  being  closed  distally  by  ir.  Further  con- 
sideration shows   us  that,   in   Bhodoneura,    as   in  Morova,  the   main  stem  of  R^^j 


BY    R.   J.    TILLTARD. 


215 


does  not  cbitinise  in  the  imago;  and  hence  the  cell  of  the  forewing  is  a  true  aneocel 
of  the   Tortricid  type. 

Thus  this  portion  of  the  forewing  indicates  some  affinity  with  the  Tortricina, 
as  does  also  the  form  of  the  egg. 

The  contrast  between  the  form  of  the  radial  sector  of  the  forewing  in  Morova 
and  in  the  Butterflies  can  be  noted  at  once  by  comparing  Text-fig.  113  with 
Text-figs.  99  and  101  of  Part  3  of  this  work  already  referred  to.  I  think  that  this 
character  alone  should  put  out  of  court  any  suggestion  that  the  Thyrididae  can 
possibly  be  ancestral  to  the  Butterflies.     It  is  only  in  the  Cossidae,  the  oldest  ex- 


Ri R, 


Text-fig.  113. 
Morova  (Siculodes)  sub/asciata  (Walk.),  (fam.  Thyrididae).  a,  tracheation  of  pupal  wings 
(x  18).  b,  the  contlition  of  the  racUal  trachea  and  its  sector  in  the  forewing,  further 
enlarged  (x  45) . 

isting  family  of  Heteroneura,  that  we  find  conditions  at  all  approximating  to 
those  of  the  Butterflies  with  respect  to  the  separation  of  Rs  into  two  stems  arising 
well  apart  from  Ri,  This  should  incline  us  to  look  for  the  origin  of  the  Butter- 
flies much  further  back,  almost  certainly  in  some  group  that  has  long  ago  become 
extinct,  and  has  left  no  very  close  relatives  existing  to-day. 


216  TIIK  PANORPOID  COMPLEX^ 

Another  point  of  interest  in  the  forewing  is  that  Cm  forks  very  far  distad, 
well  beyond  the  level  of  the  forking  of  Mi_4.  This  should  be  compared  with  the 
condition  to  be  seen  in  Euschemon,  where  the  fork  of  Cui  is  placed  much  nearer  to 
the  base;  and,  consequently,  in  the  imago,  Cui„  and  Cuih  leave  the  areocel  much 
further  apart  than  they  do  in  the  Thyrididae.  There  can  be  little  doubt  that 
the  condition  to  be  seen  in  Euschemon  and  in  other  Butterflies  is  the  more  primi- 
tive of  the  two. 

In  dissecting  the  forewing  of  the  pupa  of  Morova,  I  looked  carefully  for 
the  trachea  3A,  but  failed  to  find  it.  This  trachea  is  (juite  easily  seen  in  the  pupal 
wing  of  Euschemon.  Thus  there  is  here  a  third  character  in  which  the  Thy- 
rididae are  more  highly  specialised  than  the  oldest  forms  among'st  the  Butterflies. 

In  the  hindwing,  trachea  Ri  is  dominant  over  trachea  Sc,  as  in  the  Tortricid 
Carjjocapsa  (Part  3,  p.  665,  Text-fig.  89)  the  Oecophorid  Wiiiyia  (Part  3,  p.  660. 
Text-fig.  90),  and  the  Butterfly  Euploea  (Part  3,  p.  685,  Text-fig.  101),  but  not  as 
in  Euschemon  (Part  3,  p.  680,  Text-fig.  99),  where  the  reverse  is  the  ease.  This 
character  is  not,  however,  of  much  importance,  as  we  do  not  yet  know  how  vari- 
able it  may  prove  to  be  in  the  different  families.  Of  more  interest  is  the  absence, 
in  Morova,  of  any  sign  of  a  humeral  veinlet  in  the  hindwing.  Such  a  veinlet  is 
to  be  seen  in  the  pupal  wings  of  many  Butterflies. 

The  very  strong  arching  up  of  Mi  towards  Rs  in  the  hindwing  of  Morova  ap- 
pears to  be  a  somewhat  more  specialised  condition  than  that  found  in  Euschemon. 

The  anal  area  of  the  hindwing  in  Morova  is  of  very  great  interest.  The 
pupal  tracheation  fully  confirms  my  original  interpretation  of  the  anal  veins  in 
the  imago  of  Rhodoneura.  Trachea  lA  is  present  in  the  pupal  wing,  in  much  the 
same  condition  as  in  the  Cossid  Xlyeutes  (Part  3,  p.  661.  Text-fig.  87),  but 
slightly  more  spe^'ialised  by  reduction,  in  that  it  fails  to  reach  much  more  than 
half-way  towards  the  wing-border.  It  has,  as  in  Xyleutes,  lost  its  original  con- 
tact with  Cu2.  and  makes  a  strong  downward  curve  towards  2A,  without  actually 
coming  into  contact  with  it.  In  the  imago,  lA  and  2A  l)eeome  fused,  thus  form- 
ing the  basal  anal  Y-vein  shown  in  Text-fig.  98. 

This  condi.tion  is  much  more  primitive  than  that  to  be  seen  in  the  pupal 
hindwings  of  Butterflies,  where  lA  is  completely  absent,  and  consequentlj'  there 
is  no  basal  anal  Y-vein  present.  It  would  seem  to  indicate  a  close  connection 
between  the  Thyrididae,  and  the  more  primitive  types  of  Heteronenra,  in  wliich 
trachea  lA  is  preserved  in  much  the  same  condition. 

Trachea  3A  is  present  in  the  pupal  liindwing  of  Moroca.  as  in  that  of  the 
Butterflies,  and  bscomes  chitinised  in  the  imaginal  venation.  Trachea  Cu2  is  also 
present  in  the  pupal  hindwings  of  both  groups,  but  fails  to  become  chitinised  in 
the  Butterflies,  tliough  it  is  sometimes  partially  and  very  feebly  indicated  in  the 
imagines   of  Thyrididae. 

To  sum  up,  then,  there  are  three  characters  in  tlie  forewing  of  tlu'  Thyriclidw, 
which  are  more  liighly  specialised  than  the  corresponding  conditions  to  be  lound 
in  the  oldest  Butterflies.  The  hindwing,  on  the  other  hand,  is  in  most  respects 
more  archaic  than  that  of  the  Butterflies. 

We  may  conclude  from  this  that,  while  there  are  obvious  affinities  between 
the  Thyrididae  and  the  older  groups,  especially  the  Tortricina.  and  also  lietween 
the  Thyrididae  and  the  Pyralididae  (thougli  the  [luiial  wing-s  of  this  latter  family 
still  remain  to  be  studied),  yet  there  is  no  evidence  that  the  Thyrididae  stand  in 
any  direct  ancestral  line  to  the  Butterflies,  as  Meyrick  and  Hampson  have  averred. 
There  is,  on  the  contrary,  very  distinct   evidence,   in   tlie  form  of  three  clinracters 


BY    R.   J.    TILLYARD.  217 

in  the  forewing,  ;ij.':aiiist  this  claim.  The  proper  degree  of  relationship  between 
the  Thyrididae  and  the  Butterflies  is  probablj  best  expressed  if  we  say  that  the 
old  Protocossid  stem  gave  origin  in  ascending  order  to  (a)  the  Zygaenoid  group 
of  families  (Meyrick's  superfamily  Psyt-liina),  (b)  the  Pyraloid  group  of  fami- 
lies, of  which  the  most  archaic,  having  very  distinct  affinities  with  the  Tortneina. 
is  the  Thyrididae,  though  these  are  not  even  to  be  considered  as  directly  ancestral 
to  the  Pyralididae  themselves,  and  (c)  the  Rhopalocera,  as  a  very  distinct  series 
whose  origin  is  to-day  lost  to  us. 

At  this  stage  we  must  leave  this  interesting  problem,  until  such  time  as 
pupae  of  the  Zijgaenidae  and  Pyralididae  can  be  obtained  and  their  wings 
studied  with  a  \-iew  to  ol)taining  further  light  upon  it.  Sufficient  evidence  has, 
however  been  obtained  to  show  the  extreme  unlikeliness  of  any  existing  Hetero- 
neurous  type  representing  e\en  a  close  apjiroximation  to  the  original  archetype 
of  the  Rhopalocera 

Corrigenda  to  Part  3. 

p.  5(31,  line  14  from  bottom,  for  "one''  read  "two." 

p.  588,  for  "Text-fig.  53"  read  "Text-flg.  58." 

p.  594,  remove  the  Lepiduptera  from   (C)    to    (D). 

p.  623,  interchange  lines  26  and  27. 

p.  635,  in  Table  II.,  to  the  characters  given  under  (4)   add  "veinlet  dec." 

p.  647,  line  19,  for   "Homoneura"  read   "Heteroneura." 

p.  650,  in  last  line,  the  percentage  for  Hepialidae  should  be  57.5,  and  that 
for  Prototheoridae   32.5. 

p.  676,  lines  3.  7,  and  14,  for  "lA"  read  "2A,"  as  in  Text-flg.  97. 

p.  682  and  ]>.  686,  in  Text-flgs.  100  and  102,  in  Iiindwing,  for  "acl"  substi- 
tute "bc"=basal  cell.     There  is  no  true  areocel  in  the  hindwing. 

p.  685,  line  6  from  bottom,  complete  the  bracket  after  "Etischemon." 

p.  689,  lines  J  and  5  from  bottom,   the  percentage  for  Hepialidae  should    l)e 
68.5,  that  for  Prototheoridae  50.0. 
In  Text-tig    110,  the  forks  of  Ei  +  -„  Mii- -  and  M3  -tt  should  be  hdjelled 

p.  701,  line  2.  for  "M"  read  "Mr,". 

X.  y,  z.  respectively,  to  conform  with  the  text. 

p.  707,  in  Table  V  (2),  under  Lepidoptera,  for  "C"  read  "D". 

p.  708,  in  the  Phylogenetie  Diagram,  for  "CRETACECUS"  read  "CRETA- 
CEOUS", and  alter  the  bracket  for  "Sialoidea"  so  as  to  enclose  only  the 
Sialidae  and  Corydalidae. 

p.  711,  line,  13,  for  "evolutions"  read   "evolution". 

p.  717,  in  the  explanation  of  Plate  xxxi.,  fig.  16,  for  "The  arrows  point  to" 
read  "The  arrow  indicates   the  position  of". 

I  have  to  thank  my  friend  Mr.  A.  Philpott,  of  Invercargill,  N.Z.,  foi-  reading 
through  Part  3  \-ery  carefully  several  times,  and  thus  disco\ering  a  number  of  the 
above  errors. 


218 


SPECIAL  GENERAL  MEETING. 

14Tn  June,  1920. 

In  Commemoration  of  the  Centenary  op  the  Birth  of  Sir  William  Macleat. 

Mr.  .J.  J.  Fletcher,  M.A.,  B.Se.,  President,  in  the  Chair. 

Presidential  Address,  "The  Society's  Heritage  from  the  Macleays." 

Brief  Synopsis,  and  List  of  Some  of  the  Exhibits. 

Yesterday  (Sunday),  the  one  hundredth  anniversary  of  the  birth  of  Sir  Wil- 
liam Macleay,  at  Wiek,  County  Caithness,  13th  June,  1820 — Came  to  Australia 
with  his  cousin,  W.  S.  Macleay,  in  March,  1839 — His  scientific  usefulness,  and 
how  he  came  to  be  useful :  in  the  first  stage  of  his  scientific  career  largely  the 
product  of  family  influence  and  family  example:  the  youngest  and  last  of  a  suc- 
cession of  Macleays  interested  in  Science — Other  reasons  for  the  Society's  interest 
in  the  Macleays:  its  Hall  stands  on  part  of  the  old  garden,  in  proximity  to  the 
old  home — The  Macleay  collections  are  now  in  the  possession  of  thy  University  of 
Sydney :  the  accessibility  of  the  collections  to  members  of  the  Soeietj'  for  study 
jtrovided  for  by  Sir  William — The  Society's  memorials  of  all  of  them,  and  of  some 
of  their  friends — Their  long  connection  with  the  Linnean  Society  of  London,  1794- 
1891:  and  with  the  Australian  Museum,  ab  inito  (1826)  to  1877 — Both  branches 
of  the  family  in  which  it  is  interested  have  now  come  to  an  end  in  the  direct  line; 
the  Society  may  be  considered  to  have  inherited  the  family  scientific  traditi;>ns. 

The  Macleayan  Succession:  Alexander  Macle.w.  F.R.S.,  F.L.S.  (1767- 
1848)— William  Sharp  Macleay,  M.A.,  F.L.S.,  eldest  son  (1792-1865)— Sir 
George  Macleay,  F.L.S.,  third  son  (1809-1891) — Sir  William  Macleay,  Kt., 
F.L.S.,  M.L.C,  nephew  (1820-91). 

Details  of  the  development  of  their  interest  in  science,  and  of  their  scientific 
work — History  of  the  old  garden  and  of  Elizabeth  Bay  Himsc;  records  of 
scientific  and  other  visitors — Records  of  their  scientific  and  other  friends — History 
of  the  Macleay  Collections  up  to  the  year  1874  [The  account  of  their  later  develop- 
ment, based  on  Sir  William's  own  records,  is  reserved  for  another  occasion]  — 
Memorials  of  all  of  them. 

Exhibits. 

Mementoes  of  Alexander  Macleay:  Portrait — Portraits  of  the  Tradescants 
(father  and  sim),  Linnaeus  (in  his  Lapland  dress).  Buff  on,  Peter  CoUinson  (Bot- 
anist), George  Edwards,  Dr.  William  Hunter,  Sir  Ashton  Lever,  Dr.  A.  Russell, 
Captain  Cook,  and  William  Curtis  (with  an  inscription,  from  Dr.  Sims). 

Books:  Fr.  Willughbeii  Ornithologia  (1626);  Linnaci  Systema  Naturae 
(1767) — Four  author's  reprints  inscribed  "from  his  affectionate  friend,"  "from 
Lis  attached  friend  R.  Brown" — Original  made-up  copy  of  J.  W.  Lewin's  "Lepi- 
dopterous  Insects  of  Now  South  Wales."  with  the  MS  text  and  title  page,  as  .sent 
to  England;  original  drawings  of  Lepidopterous  larvae — Sale  catalogue  of  collec- 
tions. 


NOTES    AND    EXHIBITS.  219 

Mementoes  of  W.  S.  Macleay — Books,  reprints  of  his  papers — Author's  re- 
prints presented  to  him  by  Robert  Brown,  Charles  Lyell,  and  others— John 
Vaughan  Thomson's  '•Zoological  Researches"  (1828-30) — His  copy  of  Robert 
Lowe's  famous  macaronic  poem  composed  on  the  visit  of  the  Princess  Victoria,  and 
her  mother,  the  Duchess  of  Kent,  to  Oxford  in  1833 — Original  Drawings  of  Tuni- 
cates,  and  of  the  Fruit-fly  (Ceratitis  citriperda)  for  the  illustration  of  two  of  his 
papers — Coloured  drawings  of  Cuban  lepidopterous  larvae,  spiders,  etc. — Miscel- 
hineous  sketches — Sketch-book  containing  drawings  of  pelagic  organisms  caught 
in  the  townet  on  the  voyage  to  Australia — Sketch  of  a  pelagic  tunicate  {Appeiidi- 
cdaria)  taken  in  the  townet  by  Mr.  Huxley  in  Torres  Straits — Charles  Curtis' 
original  drawings  of  Paussid  beetles,  and  spiders,  for  the  illustration  of  tw.D 
papers — Original  drawing-s  of  remarkable  spiders  and  Membracid  insects  sent  by 
Dr.  Cantor,  of  Calcutta — Dr.  James  Stuart's  collection  of  drawings  of  Australian 
animals,  chiefly  Port  Jackson  fishes,  bequeathed  to  W.  S.  Macleay — Original 
drawings  of  Lepidoptera,  spiders,  and  of  a  "^'egetable  Caterpillar,"  by  the  Misses 
Scott  of  Ash  Island— Sketch  of  a  Pselaphid  beetle  by  the  Rev.  R.  L.  King,  1S58— 
Gerard  Krefft's  original  drawing  of  Chaeropus.  and  etchings  of  Aboriginals  and 
marsupials  seen  in  the  Lower  Murray  and  Darling  country,  about  1857 — Lei  ter  to 
iliss  Harriet  Scott,  explaining  the  synonymy  of  the  species  of  Charagia — Letters 
from  scientific  friends — Original  sketch  of  Phi/llirhoe  by  Dr.  J.  Denis  MacDonald, 
II .  M .  S .   Herald — Dissecting  microscopes. 

M.emento  of  George  Maeleay,  donor  of  some  of  W.  S.  Macleay's  entomolo- 
gical books,  and  of  the  Stuart  collection  of  drawings  to  William  Macleay :  his 
portrait. 

Mementoes  of  William  Macleay — Portraits — Bust  presented  by  Memliers — 
The  Society's  home,  much  of  its  library,  and  of  its  other  possessions,  including 
nearly  all  the  foregoing. 

Other  Exhibits    (not  Maeleayan  relics). 

Photo  of  the  bust  of  W.  S.  Macleay,  kindly  sent  by  Dr.  B.  Daydon  Jack- 
son, General  Secretary  of  the  Linnean  Society  of  London,  by  permission  ol  the 
Council — Photographs  of  original  drawings,  by  Conrad  Martens,  of  the  Colonial 
Secretary's  official  residence  in  Bridge  Street,  and  of  Elizabeth  Bay  House  viewed, 
from  Darling  Point,  kindly  sent  by  Mr.  Clive  Lord,  Hon.  Secretary  of  the  Royal 
Society  of  Tasmania,  by  permission  of  the  Council. 

Portraits  of  Rear-Admiral  P.  P.  King  and  Mrs.  King,  and  their  son,  the  Hon. 
P.  G.  King,  M.L.C.,  an  early  Member  of  the  Society,  Member  of  the  Council, 
and  donor  of  his  father's  author's  copy  of  J.  D.  Hooker's  "Flora  Antarctica" 
(the  photos  kindly  lent  by  Mr.   G.  Goldfinch). 

Portrait  of  Mrs.  Charles  Meredith,  who,  with  her  husband,  came  out  to  Sydney 
in  1839,  and  afterwards  removed  to  Tasmania :  authoress,  some  of  her  books  illus- 
trated with  her  own  drawings  of  plants  and  animals. 

Portraits  of  Mr.  A.  W.  Scott,  and  of  his  younger  daughter,  Mrs.  Edward 
Forde,  entomologists  and  artists,  formerly  of  Ash   Island. 


Professor  J.  T.  Wilson  unveiled  the  Society's  Honour  Roll,  on  which  are 
inscribed  the  names  of  members  who  served  abroad  during  the  Great  War,  1914- 
1919. 

A  cordial  vote  of  thanks  was  tendered  to  Professor  Wilson  for  unveiling  the 
Honour  Roll. 


220  XOTES    AND   EXHIBITS. 

The  President,  on  behalf  of  Members,  offered  Professor  "Wilson  hearty  eon- 
gratulations  on  his  appointment  as  Professor  of  Anatomy  in  the  University  of 
Cambridge,  at  the  same  time  expressing  their  keen  regret  at  his  departure  from 
Sydney,  and  also  asked  him  to  convey  a  message  of  remembranc-e  and  regard  to 
Professors  Martin  and  Hill. 

Professor  Wilson  expressed  his  appreciation  of  the  invitation  to  be  proent 
and  unveil  the  Honour  Roll;  he  also  thanked  Members  for  their  congratulations 
on  his  recent  appointment. 

On  the  motion  of  Professor  David  a  heai'ty  vote  of  thanks  to  the  President, 
Mr.   J.  .J.  Fletcher,  was  eai-ried  by  acclamation. 

The  Meeting  closed  with  eheere  for  His  JIajesty  the  Eng,  and  H .  R .  H .  the 
Prince  of  Wales. 


221 

ORDINARY  MONTHLY  MEETING. 
30th   June,  1920. 

Mr.  J.  J.  Fletcher,  M.A.,  B.Sc,  President,  in  the  chair. 

The  President  announced  that  a  telegram  had  been  received  from  the  Koyal 
Society  of  Tasmania  wishing  the  Society  a  successful  Macleay  Centenary  Meeting. 

A  letter  was  read  from  Dr.  L.  A.  Cotton,  returning  thanks  for  congratula- 
tions on  his  attaining  the  Doctorate  of  Science. 

The  Donations  and  Exchanges  received  since  the  previous  Monthly  Meeting 
(2nth  May,  1920),  amounting  to  8  Vols.,  65  Parts  or  Nos.,  20  Bulletins,  1 
Report  and  .3  Panmhlets,  etc.,  received  from  41  Societies  and  Instihitinns  and  3 
private  donors,  were  laid   upon  the   table. 

NOTES   AND  EXHIBITS 

Mr.  E.  Cheel  exhibited  herbarium  specimens,  together  with  samples  of  timber 
taken  from  two  distinct  forms  of  Callistemon  viminalis  (Sol.)  Cheel,  showing  the 
following  distinctive  characteristics : — 

(1)   Calyx-tulii'   glal)rous;  bark  of  a   thick   corky  appearance   similar   to  that 

of  the    common  "Broad-leaved    Tea-Tree"    {^lelaleiica   leucadendrom  var. 

albida  Sieb.  Cheel).      (2)    Calyx-tube  silky-hairy;  bark  ni'  a  more  or  less 

fibrous  nature. 

He  also  exhibited  specimens  of  two  forms  or  varieties  of  Ccdlistemon  pachy- 

pliyllua    Cheel,  showing  the  following  characters: — 

(1)   Flowers    of  rich    dark    crimson    similar    to  the    type  specimensv  but  the 
lea\"es  very  narrow.     (2)  Flowers  of  a  greenish-yellow  colour  and  leaves 
naii'ower  than    the    type.     The    two  latter  forms    are  from    Coff's    Har- 
bour, whilst  the  type  is  to  be  found  at  Bullahdelah,  Byion  Bay,  and  in 
Queensland 
Mr.   G.   A.  Waterhouse  exhibited  a  male  Tisiphone  rmcnsleyi,  which  he  had 
mated  with  a  female   Tisiphone  abeotia,  together  with  the   five  butterflies  reared 
from  eggs  laid  by  tlie  female.     The  male    T.  rawnslei/i  was   reared   from   a  larva 
found   at   Mooloolah,    Queensland,   which  pupated  at    Sydney  on  9th   September, 

1919,  and  emerged  on  18th  October,  1919;  the  female  T.  aheona  from  Sydney 
emerged  on  19th  October,  and  the  pairing  took  place  the  same  day.  The  butter- 
flies were  placed  in  a  mosc|uito  net  hung  on  a  clothes  line,  and  the  actual  mating 
was  observed,  the  female  was  then  caged  over  a  growing  plant  of  swordgrass 
(Gahnia  sp?)  and  ten  fertile  eggs  were  laid  on  20th  and  21st  October,  which 
emerged  in  15  and  16  days.  The  young  larvae  were  left  undisturbed,  the  only 
artificial  condition  being  the  surrounding  wire  of  the  cage.     Early  in   February, 

1920,  five  pupae  were  found,  and  these  produced  three  males  and  two  females 
from  21st  to  29th  Feln'uary,  all  being  very  similar  in  markings.  Two  further 
snatings  of.  these  first  generation  hyln'ids  were  obtained  and  the  young  second 
generation  larvae  are  now  under  observation.  As  seen  from  the  specimens  ex- 
hibited the  first  generation  hybrids  combine  the  characters  of  both  parents,  the 
broad  orange  band  of  the  forewing  of  aheona  being  very  much  reduced  in  size  and 
much  paler  in  colour.  When  it  was  neeessaiy  to  keep  the  specimens  alive  for 
more  than  a  day,  they  were  artificially  fed  with  a  mixture  of  honey  and  water. 
He  also  exhibited  for  comparison  a  series  of  Tisiphone  aheona  from  Eastern 
Australia  showing  the  northern  and  southern  forms  and  the  wonderful  variation 
existing  at  Port  Macquarie. 


222 


NOTES    ON   SOME    AUSTRALIAN     TENEBmOKIDAE.    AVITH 
DESCRIPTIONS    OF    NEW    SPECIES;— ALSO  OF    A  NEW 
GENUS  AND  SPECIES  OF  BUPEESTIDAE. 

By  H.  J.   Carter,  B.  A.,  F.E.S. 

(With  fourteen  text-figiires.) 

Family   BUPRESTIDAE. 

Ctrioides,  n.    sen.     Clirysocbroinorum    (Text-fig.  1). 

Near  Cijria,  but  differs  from  that  g'enus  in  the  following:  particulars.  An- 
terior margin  of  prosternum  straight,  without  medial  notch  or  lobe:  presternum 
furrowed  in  middle,  narrowed  and  rounded  at  apex  to  fit  into  mesosternal  ex- 
cision. Antennae. — 1st  joint  long,  bent  and  thickened  at 
apex,  2nd  sliortly  obconic,  3rd  longer  than  4th,  but  con- 
siderably shorter  than  1st;  4th-8th  subequal.  elongate  sub- 
triangular  and  flattened,  lltli    elongate    ovoid. 

Posterior  tarsi  with  1st  joint  not  as  long  as  the  two 
following  combined;  last  abdominal  segment  of  c?  with 
wide  triangular  excision  at  apex  between  two  rounded 
lobes;  of   9   round   and  subacuminate. 

Following  Kerreman's  table  of  the  tribe  in  the  "Genera 
Tnsectonim."  Cijrioides  is  separated  from  all  other  describ- 
ed genera,  except  Cyria  and  Epistomentis  by  having  its  an- 
tennal  cavities  small  and  rounded.  From  Epintomentis  it 
differs  in  having  the  3rd  antennal  joint  decidedly  shorter 
than  the  1st;  the  strongly  bisinuated  front  of  prothorax; 
the  proportions  of  the  hind  tarsal  joints;  and  the  abdomen 
not  carinated  in  any  part. 

Ctrioide.s  ses-spilota^  n.sp.      (Text-fig.  1.) 

Navicular,  rather  flat,  smooth;  nitid  black  above  with 
the  posterior  sides  of  pronotum  sanguineous  and  each  ely- 
tron with  3  yellow  spots,  the  first  small,  jiosthumeral  (not 
seen  from  above),  the  second  large  and  ovate,  opposite 
lateral  tooth  and  nearer  sides  than  suture,  the  third  of 
same  size  and  foiin  as  the  second  on  posterior  third.  Legs 
and  underside  with  long  white  hair,  the  smooth  parts  nitid 
black  with  metallic  reflections.  Head  carinated  in  front, 
furrowed  on  vertex,  with  large  sparse  punctures.  Pm- 
thorax  5  X  4J  mm.,  widest  at  ba.sp,  bisinuate  at  base  and 
apex — more  strongly  so  at  apex — the  medisn  lobe  of  this 
Cyrioides sex-spi/o/a.  l"""''«C'e(i  foi-ward;  scarcely  (in  <?)  or  nit  (in  ?)  excised, 
n.sp.  .mterior  angles  acute  (as  seen  from  above),  >ides  very  little 


tefl'. 

w 


Text.fig.  1. 


BT    II.    J.    CARTER. 


223 


rounded  in  middle  and  sinuate  behind,  base  with  medial  lobe  subanj^ilate,  posterior 
angles  widely  acute  (about  80°)  ;  disc  with  medial  furrow  strongly  impressed,  ter- 
minating in  a  wide  depression  near  base,  sparsely  punctate  with  larsje  and  deep  gem- 
mate foveae  near  posterior  sides.  Scutellum  invisible  from  above.  Elytra  slightly 
wider  than  prothorax  at  base,  and  thrice  as  long,  gently  sinuate  at  sides  and 
slightly  widened  behind  middle,  thence  narrowed  to  apex — each  apex  strongly 
bideutate,  the  interior  tooth  longer;  posterior  sides  entire;  disc  striate-punctate, 
the  punctures  large  on  basal  third,  thence  smaller  and  almost  evanescent  at  apex; 
prosteruum  and  apical  segment  of  abdomen  coarsely,  the  rest  of  underside  finely 
and  sparsely  punctate ;  fore-tibiae  curved.  Dimensions :  c?-  18  X  6,  S.  21  x  7  mm. 
Ilab. — Johnstone  River,  Queensland  (Mr.  H.  W.  Brown.) 
A  pair  of  this  fine  species,  sent  for  identification  from  the  South  Australian 
INIuseum,  are  the  only  examples  I  have  seen. 

Types    in  the  South    Australian   Museum. 

Stigmodera  aeneicornis  Saund. 

Specimens  frim  N.W.  Victoria  (Hattah,  Sea  Lake,  etc.),  are  so  labelled  in 
the  National  Museum,  Melbourne,  and  exactly  correspond  with  the  description  and 
figure.     The  name  is  of  no  value  for  purposes  of  identification. 

Family  TENEBRIONIDAE. 

Through  the  helpful  co-operation  of  Mr.  K.  G.  Blair,  of  the  British  Museum, 
and  by  the  specimens  compared  with  type,  sent  for  inspection,  I  am  now  able  to 
correct  mistakes  of  identification  and  to  indicate  further  synonymy.  Mr.  Blair's 
notes  have  further  led  me  to  a  close  re-examination  of  the  species  belonging  to 
the  closely  allied  g-enera  Daedrosis,  Licinoma,  Brycopia  and  their  allies,  and  this 
necessitates  a  considerable  modification  of  the  tabulations  published  by  me.* 

Caedius.      C.  sphaeroides  Hope  =  C.  tuberculatus  Cart. 

This  beach-dweller  is  found  on  both  the  East  and  West  coasts  of  Australia. 
I  was  misled  by  a  comparison  between  fresh  and  abraded  specimens. 

Hyocis.  The  species  of  this  genus,  though  commonly  found  at  the  roots  of 
maritime  plants  on  the  sandy  sea  beaches,  are  not  so  restricted.  Thus  I  have  received 
E.  pallida  Macl.  from  Narromine,  N.S.AV.,  and  have  taken  H.  pubescens  Macl. 
(described,  like  tho  former,  from  Gayndah)  in  my  garden  at  Darling  Point.  H. 
bicolor  Cart.,  originally  from  Botany,  I  found  again  at  Burnie.  Tasmania.  .  The 
species  vary  much  in  colour  and  pattern,  and  while  pointing  out  at  least  two 
synonyms,  it  is  probable  that  a  further  reduction  in  the  number  of  names  may  be 
desirable. 

H.  bakewelli  Pase.  =  H.  occidentalis  Blackb.   var. 

77.  sub-parallela  Champ.  =  H.  variegata  Blackb.  var. 

Regarding  the  first  of  these  it  is  evident  that  Champion's  notesf  refer  to 
occidentalis  Blackti.  which  varies  much  in  colour  and  marking's,  but  is  inseparable 
in  form  from  concolorous  examples  that  are  found  from  Victoria  to  Albany.  Re 
sub-parallela  Champ.,  Mr.  Blair  writes  "at  my  request  he  [Mr.  Champion]  "has 
looked  at  the  type  and  finds  it  identical  with  variegata  Blackb.  except  that  in  the 
latter  the  pale  spots  are  a  little  more  extensive.  The  other  foi-m  is  completely 
dark,  with  the  elytra  curiously  irregular."     A  new  species  is  described  below. 

•Trans.  Key.  Soc.  S.  Aus.,  xxxviii.,  1914,  p.388-391. 
tTrans.  Ent.  Soc.  Lend.,  1894,  p. 36.3. 


224 


XOTES  ox    SOME  AUSTRALIAN  TESEBRIOXIDAE, 


Phaennis  fasc-icidata  Champ.  The  female  only  of  this  species  was  described. 
I  have  lately  seen  a  male  example  from  Zeehan,  Tasmania  [Simson  Coll.,  South 
Australian  Museum]  and  I  possess  another  taken  by  Dr.  Ferguson  in  the  Blue 
Mountains,  N.S.W.     The  head   has  pronounced  sexual   eharactei-s   as   follows : 

c?.  Head  with  three  prominent  horns;  one,  sharply  conical,  on  centre  of 
forehead,  pointing  oblif|uely  backwards,  and  one  on  each  side  of  head,  triangular, 
forming  a  projection  over  the  points  of  insertion  of  the  antennae. 

AxEiiiA    cAVLOBioiDES,  n.sp.      (Text-fig.  2 . ) 

Short,  rather  squarely  ovate,  black,  pronotum  sub-opacjue,  elytra  i-atlier  nitid, 
upper  sui'face  sparsely  clothed  at  sides  with  upright  reddish  hair.  Head  wide, 
labrum  evident,  epistoma  with  circular  excision  in  front,  without  defined  sulcus 
behind,  and  rounded  in  a  single  curve  from  the  apical  excision  to  behind  the  eyes; 
apical  joints  of  palpi  subulate,  eyes  large,  almost  completely  divided  by  a  narrow 
canthus;  closely  punctate;  antennae  short,  joints  trapezoidal,  gi-adually  enlarging 
to  the  10th;  apical  narrower  than  preceding  and  widely  ovate.  Prothorax  widely 
transverse,  truncate  at  ajiex  and  base,  slightly  narrowed  at  the  former,  sides 
rounded,  all  angles  obtuse,  densely  and  finely  punctate,  without  medial  line  or 
foveae.     Seutelbim    triangular.     Eh/fra  con^•ex    laterally,    of  same    width  as  pro- 


Text-fig.  2. 
Aiieiiiia  caii/ohioides,  n.sp.     2a,  front  leg;  2b,  mid  leg;  2c,  hind  leg. 

thorax  at  base,  sides  parallel,  without  evident  margin,  the  whole  finely  punctate, 
with  some  transverse  strioles;  the  punctures  larger  and  less  dense  than  on  pro- 
notum. Epipleurae  narrow,  body  winged,  mctasteruum  coarsely  punctate,  tibiae 
dentate  on  outside  margin,  spinose  and  pectinate  at  the  enlarged  apex;  tarsi  witli 
a  few  spiny  bristles,  claws  very  tine.     Dimensions:   5 — 6    ^  2i — 3   mm. 

Hab.—W.A.:  Swan  River  and  Geraldton  (J.  Clark),  Yallingap.  (R.  E. 
Turner,  in  British  Museum). 

Twenty  specimens  examined  of  this  scarab-like  Tenebrionid,  sent  to  me,  as 
also  to  the  South  Australian  Museum,  by  Mr.  Clark.  I  had  already  described 
this  as  a  new  genus  and  species,  but  a  timely  note  from  Mr.  Blair,  to  whom  [ 
had  sent  a  specimen,  brought  an  additional  example  taken  by  Dr.  Turner,  with 
the  information  "Anemia  sp.(prob)n.,  near  .1.  sardoa  Gene  and  A.  denticulata 
WoU;  but  differs  from  both  in  having  thorax  much  more  finely  and  closely  punc- 
tate.    From  A.  sardoa    it    differs   also  in   its    shorter,    more  squat    shape."     The 


BY    H.    J.    CARTER.  225 

srenns  Anemia  is  widely  distributed  in  S.    Europe,  Asia  (Syria  to  India).   Atrica 
(widely)  and  America   (California).     The  above  record  is  the  first  for  Australia. 
It  is  found  in  sandy  beaches  or  sandy  soil. 
Types    in  the  Coll.   Carter. 

Hyocis  minor,  n.sp. 

Shortly  ovate,  convex,  opaque  brownish  black,  elytra  with  some  undefined 
reddish  markings,  chiefly  in  humeral  region,  antennae  and  leg's  red.  Head  coarsely 
punctate,  antennae  stout,  .ioints  9  and  10  transverse,  11th  oblong  oval.  Prothorax 
emarginate  at  apex,  front  angles  rounded  but  prominent,  sides  rounded,  slightly 
sinuate  behind,  posterior  angles  rectangular,  base  bisinuate,  disc  coarsely  and 
closely  punctate,  very  sparsely  pilose  towards  sides,  with  well  marked  medial 
sulcus.  Elytra  wider  tliau  prothorax  at  base,  oval  and  convex,  deeply  punctate- 
striate,  the  punctures  moderately  large  and  round,  more  widely  separated  than 
usual  in  the  genus,  underside  more  finely  punctured  than  upper  surface.  Dlmen- 
gions:  2 — 2^  X  IJ  mm. 

Hub. — Stradl)riike  Island.  Queensland  (Mr.  Pottinger  and  H.  .7.  Carter); 
Sydney   (Dr.  E.  W.   Ferguson). 

Six  examples  taken  on  the  sea-beach  near  Dunwich  (Stradbroke  Is.),  seem  in- 
separable from  the  Sydney  specimen,  which  has  long  been  in  my  collection  as  a 
probable  sp.  nov.  It  shares  with  H.  nigra  Blackb.  the  distinction  of  being  con- 
sistently smaller  tlian  the  other  described  species,  while  distinguished  from  nigra 
by  its  more  convex  and  wider  form  and  rounded  sides  of  prothorax.  //.  hake- 
welli  Pasp.  is  larger  aiul  has  much  coarser  elytral  sculpture  with  caneellate  ridges 
between  the  square  seriate  punctures,  and  with  more  angulate  humeri. 

Type    in  Coll.  Carter. 

Alphitobius  blaiei,  n.sp. 

Sub-parallel,  depressed,  piceous  above  (elytra  nearly  black),  underside,  legs 
and  antennae  castaneous.  Head  closely  punctate,  eyes  rather  large,  antennal  orbit 
not  prominent,  antennae  submoniliform,  slightly  and  successively  widened  out- 
wards, not  extending  to  base  of  prothorax.  Prothdra.r:  apex  truncate  (as  seen 
from  above),  base  bisinuate,  anterior  angles  rounded,  posterior  angles  sub-rect- 
angular, widest  at  base,  sides  arcuately  narrowing  to  the  front;  disc  closely,  not 
very  finely  punctate,  with  two  small  basal  foveae.  Elytra  of  same  width  at  ba-se 
and  about  two  and  a-half  times  as  long  as  the  prothorax;  finely  striate-]iunctate, 
intervals  flat  and  minutely  punctate;  underside  closely  punctate,  the  prosternum 
coarsely,  abdomen  more  finely  so,  tibiae  very  little  enlarged  at  apex,  their  margins 
entire.     Dimensions:  3J  x  Ij   (approx.)   mm. 

Hal).— Townsville,  Queensland   (F.  P.   Dodd) . 

Two  specimens  were  sent  from  the  British  Museum,  labelled  as  above,  of  a 
species  that  is  dillicult  to  place;  and  which  I  was  inclined  to  think  was  a 
Vlomoides,  but  the  shorter  body  and  antennae,  more  transverse  prothorax  pre- 
clude this. 

T  V  p  e    in    British  Museum. 

Alphitobius  xajiiaphila,  n.sp. 

Elongate-ovate,  sub-nitid ;  head,  prothorax,  underside  and  appendages  red,  the 
first  often  blackish ;  elytra  piceous,  more  or  less  suffused  with  red,  tarsi  luteous. 
Head  coarsely  and  eonfluently  punctate,  eyes  large,  prominent  and  coarsely  faceted, 


226  NOTES   ox    SOME  AUSTRALLW   TENEBRIOXIDAE, 

epistomal  suture  arcuate  and  -well-impressed;  antennae  extending  nearly  to  half 
the  length  of  prothorax;  basal  joints  sub-cylindrie — 3rd  slightly  longer  than  4th; 
gradually  enlarging  from  5th  to  8th;  8th — 10th  wider  than  long,  11th  largest, 
ovoid.  Prothorax  strongly  trans\erse,  truncate  at  apex,  feebly  bisinuate  at  base, 
sides  evenly  rounded,  all  angles  obtuse,  disc  closely  and  coarsely  punctate,  without 
medial  line,  two  large,  shallow,  foveate  depressions  near  base.  Scutellum  large, 
curvilinear  triangular.  Elytra  wider  than  prothorax  at  base  and  about  3  time;5 
as  long,  sub-parallel  (or  feebly  ovate)  moderately  convex  (narrow  border  not 
evident  from  above),  striate-punctate,  intervals  lightly  convex  on  disc,  more 
markedly  so  at  sides;  seriate  punctures  large;  intei-%-als  thickly  punctate  (giving 
semi-opaque  appearance  to  surface).  Underside  coarsely,  metastemum  more 
sparsely  punctate  Prostemum  narrowly  compressed  between  coxae,  the  apex 
produced  backwards  forming  an  ellipse,  fitting  an  arcuate  triangular  depression 
in  mesostemum,  metasternum  channelled ;  middle  and  post  intercoxal  processes 
arcuate;  legs  clothed  with  longish  yellow  hair;  tibiae  with  short  spine  at  apex, 
posterior  tarsi  with  claw-joint  nearly  as  long  as  the  rest  combined.  Dimeiisionf:: 
4  X  IJ— 2  mm. 

77nb.— N.  Territory:  Stapleton  (Mr.  G.  F.  Hill);  also  British  :\ruseum;  in 
both  cases    taken  in  <?  flowers  of  Zantia. 

Five  specimens  from  !Mr.  Hill,  and  two  sent  from  the  British  Museum  show  a 
species  that  I  place  with  much  diffidence  under  Alpliitobiits. 

Type  in  Coll   Carter. 

Platycilibe  integricollis.  n.sp. 

Short,  broad,  depressed,  sub-parallel,  nitid  brown  above  and  below ;  antennae, 
jialpi  and  tarsi  reddish.  Head  wide  and  convex,  eyes  small,  surface  —  as  also 
that  iif  [tronotum — closely  and  rather  coarsely  punctate;  antennae  short,  with  3- 
jointed  club — less  enlarged  than  in  P.  brevis  mihi.  Prothorax  truncate  at  base, 
squarely  emarginate  at  apex,  anterior  angles  rather  sharply  advanced,  sides 
straight — slightly  -n  ider  at  base  than  at  apex,  with  narrow,  horizontal,  lateral 
border  bounded  internally  by  a  fine  sulcus,  the  external  edge  entire,  disc  without 
medial  line  or  foveae.  Scutellum  small.  Eli/tra  of  same  width  as  and  closely 
adapted  to  prothorax,  punctate-striate,  the  intervals  a  little  convex  and  smooth, 
the  punctures  in  striae  roimd,  regular  and  close.  Under  surface  of  head  and 
sternum  strongly  punctate,  abdomen  sparsely  punctate;  fore-tibiae  (at  least) 
spinose  on  outside  edge.     Dimensions:  4^2  mm. 

Hah. — Acacia  Creek,  JlacPherson  Ranges,  X.S.W.  (H.  J.  Carter).  Xa- 
tional  Park,  Q'land.  (H.  Hacker)  and  Queensland.  [British  Museum  ((^liallenger 
Expedition).] 

Six  specimens  examined  show  a  species  so  close  to  P.  brevis  Cart,  that  my 
own  two  specimens  had  been  placed  under  that  label  in  my  cabinet.  The  two 
Queensland  examples  sent  by  Mr.  Blair,  who  called  attention  to  their  ditferenca 
from  P.  brevis,  made  me  examine  them  more  closely  and  the  following  distinctions 
were  noted : — Head  and  pronotiim  more  coarsely  punctate,  antennal  club  3- 
jointed:  sides  of  prothorax  entire;  underside  less  coarsely  and  more  s]),Trsely 
punctate;  size  smaller.  (N.B. — In  my  description  of  P.  brevis,  I  omitted  the 
fact  that  the  sides  of  prothorax  are  finely,  irregularly  crenulated.  wliile  the  an- 
tennal dub,  as  seen  in  figure,  is  more  or  less  4-jointed.) 

Types    in  Coll.  Carter. 


bt  h.  j.  carter.  227 

Pterohelaeus. 
Synonymy. 

(a)  P.  planus  Bless.  =     P.  liepaticits  Pasc    =  (?)   P.  bagotensis  Blackb. 

(b)  P.  pice^ts  Ivirby  ^  P.  pascoei  Mad.  =  P.  iiruinosus  Pasc 

(c)  P.   dispar  Pasc.  ^  P.  abdoininaUs   Lea. 

(d)  P.  tristis  Germ  =  P.  memnonius  Pasc.  ^  P.   tenwistriatus  Lea. 

(e)  P.  geminatus  Blackb.  =  P.  sub-punctatus  Cart. 

(/)  P.  dispersus  Macl.  ^  P.  fraternus  Blackb.  =  ( ?)  P.  ofdZf's  Blackb. 
(«)  ^rfe  Blair.  (?))  Mr.  Blair  writes:  "The  type  of  P.  piceus  Kby  appears 
to  be  lost,  but  I  send  a  specimen  of  what  passes  with  us  for  this  species,  and 
with  which  I  consider  P.  pruinosiis  Pasc.  and  P.  pa.scoei  Macl.  (det.  H. J.C.I 
identical."  (c)  My  own  examples  have  been  compared  with  Lea's  type  and 
secondly  with  an  example  of  dispar  (?)  from  the  British  Museum.  An  example 
of  P.  dispar  c?  (f)  much  smaller  than  the  S  (14  X  9  mm.)  is  identical  with  P. 
broadhursti  Lea,  but  I  consider  this  specimen  to  be  doubtfully  conspeeific  with 
the  female  example  sent,  and  Mr.  Lea's  name  should  stand  till  further  evidence 
is  adduced,  (d)  Mr.  Blair  states  "The  type  of  memnoiiitis  Pasc.  certainly  has 
quite  distinct  granules  (=  tristis  Germ.)  ."  An  example  of  meinnonius  sent  me 
from  the  British  Museum  agrees  with  my  own  example  that  has  been  compared 
with  P.  tenulstriattis  Lea.  (e)  is  certain  from  example  sent  of  geminatm.  (f) 
fide  Blair,  with  some  doubt  as  to  ovalis. 

P.  semis  Pasc. — A  specimen  sent  from  the  British  Museum  is  identical  with 
examples  in  my  collection  from  Walgett  and  Nan-abri,  N.S.W.  The  type  was 
described  as  from  Victoria. 

P.  agonus  Pasc. — An  example  sent  is  quite  new  to  me,  and  in  size  and  form 
near  peltatus  Erichs.,  but  has  head  and  thorax  more  cleai'ly  punctate,  the  elytril 
margins  narrower,  all  intervals  f|uite  flat,  and  seriate  punctures  much  finer. 

Pterohelaeus  intbrruptus,  n.sp. 

Elliptic,  depressed,  subnitid,  black,  tarsi  and  apical  joints  of  antennae  red- 
dish. Head  very  minutely  punctate,  eyes  separated  by  a  space  of  about  the 
diameter  of  one  eye,  antennae  with  last  4  joints  enlarged,  9th-10th  round,  11th 
oblong,  elliptic.  Prothorax  3  X  7i  mm.,  length  measured  in  middle,  base  bisinu- 
ate,  apex  deeply  emarginate,  anterior  angles  sharply  produced — though  slightly 
blunted  at  extreme  end;  sides  continuing  the  elliptic  curve  of  elytra  but  slightly 
sinuate  before  the  anterior  angles;  posterior  angles  acute  and  falcate;  disc  nearly 
smooth  or  merely  microscopically  punctured ;  foliate  margins  a  little  concave,  rather 
wide  medial  basal  impression  and  shallow  foveae  on  each  side  of  this.  Scutellum 
equilatero-triangnlar.  Elytra  of  same  width  as  prothorax  at  base,  widely  ovate 
and  depressed,  foliate  margins  wide  and  sub-horizontal;  irregularly  linear-punc- 
tate, with  nine  more  or  less  raised  inteirvals  of  which  the  1st,  3rd,  5th  and  9th 
are  more  raised  than  the  others,  the  1st  bifurcating  at  scutellum,  the  9th  eosti- 
form;  from  halfway  to  apex  these  intervals  broken  up  into  rows  of  noduleK;  be- 
tween the  intei-vals  are  double  rows  of  small  punctures,  those  near  suture  very 
irregular;  outside  the  9th  and  limiting  the  foliate  margins,  a  row  of  large  punc- 
tures ;  abdomen  finely  strigose.     Dimensions :  c?.  14  X   9,  9  15  X   10  mm. 

Hob. — Forest  River  District,  W.A.  (Western  Australian  Museum),  also 
Kimberley  District   W.A. 


228  NOTES   ON"    SOME   AU.STRALIAX    TK.VEIiRIOXIDAE, 

Two  examples  examined  show  a  species  rather  closely  allied  to  the  Queens- 
land species  P.  arcanus  Pasc,  having  rather  similar  elytral  sculpture,  but  the 
form  is  more  regiUarly  elliptic,  the  foliation  less  wide,  the  sides  of  prothorax 
feebly  sinuate.  In  I'.  arcanuK  the  lines  ot  nodules  are  continuous  throughout,  ex- 
cept  for  the   costate   3rd  interval. 

Type   (c?)  in  the  \Yesteru  Australian  Museum,  Perth. 

Pterohelaeus  nodicostis,  n.sp. 

Widely  ovate,  convex,  reddish  brown,  head  and  pronotum  black,  paliii  and 
legs  red,  antennae  wanting.  Head  and  pronotum  very  finely  punctate,  eyes 
moderately  distant  (as  in  P.  piceiis  Kii-by).  Prothorax  transverse,  foliage  mar- 
gins wide  and  horizontal,  anterior  angles  widely  rounded,  posterior  angles  pro- 
duced, but  widely  blunted  at  apex,  medial  line  faintly  indicated.  Ehjtra  of  same 
width  as  prothorax  at  base,  sides  sub-parallel  to  halfway,  widely  rounded  be- 
hind; very  convex,  foliate  margins  wide  and  horizontal,  little  narrowed  behind; 
disc  with  17  rows  of  punctures,  besides  a  short  scutellary  row ;  all,  except  this  and 
extreme  lateral  row,  in  pairs  between  costate  intervals;  the  seriate  punctures  tine 
near  suture,  much  finer  than  in  piceics,  larger  towards  sides,  there  as  large  as  in 
piceus;  the  suture  raised,  the  1st  and  3rd  costae  flattening  out  on  basal  half,  the 
rest  earinate-crenulate  on  basal  half;  all  costae  nodulose  on  apical  half,  a  single 
row  of  nodules  forming  a  crest  on  each  raised  inter\-al.  Underside  lightly 
strigose,  apical  segment  punctate.     Dimensions:  21   X   13}  uim. 

ffab.— Moree  District,  N.S.W.  (Mr.  P.  C.  Morse). 

A  single  specmien  lately  sent  by  its  captor,  is  a  very  distinctly  differentiated 
member  of  IMacleay's  Sect.  1.2.  Species  of  broadly  ovate  form,  and  largely 
expanded  margins  to  both  thoi-ax  and  elytra.  It  is  the  only  one  besides  arcanus 
Pasc,  raucus  Blackb.,  and  interrupt  us  (supra)  in  which  the  elytra  have  grannies; 
arcanus  is,  however,  much  more  widely  oval,  with  the  wide  sutnral  interval  con- 
fusedly punctate,  and  the  suture  itself  nodulose  inter  multa  alia:  rattcus  has  a 
totally  different  sculpture.  In  size  and  foliation  it  is  near  piceus  Kirby,  hut  i5 
more  convex.  It  differs  from  interruptus  (stipra).  which  has  the  costae  clearly 
interrupted,  leaving  island  nodules. 

Type   in  Coll.  Carter. 

Pterohelaeu.s  oblongus,  n.sp. 

Elongate  parallel,  whole  surface  rather  nitid  black,  legs  very  nitid ;  antt  nnae 
— especially  apical  half — and  tarsi  reddish.  Head  finely  punctate,  eyes  sei)ar- 
ated  by  a  space  '>f  about  half  the  diameter  of  one;  antennae  with  third  joint  as 
long  as  4th  and  5th  combined,  2nd — Cth  linear,  7th  obconic,  8th — lOtli  enl.ii'ged, 
ovate,  11th  elongate  ovate.  Prothorax  (4X9  mm.),  emarginate  at  apex,  bisinu- 
ate  at  base,  widest  a  little  in  front  of  base,  thence  converging  lightly  to  base, 
more  strongly  and  arcuately  to  apex;  base  nearly  twice  as  wide  as  apex  (9 :5) ;  foliate 
margins  wide  and  slightly  concave,  extreme  margin  reverted:  anterior  angles 
prominent  but  bhuitly  rounded,  posterior  sharp  and  sub-rectangular  (feebly  fal- 
cate) ;  disc  nearly  smooth,  very  minutely  punctate,  medial  line  , dearly  impressed; 
two  deep  triangular  foveae  at  base.  ScuteUum  very  large,  curvilinear  triangular. 
Elytra  slightly  wider  than  prothorax  at  base  and  about  four  times  as  long,  sides 
parallel  for  the  greater  part,  margins  very  narrow,  slightly  widened  at  the  shoul- 
ders, there  forming  an  obtuse  angle;  disc  coarsely  striate-punctato,  with  about  18 
sub-obsolete  striae,  including  a  short  scutellary  and  a  lateral  row  nf  larger  punc- 
tures, seriate  punctures    round    and    deep,  l)ecoming  finer  at  shoulders  and  apex, 


liV    11.   .1.   CAIiTKU.  229 

humeral  gibbus  prononneed,  intervals  flat,  except  the  sutural,  4th,  8th,  and  12th, 
these  wider  than  the  rest  and  more  or  less  costate,  the  sutui-al  eosta  l)ifurcating  at 
the  seutelliim  and  continuous  to  the  base;  prosternum  shaiply  carinate  and  lightly 
transversely  rugose,  basal  segments  of  abdomen  punctate  and  strigose,  apical 
segments  very  finely  punctate.     Dimensions:  21 — 22    x    10  mm. 

Hab. — Gingkcn.  Blue  Mountains  (R .  B.  Carter),  Blue  .VIountains  (Mr. 
Deu(juet ) . 

Two  examples  show  a  species  that  I  have  hitherto  hesitated  to  distinguish  from 
memnoniits  Pase.  (=  tristis  Germ.),  but  with  the  information  lately  acquired  from 
examples  sent  by  Mr.  Blair,  it  is  evidently  not  that  species.  It  belongs  tj 
Macleay's  Sect,  ii..  Sub-section  1,  and  is  neai'est  to  the  Ta-smanian  species  P. 
reichei  Breme,  from  which  it  is  chiefly  distinguished  by  (1)  more  nitid  surface, 
and  wider  form,  (2)  more  clearly  channelled  and  foveate  proiiotum,  (3)  narrower 
elytral  margins,   (-1)  considerably  larger  seriate  punctures. 

Type    in   Coll.  Carter. 

Helaeus  latifolius,  n.sp. 

Widely  obovate,  sub-nitid  brown  black,  elytra  with  short  upright  fine  bristles; 
tarsi,  apical  joints  of  antennae  and  tarsi  reddish,  underside  opaque  black.  Heaii 
densely  and  fuiely  ]5unctate,  antennae  with  3rd  joint  as  long  as  4th-5th  combined; 
joints  beyond  8th  wanting.  Prothurax  5X9  mm.;  foliate  margins  wide,  in  d' 
arcuately  narrowed  from  base  to  apex,  in  ?  expanding  in  front  of  base,  thence 
widely  rounded  to  apex;  disc  and  margins  very  flmely  and  sparsely  punctate;  the 
punctures  on  margins  bearing  each  a  short  bristle,  foliate  margins  a  little  concave 
and  raised  at  the  edges,  anterior  processes  concave  above,  overlapping  and 
lather  sharply  rounded  at  apex,  posterior  angles  falcate  and  overlajiping  elytra; 
disc  with  feebly-raised  carina  terminating  behind  in  a  small,  narrow,  rounded  knob 
in  front  of  ba.se,  the  latter  widely  l)!sinuate.  S'cutellum  widely  transversely  oval. 
Elytra  of  same  width  as  prothorax  at  base  and  more  than  twice  as  long;  obovate, 
shoulders  obtusely  rounded,  margins  wide,  concave  and  reflexed,  more  minutely 
setose  than  those  of  tlie  prothorax,  each  elytron  separately  rounded  at  apex,  disc 
with  suture  carinate  and  two  strongly  raised  carinate  costae,  these  sub-parallel, 
less  than  2  mm.  apart,  slightly  diverging  at  scutellum,  and  suddenly  terminating  at 
apical  third ;  space  between  costae,  as  also  area  between  costae  and  margins, 
coarsely  punctate,  each  puncture  producing  a  short  reddish  bristle,  the  extra- 
costal  spaces  with  two  or  three  ill-defined  longitudinal  ridges.  Abdomen  densely 
punctate,  prosternum  finely  shagi'eened,  e|iipleurae  coarsely  and  closely  punctate. 
Dimensions:  18  X  21}  mm. 

Hab. — Margaret  River,  Western  Australia    (Mr.  .J.   Clark). 

Two  examples,  the  sexes,  show  a  species  near  H.  ijilesi  Cart.,  but  diftVriiig  iu 
;1)  much  wider  foliate  margins  of  prothorax  and  elytra,  (2)  shorter  and  less 
widely  separated  elytral  costae,  (3)  much  more  coarse  punctures  on  both  elytra  and 
epi]i!eurae.  Though  the  dimensions  appear  the  same  as  those  of  II.  gilesi,  the 
species  is  really  more  elongate  and  nearer  II.  frenehi  Cart,  in  outline,  the  width 
bein"  largely  due  to  the  very  wide  margins  sliown  by  the  following  comparison. 
In  H.  gilesi  the  width  of  body  and  of  combined  margins  are  ft  and  2  mm.  respect- 
ively.     In  n.  latifolius  the  corresponding  widths  are  7i  and  3}  mm. 

Type  c?  in  Coll.  Carter;  ?  in  that  of  Mr.  Clark. 

Men'farchus,  n.gen.  Tenebrioninarum.     (Text-fig    3.) 
Lightly  obovate,  depressed;  antennae  long   (extending  nearly  to  base  of  pro- 
thor.ix),  3rd  joint  very  little  longer  than  4th,   apical  joints  widely   oval  and   flat- 


230 


NOTl;S  ON    SOME  AUSTRALIAN  TENEBRIOXIDAE, 


tened;  epistoma  arcuate  (concave)  iu  front,  without  marked  sulcus  separating 
forehead;  meutum  cariuate  in  middle,  its  sides  straight  and  narrowing  to  apex — this 
bilateral,  fuiiuing  a  triangular  notch;  all  palpi  with  apical  joints  securiform, 
i'ront  coxae  round,  posterior  transverse,  all  coxae  furn- 
ished with  troehantins.  Prostenium  convex,  produced 
oetween  fore-coxae  into  a  blunted  process,  received  into 
a  triangular  inesosternal  notch;  mid-intercoxal  process 
widely,  post-intercoxal  process  squarely  rounded,  abdomen 
with  wide  longitudinal  depression;  fore-tibiae  strongly 
ueni  and  enlargeil  at  apex,  post-tibiae  curved  and  strongly 
tomentose  within,  all  tibiae  shortly  bispinose  at  apex; 
elytra  sulcate-sub-puuctate.  A  genus  quite  at  variance 
with  any  other  yet  described.  ^lore  ijvate  than  Hi/ixiuJax, 
less  so  than  Asphalus^  more  depressed  than  either,  its 
most  striking  features  are  the  combination  of  the  usual 
Tenebrioninae  characters  of  the  bead,  body,  and  strongly 
cur\ed  tibiae,  together  with  more  elongate  antennae  and 
a  sculpture  sui  generis. 

MeNEARCHUS  lilPRESSO-SULCATUS^  n.sp.      (Text-fig.  3.) 

Opaque  black  above,  nitid  beneath,  glabrous;   antennae, 
oral  organs  and  tarsi  piceous.    Head  large  and  flat,  labrum 
emarginate.  epistoma  arcuate,  its  sides  ailvanced ;  antennal 
orbits   wide  and    depressed;    eyes  narrow    and    transverse; 
Text-fiij.  S.|  u]iper   surface — like  that   of    prouotum —  uniformly    very 

Meneuir/iiis  im-  densely    and   finely    punctate.     Frothora.r:     5X7   mm. 

presso-siilcaliis.  (length  measured  in  middle),  arcuate  emarginate  at  apex, 

bisinuate  at  base,  anterior  angles  sub-acute,  tips  blunted;  sides  evenly  rounded, 
widest  at  middle,  posterior  angles  rather  widely  acute  and  produced  so  as  to  over- 
lap slightly  the  elytra;  lateral  border  narrowly  raised — not  sulfite  within — still 
narrower  at  base  and  ol)solete  at  apex;  disc  with  a  faint  indication  of  medial 
channel.  Scutellum  convex,  strongly  transverse,  punctate.  Elytra  slightly  wider 
than  prothorax  at  base  and  two  and  a-half  times  as  long,  widest  behind  middle, 
cpipleural  fold  forming  a  marked  but  wide  humeral  angle;  with  9  sulci,  in- 
cluding extreme  lateral  one  (besides  a  very  short  scutcllary  sulcus)  ;  the  intervals 
evenly  and  roundly  convex  and  impressed  on  sides  by  shallow  sub-jnmctate  im- 
pressions, these  more  pronounced  laterally,  the  two  outside  sulci  definitely  punctate; 
intervals  everywhere  covered  with  dense  system  of  fine  punctures  as  on  head  and 
pronotum.  Undersurface  and  legs  closely  punctate,  abdomen  more  coarsely  and 
less  closely  than  upper  surface,  hind  femora  dentate — a  line  of  tomentum  extending: 
from  base  to  this  tooth ;  fore-tibiae  having  apical  third  abrui)tly  bent  inwards  and 
thence  mudi  enlarged,  mid-tibiae  triangularly  enlarged  at  apex,  posterior  tibiae 
strongly  curved,  widely  dentate  near  base,  with  a  line  of  coarse  tomentum  on  inner 
edge;  three  basal  joints  of  front  tarsi  enlarged,  basal  joint  of  hind  tarsi  about  as 
long  as  the  2nd  and  3rd  combined.  Dimetnfions:  19 — 20  x  7J — 8  mm. 
II ah. — New  South  "Wales  (Mr.  Deuqnet). 

Two  c?  specimens  taken  by  Mr.  Deu(iuet,  one  of  which  has  been  generously 
idaced  at  my  dis])osal.  Tlie  tibial  diaracters  alone  would  distinguish  this  unusual 
insect  from  any  other  Australian  member  of  the  Tenehrionidae. 


BY    H.    J.    CARTER.  231 

Type  in  Coll.  Carter.  It  is  unfortunate  that  the  captor  of  this  fine  s-pecies 
did  not  aflix  a  locality  label  to  his  specimens,  and  in  consequence  there  is  some 
doubt  as  to  the  exact  habitat,  but  Mr.  Deuquet  thinks  that  he  took  them  near 
Mulgoa   (Upper  Nopean  River). 

Menephilus  longicollis,  n.sp. 

Elongate,  sub-parallel,  nitid  blaek;  antennae,  palpi  and  tarsi  castaneous. 
Head  closely  and  finely  punctate,  widest  in  front  of  eyes,  these  not  pronunent. 
Protliorax  very  convex  laterally,  strongly  and  widely  produced  in  middle  at  apex, 
base  truncate,  anterior  angles  obsolete  (widely  rounded  off)  ;  sides  nearly  straight 
(or  feebly  arcuate)  on  apical  half,  narrowing  considerably  and  rather  abruptly  to 
base,  posterior  angles  widely  obtuse;  basal  border  naiTowly  raised,  lateral  border 
not  seen  from  above,  disc  evenly  and  finely  punctate,  without  any  sign  of  foveae 
or  medial  line.  Scutellum  triangular,  punctate.  Elytra  wider  than  prothorax  at 
base,  and  about  twice  as  long,  humeri  sharply  rounded  and  prominent  and 
a  little  produced  forward ;  sides  parallel  to  near  apex,  with  very  narrow 
horizontal  border;  disc  striate-punctate,  with  8  deep  striae  besides  a 
short  scutellary  stria  on  each  elytron,  containing  rows  of  large  punc- 
tures crenulating  the  sides  of  interstices  and  rather  irregularly  placed, 
those  near  suture  more  closely  placed,  more  widely  separated  in  external  striae;  in- 
tervals raised  but  somewhat  flattened  above,  and  minutely  punctate.  Pro-  and  meta- 
sterna  smooth,  the  latter  with  medial  depression;  abdomen  finely  punctate,  each  seg- 
ment uith  a  row  of  large  punctures  on  front  margin,  a  similar  row  surrounding  the 
hind  coxae.     Dimensions:  10 —  11  X  3^ — 4  mm. 

Hab. — Kellerberrin,  Western  Australia  (Mr.  W.  Crowshaw). 

Three  specimens  examined  show  a  very  distinct  species  nearest  to  M.  coeru- 
lescens  Haag,  but  clearly  differentiated  by  the  longer  and  more  cylindric  prothorax, 
wider  head  (in  coerulescens  the  head  is  widest  at  the  eyes;  in  longicollis  the  can- 
thus  extends  laterally  in  front  of  but  beyond  the  eyes),  coarser  elytral  sculpture, 
besides  the  unusual  character  of  the  rows  of  large  punctures  at  the  margins  of 
abdominal   segments. 

Type  in  Coll.  Carter.  (N.B. — The  colour  of  31.  coerulescens  Haag  varies 
from  blue  to  black — the  latter  being  more  often  seen.) 

Brises.  In  my  revision  of  the  Tenehrioninae*  the  table  of  Brises,  line  4. 
should  read  "4(6)   Elytra  iricostate"    (for  bicostate). 

Cyphaleinae.  In  my  revision  of  this  sub-familyt  the  numbers  on  Plate  vi., 
corresponding  to  the  index,  p.  105,  were  misplaced,  and  should  be  read  in  vertical 
columns  downwards,  instead  of  in  horizontal  rows. 

Ospidus.  From  a  comparison  with  type,  it  is  clear  that  my  original  identifica- 
tion of  0.  chrysomeloides  Pasc.  was  erroneous. 

In  consequence,  0.  chrysomeloides  Pasc.  ^  O.  paropsoides  Cart.,  and  O. 
chrysomeloides  Cart,  (nee  .Pasc.)  requires  a  name,  and  is  defined  below.  The 
genus  Ospidus  placed  by  its  author  in  the  Helaeinae,  should  be  classed,  as  I  now 
consider,  with  the  Cyphaleinae,  near  Bolbophanes. 

Ospidus  major,  n.sp. 

Widely  ovate,  very  convex,  nitid  castaneous  bronze  above,  less  nitid  beneath 
and  rather  densely  clothed  with  short  recumbent  golden  hairs.     Compared  with  0. 

•These  Proe.,  xxxix.,  1914,  p. 46. 
•      tThese  Proc,  xxxviii..  1913. 


232  NOTES  ox    .SOME  AUSTRALIAN    TEXEURIOMDAE, 

chrD^umeJoides  Pasc.  the  liead  is  less  coarsely  rugose,  the  pronotum  is  minutely 
;iik1  lightly  jjunctured  and  more  nitid — the  former  rather  strongly  depressed  be- 
tween the  eyes,  the  latter  with  only  a  taint  depression  near  base  to  indicate  the 
medial  channel,  the  foliate  margins  transversely  rugose.  Elytra  with  shoulders 
obtuse,  the  sub-obsolete  costae  even  less  obvious,  the  disc  much  more  finely  punc- 
tate, without  anywhere  a  sign  of  linear  arrangement.     Dimensions:  15  >^  10  mm. 

Rah. — Cooktown,  Cairns,  etc.,  N.  Queensland. 

A  species  easily  separated  from  O.  chrijsomeluides  by  its  lai-ger  form,  brighter 
colour  and  much  liner  puncturation.  1  have  O.  chrysumehiides  from  Townsvillc 
Brisbane  and  Tambourine  Mountain,  S.  Queensland.  0.  gihbus  Blackb.  from  Cajie 
I'ork  is  even  more  convex  than  major,  is  castaneous,  not  metallic,  with  black 
markings,  and  coarse  irregular  punctures.  The  three  species  may  be  distinguished 
as  follow: — 
1 — 3  Concolorous  and  metallic. 

2.  Coppery    bronze,    pronotum    closely   and  finely  rugose. 

Hab. — S.   Queensland f/irysotne/oides  Pasc. 

paropsoides  Cart. 

3.  Castaneous   bronze,    pronotum    very   lightly  punctate     major,  n.s,p. 

4.  Xon-metallic   castaneous  with   black  maculae gibbus  Blackb. 

ADELIINAE. 

C  A  R  D  I  O  T  H  O  R  A  X. 

{a)  C.  acHtuiiguhis  Bates  =  C.  constrictus  Cart.  ='!.  aeripennis   Blackb.,  var. 

(b)  C.  aeneus  Bates  =  C.  coeruleo-niger  Cart.,  var.  A  ^  C.  macleayensis 
Cart.,  var.  B. 

(a)  The  first  of  these  is  certain  by  a  comparison  of  specimens  by  ]\Ir.  Blair. 
I  was  misled  by  three  inaccuracies  in  Bates's  description. —  (1)  the  colour  is  not 
black,  (2)  there  is  a  sulcus  between  margin  and  disc  of  prothorax,  (3)  tlie 
liabitat  is  not  Brisbane.  In  general  C.  aeripennis  Blackb.  differs  from  acutamju- 
1ns  Bates  in  the  following  respects, — hind  angles  of  thorax  less  wide,  narrower 
sinuation,  extreme  border-  thicker,  with  a  characteristic  carina  at  anterior  angles, 
luited  l)y  author.  However,  these  differences  are  so  modified  in  some  examples 
that  it  must  be  confessed  that  the  distinctions  are  in  some  eases  evanescent.  I 
rook  a  large  number  of  acntangulus  at  Capertee,  N.S.W.,  and  some  dozens  of  the 
tvi^ical   aeripennis  at  Mount  Wilson,  Blue  Mountains. 

{h)  These  are  well-marked  colour  variations  in  fresh  exam)des,  but  I  can 
find  no  structural  dift'erences  whatever  between  tlie  three.  I  found  the  first  two. 
aenetis  and  coeruleo-niger.  in  separate  batches — never  in  company — some  mile  or 
two  apart  at  Bullahdelah,  Port  Stephens,  while  macleayensis  occurs  from  the 
Macleay  River  to  Coraki  on  tlie  Richmond.  The  typical  aeneus  has  a  blue-lilack 
thorax,  with  lirassy  elytra;  coeruleo-niger  is  wliolly  blue-lilack,  while  niacleayensis 
is  a  bright  brcmze,  often  with  brassy  gleam  at  .sides.  The  varietal  names  should  be 
retained.     Four  new  species  are  described  below. 

Adelium  calosomoides  Kirby  =,1.  bicolor  Cart.  (The  latter  is,  I  think,  oiil,- 
one  of  the  many  varieties  of  the  former  having  red  antennae.) 

Adelium  angulatiim  Blackb.  My  notes  on  this  species*  were  based  on  <i  mis- 
named specimen  ;.'ivcn  me  as  angulatum  by  the  late  Canon  Blackburn.  This  is 
certainly  angnlicoll?  Casteln.  The  type  of  angulatnm.  Mr.  Blair  writes,  "is  cer- 
tainly not  -1.  angiilicolle  Casteln.  It  resembles  in  thorax  and  elytra  .1.  scytali- 
cum  Pasc,  and  is,  I  think,  tlie  same  species." 

•Those  Proc,  xx.xii..  19()H,  p.2r)9,  and  Trans.  R.  Soc.  S.  Aust.,  xxxviii.,  1914,  i).40:i. 


BY    H.    J.    CARTER. 


23'3 


Seirotrana  ereuicnllis  Pasc.  =  ,S'.  de>iticollis  Cart.  I  now  consider  the  latter 
as  merely  a  variety  of  the  former  (a  Victorian  species)  ;  and  that  Mr.  Dulxmlay 
was  mistaken  as  to  the  locality  of  capture. 

Cardiothorax  marcixatu.s^  n.sp.     (Text-fig-.  4.) 

Elongate-ovate,  polished  black,  antennae  reddish-brown,  tarsi  with  red  tomen- 
tum  beneath,  llead  smooth  on  front,  minutely  punctate  on  clypeus,  the  latter 
produced  in  middle,  the  usual  frontal  impression  deep.  Frothuray  ciirdate,  wide:-;!, 
before  middle,  arcuate-emarginate  at  apes,  front  angles  rounded,  sides  well 
rounded,  sinuate  behind,  dentate  posterior  angles  pointing  obliquely  backward; 
foliate   margins  divided  from  disc  by  sulcus,  lateral  border  wide  and   I'ound.    disc 


Text-fig.  4.     Caidiotlwyax  inarginaius. 
Text-fig.  ia.     Cardiothorax  walckenaerii  Hope. 


%.ith  flue  medial  sulcus,  a  ti'ansverse  suleate  impression  parallel  to  and  near  liast, 
and  two  deep  triangular  foveae  near  hind  angles.  Scutellum  with  a  single  large 
puncture.  Eli/tra  slightly  wider  than  prothorax  at  base,  humeri  obsolete,  suleate, 
intervals  of  uniform  width,  flat  on  disc,  a  little  convex  at  sides  and  apex;  under- 
side smooth.     Dimensiuiis  :   16 — 17    X   5^ — Q  mm. 

Hah. — Mittagong   (Mr.  Deuquet)  ;  also  Blue  Mountains   (H.   J.  Carter). 

Two  examples  from  Mittagong,  and  a  specimen  I  have  fro.ni  Newnes,  which 
I  think  is  eonspeciflc,  are  allies  of  the  common  Sydney  species  C.  walckenaerii 
Hope.     The  following  distinctions  necessitate  a  speeifle  name : 


niarginatus. 
Colour.      Polished  black. 
Clypeus.      Produced  in  middle. 
Prothorax.     Border  wide. 

Transverse  sulcus  near  base. 
Latero-basal  foveae     triangu- 
lar,     running      into      lateral 
depression . 
Elytra  .—V^Wa     7     flattish    intervals   on 
disc;      space      beyond      these 
smooth,  with  the  usual  lateral 
striae . 


walckenaerii  (Text-fig. 4(;.) 
Sub-nitid  bronze-black. 
Widely  rounded. 
Border  narrow. 
None. 

Basal  foveae  elongate  (parallel  to  medial 
line),  not  connected  with  lateral  depres- 
sion. 

With  8  convex  intervals:  space  beyond 
these  with  2  rows  of  large  punctures. 


234  NOTES  ON    SOME  AUSTRALIAN   TENEBRIOSIDAE, 

The  sexual  distinction  is  very  similar  hut  less  definite  than  is  the  ease  with 
C.  walckenaerii. 

T  y  p  e  s    in  Coll.  Carter. 

Cardiothoras  metallicus,   n.sp.       fXext-fig.  5.) 

Elongate-oval;  above  metallic  blue,  sometimes  with  violet  or  brighter  sheea 
towards  margins,  underside  black,  antennae  fuscous,  tarsi  clothed  beneath  with 
red  hair.  Head  finely  punctate,  frontal  impression  sharply  angulate,  a  seta  near 
each  angle  on  epistoma;  a  round  fovea  between  eyes  and  a  few  foveate  punctures 
on  forehead,  antennal  joints  pear-shaped,  3rd  much  longer  than  4th,  and  sub- 
cylindrie,  11th  half  as  long  again  as  10th,  ovate-acuminate.  I'rothorax  3^4  mm. 
widest  in  front  of  middle,  arcuate-emarginate  at  apex,  base  angulate  and  nar- 
rowly marginal,  sides  moderately  rounded,  converging  to  base,  anterior  angles 
rounded,  posterior  obtuse,  undentate;  lateral  foliation  narrow,  without  separating 
sulcus,  and  bearing  two  or  three  setae ;  disc  with  well  marked  medial  sulcus,  and 
basal  impression  near  angles,  sometimes  with  a  few  shallow  impressions  on  eacii 
side  of  middle.  Scutellum  convex,  elongate,  rounded  behind.  Elytra  rather  nar- 
rowly ovate,  shoulders  obsolete,  epipleural  fold  very  narrow,  with  9  well-markeil 
sulci  on  each  (the  9th  on  the  sides),  intervals  evenly  convex,  the  first  two  and 
sixth  continuous  to  apex,  3rd  joining  5th  on  declivity.  Underside  smooth;  legs 
without  sexual  charactei's.     Dimensions  :  13 — 14  ^  4 — 4J  mm. 

Hah. — Bunya  Jlouiitains,  S.  Queensland  (INIrs.  Ilobler.  Jlr  R.  Illidge  and 
H.  .7.   Carter)." 

Twenty  specimens  taken  by  the  author,  besides  those  taken  by  the  shove, 
during  a  cainp  of  the  Royal  Austsalasian  Ornithologists'  Union.  The  species  ea!i 
only  lie  confused  with  C.  coeruleo-niger  Cart.,  which,  however,  has  a  truncate  base 
to  the  prothorax,  with  dentate  posterior  angles,  each  elytron  with  only  five  ciearly 
defined  sulci  inter  alia. 

Types   in  Coll.  Carter. 

Cardiothorax  regularis,  n.sp.  (Test-fig.  6.) 
Elongate-ovate,  opaque  brown-black,  antennae  and  tarsi  brown,  legs  and 
underside  nitid  black.  Head  with  epistoma  rather  sharply  produced  in  front,  witfi 
rhomboidal  frontal  impression;  antennae  having  joint  3  half  as  long  again  as  4. 
Prothorax  arcuate-emarginate  at  apex,  feebly  arcuate  at  base,  anterior  angles 
rounded,  sides  well  rounded  at  middle;  posterior  angles  narrowly  dentate,  with  a 
small  blunt  tooth  directed  downwards  and  outwards;  foliate  margins  horizontal 
with  narrow  nitid  border  throughout;  disc  rather  flat,  with  a  medial  sulcus,  two 
small  foveae  on  each  lobe  (more  or  less  connected  by  a  depressed  line),  and  a 
wide  depression  between  disc  and  foliate  margins.  Scutellum  oval.  Elytra  sul- 
cate,  with  nine  regular  convex  intervals,  the  lateral  three  narrow:  epipleurae  and 
underside  .smooth.     Dimensions:  15 — 17  X  5 — 5i  mm. 

Hah. — Toronto   (Lake  Macquarie),  00  miles  N.   of  Sydney    (Mr.  Deu(iuet). 
Five  specimens  examined — showing  no  marked  sexual  distinction — of  a  species 
very  near  C.  altrrnatu><  mihi    Imt  clearly  differentiated  as  follows: — - 
renii/iiris.  aUernatm. 

Head.      Narrower  and  more  pointed.  Wider  and  squarer. 

.intciiinic.      More  slender.  Stouter. 

Prol/uiyax.    Anterior  angles  rounded.  .-Xnterior  angles  sub-acute. 

Posterior  tooth  narrow.  Posterior  tooth  wide. 

/ilvlid.       Intervals*  sub-equal.  1st,  3rd  &  iith  evidently  wider  than  rest. 


BY    H.   J.   CARTER. 


235 


C    % 


Text-fig.  .5     Cardiothorax  inetallicus. 
Text-fisf.  6.     C.  reertilaris. 


Text-fig.  7.     C.  iiiidiilatirostis. 
Text-fig.  la.   C.  hiniieralis  Bates 


*The  Srd  and  5th  elytral  intervals  are  slightly  wider  than  ths  adjacent  intei-- 
vals  near  the  base  in  many  spp.  (including  regularis),  but  this  is  quite  different 
from  the  evident  alternate  inequality  shown  in  alternatus. 

Types   in  Coll.  Carter. 

Cardiothorax  IjNdulaticostis,  n.sp.     (Text-fig.  7). 

Elongate,  opaque  black,  costae  of  elytra  and  abdomen  nitid  black,  tarsi  and 
apex  of  tibiae  clothed  with  golden  tomeutum.  Head:  frontal  impression  square 
in  front,  rounded  behind,  containing  a  triangular  impression  within,  cl-vpeus 
rounded  in  front,  rather  prominently  angulated  at  sides  in  front  of  eyes ;  antennae 
stout,  Srd  joint  not  much  longer  than  4th,  4th — 10th  more  or  less  oblong  ovoid, 
11th  scarcely  longer  than  10th.  Prothorax  (5  X  6J  mm.)  eordiform,  wider  at 
apex  than  at  base,  widest  about  middle,  arcuate-emarginate  at  apex,  base  sub- 
truncate  (except  at  angles),  anterior  angles  widely  rounded,  sides  gradually  widen- 
ing to  half-way,  then  strongly  sinuately  narrowed,  the  posterior  angles  forming  a 
strong  triangular  tooth  bent  diagonally  outwards  and  a  little  backwards;  I'oliate 
margins  wide  and  up-turned,  separated  from  disc  by  a  wide  depression;  extreme 
border  nitid  and  thifk;  disc  with  deep  medial  sulcus,  and  a  linear  depression  on 
each  side  of  this,  besides  two  large,  triangular,  ba.sal  foveae.  Elytra  considerably 
wider  than  prothoiax  at  liase  and  nearly  2i  times  as  long,  obovate  and  flat,  humeri 
(formed  by  epipleural  fold)  very  prominent  and  irregular  (the  ri§;ht  clearly  angu- 
late,  the  left  rounded  and  ear-like)  ;  each  elytron  with  nine  raised,  crenulate  or 
wavy  costae — the  1st,   2nd,  3rd,  5th  and  7th  more  sharply  raised  than  the  rest, 


23G  XOTES   ox    SOME  AUSTRALIAX    TKXEBRIOXIDAE^ 

especially  the  7th;  the  yth  (on  side)  not  visible  from  above;  th'i  external  eostae 
less  wavy  than  those  near  suture;  the  wide  depression  between  eostae  of  irregular 
width,  the  (ith  and  7th  wider  than  the  rest,  and  showing-  faint,  obsolescent,  punc- 
tures; underside  smooth,  prosternum  opacjue.     Dimensious:  19   ^  7  mm. 

Hab. — Moruya,  New  South  Wales  (E.  H.  MacD.  Murray). 

Two  examples  were  obtained  by  !Mr.  W.  DuBoulay,  of  which  one  \va^  kindly 
given  me  some  years  ago.  At  the  time,  1  erroneously  identified  it  as  C.  hiinierali^ 
Bates,  but  the  true  hiimeralis  has  lately  been  clearly  identified  by  the  couiteous 
help  of  Mr.  Blair,  to  whom  1  sent  drawing's  of  the  two  species  to  compare  with 
the  tjrpe  (no  Australian  Museum  possesses  a  specimen).  Bates's  species  has  a 
very  differently  shaped  prothorax  (.see  fig.  7a),  while  the  elytra  have  8  uniform 
<  ostae,  scarcely,  or  very  feebly,  crenulate,  with  narrow-er  sulci  of  equal  width. 
The  only  cxamisle  T  have  seen  (exce]>t  the  type,  in  1907)  was  taken  at  Port. 
Maequaric  by  Dr.  E.  W.  Ferguson  and  generously  given  to  me.  The  two  .sj'ecies 
are,  however,  allied  and  belong  to  the  same  section  of  my  tabulation.  (X.B. — Tn 
this  section  there  are  no    external  sexual  characters.) 

Type    in  Coll.  Carter.     ' 

CaRDIOTIK.IKAX   KXCISICOLLIS.   U  .  Sp  . 

(jbovate,  depressed,  opaque  l)lai-k  above,  underside  nitid.  Iltat}  with  iim- 
iiouuced  stirrup-shaped  impression  on  front,  this  outlined  by  deep  sulcus;  an- 
tennae very  stout,  joints  oval,  3rd  longer  than  4th;  clyiJeus  sub-truncate.  Pro- 
tJiorax — length  in  middle  slightly  less  than  width;  widest  near  front;  foliate  mar- 
arins  wide  and  obliquely  raised,  separated  from  disc  by  wide  sulcus,  anterior  angles 
widely  rounded  and  jiroduced,  lateral  recurved  border  moderately  wide;  sides 
arcuately  converging  behind,  with  a  wide  notch  or  excision  preceding  the  acuta, 
outwardly-directed,  hind  angles;  base  sub-angnlate  (scarcely  coan-tate)  ;  disc  with 
wide  and  deep  medial  sulcus  and  a  short  sulcus  on  each  side  of  this.  Scut  ell  iii-t 
transverse,  with  a  triangular  depression  behind  it.  Elytra  widely  obovate  and 
rather  flat,  considerably  wider  than  prothorax  at  base,  shoulders  formed  by  epi- 
iileural  fold  sr|uarely  I'ounded,  each  elytron  with  9  rather  sharply  raised  nitid 
eostae,  those  near  suture  feebly  undulate,  1st  to  5th  subgeminate,  divided  by  fine 
sulcate  line,  the  Sth  short,  extending  from  half-way  to  tlie  apical  declivity,  the  9tli 
starting  immediately  behind  epipleural  fold  and  forming  a  limiting  border  to  the 
elytra  throughout ;  between,  the  9th  and  the  epipleural  fold  a  wide  convex  interval 
bounded  on  each  side  by  a  row  of  t'ovento  punctures.  Underside  smooth.  le-:rs 
simple.      Dimensions:  21    ^   8  mm. 

Jiah. — Eidsvold,   Soutii  Queensland    (  .\ustralian   and   Queenslan<l  Museums). 

Two  examples  in  the  Australian  ^Museum  and  one  in  the  Queensland  Museum 
(-an  only  be  confused  witii  ('.  iiiiadridentatus  Waterh.  from  Port  Boweii,  wlii.-h 
lliey  resemble  in  form,  colour  and  in  the  curiously  excised  posterior  sides  of 
thorax.      The  following  oorapari-soti  will   <listinguish  them. 

C.  quadriilculalus.  C.  e.rcisicollis. 

Piolhorax.    .-Xnterior    angles    acute    and  Widely  rounded,  less  prom'iient. 

prominent. 

Lateral  border  sub-obsolete;  Lateral   border   moderately    thick;    base 

base  sub-truncate.  sul>angulate. 

lUxtra.  .Alternate  intervals  costate.  .Ml  eostae  uniformly  raised. 


BY    H.    J.    CARTER.  237 

Liciiiotna.  Daedrosis,  Bri/eopia  aud  Diiioria. 

Pasooe's  genera  were  insiifliciently  defiiu'd,  while  be  omitted  Daedrosis  t'rora 
his  tabulation  of  the  group*  tiiougii  Bates's  genus  was  published  some  six  months 
earlier.  Of  Diiiaria  its  author  stated  "very  similar  to  Brycopla  and  only  to  be 
distinguished  by  the  pihise  tarsi."  Of  this  distinction  Mr.  Blair  writes  "on  an 
examination  of  the  types  I  fail  to  perceive."  My  own  specimens,  gummed  on 
cards,  had  not  hitlierto  been  critically  examined ;  but  having  now  closely  examined 
73.  picta  Pasc.  and  B.  piloseUa  Pasc.  under  a  Zeiss  binocular,  I  cannot  separate 
them  on  this  tarsal  <-haracter.  lioth  showing  hairs  together  with  a  short 
tomentum.  It  is  clear,  tlierefore,  that  the  name  Dinoria  should  be  sunk  as  a 
synonym.  From  a  specimen  sent  from  the  British  Museum  it  is  certain  that  B. 
diemenensis  Cart,  is  the  same  species  as  T).  coelioides  Pasc.  Of  the  latter  Mr.  Blair 
writes  "the  type  is  from  Queensland  though  we  have  8  specimens  from  Tasmania, 
and  one  from  K.  George's  Sound."  I  thiid'C  that  the  Queensland  and  Western 
Australian  localities  are  prol)ably  label  mistakes,  the  species  of  Bri/copia  being, 
in  general,  localised;  though  I  have  one  species..  B.  minuta  Lea,  from  Sydney, 
Mulwala  (Vic),  and  Barossa  (South  Australia).  I  had  always  been  puzzled 
over  D.  coelioides,  and  my  difficulty  was  enhanced  by  the  fact  that  another  species 
from  Tasmania,  described  below  as  B.  hexai/oiia,  has.  in  the  form  of  the  pro- 
thorax,  a  much  closer  affinity  to  D.  picta  than  the  real  D.  coelioides. 

A  close  re-exaniination  of  all  the  species  of  Daedrosis  and  Licinoma  avail- 
able, in  conjunction  with  Bates's  very  detailed  generic  description,  has  had  a  some- 
what disturbing  effect  on  my  previous  ideas,  which  had  been  formed  on  a  too 
prominent  consideration  of  what  now  apjtear  to  me  as  secondary  characters, 
antennae  and  sculjiture.  My  predecessor  Blackburn  evidently  held  similar  views, 
since  the  two  insects  he  described  as  Daedrosis  are  both  Licinoma,  and  indeed  one 
of  them,  D.  rictoriae,  is  a  synonym  of  L.  iiitida  Pasc,  the  genotype  of  Licinoma. 
Mr,  Blair's  note  on  this  is  "L.  nitida  Pasc.  is  certainly  generic  with  Blackburn's 
(ypc  of  Daedrosis  rictoriae  ....  and  in  my  opinion  victoriae  should  not  be  more 
than  a  var.  of  nitida  (the  puncturation  of  the  thorax  is  a  little  coarser  and  less 
regular.")      The  two  genera  are  to  be  distinguished  as  follows: — 

Daedrosis.  Licinoma. 

Protliorax.    Emarginate    at    apex;    sides         .\ot  emarginate  at  apex:  sides  entire. 

crenulate . 
Hidiicii.      Prominently  dentiform.  Rounded. 

Other  characters  which  differentiate  the  great  majority  of  species  lie  in  the 
antennae,  tarsi,  sculpture  and  clothing.  Tn  Daedrosis  the  antennal  joints  are 
round  and  coarse  with  an  unusually  large  terminal  joint.  In  Liciaoma  the  joints 
are  obeonic  or  triangular  with  terminal  joint  of  moderate  size.  Concerning  the 
tarsal  joints.  Bates  states  (under  Daedrosis)  "The  comparative  length  of  the  first 
and  last  joints  of  the  posterior  tarsi  does  not  appear  to  be  a  character  possessing 
any  generic  value.  In  TJioracopherus  [now  Cardiothora.r]  the  first  joint  is  longer, 
equal  to,  or  shorter  tlian  the  last,  according  to  the  species,  and  even,  I  believs, 
according  to  the  sex."  I  have  just  examined  both  sexes  of  16  species,  including 
7  species  of  that  author,  and  find  in  ereri/  case  that  the  first  joint  is  longer  than 
the  la.st.  Again  it  would  appear  that  this  comparative  leng-th  of  joints  is  a 
generic  test.     In  Daedrosis  (i.e.  in  the  species  included  below),   also  generally  in 


•  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist..  (4),  iii.,  1869,  p.  133. 


238  XOTES  ON'    SOME  AUSTRALIAN   TEXEBRIOXIDAE, 

Leptogaatrtis,  the  first  joint  is  shorter  than  the  last,  while  in  Licinoma  and  Bry- 
copia  the  first  joint  is  either  greater  or  (in  a  tew  cases)  of  e<|ual  length  to  the 
claw  joint.  The  leulpture  of  Daedrosis  is  generally  coarse,  with  more  or  leiis 
pilose  clothing,  while  the  species  of  Licinoma  are  generally  glabrous,  with  fine 
sculpture.  Brycopia  is  distinguished  from  both  Daedrosis  and  Licinoma  by  the 
round  (as  seen  from  above)  and  generally  prominent  eyes,  the  prothorax  is  not 
emarginate  at  apex,  and  the  species  are  generally  smaller,  and  of  shorter  iorm. 
The  sculpture  is  generally  coarse  (except  in  the  femorata,  minor  group),  and  the 
surface  glabrous,  or  pilose;  the  apical  joint  of  the  antennae  is  of  moderate  size, 
the  other  joints  in  general  more  or  less  moniliform.  In  this  difficult  group  of 
genera  there  are  cases  where  some  compromise  is  necessary,"  at  least  so  far  as  the 
secondary  characters,  referred  to  above,  go,  as  the  jireferable  alternative  to  the 
erection  of  nev.'  genera  on  fine  distinctions. 

The  following  synonymy  of  the  group  has  been  investigated: — 

Brycopia  =  Dinoria. 

Brycopia    (Dinoria)  coelioides  Pasc.  ^  B.  diemeneusis  Cart. 

Licinoma  nilidn  Pasc.  =  var.  Daedrosis  victoriae  Blackb. 

L.  {Daedrosis)   monticola  Blackb.  =  L.  pinicta-latera  Cart. 

L.  elata  Pasc.  =  L.  violacea  Macl. 

In  the  last  case  I  compared  the  specimen  of  elata  from  the  British  Museum 
with  specimens  labelled  elata  Pasc,  and  the  type  of  violacea  in  the  Australian 
Museum,  and  note  that  elata  was  correctly  named  and  that  the  type  ciolacea  is 
merely  a  larger  specimen  of  the  same  species. 

On  the  Bunya  Mountains  (S.  Queensland)  last  October,  I  ttxik  3  examples  of 
a  Licinoma  which  may  at  present  be  called  L.  elata  Pasc.  var.,  but  which  differ 
from  the  typical  form  in  the  following  characters:^ — (1)  Antennae  and  tarsi  black 
(or  nearly  so) — red  in  L.  elata;  (2)  sides  of  prothorax  less  widened  in  middle, 
less  abruptly  narrowed  behind.  I  bad  described  this  a.s  new,  but  its  sculpture  and 
form  approach  that  of  elata  so  closely  tliat  it  is  inail\'isat)le  to  separate  it  bv 
name. 

In  Daedrosis  my  tablet  must  l)e  cancelled;  eight  of  the  nine  L-,pecies  recorded 
there  being  disposed  as  follows: — Daedrosis  crenato-striata  Bates  =  7).  amhigiM 
Bates  =  D.  pyymaea  Haag. 

D.  angulala  Cart  is  a  Brycopia,  while  Lejilof/aslrus  was  incorrectly  placed  as 
synonymous  with  Daedrosis,  and  is  a  distinct  genus,  differentiated  by  the  complete 
absence  of  (1)  hind  angles  of  thorax.  (2)  slioiilders,  tlie  iia'rowing  of  both 
segments  in  this  region  causing  the  "pedunculation"  stated  by  Macleay.  Besides 
the  original  L.  mastersi,  my  Daedrosis  apifurmis  and  D.  hirsiita  umst  be  trans- 
ferred to  Leptoyastrus,  and  the  following  new  species  added,  while  the  species 
identified  by  me  as  Daedrosis  monticola  Blackb.  is  described  l)elow  as  TK  anten- 
iialis.     Daedrosis  interrupta  mihi  umst  be  transferred  fo  Adelium. 

In  regard  to  the  Daedrosis  synonymy  above,  there  is  little  doul)t.  that  tlie  fine 
distinctions  made  by  Bates  for  "amhiyua"  disapiiear  in  the  examination  of  a 
long  series,  tlie  Blue  Mountains  forms  being  generally  darker  and  larger.  The 
small  forms  taken  on  the  coast,  that  I  had  identified  as  pyymaea.  happened  to  lie 
more  pilose,  but  Mr.  Blair  considers  that  they  are  not  specifically  distinct  from 
the  type  of  crenato-striata.     Daedrosis   now,  therefore,  contains  two  species,   the 

•See  noto,  infra,  on  /,.  triiiicala. 

tTraus.  Roy.  See.  S.  Aus.,  xxxviii..  ISUl.  j).  :!88. 


BY    H.    .1.    CARTER.  239 

genotype  and  D.  antenuulis,  easily  distiugiiisbed.  Macroperas  has  the  pronounce! 
toothed  humeri  as  in  Daedrosis,  together  with  the  unusual  development  of  the  api- 
cal antennal  joint;  but  I  do  not  think  these  genera  should  be  merged.  Leptogas- 
irus,  Licinoma  and  Brt/eopia  are  now  tabulated  below. 

Table  of  Lcptogastru$\ 
1 — 5  Elytral  inter\-als  raised   (sub-costate) . 
2 — 4  Colour  bronze. 

3         Pronotum  coarsely  punctate iiiasteisi  Mad. 

t        Pronotum  finely  punctate occidenialis,  n.sp. 

5        Colour  blue cvanens,n.s^ 

6—8  Elytral  intervals  flat. 

7        2nd  and  -Ith  elytral  intervals  impunctate hirsulns  Cart. 

S        All  elytral   intervals  coarsely  punctate api/oriins  Cart. 

LEPTOG.i.STRU.S    CY.^NKU.S,  n  .  Sp  . 

Narrowly  elongate-uvate,  body  pedunculate,  upper  surface  nitid  dark  blue, 
thinly  clad  with  dark  upright  hair;  antennae,  oral  organs,  legs,  underside,  lateral 
margins  of  pronotum  and  humeral  region  eastaneous.  Head  and  pronotum 
rugose-punctate,  the  punctures  coarse  and  sub-confluent,  the  ridges  with 
a  longitudinal  tendency.  Head  rather  flat  on  vertex,  epistomal  suture 
straight,  eyes  large  and  transverse,  antennae  moniliform,  elongate  and 
very  robust.  3rd  joint  clearly  longer  than  the  4th;  from  4th  to  10th 
increasing  in  size,  7th-10th  spherical,  11th  twice  as  long  as  10th,  widely  ovate. 
Prothurax  sub-cordate,  considerably  wider  at  apex  than  at  base,  anterior  angles 
forming  a  sharp  triangular  tooth  pointing  a  little  outwards ;  sides  with  a  slightly 
uneven  outline  (scarcely  crenate),  with  a  small  sinuation  before  the  hind  angles 
and  a  wider  one  at  anterior;  the  posterior  angles  finely  dentate,  the  point  directed 
outwards;  extreme  lateral  border  sharp,  narrowly  horizontal  within,  the  latter 
with  a  row  of  large  impressed  punctures.  Eh/tra  sub-cylindric,  shoulders  widely 
rounded,  sides  parallel,  apex  rather  bluntly  rounded ;  punctate-suleate.  the  sulci 
deep,  closely  placeil  and  lined  with  densely  packed,  rather  large  punctures,  the 
intervals  sharp,  except  the  sutural — this  wide  and  smooth— with  three  or  four 
large  setae,  etiually  spaced.  Flanks  of  ))rosterniun  coarsely  punctate,  abdomen 
wanting,  legs  long,  posterior  tarsi  having  claw  joint  as  long  as  the  rest  combined. 
Dimensions :  7  ^  2i  mm. 

Hah. — Queensland.      (Blackburn    collection.) 

A  single  specimen  (the  type)  in  the  South  Australian  Museum,  is  clearly  dis- 
tinguished from  its  congeners  by  colour,  besides  the  sharply  angulate  prothorax 
and  subcylindric  elytra. 

LePTOGASTRUS    OrCTDKNTALIS,  n.sp. 

Elongate,  sub-pedunculate,  head  and  pronotum  dark,  elytra  violet  bronze, 
snteiuiae,  palpi,  tibiae  and  tarsi  red,  upper  surface  moderately  clothed  with  long 
upright  hair.  Head  finely  and  evenly  punctate,  part  between  forehead  and  epis- 
loma  depressed,  antennal  ridge  prominent ;  antennae  long,  the  joints  obconic  and 
gradually  widening  outwards,  apical  joint  less  enlarged  than  usual.  Prothorax 
subcordate,  subtnnii  ate  at  apex  and  base,  sides  arcuately  widening  from  the  base, 
the  gi'eatest  width  in  front  of  middle,  all  angles  obtuse,  the  posterior  widely  so, 
surface  finely  punctate,  with  some  larger  setiferous  punctures  irregularly  placed, 
the  medial   sulcus   distinct  and   terminated    behind  in   a   wide  depression.     F.hitra 


240  NOTES   ox    SOMK   Al'STlJAI.I AX    TEXEBRIOXIDAE, 

subcyliuilric,  about  as  wide  as  in-otlioiax  and  more  than  twice  as  long,  shoulders 
rounded,  sides  parallel  for  the  greater  j)art ;  striate-suleate,  the  intervals  sharply 
laised  and  suberenulate,  the  punetures  in  sulci  large  and  apparently  only  i^artly 
separated  by  cancellate  ridge;  the  3rd,  5th,  and  7th  intervals  containing  seta';: 
underside  with  sparsely  scattered  setiferous  punctures,  these  more  close  on  the  last 
abdominal  segment,  each  bearing  longish  white  hairs.  Posterior  tarsi  with  first 
joint  sliorter  than  claw-joint.     Dimr)it<ioii!< :  c?.  5i  x  limm.  5.  7  X  l]  ram. 

Hub. — Parkerville.  AA'estern  Australia.     (.T.  Clark.) 

Three  specimens  (2  c?,  1  2)  sent  by  Mr.  Lea  from  the  South  Australian 
Museum,  ai"e  the  only  ones  of  the  genus  yet  recorded  from  Western  Australia. 
It  is  nearest,  though  not  very  near,  to  L.  masters!  Macl.,  haraig  much  more  finely 
uunctured  jirothorax.  subcancellate  elytra,  and  f|uite  different  antennae. 

T  y  p  e  s    in  the  South  Australian  Museum. 

Daedrosis  axtexxalis,  n.s[>. 

Subcylindric.  dark  bronze,  nitid :  undei'side  and  let;-s  nitid  black,  palpi  and 
tarsi  red;  antennae  opaque  brown  (basal  joints  bronze).  Head  sparsely  and 
coarsely  inmctate,  epistomal  suture  straight ;  forehead  rather  flat,  antennae  monili- 
form,  3rd  joint  slightly  longer  than  4th,  7th-10th  very  gradually  increasing  in  .size, 
llth  ovate-acuminate,  as  long  as  the  preceding  three  joints  combined.  Prothorax 
iecbly  emarginate  in  front,  convex  in  the  middle,  anterior  angles  bluntly  obtuse; 
slightly  wider  at  apex  than  at  base,  sides  lightly  rounded,  a  little  irregular  in  out- 
line (suberenate),  posterior  angles  obtuse;  disc  evenly,  finely  and  closely  punctate, 
without  any  sign  of  medial  line,  an  elongate  fovea  on  basal  margin  near  each  hind 
angle.  Scutellum  very  small.  Eli/tm  wider  than  ]irothorax  at  base  and  more 
than  twice  as  lonj.',  humeri  produced  as  usual,  sides  very  lightly  widened  l;ehind 
middle;  striate-punctate,  the  striae  deep,  the  punctures  therein  smaller  and  less 
evident  than  in  crenato-striata  Bates,  the  intervals  flatter  and  more  nitid — the 
3rd  and  5th  slightly  wider  than  the  rest,  but  all  sharjily  convex  at  ajiex.  Pros- 
ternum  sparsely,  its  epimera  and  the  elytral  epiiileurae  coarsely  punctate;  ab- 
diimen  smooth;  iiost  tarsi  witli  1st  joint  slinrter  than  claw  joint.  Dimfiisioits: 
8—10  X  3—33  mm. 

Hab. — Mount  Irvine  (Blue  Mountains),  Xew  South  Wales.     (11.    .] .    Ci-rter.) 

Five  exami>les.  of  which  one  has  been  sent  to  the  British  Museum,  belong 
to  a  species  I  have  long  had  in  my  cabinet  as  D.  mariticola  Blackb.  The  true 
monticola,  howeve;,  turns  out  to  be  a  Liclnoma,  and  is  the  species  I  described  as 
L.  pwicto-latera.  wliich  nuist  now  be  known  as  L.  moiilirola  Blackb..  leaving  my 
species  without  a  name  tUl  now.  D.  aiiterinalif:  is  clearly  separated  from  I), 
crenato-striata  Bates  (^  amhigua  Bates)  by  the  following  differences:  (1)  apical 
joint  of  antennae  very  large  (in  Bate.s's  species  this  joint  is  about  as  long  as  the 
twn  preceding)  ;  (2)  Prothorax  mucli  more  finely  pun<-tate,  the  sides  more  i-ouiided 
iind  sub-entire,  its  hind  angles  obtuse;  (3)  Elytral  intervals  flatter  and  sniootlier. 
1  have  not  been  able  to  find  any  external  sexual  characters. 

T  y  |i  !■  s    ill  Cell.   Carter. 

LicixojrA  AKiiKA,  n.sp.     (Text-fig  8). 

Elfinaate-oblong,  brilliant  l)rassy  bionze  above;  antennae,  leg-:  and  underside 
castaneous.  IJeail  with  dee|)  wedge-sbape<l  depression  behind  epistoma.  th"  latter 
wide  and  convex:  finely  and  evenly  punetate.  antennae  with  3rd  joint  as  long  as 
4th-5th    combined,    5th-10th    sub-cupuliform,    successively     and    rather    strongly 


BY    ir.   J.   CARTER.  241 

widened,  lltli  ovate,  considerably  larger  than  lOtli.  Prothnrax  feelily  emarglnate 
at  apex,  anterior  angles  rounded,  sides  widely  and  evenly  rounded,  posterior  angles 
obtuse,  base  sub-truueate,  lateral  border  very  narrow,  the  sub-vertical  area  between 
disc  and  margin  showing  a  rugose  punctate  surface:  disc  very  nitid,  covered  with 
fine,  shallow,  sub-punctate  impressions  with  a  few,  irregular,  larger,  shallow  im- 
pressions (in  general  one  on  each  side  of  middle),  medial  line  sometimes  feebly 
indicated  near  base  (in  one  example  fine  and  distinct).  Scutellum  small,  round 
and  nitid.  Eli/tra  rather  wide  and  flat,  clearly  wider  at  base  than  prothorax, 
shoulders  rather  squarely  rounded,  sides  slightly  widening  behind  middle,  disc 
sulcate-punctate,  the  punctures  chiefly  hidden  in  the  deep  narrow  sulci,  but  (iii 
good  light)  seen  to  be  close  and  regular:  inter\als  very  nitid.  rather  flat  and 
wide  on  centre,  becoming  convex  and  narrow  at  sides  and  apex,  the  3rd  and  5th 
wider  than  their  neighbours;  underside  very  nitid  and  glabrous,  epipleurae  fiuely 
punctate:  protibiae  lightly  curved,  post -tarsi  with  1st  joint  longer  than  elaw- 
.loint.     Dimensions:  8 — 11 J   X  3i — 4^  mm. 

Hab. — Dorrigo,  New  South  Wales.     (W.  Heron). 

Five  exampl-is    (2  <?) .     L.   viohicea  Macl,  is  clearly  distinct  l)y  its  subaiigular 
sides  of  prothorax  and  unifoiin  elytral  intervals. 

Types    in  Coll.  Carter. 

Var.  eomboynerhiis  Cart. — with  sides  of  prothorax  less  widened  and  the  pos- 
terior angles  blunted. 

Three  examples    in  Mr.    Lea's  collection  may  possibly    deserve  specific  rank 
Two  of  these  are  labelled  "(Comboyne,  N.R.W.     H.  Muldoon),"  the  third,  N.S.W. 
These  three   are   of   the  same  colour  as    aereo    and   augusticollis  Cart,    and  inter- 
mediate in  form  between  them;  but  angusticnllis  has  a  quite  sraootli    (inqiutictatei 
pronotum  and  the  elytra  sulcate,  without  seriate  punctures. 

LiciNOMA  APASioiDES,  n . sp .      ( Text-fig.  9.) 

Elongate-ovate,  nitid  black,  glabrous,  antennae  reddish  b"iiwn,  tarsi  red. 
Head  with  deep,  irregular  impression  on  forehead,  suture  arcuate;  strongly  punc- 
tate within  the  impression,  eyes  large,  antennal  joints  oval,  3rd  half  as  long  again 
as  4th,  11th  ovate-acuminate  longer  than  10th.  Prothorax  truncate  at  apex  and 
base,  narrowest  at  the  latter,  anterior  angles  rounded,  sides  rather  widely  rounded, 
widest  before  middle,  thence  more  sharply  narrowed  to  the  defined  obtuse  posterior 
angles,  lateral  margin  narrow;  l)ase  with  a  ]iseudo-margin  defined  by  a, 
sulcus  interrupted  at  middle;  disc  minutely  and  lightly  punctate;  medial 
line  indicated  in  front  and  behind  Ijy  a  faint  depression,  an  elongate 
fovea  near  lateral  margin  and  (in  two  examples)  four  discal  foveae,  symmetrically 
placed.  Scutellum  triangular.  Elytra  clearly  wider  than  prothorax  at  base, 
cvate,  shoulders  rather  widely  rounded;  punctate-sulcate,  the  sulci  deep,  the  punc- 
tures therein  close  and  rather  coarse,  those  near  suture  erenulating  interior  side 
of  sulci ;  intervals  strongly  convex  at  sides  and  apex,  somewhat  flattened  on  disc, 
and  impunctate;  underside  smooth,  apical  segment  (only)  finely  punctate;  tibiae 
straight.     Dimensions :  12^  X  4i  mm. 

Haft.— Forrest,  Victoria.     (Mr.  H.  W.  Davey.) 

Four  examples  (T  think  males  from  their  wide  anterior  tarsi)  sent  me  some 
yeai-s  ago,  were  put  aside  as  L.  nitida  Pasc.  The  recent  identification  of  these 
shows  this  to  be  a  distinct  species,  nearest,  but  not  very  close,  to  L.  monticola 
Blackb.,  but  differing  in  its  larger  size,  more  rounded  prothorax,  with  more  sharply 
defined  hind  angles,    clearly    punctate    elytval    sulci,   etc.     Tt    forms    a  link    witli 


242 


NOTES  ON    SOME  AUSTRALIAN  TENEBRIONIDAE, 


Text-fig.8.     Licinonia  aerea.       Text-fig.9.     L.  apasioides.      Text-fii^.lO.     L.  iiieridiana. 


Apasis,  and  there  are  few  characters  which  separate  these  genera,  beyond  the  more 
developed  humeri  and  the  square  posterior  inter-coxal  process  of  Apa.yif. 
Type  in  Coll.  Carter. 


LiCINOMA    MKRIIJIANA,    n  .  Sp  .        (Text-fig.    10.  I 

Elongate-ovate,  nitid  black;  antennae,  tibiae  and  tarsi  red.  Head  with  reel 
angular  frontal  depression,  coarsely  punctate ;  antennae  sub-moniliform,  3rd  joint 
lialf  as  long  again  as  4th,  apical  three  joints  successively  enlarged,  11th  elongate- 
ovate,  twice  as  long  as  10th.  Prothorax  sub-rhomboidal,  narrow,  longer  than 
wide,  apex  nearly  straight,  with  the  anterior  angles  very  slightly  protruding  and 
sub-acute,  sides  feebly  arcuate  and  narrowing  to  base,  posterior  angles  obtuse, 
base  truncate,  disc  rather  strongly  and  regularly  punctate;  medial  sulcus  sharply 
defined  throughout,  with  a  i'ovea  on  each  side  of  sulcus  near  middle  (in  one  ex- 
ample), the  narrow  raised  border  separated  from  disc  by  a  fine  sulcus  cont.aining 
a  row  of  punctures  Scutelhim  small.  FAiitra  wider  tlian  prothorax  at  base,  and 
about  twice  as  long ;  subeylindric,  shoulders  rounded;  punctate-striate,  tiio  intervals 
flat,  impunetate  on  disc,  eonvex  at  sides  and  apex,  of  even  width,  the  3rd  with  a 
seta  near  apical  declivity,  and  one  on  the  .5th  about  half-way,  abdomen  nitid, 
bind  tarsi  with  1st  joint  shorter  than  claw-joint.     Dimensions:  8  X  2i  mm. 

H«/). -Aft.  Lofty  Hangcs,  South  Australia  ( Mr.  K .   .T.   Rnrti.n.  A.  IT.  El.ston; 
South  Australian   and    British    ^tuseums.) 

Many  specimens  examined,  in  which  T  cannot  see  any  sexual  distinction.     The 
nearly    straight    sides    of  prothorax.   the   feebly   i>rominent    anterior    angles,    the 


BY    11.    J.    C'ARTKR.  243 

definitely    ohannelleil    pninotum,  distinguish    this  species    from  all    its  congeners. 
The  South  Australian  Museum  examples  were  erroneously  labelled  L.  xitida. 

Var.  with  femora  red  (in  Coll.  Elston). 

Type   in  Coll.  Carter. 

LiCINOMA    TRUNCATA,     H.Sp. 

SubcylLndric,  dark  bronze,  nitid;  iinderside  and  legs  castaneous,  tarsi  pale 
red,  antennae  opaque  Reddish  brown.  Head  and  pronotum  rather  closely  but 
unevenly  pitted  with  coarse  punctures;  epistomal  suture  straight  and  deeply  im- 
pressed; antennae  moniliform,  3rd  joint  a  little  longer  than  4th,  last  joint  much 
larger  than  10th.  Protliorax  rather  convex  in  the  middle,  in  front;  apes  and 
base  truncate  (as  seen  from  above),  slightly  longer  than  wide,  clearly  wider  at 
apex  than  at  base;  sides  moderately  arched,  with  greatest  width  before  the 
middle;  margins  irregular  in  outline  (scarcely  crenate),  posterior  angles  obtuse 
and  blunt,  medial  line  rather  widely  but  interruptedly  impressed;  some  irregular 
foveate  impressions  on  each  side.  Scutellum  very  small.  Elytra  convex,  of  about 
the  same  width  as  the  prothorax,  humeri  not  produced  (as  seen  from  above) ; 
crenate-sulcate,  the  punctures  in  sulci  close  and  forming  crenulations  at  the  sides  of 
intervals;  these  slightly  flattened  on  centre  and  finely  punctured,  the  3rd  and  5th 
showing  setae  (four  on  the  3rd  and  one  on  5th).  Prosternum  and  epipleurae 
coarsely  punctate,  the  last  segment  of  abdomen  finely  punctate,  the  rest  smooth; 
post  tarsi  with  first  joint  shorter  than  the  claw  joint:  hind  intercoxal  process 
narrow  and  subtruncate.     Dimeusions :  10  x  4  min. 

Hab. — Victoria   (Blackburn  Coll.  and  DuBoulay). 

Two  specimens  are  in  the  South  Australian  Museum,  of  which  one — wanting 
the  abdomen — bears  Blackburn's  No.  4473  and  the  name  "ambigua  Bates"  in  his 
handwriting  (besides  Victoria) — a  manifestly  incorrect  identification.  The  other, 
the  type,  is  labelled  ''Victoria  Du  Boulay  Aug.  /89".  This  pu/!zling  specie.s  is 
very  like  Daedrofilfi.  hut  is  without  the  toothed  humeri;  the  prothorrx  has  the  sides 
entire,  and  rounded. 

Type    in   South  Australian  Museum. 

Table  of  Licinoiiia. 

1 — 28  Elytra  seriate  punctate. 

2 — 23  Elytra!  inter\-als  of  uniform  width. 

3—11  Elytral  intervals  fiat. 

4 — S  Elytral  intervals  clearly  punctate. 

5  Prothorax  transverse,  sides  well  rounded  ....  iiitida  Pasc.  ;   r»/V/o;-/«cBlackb. 

6 — 8  Prothorax  as  long  as  wide,  sides  nearly  straight. 

7  Elytral  intervals  nodulose ;/oo'«fo.?(7  Champ. 

S  Elytral  intervals  not  nodulose tnsniauica  Champ. 

9 — 11  Elytral  intervals  impunctate* 

10  Legs  dark iiitidissinia  'L&a.. 

11  Legs  testaceous pa/lipes  Blackh. 

12 — 23  Elytral  inter\-als  convex. 

13 — 22  Prothorax  transverse. 

14 — 18  Prothorax  widest  at  middle. 

15  Prothorax  sub-circular,  highly  polished   (sublaevigatei    ..    ..    cyclocoUis  Cart. 

16 — IS  Hind  angles  of  prothorax  clearly  defined,  disc  clearly  punctate. 

17  Elytral   intervals  narrow   and  punctate    ..    ..     elafa   Pasc:      violaiea    Macl. 

IS  Elytral  intervals  wide  and  striolate  only n-i/esi  Cart. 

19 — 21  Prothorax  widest  before  middle,  not  channelled  in  middle. 


244  XOTES  ox    SOME  AUSTRAIJAX  TEXEBRIOXIDAE^ 

20  Hind  angles  rounded uiontiiola  Blackli.  ;  f>U}ir/a-lahia  Cart. 

21  Hind  angles  defined iifiasiohfes,  n.ip. 

22  Prothorax  widest  before  middle,  channelled  in  middle ituncaia,  n.sp. 

23  Prothorax  longer  than  wide,  clearly  channelled uicyidiana,  n.sp. 

24 — 29  Elytral  intervals  not  of  uniform  width. t 

2.5- -27  Elytral  intervals  fiat. 

26  Elytral   intervals  impunctate   and   non-seto.se sylvicohi   Blackb 

27  Elytral   intervals   punctate    (3rd   and   5th   setosel    •  amiiiioda  Pasc. 

28  Elytral  intervals  convex   (sulci  feebly  punctate) at'iea,  n.sp. 

29  Elytra  sukate a7tj:iistiaillis  QvX- 

"Impunctate  does  not  refer  to  the  presence  of  occasional  setae  found  in  pa/lipes 

and  others. 

f  The  3rd  and  5th  intervals  sometimes  considerably  wider  than  the  rest;  only 
distinct  and  constant  examples  so  included. 

BryCOPIA  (30MATA,    11. sp. 

Oval,  black  nitid,  strongly  pilose,  antennae  and  tarsi  red.  Head  and  pro- 
notum  densely  rugose,  punctate  and  clothed  with  long  upright  hairs;  eyes  large  and 
prominent,  antennae  unusually  long  and  slender,  3rd  .ioint  cylindrie,  nearly  as 
long  as  4tb-5tli  combined,  4th-10th  oval,  8tli-10th  increasing  in  size,  11th  elongate- 
oval,  twice  a.s  long  as  10th.  Prothorax  truncate  at  base  and  apex,  sides  crenulate, 
angulately  widened  and  widest  at  middle,  thence  obliquely  narrowed  each  way, 
base  and  apex  of  about  same  width,  all  angles  oljtuse  (anterior  wider  than  pos- 
terior), disc  without  medial  line  or  basal  foveae.  Scutelhini  triangular.  Eli/trit 
wider  than  prothorax  at  base,  and  two  and  a-half  times  as  long;  punctate-striate, 
the  striae  wide,  the  punctures  therein  coarse,  crenulating  the  sides  of  interstices; 
these  convex,  cross-wrinkled,  each  bearing  a  row  of  setae;  underside  strongly 
punctate.     Leg-s  hairy  like  the  body.     Dimensions:  G  X  3  (vix)   mm. 

Hah. — Murray  River,  South  Australia  (A.  H.  Elston). 

A  single  specimen,  sex  uncertain,  was  generously  given  me  by  Mr.  Elston, 
and  shows  a  species  distinct  from  all  others  by  the  combination  of  black  colour, 
verv  hairy  surface  and  legs,  and  subaiigulate-sidcd  thorax . 

Type  in  Coll.  Carter. 

Brycopia  globicollis,  n.sp.      (Text-fig.   11). 

Ovate,  brownish  bronze,  antennae  and  leg-s  i-ed,  tarsi  and  palpi  testaceous, 
whole  upper  surface  rather  thinly  clothed  with  jjale  upright  haii-s.  Head  with 
a  few  scattered  punctures,  epistomal  suture  straight,  deep  and  shortly  imidiKH  d 
backwards  at  its  extremities;  antennae  stout,  nionoliforni,  joints  -,  3  and  4  sub- 
equal,  thence  gradually  widening;  11th  wider  than  and  twice  as  long  as  10th, 
cvate.  Prnthornx  very  ccmvex,  subcircular,  truncate  at  apex  and  base,  sides  entire, 
widely  and  evenly  rounded,  widest  at  middle ;  anterior  angles  widely  rounded,  pos- 
terior widely  obtuse;  disc  coarsely  and  unevenly  punctured,  with  a  few  smooth 
rugosities;  without  foveae  or  medial  line.  Sciitellum  very  small  and  round. 
Elytra  ovate,  two  and  a-half  times  longer  than  iirothorax  and  at  the  shoulders 
slightly  wider  than  it;  humeri  obliquely  rounded;  striate-punctate,  the  inlervals 
flatfish,  but  more  convex  at  sides  and  apex.  3rd  and  ijth  intervals  wider  than  the 
rest,  intervals  unequally  setose,  the  sutural  interval  smooth.  2nd  with  about  two 
setae,  3rd  and  .'5th  with  6-8  setae,  4tli  nearly  smooth ;  sides  of  prosternum  ami  epi- 
pleurae  spar.sely  mid  coarsely  punctate,  abdomen  smooth.  Dimeiisioiix:  6*  X 
21  mm. 

Tlah. — r>aunccstoii.  Tnsinaiiiii    (X.    if.   Lea). 


BY    H.    J.    CARTER. 


245 


Five  specimens  on  a  card  sent  by  Mr.  Lea  show  a  species  near  B.  pHosella 
Pase.  and  B.  creiiaticollis  Cai-t.,  but  clearly  separated  from  both  by  the  almost 
circular  prothorax.  the  sides  of  which  are  nowhere  crenated;  the  antennae  are  also 
more  robust  than  in  either  of  these.  The  prothorax  of  globicollis  in  the  middle  is 
nearly  as  wide  as  the  elytra,  whereas  in  the  two  species  mentioned  the  prothorax 
is  decidedly  narrower  than  the  elytra.  The  elytra!  intervals  are  less  strongly 
punctured  than  in  B.  pilnsella  and  are  without  the  transverse  wrinkles  shown  in 
Pascoe's  species,  which,  moreover,  has  its  intervals  of  equal  width. 

Types    in    South  Australian  Museum. 

Brycopia  hKAi,  n.sp.      (Text-fig.  12). 

Shortly  ovate,  rather  tlat,  dark  bronze,  nitid,  almost  glabrous,  antennae,  palpi 
and  legs  pale  red,  tarsi  testaceous.  Head  and  pronotum  thickly  and  strtjugly 
punctate,  antennae  with  joints  4-8  shortly  obconic,  9  and  10  sub-trianguler,  11 
ovoid.  Prothorax  sub-cordate,  apex  nearly  straight  (from  above),  base  feebly 
bisinuate,  anterior  angles  obtuse,  sides  arcuately  widening  to  half-way,  tlience 
angulately  narrowing  in  a  concave  curve  to  the  acutely  produced  posterior  angles ; 
disc  with  medial  line  partly  indicated  by  a  short  smooth  space,  a  large  shallow 
fovea  on  each  side   of  this,   a   triangular  impression   near  hind  angle    and    a    fe-v 


It 

15 

Text-fig.ll. 

Brycopia 

iilobiiollis. 

Text-fiK-l-'!. 

B.  hexagona 

Text-fig.  12. 

B.  leai. 

Text-fig.  14. 

B.  ohtnsa. 

larger  punctures  niterspersed  amongst  the  others.  Scutellum  triangular  and  small. 
Elytra  considerably  wider  than  prothorax  at  l)a.se,  and  about  twice  as  long,  shoul- 
ders rounded,  sides  sub-jiarallel  for  the  greater  part ;  punctate  striate,  seriate 
punctures  large,  round  and  regular,  not  at  all  hidden  in  the  fine  striae,  intervals 
quite  flat  and  dotted  with  distinct  but  smaller  punctures  than  those  in  striae,  the 
.3rd  and  5th  each  with  about  5  large  setae,  a  few  fine  pale  hairs  discernible;  Banks 
of  meso-  and  meta- sternum  with  sparse  punctures,  last  segment  of  abdomen  closely 
punctured,  rest  of  underside  smooth  or  nearly  so.  Dimensions:  7X3  mm. 
Hab. — Launceston,   Tasmania. 


246  NOTES  ON    SOME  AUSTRALIAN  TENEBRIONIDAE, 

I  took  a  single  specimen  in  January,  1918,-  and  from  its  close  likeness  in  form 
— especially  of  prothorax — to  Dinoria  picta  Pasc,  I  thought  it  was  Dinoria 
toelioides  Pasc.     It  is  perhaps  nearest  to  B.  femorata  Cart,  in  sculpture. 

Type    (unique)  in  Coll.   Carter. 

Brtcopia  hexagona,  n.sp.      (Text-fig.  13). 

In  form  and  colour  near  the  former  (leai),  but  clearly  differentiated  from  it  as 
follows: — Head  and  pronotum  much  less  strongly  punctured;  antennae  coarser 
and  monilifoi-m,  joints  6-10  almost  round.  Prothorax  with  sides  less  rounded  in 
front,  the  lateral  angulation  more  strongly  emphasized,  posterior  angles  rectangular 
and  less  prominent,  disc  without  the  central  foveae.  Elytra  with  much  larger 
seriate  punctures,  coarser  and  deeper  striae — the  intervals  thus  appearing  from  a 
side  view,  sub-convex — intervals  almost  smooth,  except  for  the  few  setiferous 
punctures  on  the  3rd  and  5th  intervals.  Underside  smooth,  except  for  the  minute 
punctures  of  the  apical  segment  of  abdomen,  and  a  row  of  large  punctures  on 
front  part   of   epipleurae.     Dimensions :  7J    ^    3  mm. 

//of). — Near  summit  of  Mount  Wellington,  Hobart  (A.  M.  Lea). 

A  specimen  was  given  to  me  by  Mr.  Lea  some  time  ago  a-s  Dinoria  sp.,  from 
a  short  series  in  his  collection. 

Type   in  Coll.  Carter. 

Brtcopia  obtusa,  n.sp.     (Text-flg.  14). 

Widely  oval,  dark  bronze,  glabrous;  antennae  piceous,  tarsi  reddish.  Head 
wide,  coarsely  punctate,  clypeal  suture  deeply  impressed,  eyes  large  and  prominent, 
antennae  moniliform,  not  extending  to  base  of  prothorax,  joint  3  little  longer 
than  4,  8th-llth  enlarging  gradually,  11th  sub-spherical.  Prothorax,  Ijase  and 
apex  truncate,  of  nearly  equal  widtli,  sides  widely  rounded,  widest  at  middle, 
thence  rather  straightly  narrowed  to  base;  all  angles  widely  obtuse,  sides  without 
obvious  foliation,  narrowly  margined  throughout,  disc  irregularly  and  rather  finely 
punctate;  medial  line  indicated  at  base  only  by  a  very  short  sulcus;  two  trans- 
verse foveate  impressions,  one  on  each  side  behind  the  middle.  Sottelhim  small 
and  bead-like.  Ehjtra  wider  than  prothorax  at  base,  widely  oval,  humeri  rounded, 
punctate-sulcate,  seriate  punctures  large,  set  in  deep,  well-marked  sulci;  intervals 
a  little  convex — strongly  so  at  sides  and  apex,  1st  (sutural)  narrow,  rest  of  uni- 
form width  and  impunctate.  Sternum  finely,  epipleurae  coarsely  punctate,  ab- 
domen smooth;  posterior  tarsi  with  1st  joint  longer  than  daw-joint.  Dimevsions: 
7  X  3i  mm. 

Hab. — Lizard  Island,  Queensland. 

A  specimen,  sex  uncertain,  amongst  some  Adeliinae  sent  from  the  I'ritish 
Museum,  shows  a  species  near  B.  cheesmani  in  its  wide  form,  but  differs  widely 
in  sculpture  and  shape  of  prothorax,  especially  in  its  sub-convex,  smooth  inter- 
stices of  elytra.  The  pronotum  is  punctured  somewhat  as  in  Adelium  calnso- 
moiden  Kirby. 

Type     in  British  JIuscuin. 

Table  of  Rrycofyia. 

1 — 9    Sides  of  prothorax  crenulate. 

2 — 6     Upper  surface  pilose  (not  including  occasional  setae) . 

3 — 5    Colour  bronze. 

4  Sides' of  prothorax  rounded   (not  sinuate  behind) pilosella  Pasc. 

h  Sides  of  prothorax  sinuate  behind  (pilose  dothing  sparse) tninnta  Lea. 

6  Colour  black,  sides  of  prothorax  angidately  widened coiiiata,  n.sp. 


BY    H.    J.    CARTER.  247 

7 — 9  Upper  surface  glabrous. 

8  Elytra  with  pale  border — form  fiat (Dinoria) picta   Pasc. 

9  Elytra    concolorous — form   very   convex.    . .' cretiaiicollis  Cart. 

10 — 39  Sides  of  prothorax  entire. 

11  Upper  surface  pilose globicollis,  n.sp. 

12 — 39  Upper  surf.ice  glabrous. 

13  Elytral  intervals  tuberculose tuhercnlifera  Champ. 

14—30  Elytral  intervals  flat. 

15 — 23  Sides  of  prothorax  sinuate  behind. 

16  3rd  and  5th  elytral  intervals  widerthan  rest taylori  Cart. 

17 — 23  Elytral  intervals  of  uniform  width. 

18  Pronotum  finely  punctate dubia  Macl. 

19 — 23  Pronotum.  coarsely  punctate. 

20 — 22  Each  elytral  interval  with  a  single  line  of  punctures. 

21  Form  convex,  seriate  punctures  small aiinulata  Cart. 

22  Form  depressed,  seriate  punctures  large hexcigona,  n.sp. 

23  Elytral  intervals  thickly  punctate /^a?,  n.sp. 

24 — 30  Sides  of  prothorax  rounded  (not  sinuate  behind). 

25  Form  wide,  pronotum  coarsely  punctate.   .      c/ieesmam'  Cart 

26—30  Forixi  narrower,  pronotum  finely  punctate 

27  Form  depressed,  each  elytron  with  4  to  6  foveate  impressions  feiiiorata  Cart. 

28 — 30  Form  convex,  elytra  not  as  in  27. 

29  Size  larger,  sides  of  prothorax  nearly  straight  behind.  (Dinoria)  coelioides  P^sc. 

30  Size  small,  sides  of  prothorax  evenly  rounded minor  Cart. 

31 — 39  Elytral  intervals  convex. 

32 — 34  3rd  and  5th  intervals  wider  than  rest. 

33  Form  depressed,  elytral  inter\'als  coarsely  punctate  .  .    . .    punciaiissima  Cart. 

34  Form  convex,  elytral  inter^-als  finely  punctate globiilosa  Cart. 

35 — 39  Elytral  inteir\-als  of  uniform  width. 

36 — 38  Elytral  intervals  smooth. 

37  Sides  of  prothorax  sinuate  behind ..    ..   monilicornis  Macl. 

3ft  Sides  of  prothorax  not  sinuate  behind obtusa,  n.sp. 

39  Elytral  intervals  punctate longipes   Macl. 

Adelium  politum,  n.sp. 

Oval,  black,  nitid,  glabrous;  antennae  and  palpi  fuscous,  tarsi  red.  lleuit 
vide  and,  like  the  pronotum,  mirror  smooth,  with  a  straight,  deep,  post-epi^fomal 
iurrow,  eyes  very  transverse,  antennae  with  joint  3  little  longer  than  4;  4th-8lh 
moniliform,  7th-llth  successively  widened,  9th-10th  widely  triangular,  11th  larger 
than  10th,  bluntly  oval.  Prothorax  transverse,  moderately  convex,  sub-truncate  a" 
apex  and  base,  anterior  angles  rounded,  sides  evenly  and  rather  widely  rounded, 
posterior  angles  obtuse,  sides  not  foliate,'  narrowly  margined  throughout ;  an 
elongate  fovea  near  hind  angle,  another  near  lateral  margin,  otherwise  without 
medial  line  or  puncture.  Scutellum  widely  triangular.  Elytra  wider  than  prothorax  at 
base  and  nearly  three  times  as  long,  oval,  striate-punctate,  the  .striae  deep  an  ! 
clearly  cut,  the  seriate  punctures  sub-obsolete — a  few  very  small  punctures  bareh- 
visible  in  one  or  two  striae  near  base;  intervals  smooth,  flat  on  disc,  convex  od 
sides  and  apex.  Tarsal  joints  short,  the  posteiior  tarsi  with  first  joint  about  as 
long  as  the  claw-joint.     Underside  .smooth.     Dimensions:  9   x  3J  mm. 

Hafj.— Mount  Victoria,  Ne^v  South  Wales  (H.   J.  Carter). 

I  took  this  specimen  in  January;  it  is  clearly  of  the  breviconie  regulare  typ'" 
differing  in  its  glassy  smooth  pronotum  and  its  scarcely  punctate  elytra. 

Type  in  Coll    Carter. 


248  NOTES   ON    SOME  AUSTKALIAX    TEXEBKIOXIDAI:: 

Seirotrana  itixoR,  n.sp. 

Ovate,  bronze,  apical  joints  of  antennae  opacjue  biuwu.  Head  ratlier  coarsely 
rugose  punctate,  depressed  on  each  side  within  the  epistoma;  antennal  joints  short, 
stout  and  sub-triaiij:ular,  3rd  about  11  times  longer  than  4th,  11th  ovate,  and  much 
larger  than  preceding.  Prothora.r  '_'  x  il  mm.,  transverse  and  rather  flat,  arcuate- 
emarginate  at  apex,  anterior  angles  acute,  widest  at  middle,  sides  well  rounded, 
sinuate  behind,  posterior  angles  rectangular,  not  dentate,  base  feebly  sinuate 
(slightly  advanced  in  middle)  apical  and  lateral  border  narrow,  the  latter  with 
slight  tendency  to  crenulation;  disc  densely  and  finely  rugose-punctate,  medial 
Ime  indicated  by  depression  near  base.  Scutellum  widely  oval  and  punctate. 
Elytra  considerably  wider  than  protliorax  at  base  and  nearly  thrice  as  longj  ovate 
and  moderately  convex;  striate-jiunctate,  the  striae  containing  row^  of  close  regular 
punctures;  intervals  microscopically  punctate,  the  3rd,  5th,  7th,  and  9th  with  shiny, 
raised,  elongate  citenulations,  the  other  intervals  on  apical  half  with  minute  round 
nodules;  sutural  intervals' flat;  epipleurae  and  flanks  of  presternum  coarsely  punc- 
tate, apical  segment  of  abdomen  finely  iiunctate.  otlier  segments  strigose.  dimen- 
sions: 9 — 10  X  4 — 41  mm. 

Ha!^.—Bunya  Mountains,  S.  Queensland;  \.\k.  A:  Tenterfleld,  N.S.W.  (11  X 
4i  mm.)   (H.  J.  Carter.) 

Three  specimens  taken  near  the  foot  of!  Mount  Mowbullan  (  F>uuya  ^lountainsl 
show  the  smallest  .species  of  the  genus,  structurally  nearest  to  .s'.  proiiina  Pa.sc.  and 
>S'.  i^icina  Cart.,  but  with  nuicli  finer  elytral  seriate  ]iunctures  and  more  elongate 
and  less  strongly  raised  nodules.  In  Var.  A.  the  lateral  crenulation  of  prothorax 
is  a  little  more,  and  tlie  hind  sinuation  a  little  less  nuirked  than  in  the  examples 
from  Bunya  Mts.,  but  it  is,  I  consider,  conspecific  with  fliem. 

Types   in  Coll.  Carter. 

EC'TYCHE   SEMI-BULLATA^   U.SJ). 

Oblong-oval,  subnitid  black,  legs  piceous,  antennae  and  tarsi  castaneous,  upper 
surface  thinly  clad  with  long  upright  black  hair.  Head  and  pronotum  finely  and 
densely  rugose-punctate,  epistomal  suture  arcuate,  antennae  submoniliform,  3rd 
joint  scarcely  longer  than  4th,  successively  increasing  in  size  from  the  6th  onv.-ards, 
9th  and  10th  sub-spherical,  11th  oval.  Prothorax  convex,  transverse,  subtruni  ate  at 
apex,  sides  widely  and  evenly  rounded,  anterior  angles  obsolete,  posterior  sharplv 
rectangular,  preceded  by  an  abrupt  sinuation  on  sides  and  followed  by  a  sub-ol)solete 
sinuation  at  base.  Eli/tra  oval,  humeri  S{iuarely  rounded,  at  shoulders  about  as  wide 
as  prothorax  at  widest ;  apex  bluntly  rounded ;  striate-punctate ;  the  round,  closely- 
packed  punctures  placed  in  fine  striae;  the  3rd,  5th,  and  7th  intervals  each  with 
about  6  large  tubercles  and  a  few  much  smaller  tul)ercles  on  tlie  sutui'al  interval. 
Epipleurae  coarsely  and  chisely,  iibdouu'ii  siiarsely  iiiuictnte,  glabnms.  Ihmeu- 
sions:   4.5 — 5   X  2  mm. 

JTob.— Geraldton,  Western  Australia  (W.  D.  Dodd). 

Two  specimens  sent  from  the  South  Australian  Museum  slinw  a  sijecies  easily 
differentiated  by  its  sculpture  from  its  allies.  The  oidy  ntlur  species  having 
tuberculate  elytra  is  E.  tuhereulipetniis  Bates,  in  which  small  tulicrcies  are  (venlv 
placed  on  all  the  intervals,  besides  many  other  differences.  1  have  s))ecnnens  if 
the  latter  taken  by  Mr.  H.  W.  Brown  at  Lake  Austin.  AV .  .\  .  I  have  not  l)ee;i 
able  to  make  out  any  sexual  distinction. 

T  v  II  e  s    in   the  South  Australian  Museum. 


BY    H.    J.    CARTER.  249 

Omolipus  punctato-sulcatus,  n.sp. 

Moderately  elongate,  sub-nitid.  Head,  pronotum,  underside  and  legs  black, 
elytra  dark  blue  (almost  black),  antennae  and  tarsi  reddish  brown.  Head 
jninutely  punctate  in  front,  smooth  on  vertex.  Prvnotum  moderately  convex,  apex 
produced  in  midde,  base  truncate,  sides  but  slightly  rounded  anteriorly  and  a 
little  sinuate  behind;  lateral  border  visible  from  above;  disc  smooth.  Elytra  elon- 
gate-ovate, shoulders  rather  sharply  rectangular  and  a  little  advanced ;  sides  Jeebly 
enlarged  behind  middle,  lateral  border  narrowly  horizontal;  punctate-sulcate  with 
8  well-marked  sulci  (besides  the  extreme  lateral  one),  and  without  the  usual  indi- 
cation of  a  short  scutellary  row  of  punctures;  the  intervals  convex,  punctures  in 
sulci  large,  regular,  crenulating  the  sides  of  intervals.  Underside  nearly  smooth, 
some  minute  punctures  on  sternum  and  apical  segments  of  abdomen. 

Dimensions :  7 — 9  X  3 — 4  mm . 

/fab.— Batchelor  and  Stapleton,  N.  Territory  (Mr.  G.   F.  Hill). 

Three  examples  (1  d',  2  2)  sent  by  Mr.  Hill  (of  the  Institute  of  Tropical 
Medicine,  Townsville)  show  a  species  near  coeruleus  Cart,  in  form  and  sculpture, 
but  in  colour  something  between  0.  (jnesioides  Pasc.  and  0.  cyaneipennis  Champ., 
the  elytra  being  of  a  blue-black  shade  sometimes  seen  in  gnesioides,  while  the 
pronotum  is  smoother  but  less  nitid  than  in  that  species.  In  most  other  species 
there  is  a  short  scutellary  row  of  punctures  (in  O.  gnesioides  about  2  or  3),  or  a 
short  sulcus  as  in  O.  coeruleus;  the  absence  of  this  in  punctato-sulcatus  is  a  di.i- 
tinctive  character. 

Types  in  Coll   Carter. 

Besides  the  synonymy  noted  above  the  following  should  be  recorded : — 

(i.)    Chalcopterus  smaragdulus  F.  ^^  C.  cairnsi  Blackb. 

(ii.)    C.  cupreus  F.  ^  C.  rusticus  Blackb. 

(iii.)    C.  setosus  Blackb.  =  C.  cupriventris  Cart,  (var.) 

(iv.)   Axgniton  championi  Blackb.  =  Catopherus  corpulentus  Cart. 

(v)   Sirrhas  liiiibcitu,'.  Champ.  =  Nof.ulea  limbata  Cart. 

Of  C.  cupreus  F.  (a  long-standing  mystery),  Mr.  Blair  writes  "is  brassy  be- 
coming pijrple  and  iinely  narrowly  bluish  behind,  the  latter"  [rusticus.]  "purple 
becoming  bluish  behind.     The  sculpture  seems  to  be  identical." 

Of  (iii.)  Mr.  Blair  writes,  "I  think — are  colour  forms  of  the  fame."  Appar- 
ently the  metallic  underside  is  not  constant. 

In  (iv.)  and  (v.)  the  genera  Catopherus  and  Notolea  must  be  sunk.  In  the 
former  case  I  failed  to  diagnose  Blackburn's  species;  in  the  latter  I  had  not  seer 
Mr.  Champion's  paper  dealing  with  this  very  unusual  Lagriid. 


250 


ON    THE    MALE   GENITALIA   OF    SOME    ROBBER-FLIES   BELONGING 
TO  THE  SUBFAMILY  ASILINAE.    [Diptera.] 

By   G.  H.  Hardy. 

(With  twelve  Text-flgures.) 

A  study  of  tliC  male  genital  forceps  of  Australian  Robberflies  belonging  to 
the  subgenus  Asilus  has  been  undertaken  for  the  purpose  of  establislung  a  satis- 
factory method  of  identifying  the  described  species.  A  further  species  with  extra- 
oidinarily  developed  male  genitalia  is  described  as  new. 

This  opportunity  is  taken  to  publish  a  figure  of  the  male  genitalia  of  Protna- 
chuti    doddi    Ricardo,  which  belongs    to  a    genus    containing  several  closely  allied 

species. 

Genus  P  I!  ()  M  A  c  H  r  s  Loew. 

Ql,g_ — This  geuus  is  very  scantily  represented  in  the  various  collections  in 
Australia,  and  the  specimens  available  for  study  do  not  readily  conform  to  the 
descriptions  already  published.  There  are  six  names  representing  sis  supposedly 
distinct  species  and  the  only  named  specimen  in  the  collections  under  revision  is 
P.  doddi  Ricardo,  which  was  identified  by  Miss  Ricardo. 


Text-tig. 1.    The  male  genitalia  of  Proiiiac/iKS  doddi  Ricanlo,  seen  dorsiiUy.   (x  14). 


BY    G.    H.    HARDY.  251 

Promachus  doddi  Ricardo.      (Text-fig.  1). 

Promachus  doddi,  Ricardo,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  (8),  xi.,  1913,  p.  41-'). 

Description. — A  male  specimen  identified  by  Miss  Ricardo  has  the  genitalia 
<mite  distinct  from  that  of  other  species  examined  in  the  collections  under  revision. 
]t  contains  a  pair  of  widely  separated  upper  forceps,  each  branch  of  which  is 
conspicuously  kidney-sbaped.  Seen  dorsally,  in  the  centre  there  are  two  flat, 
partly  overlapping  appendages  which  are  undoubtedly  the  lamellae.  Further 
parts  of  the  genital  organs,  usually  covered  bj'  the  forceps,  are  exposed  in  this 
species.  The  upper  forceps  apically  have  a  number  of  long  thick  bristles,  and 
there  are  three  short  bristles  on  the  inner  side,  directed  towards  the  median  line 
but  not  meeting.  The  whole  surface  is  covered  with  hairs  which  become  stronger 
apically  and  merge  into  bristles. 

Obs. — In  Mr.  F.  H.  Taylor's  collection  there  are  two  specimens  of  this 
species  and  one,  from  which  the  above  description  is  taken,  was  identifipd  by  Miss 
Ricardo.     Two  other  species  in   the  same  collection  are  unidentified. 

Genus   A  s  I  L  u  s   Linnaeus. 

Obs. — White  has  given  a  key  to  the  genera  of  the  subfamily  Asilinae*  and 
in  it  the  forceps  of  the  male  genitalia  of  the  genus  Asilus  are  stated  to  be  globular. 
This  character  is  typical  of  only  a  few  Australian  species  and  the  remainder  have 
male  genitalia  of  remarkal)ly  diverse  forms.  The  description  "large,  brightly 
coloured  species"  will  also  only  apply  to  a  few  as  a  number  are  sombre  coloured, 
and  they  range  in  size  down  to  species  no  bigger  than  some  belonging  to  the 
group  Neoitamus. 

The  material  upon  which  the .  following  study  is  based  consists  of  the  col- 
lections in  the  Australian  and  Macleay  Museums,  the  writers  collection  which 
contains  species  from  Western  Australia,  Tasmania  and  New  South 
AVales,  the  specimens  from  Queensland  collected  by  Mr.  F.  H.  Taylor,  and  tinally 
a  very  valuable  collection  made  by  Dr.  E.  W.  Ferguson  containing  species  that 
occur  around  Sydney  and  identified  by  comparison  with  specimens  in  the  British 
Museum. 

Asilii.t  ref/iuri  Jaennickc.  and  Asihis  aureus  White  have  not  been  recucnised 
in  the  above  collections. 

Characters. — The  genus  Asilus  contains  two  subgenera  in  Australia.  The 
subgenus  Neoaratus  is  represented  by  one  species,  iV.  hercules  Wiedemann,  and  is 
distinguished  by  the  male  having  the  costal  border  of  the  wings  inflated,  and,  in 
addition,  each  branch  of  the  upper  forceps  of  the  male  genitalia  is  bifid.  The 
subgenus  Asilus  contains  species  without  the  costal  inflation,  and  the  upper  for- 
ceps of  the  male  genitalia  are  of  various  shapes,  with  or  without  a  process,  but 
not  bifid  in  the  known  species. 

Key  to  the  species  of  subgenus  Asilus 

1 .  The  forceps  of  the  male  genitalia  set  v;ide  apart  and  exposing  other  parts  of  the 

"  .nital  organs 2. 

The    lorccps   of   the   male    genitalia   concealing '  the    other   parts    of    the    genital 
organs j . 

2.  The  branches  of   the   upper  forceps  containing   an   apical  process   on   which   is 

situated  a  branching  appendix genitalis,  n.sp. 

*  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.,  1917.  p.  88. 


2o2  OX   THE    MALE    ITEXITALIA  OF    SOJtE   ROBBER-FLIES. 

The    branches    of    the    upper   forceps   containing    an    apical    process    without    an 
appendix rubrithorax. 

3.  The  upper  forceps  atteruir-ted  apically 4. 

The  upper  forceps  not  attenuated  apically 6. 

4.  The  attenuated  portion  of  each  branch  of  the  vipper  forceps  distinctly  forms  a 

process /eriHginehentris. 

The  attenuated  portion  of  the  upper  forceps  forms  a  continuation  of  the  basal 

portion  and  does  not  form  a  process 5. 

0.   The  upper  forceps  constricted  subapically     pelago. 

The   upper  forceps   not   constricted   subapically   but   tapering   more   or   less  uni- 

foiTnly  to  the  apex malleolus,  inglorius  a.nArufiveiUiis. 

5.  The  upper  forceps  ending  in  a  minute  projection  and  each  branch  of  the  upper 

and  lower  forceps  containing  three       subapical  bristles  on  the  ventral  side. 

hlasio. 
The  upper  forceps  more  or  less  rounded  and  without  bristles. 

iiiuriinis,  sydiieyeiisis  and  alctias. 

AsiLUs  GEXiTALis,  n .  sp .      (Text-fig.  2.) 

Description. — 6.  The  head  is  covered  with  light  yellowish  tomontum;  the 
moustache  of  the  same  colour  contains  bristly  hairs  in  the  centre;  the  ))eard,  the 
bristles  and  hairs  of  the  occiput  are  also  the  same  colour;  there  are  a  few,  red- 
dish, short  hairs  on  the  tubercle  containing  the  ocelli.  The  palpi  are  deep  reddish- 
.vellow,  with  similai-ly  coloured  hairs  which,  apically,  are  bristle-like.  The  an- 
tennae are  missing  in  the  holotype  and  partly  damaged  in  one  paratvpe,  but  in 
the  second  paratvpe  they  are  reddish-yellow,  with  similarly  coloured  hairs  on  the 
two  basal  .joints .  The  proboscis  is  also  reddish-yellow  but  is  strongly  stained 
))lack  on  the  apical  half;  the  hairs  are  light  yellowish. 

The  thorax  has  a  mixed  yellowish  and  reddish-yellow  ground  colour,  and  con- 
tains two  black  median  stripes,  and  an  interrupted  lateral  stripe  on  each  side. 
Dorsally,  the  bristles  and  liairs  on  the  pronotum  aio  yellowish,  and  on  the  re- 
mainder of  the  thorax  black.  The  dorsal  thoracic  bristles  consist  of  two  pre- 
sutural  and  one  anterior  to  these,  three  superalar,  four  postalar  and  three  or  towv 
dorsocentral.  The  scutellum  is  similar  in  gi'ound  colour  to  that  of  the  thorax 
and  contains  four,  black,  marginal  bristles,  but  in  one  of  the  jiaratypes  there  are 
six  reddish  bristles  on  the  apical  margin.  Yentrally  the  thorax  is  whitish  with 
very  sparse  whitish  hairs.  Tlie  metapleural  bristles  are  strong  and  yellow,  and 
the  hy]>opleural  bristles  are  weak   and  whitish. 

The  abdomen,  dorsally.  is  reddish-yellow  with  similarly  coloured  jiubescence 
and  whitish,  bristly,  lateral  hairs.  Yentrally,  the  abdomen  is  unicoloured  Avith 
the  under  side  of  the  thorax. 

The  genital  organs  are  very  large  and  the  for<'eps  are  set  v.ule  apart  ex- 
])osing  other  parts  which  are  hidden  in  most  species  of  tlie  genus.  The  lower 
half  of  each  branch  of  the  upper  forceps  is  produced  apically  into  a  very  long 
jirocess  which  curves  upwards,  and,  near  the  base  of  this,  there  is  a  shoif  ajipendix 
Avhieh  branches  towards  the  median  line  and  is  directed  downwards.  Tlie  lower 
forceps  are  short,  and  the  apical  prong  can  be  seen  diverted  so  that  it  ])oints  to- 
wards the  base.  The  lamella  is  broad  and  short,  and  issues  from  a  two-pronged 
aiipendage,  the  apices  of  which  can  be  seen  l)etweeTi  the  process  and  the  basal  jKir- 
tion   of  the  upper   forceps. 

The  legs  have  their  coxae  whitish  with  yellow  liairs  and  livistlcs.  Tlie 
inihilli    arc    yellow     and    (lie    claws  are  reddish    hasally   ami    l)hick   .-iiiically;   the 


BT     G.    H.     HARDY. 


253 


Text-fig. 2.  The  male  genitalia  of  Asil us  genitalis,  n.sp.,  seen  laterally,   (.x  H). 
Text-fig.3.  The  male  genitalia  of  Asiliis  rubrithorax  Macquart,  seen  laterally,   (x  6). 
Text-fig. -1.  The  male  genitalia  of  Asiltisferrugineiventris  Macquart,  seen  laterally,  (x  14). 

remainder  of  the  legs  are  reddish  yellow  with  similarly  coloured  hristles.  The 
anterior  femora  are  without  spines;  the  intermediate  femora  have  two  rows  of 
pines  on  the  anterior  side,  one  ventral  row,  one  subajsical  and  two  median 
spines  on  the  posterior  side;  the  posterior  femora  have  two  rows  of  bristles  on 
the  anterior  side,  one  ventral  row  and  a  number  of  subapical  spines. 

The  wings  are  hyaline  with   a  slight  yellowish  tinge. 

The  female  is  unknown. 

Length,  .30  mm. 

Hah. — Queensland.  Two  specimens  are  without  labels;  the  specimen  in  the 
]\Iacleay  Museum  is  from  Cairns. 

Type. — The  holotype  male,  in  the  Australian  Museum,  was  presented  by  Mr. 
F.  H.  Taylor.  A  paratype  is  in  Mr.  Taylor's  collection  and  a  second  paratype 
is  in  the  Macleay  Museum. 

AsiLUS  liUBRiTiiOR.vx   Macquart.      (Text-fig  3.) 

Asilus  ruhrithorcu,  Macquart,  Dipt.  Exot.,  i.  (2),  1838,  p.  143;  Walker,  List  Dipt. 
Brit.  Mus.,  vii.,  suppl.  3.  185.5,  pp.  72!)  and  735;  Rieardo,  Ann.  Mag.  Naf:. 
Hist..  (8),  xi..  1913,  p.  441. 

Description. — Two  specimens,  identified  from  the  description  only,  arc  some- 
what similar  in  appearance  to  Asilus  murinus  Macquart,  larger  in  build  and  dis- 
tinctly different  in  the  male  genitalia. 

(?.  The  head  is  light  yellowish;  the  moustache  consists  of  some  black  hairs, 
below  which  there  are  much  longer  bristly  white  hairs.  The  hair  on  the  vortex 
and  a  little  of  the  hair  on  the  occiput  is  black ;  the  hair  on  the  remainder  of  the 
head,   including  the  beard,   is   light  yellowish  or   white.     The  antennae  are   black, 


254  ox  THE    JIALE    GENITALIA  OF   SOJIE  ROBBER-FLIES, 

containing  black  hairs  on  the  two  basal  segments.  The  palpi  are  blaok  with 
lilack  hairs  and  the  proboscis  is   black. 

The  thorax  has  a  pair  of  black  median  stripes  and  between  them  there  is  a 
slightly  obscure  yellowish  line ;  on  each  side  a  lateral  stripe,  interrupted  anteriorly, 
is  separated  from  the  median  stripe  by  a  bright  yellow  stripe;  the  lateral  border 
is  bright  yellow  merging  into  the  light  greyish  on  the  postalar  callus. 

The  thoracic  bristles  consist  of  a  row  of  three  presutural  with  one  anterior 
to  these,  three  or  four  superalar,  three  or  four  postalar  and  about  six  dorso- 
central.  The  scutellum  is  greyish,  with  about  four,  black,  marginal  bristles  and 
black  pubescence.  Ventrally  the  thorax  is  light  yellowish,  with  the  hairs  and 
bristles,  including  the  metapleural  and  hypopleural,  yellow  or  white. 

The  abdomen,  dorsally,  is  yellowish  brown  in  colour  and  obscurely  black 
along  the  median  line  forming  a  broad  obsolete  stripe.  The  pubescence  is  mostly 
black  but  yellowish  laterally,  with  yellowish  hairs  and  bristles. 

The  forceps  of  the  genitalia  are  black  and  large,  set  wide  apart,  and  expo-se 
the  other  parts  of  the  genital  organs;  each  branch  of  the  upper  forceps  contains 
a  process  issuing  from  the  upper  half  at  the  apex  and  curves  upwards ;  the 
whole  surface  is  covered  with  l)lack  pubescence  and  some  conspicuous  white  pub- 
escence; the  lower  forceps  are  black,  with  long  whitish  hairs  which  become  bristly 
at  the  apex;  the  black  lamella  is  conspicuous  and  broad. 

The  legs  have  their  coxae  unicoloured  with  the  under  side  of  the  thorax.  ;ind 
contain  long  whitish  hairs  and  bristles;  the  femora  are  red  with  a  black  stripe 
on  the  anterior  side;  the  tibiae  are  red  with  black  at  the  apices;  the  tarsi  are 
black;  the  claws  are  red  at  the  base  and  black  at  the  apes;  the  pulvilli  are  yel- 
low. The  pubescence  is  mostly  yellowish  on  the  femora  and  tibiae,  and  black  on 
the  tarsi.  There  are  some  long,  black,  bristly  hairs  on  the  anterior  femora  which 
are  spineless;  the  intermediate  femora  contain  two  rows  of  spines  on  the  anterior 
side,  one  ventral  row  and  one  row  on  the  posterior  side ;  the  posterior  femora  con- 
tain two  rows  of  spines  on  the  anterior  side  and  a  few  subapical  spines. 

Length  of  male,  30  mm. 

Hab. — New  South  Wales :  Hampton,  near  Rydal — one  male  specimen  col- 
lected by  Dr.  R.  J.  Tillyard  during  January,  1918.  There  is  also  a  male  speci- 
men in  the  Macleay  Museum,  with  the  genitalia  distorted,  from  Walcha;  the  label 
indicates  the  month  "November,"  but  the  year  of  ca^iture  is  not   specified. 

AsiLUS   FERRUGiXEiVENTRis  Macquart.        (Text-fig.    4.) 

Asilus  ferrugineiventris,  Macquart,  Dipt.  Exot.,  suppl.  4,  1850,  p.  O'J,  PI.  ix.  fig.  1. 
Asihis  hyagnis.  Walker,  Ins.  Saund.  Dipt.,  1851.  p.  139;  Walker,  List  Dipt.  Brit. 
Mus.,  vii.,  suppl.  3,  1855,  pp.  730  and  739;  Ricardo,  Aim.  ^fag.  Nat. 
Hist,    (8),  xi.,  1913,  p.  445. 

Sgnongmy. — The  description  of  A.  ferrugineiaextris  Macquart  conforms  to 
specimens  of  A.  hyagnis  Walker  in  all  essential  points. 

Stattis. — Although  the  synonymy  is  given  here  with  the  writer's  convictions, 
the  identity  of  the  species  with  A.  hyagnis  Walker  is  accepted  upon  the  evidence 
that  Mr.  Taylor  sent  to  Miss  Ricardo  some  specimens  from  a  long  series  col- 
lected in  Queensland  and  these  were  identified  as  A.  hyag)ii!i  Walker.  In  conse- 
quence, the  specimens  retained  were  labelled  as  such  and  were  subse(]uently  ex- 
amined by  the  writer.  The  retained  specimens  belong  to  only  one  species  and  a 
mah'  was  selected  for  inclusion  in   the   collection  of  the   Australian  ^Museum.      A 


BY    G.    H.     HARDY.  253 

second  specimen,  taken  near  Sydney,  was  found  to  agree  with  the  Queensland 
specimens  and  also  with  the  descriptions. 

Description. — A  straight  process  issues  from  the  apex  of  each  branch  of  the 
upper  forceps  of  the  genitalia  at  the  lower  half. 

Hah. — New  South  Wales,  Queensland  and  two  female  specimens  in  the  Mac- 
leay  Museum  from  King  George  Sound,  Western  Australia. 

AsiLUS  PELAGO  Walker.     (Text-fig.  5.) 

Asiliis  pelago,  Walker,  List.  Dipt.  Brit.  Mus.,  ii.,  1849,  p.  419;  and  vii.,  suppl.  .3, 
1855^  pp.  729,  731,  and  735;  Schiner,  Verh.  z.-b.  Ges.  Wien,  xvii.,  1867, 
p.  400;  Ricardo,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  (8),  xi.,  1913,  p.  443. 

Description. — The  attenuated  portion  of  the  upper  forceps  of  the  male 
genitalia  is  short,  slightly  constricted  subapically,  and  broadly  rounded  at  the 
apex;  it  is  conspicuously  deflected  from  the  considerably  arched  basal  portion; 
the  whole  area  is  covered  with  a  vestiture  of  short  bristly  appearance. 

Hah. — Western  Australia:  one  male  and  one  female  from  Perth;  South  .4us- 
tralia:  two  males  and  four  females  in  the  Macleay  Museum  probably  belong 
here,  but  neither  male  specimen  has  the  genitalia  in  sufSeiently  good  condition  for 
positive  determination. 

AsiLus  JIALLEOLUS  Walker.     (Text-flg.  6.) 

Asiliis  malleolus,  Walker,  List  Dipt.  Brit.  Mus.,  ii.,  1849,  p.  418;  and  vii.,  suppl. 

3,  1855,  pp.  729,  732  and  736. 
Asilus  discutiens,   Walker,  Ins.  Saund.    Dipt.,  1851,   p.    135;    Walker,  List  Dipt. 

Brit.  Mus.,  vii.,  suppl.  3, 1855,  pp.  729  and  736;  Ricardo,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat. 

Hist.,  (8),  xi.,  1913,  p.  445;  Wliite,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.,  1916,  p.  182. 
Asilus  unilineatus,  Macquart,  MS.  name. 

Synoui/my. — The  above  synonymy  is  accepted  on  the  authority  of  Miss 
Ricardo.  A.  malleolus  Walker  takes  precedence  over  A.  discutiens  Walker,  under 
which  name  the  species  has  been  well  known  liitherto. 

Description. — The  upper  forceps  of  the  male  genitalia  are  attenuated  and 
curve  downwards;  on  the  dorsal  surface  of  the  genitalia  there  is  a  hump  ■^^■hich 
partly  conceals  the  lamella. 

Hah. — New  South  Wales.  Miss  Ricardo  reports  the  species  from  "Van 
Dieman's  Land"  which  locality  is  usually  taken  to  be  Tasmania;  there  is,  however, 
a  "Van  Dieman"  marked  on  some  old  maps  in  the  north  of  Australia,  and  this 
may  be  the  locality  of  the  many  species  recorded  from  Tasmania  but  only  known 
from  the  northern  lialf  of  Australia. 

Asilus  ingIjOriijs  Macleay.     (Text-fig.  7.) 

Asilus  inglorius,  Macleay,  in  King's  Narr.  Surv.  Austr.,  ii.,  1837,  p.  467;  Wiede- 
mann, Auss.  Zweifl.  Ins.,  ii.,  1830,  p.  644;  Walker,  List  Dipt.  Brit  Mus., 
ii.,  1849,  p.  423;  and  vii.,  suppl.  3,  1855,  pp.  730,  734  and  738;  Schiner, 
Verh.  z.-b.  Ges.  Wien,  xvi.,  1866,  p.  690;  Schiner,  Reise  Novara,  Dipt., 
1868,  p.  183;  Ricardo,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  (8),  xi.,  1913,  p.  439. 

Asilus  ami/cla.  Walker,  List  Dipt.  Brit.  Mus.,  ii.,  1849,  p.  423  (?)  ;  and  vii., 
suppl.  3,  1855,  pp.  730,  734  and  741. 

Asilus  centho,  Walker,  Ibid.,  ii.,  1849,  p.  431  (9)  ;  and.  vii.,  suppl.  3,  1855,  pp. 
730.  733  and  740. 


256 


ON  THE    MALE   GENITALIA  OP   SOME  ROBBER-FLIES, 


Text-fig.5.  The  male  genitalia  of  Asiliis pelago  Walker,  seen  laterally,   ^x  li). 
Text-fig.6.  The  male  genitalia  of  Asilus  malleolus  Walker,  seen  laterally,   (x  1-t). 
Text-fig. 7.  The  male  genitalia  of  Asilus  inglofius  Macleay,  seen  laterally,   (x  14). 
Text-fig. 8.  The  male  genitalia  of  Asilus  rufiventris  Macquart,  seen  laterally,   (x  14). 

Asilus  planus,  Walker,   Ibid.,  vii.,   suppl.   3,  1855,  pp.  730  and  741     ($). 
Asilus  sericeiventris,  Macquart,  MS.  name. 

Synonymy. — The  above  synonymy  is  given  on  the  authority  of  Miss  Ricardo, 
who  accepts  Sehiner's  authority  for  the  identification  of  Asilus  inglorius  Macleay. 

The  species  referred  here  is  the  only  known  form  to  which  Macleay's  descrip- 
liiin  can  be  applied. 

Description. — The  upper  forceps  of  the  male  genitalia  are  long,  slender  and 
attenuated  ai)ieally;  the  attenuated  portion  is  deflected  basally  and  then  curves 
back  to  the  horizontal  line  at  the  apex.  A  hump  at  half  the  length  on  the  dorsal 
surface  partly  conceals  the  lamella. 

Ilab. — Queensland,  New  South  Wales,  Victoria,  South  Australia  and  Western 
Australia.  These  States  are  represented  liy  specimens  in  the  Australian  and 
Macleay  Museums. 

Asii.is  liUFivENTRis  Macquart.     (Text-fig.   8.) 

Asilus  rufiventris,  Jfacquart,  Dipt.  E.xot.,  !.,  (2),  1838,  p.  l-H;  Walker.  List  Dipt. 

Brit.  Mus.,    vii.,  suppl.  3,    1855,    pp.   730  and  739;  Ricardo.    Ann.    Mag. 

Nat.  Hist..  (8).  xi..  1913.  p.  442. 
.Lsilus  alligans,  Walker,  Iliid..  vii.,  suppl.  3,  1855,   p)).   730,  734  riid  740. 


HY    G.    H.     HARDY.  257 

Synonymy. — The  description  of  A.  alUgans  Walker  conforms  to  A.  rufiventris 
Maequart,  and  therefore  the  name  is  placed  here  as  a  synonym  of  that  species. 
Miss   Ricardo  states  that   the  type  is   lost. 

Description. — Each  branch  of  the  upper  forceps  of  the  male  genitalia  has  an 
attenuated  apex  which  curves  upwards  apically ;  a  hump  on  the  dorsal  surface 
of  the  genitalia,  at  half  the  length,  partly  conceals  the  lamella. 

Ilab. — Queensland,   New   South  Wales,   Victoria   and  South   Australia. 

A.siLus  BLASio  Walker.     (Text-fig.   9.) 

Asilm  blasio,  Walker.  List  Dipt.  Brit.  Mus.,  ii.,  1849,  p.  441;  and  vii..  .supid.  3, 
1855,  pp.  730,  731  and  758;  Ricardo,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  (8),  xi., 
1913,  p.  444. 

Status. — The  species  was  described  from  Western  Australia,  hut  Miss 
Ricardo  redeseribed  it  from  a  Victorian  specimen  as  the  type  is  very  old  au'I 
worn.  It  is  possible  that  the  specimen  described  by  Miss  Ricardo  is  closely  allied 
to,  but  distinct  from,  Walker's  species.  A  series  from  New  South  Wales  is  also 
referable  here  and  is  used  for  the  study  of  the  genitalia.  A  male  specimen  from 
Perth,  Western  Australia,  differs  in  the  genitalia  by  having  the  dorsal  digitate 
process  missing ;  the  specimen  has  its  genitalia  broken  on'  one  side  but  the  other 
side  appears  to  be  complete,  as  a  line  of  fracture  cannot  be  traced ;  nevertheless, 
it  is  advisable  to  I:eep  these  specimens  under  one  specific  name  until  the  dif- 
ferences in  the  male  genitalia  can  be  contirmed  with  new  material  from  Western 
Australia. 

Description. — The  upper  forceps  of  the  male  genitalia  are  more  or  less  ellip- 
tical in  shape.  Each  branch  of  the  upper  and  lower  forceps  contains  a  minute 
projection  at  the  extreme  apex,  aftid  three  conspicuous  subapical  bristles  on  the 
ventral  side.  On  the  dorsal  edge  of  the  upper  forceps  there  is  a  digitate  process 
situated  at  about  three-quarters  the  length,  which,  however,  is  missing  in  the 
specimen  from  Western  Australia ;  this  specimen  is  also  very  mui'h  brighter  tlinn 
those  from  New  South  Wales. 

Hah. — Western  Australia:  Perth,  one  male  specimen:  New  South  Wales: 
Blue  Mountains,  Blackheath,  a  series  of  each  sex  collected  during  November,  1919 ; 
Victoria:  Dandenong  Ranges    (Ricardo). 

A.'siLUS  MURINUS  Maequart.      (Text-fig.  10.) 

Asilus  murinus,  Maequart,  Dipt.  Exot.,  i.,  (2),  1838,  p.  144;  Walker,  List  Dipt, 
Brit.  Mus.,  TO.,  suppl.  3,  1855,  pp.  729  and  736;   Ricardo,  Ann.  Mag 
Nat.  Hist,  (8),  xi.,  1913,  p.  440. 
Asilus  murinus,  var.    Maequart,  ihid.,  suppl.  2,  1847,  p.  45. 

Description. — The  shape  of  the  male  genitalia  is  more  or  less  globular,  a  little 
smaller  in  proportion  to  but  scarcely  differing  from  that  of  A.  sydneyensis  Mac- 
quart.  The  Tasmanian  A.  alcetas  Walker  also  contains  similar  shaped  geni- 
talia and,  moreover,  there  does  not  appear  to  be  any  structural  difference  be- 
tween the  three  species. 

^1.  murinus  Maequart  is  a  dingy  coloured  species,  whilst  ^4.  sydneyensis 
Maequart  is  brighter  and  has  a  reddish  tinge  on  tiie  abdomen:  thev  are  both  from 
New  South  Wales.  A.  alcetas  Walker  from  Tasmania,  is  similar  to  A.  murinus 
Maequart,  and  much  smaller  in  size. 


258 


ON  THE    MALE    GENITALIA  Or   SOME  ROBBER-FLIES, 


II 

Text-fig.9.  The  male  genitalia  of  Asiliis  blasio  Walker,  seen  laterally,   (x  14) . 

Text-fig.lO.  The  male  genitalia  of  Asilus  vmrinus  Maequart,  seen  laterally,   (x  14). 

Text-fig. 11.  The  male  genitalia  of  Asilus  syifit  eye  list's  Maequart,  seen  laterally,   (x  11). 

Text-fig. 12.  The  male  genitalia  of  Asilus  alee/as  Walker,  seen  laterally,   (x  14). 

AsiLU.s   SYDNEYENSis  Mar(|uart.      (Text-fig.   11.) 
Asilus   iiiyritarsis,  Maequart,    Hist.  Nat.  Dipt.,  i.,    1834,    p.    304    {preoccupied); 

Walker,  List  Dipt.  Brit.  Mus.,  vii.,  suppl.  3,  1855,  pp.  729  and  736;  v.d. 

Wulp,  Cat.  Dipt.  S.Af.,  1896,  p.  93. 
Asilus  si/diieensis  Maequart,  Dipt.  Exot.,  i.,    (2),  1838,  p.  144;  Walker,   ibid,  ii , 

1849,  p.   425;   and  vii.,  suppl.   3,   1855,  pp.  730   and  739. 
Itamus  sydtieyensis,  Sehiner,  Novara  Raise,  Dipt.,  1868,  p.  189. 
Neoitamus  sydneyensis,  Kertesz.,  Cat.  Dipt.,  iv.,  1909,  p.  294. 
Asilus  sydneyensis,  Eicardo,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  llist.,  (8),  xi..  1913,  p.  442:  White, 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.,   1916,  p.  182. 
Asilus  jacksonii,  Maequart,   Dipt.   Exot.,  i.,    (2),   1838,  p.  145;    Walker,  ibid.,   ii , 

1849,  p.  451 ;  and  vii.,  suppl.  3,  1855,  pp.  730,  733  and  740. 
Asilus    tasmaniaes     Maequart,  Dipt.  Exot.,   i.,    (2),    1838,  p.  145;   Walker,    ibid., 

vii.,  suppl.  3,  1855,  pp.  729  and  735. 
Aratus?  tasmaniae,  v.d.  Wulp.,  Term.  Fuz.,  xxi  (1),  1898,  p.  237. 
Asilus  ami/thann.  Walker,  ibid.,  ii.,  1849.  p.  423. 
Asilus  tnuso.  Walker,  ibid.,  ii.,  1849,  p.  424. 

Synonymy. — The  name  Asilus  nigritarsis  was  used  by  Wiedemann  in  182] 
for  Basypngon  (now  Mallophora)  nigritarsis  Fabrieius  from  America.  The 
sjTionymy  is  given  on  the  authority  of  Rehiner  and  Miss  Ricardo. 

Description. — The  shape  of  the  male  genitalia  is  more  or  less  globular  and 
similar  to  but  laiger  than  that  of  A.  murinus  Maequart,  under  which  species  fur- 
ther particulars  will  be  found. 

Hah. — New  South  Wales.  In  the  collections  under  revision  the  specimens 
with  locality  labels  are  invariably  from  New  South  Wales.  The  Tasmanian  re- 
cords are  e^ndentlv  incorrect. 


BY    G.    H.    HARDY.  259 

AsiLUS  ALCETAS  Walker.     (Text-fig.  12.) 

Asiliis  alcetas,  Walker,  List    Dipt.  Brit.  Mus.,  ii.,  1849,  p.  425;  and  vii.,  siippl.  3, 

1855,  pp.  729.  732,  and  736. 
Itamus  alcetas,  Schiner,  Verb,  z.-b.  Ges.  Wien.,  xvii.,  1867,  p.  408. 
Neoitamus  alceta.'^,  Kertesz,  Cat.  Dipt.,  iv.,  1909,  p.  290. 
Asilus  alcetas,  Rieardo,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,   (8),  xi.,  1913,  p.  447:  Wliite.  Proc 

Boy.  Soe.  Tas.,  1916,  p.  181. 
Asilus  trachaliis.  Walker,  Ins.  Saund.  Dipt.  1851,  p.  143;  Walker.  List  Dipt.  Brit. 

JIus.,  vii.,  suppl.  3,  1855,  pp.  730  and  738. 
Synonymy. — The  synonymy  is  given  on  the  authority  o£  Miss  Rieardo,  who 
states  that  the  species  refen-ed  by  Schiner  to  the  genus  Itamus,  now  Neoitamus, 
must  be  an  altogether  different  species  from  the  type.  Although  this  is  probably 
correct,  there  is  not  sufficient  information  in  the  description  to  allow  Schiner's 
species  to  lie  identified  with  any  known  species  of  Neoitamus  and,  moreover, 
Asilus  alcetas  Walker  has  a  very  striking  resemblance  to  Neoitamus. 

Description. — The  shape  of  the  male  genitalia  is  more  or  less  globular  and 
similar  to  that  of  A.  murimis  Macciuart,  under  which  further  particulars  are  given. 
Hab. — Tasmania :  Mount  Arthur,  one  male  and  one  female  collected  by  Mr. 
r.  M.  Littler,  to  whom  the  writer  is  indebted  for  these  specimens  now  in  the 
collection  of  the  Australian  Museum.  This  is  the  only  species  of  the  genus 
definitely  known  from  the  State. 


260 


NOTE?   FROM  THE  BOTANIC  GARDENS,  SYDNEY. 
Bv  A.   A.  Hajiiltox,  Botanical  A-ssistaxt. 

SciEPUs  scpixus  L. 

Conteunial  Park  (A.  A.  Hamilton,  2,  191(i.) — a  new  habitat  for  a  species 
apparently  rare  in  iliis  State.  The  only  specific  locality  recorde'l  for  this  jilant 
in  New  South  Wales  is  Nepean  River  (Coll.  R.Br.).*  Australian  forms  of  this 
species  are  represented  in  the  National  Herbarium,  Sydney,  by  specimens  from 
the  British  Museum  under  Isolepis  supina  R.Br.  (Coll.  Banks  and  Solander,  New 
Holland,  1770)  and  Lake  Albert.  Victoria,  a  locality  given  by  Bentham,  loc.  cit. 
There  is  also  an  example  without  collector's  name,  locality,  or  date.  The  speci- 
mens now  recorded  agree  with  those  collected  by  Banks  and  Solander  in  all  the 
important  characters,  differing  only  in  the  leng^th  of  the  invohicral  bract,  which 
does  not  exceed  the  measurement  (2  inches)  given  by  Bentham.  In  some  of  the 
Banks-Solander  specimens — which  were  probably  collected  at  the  Endeavour 
River — it  attains  a  length  of  15  cm.  The  Victorian  specimens  are  diminutive, 
!.) — 8  cm.  high,  with  slightly  llexuose  stems.  An  examination  of  the  exotic  her- 
barivun  material  disclosed  considerable  variation  in  the  leng-th  of  the  invohicral 
bract.  It  appears  to  be  an  exceptionally  variable  species,  as,  according  to  the 
descriptions  given  in  the  works  consulted,  it  is  found  to  vary  greatly  in  such  im- 
portant characters  as  the  shape  of  the  fruits,  number  of  style  branches,  and  the 
presence  or  absence  of  rudimentary  sepals  or  petals;  and  is  usually  (juoted  as 
an  exception  in  the  section  in  which  it  has,  for  convenience,  been  placed.  Ex- 
amples with  biconvex  fruits  and  2-style  branches,  and  others  with  triangular  fruits 
and  3-style  branches  were  noted  throughout  the  series.  In  sexeral  European 
specimens  the  lamina  of  the  leaf  sheath  is  occasionally  produced  to  a  length  of 
3—5  cm. 

•  SCHOENUS    MOOREI  Benth. 

Moore  and  Betehef  i)laced  S.  Moorci  systematically  in  a  group  with  smooth 
fruits.  This  is  misleading,  as  an  examination  of  the  fruits  througliout  a  series  of 
specimens  from  various  localities  shows  them  to  be  prominently  transversely 
rugose.  The  character  of  smooth  as  opposed  to  rugose  or  tuberculate  fruits  is  an 
important  factor  in  the  determination  of  members  of  this  genus,  liut  in  tliis  par- 
ticular species  Benthamt  has  omitted  to  mention  this  feature,  tliouyh  he  refers  to 
both  the  shape  and  ribbing  of  the  fruit. 

•Fl.  Austr.,  vii..  1878,  330. 
tH'book  J'l.  N.S.Wales,  1893,  p.458. 
:A.r.,p.367. 


BY    A.    A.    IIAJIILTON.  '201 

Lepidospekaia  quadraxgulata,  n.sp. 

South  Brotliei>,  John's  River  (J.  L.  Boormau,  6,  1915);  Port  Macquarie 
(J.   L.   Boorman,  1],  1915). 

Stipes  1  111.  altus,  2  mm.  latus,  foliis  latioribus,  75  cm.  longis,  stipes  t'oliaque 
codiuu  iiiodo  quadrangulata.     Panicula  2  ad   5  cm.  longa.     Bractea  paniculae  in- 
feiior  1 — 5  ad  3  em.  longa.      Niix  obovoidea  triangularis,  eostis  prominentibus 
Squamae  angustae  setaceae. 

Stem  about  1  ui.  high,  under  2  mui.  broad,  Huely  striate,  smooth,  4-angled,  the 
edges  slightly  produced  and  rounded.  Leaves  4-angled,  broader  and  flatter  than 
the  stem,  from  50  to  75  cm.  long,  the  rounded  edges  of  the  angles  prominent,  form- 
ing a  shallow  channel  more  conspicuous  on  the  broad  side  of  the  leaf.  Panicle 
from  2  to  5  cm.  long,  compound,  dense,  ovoid-oblong  to  pyramidal,  branches  few, 
erect.  Bracts  of  the  inflorescence  striate,  the  lowest  1|  to  above  3  cm.  long, 
the  lamina  oecnpying  about  half  its  lengfh,  the  upper  ones  gradually  smaller. 
Spikelets  clustered,  sessile,  crowded  on  the  panicle  branches,  5 — 6  mm.  long. 
Barren  flowers  1 — 2  below  the  jierfect  one.  Flowering  glumes  acuminate,  3 — 4 
outer  ones  shorter  and  broader.  Nut  obovoid,  3-angled,  the  rite  prominent,  pale 
when  young,  but  gradually  becoming  mottled  with  brown.  Hypogynous  scales 
narrow,  frequently  tapering  into  a  seta. 

Its  nearest  affinity  is  L.  Neesii  Kunth.,  from  which  it  is  easily  separated  by 
the  quadrangular  leaves  and  stem,  though  in  some  forms  of  L.  Neesii  the  stems 
show  a  degree  of  angularity.  Quadrangiilar  stems  and  leaves  are  represented  in 
the  genus  by  L.  tetraqiietrum  Nees,  an  exceptional  species  placed  by  Bentham* 
in  his  otherwise  flat-leaved  series  Floribundae,  a  position  to  which  it  is  entitled 
by  its  inflorescence,  an  elongated  panicle  of  6 — 12  inches.  The  much  reduced 
compact  panicle  of  L.  quadrangulata  is  tliat  of  Bentham's  series  Tereticaules, 
though  it  differs  in  the  shape  of  stem  and  leaf  from  the  other  members  of  the 
group,  which  have — as  the  series  distinction  indicates — -cylindrical  stems  and 
leaves . 

Grkvillf.a   punicea  R.Br.  var.    crassipolia,  n.var. 

Gosford  (J.  Purser,  9,  1899) ;  Penang  Ranges,  Gosford  (J.  H.  Maiden,  (i, 
1903)  ;  Road  to  Wiseman's  Ferry,  Gosford   (A.  A.  Hamilton,  1,  1916). 

Leaves  crass,  rigid,  flattened,  from  ovate  to  rotundate,  J,  to  2  em.  long,  the 
intramarginal  vein  prominent  and  slightly  tubereulate.  A  variety  differing  from 
the  typical  Port  Jackson  form  in  the  size  and  rotundity  of  the  leaves,  and  the 
conspicuous  infra-marginal  vein  which  gives  the  refiexed  leaf  margin  a  spreading 
rather  than  the  typical  recurved  habit.  This  variety  appears  to  be  confined  to 
the  neighbourhood  of  Gosford. 

Hakea  saligna  R.Br.  var.  angustifolia,  n.var. 

Woronora  Rivei;,  Heathcote  (A.  A.  Hamilton,  10,  1915).  Growing  among 
boulders  in  the  river  bed. 

A  compact  shrub  2  m.  high.  Leaves  narrow,  I  to  1  dee.  long,  3 — 5  iniu. 
broad,  rigid,  almost  veinless.  Fruit  carpels  small,  2  cm.  long,  1 — 1]  cm.  broad, 
nearly  smooth,  the  beak  straight  or  barely  produced,  approaching  the  fruit  of  H. 
microcarpa  R.Br.     An   example  from  Lawson    (A.    A.    Hamilton,   9,  1914)    of 

•Fl.  Austr.,  vii.,  p.385. 


262  NOTES    FROM    THE    UOTANIC    GARDENS,    SYDNEV, 

H.  saligna,  a  spreading  tree  6  m.  high,  has  leaves  from  J  to  IJ  Jec.  long  and  1  to 
nearly  3  cm.  broad,  distinctly  veined,  and  fruit  carpels  3J  cm.  long.  2  cm.  broad, 
covered  witii  large  prominent  tubercles,  the  beak  recurved.  Specimens  in  the 
National  Herbarium  forming  connecting  links  are  from  Cockle  and  Cowan  Creeks 
(W.  F.  Blakely,  3,  1915),  "taU  slender  shrubs  15—20  ft."  (CoUector's  note), 
with  narrow  acuminate  leaves,  the  venation  indistinct,  and  comparatively  large, 
prominently  tuberculate  fruits;  Nowra  (J.  L.  Boorman,  1,  1915).  "a  small  tree 
32 — 14  feet''  (Collector's  note)  with  short  acute  leaves,  midway  in  width  between 
the  Lawson  and  Heathcote  specimens,  and  small  fruits  with  an  elongated  beak,  the 
tubercles  less  prominent  than  in  the  examples  from  Lawson.  Bentham's  descrip- 
tion of  H.  saligna*  may  be  interpreted  to  include  all  the  forms  here  reviewed, 
but  the  morphological  differences  between  the  typical  specimens  from  Lawson,  and 
those  from  Heathcote  appear  to  be  sufficiently  pronounced  to  warrant  a  vsrietal 
distinction.  The  figure  presented  by  Mr.  Maidenf  is  probably  the  nearest  ap- 
proach to  the  type  available. 

Pdltenaea  ferruginea  Rudge. 

Trans .  Linn .  See,  xi.,  300,  t.  23 . 

Rudge's  species  is  upheld  by  De  Candolle,t  who  quotes  Sieber's  n.  420,  but  is 
reduced  to  a  variety  (latifolia)  of  P.  villosa  Willd.  by  Bentham.§  The  latter  aho 
mentions  Sieber's  n.  420.  He  bases  his  varietal  distinction  on  the  smaller,  very 
pubescent  leaves,  from  narrow  cuneate  to  broadly  obovate,  together  with  the  larger 
flowers  of  the  variety  We  have  in  the  National  Herbarium  a  series  of  specimens 
collected  in  the  neighbourhood  of  Glenbrook,  which  agree  with  Rudge's  figure,  and 
conform  to  his  description,  viz.,  Lapstone  Hill  (J.  H.  Maiden  and  R.  H.  Cam- 
bage,  10,  1904);  Glenbrook  (W.  F.  Blakely,  10,  1913;  A.  A.  Hamilton,  11, 
1914);  Blue  Mountains,  without  specific  locality  (E.  Betche,  12,  1882).  P.  vil- 
losa has  a  wide  range  and  as  a  consequence  shows  considerable  variation,  but  none 
of  the  numerous  specimens  in  the  National  Herbarium  collection  which  were  ex- 
amined approach,  either  in  habit  or  foliage,  the  form  under  review.  The  pen- 
dulous branehlets  and  narrow  concave  leaves  of  the  typical  P.  villosa  are  replaced 
by  an  erect  branching  habit  and  leaves — as  in  Rudge's  figure — rotund,  slightly 
emarginate,  and  much  larger  than  those  of  P.  villosa  typica.  The  hairs  on  the 
leaves  of  the  typical  P.  villosa  are  short,  erect,  and  bulbous  at  the  base,  and  the 
flowers  entirely  yellow.  In  P.  ferruginea  the  leaf  hairs  are  long,  weak,  and 
appressed,  and  the  carina  of  the  flower  is  rust-coloured .  Rudge  gives  some  prom- 
mence  to  certain  dots  (sub-lente  punctata)  on  the  leaves  of  his  species,  including 
details  in  the  plate  showing  both  surfaces  of  a  leaf  to  demonstrate  this  charac- 
ter. These  dots  arc  filso  discernible  in  a  greater  or  lesser  dcgi-ee  tliroughout  the 
series  of  specimens  of  P.  villosa  examined.  It  will  be  seen  that  we  have  a  difTor- 
ence  in  the  habit  of  the  plant,  size  and  shape  of  leaves,  size  and  colour  of  flow- 
ers, and  a  distinct  vestiture  separating  these  plants.  When,  after  the  passing  of 
a  century,  examples  are  found  in  the  neighbourhood  in  which  Sieber  (upon  whose 
n.  420  the  species  is  founded)  is  known  to  have  collected,  which  arc  the  counter- 
part of  those    figured  by    Rudge,  it  would  appear  that    the   characterization    is 


•Fl.  Avistr.,  v.,  51?, 

tPor.  Flora  N.S.W.,  v.,  p.l09.  PI. 171. 

tProd.  Syst.  Vcr.,  ii..  111. 

§F1.  Austr.,  ii.,  i;t4. 


BY   A.  A.   HAMILTON.  263 

siiffieiently  stable  to  warrant  the  retention  of  the  speeitic  rank  and  nomenclature 
as  proposed  by  him. 

Peostanthera  densa,  n.sp. 

Cronulla  (A.  A.  Hamilton,  9,  1911;  E.  Cheel,  7,  1918.) 

Frutex  compactus  subarboribus  florens  5 — 9  dec,  altus.  Folia  sucida,  brevi- 
ter  petiolata,  cordata  ad  ovata-lanceolata,  costa  hirsuta  prominente  precursa,  5  mm. 
ad  1  cm.  longa,  apud  extremitates  ramorum  crebra,  nonnumquam  fasciculata. 
Semina  metallica  ritentia.     P.  marifoUa  R.Br,  affinis. 

A  compact  erect  undershrub  5 — 9  dec.  high  with  terete  hirsute  l)ranches. 
Leaves  succulent,  very  shortly  petiolate,  from  cordate  to  ovate-lanceolate  with  re- 
volute  margins,  scabrous  hispid  above,  somewhat  paler  underneath  with  a  prom- 
inent liirsute  midvein,  5  mm.  to  1  cm.  long,  densely  crowded  at  the  tips  of  the 
branches,  occasionally  fasciculate.  Flowers  axillary  on  very  short  pedicels  with 
linear  hirsute  bracts  3  mm.  long,  the  floral  leaves  similar  to  those  of  the  stem, 
'^alyx  hirsute,  5  mm.  long,  the  lips  entire  and  nearly  equal.  Corolla  more  than 
twice  as  long  as  the  calyx,  sprinkled  on  the  outside  with  short  hairs,  the  broad 
thi-oat  bearded  inside  with  long  white  hairs.  Anthers  with  one  apisendage  about 
twice  as  long  as  the  cell,  the  other  short  and  adnate.     Seeds  with  a  metallic  lustre 

Its  position  in  the  genus  is  under  Bentham's  series  Convexae  following,  in 
.specific  sequence  P.  marifolia  R.Br.,  with  which  it  is  connected  by  a  series  of  speci- 
mens from  Helensburgh  (A.  A.  Hamilton,  10,  1913)  taken  from  a  shrub  of  9 — 12 
dec.  with  an  upright  spreading  habit.  The  typical  P.  marifolia  of  the  Port  Jack- 
son district  is  a  scrambling  undershrub  of  3— -5  dec. 

The  plants  were  found  gi'owing  in  profusion  on  the  ocean  slope  of  the  rock\- 
headland  (Hawkesbury  Series)  at  Cronulla,  and  the  crass  foliage  is  doubtless  a 
response  to  the  halophytic  conditions  prevailing  in  this  station,  as  plants  growing 
in  the  vicinity  of  tidal  waters  frequently  develop  a  succulent  habit.  The  species 
is  confined  to  a  limited  area  Ijetween  the  ocean  beach  at  Cronulla  and  the 
northern  entrance  to  Port  Hacking. 

Pkostaxthera   i!hojii!ea    R.Br. 

Port  Macquarie  (E.  R.  Brown,  2,  1897);  Douglas  Park  (  A.  A.  Hamilton, 
12,  1915)  .  Two  new  specific  localities  extending  the  range  of  this  somewhat 
rare  species.     Previously  recorded  from  the  Blue  Mountains  and  Tllawarra. 

Prostantheea  saxicola      K.Br.  var.  Montana,  n.var. 

Katoomba;  Narrow  Neck  (A.  A.  Hamilton,  1,  1903).  Larger  in  all  its 
parts  than  the  typical  P.  saxicola,  the  flowers  and  young  shoots  more  thickly 
clothed  with  liairs,  the  setaceous  bracts  minute  and  only  occasionally  developed. 
This  variety  approaches  a  form  of  P.  Behriana  Schlecht,  but  differs  from  that 
species  in  the  length  of  the  calyx  lips  (longer  in  P.  Behriana),  the  minutes  bracts, 
and  the  bristly  tomentiim.  (The  bracts  are  conspicuous  in  P.  Behriana  and 
the  tomentum  of  a  fine  texture.)  It  is  usually  found  in  scattered  patches  on'  shel- 
tered hillsides,  on  the  higher  elevations  of  the  Blue  Mountains.  Specimens  in  the 
National  Herbarium  are  from  Mt.  Victoria  (R.  T.  Baker,  12,  1890)  ;  Blue  Moun- 
tains (E.  Betche,  12,  1902);  Blackheath  (J.  H.  Maiden,  1,  1904).  A  specimen 
from  Milton,  near  top  of  Pigeon  House,  n.  775  (R.  H.  Cambage,  12,  1902)  is 
also  referred  to  this  variety. 


2c4  xott;s  proji  the  botanic  gakiikn's,  sydxky, 

Prostanthera  debilis  F.  v.  M. 

New  tor  New  South  Wales.  Recorded  from  the  Grampian  Mountains.  A'io- 
toria.*  Examples  in  the  National  Herbarium  are  from  Gulgong  (J.  H.  Maiden, 
4,  1901),  Warrumbungle  Ranges  (W.  Forsj-th,  10,  1901),  Molong  (J.  L.  Boor- 
man,  11,  19()(il,  expert ee  (J.  L.  Boorman,  12,  1915).  An  interesting  range  for 
a  species  liitherto  regarded  as  exclusively  Victorian.  Tlie  New  South  Wales 
forms  of  P.  debilis  approach  very  closely  specimens  in  the  National  Herbarium 
irom  New  England  (the  type  locality)  of  P.  sckcicola  R.Br.  var.  major,  differing 
chiefly  in  the  distpnt  canaliculate  leaves,  and  the  dense  hoary  tomeutum  on  the 
calyces  and  young  shoots.  The  leaves  of  P.  saxicola  var.  major  are  flat  and 
crowded  and  the  calyces  and  young  shoots  sparsely  tomentose. 


•Frag.  Phyto.  Austr.,  F.v.M.,  viii.,  1874,  p.  147 


365 


ORDINARY  MONTHLY  MEETING. 
28th  July,  1920. 
Mr.  ,1.   .).    Fletcher,   il.A.,  B.Se..  Presiilent,   in   the  Chair. 

Dr.  Arthur  H.\iiilton  Tebbutt,  185  Maoquarie-street,  Sydney,  was  elected 
an  Ordiuarj'  Member  of  the  Society. 

The  President  amioimced  that  a  Pan-Pacitie  Science  Congress  was  to  be  held 
at  Honolulu,  commencing  on  2nd  August,  and  that  a  number  of  Australian  repre- 
sentatives had  left  to  attend,  including  Mr.  E.  C.  Andrews,  Assistant-Professor 
L.  A.  Cotton,  Messrs.  C.  Hedley,  and  C.  A.  Sussmilch,  from  Sydney,  Professor 
Wood-.Junes  from  the  University  of  Adelaide,  and  Professor  H.  C.  Richards,  from 
the  University  of  Queensland. 

The  Donation-;  and  Exchanges  received  since  the  pre\'ious  Monthly  Meetin'^ 
(30th  June,  1920),  amounting  to  31  Volumes,  56  Parts  or  Nos.,  10  Bulletins,  and 
2  Reports,  received  from  39  Societies  and  Institutions,  and  two  private  donois, 
were  laid   upon  the  table. 

NOTES   .\XD    EXHIBIT.S. 

Dr.  E.  AV.  Ferguson  exhibited  specimens  of  the  imago  and  larvae  of  <*> 
muscid  tiy  belonging  to  an  undetermined  genus.  The  imago  was  bred  from  a 
pupa  taken  in  the  nest  of  a  Leatherhead  by  Messrs.  W.  G.  and  R.  C.  Harvey, 
of  Mackay,  (Queensland.  The  larvae  live  on  the  nestling  birds,  and  when 
mature  conceal  themselves  in  the  nest  and  pupate.  Out  of  twenty  pupae  ob- 
tained by  Messrs.  Harvey,  only  one  hatched  out,  the  others  being  parasitised  by 
a  chaleid  wa-sp,  a  pair  of  which  were  also  exhibited.  Mr.  P.  H.  Gilbert,  of 
Lakemba,  Sydney,  has  found  what  appears  to  be  the  same  species  on  nestling 
birds  (New  Holland  Honeyeater). 

Mr.  E.  Cheel  exhil)ited  some  very  interesting  specimens  of  a  rare  lichen 
collected  on  Mount  Kosciusko  by  Miss  A.  V.  Duthie. 

The  only  specimens  previously  collected,  so  far  as  can  be  ascertained  at  pre- 
sent, are  in  a  solitary  collection  by  Rev.  F.  R.  M.  Wilson,  found  on  earthy 
rock  on  Mount  Hotham,  Victoria,  in  January,  1890.  The  specimen  is  labelled 
Ihifnurea  madreporiformis  (Wulf.)  Ach.  (AA'ilson  No.  1157,  in  National  Her- 
barium, Sydney).  It  seems  to  have  close  affinities  with  Dactylina  artica  (Hook.) 
Nyl.,  and  further  investigation  is  needed  to  settle  the  generic  position,  as  no 
apothecia  are  present  in  either  the  Mount  Hotham  or  Mount  Kosciusko  specimens. 
Unfortunately  there  are  no  specimens  of  the  above-mentioned  genera  (recorded 
from  Arctic  Regions)    available  for  comparison. 


266 


THE    ATRYPIDAE  OF  NEW  SOUTH    WALES.    WITH  REFERENCES  TO 
THOSE  RECORDED  FROM  OTHER   STATES  OF  AUSTRALIA. 

Bv  JoHx  Mitchell,  late  Principal  of  the  Newcastle  Technical  College  and 
School  or  Mines,  N.  S.  Wales,  and  W.   S.   Dun,  PALAEONTOLOCiisT,  Dept.  of 

Mines,  Sydney. 

(With  Plates  xiv.-xvi.;  Text-figures  1-5.) 

One  reason  for  tlie  present  paper  is  to  make  some  additions  to  our  present 
knowledge  of  the  Atrypidae  found  in  the  Palaeozoic  rocks  of  New  South  Wales, 
with  a  view  to  facilitate  their  correlation  with  those  of  similar  age  in  other 
countries  in  which  such  rocks  have  been  chronologically  classified. 
The  value  of  the  Atrypa  group  for  this  purpose  is  hardly  surpassed 
by  any  other  group  of  brachiopods  and  because  of  this,  ajid  that  a  supply  of 
good  material  has  become  available  to  work  upon,  the  task  of  systematically  deal- 
ing with  members  of  the  gi-oup  represented  in  the  Middle  Palaeozoic  rocks  of  this 
State  is  now  undertaken.  Besides  the  foregoing  reasons,  another  inducement  to 
deal  with  the  group  was  the  discovery,  some  time  ago,  of  a  number  of  remarkable 
brachiopods  belonging  to  the  Atrypidae,  but  not  placeable  in  any  of  the  existing 
genera  of  the  family. 

Up  to  the  present  the  following  species  of  Atrypa  have  been  recorded  from 
New  South  Wales, — Atrypa  reticularis  Linn.,  A.  desquamata  Sowerby,  A.  plica- 
tella  de  Koninck,  and  A.  marginalis  Dalman.  To  these  species  we  are  able  to 
add  Atrypa  pulchra,  n.sp.,  A.  erectirostris,  n.sp.,  and  A.  duntroonensis,  n.sp. 

If  the  doubtful  -1.  plicateUa  be  omitted,  New  South  Wales  would  be  repre- 
sented by  six  species  of  Atrypa,  and  this  is  quite  a  good  contribution,  for  nowhere 
are  the  species  of  Atrypa  found  to  be  very  numerous,  as  is  the  case  with  some 
other  genera  of  brachiopods.  In  addition  to  these  tnie  Atrypas  we  find  it  neces- 
sary to  add  a  new  genus  to  the  group,  for  the  reception  of  some  brachiopods  col- 
lected from  Molong,  Yass  and  Bowning  districts.  From  external  features,  these 
remarkable  fossils  were  considered  to  belong  to  Meristina,  but  the  discovery  of 
specimens  exhibiting  internal  structures  proves  that  their  ti-ue  position  is  with  the 
Atrypidae. 

For  this  new  genus  we  have  decided  upon  the  name  Atrypnidea,  and  in  it  we 
have  placed  the  following  species: — Atrypoidea  aiistralif^,  n.sp.,  and  A.  aiigiista, 
n .  sp . 

Atrypa   UETirri.Anis     Linnaeus. 
(PI.  XV.,    figs.    1-7;  PI.  xvi.,  figs.    0.    10,  20.) 

It  is  unnecessary  to  snjiidy  the  synonymy  or  the  description  of  this  world 
widely  distributed  and  stratigra|)hically  persistent  brachiopod.  Its  lii.story  for 
this  State  is  a  brief  one.  • 

The  first  record  of  its  occurrence  was  made  by  the  late  J.  W.  Salter  in  a 
letter  to  the  late  Rev.   W.   B.   Clarke,  dated  28th  Nov.,  1858,  wherein  he  states 


BY   JOHN  MITCHELL  AND  W.  S.  DUN.  267 

that  he  had  identified  this  species  in  a  collection  of  fossils  from  New  South  Wales 
whicli  had  been  sent  to  the  Woodwardian  Museum  of  Cambridge  University  by 
Clarke  in  1844  for  description.* 

In  1877  its  presence  is  noted  by  Prof,  de  Koninckt  from  Kempsey.  and  the 
banks  of  the  Murrumbidgee  [Devoniair]  .  With  regard  to  the  Kempsey  locality 
there  is  considerable  doubt,  the  formations  in  that  area  being  of  Upper  Palaeozoic 
age.  In  1888  the  species  was  reported  from  the  Bowning  Beds.l  In  1880  R. 
Etheridge,  Jr.,  recorded  A.  reticularis  from  Bombala,  and  the  variety  aspera  froiii 
Collins  Flat.^ 

Normal  specimens  of  this  fossil  from  the  Bowning- Yass  Beds,  exclusive  of 
their  foliated  margins,  appear  to  be  rather  smaller  than  the  European  species. 
The  dimensions  of  one  of  the  largest  specimens  from  these  beds  are^length  and 
width,  20  mm.,  depth  11  mm.  Judging  from  the  figures  of  A.  reticularis  in 
Davidson's  British  Brachiopoda,  it  would  apjsear  that  adult  British  species  usually 
exceed  an  inch  in  length  and  width,  and  are  more  gibbous  than  our  forms.  The 
pedicle  valves  of  our  specimens  too  seem  less  convex  in  the  umbonal  region,  and 
more  concave  laterally  and  anteriorly.  Some  specimens  from  Wellington  Caves, 
N.S.W.,  have  been  obtained  of  relatively  large  size,  their  length  and  width  ex- 
ceeding 43  mm.  without  the  fringe,  with  a  thickness  of  26  mm.  In  these  speci- 
mens the  radial  ribs  are  coarse,  and  the  marginal  sinus  in  front  deep  and  tongue- 
like, but,  except  for  their  unusual  size,  their  external  and  internal  features,  as  far 
as  they  are  revealed,  are  quite  typical  of  the  normal  A.  reticularis. 

In  tlie  upper  beds  of  the  Bowning  Series,  a  form  occurs,  possessing  features 
which  would  place  it  about  midway  between  A.  aspera  and  A.  i\eticularis,  and  al- 
though these  features  are  unvarying  in  all  the  specimens  of  it  that  have  come 
under  our  notice,  we  deem  it  undesirable  to  separate  it  from  the  type  form  at 
present.     Vide  PL  xvi.,  fig.   13. 

The  stratigraphical  range  of  the  species  in  the  Bowning  Series  extends  practically 
from  base  to  summit ;  but  it  is  most  abundant  in  the  lower  beds  of  the  series  espe- 
cially in  those  of  Hatton's  Corner  and  the  limestones  of  Limestone  Creek,  Silver- 
dale.  Its  associates  in  these  beds  are  Barrandella  linguifera  var.  wilkinsoni  Eth., 
Bhizophyllum  interpunctatum  de  Koninck,  Encrinurus  mitchelli  Foerste,  Bronteus 
jenkinsi  E.  and  M.,  etc. 

Loc.  and  horizon. — Hatton's  Corner,  Yass  River,  Parish  of  Y'ass,  County  Mur- 
ray; Limestone  Creek  Parisli  of  Derrengullen,  County  King;  Bowning  Creek, 
etc . ,  Parish  of  Bowning,  County  Harden .  Upper  Silurian — Wenlock  or  Bar- 
rande's  etage  E  of  Bohemia;  and  in  the  upper  part  of  the.  Bowning  Series  pro- 
l)ably  passing  into  Devonian. 

Atrypa  erectirostris,  n.sp.  (PL  xv.,  figs.  10,  11;  PI.  xvi.,  figs.  17,  18.) 

Shell  subdiscoidal  when  the  fringe  is  attached  in  mature  specimens;  radial 
striae  numerous,  fine,  strongly  arcuate  laterally  and  dichotomous  at  more  or  less 
frequent  intervals.  Pedicle  valve  moderately  convex  at  the  umbonal  region,  con- 
cave laterallj',  and  at  front  margin  only  mildly  sinuate,  umbo  inconspicuous,  beak 
erect,  high,  acutely-pointed,  laterally  supported  by  strong  divergent  umbonal 
ridges.  Aperture  circular,  the  under  half  enclosed  by  the  deltidial  plates,  false 
area  conspicuous,  hinge  line  wide,  undulating;  cardinal  angles  high  and  rounded. 


•Sed.  Form.  N.S.  "Wales,  1878,  p.l.5.j. 
+Mem.  Geol.  Surv.  N.S.W.,  Pal.  No.  (i,  1898,  pp.  77-78. 
JMitehell,  Proc.  Aust.  Assoc.  Adv.  Sci.,  i.,  1887  (18S8),  p. 293. 
SJour.  Proc.  Eoy.  Soc.  N.S.Wales,  xiv.,  1880,  p.216. 


268  THE     ATRVl'lUAi;     Oi'     NEW     SOUTH     WALES, 

Brachial  valve  very  convex  to  gibbous  in  large  specimens,  laterally  strongly  turned 
up.  The  spiralia  are  of  the  true  Atnjpu  type  and,  with  cones,  consist  of  ten  or 
more  spirals  with  their  apices  directed  towards  the  outward  centre  of  the  brachial 
valve;  apices  of  the  cones  are  apart,  but  opposing  sides  compressed.  Uimensiuns: 
The  lai-gest  of  specimens  has  a  length  and  width  of  one  and  a-half  inches  without 
the  marginal  fringe,  and  a  depth  of  three  quarters  of  an  inch.  This  specimen, 
with  the  fringe,  would  have  had  a  width  of  not  less  than  two  and  a  quarter  inches. 

Qlis. — The  valves  in  young  specimens  are  very  mildly  and  about  equally  con- 
vex, and  the  umbo,  cardinal  ridges  and  beak  form  an  isosceles  triangle,  the  base 
of  which  is  from  one  cardinal  angle  to  the  other,  but  with  age  the  brachial  valve 
becomes  more  and  more  convex  until,  when  full  growth  has  been  reached,  it  is 
strongly  s-o,  or  gibbous.  This  form  resembles  both  A.  reticularis  and  A.  des- 
quamata,  but  differs  from  each  of  them  in  the  fineness  of  its  surface  ornamentation 
and  the  strong  curve  of  the  radial  striae  which  is  directed  laterally.  From  ^-1. 
reticularis  it  differs  in  the  high,  erect,  pointed  beak  of  the  pedicle  valve,  the  more 
exposed  deltidium  and  false  area,  exceedingly  fine  concentric  growth  lines,  and 
much  greater  dimensions  when  compared  with  normal  representatives  of  the 
species.  In  the  proportions  of  the  leng-th  to  width,  and  also  in  contour  it  agi-ees 
with  A.  reticularis.  It  resembles  ,1.  desquamata  in  having  a  high  pedicle  valve 
beak,  exposed  circular  foramen  and  deltidial  plates,  prominent  umbonal  ridges 
and  false  area,  also  in  the  features  of  the  brachial  cones,  but  with  some  of  these 
resemblances  it  is  merely  a  matter  of  degree,  because  the  beak  of  the  present 
species  is  very  much  higher  and  erect,  more  acutely  pointed  and  practically  with- 
out incurvation.  The  umbonal  ridges  are  less  divergent,  higher,  and  with  the 
beak  form  a  triano-lf  with  an  acute  apical  angle,  <|uite  different  from  the  triangle 
formed  by  these  ridges  in  ^-1.  desquamata.  Then  there  are  the  differences  already 
referred  to — the  much  finer  superficial  ornamentation  of  the  shells  of  the  local 
form,  and  the  strong  curving  of  the  radial  striae  laterally  and  towards  the  cardinal 
angles.  The  liinge  line  of  A.  desquamata  is  mildly  arcuate,  that  of  the  other  un- 
dulating. Plainly  our  species  resembles  in  several  particulars  both  ^-1.  reticularis 
und  A.  desquamata,  and  the  latter  in  more  than  it  does  the  former. 

Considering  the  tendency  to  variation  among  the  Atrypa  group  some  might 
be  disposed  to  recognise  A.  erectirostris  as  a  variant  of  A.  desquamata,  but  it  is  to 
be  noted  that,  though  the  differences  between  the  two  forms  in  some  instances 
appear  only  to  be  of  degree,  V'et  they  are  permanently  estaljlislied ;  for,  though 
the  normal  form  of  .1.  desquamata  is  found  in  association  witli  tlic  one  hero  de- 
scribed, there  is  no  evidence  of  gradation  of  the  one  form  into  the  othi>r.  and  this 
affords  an  additional  reason  for  a  separation  of  the  two  types. 

Loc.  and  horizon. — Cave  Flat,  near  the  jiuiction  of  the  Goodradigbce  with 
tlie  Murrumbidgee  River,  an  area  that  is  now  submerged  by  the  waters  impounded 
within  the  Bai-ren  Jack  (Burrin.jiick)  dam,  where  it  occurs  i)lentil'ully  in  a  stratum 
'of  limited  thickness,  associated  with  Spirifer  i/assensis  and  many  other  Spiriferi 
not  yet  determined,  Iiht/ncli<iiiella,  Atrypa  desquamata,  Ci/rtina,  etc.  Parish  of 
Woolgarlo,  County  of  Harden.     Probably  lower  Middle  Devonian. 

Atrypa  MARGiNALis  Dahnan .  (PI.  xv.,  figs,  l-l-lti;  PI.  xvi.,  fig-s.  1-5;  Text-figs.  1-5.) 
The  following  is  Davidson's  description  of  this  species*: — 
"Spec.    Char.     Transversely    subpent agonal    or    almost    elliptical:    hinge    line 

nearly  straight;  lateral  margins  rounded,  very  slightly  so  in  front,  beak  of  ventriil 


•Mon.  Brit.  Dev.  aii.l  Sil.  I!i-iu-hio]ioaa.  vul.  iii..  Scot.  Sit.  Hracli.,  iii>.l.Ti-4. 


BY    JOHN"   3IITCHELL  AXD  W.   S.   DUX. 


2Gfl 


valve  small,  straight,  moderately  inourvecl  with  a  circ-iilar  foramen  under  its  ex- 
tremity, and  distinctly  separated  from  the  umbone  or  hinge-line  of  dorsal  valve 
by  a  deltidiuui  in  two  pieces,  almost  surrounding  the  aperture.  Dorsal  valve 
moderately  convex  and  trilobed ;  mesial  fold  extremely  narrow  at  first  and  sud- 
denly widening,  slightly  elevated,  flattened  along  the  middle,  and  sharply  separated 
from  the  lateral  portions  of  the  valve  by  a  deepened  groove.  The  fold  is  also 
often  bent  upwards  close  to  the  frontal  edge.     "\'entral  valve  almost  flat  or  very 


Text-figs. 1-5.     Artypa  inarginalis  Dahii.     Enlarged  drawings  to  show  the  surface 
oruaiiientation,  muscuhir  scars  and,  in  one,  greater  portion  of  a  spiral. 

sliglitly  convex  near  the  beak  with  a  rather  deep  and  sharply  defined  sinus,  mar- 
gined on  either  side  by  a  prominent  ridge,  while  the  lateral  portions  of  the  vahe 
are  gently  concave  and  vertically  turned  up  at  the  extremity;  lateral  margins  un- 
dulating; front  margin  abruptly  raised,  straight  along  the  middle;  surface  of  both 
valves  ornamented  with  numerous  small  bifurcating  ridges  or  ribs."  The  above 
description  applies  to  the  Australian  representatives  so  fully  as  to  make  it  un- 
necessary to  give  them  a  separate  one. 

In  North  America  this  species  occurs  associated  with  A.  reticularis  in  Silurian 
rocks  (Niagara  Formation), f  and  is  there  said  by  the  authors  quoted  to  have  been 
short  lived,  just  as  it  appears  to  have  been,  as  far  as  evidence  yet  available  goes 
to  show,  in  Australia. 

The  discovery  of  this  very  remarkaljle  Atrypa  in  Australia  is  of  considerable 
interest  to  paleontologists,  adding,  as  it  does,  another  instance  of  the  remarkalile 
powers  for  world  wide  distribution  possessed  by  certain  types  of  brachiopoda. 
It  would  appear  too,  that  this  species  originated  in  the  British  Isles  and  lived 
there  through  a  longer  geological  period  than  elsewhere.  In  this  State  it  occurs 
plentifully  in  the  lowest  zone  of  the  Lower  Trilobite  Beds  of  the  Bowning  Series 
on  the  East  and  West  sides  of  the  Bowning  S^Ticline.  Its  vertical  range  here 
seems  to  be  very  limited.  It  is  not  improbable  that  it  occurs  also  in  the  Orange 
district,  for  the  fossil  described  by  one  of  usf  under  the  name  of  Camarntecli/ia 


•Hall  and  Clarke,  Pal.  N.T..  vol.  iii.,  Brachiopoda.  pt.  ii.,  p. 173. 

tDun.  Rec.  Geol.  Surv.  N.S.W.,  viii..  pt.  3,  1907,  p. 127,  PL  xl.,  figs. 3,  3b. 


270  TlIK     ATKYPILUK     OF    NEW     SOCTH     WALES, 

sussmilchi  may  be  iilentioiil  with  this  species.  In  En<rlan<l  it  seems  to  range  from 
Lower  to  middle  Upper  Silurian.  In  our  Bowning  rocks  it  is  found  associated 
with  Encrinurus  silverdalensis  E.  &  M.,  E.  mitchelli  Foerste  and  below  beds  con- 
taining Odontopleiira  howningensis  E.  &  M.,  O.  parvissima,  E.  &  M.,  (Jeratoce- 
phula  vogdesi  E.  &  M.,  and  these  rocks  are  not  younger  than  those  of  Wenlock 
age.  The  occurrence  of  this  small  Atriipa  at  such  a  distance  from  places  where 
pre\'iously  found  will  no  doubt  be  of  much  interest  to  geologists,  and  may  help  to 
indicate  the  route  along  which  Palaeozoic  marine  faunas  were  distributed  from 
Europe  to  Australia  or  vice  versa. 

The  first  record  of  its  presence  in  Australian  rocks  appears  to  have  lieen 
made  by  one  of  us.* 

Loc.  and  horizon. — Silverdale,  Parish  of  Derrengullen,  County  King;  and  one 
mile  south  of  Bowning  Public  School.  Parish  of  Bowning,  County  Harden. 
Lower  Trilobite  Beds,  Bo^vning  Series. 

Atrypa  pfLCHRA,  n.sp.     (PL   xiv..  tig.   19;   PI.  xvi..  tig-s.   14-lf).) 

Shell  subdiseoidal  or  rarely  oval,  biconvex,  radial  ami  concentric  striae  very 
fine,  and  form  a  beautiful  caucellate  pattern ;  marginal  Iriuge  very  narrow,  and 
mildly  recurved,  hinge  line  arcuate,  front  margin  very  mildly  sinuate.  Pedicle 
valve  about  as  convex  as  the  brachial  valve,  from  the  umbo  for  two  thirds  of  its 
lengfh  medially  decidedly  ridged,  and  opposed  to  this  in  the  brachial  valve  is  a 
shallow  sulcus;  benk  moderately  prominent,  mildly  incurved,  foramen  conspicuou-^ 
iuid  circular.  Brachial  valve  evenly  and  moderately  to  fairly  strongly  convex 
in  adult  specimens;  sulcus  faint  and  vanishes  as  it  reaches  the  middle  of  the  valve. 
Dimensions  of  an  adult  specimen — length  and  width,  15.4  mm.,  depth,  9.4  mm. 

Obs. — This  species  differs  from  the  .1.  reticularis  in  (1)  its  small  size.  (2) 
exceedingly  fine  ornamentation,  (3)  approximately  equal  biconvexity  of  the 
valves,  (4)  greater  prominence  of  the  beak  of  file  pedicle  valve  and  of  its  fora- 
men, (5)  its  uniformly  subcircular  outline.  (6)  very  narrow  marginal  fringe. 

We  have  no  specimen  showing  internal  structure,  but  from  external  eviden^'e 
we  assume  it  to  closely  resemble  that  of  A.  reticularis  in  this  particular.  The 
specimens  of  this  species  used  for  the  present  description  were  obtained  chiefly 
from  the  upper  of  the  lime.stone  beds  of  Limestone  Creek,  Silverdale,  immediately 
below  the  Lower  Trilobite  Beds  of  the  Bowning  Series,  and  were  associated  with 
numerous  corals  representing  the  genera  Favosites,  Heliolites,  CiMtliopIiiillum  and 
Tryplasma  and  with  .1.  reticularis,  etc.  The  vertical  range  of  this  fossil  is  ap- 
parently limited. 

I^dc.  and  hnrizoH. — Limestone  Creek,  Silverdale.  near  Bowning,  Parish  of 
Derrengullen,   County  King.     Probably    Wenlock. 

Atrypa  DrxTROONEXsis,  n.sp.     (PI.  xvi.,  figs.  8-12.) 

Shell  almost  equally  biconvex  oval,  radial  ribs  subsharply  ridged,  not  pro- 
minent, dichotomise  two  or  three  times,  concentric  striae  fine  and  very  numerous 
and  undulating  towards  the  front.  Pedicle  valve  moderately  convex  throughout, 
slightly  upturned  at  the  margins,  umbo  and  beak  not  prominent,  the  latter  de- 
pressed. Bracliial  valve  slightly  more  tumid  than  the  other,  muscle  scars  incon- 
spicuous, the  margin  in  front  very  slightly  sinuate.  Dimensions:  Length,  10.7. 
width,  17,  depth  11  mm.     These  dimensions  are  for  mature  specimens. 


•Mitchell,  Proo.  Aust.  Assocn.  Adv.  Sc,  i.,  1887  (1888),  p.293. 


BY    JOHX   MITCHELL  AXD  W.    S.    DUK.  271 

Obs. — Among  specimens  forwarded  by  the  late  Rev.  W.  B.  Clai-ke  to  the 
late  Rev.  Sedgwick  in  1844*  from  Dimtroon,  N.S.W.,  Salter  reported  having 
recognised  Atrypa  reticularis  Linn.  We  are  of  the  opinion  that  the  shell 
now  under  review  is  specifically  identical  with  the  one  referred  to  by  Salter. 
It  certainly  bears  some  resemblance  to  the  normal  A.  reticularis,  and  on  first  in- 
spection we  were  inclined  to  make  it  a  variety  of  the  normal  form  but  on  closer 
study  of  it,  determined  to  give  it  specific  rank.  From  A.  reticularis  it  differs  in 
having  the  valves  almost  equally  convex,  little  or  no  foliated  margin,  very  fine 
wavy  and  numerous  concentric  striae,  no  defined  sulcus  in  either  valve,  slightly 
sinuate  margins,  and  the  length  invariably  gi'eater  than  the  width.  In  some  re- 
spects this  species  resembles  A.  (?)  headii  Billings  var.  anglica.  Found  asso- 
ciated with  Encrinurus  duntroonensis  E.  and  M.  and   Trinuclem  clarkei  Mitchell. 

Loc.  and  horizon. — Near  Duntroon  homestead.  Parish  of  Canberra,  County 
jMurray . 

Atkypa  desquajiata  Sowerby.     (PI.    xv.,  figs.  12,  13.) 

This  species  was  recorded  by  de  Koninck  from  New  South  Wales,  but  no 
particulars  of  locality  were  given. 

Specimens  of  the  species  have  been  collected  from  the  black  cave  limestone 
beds  of  Cave  Flat,  and  Goodravale,  Parish  of  Woolgarlo,  County  Harden,  and  the 
Tarago  District,  by  officers  of  the  Department  of  Mines,  Sydney,  and  one  of  us, 
and  it  will  be  noticed,  on  reference  to  our  figures  given  of  a  specimen  of  the  local 
form,  that  it  agrees  with  the  Euroj^ean  types. 

Atrypa  plicatella  de  Koninck. 

This  species  was  said  to  have  been  found  in  a  black  limestone  in  Yass  district.f 

No  subsequent  reference  seems  to  have  been  made  regarding  the  occuiTence 

of  this  species  in  New  South  Wales  rocks.  Judging  by  the  figures  and  description 

we  are  not  disposed  to  accept  de  Koninck's  determination.     Externally  it  bears 

little  if  any  resemblance  to  an  Atrypid. 

Atrypoidea,  n.g. 

Geii.  chars. — Shells  strongly  biconvex  and  at  maturity  some  forms  ovoid  to 
globular,  not  conspicuously  inequivalve,  surface  smooth,  but  sometimes  very 
faintly  showing  concentric  growth  lines.  Beaks  not  prominent,  hinge  line 
straight  and  moderately  long;  cardinal  angles  high  and  rounded.  Pedicle,  valve 
less  convex  than  the  brachial,  with  or  without  a  faint  sulcus,  beak  of  the  pedicle 
valve  relatively  small,  depressed  and  incurved.  Foramen  apical  and  circular  in 
mature  specimens.  Anterior  margin  moderately  to  very  intensely  sinuate.  The 
deltidial  plates  and  teeth  have  not  been  observed.  Muscle  scars  appear  to  be 
large  and  moderately  defined.  Brachial  valve  very  convex,  no  defined  median  fold 
except  in  cases  of  mature  specimens  in  which,  towards  the  front,  a  short  fold  is 
sometimes  developed,  but  sometimes  bearing  a  very  faint  medial  sulcus.  No 
cardinal  area,  beak  incurved  and  concealed.  Crura  unknown.  Brachidia  or 
spirals  form  cones,  consisting  of  about  ten  volutions  in  specimens  reaching  two 
thirds  maturity.  The  apices  of  the  cones  are  directed  towards  the  centre  of  the 
brachial  valve  cavity,  but  in  one  or  two  cases  they  had  a  droop  anteriorly  which 
may  have  arisen  from  accidental  causes. 


'Ofi.  cH. 

Me  Koninck,  Mem.  Geol.  Siu-v.  N.S.W.,  Pal.  Xo.  (i,  1898,  p. 78,  PI.  iii.,  figs.  4  and  4rt. 


272  THE     ATRYPIDAE     OF    NEW     SOUTH     WALES, 

06s. — The  features  which  separate  this  genus  from  Atri/pa  are  the  great 
bicouvexity  and  smoothness  of  the  valves,  absence  of  marginal  fringe  and  radial 
striae  or  ribs. 

Genotype,  Atrypoidea  australis. 

Atrypoidea  australis   n.gen.  et   sp.    (PI.  xiv.,  tigs.  1-18;  PL  xv.,  figs.  8,  9; 

PL  xvi.,  figs.  7,  13.) 

Shells  intensely  biconvex  to  subglobular  in  mature  specimens.  In  young 
specimens  mildly  convex  beak,  as  maturity  is  approached  the  convexity  and  front 
sinus  of  the  valves  rapidly  develop,  and  at  no  stage  of  growth  is  the  difference 
in  the  convexity  of  the  two  valves  of  this  species  very  pronounced,  though  that 
of  the  brachial  valve  is  the  greater:  cardinal  angles  rounded,  hinge  line  wide, 
straight  or  only  gently  arcuate.  Pedicle  valve  has,  in  some  large  specimens,  a 
faint  medial  fold  extending  from  the  umbo  to  the  front  and,  on  each  side  of  this 
fold,  a  very  shallow  faint  sulcus;  opposed  to  this  in  the  brachial  valve  is  a  faint 
sulcus  bounded  by  an  exceedingly  faintly  defined  fold,  but  this  feature  does  not 
appear  to  be  constant,  for,  in  some  forms,  the  plainness  of  the  surface  is  unin- 
terrupted and  in  others  a  feeble  sulcus  takes  the  place  of  the  fold;  front  sinus 
wide  and  deep  in  mature  specimens,  its  intensity  gradually  develbping  with  age, 
^ery  immature  shells  having  none.  Brachial  valve  very  convex  and  at  no  stage  of 
growth  showing  a  decided  fold,  beak  small  and  concealed.  Dimetisions  of  a  ma- 
ture individual  (PL  xiv..  figs.  5  and  6)  :  Length,  28,  width,  28,  thickness,  22  mm. 
The  projiortions  of  these  measurements  remain  very  constant  for  sizes  of  shells 
from  half  to  full  maturity. 

06s. — A  specimen  of  this  species  was  described  l)y  one  of  us*  under  tiie 
name  of  Merlstina  australis.  This  determination  and  description  was  based  upon 
superficial  features  only,  which  indeed  very  closely  resembled  those  of  the  Meris- 
ti)ia  group.  That  there  were  good  reasons  for  this  determination  is  shown  by 
the  fact  that  specimens  of  this  new  group,  showing  only  external  features,  were 
submitted  to  British  palaeontologists  and  they  referred  them  to  Meristina  tumida. 
More  recently,  specimens  of  the  group  with  spirals  preserved  enable  us  now  to 
place  it  in  or  near  its  proper  phylogenetic  position,  and  that  it  belongs  to 
Atnjpidae,  we  believe,  cannot  be  disputed,  though  certainly  a  few  features  of  its 
internal  structure  remain  to  be  revealed,  but  we  do  not  expect  the  revelation  of 
them  will  materially  alter  the  views  we  have  arrived  at  with  respect  to  its  classi- 
fication. Externally  the  group  shows  some  features  rot  seen  in  Atrypa,  yet 
on  the  other  hand  has  others  that  are  truly  Atrypoid,  as,  for  instance,  the  straight 
hinge  line,  absence  of  cardinal  area,  high  rounded  cardinal  angles,  d?nressed  in- 
curved beak  of  the  pedicle  valve,  and  very  strongly  convex  biachial  valve.  They 
are  certainly  extraordinary  Atrypids  and  up  to  the  present  are  known  to  occur 
only  in  the  limestones  of  Molong  and  the  impure  limy  shales  of  the  Bowning 
Series,  and  the  specimens  in  these  different  districts  are,  for  the  most  part,  alike 
specifically.  Those  belonging  to  the  present  species  from  IMolong  are  uniformly 
of  much  larger  size  than  the  Bowuing-Yass  (Hatton's  Corner)  representatives. 
Tliis  variation  may  have  arisen  from  more  favourable  conditions  for  their  de- 
velopment having  prevailed  in  the  Molong  area  than  at  Bowning.  In  the  former 
the  sea  was  clear,  and  free  from  the  muddy  sediment  present  in  the  latter.  Be- 
sides the  relative  smallness  of  the  Hatton's  Corner  members  of  the  species,  they 


•Dun.  Records  Geol.  Surv.  N.S.W.,  vii.,  1904.  p.318. 


BY    JOHN    MITCHELL  AND  W.   S.   VUK.  273 

also  appear  to  have  a  slightly  less  conspicuous  umbo  and  beak  than  those  from 
Molong;  also  the  strong  tongue-like  anterior  sinus  would  seem  to  have  developed 
at  an  earlier  stage  of  growth  in  those  from  Hatton's  Corner  than  in  the  others. 
Further,  in  one  specimen  of  this  species  from  Molong,  the  braehidia  show  a  rather 
strong  droop  apically,  but  this  would  appear  to  be  accidental,  for  others  from 
Molong  show  the  apices  of  the  spiralia  to  be  directed  almost  towards  the  centre 
of  the  brachial  valve,  and  this  agrees  with  the  Hatton's  Corner  types. 

Loc.  and  horizon. — Near  Molong,  Parish  of  Bomey,  County  Wellington;  Hat- 
ton's Corner,  Parish  of  Yass,  County  Murray;  Gurnett's  Selection,  three  miles 
west  of  Bowning,  Parish  of  Bowning,  County  Harden.     Upper  Silurian. 

ATRYPOinEA  ANiiUSTA,  n . sp .      (PI.  xiv.,  figs,  20-29.) 

Shell  intensely  biconvex,  subquadrate,  smooth;  length  greater  than  width, 
valve  margins  intensely  sinuate,  front  sinus  very  deep.  Hinge  line  mildly  ar- 
cuate; umbonal  ridges  low  and  spreading.  Pedicle  valve  transversely  and  longi- 
tudinally strongly  convex,  just  below  the  umbonal  region  the  inflation  is  so  great 
that  it  gives  the  shell  quite  a  hunchback  aspect;  towards  the  front  a  very  faint 
sulcus  is  developed,  the  sides  of  it  being  slightly  more  depressed  than  the  medial 
portion,  indenting  lip  tongue-like  and  long.  Umbo  of  moderate  size,  beab 
strongly  incurved  and  depressed,  aperture  small.  Brachial  valve  very  much 
arched  transversely,  highest  in  front  of  its  centre,  and  developing  into  a  strong 
fold  on  the  anterior  third.  Dimensions:  Length,  23.4,  width,  22,  thickness,  18.7 
mm.,  for  the  largest  specimens  from  Bowning  and  Molong;  but  the  specimens 
from  Hatton's  Corner  so  far  collected,  are  much  smaller,  the  largest  from  here 
measuring— length,  19,  width,  17.2,  thickness,  14  mm.,  respectively,  and  an  im- 
mature specimen  from  Molong  had  the  same  dimensions.  The  relative  propor- 
tions of  these  measurements  are  fairly  constant  for  the  specimens  from  all  three 
localities". . 

(Jbs. — The  internal  structure  of  the  species  has  been  observed  in  the  Bowning 
form  only  and  agi'ees  in  the  spiralia  with  the  genotype.  From  the  foregoing 
species  the  present  differs  in  being  much  more  biconvex,  having  a  less  conspicuous 
umbo,  more  strongly  incurved  and  depressed  beak,  narrower  hinge  line,  greater 
length  than  width,  a  greater  relative  thickness,  much  stronger  sinuosity  of  the 
lateral  and  front  margins. 

It  may  be  noted  that  very  immature  shells  of  this  species  cannot  be  dis- 
tinguished from  similar  ones  of  A.  australis.  or  at  least  we  have  not  been  able  to 
do  so  up  to  the  present. 

Loc.  and  horizon. — The  same  as  for  the  preceding  species. 

References  to  records  of  Atrypa  from  other  States  of  Australia. 

Queensland. 

Atrypa  reticularis  Linnaeus. — The  occurrence  of  this  species  has  been  re- 
corded from  the  Fanning  River,  Burdekin  Downs,  by  the  late  R .  Etheridge  Jun .  * 
tnd  by  Foord.f     In  1892,  R.  Etheridge  repeated  his  previous  records.! 

Through  the  courtesy  of  Mr.  B.  Dunstan,  Chief  Government  Geologist  of 
Queensland,  we  have  been  enabled  to  inspect  the  original  specimen  referred  to 

•Proc.  E.  Phys.  See.  Edinh.,  v.,  1880,  p.270. 

tGeol.  Mag.,  vii.,  (3),  1890.  p. 100. 

JGeol.  Pal.  Qld.  and  N.Guinea,  1892,  p.05,  PI.  4,  t.  -t.     . 


,^'A.»^-S:y 


274  THE    ATRYPIDAE    OF    XEW     SOUTH     WALES, 

this  species  by  the  late  Mr.  K.  Etheridge,  Jim.,  and  after  a  very  critical  exataina- 
tion  of  it,  coucliide  that  it  is  not  A.  reticularis,  but  an  immature  A.  desquamata. 
Our  reasons  for  this  conclusion  are  the  prominent  beak,  the  exposure  in  the 
specimen  of  an  area,  and  the  strong  curvature  of  the  lateral  ribs  towards  the  car- 
dinal angles.  In  addition,  the  alleged  A.  reticularis  is  represented  in  the  Mu- 
seum of  the  Geological  Survey,  Brisbane,  only  by  the  single  specimen  which  served 
Mr.  Etheridge  Jr.  for  his  determination.  This  of  itself  is  a  very  suggestive  fact, 
for  A.  reticularis  was  a  very  gi'cgarious  brachiopod  and  wherever  it  occurs,  does 
so,  almost  without  exception,  in  numbers.  It  is  also  worthy  of  remark,  that  this 
fossil  occurs  in  association  with  numerous  individuals  of  Atrypa  desquamata;  a 
circumstance  which  supports  the  contention  that  it  is  an  immature  specimen  of 
the  latter  species. 

Atrypa  desquamata  J.  de  C.  Sowerby. — The  occurrence  of  this  brachiopod 
is  also  recorded  by  Mr.  Etheridge  Jun.§  It  is  found  plentifully  in  the  middle 
Devonian  Rocks  outcropping  in  the  valley  of  the  Fanning,  Burdekin  and  Broken 
Rivers  in  the  Burdekin  Downs  District,  and  the  specimens  collected  from  this 
locality  agree  very  fully  with  the  original  types.  In  New  South  Wales,  to  my 
knowledge,  A.  reticularis  has  never  been  found  in  association  with  A.  desquamata. 
May  this  not  be  the  case  also  in  Queensland?  In  England,  the  two  species  are 
found  commingled  in  Middle  Devonian  Rocks. 

Victoria. 

F.  Chapman*  has  recorded  the  occurrence  of  A.  reticularis  var.  decurrens 
from  the  Yeringian  of  Yeriug  and  Loyola;  A.  aspera  Schloth.  from  Loyola  and 
the  Middle  Devonian  of  Bindi;  and  A.  fimbriata  from  Lilydale.  The  latter  form 
he  compared  with  ^1.  hystrix  and  A.  spinosa  J.  Hall  from  the  Chemung  and 
Hamilton  Groups  of  N.  America.  In  general  these  forms  have  extra- Australian 
Devonian  affinities. 

Mr.  Chapman  observes  with  reference  to  the  occurrence  of  .1.  reticularis 
that  he  tinds  it  to  be  very  common  in  the  limestone  beds  and  much  less  common 
in  the  shales  of  the  Yeringian  beds  of  Victoria.  In  the  Downing- Yass  beds  of 
New  South  Wales,  the  same  thing  is  noticeable,  and  it  appears  that  this  preference 
for  clear  sea  Hoors  on  the  part  of  this  reniarkal)!e  brachiopod  is  manifest  in  every 
part  of  the  world  where  it  is  found.  With  reference  to  his  A.  aspera,  recorded 
from  the  Yeringian  beds  and  which  he  says  had  been  recorded  from  tlie  Silurian 
and  Devonian  of  Victoria  previously  by  McCoy,  it  must  be  observed  that  the 
latter  regarded  it  as  a  variety  of  A.  reticularis.  We  have  some  doubts  as  to  the 
correctness  of  this  determination,  though  it  must  be  admitted  that  the  concentric 
lamellae  exhiliited  liy  Mr.  Chapman's  species  closely  resemble  tliose  of  the  ori- 
ginal type.  Whether  Mr.  Chapman's  conclusion  is  right  or  not,  it  must  not  be 
overlooked  that  many  palaeontologists  recognise  A.  aspera  only  as  a  variety  of 
A.  reticularis. 

Atrypa  reticularis  var.  decurrevs,  to  ns,  seems  a  slightly  abnormal  A.  reticu- 
laris. Some  similar  specimens  have  been  noticed  by  one  of  us  from  the  Bowning 
Beds.  ,1.  fmhriata  Chapman  is  a  very  interesting  species  and  as  Mr.  ('lia)iman 
points  out  is  very  like  A.  hystri.r  J.  Hall.  Notliing  similar  has  yet  been  collected 
from  New  South  Wales.  Mr.  Chapman t  has  also  recorded  ^1.  reticularis  from 
O'Keefe's  Gully,  Aberfeldy  River,  and  Atrypa  sp.  from  Tyer's  River. 

§Aof.  rif. 

•Proc.  Roy.  Sec.  Vict.,  xxvi.,  (N.S.),  Pt.  i.,  1913,  pp.107-109. 

+Rec.  Geol.  Survey  Vic,  ii.,  Pt.  i.,  1907,  pp.68,  71. 


BY  JOHN  MITCHELL  AND  VT.    S.   DUN. 


275 


Western  Australia. 

A.  H.  Foordt  records  Atrypa  reticularis  from  Mt.  Piene,  Kimberley  Dis- 
trict, associated  with  Ulnjiichonella  pleurodnn  and  RhijnclioneUa  cuboides,  in  the 
Stroraatoporoid  horizon  which  Nicholson  considered  to  be  Upper  Devonian.  To 
our  knowledg-e,  no  specimen  of  this  species  from  a  similar  horizon  in  Eastern 
Australia  has  vet  been  collected. 


Figs. 

Figs. 

Fig. 
Figs. 

Fig. 
Figs. 


1  —  4 


S. 

9  —11 

12. 

13— IS 


19. 


Fig. 

Pigs.   20-21 


Figs. 
Pigs. 

Fig. 
Fig. 


22—26, 

27 28 . 


EXPL.\N.\TION  OF  PL.\TES  XTV.-XVI. 
Plate  xiv. 

(.-Ml   figures   natural   size.) 

Alrvf>oiiiea  aiistnilis.    Mitchell  and  Dun. 
Ventral,   profile   and   dorsal   view?   nf   two   perfect   young   specimens. 
Molong.     Coll.     Mitchell. 
Front,   profile   and   ventral   view    of   a    mature    specimen.        Molong, 

ing.     Coll.  Mitchell. 
Front  view  of  a  nearly  mature  specimen.     Molong.     Coll.     Mitchell. 
Front,  profile  and  ventral  views  of  the  largest  specimen  from  Down- 
ing.    Coll.   Mitchell. 

Ventral  view  of  specimen  shown  in  figure  S.  Molong.  Coll.  Mitchell. 
Specimens  from  Hatton's  Corner,  Yass  River.  Fig.  13  shows  the 
largest  shell  from  that  locality;  fig.  18,  a  small,  square-shouldered 
form  with  inconspicuous  umbo.     Coll.     Mitchell. 

Atrvpa pulchra  Mitchell  and  Dun. 
.\  perfect  specimen,  dorsal  aspect..   Silverdale,  near  Bowning.     Coll. 
Mitchell. 

Atrvpoidea  aiigiisfa  ^litchell  and  Dun. 
Oblique  profile  and  front  view  of  largest  specimen  from  the  Bowning 
series.     This  shows,  in  the  original  where  the  brachial  valve  is  weath- 
ered   slightly,   faint   outlines   of   one   of  the   spirals.     Gurnett's   fann, 
three  miles  west  of  Bowning.     Coll.     Mitchell. 
29.   Specimens  from   Molong,   at  various  stages  of  growth. 
Front  and  profile  views  of  two  specimens  from  Hatton's  Corner,  Yass 
River . 

Plate   XV. 

Atrvpa  rciicnhiris  Linn . 
A  beautifully  weathered  transverse   section   of  a  large   shell,  showing 
the  spiral  cones  and  great  inflation  of  the  brachial  valve.     Wellington 
Caves.     Coll.     Mining   Museum.   Sydney. 

Same  specimen  as  fig.   3,  but  enlarged   to  show  the  surface  ornamen- 
tation. 


JGeol.  Mag.,  Dec.  3,  vii.,  1890,  pp.lOO-l. 


276  THK     ATRYPIDAF,     OF     NEW     SOFTH     WALES. 

Figs.     3—  4.  Ventral  and  front  views  of  normal  specimen   from   the  same  locality 

and   Collection . 
Fig.     .").  A  very  large  specimen   (silicifiedi.  showing,  rather  plainly,  one  spiral 

cone    with    some    twenty    coils    and    tongue-like,  sinuation    in    front. 
Reduced.      Wellington.      Coll.    Minmg    ,Museum.    Sydney,    X.S-W. 
Figs.     6 —  7.  Ventral    views    of    two    adult    shells.      Derrengullen    Creek,    near    its 
junction  with  Limestone  Creek.     Coll.    Mitchell. 
Atrypoidea  aus/ralis   Mitchell  and  Dun. 
Figs.  8 —  9.   Dorsal   and   ventral   views,   enlarged.     Coll.   Mining   Museum    Sydney. 

A/iypa  ereilirostris    Mitchell   and   Dun. 
Figs.   10 — 11.   Dorsal  and  ventral  views  of  two  specimens,   slightly   reduced.     Cave 
Flat.     Coll.    Mitchell. 

Atrypa  desquamata  Sowerby. 
Figs.   12 — 13.   Front  and  dorsal  views  of  a  specimen  from  Cave  Flat,  near  the  junc- 
tion  of   the   Gcodradigbee   and   Murrumbidgee    Rivers.     Coll.    Mining 
'  Museum.  Sydney,  N.S.W. 

Aiiypa  inwginalis    Dalm. 
Figs.    U — 16.   \'entral.    dorsal    and    front    views    of    three    nearly    adult    specimens. 
Limestone  Creek.   Silverdale,  near  Bowning.   Coll-    Mitchell. 

Plate   xvi. 

^■Itrypa  Jiiarginalis  Dalm. 

Figs.      1 —  ,5.   Photos  of  specimens  of  different  stages  of  growth,  slightly  enlarged. 

Coll.    Mitchell. 
Fig.     6.  A    small    specimen    with    concentric    ornamentation,    like   A.    Aspeia 

Schloth.     Coll.    Mitchell. 

Atrypoidea  ans/ralis  Mitchell  and  Dun. 
Figs.  7  and  13.  A   sketch   and  photo,  of  a  specimen   from   which   the  brachial   is   re- 
moved and  the  spiral  cones  exposed.     Fig.  13  (enlarged  2*. 
Atrvpa  diiii/i-ooiu'lisis  Mitchell  and  Dun. 
Figs.     S — 11.   Four  different  specimens,  dorsal  and  ventral  views. 
Fig.    12.  Same  specimen  as  Fig.  9,  enlarged   (x  2). 

Atrypa  pn/r/ira    Mitchell  and  Dun. 
Fig.    14.  Dorsal  view,  sHghtly  enlarged. 

Figs.  15  and  16.  Ventral   and    dor.sal    views    of   mature    specimens    (x   2'.        Fig.    16 
same  as  fig.   14.   'Limestone   Creek.      Coll.    Mitchell. 
Atrypa  erec/irostris  ilitchell  and  Dun. 
Fig.   17.  A    voung    specimen — shows    the    high,    erect    umbo,    acutely    pointed 

beak,   steeply  sloping  umbonal  ridges,  and  radial  striae,     (x  2.1 
Fig.    IS.  An  immature  specimen  in  which  the  dorsal  valve  has  been  weathered 

away    and    exposed    the    spirals.     The    apex    of    the    beak    has    been 
weathered  off.      (x  2.1     Coll.    Mitchell. 
Atrypa  reticularis  Linn. 
Figs.  19  and  20.  Two  specimens  with   the   marginal   fring  s  partly   preserved. 


277 


NOTE  ON  CERTAIN   VARIATIONS    OF  THE    SPOROCYST  IN   A 
SPECIES  OF  SAPROLEGNIA.* 

By  Marjoeie  1.  Collins,  B.Sc,  Linneax  Macleay  Fellow  of  the  Society  m 

Botany. 

(Witli  eleven  Text-figures.) 

Introduction. 

During  the  summer  of  1919,  a  quantity  of  Saprolegnia  Avas  made  available  to 
the  writer  by  the  aecidental  drowning  of  a  beetle,  in  a  tank  situated  in  the  glass- 
house of  the  Botany  Department,  University  of  Adelaide.  The  material,  with  a 
little  water  from  the  tank,  was  transferred  to  the  laboratory  and  kept  under 
observation  for  some  weeks.  It  was  found  to  show  variations  in  sporocyst  forma- 
tion similar  to  these  recorded  by  Lechmeref  for  Saprolegnia  Thureti  and  certain 
additional  variations  which  are  thought  to  be  of  sufficient  interest  to  place  on 
record. 

Since  sexual  reproduction  was  not  observed,  it  was  impossible  to  identify  the 
species  under  examination  with  any  accuracy.  Judging  by  the  stout  nature  of 
the  hyphae,  however,  it  seems  probable  that  the  species  is  identical  with  that 
of  Lechmere's  work.  Saprolegnia   Thur.-ti. 

The  writer's  thanks  are  due  to  Professor  T.  G.  B.  Osborn.  University  of 
Adelaide,  in  whose  Department  these  observations  were  made,  for  his  interest  in 
the  work. 

Previous  In  restigations. 

In  his  investigation  of  certain  species  of  Saprolegnia  Lechmeret  draws  atten- 
tion to  the  marked  variability  in  the  nature  of  sporocyst  formation  and  dis- 
charge. In  addition  to  the  normal  Saprolegnia  type  of  sporocyst,  he  records  five 
variations,  each  of  which  shows  features  which  are  characteristic  of  a  distinct 
genus  of  the  Saprolegniaceae.  These  variations  are  all  concerned  with  the  nature 
of  discharge  of  the  sporoeysts,  and  sometimes  result  in  the  suppression  of  the 
first,  second  or  of  toth  motile  phases.  The  following  is  a  brief  summary  of  the 
sporocyst  variations  observed  by  Lechmere : — 

1.  Leptolegnia  condition,  where  the  zoospores  are  arranged  in  a  single  row 
in  a  long  cylindrical  sporocyst.     Two  motile  phases. 

2.  Pythiopsis  condition,  where  the  spores  swarm  feebly  from  a  club-shaped 
sporocyst,  and  come  to  rest  near  the  mouth  of  the  sporocyst.  No  record  of  a 
second  motile  phase. 


*The  observations  recorded  in  this  paper  were  made  while  the  writer  held  the  position 
of  Demonstrator  in  Botany,  The  University  of  Adelaide. 
tNew  Phytologist,  ix.,  1910,  p.-TOS. 
ILoc.  lit. 


278  NARIATIOX.S  OP  THE  SPOROCYST    IS    SAPROLEGNIA, 

3.  Achilla  eoiulitiun.  wliert-  the  tirst  iiKitile  phase  is  merely  represented  by 
the  liberation  of  the  spores,  which  encyst  in  a  mass  near  the  mouth  of  the  sporo- 
cyst.     The  second  motile  jjhase  occurs  later. 

■i.  Dictiiuchus  condition,  where  the  spores  encyst  within  the  sporocyst,  re- 
gardless of  the  terminal  opening  formed  for  their  exit.  Later,  the  spores  leave 
their  cyst  cases,  enter  upon  the  second  motile  phase,  pass  out  through  the 
terminal  opening,  often  pushing  their  empty  cyst  cases  befoi-e  them.  A  second 
Dictyuchus  condition  is  described*  where  the  zoospores  pass  directly  through  the 
wall  of  the  sporocyst.  There  is  no  definite  statement  as  to  how  the  zoospores 
pass  through  the  sporocyst  wall,  but  from  Lechmere's  figure  17  we  can  only 
infer  tJiat  the  sporocyst  wall  degenerates  at  certain  places  to  allow  the  escape  of 
the   zoospores. 

5.  Aplanes  condition,  where  all  motility  is  suppressed,  and  germination  is 
direct  within  the  sporocyst,  the  germ  tubes  growing  out  through  the  wall  of  the 
sporocyst. 

A  variation  of  the  sporocyst  known  as  the  "Dictyuchics-torm."  was  recorded 
for  the  Saprolegniaceae  prior  to  Lechmere's  work.  Hartogt  refers  to  this  form 
in  his  analysis  of  the  genera  in  the  Saprolegniaceae ,  as  follows : — 

"Dictyuchus-iorui.  When  the  spores  of  Achlya  or  Saproleynia  fail  to  leave 
it  [the  sporocyst]  at  maturity,  they  encyst  within,  constituting  this  fomi  or 
dictyosporange.  They  either  swarm  ultimately  in  the  second  form  or  germinate 
in  situ  by  emission  of  a  hypha."  The  "Dictyiichiui-lLorm"  of  Hartog  is  evidently 
the  dictyosporocyst  of  Lechmere  wliich  includes  the  Dictyuchus  and  Aplanes  condi- 
tions. 

In  the  present  investigation,  which  was  made  upon  material  growing  under 
natural  conditions  as  well  as  upon  white  of  egg  cultures,  the  writer  observed 
sporocysts  of  the  Lepiolegnia,  Pythiopsis,  Achlya  and  Aplanes  types  similar  to 
those  described  by  Lechmere.  In  addition,  certain  remarkable  composite  sporo- 
cysts were  observed  which  combine  the  characters  of  from  two  to  four  genera; 
also  a  new  Dicti/uchtis  condition  which  diffei's  from  either  of  those  described  by 
Lechmere.t 

Material  was  selected  from  the  body,  legs,  wings  and  antennae  of  the  in- 
sect in  order  to  ascertain  whether  the  sporocyst  variations  were  restricted  to  any 
particular  part  of  the  host,  and  whether  their  occurrence  is  influenced  by  the 
amount  of  available  nutriment.  Although  the  general  growth  of  the  hyphae  was 
found  to  be  more  vigorous  upon  the  body  of  the  insect,  the  abnornial  sporocysts 
occurred  freely  on  all  parts. 

Upon  transferring  part  of  the  material  to  tap  water  in  the  laboratory,  the 
production  of  sporocysts  was  stimulated  in  both  old  and  young  hyphae.  Young 
liyiihae  show  a  preponderance  of  the  normal  Saprolegnia  type  of  sporocyst  in 
which  two  motile  (iliases  were  observed.  In  old  hypliae,  however,  the  new  sporo- 
cysts often  form  within  or  at  the  base  of  three  or  four  discharged  sjjorocysts.  In 
these  cases  some  of  the  new  zoospores  find  dilliculty  of  escape,  and  encyst  during 
their  passage  through  the  old  dischai-ged  sporocysts  (Text-fig.  1).  Encystment 
within  the  sporocyst  under  these  conditions  is  found  to  occur  at  apin-oximately 
the  same  time  as  that  of  zoospores  which  succeed  in  escaping.      Retained  zoospore."; 


•Now  Phytologist,  x.,  191.1,  pp.  167-203. 

+Ann.  Bet.,  xi..  1888-89,  p.20;{. 

♦New  Phytologist,  ix.,  1910,  1...W8:  aii.t  x..  liltl,  p.lO; 


BT    MARJORIE  I.   COLLINS. 


279 


which  encyst  in  tlie  above  manner,  do  not  enter  upon  a  second  motile  phase,  but 
germinate  directly  within  the  sporocyst.  In  some  eases  a  germ  tube  from  an  en- 
cysted zoospore  has  been  observed  to  grow  back  through  a  series  of  empty  sporo- 
cysts  and  penetrate  the  hypha  behind  for  some  distance  (Text-fig.  2) .  The 
Aplanes  type  of  germination  by  penetration  of  the  wall  of  the  sporocyst,  does  not 
occur  under  these  circumstances. 

In  cultures  made  upon  white  of  egg,  early  sporocyst  formation  was  decidedly 
of  the  Saprolegnia  type,  but  after  some  days,  all  the  variations  recorded  ap- 
peared in  the  culture.     Owing  to  the  rapidity  of  their  formation,  it  was  impos- 


Text-fig.  1.  ShowiBg  formation  of  new 
sporocyst  at  base  of  old  discharged 
sporocysts.  Note  encystment  of 
some  of  the  zoospores  (luring  pass- 
age through  empty  sporocysts. 
(x  about  170). 

Text-fig. 2.  (iermination  of  spore  which 
has  encysted  within  old  sporocyst. 
Note  penetration  of  hypha  behind, 
(x  about  170) . 


sible  to  discover  any  definite  sequence  of  formation  of  sporocyst  types.  It  was 
found,  however,  that  normal  sporocysts  occur  more  abundantly  in  the  young  cul- 
ture, though  they  continue  to  be  formed  to  a  slight  degree,  after  the  abnormal 
forms  have  made  their  appearance.  Leptolegma,  Pythiopsis  and  Achlya  condi- 
tions were  found  to  be  more  rare  than  Dietyuchus  and  Aplanes  conditions. 

The  most  noticeable  feature  of  the  material  was  the  prevalence,  under  both 
natural  and  cultural  conditions,  of  two  forms  of  sporocyst  unrecorded  by  previous 
investigators.  The  first  of  these  is  certainly  a  Dietyuchus  condition,  though  it 
differs  in  salient  features  from  either  of  the  Dietyuchus  conditions  described  by 
Lechmere.  In  reference  to  the  formation  of  the  Dietyuchus  condition  on  a  white 
of  egg  culture,  Lechmere  says : — 

"The  numerous  resting  sporocysts  present  on  the  mycelium  commenced  to 
develop  into  sporocysts.  In  by  far  the  greater  number  of  cases  observed,  the 
spores  encysted  within  the  sporocyst  before  its  discharge,  in  spite  of  the  fact 
that  a  tubular  process  was  developed  on  the  sporocyst  before  the  spores  encysted.'"' 

•New  Phytologist,  ix.,  1910,  p.316,  PI.  2,  figs.  30,  31. 


280 


VARIATIONS    OF   THE   SPOROCY><T    IX    SAPROLEGXIA, 


Also,  "The  zoospores  were  observed  lea\iug  their  cyst  walls  ami  escaping  through 
the  tubular  process,  pushing  before  them  the  empty  cyst  cases  which  were  in  the 
tube/'t  Leehmere  only  observed  this  condition  during  the  development  of  rest- 
ing sporocysts  in  white  of  egg  cultures.  It  is  interesting  to  note  that  here  the 
second  motile  phase  commences  within  the  sporocyst.  A  further  Dietyuclnts  con- 
dition is  recorded  by  Lechmere  in  his  second  paper.J  He  says  of  these  sporo- 
cysts :  "they  are  always  derived  from  gemmae,  and  in  shajje  they  are  broad  and 
short.  The  empt>  spore  eases  form  a  dense  network  within  the  sporocyst,  the 
wall  of  which  is  very  thin  and  is  apparently  directly  penetrated  by  the  zoospores 
on  their  escape  froiii  their  encysted  condition." 

The  Dictyuchus  condition  observed  by  the  writer,  resembles  the  second  of 
Lechmere's  Dictyuchus  forms  in  the  fact  that  the- second  motile  phase  occurs  out- 
side the  sporocyst,  the  first  being  suppressed.  The  sporocysts  are  found  to  be 
either  short  and  club-shaped,  or  long  and  cylindrical;  they  are  never  observed  to 
arise  from  resting  sjjorocysts  and  occur  freely  under  natural  as  well  as  cultural 
conditions.  The  encysted  spores  send  out  a  protuberance  which  penetrates  the 
sporocyst  wall  and  projects  for  a  distance  of  varying  length  (Text-fig.  3).  The 
protoplast  then  shrinks  from  the  cyst  wall,  streams  out  through  the  cyst  tube,  the 


Te.xt-tii^.S.  Portion  of  younj;  J)iclyi(c/ius  sporocyst.  Note  germiiiiition  of  encysted 
spores  and  passing  of  protoplast  through  cyst  tube.    (.\  2:iO) . 

Text-figs. 46.  k  'la.  Club-shaped /-'/V/,l7«7;ft.s'  sporocyst  show-ing liberation  af  ciliated 
zoospore  and  the  coming  to  rest  and  second  encystinent  of  tlie  latter,    (x  2;iO). 


tip  of  wliich  degenerates.  A  ciliated  zoospore  is  liberated  which  reuuiins  at- 
tached to  the  cyst  tube  for  about  five  minutes,  maintaining  a  rocking  motion.  It 
then  swims  away  and  comes  to  rest  close  to  the  sporocyst  after  a  period  of  from 
3 — 5  minutes  (Text-figs.  Ah  and  4«.).  Tliis  motility  is  noticeably  feelile  in  com- 
parison with  the  vigorous  motility  in  Lechmere's  first  Dicttiuclius  condition  where 
the  zoospores  push  (lieir  eiiii>ty   cyst   cases   l)e1'orc  them   wlieii  leaving  the  sporo- 

ifd.,  ix.,  1910,  p.:il7. 

:/(/.,  X.,  1911,  p.l8(i,  fig.  17. 


BY    MARJORIE   I.    COLLINS. 


281 


cyst.  Direct  gennination  follows  this  second  encystment.  This  mode  of  dis- 
charge, through  cyst- tubes  which  penetrate  the  wall  of  the  sporoeyst,  is  similar 
io  the  mode  of  discharge  described  and  figured  by  Lotsy  for  the  genus  Dictyn- 
chus.^ 


Text-fig.  5.    Dictyuchus  type  of  sporoeyst  incompletely  discharged. 

projecting  cyst  tubes  from  empty  cyst  cases,     (x  about  170) . 

,,     -  Text-fig. 6.    Portion    of   a    cylindrical    sporoeyst    showing    combination   of 

■    '  Z?/r/j'i<r/zKi  and  W/>/ff«fi- conditions,     (x  230). 

'•  Text-fig.7.  Composite  spoi-ocyst  showing  predominance  of ' '  Dictyit-Aplanes' ' 

C(/ndition.     Mote  Achlva  type  of  branching  with  lateral  sporocysts  of 

normal  Saprolcgnia  form.    In  the  latter,  complete  discharge  has  led 

to  encystment  and  germination  within  the  sporoeyst.   (x  about  170). 

The  partly  or  wholly  discharged  sporocysts  with  their  empty  cyst  cases  and 
projecting  cyst  tubes  with  abruptly  broken  tips,  present  a  peculiar  and  striking 
appearance  (Text-fig.  5).  In  some  instances  there  is  evidence  of  a  primary  attempt 
at  discharge  of  the  sporoeyst  in  the  nonnal  Saprolegnia  manner  through  a  terminal 
opening    (Text-fig.  5). 


§Lotsy,  Pflanzensystematik,  i.,  1907,  p.  164,  fig.  95, 


282 


\  AHIA'DONN    oy  THE   ISPOKOC'YST    IX    SAPROLE(iXIA, 


In  the  opinion  of  the  writer  tlie  al)ove  is  the  true  DictiiudiuH  couditiou,  that 
described  by  Leci'.niere  being  a  transitional  stage  to  this  condition. 

In  addition  to  a  true  Dictyuchun  and  a  true  Aplanes  condition,  an  interesting 
transition  often  occurs  which  combines  the  featui'es  of  both  these  types.  In  cer- 
tain sporocysts  a  number  of  encysted  spores  germinate  directly,  producing  long 
narrow  tubes  resembling  young  hypliae.  which  penetrate  the  sporoeyst  wall. 
Other  encysted  spores,  within  the  same  sporoeyst,  after  producing  a  cyst  tube, 
cease  to  germinate  and  enter  u])on  a  Dicti/iichus  condition,  the  second  motile 
phase  taking  place  with  the  liberation  of  a  zoospore  from  a  broken  cyst  tube 
(Text-fig.  6) .  This  type  of  sporoeyst  is  a  combination  of  that  where  all  motility 
is  suppressed  (Aplanes)  with  one  in  which  the  second  motile  phase  is  present, 
although  noticeably  feeble  and  short  in  duration.  It  is  interesting  to  note  that 
transitional  form-i  occur,  between  the  true  Dictiiucln(s  conditioii,  through  com- 
posite sporocysts  where  either  the  Dictyuchus  or  Aplanes  condition  is  predomin- 
ant, to  the  pure  Aplanes  form.  It  is  suggested  that  this  composite  sporocy.st 
should  lie  known  a';  tlie  "Dicti/ii-Aplaves"  condition. 


Text-fig.8.  Club-shaped  sporoeyst  of  the  Aplanes  form.  Swollen  structures  at  "a" 
and  "b"  ai-e  formed  by  the  streaming  of  the  protoplasm  towards  the  tip  of  the 
germ  tube,     (x  230). 

Text-fig. 9.  Shows  formation  of  two  germ  tubes  in  terminal  swelling  after  streaming  of 
protoplasm  has  ceased,      (x  230). 


Rare  examples  of  composite  sporocysts  are  found,  in  which  the  features  of 
Achli/a,  Saprolegnia,  Dictyuchus  and  Aplanes  are  eoipbined.  In  Text-fig.  7  the 
Achhja  type  of  branching  is  shown.  The  main  sporoeyst  is  of  the  "Dictyu- 
Aplanes"  form,  while  the  two  basal  sjiorocysts  are  normal  Saprolegnia  sporo- 
cysts incompletcl ,-  disduirged. 


BV    JIAKJOKIK    I.     IJOI.LIXS. 


283 


An  interesting  feature  often  occurs  iu  the  Aplaties  type  of  sporocyst.  iu  wiiat 
may  be  regarded  as  an  attempt  at  escape  of  the  protoplast  during  germination. 
After  some  of  the  germ-tubes  liave  readied  a  certain  length,  a  streaming  move- 
ment is  observed  from  the  body  of  the  germinating  spore.  Part  of  the  proto- 
plasm streams  to  the  tip  of  the  tul)e,  where  a  large  swollen  structure  is  formed 
(Text-fig.  8).  Tbi?  swollen  structure  never  ruptures  the  tip  of  the  germ-tube. 
but  appears  to  function  as  an  encysted  sj-)ore  from  which  one  or  two  germ-tubes 
may  ultimately  develo]i    (Text-fig.  9). 

From  these  observations  it  seems  conceivable  that  the  Aplanes  cunditiiju  has 
arisen  from  the  Dictiiuchus  condition  by  the  delay  of  protoplasmic  activity  until 
the  length  of  the  germ-tube  renders  escape  ineffective. 

Formation  of  New  Sporoeysts. 

Owing  to  the  prevalence  of  Dicti/iichiis,  Aplanes,  and  "DictyH-Aphinefi"  forms 
in  which  the  original  spoi'm-yst  remains  l)lockeil  either  by  empty  cyst  cases  or  bv 


Text-fig.  10.     Short  Didyuchus  sporooyst  showing  penetration  of  hypha  at  base  in 
attempt  to  form  new  sporocyst.      (x  230). 

Text-fig.ll.     Base  of  old  Dictyicchus  sporocyst  showing  lateral  divergence  of  hypha 
to  form  new  sporocyst.     (x  230) . 


germinating  spores,  the  formation  of  a  new  sporocyst  almost  invariably  takes 
]ilaie  l)y  the  lateral  outgrowth  of  the  hypha  from  the  base  of  the  sporocyst.  The 
hypha  grows  forward  until  further  progress  is  blocked,  lateral  divergences  then 
taking  place  (Text-tigs.  10  and  11).  In  this  manner  a  pseudo-^4c/;Z(/o  condition 
is  obtained. 


284  VARIATIOXS   OF  THE  SPOROCTST    IN    SAPBOLEGNIA. 

Summary. 

1.  Certain  speeiw  ol'  iSaprole<jnia  are  known  to  show  variations  in  sporocyst 
formation  and  discbarge,  wlien  grown  under  cultural  conditions. 

2.  In  the  present  investigation  certain  variations  are  recorded  tor  an  undeter- 
mined species  of  Saprolegnia  growing  under  natural  as  well  as  cultural  con- 
ditions. Leptolegnia,  Fytliiopsis  and  Achlya  conditions  occurred  rarely,  while 
Dictyuchuf:  and  ApUuies  conditions  were  found  freipiently.  These  variations  oc- 
curred in  botl?  club-shaped  and  cylindrical  sporocysts,  but  weie  not  observed 
arising  from  resting  sporocysts. 

3.  The  Bictyuchzis  condition  described  here  diti'ei-s  from  either  of  those  described 
by  Leehmere  and  is  held  to  be  the  true  DictyiKhus  condition. 

4.  Composite  sporocysts  were  observed,  the  most  important  of  which  combine 
the  features  of  Dictyuchus  and  Aplaiies.  The  name  "Dictyii-Apla>ie$"  is  sug- 
gested for  these  sporocysts. 

5.  Evidence  is  given  in  favour  of  the  suggestion  that  ttie  Aplaneg  condition  has 
arisen  from  the  Dictyuchus  condition,  by  failure  of  the  protoplast  to  escape 
from  the  germ-tube  during  its  early  growth. 

6.  New  sporocysts  are  frequently  formed  as  lateral,  basal  brandies  of  old  sporo- 
cysts, owing  to  the  blocking  of  the  latter  with  empty  cyst  cases  and  germin- 
ating spores. 

All  Text-figures  were  made  at  table  le\el,  with  Zeiss  camera  lucida  and  tube  at 
160  mm.,  Leitz  objectives  3  and  (i  and  oculars  2  and  4. 


285 


THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROLOGY  OF  THE  GREAT  SERPENTINE 
BELT  OF  NEW  SOUTH  WALES. 

Part  IX. — The  Geology,  Palaeontology  axd  Petrography  of  the 

CURRABUBtTLA  DISTRICT,   WITH  NOTES   ON  ADJACENT     REGIONS. 

By  Professor  W.   N.  Benson,  B.A.,  D.Sc,  F.G.S.,   W.  S.  Dun,  and 
W.  R.   Browne,  B.Sc. 

Section  A. — General  Geology. 

By    W.    N.  Benson,  B.A.,    D.Sc,   F.G.S.    Professor  of  Geology,  The  University 
of  Otago.  N.Z  •  formerly  Linnean  Maeleay  Fellow  of  the  Society  in  Geology. 

(Plates  xvii.-xvii(/;   Text-figures  1-9.) 

CONTENTS. 

Page 

Introduction  and  Acknowledgments 285 

General  Geology  of  the  Western  Zone  of  the  Great  Serpentine  Belt,  especially 

the  Somerton-CarroU  District 286 

The  Geology  of   the  Currabubula  District 292 

Tectonics ■ 307 

The  Age  of  the  Werrie  Volcanic  Series  and  its  relation  to  the  crust-movements  308 

The  Physiography  of  the  Peel  River  Valley  and  its  bordering  Ranges 309 

Summary  of  Geological  History 315 

Introduction  and  Acknowledgments. 

It  has  been  the  endeavour  in  previous  parts  of  this  series  to  present  in  each 
part  a  fairly  detailed  account  of  some  area  or  problem  investigated  in  the  Great 
Serpentine  Belt.  The  preliminary  survey  of  the  whole  belt,  described  in  Parts 
i.  and  vi.  (1-2),*  and  other  studies  (3)  have  indicated  the  significance  of  the 
Carboniferous  crust-movements  and  ^'rilcanicity  in  the  general  tectonic  and  petro- 
logic  evolution  of  the  Serpentine  Belt,  and  it  is  therefore  desirable  that  there 
should  be  made  a  detailed  investigation  of  the  Carboniferous  history  of  the  Ser- 
pentine Belt,  in  addition  to  the  Devonian  history  to  which  attention  has  chiefly 
been  directed  hitlicrt(i.  For  this  reason  the  Currabubula  disti'ict  was  selected  as 
most  suitable  for  study,  being  easy  of  access,  and  hang  midway  between  the 
Burindi  and  Rocky  Creek  regions  already  examined  (though  but  rapidly ),  and  the 
more  fully-known  extensive  development  of  Carboniferous  rocks  in  the  region 
north  of  Newcastle.  Some  four  weeks  were  spent  by  the  writer  in  surveying  iu 
1915,  but  he  was  unable  to  visit  the  region  again  until  January,  1917,  when, 
accompanied  by  Browne,  he  spent  a  week  in  completing  the  mapping  of  about 

*  The  figures  in  brackets  refer  to  the  bibliography  at  the  end  of  the  paper. 


286     GEOLOGY  ANU  PETROLOGY  OP'  THE  GREAT  SERPEXTISE  BELT  OF  X.S.W. 

seventy-five  square  miles  aud  visiting  some  outlying  districts.  Removal  to  New- 
Zealand  prevented  the  writer  from  continuing  in  further  detail  the  mapping  thus 
rapidly  outlined.  Meantime,  the  investigations  by  Mr.  SussmUeh  and  others 
showed  the  widespread  nature  of  the  tluvioglacial  phenomena  in  Carboniferous 
rocks  discovered  in  1914  by  Professor  David,  and  of  this  work  an  exceedingly 
important  statement  has  just  appeared  (4).  A  two  days*  visit  to  C'urralndiula 
jiaid  by  Browne  in  September,  1919,  resulted  in  the  discovery  of  the  glacial 
phenomena  in  this  district  also,  an  observation  coniii-med  immedi:itely  afterwards 
by  Professor  David.  The  wiiter  paid  further  brief  visits  in  December,  1919,  and 
.January,  1920,  and  noted  the  extension  of  these  glacial  beds,  and,  in  more  detail, 
tlie  stratigraphica'  succession.  While,  therefore,  we  are  now  able  to  give  a  general 
account  of  the  geology  of  this  tlistrict,  it  is  obvious  that  much  remains  to  l>e  done 
in  the  detailed  study  of  all  the  formations,  and  in  particular  it  must  be  pointed  out 
that  the  boundaries  of  the  subdivisions  of  the  sedimentary  series  and  the  estimates 
of  their  thickness  are  only  rough  approximations,  and  no  attempt  has  been  made 
to  differentiate  between  the  numerous  igneous  formations,  sills,  dykes,  breccias, 
etc..  grouped  together  as  the  roughly  outlined  Warragnndi  complex.  The  im- 
probability of  oppi.rtunity  for  further  detailed  work  in  this  region  seems  to  jus- 
tify the  publication  of  results  of  our  studies  up  to  the  present  time. 

For  the  purpose  of  linking  this  study  to  those  made  in  the  regions  about 
the  head  of  the  Manilla  River  (2),  the  available  data  concerning  the  intervening 
region  have  also  been  summarised. 

T'le  writers  thanks  are  due  in  the  tirst  place  to  his  collaborators,  Mr.  W.  R. 
Browne  and  Mr.  W.  S.  Dun,  to  Professor  David  for  helpful  discussion  in  the 
field  and  in  the  laboratory,  to  Professor  Lawson  for  his  interesting  palaeol)otanical 
notes,  and  to  Mr.  F.  Chapman,  A.L.S.,  for  descriptions  of  oolitic  limestones. 
Cliaetetes  and  Bryozoa.  Mr.  Porter,  of  Tamworth,  first  directed  our  attention  to  the 
occurrence  of  fossils  at  Currabubula,  and  Mrs.  Scott  to  the  south-eastern  corner  o'' 
the  Parish  of  Babbinboon,  from  whicii  locality  she  has  made  a  large  collection  avail- 
able for  our  study.  To  the  hosjiitality  of  her  parents,  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Mackay,  of  Allan- 
bank,  the  writer  is  indebted  for  the  opportunity  of  visiting  this  most  interesting 
area.  The  hospitality  of  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Doyle,  of  Purle\-vvah,  TVei-ris  Creek,  made 
possible  the  examination  of  the  upper  parts  of  \Verrie's  Creek,  and  to  the  gui<lance 
of  Mr.  Hammond,  of  Escott  Park,  is  due  the  knowledge  of  the  Permian  Rocks  of 
this  district. 

(iKXKRAf-  Geology  of  the  Wester.v  Zone  of  the  Great  Serpentine  Belt, 
EspECLiLLT  tti'-;  So.mekton-Carroll  District. 

In  the  northern  region  of  the  Great  Serpentine  Belt  (2)  the  general  strm;- 
ture  is  as  follows: — Immediately  west  of  the  zone  of  serijentine,  there  are  strongly 
folded  Devoni.an  rocks,  with  dccasionally  infolded  Carboniferous  rocks.  West 
from  this,  lie  gently,  sometimes  stee])ly,  folded  Upper  Devonian  (Barraba)  uuid- 
st(mes  with  tuffs,  etc.,  passing  uj)  into  Lower  Carboniferous  maiine  limestones, 
with  occasional  bands  of  conglomeiate,  limestones  and  tuffs,  the  Burindi  Series, 
on  which  lie  a  largely  conglomeratic  series  and  beds  containing  Carboniferous 
plant  fossils  with  abundant  tuffs  and  volcanic^  rocks,  to  which  the  term  Rocky 
Creek  Series  was  applied,  the  whole  forming  a  conformable  se(|uence.  The  two 
Carboniferous  formations  are  developed  chiefly  in  a  synclinal  zone  lying  abi>ut 
twenty  miles  west  of  the  serpentine.       [See    (1),  p.  50.3  and   PL  xxi.,  fig.  4,   and 


BT   W.  N.  BENSON,  W.  S.    DUN^   AND   W.    R.  BROWNE.  287 

(2),  pp.  264-272,  PI.  xx.,  fig.  4.]  Studies  iu  the  southern  regiou  by  Professor 
David  and  Mr.  Sussmilch  (4)  have  shown  that  there  also  the  Carboniferous  is 
divisible  into  a  lower  marine  portion,  which,  as  pointed  out  by  the  writer  (1,  p. 
504),  is  to  be  correlated  with  the  Burindi  Series,  and  an  upper  portion  of  con- 
glomerates, tuffs  and  other  volcanic  rocks  and  glacial  formations.  As  this  por- 
tion is  so  much  more  extensive  and  varied  in  the  Southern  district  than  in  the 
Northern,  tlie  name  Rocky  Creek  Series  was  clearly  not  sufficiently  inclusive,  and 
the  term  "Kuttung  Series"  was  adopted  to  cover  all  those  formations  that  lie 
between  the  top  of  the  Burindi  and  the  base  of  Permo-Carboniferous  Beds.  The 
term  Rocky  Creek  Series,  if  it  be  retained,  must,  then,  be  considered  as  indicat- 
ing a  local  development  of  the  Kuttung  Series,  and  the  latter  term  will  be  em- 
ployed herein  iu  its  original  significance.  The  possibility  of  correlation  of  por- 
tions of  the  Kuttung  Series  in  different  localities,  e.g.,  the  Rocky  Creek  and  Wal- 
larobba  conglomerates,  or  the  several  horizons  of  "Varve  Rock"  can  be  determined 
only  after  much  more  extensive  work  than  has  yet  been  undertaken. 

If  we  trace  the  development  of  the  Carboniferous  rocks  southwards  from  the 
Gwydir,  the  following  is  the  outline  of  the  structures  observed.  The  syncline, 
which  seems  to  be  broken  by  strike  faulting,  is  seen  to  form  the  northern  spur  of 
the  Nandewar  Ranges,  west  of  Horton  River.  It  is  intersected  liy  Rocky  Creek, 
and  extends  beyond  the  head  of  the  Manilla  River.  It  is  the  most  marked  of 
several  }iarallel  synclines,  the  axes  of  which  undulate  southward  from  the  head 
of  the  Manilla  River.  The  fold  axis  seems  to  have  been  warped  upwards,  and 
the  Kuttung  sediments  have  been  removed  for  some  miles  {see  text-fig.  1).  The 
rocks  outcrojiping  at  the  surface  are  the  underlying  Burindi  beds,  and  those  near 
Rangira  have  been  hastily  examined  by  Mr.  Pittman  (5)  who  obtained  therefrom 
specimens  of  Bhynchonella  and  Cyrtuceras.  In  the  Parish  of  Tulcumbah,  Mr. 
Porter  collected  oolitic  limestone  which  has  been  examined  by  Mr.  F.  Cliaiiuian 
(see  below).  The  Kuttung  rocks  appear  again,  however,  where  this  synclinul 
zone  crosses  the  \amoi  River,  striking  S.  35°  E.,  as  noted  by  Pittman  (6)  and 
Andrews  (7)  .  At  Keepit,  the  syncline  is  Ijroken  by  a  strike-fault  throwing  down 
to  the  west  (6),  and  this  faulted  structure  has  also  been  recognised  by  Messrs. 
Cotton  and  Walkom  (8)  at  Carroll  Gap,  two  miles  to  the  south  of  the  river, 
•where  Burindi  rocks  only  occur.  Eight  miles  in  a  south-easterly  direction  from 
here,  the  low  ridges  rise  up  to  form  the  northern  extremity  of  the  Peel  Range. 
According  to  the  writer's  hurried  observations,  this  range  here  consists  of  the 
eastern  limb  of  the  syncline  of  Kuttung  rocks,  the  eastern  lieing  Iiere  tlie  down- 
thrown  side  of  the  fault.  The  underlying,  richly  fossiliferous  Burindi  rocks 
forming  the  trough  and  western  limb  of  the  syncline  make  the  foothills  to  the  Peel 
Range  and  extend  for  several  miles  on  either  side  of  it.  From  this  point,  the  axis 
of  the  syncline  pitches  steadily  to  the  south,  and  the  Kuttung  rocks  on  either 
limb  of  the  syncline  make  up  the  Peel  Range,  which,  for  some  distance,  consists 
of  two  series  of  opposed,  slightly  divergent,  dip-ridges  or  cuestas. 

A  digTession  must  here  be  made  to  point  out  the  great  interest  of  the  region 
just  described,  which,  unless  its  geology  is  unduly  obscured  by  the  recent  alluvial 
deposits  noted  bv  Cotton  and  Walkom  (8),  is  likely  to  be  of  very  great  im- 
portance in  the  study  of  the  Burindi  rocks  of  this  State.  The  first  examination  of 
the  region  was  made  by  Sir  T.  L.  Mitchell  in  1831  (9.  pp.  38,  30).  The  lii^- 
torie  interest  of  the  early  work  on  this  region  makes  full  quotation   desirable : 

"We  met  with  a  rather  singular  formation  of  little  hills  formed  l)y  pro- 
jecting strata,  the  strike  extending  in  a  direction  of  N.  30  W.,  and  the  dip  being 


288 


GEOLOGY    AS])   PKTKOLOGT    OF  TllK    GREAT   SERre.VTIXE   BELT    OF    N.S.W. 


nV    W.  X.  BENSON,  W.   S.   DUN,   AND   W.    R.  BROWNE.  289 

to  tlie  east  at  au  angle  of  about  3U° .  The  rock  appears  to  consist  in  some  parts 
of  a  butt'  ealcarecus  sandstone,  calcareous  tuff,  and  more  abundantly  of  limestone, 
with  disseminated  portions  of  calcareous  spar,  principally  due  to 
fragments  of  crinoidea.  At  a  lower  part  in  the  same  rock  less  compact,  I  found 
a  beautiful  ehalcedonic  cast,  apparently  of  a  terehra'  (Loxonemaf)  ;  ''the  cal- 
careous sandstone  ....  contained  fragments  of  shells  of  the  liitorina  or 
turbo"  (Macrocheilus  filosa).  ''We  encamped  on  the  'Nammoy'  or  Peel  river  at 
the  foot  of  a  small  hill  named  'Perimbungay.'  In  the  left  bank  of  the  river  1 
found  a  conglomerate-rock  consisting  of  waterworn  fragments  of  serpentine  and 
trap  cemented  b\  calcareous  spar."  "The  range  we  had  crossed  at  Turi  was  near 
us  to  the  westward  and  a  conical  hill  called  'Uriary'  in  the  direction  of  Turi,  was 
the  most  prominent  feature  to  the  south-east.  The  Peel  continued  its  course 
through  this  range  which  presented  a  more  defined  and  elevated  outline  where  it 
continued   beyond  the  river." 

In  1852,  the  Rev.  W.  B.  Clarke,  visited  this  area  (10)  and  recognised  the 
I'elationship  of  the  marine  beds  with  those  elsewhere  in  the  Colony.  "In  my 
report  of  September  6,  1852,''  he  says,  "I  stated  my  opinon  that  there  is  a 
regular  sequence  of  the  various  beds  of  this  formation  over  the  Lepidodendron 
beds  of  the  Manilla  and  Goonoo  Goonoo.  I  have  now  to  show  that  the  middle 
beds  of  this  formation,  those  of  the  Hunter  and  Hawkesbury,  are  widely  distri- 
buted in  the  western  border  of  the  countrj'  between  New  England  and  the  in- 
terior. Sir  T.  L.  Mitchell  in  1831  found  strata  having  the  usual  strike  and 
dip  of  the  region  and  bearing  fossils  which  evidently  belong  to  similar  roc'js 
which  I  have  founJ  abundant  in  similar  remains  at  the  base  of  the  Carboniferous 
on  the  Paterson  and  Hunter,  and  more  recently  I  have  obtained  from  the  same 
neighbourhood  near  the  junction  of  the  Peel  and  Namoi  rivers  other  fossils 
which  are  identical  with  specimens  coming  from  WoUongong  jn  the  Illawarra, 
where  they  occur  in  beds  that  pass  in  ascending  order  into  the  coal-bearing  grits 
and  sandstones  of  the  Wollondilly  and  Hunter  River  basins." 

About  the  years  1888-90,  Mr.  Donald  Porter  collected  a  number  of  fossils 
from  here  which  were  transferred  to  the  Australian  Museum  and  to  the  Mining 
Museum,  and  in  Ihe  following  year  Stonier  (11)  remarks  that  at  Somerton  the 
marine  beds  "appear  to  belong  to  two  distinct  series  which  are  unconformablo, 
and  may  perhaps  belong  to  the  Upper  and  Lower  Marine.  The  evidence  is  not 
conclusive,  nor  are  the  sections  sufficiently  clear  to  establish  the  uneonformiiv 
without  a  detailed  survey."  Mr.  Etheridge  (12),  in  the  same  year,  accepted, 
with  some  doubt,  the  correlation  of  these  beds  with  the  Upper  Marine  Series,  a 
correlation  which  was  abandoned  in  the  following  year  when  a  more  extensive 
study  of  the  fossils  had  been  made  (13) .  No  further  field  studies  were  made  of 
this  region  for  a  long  time,  except  the  visits  of  Mr.  Pittman  (6)  and  Mr. 
Andrews  (7),  })ut  large  series  of  fossils  were  obtained  by  Messrs.  Porter, 
Musson,  Pittman  and  Cullen,  which  were  in  part  described  by  Mr.  Etheridge  (14, 
15),  and  have  also  been  studied  by  Mr.  Dun  and  the  writer  in  the  present  paper. 
These  have  been  supplemented  by  collections  obtained  from  the  south-eastern 
portion  of  the  parish  of  Babbinboon  by  Mrs.  Scott  and  the  writer.  Hers, 
adjacent  to  portion  14  of  the  Parish,  there  is  a  low  hill  capped  with  a  horizontal 
layer  of  fine-grained  limestone,  beneath  which  is  a  calcareous  and  tuttaceous  mud- 
stone  with  abundant  fossils.  The  following  is  the  list  up  to  the  present  date  of 
the  fossils   recognised   in  the  region  contained    l)etween  Carroll,   Babbinboon,   Mt. 


2i)0  (jEOI.OGY    AX1>   PKTROI.OtiY    OK   THK    (lUKAT   SKIIPKNTINK.    IlKLT    OF    X.S.W. 

Uriari  and  Somertou.  lu  a  subsecjuent  paper  the  localities  ±or  oaili  will  be  in- 
dicated as  I'ar  as  possil)le  with  tlie  jiresent  indefinite  statements  available.  The 
list  cannot  be  considered  exhaustive.  A  distinctive  feature  is  the  abundance  oi 
Pnxtuctus  »)«)"/(■«?«,■>'.  casts  of  Loxoiifma,  and  forms  of  GusaeMina. 

Plaxtae. — Girianella. 

PoRlFERA. — Sponge  spicules. 

COELEXTERATA. — Zapliretitls  culUui,  '/..  smnpliuens^  Z.  sp.  indet.,  Aiiii/yilai- 
ophyllum  etheridgei,  gen.  et  sp.  nov..  Diplii/phiilliim  sp.  indet..  .'  Lithostrntion  sp. 
indet.,  ?  Tri/plaama  s)!.  indet..  Mirhelinia  tenHixepta,  Michelitiia  sp.  nov.,  Chaetetes 
spiiiiiliferus,  sp.  nov 

Hrvozoa — Fistulipora  microficopica,  sp.  nov.,  Cyclnidntriipa  ou-ilralis,  gen. 
et  s]i.  nov.  llaHopura  fruticosa,  TImmniscus  sp. 

Hrachiopoda. — Orthotetef!  crenistria,  Chonetes  aspinoaa,  Pnidnctiiri  hemi- 
>:phaericiis,  P.  miiricatKS,  P.  puitulnsux,  P.  !iemireticulatu!<,  P.  sp.  indet..  Orthis 
(Rlupidomella)  aMstrtilis,  Orthis  {ifchizoplwria)  resupinata.  Rlnjiicli(/)ieUu  plewn- 
do)i,  R.  sp.  indet.,  Diel<ismn  sacculitm  var.  hat-tata,  D.  saccnlum  var.  amygdala,  D. 
sp.  indet.,  Semiiiula  subtilita,  Spiriferu  bisulcata,  6'.  davidis,  S.  duplicicontata,  .V. 
mosquensix,  S.  pingttis,  S.  pingwx  var.  elongatn,  var.  nov.,  .5.  striata,  S.  striato- 
conrohttn,  sp.  nov..  >'.  sp.  indet..  Siiriiigntln/ris  e.r^iiperoiix.  Rct:in  vf.  idntrir, 
Actinocunch us  plano.sitlcata. 

PELECrpODA. — Saiiguiiioliles  triradiatiis,  sp.  nov.,  .S'.  sj).  indet.,  Kdmniidia  sp. 
indet.,  Ctenodonta  sj).  indet..  S uadaua  sj>.  indet.,  ParaUeindon  canifi,  sp.  nov, 
Pteronites  subpitttmini.  P.  taiiipteroid^g,  Kochia  striata,  sp.  nov..  Conocardinm 
sp.  indet.,  Pnsidoiiiella.'  spp.  indet.,  Spathella  sp.  indet..  Pavenka  purlrri,  sp.  nov., 
Ai'icidopecten  sp.  indet.  (ef.  A.  granosus),  A.  sp.  indet.,  Entolium  ariculatum,  E. 
sp.  indet.,  Leiopteria  aiistrnlis,  Scaldia  sp.  indet. 

Gastropoda. — Pleiirotomaria  sp.  indet.,  Ptiicumphalns  culleui.  sp.  nov.. 
Ptgcomphalitia  sp.  indet..  Mourlonia  ortiata,  sp.  nov..  .1/.  sp.  indet..  Gosseietinu 
aiistralin,  G.  auatralis  var.  aita,  var.  nov.,  G.  maclaiii,  s]i.  nov..  G.  acotti.  sp.  nov.. 
Porcellia  piearsi,  Phanerotremata  australis,  sp.  nov.,  P.  aiistralis  var.  alta,  var. 
nov..  Miirchisonia  spp.  indet..  Belierophon  sp.  cf.  /i/x/cd.v,  B.  sp.  indet.,  Eiwni- 
phalus  carrolleuxii  sp.  nov..  E.  cera,  E.  pentangulatus,  E.  sp.  indet.,  StrapnroUii'i 
davidis,  s\t .  nov..  \alici>j>sis  Jir,''rispira,  X.  ghdidsa.  X.  tibliqua,  sp.  nov..  Macru- 
eheilus  filostts,  M.  sp..  Loxnnema  babbinboonettsis,  L.  cf.  lefevrei,  L.  sp.  indet., 
Platyceras  sp.  indet  ,  Conidaria  sp.  indet..  Tfyidiies  sji.  indet. 

SCAPHOPODA. — Dentalium  sp.  indet. 

CephaLiOPODA — Orthoceras  sp.  indet.,  Trochncerns  sji,  indet..  Cyrloceros  sp. 
indet.   (?  Gyrnceras).  Gomplniceras. 

TRiLOniTA. — Phillipsin    .'  mhitsta. 

As  will  l)e  shown  in  section  B  of  tliis  paper,  this  series  of  fossils  indicates 
that  the  Burindi  beds  here  may  be  correlated  witli  the  middle  portion  of  the 
Carboniferous  limestone  of  Western  Europe.  It  is  not  possible  yet  to  indicate 
the  thickness  of  the  fossiliferons  beds,  or  to  state  whethei-  there  is  any  zonal  dis- 
triI)ution  of  forms,  but  tliis  area  is  strongly  to  be  reconnnended  as  one  suitalile  for 
such  furthei'  studies. 

Tn  regard  to  the  lithohigy  of  these  beds,  little  can  yet  l)e  added  to  the  ro- 
marks  made  above  save  to  call  attention  to  the  importance  of  the  oolitic  limestone 
bands  .which  are  so  frequent  a  feature  of  Bnrindi  rocks.  Besides  the  occurrene>> 
in  the  Parish  of  Tulcunihah.  north  of  Carroll,  noted  above,  there  is  also  a  patch 


CV    W.   X.   UKNSOX,  W.   8.    DUX,    AXU    \V.    R.  BROWXF;.  291 

aljout  a  huuflred  yards  in  leng-tli  ou  the  western  edge  of  Conditional  Purchase 
Leiiso  172  in  the  south  of  the  Parish  of  Baljbinboon.  Mr.  Chapmnn  in  private 
communication  states  that  the  former  rock  contains  stem-joints  ;'nd  nodal  joints 
of  a  crinoid,  which  are  like  those  that  may  be  seen  in  the  IIexaeri)iichte,  though  it 
would  be  hazardous  to  point  out  their  exact  relationship  on  such  n\eagre  evidence. 
Numerous  gT'ooved  brachial  ossicles  occur  as  nuclei  in  the  oolitic  gi-ains  of  this 
Jock.  This  limestone  is  interstratified  in  a  calcareous  mudstone  with  abundant 
crinoids  and  some  corals,  dipping  E  30°  X.  at  40°. 

We  now  return  from  this  long  digression  to  trace  further  southwai'ds  the 
tectonic  structures.  The  Bnrindi  beds  have  lieen  traced  down  the  western  side  of 
the  Peel  Range  to  the  ('urral)ubula  Creek  at  Piallaway,  and  preserve  throughout 
an  easterly  dip,  though  with  slight  variation  in  strike  and  inclination,  and  doubt- 
less form  the  western  limb  of  the  syneline,  and  are  overlain  by  Kuttung  rocks. 
South-east  from  Piallaway,  the  diverging  ranges  of  Kuttung  rocks  are  sei^arateJ 
by  an  extensive  volcanic  formation,  the  Werrie  Series,  chiefly  composed  of  basalt 
flows  overlying  the  Kuttung  rocks,  and  as  the  main  syneline  plunges  more  deeply 
to  the  south,  these  form  the  broad  i>lain  l)etweeu  Currabubula  and  Werris  Creek 
townships,  enclosed  by  the  ranges  of  Kuttung  rocks  to  the  east  and  west.  The 
eastern  range  is  the  main  Peel  Range  and  is  the  more  continuous,  though  tra- 
versed by  several  gaps.  It  extends  past  the  Cunabubula.  Werrie's  and  Quii)olly 
Creeks  and  continues  southwards  towards  the  Liverpool  Ranges,  the  component 
rocks  liaving  a  gei.eral  dip  of  35°  to  40°  in  a  direction  about  W.  20°  S.  The 
euesta  or  diji-ridge  cliaracter  of  the  ranges  is  most  marked,  es]iecially  where,  as 
in  the  Currabubula  District,  tliey  contain  very  resistant  stratiform  masses  of 
andesite.  The  marine  rocks  continue  in  a  zone  dipping  beneath  the  Peel  Range 
and  resting  in  turn  upon  the  Lepidodendroti  aiistrale  beds  (Barraba  Series),  as 
noted  at  Goonoo  Goonoo  by  Clarke  (10)  and  Stonier  (111.  Ch:iracteristic  fos- 
sils have  l)een  obtained  east  of  Curi-abubula  (see  later)  and  further  south  at 
Gowrie  and  particularly  at  Goonoo  Goonoo. 

The  following  fossils  have  been  recorded  in  the  last  two  districts: — Martinia 
sp.,  Xiieula  sp.,  Entolium  aricidatum.  Ariculnpecten  sp..  yincrdchilhui,  Yraiiin 
konixcki,    Orthoceras   •<]!. 

The  westerly  segment  of  the  syneline  of  Kuttung  rocks  crosses  t'urral)ul)ula 
Creek  by  Piallaway  and  continues  southwards  across  "Werrie's  Creek  (whicii  occu- 
pies a  narrow  defile )  to  Quipolly  Creek. 

South  of  Werris  Creek,  the  opening  between  these  diverging  ridges  is  par- 
tially closed  by  a  little  cross  warping  bringing  up  a  minor  anticline  of  Kuttung 
rocks  and  cutting  off  a  small  basin  of  Werrie  Basalts.  Between  this  ami  the 
western  range  there  lias  been  let  down  into  the  Werrie  basalts  a  small  patch  of 
Glossopteris-henrins:  sandstone,  possibly  belonging  to  the  Newcastle  Series.  Thus 
the  region  of  Werrie  basalts  between  Curral)ul)ula  and  Werris  Creek  forms  almost 
an  enclosed'  basin.  Within  this  the  low  land  is  interrupted  by  the  resistant  moun- 
tain ma.ss  of  Warragundi,  a  volcanic  complex,  from  which  extends  a 
series  of  ridges  following  a  bundle  of  dykes,  running  in  a  curve  to  the  south-west. 
To  the  north-west,  the  Dunover  Mountains  appear  from  a  distant  inspection  to  be 
also  a  complex  of  volcanic  rocks,  more  resistant  to  erosion  than  the  surrounding 
basalts.  Here  and  there  are  minor  intrusions  of  basalts,  probably  of  Tertiary 
age.  and  recent  alluvium  occurs  in  some  amount  in  tlie  valleys. 

The  main  structures  and  formations  have  been  now  outlined,  but  the  details 
of  stratigraphic  succession  of  tlie  sef|UPnce  of  iuiieous  events  and   flie  coniiilexifies 


292    GEOLOGY  AND  PETROLOGY  OF  THE  GREAT  SERPEXTIXE  BELT  OF  N.S.W. 

of  struetui-e  introduced  by  faulting,  can  be  i)aitl\  realised  from  a  t-ousideratioa 
of  tbe  features  of  the  Currabubula  district. 

The  Geology  of  the  CuRRABunvLA  District. 

Previous  Investigation. 

Tile  tiist  account  of  this  district  was  given  l)y  Sir  T.  L.  Mitchell  in  1831 
(1,  p.  31),  in  the  following  words:  "The  country  appeared  tolerably  open  and 
level,  so  that  we  could  pursue  our  course  in  one  direction  nearly  eight  miles. 
The  most  conspicuous  hiU  on  our  right  was  named  by  the  native  "Barragundy." 
It  was  \-isible  during  the  whole  of  our  day's  journey.  We  at  length  entered  upon 
an  open  and  grassy  plain,  and  found  in  the  skirts  of  the  wood  beyond  it  a  channel 
containing  water  in  alnindance.  and  which  was  known  to  the  natives  as  "Carra- 
bobila."*  Beyond  this  channel  arose  a  peaked  and  picturesque  range  whereof  tlie 
highest  summit  was  named  "Turi."  Several  guUies  were  dilTicult  for  the  passage 
of  the  carts,  and  detained  the  party  in  its  ascent,  but  at  length  we  reached  the 
top  of  tlie  pass  and  crossed  the  range,  which  appeared  to  be  continuous,  thus 
separating  the  basin  of  the  Peel  from  that  of  the  water  falling  into  the  Liverin)ol 
Plains.**  We  were  agreeably  surprised  to  ttnd  that  the  opposite  side  of  these 
hills,  and  the  whole  face  of  the  country  beyond  them  presented  a  very  different 
appearance  from  that  through  which  we  had  passed.     A  gently  sloping  extremity 

lay  before  us  for  eiglit  miles  in  the  dii-ection  of  our  proposed  route 

The  heights  which  we  had  crossed  appeared  to  extend  from  the  Liverpool  Range 
to  the  northward  as  far  as  could  be  seen;  but  the  native  told  me  tliat  it  soon 
terminated  on  the  river  'Callala'  (or  Peel),  whose  course  he  said  turned  west- 
ward." 

The  Rex-.  W.  B.  Clarke,  twenty  years  later,  determined  the  height  of  Turi 
Peak  as  2,952  ft.,  but  made  no  reference  to  the  geology  of  the  region  (10) ;  Mr. 
Etheridge  received  samples  of  erinoidal  limestone  from  Glen  Donald,  four  miles 
east  of  Currabubula  in  1890  (11)  ;  and  in  1905  Mr.  Andrews  briefly  referred  to 
the  topogi-aphical  features  (17).  In  1913  Mr.  Carne  examined  the  Glnssoptcris 
sandstones  of  Werris  Creek  (18)  and  Mr.  Cambage  obtained  Itliacopteris  near 
Currabubula  (19)  .  The  occurrence  of  Archaencalamitea  was  also  reported  in 
1914  (20).  No  connected  account  of  the  geology  of  the  region  has,  Lowever,  yet 
been  given. 

The  Buritidi  Series. 

Tlie  eastern  iiurtimi  of  tlie  Cuiialmbula  region  consists  of  rocks  of  marine 
origin.  They  eomurise  a  lower  and  an  upper  portion.  The  former  is  made  up 
of  marine  mudstones  of  an  olive-gieen  colour  showing  Carboniferous  fossils 
mostly  as  easts.  They  contain  here  and  there  small  lentides  of  limestone  up  to 
a  few  inches  in  thickness  and  a  few  feet  in  diameter,  and  are  interbedded  with 
tuffs  of  intermediate  or  keratophyric  composition,  the  tuffaceous  zones  being  also 
at  times  fossiliferous.  Narrow  zones  of  conglomerate  or  pebbly  tuff  occur,  and 
locally  larger  masses  of  coralline  (Zaphrentis)  and  erinoidal  limestones.  In 
general,  these  beds  resemble  quite  clearly  the  Burindi  rocks  in  the  western  slopes 


•Mitchell  mills  :  "Even  before  iiiy  men  had  seep  this  .spot,  the  uative  name  in  their 
mouths  was  corruiiteil  into  'Teri-ible  Billy."  Locally  this  name  is  now  apjilieil  to  the 
hill.  olHcially  teniiod  "  Wan-ai^umU ' "  or  "Ten-ililc  Mountain." 

•'PioViably  Mitchell's  party  passed  thi'ou>;h  the  ijap  north  of  Duii  I'eak. 


BY    W    X.  BENSON,  W.  S.    DUN,   AND  W.    R.  BROWNE. 


293 


Plains 

n 


Werris  Creek  Warraoundi  fom^ilen        Kurfung    Scncs,     Tamwrth 


Plains     (Bosalt-) 


/Indesiffs    Sills      Plains 


Livert^ool 
Plains 


B 

Lower  Carbs 
Burindi  5er<es 


L'|3^er   Oevonian 
Barraba  5ene«^ 


D 


Text-fis-2.     Geological  Structure  of  the  Currabubula  and  Werris  Creek  Districts. 

of  New  England  (2)  and  near  Dungog  (4).  To  the  west  they  appear  to  pass 
down  into  the  tfpper  Devonian  (Barraba)  rocks  at  Goonoo  Goonoo,  which  con- 
tain Lepidodendron  australe,  but  the  exact  position  of  the  zone  of  passage  has 
not  been  determined  In  the  north-western  portion  of  the  area  mapped,  in  a 
small  gully  in  portion  197*  there  occur  four  narrow  seams  of  very  impure  coal, 
the  thickness  being  only  twelve  inches.  They  are  all  much  veined  by  calcite. 
They  recall  the  carbonaceous  shales  of  Clarencetown  (21)  to  some  extent,  but  are 
not  among  freshwater  strata.  Among  these  marine  rocks  has  been  thrust  a  sill 
of  glassy  (sometimes  lithoidal)  andesite  which  forms  the  easternmost  of  the  more 
or  less  continuous  zones  of  sills  in  this  region,  leaches  a  thickness  of  about  four 
hundred  feet  but  pinches  out  south  of  the  railway  line;  where  thickest  it  forms 
the  high  cuesta  called  Minnarooba.  Here,  in  its  northern  part  in  portion  199,  the 
intrusive  character  of  the  igneous  rocks  is  clearly  indicated  at  its  upper  surface 
where  the  andesite  has  enclosed  and  indurated  the  fragments  of  mudstone.  The 
mudstone  is  also  somewhat  indurated  adjacent  to  the  andesite  in  the  small  ridge 
crossed  by  the  railway  cutting  in  portion  35.  A  few  fossils  have  been  noted  in 
portion  199,  but  the  majority  were  found  near  the  railway  cutting  in  portions  83 
85,  and  35  in  Mr.  Donaldson's  property  (11)  .  The  writer's  attention  was  called 
to  these  fossils  by  Mr.  Donald  Porter,  and  in  collecting  them  he  was  aided  by  Mr. 
C.  E.  Tilley,  B.Sc,  and  Mr.  D.  A.  Pritchard,  B.Sc.  The  gem  of  the  collec- 
tion, however,  the  Cactocrinus,  was  presented  by  Mr.  Donaldson  and  found  prob- 
ably a  short  distance  south  of  the  railway  line.  The  collection  is  remarkably 
depauperate.  A  i^ebbly  or  conglomeratic  layer  is  intercalated  in  the  mudstone 
here  and  a  small  lenticular  mass  of  limestone,  a  few  yards  in  leng-th  and  width, 
occurs  which  is  made  up  almost  entirely  of  crinoidal  fragments  and  Zaphrentis. 

The  following  are  the  forms  recognised,  ob\'iously  representing  the  Burindi 
fauna: — Cactocrinw  hrownei,  sp.  nov.,  Zaphrentis  culleni,  Zaphrentis  sp.  indet  ■ 
Fenestslla  sp.  indet..  Chonetes  hardrensis,  Orthotetes  crenistria,  Productus  longi- 
spiniis,  Ortli'is    {Tthipidomella)    australis,  OrtJiis  (Schisophoria)    resupinala,  Spiri- 

*  Portion  numbers  refer  to  the  Parish  of  Currabubula  except  where  otherwise  stated. 


294  OKOLO(;V    and   PKXIiOUJdV    ok   TIIK    IIREAT   SERPENTIXK    llELT    OF    N.S.W. 

fera  bisiilcala,  ,Spirifera  sp.  iiidet.,  Spin'feri>iu  iiisculjilti,  Vielu.-nnu  auccuhoti  var. 
hastata,  two  indefinite  species  of  Pelecypoch,  Conularia  sp.  '?,  PhilUiJsia  sp.  ?. 

The  lower  limit  of  the  Burindi  })eds  is  not  definiti'.  hut  we  may  assume  their 
thickness  to  be  not  less  than  twcnty-tivf  hundred  feet,  and  the  lower  portion,  con- 
taining marine  fossils,  to  be  about  half  that  amount,  which  agrees  with  the  esti- 
mate of  their  thickness  in  the  type  locality  (1,  p.  508) .  The  upper  moiety  of 
the  Burindi  Series  does  not  make  any  marked  outcrop,  but  seems  to  consist  of 
mudstone  and  also  of  very  easily  <lecomposed  basic  tuffs,  yielding  a  tenacious 
red  soil.  At  the  base  of  these  a  stronger  band  of  tuff  was  found  to  contain  hspi- 
dodendron  veltheimianum.  Scattered  through  the  belt  of  red  soil  are  irregular 
nodular  masses  of  silica,  sometimes  apparently  chalcedonic,  at  other  times  clearly 
silicified  tuffs,  more  often  replacements  of  some  unknown  material.  This  horizon 
of  silicification  runs  throughout  the  region  mapped,  and  is  immediately  ff)llowed 
by  rather  more  felsitic  tuft's. 

Above  tliis  there  is  a  zone  of  passage  into  the  more  keratophyric  tuft's  wliich 
form  the  base  of  the  Kuttung  Series.  This  zone  is  developed  along  the  eastern 
slopes  of  Mts.  Cobla  and  Sugarloaf,  and  here  Mr.  Donaldson  found  the  silicified 
plant  remains  described  in  the  jialaeontological  section  of  this  paper,  and  consist- 
ing of  gymnospermous  wood  and  a  bundle  of  roots,  both  of  an  indeterminate 
nature. 

Lower  Portion  of  the  Kuttung  Series. 

In  the  region  mapped  the  distinction  between  the  base  of  the  Ivuttmig  Series 
and  the  top  of  the  Burindi  Beds  is  not  sharp.  The  former  are  less  readily  de- 
composed and  contain  one  or  more  marked  pel)bly  zones.  This  basal  portion  of 
the  Kuttung  Series  may  be  traced  along  the  scarp  of  the  easternmost  line  of  the 
westerly  inclined  dip-slopes  of  the  Peel  Range,  which  line  of  ridges  is  made  up  of 
a  nearly  continuous  band  of  more  or  less  glassy  hypersthene  andesite  about  five 
hundred  feet  in  tluekness.  The  relation  of  this  to  the  adjacent  Kuttung  rocks 
is  not  clear,  for  distinctive  outcrops  bave  not  been  discovered  (but  see  p.  304). 
The  Kuttung  Kocks  are  here  mostly  of  medium  grain,  gritty  tuft's  composed 
chiefly  of  acid  felspar,  and  are  associated  with  occasional  zones  of  thinly  bedded 
olive-green  mudstone;  and  of  pebbles  wliich  are  apparently  waterworn.  No 
glacial  striae  have  been  found  on  any  of  these  yet,  but  they  have  not  been  closely 
investigated.  In  Turi  Creek  (Portions  57  and  59)  a  thin  flow  of  basalt  occui's. 
Through  this  portion  of  the  series  there  extends  another  series  of  stratiform 
masses  of  more  or  less  gkssy  audesite.     Duri  Peak,  for  example,  is  a  magnificent 


Text-fig.y.     Duri  Park  tioiii  the  east. 


BY   W.  N.  BENSON,  W.  S.   DUN,  AND  \V.   R.  BROWNE.  295 

cuesta,  formed  of  a' sheet  of  igneous  rock  over  three  hundred  and  fifty  feet  in 
thickness,  tlie  western  dip  slope  and  almost  vertical  eastern  scarp  being  very  dis- 
tinctive (see  Text  fig'.  3.)  South  of  this,  there  is  a  small  hill  in  portion  llfi  which 
seems  to  be  composed  of  a  lenticular  mass  of  tlie  rock  about  two  hundred  feet  in 
thickness.  Further  south,  in  Sandy  Gully,  is  a  larger  mass  composed  of  both 
vitropliyric  and  litlioidal  andesite  which  together  reach  a  thickness  of  nearly 
fifteen  hundred  feet,  and  further  south  again,  oh  the  margin  of  the  map,  is  the 
great  mass  forming  Kingsmill's  Peak,  the  thickness  of  which  has  not  yet  been 
a-scertained.  It  does  not  seem  likely  that  these  isolated  masses  of  pyro.xene 
andesite  are  repetitions  In*  faulting  of  portions  of  the  continuous  median  zone, 
though  perhaps  not  impossible.  Strike  faulting  occurs  to  some  extent,  but  its 
fiill  effects  are  unknown.  Thus  along  the  two  lines  of  section  north  of  Curra- 
bubula  Creek,  the  apparent  thicknesses  of  the  lower  portion  of  the  Kuttung 
beds  are  respectively  forty-two  and  forty-four  hundred  feet.  Along  the  southern 
line  of  section,  the  apparent  thickness  of  these  beds  is  only  thirty-four  hundred 
feet,  and  there  is  additional  evidence  (see  pp.  307-8)  to  suggest  that  the  move- 
ments differed  on  the  two  sides  of  Currabubula  Creek,  that  some  portion  of  the 
Lower  Kuttung  rock  was  repeated  by  strike-faulting  north  of  the  Currabubula 
Creek,  or  was  cut  out  by  the  same  process  south  of  the  same  creek.  The  trun- 
cation of  the  western  margin  of  the  andesite  of  King'smill's  Peak  suggests  tho 
latter  as  the  more  probable  alternative.  In  either  case,  the  exact  thickness  of  the 
Lower  Kuttung  Series  remains  in  doubt.  No  fossils  have  been  found  in  this 
portion  of  the  Series,  unless  tlie  plants  assigned  to  the  uppermost  Burindi  rocks 
should    rightly  be  included  here. 

The  inclination  of  the  beds  is  between  35°  and  40°  to  the  S.S.W.  in  the 
northern   part   of  the  region,  but  less  in  the  southern. 

Middle  Portion  of  tlie  Kuttung  Series. 

(a)  The  Lower  Glacial  Beds. — Tliis  is  the  most  varied  and  interesting  portion 
of  the  Kuttung  rocks  in  the  district.  The  succession  of  beds  has  been  traced  in 
approximate  detail  along  four  lines  of  traverse.  In  portion  223,  a  mile  and  a  half 
to  the  east  of  Currabubula  railway  station,  a  small  cpiarry  exhibits  a  very  fine- 
grained, almost  porcellanous,  creamy-white  banded  rock  which  has  some  of  the 
characters  of  the  "varve"  rock  of  De  Geer  (22)  (see  Text-fig.  3a,  Section  iii.). 
Beneath  and  especially  above  it  the  bouldery  rock  is  not  a  normal  conglomerate, 
but  in  place  of  closely-packed,  contiguous,  rounded  pebbles,  more  or  less  uniform 
in  size,  the  pebbles  present  are  sub-angular,  very  varied  in  size,  and  are  set  in  a 
matrix  of  gi-itty  felspathic  material,  in  which  they  are  often  widely  spaced  and 
not  contiguous,  and  there  is  little  sign  of  stratification.  The  rock  has  thus  some 
of  the  cliaracters  of  boulder  clay  or  tillite.  Tliis  bouldery  material,  with  inter- 
bedded  tuff  lying  above  the  flne-gi'ained  banded  rock,  is  about  1000  feet  thick,  and 
extends  into  portion  321  (Mr.  Proctor's  jiroperty).  Above  this  is  a  second  zone 
of  fine-grained  banded  rock,  but  here  the  comparison  with  "varve"  rock  is  even 
more  marked.  The  bedding  planes  of  this  rock  are  often  strongly  contorted,  and 
scattered  through  it  are  small  or  large  pebbles  of  granite,  aplite,  etc. — evidently 
small  erratics.  This  zone  of  "varve"  rock  has  Ijeen  proved  to  be  continuous  for 
at  least  five  miles,  and  is,  therefore,  termed  tlie  main  "varve"  zone;  it  is  about 
fifty  feet  in  thickness.  Lying  above  it  are  laminated,  olive-green  mudstones  very 
like  those  in  the  Burindi   Series,  but  so  far  these  have  not  been  found  to  be  fos- 


296 


GEOLOGY  AND  PETROLOGY  OF  THE  GREAT  SERPENTINE  BELT  OF  N.S.W. 


UJI 

u 

•- 
ifi\ 

— il 

< 
u 

(J 
o 

_l 
o| 

UJ 


L- ) 


LD 


CO 
QQ 

D::: 


7- 

f? 

z 

ii 

C) 

>: 

r: 

t: 

o 

rf 

p 

ii 

fe 

p 

Z 

fe 

t7 

■J 

g 

< 

re 

X 

^ 

k 

lu 

X 

e 

d 

SjUD|l}    PSIJI)I|IS 


00 

Otinoj   9U'J01^ 
Jo    pojli  JO   c)o5 


woij    ^losog 


o 


-l-llciejD 


»■« 


aiisspuy  a 


jatoj^j 


^  lo-y  _a  *  JON  ,    (^V  ;■;>; 
puo   >uoiip.llN 

(up  jimod'ilaj 

"'."IN 


(UOjDjJO^  ,  |000|^   o.'nij 

■Mi|l'i 

iinjOft   uo    JuO)5pniFj 

JJ"i  9J'|okHy 

C 
Z.  8iJtf|j9M>     UjniAnji^ 

,.  J°    Jj.ioloo-, 


O     .  I — 


in 

—       M^:i^  ?'JPfi  pajjpjuin 
^      iuojspriftj    p»jpuiuitn 


■oj  in 

pup     9no?70Jjr>j_ 


—  aujO;  ujiM    ^MOM 

c   i 

„  t  a4ijKi4(jjoj    puD 

3  g  sj'Jaii'O  -J"  ^II'S 


BY    W.   N.    BENSON,    W.    S.   DUN,  AND    W.    R.    BKOWNE.  297 

siliferous .  Theb^c  imidstoues  are  about  tilty  feet  thick.  Upon  them  lie  conglom- 
erate Or  bouldery  beds,  interstratifled  with  flne-gi'ained  tull  containing  plant  re- 
mains. On  the  steep  sides  of  the  hill  in  portions  320,  321,  immediately  south  of 
Mr.  Proctor's  homestead,  Mr.  Browne  and  Mr.  Waterhouse  obtained  from  this 
horizon  a  number  of  fossil  plant-remains,  including  Rhaeopteris  intermedia, 
Aneimites  ovata,  and  reed-like  impressions,  possibly  of  Calarmtes.  These  beds 
are  followed  by  the  gritty  felspathic  rock  which  is  desci-ibed  below  as  the  main 
felspathie  grit.  Tlie  total  thickness  of  the  beds  here  described  as  forming  the 
lower  moiety  of  the  Middle  Portion  of  the  Kuttung  Series  is  about  thirteen  hun- 
dred feet.  They  are  grouped  together  as  the  Lower  Glacial  Beds.  The  main 
"varve"  zone  may  be  traced  to  the  south,  and  has  been  studied  two  miles  from  . 
here,  where  the  eastern  branch  of  Rocky  Creek  approaches  Sandy  Gully  (portion 
278).  The  ridge  separating  Rocky  Creek  from  Sandy  Gully  consists  of  a  succes- 
sion of  banded  mudstones,  felspathic  tuffs,  narrow  zones  of  tillite  and  traces  of 
varve  rock  overlain  by  a  definite  zone  of  tillite.  The  main  "varve"  zone  follows 
this,  and  can  be  seen  in  the  valley  of  Rocky  Creek  below  the  northern  sharp 
bend,  and  it  is  followed  by  the  main  felspathic  grit  {see  Text-fig.  3a,  Section  iii., 
E — F).  The  boundaries  of  the  glacial  beds  southwards  from  here  are  largely  con- 
jectural. 

North  of  Currabubula  Creek,  still  more  distinct  evidence  of  glaciation  is 
available  (see  Text-fig.  3a,  Section  ii.,  C — D)  .  Tracing  the  sequence  of  beds  up 
from  the  valley  of  Turi  Creek  we  find  that  the  upper  portions  of  the  easterly 
facing  slopes  are  rather  too  covered  with  shed  rock  to  yield  a  clear  succession  to 
a  hasty  traverse.  The  rocks  appear,  however,  to  be  felspathic  grits  with 
pebbly  layers  and  some  well  stratified  material,  and  possibly  represent  the  lowest 
"varve"  horizon.  Above  these,  forming  the  almost  vertical  cliffs  at  the  scarp  edge, 
IS  a  thick  stratum  of  boulder-bearing  rock  which  ])erhaps  is  more  like  a  normal 
conglomerate  than  a  tillite  Above  it,  is  a  narrow  zone  of  fine-grained,  creamy, 
felspathie  tuff  containing  abundant  remains  of  Rhaeopteris  intermedia,  Aneimite' 
ovata  and  Calamite-like  impressions.  These  were  first  obtained  here  by  Mr. 
Cambage  (19).  Probably,  also,  the  Archaeocala/inites  was  obtained  from  this 
.spot  (20).  These  plant-beds  are  followed  by  a  thick  zone  of  tillite,  which  forms 
the  highest  part  of  the  ridge  where  it  is  crossed  by  the  line  of  section  (C — D), 
and  may  be  traced  down  the  valley  of  Browne's  Creek.  Here  the  glacial  origin  of 
the  rock  is  shown,  not  only  by  similarity  of  the  structure  to  that  of  a  boulder 
clay  but  by  the  presence  of  polished  striated  and  more  or  less  faulted  pebbles 
collected  by  Professor  David  and  Mr.  Browne.*  These  are,  however,  difficult  co 
obtain,  for  the  matrix  of  the  tillite  is  strongly  cemented.  Moreover,  as  in  the 
Paterson-Maitland  District,  the  striations  are  found  almost  solely  on  the  quartzite 
pebbles,  the  boulders  of  granite,  porphyry  and  ajilite  being  generally  withoui 
striation,  though  they  are  often  only  partially  rounded.  The  largest  boulders  are 
of  granite  which  may  be  over  two  feet  in  diameter.  Above  this  tillite  lies  the 
main  "varve  zone"  first  discovered  by  Browne,  and  Mell  exposed  here  in  Browne's 
Creek.  Here  the  contorted  character  of  the  rhythmically  banded  "varve"  rock  is 
most  striking  (se.e  Text-fig.  4)  and  so  also  is  the  presence  of  abundant  erratics  of 
granite,  some  over  a  yard  in  diameter,  embedded  in  these  fine-grained  sediments 
(ser  Text-figs.  5  and  6)  .     The  main  varve  zone  is  followed  as  usual  by  laminated 

•For  photographs  of  glaciated  pebbles  from  Browne's  Creek  and  Eocky  Creek  see  Plate 
xxiv.,  figs.9,10  of  section  B  of  this  paper,  to  appear  in  Part  3  of  these  Proceedings  for  1920. 


298 


GEOLOGT  AND  PETROLOGY  OF  THE  GREAT  SERPEXTIXE  BELT  OF  X.S.W. 


oiive-gi'een  nuulstones  about  sixty  feet  in  thickness  overlain  by  a  tliiu  tuflfaceous 
conglomerate  containing  Rhacopteris  intermedia  and  E.  racmerif  (probably  tha 
equivalent  of  the  Rhacopteris  beds  by  Proctor's  homestead) .  TJiese  are  followed 
by  the  Main  Felspathic  Grit.  The  main  "varve"  zone  and  the  olive-green  mud- 
stones  are  weak  structures  compared  with  the  tillites  below  and  the  g^its  above, 
and  their  extension  for  some  miles  to  the  north  is  indicated  by  the  manner  in 
which  the  heads  of  creeks  open  out  into  strike  valleys  following  the  base  of  the 
^lain  Felspathic  Grit  In  the  three  jireeeding  traverses  across  steep  slopes  only 
broad  subdivisions  of  the  Lower  Glacial  Series  have  been  traced.  The  exposures 
in  Currabubula  Creek,  where  it  passes  through  the  township,  indicate  that  in 
reality  the  succession  of  beds  is  more  complex.  The  section  from  the  point  where 
the  Creek  is  crossed  by  the  Duri  Road  to  that  where  it  is  joined  by  Anstey's  Creek 


Text-fig. 4.  Contorted  "varve-rock"  in  Browne's  Creek. 


Text-fig.  5.     A  rounded  granite  houlder  in 
"varve-rock,"  Browne's  Creek. 


Text-fig. 6.  Subangular  granite 
boulders  in  contorted  "varve- 
rock,"  Browne's  Creek. 


merits  detailed  study.  Commencing  the  section  is  a  thick  band  of  conglomerate 
followed  by  banded  mudstone  40  ft.,  tillite  10  ft.  (including  a  granite-erratic 
three  feet  in  diameter),  well  bedded  felspathic  tuff  30  ft.,  tillite  10  ft.,  contoi-ted 
'•varve"-like  felspathic  tuff  50  ft.,  tillite  30  ft.,  followed  by  thii-k  conglomerate 
extending  to  the  bond  where  Kocky  Creek  enters.  Here  the  section  is  broken  by 
a  zone  of  crushing  probably  denoting  a  fault.  There  follows  banded  contorted 
"varve"  rock  60  f t ,  containing  many  small  erratics;  this  must  be  considered  to  be 
the  main  "varve"  zone.     It  is  overlain  by  laminated  olive-green  mudstones,  and 


BY    W.   N.    BENSON^    W.    S.   DUN,  AND    W.    B.    BROWNE. 


299 


tliese  again  by  the  Main  Felspathic  Grit  which  extends  beyond  the  point  where 
Anstey's  Creek  enters  the  main  stream.  The  grit  contains  intercalated  bauds  of 
conglomerate. 

(b)  The  Main  Felspathic  Grit  which  thus  immediately  overlies  the  lower 
glacial  beds  is  the  most  uniform  portion  of  the  Kuttung  Series  in  this  district. 
It  is  a  strongly  cemented  grit  chiefly  composed  of  fragmental  grains  of  orthoclase 
and  quartz  with  a  little  albite  et  cetera.  Here  and  there  it  contains  interstratified 
pebble-bandSj  passing  into  deiinite  layers  of  conglomerate,  and  also  occasionally 
thin  bands  of  mudstone.  Its  great  resistance  to  erosion  is  seen  from  the  per- 
sistency with  which  it  forms  the  highest  ridges  throughout  the  whole  of  the  district. 
It  probably  forms  "Rocky  Peak,"  between  Quipolly  and  Werrie's  Creeks,  and  then 
north  of  it  rises  to  form  Soma,  and  the  point  immediately  north  of  it  (both 
of  which  are  higher  than  Duri  Peak) ;  it  also  forms  the  ridges  east  of  Rocky 
Creek,  and  those  lying  just  west  of  the  watershed  between  Currabubula  and  Turi 
Creek.  No  fossils  Lave  yet  been  found  in  this  formation,  which  is  approximately 
a  thousand  feet  thick.  It  evidently  resulted  from  prolonged  explosive  eruptions 
which  culminated  in  the  production  of  a  little  rhyolitic  tuff,  possibly  in  some  parts 
rhyolitic  flow-breccia,  about  fifty  feet  thick.  This  last  has  been  traced  down 
the  eastern  side  of  Rocky  Creek,  and  along-  the  western  foothills  of  the  ridges 
north  of  Currabubula. 

The  Upper  Portion  uf  the  Kuttung  Series. 

The  beds  following  this  are  again  more  or  less  glacial  in  character.  North 
of  Currabubula  Creek,  a  little  basic  tuff  and  a  flow  of  basalt  only  a  yard  wide 
intervene  between  the  rhyolitic  tuff  and  the  tillite,  but  these  are  absent  from  the 
development  in  Rocky  Creek  where  also  some  faulting  appears  to  have  obscured 
the  succession.  The  tillite  has  the  same  general  characters  as  that  in  the  Lower 
glacial  beds,  and  contains  striated  pebbles  of  quartzite  {see  footnote  on  p.  297) 
among  many  more  or  less  rounded  boulders  of  granite,  porphyi-y,  and  aplite. 
It  becomes  more  conglomeratic  in  character  in  its  higher  portions,  and  is  inter- 
stratified with  a  large  amount  of  felspathic  tuff.  About  fifteen  hundred  feet  above 
the  top  of  the  Main  Felspathic  Grit  there  is  a  narrow  zone  of  fine-grained,  white 
felspathic  tuffs,  which  may  be  traced  up  the  face  of  and  the  spur  to  the  south  of 
the  hill  immediately  to  the  south-east  of  Currabubula.  Traces  of  Hhacopteris 
have  been  observed  in  this,  and  associated  with  it  are  contorted  banded  tuffs  some- 
what resembling  "varve"  rock.  Altogether  these  are  rather  more  than  fifty  feet 
thick.  Two  miles  from  Currabubula  Station,  in  portion  274,  where  the  western 
branch  of  Rocky  Creek  crosses  what  is  probably  this  horizon,  coarse  tillite  is  seen 
containing  several  narrow  layers  of  "varve"  rock  up  to  a  foot  in  width. 

TJie  Kuttiinri  Rocks  West  of  Werris  Creek. 

The  Kuttung  rocks,  which  make  the  western  limb  of  the  syncline,  form  the 
hills  to  the  north  and  south  of  Werris  Creek  Gap.  They  have  not  yet  been  in- 
vestigated in  detail,  but  appear  to  be  similar  to  the  upper  portion  of  the  Kuttung 
Series  near  Currabubula.  Intercalated  in  these  is  a  mass  of  andesite  thirty  feet 
thick,  which  closelv  resembles  the  rock  termed  the  Martin's  Creek  andesite  in  the 
Paterson  District,  which  there  has  been  shown  to  be  a  flow.  Immediately  to  the 
west  of  these  hills  extend  the  Liverpool  Plains  which,  near  the  Werris  Creek  Gap, 
are  covered  by  black  soil,  probably  derived  from  the  Werrie  basalts.  It  is 
possible  that  the  western  face   of  these   hills  is  parallel  to  a  line  of  strike-fault 


300     GEOLOGY  AND  PETROLOGY  OF  THE  GREAT  SERPEXTIXE  BELT  OF  X.S.W; 

bringing  up  the  Burimli  beds  beneath  the  cover  of  black  soil.  The  width  of  the 
range  does  not  seem  sufficient  to  permit  of  the  development  here  of  the  full  thiefe- 
ness  of  the  Kuttung  Series  (see  Text-fig.  2). 

General  Bemarks  Concerning  the  Kuttung  Series. 

Summarising  the  above  facts  we  find  that  the  Kuttung  Series  in  this  region 
is  made  up  of  the  following  members: — ■ 

Upper  Portion:  Approximate  Thickness. 

Tuft's  and  conglomerates 1600  feet . 

Bhacopteris  tuffs  and  varve  beds 50 

Upper  Tillites,  conglomerates  and    tuffs 1500 

Middle  Portion : 

Khyolite  Tuff 50 

Main  Felspathic  Grit     1000 

Lower  Glacial  Beds 1300 

Lower  Portion: 

Felspathic   tuffs   and   pebble   beds  (say) 4000 

Total 9500 

The  total  thickness  of  the  Kuttung  Series  in  this  district  is  thus  comparable 
with  the  thickness  of  7000  feet  measured  in  the  same  series  in  the  Paterson  area 
by  Professor  David  and  Mr.  Sussmilch  (4) .  It  would,  however,  be  quite  pre- 
mature to  attempt  any  detailed  correlation.  A  striking  point  of  distinction  is  the 
comparative  rarity  of  actual  flows  of  volcanic  rock  in  the  Currabubula  district,  con- 
trasted with  their  frequent  occurrence  in  the  Paterson  region. 

Attention  may  here  be  directed  to  the  writer's  comment  on  the  section  exposed 
on  Rocky  Creek  near  Bingara  (2.  p.  268), — "The  series  is,  in  ascending  order; 
Burindi  tuft'aceous  mudstoncs.  followed  by  tuffs  covered  by  a  very  gi'eat  thickness 
of  coarse  conglomerates  with  boulders  of  granite,  porphyry  and  rhyolite  in  a  tuff- 
aceous  groundmass,  with  interbedded  layers  of  rhyolite  and  rhyolite  tuff.  Following 
this  there  is  more  tuff,  and  al)ove  a  band,  about  fifty  feet  thick,  of  a  hard  cherty  tuff, 
very  fine  grained  but  including  small  pebliles  of  gi-anite,  etc."  [See  also  the 
microscopic  description  (23,  p.  720,  M.B.  16).]  "Following  this  is  a  mass  of 
coarse  rhyolite  tuff.  Altogether  the  series  cannot  be  less  than  two  thousand  feet 
thick,  and  the  hill  at  the  side  exposes  at  least  five  hundred  feet  more." 

The  experience  now  gained  leads  the  writer  to  conclude  that  this  "hard 
cherty  tuff,"  observed  by  him  in  1911,  was  also  a  glacial  rock  containing  small 
erratics,  and  that  the  section  exposed  on  Rocky  Creek  is  perhaps  comparable  \vith 
the  Middle  and  Lower  Portions  of  the  Kuttung  Series  as  here  described. 

As  regards  the  conditions  under  which  these  sediments  were  deposited,  it  is 
evident  that  the  epoch  of  their  foi'mation  was  one  of  continuous  and  energetic 
explosive  volcanic  activity,  accompanied  by  extensive  glaciation.  The  apparent 
absence  of  striated  pavements  and  the  rarity  of  the  preservation  of  striae  except 
on  the  quartzite  pebbles,  together  with  the  abundance  of  waterwom  pebbles  and 
of  "varve"  rocks,  seem  to  indicate  that  fluvio-glacial  rather  than  purely  glacial  con- 
ditions predominated,  a  conclusion  whicli  accords  with  that  of  Professor  David  and 
]\rr.  Sussmilch  (4) .  At  the  same  time,  the  unstratified  beds  containing  large 
boulders  scattered  through  a  felspathic  matrix  have  soine  features  like  those  of 
subglacial  till.     It  must  also  be  pointed  out  that  the  discrimination  between  glacial 


BY    W.    N.    BENSON,    W.    S.   DVS ,   AND    W.    R.    BROWNE.  301 

l)eils  autl  mere  conglomerates  rests  at  preseut  upon  a  rapid  survey  only.  It  will 
be  necessary  to  establish  and  apply  critically  discriminative  criteria  before  definite 
conclusions  concerning  these  beds  may  be  obtr.incd. 

'Hie  Werrie  Volcanic  Series. 

This  consists  cf  an  immense  mass  of  basaltic  rocks,  which  are  now  probably 
over  two  or  three  thousand  feet  thick  near  Warragundi,  and  must  originally  have 
been  much  more  extensive.  Invading  these  is  an  extensive  series  of  siUs  and 
dykes  described  below  The  lavas  are  chiefly  very  decomposed  basalts,  of  which 
the  petrological  examination  is  very  diiticult.  No  fresh  examples  have  been  ob- 
tained, though  the  nature  of  the  rock  may  be  fairly  well  determined  in  a  speci- 
*men  from  the  bottom  of  a  deep  well  near  the  head  of  Anstey's  Creek.  The  rocks 
are  very  vesicular,  the  vesicles  being  either  empty  or  filled  with  zeolites,  calcite, 
chlorite,  or  a  form  of  silica.  Here  and  there  there  is  evidence  that  the  mass  is 
composed  of  many  flows  of  small  size.  In  the  banks  of  creeks  the  irregular  out- 
lines of  the  chilled  margins  of  slaggy  flows  may  be  seen. 

On  the  summit  of  a  hill  in  portion  110,  Parish  of  Werrie  (west  of  the 
area  mapped),  at  the  highest  point  of  the  Werrie  lavas  so  far  as  is  yet  known, 
slaggy  and  ropy  lava  is  found  deeply  weathered  and  of  red  brown  colour.  It  is 
not,  however,  a  true  basalt. 

Warragundi,  ur  Terriljle  Mountain,*  and  the  group  of  hills  around  it  probably 
formed  the  centre  of  the  ancient  volcanic  activity.  In  all  probability  the  original 
volcanoes  were  dissected  and  reduced  in  Permo-Carboniferous  times,  and  covered 
with  Glossopteris-hearing  sandstones,  of  which  a  remnant  still  occurs  near  Werris 
Creek.  This  covering  being  stripped  off  by  subsequent  erosion,  perhaps  in  com- 
paratively recent  times,  renewed  dissection  has  cut  deep  into  the  core  of  the  old 
volcano.  Probably  there  is  no  finer  examjilc  in  Australia  of  a  dissected  volcanic 
complex  than  is  afforded  by  these  liills,  the  detailed  examination  of  which  will 
form  a  most  fascinating  study.  The  writer  has  been  able  to  spend  only  three 
days  among  these  hills,  and  has  therefore  merely  indicated  on  the  map,  Plate  xvii., 
rouighly  the  area  in  which  the  gTeatest  variety  of  rocks  is  to  be  found,  classing 
the  whole  as  the  Warragundi  complex.  A  few  notes,  ho'wever,  may  be  given  to 
indicate  the  nature  of  this  complex.  The  basaltic  rocks  are  in  one  place  associ- 
ated with  rhyolite,  possibly  a  flow.  They  have  been  broken  through  by  large 
masses  of  trachytie  or  felsitic  agglomerate,  the  largest  of  which  forms  Warra- 
gundi itself,  and  adjacent  to  these  are  more  basic  agglomerates.  In  addition, 
there  is  a  varied  and  extensive  series  of  intrusive  rocks,  which  form  dykes,  sills 
or  sheets,  or  less  regularly  shaped  masses,  the  rocks  of  which  may  be  termed 
provisionally  felsites  or  granophyres  and  keratophyres,  porphyrites  of  several 
types,  and  dolerites.  These  are  clearly  related  to  the  intrasive  rocks,  dykes  and 
sheets  in  the  Carboniferous  sediments,  as  will  appear  more  clearly  after  a  con- 
sideration of  the  latter  rocks.  It  will  suflRee  at  present  to  point  out  that  the 
dykes  in  the  sediments  tend  to  radiate  out  from  about  Warragundi.  From  this 
centre  two  bundles  of  dykes  pass  outwards,  the  one  extending  to  the  east,  form- 
ing the  ridge  at  the  head  of  Anstey's  Creek,  and  extending  for  a  considerable  dis- 
tance through  the  Kuttung  rocks;  the  other  bundle  strikes  to  the  south-west  and 
bends  round  almost  to  a  southerly  direction  on  crossing  Werrie's  Creek,  and  being 
resistant  to    erosion     the    dykes  have    determined   the  yiresenee    of  the  creseentie 

'  See  footnote  p. 292. 


302  GEOLOGY  ANLi  PETROLOGY    OF   THE   GREAT  SERPEXTIXE    BELT  OF    N.S.Vl . 

row  of  hills  which  lie  east  of  the  railway  line.      Possibly  this  continuous  ciyke-zono 
marks  the  site  of  fissures  from  which  the  Werrie  basalts  were  eject etl. 

The  consideration  of  the  age  of  these  rocks  is  deferred  to  a  later  section 
(p.  308),  but  the  most  probalik;  conclusion  is  that  they  were  formed  in  late  Car- 
boniferous or  earlv  Pernid-Carlinniferous  times. 

Tlie  Iiitrnsive  Igneous  Itnckn. 

We  have  just  remarked  that  the  Werrie  Series  and  we  may  now  say  the 
underlying  sedimentary  formations  also,  have  been  invaded  by  numerous,  more  or 
less  concordant  intrusions  and  dykes  composed  of  a  variety  of  igneous  rocks. 
These  intrusions  fall  into  several  gi'oups:  , 

(a)  Sills  and  sheets.  The  most  striking  of  the  intrusive  rocks  ai'e  sills  of 
glassy  or  lithoidal  pyroxene  andesite.  Of  these  there  are  three  zones,  a  com- 
paratively short  ard  intermittent  eastern  zone,  the  main  continuous  zone,  and  the 
western  zone  of  intermittent  Init  large  intrusions  which  rise  t<i  form  two  of  the 
highest  peaks  in  the  district.  The  resistance  to  erosion  offered  b.y  these  sills  is 
very  great,  and  as  they  are  inclined  at  a  considerable  angle  they  usually  form 
high,  sharp-ridgeil  cuestas. 

The  eastern  i'one  commences  in  a  low  hill  in  the  south-western  corner  of  the 
Parish  of  Warral  and  thence  continues  intermittently  southwards,  rising  into  a 
well  marked  ridge.  In  portions  2(56  and  197  of  the  Parish  of  Currabubula,  ex- 
posures of  the  upjier  surface  of  the  sill  seen  in  a  creek,  sliow  that  the  andesite 
has  invaded  the  mudstone,  and  included  fragments  of  it,  wliich  have  been  con- 
verted into  a  dense  flinty  hornstone.  The  sill  is  not  seen  from  about  a  mile  south 
of  the  Duri  road  until  it  appears  again  in  portion  83.  after  which  it  continues 
intermittently,  forming  a  low  ridge  extendino  for  a  mile  and  a  half  further  to  the 
south-east.  The  railway  cutting  through  tliis  ridge  reveals  a  complex  of  shat- 
tered and  indurated  mudstones,  conglomerate,  and  tuffs. 

The  main  zone  of  pyroxene  andesite  extends  from  the  Parish  of  Wiuton  on 
the  north  into  the  area  mapped,  crosses  the  low  divide  at  the  head  of  China- 
man's Gully,  and  rises  int(j  the  strongly  asymmetric  hill  east  ot  Duri  Peak  which 
has  a  precipitous  westerly-facing  scarp  and  a  long,  smooth,  but  steep  dip-slope 
to  the  east,  rising  until  the  surface  of  the  andesite  is  half  a  mile  wide.  The 
andesite  is  truncated  by  a  fault,  the  same  which  forms  the  soutliern  boundary  of 
the  igneous  rocks  of  Duii  Peak,  and  by  this  fault  the  outcrop  is  displaced  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  west,  the  down-tlirow  being  to  the  north.  A  basic  dyke 
occupies  this  fault-fissure.  Tlicnce  the  andesite  continues  in  a  succession  of  dip- 
ridges  or  cuestaii.  broken  by  minor  dip-faults  and  occasionally  crossed  by  nari'nw 
dykes  of  l)asalt,  which  weather  so  rapidly  that  they  have  determined  in  several  in- 
stances the  positions  of  the  valleys  crossing  the  andesite  (see  p.  310) .  The  most 
marked  instance  is  that  between  Mts.  Cobla  and  Sugarloaf.  Fault-fissures  also 
have  determined  transverse  valleys,  as  in  the  ease  of  Currabubida  Creek.  South 
of  the  latter  the  andesite  liand  wedges  out  and  is  replaced  by  a  second  zone  com- 
mencing to  the  east  of  this  termination  of  the  main  l)and.  The  nari'ow  strip  of 
sediments  between  these  two  masses  of  pyi'oxene  andesite  consists  of  fragnaentnl 
jaspery  rock.  The  zone  now  continues  across  the  upper  part  of  Currabubuhi 
Creek,  and  rises  into  the  higli  ridges  forming  the  western  boundary  of  the  Parisli 
of  Goonoo  Gdonoo.  It  aiipcars  to  cont'nue  for  several  miles  furtlier  tn  tlie 
south-east . 


BV    W.   N.    BENSON^    W.    S.   DUN^   AND    W.    R.    BROWNE.  303 

No  indubitable  evidence  of  the  intrusive  nature  of  this  main  zone  of 
pyroxene  andesite  has  yet  been  found,  and  its  classitieation  rests  chiefly  on  litho- 
logical  similarity  with  the  rock  of  the  eastern  zone,  and  the  similar  absence  of 
characteristically  volcanic  features.  The  jaspery  character  of  the  brecciated  rock 
between  the  two  overlapping  portions  of  this  zone,  suggests  that  here  is  contact 
metamorphism  which  has  become  most  marked  between  the  separated  portions  of  a 
split  sill,  but  it  is  still  possible  that  the  apparent  S]ilitting  and  shattering  may  be 
due  to  a  powerful  strike-fault. 

The  third  zone  is  the  most  intermittent,  thcnigh  containing  the  broadest  ex- 
posures of  pyroxene  andesite.  Of  these  the  northernmost  extends  into  the  area 
mapped  from  the  Parish  of  Winton,  crosses  the  upper  portion  of  Chinaman's 
Gully  without  producing  marked  relief,  and  becomes  rather  narrower  until  it  is 
fliaridy  upthrown  by  a  fault  to  form  the  shapely  ridge  of  Duri  Peak  (Text-fig.  3). 
In  this  the  andesite  is  exposed  as^a  clift'  of  prismatic  rock  on  the  north-eastern 
face,  showing  that  the  igneous  stratum  is  about  three  hundred  and  fifty  feet  thick. 
The  south-western  face  is  a  dip  slope  inclined  at  an  angle  of  40° .  The  southern 
flank  of  the  mass  is  grooved  by  an  L-shaped  valley,  the  position  of  which  was 
apparently  determined  by  a  small  strike  fault  intersecting  a  dip-fault,  the  latter 
partly  truncating  the  andesite,  its  plane  being  occupied  by  a  basalt  dyke.  The 
remnant  of  the  andesite  extending  beyond  this  fault  is  cut  off  by  a  second  one  a 
short  distance  to  the  south,  which  also  displaced  the  main  zone  of  andesite. 

The  portion  of  the  pyi-oxene  andesite  included  between  these  two  faults  shows 
most  markedly  a  flow  structure,  especially  on  weathered  surfaces,  where  the  lines 
of  phenocrysts  of  plagioclase  and  pyroxene  stand  out  distinctly  from  the  glassy 
matrix,  which  is  often  weathered  to  a  bright  red  colour  by  the  separation  of  dusty 
haematite . 

About  a  mile  to  the  south-east  from  here  is  a  small  mass  of  pitclistone  (in 
portion  116)  from  which  was  obtained  the  sample  which  has  been  analysed.  It 
forms  an  inconspicuous  knoll. 

The  pyroxene  andesites  appear  again  in  the  valley  of  Sandy  Creek.  Thev 
are  l)rought  up  to  the  surface  by  9,  fault  (which  has  been  traced  westwards  for 
some  distance),  and  thence  the  mass  swells  out  to  a  width  of  about  half  a  mile, 
continuing  for  two  miles  to  the  south-east  and  rising  to  form  a  small  group  of 
hills  about  five  hundred  feet  above  the  floor  of  the  valley.  Two  faults  cross  this 
mass,  displacing  it  slightly,  and  its  southern  margin  is  also  a  fault  traceable  tor 
some  distance  westward.  An  interesting  feature  of  this  mass  is  its  three-fold 
nature.  The  highest  hill  is  seen  to  be  craggy  on  the  easterly  and  westerly 
aspects,  the  rock  composing  the  slopes  being  very  glassy,  but  in  the  centre  of  the 
hill  there  is  a  smooth  saddle,  slightly  lower  than  the  sides,  and  composed  of 
lithoidal  andesite.  Possibly  the  mass  is  twofold  in  nature,  the  vitrophyric  ex- 
ternal segments  having  a  lithoidal  inner  portion.  In  other  parts  of  this 
region  is  seen  a  close  association  of  lithoidal  and  glassy  rocks  uf  otherwise  simi- 
lar nature,  and  forming  part  of  a  simple  mass.  The  significance  of  this  will  be  a 
matter  of  interesting  research.  A  somewhat  analogous  association  has  been 
found  to  be  not  uncommon  in  Western  Scotland  (24).  This  ma.ss,  if  stratiform, 
must  be  nearly  fifteen  hundred  feet  thick. 

The  last  occurrence  of  pyroxene  andesite  remaining  for  description  is  that 
which  forms  Kingsmill's  Peak  at  the  head  of  Curiabubula,  Werrie's  and  Back 
Creeks.  In  this  mass  the  width  of  the  exposed  surface  of  pyi-oxene  andesite  is 
gi-eater  than    elsewhere  owing  to    the    smaller   inclination    of   the  dip-slope.     The 


304    GEOLOGY  AND  PETROLOGY  OF  THE  GREAT  SERPENTINE  BELT  OP  N.S.W. 

western  boundary  of  the  mass  is  a  strongly  marked  fault  which  crosses  Werrie's 
Creek  obliquely.  The  eastern  margin  is  a  steep  scarp.  The  andesite  appears  to 
be  cut  off  to  the  south  by  a  dip-fault,  and  does  not  reach  Back  Creek.  The  thick- 
ness of  the  sill  does  not  apparently  exceed  three  hundred  feet  at  its  eastern 
margin .  •  * 

As  in  the  case  of  the  occurrences  along  the  main  zone  of  pyroxene  andesite, 
no  exposures  have  been  found  of  the  contact  between  the  igneous  rock  and  tha 
surrounding  sediments^  and  the  classification  of  the  four  western  masses  as  intru- 
sive bodies  again  rests  on  their  lithologieal  resemblance  to  the  rocks  intrusive 
into  the  Burindi  beds  two  or  three  thousand  feet  lower  in  the  stratigrapliical  suc- 
cession. Against  this  it  might  be  urged  that  there  is  a  lithologieal  similarity  no 
less  marked  between  the  rocks  of  the  main  and  western  zone  of  pyroxene  andesite 
and  those  which  in  the  Seaham  and  Clarencetown  areas  are  considered  to  be 
flows  (4) .  In  our  area  the  rocks  are  marked  by  concordant  fluxional  banding,  and 
by  an  absence  of  any  evidence  of  a  scoriaceous  or  spherulitie  upper  surface,  or  of 
the  presence  of  fragments  of  similar  rock  in  the  tuffaceous  beds  among  which 
they  occur.  These  features,  together  with  their  gi-eat  thickness  and  continuity, 
are  perhaps  more  in  favour  of  an  intrusive  than  an  extrusive  origin  for  the 
andesite. 

Among  the  main  minor  sheets  and  sills,  we  may  consider  tliose  of  andesite, 
quartz  basalt  and  doleritc,  and  also  those  of  keratophyre. 

A  short  distance  below  the  Lower  Glacial  zone  is  a  band  of  hornblende 
andesite  extending  along  the  eastward  slope  of  the  ridge  north  of  Cun'abubula,  and 
occurring  again  in  a  similar  horizon  in  portion  88,  near  Proctor's,  south  of  Curra- 
bubula  Creek.  It  is  of  the  type  of  rock  known  as  Martin's  Creek  andesite  in  the 
Paterson  region  (4),  weathers  to  an  ochreous  or  buff  colour,  showing  strongly- 
marked  fluidal  structure,  and  in  the  rare  fresh  specimens  is  a  grey-blue  with 
plentiful  phenoerysts  of  plagioclase  and  hornblende.  As  before  noted,  the  same 
type  of  rock  may  be  found  in  the  Kuttung  Rocks  in  Werris  Creek  Gap.  The 
rock  of  this  type  in  the  Paterson  region  is  considered  to  be  a  flow :  here  it  is  classed 
doubtfully  as  a  sill.     Decisive  evidence  is  not  yet  available. 

Andesites  and  porphjrrites  of  several  other  types  occur  forming  sheets  in  the 
Warragundi  hills.  The  (|uartz  basalts  are  fine-grained,  greenish-grey  rocks  which 
are  generally  more  or  less  vesicular.  They  occur  in  most  noteworthy  amount 
forming  two  layers  extending  through  the  uppermost  portion  of  the  Kuttung 
rocks  from  Werris  Creek  to  within  two  miles  of  Currabubula.  These  are  not 
associated  with  basic  tuffs,  but  seem  to  transgress  the  bedding  planes  of  the  sedi- 
ments, and  to  be  associated  with  dykes  of  the  same  composition.  In  the  north- 
west corner  of  the  region  mapjied,  however,  is  an  irregularly  bo\inded  layer  of  the 
same  rock,  only  about  a  yard  in  width  where  observed,  intei-calated  in  ba,sic  tutf. 
This  may  perhaps  be  a  flow.  Some  sheets  of  the  same  type  of  rock  occur  along 
the  eastern  slopes  of  the  Warragundi  hills.  Sills  of  dolerite  occur  in  the  Werrie 
Volcanic  Series,  two  very  thick  masses  being  known  in, the  hiUs  east  of  WaiTa- 
gundi  Mountain,  and  thinner  ones  to  the  west,  but  these  have  not  yet  been 
studied  in  detail .  In  the  tuffs  and  conglomerates  half  a  mile  south-soiith-east  of 
Currabubula  railway  station,  there  is  a  sill  whicli  runs  for  about  a  quarter  of  a 
mile,  increasing  in  width  until  it  is  120  feet  across  near  the  northern  angle  of 
portions  271  and  287,  where  it  is  tnincated  by  a  fault.  Altlumgh  of  teschenitic 
character  and  resembling  some  of  the  Tertiar\'  intrusive  masses,  it  is  not  neees- 


BY    W     X.  BEXSOX,  ■«■.   S.    DUX^    AXD   W.    E.  BROWXE. 


313 


'■'.•"■'.  ^'    ti+    + 


t>.^.  ■•  ^i 


Serbenfin;  M>dO(vr  flaimwrfh)  Cheri''s  ere 


Co.b'? ^Werfid  Bosair   Dev"(fa5temlJospe''flid  i' 


W»5dJr" 


Tt'xt-fiy.it.     Topographical  ;incl  (_ieolut;ical  Map  of  the  Peel  River  and  Goonoo  Goonoo  District. 


314  GEOLOGY    AND   PETROLOGY    OF  THE    GRIiAT   SERPENTIXK   BELT    OF    N.S.W. 

Tamwoilh  Common  north-westwards  to  Moore  Creek,  and  is  continued  to  the 
south-east  in  the  ridges  running  out  into  the  Common,  where  tlie  liack  slope  or 
scarp  of  tile  tilted  block  has  been  deeply  dissected  by  streams  which  have  worked 
back  along-  the  soft  elaystones  and  crush  zones  between  the  hard  agghmiorates  and 
tuffs,  and  have  even  captured  part  of  the  drainage  that  previously  llowed  to  the 
north-west. 

Again  in  the  Nundle  District  {see  28)  the  varying  elevation  of  the  Tertiary 
gravels  shows  that  warping  and  faulting  has  occurred  since  their  formation,  per- 
haps during  and  certainly  also  after,  the  period  of  Tertiary  volcanic  activity. 
The  following  facts  will  indicate  this,  reference  being  made  to  the  geological  and 
topographical  map  of  the  Xundle  District  (28,  Plate  xxii.),  the  figures  being  based 
<m  aneroid  observations.  Commencing  at  Hanging  Kock  there  are  a  number  of 
occurrences  of  a  "deep  lead"  or  gravel-filled  valley  covered  over  by  basalt.  The 
floor  of  this  valley  descends  nine  hundred  feet  within  a  distance  of  three  miles 
in  a  south-westerly  direction,  the  sharp  drop  including  one  fault  of  two  hundred 
feet.  This  steep  descent  is,  however,  only  a  local  feature,  for  in  an  adjacent  dee|i 
lead  beneath  the  basalts  of  Yerrowinn,  the  fall  is  only  two  hundred  and  ten  feet 
in  a  distance  of  two  and  a  half  miles  in  a  north-westerly  direction.  In  Yellow 
Rock  Hill  the  slope  of  the  base  of  the  gravel  is  140  feet  in  a  distance 
of  two  miles  to  the  north-east,  but  the  slope  of  the  base  of  the  overlying 
basalt  is  160  feet  in  the  opposite  direction,  the  gravel  being  340  feet  thick  at  the 
soutli-c-astern  end  and  40  feet  only  at  the  other.*  Moreover,  the  lowest  point  of 
these  gravels  is  lower  now  than  anj'  possible  outlet  for  the  Tertiary  stream  sys- 
tem in  which  they  were  formed.  It  seems,  therefore,  certain  that  the  region  abo\it 
Yellow  Rock  Hill  has  been  depressed  relatively  to  the  surrounding  regions,  during 
later  Tertiai'y  or  post-Tertiary  crust  movements.  To  this  wari>ing'  and  faulting  is 
)irobably  due  also  the  sharp  decrease  in  the  height  of  the  Liverpool  Ranges  soutli 
of  the  head  of  Nundle  Creek.  We  must  therefore  conclude  that  within  the  water- 
shed cf  the  Peel  River  System,  late  or  post-Tertiary  differential  crust-movements, 
as  well  as  differential  erosion,  have  been  significant  factors  in  determining  the 
present  topogi-apliv .  This  is  in  accord  with  the  conclusi<m  obtained  from  a  study 
of  the  western  slopes  of  New  England  between  the  Namoi  and  Gwydir  Rivers,  and 
in  particular  tlie  "Nandewar  Buttress"  (2) . 

Probably  several  epochs  of  movement  and  subsequent  erosion  occurred,  as 
Andrews  (2!)/f)  has  urged.  Of  these  some  evidence  is  afforded  in  the  Nundle 
district.  The  study  of  the  relation  between  the  present  contour  lines  and  the 
boundaries  of  the  Tertiary  basalts  there  suggests  that  tliey  flooded  over  a  fairly 
matured  ])eneplain,  and  down  into  comparatively  youthfid  valleys  filled  to  a  con- 
siderable deptli  with  gravel.  Uplift  of  the  jieneplain  to  iiermit  dissection,  and 
subsequent  depression,  accounting  for  the  great  thickness  of  the  gravel  appears  |o 
have  occurred.  From  the  plateau  of  basalts  and  the  older  rocks,  however,  have 
been  caivod  out  broad  mature  valleys  to  a  depth  of  about  300  feet,  wliich  lead  into 
the  deep  lanyons  of  the  upper,  but  not  head  waters  of  sonir  of  tlie  streams  of  th<i 
ju'csent  cycle.  Thus  we  realise  the  complexity  of  the  history  of  the  ])resent  topo- 
graphy and  drainage  system.  If  it  be  indeed  a  superimposed  system,  formed  by 
the  cutting  down  of  streams  through  a  more  or  less  uniform  Mesozoic  or  Permo- 
('arboniferous  sandstone  covering  (now  I'emoved)  on  to  a  foundation  of  Upper 
Palaeozf)ic  rocks  of  very  variable  hardness,  it  must  be  recognised  that   it   has  not 

"Coiiipivri.son  should  ho  made  with  the  facts  recorded  cono'rning  the  relative  levels 
of  basalts  and  underlying  gravels  in  the  Nandewar  Kange  (2,  pp.27l'>-2"8). 


BY  -W.  K.  BENSOK,  ■«•.  S.   DVS,  AXD  W.   R.  BROWXE.  315 

beeu  by  a  siuglf  cycle  of  movement  aud  erosion,  Ijut  by  a  series  of  movements, 
regiojal  and  locals  the  effects  of  which  would  alone  suffice  to  give  much  com- 
plexity to  the  present  drainage  system  even  if  it  were  not  for  the  complicating 
factor  of  the  very  variable  hardness  of  the  structures  on  to  which  they  were  super- 
imposed. In  the  regions  of  harder  structures  some  indications  of  the  former 
valley  system  may  still  be  preserved,  but  in  the  softest  mudstones  the  streams  have 
now  succeeded  in  obliterating  nearly  all  trace  of  their  complex  history,  producing 
the  apparently  simple,  and  approximately  consequent  drainage  of  the  Tamworth 
Plains. 

Summary  or  Geological  History. 

The  long-continued  subsidence  and  sedimentation  of  Devonian  times  was  con- 
tinued into  the  Carboniferous  Period,  and  an  invasion  of  a  marine  fauna  with 
strong  aflBnities  with  that  of  Western  Europe  took  place  about  the  middle  of 
Lower  Carboniferous  times.  Volcanic  eruptions  occurred  from  time  to  time, 
producing  intercalated  layers  of  tuff,  and  occasional  bands  of  conglomerate  may 
indicate  some  crust  movement.  The  presence  of  Lepidodendron  leUheimiaiium  in 
place  of  the  L.  oust  rale  of  Devonian  times  indicates  a  change  in  the  flora  of  ad- 
jacent lands. 

Crustal  upwarping  became  more  pronounced,  and  explosive  volcanic  activity 
gi-eatly  increased.  Hydrothermal  siliceous  solutions  affected  some  of  the  flora 
(gymuosperms  and  some  indeterminable  roots)  and  an  overwhelming  predominant 
deposition  of  keratophyric  tuff  took  place,  intercalated  with  conglomerate  bands, 
a  little  mudstone,  and  rarely  flows  of  basalt.  Glaciers  formed  on  the  adjacent 
uplands,  and  discharged  great  masses  of  fluvio-giacial  conglomerate  and  till,  and 
locally  there  appeared  widespread  lakes  in  which  the  water,  charged  with  rock 
flour,  deposited  seasonally  banded  "varve"  sediments,  which  became  contorted 
through  subsequent  thrusting  from  stranding  ice-floes,  the  presence  of  which  float- 
ing in  the  lakes,  is  indicated  by  the  occurrence  of  large  boulders  drop]3cd  among 
the  banded  clays.  The  plants  of  the  period  were  now  Ehacopteris  and  Calamites. 
Meantime  explosive  eruption  continued  with  varying  intensity,  felspathic  material, 
but  occasionally  rhyolitic,  being  produced,  and  this  was  interstratified  with  con- 
glomerate, etc.  Perhaps  some  ba.sie  flows  occurred.  There  followed,  however, 
possibly  after  a  hiatus,  a  huge  development  of  flows  of  basalt  derived  from  fis- 
sures, and  perhaps  at  the  same  time  a  great  development  of  sills  of  intermediate 
and  basic  rocks  in  the  sediments  beneath  the  basalts.  Crust  warping,  fracturing, 
and  extensive  differential  movement  (block-faulting)  followed,  and  with  or  after  it 
a  great  development  of  keratophyi-e  and  quartz  keratophyre  sills  and  dykes  radi- 
ating from  the  volcanic  centre  of  Warragiuidi.  Here,  too,  many  dykes,  sheets 
and  sills  were  formed  in  the  basalts  about  the  volcanic  centre,  where  several  large 
masses  of  breccia  now  filled  the  volcanic  vents.  Dykes  of  basalt  and  dolerite,  ex- 
tending into  the  older  formations,  formed  aljout  this  time  also.  This  great  eruptive 
activity  concluded  the  Carboniferous  or  ushered  in  the  Permo-Carboniferous 
Period. 

Long  continued  erosion  followed,  but  at  tlie  close  of  this  latter  period,  the 
region  had  become  one  of  deposition  of  the  Newcastle  Series  of  Glossopteris- 
bearing  sandstone.  The  final  movements  of  the  epoch  of  crustal  instability  which 
appeared  in  Carboniferous  times,  broke  up  the  Permo-Carboniferous.  or  Permian 
sediments,  and  let  down  small  blocks  into  the  general  platform  of  older  structure, 
where  they  have  been  preserved  from  erosion.     The  jfesozoie  Era  closed  with  the 


316     GEOLOGY  AXD  PETROLOGV  OF  TUE  GREAT  SERPEKTIXE  BELT  OF  X.S.W. 

formation  of  a  peneplain,  which  in  Tertiary  times  was  uplifted  by  a  series  of 
comparatively  small  uplifts  and  finally  by  a  much  larger  one,  these  acting 
regionally  but  being  lomplicated  by  local  warping  and  faulting,  whUe  basaltic 
eruptions  occurred  after  the  first,  but  before  the  last  of  these  movements.  Erosion 
acting  throughout  this  period  has  jjroduced  wide  valleys  or  plains  on  the  softer 
structures,  but  lemnants  of  the  harder  stnictnres  are  still  preserved  in  narrow 
ridges  or  wide  plateaus. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY. 

1.  Bensox,  W.   N. — The  Geology  and  Petrology  of  the  Great  Serpentine  Belt 

of  New  South  Wales.  Part  i.  These  Proceedings,  xxxviii.,  1913, 
p.  490  517. 

2.  Part  vi..  Ibid.,  xlii..  1917,  pp.  223-282. 

3. The  Tectonic  Conditions  accompanying  the  Intrusion  of  Basic  and 

Ultrabasic  Igneous  Rocks.     Bull.  Geol.  Soe.  Amer.,  1919  (Abstract.) 

4.  David.  T.  AV.  E.  and  Sussmilch,  C.  A. — Sequence,  Glaciation  and  Corre- 

lation of  the  Carboniferous  Rocks  of  the  Hunter  River  District,  New 
South  Wales.  Jouru.  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  N.S.W..  liii.,  1919  (1920), 
pp.  246-338. 

5.  PiTTMAX,  E.  F.— Annual  Report  Dept.  Mines,  N.S.W.,  1897,  p.  137. 

6.  . Ibid     p.  135. 

7.  AxDREws.  E.   C— Ann.  Rep.  Dept.  Mines,  N.S.W.,  1914,  p.  198. 

8.  COTTOX,  L.   A  .  and  Walkom,  A.  B. — Notes  on  the  Relation  of  the  Carbon- 

iferous and  Devonian  Formations  West  of  Tamwortla.  These  Pro- 
ceedings, xxxvii..  1012.   pp.   703-708. 

9.  Mitchell,  T.  L  — Three  Exjieditions  into  tlie  Interior  of  Eastern  Australia. 

London,  1838. 

10.  Clarke,  W.   B. — The  General  Prospects  and  Conditions  of  Hanging  Rock 

and  Peel  River  Gold  Fields.  Reports  v.-vii.,  xii.,  1852.  Votes  and 
Proc.  Leg.  Council,  X.S.W.,  ii.,  1852,  pp.  485-487. 

11.  Stoxier.  G.  a  —Ann,  Report  Dept,  Mines,  N.S.W.,  1891,  p,  261. 

12.  Etheridge,  R..    JrxR.— a    jMoiidgrapli    of  the   Carboniferous    and   Permo- 

Carboniferous  Tnvertel)iata.  Pt.  i.  Coelentei-ata.  Mem.  Geol.  Surv. 
N.S.W.,  Pal.  V.    (i.),  1891,  p.  17. 

13.  Pt.  li.     Echinoderniata.  Annelida  and  Crustacea,  Ibid.,  Pal.  v.  (ii.l, 

1892,  p.  129. 

14.   Palaoontoloi;ia  Novae   Cainbriae    Mcriilioiialis.     No.    3.     Rcc.    Geol. 

Surv.  N.S.W.,  v.,  1897,  pji.  177-9. 

15.  No.  5.     Ibid.,  viii.,  1907,  pp.   192-190. 

10.   Clarke.    W.    B. — The    Sedimentary     Formations     of    New    South    Wale. 
Fourth  Ed.  1878,  p.  25. 

17.  AxDiiEws,  E.    C, — An  Outline  of  the  Tertiary    History    of    New  Knuland 

Rec.  Geol.  Surv.  N.S.AY.,  vii.,  1903,  p.  109. 

18.  Carxe,  ,L  E.— Ann.  Rep.    Deiit.  Mines,  N.S.AY..  1913,  p.  179. 

19.  CAJir..u;K,  R.   H.— .Tourn.  and  I'roe.   Roy.  Soe.    N.S.W.,  xlvi.,  1912,  p.  xxiv. 

20.  Dc-x,  W.  S.— Ann.  Rept.  Dept.  Jlines,  N.S.W.,  1914. 


BV    W.  N.    BENSON^    W.    S.  DUN,  AND    W.    R.    BROWNE.  305 

sarily  to  l)e  separated  from  the  grtnip  of  Carboniferous  igneous  roeks.     Its  age  is, 
therefore,  uncertain . 

Sills  of  keratophyre  occur  in  the  Kuttung'  Series  and  can  be  traced  along 
the  eastern  scarp  of  the  ridges  north  of  Currabubula.  One  very  interesting  sill 
occui-s  immediately  south  of  Duri  Peak.  It  extends  in  the  felspathic  tuifs  in  por- 
tion 255  for  about  half  a  mile,  then  turns  sharply  and  runs  as  a  dyke  up  the  slope 
to  the  west,  cutting  several  bauds  of  conglomerate  (or  tillite)  and  turns  once  mors 
into  a  sill  in  the  Lower  Glacial  Beds  at  a  horizon  more  than  a  thousand  feet 
higher  than  the  part  of  the  siU  in  portion  255.  A  little  to  the  south  of  the  dyke 
which  thus  connects  the  two  portions  of  the  sill,  there  is  a  second  dyke  extending 
downwards  from  the  upper  moiety  of  this  twofold  sill,  till  it  reaches  the  Duri 
pyroxene  andesite,  which,  however,  it  does  not  traverse,  though  it  seems  to  be 
represented  by  an  extension  of  the  same  dyke  of  keratophyre  on  the  opposite 
eastern  side  of  the  Duri  andesite.  There  is  here  evidence  of  the  contemporaneous 
origin  of  at  least  one  group  of  dykes  and  sills  of  keratophyre.  South  of  this, 
similar  dykes  are  found  to  extend  upwards  into  the  sills  of  which  they  were  per- 
haps the  feeding  channels,  and  one  of  these  appears  to  intersect  tlie  hornblende 
andesite  described  above. 

South  (if  Currabubula  Creek  they  appear  in  the  Middle  and  Upper  portions 
of  the  Kuttung  Beds,  and  have  been  noted  in  portions  212,  the  north-western 
corner  of  229  and  elsewhere.  With  these  we  may  perhaps  class  a  sheet  of  felsitic 
rock  which  makes  a  striking  feature  in  the  extreme  north-west  of  the  area 
mapped,  occurring  in  a  iissure  wliich  runs  parallel  to  the  Currabubula  Creek 
fault  zone. 

(6)  Intrusions  of  less  regular  form.  The  most  striking  of  these  is  perhaps 
that  which  occurs  in  the  Werrie  basalts  immediately  west  of  Currabubula.  Ap- 
pearing beneath  the  alluvium  of  Currabubula  Creek  about  a  mile  north-west 
of  the  railway  station,  it  extends  to  the  south-south-east  and  becomes  700  yards  in 
width,  and  splits  to  the  south  into  several  thick  sills- which  appear  in  the  decom- 
posed basalts  exposed  in  the  railway  cuttings.  The  rock  of  which  these  are  com- 
posed appears  to  be  a  normal  keratophyre,  but  in  the  centre  of  this  laccolitic  in 
trusion  it  is  a  quartz  keratophyre,  with  a  peculiar  interstitial  development  of 
quartz.  Quartz  is  also  found  in  the  rock  of  the  two  following  masses  which  invade 
the  Kuttung  rocks.  The  smaller  lies  in  the  lowest  portion  'of  the  series  in  the 
south-eastern  extremity  of  the  region  mapped,  and  just  below  the  main  sill  of 
andesitic  pitchstone.  Though  its  southern  extremity  has  not  been  mapped,  the 
lenticular  outline  of  the  northern  extremity  suggests  that  the  mass  is  probably  a 
laccolite. 

The  larger  mass  lies  in  the  valley  of  Werrie's  Creek  between  Kingsmill's  Peak 
and  Mount  Soma.  It  is  a  roughly  circular  area  about  a  mile  in  diameter,  and  as 
it  truncates  sharply  the  planes  of  bedding  of  the  grits  and  conglomerate  on  the 
southern  flanks  of  Mt.  Soma,  it  may  be  a  small  boss  rather  than  a  laccolite.  Its 
southern  margin  has  not  been  closely  examined.  It  is  invaded  by  a  narrow  dyke 
of  pyroxenic  keratophyre. 

(c)  Dykes.  The  dykes  consist  of  a  very  varied  assortment  of  i-ocks,  quartz 
keratophjTes,  keratophyres,  trachytes,  latites,  lamprophyre,  andesites,  dolerites 
and  basalt.  As  yet  they  have  not  been  sufficiently  studied  to  determine  their 
chronological  relationships.  In  the  northern  portion  of  the  map  they  have  a 
general  north-easterly  trend,  but  in  the  southern  ])ortion  they  run  more  nearly 
east  and  west,  tending  thus   to   radiate   from   the  volcanic  centre  of   AVarragundi, 


306     GEOLOOY  AND  PETROLOGY  OF  THE  GREAT  SERPEXTIXB  BELT  OP  N.S.W. 

whieh,  however,  is  probably  a  local  centre  of  radiation  in  a  region  of  general 
east-north-easterly  trend  of  dyke-fissures  (Compare  25).  Dykes  very  frequently 
occupy  fault  fissures,  so  that  it  is  probable  that  the  main  fault-movements  accom- 
panied or  preceded  the  formation  of  the  dykes. 

The  more  acid  dykes  consist  of  rocks  closely  resembling  the  material  compos- 
ing the  keratophyTe  sills.  These  are  most  obvious  in  the  conglomerates  and  fels- 
patliic  grits,  but  have  not  yet  been  traced  through  into  Burindi  Mudstone.  The 
longest  of  these  dykes  crosses  from  the  hills  west  of  the  head  of  Anstey's  Creek, 
and  may  be  traced  thence  across  the  sills  of  quartz  basalt  and  through  the  Kuttun* 
rocks  as  far  as  the  slopes  overlooking  Sandy  Creek.  The  fissure  which  it  occu- 
pies seems  to  be  continued  by  the  fault  truncating,  on  the  south,  the  pyroxene 
andesite  in  the  valley.  Of  the  basic  dykes,  we  may  note  the  group  of  outcrops, 
which  commence  in  the  railway  cutting  in  portion  34,  pass  through  the  gap  be- 
tween Cobla  and  Sugarloaf,  and  seem  to  be  continued  in  a  dyke  crossing  Curra- 
bubula  Creek  in  portion  140  and  the  main  road  in  portion  319 .  The  rock  in  these 
is  generally  decomposed,  but  in  the  above-mentioned  gap  is  a  compound  dyke  of 
decomposed  basalt  containing  another  dyke  in  the  centre  composed  of  fresh  dole- 
rite.  Other  fresh  specimens  of  basic  dykes  have  been  found,  particularly  where 
such  traverse  well-cemented  conglomerate.  Very  frequently  decomposed  basic 
dykes  occur  in  fault  fissures,  and  such  fault-dykes  traverse  the  sills  of  pyroxene 
andesite. 

Dykes  of  porphyi-itic  dolerite  occur  abundantly  in  the  Warragundi  complex 
but  have  not  yet  been  studied  in  detail.  They  also  occur  in  the  arcuate  line  of 
hills  that  run  to  the  south-west  from  that  volcanic  centre. 

With  regard  to  the  relative  age  of  these  various  dykes  and  sills,  little  can 
yet  be  stated,  except  that,  apart  from  the  cases  in  which  the  keratophyre  dykes 
and  sills  may  be  contemporaneous,  but  older  than  the  pyroxene  andesites,  the  dykes 
are  younger  than  the  sills  wherever  their  intersections  have  been  observed.  Per- 
haps here  also  the  ])hase  of  minor  intrusions  was  one  of  increasing  basicity  (Cora- 
pare  25).  Nevertheless,  it  must  be  emphasised  that  much  detailed  observation  of 
these  rocks  is  yet  required,  and  that  the  present  list  of  types  of  rock  developed, 
and  mapping  of  intrusions  is  far  from  being  exhaustive . 

The  Permian  ( ?)  Glossoptkris  Sandstone. 
These  rocks  were  first  noted  by  Mr.  J.  E.  Carne  (18),  being  pointed  out 
to  him  and  later  to  ourselves  by  Mr.  Hammond,  of  Escott  Park.  They  are  not 
present  in  the  area  mapped  in  detail,  but  occur  in  Grenfell  Parish,  and  extend 
along  the  western  side  of  the  railway  line  for  a  mile  and  a  half,  commencing  two 
miles  south  of  Werris  Creek.  Mr.  Carne  noted  a  dip  to  the  W.S.W.  at  20°  on 
the  eastern  edge  of  the  sandstone,  and  we  observed  a  dip  of  like  amount  in  the 
opposite  direction  on  the  western  side.  The  sandstone  is  thus  bent  into  sympathy 
with  the  folding  of  the  Kuttung  Beds  and  lies  over  the  synclinal  axis.  It  is  prob- 
ably not  merely  a  residual  mass  left  by  erosion ;  its  sharp,  almost  rectilinear 
boundaries  are  more  in  accord  with  the  view  that  it  is  an  infaulted  outlier  brought 
now  into  relief  by  differential  erosion  of  the  softer  basalts  about  it.  The  rociv 
consists  of  sandstone  and  a  little  conglomerate,  (|uite  different  from  that  of  the 
Kuttung  rocks;  indeed  the  sandstone  is  remarkably  similar  to  that  in  the  New- 
castle Coal  Mea.«UJ'es  west  of  Pokolbin,  with  which  it  is  tentatively  correlated. 
Like  them  it  contains  several  species  of  Glossopterix  with  Yertchrnria  and  silici- 
fied  (coniferous?)  wood.  Mr.  Carne,  however,  suggested  that  it  might  be  cone- 
lated  with  the  Creta  dial  Measures. 


bv  w.  n.  benson^  \v.  s.  dun,  and  w.  s.  browne.  307 

Tektiarv  Igneous  Rocks. 
A  tew  masses  of  rock  may  be  referred  to  this  epoch.  More  than  three  miles 
to  the  south-south-east  of  Currabubula  railway  station,  in  the  centre  of  portion  178, 
there  is  an  oval  patch  of  basalt,  the  major  and  minor  axes  of  which  are  forty  and 
twenty  feet  respectively:  this  is  probably  a  pipe.  A  second  and  smaller  patch 
occurs  a  mile  and  a  half  east  of  t'urrabubula  on  the  lane  between  portions  31t) 
and  68.  The  rocks  comprising  these  are  indistinguishable  in  hand  specimen  from 
the  normal  Tertiary  basalt  of  this  State.  Mr.  Browne  considers  there  is  con- 
siderable similarity  between  the  Tertiary  teschenitie  dolerites  found  in  the 
vicinity,  e.g.,  at  Goonoo  Goonoo  (23,  p.  703)  and  near  Muriiirundi  and  the  tes- 
chenitie dolerite  occurring  south  of  C'urrabubula  township.  This  similarity  is 
not,  however,  suflicient  to  determine  that  the  latter  is  (jf  Tertiary  age. 

Recent  Alluvium. 
No  features  of  the  Tertiary  alluvium  call  for  special  comment,  except  the 
widespread  character  of  the  alluvial  fans  where  gullies  open  out  on  to  the  areas 
of  WeiTie  basalt.  The  distribution  of  ochreous  felsitic  detritus  on  the  black 
soil  of  the  plains  at  the  north  side  of  the  Warragimdi  hills  shows  how  much 
alluviation  of  piedmont  plains  may  be  produced,  not  by  definite  streams,  but 
merely  by  the  creeping  of  the  soil  mantle  down  the  slopes  of  the  hills  directly 
leading  to  the  plains.  An  extensive  alluvial  fan  has  formed  at  the  mouth  of 
Browne's  Creek,  the  result  of  a  land  slide  whicli  occuiTed  a  few  years  ago. 

Tectonics. 
The  general  structure  of  the  district  is  simple.  As  shown  in  Text-figures  1 
and  2,  it  is  a  syncline,  the  region  mapped  in  detail  forming  the  eastern  limb. 
This  consists  of  a  long  secjuence  of  sediments  of  Carboniferous  age  with  a  total 
thickness  of  about  fourteen  thousand  feet,  and  covered  by  lava  flows  of  unknown 
thickness.  The  whole  dips  to  the  west-south-west  at  an  angle  varying  between 
28°  and  45°.  but  usually  about  37°  in  the  northern  portion,  but  less  steeply  near 
Werris  Creek.  Complexity  is  brought  in  by  the  faults,  of  which  there  are  two 
series.  The  dip-faults  are  very  obvious  and  numerous  and  often  have  a  very  con- 
siderable tlirow.  Of  these  the  most  important  is  that  first  made  apparent  by  the 
discovery  of  the  glncial  beds  of  Browne's  Creek  and  at  Proctor's  liomestead,  which 
though  formerly  continuous,  have  been  displaced  about  half  a  mile.  Approximate 
determinations  show  that  the  downthrow  on  the  southern  side  of  the  fault  at 
Currabubula  must  be  about  twenty-seven  hundred  feet.  But,  where  (presum- 
ably) the  same  fault  crosses  the  main  zone  of  pyroxene  andesite,  the  downthrow 
is  on  the  northern  side  and  is  only  a  hundred  feet.  If  we  consider  this  fault  to 
have  therefore  had  a  pivotal  movement,  the  present  westerly  inclination  of  the 
beds  on  tlie  soutli  side  of  the  fault  should  be  about  ten  degrees  greater  than  it  is 
on  the  north,  but  instead  there  is  no  noticeable  difference  of  dip.  The  same 
absence  of  evi<lence  of  pivotal  movement  wliere  it  might  be  expected  arises  in 
other  eases  as  shown  below.  Parallel  to  this  fault  are  several  other  features, 
the  long  dyke  of  hornblende  andesite  in  the  north-western  portion  of  the  area 
majaped,  the  large  laccolite  of  keratophyre  west  of  Currabubula.  a  narrow  zone 
of  crushing  which  crosses  Currabubula  ( "reek  just  below  its  junction  with  Rocky 
Creek,  the  lower  course  of  the  valley  of  Rocky  Creek  itself,  and  the  dyke  of 
keratophyre  that  extends  from  the  "elbow"  in  this  creek,  past  Proctor's  home- 
stead towards  the  Gap  south  of  Cobla — these  all  combine  to  show  that  a  broad 
belt  of  fracturing  traverses  the  Peel  Range  at  this  place,  into  which  were  injected 


308     GEOLOGY  AND  PETROLOGi'  OF  THE  GREAT  SERPEXTIXE  BELT  OF  N.S.W. 

felsitic  magmas  iu  late  Palaeozoic  times,  and  by  which,  at  the  present  time,  the 
structures  have  been  rendered  less  resistant  to  stream  erosion.  Concerning  other 
miportant  dip-faults,  we  may  note  that  these  have  also  very  extensive  throws. 
The  fault  immediately  north  of  Duri  Peak  thi-ows  the  andesite  down  nearly  nine 
hundred  feet,  but,  though  the  displacement  of  the  andesite  directly  to  the  east 
has  not  been  measured,  it  has  clearly  not  been  moved  along  the  fault  to  the  same 
extent  as  the  mass  composing  Duri  Peak.  This  mass  again  is  cut  off  to  the  south 
by  two  faults  with  an  aggregate  throw  of  over  twelve  hundred  feet.  This,  how- 
ever, does  affect  the  rocks  to  the  east,  but  the  southern  side  of  the  fault  is  the  up- 
throw side  to  almost  as  great  an  amount.  Two  miles  further  south  there  is  an- 
other fault,  possibly  a  branch  of  the  Currabubula  Creek  fault  zone,  and  this  has 
moved  the  main  zone  of  andesite  so  that  the  southern  side  of  the  fault  has  been 
thrown  up  over  six  hundred  feet. 

South  of  Currabubula  Creek  the  mass  of  andesite  in  the  valley  of  Sandy 
Gully  is  brought  up  by  a  fault  of  at  least  nine  hundred  feet  throw,  which  is  fol- 
lowed immediately  by  another  of  about  four  hundred  feet  throw.  Both  these 
seem  to  affect  the  sedimentary  rocks  immediately  to  the  west  to  some  extent, 
but  have  no  noticeable  effect  on  andesite  to  the  east,  unless  the  first  strikes  through 
Currabulnila  Creek  Gap  also,  where  a  fault  movement  of  about  a  hundred  feet  ha'! 
occurred .  The  mass  of  andesite  in  the  valley  of  Sandy  Gully  is  again  cut  by 
faults,  the  one  throwing  up  to  the  south  about  four  lumdred  feet,  and  the  other 
with  a  throw  of  perhaps  nine  hundred  feet  completely  cutting  off  the  mass  of  an- 
desite, but  neither  of  these  appeai-s  to  have  had  any  effect  on  the  andesite  of  the 
main  zone  immediately  to  the  west.  This  extraordinary  diversity  of  movement 
along  the  one  fault  line,  witliout  an  accompanying  change  of  dip,  owing  to  local 
warping,  can  lie  best  explained  Ijy  the  presence  of  several  strike-faults,  and  the 
assumption  that  the  region  was  tilted,  fractured  by  strike  and  dip-faults,  and  the 
blocks  into  which  the  crust  was  thus  separated  moved  up  and  down  to  various  ele- 
vations. Unfortunately  direct  evidence  of  the  existence  of  such  strike-faults  is 
wanting  save  for  that  running  west  of  Kingsmill's  Peak.  The  occurrence  of  a  belt 
of  mudstone  beside  the  main  zone  of  andesite  directly  east  of  Duri  Peak,  and 
again  midway  between  the  western  and  main  zone  of  andesites  crossed  by  the 
section  line  two  miles  to  the  south,  may  result  from  the  presence  of  such  strike 
faulting  (Compare  Text-fig.  3a,  Sections  A — ^B  and  C — D).  The  sections,  how- 
ever, merely  indicate  that  some  of  these  strike-faults  occur:  their  positions  and 
amount  of  throw  .ire  as  yet  almost  entirely  conjectural. 

The  occurrence  of  dip-faults  recalls  the  faults  of  the  Loomberah  District  (261 . 
It  may  be  that  these  faults  are  the  continuation  of  the  same  regional  series  per- 
pendicv;lar  to  the  fcild  axes  as  are  there  represented.  Moreover,  it  was  shown  in 
the  paper  cited,  that  the  movements  along  the  lines  both  of  dip-  and  of  strike- 
fault  must  have  continued  on  into  the  close  of  the  Pcrmo-Carbon- 
iforous  times,  or  have  been  then  repeated  as  jiostliumous  movement.  The 
same  appears  to  lave  been  the  case  near  Werris  Creek  where  the  Permian  ( ?) 
(rlnsxopferis  sandstone  has  been  let  down  anidiig  the  Wcirie  basalts  alcm^  fatiltl 
parallel  to  the  old  strike  lines. 
The  Age  of  the  Werrie  Volpaxic  Serte.s  and  Tt.s  Relatiox  to  the  Cru.st 

M0\T5MEXTS. 

The  sequence  of  events  shown  by  the  sedimentary  and  igneous  record  indi- 
cates a  close  association  between  crust-movements  and  igneous  action.  An  ex- 
tensive upward  warping  of  the  crust  is  indicated  by  the  gradual   change  in    con- 


nv    W.   X.    BENSON,    W.    S.   DuN,   AND    W.    R.    BROWNE.  309 

ditious  from  those  when  the  Buriudi  mudstones  were  deposited  in  a  sea  some 
distance  from  land,  to  those  during  the  formation  of  Kuttung  times,  when  in  the 
vicinity  of  this  area  appeared  high  land  from  which  glaciers  carried  a  load  of 
granitic  erratics,  and  streams  discharged  abundant  more  or  less  rounded  boulders, 
nud  land  plants  flourished.  As  Professor  David  and  Mr.  Sussmilch  _have  pointed 
out  (4),  though  this  movement  did  not  produce  a  stratigi-aphieal  unconformity,  it 
was  one  of  great  importance,  and  with  it  there  occurred  immense  and  prolongea 
explosive  volcanic  activity  yielding-  the  felspathic  tuft's.  These  are  clearly  related 
to  the  keratophyres  in  the  Werrie  Series.  It  requires  more  detailed  survey  than 
has  been  possible  as  yet  to  determine  whether  the  Werrie  Series  lies  conformably 
upon  the  Kuttung  sediments,  or  whether  some  crust  movement  and  erosion  of  the 
Kuttung  rocks  preceded  the  outpouring  of  the  basalts,  probably  through  fissures 
radiating  from  volcanic  centres.  It  is  evident,  however,  that  no  gTeat  hiatus 
occurred.  The  intrusion  of  pyroxene  andesite  may  have  occurred  sometime  be- 
fore the  outpouring  of  the  basalts.  Crust-fracturing  and  extensive  faulting 
supervened,  and  especially  at  this  period  would  we  note  the  formation  of  the 
Cun-abubula  Creek  zone  of  fractures,  into  which  were  injected  felsitic  magmas 
(keratophyres  and  perhaps  the  hornblende  andesites)  of  much  the  same  composi- 
tion as  the  pre-basaltic  tuffs.  The  magma  rising  in  fault  fissures  also  was  thrust 
out  into  sills  (see  p.  305). 

Perhaps  also  at  this  period  were  formed  the  large  intrusions  of  quartz 
keratophyre  on  Upper  Currabubula  Creek,  Werrie's  Creek,  and  west  of  Curra- 
bubula  township.  The  age  of  the  porphyrites  and  dolerites  we  do  not  yet  know, 
but  among  the  latest  extrusions  must  be  placed  the  basalt  dykes,  now  largely  de- 
composed, and  as  these  occur  so  frequently  in  the  fissures  of  powerful  faults,  it  is 
probable  that  crust  movements  were  still  in  progTess  at  the  time  of  their  intrusion. 
We  have  thus  evidence  of  long,  but  not  necessarily  unbroken  succession  of  igneous 
events  accompanied  by  crust-movement. 

No  evidence  of  the  extension  of  these  dykes  of  felsite,  dolerite  or  basalt  into 
the  Glossopteris  sandstone  has  yet  been  found,  and  therefore  we  conclude  that  the 
igneous  activity  about  the  Warragundi  centre  had  ceased  before  their  formation, 
though  the  crust  movements  had  not  then  ceased.  Thus,  in  the  presence  of  ex- 
tensive igneous  activity  extending  from  the  Carboniferous  period  possibly  into 
Permian  time,  with  cnistal  instability  of  even  longer  duration,  we  find  some 
analogy  here  with  the  sequence  of  events  in  the  Hunter  River  District  (4). 

PHrsiofiRAPHV  OF  THE  Peel  River  Vallet  and  its  Bordering  Ranoes. 

In  this  section  we  discuss  first  the  detailed  physiography  of  the  Currabubula 
district  as  an  introduction  to  a  general  consideration  of  the  valley  of  the  Peel 
River.  The  special  interest  of  the  physiography  of  the  Currabubula  district  lies 
in  the  vivid  manner  in  which  it  illustrates  the  effects  of  differential  erosion  of  a 
complex  terrane.  The  western  portion  of  our  area  is  formed  of  the  wide  lowland 
of  the  Tamworth  Plains;  the  portion  west  of  the  Werris  Creek  and  Piallaway 
Gaps  is  similarly  portion  of  the  Liverpool  Plains,  both  of  which  lowlands  ai-e 
(near  our  area)  cut  from  the  soft  Burindi  mudstones.  The  broad  valleys  of 
Turi  and  Sandy  Creeks  are  cut  from  the  soft  felspathic  tuffs  comprising  tlie 
lowest  portion  of  the  Kuttung  Series,  while  the  lowland  basin  between  Curra- 
bubula, Werrie's  and  Qui|ioIly  Creeks  is  cut  from  decomposed  basalts.  These  sur- 
faces lie  between  1200  and  1400  feet  above  sea  level.     The  elevations  are  all  of 


310 


GEOLOGY  AKl)  I'ETKOLOGV    Oi'    TUt;   GREAT  SEBPE^TI^E    BELT  OF    X.S.W. 


hard  rock.  Most  striking  are  the  "cuesta"  ridges  of  tlie  northeru  part  of  the 
eastern  zone  of  pyroxene  •ludesite,  the  main  zone,  Duri  and  ICingsmiU's  Peaks. 
Here  and  there  for  reasons  not  yet  apparent,  these  hard  rocks  have  been  reduced 
to  rounded  hills,  as  in  .Sandy  Creek  valley  or  the  low  knoll  in  the  valley  of  Duri 
Creek,  or  they  have  even  been  reduced  to  lowland  as  in  the  valley  of  Chinaman's 
Creek,  just  north  of  the  region  mapped.  (Perhaps  this  la.st  is  an  old  water  gap.) 
West  of  these  rise  the  complex  ridges  cut  from  the  Middle  and  Upper  portions  of 
the  Kuttung  rocks  and  moulded  in  a  great  degree  by  the  resistant  masses  of  the 
lower  tillites  and  the  main  felspathie  grit.  Between  this  is  the  softer  horizon  of 
the  main  ''varve'"  zone,  and  overlying  mudstone,  in  which  extend  tributary  heads 
of  the  small  streams,  the  adjustment  of  streams  to  structures  being  as  yet  far  from 
complete.  Westward  again  the  hills  around  Warragundi,  made  up  of  resistant 
trachytic  breccia  or  strengthened  liy  sills  and  dykes  of  dolerite  and  andesite,  rise 
above  the  surrounding  easily-eroded  Werrie  basalts.  These  greater  elevations  all 
rise  approximately  to  a  height  of  3000  feet  or  rather  less,  or  nearly  two  thousand 
feet  above  the  general  level  of  the  lower  land. 

In  minor  topographic  features,  the  adjustment  of  streams  to  structures  is  no 
less  marked.  Nearly  every  stream  which  crosses  a  resistant  band  or  zone  of  roek 
follows  through  a  belt  of  weakness,  a  line  of  faulting  or  crush  brecciation,  or  a 
dyke,  generally  one  of  the  very  readily  decomposed  basic  dykes,  often  in  a  fault- 
fissure.  Attention  may  be  called  to  several  instances  of  this  feature.  The  main 
transverse  valley  of  the  district,  that  by  which  Currabubula  Creek  passes  through 
the  Kuttung  Series  follows  the  fracture  line,  the  existence  of  which  is  shown  by 
the  displacement  of  the  rocks  of  this  Series,  and  by  other  features.  To  the 
same  direction  are  parallel  the  lower  portion  of  Rocky  Creek  and  the  fault  and 
dyke  extending  beyond  it  towards  the  gap  in  the  main  zone  of  pyroxene  ande- 
site. The  main  transverse  valley  in  the  district  thus  follows  a  marked  and  ancient 
zone  of  weakness. 

Of  the  gaps  determined  by  the  presence  of  decomposed  basic  dykes  we  have 
already  indicated  that  that  between  Mts.  Cobla  and  Sugarloaf  is  the  most  marked. 
To  the  same  cause,  however,  must  be  assigned  the  form  of  Duri  Peak,  a  striking 
landmark  seen  from  most  points  between  Barral)a  and  Hanging  Rock  {see  Text-fig. 
.3)  .  A  decomposed  basalt  dyke  crosses  the  ridge  between  the  two  summits,  and 
may  be  traced  down  cither  side.  Though  only  a  few  feet  wide,  it  has  in  all 
probability  determined  the  depression  in  the  ridge  between  the  summits. 


Text-fig.7.     Block  diagram  of  Rocky  Creek  Valley. 


By    W.  N.    BENSON,   W.    S.  DON,  AND    W.    E.    BROWNE.  311 

There  are,  however,  other  peculiarities  of  the  courses  of  streams  which  do  not 
appear  to  be  referable  to  either  of  these  causes  [see  Text-fig.  7) .  The  eastern 
branch  of  Rocky  Creek,  for  example,  rises  on  the  upper  surface  of  the  very  resistant 
Main  Felspathic  Grit,  and  owing  to  monoelinal  shifting  (in  Gilbert's  sense,  27), 
the  upper  part  of  its  course,  which  approximately  follows  the  strike,  has  been 
moved  down  to  the  western  edge  of  the  dip-slope  of  felspathic  giit.  The  easterly 
scarp  of  this  dip-slope  is  very  steep,  but  the  stream,  a  mile  from  its  source 
turns  back  across  the  line  of  the  highest  ridges  and  for  half  a  mile  flows  along  a 
niche  cut  in  the  scarp  slope,  before  again  turning  at  a  sharp  angle,  and  returning 
through  a  deep  gorge  to  the  upper  surface  of  the  dip  slope  once  more,  down  whicl; 
it  continues  for  the  remainder  of  its  course.  Though  no  sign  of  fracturing  has 
been  observed  along  the  course  of  this  lower  gorge  through  the  main  grit,  the  ap- 
proximate collinearity  of  a  fault  through  the  andesite  in  Sandy  Gully,  the  gorge  in 
question,  and  the  most  important  tributary  to  Anstey's  Creek,  may  be  not  with- 
out significance. 

We  may  compare  with  this  the  course  of  Upper  Currabubula  Creek,  from 
the  western  side  of  the  main  andesite  sill  through  to  the  eastern, 
where  it  is  separated  by  a  very  low  divide  from  the  head-waters  of 
the  tributaries  of  the  Peel  River,  which  it  might  be  expected  to  join, 
but  instead  of  so  doing,  it  returns  through  the  gap  in  the  andesite-sill  and 
flows  north-westwards  across  the  hard  Kuttung  rocks.  Similarly,  the  western 
branch  of  Rocky  Creek  continues  approximately  along  the  dip  slope  of  a  band 
of  (glacial?)  conglomerate  in  the  upper  portion  of  the  Kuttung  Series,  and  is 
very  little  entrenched  therein,  but  just  where  it  would  be  expected  to  foUow  the 
natural  slope  down  into  Anstey's  Creek  it  turns  at  a  right  angle,  forming  a  smaU 
gorge  through  the  conglomerate,  to  join  the  -  eastern  branch  described  above. 
Again,  there  is  the  little  gorge  in  which  the  western  head-waters  of  Turi  Creek 
cut  across  the  mass  of  pyroxenie  andesite.  Also,  the  passage  of  Werrie's  Creek 
through  Kuttung  rocks  at  the  Gap  to  the  west  of  the  township,  rather  than  south- 
wards along  the  soft  Werrie  lavas  in  the  depression  followed  by  the  railway  line,  is 
apparently  a  striking  instance  of  the  want  of  adjustment  of  streams  to  structures. 
These  features  suggest  that  the  present  drainage  scheme  is  a  super-imposed 
drainage,  now  greatly  modified  by  adjustment  to  structures  through  perhaps 
several  cycles  of  change,  an  idea  for  which  tb.e  writer  is  indebted  to  Mi'.  W.  R. 
Browne.  The  presence  of  the  Glossopteris  sandstones  at  WeiTis  Creek  and  in 
several  other  districts  to  the  south  and  north,  and  again  of  Permo-Carboniferous 
marine  rocks,  and  Glossopteris  beds  near  Bowling  Alley  Point  (25),  both  infault- 
ed  outliers,  renders  it  probable  that  the  intervening  area  was  at  one  time  covered 
by  Permo-Carboniferous  or  Permian  strata  lying  perhaps  unconformably  upon 
the  Devonian  and  Carboniferous  rocks.  These  have  been  almost  completely  re- 
moved and  the  original  valley  system  existing  on  these  rocks  has  been  superposed 
upon  the  underlying  complex  of  varied  rocks.  Tlie  extent  to  which  the  present 
drainage  bears  sign  of  its  ancestry  depends  upon  the  ease  of  erosion  of  the  rocks 
upon  which  the  drainage  was  superposed.  Tn  the  Tamworth  Plains,  carved  out 
of  yielding  Barraba  and  Burindi  mudstones,  a  high  degi-ee  of  maturity  has  been 
reached  and  a  thickness  of  two  tliousand  feet  of  sediments  may  have  been  re- 
moved from  the  greater  part  of  the  area.  Where  more  or  less  resistant  rocks  oceui* 
they  have  been  brought  into  greater  or  less  relief,  notably  at  Round  Mountain, 
nine  miles  south  of  Tamworth,  which  is  composed  of  a  hard  tufifaeeous  conglom- 
erate (26)  and  rises  several  hundred  feet  above  the  plain.     It  is  also  the  case  in 


312 


GEOLOGV  AXD  PETROLOGY  OF  THE  GREAT  SERPENTINE  BELT  OF  N.S.W. 


the  Livei'pool  Plains  where  the  underlying  stinietures  seem  to  have  been  more 
uniformly  weak,  and  the  base-levelling  is  more  complete.  But  in  the  interven- 
ing zone  the  valley  systems  superimposed  on  the  diverse  structures  have  retained 
their  position  to  a  varying  degree  on  the  hard  structures,  though  modified  by 
monoclinal  shifting  and  the  more  rapid  development  of  valleys  on  the  softer  stnic- 
tures. 

This  suggestion  must  be  considered  in  connection  with  that  of  the  eastern 
margin  of  the  Tamworth  Plains,  the  discussion  of  which  has  been  postponed 
until  this  region  should  be  studied.  Keference  should  be  made  for  this  to  the 
topographic  maps  in  the  writer's  previous  papers  (26)  (28)  (29)  and  to  Text-fig. 
9  herewith.  The  Moonbi  Ranges  to  the  north  and  south  of  Tamworth  rise  up 
from  the  Tamworth  Plains  to  a  level  of  about  three  thousand  five  hundred  feet, 
rising  to  the  south  to  four  thousand  feet,  as  about  Hanging  Rock.  They  are  com- 
posed of  the  resistant  jaspers  and  cherts,  the  altered  equivalents  of  the  Lower 
Tamworth    (Middle  Devonian)   claystones    and    tuffs     with    perhaps  older    rocks 


^^^^^^^ 


Text-fi^.8.      Block  tliau^i-am  of  the  Tamworth  District. 

grouped  together  as  the  Eastern  Series.  West  of  them  there  is  the  zone  of  un- 
altered Tamworth  rocks  of  less  hardness,  passing  still  westward  into  the  Barraba 
series  of  mudstones  with  resistant  tuffs.  This  forms  the  zone  of  foothills  of  the 
Moonbi  Range,  and  in  these  differential  erosion  has  had  a  considerable  effect.  In 
the  series  of  hQls  in  the  Loumbcrah  District,  in  which  the  ridges  of  harder  rock 
reach  a  level  approximating  to  three  thousand  feet,  we  may  see  the  greatly  dis- 
sected remnants  of  the  plateau  that  once  extended  across  to  the  Currabubula  re- 
gion, where  again  the  resistant  hills  rise  to  a  comparable  general  level. 

The  course  of  the  Peel  River  is  of  special  interest.  It  rises  in  two  main 
head  streams,  Wombramurra  Creek  and  the  Peel  River  itself,  which  fiow  for  the 
most  part  over  the  soft  Barraba  mudstones.  the  latter  in  a  very  open  valley. 
This  closes  north  of  Nundle  as  the  harder  cherts  of  the  lower  portion  of  the 
Tamworth  Series  are  encountered,  and  beyond  the  valley  passes  between  steep 
rough  hills,  through  the  jasperoid  rocks  of  the  eastern  series  from  Bowling  Alley 
Point  to  Piallamore,  but  returns  once  more  to  the  softer  rocks  of  the  Tamworth 
Series,  and  thence  on  to  the  BaiTaba  rocks  of  the  Tamworth  Plains.  This  alsD 
may  perhaps  be  an  example,  on  a  gi-and  scale,  of  a  superimposed  river. 

But  this  does  not  exhaust  the  variety  of  physiographic  interest  of  this  region. 
The  small  area  lying  between  the  Peel  River  and  a  line  nmning  north-north- 
westward from  Tamworth  to  Moore  Creek  (29)  has  many  of  the  features  of  a 
tilted  block   (see  Text-fig.  8) .     A  very  mature  aggraded  surface  slopes  from  the 


Proc.  Linx.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1920. 


Plate    xiv. 


noDH 


4 


3 


8 


^-■-^■-~ 


•^V 


10 


11 


12 


13 


14 


C  #  I   ^ 


15 


16 


17 


18 


19 


>-'"> 


20 


21 


22 


23 


24 


25 


26 


^.:       W^s 


29 


Atiypidae  of  New  South  Wales. 


Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1920. 


Plate    xv. 


A/rvpidac  of  New  South  Wales. 


Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1920. 


Plate  xvi. 


fv\ 


0  W^  w$ 


Wt}^ 


4 


.-i/rypi(hie  of  Xew  South  Wales. 


l*Koc  LiNS.  8w<c.  N.S.W-  im). 


^nm^'^h^r. 


Geological   M;i])  of  tlif  Oiiriabul'ula   District. 
Toposjri-apnical  Map  of  the  Currabnbiila   District. 


!•/.      -IT/  ..    1 


.0£(>r   'npM.  .o>>»   iiKiJ  ,oon"-l 


.■-.;  JA^, 


J  uiJaiU    «liir(ii<ljiTiirj  Hcl}   tu  quM    lifjidqir^'oqoT 


J'KOC.  Ll.NX.    Soc    N.>5  "W.    lill'd. 


Plate  xvii 


Geolojfical  Map  oi  thf  Currabubula   District. 


BY  W    N.  BENSON.  W.  S.  DUN.  AND  W.   R.  BROWNE. 


317 


21.  Jaqtjet,  J.  B.— The  Iron  Ore  Deposits  of  New  South  Wales.     Mem.  Geol. 

Surv  N.S.W.,  vi.,  1901,  pp.  63-71. 

22.  De  Geer. — A  Geochronology  of  the  last  12,000  years.    Compte  Reijdu.     Con- 

gres  Geol.     Internat.    (Stockholm),  1910,  pp.   2-11-253. 
See  also  Sayles,  K.  W.— "The  Squantum  Tillite."     Bull.  Mus.  Comp. 
Zool.    Harvard,    hi..  No.  2,  pp.    141-175;   Seasonal  Deposition    in 
Aqueo-glacial    Deposits.      Mem.    Mus.  Corap.  Zool.    Harvard,  xlvii.. 
No.  1    1919. 

23.  Benson,  W.   N. — The  Geology  and    Petrology  of  the  Great  Serpentine  Belt 

of  N.S.W.     Part  iii.     These  Proceedings,  xxxviii.,  1913,  pp.  662- 
724. 

24.  Anderson,  E.    M.  and  Kadley,  E.   G.— The  Pitehstones  of  Mull  and   their 

Genesis.     Quart.  Journ.  Geol.  Soc,  Ixxi.,   1915,   pp.  205-217. 

25.  Harker,  a. — The  Tertiary  Igneous  Rocks  of  Skye.     Memoirs    Geol.  Survey 

of  Great  Britain,  1904. 

26.  Benson.  W    N. — The  Geology  and  Petrology  of  the  Great  Serpentine  Belt 

of  N.S.W.     Part   vii.     These  Proceedings,   xliii.,  1918,  p.   320. 

27.  Gilbert,  G.  K.— The  Geology  of  tlie  Henry  Mountains,  1877,  pp.  135-8. 

28.  Benson,  W    N. — The  Geologj'  and  Petrologj'  of  the  Great  Serpentine  Belt 

of  N.S.W.     Part  v.     These  Proceedings,  xl.,  1915,  pp.  540-624. 

29.  Part  ii.,  Ihid.,  xxxviii.,  1913,  pp.  569-596. 

29a.   Andrews,  E.  C. — The  Geographical  Unity  of  Eastern  Australia.     Proe.  Rov. 

Soc.  N.S.W.,  xliv.,  1910.  pp.  420-480. 
296.   Notes  on  a  Model  of  New  England.     Ihid..  xlvi..  1912,  pp.  143-155 

(an.l  several  other  papers  by  the  same  author). 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES  XVII.-XVTIrt. 

Plate  xvii. — Greological  Map  of  the  Currabuhula  District. 
Plate  xviirt.— Topographical  Map  of  the  Curvabubiila  District. 


318 


ORDIXARV  :\r()XTHLY  MEETING. 
25th  August,  1920. 
Mr.   .J.   .J.  Fletfher.  M.A..  B.Si-.,  Piesideut,  in  the  Cliair. 

Mr.  NORMAX  Bartlett  I'rienu.  42  Pile  Street.  Dulwii'h  Hill,  was  eleeted  an 
Ordinary  Member  of  the  Society. 

The  President  made  regretful  reference  to  the  death  of  Mr.  F.  M.  Clements, 
who  had  been  a  member  of  the  Society  since  1911. 

The  Donations  and  Exchanges  received  since  the  jirevious  Monthly  Meeting 
(28th  July,  1920),  amounting  to  2  Volumes,  49  Parts  or  Nos.,  2  Bulletins,  1 
Report  and  2  Pamphlets,  received  from  45  Societies  and  Institutions  and  one 
private  donor,  were  laid  upon  the  table. 

NOTES   AND    EXHIBITS. 

Mr.  T.  Steel  exhibited  a  jiortion  of  the  liver  uf  a  domestic  fowl  showing  a 
common  pin  one  inch  in  length  embedded  in  the  liver  substance.  Both  ends 
of  the  pin  projected  for  several  mm.,  and  were  enveloped  in  liver  tissue,  the 
head  and  point  bein;-'  distinctly  outlined.  The  pin  must  have  been  swallowed  and 
then  worked  its  way  through  the  tissues  until  it  became  tixed  in  the  position  found. 
Mr.  Steel  mentioned  having  been  shown  the  crop  of  a  domestic  duck  which  was 
crammed  with  common  pins  picked  up  by  the  bird  when  running  about  a  back 
verandah  where  dressmaking  was  going  un. 

Mr.  W.  W.  Frogg'att  exhibited  specimens  of  the  larva  of  the  t'up  moth 
{Apoda  xylomeli)  on  a  Waratah  from  Sydney. 

Miss  Y.  Irwin  Smith  exhibited  a  female  specimen  of  the  conuuon  "hug  moth" 
{Metura  elongata  Saunders),  and  gave  an  account  of  its  observed  method  of  pro- 
gression up  a  vertical  pane  of  glass.  In  climbinsi;  it  clung  to  a  narrow  transverse 
bar  of  silky  threads  by  its  forelegs,  while  it  spun  a  similar  bar  about  half  an  incli 
higher  up,  and  in  two  hours  spun  over  80  rung's  and  climbed  a  vertical  distance  of 
four  feet.  Each  rung  was  cumposed  of  7  or  9  strands,  the  rung  always  being 
commenced  on  tiie  right  side  and  finished  on  the  left.  The  threads  are  not  sticky, 
but  each  is  glued  down  securely  at  both  ends  by  some  adhesive  substance. 

Mr.  W.  F.  Blakely  exhibited  specimens  from  the  National  Herbarium  of  Eupa- 
torlum  glandulosum  H.H.  et  K.  in  Nov.  Gen.  et  Sp..  1820,  iv.,  122,  t.  34(),  and 
Crepis  lietuait  Hall  f.  in  Rocni.  Arch.,  i.,  2,  1.  The  first  is  a  native  of  Mexico, 
and  is  a  garden  escape,  which  appears  to  be  well  established  in  several  |)laces  in 
the  Port  Jackson  district,  namely — Neutral  Bay  (J.  White);  Parramatta  River 
near  Gladesville  bridge;  Lane  Cove  River,  Killara;  head  of  salt  water.  Lane  Cove 
River;  between  Marsfield  and  Epping   (W.   F.    Blakely). 

On  the  Lane  Cove  it  is  firndy  established,  and  vegetates  freily  among>;t  the 
native  vegetation,  the  moist  loamy  banks  corresponding  to  some  extent  to  the 
moist    plateaus  of    its  native    cm  irdimient.  except    that    in    its  native    country    it 


XOTKS    AND    EXHIBITS.  319 

thrives  at  an  elevation  frum  5000  to  8000  feet,  while  here  it  flourishes  at  sea 
level,  and  appears  to  be  sufficiently  stable  to  be  considered  a  naturalised  alien. 
It  is  depicted  in  the  Botanical  Reijister  t.  1732. 

Crepls  setosa  is  a  native  of  Europe  and  Asia  Minor,  and  is  now  recorded  for 
the  first  time  for  Australia.  Several  jilants  were  found  growing-  in  a  lane  off 
Florence-street.  Hornsby  (W.  ¥.  Blakely).  In  New  Zealand  it  is  classed  as  a 
roadside  weed .  For  a  ready  reference  to  the  description,  see  Hookers  Students' 
Flora  of  the  British  Isles,  p.  228. 

Mr.  A.  A.  Hamilton  exhibited  a  seed  of  Biitia  yataii  Beec.  (Cocos  yatai/ 
Mart.),  grown  in  the  Sydney  Botanic  Gardens  by  J.  H.  Camfield,  which  had  pro- 
duced twin  seedling's  Worsdell  (Prin.  of  Plant  Terato..  1,  pi.  9)  figures  twin 
seedlings  in  the  "Desert  Rod"  Eremostuchys  laciniata,  and  attributes  the  dicho- 
tomy (p.  94)  to  fasciation.  Patterson  f  Journ.  of  Heredity,  x.,  350)  figures  an 
example  of  polyembi-yony  in  the  '"Mango."  Mangifera  hidica,  showing  a  series  of 
seven  seedling's  arising  from  a  single  seed.  The  occurrence  of  twin  stems  in  a 
seedling  of  Acacia  juniperina  has  been  noted  bv  Mr.  R.  H.  Cambage  (Journ.  Rov. 
Soc.  N.S.W.,  xlix..  93.) 

Mr.  Fletcher  exhibited  a  stunted  In-anch  of  Encaliiptu.'<  sali(/tia  with  a  cluster  of 
about  thirty-five  four-pronged  female  galls  of  the  Coccid,  Brachiisceli>/  munita 
Schrader,  together  witli  numerous  grouped  or  single  male  galls.  One  horn  of  one 
of  the  female  galls,  about  13  inches  long,  carries  a  small  female  sail- 


320 


A   LIST  OF   THE  SPECIES  OF  AUSTRALIAN   CARABIDAE  WHICH 
RANGE   BEYOND    AUSTRALIA    AND   ITS    DEPENDENT     ISLANDS. 

By  Thomas  G.  Sloaxe. 

Only  synonymy  that  is  new  is  given,  but  occasionally  references  are  given  for 
species  wbich  have  been  generally  knowji  under  a  name  that  now  lias  to  be  dis- 
carded in  order  that  the  evidence  for  the  unfamiliar  name  may  be  easily  found. 
The  date  of  each  name  cited  is  given,  so  that,  if  it  be  not  foand  in  existing 
catalogues,  it  may  be  traced  in  the  literature  of  the  year  given  for  its  appearance. 

Clivlna  aiistralasine  Bolieniann  (1858). — Australia.  New  Zealand,  Lord  Howe 
Island. 

Clivina  clilutipes  Putzeys   |18C8|. — Australia,  New    Zealand. 

Clivina  ephippiata  Putzeys  (1867)  [=  C.  felix  Sloane,  1896  =  C  eximia 
Sloane,  1890]. — Having  seen  specimens  from  Java,  and  having  obtained  many 
more  Australian  specimens,  chiefly  from  tropical  Australia,  I  have  no  hesitation  in 
placing  my  species  ('.  felix  and  ('.  eximia  under  C.  epliippiuta  as  synonjins.  The 
differences  on  which  I  relied  to  separate  C.  felix  and  C.  eximia  were  not  of  speci- 
fic   value. — Australia,   Celebes,  .Java. 

Calosoma  oceavicum  Perroud  (1864)  [=  C.  walkeri  Waterhouse,  1898].- — 
Both  C.  oceanicum  Perr.,  and  C.  ualkeri  Waterh.,  are  known  to  me,  but  I  cannot 
differentiate  them.  I  brought  this  opinion  before  Mr.  H.  E.  Andrewes,  of  Lon- 
don, and,  after  looking  into  the  matter,  he  has  written  to  me  tliat  lie  concurs  in 
this  synonymy.- -Australia,  New  Caledonia. 

Gnathaphami^  licitwides  Hope  (1842)  \=  Catadromusf  impresstis  Montrousier 
I860;  =  llnrpalus  alieniaiis  Castelnau,  1868.  Cf.  Andrewes,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc. 
Lond.,  1919,  p.  202].- — Australia,  New  Guinea,  New  Caledonia. 

Gnathaphnvu.s  pjliiliji/ieii'^i.'i  Chevrolet  (18411. — .\nstralia,  Malay  .Vrclii- 
pelago,  S.E.    Asia. 

(iiialhajitiuini't  'mprrs^ii peiniis  t'astelnau  (18li8). — Australia,  New  Cale- 
donia, New  Guinea,  Sumbawa. 

Diaplioromerus  melanarius  Dejean  (1829)  . — I  now  restrict  the  genus  Giiatha- 
phamis  to  species  having  at  least  the  third  interstice  of  the  elytra  pluripunctate. 
and  for  that  reason  amongst  others,  refer  JIarpalm  mehiiiariiis:  Dej.  to  Diaphnro- 
merus. — Australia,  New  Caledonia. 

Ilypharpax   australi''   Dejean    (1829).- — Australia.   Lnrd   Howe  Island. 

Pacliiitraehelu-'^  nbknHjiis  Dejean  (1831).- — I  have  received  specimens  of  this 
species  from  the  National  ^Museum.  ^Melbourne,  ticketed  Oenpili,  N.  Territory.— 
Australia,  Malay    ArchiiJelago.   India. 

Ambli/xtomiis  metalliciix  Blackburn  (1887)  . — A  specimen  whicji  T  cannot  dif- 
ferentiate from  A.  (Thenarotes)  metalllcus  Blackb.  was  in  the  Van  der  Poll. 
Coll.  as  from   Sumbawa. — Australia  (widely  distributed),  Sumbawa. 


BY    T.    G.    SLOANE.  32i 

Amhliistomits  indtcus  Nietner  ( 1 858 ) . — Mr.  A.  M.  Lea  sent  me  speoimens 
ticketed  Dalby,  Queeusland,  which  agree  so  well  with  Nietner's  description  ot  ^1. 
{Megaristerus)  indicus  that  I  am  compelled  to  regard  it  as  that  species.  Mr. 
H.  E.  Andrewes  has  sent  me  an  Indian  specimen  under  the  name  of  Amblystomus 
guttatus  Bates  (1873)  which  is  conspecific  with  the  Queensland  species. — Aus- 
tralia,  Asia,   Ceylon. 

Aiiiblij^toiiiHfi  steiiulopliuides  Xietner  (1858). — Mr.  F.  P.  Doild  sent  me  a 
species  from  Kuranda  Queensland,  which  agrees  so  well  with  Nietner's  descriptior 
of  A.  (Megaristenis)  steiiolopJioides  Niet.,  that  I  identity  it  as  that  species.-  - 
Australia,  Ceylon. 

Stenolojjhus  smaragdulus  Fabricius  (1798). — Mr.  H.  E.  Andrewes  has  re- 
cently published  the  synonymy  of  this  species  (Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  Lond.,  1919,  pp. 
178,189).  He  reported  the  5-spotted  form,  S.  qui )i que- past iilatus  Wied..  as  occur- 
ring in  Queensland;  it  has  been  sent  to  me  from  Kuranda  by  Mr.  F.  P.  Dodd. — 
Australia,  Malay  Archipelago,  Asia. 

Stenolophus  dingo  Castelnau  (18G8)  {_=  S.  robiKttis  SI.  1907]. — When  I 
described  S.  rohustus  I  believed  .s'.  dingo  to  be  conspecific  with  ,S'.  (Acupalpui) 
picens  Guer.,  but,  Ijaving  since  received  what  I  now  consider  to  be  the  true 
iS'.  dingo  from  N.  Queensland,  I  beliexe  my  species  to  be  the  same  as  Castelnau's. 
The  description  of  <S'.  (Amphibia)  pallipes  Perroud  (1860),  is  useless,  but  I 
believe  it  to  be  the  same  as  S.  dingo;  the  name  .S'.  pallipes  was  already  in  use 
in  1860.  so  Fauvel  in  1882  proposed  S.  grandieeps  to  replace  it,  but,  if  I  am  right 
in  my  surmise  as  to  its  identity  with  S.  dingo,  this  name  was  not  re(|uired. — 
Australia.  New  Guinea,  Java,  (?)  New  Caledonia. 

Bembidium  iipnlentum  Nietner  (1858)  [^  B.  enrops  Bates  188()  =  B.  river- 
inae  Sloane  1894] — Mr.  H.  E.  Andrewes  has  published  the  opinion  that  B. 
opulentum  Niet.  is  the  same  thing  as  B.  europs  Bates  (Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  1919, 
p.  472)  ;  I  believe  there  is  no  doubt  but  that  he  is  right  in  this.  He  sent  me  a 
specimen  of  B.  europs  which  showed  me  that  my  B.  riverinae  was  the  same  species. 
From  Fauvel's  treatment  of  his  B.  hamiferum  (1882)  in  his  Faune  Analytic|ae  des 
Coleopteres  de  la  Nouvelle-Caledonie  (1903).  it  would  appear  as  if  it  would  nl.so 
prove  iohe  B.  opulentum. — Australia  (widely  distributed),  Sumbawa,  .Java.  Ceylim. 
Southern   Asia. 

Tacln/s  triangularis  Nietner  (1858). — Australia,  New  Caledonia,  ^lalay  Archi- 
pelago.  Asia,   Africa. 

Limnastis  pilosus  Bates  (1892)  [=  Tachgs  setiger  Sloane.  1903].— After 
seeing  specimens  from  Borneo.  I  liave  no  hesitation  in  placing  ray  Tachgs  s.etigrr 
as  a  synonym  of  L.  pilosus  Bates. — Australia,  Borneo,  Burma. 

Coelostomus  picipes  Macleay  W.S.  (1825). — Mr.  H.  E.  Andrewes  has  gone 
very  fully  into  the  synonymy  of  this  species;*  it  has  been  reported  as  having 
been  found  at  Mount  Ernest,  Queensland,  by  d'Albertis  (teste  Chaudoir,  under 
name  of  Stomonaxus  striaticoUis  Dej..  Col.  Nov.,  1,  1883.  \>.  39). — Australia.  .lava, 
S.E.   Asia. 

Morio  longipennis  Putzeys  (1875). — Australia.  New  Guinea. 

Catadromus  tenebrioides  Olivier  (1790)  [=-■  C.  elseyi  White  (1859)]. — I 
have  specimens  from  Australia  and  .Tava,  but  cannot  differentiate  them  as  sep- 
arate species. — Australia,   .Tava,  Amboyna. 

Chlaenioidius  prolixus  Erichson  (1842). — Australia,  New  Caledonia. 

*  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  Lond.,  1919.  p.  160. 


322  ArsTRAl.IAX     ('AIJAItllJAK     WIIK  11     l.'ANCK    BEYOXl)    AlSTRAI.IA, 

VhlaeniokUus  mellki  Montrousier  (ISIJU). — C.  Ittrbucci'.s  t/hauduir  (181)5),  the 
name  usually  given  to  this  species,  is  a  syuonym. — Australia.  New   Caledonia. 

Cosmodiseus  rubripictus  Sloane  (1907). — A  specimen  trmn  the  \'an  der  Poll 
Coll.,  was  ticketed  "Am  Is.";  it  ag:reed  so  closely  with  C.  rubripictus  SI.  (though 
smaller)   that  it  was  evidently   conspecific. — Austialia,   Aiu   Islands. 

Colpudas  subinetallicus  White  (1S4G)  [=^  Platyiius  muryinicollis  .Macleay 
1871.] — Both  C.  nubmetallicus  \Vt.  and  1'.  maryinicullis  Macl.  are  in  my  collection, 
but  1  <lo  not  see  specific  distinctions  between  them. — Australia,  New  Zealand. 

Colpudes  laj'ertei  Montrt)usier  (1800). — Australia,  New  Caledonia. 

Culpodes  viulaceus  Chaudoir    (18.59) . — Australia,  New   Guinea. 

Dicranoucus  qu&siisUindicue  Sloane. — A  specimen  of  this  species  has  been 
sent  to  me  by  Mr.  H.  E.  Andrewes,  of  London,  ticketed  Nilgiri  Hills,  and  I 
have  another  specimen  labelled  "Ceylon." 

Aepluiidiu^s  adeloides  Macleay    (18251. — Australia,   Malay  Archipelago,  Asia 

Periyuna  iiiyriceps  Dejean  (1831). — A  cosmopolitan  species  which  1  have 
described  from  (Queensland  as  J',  austrulica. 

Dicraspedu  ttitida  Sloaue  (1917)  . — 1  described  this  as  a  species  cf  Eudaliu, 
but  now  consider  it  to  belong-  to  tliii  older  genus  Dicraspeda. — Queensland,  Java . 

CIdaeiiius  ophonoid,es  Fairmaire  (1843). — Australia,  New  Caledonia. 

Clilneiiius  flai-iyuttatus  Macleay  W.S.  (1825). — Mr.  H.  E.  Andrewes  has 
recently  made  known  the  fact  that  C.  fUiriyuttatu^  Macl.  must  re])lace  the  more 
recent  name  (_'.  binotatua  Dc.j.  (182G),  uuder  which  this  species  has  bee;i  generally 
known. — Australia    Java,  Sumatra. 

Chlaenius  maculiyer  Castelnau  (1808). — Australia,  New  Guinea. 

Chlaenius  hamifer  Chaudoir  (1856)  [=  C.  queenslandicm  Sloane,  1910]. — 
After  seeing  specimens  of  ('.  Iiumifer  sent  to  me  by  Jfr.  H.  E.  Andrewes,  I 
have  no  hesitation  in  putting  C.  queenslandicus  under  it  as  a  synoiijTij. — Aus- 
tralia, (Celebes,   India 

llolnleim  nitlJulus  Dejean   (1820). — Australia,  Asia. 

Catascopus  eleyans  AVcher  (1801). — This  species  is  widely  (lis(vil)uted  from 
Asia  to  Australia;   Chaudoir  considered   Hope's   C.  austrulasiae  (18421   a  variety. 

Miscelu-f  niorioformis  ■\lacleay  (1870). — North  Australia,  New  Guinea. 

Lebia  picipennis  Macleay    (1871). — Australia.  New   Guinea. 

Celaeiiephes  parallehi.i  Schmidt-Goebel  (1840). — Australia,  New  Caledouia, 
Malay  Archipelago,  S.E.  Asia. 

Dolichochtis   tetrastiynm   Chaudoir    (1809). — Australia,  New  Guinea,  Celebes. 

Phloeodromms  playiutus  .Macleay   (1870). — Australia,  New  Guinea. 

Peniagonica  olivaceus  Chaudoir  (1877). — I  obtained  in  the  grass  beside  the 
margin  of  a  small  creek  near  Brisbane,  one  specimen  of  a  species  which  I  identify 
from  the  description  as  P.  olivaceus  Chaud. — Australia,   New  Caledonia. 

Creayris  labrosus  Nietner    (1858). — Australia,  Java.   Slam.   Ceylon. 

Agonochila  binotata  White.  T  cannot  differentiate  IVoiri  one  .•mother,  speci- 
mens of  this  species  from  New  Zealand  and   Tasmania. 

There  arc  three  exotic  species,  unknown  to  me  in  nature,  which  seem  to  re- 
semble their  nearest  Australian  congeners  so  closely  that  I  believe  there  is  a  great 
probability  of  their  lieing  identical;  comjiarisons  certainly  rei|uire  to  ^\-  made,  as 
indiiafi'd  lielow,  before  their  validity  as  sjiecies  can  be  recognised  as  absolutely 
settled. 


BY    T.    (i.    SLOASE.  ,  323 

Steiioloplius  se.cualis  Fauvel  (1882),  N.  Caledonia,  with  ,S'.  (Acnpalpus) 
piceus  Gueiin  (1831),  Australia. 

Ehytisienius  nigifrons  Brown  (1880),  N.  Zealand,  with  N.  miser  l"hau<loir 
(1865),  Australia. 

Peiitagaiiica  rittata  IJrciwn  (1880),  N.  Zealand,  with  P.  vlttlpeiniis  Chaudoir 
(1877),  Australia. 

The  ('AR.iBiDAR  OF  Tas.maxia. — Corrigenda. 

Some  errors  escaped  notice  in  my  paper  on  ;he  Carabidae  of  Tasmania,  pub- 
lished in  Part  1  of  the  present  volume  of  these  Proceedings,  pp.  113-178,  and  at- 
tention is  in)w  directed  to  the  following: — 

Page  113,  line  2G  of  text,  for  stria,  read  interstice. 

Page  11-1-.     In  the  figures  given  the  external  stria  has  been  omitted. 

Page  118.  line  27,  for  Australian,  1,  read  Australian  61. 

Page  142,  line  12,  for  P.  tasmatiica  read  P.  tasmanicus. 

Page  152,  lines  32  and  33  fur  beside  second  stria,  posterior  puncture  beside 
third  stria,  read  beside  third  stria,  posterion  puncture  beside  second  stria. 


324 


ON  DENTAL   INCRUSTATIONS  AND  THE  SO-CALLED  "GOLD-PLATINa" 

OF  SHEEP'S  TEETH. 

Bv  Tuos.  Steel. 

For  many  years  past  there  have  appeared  from  time  to  time,  in  newspapers 
and  magazines  published  all  over  the  world,  statements  as  to  the  occun-enee  of  a 
metallic  incrustation  on  the  teeth  of  sheep.  The  incrustation  in  question  is  usu- 
ally found  more  or  less  thickly  coating  the  sides  of  the  molar  teeth,  and.  being 
fre(iuently  of  a  shining,  yellowish,  metallic  appearance,  has  been  popularly 
attributed  to  gold  supposed  to  have  been  derived  from  particles  of  that  metal 
scattered  about  the  pastures.  So  deeply-rooted  is  the  popular  belief  that  the 
incrustation  consists  of  gold,  my  friend,  Mr.  J.  H.  Campbell,  informs  me  that 
persons  have  brought  jaws  of  sheep  to  the  Eoyal  ilint.  Sydney,  with  a  view  to 
selling  them  for  the  supposed  adherent  gold.  Quite  recently,  it  was  most  confi- 
dently asserted  by  correspondents  in  Xature*  that  the  incrustation  consisted  of 
iron  pyrites,  and  various  fantastic  theories  were  put  forward  to  account  for  the 
presence  of  this  substance  in  such  a  situation. 

In  1905  Professor  Liversidge  exhibited  at  a  meeting  of  the  Royal  Society  of 
New  South  Wales!  part  of  a  sheep's  jaw.  heavily  coated  with  yellow  metallic- 
looking  deposit,  and  read  a  descriptive  note  with  a  qualitative  analysis,  clearly 
showing  the  true  nature  of  the  substance  to  be  a  deposit  derived  from  the  saliva, 
and  that  the  metallic  appearance  was  due  to  the  refraction  of  light  by  the  over- 
lapping edges  of  the  thin  lamellae  of  the  deposit.  Again,  in  .Tuly.  190.5.  the  same 
gentleman  exhibited  and  explained  the  deposit  at  a  meeting  of  the  Sydney  section 
of  the  Society  of  Chemical  Industry.  Similar  specimens  were  exhibited  by 
Horan  to  the  New  South  Wales  Naturalists'  Club  in  1013. t 

As  will  be  shown  in  this  paper,  the  presence  of  such  deposits  is  by  no  means 
confined  to  the  teeth  of  sheep,  but  is  a  common  occuiTence  on  those  of  a  very  large 
variety  of  animals,  including  man.  It  is,  in  fact,  a  dental  calculus  analogous  to 
those   occurring  in  the   urinary  tract. 

The  earliest  account  of  the  true  nature  of  dental  incrustations  witli  which  T 
have  met,  occurs  in  the  Annals  of  Philosoi-)hy.§  In  the  course  of  a  series  of 
articles  entitled  "General  Views  of  the  Composition  of  Animal  Fluids,"  Rerzelius 
gives  a  correct  explanation  of  the  nature  of  the  deposit  from  human  teeth,  and  his 
analysis  of  a  specimen,  which  will  be  quoted  further  on. 

In  1834,  Dr.  G.  Bennett ||  re(!ords  having  observed  a  layer  of  "metallic  sub- 
stance" incrusting  the  teeth  of  kangaroos,  and  correctly  diagnosed  it  as  "tartar" 

•Nature,  xcix.,  1917,  pp.2fi4,  284,  290.  .'itX);  c,  1917,  p.l06. 

+Journ.  Roy.  Soc.  N.S.Walt-s,  xxxix.,  190.'),  p.3:ij  .also  Chem.  News,  xcii.,  1905.  p. 11.5; 
.Tour.  Soc.  Chem."  Tnd..  xxiv.,  1905,  p.lO.TO. 

tAustralian  N.ituraliat,  ii..  191,^,  pp!l74,  187. 
§Thoinson's  Ann.  Phil.,  ii.,  1814.  p..'i80. 
ilWamWinors  in  New  South  Wales,  i.,  1834.  p. 294. 


BV  T.   STEEL.  325 

precipitated  from  the  saliva.  He  mentious  its  occurrence  in  the  ox  and  sheep, 
and  remarks  that  on  account  of  its  yellow  colour  it  is  freqiiently  mistaken  for 
gold.     He  quotes  the  analysis  by  Berzelius  mentioned  above. 

In  a  paper  published  in  1879,  "On  Macrodontism."  N.  de  Miklouho-Madayt 
described  and  figured  the  huge  projecting  teeth  which  he  observed  in  natives  of 
the  Taui  or  Admiralty  Islands,  and  refers  to  a  sketch  in  Xature*  which  he  de- 
scribes, liowever,  as  a  caricature.  In  a  subsequent  paperf  he  explains  that  fur- 
ther investigation  had  shown  that  he  was  mistakin  in  supposing  that  the  projec- 
tions were  due  to  dental  malformation,  but  that  they  really  consisted  of  an  enor- 
mous deposit  of  '"tartar,"  probably  largely  due  to  the  habit  of  these  people  of 
chewing  betel  nut  and  lime.  The  deposit  could  be  detached,  leaving  the  teeth 
quite  normal.  The  late  Mr.  P.  R.  Pedley,  surgeon-dentist,  who  examined  the 
deposit,  identified  it  as  dental  tartar.  Unfortunately  there  is  no  record  of  a 
chemical  examination  having  been  made.  Miklouho-Maelay  proposed  the  term 
"odontolithiasis"   fur  this  condition. 

From  the  stocks  of  bones  passing  through  a  large  bone  charcoal  factory  in 
Sydney,  I  have  been  able  to  examine  the  teeth  o*'  numerous  sheep  and  also  those 
of  oxen,  horses,  pigs,  etc.,  and  to  secure  ample  material  for  a  complete  chemical 
analysis  of  the  deposit  from  the  teeth  of  sheep  and  oxen .  From  other  sources 
I  have  obtained  sufficient  for  (]uantitative  analysis  from  the  teeth  of  a  number 
of  animals,  including  man.  By  the  courtesy  of  the  late  Mr.  R.  Etheridge,  speci- 
mens from  the  teeth  of  animals  in  the  Australian  Museum,  Sydney,  were  secured, 
sufficient  in  a  few  cases  for  full  analysis,  and  in  a  considerable  number  of  others 
for  qualitative  determination.  Mr.  H.  A.  Longman,  F.L.S.,  Director  of  the 
Queensland  Museum,  kindly  allowed  me  material  from  the  skeleton  of  a  camel. 
In  all  such  cases  care  was  taken  to  insure  that  the  dejiosit  obtained  was  pure  and 
not  contaminated  with  lime  whicii  may  have  been  used  in  the  preparation  of 
skeletons . 

Very  eommonlv  the  taxidermists  api)ear  to  have  carefully  cleaned  the  teetii. 
My  kinsman.  Mr.  A.  Ross  Brown,  B.D.Sc,  L.D.S..  of  Windsor,  Melbourne,  and 
nw  friend,  Mr.  J.  Dartou,  surgeon  dentist.  Petersham,  furnished  me  with  an  ample 
supply  from  human  teeth,  secured  in  the  course  of  their  professional  practice  in 
the  operation  of  "scaling."  Mr.  Charles  Hedley,  Acting  Curator  of  the  Aus- 
tralian Museum,  kindly  gave  me  facilities,  with  the  aid  of  Messrs.  Thorpe  and 
Troughton,  to  examine  the  large  collection  of  skulls  in  the  Museum.  To  Pro- 
fessor J.  Douglas  Stewart,  of  the  Veterinary  School,  Sydney  University,  I  am  in- 
debted for  explaining  to  me  details  regarding  the  structure  of  teeth  and  giving 
me  other  information.  To  all  of  these  gentlemen  I  desire  to  tender  my  best  thanks. 
Further  material  was  obtained  from  specimens  in  my  own  collection  and  passing 
through  my  hands.  In  addition  'to  examining  the  dental  deposit,  I  have,  in  the 
cases  of  the  ox  and  camel,  made  an  analysis  of  the  cement  or  cementum  layer 
(cntsta  petrosa).  In  these  animals  this  layer  is  strongly  developed,  extending 
well  up  on  the  exposed  part  of  the  tooth,  and  can  be  readily  separated.  The 
incrustation  could,  in  most  cases,  be  easily  flaked  off  from  either  the  cement  or 
the  enamel  and  the  surface  beneath  was  always  f|uite  sound. 

The  figures  following  give  the  results.  The  samples  were  ground,  and  air- 
dried  at  ordinary  temperature. 


tProc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.  Wales,  iii.,  1879,  p. 169. 

•Nature,  xvi.,  1877,  p.a.'jl. 

tProe.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.  Wales,  x.,  1886.  p.682. 


32G  ox    UKXTAL    IXCRI'STATIOXS, 

ANALYSES  OF  DENTAL  INCRUSTATIONS.  Cement  layer 

(Ciiisla  pe/rosa) 


C 


Lime  (CaO)  ■10-75  28(X)  29-38  37-75  37-00  46-13  47-50  35-119  3(i-21 

Mao-nesia  (Mg  O)  0-18  4-19  3-69  0-27  0-18  0-56  0.68        112  .  0-98 

Phosphoric  oxide  (Po  O5)  34-73  26-.55  2817  29.33  2948  7-95  714  26-68  26-88 

Carbon  (Uoxide  (CO2)  1-32  1-45  1-10  2-70  2.88  22-65 1  ^^  2-90  1-80 

Organic  matter*  17-23  24-65  23-90  16-20  16-82  17-48  j  "  23-54  24-74 

Water  at  110°  C.  5-38  11-03  10-30  11-65  10-40  3-85  2-63  9-35  8-66 

Sand  0-10  2-30  2-00  0-60  0-30  055  0-39  nil  nil 

Undetermined  and  loss  0-31  1-83  146  1-50  2-94  0-83  0-03  0-72  0-73 

100-00  ia)-ai  loo-oo  lo-ooo  loo-oo  loo-oo  loo-oo  loo-oo  loo-ai 

•Containini;  nitrogen       1-20       1-48  0-71 

Sp.  Gr.  2-317      2-025  2112 

Mikloulio-Maclay  mentions  that  specimens  of  teeth  similarly  iiiornsted  to 
those  which  he  describes  were  forwarded  by  F.  A.  de  Roepstorff  from  the  Xicobar 
Islands  to  Professor  Yin-how.  Berlin. -t  The  deposit  from  these  was  analysed  by 
Salkowski,  and  the  results  published  by  Virchow.  llu-  following  being  the  figures: — 

Water 0 .  93 

Organic    matter !) .  iU 

Silica  and  iron  oxide     .87 

Iron  phosphate 2.26 

Lime 45 .  24 

Magnesia .68 

Pliosphoric  oxide     30.73 

(,'arbiin  dioxide 4.87 


S):) .  70 
This  shows  more  lime  and  carbtm  dioxide  and  consideraldy  le.ss  organic  matter 
than  I  found  in  the  normal  incrustation  from  hunuui  teeth.  Probably  this  is  a 
result  of  the  addition  of  carbonate  of  lime  from  the  lime-betelnut  habit,  but  the 
high  phosphoric  acid  shows  that  essentially  the  deposit  has  been  derived  from  the 
saliva.  The  presence  of  so  much  iron  phosphate  is  peculiar,  and  T  am  uniible  to 
explain  it.  I  found  no  apiireciable  iron  in  any  of  ray  samples. 
The  analysis  l)y  Berzclius   mentioned   above,   is  thus   stated  :-- 

Eartiiy    phosidiates 70.0 

Mucus 12.5 

Peculiar  salivary  matter 1.0 

Animal  matter  soluble    in    muriatic    aciii 7.5 


100 
There  is  no  mention  of  water.  It  is  probable  that  Herzelius  merely  ignited 
and  took  the  ash  as  "earthy  phosphates,"  and  the  organic  substances  include 
water.  For  a  rough  comparison  it  will  suffice  to  consider  the  "phospliates"  as 
being  tribasic  phosphate  of  lime  and  to  lump  tou-etlior  tlie  orsranic  substauces. 
This  would  give: — 

tVerh.  Berlin.  (Jes.  Anthrop.,  June,  1881.  p. 219. 


BV    T.    .STEEL. 


327 


Lime ■^S  • 

Pliospboric  oxide 3l) . 

Oi"auie  matter   anil    wattT -l- 


100. 

These  figures  agree  very  well  with  my  analysis  of  the  liumau  prodiu-t.  In 
my  examination  1  found  the  total  loss  on  ignition,  including  water  and  carbon 
dioxide,  was  24  %  and  the  ash  76  %. 

In  my  analysis,  in  every  case  the  sand  was  m  the  form  of  mechanically  em- 
bedded grains.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  incrustations  from  the  Rhinoceros  and 
Babirussa  (a  pig-like  animal  from  N.  Celebes)  differ  from  the  others  in  contain- 
ing but  little  phosjihoric  acid  and  a  considerable  proportion  of  calcic  carbonate. 
In  both  of  these  the  scale,  w-hen  detached,  was  in  appearance  much  like  that  from 
the  sheep  and  ox,  being  in  clean  shining  flakes.  In  man  it  is  chalky-looking  and 
has  not  got  the  metallic,  or  more  commonly,  nacreous  look  of  that  from  the  sheep. 
The  similarity  in  comiiosition  between  most  of  the  incrustations  and  that  of  the 
cement  layers  of  ox  an<l  camel  is  striking.  Ordinary  maunualian  lione  has  also 
a  very  similar  composition.* 

In  making  the  analyses,  care  was  taken  in  separating  lime  an<l  magnesia,  by 
double  precipitation  of  the  lime  in  the  cold  to  avoid  co-precipitation  of  magnesia. 
The  proportions  of  lime  and  phosphoric  acid  present  are  such  as  to  indicate 
that  the  phosphate  of  lime  does  not  exist  entirely  as  the  tribasic  (Cas  P2  O.s).  but 
that  a  variable  amount  of  the  tetrabasic  (Cai  P2  On)  is  also  present.  I  have 
found. this  to  be  a  usual  condition  in  many  natural  phosphates  sucli  as  those  from 
Ocean  Island. 

Bearing  in  mind  the  analogy  between  these  dental  salivary  incrustations  and 
urinary  calculi,  a  careful  examination  was  made  of  those  from  man,  sheep  and  ox 
for  oxalic   and   uric   acids,   but  with    entirely   negative  results. 

I  have  examined  the  deposit  from  a  large  variety  of  animals  in  addition  to 
those  already  mentioned,  using  micro-chemical  methods  when  the  amount  available 
was  minute,  and  in  every  case  have  found  it  to  be  of  substantially  the  same  nature. 
The  quantitx-  present  varies  from  a  mere  trace  of  brown  film,  to  a  heavy  incrusta- 
tion packed  round  the  crowns  of  the  teeth  and  forming  a  continuous  coating  along 
the  sides  as  much  as  a  quarter  of  an  inch  in  thickness.  It  is  heaviest  in  herbivorous 
animals  and  in  man.  The  teeth  of  the  carnivorae  and  rodents  are  usually  very 
clean ;  this  is  well  seen  in  dog-s,  cats,  mice  and  rats,  though  all  of  tiiese.  particu- 
larly when  old.  and  also  rabbits,  frequently  have  a  thin  brown  film  even  on  the 
incisors.  Some  individuals  are  more  predisposed  to  dental  incrustation  than 
others.  This  is  well-known  in  man,  and  T  have  noticed  it  in  sheep  and  other 
animals.  The  teeth  of  snakes,  lizards  and  fish  in  so  far  as  I  have  noticed,  ap- 
))ear  to  be  always  quite  free  from  deposit. 

I  do  not  think  that  the  nature  of  the  pasture,  as  has  sometimes  been  asserted, 
has  anything  particular  to  do  with  the  abundance  or  otherwise  of  the  deposit  on 
sheep's  teeth,  but  tliat  it  is  purely  a  physiological  idiosyncrasy.  Sheep  and  oxen 
very  commonly  have  the  teeth  coated  with  a  uniform,  thin,  dead  black  film,  but 
this  does  not  differ  in  composition  from  the  thicker  deposit.  The  common  pig 
has  very  clean  teeth .  I  have  examined  many  hundreds  of  pigs'  jaws,  and  have 
never  noticed  more  than  traces  of  a  brown  film. 

'Watt's  Diet.  Chem.,.vi.,  1879,  1st.  Supp.,  .357. 


328  ON'   KENTAI.   iNcur.vrATioxs 

Extended  observation  has  satisfied  me  that  the  incrustation,  in  greater  or  less 
degiee,  is  common  to  all  mammals,  and  also  to  a  number  of  otlier  animals,  in 
every  ease  being  of  the  same  general  character.  I  have  found  it.  for  instance,  in 
the  crocodile  (C.  purosus)  Queensland,  killer  v.hales  {Orca  gladiator),  and  in 
one  individual  or  another  of  practically  every  mammalian  species  examined.  It 
will  suffice  to  give  the  names  of  a  few  as  indicating  the  scope  of  the  investigation: 
Tapir,  eland,  American  bison,  hippopotamus,  various  bears,  dog,  cat,  rat,  mouse. 
Examination  of  the  skulls  of  marsupials  in  the  Australian  Museum  collection  and 
elsewhere  disclosed  numerous  examples:  Mucropins  major,  cjuite  as  heavy  as  that 
of  the  sheep,  J/,  ijiganteus,  21.  riifus,  Phascolarctus  civereus.  Phaf^colomys  mit- 
chellij  Da.si/tire,  and  many  others.  The  original  observations  of  Dr.  Bennett  are 
thus  completely  confirmed.  Fossil  marsupial  teeth  from  Wellington  Caves,  Xew 
South  Wales,  in  the  Australian  iluseum,  still  ha^e  adhering  brown  patches  which 
I  take  to  be  the  same  deposit.  Where\"er  the  teeth  of  animals  were  noticed  to 
have  a  yellow  or  brownish  tint  as  in  aged  rats,  minute  examination  showed  this  to 
be  due  to  the  same  cause. 

In  response  to  queries  from  me,  Mr.  Brov.n  has  supplied  me  with  the  follmv- 
ing  very  interesting  notes: — '"Tartar  fonns  on  artificial  plates,  especially  lower 
plates,  quite  as  readily  as  on  the  natural  teeth;  it  is  an  everyday  occurrence  to 
see  that.  It  is  deposited  along  the  lower  portion  of  the  lingual  side  of  the  plate, 
and  dentists  are  continually  asked  by  patients  what  it  is  and  how  to  remove  it. 
I  do  not  remember  seeing  teeth  forming  jjart  of  a  Ijridge  witli  tartar  deposited  on 
them,  but  frequently  find  that  the  gum  having  slightly  receded  after  the  bridge  has 
been  fixed;  a  slight  deposit  is  to  be  seen  round  the  gingival  margin  of  the  natural 
roots  to  which  the  bridge  is  attached.  Porcelain  crowns  (pivots)  and  gold 
crowns  or  caps  remain  free  from  deposit.  I  once  had  to  remove  from  an  elderly 
woman's  mouth  a  little  lower  plate  having  three  teeth  on  it,  and  there  was  such 
an  accumulation  of  tartar  all  about  the  whole  structure  and  the  remaining  teeth 
that  two  of  the  latter  were  extracted  in  the  removal  of  tlie  plate;  these.  ho\vevc>r. 
were  loose  from  pyorrhoea.  In  this  case  the  tartar  had  certainly  eiu-roached  to 
some  extent  on  the  artificial  teeth.  The  iiatient  informed  me  that  she  had  not 
removed  the  denture  since  the  dentist  luit  it  in  place  many  yeai-s  before.  This 
case  was  an  exceptional  one,  and  as  I  have  mentioned.  T  do  nut  remember  seeing 
deposit  on  artificial  teeth  at  any  other  tinu\" 

I  think  it  is  proliable  tliat  the  nature  of  the  surface  of  ixircelain  teeth  and 
gold  crowns  inhibits  the  adliesion  of  deposit.  In  the  case  of  the  urinary  tract,  it 
is  well  known  that  any  solid  foreign  body,  such  as  a  piece  of  broken  catheter, 
soon  becomes  coated  with  phosphate,  and  that  a  little  blood  clot  or  even  bacteria 
mav  foim  the  nucleus  of  a  urinarv  calculus. 


329 


ON  THE   STKUCTURE  OF   THE  RESIN-SECRETING  GLANDS  IN    SOME 

AUSTRALIAN  PLANTS. 

By  Marjorie  I.  Collins,  B.Sc,  Linnean  Macleay  Fellow  or  the  Society  in 

BOTAXY.* 

(With  Test-figures  1-12.) 
Introductiox. 

While  engaged  upon  an  investigation  of  the  resinous  secretion  of  the  bud 
in  certain  Australian  genera  of  the  Natural  Orders  Sapiiidaceae,  Leijiiininoseae 
(Sub-Order  Mimo^eae) ,  Compositae,  Goudeniaceae  and  Myoporineae,  the  writer's 
attention  was  drawn  to  certain  types  of  glandular  hair,  some  of  which  have  not 
been  recorded  previously  for  these  Orders. 

Since  in  all  cases  the  developmental  stages  tlmiAv  an  interesting  light  upon 
the  structure  of  the  mature  gland,  and  since  the  results  obtained  might  prove  to 
he  of  systematic  value,  it  is  thought  desirabJij  to  place  these  observations  on 
record. 

Glandular  hairs  are  described  for  the  following  species : — Dodonaea  viscosa 
Linn.  [Sapindaceae).  Acacia  rupieola  F.  v.  M.,  A.  armata  R  Br.,  A.  pi/criantha 
Benth..  ,1.  rerniciflua  Cunn.,  (Leguminoseae,  Sub-Order  Mimosieae),  Ixodea  achill- 
eoides  R.Br.,  Heliclirysum  semipapposum  DeCand.,  and  Hiimea  cassiniacea  F.  v.  M. 
{Compositae).  Mi/oporum  serratuni  var.  ivfiilare  R.Br.,  Mi/oporum  serratum  v^ar, 
viscosum  R.Br.,  and  Eremophila  latifolia  F.  v.  M.   (Myoporineae)  . 

^ly  thanks  are  due  to  Professor  Osborne,  University  of  Adelaide,  for  the 
■nterest  he  has  slio'mi  during  the  progress  of  the  work. 

Description  of  Glandli.ar  Hairs. 

N.  0.  SAPINDACEAE. 

In  his  account  of  the  Sapindaceae,  based  iipon  Radlkofer's  monograph  {'2), 
Solereder  states  that  glandular  hairs  are  widely  distributed,  and  are  present  on 
young  leaves  throughout  the  order  (3,  p.  230).  The  glands  are  described  as  being 
multicellular  peltate  .scales,  in  which  the  cells  of  the  shield  either  show  a  radial 
arrangement  (Arytera).  or  are  polygonal  and  irregularly  placed  (Filicium,  etc.). 
It  is  recorded  that  in  some  genera,  e.g.,  Melai/odifcus.  the  external  glands  are 
analogous  to  glandular  shaggj'  hairs,  since  they  possess  a  palisade-like  secretory 
region  at  the  perijihery. 

In  Dodonaea  viscosa,  which  was  examined  by  the  present  writer,  the  glandular 
hairs  resemble  the  Melanodiscus  type.  They  are  large  in  propoi-tion  to  the  thick- 
ness of  the  young  leaf,  and  show  a  tendency  towards  radial  arrangement  of  the 

•Tlie  observations  recorded  in  this  paper  were   made  while  the  writer  held  the  posi- 
tion of  Demonstrator  in  Botany,  The  University  of  .\delaide. 


330 


liKSI.V-SECliKTING    CLANDS    IN     SO.XtK    ArSTKAI.IAX    PLANTS, 


peripheral  lioad-cells.  Sometimes  tbis  tendency  ]s  very  marked,  giving-  tlie  gland 
a  colleter-like  appearance,  while  often  there  is  no  sign  of  peripheral  elongation, 
the  gland  merely  being  a  mass  of  polygonal  cells,  irregularly  arranged. 

Development  uf  the  Glands. — The  first  sign  of  gland  development  in  On- 
donuea  viacosa,  is  the  projection  from  the  epidermis  of  a  papillose  cell  which 
reaches  a  height  of  about  twice  that  of  the  adjacent  epidermal  cells  (Text-tig. 
]«)  .  Tile  nucleus  divides  and  the  first  wall  is  formed  in  a  \-ertical  direction,  divid- 
ing the  initial  cell  of  the  gland  into  two  cells  of  equal  size  (Text-iig.  lli).  The 
second  division  follows  in  either  of  the  cells  thus  formed.  The  wall  is  either 
placed  in  a  slightly  oblique  position,  when  fbe  resulting  cells  are  unequal  in  size 
(Text-fig.  Ic)  or  it  may  be  vertical,  when  the  resulting  cells  are  e<|ual  (Text-fig. 
1//).  Whether  the  mature  gland  possesses  a  pedestal  region,  made  up  of  two  or 
three  rows  of  cells,  depends  upon  the  manner  in  which  this  second  wall  is  formed 
in  the  young  gland.  From  observations  on  a  number  of  glands  it  stems  pro- 
bable that  there  are  never  more  than  two  vertical  divisions  in  the  first  stages  of 
development,  while  in  a  number  of  cases  there  is  only  one.  The  vertical  divisions 
are  followed  by  a  series  of  o1)lique  divisions  (Text-fig.  Ic-/,  /(-/),  which  result  in 
the  formation  of  a  projecting  cell  mass  almost  spherical  in  contour  (Text-fig.  Ij). 
At  this  stage  there  is  a  marked  increase  in  the  size  of  the  cells  making  up  the 
gland.  Those  at  the  periphery  tend  to  elongate  in  a  radial  manner,  causing  the 
differentiation  of  the  gland  into  marginal  and  central  regions  (Text-fig.  Ik). 
The  mature  glands  are  large  ])eltate  hairs  which  overlap  one  another  and  spread 
out  to  cover  a  considerable  area  of  the  epidermis  (Text-fig.  2).     The  multicellular 


Text-fig. 1. — (a-k).  St.iges  iu  the  develop- 
ment of  the  glandular  hairs  of  J)oJoiiaea 
viscosa  Linn,     (x  200). 


Text-£ig.2. — Mature  u;lands  of  Dodouaea 
viscosa  crowded  and  overlapping  on 
S'-ii-face  of  young  loaf.  Note  their 
height  in  comparison  with  thickness  of 
leaf,     (x  120). 


head  is  borne  upon  a  i)edestal  of  2  or  3  rows  of  cells  which- umy  become  more 
numerous  by  later  divisions.  At  maturity  the  radial  elongation  of  the  peripheral 
cells  of  the  gland  is  often  partly  and  sometimes  totally  obliterated  by  a  series  of 

irregular  divisions  which   nccur  during  the  later  stages   of  development   (Text-fig. 

2).' 

iV.  0.  LEGUMINOSExlE  (Sub-order  Minw.seae). 

Solereder  refers  to  the  constant  formation  of  glandular  hairs  in  the  .Mimosene. 
The  glands  may  possess  a  uniseriate  stalk  of  varying  length,  with  a   nuilticcllular 


BY    MARJORIE    I.    C'OLLIXS. 


331 


head  divided  by  butli  liuiizoutal  and  vertieal  walls,  e.g.,  eertaiu  species  of 
Parkia,  Entada,  Acacia,  and  Albizzia  (3,  p.  296),  or  the  head  may  be  shield-like 
and  consist  of  two  layei's  of  cells  (certain  species  of  Mimosa).  Glands  with  a 
short  stalk  and  a  few  head  cells  have  been  observed  in  Acacia  dud onae folia 
Willd.,  A.  exsudanti  Liiid.,  and  A.  leprosa  Sieb.   (3,  p.  296). 

In  species  of  Acacia,  A.  rupicola  F.  v.  M.,  A.  vertiicij'lua  Cunn.,  .1.  armuta 
R.Br.,  A.  iJtjcHuntha  Benth.,  found  in  the  neighbourhood  of  Adelaide,  the  writer 
observed  four  distinct  types  of  glandular  hair  lutherto  unrecorded  for  the  genus 
Acacia. 

A.  rupicola. — In  Acacia  rupicola  the  mature  gland  consists  of  a  uniseriate 
stalk  of  from  three  to  six  small  cells  surmounted  by  a  large  balloon-like  head  cell 
(Text-fig.  3).  The  cells  which  make  up  the  stalk  are  not  cut  oft'  from  the  base 
of  the  head  cell,  but  are  formed  by  a  series  of  parallel  transverse  divisiiais  within 
the  stalk  rudiment.     The  head  cell  appears  to  be  more  actively  secretory  than  the 


Text-fig. 3. — Mature  glands  of  Acacia  rupi- 
cola showing  uniseriate  stalk  of  varying 
length  and  inflated  head  cell,      (x  230). 


Text-fig. 4. — Surface  view  of  glands  of 
Acacia  verniciflua  showing  head  cells 
and  upper  tier  of  stalk,      (x  230) . 


stalk  cells.  The  glands  of  A.  rupicola.  differ  from  the  uniseriate  type  of  gland 
already  recorded  for  species  of  Acacia  l)y  Soleieder,  in  that  the  head  is  always 
unicellular;  they  jirobably  re)iresent  a  simpler  tvpe  of  gland  than  any  previously 
recorded  for  the  Mimoseae. 

Acacia  verniciflua. — In  Acacia  verniciflua  the  mature  gland  resembles 
the  type  recorded  for  species  of  Mimosa  with  i-hield-like  head  and  consisting  of 
two  layers  of  cells  (3,  p.  296).  Here  the  normal  mature  gland  is  made  u]i  of  a 
large  head  of  from  eight  to  sixteen  radiating  cells  in  a  single  layer,  supported  by 
a  stalk  of  one  or  two  rows  of  cells  (Text-tig.  4n.  h).  Each  row  of  the  stalk  nor- 
mally consists  of  four  cells,  but  in  some  cases  iiTegnlar  divisions  may  occur, 
converting  the  stalk  region  into  a  mass  of  cells  of  variable  number. 

Gland  Development. 

After  the  first  horizontal  division  differentiating  the  gland  rudiment  from  the 
epidermis,  a  second  horizontal  division  parallel  to  the  first  separates  the  head  and 
stalk  rudiments  (Text-flg.  ba-d).  The  third  division  is  vertical  in  the  median  plane 
of  the  head,  and  is  followed  almost  immediately  by  a  horizontal  division  within  the 
stalk,  cutting  off  a  second  stalk  cell  (Text-flg.  5e-f).  Further  vertieal  divisions  are 
now  formed  in  the  head,  many  of  which  are  quite  radial,  others  nearly  so.  Closely 
following  the   first  of  these   vertical  divisions   in  the  head,   two   vertieal   divisions 


33:2 


RKSIX-SKCRETlXCi    III.AXIIS    IN    SOJIK    AUSTRALIAX     PLANTS, 


appear  bisecting  tlie  uppermost  stalk  cell  in  planes  at  right  angles  (Text-%.  5^;). 
Similar  tlivisions  are  then  tVirniecl  in  the  second  stalk  cell  anil  ultimately  in  the 
basal  epidermal  cell    (Text-tig.  5//).      Owing  tn  the  position  of  the  original   hori- 


l^^lfl 


Text-fig.  5. — («-/')  •     Stages  in  the  development  of  the  normal  gland  of  Acacia  verniciflua  ; 

i,  shows  commencement  of  irregular  divisions  iu  the  upper  tier  of  the  stalk;  y,  and^, 

types  of  gland  formed  by  the  omission  of  the  second  stalk  cell,      (x  t'M). 

Text-fig. 6 — Mature  gland  of  cicada  I'crnicijina   in  which    tlie   two-tiered    nature  of  tlie 

stalk  has  been    ol)literated    by   irregular   lUvisions    during   the    later  stages  of 

development,  (x  230). 

zontal  division,  at  a  level  sometimes  above  that  oi'  the  neighbouring  epidermal 
cells,  these  basal  cells  often  project  for  some  distance,  and  appear  to  form  part 
of  the  gland  (Text-tig.  5ft,  i,  j). 

In  Text-fig.  5ft  we  have  what  is  |irob:il]ly  the  normal  type  of  gland,  in  which 
each  tier  of  the  stalk  is  made  up  of  four  cells.  Text-fig.  5  j  and  A-  represent  a 
ty])e  of  gland  often  met  where  the  second  stalk  cell  has  been  omitted. 

With  gi'owth  of  the  gland  cells,  however,  an  irregular  division  often  takes 
place  in  the  upper  tier  of  the  stalk  wliicli  is  then  made  up  of  five  or  six  poly- 
gonal cells,  irregidarly  arranged  (Text-fig.  5/).  When  this  irregular  division 
proceeds  to  the  second  tier  of  the  stalk,  the  resulting  gland  liecomes  more  com- 
plex, the  sliield-like  head  being  supported  by  an  irregular  mass  of  cells  in  whicii 
all  trace  of  the  two-tiered  stalk  is  obliterated  (Text-tig.  (i). 

Acacia  armata. — During  the  development  of  the  glandular  hairs  in  ,1.  urmata 
there  is  marked  variation  in  the  sequence  and  number  of  cell  divisions.  This 
variation  is  accountable  for  the  number  of  gland  forms  which  are  mingled  freely 
on  the  surface  of  the  young  phyllode.     These   gland  forms  resemble   one  anothei-, 


BY    3IARJ0RIE   I.    COLLINS. 


333 


in  that  the  bead  is  always  vertically  elongated  and  never  shield-like.  What  ap- 
pears to  be  tlie  normal  type  of  gland  is  figured  in  Text-fig.  la.  There  the  head 
is  composed  of  an  octant  of  cells,  and  is  supported  by  a  short  stalk  of  two  cells. 
The  stalk    may  possess   two    or  three    cells    (Text-fig.    la-c),  but    is  often  absent 


Text-fig. 7. — (a-d).  Gland  forms  of  Acacia 
armaia  in  which  stalk  region  is  present; 
e-f,  types  where  stalk  is  absent,  (x  200) . 


Text-fig. 8. — Glandular  hair  from  the  base 
of  the  phyllode  in  Acacia  pycnantha. 
(x  200) . 


(Text-fig.  7e-f).  The  head  in  the  greater  number  of  glands  is  characterised  by 
vertical  and  horizontal  divisions  which  vai-y  in  number  and  sequence  (Text-fig. 
7h-e).  Text-fig.  If  sliows  a  new  type  of  gland  which  has  arisen  by  the  omission 
of  the  divisions  giving  i^ise  to  stalk  cells. 

Acacia  pi/ctiaiitlia. — In  ^1.  piicn.antha  the  glandular  hairs  are  restricted  to  a 
Z(me  at  the  base  of  the  phyllode.  The  mature  glands  are  elongated  in  form,  and 
show  no  differentiation  into  head  and  stalk  region.  They  are  multicellular,  club- 
shaped  bodies  in  which  both  vertical  and  horizontal  walls  are  formed  ( Text-fig.  8 ) . 
These  glands  are  of  interest  in  that  they  resemble  the  stalkless  type  of  gland 
found  in  A.  armata  (Text-fig.  7/'),  and  could  conceivably  have  arisen  from  tliis  type 
by  tlie  interpolation  of  further  divisions. 

N.  0.  COMPO SITAE. 

Resin-secreting  glandular  hairs  are  widely  distributed  in  the  N.  0.  Compositae, 
and  have  been  recorded  by  various  investigators  (1,  4,  5,  6,  7).  The  most  com- 
mon type  of  gland  is  shortly  stalked  and  possesses  a  head  divided  by  a  median 
vertical  wall  into  two  rows  of  cells.  These  are  recorded  for  species  of  AnthemiK, 
Baccharis,  Brachiilaena,  etc.  (3,  p.  460),  and  have  been  observed  by  the  writer  in 
Ixudea  achiUeoides  R.Br.,  llumea  cassinlacea  F.  v.  M.,  and  Helichrysum  semipap- 
posum  DeCand.  The  glands  figured  by  Vogl  for  a  species  of  CJirysanthemam 
(see  3,  i.,  p.  458,  fig.  W3h,  after  Vogl),  evidently  represent  a  transitional  stage  be- 
tween those  observed  by  the  writer  for  Helicliri/siim  semipappufiiim  and  I.mdea 
achiJleiiides. 

Gland  Development. — In  tliese  three  types  the  first  transverse  division  whicli 
cuts  off  the  rudiment  of  the  gland  from  the  epidermis  is  followed   by   a   median 


334 


RESIX-SECRETIXG    GLANDS    IX    SOME    AUSTRALIAN'    PLANTS, 


vertical  division  in  both  gland  rudiment  and  basal  epidermal  cell  (Text-figs.  9a-c, 
]0«-b).  This  vertical  division  is  fdllowed  by  a  series  of  transverse  divisions 
parallel  to  the  first  transverse  wall  formed.  In  the  case  of  Helichrnsum  semi- 
papposum  the  median  vertical  division  is  followed  by  one  transverse  division  only. 
The  gland  cells  then  increase  in  size,  the  upper  pair  being  markedly  inflated 
(Text-fig.  10  c,  d).  In  Ixodea  and  Humea  there  are  three  transverse  divisions  fol- 
lowing the  median  vertical  division,  so  that  the  mature  gland  possesses  two  vertical 
rows,  each  of  four  cells  surmountin.i;'  a  basal  epidermal  cell  (Text-figs.  9e-f).  In 
the  glands  of  a  species  of  Chri/santliemtim  figured  by  Solereder  after  Yogi  (3,  i., 
p.  458,  fig.  103/f.).  only  two  transvei-se  divisions  iollow  the  vertical  divisiim. 

N.  (>.  MYOPOBIXEAE. 

Glandular  hairs  are  of  common  occurrence  in  the  two  genera  of  Mi/oporineae — 
Myoporum  and  Eremophila.  Solereder  states  tliat  these  glandular  hairs  possess 
"varied  structure    within    the   individual  species,   but    agree  in    the   tact  that    the 


Jfef 


Text-fig. 9. — (a-/).     Stages  in  the  development  of  the  glandular  hairs  of  Ixodea  achille- 
oides ;  g,  h,  surface  and  lateral  views  of  glandular  hairs,      (x  280). 

Text-fig. 10. — (a-d).     Stages  in  development  of  the  glamlular  hairs  of  Helic/nrsiuii  seini- 
papposuiii.      (x280). 

ghuididar  lu'a<l  is,  in  ahimst  all  cases,  divided  by  vertical  walls  only"  (3,  p.  ()26). 
(ihindular  and  clothing  hairs  are  also  known  to  occur  in  the  same  leaf-bud,  and, 
according  to  Solereder,  transitional  forms  of  a  d\ial  nature  are  often  found  (3,  p. 
(i271.  These  facts  suggest  that  glandular  hair  formation  in  the  Mf/oporineae  is 
in  an   unstable  condition.     Observations  made   by  the  writer   upon   gland  develop- 


BY    MAKJOKIE    I.    COLLINS. 


335 


meiit  in  Mi/oporum  serratum  and  Eremophila  latifolia  give  additional  evidence  in 
support  of  this  view. 

The  most  common  type  of  gland  in  the  Mijoporitieae  is  that  found  in  species 
oi  Myoporum.  e.g.,  (M.  serratum  var.  insulare  I?. Br.,  and  3/.  serratum  var.  vis- 
cosiim  R.Br.),  where  a  large  shield,  consisting  cf  four  cells  in  a  row,  is  placed 
e.xeentrically  upon  a  stalk  of  two  cells. 

Gland  Bevelopment. 

Myoporum  serratum. — In  the  initial  stages  of  gland  formation  a  splierical 
projection  from  an  epidermal  cell  is  cut  off  from  the  remaining  epidermal  cells 
by  a  transverse  wall  (Text-tig.  11a,  b).  A  second  transverse  division  differen- 
tiates the  gland  rudiment  into  head  and  stalk  regions  (Text-fig.  lie).  A  third 
transverse  division  now  takes  place  in  the  stalk  (Text-fig.  lid),  and  is  immediately- 
followed  by  a  vertical  division  in  the  median  plane  of  the  head  (Text-tig.  lie). 
The  5th  and  6th  divisions  are  also  vertical  in  the  head,  and  parallel  to  the  first  head 
division   (Text-tig.  11/).      Growth  of  the  cells  continues  after  division  has  ceased. 


Text-fig. 11. — (a-f).     Stages   in   the   development   of  the   glandular  hairs  of   Afyoponitii 
serratum  ;  g,  /i,  surface  and  lateral  views  of  the  glands,      (x  280). 


330  KESIX-SKCRETIXG    CLAXDS    IN"     SOMK    AUSTRALIAN     PLANTS, 

In  the  glaiul  head  there  is  greater  growth  of  the  fells  to  one  side  causing  the 
eceentrieity  noted  above  (Text-tig.  11/'.  /( )  ■  This  une(|ual  lateral  growth  always 
occurs  in  the  longitudinal  plane  of  the  leaf,  and  is  directed  towards  the  leaf  ape.\. 
Text-fig.  11(7  shows  gland  in  surface  view. 

Eremophila  latifolia. — In  Eremophila  hitifoba  the  general  plan  of  gland  de- 
velopment resembles  that  of  Mi/uponim.  Here,  however,  the  liead  shield  is  coni- 
jiosed  of  eight  cells  and  shows  two  distinct  forms  within  the  species. 

After  the  differentiation  of  the  young  gland  into  head  and  stalk  legion,  tlie 
first  division  which  takes  place  is  vertical  in  th?  median  plane  of  the  head.  This 
is  either  followed  immediately  by  a  horizontal  division  forming  a  second  stalk 
cell,  or  the  latter  is  postponed  until  the  later  head  divisions  have  taken  place. 
From  the  number  of  glands  found  in  which  a  bead  shield  with  full  number  of 
divisions  is  suyiported  by  a  single  stalk  cell,  it  seems  probable  tiiat  tliis  second 
stalk  division  is  often  omitted.  The  later  divisions  in  the  head  are  all  vertical  and 
according  to  the  arrangement  of  the  walls,  give  rise  to  two  distinct  types  of  liead 
shield. 

In  one  type  tlie  vertical  divisions  are  formed  in  a  radial  manner  and  result 
in  a  subspherical  sliield  of  8  radiating  cells  (Text-fig  12«).  In  the  other  type 
two  sets  of  parallel  or  almost  parallel  divisions  meet  the  original,  median  vertical 


Text-fig. 12. — (a-b).    Surface  view  of  the  two  ^laiid 
forms  of  Eremophila  latifolia.     (x  230). 

division  at  approximately   equal   angles,   and   result  in   the   formation   of  a  shield 
of  eight  cells  arranj^ed  in  two  rows  of  four  (Text-fig.  12J)). 

The  relation  between  these  types  of  gland  and  that  of  MiinjicrKm  is  oli\ious. 
All  the  gland  cells  in  EremnphUu  latifolia  are  clu'racterised  by  the  inclusion  nl'  a 
clustered  crystal  of  calcium  oxalate. 

All  text-figures  were  made  at  table  level,  tube  at  Kit)  mm.,  with  tiic  aid  of 
Zeiss  camera  hu-ida    and  with  Leitz  objectives  3  and  (i,  oculars  2  and  4. 

LITERATURE. 

1.  Martinet. — "Organes   de   secretion.''     Ann.    Sci.   nat..   ser.   5,  t.   xiv..    1872. 

p.  1()8,  PI.  15. 

2.  Radlkopeu. — "Ueber    die  Gliederung  der  Familie    dcr    Sapindaceen."      Sitz. 

k.b.  Akad.  Wiss.  Munchen,  xx.,  18!)(),  pp.  105-379. 

3.  Solereokr. — Systematic  Anatomy  of  the  Dicotyledons.  \"ols.  i.  and  ii..  IIHIH. 
*4.     Van  Tiegiieji. — "Appareil  secret,  dans  les  Com]iositae."     Hull.   Soc.   I'.ot.  dc 

France,  1883,  pp.  310-13;  1884.  pp.  112-1  Hi. 
*5.     V(x;l.— Sitz.  k.  Akad.  W'wn..  xlviii.,  Abt.  2,  1S(i3,  p.  ti88. 
6.      VOLKEXS. — "Ueber  Pflanzen    mit    lackirtcn     P.laltern."      Per.    Deutsch.    Hot. 

Oesell..  viii.,  1890.  pp.  120-140,  PI.   viii. 
*7.     VuiLLEMix. — "Appareil    secret,   dans    les   t'ompositac."     Bull.    Soc.   Hot.    de 

France,  1884,  pp.  108-10. 

•The  works  marked  thus  were  not  directly  accessible  to  the  writer. 


337 


THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROLOGY  OF  THE  GREAT  SERPENTINE 
BELT  OF  NEW  SOUTH  WALES. 

Part  IX. — The  Geology,  Palaeontology  and  Petrography  op  the 

CURRABUBULA  DISTRICT,   WITH  NoTES  ON  ADJACENT     REGIONS. 

By  Professor  W.  N.  Benson,  B.A.,  D.Sc,  F.G.S.,   W.  S.  Dun,  and 
W.  R.   Browne,  B.Sc. 

Section  B. — PALAEOXT0LO(;y. 

By   W.  S.   Dun,  Government  Palaeontologist   and  Lecturer  in   Palaeontologj",   The 

University  of   Sydney,  and  AY.  N.   Benson,  P.. A..  D.Sr..  F.G.S. .   Professor  of 

Geology',  The  University  of  Otago,  N.Z.;  formerly  Linnean  Maeleay  F'ellow 

of  the  Society  in  Geology. 

With  an  Appendix  by  F.  Chapman,  A.L.S.,  Lecturer  in  Palaeontology,  The 
University  of  Melbourne. 

(Plates  xviii.-xsiv. ;  Text-tigures  10-17.) 

Descriptive  portion    (VV.   S.  Dun  and  W.    N.   Bien?onl 337 

Appendi;-:. — Lower    Carboniferous    Limestone  fossiii  from  New  South  Wales  (F. 

Chapman ) 364 

Comparison    of    the   Burindi    Fauna   with   the  Lov.-er  Carboniferous  Faunal  Suc- 
cession in  the   British   Isles    (W-    X.    Benson i      367 

(i.)  Descriptive  Portion. 

(W.   S.  Dun  and  W.  N.   Benson.) 

In  the  following  section  we  have  remarked'upon  the  noteworthy  features  of 
all  fossils  obtained  by  us  from  Currabubula  and  the  shelly  ridge  in  'the  south-east 
of  the  parish  of  Babbinboon,  and  also  the  extensive  collection  from  the  latter  area 
presented  to  us  by  IVfrs.  Scott,  to  whom  we  are  greatly  indebted.  The  opportunitv 
has  heen  taken  to  examine  also  the  undescribed  fossils  in  the  collection  of  the  Aus- 
tralian Museum  and  that  of  the  Geological  Survey  which  were  obtained  in  the 
region  around  Carroll,  Somerton  and  Babbinboon.  chiefly  by  Mr.  Donald  Porter, 
and  the  late  Charles  CuUen .  We  are  thus  able  to  gi\e  a  list  of  the  known  forms, 
including  critical  descriptions  of  five  forms  previously  known  in  the  State  but 
only  from  provisional  determinations*  seven  new  records  for  the  State,  and  fifteen 
species  and  three  varieties  which  we  believe  to  be  new.  We  are  indebted  to  Pro- 
fessor Lawson,  D.Sc.  and  Mr.  Chapman  for  the  description  of  several  of  the  fos- 
sils. Apart  from  the  leaf  impressions  of  Rhacopteris,  Aneimites  and  Archaeo- 
cala  mites  in  the  Kuttung,  which  do  not  call  for  special  notice,  two  silieitied  plant 
remains  are  noteworthy.  They  were  found  on  the  eastern  slopes  of  Mts.  Cobla 
and   Sugarloaf,    three   miles   east   of   Currabubula.     Professor    Lawson     describes 


338    GEOLOGY  AND  PETROLOGY  OF  THE  GREAT  SERPEXTIXE  BELT  OF  X.S.W., 

these  as  follows: — "The  first  is  represented  by  a  single  specimen  about  four  imlu's 
in  either  dimension ;  portion  of  a  large  stem  of  gymnospermous  wood.  The 
••ellular  structure  shows  no  sharp  definition ;  the  tracheids  may  lie  made  out  rather 
vaguely,  and  these  are  traversed  by  numerous  medullary  rays,  some  of  w'hieli  ai'e 
several  cells  in  width,  others  only  a  single  cell.  Vague  indications  of  bordered 
pits  appear  in  the  tracheids,  but  on  account  of  the  poor  definition  of  the  tracheids 
themselves,  it  is  impossible  to  determine  how  many  rows  of  these  are  present  on 
the  tracheid.  From  the  evidence  of  their  more  or  less  circular  outline  as  seen  on 
the  radial  wall,  one  is  inclined  to  the  conclusion  that  there  is  only  a  single  row  of 
these  in  each  tracheid.     The  length  of  a  single  tracheid  cannot  be  defined." 

The  second  form  is  illustrated  by  two  specimens  possibly  originally  united; 
the  one  has  roughly  the  appearance  of  a  portion  of  a  stem  about  five  im-hes  in 
diameter,  though  really  a  bundle  of  parallel  roots,  each  5  to  8  nun.  in  diameter, 
the  other  shows  its  fascicular  nature  more  evidently.  The  tissues  are  preserved 
in  a  red  jasper,  and  dusty  haematite  considerably  obscures  tlie  structures.  "The 
cellular  structure  has  been  (|uite  disintegi'ated.  There"  is  a  solid  core  of  woody 
tissue  traversed  by  innumerable  medullary  rays  that  run  almost  from  the  very 
centre  to  the  cortex,  traces  of  the  latter  being  ciuite  evident  (see  Plate  x.\i.,  figs. 
11.  12).  All  trace  of  protoxylem  seems  to  have  been  destroyed.  There  appears 
no  sign  whatever  of  annular  rings,  though  the  secondary  wood  is  of  considerable 
thickness,  the  average  radius  of  the  roots  l)eing  6 — 7  mm.  There  is  no  trace  of 
pith  structure.  The  secondary  wood  starts  abruptly  upon  an  indefinite  mass 
showing  no  cellular  structure,  but  which  we  may  interpret  to  be  at  least  the  jiosi- 
tion  of  the  phloem,  the  entire  phloem  having  been  replaced  by  silica.  An  out- 
standing feature  of  the  secondary  xylem  is  the  apparent  uniformity  of  its  cellular 
structure.  If  its  elements  are  tracheids,  which  seems  to  be  the  case,  they  appear 
to  be  uniform  in  their  size  and  structure  from  the  position  of  tlie  phloem  to  the 
cortex.  From  the  longitudinal  section  all  traces  of  bordered  pits  liave  been  com- 
pletely obliterated.  To  what  gi-oup  of  plants  these  roots  belong  it  would  lie  diffi- 
cult to  say  until  further  evidence  is  obtained  as  to  the  detailed  structure  of  tlieir 
protoxylem  and  other  tissues."  The  slides  are  in  the  collection  of  the  Univevsitv 
of  Sydney. 

Mr.  riiapman  describes,  in  the  aiijiendix.  the  occurrence  of  Oirraxelhi  in  tlie 
oolitic  limestones  of  the  Parish  of  Babbinboon. 

The  marine  fossils  of  the  Burindi  Series  so  far  obtained  from  the  Turra- 
bubnla,  Somerton,  Carroll  ;ind  Babbinboon  Districts  comprise  the  follciwing 
forms : — 

COELENTERATA. 

Zaphrextis    (Plerophyllum)   crLLEXi  Eth.  fil. 

Mem.  Geol.  Surv.  N.S.W..  Pal.  No.  5.  pt.  1.  1891.  p.  13,  I.  0.  f.  1-7. 

This  form  occurs  rathei'  abundantly  near  the  railway  cutting  Un\r  miles  east 
of  Currabubula.     Collected  by  Benson. 

Zaphrextis  simpiivexs  Eth.  fil. 

Mem.  Geol.  Surv.  X.S.W..  Pal.  No.  5.  pt.  1.  \i.  10.  t.  11.  f.  4-0. 

This  form  was  described  from  the  Somerton  District;  it  also  occurs  in  tlie 
south-eastern  portion  of  Babbinboon.     Collected  by  Benson. 


by  w.  n.  benson,  w.  s.  dun,  and  w.  r.  browne.  33!) 

Zaphrentis  sp.  indet. 

This  is  a  large  form,  the  calyx  of  which  is  about  an  inch  in  diameter,  but  is 
stated  by  Dr.  Smith  (in  a  private  communication)  to  be  too  poorly  preserved  to 
admit  of  specific  determination.  It  occurs  in  the  small  mass  of  limestone  north 
of  the  railway  cutting  four  miles  east  of  Currabubula. 

LiTHOSTROTION   SP. 

Mitchell  has  reported  finding  a  specimen  of  this  genus,  as  recognised  by 
Sowerby,  at  Perimbungay,  near  the  junction  of  the  Peel  and  Namoi  Rivers  in 
1831  (9). 

Amygdalophyllum  etheridgei,  gen.  et  sp.  nov.     (Plate  xviii. ;  Text-fig.  10.) 

The  material  for  the  investigation  of  this  form  consists  of  one  specimen  show- 
ing the  external  form,  but  not  that  of  the  interior  of  the  calyx,  and  four  other 
specimens  from  which  have  been  obtained  six  transverse  and  two  longitudinal 
sections . 

The  corallum  (Plate  xviii.,  fig.  1)  is  simple  and  turbinate,  marked  by  slight 
growth  ridges,  and  rapidly  increasing  in  diameter  from  apex  to  the  bell-like 
calyx.  The  length  of  the  corallum  must  have  been  originally  about  sixty  milli- 
metres; its  greatest  diameter  is  forty-two.  The  external  wall  has  been  removed 
for  the  most  part,  exhibiting  the  ends  of  the  septa,  which  follow  the  plan,  normal 
to  the  Rugosa,  of  addition  at  four  points.  Where  the  coral  has  a  diameter  of 
about  ten  millimetres  there  are  thirty-eight  septa  visible,  but  where  the  diameter 
is  thirty-five  millimetres  the  number  of  visible  septa  is  increased  to  between  ninety 
and  a  hundred.  Transverse  sections  show  that  the  outer  wall  was  thin,  and  very 
slightly  undulating,  being  apparently  devoid  of  rugae  and  costae.  The  septa  are 
in  two  cycles,  the  longer  reaching  to  the  columella,  the  shorter  extending  to  the  inner 
limit  of  the  dissepimental  zone.     Septa  of  lioth  cycles  are  stout,  generally  increas- 


Diamerer    tOmm  iStnm  55  mm 


Text-fig.  10.— Section  of  portions  of  the  corallum  of  AtnygdalophylLuiu  etheridgei,  gen. 
et  sp.  nov.,  to  show  the  relation  of  the  septa  to  the  wall.     Babbinboon. 

ingly  so  as  they  proceed  further  from  the  columella,  this  being  especially  marked  with- 
in the  dissepimental  zone.  Generally  the  longer  septa  are  more  thickened  than  those 
of  the  second  cycle,  but  in  some  cases  this  distinction  is  not  noticeable  in  the  outer 
parts.  The  septa  of  both  cycles  nearer  the  apical  portion  of  the  corallum  pass 
directly  into  the  wall  (Plate  xviii..  f.  3;  also  Text-fig.  10a),  but  later  they  become 
much  thinner  as  they  approach  the  wall,  somewhat  flexuous  in  some  cases,  and 
supported  from  the  wall  by  a  number  of  obliquely  placed  lamellae  (Plate  xviii., 
fig.  2,  Text-fig.  106)  In  the  sections  of  greatest  diameter  the  septa  may  not 
reach  the  wall  at  all,  but  near  it  branch  out  into  the  oblique  supporting  lamellae 


340    GEOLOGY  AND  PETROLOGY  OF  THE  GREAT  SERPEXTIXE  BELT  OP  X.S.W., 

wliieli  in  turn  are  joined  to  the  wall  {see  Text-fig.  10e|.  Indeed,  in  some  eases, 
the  wall  is  replaced  by  a  broad  zone  of  vesicular  tissue  composed  of  long  cells 
flattened  parallel  to  the  outer  surface  (see  Text-fig.  lOd).  The  septa  spring  from 
the  inner  side  of  this  zone.  In  regard  to  the  illustrations,  it  should  be  noted  that 
the  originals  of  Text-flgures  10  a  and  d  are  cut  from  the  same  eorallum.  The 
greatest  number  of  septa  observed  in  a  transverse  section  was  sixty  of  the  longer 
cycle,  and  an  equal  number  of  intervening  septa  of  the  shorter  cycle.  No  trace  of 
a  fossula  is  present.  Some  variation  is  seen  in  the  manner  of  attachment 
of  the  longer  septa  to  the  columella.  In  some  cases  (Plate  xviii.,  tig.  4)  they 
pass  directly  into  the  columella  and  appear  to  radiate  from  its  outer  margin, 
though  two  or  three  of  the  septa  occa-sioually  coalesce  before  reaching  the  colum- 
ella; in  other  cases  (Plate  xviii.,  tig.  2)  they  are  crowded  together,  bent,  and  even 
broken  as  if  they  had  been  twisted  and  thrust  against  the  columella.  Intermedi- 
ate stages  of  partial  twisting  occur  (e.g.,  Plate  xviii.,  fig.  3),  but  this  does  nut 
seem  to  be  referable  to  the  stage  of  growth. 

The  most  remarkable  feature  of  the  coral  is  the  nature  of  the  columella  which 
is  a  thick  solid  rod  of  rougldy  ellijitical  cross  section,  one  end  of  the  major  axis 
being  drawn  out  into  a  sharp  point,  directed  ])robably  towards  the  cardinal  septum 
(Plate  xviii.,  fig's.  2,  4).  As  in  the  case  of  Lithostrotion,  this  appears  to  be  essen- 
tially an  enlargement  of  the  plate  joining  the  cardinal  and  counter  septa.  This 
plate  may  be  clearly  seen  in  the  centre  of  the  columella  (Plate  xviii.,  flg-s.  4,  6)  and 
in  the  larger  transverse  sections  is  about  three  millimetres  long  and  a  fifth  of 
a  millimetre  in  width.  About  it  has  been  deposited  a  layer  of  lime  carbonate 
3  mm.  thick,  so  that  the  major  and  minor  axes  of  the  columella  are  as  much 
as  9  and  5  or  6  mm.  respectively.  This  layer  is  made  up  of  fibres' 
radiating  from  the  original  plate  within,  and  to  a  less  extent  from 
the  extensions  of  this  plate  into  the  septa  at  either  end  (Plate  xviii.,  fig.  6) .  The 
other  septa  also  appear  to  be  continued  into  the  structure  of  the  stereojilasm  an<l 
to  join  the  primitive  plate.  The  connection  is  most  clear  in  the  cases  where  the 
.septa  are  not  twisted  (Plate  xviii.,  fig.  4),  in  which  case  the  darker,  rather  llexuous 
fibres  of  the  columella  are  continued  into  the  centre  of  the  septa.  Between  such 
flark  lines  connecting  with  the  septa  are  intervening  dark  lines,  as  if  corre- 
sponding to  the  distant  septa  of  the  secondary  cycle.  In  other  cases  the 
relation  of  lines  to  sei)ta  is  not  so  clear,  and  if  the  septa  are  tiuich  twisted  al)out 
the  columella,  the  connections  are  more  or  less  destroyed  (Plate  xviii.,  fig.  (il. 
Sometimes  the  dark  lines  cannot  be  separated  from  the  general  radiating  structure, 
which  closely  resend)les  that  of  oolite.  At  other  times  this  resemblance  is  rendered 
still  more  striking  by  the  development  of  concentric  layers  in  the  thickening  of  the 
columella   (Plate  xviii.,  fig.  4). 

The  dissepiniental  zone  extends  about  tliree  (|uarters  of  the  distance,  more 
or  less,  from  the  wall  to  the  columella.  The  vesicles  are  most  closely  jiacked  in 
that  portion  which  is  nearest  to  the  columella  and  forms  a  half  to  a  third  of  the 
width  of  the  dissepiniental  zone.  The  outer  and  inner  limits  of  this  zone  of 
closely  packed  vesicles  may  have  the  dissepiments  so  thickened  as  to  form  more  or 
less  continuous  walls,  the  latter  or  thecal  wall  at,  or  just  within,  the  circle  toucli- 
ing  the  ends  of  the  shorter  septa.  Generally,  however,  there  is  little  or  no  sign  of 
those  structures.  The  nl)li(|ue  but  nearly  longitudinal  section  (Plate  xviii.,  fig.  5) 
shows  that  the  dissepiments  are  ranged  in  a  steejdy  descending  sei'ies;  tlie  largest 
vesicles  in  the  central  portion  of  (lie  dissepimental  zone  are  about  three  millimetres 
in  length,  and  one  in  width,  though  usually  tliey  are  about  half  tliat  size,  and  less 
than  that  in  the  region  of  closest  packing. 


BY  W.   X.   BEXSOX,  W.   8.   DUN,   AXD   W.    R     BROWXE.  341 

The  taljulae  are  somewhat  irregularly  spaced,  being  frequently  about  a  milli- 
meti'e  apart,  and  often  closer  together.  They  have  a  general  upward  arching,  but 
this  is  not  marked.  Sometimes  they  are  continuous  across  several  septa,  but  at 
jther  times  are  confined  to  one  interseptal  space.  There  is  no  apparent  stereo - 
plasmic  thickening  on  the  tabulae  and  very  little  if  any  on  the  dissepiments. 

This  form  appears  to  be  closely  related  to  Koninckophyllum  inopinatum  Eth. 
til.,  which  occurs  in  the-  Carboniferous  limestone  of  Lion  Creek,  Stanwell,  near 
Rockhampton.*  It  differs  from  this  form,  however,  in  that  the  primary  septa 
reach  and  unite  with  the  columella,  while  those  of  Koninckophyllum  do  not  do  so, 
and  that  the  septa  of  the  second  cycle  are  two-thirds  or  three-quarters  of  the 
lengfh  of  the  priraary  septa,  instead  of  being  only  one-half  as  in  the  case  of 
Koninckophyllum.  In  some  respects  also  the  form  appears  to  be  allied  to  Cya- 
thaxonia,  as  pointed  out  in  a  private  communication  from  Dr.  Stanley  Smith. 
Though  the  corallite  is  simple,  its  structure  resembles  that  of  such  forms  of  Litho- 
strotioti  of  much  smaller  diameter,  as  L.  stanveUense  Eth.  fil.,  which  Dr.  Smith  has 
recognised  in  the  Burindi  Beds  at  Hall's  Creek,  soutli  of  Bingara.**  It  is  interest- 
ing to  note  that  his  remark  that  the  stoutness  of  the  columella,  and  the  tendency 
of  the  septa  to  end  in  the  area  of  dissepiments,  and  not  quite  reach  the  epitheca, 
features  which  are  present  in  the  form  described  here,  are  features  which  dis- 
tinguish the  Australian  forms  of  Lithostrotion  from  the  British  types.  On 
account  of  the  shape  of  the  transverse  section  of  the  columella,  we  have  adopted 
for  this  genus  the  name  Amygdalophyllum,  suggested  to  us  by  Professor  David, 
F.R.S.  The  species,  the  only  one  yet  known,  we  dedicate  to  the  late  Robert 
Etlieridge,  Junr.,  in  appreciation  of  his  fifty  years  of  work  on  the  Geology  and 
Palaeontology  of  Australia.  This  form  was  collected  in  the  south-east  of  Babbin- 
boon  by  Mrs.  Scott  and  Benson.  The  type  material  will  be  placed  in  the  collec- 
tion of  the   Geological  Survey. 

DiPHVPHYLLUJt    SP.    IXDET. 

Indefinite  sjiecimens  provisionally  referred  to  this  genus  were  obtained 
by  Cullen  from  the  Parish  of  Moorowarra.  These  are  recorded  as  numbers  4510 
and  4515  in  the  collection  of  the  Geological  Survey.  This  is  perhaps  a  Lithostro- 
lioii  ((■/.  Smith,  1920,    loc.cit.). 

TrYPLASMA    ?  SP.    IXDET. 

A  very  indefinite  fragment  doubtfully  referred  to  this  genus  is  found  on 
specimen  4419  in  +he  collection  of  the  Geological  Survey,  and  was  obtained  by 
Cullen  in  the  Parish  of  Moorow-arra. 

MiCHELINIA  TENUISEPTA    (Phillips). 

Cahtmnpora  tenuisepta,  Phillips,  Illus.  Geol.  York.,  ii.,  1836,  p.  201,  t.  2,  f.  3. 
Michelinia  tenuisepta,  De  Koninck,  Anim.  Foss.  Terr.  Carb.  Belg.,  p.  31,  t.  c,  f.  3; 

R.  Etheridge,  Junr.,  Mem.   Geol.  Surv.  N.S.W.,  Pal.  No.  5,   pt.   1,  1891 

p.  28,  t.  4,  f.  1. 
Tlie   form  was  found   in   New    South   Wales   first   at    Carroll,   and   compared 
dubiously  by  Mr.   Etheridge  to  the  above  species.     Later  and  more  perfect  speci- 
mens have    confirmed    the  determination.     Our   specimen    was  collected   by   jMrs. 
Scott  in  the  south-east  of  Babbinboon. 

•R.  Etheridge,  Junr.,  Geol.  Sxirv.  Queensland,  BuU.  12,  1900,  T)p.20-21,  t.l,  f.2 ;  t.2, 
f.9,  10.  AccordinET  to  a  private  communication  from  Dr.  S.  Smith,  Etheridge's  Konincko- 
phyllum is  certainly  not  Thompson's  l\oninckof>hvlliiiii. 

*'S.  Smith,  On  AphropvUum  hallense,  gen.  et  sp.  nov.  and  Lithostrotion  from  the 
Neighbourhood  of  Bingara.  N.S.W.  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  N.S.W.,  liv.,  1920. 


342    GEOLOGY  AXD  PETROLOGY  OF  THE  GREAT  SERPENTIXE  BELT  OF  X.S.W., 

CRINOIDEA. 
Cactocrinus  ?  BROWXEI^  sp.  nov.       (Plate  xix.,  fig.  1.) 

The  specimen  is  an  external  cast,  in  a  ferruginous  mudstone  or  aririllaceous 
limonite,  of  a  part  of  a  calyx  showing  the  upper  portion  of  the  first  columnal  and 
the  right  and  left  massed  basal  plates,  the  anterior  not  being  visible.  In  the 
radial  cycle  can  be  seen  the  hexagonal  anal  plate,  broad  and  symmetrical  in  form, 
with  its  superimposed  inter-radial  plates,  of  which  three  cycles  are  preserved . 
The  plates  generallv  are  characterised  by  their  regularity  of  form  and  hexaradiate 
ornamentation,  the  point  of  radiation  being  marked  by  a  tubercle.  Xo  definite 
idea  can  be  obtained  as  to  the  nature  of  the  tegmen,  nor  as  to  the  condition  of 
the  anal  opening,  nor  yet  of  the  brachia.  The  general  form  of  the  calyx  is  glo- 
bose and  somewhat  depressed.  The  form  is  not  comparable  directly  with  any 
known  form  except  perhaps  Ca-ctocrinus  ectypus  (Meek  and  Worthen).  though 
differing  widely  from  it  in  urnamentation.  The  classification  of  the  Actinocrin-.- 
(lae,  so  characteristic  of  the  Lower  Carboniferous  formations,  is  based  on  the  con- 
dition of  the  anal  tube,  and  the  conformation  of  the  brachials,  information  iis  to 
■which  cannot  be  obtained  from  our  specimen.  It  appears,  however,  from  the  shape 
of  the  radial  and  fused  brachial  plates  to  approach  closely  to  Waclismuth  and 
Springer's  Cattocrhius. 

Dimensions:  Height  of  calyx.  18.5  mm.;  breadth  of  calyx,  26.0  mm.;  heiglit 
of  anal  plate,  4.0  mm.;  lireadth  of  anal  plate,  4.0  mm.;  height  of  right  posterior 
radial  i^late,  4.5  mm.;  breadth  of  right  posterior  radial  plate,  3.7  mm. 

We  name  this  in  honour  of  our  colleague,  Mr.  W.  R.  Browne,  B.Sc.  Our 
specimen  was  collected  by  Mr.  W.  Donaldson,  south  of  the  railway  line,  four 
miles  east  of  Currabubula,  and  is  now  specimen  No.  F12,454  in  the  collection  of 
llie  Geological  Survey. 

A  fragment  of  a  calyx  with  an  ornamentation  very  similar  to  that  shown  on 
C.  brownei  which  has  been  figured  and  described  as  Actinocrinus  sp.  indet.  was 
found  in  the  Star  Beds  near  Rockhampton,  Queensland.* 

BRYOZOA. 

ThaJIXISCUS     sp.     INDET. 

King,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist,  (2).  iii.,  1849,  p.  389. 

In  manuscripts  left  by  the  late  Mr.  R.  Etheridge.  Junr.,  a  form  not  deter- 
minable specifically  was  described  as  belonging  to  this  genus.  It  was  collected 
in  the  parish  of  Moorowarra,  south  of  Somerton,  by  Cullen,  and  near  Carroll  by 
Porter. 

Fenestella  spp.  ixdet. 

Indeterminate  specimens  belonging  probably  to  this  genus,  occur  four  miles 
east  of  Currabubula.     Collected  by  Benson. 

BRACHIOPODA. 

Orthotetes    (Schellwienella)    crexistria    (Phillips). 

Orthotetes  crenistria.  Dun,  Rec.  Geol.  Sur.  N.S.W.,  vii.,  1002,  p.  82,  t.   23,  f.  11. 
and  Bibliography. 


•K.  Etheridge  Junr.,  in  Geol.  Vn\.  Qslfl.,  1892,  p.207.  t.7.  f.9. 


BY  W.   N.  BENSON,  W.    S.   DUN,  AND   W.    R.    BROWNE.  343 

Schdlu'ieneUa  crenistria,  Thomas,  The  British  Carboniferous  Orthotetinae,  Mem. 
Geol.  Surv.  Gt.  Brit.,  Pal.  I.,  Pt.  ii.,  1910,  p.  92. 

Tliis  readily  recognised  form  was  found  by  Benson  at  the  railway  cutting  four 
miles  east  of  Currabubula,  and  again  in  the  south-east  of  Babbinboon.  The  largest 
specimen  found,  if  perfect,  would  have  had  a  breadth  of  70  mm.  and  length  o'c 
40  mm. 

According  to  De  Koninck  (30)  this  form  is  rather  rare  in  the  Lower  Car- 
boniferous but  very  abundant  in  the  upper  beds  of  the  Carboniferous  Limestone. 
Modern  British  workers,  however,  have  divided  O.  crenifstria  into  a  number  of 
varieties  of  which  the  most  important  form  is  termed  Schellwienella  crenistria 
and  recognise  the  species  sensu  strieto  extending  from  the  base  of  the  Car- 
boniferous up  to  the  zone  Ca,*  while  varieties,  e.g.,  var.  senilis,  extend  up  to  the 
zone  D2.  It  has  even  been  found  in  the  Millstone  Grit  of  the  Welsh  Border  (31, 
p.  251)  (?  a  facies  of  D2)  .  It  is  apposite  here  to  cite  a  remark  of  Davidson 
(31,  p.  290)  apropos  of  Streptorhi/i/chns  cnenistria  var.  senilis. — "Some  palaeont- 
ologists seem  disposed  to  erect  this  important  variety  into  a  distinct  species,  and 
it  cannot  be  denied  that  in  some  localities,  particularly  in  Au.stralia,  it  alone 
occurs." 

Chonetes  aspinosa   Dun. 

Dun,  Rec   Geo!    Surv.  N.S.W.,  vii.,  1902,  p.  69,  t.  19,  f.  1-3,  t.  20,  f.  1-5. 

This  species  was  proposed  by  Dun  to  receive  forms  previously  classed  as 
Chonetes  cf.  comoides,  Daviesiella  cf.  comoides,  or  Productus  cf.  giganteus.  Pro- 
bably should  be  here  included  the  form  referred  to  the  last  designation  which  was 
obtained  by  Mr.  Pittman  from  Somerton.  Forms  compared,  but  not  identified  with, 
any  one  of  the  three  above-mentioned  species,  are  cited  as  occurring  between  the 
zones  Ci  and  Di  in  the  Carboniferous  rocks  of  Great  Britain. 

Chonetes  cf.  habdbensis   (Phillips). 

For  Bibliography  see  De  Koninck,  Pal.  Foss.  N.S.W.     Mem.  Geol.  Surv.  N.S.W., 

Pal.  No.  6,  1898.  pp.  66-8. 

Two  small  specimens,  not  well  preserved,  which  may  be  referred  to  this  spe- 
cies were  obtained  by  Benson  from  the  railway  cutting  four  miles  east  of  Curra- 
bubula.    The  dimensions  of  these  were  length,  5  ram.,  breadth,  8  mm. 

This  form  occurs  both  in  Devonian  and  Carboniferous  beds  of  this  State  as 
elsewhere,  though  De  Koninck  (op.  cit.)  urges  that  specific  differences  may  be 
found  between  the  types  belonging  to  the  two  Periods.  This,  however,  does  not 
appear  to  be  the  view  of  modern  British  workers  who  record  it  as  ranging  from 
the  base  of  the  Carboniferous  System  up  to  the  zone  C2. 

Productus  hemisph.*ericus  (Sowerby).  (Plate  xix.,  fig.  8.) 
Jas.  Sowerby,  Min.  Conch.,  1822,  t.  328;  Productus  giganteus  var.  hemisphaericus, 
Davidson,  Brit.  Carb.  Brach.,  1858.  p.  144,  t.  40,  f.  4-9. 
Of  this  form  there  is  only  the  cast  of  a  pedicle  valve  available  for  study. 
It  agrees  so  closely  with  Davidson's  diagnosis  and  figure  that  no  individual  de- 
scription is  necessary  here.  Its  dimensions  are:  Length,  28  mm.;  breadth,  35 
mm.;  length  of  hinge  line,  30  mm. 

This  form  was  obtained  by  Benson  from  the  south-east  of  Babbinboon,  and 
is  in  the  collection  of  the  University  of  Sydney.     It  was  also  recorded  by  Dun  as 


•For  the  explanation  of  this  notation,  see  p. 368. 


344         OKOLOliY    AN'll    l'KTl;(>l,OGY    OF    THE    GREAT    ^:EI!PEXTINE    BELT    OF    X.S.W.. 

the  provisional  detciiiiiiiafioii  of  a  shell  from   Hawdon  VaU'.     Tu  Great   Kritain  ami 
Jrelariil  this   form   ranfji's  Itetween   the  zones  Si  and  Dj. 

Pkoductus   cf.   LOXGlSPixrs    (So\verl)_v). 

Jas.  Sowerby.    Min.   Conrili.,  i.,  1814,  p.    154,  t.  08,    f.  1:    Davidson.  lirit.    Carb. 
Brach.,  1858.  p.  154,  t.  35,  f.  5-17. 

This  small  form  is  rejireseutetl  liy  a  single  pedicle  vahe  obtained  by  Benson 
from  four  miles  east  of  Currabubula.  It  is  a  dejiauperate  form.  7  mm.  long-  and 
C  mm.  broad,  but  otherwise  conforms  to  Davidson's  diajj'nosis.  The  species  \va.s 
provisionally  recorded  as  being  found  at  Greenhills.  near  Paterson.  in  1898. 
This  form  is  '"present  in  almost  any  Carboniferous  district  where  brachiopoda 
have  been  found."     In  Great  Britain  it  ranges  from  the  zone  S:;  to  the  zone  Di. 

PROi)rcTU.s   jiuiucATrs  (Phillips).     (Plate  xxiii..  tigs.   1-3.) 

Phillips,  lUus.  Geol.  York.,  183U.  t.  viii.,  f.  3;  Davidson.   P.rit.  Carli.  Brach..  18.58, 

!>.  153.  t.  32,  f.  10-14. 

This  shell  is  sub-circular  in  outline,  the  hinge  line  somewhat  shorter  than  the 
greatest  width  of  the  shell.  The  [ledicle  valve  is  very  evenly  rounded  so  as  to  give; 
an  almost  semicircular  profile.  It  is  ornamented  by  numerous  rounded  ribs  with  a 
small  amount  of  reticulation  near  the  l)eak.  This  is  large  and  incurved.  Except 
for  the  absence  of  spines  (and  our  specimens  are  only  casts),  this  form  agrees 
closely  with  Davidson's  diagnosis. 
Dimensions  of  three  forms : 

a  h  c  , 

Breadth  in  millimetres 18  18  18 

Length  from  beak  to  margin 15  18  15 

Convexity !l  7  0 

This  form  is  remarkably  abundant  at  the  soutli-eastern  portion  of  Bahbin- 
hoon,  and  was  also  (■ollect<'d  liy  Pittman  from  the  "Whale's  Egg."»tive  miles  soutli 
of  Somerton.  in  1897,  being  represented  by  specimens  1574.  1575.  and  1578  in  tho 
collection  of  the   Geological  Survey. 

Davidson  (31)  states  that  it  occurs  in  the  Millstone  firit,  I'pper  ami  Lower 
Limestone  Sei'ies  of  Scotland.  In  England  and  Ireland  it  occurs  in  the  zone  of 
Di. 

PitoorcTus  pu.STi'LO.sus  (Phillips'). 

Phillii)s,  Tllus.  Geol.  York.,  ii.,  183G,  p.   'ilti.   t.   7.  f.   1-5:  Dun.  Rec.   Geol.  Sur. 
N.S.W.,  vii.,  1002,  )).  72.  t.  23.  f.  1.  2.  3.  4.  and  Bibliography. 

This  form  was  determined  i>rovisionally  I'nr  this  distri<'t  on  s))ecimens  Xo. 
4579  and  4(il0  in  the  collection  of  the  Geological  Survey,  obtained  by  Cullen  trom 
two  miles  west  of  Mt.  Uriari      These  have  not  been  re-examined  by  us. 

This  form  is  present  in  the  Lower  Limestone  Series  of  Scotland  (31).  ant 
ranges  in  England  and  Ireland  from  zone  Z2  to  D2. 

PRODUCTrS!   .SEMlRFTlcur.ATtis   (Martin).       (Plate   xix..  tigs.  2-7:    'fexl-tig.   11.) 

Dun.  Kcc.  Geol.  Surv.  X.S.W..  vii..  1902.  p.  79.  t.  23.  f.  4-9. 

A  number  of  examples  of  this  vei'V  variable  six'cies  are  figured  to  show  the 
range  of  characters      Figures  2  and  3.  Plate  xix  .  illustrate  a   form,  wjiich   we  will 


BY   \V.    X.   BENSOX,  \V.    S.    DUX',  AX'l)    W.    R.    BIJOWXE. 


345 


term  (<().  in  wliit-h  the  radial  ridges  are  very  marked  and  extend  only  abnut  a 
<|uarter  of  the  way  from  the  beak  to  the  margin.  Figures  4  and  5  illustrate  (b), 
a  form  that  is  rather  crushed  so  that  the  curved  outline  is  fractured.  The  radial 
and  transverse  ridging  is  not  so  deeply  marked,  but  the  sinus  is  more  noticeable. 
It  has  a  heavier,  coarser  ornamentation  than  the  majority  of  the  examples  of  this 
sjiecies  from  the  Burindi  Beds.  The  shell  (c )  in  Figures  (>  and  7,  is  smaller  than 
the  other  foims,  and  the  outline  of  the  pedicle  valve  seen  in  profile  is  more 
acutely  elliptical  than  usual.  The  well-marked  concentric  ridging  covers  more 
than  a  third  of  the  surface  of  the  valves.  The  i-adial  ridges,  however,  are  not  so 
continuous  as  usual.  The  fourth  specimen,  Text -fig.  10,  is  distinguished  from  the 
other  forms  by  its  greater  breadth  relative  to  the  length,  by  the  presence  of  prom- 
inent ears,  by  the  even  convexity  of  the  pedicle  valve  and  by  the  fact  that  the 
reticulate  area  covers  almost  half  the  shell.  The  dimensions  of  these  four  shells 
are  as  follow : — 

abed 

Breadth  in  millimetres 30         30         17         24 

Length  of   hinge  line 27         34         15         23 

Distance  from  beak  to  margin  ....     23         —         —         17 

Convexity  of  pedicle  valve 10         —         11  9 

This  form  was  collected  by  Porter  near  CaiTolI;  by  Mrs.  Scott  and  Benson  in 
the  south-east  of  Babbinboon. 

According  to  Davidson  (31),  it  extends  through  the  Calciferous  Sandstone  of 
Scotland   into   the  Upper   Limestone,  and  is   also  found   in  the   Millstone   Grit  of 


Text-fig.  11 . .-  Prod  mi  us 
seinireticu/aliis.  Bab- 
binboon. 


Text-fig.  12. — Dielasma 
saitnluiii  var.  amyg- 
dala (Dana).  Soiner- 
ton. 


the  Welsh  Border.  Freeh  (32)  states  that  it  occurs  in  the  lower  portion  of  the 
Visean  in  France  and  Belgium,  and  in  Russia,  and  in  America  it  is  found  through- 
out the  Tpjier  and  Lower  Carboniferous  Formations   (33)  . 

Ortiiis    (Sciiizophori.4)    kesupinata    (Martin).     (Plate  xix.,  figs.  1(1,  IL) 

Anomitea  resupinata,  Martin,  Petrif.  Derb.,  180i;,  p.  12,  t.  49,  f.  13-14;  Schi-'o- 
plioria  resupinata,  Dun,  Rec.  Geol.  Surv.  N.S.W.,  vii.,  1902,  p.  78,  t.  21, 
f.  3-9  and  Bibliography  there  cited. 

This  widely  distributed  form  has  been  obtained  from  most  of  the  knowa 
fossiliferous  localities  in  the  Somerton  District,  and  was  also  found  by  Benson 
four  miles  east  of  Currabubula.  None  of  the  forms  are  well  preserved,  but  those 
here  figured  conform  in  all  essentials  to  the  diagnosis  of  the  species.  In  both,  the 
margin  forms  a  smooth  curve,  but  the  sinus  is  rather  marked  in  one,  while  in  the 


340    GEOLOGT  AND  PETROLOGY  OP  THE  GREAT  SERPENTINE  BELT  OF  X.S.W., 

other  the  Ijeak  Ls  more  proniineiit  and  separated  from  the  ears  l)y  a  marked 
flexure.  Its  margin  also  is  elliptical  rather  than  quadrate.  The  length  of  the 
ioriu  from  beak  to  margin  is  from  30  to  35  millimetres;  the  breadth  is  45. 

According  to  De  Koninck  (30)  who  first  recorded  this  form  in  New  South 
Wales,  it  ranges  throughout  the  whole  of  the  Carboniferous  System.  In  Scotland 
it  is  found  from  the  Upper  Limestone  Series  to  the  base  of  the  Calciferous  Sand- 
stone (31)  .     In  England  and  Ireland  the  range  is  from  the  zone  Za  to  that  of  Di. 

Orthls    (Bhipidomella)     australis  (McCoy).     (Plate  six.,  fig.   9.). 

Orthis  australis,  McCoy,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  xx.,  1849,  p.  -234,  t.  13,  f.  4-4A; 
Rhipidomella  australis,  Dun,  Rec.  Geol.  Sur.  N.S.W.,  vii.,  1902,  p.  81,  t. 
21,  f.  10-11,  and  Bibhography  there  cited. 

The  specimens  obtained  by  Mrs.  Scott  from  the  south-east  of  Babbinhuon,  are 
all  such  as  show  the  external  form  only,  and  therefore  difficult  to  assign  to  either 
Orthis  miehelini  or  Orthis  australis.  The  known  abundance  of  the  latter,  and  im- 
jirobability  of  the  occurrence  of  the  former  may  be  taken  as  deciding  the  nomen- 
clature of  these  specimens.  The  size  is  normal  or  rather  small.  Breadth,  21  mm., 
length,  19,  and  depth  or  thickness,  5  mm.  Less  well  developed  specimens  were 
collected  by  Benson  four  miles  east  of  Currabubula,  and  by  CuUen  from  Somerton. 

Rhynchonella  pleurodon  (Phillips). 

Terebratula  pleurodon,  Phillips.  lUus.  Geol.  York  ,  ii.,  1830,  p.  222,  t.  12,  f.  25,  30; 
Bhynchonella  {Puijnax)  pleurodon,  Dun,  Rec.  Geol.  Surv.  N.S.W.,  vii., 
1902,  p.  18.  t.  23,  f.  10,  11  and  Bibliography. 

This  form  is  represented  by  specimens  Nos.  4385,  4434,  4435,  in  the  collection 
of  the  Geological  Survey,  obtained  by  CuUen  from  the  Parish  of  Moorowarra, 
south  of  Somerton.  These  have  not  been  critically  examined  by  us.  The  species, 
however,  has  been  determined  critically  in  specimens  from  Clarencetowu  occurring 
in  the  Burindi  rocks,  and  is  also  abundant  in  the  Upper  Devonian  rocks  of  Mt. 
Lamhie  and  "S'alwal.  In  Scotland  it  is  known  in  the  Calciferous  Sandstone  and 
Lower  Limestone  Series   (31)  . 

Rhynchonella   (?)   sp.  index.     (Plate  xix.,  fig.   13.) 

A  single  specimen  of  an  indeterminate  form  which  may  be  related  to  this 
genus  has  been  obtained  by  Mrs.  Scott  from  the  .south-east  of  Babbinboon.  Its 
length  and  breadth  are  about  8  millimetres,  and  it  is  ornamented  by  fourteen 
strongly-marked  radiating  ribs.  The  evidence  is  insufficient  to  justif\  our  assign- 
ing this  to  any  known  species. 

DiELASMA  .sACCUiiUiM   (Martin)   var.    h.vstata  (Sowerby).     (Plate  xix.,  fig.    12.) 

Terebratula  liaslata,  J.  Sowerby.  Min.  t'onch.,  1824,  t.  440,  f.  2,  3;  Dielasmii  sac- 
culum  var.  liaslata,  Dun.,  Rec.  Geol.  Surv.  N.S.W.,  vii..  1902,  p.  83,  t.  21, 
f.  13,  and  Bibliograpliy  cited. 

Numerous  examples  of  this  form  have  been  obtained  by  Mrs.  Scott  from  the 
south-east  of  Babbinboon.  The  dimensions  show  considei-able  variation,  the  fol- 
lowing measurements  Ijeing  representative : — • 

a           b          c  tl 

Length  (beak  to  margin) 20        27        18  9 

Breadth 10         10         14  10 

Thickness 8         —           8  — 


BY   W.   N.   BENSON,  W.   fS.   DUN,  AND   W.   K.    BROWNE.  347 

The  last  is  a  small  form  obtained  by  Benson  from  the  railway-cutting,  four 
miles  east  of  C'urrahubula. 

This  form  ranges  from  the  base  of  the  Carboniferous  to  the  Upper  Limestone 
Series  in  Scotland  (31),  and  is  most  abundant  in  the  Upper  Carboniferous  Lime- 
stone of  Belgium,  though  extending  to  the  lower  portion  (30).  In  England  it 
ranges  from  Ci  to  Di.  It  also  is  found  in  the  Permo-Carboniferous  beds  of  this 
State. 

DiELASMA  SACOULUM  (Martin)   var.  amygdala  (Dana).     (Text-tig.  12.) 

Terebratula  amygdala,  Dana,  Amer.   Jour,   of  Science    (4),  ii.,  p.   152;   also  in 
Report  Wilke's  U.S.  Esplor.  Exped.,  Geol.,  1849,  p.  682,  t.  1,  L  2a,  b. 

This  variety  differs  from  D.  hastata  in  its  very  elongated  form.  The  figured 
specimen,  now  in  the  collection  of  the  University  of  Sydney,  was  obtained  by  Mrs. 
Scott  from  the  south-east  of  BabbLuboon,  and  has  the  following  dimensions: — 
Length,  27  mm.,  breadth,  17  mm.,  thickness,  12  mm. 

This  form  also  has  been  obtained  from  the  Burindi  rocks  at  Somertoii, 
represented  by  specimen  1511  in  the  collection  of  the  Geological  Survey.  This 
was  tig-ured  (Mem.  Geol.  Surv.  N.S.W.,  iv.,  t.  oS,  f.  8)  a.s  D.  hastata.  At  pre- 
sent its  Museum  label  is  D.  hastata  amygdala   (Dana). 

The  form  was  first  described  from  the  Upper  Marine  Permo-Carboniferous 
Beds  which  are  probably  Permian  (4) . 

Spirifera  bisulcata  (Sowerby.)      (Plate  xxi.,  fig.  1.) 

J.  Sowerby,  Min.   Conch.,   iii.,   1820,   p.   17,  t.    23,  f.    2,   3;  Ddvidsou,  Brit.  Carb. 

Brach.,  1850,  p.  31,  t.  4,  f.   1    (?);   t.  5,  f.  1 ;  t.  6,  f.  1-19;  t.   7,  f.  4; 

L.   G.    de  Koninck,    Foss.    Pal.    N.    Galles,  1877,    (English  Translation, 

1898,  p.  192-3,  t.  14,  f.  5.) 
This  form  is  smaller  than  S.  striata,  and  is  characterised  by  the  deep  sulcus 
on  either  side  of  the  mesial  fold.  The  form  figured  here  closely  resembles  David- 
son's figure  {Op.  cit.,  t.  6,  f .  8)  of  Sowerby's  type  specimen.  There  are  thirteen 
ribs  on  either  side  of  the  sinus,  in  which  are  three  obtusely  rounded  ribs .  Length, 
about  25  mm.;  breadth  26  mm.  Locality,— S . E .  Babbinboon.  Collected  by 
Mrs.  Scott.  This  form  was  also  obtained  by  Mr.  Pittman,  5  miles  S.E.  of  Somer- 
ton.  In  the  railway-cutting,  four  miles  east  of  Currabubula,  Benson  has  col- 
lected small  and  rather  more  transverse  specimens,  with  a  greater  number  of  ribs, 
resembling  Davidson's  t.  6,  f.  19.  This  form  has  the  sulci  on  either  side  of 
the  mesial  fold  more  strongly  marked,  and  small  ribs  intercalated  near  the  margin 
separate  the  three  low,  broad  ribs  on  this  fold,  and  these  are  slightly  sinuous. 
Length,  15  mm.;  breadth,  32  mm.  De  Koninck  points  out  that  this  species  is 
very  al)undant  in  the  upper  beds  of  the  Carboniferous  Limestone  at  Vise  in  Bel- 
gium and  in  Great  Britain,  but  occurs  also  in  the  Lower  Limestone  Series  and 
Calciferous  Sandstones  of  Scotland  (31) .  In  England  and  Ireland  the  range  is 
from  the  zone  C2  to  D2,  and  also  extends  into  the  Millstone  Grit  (31,  p.  251)  . 

Spirifera  davidis  Dun. 
Rec.  Geol.  Surv.  N.S.W.,  vii.,  1902,  p.  323,  t.  60,  1.  1,  a-f. 

This  species  was  obtained  by  Cullen  from  the  Parish  of  Moorowarra,  south 
of  Somerton,  and  also  near  Carroll.  (See  specimens  4360,  4374  and  4390  of  the 
collection  of  the  Geological  Survey).  Nothing  need  here  be  added  to  the  descrip- 
tion previously  given. 


348   GEOLOGY  AND  PETROLOGY  OF  TKB  GREAT  SEUPEXTINE  BELT  OF  N.S.W., 

Spirifera  duplicicostata  (Phillips).     (Plate  xxiii.,  fig.  4.) 
Phillips,  Illiis.   Geol.   Yorks.,  ii.,  183ti,  p.   218,   t.  10,  f.  1;   Davidson,  Brit.    Carb. 

Brach.,  pp.  24,  22l!  t.  3,  f.  7-10;  t.  4.  f.  3,  5-11,  15-10?;  t.  5,  f.  3.5,  37; 

t.  52,  f.  6. 
The  pedicle  valve  is  very  similar  to  Davidson's  t.  4,  f.  15-l(i.  though  it  is  too 
imperfect  to  permit  tlie  observation  of  the  marked  inflection  of  the  margin'il 
regfiou.  There  is,  however,  a  broad  sulcus  with  about  thirteen  fine  ribs  therein, 
and  about  thirty-five  striatious  on  either  side.  While  originally  considering-  the 
forms  illustrated  in  tliese  figures  as  S.  humerosa,  Davidson  later  (\).  221)  states 
that  he  is  inclined  to  refer  these  forms  to  S.  duplicicostata-  This  course  is  there- 
fore followed  here  The  specimen  is  No.  F.1652  of  the  Geological  Survey  col- 
lection, and  was  obtained  near  the  "Whale's  Egg,"  five  miles  south-east  of  .Somer- 
ton  by  Mr.  Pittman.     This  form  occurs  in  the  zone  of  Di  in  England. 

Spirifera  cf.  jiosquen.sis  (Fischer).       (Plate  xx.,  figs.  4,  5,  U.) 
Choristites  musquensis,  Fischer  de  Waldheim,  Programme  sur  les  Chonstite.  p.  S, 

No.  1,  1837.  and  Oryctogr.  du  gouv.  de  Moscow,  1831,  p.  140,  t.  xxii.,  t. 

3;   t.   xxiv.,  f.   1-4;    Spirifera   mosqueii!<is,  De    V'ernueil   and   Keyserling, 

Russie  et  Oural,  Vol.  II..  p.  161,  t.  v.,  f.  2;  Davidson,  Brit.  Carb.   Hracli., 

p.  22-3,  t.  iv.,  f.  13,  14;  t.  xiii.,  f.  Iti.* 
Tliis  form  differs  from  ,S'.  striata  in  the  greater  length  of  the  shell,  in  nur 
form  there  are  about  sixty  ribs,  which  are  very  much  broader  on  the  siuus  than 
towards  the  ears,  about  ten  ribs  occurring  on  the  sinus  and  mesial  fold.  Tlicre 
is  very  little  sign  of  concentric  ornamentation.  The  length  of  hinge  line  is  rather 
less  than  the  greatest  width  of  the  shell,  and  the  area  on  the  pedicle  valve  has 
almost  parallel  sides  and  is  about  3  mm.  wide,  and  marked  with  faint  vertical 
.^triation. 

Dimensions:  Breadth,  37  nun.  (leng'th  of  hinge  33  mm.);  length  of  pedii-le 
valve,  35  mm. ;  thickness  of  shell.  23  mm. 

Our  specimen  was  obtained  by  Mrs.  Scott  from  the  shelly  ridge  in  the  iS.E. 
of  Babbinboon,  and  is  in  the  collection  of  the  University  of  Sydney.  Other  speci- 
mens from  Carroll  Gap  have  been  received  by  the  Australian  Museum  from  ]\Ir. 
D.  A.  Porter;  and  these  forms  approach  more  closely  to  Davidson's  illustration 
of  S.  mosquensis  tlian  does  oui'  specimen  in  the  more  marked  chiirHcfer  of  the 
median  fold. 

According  to  Freeh  (32)  this  species  is  a  characteristic  fossil  of  the  lower 
portion  of  the  Upper  Carboniferous.  A  variety  of  it  occurs  in  the  zone  D2  in 
England. 

Spirifera  pinguis   (Sowerbyk      (Plate  xxi.,  figs.   9,   10.) 
Sowerby,  Min.  Conch.,  iii.,  1820,  p.  125,  t.  271;   Davidson;  Brit.   Carb.   Bracli.,   p. 

50.  t.  10,  f    1-12;  .S.  pinguis  var.  rotundatiis^  L.   G.    de  Koninck,   Foss. 

Pal.  N.  Galles  Sud.,  1877,  English  Translation  1898.  p.  185,  t.  14.  f.  2,  2a; 

S.  pinguis,  Dun,  Rec.  Geol.  Surv.  N.S.W..  vii.,  1902,  ]).  84,  t.  xxii.,  f.  1, 

2,  5. 
The  specimens  obtained  from  Mrs.    Scott   are  typical  exani|des   of  llic  species. 
The  larger  has  a*  length  of  43  mm.  and  a  breadth  of  40  mm.,  there  being  eight 


•  Diiviilson  states: — "Prof.  L.  G.  de  Koninck  assures  me  that  the  true  Russian 
Spirifera  uioaquensis  has  not  been  found  in  (treat  Britain,  and  that  what  lias  been  re. 
ferred  to  it  are  merely  variations  in  shape  of  Spirifera  striata,  and  I  feel  incHned  to 
adopt  the  Professor's  view."     Brit.  Carb.  Brach.,  Suppl.,  1880,  p.;U5. 


BY    W.    N.    BEXSON,   W.    S.    DUN,    AND    W.    R.    BROWXE. 


349 


ridges  on  either  side  of  the  sinus,  whieh,  liowever,  are  unusually  coarse  in  charac- 
ter. The  otiier  form  is  slightly  less  elongated  proportionately.  The  length  is  29 
mm.  and  breadth  ?■'?.  mm.  Locality:  Shelly  Ridge,  S.E.  of  Babbinboon.  De 
Koninek  states  that  this  is  one  of  the  most  abundant  forms  in  the  Middle  Car- 
boniferous Limestone.  In  Great  Britain  this  form  ranges  throughout  the  zones 
Ci-Cs. 

Spibifera   PiXGUls  var.   eloxgata,   var.  nov.       (Plate   xx.,   lig.    11;  Text-tig.  1.3.) 

This  form  differs  from  ,S'.  pinguis  in  the  greater  elongation  of  the  shell.  Two 
specimens  have  come  under  our  notice.  That  illustrated  in  Plate  xx.,  tig.  11,  is 
a  single  pedicle  valve  with  much  the  same  form  as  S.  reedi  (Davidson),  though 
twice  the  size.  It  has  an  elongate-oval  outline;  the  hinge  line  is  shorter  than 
the  greatest  width  of  the  shell,  and  the  cardinal  angles  are  rounded.  The  beak 
is  of  moderate  size  and  strongly  incurved  over  a  triangular  delthyrium.  The 
shell  is  smoothly  convex  with  a  broad  medial  sinus  extending  into  a  tongue-like 
projection  of  the  margin.  On  either  side  are  about  ten  low,  rounded  ribs;  coa- 
eentrie  lamellar  growth  lines  cross  the  sinus  near  the  margin.  The  other,  shown 
in  Text-figure  13,  is  even  more  markedly  elongate,  and  somewhat  distorted  in  out- 
line. The  shell  has  been  largely  removed  but  sutticient  remains  to  show  that  the 
ornamentation  was  much  finer  than  in  the  first  specimen,  about  twenty  ribs  occur- 
ring on  one  side  of  the  mesial  fold  on  the  brachial  valve,  and  the  ornamentation  of 
the  pedicle  valve  appears  to  have  been  as  fine.  A  few  concentric  growth  lines 
are  present  on  each  valve.     The  dimensions  are: — 

Fig.  11.         Text-fig.  13. 

Length  in  millimetres 34  24 

Breadth 26  19 

Length    of  hinge  line 1.5  12 

Total  thickness —  18 

Depth  of  pedicle  valve 11  10 

The  first  of  these  forms  was  obtained  by  Benson  in  tiie  south-east  of  Babbin- 
boon, and  is  in  the  collection  of  the  University  of  Sydney.  The  second  (Specimen 
No.  F4360  of  the  Geological  Survey  Museum,  N.S.W.)  was  obtained  by  Cullen 
from  Reserve  121.  Parish  of  Moorowarra. 


Text-fig. 13. — Spirifera  pinguis  rar.  elongala, 
var.  nov.  Moorowarra. 


Text-&g.l4,.—Posidonie//a  ?  spp. 
indet.     Babbinboon. 


350     GEOLOGY  AND  PETROLOGY  OF  THE  GREAT  SERPENTISE  BELT  OF  X.S.W., 

Spirifera  STRIATA  (Sowerbv).     (Plate  xx..  figs.  1-3.) 

Sowerby,  Min  Coneli.,  1820,  t.  270;  Daviason,  Brit.  Caib.  Bracii.,  1852,  p.  19,  t.  2, 
f.  12,  14:  t.  3,  f.  2-6:  Ibid.  Carb.  Suppl..  1880.  p.  274.  t.  31.  f.  1.  2,  3,  4; 
Dun,  Kec.  Geol.  Sun..  X.S.W..  vii..  Ft.  2.  1902.  p.  8.^-4.  t.  xxii..  f.  6-9. 
and  Bibliogxaphy. 

As  may  be  seen  from  Davidson's  figures,  there  is  considerable  variety  in  tUe 
forms  grouped  under  this  species.  Three  specimens  are  illustrated  here.  That 
represented  by  Plate  xx.,  lig.  1,  closely  resembles  Davidson's  illustration  (op.  cit. 
■iupra,  t.  3,  f.  4),  though  the  ribs  are  not  so  numerous.  It  is  the  most  alate  of 
the  three.  There  are  about  fifty  radial  ridges  ei-ossed  by  faint  concentric  lines. 
The  sinus  of  the  pedicle  valve  is  somewhat  deeply  impressed  near  the  margin, 
which  is  here  flexed  rather  sharply  and  projected  like  a  tongue  in  the  dorsal  direc- 
tion. The  beak  is  not  quite  centrally  placed  in  one  form.  Its  dimensions  are 
(restored)  :  Breadth.  55  mm.  :  length,  23  mm.  The  other  forms  are  less  broad. 
That  shown  in  Plate  xx.,  fig.  3,  has  forty  strongly-marked  ribs,  on  wliich  slight 
beading  gives  the  only  traces  of  concentric  ornamentation.  The  (restored) 
breadth  is  36  mm.,  the  lengih  25,  and  thickness  14  mm.  That  shown  in  Plate  xx., 
Sg.  2  has  less  accentuated  ribbing  with  scarcely  any  other  ornamentation.  There 
are  about  fifty  ribs  which  are  much  narrower  and  more  closely  spaced  towards  the 
ears  than  in  the  median  portion  of  the  shell.  Brcadtli  (restored).  56  mm.;  length, 
30  mm. ;  thickness,  18  mm.  These  three  forms  were  collected  by  Mrs.  Scott  from 
the  south-east  of  Babbinboon.  They  were  also  obtained  by  Mr.  Pittniau  in  1897 
from  the  "Whale's  Egg,''  5  miles  S.E.  of  Somerton. 

This  form  appears  to  occur  throughout  the  Carboniferous  limestone,  and  is 
most  characteristic  of  its  lower  portion  (Davidson,  op.  cit.  sup.  p.  21).  The  re- 
cent workers  record  the  range  of  the  form  in  the  British  Isles  as  from  the  zone 
of  Ci  to  that  of  Di. 

Spirifera  steiato-cox\'Oluta.  sp.   nov.     (Plate  xx..  figs.  7,  8.) 

This  form  is  intermediate  in  character  between  ,S'.  striata  (Sowerby)  and  <S. 
convoluta  (Phillips).  It  is  broader  in  proportion  to  the  length  than  5.  striata 
but  not  so  broad  as  convoluta.  The  hinge  line  resembles  that  of  convoluta  in  ex- 
tending the  fnll  width  of  the  shell.  The  area  also  is  narrow,  with  parallel  sides, 
is  marked  by  faint  transverse  striation,  and  jiierced  by  a  triangular  delthyrium. 
The  ribs,  both  simple  and  intercalated,  are  about  sixty  in  number,  and  arc  almost 
as  numerous  as  in  the  larger  forms  of  iS.  striata,  and  more  so  fiuin  is  normal  for 
S.  convoluta,  though  Davidson  illustrates  a  form  of  S.  convoluta  (Biit.  Carb. 
Brach.,  t.  5,  f.  9-10)  in  which  the  broad  mesial  ribs  are  succeeded  (but  on  one  side 
only)  by  numerous  narrower  ribs,  there  being  altogether  twenty-seven  ribs  on  this 
side  of  the  shell  as  against  twenty  on  the  other  side.  Our  form  is  more  sym- 
metrical and  the  ribs  decrease  gradually  in  size  from  the  mesial  portion  to  the  ears 
of  the  shell.  Tlie  rather  sinuous  character  of  the  ribs  acconls  with  S.  convoluta 
rather  than  S.  striata,  though  it  is  not  unknown  in  the  latter.  There  i.s  little  sign 
of  a  concentric  ornamentation,  for  the  form  is  partly  decorticated,  but  the  growth 
lines  give  an  appearance  of  overlapping  lamellae.  The  valves  are  approximately 
of  equal  convexitv  the  shallow  sinus  on  the  pedicle  valve  corresponding  to  a 
mesial  fold  on  the  dorsal  which  becomes  more  elevated  near  the  margin,  and  is 
bent  backwards  into  a  tongue-like  projection.  No  internal  structures  are  visible. 
Dimensions:    Length.  25   mm.;  breadth.  49   mm.:  thickness,   9   mm.     Coliccted    by 


BY   \V.    X.    BEXSOX^   W.    8.    DUX,    AXD    \V.    R.    BROWXE.  351 

Mi-s.  Seott  from  the  Shelly  Ridge  iu  the  S.E.   of  Babbiiiboon.      The  type-speei- 
men  is  No.  F  12461  in  the  Museum  of  the  Geological  Survey. 

Spiriperina  insculpta  (Phillips). 

J.  Phillips,  Geol.  Yorkshire,  ii.,  1836,  p.  216,  t.  9,  f.  2-3;   Davidson,  Brit.  Carb. 

Brach,  p.  42,  t.  7,  f.  48-55;  De  Koninck,  Foss.  Pal.  N.  Galles  Sud,  1877, 

English  Translation,  p.  197. 
A  portion  of  the  pedicle  valve  of  a  specimen  of  this  form,  corresponding,  as 
far  as  could  be  seen,  to  the  diagnoses  of  Davidson  and  De  Koninck,  was  found  by 
Benson  four  miles  east  of  Currabubula.  It  is  a  pedicle  valve,  moderately  convex, 
ornamented  by  five  large  bold  angular  ribs,  separated  by  deep  narrow  gi-ooves. 
Length  of  valve,  8  mm.;  breadth,  11  mm.;  thickness,  25  mm.  De  Koninck  states 
that  this  form  belongs  principally  to  the  upper  beds  of  the  Carboniferous  lime- 
stone (30).  It  is  recorded  from  the  Upper  Limestone  Series  only  in  Scotland 
(31).     In  England  it  ranges  from  the  zone  of  Ci  to  D2. 

SYRixciOTHYRis    EXSUPERANS  (De  Koninck). 

Spirifera  exsuperam,  L.  G.  De  Koninck,  Foss.  Pal.  N.  Galles  Sud,  1877,  English 

Trans.,  189S,  p.  195,  t.  15,  f.  1;  Syrlti^othyris  exsuperans,  A.  H.  Foord. 

Geol.  Mag.   1890,  p.  149,  153;  R.  Etheridge  fil.,  Ree.  GeoL  Surv.  N.S.W., 

vi.,  Pt.  i  1897,  pp.  43-49. 

An  example  of  this  form  has  been  recorded  from  "a  shelly  ridge  twenty  miles 

west  of  Tamworth."  possibly  that  we  have  examined  in  the  south-east  of  Babbin- 

boon,  where  a  distinctive  fragment  of  this  form  was  obtained  by  ilrs.  Scott. 

Retzia  cf.  ULSTRix  (De  Koninck) . 

Terehratula   (Crispata)   iilstrix,  De  Koninck,  Anim.  Foss.  Belg.,  p.  292,  t.  19.  f. 

5;  Retzia  ulstrix,  Davidson,  Brit.  Carb.  Brach.,  1858,  p.  88,  218,  t.  18.  f. 

14,  15;  t.  54,  f.  45. 
A  specimen  referred  provisionally  to  this  form  has  been  recorded  from  the 
parish  of  Bective  at  a  spot  to  the  south-east  of  Mt.  Uriari.     It  has  not  been  ex- 
amined by  us.     This  specimen  is  in  the  collection  of  the  Geological  Survey. 

AcTixocoxcHUS  PLANOSULCATCs   (Phillips).       (Plate  xxi..  figs.  3,  6.) 

Spirifera  planosulcata,   Phillips,  Geol.    Yorkshire,  ii.,  1836,  p.    220,    t.    10,  f.  12; 
Athyris  planosulcatus ,  Davidson,  Brit.  Carb.  Brach.,  1859,  p.  80,  t.  10,  f. 
2-13,  15;  De  Koninck,  Foss.  Pal.  N.  Galles  Sud.,  1877,  English   Trans- 
lation, 1898,  p.  172,  t.  9,  f.  6;  Actinoconchus  planosulcatus,  R.  Etheridge, 
fil.,  Ree.  Geol.  Sur.  N.S.TY.,  v.,  Pt.  4,  1898,  p.  177,  t.  19,  f.  18;  Dun,  Rec. 
Geol.  Sur.  N.S.W.,  vii.,  1902,  p.  87,  t.  21,  f.  17;  t.     22,  f.  12-14. 
Of  the  forms  figured  here,  the  larger  has  a  length  of  24  mm.  and  breadth  of 
36  mm.,  the  size  of  the  single  valve  being  thus  nearly  three  times  as  great  as  the 
Australian  form   described   by  De  Koninck.     The   other  is   somewhat  smaller  and 
less  oblong-ovate.     Length,  23mm.;  breadth,  27  mm.     This  shows  numerous  traces 
of  the  ornamental   fringes  extending  from  the  lamella,   but  the  shell  is   smoothly 
convex,    whereas    the  other    form  shows  the    characteristic  broad    shallow  sinus. 
Collected  by  Mrs.   Seott  from  Shelly  Eidge,  S.E.  of  Babbinboon,  and  by  Cullen 
from  Parish  of  Moorowarra. 

De  Koninck  points  out  that  this  form  occurs  mostly  in  the  Upper  portion  of 
the  Carboniferous  (Limestone?)  especially  at  Vise.     It  occurs  in  the  Upper  and 


352     nEOLOGY  AXD  PETROLOGY  OF  THE  GREAT  SERPEXTINE  BELT  OF  X.S.W., 

Lower  Limestone  Series  iu  Scotland,   hut  not  in  the  Caleit'erous   SauJsu  ue  (31), 
In  England  antl  Ireland  it  ranges  between  the  zones  Si  and  Di. 

Semixttla  subtilita  (Hall).     (Plate  xxi.,  figs.  2,  4,  5.) 

Terebratida  subtilita,  Hall    (In   Stransburg),    Explanation   of    the  Valley   of    the 

Salt  Lake  of  Utah,  1852,  p.  409,  t.  2,  f.  1  a,  b,  2  a,  b,  c;  Davidson,  Brit. 

Carb.  Brach..  p.  18,  t.  1,  f.  21,  22;  Seminula  subtilita,  Hall  aad   Clarke, 

Pal.  New  York,  viii.,  pp.  93-98,  t.  xlvii.,  f.  17-31. 

This  form  was  the  first  example  of  this  widespread  genus  to  be  recognised  in 

this  State,  but  it  has  since  been  recognised  in  the  beds  at  Gosforth,   which   are 

probably  transitional  between  the  Burindi  and  Lower  Marine  Permo-Carboniferous 

Beds    (4).     The  species  is  protean,  and   "one  feels   at  first   disinclined  to   include 

under  the  same  specific  designation  the  broadly  ficiform,  the  narrow  elongate,  the 

sinuate,  non-sinuate   and  tri-lobed    forms,    which    are  customarily  thus   referred, 

but  the    very    abundant  material    shows  the  impossibility  of    separating  them." 

(Hall  and  Clarke,  op.  cit.,  p.  95).     Our  form  is  a  very  neat  shell.     The  margin  is 

smooth,  non-sinuate,  and  the  test  is  ornamented  by  fine  radial  striae  and  broader 

concentric  bands  with  a  few  irregular  growth  lines.     Its  length  is  18  mm. ;  breadth, 

25  mm.;  hinge  line,    19   mm.;  total   thickness  about  16  mm.     It   was  obtained  by 

Mrs.  Scott  in  the  shelly  ridge  in  the  south-east  of  the  parish  of  Babbinboon,  and 

now  is  in  the  collection  of  the  University  of  Sydney. 

This  form  is  widely  developed  in  the  Upper  Carboniferous  beds  in  the  United 
States,  but  is  found  rarely  in  the  St.  Louis  Limestone  belonging  to  the  Upper 
portion  of  the  Mississi]ipian  System,  the  American  e<|uivalent  of  the  Visean  For- 
mation (33).  In  Belgium,  however,  it  descends  to  the  Tournaisian,  according  to 
De  Koninck,  as  cited  by  Davidson  (31,  p.  219). 

PELECYPODA. 

SaxguikoIvITe.s  triraiuatus,  sp.   nov.     (Plate  xxiii.,  fig.  8.) 

Sanguinolites,  McCoy,  Synop.  Carb.  Limestone  Foss.,  Ireland,  1844,  p.  47;  Brit. 
Pal.  Foss.,  Fasc,  ii.,  1852,  p.  27ti. 
The  shell  is  very  elongate,  the  beak  anterit)r  and  the  lower  posterior  margin 
projects  beyond  the  hinge  line.  It  is  characterised  by  the  presence  of  three 
obtusely-rounded  earinae,  extending  from  the  umbo  to  the  posterior  margin.  It  is 
also  marked  by  numerous  delicate  concentric  growth  lines.  It  differs  from  6\ 
tricostata  (De  Koninck)*,  which  is  the  most  nearly  allied  form,  in  that  our  form  is 
much  narrower  and  the  cariiiation  is  less  pronounced  than  in  the  Belgian  form 
(which  is  found  in  the  Visean  Series).  The  dimensions  of  S.  triradiata  are: 
Height,  10  mm. ;  length,  28  mm. ;  thickness,  25  mm.  The  species  is  based  upon 
Specimen  F.  4584  of  the  collection  of  the  Geological  Survey,  obtained  by  Cullen 
from  the  ))arish  of  Moorowarra,  south  of  Somerton. 

Saxgi'ixolites   sp.  ixdet.      (Plate  xxiii.,  fig.  11  ) 

This  form  docs  not  appear  very  closely  similar  to  any  of  the  forms  we  luive 
seen  figured,  but  is  not  sufficiently  well  preserved  for  specific  description.  It  has 
a  carina  forming  a  low  rounded  ridge  except  near  the  margin  of  the  shell,  and 
another  running  a  short  distance  below  it,  commencing  as  an  angular  ridge  near 
the  umbo,  but  fading  out  into  the  general  curve  of  lower  posterior  margin. 
•Faune  Calc.  Carb.  Belg.,  v.,  1885,  p.84,  t.l5,  f.l5. 


BV    \V.    X.    BENSON,    \V.    S.    DUN,    AND    ■«".    R.    BROWNE.  353 

There  is  a  faint  sign  of  concentric  ornamentation.  The  superior  extent  of  the 
shell  is  slig:htly  saddle-shaped.  Tlie  dimensions  of  the  shell  are :  Leng-tn,  35  mm. ; 
height.  15  mm. ;  thickness,  7  mm. 

This  form  is  represented  by  Specimen   No.  4642  in  the  collection  of  the  Geo- 
logical Survey,  and  was  obtained  by  Cullen  from  the  parisli  of  Jlooroivarra. 

Edjiondia  sp.  indet. 
This  form  is  represented  by  Specimen  No.  43G3  in  the  collection  of  the  Geo- 
loaical  Survey   obtained  by  Cullen  from  the  parish  of  Moorowarra.* 

Ctexodoxta  sp.  index. 

A   form  provisionally  referred   to   this  species   was  obtained  by  Mr.  Pittman 
from  Carroll .  * 

NUCULAXA  SP.    INDEX. 

This    form  is    represented  by    Specimen    No.    4689    in  the    collection  of  the 
Geological  Survey.     Collected  by  Cullen  from  ^It.  Uriari. 

Parallelodon  carxei,  sp.  nov.  (Plate  xxi.,  fig.  7.) 
Parallelodou,  Meek'  and  Worthen.  Proc.  Chicago  Acad.,  i..  1866.  p.  17. 
This  is  represented  by  the  cast  of  a  single  left  valve  covered  with  a  little  of 
the  original  shelly  material.  It  is  nine  mm.  in  height.  The  hinge  line  is  seven 
mm.  long  and  shows  no  sign  of  teeth.  The  umbo  is,  three  mm.  from  the  anterior 
end,  and  from  it  radiate  many  delicately  marked  striae  crossed  by  a  few  concen- 
tric folds.  This  form  resembles  P.  arijutus  (Phillips)  of  the  European  Carboni- 
ferous, but  is  more  delicately  ornamented.  It  is  named  in  honour  of  Mr.  .J.  E. 
Carne.  the  late  Government  Geologist.  It  was  collected  liy  Mrs.  Scott  from  the 
south-eastern  portion  of  Babbinlioon. 

PXEROXIXES    (?)    XAX'IPXEROIDES    Eth.  fU. 

R.  Etheridge    Junr.    Rec.   Geol.  Surv.  X.S,W.,   viii..   Pt.  3.  19oT.   p.    1II3.   t.  37.   f. 
9-10;  t.  38,  f.  10. 
Obtained  from  tlie  west  of  Mt.  Uriari. 

PXERONIXES   SUB-PIXXJIANI     (?)    Eth.   til. 

K.  Etheridge,  Jun.,  Rec.  Geol.  Sur.  N.S.W.,  iv.,  Pt.  1.  1894.  p.  29,  t.  6;  ibid.,  viii , 
Pt.  3.  1907.  p.  194,  t.  38,  f.  3. 
In  the  original  specimen  of  this  species  the  umbo  was  missing,  and  the  form 
could  not,  therefore,  be  distinguished  from  the  Devonian  form,  P.  pittmani.  It 
was  suggested,  however,  that  should  further  collecting  yield  forms  with  a  well- 
developed  umbo,  such  differences  might  be  found  as  would  .justify  the  erection  of  a 
new  species — P.  sub  pittmani.  The  form  originally  described  was  obtained  from 
west  of  Mt.  Uriari.  and  is  in  the  collection  of  the  Geological  Survey. 

KOPHIA  STRiAXA,  sp.  nov.  (Plate  xxi.,  fig.  8.) 
Kochia,  Freeh.  Die  Devonisehen  Aviculiden  Pentsehlands,  1891,  p.  72:  Clarke, 
New  York  State  Museum,  Memoir  No.  6  1904,  p.  26,  t.  13,  f.  1-8. 
This  form  at  first  sight  resembles  a  capulid  genus,  but  the  shape  of  the  umbili- 
cal region,  and  its  relation  to  the  posterior  margin  of  the  shell,  together  with  the 
presence  of  a  slightlv  developed  posterior  ear,  lead  to  the  conclusion  that  it  ought 
to   be  placed  in  Freeh's   genus,  Kochia.     The   umbo   is   a   little  posterior  of  the 


•Annual  Eep.  Dept.  Mines,  N.S."W.,  1897,  p. 200. 


354     GEOLOGY  AXD  PETROLOGY  OF  THE  GREAT  SERPENTIXE  BELT  OF  X.S.W., 

median  line,  incurved  and  directed  anteriorly.  On  tbe  posterior  ear  can  be  seen 
a  sharp  fold  along  the  hinge  line.  The  shell  is  ornamented  by  simple  and  inter- 
polated radial  folds  spaced  eight  or  ten  to  a  centimetre  and  travereed  by  a  tew 
faint  concentric  undulations.  The  height  of  tlie  type  specimen  is  42  mm. ;  the 
height  of  the  umbo  above  the  hinge-line,  14;  the  breadth,  35,  and  the  thickness  of 
the  single  valve  is  18  mm. 

It  was  collected  by  Donald  Porter  from  Swain's  Conditional  Purchase  Lease, 
seven  miles  south-east  of  Carroll,  and  is  in  the  Museum  of  the  Geological  Survey, 
No.  FlSll. 

CONOCARDICII    SP.    IXDET. 

An  indefinite  shell  which  has  provisionally  been  referred  to  this  genus  is  seen 
in  Specimen  No.  4424  in  the  collection  of  the  Geological  Survey,  obtained  by 
Cullen  from  the  jjarish  of  Moorowarra,  south  of  Somerton. 

P0.SIDONIELLA  ?  spp.  INDEX.      (Plate  xxiii.,  fig.  6;  Text-fig.  14  a,  b.) 

Posidoniella,  De  Koninckj  Faune  Calc.  Carb.  Belg.,  1885,  p.  184. 

These  three  forms  all  occur  in  the  south-east  of  Babbinboon,  and  were  ob- 
tained by  Mrs.  Scott.  The  following  features  are  common  in  the  three  shells, 
which  are  obviously  generically  related.  The  shell  has  a  prominent  bean  or  umbo, 
incurved  and  placel  subcenti-ally,  generally  slightly  anterior.  The  hinge  line  is 
straight  with  round  angles  producing  small  ears.  They  are  marked  with  a  few 
(five  to  eight)  prominent  ridges,  with  broad  sulci  between,  in  which  are  seen  thin 
radial  striae  sometimes  extending  as  spines  from,  the  margin.  The  two  forms,  a 
and  h,  are  rather  inflated,  but  c  is  much  Hatter.  The  shells  are  rather  like  the 
illustrations  of  forms  of  Posidoniella;  particularly  marked  is  the  resemblance  of 
(a)  to  Posidoniella  suhsulcata*  as  illustrated  by  Dr.  Wheelton  Hind,  but  they 
differ  from  that  form  in  the  sub-central  character  of  the  umbo  and  its  general 
prominence  above  the  hinge  line.  They  resemble  Atliijris  rui/ssii  to  some  extent,  are 
the  possessors  of  a  lamellar  fringe  as  shown  in  b  (which  is  the  only  bilaterally 
symmetrical  form),  but  differ  from  it  in  the  presence  of  so  few  concentric  ridges, 
and  usually  asjTnmetric  character  and  anterior  inclination  of  the  umbo  Tenta- 
tively, however,  the^e  forms  have  been  assigned  to  the  genus  Posidoniella,  awaiting 
the  investigation  of  further  material. 

The  following  are  the  characters  of  the  three  forms : — 

(n).  This  is  the  form  illustrated  in  Text-flg  14a,  and  two  specimens  of  it  are 
available.  The  following  are  tbe  dimensions  of  this  form: — Heiglit,  umbo  to 
margin,  13,  14  mm. ;  length,  11,  12  mm. ;  length  of  hinge  line,  9  nun. ;  height  of 
umbo  above  hinge,  4  mm.;  thickness  of  valve,  (i  ram.;  iiumbei'  of  coiiceiili-ic  folds, 
7—8. 

The  beak  in  both  cases  is  not  quite  central,  and  tlie  middle  line  is  very  slightly 
obli(|ue  to  the  normal  to  the  hinge  line.  The  ears,  liowever,  are  very  nearly  eiiual 
and  the  hinge  line  is  straight.     The  radiating  striae  are  marked. 

(b) .  This  also  is  represented  by  two  specimens,  and  is  proportionately  broader 
than  the  first.  The  following  are  the  chief  diniensions  of  the  two  specimens: — 
Height,  6.5,  6.2  mm.;  length,  8,  7.2;  length  of  hinge-line,  5.  4.5;  height  of  umbo 
above  hinge-line.  2.5.  2.5;  thickness  of  valve,  3.7,  3.5. 

In  both  there  were  five  marked  concentric  lolds  with  intervening  fhie  railial 
markings,   which   are  continued   into   a  fringe  along  the  margin  of  one  of  these 


•Brit.  Carb.  LameU.,  II.  (iii.),  1904,  t.25,  f.2-6. 


BY   VC.    N.    BENSON,    W.    S.    DUN,    AND    W.    R.    BROWNE.  355 

specimens.  (The  djawing  is  a  composite  of  tb'-  characters  of  both.)  The  ears 
are  scarcely  developed,  the  straight  hinge-line  being-  broadly  rounded  on  the  ex- 
tremities.    These  sliells  appear  to  be  quite  symmetrical  about  the  middle  line. 

(f).  The  form  illustrated  in  Plate  xxiii.,  tig.  6,  is  represented  bj  a  single 
specimen  only.  The  shell  is  depressed  and  subquadrate,  the  lower  margin  being 
almost  semicircular.  The  shell  is  depressed,  the  beak  scarcely  rising  above  the 
hinge  line.  The  anterior  ear  is  marked,  but  rather  smaller  than  the  posterior  ear 
which  extends  to  a  sharp  terminal  angle.  The  hinge  line  is  straight  and  slightly 
oblique  to  the  middle  line  of  the  shell.  The  umbo  is  subeentral  but  slightly  an- 
terior. There  are  seven  prominent,  rather  angular,  concentric  folds  crossed  by 
radial  striae.  No  sign  of  adductor  scars  is  noticeable.  The  dimensions  of  this 
shell  are:   Height,  10  mm.;  length,  9  mm.;  thickness,  2.5  mm. 

The  specimens  are  numbered  F^  12457  in  the  collection  of  the  Geological 
Survey. 

Spathella  sp.  indet.     (Plate  sxiii.,  figs.  5,  7.) 

Spathelhi.  Hall,  Geol.  New  York,  Pal.  v.  (i.),  Lamellibranchiata,  1885,  p.  xxxiii.; 
Wheelton  Hind,  Brit.  Carb.  Lamellibranchiata,  ii.,  1897,  p.  153,  t.  23. 

There  are  two  specimens  which  we  refer  to  this  genus  with  some  hesitation, 
seeing  that  they  are  certainly  specifically  distinct  from  any  forms  of  which  we  have 
seen  figures.  The  larger  form  is  an  internal  cast.  The  shell  is  elongated,  rounded 
at  the  terminations,  with  a  sub-anterior  umbo,  which  is  narrow  and  shghtly  m- 
curved.  There  are  faint  traces  of  concentric  gi'owth  lines  and  the  anterior  ad- 
ductor scar  is  strongly  marked,  but  the  posterior  is  faint.  The  smaller  form  ia 
almost  exactly  half  the  size  of  the  larger,  and  differs  in  the  marked  character  of 
the  concentric  growth  lines  giving  the  shell  a  lamellar  appearance.  It  is  slightly 
constricted  along  a  band  running  obliquely  from  tlie  umbo  to  the  middle  of  the 
lower  margin.  The  dimensions  of  these  two  shells  are  as  follow: — Length,  (a), 
32,  (h)  15  mm.;  height,  (a)   16,   (b)  7;  thickness  (only  one  valve),   {a)   7,    (6)    3. 

The  two  forms  are  found  on  Specimen  No.  F.  4650  in  the  collection  of  tlie 
Geological  Survey,  and  were  obtained  by  Tullen  from  the  hills,  two  miles  west  of 
Mount  Uriari. 

Panenka  porteei,  sp.  nov.     (Plate  xxi.,  fig.  10.) 
Panenka,  Barrande,  Systeme  Sil.  Boljeme,  vi.,  1881,  p.  128. 

This  interesting  shell  is  represented  by  a  specimen  in  the  Australian  Museum 
here  illustrated,  and  Specimens  1752-3-4-5  and  -7  in  the  collection  of  the  Geolo- 
gical Sur\-ey,  obtained  by  Mr.  Donald  Porter  from  Swain's  Conditional  Purchase, 
8  miles  south-east  of  Carroll,  and  also  by  No.  1756,  from  Goonoo  Goonoo.  'The 
form  illustrated  has  a  lengfh  of  51  mm.,  and  breadth  of  57.  The  thickness  of 
the  single  (right)  valve  is  14  mm.  It  is  folded  into  numerous  simple  or  inter- 
polated straight,  obtusely-rounded,  radiating  ridges,  spaced  about  ten  to  the  cen- 
timetre. There  is  no  concentric  ornamentation  or  imbrication,  though  there  are 
a  few  growth  lines  and  concentric  undulations  jjlaced  irregularly.  The  postenoi' 
ear  is  strongly  developed,  flange-like,  and  striated.  The  umbo  is  acute,  highly  in- 
curved and  slightly  carinate.  The  posterior  adductor  scars  are  high  and  faintly 
marked . 

Our  forms  resemble  most  closely  Panenka  niultiradktta  (Hall),  a  Devonian 
form,  but  are  more  delicately  ornamented  than  this  American  t>T3e.  The  umlx)  is 
also  more  acute  and  incurved.  This  form  is  named  in  lionour  of  Mr.  Donald  Por- 
ter, the  first  to  make  extensive  collections  of  Bnrindi  fossils  in  this  region. 


350  GEOLOGY   AXn   PETROLCKIY  OF   THE  GREAT  SERPEXTIXE   BELT  OF   N.S.W., 

ExTOLiril     AVICULATU.M     (Swullow). 

Etheridge  and  Dun,  Mem.  Geol.  Sur.  N.s;A\'.,  P:i1.   No.  5,  Vol.  ii.,  Pt.  1.  1000,  p. 
30,  t.  15,  f.  1-4  and  Bildiu.m-aiiliy. 
This  form  was  obtained  by  Cullcn  from  Mt.  Uriari,  near  Sonierfon. 

Entolipm  sp.  indet. 

An  indetermin'ite  form  belonging  to  this  genus,  represented  by  S]ii'i'imen 
r.'45il  in  the  collection  of  tlie  Geological  Survey. 

AVICULOPECTEX   SPP.   IXDET. 

cf.  Aviculopecten  knockonensis,  De  Koninck,  1877,  Pal.  Foss.  N.S.W.  (1898),  p. 
232;  Avieulopeclen  granosus,  ibid.,  p.  234,  t.  22,  f.  10;  Aviculopecten 
.^p.,  Etheridge  and  Dun,  Mem.  Geol.  Sur.  N.S.W.,  Pal.  5,  1904,  p.  14,  20, 
t.  15,  f.  10,  11,  12. 

Indeterminate  forms,  which,  according  to  Etheridge  and  Dun,  are  not  deter- 
minable specifically.  lia\c  l)een  obtained  by  Cullen  from  the  hills  west  of  Mt. 
I'riari.  Two  of  these  may  be  similar  to  the  forms  which  De  Koninck  compared 
with  .1.  yranusus  and  A.  knockonensis  respecUvely,  and  a  third  form  also  is 
present. 

LeIOPTERIA    (?)    AUSTRALIA    Eth.   HI. 

Etheridge,  Juur.,  Rec.  Geol.   Surv.  N.S.W.,  v.,  1898,  p.  178,  t.  19,  1.  19. 

This  form  is  represented  by  Specimens  4539,  4508,  4571  and  4579  in  the  col- 
lection of  the  Geological  Survey,  which  were  obtained  l)v  Cullen  in  the  hills  west 
of  Mt.  Uriari. 

SCALDIA  SP.  ixuET.       (Plate  xxi..  (ig.  9.) 

tScaldia,  Kyckh(jlt,  Melanges  Palaeontologiqucs,  1852.  t.  10,  f.  24-20:  ,i,i(l.,  1853, 
p.  07. 

This  form  is  a  single  right  val\-e,  oblong-ovaie  in  shape,  with  the  beak  slight- 
ly anterior,  and  the  surface  ornamented  with  tine  radial  striae  and  delicate  concen- 
tric gi'owth  lines.  The  shell  substance  is  thin.  Its  dimensions  are:  Length  of 
hinge-line,  27  mm.;  breadth  of  valve,  33;  height  of  valve,  27;  thickness,  11. 

It  is  less  elongate  than  the  form  described  as  Scalilia  ?  depressa  by  De  Kon- 
inck,* derived  from  the  Burindi  rocks  of  Huchan  on  the  Gloucester  Kiver,  and 
differs  also  from  the  Belgian  forms  described  by  the  same  author,  and  also  from 
the  American  forms  to  which  we  have  made  reference.  It  is  not,  however,  suffi- 
ciently well  jireserved  for  specific  description.  The  specimen  is  in  the  collection 
of  the  Australian  Museum,  and  was  t)btained  by  Mr.  Donald  Porter  from  Carroll. 

GASTROPODA. 

Ptvcoiiphalus   cullexi,  si>.   nov.       (Plate  xxiii.,  iig-s.  12,14.) 

Pliicompludus,  Agassi/.,  Tradnct.  Conch.  Min.  .U>  Sowcrby.  1838.  \>.  222,  t.  115. 
f.  1 ,  2,  3. 
Thi'  shell  is  turbinate,  elevated  and  markedly  uiiibilicate,  consisting  of  alumt 
five  whorls  with  imi)ressed  sutures.  The  aperture  is  sul)-circulai-.  The  slit-band 
is  placed  medianly  between  two  prominent  ridges,  and  aliove  the  np|)'T  of  these 
ridges  there  are  five    finer  ridges,   while   below,    between    the   slit-band   and    the 


•Pal.  Poss.  N.S.TV..  (1898).  p. 20:^,  t.l.").  f.f)- 


BY    \V.    N.    BEXSOX,   W.    S.    DUN,    AND    W.    R.    BROWN  K.  357 

umbilicus,  the  ridges  or  spiral  striae  are  more  than  a  score  in  number  and  extend 
into  the  umbilicus  itself.  The  faintly  marked  and  delicate  growth  lines  cross 
these  ridges,  giving-  the  shell  a  slight  sub-cancellate  appearance.  Two  specimens 
are  available  of  this  form,  respectively  4684  and  4642  in  the  collection  of  tlie 
Geological  Survey.  The  dimensions  of  these  are :  Diameter  of  base,  29  mm., 
or  in  the  more  complete  shell  25  mm.  In  the  latter  also  the  height  of  the  shell 
is  17  mm. ;  the  heia-ht  of  the  aperture  is  12  mm.,  and  the  breadth  14  rmn.  These 
forms  were  collected  by  C'ullen  from  the  Parish  of  i\Ioorowarra,  south  of 
Somerton. 

MouRLO.viA  ORXATA,  sp.   nov.     (Plate  xxii.,  fig.  1.) 

Mourlonia,  De  Koninck,  Ann.  Mus.  Roy.  Nat.  Hist.  Belg.,  viii.,  1883,  p.  75. 
This  beautiful  fossil  is  represented  by  Speoimen  No.  4382  in  the  collection 
of  the  Geological  Survey,  obtained  by  Cullen  from  the  Parish  of  Moorowarra, 
south  of  Somerton.  The  shell  is  turbinate  and  elevated,  only  two  wliorls  are 
present,  the  upper  jiart  having  been  broken  away.  The  body  whorl  is  highly 
distended,  oval  in  cross  section,  with  two  marked  ridges  limiting  the  narrow 
slit-band  on  the  periphery.  Between  these  and  the  upper  suture  there  are  four 
small  spiral  ridges  alternating-  with  four  others  that  are  still  smaller.  On  the 
lower  side  of  the  slit-band  there  are  several  less  distinct  ridges.  These  are  tra- 
versed by  delicate  growth  lines  g-iving  a  sub-cancellate  appearance.  There  is  a 
small  umbilicus.  The  dimensions  are :  Probal)le  height,  25  mm. ;  diameter  of 
base,  21  mm.;  height  of  body  whorl,  12  mm.;  l)readth,  13.5  mm.;  angle  of  spire, 
70°. 

MOURLOXIA    SP.    INDET.        (Tcxt-tig.    15.) 

The  forms  are  turreted,  but  depressed,  the  spiral  angle  being  about  95°. 
They  consist  of  three  or  four  pentagonal  whorls  with  strongly  impressed  sutures. 
The  upper  surfaces  of  the  whorls  are  excavated  and  bordered  by  a  strongly- 
ridged  shoulder,  below  which  the  flattened  area  of  the  broad  slit-band  slopes  out- 
wards and  d<iwnwards  to  the  lower  angular  ridge,  where  the  whorl  bends  sharply 
in  t'owards  the  umbilicus.  Below  this,  but  lying  nearer  to  the  periphery  than  to ' 
the  centre  of  the  liroad  flat  umbilicus,  is  a  third  but  \ery  subordinate  angular 
ridge . 

The  specimens  are  internal  casts  only,  and  do  not  show  the  external  orna- 
mentation. The  dimensions  of  two  specimens  are  as  follow: — Height,  8  mm.,  8.5 
mm.;  diameter,  15  mm.,  22  mm.;  height  of  aperture,  6,  8;  breadth,  9,  10  mm. 

These  forms  of  this  type  were  obtained  bv  Mrs.  Scott  in  the  south-east  of 
Babbinboon. 

WORTHENIA      (?)     CAXALICULATA     Etll.    fil. 

R.  Etheridge,  Jun.,  Rec.  Geol.  Surv.  N.S.W.,  viii..  Pt.  3,  1907,  p.  192,  t.  38,  f.  4. 
This  specimen  was  obtained  at  Carroll  by   D.  A.   Porter,  and  is  in  tlie  collec- 
tion  of  the   Geological   Survey. 

GOSSELETIXA    AUSTRALis    var.    ALTA,    var.    nov.     (Plate  xxii.,  figs.  5,    0.) 

Gosseletina  australis,  Etheridge,  Junr.,  Rec.  Geol.  Sur.  N.S.W.,   ii.,  1890,  ji.   82; 
ibid.,  vii.,  1907,  p.  192,  t.  37,  f.  6,  7,  8;  t.  38,  f.  7,  8. 
This  shell  consists  of  four  or  five  convex  whorls;  the  spire  is  short   and   de- 
pressed, and  the  height  of  the  body  whorl  is  slightly  greater  than   the   height  of 
the  remainder   of  the   shell.     It  is  reg-ularly  convex,   almost  circular  in   cross   see- 


358     GEOLOGY  AXD  PETROLOGY  OF  THE  GREAT  SERPEXTIXE  BELT  OF  X.S.W., 

tion.  The  slit  band  is  placed  nearer  to  the  suture  than  to  the  greatest  periphery 
of  the  shell,  but  is  not  presei-\ed  in  our  specimens,  a  little  patch  of  obliquely 
striated  test  from  below  the  slit  band  serving  to  indicate  its  position. 

The  following  are  the  dimensions  of  two  specimens :  Height  of  spire,  9,  9mm. ; 
diameter  of  base,  17,  21;  height  of  aperture,  9.  9;  breadth  of  aperture,  9,  10; 
angle  of  spire,  115°. 

This  variety  differs  from  the  type  of  the  species  in  the  greater  height  of  the 
spire  proportionately  to  that  of  the  body  wliorl.  These  forms  were  collected  by 
Mrs.  Scott  from  the  south-east  of  Babbinboon,  and  are  Nos.  n2455  in  the  collec- 
tion  of  the  Geological  Survey. 

GosSELETiXA     MACKAYi,  sp.  nov.     (Plate  xxii.,  fig.  2.) 

The  spire  consists  of  four  or  five  whorls,  the  first  three  being  discoid,  but 
the  body  whorl  is  depressed  so  that  the  top  of  the  aperture  rests  against  the 
middle  line  of  the  previously-formed  whorl.  The  whorls  are  turreted.  with  a 
sharp  angle  placed  half-way  between  the  suture  ;ind  the  periphery  and  marked  by 
low  tubercles.  The  slit -band  is  half  way  between  this  angle  and  the  suture. 
The  aperture  cannot  be  seen. 

The  dimensions  are:  Height  of  spire,  about  16  mm.;  diameter  of  base,  32; 
height  of  body  whorl.  11. 

The  specimen  is  a  cast  obtained  by  Mrs.  Scott  from  the  shelly  ridge  in  the 
soutb-east  of  Babbinboon,  and  named  after  her  parents  in  appreciation  of  their 
hospitality  and  helpfulness.  The  type  is  specimen  No.  F  12456  in  ths  collection 
of  the  Geological  Survey. 

GossELETixA  .scoTTi,  sp .  nov.  (Plate  xxii..  figs.  3,  4.) 
Shell  composed  of  four  or  five  whorls,  the  cross  section  of  which  is  very 
characteristic.  The  suture  is  rather  deeply  marked,  and  the  slit-band  lies  at  a 
sharp  angle  close  to  the  suture  line,  less  than  a  quarter  of  the  distance  from  the 
margin  to  the  periphery,  and  beneath  it  is  another  but  much  fainter  ridge.  The 
margin  is  rounded  and  subangular.     Tliere  is  a  small  umbilicus. 

Dimensions:  Height,  8  mm.;  breadth  of  base,  20;  height  of  aperture,  8; 
breadth  of  aperture,  9;  angle  of  spire.  135°. 

This  form  differs  from  G.  aiu^tnilis  in  its  greater  size,  and  the  position  and 
angular  character  ef  the  slit  band.  It  was  obtained  by  Mrs.  Scott  from  the 
shelly  ridge  in  the  south-east  of  Babbinboon.  The  type  is  specimen  No.  F  12458 
in   tiie  collection   of  the  Geological  Survey. 

YVAXIA  KOXIXCKIl   Elh  til. 

Baylea    komiickii,  Etheridge,  Junr.,  Rec.  Geol.    Surv.  N.S.AV..    ii..  1890.    p.    82; 

Yranin  koninckil,   ihid,  Geo].  Pal.   (^Id.  and  N.  Guinea.   1892.   p.  288,  t. 

41,  f.  7;  ibid.,  Rec.  Geol.  Surv.  N.S.W..  viii..  1907.  p.  192.  t.  38.  f.  2,  3. 
This  form  is  represented  in  our  region  by  S|iecimen  1804  in  the  collection  of 
the  Geolosrical  Survey,  obtained  from  Carroll  by  Donald  Porter. 

PORCKLLIA  PEARSi  Etli.  fil.     (Plate  xxii.,  fig.  7.) 
R.  Etheridge,  Junr.,  Geol.  Pal.  Q'sland  and  N.  Guinea.  1892.  p.  290.  t.  15.  f.  7,8. 
This  form'  is   represented   by  Specimen    437(i  in    the   collection  of   the  Geo- 
logical Survey,  and  -was  obtained  by  Cullen   from  the  parish  of   Moorowarra.     It 
consists  of  a  cast  of  the  base  of  a  single  shell.     It  contains  about   four   or  five 


Br   TV.    X.    BEXSOX,   TV.    S.    DUX,    AXD    W.    R.    BROTVXE. 


359 


approximately  quailraugular  whorls,  with  rounded  angles,  the  lower  exterior 
angle  of  each  whorl  bearing  prominent  tubercles.  The  shell  is  loosely  coiled  into  a 
low  spiral  with  a  very  broad  umbilicus,  the  conical  angle  of  which  is  about  120°. 
The  base  is  18  mm.  in  diameter  and  the  body  whorl  at  the  aperture  is  6  mm. 
in   diameter . 

This  species  was  instituted  by  Etheridge  to  include  forms  obtained  from  the 
Star,  Gympie,  and  Middle  Bowen  Series  of  Queensland. 

Phaxerotrema  .wstralis,  sp.  nov.     (Plate  xxiii.,  fig.  13;  Text-fig.  16.) 

Phanerotrema,   Fischer,    Man.    Conchyl.,    1887,   p.   851, 

The  shell  is  depressed,  sub-tui-binate,  and  umbilicate,  consisting  of  four  or 
five  rapidly  enlarging  whorls,  coiled  into  a  laterally  compressed  or  oval  spiral. 
The  superior  whorls  are  rounded,  but  the  greatly  enlarged  body  whorl  is  flat- 
tened on  the  upper    portion  with  a  distinct  shoulder,    at  the    angle    of   which    is 


Te.xt-fis;.15.— v7/o«)-/o//;(r  Te^t-^g-m.—Phatierolreiiia  Text-R^-IT  .—Bf/Zeivp/ioii 

sp.  indet.  Babbinboon.  aus/ni/is,  s^i.  no\.  to  shov;  of.  /»'«/<-;«  Martin,  and 

/jj  4^  form  of  body  whorl.    Bab-  Bellerophon    sp.    indet. 

^    ■'■^"  hinboon.  Babbinboon. 

situated  the  slit-band  between  two  ridges.  Thi  rounded  lower  surface  nf  the 
body  whorl  passes  fonvard  into  a  sharp  lower  peripheral  angle  making  a  sub- 
quadrate  aperture.  A  little  of  the  original  test  preserved  on  the  original  of 
Text-fig.  16  "is  composed  of  three  layers,  and  is  marked  with  very  fine  gi-owth 
lines  descending    obliquely    forward    .iust  below  the   slit-band. 

Dimensions :  Plate  xxiii.,  fig.  13,     Text-flg.  15. 

Height   of  spire 12  mm.  .     — 

Body    whorl  near    aperture..     29  mm.  34  mm. 

Height 15  mm.  16  mm. 

Breadth 15  nun.  16  mm. 

The  fii-st  of  these  has  an  angle  of  spire  of  135°,  but  the  tip  of  the  spire  has 
been  broken  from  the  second  shell.  The  first  shell  is  Specimen  4659  in  the  col- 
lection of  the  Geological  Survey;  the  second  was  obtained  by  Mrs.  Scott  from 
the  south-east  of  Babbinboon,  and  is  in  the  collection  of  the  University  of  Sydney. 

Phaxebotrema  australis    var.  alta,  var.  nov.      (Plate  xxiii.,    figs.    9,  10.) 

This  form  differs  from  the  type  of  the  species  in  tlie  more  elevated  character 
of  the  spire,  the  dimensions  being:  Height,  25  mm.;  breadth,  30  mm.;  aperture  of 
whorl,  height  and  breadth,  20  mm.  It  consists  of  four  whorls  with  a  spiral 
angle  of  110°.  In  the  form  studied  there  was  faint  evidence  of  some  concentric 
spiral  striae,  crossed  by  gi-owth  lines.  The  form  is  represented  by  Specimen 
4642  in  the  collection  of  the  Geological  Surrey  obtained  by  Cullen  from  ^looro- 
warra. 


360  GEOLOGY   AXD    PETROLOGY   01'   THE   GREAT   SERPENTINE'  BELT   OF    N.S.W.. 

MURCinSONIA    SP.    INDET. 

Forms  referable  to  this  genus  were  obtained  by  Mr.  Pittnian  from  near 
Carroll.* 

Bellerophon  spp.  indet.  (Text -fig.  17.) 
Out  of  several  specimens  of  Bellerophon  collected  by  Mrs.  Scott,  east  of 
Babbiuboon,  two  types  only  apjicar  to  be  represented.  Both  are  so  poorly  pre- 
ser\'ed  as  to  be  incapable  of  specific  determination.  The  larger  is  In'oad  and  oval, 
the  mouth  broadly  crescentic.  The  umbilicus  (to  the  right  of  Text-%.  17a)  is 
■wide  and  shallow.  The  upper  edge  of  the  lip  is  thickened,  and  there  seems  to  be 
no  umbilicus.  There  is  only  the  faintest  indication  of  a  slit -band,  and  no  sign 
of  ornamentation.  The  height  is  13  mm.  and  greatest  diameter  '23.  The  heiglit 
of  the  aperture  is  18  mm.,  and  breadth  10. 

This  form  is  evidently  closely  related  to  B.  Iihilciis  (Martin)  t  (Cf.  Sowerby, 
Min.  Conch.,  t.  470,  f.  1). 

The  second  form,  Text-iig.  17b,  is  narrower  and  markedly  carinate.  The 
fragment  of  the  lip  preserved  indicates  that  it  had  a  widely  spreading  mouth. 
This  form  is  probably  more  allied  to  B.  costaluf:,  though  it  is  apparently  rather 
narrower  than  the  typical  form  of  that  species.  {See  Sowerby.  op.  cit.,  t.  470, 
f.  4.)  The  specimen  is  an  internal  cast  only,  and  no  sign  of  ridu-insr  or  tither  ex- 
ternal ornamentation  is  to  lie  found. 

Euomphalus  carrollensls,  sp.  nov.  (Plate  xxii.,  tig.  ii. ) 
The  shell  is  sub-turbinate  to  sub-conical,  consisting  of  five  to  six  whorls  of 
which  all  but  the  body  whorl  are  sub-circular  in  cross  section,  while  the  latter  has 
a  broad  flattened  upper  surface,  and  is  entirely  of  the  pentaiuiulatu.t  type.  The 
ornamentation  of  the  shell  consists  of  numerous  gi'owth  lines  of  the  nornud 
Euomplialid  type.  Dimensions:  Height  of  spire.  15  mm.;  breadth.  33;  height 
of  body  whorl,  9;  spire  angle,  120°. 

The  specimen  was  obtained  at  rari-cill.  and  is  Specimen  No.  '2771  in  the  col- 
lection of  the  Geological   Survey. 

Euomphalus  cer.\  (Eth.  fil.). 
R.  Etheridge,  Jun.,  Kec.  Geol.  Surv.  N.S.W.,  vi..  189G.  p.  17,  t.  1,  f.  5.  (i. 
The  specimens  examined  from  the  south-east  of  Baljbiubood  (which  were 
obtained  by  Mrs.  Seort)  resemble  in  all  respects  the  illustrations  of  Euomphalus 
cera  given  by  Etheridge,  save  that  tlicy  are  smaller  than  the  illustration.  As  no 
dimensions  or  statement  of  the  nuiltiplication  involved  in  illustrating  are  men- 
tioned, the  following  are  g-iven  as  tlie  dimensions  in  millimetres  of  several  forms 
examined : — 

Height  of  shell 4  5         — 

Diameter 1<5         20         '24 

Height   of  aperture       4  5  6 

Breadth     S  7  8 

Euomphalus  PEXTANGUi.ATf^    (Sowerl)y). 
J.   Souerbv,  l\Iin.  Conch.   Grt.  Brit.,  1814,  j..  it7,  t.  4.5,  f.  1   and   2;  K.  Etheridge, 
Junr..  Rec.  Geol.  Surv.  N.S.W.,  ™i..  pt.  3,  1907,  p.  19(i,  t.  38.  f.  1. 
The   specimen    closely    resembles   that    from     Moonan    Brook,   desciibed    and 
figured  by  Etheridge.     Its   dimensions    are:    Height  (d'  sliell,    9   mm.;    hreadtii    of 
shell,  29;  height  of  aperture,  7;  breadth  of  aperture,  10. 

"  •  Annual  Kept.  Dept.  Mines^  N.S.W.,  1897,  p.aOO. 

tPetref.  Derbiensis,  1809,  t.  40,  f.  4. 


BY    W.    N.    BENSOX,   W.    S.    DIX,    AND    W.    R.    BROWXE.  361 

This  form  is  rcpi-escnted  by  Specimen  4370  in  the  collection  of  the  Geologi- 
cal Survey,  ()l)taine(l  by  Culleu  from  Moorowarra  Parish,  and  another  from 
Carroll. 

Straparollus  davidis,  sp.  nov.     (Plate   xxii.,  fig.  10.) 

Straparolhis,  Moutfort,  Conch.  Syst.,  Vol.  ii.,  1810,  p.  174. 
The  form  is  sub-discoid,  and  consists  of  five  or  six  gently  enlarging  whorls 
which  are  sub-circular  in  cross  section,  making  a  low  spiral  with  an  extremely  broad 
umbilicus.  The  shell  is  ornamented  by  transverse  striae  which  cross  the  whorls 
almost  perpendicularly.  The  dimensions  are:  Height  of  spire,  7  mm.;  diameter 
of  kase,  24  mm.;  height  of  aperture,  5  mm.;  breadth,  (i  mm.;  (ingle  of  spire,  135°. 
This  form  has  no  analogy  among  the  Belgian  Carboniferous  forms  described  by 
De  Koninck,  but  is  not  unlike  S.  clymenoides  (Hall)  from  the  Devonian  (Scho- 
harie Grit  and  Helderberg  Series)  of  the  United  States.  The  specimen  upon 
which  this  species  has  been  instituted  is  No.  F  ]  773  in  the  collection  of  the  Geo- 
logical Survey,  and  was  found  at  Carroll  by  Mr.  J.  G.  Gritfin.  We  dedicate  the 
species  to  Professor  David,  F.R.S. 

Naticopsls  brevispika  (Ryckholt).      (Plate  xxii.,  fig.  8.) 
P.   de  Ryckholt,    .Melanges  Palaeontol.,  Pt.  i.,    1847,    p.    78,    t.    3,    f.    8,   9    {non 
Roemer)  ;  De  Koninck,  Faune  Calc.  Carb.  Beige,  Pt.  3,  1881,  p.  22,  t.  1, 
f.    23,    24,    25,    26. 

Several  small  specimens  are  available  for  examination.  The  spire  has  four 
whorls  ornamented  with  fine  striae  with  the  same  sinuosity  as  is  general  for  this 
genus.  The  form  agrees  fairly  closely  with  De  Koninck's  diagnosis,  the  following 
being  the  dimensions  of  the  largest  example:  Height  of  spire,  12  mm.;  width,  14; 
height  of  aperture,  10;  width,  6;  spiral  angle,  135°. 

Soine  callus  occurs  on  the  inner  margin,  but  its  tubercular  nature  cannot  be 
observed.  In  Belgium  this  form  occurs  in  Stage  VI.  of  the  Carboniferous 
Limestone  at  Vise.  That  chosen  for  illustration  is  No.  1814  of  the  Geological 
Survey,  and   was  obtained  at  Carroll. 

Naticopsis  globosa    (Hoeninghaus).      (Plate  xxii.,  figs.  15,  16.) 

Hoeninghaus,  Verzeichniss  des  von  E.  W.  Hoeninghaus  dem  Museum  der  Uni- 
versitat  Bonn  uberlassen  Petrifacten  Sammelung,  1829,  p.  8;  De  Kon- 
inck. Faune  Calc.  Belg.,  Pt.  3,  1881.  p.  15,  t.  1,  f.  1,  2,  8,  9,  10,  11; 
t.  2,  f.  25. 

Our  specimens  are  the  internal  casts  of  three  individuals,  one  of  which  has 
been  slightly  flattened  by  crushing  parallel  to  the  spire.  The  spire  is  composed  of  four 
or  five  whorls.     The  measurements  of  the  two  forms  are  as  follows: — 

A.  B.  (flg-ured). 

Leng-th  of  spire     10  mm.  17  mm. 

Breadth 10  mm.  14  mm. 

Length    of    aperture 9  mm.  14  mm. 

Breadth 7  mm.  flattened. 

Spiral  angle 114°  110° 

This  form'  was  collected  by  Mrs.  Scott  from  the  S.E.  of  Babbinboon,  and 
examples  are  Specimen  No.  F  12459  in  the  Museum  of  the  Geological  Survey,  and 
two  others  in  the  collection  of  the  University  of  Sydney. 


362  GEOLOGY    AXD    I'KTIiOI.Of; V    OF   TI[K    GliKAT    SKRPKXTIXK    BKLT   OF    X.S.W., 

In  Belgium,  this  form  occurs  in  Stage  VI.  of  the  Carboniferous  Limestone 
at  Vise.  It  is  also  found  at  Bolland,  in  Yorkshire,  near  Glasgow,  and  in  the 
Chester  Group  (Upper  Mississippian)   in  Illinois. 

Naticopsis  obliqua,  sp.  nov.     (Plalc  xxii.,  figs.  13,  14.) 

This  form  has  some  resemblance  to  A',  consimilis  (De  Kon.),  but  dilt'ei-s 
from  it  specifically.  It  is  also  quite  unlike  any  American  form  of  which  we  have 
information.  It  is  an  internal  cast,  the  spire  consisting  of  five  or  six  whorls. 
The  last  whorl  is  for  the  most  part  below  rather  than  around  the  preceding 
whorls.  The  distinguishing  feature  is  the  very  eccentric  position  of  the  spire  in 
regard  to  the  upper  surface  of  the  last  whorl. 

The  dimensions'  are  as  follow : — Height  of  spire,  13  mm. ;  breadth  of  base, 
18;  height  of  aperture,  14;  breadth  of  aperture,  8;  angle  of  spire,  115°. 

The  specimen  was  obtained  by  Mrs.  Scott  in  the  south-east  of  Babbinboon, 
and  is  No.  F  12460  in  the  collection  of  the  Geological  Survey. 

Macrocheilus    filosus   (Sowerby). 

lAttorina  filosa,  Sowerby,  in  Mitchell's  Three  Expeditions  into  Eastern  Australia, 

1838,  p.  15,  38,  t.  3,  f.  5:  Morris,  in  Strzeleeki's  Phys.  Descr.  of  X.S.W. 

and  Van  Diemen's  Land,  1845,  p.  285,  t.  18,  f.  14;  Macrocheilus  filostts, 

De  Koninck,  1877,  Pal.  Foss.  N.S.W.,  (1898),  p.  264,  t.  23,  f.  16. 

This  form  was  among  the  first  fossils  found  in  the  district,  and  was  obtained  by 

Mitchell  at  Perimbungav.  just  below  the  junction  of  the  Peel  and  Namoi  Rivei-s. 

PLATrCERAS    SP.    IXDET. 

Specimen  1811  of  the  collection  of  the  Geological  Survey  has  been  referred 
to  this  genus.     It  was  obtained  near  Carroll. 

LOXOXEMA    BABBINB00XEN8I.S   Etll.    fil . 

Etheridge,  Junr.,  Rec.  Geol.   Surv.  N.S.W.,  viii.,  1907,  p.  194,  t.  38,  f.  5,  (i. 
This   form   was   collected  by    Stonier  from    the    parish   of    Babbinboon,   and 
probably  near  the  south-eastern  portion. 

LOXONEMA    .SP.    IXDET. 

Rec.  Geol.  Surv.  N.S.W.,  viii.,  1907,  p.  195,  t.  37,  f.  4,  5. 
This  form,  aceoi'ding  to  Etheridge,  resembles  L.  lefevrei  and  other  species  in 
ornamentation,  but    is    not    identical  with  any    of    them.     It  wa-s    obtained    by 
Porter  from  Carroll. 

LoxoxEiiA  SP.  IXDET.     (Plate  xxii.,  figs.  11,  12.) 
The   specimens  figured  were  obtained  by  Mrs.   Scott   from  the  south-east  of 
Babbinboon.     These  are  greatly  weathered  examples,  possibly  of  L.   rwjifera. 

Specimens  of  Loxonema,  generally  in  an  obscure  and  imperfect  state  of  pre- 
servation, are  very  abundant  in  the  last-mentioned  locality.  Mitchell  was  jtro- 
bably  referring  to  a  Loxonema  when  he  mentioned  the  presence  of  Terehra  in  this 
region .  * 

COXUI.ABIA    SP.    IXDET. 

An  indeterminate  lorm,  possibly  referable  to  this  genus,  was  oblalued  hy 
Benson,  four  miles  east  of  Currabubula.  Another  example  has  been  reported 
from  Somerton. 

•Three  Expeditions  into  Eastern  Australia,  i.,  1838,  p. 38. 


by  w.  x.  bexsox,  w.  s.  dun,  and  w.  r.  browne.  363 

Hyolites  sp.  index. 

Specimen  4682  iu  the  collection  of  the  Geological  Survey  contains  an  indefin- 
ite tapering  form  that  has  been  referred  to  this  genus.  Its  occurrence  at  Carroll 
has  also  been  reported. 

SCAPHOPODA 

Dentalium  sp.  indet. 

Several  Ladefinite  forms,  possibly  referable  to  this  genus,  have  been  found  by 
Mrs.  Scott  in  the  south-east  of  Babbinboon.  The  largest  of  these  is  quite  straight 
and  the  remaining  portion  is  46  mm.  in  length.  It  is  oval  in  cross  section  with 
diameters  of  8.5  and  6.5  mm.,  tapering  to  diameters  of  4  and  3  mm. 

CEPHALOPODA. 

A  gi'oup  of  exceedingly  imperfectly  preserved  cephalopods  have  been  ob- 
tained from  the  Somerton-Carroll  District,  which  have  been  provisionally  referred 
to  the  following  old  and  comprehensive  genera,  it  being  f[uite  impossible  to  deter- 
mine them  closely  and  on  modern  lines. 

Orthoceras   sp.  indet. 

Specimen  4491  in  the  collection  of  the  Geological  Survey,  obtained  by 
Cullen  from  the  Parisii  of  Moorowarra. 

Trochoceras  sp.  indet. 

Collected  by  Mr.  Pitt  man  at  Rangira. 

Ci'RTOCERAS     sp.    indet. 

Specimen  4682  of  the  Geological  Survey,  obtained  from  Somerton. 

Cyetoceras  (?  Gyroceras)    sp.  indet. 

Specimen  1843  of  the  Geological  Surve}',  obtained  by  Mr.  Pittman  at 
Rangira. 

GfOMPHOCERAS   SP.    INDET. 

Specimen  1835  of  the  Geological  Sui-vey  from  Carroll. 

TRILOBITA. 

Phillipsia  (?)    robusta  (Mitchell). 

PUllipsia  gratidis,  Eth.  fd.,  Mem.  Geol.  Surv,  N.S.W.,  Pal.  No.  5,  Pt.  ii.,  1892, 
p.  128,  Text-fig.  5;  Phillipsia  (?)  robusta,  J.  Mitchell,  Proc.  L,inn.  Soc. 
N.S.W.,  xliii.,  1918,  p,  451,  t.  47,  f.  1,  8. 

This  form  was  obtained  by  Porter  at  Swain's  Conditional  Purchase  Lease, 
seven  miles  south-east  of  Carroll. 

Phillipsia  sp.  indet. 

A  fragment  of  a  small  pygidium  was  obtained  by  Benson,  four  miles  east  of 
Currabnbula.     It  has  unfortunately  since  been  lost. 


364  GEOLOGY    AND    PETKOLOGY   OF    THK   GREAT   SERPEXTISE    BELT   OF    N'.S.W., 

APPENDIX. 

Lower  Carboxiferous  Limesto.ve  Fossils  prom  New   South  Wales. 

By   Frederick   Chapmax,  A.L.S.,   Palaeontologist   to  the  Natioual   Museum   and 
Lecturer  on  Palaeontology,  Melbourne  University. 

(With  Plate  xxiv.,  figs.  1-8.) 

A  tew  months  ago  Dr.  W.  X.  Benson  forwarded  for  my  inspection  a  rock 
specimen  composed  largely  of  tlie  eorallum  of  a  species  of  Chaetetes,  from  the 
parish  of  Moorowarra,  New  South  Wales.  Accompanying:  these  were  some  thin 
slides  of  other  limestones  from  New  South  Wales,  including  three  apparently  new 
polyzoa  and  some  interesting  oolitic  structures.  At  Dr.  Benson's  re(|uest  I  have 
written  the  following  notes  on  these  minute  fossil  remains. 

PLANTAE. 
CYASOPllYCEAE    (Blue-green  Algae.) 
Genus  G  I  R  V  A  X  E  L  L  A  Nicholson  and  Etlieridge. 

GiRVAXELLA    .SP. 

Description. — The  granules  forming  an  oolitic  limestone  from  the  Lower 
Carboniferous,  represented  in  the  present  collection,  are  circular  to  ovoid  in  sec- 
tion. In  many  eases  the  filamentous  growth  ot'  which  they  are  formed  enwraps 
adventitious  particles  near  their  periphery,  as  distinct  from  the  nuclei,  and  which 
ai)parently  were  wasiied  against  the  grains  during  the  process  of  their  formation. 
This  precludes  any  idea  of  a  mere  chemical  deposition,  as  it  denotes  a  tiiread-like 
thallus,  free  at  the  extremity  during  its  winding-  growth  and  ready  to  tangle  on 
to  surrounding  fragments. 

The  structure  of  the  thallus  in  these  oolitic  grains  is  clearly  that  of  Girvan- 
ella,  although  the  preservation  is  such  as  to  present  some  difficulty  in  their  study 
under  high  powers.  The  thallus  consists  of  a  fine  tube,  whilst  here  and  there  in 
its  course  are  indications  of  strings  of  minute  globular  cells,  proliably  repro- 
ductive. 

The  nuclei  upon  which  the  pellets  are  moulded  consist  of  shell-fragments, 
pieces  of  Polyzoa,  ossicles  (arm  and  .stem  joints)  of  Crinoids  and  Echinoid  plates. 
A  four-rayed  sponge-spicule  is  also  present. 

Comparisons. — In  1900  ^\v.  G.  W.  Card,  A.K.S.l\r.,  gave  an  account  of 
"Oolitic  Limestones  from  Lion  Creek,  Stanwell,  near  Rockhainpton."*  In  this 
paper  Mr.  Card  describes  an  oolite  very  sinnlar  in  character  to  the  i>resent, 
formed  of  &irvaneUa  tubules  enwrapping  \arious  nuclei,  as  coral  traginents, 
<  rinoid  ossicles  and  other  organic  particles.  The  age  of  this  rock  is  either  Car- 
bopenniaii  or  Carboniferous.  From  the  occurrence  of  .'Lithtistrotion  and  some 
Cither  older-ranging  corals,  one  would  judge  Iho  balance  of  evidence  as  supi>ort- 
ing  a  CarlionifeiTOus  age. 

Mr.  Card  also  recordsf  oolitic  linicstniu's  Irnui  New  Soutli  Wales  and 
Queensland   i\s  follows : — 

'Queensland  Geol.  Surv.,  Bull.  12,  1900,  pp.25-32,  PI.  iii.  ~ 

iOp.  cU.  p..Sl. 


BY   W.    X.  BENSON^  W.    S.   DUX,  AXD   W.   li.    BEOWXE.  3(55 

1.  Yellow   Kock    Limestone,   Upper   Muswe'l    Creek,   Muswell    Brook,    N.S. 

Wales;  ])robably  of  Carboniferous  age. (*?) 

2.  Manning-    Kiver  N.S.     Wales,   containing    Foraminifera    and    of   similar 

geological  age.  ( "? ) 

3.  Bingara,  N.S.  Wales.     Of  Lower  Carboniferous  age.* 

4.  Rocky  Creek,  Horton  River,  N.S.  Wales  * 

5.  Mount  Siluria,  4  miles  S.W.  of  Gracemere,  W.  of  Rockhampton,  Queens- 

land. 

6.  Co.  Murehison,  Parish  of  Horton,  N.S.   Wales.* 

7.  Co.  MmThison,  Parish   of  Pallal.     {Girvanella.)* 

8.  Torryourn,  Paterson,  N.S.  Wales*. 

9.  Yass  District,  N.S.  Wales.     Upper  Silurian. 

The  present  specimens  closely  resemble  the  Stanwell  Oolites. 

Occurrence. — Lower  Carboniferous  Limestone.  Parish  of  Babbinboon,  N.S. 
Wales. 

Note. — Many  of  the  oolite  granules  sliow  the  presence  of  dolomite  crystals, 
probably  due  to  metasomatism,  and  perhaps  the  result  of  a  slight  deformation  of 
the  rock.  The  result  of  rock  movements  within  the  mass  is  seen  also  in  the  par- 
tial solution  of  the  granules  where  the  surfaces  under  greatest  pressure  have 
dissolved  or  become  etched ;  whilst  others  have  been  faulted  and  re-cemented. 

The  matrix  of  these  oolites  is  now  chiefly  calcitic.  All  the  grains  are  fairly 
evenly  spaced,  a  fact  probably  due  to  the  simultaneous  and  radial  crystallization 
of  the  original  aragonitic  deposit. 

ANTHOZOA. 

Sub-Order  Tabulata. 

Genus  Chaetetes  Fischer. 

Chaetetes  spinuliferus,  sp.  nov.     (Plate  xxiv.,  tigs.  1,  2.) 

Description. — Corallum,  massive,  growing  on  a  base  of  stony  or  argillaceous 
material  and  expanding  over  an  irregular  area. 

Corallites  tubular,  polygonal,  more  generally  pentagonal  or  tetragonal,  oc- 
casionally hexagonal,  and  sometimes  with  one  wall  incurved,  indicating  division  by 
fission;  multiplying  by  division  at  frequent  intervals,  radiating  and  strongly 
cur\'ed;  walls  fairly  thick  and  imperforate,  with  spinules  resembling  those  seen 
in  Alveolites.  Tabulae  numerous,  not  very  regular,  thin,  occasionally  incomplete. 
Diameter  of  corallites  averaging  about  1  mm.  Longest  diameter  of  corallites 
(worn  and  incomplete),  8  cm. 

Relationships. — The  strongly-curved  corallites  with  their  short  spinules,  best 
seen  in  longitudinal  section,  at  first  sight  recall  Alveolites.  The  calicular  orifices, 
liowever,  are  polygonal  and  not  lunate,  and  the  walls  are  not  perforated.  It  is  a 
true  tabulate  coral  since  the  tubes  are  all  of  one  kind  and  do  not  show  imperfect 
fusion  of  the  walls  as  in  the  Montieuliporoids. 

There  is  an  interesting  species,  formerly  described  as  Chaetetes  petropoli- 
tanus  by  Lonsdale,  from  the  Ordovieian  of  Russia, t  which  (in  its  thin-walled  cor- 
allites and  irregularly  contracted  tubes  resembles  the  above  species;  it  differs, 
however,  in  having  no  spinous  projections  on  the  corallite  walls.      The  transverse 

•These  limestones  are  in  the  Burindi  formation  W.N.B. 

tMurchison,  Geol.  of  Russia  (Corals  by  Lonsdale),  Vol.  i.,  1845,  p. 596,  PI.  A,  figs.lO, 
10<(. 


3(j6  CiEOLCXJY    AXl)   PETHOLOGY   OK    TllK    (iHKAT    SKliPEXTIXK    BELT   OF    X.S.W., 

\iew  of  tile  eorallites  in  the  Russian  species  is  not  given,  liut  tliey  are  saiil  to  be 
polygonal  and  in'egularly  arranged.  The  species  has  since  been  referred  to  Man- 
ticuUpora  on  account  of  its  double-walled  structure. 

Undoubtedly  the  nearest  allied  form  is  the  ''Alveolites''  septosa  Milne  Ed- 
wards and  Haime,t  a  coral  described  from  the  Mountain  Limestone  (Upper  Car- 
boniferous) of  Corwen,  near  Bristol,  Lee  in  Northumberland,  in  Westmoreland, 
Derbyshire  and  Ireland;  also  at  Novgorod,  Russia.  Chaetetes  septosus  M.  Edw. 
and  Haime  sp.  has  been  shown  by  Messrs.  Nicholson  and  Etheridget  to  belong 
to  the  genus  Chaetetes  and  not  to  Alveolites.  That  species  differs  from  the  i)re- 
sent  Chaetetes  spinuliferus  in  the  greater  development  of  the  septal  teeth  and 
spines  seen  in  vertical  section  at  or  near  the  junction  of  the  tabulae,  and  also  in  the 
more  irregular  growth  of  the  eorallite  walls,  which  in  C.  septosus  are  nearly 
uniformly  parallel.  The  form  of  the  eorallites  in  transverse  section  and  the 
development  of  the  septal  tooth  are  in  both  species  nearly  comparable . 

Occurrence. — Lower  Carboniferous  Limestone.  Parish  of  Moorowarra,  New 
South  Wales. 

POLYZOA. 

Order  CYCLOSTOMATA. 

Genus  Fistulipoea  McCoy. 
FiSTULipORA  iiicROscopicA,  sp .    uov.     (Plate  sxiv..  fig.   8.) 

Description. — Zoarium  small,  parasitic  or  encrusting;  more  or  less  lamellate; 
zooecial  tubes  sparsely  tabulate,  open  and  flexuose;  interspaces  with  two  or  more 
series  of  vesicles.  Diameter  of  zooecial  tubes,  .13  mm,  diameter  of  vesicular 
cells,  .08  mm.;  height  of  zoarium,  2.5  mm. 

The  zoarium  is  seated  on  a  base  of  calcareous  algae  and  is  in  turn  overgrown 
by  a  similar  organism.  The  zooecial  opening's  are  not  clearly  seen,  but  all  other 
structures  point  to  its  being  a  typical  FistuVporu,  although  of  such  snuill  ilinu-ii- 
sious. 

Comparisons. — This  species  resembles  Hexagonella*  another  of  the  Fistuli- 
porids,  in  structure,  but  is  more  minute  and  is  not  dendroid  in  habit  of  growth. 
The  interzooeeial  tissue  is  more  horizontally  extended  in  vertical  section,  and  the 
mesopores  are  larger  than  in  Fistulipora  incrustans  Phillips  sp.,$  which  our  spe- 
cies otherwise  much  resembles.  Moreover,  F.  incrustans  is  a  larger  form,  having  zooe- 
cia  of  twice  the  diameter  of  /•'.  microscopica.  It  is  interesting  to  note  that  F.  in- 
crustans is  also  a  Carboniferous  species,  being  found  in  the  Carboniferous  Lime- 
stone of  Yorkshire,  Northumberland,  Derbyshire,  West  of  Scotland,  and  Ireland. 

Occurrence. — In  Lower  Carboniferous  Limestone.  Parish  of  Mcorowarra. 
New  South  Wales. 

Genus  C  ViC  I.  o  I  n  o  T  R  Y  p  a,  gen.  nov. 

Zoarium  adnate  or  encrusting  and  repent;  filling  up  intei-stices  in  sliells,  etc. 
Apertures  of  surface  maculae  sub-circular;  vesicrdar  tissue  not  well  developed. 

tMon.  Pal.  See,  vi.,  1852,  p.l57,  PI.  xlv.,  figs.S,  5a,  b. 

JJoui'n.  Linn.  Soc.  Lend.,  xiii.,  1877,  p. 365. 

'.See  Hinde,  Geol.  Mas-,  Dec.  iii..  Vol.  vii.,  1890,  p.aoo,  Pl.viii.,  fig.ti;  Pl.viiia.,  fi'jcs. 
5,  5a-d. 

gPhillips,  Geol.  Yorkshire,  Pt.  ii.,  18.36,  p.200,  PI.  i.,  figs.63,  64  ( Calamofiora  iii- 
rnis/'ins).     A/so  Nicholson  and  Foord.  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  ser.5,  vol.xvi..  1885,  p.500. 


nV    \V.    N.    BEXSOX,    W.    S.    DIX,    AXD    \V.    R.    BROWNE.  3(j7 

CrcLOiDOTRYPA  AUSTRALis,  geii.  et  sp.  uov.     (Plate  xxiv.,  flg-s,  3,  4.) 

Description. — Zoarium  encrusting;  surface  maculae  sub-circular,  slightly 
larger  than  the  surrdundiug  zooecial  tubes.  Vesicular  tissue  ra»'e.  Tabulae  very 
irregularly  developed.  Diameter  of  a  typical  zoarium,  about  7  nun.;  diameter  of 
a  macula,  .33  mm. 

Observations. — Tliis  genus  is  of  later  appearance  than  the  typical  Ci/clotri/pa 
(Devonian  of  North  America).  The  character  of  the  central  zooecial  openings 
(maculae),  being  typically  sub-circular  or  ovoid,  as  -well  as  the  open-structured 
and  rare  vesicular  tissue,  seem  to  distingiiish   thri   Lower  Carboniferous  fossil. 

Occurrence. — Lower  Carboniferous.  Parish  of  Moorowarra,  New  South 
Wales. 

Order   TREPOSTOMATA. 

Genus  li  .V  I,  L  o  IM)  R  A  Bassler  (Callopora  J.  Hall  pre-occupied.) 
Hallopok'a  froticosa,  sp.  nov.     (Plate  xxiv.,  figs.  5,  6,  7.) 

Description. — Zoarium  at  first  encrusting,  then  bluntly  ramose  or  bushy. 
Zooecia  sub-circular  or  ovoid,  surrounded  by  polygonal  mesopores,  sometimes  very 
abundantly  developed.  Zooecia  tabulate  at  distant  intervals;  mesopcres  tilled 
with  vesicular  tabulae.  Walls  of  zooecia  thick,  of  the  mesopores  thin.  Dia- 
meter of  a  branch,  3.4  mm.;  diameter  of  zooecia,  circ.    .33  mm. 

Occurrence. — Lower  Carboniferous.  Parish  of  Moorowarra.  New  South 
Wales. 

Note. — The  range  of  this  genus  in  North  America  is  from  the  Ordovician  to 
the  Devonian. 

(ii.)  A  Comparison   of  the  Burindi   Fauna   v.-ith   the  Lower  Carboniferous 
Faunal  Succession  in  the  British  Isles. 

(W.  N.  Benson.) 

The  discussion  of  the  Burindi  Beds  in  an  earlier  paper  in  this  series  laid 
stress  on  the  fact  (first  brought  to  the  writer's  notice  by  Dr.  Stanley  Smith)  that 
the  occurrence  of  Lithostrotion  in  this  series  uf  beds  indicates  that  some  portions 
at  least  of  it  are  newer  than  the  lowest  Carboniferous  rocks.  As  remarked  (p. 
269),  "Dr.  Vaughan  (37)  states,  e.g.,  'Lithostrotion  both  massive  and  dendroid, 
enters  the  early  Visean'  (Upper  Moiety  of  the  Lower  Carboniferous)  'in  North 
America,  Britain  and  Belgium.  It  may  be,  therefore,  that  the  true  base  of  the 
Carboniferous  System  lies  at  some  unrecognisable  horizon  in  the  Barraba  Mud- 
stone.  For  the  purpose  of  mapping,  however,  the  base  of  the  Burindi  Series 
is  the  lowest  recognisable  horizon  that  can  be  traced." 

One  of  the  objects  of  the  detailed  palaeontological  study  of  these  beds  was  to 
discover  its  bearing  upon  this  point.  For  this  purpose,  the  stratigiaphically 
classified  lists  of  Carboniferous  forms  given  by  Davidson  for  Scotland  (31)  and 
by  the  late  Dr.  Vauv:luin  (34,  35.  36,  37,  38,  39),*  Sibly  (40,  41,  42,  43),  Douglas 
(44).  Garwood  (45).  and  Parsons  (46)  have  been  examined  to  ascertain  the 
position  of  forms  with  representatives  in  New  South  Wales.  The  results  hav-e 
been  noted  in  regard  to  Britisli  forms  described  on  the  previous  pages.  The 
significance    may    be    considered  briefly.     The   stratigraphical    classification     and 

•Unfortunately  tlie  modern  investigation  of  the  Carboniferous  Eocks  of  Bela;iuni  by 
Carpentier,  Delpine  and  Dordolot,  cited  by  Vauglian  (39),  are  not  accessible  to  the  writer 
at  the  present  time. 


3G8 


GEOLOGY    AND   PETROLOGY    OF    THE   GliEAT    SERPEXTIXE    BELT   OP    X.S.W., 


notation  adopted  by  Dr.  \auj;lian  has  not  yet  been  applied  to  Australian  Geology. 
In  most  simplified  form  we  may  record  it  thus: — 

Lower  Carboniferous^ — Avonian  Series. 

(=  Dinantian  =  Mississippian. ) 


Tournaisian 


X'isean 


Cleistopora 


Zaphrentis 


I    _    I 
Cnninia 


I 
Dibunophylliuu 


Syringothyris 


Seminula 


I  !  I  1  I  I  i  I  I 

Lower  l^ipi)er         Lower   Upper     Lower   Upper       Lower  Upper         Lower   Upper 
Ki  K2  Zi  Z2         Ci  C2  Si  S2  Di  1)2 

The  division  between  tlie  Tournaisian  and  the  A'isean  was  i)laced  at  first 
between  the  Syringothyris  and  Seminula  Zones  (Si),  but  now  part  of  the  Upju'r 
Syringothyris  Zone,  C'l',  is  inclu<lfd  by  Vaughan  and  the  Helgian  authorities  in 
Ihe  Visean   (39). 

The  braohiopods  afford  our  best  grou])  of  forms  for  comparison  with  British 
types  on  account  of  the  better  determination.  Out  of  twenty-three  species  oc- 
curring in  the  Somerton.  Carroll  and  Habbinboon  region,  the  following  are  found 
in  the  British  Isles,  together  with  the  highest  and  lowest  horizon  recorded  for 
each  in  England  and  Ireland  by  workers  publishing  since  1905.  In  the  second 
column  are  Davidson's  records  for  Scotland  in  1880,  referred  as  far  as  possible 
to  the  new  terminology. 

Orthotetes  crenistria  and  varieties Ki  to  Di; 

and  M.G.VS 

Chunetes  harArensis Ki  to  C2  (Da) 

I'ruductus  hemisphericus Si  to  D2 

longispiniii S2  to  D2  (Ki?)t 

muricatus , Di  (M.G.)^ 

pusiulosun Z2  to  Di 

semirctictihili(f:\\ Zi  to  D2 

(and  M.G.*vN)    (Ki  '    M.G.)§ 

Orthis    {Schii<iphori(i)    resujiimita Z2  to  Di  (Ki  ?) 

Rhynchonella  pleurodoii     Di  (Ki  '?) 

Dielasma  hasUittiin Ci  to  Di  (Ki  ?) 

sacculum      Si 

'See  (31),  p. 251,  but  this  may  be  a  phase  of  Di. 

fKi  ?  ^  Calciferous  Sandstone. 

§M.G.  =  MiUstone  Grit. 

il  Passes  into  Upper  Carboniferous  in  Rvissta. 


BT   W.    K.    BENSON,   W.    S.    UUX,   AND   W.    R.    BROWNE.  369 

Sfiirifera  hisuicata C2  to  D-j 

andM.G.  (Id?) 

duphcoftata Di  t(i  D2 

mosquenxh  var*     D2  (l.C.) 

pinguis Ci   td  Ta 

striata] Ci  to  D2 

Spiriferiiia   >i:sci(lpl'<i ('i  to  D2 

Actiiiocoiichwi  phduisiilcdtux Ri   to  D2 

Perhaps  the  best  manner  to  obtain  an  approximate  idea  of  the  average  horizon 
of  such  a  fauna  is  to  accord  numerical  values  to  the  zones  from  Ki  {=  1)  to  D2 
(=10),  and  obtain  thus  the  arithmetical  average  position  of  the  Burindi  fauna  by 
comparison  with  the  modern  British  work.  It  is  then  found  that  the  Burindi 
fauna  centres  in  the  Si  (the  Lower  Semirmla)  zone,  near  the  base  of  the  Visean. 
If,  however,  we  consider  also  the  older  Scottish  records  and  place  a  value  of  12 
on  the  Millstone  Grit,  and  14  on  a  form  rising  higher  than  this  we  find  the  same 
result. «  Comparing  this  with  our  Australian  faunae  we  may  note  that  the  fact 
tliat  Bhynchonella  pleurodon  descends  into  the  Upper  Devonian  may  be  balanced 
against  the  ascent  of  Dielasma  saeculum  var.  hastata,  and  var.  ami/gdala  to  the 
higher  parts  of  the  Upper  Marine  Permo-Carbouiferous  Series. 

Quite  in  accordance  with  this  conclusion  we  may  note  that  Michehnia  temii- 
septa  which  occurs  in  our  region,  ranges  in  Great  Britain  from  Z2  to  Di,and  that 
Seminula  subtilita,  though  it  occurs  in  the  Tournaisian  of  Belgium  and  its  equiva- 
lent in  America,  and  is  sometimes  in  the  equivalent  of  the  Visean  Beds;  it  is 
chiefly  found  in  the  Upper  Carboniferous  Formations  of  that  continent.  More- 
over, there  appears  at  several  localities  in  Great  Britain,  in  the  Middle  of  the 
Lower  Carboniferous  Beds  (C  and  S  zones),  a  great  influx  of  species  of  gastro- 
pods, particularly  Eiiomphalus,  Bellerophon,  Lo-conema,  Straparolhis  and  Nati- 
copsis,  genera  also  well  represented  in  the  Burindi  fauna.  It  is  questionable, 
however,  whether  this  is  a  factor  of  correlative  ^alue,  being  possibly  indueiu'cd  by 
the  general  shallowing  of  the  British  province  at  this  epoch. 

A  wider  study  of  the  Burindi  fauna  shows  a  somewhat  similar  result.  In  a 
later  part  of  this  series  of  papers  the  writer  hopes  to  give  a  complete  census  of 
the  Burindi  fauna  as  far  as  is  known  for  the  legion  extending  from  Port  Ste- 
phens to  the  Gwydir  River  near  Moree  (Graveseud).  We  may.  liowevi  r.  antici- 
pate this  by  stating  the  results  of  study  of  the  ranges,  so  far  as  the  writer  can 
ascertain  them,  in  tlie  British  Isles  of  the  remaining  brachiopods  that  also  occur 
in  the  Burindi  fauna  in  New  South  Wales.  The  following  are  stated  in  the 
same  way  as  before: — 

Orblculoidea  r.ithla Ci  U.C.M.|| 

Leptaena  analor/a Ki  to  D2 

Chovetes  la<piefsiaiia Ki  to  Z2 

papiUonacea  (and  varieties) Zi  to  Si 

•According  to  Freeh  this  passes  into  the  Upper  Carboniferous. 

fPasses  into  the  Upper  Carboniferous  in  Russia. 

§In  this  'calculation  it  is  assumed  that  all  forms  recorded  from  the  Calciferous  Sand- 
stone extend  as  low  as  Kl.  If,  as  may  well  be  the  case,  this  assumption  is  not  strictly 
true,  the  average  Burindi  horizon  would  then  be  somewhat  higher  than  indicated  above. 

IIU.C.M.   Upper  Coal  Measures. 


370  OEOI.(Wy   .\XD    PKTROi.OGY    OF    TIIK   CRKAT   SERPEX'TINK    UELT   OK    N.S.W., 

Piotluctus  acuieatu^     Z:;   tn   D:;  (Ki   .') 

cora* Z2  to  Di  (Ki?) 

fimbriatus Si  tci  Di 

flemiiigii   (==    burrmfiiiiiuns.s)    ..    ..       K2  to  Ci 

pHiictatWi Ci  to  Si  (Ki  ■?) 

scabriculus Ci  to  Di  (Ivi  ?) 

loidatus Viseant 

Reticularia  lineata Zi  to  D2 

Spiriferina  octoplicatat Ki  to  Ci 

Ci/rtina  carhotiaria Si  to  Di 

The  a\eiage  position  of  this  fauna,  calculated  in  the  same  manner  as  be- 
fore, is  in  the  middle  of  the  Lower  Siirinr/iitht/ria  zone,  Ci,  or,  if  we  take  into 
account  the  Scottish  records,  the  result  is  merely  to  bring  the  average  down  to  the 
base  of  the  same  zone.  Combining  the  two  lists  we  reach  as  an  average  derived 
from  the  thirty-one  British  lirachiopods  in  the  Burindi  Series,  a  horizon  in  the 
middle  of  the  Upper  Syri)igothiiri<<  zone,  or  as  nearly  as  possible  on  the  dividing 
line  between  the  Tournaisian  and  Yisean.  This  accords  with  Professor  David's 
view  that  the  Burindi  Series  is  approximately  coeval  with  the  Osage  Series  (Midille 
Mississippian),  the  Burdiehouse  Limestone  of  Scotland,  the  Visean  System  of 
Europe  and  perhapi^  the  Lipak  Series  of  Spiti  in  the  Himalayas  (4).  Analysing 
the  lists  more  closely,  we  may  point  out  that  Spiriferina  oclnplieatci.  occurring  m 
the  Clarencetown  district,  is  confined  to  the  Tournaisian,  and  particularly  charac- 
terises the  zone  K2.  Orthis  resupinata,  though  it-',  mutations  extend  to  the  Dilrnvn- 
phyllum  zone,  is  characteristically  abundant  in  Z2,  and  Leptaena  ano'topa  and 
Ch'Onetes  papilionacea,  both  most  common  in  tlie  southern  region,  are  chiefly  con- 
fined to  the  Tournaisian  in  Britain,  though  Parsons  records  the  former  as  com- 
mon in  the  D2  zone  in  Leicestersliire.^  On  the  other  hand,  the  Productids,  with 
the  exception  of  P.  flemingii,  are  almost  all  Visean,  and  the  exclusively  Visean 
foi'uis  of  Lithiist ration  appear  in  the  northern,  but  not  so  far  as  it  is  yet  known 
with  certainty,  in  the  southern  region  of  tlie  Burindi  Series.  There  is,  therefore, 
perhaps  some  reason  to  hope  that  as  the  detailed  stratigraphical  study  of  the 
Burindi  Beds  proceeds,  accompanied  by  refined  palaeontological  work,  a  regular 
succession  of  faunal  zones  may  be  shown  to  exist  in  this  State  as  elsewhere.  Such 
investigation,  however,  will  he  particularly  difficult  in  the  absence  of  much  or 
regular  variation  in  the  lithology  of  the  Burindi  locks. 

It  is  of  interest  to  recall  the  great  contribution  to  this  study  made  by  Pro- 
fessor De  Koninck  over  forty  years  ago.  Summarising  his  study  of  the  Car- 
boniferous fauna  of  the  State  he  said,  "In  order  to  deduce  from  the  collection  of 
species  described  the  stratification  of  the  formations  which  have  furnished  them, 
I  have  had  to  confine  myself  to  the  use  of  the  eighty-one  European  species  repre- 

'P.  cora  extends  into  the  Upper  Carboniferous  (Uralian)  Series  in  Russia. 

fProdiif/iis  undafits  occurs  in  the  Upper  and  Lower  Limestone  Series  of  Scotland 
^Visean. 

Jin  regard  to  Spiriferina  oc/oplicala.  Davidson  regards  it  as  oonspecific  with  a 
smaller  form  Sf>.  crislahi  in  the  Permian  and  accojits  the  former  name.  (Brit.  Carb. 
Kracli.,  18(;3,  p.2t>7).  Later  (Suppl.,  1880,  p. 2,58),  he  revives  ocfoplicala  as  a  varietal 
name,  and  some  modern  British  workers  consider  it  as  of  specific  value.  Mr.  Dun  remarks : 
(1902,  p. 88)  "it  appears  that  the  term  ocloplicata  is  of  more  value  from  a  stratigraphical 
than  from  a  palaeontolowiciil  point  of  view."  Recent  British  work  shows  how  important 
is  the  stratigraphical  signifiance  of  this  variety  or  species. 

§  Dr.  Wheelton  Hind,  however,  is  of  the  opinion  that  the  beds  studied  by  Parsons 
should  be  assigned  to  the  Seinimila  zone  (4f)A). 


BY    AT.    X.    BENSOX^   W.    S.    DUX,   AXD    W.    R.    BROWXE.  371 

M'uted  among-  them  and  to  study  the  beds  in  which  they  were  found.  This  exam- 
ination has  proved  to  nie  that  twenty-two  of  these  are  common  to  the  upper, 
niiildle,  and  lower  beds  of  the  Carboniferous  Limestone;  thirty-six  belong  ex- 
clusively to  the  upi^er  beds;  five  or  six  to  the  upper  or  middle  beds;  and  six  or 
seven  to  the  lower  beds.  It  must  be  observed  that  while  the  thirty-six  species  of 
the    upper    beds    contain    a  small  number  of    characteristic    species,     .... 

the  middle  and  lower  beds  furnish  no  decidedly  characteristic  species 

I  believe  then  that  1  am  right  in  concluding  that  the  most  of  the  Carboniferous 
rocks  of  New  South  Wales  belong  to  the  upper  beds,  that  a  part  .  .  .  may 
belong  to  the  middle  beds,  and  that,  if  the  lower  beds  are  represented  at  all,  it  is 
only  by  some  insignificant  spots  where  fossils  are  rare."  (30).  Perhaps  it  was 
because  of  the  speedy  recognition  that  these  fossils  came  in  part  from  what  we 
now  term  Permo-Carboniferous  beds,  this  very  important  conclusion  of  De 
Kouinck  has  been  almost  entirely  overlooked.  Vet  if  we  confine  attention  to  the 
fossils  as  described  by  De  Koninck,  which  come  merely  from  the  Carboniferous 
localities  shown  in  the  list  appended  by  Professor  David  to  the  oflfleial  translation 
of  De  Kouinck's  Memoir,  we  find  that  there  are  sixty-one  European  forms  recog- 
nised by  him.  Setting  aside  from  these  sixteen,  as  being  questionable  identifica- 
tions, and  four  the  horizons  of  which  are  not  specified,  there  remain  forty-one 
usable  determinations,  of  which  twenty-four  are  of  brachiopods.  We  find  that  of 
these  forms,  nine  range  throughout  the  Carboniferous  Limestone,  of  v  hich  four 
are  more  abundant  in  the  upper  beds,  four  are  chiefly  in  the  lower  beds,  one  in 
the  middle  beds ;  five  forms  occur  in  both  the  middle  and  upper  beds,  and  twenty- 
two  are  almost  wholly  in  the  upper  portion  of  the  Carboniferous  Limestone.  On 
De  Koninck's  showing,  therefore,  the  Burindi  fsuna  is  a  very  distinctly  Visean 
one.  The  difference  between  his  conclusions  and  those  now  put  forward  is  to  be 
explained  by  the  increased  knowledge  that  has  l)een  gained  during  the  forty  years 
that  have  elapsed  since  De  Koninck's  work.  It  has  thus  been  shown,  for  example, 
that  nine  of  the  brachiopods  considered  by  him  typically  of  Upper  Carboniferous 
Limestone  age.  descend  also  into  the  middle  portion,  and  that  four  of  them  (L. 
analoga,  C.  laguessiana.  C.  papilionaaea,  and  5'.  cristata  (octoplicata)  are  really 
most  characteristic  of  the  lower  portion  of  the  Carboniferous  Limestone.  Pro- 
bably similar  adjustments  would  be  required  in  other  groups. 

It  has  been  a  pleasure  to  the  writer  to  bear  tribute  to  the  excellence  of  the 
pioneering  work  of  the  Rev.  W.  B.  Clarke,  whose  footsteps  he  has  now  followed 
from  Crawney  to  Warialda ;  he  has  an  added  gratification  in  bringing  into  clearer 
liaht  than  before  the  remarkable  residts  of  the  investigations  of  the  Rev.  W.  B. 
Clarke's  collections  of  Carboniferous  fossils  published  over  forty  years  ago  by  his 
distinguished  Belgian  colleagTie,  Professor  L.  G.  De  Koninck,  of  Liege. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY.' 

4.   David.  T.  W.  E.,  and  Sussmilch,  C.  A. — Sequence,  Glaciation  and  Correla- 
tion of  the  Carboniferous  Rocks  of  the  Hunter  River  District,  New 
South  Wales.      -Tourn.   Proc.   Roy.    Soc.   N.S.W.,   liii.,   1919    (1920), 
pp.  246-338. 
9.   "Mitchell,   T.  L. — Three  Expeditions   into  tie  Interior   of   Eastern  Australia. 

London,   1838. 
30.   DE  Koxixc'K,  I.,    (t. — Reeherches  sur  le-;  fossiles  paleozoiques  des  Nouvelle — - 
Galles  du  sud   (Australie).     Mem.   Soc.   Roy.   Sci.   Liege,  3870-1877. 


3/2      GEOLOGV  AXD  PETROLOGY  OP  THE  GREAT  SERPENTINE  BELT  OF  N.S.W., 

2  (ii.j.  Translated  as  Descriptions  of  the  Palaeozoic  Possils  of 
New  South  Wales,  Australia.  Mem.  Geol.  Surv.  N.S.W.,  Pal.  No.  6, 
1898.  (References  are  given  to  the  pages  of  the  translation, 
throughout  this  paper. ) 

31.  Davidson,  T. — A  Monograph  of  P.ritish  Fossil  ISrachioiKHla.  Supplement.  Part 

iii.,  1880. 

32.  Freoh,  F.— Lethea  Palaeozoica,  Bd.  ii.,  18<)7-19()2. 

33.  GiiABAU,  A.   W.,  and  Siiimer,  H. — North  American  Index  Fossils. 

34.  Xaighan,  a. — The  Palaeontological  Sequence  of  the  Carboniferous  Rocks  in 

the  Bristol  Area.     Quart.  Jouru.  Geol.  Soc.  Ixi.,  1905,  pp.  181-304. 

35.   and  Matley,    C.    A. — The  Carboniferous    Rocks  at    Rush.  County 

Dublin.     Loc.  cit.,  Ixii.,  1900,  pp.  275-322. 

36. .     The     Carboniferous    Rocks     at     Loughshinny,     County 

Dublin.     Loc.  cit.,  Ixiv.,  1908,  pp.  413-472. 

37.  and  Reynolds,  S.  H. — The  Avonian  of  Burrington  Combe.  Somer- 
set.   Loc  cit.,  Ixvii.,  1911,  pp.  342-392. 

38.  and  Dixon,    E.   E.    L. — The   Carboniferous    Succession   iu    (lower. 

Loc.  cit.,  Ixvii.,  1911,  pp.  477-571. 

39. The   Correlation  of    the    Diiiantian    and   Avonian.     Loc.   cil.,    Ixxi.. 

1915,  pp.  1-49. 

40.  Sim.Y,    T.     F. — The     Carboniferous    Limestone   of  the    Weston-Su|)('r-Mare 

District.     Ldc.   cit.,  Ixi.,  1905,  ]>.   561. 

41.  The   Carboniferous    Limestone     (Avonian)     of   the    Mendi|>    Area, 

Somerset.     Loc.  cit.,  Ixii.,  190(i,   |)p.  324-378. 

42.   The  Faunal  Succession  in  the  Carboniferous  Linic^tonc  nl'  the  ^fid- 

land  Area.     Loc.  cit.,  Ixiv.,  1908,  pp   34-80. 

43. and  Dixky,  F. — The  Carboniferous  Limestone  Series  on  tiie  south- 
eastern Margin  of  the  South  Wales  Coalfield.  Loc.  cit  ,  Ixxviii., 
1917,  pp.  111-160. 

44.  Douglas,    J.    A. — The    Carboniferous    Liuu'stone  of  County    Clare,   Ireland. 

Loc.  cit..  Ixv.,  1909,  pp.  538-583. 

45.  Garwood,  E.    J. — The  Lower  Carboniferous  Succession  in  the  nor(l'.-west  of 

England.     Loc.  cit.,  Ixviii.,  1912,  pii.  449-582. 

46.  Parsons^    L.    M. — On     the    Carbonifenms    Limestone     of   the     Leicestershire 

Coalfield.     Quart.  Journ.  Geol.  So..,  Ixxviii.,  1917,  pp.  84-110. 
40r(.   Smith,   S. — On  Aphrophi/Utitti   halloine,  gen.   et   sp.   nnv.   and    Lithnstmlion 

from  the  neighbourhood  of  Bingara,  N.S.W.     Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  X.S. 

Wales,  liv.,  1920. 
40?).  TT:xn.  W.— Letter  in  Geol.,  Mag.,  1918,  i..  480. 


EXPLANATION  OF   PLATES   XVIIt.    XXIV. 

Plate  xviii. 
Aiins^dalop/iylluiii  li/icriiii;/'!.  gen.  et  sp.  uov. 

1.  Complete  CoraUuin.     (x  f). 

2.  Transverse  section  sliowing  the  manner  in  wliioli  tlie  septa  are  crushed  against  the 

large  pointed-oval  columella,      (x  2). 
'■^.     Transverse  section  near  tip  of  corallum.      (.x  2). 

4.     Transverse  section  showing  "oolitic  structure"  of  the  columella.      (x2). 
.").     Vertical  section  showing  dissopimental  and  taLular  portions  and  columella.    (x2). 


BY  W.   N.   BENSON,  W.   S.   DUN,  AND   W.   R.    BROWNE.  373 

Fii,'.  fi.     Enlarged  transverse  section  of  the  columella  showing  the  median  plate,  and  the 
relation  of  the  radial  portions  of  the  columella  to  the  septa,      (x  5i). 
Locality. — Babbinboon. 

Plate  xix. 

Lower  Carboniferous   (Burindi)  fossils  from  S.E.  Babbinboon  (except  tig.  1.).     All 
figures  natural  size,  except  fig.  K{.  • 

Fig.     1.     Car/arn'iii/s  Aron'iiei,  sp.  nov.     Cast  of  specimen  obtained  four  miles  east  of 

Currabubula. 

2.  Proditr/tis  sei/iiriiini/a/ns  (Martin).     Lateral  aspect. 

3.  .,  ,.  Pedicle  valve  of  same  specimen  as  Fig.  2. 

4.  ,,  ,,  tJmbonal  aspect. 

5.  ,,  ,,  Pedicle  valve  of  same  specimen  as  Fig.  4. 

6.  ,.  ,,  Pedicle  valve. 

7.  ,.  ,,  Lateral  aspect  of  same  specimen  as  Fig.  o. 

8.  Prodiictus  lunnispliaericiis  (Sowei'by).     Lateral  aspect. 

9.  Ortliis  (Rhipidoinella)  austratis  (McCoy).     Brachial  valve. 
UK      Otlliis  (Sc/iizoplioria)  vesupiiiala   (Martin).     Pedicle  valve. 

11.  ,,  ,.  ,,  Another  specimen,  pedicle  valve. 

12.  Dielasma  sacciitiiiii  var.   /laslata   (Sowerby).     Lateral  aspect. 
,,     13.     An  [ndetermiuate  Rhynchonellid.      (x  3). 

Plate  XX. 

Lonei-  Carliouiferous  (Burindi)  fossils  from  S.E.  Babbinboon.    All  figures  natural  size. 

Fig-.     1.     Spiri/cra    s/riata  (Sowerby).     Pedicle  aspect. 

2.  ,,  ,,  Brachial  aspect. 

3.  ,.  ,,  Pedicle  aspect. 

4.  Spirifera  cf.  inoiqitensis  (Fischer).     Brachial  aspect. 

5.  ,,  ,,  Lateral  aspect. 
().             ,,                          ,.                        Pedicle  aspect 

7.  Spirifera  strinlo-coiixv/iita,  sp.  nov.     Pedicle  aspect. 

8.  ,,  ,,  Brachial  aspect. 

9.  Spirifera  pini^uis  (Sowerby).     Pedicle  aspect. 

10.  ,,  ,,  Another  example,  petlicle  aspect. 

11.  Spirifera  piiiguis  var.  elongaia,  var.  nov.     Pedicle  aspect. 

Plate  .xxi. 
Lower  Carboniferous  (Burindi)  fossils,  all  from  S.E.  of  Biibbinboon,  excejjt  Fig.  10. 

Fig.     1.     Spirifera  hisulcala  (Sowerby).     Pedicle  aspect,     (xi). 

2.  Seminula   snbtilita    (Hall).         Brachial   aspect,      (x^). 

3.  ,,  ,.  Pedicle  aspect,      (x^). 

4.  ,,  ,.  Lateral  aspect,      (x^). 

5.  Actinoconchus  planostilcata  (Phillips).     Pedicle  aspect,     (nat.  size). 
().  ,,  ,,  Pedicle  aspect  of  another  example,    (nat.  size). 

7.  Parallelodon  carnei,  sp.  nov.     (x  3). 

8.  Kochia  stria/a,  sp.  nov.     (nat.  size). 

9.  Sea/dia,  sp.  indet.      (nat.  size). 

10.  Panenka  porteri,  sp.  nov.     Carroll,     (xi). 

11.  Cross-sections  of  a  bundle  of  roots  of  an  indeterminate  form  of  plant  in  the  top 
of  the  Burindi  or  base  of  the  Kuttung  Series,      (x  2). 

12.  Enlarged  microplmtograph  of  one  root-section,      (x  7). 


374 


GEOI-OGT  AND  PETROLOGT  OF  THE  GREAT  SERPEXTIXE  BELT  OF  X.S.TV. 


Plate  xxii. 
Lower  Carboniferous  (Burimli)  fossils  from  District  of  Somerton,   Babbinboon  and  Carroll. 
Pi?.     1.     Mourlonia.     Parish  of  Moorowarra.     (nat.  size). 

2.     Gosseletina  vnictayi ,  sp-  nov.     S.E.  Babbinboon.     (x^). 
•i.     Gosseletiiia  .fro///,  sp.  nov.     S.E.  Babbinboon.    (.x^). 

4.  „  ,,  Another  view  of  the  same  specimen  as  Fiu;.  :i     (xi). 

..   .5.  &  ti.    Gosseletina  ai/s/rci/is  var.  a//a,  var.  nov.     S.E.  Babbinboon.      (xi). 

7.     Porcellia  pearsi    (Eth.    fil.)     Somerton.      (x^). 
,,       8.     NatiiOpsis  brevispira  Ryckholt.     Carroll,     (x  3). 

9.     Euomphalus  carrollenais,  sp.  nov.     Carroll,     (nat.  size). 
..     10.     S/raparollus  daviilis,  sp.  nov.     Carroll,     (xf). 
,.   11.  A  12.  Loxonema  sp.  intlet.     S.E.  Babbinboon.     (x^). 

I.'?.     Naticopsis  obliqua,  sp.  nov.     S.E.  Babbinboon.     (xi). 
..      14-  „  ,.  ,,  „  (x|). 

..   1.").  k  Hi.  Xaticopsis  glohosa  Hoeninghaus.  S.E.  Babbinboon.     (x  \). 

Plate   xxiii. 
Lower  Carboniferovis  (Burindi)  fos.sils  from  the  Somerton  District. 
Proditctus  w/«)7Vi;///i  (Phillips)  from  S.E.  Babbinboon.   Brachial  aspect.    (x2). 
,,  .,  Lateral  aspect  of  pedicle  valve,      (xi). 

Pedicle  aspect,      (xi). 
Spirifeia  dnplieicostata  (Phillips)  Reg.  No.  G.S.  H)52  Somerton.     (nat.  size). 
Spaihetla  sp.  indet.     Mt.  Uriari.      (xi). 


Fi 


1. 


ti.  Posit/on !e//<i /  sp.  inAet.     S.E.  Babbinboon.     (xi). 

7.  Spathella  sp.  indet.     Mt.  Uriari.     (x  J). 

8.  Sanguinoli/es  iriradiatus,  sp.    nov.     Mt.  Uriari.     (xi). 

9.  Phaiieio/reiita  niistralis  yax.  nl/a,  \.\.v.  now    Viewed  from  above.    Moorowarra. 

(nat.  size). 

10.  Phanerotreuia  aiistralis  y&r.  alta.     Lateral  view.     (nat.  size). 

..     11.  Sanguiitolites  sp.  indet.     Moorowarra.     (x^). 

12.  Ptycoiiiphaliis  culleiii,  sp.  nov.     Moorowarra.      (nat.  size). 

i;f.  Phanerotreinata  aus/ralis,  sp.  nov.     Moorowarra.     (nat.  size). 

1-1.  Ptycoinphalus.  culleni,  sp.  nov.     Moorowarra.     (nat.  size). 

Plate  xxiv. 
Piif.     I.     C/iaetetes    spiitiili/erus,    sp.   nov.      Transverse   section   of   coralhim,    showing 
irregular  character  of  ooraUites  and  septal  teeth.     Spec.  4491F.      (x  4). 
Chaetetes  spinuli/eriis,  sp.  nov.     Vertical  section  of  corallum,  showing  coral- 

lites  and  thin  tabulae.     Spec.  4491 F.      (x  4). 
Cye/oido/rvpa  aus/ralis,  gen.  et  sp.  nov.    Transverse  section  of  zoarium.    Spec. 

4405F.      (x  18). 
Cycloidotrypa  auslralis,  gen.  et  sp.  nov.     Vertical  section  of  zoarium  attaelied 

to  calcareous  nodule.     Spec.  4405F.      (x  18). 
Hallopora  friitiiosa,  sp.  nov.      Tangential  section  of   a  branch  of  the  zoarium, 

showing  zooecia  surrounded  with  mesopores.     Spec.  4405F.      (x  VX). 
Hallopora  fruticosa',  sp.  nov.     Vertical  section  of  zoarium  showing  sparsely 
tabulate  zooeoial  tubes  and  vesicular  character  of  the  mesopores.  Spec.  4405F. 
(xl8). 
7.     Hallopora  frulicosa,  sp.  nov.     Transverse  section  of  zoarium,  showing  group- 
ing of  mesopores.     Spec.  4405P.      (x  18). 
H.     Fisttilipora  microscopica,  sp.  nov.     Vertical  section  of  zoarium.     Spec.  4405F. 

(X  78). 
9.     (tlaciated  pebble   of   quartzite    collected    by    Professor   David  from   below  the 
••Varve"  Rocks  in  B^o^vne's  Creek,  below  the  Middle  Kuttung  Main  Felspathic 
Grit.     Approximately  natural  size. 

10.  Glaciated  pebble  of  quartzite  from   the  base  of   the  Upper  Kuttung   rocks,  im- 
mediately above  the  Main  Felspathic  Grit  in  Rocky  Creek,     (x  ^). 


375 


DESCRIPTIONS  OF  NEW  SPECIES  OF  AUSTRALIAN   COLEOPTERA. 

Part  xvi. 

By  Arthur  M.  Lea,  F.E.S. 

By  courtesy  of  the  late  W.  J.  Rainbow,  I  was  able  to  examine  some  of 
Maeleay's  and  Olliff's  types,  belonging  to  the  Australian  Museum,  and  to  make 
notes  on  synonymy,  as  given  in  some  of  the  following  pages. 

STAPH  YLINIDAE . 

PiNOPHILUS  GRAXDICEPS  Maol. 

The  type  of  this  species  is  very  close  to  a  specimen  in  my  collection  identified 
as  P.  trapezus,  but  its  prothorax  is  less  dilated  to  the  apex  than  on  that  specimen 
(this  is  possibly  a  sexual  difference) .  It  is  very  close  to  P.  mastersi  (the  type 
of  that  species  has  lost  its  prothorax).  but  has  the  suture  of  the  elytra  raised  (as 
on  trapezus)  . 

Philoxthus  aexeus  Rossi. 

{('nfus  amhlijtenis  Oil.;  Cafius  laeiis  Oil.) 

The  type  of  C.  ambhitenofi  agrees  perfectly  with  specimens  from  New  South 
Wales  and  Tasmania  identified  by  Blackburn  and  myself  as  P.  aeneus,  and  I  am 
convinced  belong's  to  that  species ;  C.  laeus  also  belongs  to'  the  species,  the  speci- 
men from  Adelaide  (marked  as  the  type)  having  the  three  conspicuous  punctures 
(and  a  smaller  apical  one)  on  each  side  of  the  middle  of  the  pronotum  as  on 
laeus,  but  in  addition  there  are  two  irregular  punctures  on  the  right  row,  and 
one  on  the  left.  In  comparing  amhlyterus  and  Jaeus,  Olliff  commented  on  the 
difference  in  the  width  of  prothorax;  the  sliglit  difference,  however,  appears  to 
be  sexual;  the  punctures  at  the  base  of  the  prothorax  (one  on  each  side)  are 
exactly  the  same,  and  exactly  as  on  aetieus. 

QuEDius  RUFicOLLLS  Grav. 

(Philovthtis  chah/beipemiis  Macl.) 

The  type  of  P.  chnli/beipennis  is  a  rather  small  female  of  Q.  ruficollifi. 

Aleochara  puberula  Klug. 

(Oxypoda  analis  Macl.) 

Oxypoda  analis  has  already  been  referred  to  Alencliara  by  Olliff,  and  from 
examination  of  the  type  I  have  now  to  record  it  as  a  synonym  of  the  introduced 
A.  puberula. 


37(5  descript:cxs   or  xew  speciks   of  Australian  coleoptera, 

POLTLOBUS  PALLlDlPENXis  AFacl.   ( f'oniR'ily     lliimalota). 

(P.    paUtd-nminor   Lea.) 

The  original  description  of  P.  pallidipennis  is  too  short  for  identificalam  of 
the  species,  as  it  would  apply  to  many  small  Stnpliyllnidne.  There  are  two  speci- 
mens mounted  on  one  card  with  a  type  label,  one  is  in  finite  unrecognisable  con- 
dition, and  the  other  is  somewhat  dirty  but  on  comparison  with  the  typo  of  P 
paUid-ominor  appeared  to  agree  with  it,  except  that  the  base  of  its  head  is  not 
quite  as  dark  as  on  the  type  of  the  latter  species,  but  this  may  be  due  to  its 
having  somewhat  faded.  Olliff,  on  referring  the  species  to  Poli/lobtiif.  and  re- 
describing  it,  noted  the  eh-tra  as  having  "a  moderately  large  indistinct  spot  near 
the  external  apical  angles,"  but  I  can  find  no  trace  of  such  a  spot  on  eitlier  of  the 
Gayndah  specimens,  so  it  is  possilile  that  Olliff's  description  may  not  liave  been 
drav»-n  up  from  these,  as  he  records  the  species  also  from  Xew  South  Wales. 

POI.VT.OPi'S    LONGVLUS    Oil. 

(P.  teiiaif'  Lea.  "I 

A  specimen  from  Shelley's  Flats  bearing  Ollifif's  laljcl  as  P.  lotu/iilus  (but 
not  marked  as  the  type)  agrees  with  the  type  of  P.  leriuis.  It  agi'ees  with  the 
description  of  tlie  structure,  but  not  of  the  colour,  of  P.  Inngidits.  a's  the  elytra  are 
twice  noted  as  being  "pitehy-black" ;  whereas  on  the  specimen  now  before  me 
they  are  scarcely  darker  tlian  the  prothorax,  although  in  some  lights  appearing  in- 
fuseated  posteriorly.  Tf  the  specimen  in  riuestion  is  really  the  type  of  lo)ii)idiii 
the  original  description  is  misleading. 

POLYLOr.US   APICAI.IS    Fxl  . 

(P.   (wufioda  Oil.) 

The  type  of  P.  fungicnla  agi'ees  with  two  Tasmanian  specimens  that  some 
years  ago  T  identified  from  its  description  as  P.  apicalix,  and  on  checkinsr  with 
that  description  aoain  appear  to  agree  with  it.  Fauvel  notes  the  pronotum  a? 
having  a  rather  wide  basal  foveole;  on  one  of  the  Tasmanian  specimens  there  is 
a  fairly  conspicuous  transverse  impression  near  the  base,  but  on  the  other  speci- 
men, and  on  the  iype  of  fungicrda  the  depression  is  scarcely  evident. 

PSELAPHIDAE. 

RvDASIs  ATKlCEPs  Mad.     (forincrly  Brgaxis)  . 

(P.    (ic(iiithoslfn)((    Tjca  . ) 

There  were  two  males  mounted  on  one  card  as  the  types  of  R.  at  rice ps.  and 
side  by  side  these  agi-ee  with  the  types  of  P.  ncanthosterna.  Maeleay  did  not 
mention  the  remarkable  features  of  the  sterna,  abdomen,  and  front  tibiae,  and  his 
description  of  the  elytra  is  misleading  "Elytra  bistriatcd.  one  on  each  elytron"  as 
there  are  two  conspicuous  striae  on  each  elytron:  a  subsutural  one,  and  a  sub- 
median  one. 

Rybasis  ei-kctrica  King,    Vav.   A. 

Mr.  A.  H.  Elston  took  a  specimen  of  this  vaiiety  from  the  nest  of  a  species 
of  Pheidole  on  Kangaroo  Island. 


BY    ARTHUR    JI.    LEA.  377 

HISTERIDAE. 

Platysoma  coxvbxiusculum  Macl. 

There  are  tliree  specimens  mounted  on  a  card  as  types  of  this  species,  Init 
of  these  only  two  (those  on  the  front  of  the  card)  agree  with  the  description; 
their  elytral  striation  is  much  as  on  P.  hipunctatum,,  but  they  are  considerably 
wider,  larger,  more  convex  and  otherwise  different  from  that  species.  The  other 
specimen  differe  from  the  types  in  being  smaller,  narrower,  and  in  having  an 
additional  short  stria  on  each  elytron,  the  medio-basal  impression  on  the  pronotum 
absent,  etc.,  and  belongs  to  P.  completum. 

I'AiiOJiALUs  PLANiCEPS  Macl.     (formerly  Platijsoma) . 

This  species  is  a  Paromalus,  larger,  wider,  and  more  depressed  than  P.  iimhid- 
catus  or  P.  mctoriae  and  with  considerably  larger  punctures. 

Tribalus  australis  Macl.  (formerly  Abraeus). 
( T.  leae  Lewis . ) 
The  fdur  types  of  T.  australis  agree  perfectly  with  two  eotypes  of  T.  leae. 

NITIDULIDAE. 

Haptoxcura    ocularis    Fairm.     (formerly    Epuraea)* 

(Uaptoncus  tetragonus  Murrayt ;  Carpophilus  convexiusculus  Macl.) 

Blaekburnt  recorded  Haptoncura  ocularis  from  Queensland  and  the  Hawaiian 

Islands,  pointing  out  Sharp's  opinion^  as  to  its  identity  with  Raptoncus  tetragonus. 

The  types  of  Carpophilus  convexiusculus  agree  with  the  specimen  he  had  named 

a^  H.  ocularis,  and  one  of  them  agrees  well  with  Murray's  figure  of  H.  tetragonus; 

the  other  has  elytral  markings  more  extended.     I  have  also  taken  the  species  in 

the  Cairns  district. 

TROGOSITIDAE. 

Lepebina  cibeosa  Pasc. 
(L.  mastersi  Macl.;  L.  burnettensis  Macl.) 
Ollitt'  commented  upon  L.  cirrosa  as  being  remarkable  "for  the  great  length 
of  the  white  scales  on  the  sides  of  the  prothorax,  and  the  large  size  of  the  elytral 
fascicles";  but  the  scales  and  fascicles  are  very  easily  abraded  and  I  cannot  look 
upon  the  type  of  L.  mastersi  as  other  than  a  large,  partially  abraded  specimen  of 
the  species;  I  think  also  that  L.  hurnettensis  was  founded  upon  small  specimens 
of  the  species,  as  OUiff  thought  possible.  It  occurs  from  Northern  New  South 
Wales  to  Darwin. 

SoRONiA  AMPHOTiFORjiis    Rcitter. 
{Aiicgrona  vesca   Oil.;   Ancyrona  arnica   Oil.) 
The  types  of  A.  vesca  agree  with  specimens  identified  by  Blackburn  as  S. 
amphotiformis,  and  I  cannot  regard  the  type  of  A.  arnica  as  othei'  than  a  large, 
partially"  abraded  specimen  of  the  same  species. 

•Rev.  et  Mag.  Zool.,  1849,  p.28. 
tMon.  Nitid.,  1863,  p.401,  PI.  xxxiii.,  fig.  7. 
JTrans.  Boy.  Soc.  S.  Aust.,  1902,  p.306. 
§Tr.  Dubl.  Soc,  188.5,  p.231. 


378  DESCRIPTIONS     OF    NEW    SPECIES     OF    AUSTKALIAX    COLEOPTERA, 

LATHRIDIIDAE. 

HOLOPARASIECUS  CAtlLARUM   Aube. 

Ann.    Soe.   Ent.   Fr.,  1843,  p.  244.  I'l.  x..  figs.  2.  5-10. 

Mr.  Froggatt  and  I  obtained  numerous  specimens  of  tbis  species  in  a  stack 
of  wbeat  at  Peak  Hill  (New  Soutb  Wales) .  I  am  indebted  to  Mr.  G.  J.  Arrow 
for  the  name  of  the  species,  now  lirst  recorded  as  occurring  in  Australia. 

SOAR  ABAEIDAE . 
OcNODus  LUGUBRis  Blackb. 

A  specimen  from  Coolgardie  may  represent  a  variety  of  this  species;  it  differs 
from  the  typical  form  in  being  somewhat  smaller,  9  mm.,  and  almost  eutirelx' 
black . 

OCNODUS  TRIDENTATUS   Lea. 

A  specimen  from  the  Flora  River  (Northern  Territory)  in  the  National 
Museum  may  represent  a  variety  of  this  species;  it  differs  from  the  type  in  being 
somewhat  larger,  and  by  having  the  labrum  more  conspicuously  notched,  and  the 
pygidium  longitudinally  carinated. 

POLYSTIGMA  VITTICOLLE   Macl. 

There  are  sexes  of  this  species  in  the  National  Museum  from  the  King  River 
(Northern  Territory)  and  they  differ  somewhat  from  the  types  in  markings:  on 
two  males  the  small  black  subapieal  spot  (of  the  types)  on  each  elytron  is  joined 
to  the  suture,  this  being  entirely  black;  on  the  female  the  subapieal  spot  and 
postmedian  fascia  form  parts  of  a  complete  but  somewhat  irregular  ring,  which 
encloses  a  conspicuous  flavous  spot  on  each  elytron;  on  the  males  also  there  i^  a 
distinct,  but  not  isolated,  spot  in  each  upper  corner  of  the  pygidium;  the  small 
humeral  spot  on  all  three  specimens  is  also  more  angular  than  on  the  types.  The 
male  has  a  wide  and  rather  shallow  depression  on  the  abdomen;  its  front  tibiae 
liave  but  two  distinct  teeth  (on  one  male  the  third  tooth  of  the  female  is  feebly 
indicated,  but  not  at  all  on  the  other) ;  the  hind  tibiae  are  shorter  and  wider  than 
those  of  the  female,  and  on  its  under  surface  there  is  a  dense  fringe  of  golden 
hair  commencing  near  the  base  and  becoming  denser  to  the  apex. 

EUCNEMIDAE. 

Nematodes  pubescens  Macl.   (formerly  Acroniojjus). 

The  type  of  this  species  is  a  female  (its  ovipositor  is  protruding)  and  it  does 
not  belong  to  the  Elateridae,  but  to  the  Eucnemidae*  In  Blackburn's  table  of 
the  subfamily  it  would  be  referred  to  AA  (the  line  marking  off  the  pronotum 
from  the  prosternum  is  acutely  carinated,  and  inwards  of  the  carina'  is  a  shallow 
depression  as  in  Nematodes,  certainly  not  a  conspicuous  groove  as  in  A),  BB,  C, 
D  (the  apical  process  is  short  and  truncated),  E — Nematodes,  to  which  accordingly 
I  refer  it,  although  it  certainly  looks  somewhat  out  of  place  in  that  genus.  In 
general  appearance,  at  first  glance  it  strongly  resembles  Fornax  parvoniger,  but 
is  somewhat  narrower,  the  prothoracic  punctures  distinctly  coarser,  and  the  elytra! 
ones  somewhat  stronger,  the  clothing  also  is  uniformly  pale ;  the  sternal  characters, 
however,  are  xevy  different. 

'Acroiiiopiis  rufipennia  Macl..  iloes  belonj;  to  thp  /'laUriihn-. 


BY    ARTHUR    M.    LEA.  379 

ELATERIDAE. 

MoNOCREPiDiiJS  MINOR  Macl . 

(j\I.    alpicohi    Blac'kb.  ;    M.    dolosti.s    (Cand.    MS)    Sc4i\varz. ) 

The  types  of  minor  agree  well  with  some  cotypes  of  M.  alpicola.  A  specimen 
of  the  species  was  sent  to  me  some  years  ago  by  M.  Candeze,  as  M.  dolosus  Cand., 
an  MS.  name  subsequently  published  by  Sehvvarz,  whose  description  agrees  with 
the  types  of  M.  minor,  and  also  with  the  specimen  sent  by  Candeze. 

MONOCREPIDIUS    EVEILLARDI    Le    G. 

{M.  hreviceps  Macl.;  M.  rubicundus  Macl.) 

The  type  of  M.  hreviceps  agrees  with  specimens  in  the  Blackburn  and  Lea 
collections  identified  by  Candeze  as  M.  eveillardi;  its  head  has  been  forced  upwards 
and  backwards,  so  that  it  _  appears  shorter  than  usual,  and  its  median  carina  is 
concealed.  The  type  of  M.  rubicundus  is  an  abraded  specimen  of  eveillardi,  with 
the  derm  and  punctures  in  consequence  more  clearly  exposed ;  its  head  is  in  the 
normal  position,  the  left  hind  angle  of  its  prothorax  has  been  broken  off  at  the 
tip,  but  the  right  is  as  on  the  type  of  hreviceps.  The  two  discal  spots  of  denser 
clothing  on  the  pronotum,  typical  of  eveillardi,  are  present  on  both  of  the  Gayn- 
dah  types. 

MoNOCREPlDiu.s     APHiLOiUE.s  Cand. 

{M.  mastersl  Macl.) 

The  types  of  M.  mastersi  agree  well  with  some  specimens  identified  by  Can- 
deze as  M.  aphiloides,  and  with  others  standing  under  the  latter  name  in  the 
Blackburn  collection.  The  species  varies  c(msiderably  in  size,  and  occurs  in 
(Queensland,  New  South  Wales,  and  Victoria. 

Lacox  VARIABILIS   Cand. 

(L.  alternans  Macl.) 

The  type  of  L.  alternaxis  is  quite  an  ordinary  male  of  L.  variabilis,  of  which 
there  are  specimens  in  the  Blackburn  and  Lea  collections,  identitied  by  Candeze. 

Lacon  guttatus  Cand. 

(L.  maculatus  Macl.) 

The  type  of  L.  maculatus  is  a  rather  small  specimen  of  L.  guttatus,  of  which 
there  are  specimens  in  the  Blackburn  and  Lea  collections,  identified  by  Candeze. 
Its  derm,  as  well  as  the  clothing,  is  mottled. 

ANTHICIDAE. 

AXTHICUS  INTRICATUS  King. 

{A.  ovipennis  Lea.) 

This  species  is  distinct  amongst  the  Australian  Anthici  by  its  pronotum  being 
densely  and  finely  longitudinally  strigose  (or  suhreticulate)  ;  King  speaks  of  the 
"intricate  markings"  of  the  prothorax,  no  doubt  referring  to  its  sculpture.      In 


380  DESCRIPTIONS     OF    XKW    SPECIES     OP    AUSTRALIAN    OOLEOPTERA, 

my  own  description  the  bead  am',  ]irutli(>iax  were  incorrectly  described  as  "shal- 
lowly  punctate."  Unfortunately  with  my  type  of  A.  ovipennis,  I  had  two  speci- 
mens of  another  species  (obtained  subsequent  to  its  description)  and  I  appear  to 
have  sent  a  specimen  of  this  other  species  to  Mr.  Champion,  who  on  it  (and  no 
doubt  on  my  inaccurate  description)  recorded  ovipe»iiii<  as  a  synonym  of  his 
A.  in  flatus,  but  the  latter  name  being  already  in  use  he  suggested  that  ovipennis 
might  stand;  in  size,  colour  and  general  appearance  in  flatus  and  intricatus  are 
extremely  close  together;  but  Champion's  description  of  the  punctures  of  infhilnf 
renders  it  quite  certain  that  the  two  species  are  distinct. 

AXTHICUS    ALBAXYEXSIS    Pic. 

Bull.  Soc.   Ent.    Fr.,  1895.  p.  cccl. 

(A.  inflatus  Champ.) 

In  M.  Pic's  Catalogue  of  the  Anthicidae,  A.  inflatus  and  A.  ovipennis  are 
placed  as  synonyms  of  A.  albanyensis;  but  as  will  be  seen  by  the  above  correcting 
note,  inflatus  and  ovipennis  are  not  equal. 

AXTHICUS   HESPERI    King. 

{A.  mastersi  Macl.;  .i.  similis  Lea.) 

Placing  the  types  of  A.  hesperi,  A.  mastersi  and  A.  similis  side  by  side  1  am 
convinced  that  they  belong  to  but  one  species;  the  sexes  differ  somewhat  in  the 
size  of  head  and  apex  of  protliorax;  the  punctures  vary  slightly  in  size,  and  the 
markings  are  extremely  variable  in  extent,  but  these  have  been  ijreviously  com- 
mented upon  under  notes  on  mastersi.  * 

Anthicus  scydmaexoioes  King. 

The  tj'pe  of  this  species  now  has  the  head  no  darker  than  the  protliorax,  and 
the  "strong  black  setae"  have  been  nearly  all  abraded ;  the  sides  of  the  prothorax 
are  armed  with  small  spines,  from  the  hindmost  one  of  which  (almost  in  the  exact 
middle)  a  pubescent  line  extends  backward  to  the  base. 

A  specimen  taken  in  rotting  leaves  in  the  National  Park  (near  Sydney) 
evidently  belongs  to  this  species,  but  dili'ers  I'rum  the  type  in  being  slightly  smaller, 
tlie  head  entirely  black,  and  the  antennae  with  the  first  and  seventh-tenth  joints 
conspicuously  darker  than  the  others. 

AnTHICUS    I.M.MACL'l.ATUS    King. 

This  species  occurs  in  abundance  at  the  roots  of  plants  on  the  sand-dunes  at 
Port  Lincoln  and  Glenelg  in  South  Australia;  the  head  and  prothorax  (except 
for  a  slight  difference  in  shade)  appear  to  be  constant  in  colour;  but  the  elytra 
vary  from  entirely  pale  to  entirely  black  (except  that  the  base  and  suture  are 
obscurely  diluted  with  red),  with  or  without  a  sliglit  metallic-green  gloss;  on  nuuiy 
specimens  the  dark  parts  consist  of  a  large  infuscation  (scarcely  a  distinct  s|)ot) 
on  each  side.  The  subsutural  striae  iu-e  well-defined,  and  by  this  character  alone 
entirely  pale  specimens  may  be  distinguished  from  other  pale  species  of  the  genus. 

•Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  X.  S.  Wales.  1894,  p.620. 


BY   ARTHUR   M.    LEA.  381 

AxTHicus  RARUS  King. 

A.  Icrefftii  King;  A.  propinquus  Macl.  ;  ,1.  (iii--ytralis  Champ,    {not  King)  . 

Although  placeJ  in  a  different  section  of  the  genus  hy  Iviug,  i  cannot  satisfy 
myself  that  the  type  of  A.  Icrefftii  is  other  than  a  specimen  of  A.  rarm,  with  the 
markings  of  the  elytra  almost  obliterated;  the  shape  of  the  elytra  (including  the 
conspicuous  subsutural  striae)  and  the  lateral  foveoles  of  the  prothorax  are  iden- 
tical, but  the  elytral  punctures  are  not  quite  as  strong  as  usual  (I  have,  however, 
specimens  with  the  typical  markings  of  ranis,  and  with  punctures  no  stronger  than 
on  the  type  of  krefftii) .  Tasmanian  specimens  have  larger  and  darker  markings 
and  somewhat  stronger  punctures  than  those  on  the  mainland.  The  other 
synonymy  has  been  already  noted. 

AxTHicus  MYRTEUS  King. 

(-1.  ghibricoUis  King.) 

Specimens  that  some  years  ago  were  compared  and  agreed  with  the  type  of 
A.  myrteus,  structurally  agree  well  with  the  type  of  A.  glahricollis,  although  the 
former  was  referred  to  Group  4,  and  the  latter  to  Group  10.  The  dark  parts 
vary  from  moderately  infuscated  to  deep  black,  the  prothorax  (as  on  the  type  of 
glahricoUis)  is  sometimes  of  an  uniform  lurid-brown,  but  is  usually  paler  at  the 
base  than  in  front,  occasionally  it  is  entirely  black.  The  species  occurs  in  abund- 
ance on  flowers  in  New  South  Wales,  Victoria,  and  South  Australia. 

AxTiiicus  xiTiDissuirs  King. 

In  general  appearance  this  species  is  very  close  to  A.  xerophilus,  and  the 
elytral  marking-s  of  the  type  are  practically  identical,  but  it  diffei-s  in  being  slightly 
wider,  head  darker  (on  some  specimens,  however,  the  head  is  not  infuscated),  pro- 
thorax more  dilated  in  front,  and  elytra  with  distinct  punctures  only  in  front  of  the 
median  markings;  on  xerophilus  there  are  quite  distinct  punctures  on  the  median 
markings,  and  beyond  them  to  the  apex  (althougli  becoming  smaller  posteriorly) 
and  the  punctures  in  front  of  the  markings  are  also  considerably  denser  than  on 
A.  nitidissimus.  From  A.  exiguus  it  differs  in  being  somewhat  larger,  elytra  con- 
spicuously wider,  and  with  much  smaller  punctures;  the  elytral  markings  are  also 
not  quite  the  same. 

The  original  description  of  the  colour  of  the  elytra  is  somewhat  misleading; 
ihey  are  pale  eastaneous,  with  a  blackish  median  fascia  narrowed  towards  and 
rot  meeting  at  the  suture,  an  infuscate  spot  on  each  side  of  the  apex,  the  space 
between  the  spots  and  the  median  fascia  paler  than  the  basal  half;  a  fairly  large 
space  about  the  scufellum  is  slightly  darker  than  the  rest  of  the  basal  half,  but 
certainly  not  "piceous."  The  colour  of  the  tyiies  has  perhaps  slightly  altered 
since  they  were  taken  (over  fifty  years  ago)  but  agrees  well  with  some  recently 
taken  tmes.  The  species  occurs  in  Western  Australia  as  well  as  in  South  Australia. 

MECYNOTARStTS     ZICZAC  King. 

Mr.  J.  S.  Clark  took  numerous  specimens  of  this  species,  about  the  Swan 
River,  from  nests  of  Ponera  httea. 


o82  description;*   of   xew  species    of  Australian   coleopteka, 

CHKVSOMELIDAE. 

Cadmus  fasciaticollis  Lea. 

Mr.  H.  J.  Carter  and  I  rfi'ciitiv  touk  .^i.x  sin'ciuR'Us  of  this  sjiecies.  at  Laun- 
eeston  and  Cradle  Mountain,  in  Tasmania,  tliat  aurue  in  colour  witli  llii-  tyi)e. 
except  that,  ou  two  of  them,  from  four  to  six  of  the  ajiii-al  joints  of  the  antennae 
are  more  or  less  deeply  infuseated.  Tliree  other  specimens,  from  Warataii  and 
Wihnot,  differ  considerably,  however;  of  tliese  a  female  has  the  prothoracic  fascia 
extended  so  as  to  occupy  most  of  the  disc,  but  not  touching'  any  of  the  margins; 
its  elytra  are  blue-black  at  the  base,  with  a  wide  extension  along  the  middle  to 
the  summit  of  the  apical  slope,  and  a  narrow  extension  from  each  shoulder,  the 
tips  of  its  antennae  are  lightly  infuseated ;  a  second  female  has  the  prothoracic 
fascia  irregularly  extended  so  as  to  touch  the  base  in  places  and  to  leave  hut  |iale 
edgings  at  the  sides  and  apex;  its  elytral  marking's  are  less  extended  tlian  on  the 
other  female,  and  the  antennae  are  entirely  yiale;  the  third  specimen,  a  male,  lias 
the  prothorax  dark  excejit  fm-  a  naiTow  edging  at  apex  and  sides,  the  elytra  are 
dark  except  for  part  of  the  apical  slope,  a  narrow  marginal  strip  on  each  sidis 
and  an  obscure  post-humeral  spot,  the  two  apical  joints  of  its  antennae  and  tii)s 
of  several  of  the  preceding  ones  are  infuseated. 

DiTROPiDUs  ocHROPrs  Er. 

'I'he  type  was  described  as  having  <lark  hind  femora,  and  several  specimens 
before  me  have  them  dark:  but  they  are  usually  no  darker  than  the  others.  The 
species  occurs  in  Soutli  Australia  (Mount  .Lofty,  Adelaide  and  ^fonnta)  as  well 
as  in  Tasm'ania. 

DiTROpinrs  ^  aurichai.ceus  Suff . 

Numerous  specimens  from  Xew  South  Wales  (Gosfi.rd,  Sydney,  and  Taui- 
wortlil  and  Victoria  (Dividing  Range)  agree  witli  specimens  identified  by  Black- 
burn as  belonging  to  this  species.  They  have  tlie  upper  surface  uniformly  bronzy 
and  the  leg's  bright  red;  the  ])ronotum  densely  and  finely  strigose  at  tlie  sides 
and  apex,  but  with  punctures  only  on  the  rest  of  its  surface;  tlie  eyes  are  rather 
close  together  on  the  male. 

DiTROPIDUS   AMABILIS   Balv. 

Xumerous  specimens  from  (Queensland  (  I'uiidaberg,  Rockhaiiipton,  and 
Oayiidah  )  probably  belong  to  tliis  s])ecies;  tiicy  are  chisc  to  I),  liiericollis,  Imt  liave 
the  |)i'othorax  more  metallic,  with  denser  imni'lures  (especially  on  the  sides,  lint 
they  are  nowhere  oblong  as  noted  for  .1.  (iniiiliilis)  and  the  dypeus  not  in  the  form 
of  a  narrow  transverse  ridge;  the  ahdomen  is  usually  entirely  pale  in  the  female, 
largely  infuseated  in  the  male. 

DiTROPiiu's  imriniATrs  P.Mly. 

Ten  specimens  before  me,-  2.2,5 — 3.25  mm.  in  h'ugth,  jirobably  lielong  to  D. 
(limidiatir.";  they  have  tlie  prothorax  decidedly  longer  than  is  usual  in  the  genus, 
its  median  leng'th  being  fully  two-tliirds  of  t!ie  median  leiigtli  of  the  elytra,  and 
witli  rather  dense  and  sharply  defined  punctures,  becoming  more  crowded  on  the 
.«ides;  the  prosternal  process  is  deeply,  on  Hie  male  almost  triangularly,  notched. 
Ill  the  original  description  the  prothorax  was  noted  as  "distinctly  and  somewhat 


BY    ARTHUl!    M.    LEA.  383 

closely  imnctuivil,"'  a  cluiracter  wliicli  should  at  once  distinguish  it  from  IJ.  elejait- 
tulidf.  and  other  species  having  the  prothorax  red  and  elytra  black.  The  legs 
vary  somewhat  in  colour,  on  some  specimens  being  entirely  pale,  on  others  the  hind 
ones,  or  the  four  hind  ones  being  partly  black  or  infuscated;  but  on  all  of  them 
the  liead  is  entirely  red.  Two  of  the  specimens,  from  Tamworth,  have  the  pro- 
thorax.  excei)t  for  its  narrow  basal  edging,  entirely  red,  and  elytra  entirely  black; 
two,  from  Brisbane,  are  similarly  coloured,  except  that  a  pale  spot  is  vaguely  in- 
dicated on  each  elytron  about  the  basal  third;  two,  from  Cairns  and  Charters 
Towers,  have  the  prothorax  red  and  the  elytra  with  two  reddish  fasciae,  the  first 
commencing  on  each  side  at  the  basal  third,  and  dilated  so  that  near  the  suture, 
which  it  almost  touches,  it  occupies  about  the  basal  half,  the  second  fascia  is 
apical ;  one,  from  Cairns,  is  like  the  preceding  ones,  cxcejit  that  the  subbasal  fascia 
appears  as  two  large  round  disconnected  spots;  two,  from  Sydney,  have  a  large 
black  blotch  occupying  most  of  the  pronotum,  and  the  elytra  are  entirely  black; 
the  last  specimen,  from  Cairns,  is  like  the  preceding  ones,  except  that  on  each 
elytron  a  pale  spot,  as  on  the  ones  from  Brisbane,  is  vaguely  indicated .  A 
specimen  from  Cape  York,  in  the  British  Museum,  has  the  elytra  pale,  except 
that  the  base  and  suture  are  very  narrowly  Idack,  and  that  tliere  are  feel)le  infusca- 
tions  on  the  sides. 

DiTROPinus  onF:wAiixii  Baly. 

Specimens  before  me  1.75 — 2.25  mm.  in  length,  ajjpear  to  belong  to  this 
species;  their  prothoracic  jjunctures  are  usually  very  feeble.  They  are  from 
New  South  Wales  (Whitton  and  Forest  Reefs)  and  South  Australia  (Adelaide. 
Port  Lincoln,  Goolwa  and  Quorn)  . 

DiTROPIDUS    ANTENNARIUS    Balv,    1877. 

(I>.  antennarius  Chp.,  1878;   I),   baccaefonms   Chp.,   var.  ) 

This  species,  from  the  female,  waa  descriljed  by  Chapius  as  entirely  pale, 
except  that  the  five  apical  joints  of  the  antennae  were  dark;  there  are  six  females 
before  me  that  agree  with  his  description,  except  that  the  junction  of  the  prothorax 
and  elytra  is  very  narrowly  black  (apparently  an  invariable  character  in  pale 
species)  ;  they  are  from  Brisbane,  Cairns  and  Bloomfleld  River,  their  antennae 
are  of  f|uite  the  ordinary  type  in  the  genus,  l)ut  the  male  has  very  different  ones, 
seven  of  the  joints  being  dark,  and  all,  after  the  second,  being  several  times  longer 
than  wide,  so  that  the  tip  of  the  eleventh  joint  actually  passes  the  elytra ;  a  charac- 
ter that,  by  his  table,  would  generically  separate  the  sexes. 

Baly's  description  of  colours  differs  from  Chapius'  only  in  six  of  the  joints 
of  the  antennae  being  noted  as  black,  and  "Body  beneatli  and  legs  more  or  less 
stained  with  piceous";  he  notes  the  name  as  being  "Suffr.  MS,"  and  probal)ly 
Chapius  also  received  his  specimens  with  that  manuscript  name. 

Yar.  A.  Five  females  from  Roekhampton,  one  from  Boweu  and  one  from 
Brisbane,  differ  in  having  the  metasternum,  abdomen  and  hind  femora  black,  and 
sometimes  other  parts  of  the  legs  infuscated,  the  antennae  have  from  four  to  six  of 
the  apical  joints  dark.  A  male  from  Roekhampton,  and  one  from  Bowen,  are 
coloured  as  the  females,  except  that  seven  of  the  joints  of  the  antennae  are  dark, 
their  antennae  are  almost  as  long  as  those  of  the  typical  form,  extending  exactly 
to  the  tips  of  the  elytra.  The  Bowen  female  is  rather  larger,  4.5  mm.,  than  usual, 
and  its  front  legs  are  almost  entirely  dark ;  except  in  this  variable  feature,  and  for 


384  DESCRIPTIOXS     OF    KE\T    SPECIES     OF    ArSTRALIAS    COLEOPTERA, 

.5  mm.  in  length,  it  agrees  well  witli  tlie  description  of  haccaeformU  (tlie  sex  of 
the  type  of  which  was  not  noted),  and  tliat  name  appears  to  be  varietal  only;  a 
femaie  (without  locality)  apparently  belons-inj;  to  this  variety  is  still  larger.  5  nnn., 
but  its  antennae  and  legs  are  all  damaged. 

A  male,  from  Ooldea  in  South  Australia  (the  only  specimen  I  have  seen, 
except  from  Queensland)  also  appears  to  belong  to  the  species,  but  its  antennae 
are  slightly  shorter,  not  quite  extending  to  the  tips  of  the  elytra,  and  only  six  of 
its  ioints  are  entirely  dark,  its  metasteruum  and  abdomen,  except  for  a  median 
space  at  the  base  of  each,  and  most  of  its  middle  and  hind  legs  are  black. 

DiTROPiDUS  JACOBTI  Balv . 

A  short,  thick-set  species  with  large  eyes,  almost  touching  in  both  sexes;  the 
elytra]  striae  are  strong,  and  contain  large  punctui-es,  the  striae  actually  extend 
to  the  suture ;  on  most  species  of  the  genus  there  are  two  or  three,  well-impressed 
striae  on  each  side,  but  towards  the  suture  these  are  represented  by  rows  of  punc- 
tures. The  prothoracie  punctures  are  strong  and  rather  dense  on  the  sides,  be- 
coming more  or  less  sparse  on  the  middle;  the  seventh  joint  of  the  antennae  (first 
of  the  club)  is  distinctly  larger  than  any  of  the  following  joints  in  tlie  male,  and  a 
trifle  larger  than  any  of  them  in  the  female.  The  upper  surface  is  usually  of  a  dingy 
testaceous,  vai-ying  to  obscurely  piceous,  or  even  black,  with  the  apical  portion  of 
the  elytra  paler  or  not;  occasionally  there  is  a  large  infuscate  blotch  on  the  pro- 
notum;  the  legs  also  vary  from  almost  entirely  pale,  to  almost  entirely  dark. 
There  are  specimens  before  me  from  many  localities  in  Xew  South  Wales,  Vic- 
toria, Tasmania  and  South  Australia. 

Var.  a.  Some  specimens!  from  New  South  Wales  (Tamworth),  Victoria 
(Alps)  and  Western  Australia  (Pinjarrah  and  Mount  Barker)  differ  from  most 
specimens  of  the  species  in  having  the  prothorax  with  dense  pimctures  throughout, 
the  elytral  striae  are  deep  throughout,  witli  all  the  interstices  strongly  convex  (on 
the  typical  form  the  elj-tral  striae  although  distinct,  are  not  as  deep  as  on  this 
variety,  and  the  interstices  near  the  suture  are  flat  and  wider  than  the  striae),  and 
the  upper  surface  is  of  a  uniform  pieeous-brown .  A  specimen  from  Victoria  and 
another  from  Tasmania  resemble  the  variety,  except  that  the  ehira  are  obscurely 
flavous  at  the  tips. 

Var.  B.  a  specimen  frcjm  South  Austi-aliii  ( Lucindak')  is  stniclnndly  like 
the  preceding  variety,  but  is  flavous,  exi-eiit  that  the  metasternuiu  and  al)domcii 
are  deeply  infuscated. 

Var.  C.  Some  specimens  from  Western  Australia  (Albany.  Blount  Barker 
and  Darling  Ranges)  resemble  the  typical  form,  but  the  prothorax  is  without 
punctures,  except  for  a  few  on  the  margins.  One  of  them  in  colour  resembles 
the  preceding  variety,  but  the  others  are  darker. 

DiTROPinus  i;i.,E(iAXTri.fs  Haly. 

Only  the  male  of  this  species,  from  "Australia,"  was  described  by  Baly.  and 
his  specimen  was  noted  as  having  ''Body  beneath  stained  with  piceous";  I  liave 
only  seen  one  specimen  agreeing  with  this  character;  on  another  the  under  surface, 
including  the  pygidium,  is  entirely  red,  and  cm  another  the  pygidium  is  red  but 
the  rest  of  the  abdomen  is  black;  on  all  other  males  the  metasternum  and  ab 
<lomen,  including  tlie  pygidium.  are  deep  l)lack.  altlioiigh  (•lotlie<l  witli  thin  wliit" 


DY    ARTHUR    11.    LEA.  385 

pubeseence.  The  female  (there  are  several  pairs  taken  in  cop-  before  me)  ditfers 
fi'om  the  male  in  being-  slightly  larger,  the  head,  except  for  a  small  part  of  the 
muzzle,  and  prothorax  of  the  same  bronzy  or  brassy  colour  as  the  elytra,  and  the 
prosternuin  entirely  black;  its  head  is  smaller,  antennae,  especially  the  joints  of 
the  club,  thinner,  prothorax  more  rounded  in  front  and  with  more  distinct' 
punctures,  distance  across  junction  of  jirothorax  and  elytra  less,  abdomen  more 
convex,  and  with  a  large  apical  fovea,  and  legs,  especially  the  front  ones,  shorter 
and  thinner. 

The  species  occurs  in  New  South  Wales,  Victoria  and  Tasmania,  and  is  some- 
times common  on  species  of  Dilwi/iniia  and  Pulteiiaea.  In  general  appearance 
it  is  close  to  a  specimen  I  have  identitied  a.s  T).  riificolhs,  but  the  elytra  are  not 
at  all  green,  the  head  is  densely  punctured  and  obliquely  strigose.  with  a  con- 
spicuous median  line,  eyes  larger,  etc.;  the  specimen  of  riificollJx  has  the  inter- 
ocular  space  with  sparse  and  snuiU  jiunctures,  and  is  without  an  impressed  median 
line  there. 

DiTROPiDUs  SEREXUS  Baly. 

This  sjjecies  varies  considerably  in  length.  2.2.3 — 3.. 5  mm.,  and  the  smaller 
specimens  usually  have  a  rather  wide  space  at  tlie  apex  of  the  elytra  infuscated; 
on  two  small  males  the  elytra  are  slightly  infuscated  throughout.  It  occurs  in 
Victoria,  as  well  as  in  South  Australia. 

DlTROPIDUS  ORXATUS    Billv. 

A  specimen  from  Murray  Bridge  (South  Australia)  appears  to  Ijelong  to 
this  species,  but  differs  from  an  undoubted  one  of  it  (from  Western  Australia)  in 
having  the  jjubescence  on  the  head  ^very  feeble,  and  the  two  pale  parts  on  each 
elytron  disconnected,  owing  to  the  black  submediau  fascia  extending  to  both  the 
suture  and  sides.  Three  other  (old)  South  Australian  specimens,  also  appear  to 
belong  to  the  species,  but  have  the  inter-ocular  space  glabrous ;  the  prothorax  has 
a  dark  green  gloss  and  the  dark  parts  of  the  elytra  a  purplish  gloss,  their  mark- 
ings, except  for  slight  differences  of  detail,  are  as  on  the  Murray  Bridge  specimen. 

DlTROPIDUS  PULCHELLTTs  Baly. 

This  species  ranges  3.25 — 4.. 5  mm.  in  length;  the  pale  elytral  markings  vary 
from  bright  flavous  to  a  moderately  dark  red,  but  appear  to  be  always  paler 
than  the  prothorax ;  the  latter  is  usually  without  diseal  marking's,  but  occasionally 
has  a  black  transverse  median  fascia,  or  there  may  be  a  scries  of  spots  represent- 
ing the  fascia.     I  cannot  distinguish  the  species  stracturally  from  ornaUi.i. 

DlTROPIDUS  C'ORxuTus  Baly. 

A  curious  species  readily  distinguished  by  the  armed  muzzle  of  the  male,  the 
processes  on  the  clypeus  and  mandibles,  however,  vary  somewhat  in  size.  The 
upper  surface  usually  has  a  slight  brassy-green  gloss ;  on  the  elytra  of  the  male 
there  are  usually  four  dark  blotches,  sometimes  only  two;  on  the  female  the 
blotches  are  usually  scarcely  in  evidence;  the  male  also  has  most  of  the  under- 
surface  black,  on  the  female  usually  only  the  nietasternum  is  infuscated.  The 
types  were  from  "Australia" ;  the  specimens  before  me  are  from  Western  Aus- 
tralia (Warren  Eiver  and  Karridale) . 


386  DESCRIPTIONS*     OK    NEW    SPKCIES     OP    AUSTRALIAX    COLEOPTERA, 

DlTROPIUUS   FASCIATIS    Baly. 

il).  caiiescens  Clip.) 

Ou  this  species  there  is  a  sliort  (il)li(|ue  earina  on  each  side  of  the  prothinax 
at  the  base,  very  distinct  on  tlie  male,  feeble  on  the  female;  the  wide  fascia  on 
the  elytra  varies  in  extent,  sometimes  being-  continuous  except  for  a  very  narrow 
interruption  at  the  suture,  at  other  times  appearing  as  a  large  spot  on  each  side; 
the  leg's  are  usually  entii'cly  dark  or  almost  so.  The  clothing  of  the  itrothoi-ax 
varies  apparently  in  accordance  with  the  elytral  fascia,  on  specimens  having  tliis 
of  gi-eat  extent  the  pubescence  in  <lecidedly  denser  than  on  those  whose  fascia  is 
gi-eatly  reduced  in  size;  the  elytra  are  usually  entirely  glabrous,  but  on  an  occa- 
sional specimen  the  sides  are  feebly  pubescent  towards  the  base. 

DiTROPinus  FASCiATUs  var.    pictipes,  n.var. 

Sis  males,  from  Cue,  differ  from  thu  typical  form  in  having  the  |>riithuracic 
punctures  somewhat  coarser,  and  the  leg's  red,  except  that  the  tarsi  are  almost 
black,  that  there  is  a  black  streak  on  the  under  surface  of  the  front  femora,  and 
that  the  knees  are  slightly  infuscated.  the  elytral  fascia  is  wide  and  very  narrowly 
interrupted  at  the  suture,  and  the  dark  parts  of  the  elytra,  although  brassv,  ai-e 
paler  than  the  prothorax. 

A  specimen,  from  Port  Lincoln,  appears  to  represent  another  variety;  it  has 
the  elytra  entirely  pale,  except  that  a  small  amount  of  the  base  is  <lark  and  the 
suture  is  infuscated;  the  colour,  however,  is  less  flavous  than  usual;  tlie  front  logs 
are  dark,  but  with  the  coxae  and  part  of  the  tibiae  obscurely  reddish,  the  other 
legs  are  red,  except  for  the  tarsi  and  knees.  The  outer  lialf  of  each  elytron  is 
sparsely  l)ut  rather  distinctly  pubescent. 

A  female,  from  "Western  Australia,  nuiy  reiiresent  still  another  variety,  it  is 
unusually  small  (3  nun.)  and  at  first  glance  the  elytra  ai)|iear  to  be  entirely  dark, 
but  from  some  directions  a  fairly  large  space  on  each  side  about  the  basal  third 
appears  to  be  obscurely  diluted  with  Havous;  the  legs  are  almost  entirely  dark, 
the  prothorax  has  denser  punctures  than  usual,  with  it  tendency  to  become  longi- 
tudinally cuntl\u'nt.  and  the  latero-basal  earinae  are  scarcely  indicated. 

DlTROPIIIfS    llOFtlAE     ('hl>. 

Numerous  s])eciniens  from  Northern  Queensland  (Cape  York,  Cairns,  JIackay 
and  Bundaberg)  ]irobably  belong  to  this  species,  but  only  two  of  them  could  fairly 
be  noted  as  having  both  prothorax  and  elytra  "nigTo-cyaneis"' ;  on  most  of  them 
the  elytra  are  purple,  or  deep  purplish-blue,  and  the  prothorax  blue  or  black, 
with  a  slight  greenish  gloss;  the  elytra  usually  have  some  of  tlie  interstices 
obliquely  strigose.  but  on  some  of  them  tliey  are  feebly  strigose  only  near  the 
apex.  The  eyes  of  the  male  are  close  together,  about  half  the  length  of  the 
basal  joint  of  the  antennae  separating  them;  on  the  female  the  distance  Ixt ween 
them  is  about  eriual  to  the  len.gth  of  that  joint. 

DiTitDi'iurs  TiiiiAi.is  Clip. 

A  small  metallic  sjjecies  raliiei-  (Mimnioii  in  New  South  AVales ;  the  typical  form 
has  legs  i)ale,  )mt  hind  femora  dark;  the  prothoracic  punctures  are  rather  dense 
and  sharply  defined. 


liv  Airniuu  ii.  LEA.  387 

Var.  a.  Some  specimens  (from  Sytlney,  Maitlaml  and  Aimidale)  differ  in 
being  of  a  darker  and  less  coppery-g-reen,  and  with  the  legs  entirely  dark;  but  I 
can  tind  no  structural  differences  from  the  tyi)ical  foi'm. 

DiTROPIDUS    PUNCTULDM    Clip  . 

This  species  ranges  1.25 — 1.5  mm.  in  lengfh.  The  eyes  are  rather  widely 
separated  in  the  male,  still  more  in  the  female.  There  was  a  ootype  in  tlie  Black- 
burn collection  and  otiiei'  specimens  before  me  are  from  Queensland  { Hribie 
Island),  South  Australia  (Mount  Lofty,  Port  Lincoln  and  Murray  Bridge),  and 
Western  Australia  ( Swan  River) . 

DiTHOPiDU.s  co.vvExiuscuLus  Clip,      (formerly  Elaphodes.) 

Two  specimens,  from  Bowen,  appear  to  belong  to  this  species,  described,  with- 
out the  sex  of  the  type  being  noted,  originally  as  an  Elaphodes.  The  antennae 
of  the  male  are  lirokeii,  but  those  of  the  female  are  slightly  shorter  and  stouter 
than  in  T).  ctimuHs,  referred  by  Chapius  to  Ditropidus.  The  male  has  a  conspicu- 
ous cross  of  white  pubescence  on  the  pronotum,  on  the  female  the  cross  is  present 
but  less  distinct ;  the  female  has  a  conspicuous  median  fascia  of  white  pulicscence 
on  the  elytra,  but  on  the  male  this  is  not  di.stinct,  owing  to  their  clothing  being 
almost  entirely  white.  In  appearance  the  sjiecies  is  fairly  close  to  cumrnis,  l)ut 
differs  in  having  the  jirothorax  scarcely  gibbons,  not  shagreened,  its  punctures 
more  sliari)ly  defined  and  not  at  all  elongate,  and  the  elytral  striae  distinct  only 
near  the  sides. 

DiTROPIDl'S    COJIAXS    Chp. 

On  this  species  there  is  usually,  but  not  always,  a  distinct  median  fascia  of 
W'hite  clothing  on  the  elytra,  the  prothorax  is  gil)boHS  in  front,  and  at  the  middle 
is  either  glabrous  or  very  sparsely  clotlie<l,  allowing  the  dense  punctures  and  finely 
shagreened  surface  to  be  clearly  seen .  The  distance  between  the  eyes  is  about 
equal  to  the  length  of  the  basal  joint  of  the  antennae  in  the  male,  considerably 
more  in  the  female;  the  length  ranges  1.5 — 3  ram.  The  species  occurs  from 
Dalby,  in  Queensland,  to  the  Swan  River,  in  Western  Australia. 

DiTROPIDUS    PUBICOLLIS    Chp. 

Recorded  by  Chapius  without  exact  locality ;  specimens  before  me  agreeing 
with  his  description  are  from  New  Soutii  Wales  (Goulliurn,  Tamworth  and  Wind- 
sor) and  Soutli  Australia  (Quorn  and  Lucindale)  . 

DiTROPIDUS    PUBKRULUS    Clip. 

A  specimen  from  Geraldton  (Western  Australia)  possibly  belongs  to  this 
species;  it  is  a  male  (the  type  was  a  female)  and  differs  from  the  description  in 
being  slightly  smaller  (2.25  mm.)  and  in  having  the  parts  flavous  that  were  noted 
by  Chapius  as  ferruginous,  except  that  the  Joints  of  the  club  are  infuscated  at 
their  tips. 

DiTROPIDUS    ilACULICOLLlS    Clip. 

A  s])ecimen  from  Brisbane  (the  type  was  from  Sydney)  agrees  well  with 
the  description  of  this  species;  its  abdomen  is  more  strongly  convex  than  is  usual 
in  males,  and  the  tip  of  the  jivgidium  is  not  encroaching  on  the  lower  surface;  but 


388  DESCRIPTIOXS     OF    XKW    SPECIES     OF    AUSTRALIAN    OOLEOPTERA, 

as  it  is  nonfoveate  I  presvnuo  the  speeiiiieii  must  be  a  male.  Two  other  males, 
from  Geraldton,  appear  also  to  belong  to  the  species,  one  is  slightly  larger  than 
the  Brisbane  specimen,  and  its  prothoracic  blotch  is  broken  up  into  two  spots; 
the  other  is  still  larger  (2.5  uim.)   and  its  prothorax  is  immaculate. 

DiTROPIIH'S    AC'K'ri.ATUS    Clip. 

Two  specimgns  from  Victoria  and  South  Australui  (Mount  Lofty)  possibly 
belong  to  this  species,  but  differ  from  the  description  in  being  smaller  (1.75 — 2 
mm.),  and  with  the  sides  of  the  prothorax  narrowly  reddish;  the  differences  are 
possibly  sexual,  as  they  are  males,  and  the  type  was  a  female.  They  both  have 
the  shoulders  slightly  infuscated,  and  one  at  first  glance  appears  to  have  a  large 
scutellum,  owing  to  the  derm  in  its  vicinity  being  deeply  infuscated . 

DiTROPIDUS  LEXTULUS   Clip. 

Three  cotypes  of  this  species  from  Tasmania  have  the  legs  entirely  dark,  and 
tliere  are  many  similar  specimens  before  me,  but  the  legs,  especially  the  front  and 
middle  ones,  are  often  obscurely  reddisli;  the  upper  surface  frequently  has  a 
greenisli  gloss,  rarely  a  purplish  one.  There  is  a  i-ather  wide  and  shallow  median 
line  on  the  head,  and  the  eyes  are  moderately  widely  separated  on  the  male,  more 
so  on  the  female. 

DiTROPIDUS   SUBAENEUS   Chp  . 

There  were  two  females  of  this  species  in  the  Blackburn  collection,  one  bear- 
ing a  label  "Ditropidiis  subameiis  Chp.  Type"  (no  doubt  it  is  a  cotype),  and  I 
took  one  at  Hobart.  All  three  have  the  hind  legs  black  with  a  metallic  gloss,  liut 
the  middle  and  front  leg's  vary  somewhat  in  colour.  The  head  has  a  conspicuous 
median  line  (not  mentioned  in  the  original  description)  and  the  eyes  are  widely 
sejiarated,  l)ut  no  doubt  they  are  closer  together  in  the  male. 

DiTROPIDUS   COSTATUS    Chp. 

Two  females  from  Dalby  and  one  from  Bowen  possibly  belong  to  this  species 
(recorded  from  "Australia"),  but  they  are  brightly  metallic  (the  types  weie  de- 
scribed as  ''subnitidus") .  The  Bowen  specimen  has  the  apical  half  of  the  abdomen 
brightly  coppery,  the  others  have  most  of  it  more  or  less  red .  They  are  close  to 
venustKs,  but  the  prothorax  has  slightly  smaller  punctures,  its  sides  could  fairly 
be  called  strigose,  and  its  colour  is  but  little  different  to  that  of  the  elytra,  the 
legs  are  also  of  a  bright  red. 

DiTROPIDUS    I.A3IIXATUS     Clip. 

On  the  male  of  this  species  the  elypeus  hn.s  two  subtriangular  elevations,  each 
side  of  the  elytra  has  a  large  opaque  patch  (in  striking  contrast  to  the  adjacent 
polished  surface),  and  the  front  legs  are  stout  and  rather  long.  The  female  differs 
from  it  in  t)eing  less  dilated  at  the  .iunction  of  the  prothorax  and  elytra,  the  latter 
nowhere  opa(|ue,  the  tu))ercles  on  the  dypeus  uiudi  smaller,  the  front  legs  shorter 
and  thinner,  the  antennae  thinner,  and  the  abdomen  more  convex,  with  a  large 
apical  fovea.  On  the  male  the  eyes  are  separated  about  the  length  of  the  two 
basal  joints  of  antennae,  on  the  female  about  three.  The  specimens  before  me 
are  all  from  Queensland  (Cape  York.  Cucii.  Cairns.  Bowen.  and  Clinrtors  Towers). 


BY    ARTUl•I^    :\[.    LEA.  389 

DiTROPIDUS    IMI'KRIALIS    Clip. 

Seven  females,  t'loiu  Cape  York,  Coen,  and  Cairns,  appear  to  belong  to  this 
species,  the  finest  of  its  genus  from  Australia;  only  one  agrees  at  all  well  with  the 
type  in  colours,  the  others  have  the  prothorax  and  soutellum  coppery  or  coppery- 
red,  and  tlie  elytra  deep  purple,  or  purplish-hlne ;  on  some  of  them  the  antennae 
have  the  basal  joint  no  darker  than  the  second,  but  on  two  it  is  partly  infuscated; 
the  distance  between  the  eyes  is  about  e(iual  to  the  length  of  the  two  basal  joints 
of  antennae.  Two  males,  from  Cairns,  differ  in  being  smaller,  4 — i.25  mm.,  the 
eyes  larger  and  closer  together,  the  distance  between  them  less  than  the  length 
of  the  basal  joint,  front  legs  stouter,  abdomen  smaller,  sloping  to  base  and  apex, 
and  non-foveate,  and  the  clothing  of  the  under  surface  denser;  the  prothornx  and 
scutellum  are  coppery  with  a  slight  greenish  gloss,  the  head  is  darker  and  the 
elytra  are  purple. 

DlTROl'IDU.S    INsrLARIS    Lea. 

(D.  chalceus  Lea:   D.  lateralis  Lea.) 

After  reexamining  the  types  and  many  other  specimens  I  now  believe  that 
D.  chalceus  and  D.  lateralis  can  only  be  regarded  as  varietal  forms  of  D.  insularis; 
the  upper  surface  is  usually  brassy,  but  varies  to  entirely  blue,  the  legs  vary  from 
entirely  dark  to  almost  entirely  red;  the  prothoracic  punctures  are  always  sharply 
<lefined,  and  are  fairly  dense.  The  species  is  evidently  close  to  D.  distingnendus, 
but  all  the  specimens  before  me  are  larger,  up  to  3.5  mm.  in  leug-th,  than  the 
type  of  that  species,  and  the  prothorax  could  not  be  regarded  as  "lateraliter 
strigero . " 

DiTROPIDUS  xiGRicOLLis  Lea. 

A  male,  from  Northern  Queensland,  probably  belongs  to  this  species,  but 
differs  from  the  type  in  being  smaller,  1.75  mm.,  the  head  and  prothorax  reddish- 
flavous,  and  elytra  flavous  (except  that  there  is  a  narrow  black  line  at  the  junc- 
tion of  the  prothorax  and  elytra) ;  its  under  surface  has  a  conspicuous  black  cross, 
the  upriglit  part  of  which  extends  from  the  prosternal  process  to  the  end  of  the 
first  abdominal  segment,  and  the  cross-piece  is  on  the  metasternum,  ending  abruptly 
at  the  episterna.  Another  male,  from  Sydney,  agrees  with  it.  except  that  the 
cross-piece  on  the  under  surface  is  larger  and  less  sharply  defined,  its  sides  in- 
eluding  the  metasternal  episterna. 

DiTROPIDUS  suBSiMiLis  Lea. 

A  female  of  this  species,  from  the  Blue  Mountains,  differs  from  the  types  in 
having  a  small,  round,  black  spot,  towards  each  side  of  the  pronotum. 

DiTROPIDUS    NIGRIPENXIS    Lea. 

On  the  male  of  this  species  the  clyi^eus  is  depressed  in  the  middle,  and  each 
side  is  elevated  into  a  small  subtriangular,  slightly  curved,  black-tipped  process, 
about  half  the  length  of  the  basal  joint  of  the  antennae;  the  armature  is  different 
from  that  of  D.  corimius,  and  there  are  many  other  differences  of  sculptui'e  and 
colour . 

Var.  a.  Three  males,  from  .lenolan,  agree  so  closely  with  the  types  that  I 
cannot  regard  them  as  representing  a  distinct  species,  but  the  processes  on  the 
head  are  much  longer  (somewhat  longer  than  the  basal  joint  of  the  antennae)  more 
stronglv  cur\ed.  and  conspicuous  from  most   directions. 

4^ 


L  I  E  i\  /-,  . 


390  DKSCRIPTIOXS     OF    XKW    SPKCIES     OF    Al'STHALIAX    COLEOPTKRA, 

DiTROPiDUs  LAEvicoLLis  Lea. 

This  species  occurs  in  South  Australia  (Lucindale  and  Port  Lincoln)  as  well 
as  in  Western  Australia.  Its  elypeus  appears  as  a  narrow  transvei-se  rid^e,  and 
in  many  other  respects  it  agrees  witli  the  description  of  D.  suhmetaUexcenn,  hut 
all  the  specimens  before  me  are  somewhat  larger,  2 — 2.75  mm.,  than  the  type  of 
that  species.  z^Hn.,  which  was  also  noted  as  having  "thorace  subremote,  tenuiter 
piiiictato'';  the  prothoracic  punctures  of  /;.  laevicoUis  are  certainly  not  subremote, 
bi'iiig  fairly  dense,  althougli  not  crowded. 

DlTBOPIDlS    MTKrATOPUXCTATrs     Lea. 

A  short  compact  species,  the  prothorax  with  sparse  and  small  punctures  on 
the  disc,  but  the  sides  densely  longitudiuall.y  strigose.  Specimens  from  Sydney 
and  Galston  agree  well  with  the  type,  except  that  the  legs  ai-e  entirely  black;  the 
eyes  of  the  male  are  separated  rather  more  than  the  length  of  the  basal  joint  of 
the  antennae,  still  more  in  the  female. 

DiTROPiDUM  sOBRixvs  Lea. 

Numerous  specimens  from  South  Australia  (Petersburg,  Quorn  and  Para- 
<-hilna)  belong  to  this  species,  but  range  in  lengih  2.25 — 3  mm.,  the  males  usually 
being  smaller  than  the  females.  The  eyes  are  moderately  widely  separated  in  the 
males,  more  widely  in  the  females;  the  jiunctures  in  the  inter-ocular  space  are 
i-ather  dense  and  sharply  defined;  there  is  usually  a  well-defined  median  line  there, 
but  occasionally  it  is  almost  absent;  tlie  discal  striae  of  the  elytra  are  very  feelile; 
the  labrum  is  reddish,  and  the  red  occasionally  extends  to  tlie  elypeus. 

DiTROPiDus  VEXUSTUS  Lea. 

A  specimen  from  Northern  Queensland,  and  another  from  Mungar  .Junction, 
<liffer  from  the  types  in  having  the  ui)per  surface  entirely  purple,  altliough  the 
protliorax  is  of  not  quite  the  same  shade  as  the  elytra. 

DiTROPinrs  .scitui.tts  Lea. 

Of  two  specimens  from  the  Swan  Kivei'  one  agrees  well  with  the  type,  but 
the  other  has  the  elytra  of  a  vivid  cn|iiiciy-green . 

DiTROPIUUS  LATIFRONS,  U  .  SJI . 

^  c?. — Coppery-bronze,  in  places  with  a  sliglit  imriilisii  gloss;  lal)rum,  antennae 
(the  club  infuscated)  and  )ial).)i  ledilisli,  ti))s  of  tibiae  obscurely  reddisli.  MckUt- 
ately  densely  clothed  with  white  pubescence. 

Head  wide  and  flat  in  front;  witli  I'ather  dense,  partially  <'nncertlecl  punct\tfes. 
Eyes  widely  separated.  Prothorax  about  twdce  as  wide  as  the  median  length, 
evenly  convex,  a  feeble  oblique  carina  on  each  hind  angle,  these  acute;  punctures 
rather  dense  and  sharply  defined,  but  not  very  large.  Eli/tra  with  siunewhat 
coarser  punctures  than  on  prothorax,  the  interspaces  slightly  rugose;  striae  well- 
detlned  on  sides,  but  scarcely  traceable  elsewliere.  Le()S  rather  stout, 
the  front  ones  somewhat  longer  than  the  otliers.      Lenglii   (c?.  ?),  3.75 — 4  mm. 

?. — Differs  in  l)eing  rather  more  robust,  iiead  smaller,  labrum  less  prominent, 
antennae  somewhat  thinner,  with  the  club  no  darkei-  than  the  basal  joints,  front 
legs  no  longer  than  tlie  liind  ones,  more  of  tlie  tiliiiie  reil.  ;ind  in  tlie  iiliduineii. 


nv    AKTUIR    M.    LKA.  391 

Hafe.— New  South  Wales:  Condobolin.  in  October  (W.   W.   Froggatt)  . 

On  the  under  surface  the  clothing  is  somewhat  longer  than  on  the  upper;  on 
the  disc  of  the  pronotuni  it  has  a  somewhat  rusty  appearance,  across  the  middle 
it  forms  a  whitish  line  that  is  fairly  distinct  on  the  types,  and  on  another  speci- 
men that  was  returned  to  Mr .  Froggatt ;  but  as  a  similar  line  is  to  be  seen  on 
occasional  specimens  of  other  species,  it  is  probably  not  to  be  depended  upon. 
The  distance  between  the  eyes  of  the  male  is  about  e(iual  to  the  width  of  the 
clypeus,  on  the  female  it  is  slightly  more.  The  species  is  close  to  D.  puhescens, 
but  the  prothorax  has  a  short  obli(|ue  carina  on  each  hind  angle  (somewhat  as  on 
D.  faseiatus,  hut  less  distinct)  the  legs  are  darker,  an<l  the  punctures  are  slightly 
coarser:  the  sliape  is  more  oblong  than  in  U.  pubicolUn  and  D.  ichitei,  and  the 
clothing  is  denser. 

DiTROPIDUS    OKXICTLATrS,    n  .  sp  . 

c?. — Coppery-bronze;  clypeus.  lalnum,  parts  of  antennae,  base  of  tibiae  and 
usually  parts  of  abdomen  and  elytral  epipleurae  red.  Under  surface  moderately 
clothed  with  white  pubescence,  more  sparsely  on  u(>per. 

Head  with  a  wide  and  rather  shallow  median  line;  punctures  dense  and  rather 
sharply  defined,  becoming  confluent  in  places.  Eyes  widely  separated.  Pru- 
th 0 rax  ahont  twice  as  wide  as  the  median  length,  ratlier  strongly  and  evenly  convex, 
scutellar  lobe  small ;  punctures  rather  small  and  not  x'ery  dense  in  middle,  becoming 
crowded  and  confluent,  or  substrigose,  on  sides.  Eli/tra  ol)long,  with  dense  and 
rather  small  but  asperate  punctures,  the  interspaces  flnely  rugose  (almost  shag- 
reeaed),  striae  distinct  on  sides  but  scarcely  traceable  elsewliere.  Legs  moderately 
stout,  front  ones  scarcely  longer  than  the  hind  ones.     Lengfh  (<?,  2),  3 — 4  mm. 

9. — Ditjfers  in  being  rather  more  robust,  head  slightly  smaller,  the  median  line 
deeper  and  almost  foveate  in  the  middle,  antennae  somewhat  thinner,  legs  slightly 
shorter,  and  in  the  abdomen. 

Hab. — Western  Au-stralia:  Geraldton   (A.  M.   Lea). 

A  sub-oblong  species,  not  very  densely  but  almost  evenly  clothed  on  the  upper 
surface.  The  third,  fourth,  and  fifth  joints  of  the  antennae,  and  the  lower  parts 
of  the  fii-st  and  second  are  reddish,  the  others  being  blackish ;  the  red  of  the  clypeus 
varies  in  extent  and  intensity;  the  sides  of  the  three  or  four  basal  segments  of 
abdomen  and  the  tip  of  the  pygidium  are  usually,  but  not  always,  reddisli  (the 
variation  is  not  sexual)  ;  the  elytral  epipleurae  are  of  a  rather  bright  red  on  some 
specimens,  obscure  on  others;  the  red  of  the  tibiae  sometimes  extends  to  the  tips 
of  the  femora.  The  distance  between  the  eyes  is  about  equal  to  the  width  of  the 
clypeus  on  the  male,  rather  more  on  the  female.  F)-om  above  the  hind  angles  of 
the  prothorax  appear  to  be  acute,  but  from  tlie  sides  they  are  seen  to  be  rectangu- 
lar; the  sides  are  not  evenly  strigose,  the  punctures  there  being  dense  and  fre- 
quently confluent,  but  as  tlie  derm  is  partially  concealed  by  the  cloth- 
ing, the  surface  at  first  glance  appears  c|uite  conspicuously  strigose. 
On  the  apical  segment  of  the  abdomen  ol'  the  male  there  is  a  vague 
depression,  but  on  the  female  this  is  increased  to  a  large  round  fovea, 
In  general  apjiearance  it  is  fairly  close  to  D.  puhicollin  but  is  somewhat  narrower 
and  the  eh'tra  are  not  glabrous;  from  I),  rji/nmrjptenis,  to  which  it  is  closer  in 
shape,  it  differs  markedly  in  the  finer  sculpture  of  both  ]irothorax  and  elytra,  as 
well  as  in  the  latter  being  clothed;  D.  intonstis  is  much  smaller  and  more  roundtd; 
T).   irhitei  is  larger,  more  rounded,  and  with  the   fliiei'  sculpture  different.        The 


392  DESCRIPTIONS     OF    XEW    SPECIES     OF    AUSTRALIAX    COLEOPIKRA, 

antennae  are  somewhat  longer  than  is  usual,  but  the  joints  of  the  club  are  not 
sufficiently  long  and  loose  to  warrant  the  species  being  referred  to  Elaphod-es. 

DiTKOPiin's  iiinvs,  n.sp. 

d". — Coppery-bronze:  elytiii  llavdus.  slioulders,  base,  and  suture  infuscated. 
six  basal  joints  of  antennae  (except  upper  surface  of  first),  knees  and  trochanters 
reddish,  rest  of  antennae  and  of  legs  infuscated  or  black.  Head,  protliorax,  under 
surface  and  legs  with  white  puljeseenee. 

Head  large  and  wide,  obliquely  flattened  Ijetween  eyes,  shagxeened  and  finely 
punctate;  dypeus  large,  rounded  in  front,  less  shagreened  and  with  stronger  punc- 
tures than  between  eyes ;  labrum  wide  and  feebly  bilobed ;  mandibles  large  and 
strongly  curved.  Eyes  prominent  and  widely  separated.  Protliorax  about  twice 
as  wide  as  the  median  length,  base  not  mucli  wider  than  apex;  with  small  and 
sparse  punctures  on  middle,  becoming  more  numerous,  but  not  crowded,  on  sides. 
Elytra  slightly  longer  than  the  basal  width,  sides  moderately  naiTowed  posteriorly: 
with  rows  of  small  but  distinct  punctures,  on  the  sides  set  in  distinct  striae ;  inter- 
stices subopaque  or  very  inconspicuously  sliagreened .  Front  legs  much  longer 
than  the  othei-s.     Leng-th,  4 — i.25  mm. 

ffab.— New  South  Wales:  Moree  (W.  W.  Froggatt's  107  L). 

A  remarkably  distinct  species,  with  mandibles  suggestive  of  those  of  the  male 
of  Elaphodes  vidpiiiiis,  although  the  antennae  are  of  normal  length;  the  eyes  are 
unusually  wide  apart,  and  the  eanthus  of  each  is  rather  feeble;  the  great  lengtli 
of  the  front  legs  is  due  partly  to  the  tarsi,  but  mostly  to  the  tibiae,  the  latter  being 
at  least  half  as  long  again  as  the  others.  I  know  of  no  closely  allied  species,  al- 
though the  colour  of  the  elytra  is  at  first  suggestive  of  D.  />(.<<■/« his.-  on  the  male  of 
D.  mandibidaris  the  jaws,  although  very  powerful,  are  of  different  shape,  the  eyes 
are  closer  together  (although  widely  separated)  with  the  eanthus  larger,  and  the 
prothorax  entirely  glabrous. 

DiTROPirns    r.iMACULATrs,  n.sp. 

d". — Black;  muzzle.  Ijasal  hall'  of  antennae,  palpi,  a  large  spot  on  each  elytron, 
and  parts  of  front  legs  fiavous  or  reddish-flavous.  Head,  under  surface  and  legs 
with  sparse,  whitish  jiubescenee. 

Head  with  rather  small  and  dense  but  sharply  defined  punctures;  median  line 
feel)ly  defined.  Eyes  moderately  separated,  tlu-  distance  between  them  about  equal 
to  the  length  of  two  basal  joints  of  antennae.  Prothorax  not  quite  twice  as  wide 
as  the  median  length,  base  almost  twice  as  wide  as  apex;  punctures  about  as  large 
as  on  head,  but  not  ([uite  as  dense.  Elytra  slightly  narrowed  posteriorly;  with 
rows  of  rather  small  but  distinct  suboblong  (lunctures,  becoming  larger  and  set  in 
strong  striae  on  tlie  sides,  interstices  with  minute  puiu-tures.  Legs  rather  short. 
Length.  2.G  nmi. 

Hah. — Queensland:  Dalby  (Mre.   F.   H.   Hobler),  unique. 

The  non-metallic  upper  surface,  with  two  large  red  spots  on  the  elytra,  ren<ler 
this  a  very  distinct  species,  to  which  I  know  no  closely  allied  one;  each  spot  is 
tear-shaped,  and  extends  from  the  middle  of  the  disc  (where  it  is  narrowest) 
almost  to  the  inner  apical  augle,  where  it  occupies  about  two-thirds  of  tiie  width; 
the  red  of  the  nuiz/.le  extends  to  slightly  beyond  the  ocular  canthi.  the  front 
femora  are  almost  entirely  red.  the  under  surface  and   apex  of  the  front   tibiae 


BY   ARTHLR   M.   LEA.  393 

and  the  tips  of  the  others  are  also  more  or  less  reddish.      The  median  length  of 
the  prothorax  is  slightly  more  than  the  apical  width. 

DiTROPIDUS    LATICOLLI.S,    n.Sp. 

?. — Black;  labiiiui,  basal  lialf  of  antennae  (the  club  infuscated)  and  palpi  rather 
obscurely  tlavous;  elytra  with  sides  and  apex  widely  tiavous,  elsewhere  infuscated; 
leg's  in  parts  obscurely  diluted  with  red.   Under  surface  and  legs  slightly  pubescent. 

Head  shagreened  and  with  dense,  fine,  aciculate  punctures,  more  distinct  on 
clypeus  than  elsewhere.  Eyes  rather  widely  separated.  Antennae  short.  Pro- 
thorax  more  than  twice  as  wide  as  the  median  length,  apex  scarcely  half  the  width 
of  base;  shagreened  and  with  dense,  tine,  aciculate  punctures,  becoming  crowded 
in  front  angles.  Elytra  scarcely  as  long  as  wide,  sides  moderately  rounded;  with 
rows  of  distinct  but  not  very  large  punctures,  becoming  larger  and  set  in  deep 
striae  on  the  sides ;  interstices  with  dense  and  very  fine  punctures,  or  feebly 
shagi'eened.  Abdomen  with  a  large,  round,  deep,  apical  fovea.  Length,  2.75^ 
3  mm. 

Rah. — Queensland:  Duaringa  (G.  Barnard). 

A  curious  round  species  of  which  I  know  no  close  ally.  On  two  speci- 
mens the  elytra  have  the  sides  widely  tlavous,  from  the  base  to  and  across  the 
apex  (but  there  is  a  slight  infuscation  on  the  sides  above  the  abdomen),  thus 
bounding  on  three  sides  a  large,  subc^uadrate,  deeply  infuscated  patch;  on  a  third 
specimen  the  infuscation  is  extended  so  that  the  tlavous  parts  (which  are  consider- 
ably reduced  in  intensity)  are  confined  to  the  vicinity  of  the  shoulders  and  apices; 
on  the  third  specimen  the  median  line  of  the  head  is  very  distinct,  on  the  others  it 
is  feeble.  The  distance-  between  the  eyes  at  their  nearest  is  about  eciual  to  the 
length  of  the  three  basal  joints  of  the  antennae,  but  it  would  be  less  in  the  male. 
The  pronotum  has  a  vague  bronzy  gloss,  but  it  could  hardly  be  regarded  as  me- 
tallic; from  some  directions  it  appears  to  be  very  finely  pubescent,  but  under  a 
compound  power  it  is  seen  to  be  quite  glabrous ;  the  hind  angles  from  above  ap- 
pear to  be  quite  sharply  acute,  but  from  the  sides  they  are  seen  to  be  rectangular; 
the  notch  of  the  scutellar  lobe  is  very  feeble.  The  intercoxal  process  of  the  pros- 
ternum  is  almost  twice  as  wide  as  long,  truncated  in  front,  and  feebly  incurved 
behind . 

DiTROPIDUS    IMPCXCTICOLLIS,    n.sp. 

?. — Black;  lalirum,  basal  half  of  antennae  (the  club  infuscated),  pa]];.i,  ab- 
domen, legs,  and  a  variable  amount  of  elytra  tlavous.  Under  surface  and  legs 
vei-y  feebly  pubescent. 

Head  shagreened  and  subopaque;  median  line  feeble.  Eyes  widely  separated. 
Prothorax  about  thrice  as  wide  as  the  median  length,  sides  stiiongly  narrowed  to 
apex;  impunctate.  Elytra  about  one  fifth  longer  than  wide,  sides  moderately 
rounded :  with  rows  of  rather  small  but  distinct  punctures,  on  the  sides  set  in  dis- 
tinct striae.  Abdomen  with  a  large,  round,  deep,  apical  fovea.  Length,  1.75 — 2 
mm. 

Tlab. — Western  Australia:   Karridale    (A.    M.    Lea). 

A  minute  species  without  punctures  on  tlie  prothorax,  even  on  the  sides. 
The  hind  end  of  the  prosternal  process  is  almost  truncated,  but  as  the  scutellar 
lobe  is  notched,  the  scutellum  minute,  and  club  five-jointed  the  species  was  re- 
ferred to  Ditropidiis  without  hesitation.     Of  the  two  specimens  under  examina- 


394  DESCRIPTIONS     OF    XtW    .SFECIES     OF    AUSTRALIAN    COLF.OPTERA. 

tiun  the  larfTcr  one  has  the  elytra  Havous,  except  for  a  narrow  Ijla.-k  hiusal  e.ly'mg, 
and  a  short  infuseation  of  the  suture  at  the  base;  but  the  smaller  one  has  about 
halt'  of  the  elytra  l)lack  or  infuscateil,  tlie  dark  part  not  sharply  defined  on  its 
edges,  but  extending  from  each  shoulder  to  the  suture  beyond  the  middle,  so  that 
the  sides  and  apex  are  widely  flavous. 

DlTliOl'IUrS    IIETALLICUS,    n .  sp . 

^_ Coppery,  prothurax  sometimes  with  a  greenish  gloss;  labruiu,  basal  half 

of  antennae  (the  club  infuscated),  tips  of  elytra,  abdomen  (except  part  of  base), 
legs  (the  claws  infuscated)  reddish-llavous.  Head,  under  surface  and  legs 
sparsely  pubescent. 

Head  with  crowded  and  more  or  less  obliquely  confluent  punctures;  median 
line  rather  shallow.  Eyes  widely  separated.  Prothorax  at  apex  abimt  as  wide 
as  the  median  length,  sides  increasing  in  width  to  base;  with  dense  and  rather 
sti'ong  punctures,  the  sides  conspicuously  strigose.  Elytra  oblong;  with  rows  of 
rather  large  punctures,  at  the  sides  set  in  rather  deep  striae.  Length  [S,  V), 
2—2.5  mm. 

?. — Differs  in  being  somewhat  more  robust,  eyes  more  widely  separated,  pro- 
thorax  and  legs  slightly  shorter,  and  abdomen  larger,  with  a  large,  round,  deep, 
apical  fovea. 

//a6.— Tasmania:   Sheffield    (il.    11.    D.    Griffith's  No.    1204). 

The  prosternum  is  usually  coppery,  the  niesosternum  and  metasternuiu  bronzy ; 
the  dark  part  of  the  abdomen  is  sometimes  semicircular,  and  almost  confined  to  the 
intercoxal  process;  the  pygidium  is  entirely  pale.  The  median  line  of  the  head  is 
rather  shallow,  but  is  very  conspicuous  on  account  of  the  converging  punctures; 
the  front  legs  of  the  male  are  no  longer  than  the  hind  ones.  The  description  of 
D.  apiciflavus  (from  "Nouvelle  Hollande")  agTees  in  most  respects  with  this 
species,  except  that  of  the  prothorax,  which  is  noted  as  "parce  et  subtiliter  pune- 
tulato,  lateraliter  substrigoso."  Specimens  from  New  South  Wales  (Gosford, 
Sydney,  and  .Jenolan)  agree  in  all  respects  with  its  description  (except  that  some 
of  them  are  larger)  ;  the  present  species  differs  from  these  in  having  the  prothorax 
with  dense,  and,  for  the  genus  rather  strong  punctures,  with  the  sides  densely 
strigose;  it  has  also  larger  elytral  jnuictures,  is  narrower  and  more  cojipery  (alino.-t 
golden)  than  brassy.  It  is  the  only  species  now  known  from  Tasmania,  witii  the 
elytra  tipped  with  red,  althougii  the  red  is  not  always  snari)iy  limited;  I).  rir'uViae- 
neus  has  the  prothorax  wider  and  very  ilifiVicntly  sculptured. 

DiTROPIDUS   INSIGNIS,   n  .  sp  . 

5.- — Deep  violet-blue,  labrum.  i>alpi  and  p.iii  nl'  antennae  re(l.  Tender  surface 
and  legs  with  sparse  pubescence. 

Head  with  crowded  and  sharjdy  ilcHncd  ]iiuictur<'s.  lic'cuiiiiug  i-iigosc  on 
clyi)eus,  median  line  shallow  and  irregular.  Kyes  widely  separated.  I'mllnirar 
at  base  scarcely  twice  as  wide  as  tiie  median  length,  sides  strongly  rounded;  with 
crowded,  longitudinally  confluent  punctures,  excejit  on  scutellav  lobe,  where  they 
are  separately  impressed.  Eli/tra  briefly  suboblong;  with  rows  of  not  very  large 
but  deep  punctures,  becoming  larger  and  set  in  fairly  deep  striae  on  the  sides; 
interstices  with  sparse  punctures,  except  posteriorly,  where  they  are  moderately 
dense  and  rugose.  Under  surface  with  rather  ilense  and  coarse  punctures;  ab- 
domen with  a  large,  round  deep  apical  fovea.      Length,  4.25  mm. 


BY   ARTHUR   M.   LEA.  395 

Hub. — Western  Australia:  jMullewa  (Miss  J.  V.  May),  imif|ue. 

A  beautiful  deep-blue  speeies,  very  distinct  from  all  others  known  to  me  by 
the  sculpture  of  the  prothi>rax;  at  first  ,y'lanee  this  apjiears  to  be  densely  longi- 
tudinally strig'ose,  but  it  is  really  densely  punctate,  the  punctures  everywhere 
continent  except  on  a  small  part  of  the  scutellar  lobe.  The  elytra  are  of  the 
same  shade  of  colour  as  the  prothorax,  but  owing  to  their  smoother  sui'face  they 
appear  brightei-;  the  antennae  are  rather  long  for  the  genus,  and  the  second-fourth 
joints  are  i)artly  or  entirely  red,  the  others  being  more  or  less  deeply  infu.scated. 
The  pygidiuni  is  glal)rous,  and  its  jninctures  are  (|uite  as  sharply  defined  as  those- 
on  the  head. 

DiTnoHinrs  py(;tiiialis,  n.sj). 

(f. — Black;  tiiree  basal  joints  of  antennae  obscurely  reddish.  Under  surface 
and  leg's  with  sparse  pubescence. 

Head  with  dense  punctures  at  base  and  on  clypeus;  median  line  wide,  shallow,^ 
and  with  smaller  and  sparser  jnmctures  than  on  the  adjacent  surface.  Eyes 
moderately  separated.  Pmthora.v  at  base  not  twice  as  wide  as  the  median  length, 
sides  strongly  rounded;  with  sparse  and  minute  punctures,  the  front  angles  finely 
strigose.  Eli/tra  briefly  suboblong,  with  rows  of  not  very  large  punctures,  at  the 
sides  set  in  deep  stria;  interstices  faintly  wrinkled.     Length  (c?,  ?),  2.6 — 3  mm. 

2. — Differs  in  being  .slightly  more  robust,  prothorax  shorter,  legs  somewhat 
shorter,  and  in  the  abdomen . 

Hab. — New  South  Wales:  Sydney  (A.   M.   Lea). 

There  is  a  single  specimen  of  each  sex  before  me ;  on  the  male  the  elytra  have 
a  slight  bluish  or  bluish-green  gloss,  but  this  is  absent  from  the  female;  the  dis- 
tance between  the  eyes  of  the  male  is  about  equal  to  the  length  of  the  three  basal 
joints  of  antennae,  in  the  female  of  the  five  basal  joints;  on  the  male  the  front 
angles  of  the  prothorax  are  densely  and  finely  strigose,  but  the  strigae  are  so  very 
fine  that  the  surface  at  first  appears  to  be  slightly  shagreened,  on  the  female  they 
almost  reach  the  vanishing-  point;  the  hind  angles  from  above  appear  to  be  acute, 
and  to  slightly  embrace  the  shoulders,  but  they  are  really  almost  rectangular;  tlie 
punctures  on  the  pygidium  are  dense  and  subreticulate. 

DlTROPIDUS    CARIN.WICEP8,    U  .  Sp  . 

2. — Blue;  labruni,  palpi,  and  second-sixth  joints  of  antennae  red.  Under 
surface  and  legs  with  sparse,- inconspicuous  pubescence. 

Head  large;  with  rather  small  but  sliarjily  defined  punctures,  becoming  crowd- 
ed and  irregular  in  front ;  median  line  well-defined  ;  clypeal  suture  marked  by  a 
bisinuate  carina.  Eyes  very  widely  separated.  Prothorax  about  twice  as  wide 
as  the  median  length,  sides  strongly  rounded,  lateral  gutters  well-defined;  punctures 
small  but  sharply  defined.  Elytra  sub-oblong;  with  rows  of  fairly  large  punc- 
tures, on  the  sides  set  in  deep  striae;  interstices  witk  sparse  and  minute  punctures. 
Abdomen  with  a  large,  round,  deep,  apical  fovea.     Length.  4.5  mm. 

Hah. — New  South  Wales:  Forest  Reefs  (A.   M.   Lea),  unique. 

The  side  of  each  elytron  is  gently  incurved  between  the  base  and  the  sudden 
deflection  before  the  middle,  the  dilated  part  being  unusually  deep,  and  the  sub- 
lateral  interstice  cun'ing  around  on  to  it;  the  clypeus  has  two  small  transversely- 
oval,  impunctate  areolets,  each  bounded  behind  by  a  narrow  carina,  and  in  front 
by   a   more   obtuse   elevation    (it   is   probably   vei-y   different    in   the   male)  ;   these 


396  DESCRII'TIO.NS     OF    NEW    SPKCIE.S     OF    AVSTRALIAX    COLEOPTERA, 

characters  at  once  distinguish  the  species  from  B.  armatus,  D.  vigilans,  D.  uhdoiii- 
inalis  and  the  blue  variety  of  D.  concalor;  from  the  variety,  it  is  also  distinguished 
by  its  red  labruin,  longer  elytra,  different  inter-ocular  space,  non-strigose  sides  of 
protliorax,  and  punctures  of  metasternum  notably  coareer  and  sjjarser  towards  the 
sides.  In  D.  coelestis  the  sides  of  the  elytra  are  almost  the  same,  but  the  punc- 
tures of  the  head  and  prothorax  are  considerably  larger  and  denser,  and  the  head 
has  a  circular  inter-ocular  fovea.  The  head  and  parts  of  the  under  surface  have 
a  greenish  gloss,  the  elj-tra  a  purplish  one;  the  tip  of  the  abdomen  and  middle  of 
the  metasternum  are  obscurely  diluted  with  red,  but  from  most  directions  the  red 
is  invisible,  parts  of  the  co.xae  are  also  obscurely  reddi.sh.  The  prothoracic  punc- 
tures, although  small,  are  sharply  defined,  on  the  sides  they  are  slightly  elongated, 
but  not  at  all  confluent. 

DiTROPIDUS    StTBARJIATU.S,   n  .  Sp  . 

c?. — Bronzy,  labrum,  basal  half  of  antennae,  palpi,  and  under  surface  of  front 
femora  and  tibiae  reddish.     Head,  under  surface  antl  legs  with  white  pubescence. 

Head  with  rather  distant  punctures;  median  line  lightly  impressed;  clypeus 
subtuberculate  at  each  end.  Eyes  rather  close  together.  Prothorax  at  base  not 
twice  as  wide  as  the  median  lengfh,  sides  strongly  narrowed  to  apex ;  with  small 
but  sharply  defined  punctures  in  middle,  becoming  larger  and  crowded  on  sides. 
Elytra  not  much  longer  than  basal  width,  sides  rather  strongly  narrowed  pos- 
teriorly; with  rows  of  rather  large  punctures,  interstices  with  dense  but  faint 
punctui'es  (almost  shagreened)  .  Front  legs  slightly  longer  than  hind  ones. 
Length,  2.75  mm. 

Hah. — Western  Australia:  Swan  River  (A.   "Si.   Lea).  uni(|ue. 

This  species  has  been  placed  amongst  those  having  dark  legs,  as,  although  the 
under  surface  of  the  front  ones  is  reddish,  their  upper  surface  is  blackish;  the 
elytra  have  a  vag-ue  greenish  gloss.  The  distance  between  the  eyes  is  hardly  more 
than  the  length  of  the  basal  joint  of  antennae;  the  rows  of  punctures  on  the 
elytra,  even  the  short  subsutural  ones,  are  set  in  shallow  striae;  as  a  result  the 
interstices  are  gently  separately  convex:  on  the  sides,  however,  the  striae  are 
much  deeper,  and  the  interstices  are  acutely  costate;  although  the  type  is  a  male, 
the  third  abdominal  segment  is  distinct  across  the  middle.  The  sides  of  the  clypeus 
denote  an  approach  to  some  of  the  armed  species,  as  they  are  slightly  elevated  and 
shining,  with  the  intervening  space  depressed :  this  character  at  once  distinguishes 
the  species  from  D.  cognatus,  D.  quadratipeiinis.  D.  indisti)tcti(.<i,  D.  conge)! it iis 
and  others,  to  which  at  first  glance  it  seems  close;  in  general  appearance  it  is  like 
a  small  D.  concolor,  but  the  jaws  and  clypeus  are  very  different . 

DiTROPIDUS    LOBICOLLIS,    U.Sp. 

(?. — Black,  upper  surface  with  a  slight  bronzy  gloss,  labrum  and  basal  half  of 
antennae  (upper  surface  of  first  joint  infuscated)  reddish.  Head,  under  surface, 
pygidium  and  legs  with  white  pubescence. 

Head  with  rather  small,  dense,  partially  concealed  punctures;  median  line 
vague.  Eyes  as  far  apart  as  the  length  of  two  basal  joints  of  antennae.  Pro- 
thorax  at  base  almost  twice  as  wide  as  the  median  length,  sides  strongly  rounded, 
with  small  and  sharply  defined  but  not  crowded  punctures  in  middle,  becoming 
larger  and  denser  on  sides.  Ehitra  short;  with  rows  of  not  very  large  punctures, 
becoming  larger  and  set  in  deep  striae  on  the  sides;  interstices  with  fnirly  dense 


BY    ARTHUR    il.    LEA.  397 

but  very  minute  ijuueturos.  Front  legs  sliohtly  longer  than  hind  ones.  Length, 
3.25  mm. 

Hab. — Queensland:  Brisbane  (A.  J.   Coates),  unique. 

The  three  apical  joints  of  the  club  are  missing  from  the  type,  but  the  two 
basal  ones  are  of  normal  appearance,  the  scutellar  lobe  is  acute,  slightly  elevated 
and  not  notched.  The  type  at  first  looks  like  a  small  female  of  D.  concolor,  but 
has  very  different  punctures  and  jaws;  the  prothorax  is  less  narrowed  in  front 
than  D.  subannatus,  the  eyes  are  slightly  more  distant,  and  the  dypeus  is  not 
subdentate  on  the  sides;  the  protlioraci<'  inuictures  differ,  lioth  on  the  middle  and 
sides,  from  those  of  D.  puncticnllis  and  tlie  labrum  is  reddish,  etc.;  the  elytra  are 
not  shagreened  as  in  D.  costatus. 

DlTROPIDUS    CAERULEUS,    U  .  Sp  . 

c?. — Deejj  blue,  under  surface  almost  black,  front  of  elypeus,  labrum  and 
basal  half  of  antennae  (upper  surface  of  basal  joint  infuscated)  reddish.  Under 
sui'face  and  legs  sparsely  clothed,  head  almost  glabrous. 

Head  with  dense,  sharply  defined  punctures.  Eyes  widely  separated.  Pro- 
thorax  mure  tlian  twice  as  wide  as  the  median  length,  sides  strongly  rounde<l ; 
with  fairly  dense  and  rather  small,  but  sharply  defined  punctures,  becoming 
slightly  smaller  on  sides.  Elytra  briefly  suboblong,  sides  gently  narrowed  pos- 
terioi'ly;  with  rows  of  small  punctures,  becoming  slightly  larger  and  set  in  dis- 
tinct striae  on  the  sides;  interstices  faintly  wrinkled,  and  with  very  small  punc- 
tures.    Front  legs  slightly  longer  than  hind  ones.     Length  (d',  S),  2.75 — 3  mm. 

?. — Differs  in  being  more  robust,  eyes  slightly  more  apart,  elytra  less  nar- 
rowed posteriorly,  front  legs  no  longer  than  liind  ones,  and  abdomen  with  a  large, 
round,  deep,  apical  fovea. 

Hab. — Western  Australia:  Rottnest  Island  and  Vasse  River;  New  South 
Wales:  Sydney  (A.  M.  Lea). 

A  beautiful,  deep  blue  species,  with  unusually  small  seriate  punctures  on  the 
elytra;  the  head  occasionally  has  a  slight  greenisli  or  coppery-green  gloss,  and  two 
specimens  have  the  sides  of  the  elytra,  from  some  directions,  distinctly  coppery, 
occasionally  the  upper  surface  is  almost  purple;  the  tips  of  the  tibiae  and  the 
extreme  base  of  the  front  femora  are  sometimes  reddish.  It  is  more  conspicu- 
ously blue  than  D.  tropicus,  eyes  (sex  for  sex)  more  widely  separated,  protlioracie 
imnctures  larger,  seriate  ones  of  elytra  much  smaller  and  the  interstices  faintly 
wrinkled;  structurally  it  is  close  to  D.  ch/pealis,  which  also  has  the  elypeus  red. 
t)ut  tlie  colour  and  punctures  are  different;  it  has  the  sharply  defined  inter-ocular 
punctures  of  D.  frontalis,  D.  tnelasomus,  D.  seminulum  and  D.  sobrinus,  but  differs 
from  all  of  these  in  being  shorter  and  broader,  prothorax  with  sides  more  strongly 
narrowed  in  front,  and  punctures  denser  and  stronger.  The  median  line  of  the 
bead  is  very  feeble  at  the  base,  and  on  some  specimens  is  rejiresented  by  a  sliallow, 
almost  circular  depression  in  the  middle,  but  from  some  specimens  it  is  altogether 
absent . 

DlTROPIDUS    CORIAC'EUS,    U  .  Sp  . 

c?.— Black,  with  a  slight  bronzy  gloss,  basal  half  of  antennae  obscurely  red- 
dish.     Glabrous.      Upper  surface  shagreened. 

Head  with  very  minute  punctures,  median  line  very  feeble.  Eyes  rather 
widely  separated.      Prothnra.v  about   thrice  as   wide   as  the  median   lena-fh,   sides 


398  DESCKIPTIOXS     OF    XEW    SPECIES     OF    AUSTRALIAN    COLEOPTERA, 

Strongly  rounded;  punctures  very  minute.  Elytra  short,  sides  beyond  middle 
stronjilv  rounded.      Length,  1.2 — 1.3  mm. 

2.— Differs  in  the  usual  particulars  of  eyes,  legs  and  abdomen. 

//a^._-\Vestei-n  Australia:  Geraldton  and  Swan  River  (A.  M.  Lea).  Dirk 
Hart og  Island  (Dr.  Michaelsen). 

In  general  appearance  very  near  punctulum,  but  slightly  narrower  and  elytra 
shagreened,  on  that  species  the  head  and  prothorax.  but  not  the  elytra,  are  shag- 
reened.  the  shagreening  is  not  so  pronounced  as  that  of  the  head  and  prothorax, 
but  is  (]uite  distinct ;  from  some  directions  vague  lines  reiiresenting  series  of  punc- 
tures may  be  seen  on  the  discal  parts,  and  even  the  lateral  striae  are  very  feeble, 
on  several  specimens  only  the  marginal  stria  on  each  side  is  present:  an  incon- 
spicuous depression  traverses  the  base  of  the  seutellar  lobe;  the  median  line  of 
the  metasternum  is  diliited  at  the  base  so  as  to  form  a  fairly  large  but  shallow 
fovea . 

DlTROPIDUS   TRAXQUILLUS,  n  .  sp  . 

d".— Black,  labium,  basal  half  of  antennae  (club  infuscated)  palpi  and  parts 
of  legs  more  or  less  reddish  or  flavous.     Glabrous. 

Head  evenly  convex;  with  small,  but  rather  sharp  punctures;  median  line 
scarcely  traceable.  Eyes  rather  widely  separated.  Prothorax  more  than  twice 
as  wide  as  the  median  length,  sides  strongly  rounded;  with  rather  dense  and  small, 
))ut  sharply  defined  punctures.  Elytra  subquadrate;  with  series  of  small  punc- 
tures, on  the  sides  set  in  deep  striae.     Length  (c?,  ?),  1.75 — 2  mm. 

9. — Differs  in  the  usual  particulars  of  eyes,  legs  and  abdomen.. 

Ilah.—'tiew  South  Wales:   Sydney  and  Como  (A.  M.   Lea). 

Slightly  larger  and  more  compact  tlian  D.  ragans,  and  elytral  jninctures  almost 
the  same,  but  prothoracic  punctures  slightly  smaller,  and  all  parts  of  the  upper 
surface  shining  and  nowhere  shagreened  or  opaque ;  the  prothoracic  punctures  are 
much  smaller  than  on  D.  rotuncliformi.-i,  and  the  legs  are  paler.  There  are  dense 
and  sharply  defiiied  punctures  on  almost  the  whole  of  the  under  surface.  The 
knees,  tarsi,  and  hind  femora  are  usually  d.Trker  than  the  rest  of  the  legs,  some- 
times the  hind  femora  are  only  partly  dark,  occasionally  the  tibiae  are  scarcely 
paler  than  the  tarsi. 

DiTROPIDUS   RUFISr.\NUS,    H.Sp. 

d". — Black;  clypeus,  labrum,  most  of  inter-ocular  space,  l)asal  half  of  an- 
tennae (the  club  infuscated)  palpi,  front  legs  (knees  infuscated),  middle  and  hind 
tarsi,  more  or  less  red.     Under  surface  and  legs  with  \-erv  sparse  pubescence. 

Head  subopaque;  with  small  and  fairly  dense  punctures;  median  line  liglitly 
impressed.  Eyes  rather  widely  separated,  rrothora.r  about  twice  as  wide  a.s  the 
median  length;  with  very  small  but  sharply  defined  punctures.  Elytra  briefly 
suboblong,  with  rows  of  rather  large  punctures,  becoming  much  smaller  posteriorly, 
and  set  in  deep  striae  on  the  sides.  Fmnl  h'l/s  slightly  longer  than  hind  ones. 
Length  (c?,  $),  2—2.2.5  mm. 

$. — Differs  in  being  more  rol)ust,  eyes  more  apart,  inter-ocular  space,  clypeus 
and  front  femora  black,  seriate  punctures  of  -elytra  smaller,  front  legs  no  longer 
than  hind  ones,  and  abdomen  larger,  more  conve.x,  and  with  a  large,  ajiical  fovea. 

Wa!*.— South  Australia:  Mount  Lofty  (A.  M.  Lea). 

In  some  respects  fairly  close  to  the  description  of  D.  farialif,  but  middle  (ibiae 
dark,  on  the  head  of  the  female  only  the  labrum  is  pale,  the  sides  of  the  metas- 


BY    ARTHUR    JI.    LEA.  399 

ternum  are  not  pale,  and  five  joints  of  the  antennae  are  dark;  tlie  elothing  and 
[junctures  also  do  not  agree  with  the  description.  Only  one  specimen  of  each  sex 
was  obtained,  and  it  is  probable  that  the  colours  of  the  legs  are  variable. 

DiTROPIDUS   SCULPTIPENNIS,   n  .  sp  . 

c?. — Black;  muzzle,  basal  half  of  antennae,  pal])i,  and  parts  of  leg's  more  or 
less  flavous.     Under  surface  and  legs  very  feebly  pubescent. 

Head  opaque  and  witli  small  punctures ;  median  line  lightly  impressed .  Eyes 
large  and  close  togetlier,  the  distance  between  them  hardly  more  than  half  the 
length  of  the  basal  joint  of  antennae.  Protliorajc  more  than  twice  as  wide  a^  the 
median  length,  sides  strongly  rounded ;  with  rather  small  but  sharply  defined 
punctures  in  middle,  becoming  larger  and  crowded  on  sides.  Elytra  short;  with 
rows  of  rather  large  ])unctures,  on  the  sides  and  apical  half  in  distinct  striae. 
Abdomen  with  a  vague  apical  depression.  Front  Jeg.-f  slightly  longer  than  hind 
ones .     Length,  2 . 1  mm . 

Hah. — Western  Australia:  Geraldton   (A.   ]\I.   Lea),  unique. 

Approaching  the  D.  jacohyi  gi'oup,  but  the  punctures  on  the  medio-basal  half 
of  the  elytra,  although  in  quite  distinct  rows,  are  not  in  deep  striae,  on  the  sides 
the  interstices  between  the  striae  are  carinated .  The  tai-si,  trochanters,  front 
tibiae  and  base  <if  fnmt  femora  are  paler  than  the  other  parts  of  the  legs,  whicii 
are  more  or  less  deeply  infuscated ;  the  pygidiuin  is  of  a  deep  black,  and  the  elytra 
in  its  vicinity  seem  dark  brown,  although  from  above  they  seem  to  be  jiolished 
black  throughout.  Frorii  above  the  soutellar  lobe  seems  to  be  entire,  but  from 
behind  it  is  seen  to  be  slightly  notclied . 

DiTROPIDUS    SUBSUTURALIS,    U  .  Sp  . 

,  S. — Black,  upper  surface  with  a  vague  metallic  gloss;  labrum,  basal  half  of 
antennae,  paljii,  tarsi,  front  leg's  (knees  excepted)  and  parts  of  middle  and  of 
hind  tibiae  more  or  less  flavous.      Glabrous. 

Head  shagreened  and  with  minute  punctures;  median  line  lightly  impressed. 
Eyes  moderately  separated,  their  distance  apart  slightly  more  than  the  length  of 
basal  joint  of  antennae.  Prnthora.r  about  thrice  as  wide  as  the  median  leng'th, 
sides  strongly  rounded,  scutellar  lobe  shorter  than  usual;  punctures  very  small. 
Elytra  short,  rather  strongly  narrowed  ixisteriorly ;  rather  strongly  striated,  the 
striae  becoming  smaller  towards  suture,  and  towards  the  base  near  the  suture 
represented  by  rows  of  punctures.     Length,  1.75  mm. 

Hab. — New  South  Wales:  Tweed  River  (A.   M.   Lea),  unique. 

The  elytral  striae  are  much  as  in  the  preceding  species,  but  their  contained 
punctures  are  much  smaller,  the  eyes  are  also  more  apart,  so  that  the  divergence 
from  the  D.  jacohyi  type  is  still  more  apparent;  at  fir.st  glance  the  species  seems 
close  to  D.  hrevicollis  and  B.  vicarius,  but  the  striae  occupy  the  whole  of  the  apical 
half  of  the  elytra,  instead  of  being  confined  to  the  sides.  The  basal  segment  of 
the  abdomen,  and  the  whole  of  the  metasternum,  have  dense  and  small,  but  shar]dy 
defined  punctures. 

DiTROPIDUS   BRUNNEIPENXIS,    H  .  Sp  . 

d". — Black,  in  places  with  a  slight  metallic  gloss,  but  head  distinctly  copi>ery; 
elytra  dark  browi,  becoming  paler  at  ape.x  and  sides,  the  suture  narrowly  black; 
labrum,  basal  half  of  antennae  (club  infuscated)  and  leg's  more  or  less  flavous. 
Glabrous . 


400  DESCRIPTIOKS     OF    NEW    SPECIES     OP    AUSTRALIAN    COLEOPTERA, 

Head  sbagreeneil  but  with  fairly  tlistinet  punctures;  median  line  taint  and 
becoming  feebly  foveate  between  eyes.  Eyes  moderately  separated,  the  distance 
between  them  abdut  eijual  to  the  length  of  three  l)asal  joints  of  antennae.  Pro- 
thorax  more  than  thrice  as  wide  as  the  median  lenglh.  sides  strongly  rounded, 
median  lobe  unusually  short ;  punctures  very  small  but  from  some  directions  rather 
sharply  defined.  Elytra  about  as  long  as  the  basal  width,  apical  half  rather 
strongly  rounded ;  with  series  of  punctures  of  moderate  size,  set  in  deep  striae  on 
the  sides,  and  lighter  ones  posteriorly.  Abilom^ii  with  a  shallow  apical  depres- 
sion.    Front  legs  slightly  longer  than  hind  ones.      Length  (S,2).  1.5 — 1.75  mm. 

?. — Differs  in  having  eyes  more  apart,  front  legs  no  longer  than  the  hind 
ones,  and  abdomen  with  a  large  apical  fovea. 

jjah. — Western  Australia:  Swan  River  and  Karridale  (A.  M.   Lea). 

A  short  rounded  species,  with  elytra!  striation  approaching  the  species  of  the 
D.  jacobyi  group,  but  the  striae  on  the  medio-basal  jiortion  giving  place  to  rows 
of  punctures,  the  eyes  are  also  more  ajjart  than  in  any  species  of  that  group.  The 
intercoxal. process  of  the  mesosternum  is  larger  than  usual,  and  with  punctures 
much  as  on  the  prosternal  process. 

Elaphode.s    RHIZOmOIDES.   n.sp. 

5. Black,  elytra  with  a  purjilish  gloss;  lalirum.  antennae   (club  more  or  less 

infuscated),  palpi,  abdomen,  and  parts  of  coxae  and  of  tarsi  reddish-Havous. 
Moderately  densely  clothed  with  somewhat  gdldcn  imbescence.  becoming  shorter 
and  sparser  on  under  surface  and  legs. 

Head  with  dense  and  sharply  defined  punctures;  median  line  fairly  distinct. 
Prothorax  more  than  twice  as  wide  as  the  median  leng-th,  sides  strongly  narrowed 
in  front;  punctures  about  the  size  of  those  on  head,  but  less  crowded.  Elytra 
rather  short;  punctures  larger  and  less  crowded  (although  still  fairly  dense)  than 
on  prothorax,  only  the  marginal  stria  on  each  side  distinct.  Abdomen  with  a  very 
large  apical  fovea.      Length,  3.25  mm. 

Hob. — New  South  Wales:  Dalmorton.  in  March   (A.  M.  Lea).  unif|ue. 

The  pubescent  body  and  fairly  long  club  seem  to  indicate  that  this  species  is  a 
member  of  Elaphodes  rather  than  of  Ditnipidits.  to  which  in  consequence  it  has 
been  referred.     At  a  glance  it  resembles  Rhisobius  ve>itralis,  of  the  CoccineUidae. 

Elaphodes  haemorrhoidalis,  n.sp. 

?. — Black;  muzzle  (including  a  subtriangular  space  to  between  the  eyes), 
antennae  (club  infuscated).  tips  of  elytra,  abdomen  and  legs  red.  With  moder- 
ately dense  and  comparatively  long  white  ]iubescence,  becoming  sparser  and 
shorter  on  under  surface  and  legs. 

Head  shagreened  and  with  dense  punctures,  many  of  which  are  obliquely 
confluent;  median  line  feeble.  Prothorax  more  than  twice  as  wide  as  the  median 
length,  sides  strongly  rounded:  iiunctures  dense  and  sharply  defined.  Elytra  ob- 
long; with  rows  of  fairly  large  iiunctures.  on  the  sides  set  in  striae;  interstices 
each  with  a  row  of  distinct  ])nncturcs.  Jhilininii  with  a  large  apical  fovea. 
Length,  3.75 — 4  mm. 

Hab. — Tasmania:  Hobart  (A.   M.   Lea). 

Structurally  and  in  appearance  like  the  jireceding  species  (and  as  with  that 
species  it  might  almost  as  well  have  been  referred  to  Ditropidiis).  but  clotiiing 
not  i|uite  tlie  same,  legs  and  tips  of  elytra  icd.  and  punctures  of  dytra  larger  and 


BY    ARTHUR    M.    LEA.  401 

seriately  arransed.  those  on  the  interstices  are  almost  as  large  as  those  in  the 
regular  rows,  although  not  so  closely  placed,  as  a  result  the  series  appear  to  be 
very  numerous . 

Elaphodes   halticoides,  n.sp. 

c?. — Head  and  prothorax  reddish  with  a  coppery  gloss;  muzzle,  basal  joints 
of  antennae  (the  others  blackish)  presternum,  mesosternum,  part  of  abdomen  and 
legs  reddish-flavous,  elytra  pale  flavous  (almost  ivory-white),  with  darker  mark- 
ings and  punctures,  extreme  base,  scutellum,  raetasternum,  and  part  of  abdomen 
black  or  blackish.  Moderately  clothed  with  short,  wliitish  pubescence,  Init  elytra 
glabrous . 

7/earf  with  crowded  punctures;  median  line  feeble.  Prothnras  more  than 
twice  as  wide  as  the  median  length;  witli  dense  Init  not  very  large  punctures, 
becoming  crowded  on  sides;  with  remnants  of  an  impunctate  median  line;  scutellar 
lobe  scarcely  visibly  notched.  Elytra  suboblong;  with  rows  of  rather  large  punc- 
tures, in  distinct  striae  throughout;  interstices  with  very  sparse  punctures.  Front 
legs  slightly  longer  than  hind  ones.     Length    {S,  2),  2.25 — 2.5  mm. 

?. — Differs  in  being  larger  and  more  robust,  under  surface  entirely  pale,  and 
in  the  usual  particulars  of  the  eyes,  leg's  and  abdomen. 

Hab. — Western  Australia:  Bridgetown   (A.   M.   Lea). 

As  the  antennal  club  is  but  five-jointed  this  species  cannot  be  referred  to 
PolijacliHS :  as  the  prothorax  is  clothed  and  the  joints  of  the  club  rather  lax  1  have 
tlierefore  referred  it  to  Elaphodef< ;  at  first  glance  it  appears  to  belong  to  the 
Halticides,  the  resemblance  to  some  of  the  ])ale  sjiecies  of  Plectroscelis  and  to  some 
small  ones  of  Arsipoda  being  quite  striking.  The  markings  on  the  elytra  are 
somewhat  the  colour  of  the  prothorax,  except  that  in  some  lights  they  have  a 
purplish  gloss;  they  are  not  exactly  the  same  on  both  specimens;  on  the  male  on 
the  left  elytron  theV  form  an  irregular  j  (reversed  on  the  right)  and  a  spot  on 
the  shoulder,  on  the  female  they  are  more  diffused  and  connected  together:  the 
punctures  at  first  appear  to  be  infuscated,  but  are  really  slightly  metallic.  On 
the  male  the  eyes  are  larger  than  on  the  female,  and  the  distance  between  them  is 
slightly  less  than  the  width  of  one,  on  the  female  their  distance  apart  is  more  than 
the  w-idth  of  one. 

COENOBIUS    LONGlrOKXIS,    U.Sp. 

d". — Black ;  nnizzle,  basal  joints  of  antennae  and  parts  of  legs  obscurely  paler. 
Under  surface  and  legs  scarcely  visibly  pubescent. 

Head  with  a  few  large  punctures  in  front.  Eyes  almost  touching.  Antennae 
considerably  longer  than  usual  in  genus.  Prntliora.r  not  twice  as  wide  as  the 
median  length,  sides  strongly  narrowed  in  front,  with  a  fairly  deep  oblirjue  impres- 
sion on  each  side  about  the  basal  third;  without  punctures  except  on  the  margins. 
Eliitra  short ;  with  rows  of  fairly  larg'e  punctures,  becoming  larger  posteriorly 
and  on  the  sides,  and  on  the  latter  set  in  dee))  striae.  Front  legs  slightly  longer 
than  hind  ones.      Length,  2  mm. 

Hah. — Queensland:  Cairns  (Dr.  E.  W.  Ferguson),  unique. 

The  eyes  are  as  close  together  as  on  C.  parvnniger,  but  the  antennae  are  de- 
cidedly longer  and  thicker,  and  the  oblique  impressions  on  the  prothorax  are  fairly 
deep  and  distinctive:  these  characters  also  distinguish  the  species  from  C.  incon- 
stans.  The  antennae,  when  at  rest,  pass  the  base  of  the  abdomen,  the  first  joint 
is  slightly  longer  tlian  the  second  and  tliird  cnmljined.  the  sixth-eleventli  arc  sub- 


402  DESCRiPTioxs   or  xew  .species    of  avstraeiax  cw.eoptera, 

equal,  ami  eaoli  is  iibout  twice  the  lengtli  ami  twice  tlie  widtli  ut  tlie  fifth.      Tiie 
elytra  have  a  vague  bluish  gloss. 

COENOBIUS    SPISSUS,    11.  sp. 

S. — Black  111-  hhickish;  imizzle,  five  l>asal  joints  of  antennae  and  legs  (parts 
of  tarsi  infuscatcd  I  more  (jr  less  Mavous.  TiKler  surface  and  legs  scarcely  visil)ly 
pubescent . 

Ileiul  with  rather  coarse  punctures.  Eyes  large  and  close  together.  An- 
tennae moderately  long.  Protliorux  at  apex  scarcely  as  wide  as  the  median  length, 
a  distinct  oblique  or  slightly  curved  impression  on  each  side  of  the  base,  in  front 
of  which  the  surface  is  rather  strongly  gibbous;  with  rather  coai-se  punctures 
throughout,  dense  in  the  middle,  crowded  on  the  sides.  Elytra  slightly  longer 
than  wide;  with  rows  of  large  punctures,  in  distinct  striae  througiiout.  Length 
{3,  ?),  1.75—2  mm. 

?. — Diffei-s  in  being  more  robust,  most  of  prothorax,  elytra  and  under  surface 
pale,  eyes  more  apart,  antennpe  and  legs  smaller,  and  abdomen  with  a  large  apical 
fovea . 

Hab.—y.v\y  S(mth  Wales:  Sydney   (A.    M.   Lea). 

A  small  species  very  variable  in  its  colours,  but  readily  liistinguishcd  from  all 
others  of  the  genus  by  its  dense  and  coarse  jirothoracic  ])unctures,  and  by  the  rows 
of  elytral  punctures  all  being  in  distinct  striae,  of  which  the  lateral  ones,  however, 
are  deeper  than  the  others.  There  are  seven  males  before  me  and  six  females; 
of  these  the  males  scarcely  differ  in  colour,  except  that  the  tip  of  tlie  abdomen  is 
reddish  on  some  specimens,  but  not  on  others;  but  no  two  females  are  exactly 
alike,  one  is  not  much  i)aler  than  the  nudes,  hut  they  usually  have  the  prothorax 
dull  red,  except  for  a  narrow  black  basal  margin,  and  elytra  tiavous  with  the  suture 
and  a  variable  extent  of  the  base  (on  one  specimen  a  narrow  black  basal  margin 
only)  l)lack,  the  metastermim  and  middle  (transversely)  jiarts  of  abdomen  are 
more  or  less  deeply  infuscated,  the  rest  of  the  under  surface  being  flavous.  On 
most  of  the  specimens  the  second  joint  of  antennae  is  distinctly  darker  than  the 
first  and  third. 

CoEXOBius  iN.sui,iroLA,  n.sp. 

iS . — Black  with  a  metallic  gloss,  more  distinct  on  head  and  inothorax  than 
elsewhere;  elytra  piceous-brown,  the  tiyis  paler,  antennae  (a  variable  number  of 
joints  of  the  club  infuscated)  and  leg's  (femora  more  or  less  deeply  infuscated)  of 
a  rather  dingy  flavous  or  testaceous.      Under  surface  and  legs  minutely  pul)escent. 

Head  with  rather  dense  and  sharply  defined  punctures.  Eyes  large  and 
close  together.  Protluirax  about  twice  as  wide  as  the  median  length,  sides  strongly 
narrowed  to  apex,  with  a  shallow  oblique  impression  on  each  side  directed  to  the 
middle  of  the  scutellar  lol)c;  ]iunitures  dense  and  sharply  defined,  Init  not  very 
large  in  middle,  becoming  coarse  and  crowded  on  sides.  Elijlra  briefly  sub- 
oblong;  with  rows  of  distinct  ininctures  in  ratliei-  narrow  striae,  Init  on  the  sides 
striae  deeper  and  wider.      Length    (c?,  2).  12 — 2.?>  mm. 

?. — Differs  in  being  larger  and  more  rolmst.  nuuh  paler,  eyes  more  apart 
(the  distance  between  them  almost  c(|ual  to  the  length  of  the  liasal  joint  of  an- 
tennae), punctures  smaller,  antennae  and  h'gs  shorter  and  abdomen  more  convex 
and  witji  a  large  a|>ical   fovea. 

//f(/(.— Western  Australia:   I'clsart   Island    (A.    M.    Lea). 


BV    AHTIIUR    M.    LEA.  403 

As  the  antennae  have  a  six-.jointetl  ihib.  the  eyes  are  close  together,  and  the 
scutellar  lobe  not  notched  I  have  referred  this  speeies  to  Coenobius,  despite  the 
shape  of  its  prosternal  ]irocess:  its  posterior  end  is  outcurved  inetead  of  slightly 
incurved  to  tlie  middle.  From  the  preceding  species  (wliosie  prosternal  ))rocess  is 
normal)  it  differs  in  being  metallic,  in  having  the  prothorax  less  gibl)ous  in  front, 
with  much  smaller  punctures,  although  the  discal  ones  are  sharply  detined,  and 
elytral  punctures  distinctly  narrower  than  the  interstices  instead  of  wider,  as  on 
at  Ica.st  the  males  of  that  species.  Six  males  before  me  are  practically  identical 
in  colours  except  tliat  on  two  of  them  the  median  intei-stice  on  each  elytron  is 
slightly  paler  than  the  adjacent  ones;  four  females  have  the  elytra  (except  the 
shoulders  and  extreme  l)ase)  and  legs  entirely  pale,  and  the  prosternum.  mesos- 
ternum  and  two  basal  segments  of  abdomen  obscurely  reddish ;  two  of  them  also 
have  parts  of  the  protliorax  and  of  the  muzzle  obscurely  reddish. 


404' 

ORDINARY  MONTHLY  MEETING. 
29th  Septembeh,  1920. 
Mr.  .).  J.  Fletclier.  M.A..  B.Sc,    President,  in  the  Chair. 

Mr.  Herbert  Charles  Furst,  Linwood  Avenue,  Killara,  an<l  Dr.  Edwix  Tueo- 
PHILUS  •Je.s.se  Ick-Hewins,  Dimedoo,  were  elected  Ordinary  jlembers  of  tlie 
Soeietj-. 

The  President  made  regTetful  reference  to  the  death  of  the  Rev.  \V.  W. 
Watts. 

The  Donations  and  Exchanges  received  since  the  previous  Monthly  .Meeting 
(25th  Aug'ust.  192IM,  amounting  to  6  Volumes,  89  Pai'ts  or  Nos..  4  Bulletins,  2 
Reports,  and  1  Pamphlet,  received  from  3(i  Societies  and  Institutions  and  one 
private  donor,   were   laid   ujion   the  table. 

NOTE.S    AND  EXHIBITS 

-Miss  Hyiies  e.xhihited  a  very  symmetrical  concretion  from  Natal  Downs  Sta- 
tion, about  90  miles  inland  from  Charters  Towel's,  Q. 

Mr.  E.  G.  Jacobs  exhibited  specimens  of  Epacris  piirpiirasceus  showing 
perfectly  doubled  flowers.  The  plant  from  which  these  specimens  were  collected  is 
growing  naturally  beside  one  or  two  plants  showing  single  flowers  only,  on  a 
stony  ridge  at  Kyde. 

Mr.  E.  Cheel  exhiliited  two  living  plants  of  Erigeron,  w-hich  had  been  re- 
garded as  forms  o^  one  species,  namely,  E.  linifolius,  as  recorded  in  these  Pi'o- 
ceeding's,  xliii.,  1918,  p.  610,  but  which  on  investigation  seem  to  be  identical  with 
specimens  in  the  National  Herbarium  labelled  Canyza  Naudinii  Bonnet  (BuU. 
Soc.  Bot.  Fr.,  XXV.,  1878,  p.  208).  Another  specimen  from  the  Ea-stern  Pyrenees 
labelled  Canijza  altissima  Ch.  Naud.  et.  U.  Debx.  seems  to  be  scarcely  distinguish- 
able from  C.  Naudinii,  but  as  the  works  describing  these  species  are  not  available 
in  our  libraries,  the  differences   between   the   two   species   cannot   be   settled. 

He  also  exhibited  specimens  of  a  wild  strawlierry,  Fragraria  itidica  Andr., 
from  Summer  Hill,  which  is  also  spreading  rapidly  on  the  Bellingen  River  in 
Paspalum  paddocks.  Specimens  from  the  latter  place  were  lirought  in  for  deter- 
mination by  Mr.  D.  Boland. 

Mr.  W.  F.  Blakely  exhibited  specimens  from  the  National  Herhariuin  of  a 
supposed  hybrid  form  of  Boronia  serrulata  Sm.,  ^  b_  floribunda  Sieb.,  and  a 
variety  of  B.  serrulata,  both  from  the  Homsby  district.  The  leaves  of  the  hybrid 
closely  resemble  tliose  of  B.  serrulata,  and  are  nearly  all  simple;  some,  however, 
are  binate.  others  tcrnate  on  the  same  branch.  The  inflorescence  is  axillary  and 
terminal,  while  the  flowers  are  solitary  and  cymose,  but  do  not  vary  essentially 
from  those  of  B.  serrulata.  As  most  of  the  im]iortant  characters  agree  with 
those  of  B.  serrulata  the  evidence  points  to  it  being  the  seed  bearer.  This  form 
is  almost  identical  with  the  one  exhibited  by  Mr.  J.  H.  Maiden,  on  behalf  of 
Mr.  T.  Steel  (these  Proceedings,  1906,  p.  566),  but  differs  from  the  specimen 
exhibited  by  Mr.  A.  A.  Hamilton  (these  Proceedings,  1915.  p.  4191  in  the 
majority  of  the  leaves   being  simple. 

Boronia  serrulata  Sm.  var.,  a  virgate  plant  about  18  inches  high;  young 
shoots  minutely  tomentose;  leaves  lanceolate,  acute,  slightly  erenulate,  12  mm. 
long,  3-4  mm.  broad ;  bracts,  sepals  and  petals  more  acuminate  than  in  the  normal 
B.  serrulata  Sm.  It  differs  from  B.  serrulata  Sm.  in  the  narrow  lanceolate  leaves 
and  relatively  smaller  flowers.  He  also  exhibited  a  white  form  of  Bornuia  flori- 
bunda Sieb.,  which,  as  far  as  he  could  ascertain,  had  not  been  previously  recorded. 

Mr.  C.  Hedley  gave  a  short  account  of  the  work  of  the  Pan-Pacific  Science 
Congi'ess  held  at  Hcmolulu  in  August. 


405 


THE  GEOLOGY  AND  PETROLOGY  OF  THE  GREAT  SERPENTINE 
BELT  OF  NEW  SOUTH  WALES. 

Part  IX. — The  Geology,  Palaeontology  and  Petrography  of  the 

CURRABUBULA  DISTRICT,   WITH  NOTES  ON  ADJACENT     REGIONS. 

By  Professor  W.   N.  Benson,  B.A.,  D.Sc,   F.G.S.,    W.  S.  Dun,  and 
W.  R.   Browne,  B.Sc. 

Section   C. — Petrography. 

By  W.    R.   Browne,  B.Sc,  Lecturer  and  Demonstrator  in  Geology, 
The  University  of  Sydney. 

(Plate  XXV.) 

Page. 

Introduction 405 

Extrusive  Rocks 406 

Intrusive  Rouks ■    •     410 

General  Remarks 421 

Comparison  with  other  Carboniferous  Areas  in  the  State     ..    .. 422 

Introduction. 

The  igne<ius  rocks  ot  the  Currabubula  district  are  of  interest,  both  on  account 
of  the  variety  in  type  and  in  mode  of  occurrence  which  they  present,  and  because 
of  the  striking  resemblance  which  many  of  them  bear  to  the  volcanic  rocks  of 
Carboniferous  age  in  other  parts  of  the  State,  and  particularly  to  the  extensive 
series  which  form  so  important  a  part  of  the  Carboniferous  area  at  Clarencetown, 
Paterson.  Seaham  and  elsewhere  in  tlie  Hunter  River  basin,  about  100  miles  away 
to  the  S.S.E.  of  Currabubula. 

Igneous  activity  appears  to  have  l)egun  in  this  area  during  the  Burindi  epocli, 
and  was  confined,  so  far  as  is  at  present  known,  to  explosive  outbursts :  no  out- 
crops of  massive  volcanic  rock  have  been  found,  but  fine-grained  tuffs  occur  at  tlie 
top  of  the  Burindi  Beds.  The  display  of  igneous  activity,  however,  culminated 
during  the  laying  down  of  the  Kuttung  Series  and  continued  apparently  right 
to  the  close  of  the  Carboniferous  period. 

The  chronological  sequence  of  the  igneous  rocks  can  never  be  determined  with 
the  same  accuracy  and  definiteness  with  which  it  can  be  established  in  the  more 
southern  areas,  for  the  reason  that  the  series  is  partly  extrusive  and  partly  in- 
trusive, and  so  mutual  relationships  can  often  not  be  observed.  This  must  also 
render  tlie  precise  stratigrapliical  position  of  some  of  the  rocks  a  matter  of  un- 
certainty :  for  example,  the  great  series  of  pyroxene  andesite  sills,  whicli  are  so 
important  both  physiographically  and  petrologically  in  the  area,  have  been  found 
intrusive  only  into  the  Burindi  Beds  and  the  overlying  "gi-its,"  so  that  their  exact 
time-relations  to  the  conglomerates  and  glacial  beds  of  the  Kuttung  Series  cannot 


406    GEOLOGY  AND  PETROLOGY  OF  THK  GREAT  SERPESTIXF.  BELT  OF  X.S.W., 

be  established,  except  iiulirt'ctly  tliiougli  tlie  fact  ot  tlic  Martin's  Cieek  type  of 
andesite  (which  presumably  is  closely  connected  with  the  pyroxene  andesite)  being 
found  at  Werris  Creek  Gap  among  the  conglomerates. 

The  earlier  and  more  acid  portions  of  the  series  appear  to  have  been  ejected 
largely  in  fragmental  form,  and  are  now  represented  by  the  tuffs  which  occur  so 
abundantly  at  the  base  of  the  Kuttuug  Series,  and  resemble  very  closely  those 
found  in  the  Hunter  \'aliey.  This  tendency  of  certain  of  the  acid  rocks  to  form 
pyroclastic  material  has  been  noted  and  commented  on  by  Flett  (47)  and  othei-s. 
It  is  exhibited  in  this  State  at  the  base  of  the  Devonian  at  Taemas,  near  Vass, 
and  it  appears  as  a  constant  feature  of  our  Carboniferous  vuleanicity.  Probal)iy 
it  is  in  some  way  connected  with  the  viscosity  of  the  highly  alkaline  magmas. 

At  intervals  during  the  deposition  of  the  tuffs  (which  continued  during  most 
of  the  Kuttung  epoch)  small  Hows  of  basalt  were  poured  out,  and  there  were  also 
local  eruptions  of  soda  rhyolite  and  associated  tuffs. 

The  most  important  and  definite  manifestation  of  volcanic  activity  took  place 
subsequent  to  the  deposition  of  the  Kuttung  Series,  when  there  were  extensive 
outpourings  of  l)aisalt,  with  tuffs  and  agglomerates,  succeeded  l)v  wides]iread  intru- 
sions, and  probably  extrusions,  of  magma.  Of  these  we  have  evidence  in  the  sills 
and  dykes  of  dolerite.  Iioridilende  and  pyroxene  andesite.  and.  lastly,  of  trachytoid 
keratophyres. 

It  js  here  assumed  that  the  sills,  dykes,  and  other  intrusions  which  are  found 
so  extensively  about  the  district  were  closely  connected  if  not  actually  synchronous 
with  the  igneous  activity  of  which  tlie  Warragundi  volcano  was  one  expression; 
the  field  evidence,  as  well  as  the  petrological  study  of  the  rocks,  tends  to  .justify 
this  assumption. 

The  petrological  examination  of  the  rocks  has  been  carried  out  on  material, 
the  Inilk  of  which  wa.s  collected  by  Benson  during  the  progress  of  the  field-work, 
and  the  field-relations  as  determined  by  Iiim  have  been  accepted . 

EXTRI'SIVK   K0CK.S. 

Tuffs  of  the  Burindi  Beds. 

A  comprehensive  study  of  these  lias  not  been  nuide,  but  specimens  have  been 
collected  and  examined  from  the  railway  cutting  in  Portion  34,  about  1}  miles 
north-east  of  the  railway  bridge  over  Currabubula  Creek.  Here  the  mudstones 
and  tuff's  have  been  invaded  and  indurated  by  a  sill  of  glassy  andesite,  and  an 
interesting  though  complicated  section  is  exposed. 

The  tuft'  itself  is  an  extremely  hai'd,  compact,  siliceous-looking  rock  with  a 
short  and  subconchoidal  fracture.  Under  the  microscope  it  is  seen  to  be  a 
keratophyric  tuff,  consisting  of  a  microfelsitic  or  cryptocrystalline  matrix  thickly 
set  with  angular  chips  of  felspar.  These  are  of  pure  all)ite  and  vary  nuu'h  in 
size,  the  bulk  of  the  fragments  being  very  minute  iiuleeil.  while  the  largest  are 
not  more  than  .5  mm.  long.  This  felspar  is  a  good  deal  kaolinized  and  the  rock 
as  a  whole  is  slightly  stained  with  limonite.  Quartz  could  not  be  detected  with 
certainty,  and  ferromagnesian  minerals  are  absent.  Tliere  has  l)een  some  silicifica- 
tion,  indicated  by  little  aggregates  of  chalcedonic  (luartz-granules.  Just  where 
the  andesite  has  invade<l  it,  the  tuff  giades  into  a  type  crowded  with  angular 
fragments  of  a  hard  butf  or  cream-coloured  porpliyritic  rock.  Tliese  grade  from 
pieces  about  l.J  inches  in  diameter  down  to  the  nunutest  chips.  It  is  evident,  on 
examination  with  the  microscope,  tliat  the  rock  has  undergone  a  cei-tain   amount 


1!Y   W.   X.    BEXSOK,   \V.    S.    DUX,    AND    \V.    R.    CROWXE.  407 

4 

of  eoutact  metamorpbism.  Augiilar  aggregates  eompused  of  tiuy  clialcedonic 
quartz-granules  are  numerous,  and  the  rock  is  crossed  with  veinlets  of  the  same 
material,  while  many  of  the  rock-fragments  included  in  the  tuff  have  been  devitri- 
tied.  Tliese  fragments  include  examples  of  a  trachytic  rock,  a.s  well  as  the  por- 
pliyritic  rock  already  mentioned.  This  latter  proves  to  he  keratophyre,  the  only 
phenocrysts  recog-nisable  microscopically  being  albite ;  a  few  aggregates  of  chlorite 
and  quartz  may  possibly  represent  original  pyroxene.  In  the  larger  fragments 
the  glassy  base  has  been  completely  kaolinized  and  is  characterised  throughout  by 
well-marked  perlitic  cracking  with  traces  of  devitrification :  in  the  smaller  frag- 
ments tlie  base  has  comidetely  dexitritied  into  spongy-looking  fels]}athic  material 
with  a  lower  R.I.  than  Canada  Balsam. 

Underlying  the  andesite  sill  there  is  a  tuff  (1-155)  of  rather  unusual  constitu- 
tion, consisting  as  it  does  for  the  most  part  of  albite,  pyroxene  and  fragments  of 
trachytic  rock.  The  felspar  is  generally  fragmental,  but  in  some  cases  shows 
almost  perfect  scjuare  sections.  It  often  contains  inclusions  of  apatite  needles 
and  of  chloritic  material,  which  at  times  assumes  the  rounded  outline  characteristic 
of  inclusions  of  glassy  base.  The  pyroxene,  which  is  mostly  augite,  with  a  little 
hj'perstheue,  still  retains  in  a  large  measure  its  stout  prismatic  habit,  although  a 
good  deal  cracked  and  somewhat  altered .  The  rock  fragments  are  small,  none 
being  more  than  3  mm.  in  diameter.  Almost  all  of  them  have  trachytic  faliric 
and  are  porphyritic  in  columnar  albite.  A  few  are  partly  gla.ssy.  The  inter- 
stices of  the  rock  are  filled  mostly  with  cidorite.  but  some  parts  of  the  matrix 
appear  to  consist  of  an  extremely  fine-grained  trachytic  hypocrystalline  rock,  and 
here  and  there  are  evidences  of  silicification .  Tlie  rock  may  be  termed  a  pyroxene- 
bearing  keratophyre  tuff. 

In  view  of  the  fact  that  the  albite  of  many  l)asic  rocks  is  secondary  and  that 
many  keratophyres  must  be  regarded  as  albitized  porphyrites  (49),  it  is  i)roper 
to  in(|uire  into  the  possibility  that  the  albite  in  the  rocks  under  discussion  may  be 
secondary.  As  far  as  can  be  observed  there  is  no  positive  evidence  that  all)itiza- 
tion  has  occun-ed.  Neither  are  there  traces  of  still  unaltered  basic  felspar  (50), 
nor  does  the  albite  exhibit  a  suspicious  cleai-ness  (51),  nor  yet  is  it  crowded  with 
epidote  and  other  alteration  products,  such  as  (me  might  expect  in  the  endogenic 
albitization  of  a  basic  felspar.  The  allute  then  may  fairly  be  considered  a  primary 
mineral . 

Felspathic   Tuffs  <,f  tlie  Kuttiuicf  Series. 

These  form  an  extensive  series  of  gritty-looking  rocks  constituting  much  of 
the  Kuttung  Beds  and  intercalated  with  the  conglomerates.  Megascopically,  a 
typical  specimen  obtained  from  the  Main  Felspathic  Grit  is  iiinkish-grey  in  colour, 
composed  mostly  of  small  felspar  chips  and  crystals,  both  pink  and  white,  and  sub- 
ordinate i|uartz.  with  a  few  dark  minerals,  all  endx'dded  in  a  greyish  matrix.  In 
thin  section  the  tutt'aceous  character  of  the  rock  becomes  apparent.  Tlie  dominant 
mineral  is  orthoclase,  in  crystals  and  fragments  averaging  about  1  mm.  and  much 
kaolinized;  there  is  a  minor  amount  of  plagioclase,  mostly  albite.  Quartz,  of  the 
type  found  as  phenocrysts  in  volcanic  rocks,  is  fairly  aljundant,  mostly  a.s  frag- 
ments but  often  retaining  traces  of  crystal  form  and  showing  corrosion  and  stony 
inclusions.  A  few  small  pieces  of  augite,  hornblende  and  ilmenite  are  also  seen. 
Of  lava  fragments  there  are  many,  mostly  glassy  and  often  pumiceous,  sometimes 
possessing  fluidal  or  spherulitic  fabric. 


408     GEOLOGY  AND  PETROLOGY  OF  THE  GREAT  SERPEXTISE  BELT  OF  X.S.W 

All  these  constituents  are  compacteil  together  and  set  in  a  biMJwn-stained  un- 
resolvable  matrix  containing  uiuiierous  tiny  cliii>s  of  (|uartz,  felspar  ami  pumiceous 
glass . 

I>iterbedded  Floas  ami  Tnjjs  in  the  Kutluiig  Series. 

(a)  Suda  rhyolites  and  tuffs.  luterbedded  with  the  Kuttung  Series  are  what 
appear  in  the  iield  to  be  rhyolitii-  tlows  or  tuffs.  Thc.'se  form  a  series  of  striking 
outcroi^s  on  the  right  bank  of  Rocky  Creek  in  Portion  322.  Three  specimens 
have  lieen  sectioned  and  examined,  and  they  prove  to  be  soda  rhyolites  or  soda 
rhyolite  tuffs.  The  rocks  are  fragmental  wholly  or  partly,  but  it  is  not  clear  from 
a  microscopic  examination  whether  they  should  be  classed  as  tuffs  or  essentially 
massive  volcanic  rocks  with  a  gi-eat  deal  of  tuffaceous  material  included . 

1493  from  the  east  end  of  Portion  273,  Currabubula.  is  in  hand-specimen  a 
light  gi-eyish-green  rock  with  a  dull  felspathic-looking  gTuundmass  containing  small 
phenoerysts  of  felspar  and  quartz.  Under  the  microscope  the  (|uartz  is  seen  to 
be  fragmental  and  much  corroded,  as  is  also  the  felspar  which  is  pure  albite  of 
the  variety  known  as  checker-albite .  The  groundmass  is  largely  crypt ocrystalline, 
is  free  from  tiow-structure,  and  in  addition  to  little  gi-ains  of  felspar  and  quartz, 
contains  large  numbers  of  remains  of  collapsed  pumice  in  the  shape  of  little  cus- 
pate  bodies  now  devitritied  and  represented  by  strings  of  chalcedonic  (|uartz 
granules  and  little  prisms  of  clear  albite.  There  are  also  little  irregular  pockets 
consisting  mostly  of  granules  of  clear  secondary  albite.  A  few  vei'y  small 
rounded  vesicles  are  tilled  with  the  chalcedonic  quartz  and  chlorite. 

1534  from  Portion  322  is  a  green,  hard,  dense  lithoidal  rock  recalling  in  a])- 
peai'ance  some  of  the  Pokolbin  rhyolites.  There  are  phenoerysts  of  (|aartz  up  to 
1  ram.  in  length,  originally  idiomorphic  but  now  much  shattered  and  corroded, 
and  with  inlets  and  inclusions  of  groundmass;  also  fragments  of  pure  albite  up 
to  2  mm .  long  and  a  good  deal  shattered .  The  groundmass  consists  of  small 
chips  of  quartz  and  felspar  and  numberless  pumice  fragments,  set  in  a  crypto- 
crystalline  base  in  which  there  are  occasional  streaks  of  glassy  material.  A  little 
apatite  is  present.  Tlie  groundmass  (if  the  rock  contains  inclusions  of  rhyolitic 
rock,  the  largest  being  of  fluidal  fabric,  and  poryphyritic  in  quartz,  orthoclase, 
and  albite. 

Specimen  1535  (PI.  xxv.,  fig.  1),  descril)ed  as  a  "llnw  bi-eccia  fi'om  Portion 
322,  Currabubula,"  looks  more  distinctly  like  a.  tuff  than  cither  ol'  the  others  in 
hand  specimen;  it  has  a  hard  stony  base  of  pale  green  colour,  in  which  can  he  seen 
tiny  fragments  of  quartz  and  of  white  and  pink  felspar,  as  well  as  larger  dark- 
coloured  inclusions  of  rock.  The  microscope  shows  it  to  be  composed  of  abinulant 
small  fragments  of  quartz  and  felspar  and  deviti-ified  pumice  with  chips  of  fluidal 
and  spherulitic  rhyolite,  set  in  a  eryptocrystallinc  base  containing  little  nests  of 
secondary  (|uartz.  The  quartz  fragments  are  angular  and  corroded;  felspar  com- 
prises albite  and  orthoclase,  the  former  ])redominating  and  both  a  good  deal  de- 
composed. The  rhyolitic  inclusions  are  sometimes  much  chloritized.  and  the  flow- 
lines  are  indicated  by  strings  of  secondary  (juartz  granules.  What  a|)pear  to 
have  been  cavities  are  now  lined  with  tiny  prisms  of  clear  (|uartz  and  filled  with 
a  colourless  zeolitic   (?)  substance  stained  in  jiatches  with  haematite. 

(h)  Basaltic  Rocks.  In  Portions  57  and  5!),  Currabubula.  there  is  a  small 
flow  (1407)  of  peculiar  type  (PI.  xxv.,  fig.  7)  .  In  hand-specimen  the  rock  is  dark 
greyish-brown  and  aphanitic,  with  a  very  few  small  felspar  phenoci-ysfs  showing. 
Microscopically  felspar  is  the  only  fresh  constituent,  in  laths  about  6  ram.  long, 


BY  W.    X.    BENSOX,   W.    S.    DUX,    AXD   W.    R.    BROWXE.  409 

with  frayed  ends.  Measurements  indicate  acid  andesine,  about  Abes  An32.  There 
is  a  second  crystallization  of  microlitic  felspar  liiving  approximately  straight 
extinction,  which  would  point  to  olig'oelase.  This  forms  a  kind  of  mesostasis  of 
sub-variolitic  aspect.  The  spaces  between  the  felspars  are  tilled  with  a  confused 
mass  of  chlorite,  some  of  which  is  pseudomorphous  after  a  mineral  giving  rect- 
angular sections,  possibly  ]iyroxene,  while  the  rest  is  just  interstitial  and  may 
represent  original  glass.  It  is  sprinkled  with  rod-like  microlitic  iron-ore.  Car- 
bonates are  present  in  fair  amount,  both  a-s  little  interstitial  patches  and  also,  with 
quartz,  tilling  a  few  vesicles.  The  rock  may  provisionally  be  termed  an  andesine 
basalt,  though  probably  more  acid  than  normal  basalt. 

Specimen  1440,  collected  from  Portion  57,  a  little  south  of  the  andesine  basalt 
just  mentioned,  is  possibly  from  another  interbedded  flow.  It  is  typically  basaltic 
in   appearance,  liluish-black,   very  comjiact  and   with   a   i-atlicr  hackly    frnchue. 

In  thin  section  it  is  hypocrystalline  intersertal  and  very  fine  grained.  Laths 
of  bytownite,  varying'  from  a  length  of  .75  mm.  down  to  microlitic  dimensions, 
and  slightly  altered,  are  distributed  through  a  matrix  composed  of  pyroxene  and 
magnetite.  The  pyroxene  is  a  bright  yellow-green  colour  and  occurs  in  dense 
masses  of  extremely  tiny,  rounded,  and  almost  e(|uidimensional  granules  and 
crystals.  Some  of  these  are  distinctly  pleochroic  and  have  straight  extinction,  in- 
dicating hypei-sthene,  but  the  bulk  of  the  pyroxene  is  augite.  There  is  abundance 
of  magnetite  as  tiny  crystals  and  locally  as  clouds  or  patches  of  fine  dust. 

The  relative  proportions  of  the  different  constituents  vary  very  much  from 
point  to  point  in  the  slide,  but  on  the  whole  felspar  probably  predominates,  with 
pyroxene  and  magnetite  in  the  order  given.  There  are  fairly  frequent  in-egular 
small  patches  of  altered  brown  glass  into  which  felspar  and  pyroxene  crystals 
protrude,  and  in  the  neighbourhood  of  these  patches  minerals  may  be  rather  lai'ger 
and  more  idiomorphic  than  usual.  Minute  apatite  needles  are  scarce.  Occa- 
sional aggregates  of  magnetite  with  some  indeterminate  material,  up  to  2  ram.  in 
length,  appear  to  be  pseudomorphs,  possibly  after  olivine.  This  may  be  called  a 
hypocrystalline  intersertal  basalt. 

Basalts  of  the  Verrie  Series. 

For  the  most  part  the  rocks  are  very  decomposed,  and  only  one  specimen 
(1510)  was  available  for  sectioning  (PI.  xxv.,  fig.  9).  This  was  obtained  from  a 
well  in  Portion  239,  at  the  head  of  Anstey's  Creek.  It  is  a  rather  weathered,  grey,, 
fine-grained  rock,  amygdaloidal  in  structure,  the  vesicles  being  filled  sometimes  with 
calcite  and  sometimes  with  white  or  colourless  zeolites.  Under  the  microscope 
the  rock  is  seen  to  have  suffered  considerably  from  surface  alteration.  The  prin- 
cipal constituent  is  a  plagioelase,  in  laths  averaging  about  .8  mm.  long  which 
are  at  least  as  basic  as  labradorite.  There  are  occasional  traces  of  parallel  orien- 
tation, and  the  interspaces  between  the  felspars  are  filled  largely  with  augite  which 
is  interstitial  rather  tlian  ophitic.  It  is  of  a  greyish-l)rown  colour,  very  faintly 
pleochroic,  and  has  magnetite  plentifully  distributed  through  it.  What  were  pro- 
bably small  crystals  of  olivine  are  now  represented  by  aggregates  of  serpentinous 
material  always  rimmed  with  translucent  haematite.  Evidently  the  original  olivine, 
if  such  it  was,  was  highly  ferriferous.  Further  alteration  of  the  rock  is  indicated 
by  interstitial  patches  of  fibrous  radial  green  chlorite.  The  amygdules  are  filled 
with  quartz  crystals  and  calcite,  or  with  calcite  and  a  zeolite  which  may  be  cha- 
bazite. 


410        geology  an'l)  i'etkol.ogv  ok  tiik  gkkat  skkl'kntine  itklt  of  x.s.'.v., 

Intrusive  Kock.*<. 
Trachytoid  Quartz  Keratoplnjres. 

Tlie  locks  (lescribed  iii  the  account  of  the  field-geology  as  felsites,  trachytes, 
etc.,  forming  sills,  dykes  and  other  intrusions,  fall,  with  few  exceptions,  into  the 
keratophyre  class,  although  varying  among  themsehes  in  details  of  texture  and 
mineral  constitution.  The  variations  are  fairly  reg^Uar,  so  that  subdivision  is 
rather  difficult,  and  it  will  be  l)est  perhaps  to  mention  tlie  general  mineralogical 
features  of  the  series  before  proceeding  to  more  detailed  description. 

The  series  as  a  whole  has  l)een  called  the  trachytoid  quartz  keratophyres  to 
distiuguisli  them  from  the  soda  rhyolites,  from  which  they  differ  in  texture,  mode 
of  occurrence  and  most  probably  also  chemical  composition. 

As  no  essential  differences  were  found  between  the  rocks  composing  the  dykes 
directly  emanating  from  the  Warragundi  volcano  and  those  forming  the  sills  and 
dykes  cutting  througli  the  Kuttung  Series  elsewhere  in  tlie  area,  all  liave  l)eeu 
grouped  together. 

Megascopically  the  rocks  are  fairly  conijiact.  occasionally  slightly  \esicular, 
and  varying  in  colour  through  buff,  pink  and  pinkish-grey  to  dark  greenish-grey. 
The  majority  of  the  specimens  have  phenocrysts  of  pink  or  white  felspar  ranging 
up  to  6  mm.  in  length;  in  other  cases  the,  plienocrysts  are  small,  while  in  certain 
types  they  are  entirely  absent. 

Microscopically  the  rocks  are  all  holocrystalline;  the  grain-size  is  tine  to  very 
fine,  and  the  fabric  may  be  trachytie  or  orthophyric,  with  or  witliout  lluxion  struc- 
ture, or  again  no  definite  fabric  may  be  recognisable.  Of  the  minerals  present 
acid  plagioelase  is  by  far  the  most  abundant  and  iui])ortant.  Accurate  deter- 
minations of  composition  were  generally  most  difficult  and  sometimes  (|uite  im- 
possible owing  to  alteration  and  fineness  of  grain,  but  there  appears  to  be  a  varia- 
tion from  pure  or  almost  pure  albite  in  certain  members  of  the  series  to  oligocla,se 
in  others.  Tlie  felspar  may  be  zoned,  with  apparently  an  oligoclase  kernel  and 
an  albite  rim.  It  is  possible  that  the  variation  in  habit  of  the  felspai-s  is  to 
some  extent  a  function  of  their  chemical  ccmiposition,  the  slender,  almost  aeicular, 
crystals  of  oligoclase  being  conti'asted  with  tlic  stumjjv  prisms  of  tiie  more  albitic 
rocks.  The  extent  to  which  orthoclase  enters  into  the  rocks  is  doubtful.  Tn  some 
it  is  certainly  present,  in  others,  especially  those  ccmtaining  the  more  acid  plagio- 
elase, it  is  undoulitedly  absent,  while  in  otiiers  again  its  presence  cannot  be  de- 
'finitely  determined.  It  is  probable,  of  coui-se,  that  orthoclase  molecules  exist 
to  a  small  extent  in  solid  solution  in  the  jilagioclase. 

Quartz  is  i)erhaps  the  mineral  next  in  importance  after  felspar;  it  is  almost 
always  interstitial,  but  in  two  cases  its  occurrence  is  i>eculiar  and  gives  the  imjires- 
sion  of  early  crystallisation.  Rarely  it  encloses  the  felspar  in  uiicropoikilitic 
fashion.  Tlic  ])roportion  of  quartz  varies  very  much  in  the  different  rocks,  but 
does  not  ai)])iNir  tn  be  con-elated  with  the  fluctuation  of  any  other  constituent 
save  possibly  tlic  iron  ore.  The  latter  varies  consideral)ly  in  amount,  both  mag- 
netite and  ilmenite  being  present. 

Primary  ferro-magnesian  minerals  are  comparatively  scarce;  certain  of  the 
rocks  must  have  been  entirely  devoid  of  them,  while  in  others  the  occurrence  of 
chlorite  and  other  secondary  material  indicates  that  some  dark  minerals  were  once 
present.  In  a  few  rocks  the  original  l)iotite,  hornblende  or  pyroxene  still  re- 
mains. The  Jiresence  of  tlie  last  two  iioints  to  a  genetic  connection  with  the  an- 
desites.     Apatite  in  small  amounts  is  a  fairly  constant  constituent. 


BY   \V.    X.    BENSOX,  W.    S.    DUX^    AXD    W.    R.    BROWXE.  411 

Many  of  tbe  more  albitic  types  are  eliaracterised  by  ortliopliyrie  fabric.  We 
may  take  as  an  (Example  1408,  from  a  dyke  in  Duri  Creek,  S.E.  of  Duri  Peak, 
cutting'  through  the  Kuttung-  grits  and  conglomerates.  Phenocrysts  of  albite  up 
to  3  mm.  long,  sometimes  aggi-egated  in  glomero-porpliyritic  fashion,  are  set  in  a 
matrix  of  stumpy  prisms  of  albite  averaging  about  .25  mm.  long  and  at  least 
as  acid  as  Aboo  Anio  in  general  composition.  The  spaces  between  these  are  filled 
with  quartz,  which  composes  about  10  %  of  the  rock.  The  felspar  is  much 
kaoliuized  and  stained  witli  haematite,  and  disjiiays  a  narrow  clear  him  round  a 
decomposed  kernel.  Tiny  crystals  of  magnetite  are  fairly  plentiful  and  little 
apatite  needles  and  biotite  flakes  are  infrequent . 

Another  rock  (1499)  resembles  1498  except  for  the  presence  of  definite  il- 
menite  much  leucoxenised,  and  that  the  biotite  is  chloritized  (PI.  xxv.,  fig.  4)  . 
This  rock  occurs  as  a  sill  which  passes  into  the  dyke  from  which  the  pre\'ious 
specimen  was  taken.  Another  specimen  (1.530)  from  the  same  dyke  diffei-s  in 
the  lugher  proportion  of  iron  ore  and  in  the  smaller  amount  of  biotite,  which  is 
reiJresented  by  a  little  chlorite. 

A  dyke  which  occurs  in  Portions  240  and  178  may  be  connected  with  the 
Warragundi  volcanic  centre,  and  belongs  to  the  orthopluTie  type,  differing  from 
the  rocks  just  described  only  in  having  slightly  coarser  texture  and  having  more 
interstitial  chlorite . 

A  much  more  basic  though  allied  type  is  1528,  from  a  dyke  24  yards  wide, 
half  a  mile  north  of  Portion  1.  This  has  a  much  higher  proportion  of  iron  ore 
than  the  others,  while  ferro-magnesian  minerals  are  represented  by  abundant 
augite.  The  grain-size  is  coarser,  too,  the  felspars  averaging  about  .6  mm.  long, 
and  the  rock  is  non-porphyritic.  Felspar  (Abn.-,  An-,)  is  slightly  zoned,  and  ha.s 
the  usual  clear  rim  round  a  decomposed  kernel.  The  interspaces  between  the 
felspars  are  filled  chiefly  with  abundant  jiale  granular  augite,  iron  ores  and  very 
subordinate  quartz.  Augite  and  magnetite  are  also  included  in  felspar.  Tiny 
apatite  needles  are  fairly  numerous,  while  chlorite  is  (juite  common,  often  filling 
cavities . 

In  1494  (dyke  crossing  Rocky  Creek)  and  1490  (dyke  in  the  S.E.  of  Portion 
11),  the  texture  is  finer  than  that  of  1498,  and  there  is  rather  more  elongation  of 
the  felspars  of  the  base,  although  their  general  composition  is  still  very  acid,  about 
Aba.'-,  An.-,.  Ilmenite  is  fairly  plentiful,  and  may  appear  among  the  phenocrysts. 
The  felspars  are  much  replaced  by  carbonates,  but  the  rocks  were  evidently  de^■oid 
of  ferro-magnesian  silicates.  Vesicles  in  1496  are  filled  with  calcite,  and  partially 
lined  with  little  quartz  prisms. 

These  two  rocks  may  very  probably  represent  dykes  radiating  from  Warra- 
gundi. A  dyke  (1511)  from  the  N.E.  corner  of  Portion  70,  Werrie,  has  much 
in  common  with  them,  but  has  rather  more  iron  ore  and  retains  chloritic  pseudo- 
morphs  after   (?)   hornblende. 

There  are  a  number  of  very  fine-grained  rocks  (1437,  1514,  1529)  consisting 
mostly  of  lath-shaped  or  acicular  felspars,  apparently  oligoclase,  and  exhibiting  a 
more  or  less  perfect  trachytic  habit.  Orthodase  is  sometimes  associated  with  the 
other  felspar,  generally  in  subordinate  amount,  but  its  presence  is  not  always 
recognisable.  In  all  of  these  there  is  practically  no  evidence  of  the  former  pre- 
sence of  ferro-magnesian  constituents,  though  mag-netite  is  plentifully  dusted 
through  the  rock.  Small  phenocrysts  of  oligoclase  are  jiresent,  and  there  is  much 
alteration  to  kaolin  and  carbonates.      Cavities  are  filled  with  chalcedonic  quartz. 


412    GEOLOGY  AN'D  PETROLOGY  OP  THE  GREAT  SERPENTINE  BELT  OP  N.S.W., 

Primary  tjuartz  is  very  sparingly  prest-ut,  aud  is  practically  abscut  m  1437.  Kock 
1515  is  a  very  ftne-gi-aiued  porpbyritic  type  witbout  traebytic  arrangement  of  tbe 
felspars,  and  is  notable  as  being  tbe  only  one  of  tbe  series  containing  bornbleude. 
Jn  band-specimen  tbis  is  seen  as  fairly  al)undant  rod-like  plienocrysts  up  to  al)out 
6  mm.  in  leng-tb.  In  tbin  section  it  is  of  a  ligbt  brown  colour  and  strongly  pleo- 
chroic.  In  addition  to  tbe  predominant  oligoclase  of  tbe  rock,  tbere  is  probably  a 
little  orthoelase  as  small  shapeless  interstitial  grains.  Quartz  is  fairly  abundant. 
Tbe  rock  (1448)  from  the  Church  Hill  railway  cutting  at  Currabubula  pre- 
sents some  unusual  characters.  It  consists  largely  of  lathy  oligoclase  showing 
traebytic  fabric,  vitb  subordinate  orthoelase.  Locally  tbe  grainsize  of  the 
felspar  may  increase  slightly  and  its  habit  may  alter  to  a  stout  prismatic 
or  to  a  gi-anular  form;  this  may  be  due  to  local  variation  in  the  water-gaseous 
content  of  tbe  crystallizing  magma.  A  large  square-shaped  section  of  labra- 
dorite,  comparable  with  that  found  in  the  andesites,  may  be  a  xenocryst.  The 
abundant  iron-ore  is  in  minut*  octahedra,  rods  and  grains,  some  of  it  being 
titaniferous,  judging  liy  the  frequent  coronas  of  secondary  sphene.  Apatite  is 
very  scarce.  The  interesting  feature  of  tbis  rock  is  in  the  habit  and  disposition 
of  the  quartz,  which  is  present  as  optically  continuous  patches,  enclosing  the  fel- 
spars in  micropoikilitie  fashion .  It  also  fills  what  have  evidently  been  drusy 
cavities,  giving  a  pseudo-porphyritic  appearance  to  tbe  rock  (PL  xxv.,  fig.  2). 
In  this  case  the  (|uartz,  which  may  consist  of  two  or  more  grains  of  different 
orientations,  lias  its  boundaries  determined  by  tbe  felspar-laths  forming  the  ori- 
ginal walls,  which  often  project  into  it.  This  quartz  is  to  be  regarded  as  of 
primary  crystallization;  it  often  contains  tiny  inclusions  and  may  pass  out  with 
optical  continuity  into  the  poikilitie  quartz.  A  few  of  the  druses  have  been  filled 
with  opal  or  with  chalcedony,  associated  with  little  rosette-shaped  bundles  of 
chlorite  needles  growing  on  tbe  walls  of  the  cavity.  One  gi'ain  of  opal  includes 
a  granule  of  ilmenite  completely  suiTounded  by  a  rim  of  secondary  sphene. 

This  rock,  being  tbe  freshest  in  the  collection,  was  selected  for  chemical  in- 
vestigation, and  the  result  of  an  analysis  by  Mr.  H.  Yates,  B.Sc,  is  given  in 
the  first  column  of  the  table. 

T.  TI.  Til.  TV. 

SiOo  07. 71     69.20     71.52     75.06 

AbO:! 15.24  15.00  11.76  14.21 

FeiiOg 1.48  1.57  1.52  1.31 

FeO 1.89  1.83  3.44  0.27 

MgO 0.46  0.60  1.18  0.00 

CaO 3.00  1.88  2.72  0.42 

NaoO 5.87  5.87  5.05  6.88 

K2O 1.81  1.81  0.26  0..58 

H2O+       ..     ..        1.89  0.67  1.25  0.62 

H2O—      ..     ..        0.39  0.00  0.14  0.56 

TiOo 0.47  0..52  0.28  abs. 

PaOr, tr.  0.10  0.20  0.03 

MnO —  0.15  0.04  0.04 

CO2 abs.  abs.  0  .38  — 

FeS2 —  —  0.12    SO3    0.11 

100.21  100.19  99.86  100.18 


BY   W.    X.    BEXSONj   W.    S.    DUN,    AND    W.    It.    BROWNE.  413 

I.      Trachytoid   quartz   keratojiliyre,   Clmrch   Hill,   (JuiTabubiihi.      Analyst,   H. 

Yates. 
II.*  Kliyolitt',  Aiu'on  Hill,  Panama  Canal  Zone.     Analyst,  G.    Steiger. 
lll.f   (|)iiai'tz  keratopliyre,  Portion  175,  Par.  Neminglia,  N.S.W.     Analyst,  W.  N. 

Benson . 
IV. t   Soda  rbyolite,   Paddy's   Sngarloaf,  nr.   Raymond   Terrace,   N.S.W.  Analyst, 
W.'a.   Grieg.' 

The  analysis  indicates  the  sodic  character  of  the  rock,  although  the  CaO  per- 
centage is  rather  high.  It  also  points  to  the  presence  of  about  10  %  of  ortho- 
olase,  either  as  a  definite  mineral  or  in  solid  solution  in  ther  oligoclase.  The  cor- 
respondence of  this  analysis  with  that  of  the  rbyolite  from  the  Panama  Canal 
Zone  is  very  striking.  Analyses  111.  and  IV.  have  been  inserted  for  contrast 
rather  than  comparison;  there  are  evidently  important  differences  between  the 
Carboniferous  rock  and  the  Devonian  quartz  keratophyre  from  Nemingha,  while 
the  Paddy's  Sugarloaf  rock,  which  is  probably  to  be  correlated,  chemically  as  well 
as  petrologically,  with  the  soda  rhyolites  of  Rocky  Creek,  emphasises  the  difference 
between  these  rocks  and  the  trachytoid  quartz  keratophyres . 

This  Clhurch  Hill  intrusion  is  an  offshoot  from  or  prolongation  of  a  laccolitic 
mass  invading-  the  Werrie  basalt  and  forming  a  small  hill  about  a  mile  west  of 
Currabubula.  The  rock  composing  the  intrusion  differs  but  little  from  that  just 
described,  but  shows  some  additional  features  of  interest.  The  cavities  in  the 
rock  have  not  always  been  filled  completely  with  quartz,  and  open  spaces  may  be 
left,  into  which  project  felspar  crystals.  These  spaces  may,  however,  be  filled 
with  calcite  or  more  frequently  with  what  appears  to  be  a  zeolite,  having  a  R.I. 
of  about  1.49,  complex  twinning,  and  a  birefringence  about  the  same  as  that  of 
quartz.  This  mineral  has  evidently  formed  after  the  consolidation  of  the  quartz, 
which  it  occasionally  enwraps.  Embedded  in  both  quartz  and  zeolite  are  isolated 
little  crystal  aggregates  of  felspar  and  an  occasional  flake  of  rather  pale-coloured 
biotite.  The  conclusion  seems  warranted  that  the  zeolite  represents  the  last 
and  the  quartz  the  penultimate  stage  in  the  continuous  process  of  rock-crystalliza- 
tion . 

The  rock  (1520,  1526)  composing  the  laccolitic  mass  S.W.  of  Soma  has  some 
features  which  mark  it  off  from  the  foregoing  types.  It  is  very  fine-grained,  with 
a  few  small  plienocrysts  of  oligoclase,  and  a  gToundma.ss  composed  mainly  of  little 
albite  laths  and  quartz,  with  ])robably  some  orthoelase.  In  contrast  to  its  usual 
habit,  the  quartz  is  characterised  by  distinctly  squarish  outlines,  sometimes  with  cor- 
rosion embaymeuts,  as  though  it  was  of  early  crystallization.  It  makes  up  about 
40  %  of  the  slide .     Bleached  and  ragged  biotite  and  a  little  ilmenite  are  seen . 

An  interesting  rock  is  that  found  in  a  kind  of  sill  cutting  through  a  mass  of 
felsite  on  Werrie's  Creek.  The  plienocrysts  include,  in  addition  to  oligoclase  and 
(?)  orthoelase.  infrequent  chloritized  crystals  of  augite  and  hypersthene.  The 
gi'oundmass  is  of  stumpy  oligoclase  with  some  orthoelase,  abundan.t  magnetite,  a 
little  pyrites  and  apatite,  and  a  good  deal  of  quartz  and  biotite. 

The  presence  of  both  rhombic  and  monoclinie  pyroxene  links  up  this  rock 
with  the  andesites. 

•Washingtou's  Tables  (United  States  Geol.  Surv.,  Prof.  Paper  99),  p. 231. 
tThese  Proceedings,  xliii.,  1918,  p. 602. 
^Washington's  Tables,  p.lf).3. 


414     GEOLOGY  AXD  PETROLOGY  OP  THE  GREAT  SERPENTINE  BELT  OF  X.S.W., 

Quartz   Trachyte. 

The  only  potash  trachyte  is  1500  from  the  S.E.  coiner  of  Portion  lUT.  It 
is  very  sparingly  micro-porphyritic  in  orthoclase,  which  also  predominates  in  the 
fine-grained  gToundmass.  The  felspar  is  in  ill-formed  laths,  much  spangled  with 
alteration-products,  and  is  accompanied  by  a  little  acid  oligoclase.  Quartz  forms 
an  imperfect  micro-poikilitic  setting  to  the  felspars  and  ii-on  ore  is  fairly  abundant 
with  a  little  apatite.  A  small  amount  of  chlorite  probably  represents  original 
biotite. 

Quartz  Latite. 

Only  one  specimen  (1495)  of  this  rock  type  has  been  en'countered,  occurring 
as  a  dyke  near  the  centre  of  Portion  273,  Currabubiila.  It  is  distinguished  from 
the  other  felsitic  rocks,  from  which  it  does  not  differ  noticeably  in  appearance,  by 
the  presence  of  a  more  basic  plagioclase .  In  thin  section  the  rock  is  slightly 
porphyritic,  the  phenocrysts  being  felspar,  probably  andesine;  a  few  crystals  with 
only  simple  twinning  or  with  straight  extinction  may  be  orthoclase.  In  the 
groundmass,  zoned  andesine  (Abeo  An4o)  predominates,  but  there  are  indications 
of  the  presence  of  orthoclase  as  well,  though  the  relative  proportions  are  impos- 
sible to  tell.  The  felspar  laths  of  the  groundmass  average  about  .6  mm.,  and 
there  is  at  times  a  tendency  to  traehytic  fabric.  Iron  ores  are  fairly  abimdant, 
while  interstitial  quartz  is  less  important.  A  few  remnants  of  a  pale  monoclinic 
pyroxene  ai-e  seen,  but  much  altered  to  carbonates,  and  tiny  apatite  needles  are 
scattered  about.  Chlorite  is  present  in  good  amount,  and  there  is  a  small  pro- 
portion of  interstitial  carbonates. 

Andesites.      • 

These  are  of  two  distinct,  though  probably  related  types,  ehai'acterised  by 
the  presence  of  hornblende  and  pyroxene  respectively.  The  former  type  is  the 
more  acid,  and  this  is  reflected  in  the  composition  of  the  felspar. 

(ft)  Hornblende  Andesites.  Rocks  belonging  to  this  type  have  been  found 
occurring  as  sills:  (a)  in  Portion  117  of  the  eastern  limb  of  the  syncline  and  (6) 
at  the  Werris  Creek  Gap,  on  the  western  limb.  We  have  also  been  supplied  by 
IVIrs.  Scott  with  a  specimen  of  the  same  type  of  rock  from  a  mass  oeeun-ing  near 
"AUanbank,"  which  lies  about  13  miles  slightly  W.  of  N.  from  the  Gap.  This 
rock-type  is  fairly  constant  in  its  main  characteristics,  and  is  identical  with  one 
phase  of  the  well-known  Carboniferous  lava  in  the  Hunter  River  district  quamed 
at  Martin's  Creek,  near  Pateison . 

The  rock  in  hand  specimen  is  purplish-grey  in  colour,  and  is  studded  with 
small  phenocrysts  of  felspar  and  hornblende,  the  former  predominating.  A 
characteristic  megascopic  feature  of  the  felspars  is  the  existence  in  them  of  kernels 
of  dark-coloured  material,  presumably  chlorite.  In  thin  section  the  Werris  Creek 
Gap  specimen  (1491)  is  seen  to  be  hj'pocrystnlline.  The  plagioclase  phenocrysts 
are  tabular,  fairly  well-formed,  and  slightly  zoned,  the  general  composition  l)eing 
about  Abso  An45  (andesine) .  The  felspar  is  much  cracked  and  resorbed  and  is 
considerably  altered  to  kaolin,  with  occasional  patches  of  carbonates.  Inclusions 
of  the  groundmass  are  not  infrequent.  Hornl)lende  is.  as  usual  in  stich  rocks, 
much  I'csorbed,  and  is  surrounded  by  a  dark  rim  composed  largely  of  magnetite 
granules.  Magnetite  is  also  beginning  to  separate  out  along  the  cleavage  jilanes 
from  without  inwards.      The  linnibleiide  is  green,  but  looks  bleaclied  at  times  and 


BY  V7.   N.    BEXSOX;,  W.    S.    DUX^    AXD   W.    R.    BROWXE.  415 

exhibits  occasional  carbonate  alteration.  Ilmenite  shows  hexagonal  and  irregular 
plates.  Tiny  apatite  prisms  are  quite  abundant  either  in  the  grouudmass,  or  as 
inclusions  in  the  phenocrysts,  notably  in  the  felspars.  Little  zircon  prisms,  too, 
sometimes  appear.  There  is  a  fair  amount  of  chlorite  in  rosette-shaped  aggi'e- 
gates,  often  pseudomorphous  after  what  appears  to  have  been  felspar,  judging 
by  its  outlines,  and  by  the  abundant  enclosed  apatite  needles.  The  groundmass 
is  largely  crj-ptocrystaUine,  with  irregularly  sinuous  aggregates  of  secondary 
quartz  and  chlorite.  Magnetite  dust  may  be  fairly  abundant  locally.  An  im- 
portant feature  of  the  groundmass  is  the  presence  of  numerous  irregular  patches 
of  brown  glass  showing  marked  fluidal  fabric,  and  with  streaks  of  cryptocrystalline 
material  through  it.  These  patches  pass  rather  quickly  into  the  ordinary  gi'ound- 
mass,  and  it  is  hard  to  say  whether  they  represent  remnants  of  a  once  completely 
glassy  base,  or  whether  the  present  texture  as  a  whole  is  due  to  heterogeneity  in 
the  original  magma. 

Specimen  1441,  from  the  centre  of  Portion  117,  evidently  represents  a  slightly 
different  phase  of  the  same  type.  There  is  a  much  gi-eater  proportion  of  glass  iu 
the  groundmass,  tlie  felspar  phenocrysts  are  rather  more  numerous  and  more 
altered,  while  hornblende  is  also  more  abundant.  Further  there  is  another  ferro- 
magnesian  mineral  present,  which  is  now  represented  by  clusters  of  magnetite 
granules,  with  or  without  an  indeterminable  greyish  or  brownish  substance.  The 
sections  are  idiomorphic  and  very  elongated,  almost  rod-like,  and  the  original 
mineral  appears  to  have  been  biotite.  Apatite  is  less  abundant  than  in  1491  and 
zircon  is  infrequent.  This  rock  corresponds  rather  more  closely  to  the  Martin's 
Creek  type  than  does  1491. 

A  rock  of  somewhat  similar  habit  to  the  hornblende  andesite  outcrops  in 
Portion  88,  about  half  a  mile  east  of  Rocky  Creek,  but  the  place  of  hornblende  is 
taken  by  biotite,  and  a  single  phenocryst  of  corroded  quartz  was  observed  in  the 
slide  examined. 

(b)  Pyroxene  Andesites.  These  present  many  variations  in  texture,  as  regards 
both  crystallinity  and  fabric,  and  in  composition  are  evidently  more  basic  than  the 
hornblende  andesites . 

The  rocks  may  be  conveniently  subdivided  into  tlie  litlioidal.  vitrophyric.  and 
pilotaxitic  types,  the  first  of  these  terms  being  applied  to  those  rocks  of  which  the 
groundmass.  as  seen  under  the  microscope,  consists  of  a  mosaic  of  spongy-looking 
felspar  grains. 

The  first  two  types  are  closely  associated  in  the  field,  combining  to  form  the 
great  series  of  sills  which  have  invaded  the  tuffaceous  grits  at  the  ba.se  of  the 
Rocky  Creek  Series,  whereas  it  is  rather  significant  that  all  the  pilotaxitic  rocks 
of  which  specimens  are  available  have  quite  a  distinctive  appearance,  and  occur 
as  dj-kes  connected  with  the  Warragundi  complex.  It  is  quite  possible  that,  al- 
though all  three  types  are  linked  together  by  mineralogical  similarities,  there  are 
chemical  differences  between  them,  but  the  data  available  do  not  warrant  a  positive 
statement  on  this  point.  It  is  difficult  to  say  whether  the  mosaic  groundmass  of 
the  lithoidal  type  is  jirimary,  or  results  from  devitrification  of  an  original  pitch- 
^ stone.  Anderson  and  Radley  have  put  forward  the  suggestion  for  certain  pitch- 
stones  of  Mull,  that  the  stony  types  have  been  derived  from  the  glassy  by  de- 
vitrification due  to  the  escape  of  some  of  the  chemically  combined  water.  This 
suggestion  is  based  on  field  observations  supplemented  by  determinations  of  the 
water  present  in  the  rocks   (24) .     In  the  case  of  the  Currabubula  rocks  special 


416     GEOLOGY  AXD  PETROLOGY  OF  THE  GREAT  SERPEXTIXE  BELT  OF  X.S.W., 

tield-examination  of  the  relations  of  the  glassy  and  stony  types  lias  not  been  made, 
but  tbey  are  known  to  be  at  times  associated  in  the  same  sill.  A  similar  close 
association  has  been  obser\ed  in  the  Hunter  ^'alley  area,  and  it  is  ijossible  that 
the  question  of  the  origin  of  the  stony  gToundmass  will  eventually  be  solved  in 
the  field  rather  than  in  the  laboratory.  It  is  to  be  noted,  however,  that  in  none 
of  the  slides  examined  does  the  stony  type  contain  anj'  traces  of  glassy  base,  or 
vice  versa,  although  in  the  hornblende  andesite  the  association  of  glassy  and  crys- 
talline patches  appeal's  to  be  the  rule. 

Lithoidal  Type.  The  rocks  belonging  to  this  type  exhibit  a  hard  stony  base 
of  a  purplish-grey  colour,  with  very  numerous  and  conspicuous  tabular  felspar 
l^henoerysts  up  to  4  mm.  in  length  and  smaller  and  subordinate  pyroxene  pheno- 
crysts,  without  any  definite  arrangement.  The  rock  weathers  to  a  very  charac- 
teristic, soft  reddish  crust  which  is  pitted  by  the  alteration  and  removal  of  the 
felspars . 

Microscopically,  in  specimen  1444,  from  near  the  summit  of  Duri  Peak,  the 
felspar  phenoerysts  prove  to  be  basic  labradorite,  zoned,  but  not  conspicuously  so, 
and  showing  well-marked  albite  and  occasionally  carlsbad  and  i^erieline  twinning. 
The  crystals  are  somewhat  cracked  and  altered,  sometimes  zonallj',  and  are  often 
crowded  with  tiny  pyroxene  and  magnetite  inclusions,  with  a  few  apatite  needles. 
The  pyroxene  phenoerysts  comprise  both  augite  and  hypei-sthene,  the  former  being 
tlie  more  abundant ;  both  occur  in  well-formed  stout  prisms,  the  augite  being  occa- 
sionally twinned.  Hypersthene  is  notably  pleochroic,  and  shows  a  disposition 
to  alteration  along  the  periphery.  Ilmenite  is  fairly  plentiful.  The  gi-oundmass 
at  first  sight  appears  cryptocrystalline,  but  really  consists  of  an  ill-defined  mosaic 
of  spongy-looking,  mitwinned  felspar,  of  indeterminate  composition,  but  with  a 
refractive  index  apparently  higher  than  that  of  Canada  Balsam.  This  groundmass 
is  plentifully  dotted  with  iron  ore  and  less  almndantly  with  pyroxene  granules, 
and  is  microporph;iTitic  in  plagioclase. 

Specimen  1503,  from  the  Summit  of  Duri  Peak,  is  exactly  similar  to  the 
foregoing  except  that  the  rock  has  been  more  weathered,  while  in  1454,  from  tlie 
lower  portion  of  ISTorth  Cobla,  the  only  differences  are  that  the  proportions  of  the 
pyroxenes  are  approximately  e(|ual  and  Miat  the  groundmass  is  liut  sparsely  micro- 
porphyritic. 

Vitropht/ric  Type.  When  fresh  the  rock  is  a  brownish-black  colour,  very 
compact,  with  a  resinous  or  pitchy  lustre,  and  porpliyi-itic  in  felspar.  Some- 
times the  phenocrysfs  show  marked  flow  structure,  but  mostly  this  is  absent.  In 
oonnnon  with  ilie  lithoidal  type,  tlie  pitchstones  have  tY))ically  a  i-atlier  smooth 
fracture. 

For  the  microscopic  features  we  may  take  as  a  type  specimen  1531.  from  the 
west  face  of  Duri  Peak  (PI.  xxv..  fig.  6) .  The  porphyritic  felspar  is  basio  labra- 
dorite (Ab35  An.'.o)  or  even  ftcid  bytownite;  it  is  tabular  prismatic  in  habit  and 
may  be  up  to  2.5  mm.  in  length.  The  crystals  are  much  fresher  than  in  any 
of  the  lithoidal  andesites  examined,  but  are  much  corroded  and  cracked.  Twin- 
ning on  albite  and  carlsbad  laws  is  present,  and  zoning  is  very  marked  in  some 
crj-stals.  There  are  very  abundant  inclusions  of  pyroxene  and  to  a  less  extent 
of  magnetite  gri-anules,  as  well  as  of  the  groundmass,  the  latter  sometimes  having 
a  schiller-like  arrangement,  while  the  mineral  grains  may  be  disposed  in  a  rude 
zonal  fashion.  Hypersthene  and  augite  are  fairly  abundant,  tlie  former  perhaps 
Ijeing  in  excess,  in  much  cracked  prisms  up  to  about  1.5  mm.  long.     Occasional 


BY  W.  N.    BENSONj  \V.    S.    llUX^    AND  \V.    It.   BROWNE.  417 

parallel  iiitergrowths  of  the  two  are  seen.  Slight  alteration  is  noticed  in  the 
hyperstheue,  but  the  augite  is  quite  fresh.  Irregular  grains  of  magnetite  or 
ilinenite  are  fairly  numerous.  The  groundmass  is  hypohyaline  and  micropor- 
phyritic,  small  grains  and  crystals  of  plagioclase  and  pyroxene  being  set  in  a 
base  composed  of  greyish-brown  glass  with  much  mierolitic  augite,  felspar"  and 
magnetite.  Round  the  microlites  there  is  often  exhibited  the  characteristic  border 
of  glass  of  lighter  colour  than  normal. 

The  chemical  composition  of  the  pitchstone  may  be  gathered  from  the  analysis 
of  a  spoeimeu  from  Portion  IIG. 

1.  II.  III.  IV. 

SiO- lJU.2(i  58. 7i)  61.17  59.48 

AI2O3' 16.46  17.51  17.74  17.38 

TeaOa 1.15  2.11  1.78  2.96 

FeO 4.87  3.87  3.51  3.67 

MgO     3.09  2.23  2.70  3.28 

CaO 5.25  6.18  5.90  6.61 

NaaO 4.23  4.84  3.79  3.41 

K2O 0.98  0.68  1.71  1.64 

H2O+      ....       2.22  2.61  , 

H2O-       ....       0.22  0.71  ;    "-^^  "-'^ 

Ti02 0.84  1.21  0.45  0.48 

P2O5 0.29  —  0.14  0.20 

CO2 abs.  tr.  —  — 

S    .; 0.03  _  _  _ 

Cr208 abs.  —  —  — 

MnO    0.08  —  0.12  0.15 

BaO abs.  —  0.06  — 

SrO abs.  —  —  — 


99.97    100.74     99.96    100.00 


I.     Andesitie  pitchstone,  portion  116,   Currabubula.      Anal.   W.   N.  Benson. 
II.*  Andesitie  pitchstone,  Pokolbin.      Anal.   AV.   R.    Browne. 
Ill.t  Hypersthene  andesite,  Lassen  Park,  California.      Anal.  Hillebrand. 
IV. t  Osann's  Average  of  hypersthene  andesite. 

It  will  be  seen  that  there  is  a  very  close  correspondence  between  the  Curra- 
bubula and  Pokolbin  rocks,  quite  sufficient  to  place  their  consanguinity  beyond 
aU  doul)t.  In  mag-nesia  and  lime  both  rocks  are  somewhat  lower  than  usual,  and 
though  the  total  of  the  alkalies  is  normal,  soda  is  conspicuously  high  and  potash 
correspondingly  low. 

The  pitchstone  from  the  small  intrusion  revealed  in  the  railway  cutting  in 
Portion  34  differs  from  that  of  the  larger  masses  in  having  a  certain  amount  of 
perlitic  cracking,  while  the  phenocrysts  are  smaller  and  less  numerous.  In  some 
parts  of  the  sill  a  certain  amount  of  alteration  has  occurred,  rendering  the  rock 
lustreless  and  giving  it  a  purplish-gTey  colour.  In  thin  section  this  peculiarity 
is  seen  to  be  due  in  part  at  least  to  the  separation  of  haematite  from  the  base. 

•See  (52),  p.404. 

tQuoted  by  Tclflmg.s. — Igneous  Rocks,  Vol.  ii.,  p.44:i. 

IQuoted  by  Daly. — Igneous  Rocks  and  Their  Origin. 


418     GEOLOGY  AXD  PETROLOGY  OF  THK  GREAT  SERPEXTIXE  BELT  OF  X.S.W., 

The  Pilotaxitic  Type.  In  band-specimen  this  is  readily  distinguished  from 
the  lithoidal  type  by  its  short,  hackly  fracture  and  by  the  fact  that  phenocrj'sts 
are  as  a  rule  less  abundant.  A  specimen  (1439)  collected  in  the  hill  in  the  S.W. 
part  of  Portion  100,  Werrie,  is  porphyi-itic  in  basic  labradorite  distinctly  zoned, 
but  exhibiting  rather  less  resorption  than  the  felspar  of  the  other  types.  The 
phenocrysts  are  generally  fresh  and  contain  rare  needles  of  apatite.  A  very 
little  pyroxene  is  present,  both  hypersthene  and  augite  being  represented.  The 
proportion  of  pyroxene  among  the  phenoerj'sts  is  notably  smaller  than  in  the 
llihoidal.and  vitrophjTie  types.  Little  fibrous,  pleochroie,  purple-brown  prisms  with 
feeble  birefringence  may  represent  bastitie  alterations  of  the  pyroxene.  Some  ilmen- 
ite  may  be  included  among  the  phenocrysts.  The  gToundmass  consists  of  a  felted 
mass  of  micnilitic  felspar,  either  untwinued  or  simjily  twinned,  with  a  R.I.  greater 
than  that  of  Canada  Balsam,  and  ajiproximately  straight  extinction.  This  is 
probably  oligoclase.  There  is  flow  structure  developed,  and  interetitial  minute 
granules  of  pyroxene  and  iron  ore  occur,  so  that  the  fabric  is  typically  pilo- 
taxitic. The  groundmass  is  mottled  or  blotched  with  ovoid  and  irregular  patches 
of  chlorite  enclosing  the  felspar  microlites  (PI.  xxv.,  fig.  5) . 

Other  examples  of  the  pilotaxitic  type  showed  a  general  similarity  to  this 
rock  with  occasional  minor  variations  such  as  the  absence  of  flow  structure  in  the 
groundmass . 

Lamproplit/re. 

One  rock  (1450),  described  as  a  "felsitie  extension  of  an  audesite  dyke"  in 
a  branch  of  Upper  Currabubula  Creek,  5  miles  S.E.  of  Currabubula,  belongs 
to  the  lamprophyres  (PI.  xxv.,  fig.  3).  It  is  pinkish-grej'  and  felsitie,  with  a 
spangled  or  frosted  appearance  due  to  the  presence  of  countless,  tiny,  rod-like, 
hornblende  crystals  never  more  than  3  mm.  in  length.  I'ndcr  the  microscope 
these  are  seen  to  be  fresh  well-formed  crystals  and  microlites,  light  brown  in 
colour,  showing  a  characteristic  cross-fracture  and  often  broken  at  the  ends. 
Pleochroism  is  weaker  than  usual,  and  there  is  occasional  simple  twinning.  Some 
of  the  larger  crystals  might  be  considered  plienocrystic;  the  smaller  ones  show 
traces  of  parallel  orientation.  A  few  gTaius  of  almost  colourless  pyroxene  ap- 
pear, and  others  are  probably  pseudomorphed  by  carbonates.  The  groundmass 
contains,  in  addition  to  hornblende,  much-altered  acid  felspar,  with  a  plentiful 
sprinkling  of  magnetite  and  a  little  apatite.  A  vei-y  abundant  constituent  is  a 
zeolitic  mineral,  similar  to  that  found  in  the  quartz  keratoph^Te  of  Clmrcli  Hill, 
which  acts  as  a  kind  of  matrix  to  the  other  minerals  over  irregular  small  areas, 
and  fills  the  central  portions  of  cavities,  which  may  sometimes  be  lined  with  tiny 
quartz-prisms. 

This  rock  is  possibly  allied  to  the  kcratophyres,  but  the  habit  of  its  eon- 
stittient  minerals  would  place  it  rather  in  tlie  lamprophyre  group. 

Basic  Intrusive  Rocks. 

There  is  a  great  variety  of  basic  intrusive  rocks  developed  in  the  Currabubuhi 
district.  They  occur  for  the  most  part  widely  distributed  throughout  the  area  as 
dykes  intrusive  into  the  Kuttung  Series.  An  interesting  series  of  basic  dykes 
is  also  found  in  close  connection  with  the  Warragundi  centre,  intersecting  the 
Wenie  Series.  So  great  is  the  amplitude  of  the  textural  and  mineralogieal 
variation  in  these  rocks  tliat  it  is  difficult  to  conceive  how  thev  all  emanated  from 


BY  \V.  X.    BENSON,  W.    S.    DUN,    AND  W.    R.   BROWNE.  41!) 

the  same  magma  reservoir.  The  majority  of  tlie  types  are  normal  dolerites,  but 
the  collection  also  includes  some  containing  albite  or  oligoclase,  and  there  is  a 
single  example  of  a  teschenitic  dolerite.  The  normal  dolerites,  though  ditfering 
much  among  themselves  in  te.xture,  may  quit*  probably  conform  to  a  common 
chemical  type  and  may  have  affinities  with  the  Werrie  basalt,  and  the  albitic  rocks 
may  have  resulted  from  albitization.  The  teschenite,  however,  stands  apart  from 
the  others,  and  its  miueralogical  characteristics  are  closer  to  those  of  the  Tertiary 
alkaline  intrusives  of  the  State  than  to  anything  of  Carboniferous  age  with 
which  we  are  acquainted.  However  this  fact  is  hardly  sufficient  in  itself  to 
justify  any  conclusion  as  to  the  geological  age  of  the  intrusion  and  the  field- 
relations  shed  no  great  light  on  the  matter. 

(a)  Normal  Dolerites.  These  comprise  most  of  the  dykes  around  Currabubula, 
as  well  as  those  actually  in  the  Warragundi  complex.  The  rocks  are  all  holo- 
crystalline,  with  or  without  phenocrysts,  and  vary  considerably  in  grainsize. 

Specimen  1502,  cutting  through  the  liasalt  in  Portions  302  and  307,  is  a  por- 
phyritic  rock.  The  phenocrysts,  roughly  prismatic  zoned  crystals  of  basic  laln-a- 
dorite  (near  Abso  Anro)  up  to  4  mm.  in  length,  are  much  cracked  and  carbonated, 
the  cracks  being  often  filled  with  what  appears  to  be  clear  secondary  albite. 
There  are  also  long  streaky  inclusions  of  devitrified  glass.  The  felspar  of  the 
groundmass  is  zoned  acid  labradorite  in  rather  stumpy  laths  about  .25  mm.  long, 
without  any  definite  arrangement.  Augite  is  plentiful  in  small  prisms,  occa- 
sionally slightly  ophitie  towards  the  felspar.  It  is  pale  reddish-brown  and  faintly 
pleoehroic.  Ilmenite  is  almost  as  abundant  as  augite  and  is  much  leucoxenised . 
Apatite  is  rare.  Chlorite  is  interstitial  but  may  also  be  associated  with  calcite 
as  pseudomorphs  after  some  unknown  mineral. 

A  somewhat  similar  roek  in  many  respects  is  1527,  from  a  dyke  in  Rocky 
Creek,  in  Portion  287,  Currabubula.  The  i)lagioclase  phenocrysts  appear  slightly 
less  basic  than  those  of  1502,  and  are  much  altered  to  carbonates,  with  inclusions 
of  what  appear  to  be  devitrified  base.  Slight  zoning  is  noticed.  The  felspars 
of  the  groundmass  are  andesine,  about  Ab-,:,  An4r.,  about  3  mm.  long  and  slightly 
zoned,  and  there  is  abundant  well-crystallized  magnetite,  with  very  tiny  apatit« 
needles.  Ferro-magnesian  minerals  are  reiiresented  only  by  interstitial  chhu-ite, 
and  by  small  amounts  of  carbonates.  There  is  a  small  amount  of  interstitial  prim- 
ary quartz. 

The  medium-grained  rock  forming  the  central  part  of  a  dyke  in  the  railway 
cutting  in  Portion  .34,  Currabubula,  is  a  felspathic  dolerite  (1509).  It  is  non- 
porphyi'itic.  The  felspar,  tabular-colunmar  in  habit,  ranges  in  lengtli  from  .3 
to  3  mm.  It  is  strongly  zoned,  the  variation  being  from  bytownite  to  andesine. 
Alteration  is  a  very  marked  feature,  the  crystals  being  seamed  with  irregular  veins 
of  what  appears  to  be  secondary  albite.  The  subordinate  augite,  of  a  pale 
greyish-brown  colour,  is  partially  idiomorjiliic  and  partly  opliitie  to  the  felspar. 
It  is  altering  to  brown,  strongly  pleoehroic  hornblende.  Ilmenite  is  fairly  plenti- 
ful, and  long  apatite  needles  are  included  in  the  felspar.  Interstitial  chlorite  and 
calcite  are  fairly  plentiful,  and  a  zeolite,  (?)'  chabazite,  occurs  in  places. 

The  basic  rocks  in  immediate  association  with  the  Warrag^undi  volcanic  centre 
occur  as  sills  and  dykes  intersecting  the  basalt,  tuffs  and  other  products  of  erup- 
tion. They  have  not  been  exhaustively  studied  in  the  field  and  will  accordingly 
be  only  briefiy  referred  to  here.  The  specimens  that  have  been  examined  exliibit 
many  textural  variations.      Some  of  the  rocks  are  porphwitic  and  a  few  exhibit 


420     GEOLOGY  AND  PETROLOGY  Or  THE  GREAT  SSRPEXTINE  BELT  OF  N.S.W., 

flow  strupture,  while  others  are  more  or  less  opliitif.  Gralu-size  is  uiediuni  to  fine. 
Jliueralogieally  they  consist  of  plagioclase,  augite  and  iron  ores,  but  there  is  much 
variation  in  the  relative  proportions  of  these  constituents.  In  the  porphyritic 
rocks  the  felspar  of  the  phenocrysts  is  usually  a  zoned  basic  labradorite,  while 
that  of  the  groundmass  is  acid  labradorite  to  andesine.  The  felspar  of  the  non- 
porphyritic  tyjies  is  labradorite  about  Ab40  Anno.  Most  of  the  rocks  ha\e  suf- 
fered considerable  alteration,  which  is  best  exhibited  by  the  ferro-magnesian 
minerals,  now  largely-  represented  by  iiralite,  chlorite  (pennine),  epidote  and 
carbonates.  Iron  ores  are  plentiful,  both  ilmenite  and  magnetite  having  been 
identified,  while  in  one  rock  a  little  pyrites  was  noticed.  Primary  quartz  is  a 
very  minor  constituent  in  a  few  of  the  rocks. 

One  type  should  be  noticed,  although  its  field  relations  have  not  yet  been 
completely  determined.  It  occurs  as  a  dyke  in  the  Warragundi  complex,  and  is 
unusually  coarse  in  grain,  the  felspars  often  attaining  a  length  of  12  mm.  Un- 
fortunately the  specimens  so  far  obtained  have  proved  vei-y  difficult  to  section, 
but  still  the  rock  has  been  determined  as  belonging  to  the  gi-anophyric  diabases 
or  quartz  dolerites,  a  small  amount  of  interstitial  mieropegiuatite  being  visible 
here  and  there,  the  felspar  of  which  is  an  acid  plagioclase  in  optical  continuity 
with  the  zoned  large  crystals.  Normal  augite,  much  uralitized,  is  apparently  the 
only  pyroxene.  Skeletal  ilmenit-e  and  some  apatite  complete  the  list  of  con- 
stituents. The  occurrence  of  this  fiuartz  dolerite  is  interesting,  inasmuch  as  a  sill 
or  other  intrusion  of  gTanophyre  occui-s  not  far  away,  which  microscopical  ex- 
amination proves  to  be  composed  almost  entirely  of  quartz  and  albite.  The  asso- 
ciation of  quartz  dolerites  and  granophyres  or  aplites.  particularly  of  sodic  type, 
has  been  noted  in  various  parts  of  the  world,  and  a  genetic  connection  has  in  many 
eases  been  proved.  This  fact  adds  to  the  interest  as  well  as  to  the  complexity 
of  the  Werrie  volcanic  series. 

(h)  Dolerites  characterised  hi/  Acid  Pkir/ioclase.  Two  specimens  of  this  typo 
were  collected,  the  first  (1451)  from  the  narrow  dyke  through  the  conglomei'ates  in 
C.L.  3,000,  Currabubula.  A  close-grained,  dark  greenisli-brown  rock,  in  thin 
section  it  is  flue-grained  and  non-porphyritic,  and  of  distinctly  basaltic  aspect 
(PI,  XXV.,  fig.  8) .  It  is  composed  of  subidiomorphic  laths  of  albite  averaging 
about  .3  mm.,  cleai'  and  fresh,  tiny  augite  prisms,  and'  magiietite  in  crystals  and 
skeletal  forms.  The  interspaces  are  occupied  mostly  by  brownish  chloritic  ma- 
terial forming  at  least  30  %  of  the  section,  and  possibly  representing  an  original 
intersertal  glassy  base.  The  suspicious  clearness  of  the  felspar  miglit  be  taken 
to  point  to  albitization.     The  rock  may  be  termed  a  fine-grained  Albite  Dolerite. 

Of  a  generally  similar  character  is  specimen  1492,  from  ''a  dyke  through  the 
Church  Hill  felsite  in  the  railway  cutting  li  miles  west  of  Currabubula."  This 
is  a  dark-coloured,  compact,  basaltic-looking  rock .  lender  the  microscojie  tliere 
are  seen  to  have  been  two  periods  of  crystallisation,  the  older  felspar  being  in 
elongated  laths  averaging  about  .(5  mm.  These  are  very  much  clouded  with 
decomposition  products,  so  that  optical  determinations  are  difficult,  but  there  is  a 
symmetrical  extinction  of  10"  and  the  R.I.  appears  to  be  a  little  less  than  that 
of  Canada  Balsain.  so  the  mineral  is  probaldy  acid  oligoclase.  No  ferro-magnesian 
minerals  are  present,  but  there  is  a  good  deal  of  chlorite,  and  there  are  abundant 
tiny  granules  of  secondary  sphene.  Ilmonife  and  magnetite  are  very  plentiful  in 
little  octahedra,  and  in  rod-like  and  skeletal  forms.  There  is  in  places  a  meso- 
stasis  consisting  mostly  of  microlitic  plagioclase  with  magnetite  dust  and  chlorite. 


BY  W.  K.    DEXSOX,  W.    S.    hVS ,    AXL  W.    K.  BROWNE. 


421 


Patches   of  calfite  are   sporadically   distributed   and   tiny   vesicles   are   filled   with 
ualcite,  or  with  chlorite,  chalcedonie  quartz  and  a  hexagonal  (?)  zeolite. 

(c)  Teschenitic  Dolerite.  An  interesting  rock,  and  the  only  one  of  its  kind 
so  far  discovered  in  the  area,  is  that  forming  the  sill  or  dyka  about  half  a  mile 
S.E.  of  Currabubula  Railway  Station.  It  is  megaseopically  fine  and  even- 
grained,  with  felspar  apparently  constituting  a  little  less  than  half  of  the  entire 
rock.  JVIieroscopically  it  is  subophitic  in  fabric.  The  augite  is  titaniferous, 
purplish-brown  and  pleochroic,  and  occurs  in  two  ways:  (1)  as  largish  subidio- 
morphic  to  allotriomorphie  individuals,  often  ophitic  towards  felspar,  and  (2)  as 
nests  or  clusters  of  small  stout  well-foi-med  prisms.  Felspar  is  in  elongated  laths 
up  to  .8  mm.  in  length,  slightly  decomposed,  and  is  labradorite  bordering  on 
bytownite.  01i\-ine,  usually  enclosed  in  augite.  is  fairly  abundant,  sometimes  as 
large  regular  gTains,  but  generally  in  small  roimded  prisms,  much  cracked  and 
altering  peripherally  to  a  brown-gi-een  serpentine .  Fresh  subidiomorphic  ilmenite 
is  plentiful,  often  surrounded  by  tiny  flakes  of  biotite,  and  apatite  is  very  abund- 
ant. There  is  a  mesostasis  composed  of  analcite  which  makes  up  at  lea.st  25% 
of  the  rock  and  often  completely  encloses  tiny  crystals  of  most  of  the  other 
minerals,  particularly  augite  and  apatite.  Indeed  the  bulk  of  the  apatite  is  found 
in  the  analeitic  mesostasis,  which  recalls  the  fact  recorded  by  Dr..  Elsdeu  in  regard 
to  certain  of  the  quartz  dolerites  of  St.  David's  Head  (53)  that  the  interstitial 
quartz  contains  over  70  %  of  the  apatite  present  in  the  rock,  indicating  a  very 
high  solubility  for  this  mineral  under  the  conditions  obtaining  in  the  magma. 
The  analcite  is  always  interstitial,  never  forming  definite  crystals.  It  is  in  some 
places  quite  clear,  but  elsewhere  is  quite  turbid,  and  flecked  with  highly  bire- 
fringent  alteration  products.     Occasionally  its  place  may  be  taken  l)y  calcite. 

It  is  now  generally  agreed  that  the  analcite  of  teschenitic  rocks  is  often  to  be 
regarded  as  belonging  to  the  period  of  primai-y  rock  crystallization,  and  to  re- 
present the  consolidation  of  the  last  watery  soda-rich  magmatic  fraction  (54)  (55). 
In  the  present  instance  the  analcite  has  all  the  appearance  of  a  primary  mineral 
of  late  crystallization.  It  has  attacked  the  felspars  to  a  very  slight  extent,  but  the 
augite  inclusions  present  well-marked  and  unaltered  boundaries,  and  there  is  no 
development  of  a  soda-rich  border  (55) .  The  serpentinization  of  the  olivine  may 
possibly  be,  as  Bailey  has  suggested,  due  to  the  action  of  residual  magma  or 
"juvenile"  waters  (54a)  . 

Gexeral  Remarks. 

The  foregoing  investigation  establishes  the  essential  correspondence  between 
the  rocks  of  the  Warragundi  complex  and  those  of  the  intrusions  at  a  distance 
from  that  centre.  Some  points  of  difference  have  been  noted,  but  the  conclusion 
of  a  close  mutual  relationship  seems  inevitable. 

If  we  consider  the  series  as  a  whole,  tuffs,  flows  and  intrusions — and  this 
seems  a  reasonable  tiling  to  do — a  curious  association  of  alkaline  and  calcic  types 
is  revealed.  On  the  one  hand  there  are  the  typical  calcic  andesites  and  dolerites, 
and  on  the  other  the  soda  rhyolites  and  keratoph^'Tic  rocks,  tlie  albitic  dolerites 
and  the  tuffs,  both  sodic  and  potassic — an  assemblage  of  distinctly  alkaline  facies. 
The  two  groups  are  of  equal  importance  in  tlie  series,  and.  as  we  have  seen,  are 
linked  by  intermediate  types,  so  that  there  can  be  no  doubt  of  their  derivation 
from  a  common  stock-magma,  a  conclusion  with  which  th«  field  evidence  is  in  com- 
plete agTeement.  What  was  the  nature  of  the  original  magma  we  can  only  con- 
.-'ecture.     In   dealing  with   the   rocks,  of  the   Seaham-Paterson-Clareucetown    area 


422  GEOLOGY    AXD  PETKOLOGY    OF    THE  GREAT   SE.^rEXTIXE  BELT  OF    X.S.TT., 

(4)  the  present  writer  took  the  view  that  possibly  the  hornblende  andesite  might 
represent  the  original  undifferentiated  magma,  but  a  thorough  chemieal  investiga- 
tion of  the  whole  series  is  needed  belcire  any  definite  opinion  can  be  formed. 

CosiPARLSox  With  Other  Carboxiferous  Areas  ix  the  State. 

The  Currabubula  rocks  show  many  analogies  with  those  of  other  Carboniferous 
areas  further  to  the  south.  One  of  the  localities  whose  rocks  have  been  petrol- 
ogieally  studied  in  any  detail  is  Pokolbin  (52),  and  many  points  of  similarity 
are  noticed  with  the  rocks  under  discussion,  although  the  sequence  of  eruption  ap- 
pears to  have  been  different,  a  point  which,  however,  inay  not  be  of  any  great 
significance . 

A  re-study  of  the  slides  of  some  of  the  Pokolbin  locks  reveals  a  closer  rela- 
tionship to  the  Currabubula  types  than  tlie  published  descriptions  would  indicate. 
For  example,  though  Mingaye's  analysis  proves  the  existence  of  a  strongly  potassie 
rhyoUte,  yet  slides  of  other  rhyolites  show  a  dominance  of  albite  among  the  pheuo- 
crysts,  linking  these  rocks  with  the  soda  rhyolites  of  the  Kuttung  Series. 

The  Pokolbin  rocks  described  as  trachj-tes  also  contain  considerable  albite  in 
addition  to  the  orthoclase  (indeed  the  soda-felspai-  occasionally  predominates)  and 
although  there  are  slight  textural  differences,  these  do  not  obscure  the  similarity  to 
the  quartz  keratophyres  of  Currabubula.  The  chemical  similarity  of  the  ande- 
sitie  pitchstones  from  the  two  localities  has  already  been  commented  on.  In 
addition,  certain  of  the  Pokolbin  andesites  are  pilotaxitic  and  are  strikinglj'  simi- 
lar to  those  from  Warragundi,  except  for  the  almost  complete  absence  of  pyroxene 
phenocrysts . 

The  present  writer  has  recently  been  privileged  to  examine  a  series  of  rocks 
collected  by  Mr.  C.  A.  Sussmilch  during  his  investigation,  iji  conjunction  with 
Professor  David,  of  the  Carboniferous  sections  at  Paterson,  Seaham,  Clarence- 
town  and  Eelah  ,  (4) .  The  series  comprises  soda  rhyolites,  toscanites,  dellenites, 
dacites,  homlilende  andesites,  hornblende  mica  andesites  and  pyroxene  andesites 
and  pitchstones.  The  hornblende  andesite  of  the  ]Vlartin's  Creek  type  and  the 
pyroxene  andesite  and  pitclistone  are  absolutely  identical  with  the  corresponding 
Currabubula  rocks .  The  soda  rhyolites  usually  contain  biotite,  but  some  of  them 
are  quite  <"omparable  with  the  Currabubula  rocks.  There  is,  however,  a  complete 
absence  of  tracliytoid  keratophyres  in  the  southern  area,  if  we  except  the  trachytic 
fragments  present  in  the  tuffs.  whiU^  the  extensive  series  of  toscanites,  dellenites, 
and  dacites  is  wanting  at  Currabubula.  It  may  be,  of  coui'se,  that  these  two 
groups  are  chemically  equivalent.  Nothing  more  basic  than  pyroxene  andesite 
lias  been  discovered  by  David  and  Sussmilch  among  the  rocks  definitely  known 
to  be  Cai'boniferous  in  the  area  examined  by  them.  Dr.  "Walkom  and  the  pre- 
sent writer,  however,  considered  that  the  natrolite  basalt  of  Pokolbin.  which  was 
regarded  as  forming  contemporaneous  flows  in  tlie  Lower  ^larine  conglomerate, 
might  rejiresent  the  la.st  phase  of  the  vulcanicity  initiated  in  Carboniferous  times 
(52,  p.  304)  and  Professor  David  has  recently  suggested  that  the  Werrie  basalt 
may  be  the  equivalent  of  the  natrolite  basalts  which  are  so  extensively  developed 
in  tlie  Hnnter  River  Valley  at  the  base  of  the  Permo-Carl)oniferous  (41 . 

A  noteworthy  fact  in  connection  with  the  Currabubula  area  is  the  great  im- 
portance and  extent  of  the  intrusive  rocks  in  it  as  contrasted  witli  the  soutliern 
area-s,  where  intrusions  are  comparatively  insignificant.  Tlie  elucidation  of  the 
causes  of  tliis  <lifference  belongs  to  tectonic  geology  rat1i(M-  than  fo  ]ietrnlogy,  and 


BY  W.   N.    BEN"SOX,  W.    S.    DUN^    AND  -W.    R.    BROWXE.  423 

will   involve   a   close   comparative   study   of  the  tectonic   conditions   attending  the 
vulcanicit  y . 

The  present  study  has  shown  that  Benson's  suggested  correlation  of  certain 
rhyolite  flows  in  the  Eocky  Creek  Series  (48,  p.  508)  with  the  Pokolhin  rhyolites 
can  be  considerably  extended.  In  the  present  incomplete  state  of  our  knowledge 
of  the  Carboniferous  rocks  of  New  South  Wales  any  hasty  attempt  at  detailed 
correlation  is  inadvisable,  but  there  is  every  reason  to  hope  that  ultimately  this 
gi'eat  series  of  rocks,  so  widespread  in  occurrence  and  so  uniform  in  character- 
istics, will  be  of  the  greatest  stratigi'aphical  importance. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY. 

4.  D.wiD,  T.  W.  E.  and  Sussmilch,  C.  A. — Sequence,  Glaciation.  and  Corre- 
lation of  the  Carboniferous  Rocks  of  the  Hunter  River  District, 
N.S.W.  Journ.  Proc.  Roy.  See.  N.S.W.,  liii.,  1919  (1920),  pp.  246- 
338. 
24.  AxDERSox,  E.  M.  and  Radlet,  E.  G.— The  Pitchstones  of  Mull  and  their 
Genesis.     Quart.  Journ.  Geol.  Soc,  Ixxi.,  1915,  pp.   205-217. 

47.  Flett,  J.   S.,  and  others. — The  Geology  of  Newton  Abbot.     Memoir  Geol. 

Surv.  England  and  Wales,  1913,  p.  57. 

48.  Bexsox,  W.  N. — The  Geology  and  Petrology  of  the  Great  Serpentine  Belt  of 

New    South   Wales.      Part   i.      These   Proceedings,   xxxviii..   1913,   pp. 
490-517. 

49.  Bailev,  E.   B. — The  Geology  of  the  Glasgow  District.     Mem.   Geol.   Surv. 

of  Scotland,  1911,  p.  127  (Citing  Neithammer) . 

50.  and  Grabhaii,  G.  W. — The  Albitization  of  Basic  Plagioclase  Fel- 
spar.    Geol.  Mag.,  1909,  p.  252. 

51.  Flett,  .1.    S.  and  Dewet,  H. — British  Pillow-lavas.     Geol.   Mag.,  1911,  p. 

204. 

52.  Browne^  W.  R.,  and  Walkom,  A.    B. — The  Geology  of  the  Eruptive  and 

Associated  Rocks   of   Pokolhin,   N.S.W.      .Journ.    Proc.    Roy.    Soc. 
N.S.W.,  xlv.,  1911. 

53.  Elsdex,  J.   v.— The  St.    David's  Head  Rock   Series.      Quart.   -Journ.   Geol. 

Soc,  Ixiv.,  1908,  p.  289. 
54fl.  Bailey,  E.  B.— Geology  of  Ea.st  Lothian,  in  Mem.  Geol.   Surv.  Scot.,  1910, 

p.  114. 

54b.- Geology  of  Glasgow  District.  Ihhl.  1911,  p.   132. 

55.    Tyrrell,    G.    W. — The   Picrite-Teschenite    Sill    of   Lugar.      Quart.    .Tourn. 

Geol.   Soc,  Ixxii.,  1916,  p.  100. 

EXPLANATION'  OF  PLATE   XXV. 

Fig.   1.   Soda  rhvolite   tuft"  (1535):    X   16*.     Ordinary  light. 

Fig.   2.   Trachytoid    quartz    keratophyre    (1448):    X    16J.     Ordinary    light.     At     the 

top  is   a  quartz-filled   cavity   with  felspar  prisms  projecting   into   it.     The 

light-coloured   patch   underneath   is  quartz  poikilitically  enclosing  felspar. 
Fig.  3.   Hornblende  lamprophyre   (1450)  :   x    16i.    Ordinary  light.     Showing  irregular 

patches  of  zeolite. 
Fig.   4.   Trachytoid   quartz    keratophyre   with     orthophyric     fabric    (1499)  :    X     23*. 

Crossed  nicols. 
Fig.  5.   Pilotaxitic  pyroxene  andesite  (1439)  :   X   16i.     Crossed  nicols. 
Fig.  6.   Vitrophyric  pyroxene    andesite  (1351)  :   X   15.     Ordinary  light. 
Fig.  7.   Andesine  basalt    (1497):   X    15.     Ordinary  light. 
Fig.  8.  Albite  dolerite    (1451):   X  15.     Ordinary  hght. 
Fig.  9.   Basalt  of  Werrie  Series   (1510);   X   15.     Ordinary  hght. 


i24 


THE  CHEMICAL  EXAMINATION  OF  MACROZAMIA  SPIRALIS. 

Bv  James  M.  Petrie,  D.Sc,  F.I.C,  Linneax  Macleat   Fellow  op  the 
Society  in  Biochemistry. 

(From  tlte  Plii/siological  Laboratory  of  the  Universiti/  of  Sydney.) 

Historical  Importance,  and  Distribu  tion  of  Cycads 424 

Record  of  their  poisonous  Character •  .    . .  425 

Experimental  Work  on  3/itrro:tiiiii(i  spiralis  :  Proximate  Composition  of  leaves 

and  nuts 429 

Complete  Chemical  Examination 431 

Feeding  Experiment;: 439 

Summary 440 

Historical. — The  family  of  the  Cycadaeeae  are  all  tropical  or  subtropical  plants. 
The  genera  have  a  very  limited  distribution,  and  are  few  in  number,  but  these 
represent  the  remnants  of  a  once  extensive  flora  which  covered  the  earth  in  the 
Palaeozoic  and  Mesozoic  Eras.  Scott,  in  his  "Evolution  of  Plants,"  says  that 
in  the  Secondary  Floras  al)out  one  plant  in  every  three  was  a  Cyead,  and  they 
stretched  from  the  Equator  to  the  Poles.  They  were  the  dominant  class;  there 
was  nothing  above  them:  they  were  the  best  thing  in  the  way  of  flowering  plants 
that  their  age  had  produced.  Though  these  in  giving  rise  to  the  Angiospei'ms 
gradually  became  extinct,  yet  from  some  less  progressive  and  therefore  less  highly 
organised  cycadeau  forms,  we  may  trace  through  the  Tertiary  Era  the  plants 
which  linger  on  to  our  present  day.  In  the  descendants  of  this  ancient  race  of 
jilants  we  still  find  those  primitive  functions  and  primitive  structures  which  closely 
resemble  those  indicated  in  the  fossils  of  the  Carboniferous  Period,  and  which 
give  to  the  Cycads  a  history  and  an  interest  uni(|ue  among  plants. 

The  fossil  cycadj  make  their  first  appearance  with  the  genus  PterophyUnm  in 
the  Upi^er  Carboniferous  formations,  and  reach  their  maximum  towards  the  end 
of  the  Triassic  and  the  beginning  of  the  Jurassic  Periods.  Of  these  ancient  forms 
Schimper  recognised  34  genera  which  include  278  species. 

Distribution. — The  Cycadaeeae  of  the  present  day,  according  to  Engler  and 
tlie  Index  Kowensis,  include  mdy  nine  genera  and  75  species.  Four  genera,  in- 
cluding Zanria,  belong  to  tropical  America,  two  are  confined  to  the  African  con- 
tinent, and  three  are  found  in  Australia.  The  last  include  Cyca^  which  is  widely 
distributed  from  India  to  Japan  and  through  the  Islands  to  Australia,  oiu^  Queens- 
land genus,  and  'Macror:amia  whicli  is  limited  to  Australia. 


BY    JAIIE.S    M.   PETKIE.  425 

There  are  fourteen  species  of  Macroznmia,  four  of  wliicli  belong  to  New  South 
Wales,  and  four  to  Queensland ;  four  are  common  to  Ijoth  States,  and  two  are 
found  in  Western  Australia.  They  are  confined  to  the  coastal  regions  of  our 
Continent,  and  on  the  Eastern  side  are  not  found  beyond  the  Dividing  Ranges. 
There  are  no  native  cyeads  in  Victoria,  nor  in  the  great  central  deserts  of  Aus- 
tralia. Macro:amia  spiralis  has  a  geographical  coast  range  of  over  800  miles  ex- 
tending from  north  of  Brisbane  to  the  Victorian  border. 

Evidence  of  Poisonous  Character. 

Nearly  all  the  cycadaceous  plants  are  believed  to  contain  some  poisonous  prin- 
ciple in  their  sap,  and  it  is  said  to  be  concentrated  in  the  seeds.  This  fact  seems 
to  be  well  known  to  all  the  native  races  in  the  lands  where  cyeads  are  used  for 
food.  We  find  that  they  uniformly  pursue  an  elaborate  course  of  preparation 
to  destroy  the  poisonous  properties.  This  consists  in  crushing  the  seeds  with 
large  stones,  in  washing  the  pulp  in  bags  laid  in  running'  water  for  a  certain  time, 
and  lastly,  in  drying  the  mass  and  heating  it  over  a  fli-e.  This  method  of  washing 
and  baking  the  pulp,  as  used  by  the  Australian  aborigines,  is  almost  identical  with 
that  used  by  the  natives  of  Brazil  in  preparing  the  arrowroot  from  the  poisonous 
cassava — Manihot  utilissima. 

In  this  connection  also,  GreshofE  describes  how  the  natives  of  the  Malayan 
Archipelago  eat  the  seeds  of  the  jjoisonous  cyanogenetic  plant,  Pangiiim  edide, 
but  never  without  submitting  them  to  the  same  treatment. 

Cycas  revoluta,  a  Japanese  tree,  and  Cijcas  circinalis,  a  tropical  East  Indian 
cultivated  plant,  are  both  described  as  having  poisonous  properties.  In  preparing 
the  starch  or  sago  for  food  their  seeds  are  first  roasted,  and  tlien  washed  in  run- 
ning water  for  a  long  period  to  remove  an  astringent  emetic  substance.  The 
aqueous  extract  is  described  as  fatal  to  chickens.  Van  Dongen  (23)  examined 
the  latter  plant  in  1903,  and  mentioned  an  amorphous  glucoside,  pakoein,  as  the 
poisonous  principle,  but  apparently  nothing  further  was  done  with  it. 

Cijcaif  werf/a  of  Queensland,  the  lai-gest  of  all  cyeads,  is  also  poisonous  (7),  and 
produces  a  kind  of  paralysis  of  the  hind  limbs  in  cattle,  sheep,  and  horses 
rPammel  (28),  Ewart  (29)]. 

In  Banks'  .Journal  (1770)  there  is  an  incident  recorded,  where  some  of  Cap- 
tain Cook's  men  found  the  hulls  of  the  nuts  round  a  desei-ted  camp  fire  of  the 
aborigines  on  the  coast  of  Eastern  Australia.  They  were  thus  assured  that  these 
nuts  were  used  as  food .  They  found  them  growing  in  the  bush  and  ate  one  or 
two,  after  which  they  became  very  iU  and  were  violently  affected  with  vomiting. 
Some  of  his  pigs  died  and  many  others  after  showing  very  severe  symptoms  just 
recovered  (1)  .  Leichhardt  also  described  this  cycad  and  how  the  natives  prejiared 
food  from  it  (16)  - 

Zamia  integrifolia  of  tropical  Florida  is  also  used  in  a  similar  manner  for 
the  preparation  of  arrowroot.  American  chemists  have  attempted  to  isolate  tiie 
poison,  but  without  success. 

Zamia  murieata  and  Z.  Fraseri  have  the  same  poisonous  seeds,  which  are 
treated  in  a  similar  manner  for  the  preparation  of  their  starch.  The  tuberous 
bulbs  also  are  poisonous. 

Xanthnrrlwea,  the  Australian  gi-ass-tree,  though  a  monocotyledonous  plant 
and  therefore  far  removed  from  the  cyeads,  is  reported  to  cause  the  same  poison- 
ous symptoms  as  the  latter',  when  the  young  shoots  or  green  buds  are  eaten  bv 
cattle. 


J2(j  THE    CHEMICAL    EXAJIIXATIOX     OF     IIACKOZAIIIA     SPIRALIS, 

Macrozamiu. — All  the  species  of  this  are  reputed  poisonous  plants,  and  the 
lecords  of  their  harmful  nature  extend  from  the  earliest  days  of  the  colonies. 
Governor  Phillip,  in  1789,  gave  an  account  of  M.  spiruUs  having  formed  pai't  of 
the  diet  of  the  Port  Jackson  aborigines,  and  of  its  having  caused  La  Perouse's 
sailors  to  become  very  ill  with  vomiting  and  diarrhoea  after  eating  the  nuts  or 
kernels  of  the  seeds  (16) . 

In  Grey's  Journal  of  his  two  Expeditions  in  1837  we  have  a  detailed  account 
of  the  use  of  the  seeds  by  the  natives,  of  the  careful  treatment  in  order  to  remove 
the  poisonous  constituent,  and  of  the  evil  effects  produced  by  eating  these  seeds 
without  this  preparation .  Grey  found  M.  Frazeri  on  the  Gairdner  Range  and 
Mount  Horner.  Several  of  his  men  ate  the  nuts  and  were  taken  violently  ill 
with  vomiting,  vertigo  and  other  distressing  ailments,  but  all  recovered  next  day 
(3).  This  "By-yu"'  nut  of  the  natives  he  describes  as  a  violent  emetic  and 
cathartic.  The  natives  soak  it  in  water,  bury  it  in  the  earth  till  the  pulp  is 
dry,  then  roast  it  for  food  (2) . 

Mr.  J.  H.  Maiden  records  the  poisoning  of  tiu-ee  boys  at  Springsure  in 
Queensland  through  eating  the  nuts  of  Macrozamia  Perowskiama  (16) . 

Baron  von  Mueller  was  quite  convinced  that  all  the  eycadaceous  plants  are 
pervaded  b\-  a  virulent  poison  principle,  which  becomes  inert  or  is  expelled  by 
heat  (6). 

Moore,  in  describing  the  methods  of  the  aborigines  in  jireparing  the  starch  for 
food,  says  that  in  the  fresh  state  the  seeds  are  dangerously  acrid  (8) . 

Macrozamia  spiralis  was  first  examined  chemically  by  Xorrie  (a  Sydney 
pharmacist).  His  report  was  published,  in  Dr.  Milford's  paper  (5),  which  was 
read  before  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales  in  1876.  Norrie  stated  (a) 
that  the  kernels  of  the  seeds  contained  much  starch  and  gluten;  the  soluble  por- 
tion had  an  acid  reaction,  and  lime  water  precipitated  calcium  oxalate;  (h)  that 
he  had  isolated  potassium  binoxalate  which  he  stated  was  the  poisonous  substance 
in  these  nuts:  and  (c)  that  he  had  also  observed  microscopic  crystals  of  an  alkaloid 
in  small  quantity.  He  believed  that  when  the  nuts  were  heated  by  the  natives 
the  potassium  binoxalate  would  be  converted  into  carbonate,  and  thus  rendered 
innocuous.  Dr.  Milford,  in  his  paper,  described  the  effects  on  human  beings 
after  eating  the  nuts,  viz.,  the  severe  suffering  like  sea-sickness,  diarrhoea,  and 
cramps  in  the  abdomen. 

On  the  other  hand.  Dr.  Bancroft  stated  in  a  Government  report  that  the 
kernels  contained  no  poison,  and  that  extracts  of  the  nuts  produced  no  delet^^rions 
effect  when  injected  into  frog's  and  guinea-pigs.  He  observed  that  when  fowls 
r.nd  ducks  were  fed  at  one  time  with  a  large  quantity  of  the  kernels  death  fre- 
quently ensued  after  1  or  2  days  from  gastro-enteritis,  caused  by  the  indigesti- 
bility  of  the  material.     He  stated  that  all  parts  of  the  plant  are  indigestible  (9) . 

Mr.  F.  Turner,  in  1893,  described  the  poiscmous  properties  of  the  two  species 
M.  Miqu-elii  and  M.  spiralis,  and  the  methods  of  the  aborigines  in  preparing  the 
starch  for  food  (11). 

In  1894,  Govt.  '\''et.  Surgeon  Edwards,  of  Western  Australia,  wrote  a  report 
describing  his  experiments  on  feeding  cattle  with  Macrozamia,  and  the  disease 
produced  Imown  as  rickets  or  "wobbles."  This  is  the  most  detailed  account  we 
have.  He  says  the  disease  has  been  known  since  180,5,  and  is  peculiar  to  Zamia 
districts.  It  is  characterised  by  partial  jiaralysis  of  the  hind  limbs,  the  diminished 
muscular  power  giving  rise  to  a  wobbling  gait.      The  symptoms  occurred  after  a 


BY   JAMES   M.  PETRIE.  427 

definite  period  according  to  tlie  amount  eaten.  A  one  year  calf  ate  U  lbs.  of 
leaves  per  day  with  other  food,  and  showed  symptoms  on  the  seventh  day;  another 
ate  4  lbs.  per  day  with  wheat  chaft',  and  became  ill  on  the  eleventh  day.  The 
author  could  thus  induce  the  disease  at  any  time  and  had  no  doubt  as  to  the 
cause.  After  the  second  week  the  disease  became  thoroughly  established.  It 
did  not  produce  death,  but  resulted  in  starvation.  Edwards  fed  cattle  with  the 
leaves,  nuts,  the  mucilaginous  secretion,  and  aqueous  extracts  of  all  parts  of  the 
plant.  These  mucilaginous  juices  and  extracts  produced,  in  cattle,  congestion  of 
the  fourth  stomach,  intestines,  liver  and  kidneys.  He  concluded  that  the  dele- 
terious effects  were  due  to  the  extremely  indigestible  nature  of  the  plant,  and  not 
to  any  organic  poison   (12,  13). 

Lauterer,  who  was  experimenting  in  a  similar  way  in  Queensland,  doubted 
the  conclusion  of  Edwards,  and  set  out  to  prove  his  assertion  of  the  existence  of 
a  direct  poison  in  the  Macrozamia.  In  1898,  he  published  his  results,  and  de- 
scribed the  symptoms  he  observed  of  spinal  meningitis  or  progressive  paralysis 
(18). 

Bancroft,  after  many  trials  in  searching  for  micro-organisms  in  the  animals 
affected  with  "wobbles,"  obtained  invariably  negative  results.  He  described  the 
disease  as  Zamia  paralysis. 

Lauterer  stated  that  the  leaves  of  M.  spiralis,  at  certain  times  of  the  year, 
contained  a  considerable  amount  of  a  poisonous  resin,  soluble  in  ether.  The 
time  corresponded  to  the  period  of  flowering  and  fruiting.  The  resin  existed  in 
greatest  amount  in  the  nuts,  and  was  also  present  in  the  half  subterranean  stems 
or  bulbs  and  the  leaves. 

In  guinea-pigs  and  cats  the  feeding  produced  gastro-enteritis  and  death. 
The  author  could  not  produce  "wobbles"  in  any  animals,  but  stated  that  enteritis, 
through  inanition,  might  lead  to  it. 

Lauterer  and  Pound  then  continued  their  experiments,  by  feeding  calves  with 
chaff  mixed  with  the  cut-up  leaves  of  Macrozamia  in  the  flowering  stage.  The 
first  calf  ate  8  lbs.  of  Macrozamia  leaves  per  day  for  3  days,  then  refused  to  eat 
more,  and  died  on  the  fifth  day.  The  second  calf  refused  to  eat  Macrozamia 
on  the  fifth  day,  ate  lucerne  for  2  days,  and  died  on  the  tenth  day.  The  third 
calf  ate  for  6  days  before  refusing,  and  lived  on  green  pasturage  till  the  tenth 
.day,  when  it,  too,  died.  All  these  animals  walked  slowly,  and  staggered  from 
weakn'Bss.  Post-mortems  revealed  symptoms  of  gastro-enteritis  only,  with  in- 
flamed membranes  of  stomach  and  alimentary  tract   (18) . 

Lamb,  in  1895,  recorded  the  death  of  a  great  number  of  cattle  in  North 
Queensland  from  paralysis  of  the  hindquarters,  attributed  4o  the  eating  of  young 
shoots  of  31.  Miquelii  (17) . 

Poisoning  by  BI.  Fraseri  is  recorded  by  Crawley  in  Western  Australia,  1898. 
Twenty-four  bullocks  died  after  eating  the  leaves.  Owing  to  a  gradual  loss  of 
vitality,  the  animals  lay  down  for  a  few  days  in  a  helpless  and  semi-paralysed 
condition,  and  finally  died.  On  post-mortem  examination,  the  contents  of  the 
omasum  were  found  impacted  with  ingesta,  which  were  abnormally  dry.  The 
abomasum  and  intestines  were  empty.  The  spinal  cord  and  meninges  were  in  an 
abnormal  condition    (19)  . 

Dr.  Himt,  of  Queensland,  carried  out  a  series  of  feeding  experiments  in 
1899.  He  observed  that  cattle  fed  on  leaves,  stem,  bulb,  and  male  and  female 
fruits,  became  affected  after  14  days,  the  ration  being  2  to  4  lbs.  per  day.     Of 


428 


THE    C'HKMICAL    KXA.MIN A'i'lOX     OF     .\lA(,'I!OZA.MIA     .SPIHALIS, 


these  animals  suffering  with  Zaiuia  paralysis,  some  being  recent  acute,  others  old 
chronic  cases,  the  author  took  blood,  spinal  and  synovial  fluids,  and  emulsion  of 
cord,  and  injected  these  into  other  healthy  cattle.  He  failed  in  all  cases  to  infect 
the  latter.  He  remarked  that  no  case  of  disease  had  ever  been  produced  by  in- 
jecting hypodermically,  or  by  internal  dosing  with  any  substance  extracted  or 
isolated  from  Macrozamias,  but  only  by  feeding  with  the  plant  itself.  After  long 
persistence  in  feeding  with  the  ])Iant,  the  j^ractical  pennanence  of  symptoms 
was  associated  with  peripheral  neuritis   (20) . 

Similar  conclusions  were  arrived  at  by  Professor  Smith,  of  Sydney  Univer- 
sity, as  a  result  of  his  experimental  work. 

Mr.  J.  H.  Maiden  descriljed  a  convincing  instance  of  cases  of  poisoning  in 
1895-1898.  In  a  paddock  in  which  Macrosamia  plants  were  growing,  stock  were 
badly  affected.  The  cattle  were  removed  and  the  cycads  cut  down  completely, 
but  left  lying  in  the  paddock.  Next  year  the  stock  were  put  back,  and  in  six 
weeks  were  again  suffering  badly.  Their  stomachs  were  filled  with  the  dried 
Macrozamia  leaves.  In  1897,  the  paddocks  were  closed  again,  till  after  one  year 
cattle  were  admitted.  They  ate  the  dried  withered  leaves  and  all  became  ill. 
In  1898  the  withered  leaves  had  all  disappeared,  and  only  the  roots  were  left, 
which  had  been  dried  for  over  3  years.  Cattle,  when  i)ut  in  again,  ate  the 
roots,  and  became  ill  as  before  (16) . 

Professor  J.  D.  Stewart,  in  1899,  then  chief  Veterinary  Officer  for  New 
South  Wales,  conducted  an  enquiry  into  an  outbreak  of  the  disease  at  Moruya. 
A  hundred  head  of  cattle  of  all  ages  were  affected.  The  symptoms  were  ob- 
served in  all  stages,  and  were  described  in  detail  and  illustrated  by  photographs. 
Post-mortem  examinations  also  were  conducted.  These  led  to  the  conclusion  of 
the  existence  of  partial  motor-paralysis  of  the  hind  extremities,  due  to  loss  of 
nervous  control  over  the  actions  of  the  muscles  of  the  parts  affected    (21). 

In  the  following  year.  Professor  Stewart  caiTied  out  feeding  experiments  on 
cattle.  He  gave  each  2  lbs.  per  day  mixed  with  cliaff.  Symptoms  of  the  disease 
were  indicated  on  the  23rd  day,  and  the  condition  tlioroughly  established  in  all 
its  manifestations  8  days  later.  This  condition  was  shown  to  be  permanent,  and 
for  all  practical  purposes  incurable  (22) . 

In  1906,  Mann  and  Wallas  analysed  Macrozamia  Fraseri,  the  Western  Aus- 
tralian species,  and  concluded  that  the  effects  upon  cattle  induced  by  eating  the 
plant  are  caused  by  potassium  oxalate  [confirming  Norrie's  result  on  1/.  spiralis 
(5)].  The  authors  referred  to  the  plant  but  did  not  say  whether  leaves  or  nuts 
were  used    (24) . 

In  1912,  Inspector  Marks  was  sent  to  the  Tabulam  district.  New  South 
Wales,  where  in  1900  over  400  cattle  had  died.  Heavy  losses  had  been  experi- 
fnced  each  succeeding  year  till  at  last  the  leases  had  been  given  up.  Zaniia 
eaters  with  the  confirmed  luibit  had  taught  the  whole  herd,  though  plenty  of 
green  fodder  was  available.  After  some  yeai-s,  this  neglected  land  was  again 
leased  for  grazing  and  the  herds  were  at  once  affected,  there  being  many  fatalities 
(25). 

Dr.  Cleland  carried  out  feeding  experiments  on  Milsou  Island  in  1912  and 
1913.  The  leaflets  of  M.  spiralis  were  cut  up  small  and  mixed  witli  cliaff,  1  to  2 
lbs.  per  day  being  given  to  each  animal  which  was  then  well  fed  with  other 
nourishing  food.  These  experiments  were  of  5  months'  duration,  and  no  signs 
of   any   poisoning  effects   were   discovered.        The   author's   comment    is   that   if 


BY    JAMES    II.   PETRIE.  4:29 

Maerosamia  eontained  any  actual  poisouous  constituent,  some  signs  of  its  action 
would  have  been  manifest  in  5  months.  Cattle  in  the  poor  Macrozamia  country, 
however,  would  eat  the  plant  in  sutfieient  quantity  to  keep  alive,  Ijut  were  not 
being  sujiplied   with  vitainine    (26)  . 

The  dietetic  deficiency  theory  put  forward  by  Dr.  Cleland  was  not  accepted 
by  Professor  Stewart,  who  has  since  conducted  further  feeding  experiments. 
These  eliminate  any  suspicion  of  lack  of  vitamines  being  the  cause  of  the  disease. 
He  has  obtained  positive  results  in  so  far  as  the  disease  was  established  in  animals 
receiving  a  '"sufficient"  diet,  with  an  allowance  of  Macrozamia.  It  is  understood 
that  the  details  of  these  later  feeding  experiments  will  be  published  shortly. 

In  1917,  Mr.  F.  B.  Guthrie  analysed  the  nuts  and  leaves  of  M.  spiralis,  and 
the  following  results  were  published    (27)  . 

Kernel-  Leaves. 

Water 81.79  76,67 

Ash 1.07  .99 

Ether  extract 18  .40 

Fibre 4.74  6.18 

Albuminoids .03  2.64 

Carbohydrates      12.19  13.31 

100.00  100.00 

It  is  important  to  note  from  these  figures  for  the  kernels,  after  deducting 
the  water  and  calculating  the  dry  substance,  that  two  thirds  of  this  is  starch  and 
one  quarter  fibre. 

Experimental   Work. 

Macrozamia  spiralis  Miq.  grows  in  great  abundance  in  certain  districts,  north 
and  south  of  Sydney.  A  large  stock  of  the  leaves  obtained  from  Bateman's  Bay 
on  the  south  coast  of  New  South  Wales,  was  made  available  by  Professor  Watt 
in  connection  with  the  investigation  of  this  plant  as  a  possible  source  of  raw 
material  for  tlie  manufacture   of  commercial   alcohol. 

The  sample  consisted  of  the  entire  rachis  and  leaflets,  each  about  six  feet 
long.  Through  the  kindness  of  Mr.  6.  Wright,  these  were  air-dried  and  put 
through  a  disintegrator  in  the  School  of  Agriculture  at  the  University.  The  fine 
dry  poT\'der  thus  obtained  weighed  10.4  kilograms. 

Proximate  Composition  of  the  Leaaes. 

A  portion  of  the  leaf-powder  was  dried  at  100°  C.  for  water  content,  then 
incinerated  to  obtain  the  amount  of  crude  ash.  Another  portion  was  completely 
extracted  successively  with  various  solvents,  in  a  Soxhlet  extractor;  the  extracts 
were  evaporated,  and  the  residues  dried  at  100°  and  weighed.  There  was  left 
an  insoluble  powder  containing  the  cellulose,  fibre,  and  other  indefinite  substances. 
The  following  results  were  obtained  for  the  air-dried  leaf-powder,  and  have 
been  also  calculated  for  the  fresh  and  completely  dried  leaves. 

Fresh  leaves.     Air-dried.         Dried 
at  100° 

Water 60.0%  9.6%  — 

Crude  ash 1.7  3.8  4.2% 

Extd.  by  solvents 12-9  29.2  32.3 

Insol.  residue 25.4  57.4  63.5 


430  THE    CHEMICAL   EXAMINATIOX     OF    MACROZAMIA     ISPIRALIS, 

The  various  organic  solvents  removed  in  solution  the  following  amounts: — 

Air-dried  leaves. 

1.  retrulfuui    spirit    (Ij.p.    luuli-r    50^)    extracted 1.19% 

2.  Ether  „  1.2ti 

3.  Chloroform  „  6.04 

4.  Ethyl  alcohol  „  13.08 

5.  Water  „  7.GU 

Total  soluble  substances 29 .  17  % 


A  portion  of  the  leaves  was  specially  te.sted  for  alkaloids  by  extracting  with 
ehloroform-ether-alcohol  mixture.  The  extract,  after  removal  of  the  solvents, 
was  heated  with  dilute  acid,  and  on  applying  the  characteristic  tests  for  alkaloids 
gave  entirely  negative  results. 

Another  portion   of   the   leaf-powder  was   treated   specially   for   the   isolation 
of  oxalic  acid  or  oxalates,  and  these  were  proxed  to  be  absent. 
Proximate  Composition  of  the  Suts. 
The  bright  red  ovules  or  seeds  were  collected  and  used  in  the  fresh  condition. 
One  average  ovule  consisted  of: — 

Soft  red  outer  cover 10  gms. 

Hard  shell 2     ,, 

Soft  white   kernel 6     „ 

Total   weight 18     „ 

These  kernels  eontained  a  harder  core  in  the  centre,  and  were  easily  cut  like 
a  potato.  When  they  were  grated  down  they  became  a  sticky  pulp,  resembling 
thin  dough,  mixed  with  much  mucilage.  Exposed  to  the  air,  the  pulp  soon 
became  dry  and  brittle,  and  was  then  easily  powdered  in  a  mortar.  A  portion  of 
this  was  extracted  with  alcoliol.  which  dissolved  out  a  small  amount  of  fixed  oil, 
and  then  extracted  with  water.  The  insoluble  residue  from  this  extraction  was 
dried  and  weighed.  In  a  second  portion  the  nitrogen  was  estimated  by  Ivjel- 
dahl's  method.  In  a  third  portion  a  careful  examination  was  made  for  salts  of 
oxalic  acid .  This  was  subsequently  repeated  with  a  much  larger  sample,  and 
the  minute  precipitates  carefully  examined  under  the  polarising  microscope,  but 
in  none  of  these  were  any  of  tlie  characteristic  calcium  oxalate  crystals  seen. 

A  large  sample  was  washed  in  a  muslin  cloth  under  cold  water,  after  which 
the  white  starch  which  deposited  was  dried  and  weighed,  likewise  the  insoluble 
fibrous   residue   in   the   cloth   was  sep.irated   and   weighed.     The   aqueous   solution 
contained  a  considerable  amount  of  a  thick  gelatinous  slime,  or  mucilage. 
Compoaitinn  of  the  Kernels  or  Seeds  of  the  Mfiero~nmia  Xiits. 

Calculated  on 
Fresh  Kernel.  Dried  at  100° 

Water 426  To  — 

Ash 1.0  1.7% 

Extracted   bv   alcohol    (oili    ..    ..       4.2.5  7.4 

hot  water 4.2  7.3 

Insoluble  residue 4S.0  83.6 

100.0  100.0 

Nitrogen 1.8%  3.2% 

Starch .39.0  68.0 

Residue  left  in  cloth   (fibrel    ..    ..     15.1  26.3 


2nd 

,.       3 

3rrl 

3 

4tli 

3 

5th 

,       3 

6tb 

.       3 

7th 

3 

8th 

4 

9th 

3 

by  james  si.  petrie.  431 

Complete  Chemical  Examination. 

Extraction  . — For  the  purpose  of  a  detailed  investigation  of  the  constituents 
of  the  leaves,  6  kilograms  of  the  air-dried  plant  powder  were  extracted  with  80  % 
alcohol,  by  maceration  and  percolation  at  room  temperature.  Three  large  per- 
colators were  employed.  The  fresh  spirit  was  addetl  to  the  first,  the  percolate 
from  this  run  into  the  second,  and  the  percolate  from  the  second  added  to  the 
third,  thus  making  one  complete  extract.  Each  complete  extract  was  assayed 
for  total  solids  contained  in  it ;  in  this  way  the  progi-ess  of  the  extraction  was 
ascertained . 

1st   extract,   3   litres,   contained   285   gms.   solid   matter. 

246 
171 
114 
,)  <J3  „ 

»  36  „ 

"  -4  „ 

28  litres  975  gms. 

The  total  solid  matter,  soluble  in  alcohol,  thus  obtained,  represents  16  %  of  the 
air-dried  leaf -powder.  The  28  litres  of  alcoholic  extract  consisted  of  a  dark 
brown  fluid,  and  were  distilled  under  diminished  pressure  to  a  thick  syrup.  The 
temperature  of  distillation  did  not  exceed  40°  ('.  After  removing  the  solvent  in 
this  way  there  remained  in  the  still  a  thick,  black,  tarry  product. 

Distillation  of  the  Extract  in  a  Current  of  Steam . — The  semi-solid  mass  was 
then  distilled  in  a  current  of  steam,  when  there  was  obtained  2.5  litres  of 
aqueous  distillate,  and  in  the  still  an  insoluble  resinous  mass  with  a  large  volume 
of  hot  aqueous  liquid.  The  latter  was  filtered  hot,  the  solid  portion  boiled  in 
■water,  and  decanted  many  times  till  the  washings  were  colourless.  This  sub- 
stance, insoluble  in  hot  water,  when  dry  weighed  392  gms.  The  filtered  solution 
and  washings  were  set  aside  to  cool,  and  after  a  few  days  a  quantity  of  a  lirown 
solid  deposit  separated,  which  was  washed  with  cold  water,  and  when  dry  weighed 
64  gms .     The  following  portions  were  obtained  : — 

A.  Volatile  steam  distillate 2.5  litres 

B .  Aqueous  solution 7 

C.  Chlorophyll   and   insoluble    resins 392       gms. 

D.  Brown    deposit    on    cooling    the    aqueous    soln.     64  ,, 

The  insoluble  substances  in  C  and  D.  weighing  456  gms.,  made  up  47  ff  of  the 
whole  alcoholic  extract. 

Examination  of  the  Volatile  Portion,  A. 

The  distillate,  measuring  2.5  litres,  and  showing  a  distinctly  acid  reaction  to 
litmus,  was  shaken  out  with  ether  many  times. 

( 1 )  .  The  remaining  aqueous  fluid  was  first  examined :  it  was  still  acid  in 
reaction  to  litmus.  When  boiled  with  Fehling's  solution  it  produced  a  slight 
reduction.  It  also  reduced  mercuric  oxide  and  silver  nitrate  when  boiled,  in- 
dicating the  presence  of  a  small  amount  of  formic  acid.     A  little  of  the  solution 


432  THE   CHEMICAL   ESAIIIXATIOX     OF    MACROZAMIA     SPIRALIS, 

was  evaporated  with  sulphuric  acid,  when  the  pungent  vapours  of  acetic  acid 
were  recognised,  and  on  addition  of  alcohol,  the  odour  of  ethyl  acetate  was  very 
marked . 

The  whole  fluid  was  neutralised  with  baryta  water  and  evaporated  to  dry- 
ness. This  left  a  residue  of  barium  salts  of  the  organic  acids  weighing  0.93 
gm.,  which   was  converted  into  barium  sulphate. 

0.93  gm.  Ba  salt  yielded  0.847  gm.  BaS04=91.1  % 
Acetic  acid  requires       „    =91.3 
The  barium  salt  represents  0.54  gm.  of  acetic  acid  in  the  aqueous  solution,  with 
a  trace  of  formic  acid. 

(2) .  The  ether  extract  of  the  volatile  distUlate  was  agitated  successively  with 
ammonium  carbonate,  sodium  carbonate,  and  sodium  hydroxide  until  nothing,  fur- 
ther was  removed  in  solution  by  each  solvent.  These  alkaline  fluids  were  then 
acidulated  and  extracted  with  ether,  the  solvent  distilled  off,  and  the  residue 
converted  into  barium  salt  by  titration  with  decinormal  baryta  solution.  The 
latter  was  decomposed  by  sulphuric  acid,  and  the  barium  sulphate  weighed. 

The  ammonium  carbonate  extract  was  too  small  in  amount  for  analysis,  but 
the  sodium  carbonate  solution  gave  0.226  gm.  of  barium  salt. 

0.04G5  gm.  Ba  salt  yielded  0.032  gm.  BaSO4=68.80  % 
Valerianic  acid,  C4Hn  .COOH,  requires    .,    ^68.73 
By   titration   the    sodium   carbonate   extract   was   found   to   contain    0.3   gm.    of 
valerianic  acid. 

The  sodium  hydroxide  extract  was  neutralised  by  0.5  ec.  of  baryta.  It 
left  a  small  residue  on  evaporation,  which  possessed  the  odour  of  cresol. 

The  ethereal  solution  remaining  after  the  treatment  with  alkaline  liquids 
was  dried  and  distilled  at  a  low  temperature.  There  was  obtained  in  this  way 
a  pale  yellow  limpid  essential  oil  weighing  2.15  gms.  This  oil  possessed  a 
strong  fi'agrant  odour  like  canq^hor,  and  when  kept  in  a  desiccator  over  suli>huric 
acid,  it  was  nearly  all  lost  by  evaporation  in  3  days.  This  exceedingly  volatile 
oil  left  about  0 .  25  gm .   of  a  yellow  solid  on  spontaneous  evajioration . 

The  volatile  constituents  in  the  steam  distillate  were  thus  identified: — 

trace    of    formic    acid ('H2O2 

0.54  gm.  acetic  acid t^2H402 

0.30   gm.   valerianic   acid      .  .    .  .      Cr.HioOa 
2.15  gms.  essential  oils. 

For  comparison  with  these  acids  we  may  mention  the  historic  work  of 
Chevreul  on  another  plant  survival  from  the  past,  G-inlcgo  hihiha,  the  maiden-hair 
tree  of  China  and  .Japan.  This  is  the  sole  representative  now  existing  of  the 
very  ancient  branch  constituting  the  second  Order  of  the  Gynmosperms.  and 
has  much  in  common  with  the  cycads.  Ciievreul  and  Becharap*  isolated  a  com- 
plete series  of  acids  from  Ci  to  Ct,  viz.,  formic,  acetic,  propionic,  butyric,  vale- 
rianic, eaproic  and  caprylie  acids.  The  second,  fourth  and  sixtli  predominated. 
This  result  was  ot)tained  after  many  trials,  and  only  after  extracting  a  large 
amount,  30  kilos,  was  sufficient  of  the  third,  fiftli  and  seventh  acids  obtained 
to  enable  them  to  l)e  identified.  It  is  quite  probable  that  small  amounts  of  the 
other  acids  are  present  in  Macrozarma  also,  but  if  so  they  can  be  recognised  only 


•Comptes  rendus  de  I'Acad.  des  Sciences,  5.3.  1861,  1225;  Annales  chim.  et  de  phys.,  i., 
1864,  288. 


By    JAIIES    M.   PETRIE.  433 

by  taking  a  much  greater  quantity  of  material,  and  making  this  a  special  object 
of  research. 

Exammatioii  of  the  Aqueous  Solution,  B. 

The  aqueous  solution : — The  voluminous  wa.shings  and  aqueous  solutions 
were  concentrated  at  a  low  temperature,  and  freed  from  a  small  amount  of  oil 
by  shaking  with  petroleum  spirit.  The  solution  was  then  treated  with  an  equal 
volume  of  10  %  lead  acetate  solution,  and  the  brown  precipitate  removed  by  the 
centrifuge  and  washed.  The  filtrate  was  next  treated  with  basic  lead  acetate 
solution,  and  a  white  precipitate  separated  in  the  same  way.  The  lead  was  re- 
moved from  the  solution  Ijy  sulphuric  acid  and  hydrogen  sulphide,  and  the  solu- 
tion concentrated  at  60°  C.  The  hydrogen  sulphide  was  lemoved  by  an  air  cur- 
rent passed  through  the  warm  solution.  The  black  solution  was  shaken  up  re- 
peatedly with  (1)  ether,  (2)  chloroform  and  (3)  amyl  alcohol.  Ether  removed 
about  2  gms.  of  a  viscous  resinous  substance,  chloroform  removed  only  a  trace, 
and  amyl  alcohol  a  dark  brown  syru]!.  These  substances  yielded  nothing  of  a 
crystalline  natui-e.  They  were  dissolved  in  ether  and  shaken  out  successively 
witli  ammonium  carbonate,  sodium  carbonate  and  sodium  hydroxide,  neutralised 
and  again  agitated  with  ether,  but  nothing  could  be  obtained  in  this  way. 

Each  of  these  extracts  was  carefully  tested  for  alkaloids  but  only  negative 
results  were  obtained. 

The  aqueous  solution  remaining  after  treatment  with  the  above  organic  sol- 
vents, was  distilled  in  a  current  of  steam  till  free  from  amyl  alcohol,  and  set 
aside.  After  some  time  crystals  separated,  and  these  were  found  to  consist  only 
of  potassium  salts.  No  tannin  was  present  in  this  solution,  and  saponins  were 
absent . 

Picric  acid  gave  a  large  precipitate  of  needle  crystals  of  potassium  salt. 
When  boiled  with  potash,  much  ammonia  was  evolved,  and  Fehling's  solution 
showed  an  immediate  and  strong  reduction . 

The  osazones  were  next  prepared  from  the  solution,  and  when  the  product 
was  examined  under  the  microscope  it  was  identified  as  the  characteristic  yellow 
crystals  of  phenyl  glucosazone.  These  were  purified  by  six  recrystalUsations 
from  dilute  alcohol,  and  then  showed  a  melting  point  of  206°   C.    (corrected). 

The  melting  point  of  the  osazone  of  glucose  is  given  as  205° .  The  pre- 
dominating sugar  is  therefore  glucose. 

The  solution   also  gave  strong  reactions  for  furf uraldehyde . 

The  total  solid  content  of  this  aqueous  fluid  was  350  gms.  or  36  %  of  the 
alcoholic  extract. 

Ej:amitiation  of  the  lead  acetate  jirecipitates. — These  lead  deposits  were  treated 
with  sulphuric  acid  and  hydrogen  sulphide  to  remove  the  lead,  and  the  hydrogen 
sulphide  boiled  off.  The  solutions  were  treated  with  animal  charcoal  till  nearly 
colourless  and  then  concentrated.  They  showed  no  reactions  with  ferric  chloride 
or  sulphuric  acid.  When  neutralised  with  sodium  hydroxide,  heavy  gelatinous 
white  precipitates  were  obtained,  and  Feliling's  solution  was  strongly  reduced. 

The  fluid  was  shaken  out  with  ammonium  carbonate,  sodium  carbonate  and 
sodium  hydroxide,  then  agitated  with  ether  and  acid,  but  nothing  was  obtained 
from  any  of  these  extracts  in  this  way.  The  remaining  solution  from  the  normal 
lead  precipitate,  after  standing  some  time,  deposited  a  considerable  amount  of 
anhydrous  calcium  sulphate,  in  masses  of  white,  needle-shaped  cr>-stals,  matted 
together . 


434  THE    CHEMICAL   EXAUINATIOX     OF    IIACROZAMIA     SPIRALIS, 

Examination   of   the   Resins,   C. 

The  resinous  mass  insoluble  in  hot  water,  which  was  left  in  the  still  after 
the  removal  of  the  volatile  eonstituents  by  steam  distillation,  when  dry  weighed 
392  gms.,  or  40  ^c  of  the  total  contents  of  the  alcoholic  extract . 

This  substance  was  a  dark  brown  powder.  It  was  dissolved  in  the  smallest 
amount  of  alcohol,  mixed  witli  purified  sawdust  and  completely  dried  to  constant 
weight.  The  dried  mass  thus  rendered  porous  was  transferred  to  a  Soxhlet  ap- 
paratus, and  extracted  successively  and  completely  with  petroleum  spirit  (b.p. 
below  50°  C),  ether,  cldoroform,  and  alcohol.  After  each  of  these  extracts  was 
distilled  to  remove  the  solvent,  and  the  residues  dried  at  110°  and  weighed,  the 
following  results  were  obtained : — 

1 .  Petroleum  sjiirit   extract 35  gins .  8.9% 

2.  Ether  extract     38      „  9.7 

3.  Chloroform    extract 4      ,,  1.0 

4.  Alcohol  extract (iO      „  15.4 

Left  unextracted      255      „  05.0 

Total 392      ..         100.0 

This  table  shows  that  although  392  gms.  of  this  mixture  originally  were  in 
alcoholic  solution,  being  extracted  from  the  leaves  with  this  solvent,  255  gins,  had 
now  liecome  insoluble  in  that  liquid,  forming  nearly  two-thirds  of  tlie  original 
extract . 

Two  factors  may  explain  this  anomaly: — The  i)etroleum  spirit  extract  con- 
tains all  the  oils  and  fats.  Certain  substances  are  intimately  associated  in  tlie 
plant  with  these  oils  and  are  soluble  in  them  alone.  'I'licy  are  removed  together 
■with  the  oils  in  the  extraction  of  the  leaves  by  alcohol.  When  subse(|uently  the 
oils  and  fats  are  removed  by  petroleum  spirit  these  other  constituents,  having 
lost  their  special  solvent,  are  now  rendered  completely  insoluble  in  alcohol.  In 
the  second  place  the  leaves  were  originally  extracted  with  80  %  alcohol  (contain- 
ing 5  %  wood-spirit),  and  in  the  resin  analysis  98  9r  ethyl  alcohol  was  used. 

i.  Petroleum  spirit  extract  of  the  Ttesins. — The  solvent  was  removed  by 
distillation,  and  the  residue  of  35  gms.  was  dissolved  in  ether  leaving  a  small 
amount  of  insoluble  brown  residue,  which  weighed  0.2  gm.  The  ethereal  solution 
was  then  agitated  a  number  of  times  with  (1)  ammonium  carbonate,  (2)  sodium 
carbonate.  (3)  sodium  hydroxide, .  (4)  water,  for  the  separation  of  organic  acids. 
The  alkaline  extracts  were  rendered  acid  with  sulphuric,  and  shaken  back  with 
ether,  the  solvent  distilled  off,  and  the  residue  examined.  In  this  way  (1)  am- 
monium carbonate  yielded  0.25  gm.  of  a  grey  amorpjious  residue.  (2)  The 
sodium  carbonate  extract  yielded  a  small  <|uantity  of  a  dark  brown  oil.  At  the 
same  time  there  was  precipitated  by  sulphuric  acid  about  10  gms.  of  a  brown 
solid  substance.  The  latter  with  the  acid  fluid  was  distilled  in  a  current  <if 
steam,  hut  from  the  distillate  only  a  trace  of  volatile  acids  was  obtained.  Tlie 
acid  liquid  remaining  in  the  still,  however,  when  titrated  \v\th  baryta  snhiticm 
and  evapoiated,  yielded  the  barium  salt  of  acetic  acid. 

0.4(i0    gm.    Ra    salt    gave    0.410    gm.   BaS04=89.2% 
Barium  acetate  requires        „      =-01.3 
The  amount  was  eiiual  to  about  0.7(1  gm.  of  acetic  acid.      The  l)ro\vii   solid  sub- 
stance mentioned   above,  of  10  gms.    weight,  was  treated   witli    petrdlcum   spirit 


BY    JAllKS    M.   PETRIE.  435 

in  wbieh  3.3  gms.  dissolved,  etiier  dissolved  1  gm.,  and  the  remainder  was  soluble 
in  aleoliol  only.  These  residues  appeared  to  he  complex  mixtures  of  acids,  and 
were  not  further  examined.  (3)  The  sodium  hydroxide  extract  contained  much 
chlorophyll.  When  acidiHed  and  shaken  out  with  ether  0.2  gm.  of  substance 
■was  obtained.  (4)  The  water  extract  after  caustic  soda  treatment  yielded  to 
petroleum  spirit  6.6  gms.  of  a  white  fatty  substance,  which  was  filtered  and 
waslied  with  cold  alcoliol.  On  recrystallisation  a  number  of  times  from  petro- 
leum s])irit,  it  showed  a  melting  point  of  47.5°  ('.,  and  solidified  at  46°  ('.  The 
solution  of  this  substance  possessed  an  acid  reaction. 

0.155  gm.  required  4.85  ccs.  of  decinormal  alkali  to  neutralise  it  to  phenol- 
phtlialein.  This  gives  for  a  monobasic  acid,  the  molecular  weight  of  320.  The 
iodine-value  by  Hubl's  method  was  determined: — 

(1).   0.1097    gm.    absorbed    0.058    gm.    of    iodine=52.9  % 
(2).   0.1012  „  0.054    "  „  =53.1 

The  iodine-value  eorresppnds  to  59  %  of  oleic  acid,  and  leaves  41  %  with  a  mole- 
cular weight  approximating  374,  as  probably  one  of  the  higher  homologues  of 
stearic  acid. 

Isolation  of  Phytoaterol. 

The  ethereal  solution  which  remained  from  the  last  section,  after  extraction 
with  alkalis  and  water,  was  distilled  off.  This  residue  consisted  of  a  mixture  of 
fats  and  oils,  with  cei-tain  unsaponifiable  substances,  and  weighed  10  gms.  It 
was  hydrolysed  by  boiling  for  6  hours  with  an  alcoholic  solution  of  potassium 
hydroxide,  and  the  products  of  saponification  brought  into  aqueous  solution  by 
heating  on  the  water-bath.  In  this  way  there  were  separated  a  black  insoluble 
unsaponified  portion,  and  a  strongly  alkaline  aqueous  solution .  The  whole  was 
cooled  and  agitated  with  ether  many  times  until  notliing  further  was  brought  out 
in  solution . 

The  unsaponified  portion. — The  ethereal  solution,  dark  l)rown  in  colour,  con- 
tained 0.5  gm.  of  solid,  and  was  distilled  off  leaving  a  residue  of  impure,  much 
discoloured  crystals.  The  latter  were  dissolved  in  alcohol  and  digested  with 
animal  charcoal.  They  were  then  obtained  in  a  fairly  pure  condition,  and  were 
redissolved  and  recrystallised  twice  from  dilute  alcohol. 

The  crystals  were  pure  white  witli  glistening  surfaces,  but  under  the  nucro- 
scope  appeared  of  two  kinds — a  few  broad  rectangular  flakes  with  dome  ends, 
and  the  greater  portion  consisting  of  lath-shaped  forms  with  pointed  ends. 

The  broad  flaky  crystals  presented  the  appearance  of  cholesterol,  with  low 
refractive  index,  and  with  the  characteristic  bites  out  of  the  sides. 

The  lath-shaped  forms  resembled  some  phytosterol  crystals. 

The  crystals  were  exceedingly  soluble  in  chloroform,  and  the  following 
specific  tests  were  applied : — 

Salkowski's  reaction — A  chlorufurm  solution  and  concentrated  sulphuric 
acid  were  mixed,  when  the  former  assumed  a  blood-red  colour  and  the  acid  a  deep- 
green  fluorescence;  the  red  solution  when  removed  and  evaporated  slowly  changed 
colour,  through  purple,  violet,  blue  and  finally  colourless ;  on  again  adding  sul- 
phuric acid  the  original  crimson  colour  was  restored . 

Liehermann's  reaction — acetic  anhydride  and  a  drop  of  sulphuric  acid  added 
to  a  chloroform  solution  gave  a  rich  rose-red  colour. 

Iodine  and  sulphuric  acid  gave  a  violet  colour,  changing  to  blue  and  green . 

Schiff's  reagent  gave  a  reddish  violet  residue. 


436  THE   CHEMICAL   EXAMIXATIOX     OF    MACROZAMIA     SPIRALIS, 

These  positive  reactions  place  the  substance  in  the  group  of  phj-tosterols. 

Purification  and  physical  properties  of  the  phytosterol. — After  five  recrys- 
tallisations  from  95  %  alcohol  the  greater  portion  of  the  substance  was  obtained 
in  one  fraction  which,  under  the  microscope,  showed  crystals  of  a  uniform  kind, 
laths  with  pointed  ends.  A  second  small  fraction  contained  a  mixture  of  the 
phytosterol  with  some  few  crystals  like  cholesterol.  The  first  fraction  was  used 
for  the  following  determinations : — 

Estimation    of   water   of   cri/stallisation. 

0.3301  gm.  heated  in  the  oven  at  110°   C.   lost  0.015  gm. 
Loss    in    weight  4.54  ^r   water 

C27H40O.H2O    contains    4.46 

Formation    of   acetate. 
.2657  gm.  of  the  anhydrous  crystals  was  boiled  with  acetic 
anhydride;    the    product    evaporated     and     weighed,    gave 
.2937  gm.  of  phytosterol  acetate. 

Increase  in   weight  10 . 0  % 

C27H460(CO.CH3)    requires    10.9 
Melting  points. — The  first  fraction  of  the  phytosterol  containing  its  water  of 
crystallisation   showed    a   constant    melting   point    of    132°    C.     (corrected).     The 
second  fraction  gave  a  melting  point  of  135°  ('.      The  phytosterol  acetate  crystals 
melted  at  120°  C.    (corrected^. 

Optical  properties. — A  polarimetric  deteruiination  nf  the  substance  was  made 
with  a  Schmidt  and  Haensch  polarimeter.  A  solution  of  .2657  gm.  of  the 
phytosterol  crystals  in  15  ccs.  of  ether,  and  equivalent  to  a  1.7714  '^,'c  solution, 
was  used  in  a  1  dcm.  tul)e.  A  laevo-rotation  was  recorded  of  — 0.61°  at  a  tem- 
perature of  16°  C. 

The  specific  rotatory  jiower.      „        =         — 34.5. 

This  biochemical  group,  of  which  cholesterin  is  flic  licst  known,  has  l)een 
called  by  Abderhalden  the  sterins  (Lehrbuch  der  physiol.  Chemie) .  These  ap- 
pear to  be  intimately  a^^sociated  with  the  fats  and  oils  in  all  living  cells,  and  have 
certain  well  defined  properties.  Their  physical  constants,  however,  are  found  to 
vary  within  certain  limits,  showing  that  not  one  substance  but  several  closely 
related  compounds  exist. 

Cholesterin  of  animal  tissue  has  been  known  for  fifty  years,  but  of  the 
analogous  compounds  iu  plants,  the  pliytosterins,  our  knowledge  is  very  recent. 
They  occur  both  in  the  free  state  and  as  esters.  Chemically,  they  are  unsaturated 
alcohols  of  high  molecular  weight,  having  the  constitution  of  cyclic  polyterpenes. 

In  the  literature  available  to  the  author  the  investigation  of  06  different  plants 
includes  the  isolation  and  identification  of  their  phytosterins .  In  the  English 
literature  the  term  phytosterols  is  adhered  to  throughout.  In  ultimate  composi- 
tion they  arc  found  to  range  from  C20  to  C.-io.  l)ut  two-thirds  of  the  number  have 
the  formula  ('27H4(iO  and  the  great  majority  possess  tlie  general  formula 
C^Hon—gO.     These  44  phytosterols  have — 

a  melting  point  between  130°  and  138°  C. 

optical  rotation  „      — 30       „  — 41 

2  groups  of  acotafcs  fl )  m.]-).  .,        118       „     122 

(2)     „  „         125       .,    128 


BY   JAMES    M.  PETIvIE.  437 

Tliose  possessing-  the  latter  constants  for  their  acetates  were  distinguisheil  by 
Burian  as  sitosterols 

The  phytosterol  of  Macrozamda  spiralis  possesses  the  following  physical 
constants : — 

molting-  point,  13-2. C'   C. 

oiitical  rotation.    — 34.5 
acetate  m.p.,  120.0°  C. 

It  therefore  falls  in  the  tirst  of  the  two  groups. 

Separation  of  Hydrocarbons. 

The  alcoholic  mother-liquors,  left  after  crystallising-  out  the  phytosterols,  were 
united,  and  on  further  concentration  a  small  quantity  of  cream-coloured  fatty 
solid  was  separated.  This  substance,  when  purified  by  digesting  with  animal 
charcoal  and  se-^-eral  crystallisations,  possessed  the  properties  of  a  saturated  hydro- 
carbon, and  a  constant  melting  point  of  65°  C.  The  weight  was  insufficient  for 
analysis,  and  was  not  further  examined.  The  melting-  point  of  the  paraffin 
triacontane,  C30H82,  as  observed  by  Tutin,  is  65°  C. 

There  now  remained  of  the  unsaponified  substances  only  an  uncrystallisable 
dark  yellow  oil,  weighing  about  2  gms. 

Something  of  the  nature  of  this  oil  was  ascertained  by  treating  a  portion 
with  a  small  piece  of  sodium,  when  only  a  few  micro-bubbles  of  gas  were  pro- 
duced, even  on  heating  to  75°  C.  The  substance  therefore  was  not  an  alcohol. 
This  point  was  confirmed  by  acetylation  of  the  substance:  when  boiled  with  acetic 
anhydride  and  the  products  separated,  no  gain  in  weight  was  observed.  The  sub- 
stance therefore  did  not  contain  a  hydroxyl  group. 

The  yellow  oil  was  next  distilled  under  a  pressure  of  30  mms.  ;  the  first 
drop  collected  at  180°  C,  and  the  greater  part  passed  over  at  about  220°.  The 
distillate  was  a  pale  yellow  fluid  which  solidified  on  cooling  in  microerystalline 
needles.  This  clear  distillate  was  quite  solid  at  16°  C,  and  when  carefully 
warmed  became  a  viscous  fluid  at  20°  ;  the  melting  point  lay  between  17°  and  19° 
C.  By  careful  bromination  of  the  substance  in  solutions  of  carbon  bisulphide, 
it  was  oljscrved  that  the  bromine  decolourised  but  almost  no  hydrobromic  acid 
was  formed, — evidence  that  onl.y  addition  products  were  present.  The  absence 
of  substitution  of  bromine  points  to  the  absence  of  paraffins. 

The  olefine  hydrocarbon,  oetodeeylene,  CisHso.  possesses  the  melting  point 
of  18°  C.  and  boiling  point  183°   C.,  under  a  pressure  of  30  mms. 

The  Sapoiiified  Oils. 

The  strong  alkaline  solution  obtained  by  hydrolising  the  petroleum  spirit 
extract  of  the  resins,  and  after  removal  by  ether  of  the  unsaponified  sul)stances, 
was  now  treated  for  fatty  acids  by  adding  sulphuric  acid  and  distillation  in  a 
current  of  steam. 

The  distillate  was  faintly  acid,  and  contained  a  small  amount  of  a  greenish 
solid,  which  was  filtered  off  and  examined.  Tlie  substance  was  recrystallised 
from  alcohol  a  number  of  times,  and  then  consisted  of  50  mgs.  of  nearly  white 
crystals  in  small  globular  masses.  The  melting  point  was  45°  C.  The  neutral- 
isation equivalent  was  determined  in  alcoholic  solutions,  the  titration  ended  sharply 
and  required  20  ccs.  of  eentinormal  alkali  to  neutralise  40  mgs.,  which  is  equiva- 
lent to  a  neutralisation  value  of  200. 

Laurie  acid,  C12H24O  a,  requires  200   and  possesses  a  melting  point  of  43.6°  C. 


438  THE   CHEMICAL   EXAMINATION'    OF    MACROZAMIA     SPIRALIS, 

The  titrated  sodium  salt  in  alcoholic  solution  was  then  precipitated  by  baryta, 
and  the  barium  compound  convei'ted  into  sulphate. 

0.0383  gm.  Ba  salt  yielded  0.0162  gm.  BaSO^. 
e(|uivalent  to  BaS04  42.3  % 
Barium  laurate  requires  43.5  % 
The  substance   was   therefore  lauric   acid,   ('12  H24    O2 

The  aqueous  distillate,  from  which  the  above  solid  lauric  acid  had  to  be 
filtered,  was  treated  by  shaking  out  with  etlier;  but  nothing  was  removed  in  solu- 
tion except  a  trace  of  an  acid  too  small  to  identify.  The  acjueous  distillate  was 
titrated  with  decinormal  barium  hydroxide,  and  required  42  ccs.  The  solution 
was  evaporated  to  dryness  and  weighed.  During  the  lieating  the  strong  odour  of 
acetic  acid  was  detected. 

0.3973  gm.    Ba   salt   yielded   0.3(571   gm.    BaS04=92.4% 
Barium  acetate  requires  „  01.3 

The  substance  is  therefore  acetic  acid,  C2H4O2. 

The  acid  liquid  remaining  in  the  distillation  fla.sk  was  shaken  out  with  petra- 
leum  spirit.  This  removed  a  dark  coloured  solid  nuiss  which  weighed  3  gms.,  and 
consisted  of  the  higher  fatty  acids  including  stearic  and  oleic  acids;  they  were 
not  further  examined. 

The  same  acid  liquid  after  treatment  with  petroleum  spirit  was  agitated  with 
ether.  This  solvent  removed  about  1  gm.  of  solid  substance  in  solution,  which 
eousisted  of  resins  and  resin  acids. 

ii.  The  ether  ea-tract  of  the  h'esiitn: — 'I'lie  ether  extract  weigliing  38  gins. 
■was  examined  in  the  following  manner. 

A  portion  of  the  extract  was  dissolved  in  alcohol  and  poured  into  a  large 
volume  of  water,  when  a  dark  green  insoluble  mass  separated  and  was  deposited. 
The  a(|ueous  portion  was  a  pale  green  colloidal  solution  wliich  did  not  settle.  The 
resinous  contents  could  not  be  induced  to  separate  either  by  spinning  in  a  high- 
speed centrifuge,  filtering  by  the  suction  pump,  allowing  to  .stand  several  weeks, 
or  by  addition  of  such  reagents  as  sodium  citrate,  magnesium  sulphate,  ether  or 
alcohol.  When  agitated,  however,  with  a  little  dilute  sulphuric  acid,  instant 
separation  took  place,  light  green  resins  were  deposited,  which  were  filtered  off 
from  a  clear  a(|ueous  fluid,  and  washed  with  water  till  acid-free. 

The  total  deposited  resins  were  dried  and  extracted  with  prepared  sawdust  in 
a  Soxlilet  extractor   (1)   with  chloroform,      (2)    with  alcohol.      From  each   of  these 
exti-acts  the  solvent  was  removed  by  distillation,  dried  and  weighed. 
27  gms.  soluble  in  chloroform. 

5  gms.  insoluble  in  chloroform,  soluble  in  alcohol. 

6  gms    insoluble  in  chloroform,  insoluble  in  alcohol. 

Each  of  tlu'se  i)ortions  was  examined  separately  in  great  detail.  Their  solutions 
in  ether  were  agitated  with  sodium  carbonate,  sodium  hydroxide,  and  water.  Each 
solution  was  carefully  purified  by  animal  charcoal  and  evaporated  spontaneously, 
but  in  no  case  could  any  crystalline  substance  be  isolated.  Amorphous  residues 
were  obtained  in  all  cases. 

The  jjortion  insoluble  in  chloroform  but  solul)Ie  in  alcohol  was  a  black  bi'ittle  resin- 
ous substance;  when  its  alcoholic  solution  was  poured  into  water  it  assumed  .1 
brilliant  pale  g-reen    and  bright  blue  fluorescence. 

iii.  The  chlorofdrm  and  iv.  tlie  alcohol  extracts  of  the  oriyiiial  renin. — Tliese, 
following  the  petroleum  spirit  and  ether  extractions,  were  treated  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  ether  suhible   portion,  l)ut   only   aiii()ri)1ious  resins  wei-c  obtained. 


BV   JAMES   M.  PETRIE.  439 

The  liesi>is  (lepo^iited  from  Cold  Water,  D. 
The  light  browu  resinous  powder  obtained  by  settling  the  original  aqueous 
solution  of  the  resins,  and  weighing  04  gms.,  was  dissolved  in  a  little  alcohol  and 
mixed  with  prepared  sawdust.  The  whole  was  then  thoroughly  dried,  and  ex- 
tracted ia  a  Soxhh't  apparatus,  successively  with  organic  solvents.  The  jdeld  ob- 
tained was : — 

Extracted  by  ether 10  % 

„  chloroform      1 

„  alcohol 21 

Insoluble 68 


The  brown  resin  contained  1.2  %  of  inorganic  salts.  From  each  of  these 
extracts  the  solvent  was  distilled,  and  the  residual  substance  examined.  Nothing 
crystalline  was  obtained  from  any  [jortion,  and  they  seemed  to  be  composed  of 
amorphous  resins. 

Fekdixg  Experijiexts  with  Maceozajiia  spiralis. 
The   animals  used  were   white  rats.     They  were   kept   singly   in   metal   cages, 
and  their  normal  food  consisted  of  bread,  or  dog-biscuit,  and  water. 

(i.)  With  the  fnesh  leaf -powder. — The  powdered  leaves  were  mixed  with 
bread  or  biscuit  into  a  paste  with  water.  10  gins,  of  leaves  were  thus  given  daily 
to  each  of  four  rats.  In  most  cases  the  ration  was  tinished,  but  at  the  end  of  two 
weeks  they  ceased  to  eat  any  more,  and  after  starving  for  a  number  of  days  they 
were  put  back  on  normal  diet. 

These  animals  were  very  lively  and  active,  showing  no  ill  effects  at  the  end 
of  the  experiment,  nor  after  some  weeks. 

(ii.)  With  the  constituents  of  the  <ether  extract. — It  has  been  stated  in  the 
historical  part  above  (p.  427),  that  Lauterer,  of  Queensland,  separated  from  the 
ieavt'S  of  Macrozamia  by  extraction  with  ether,  a  quantity  of  resin,  to  which  he 
attributed  the  poisonous  effects. 

For  the  purpose  of  testing  tliese  resins  a  quantity  of  the  leaves  were  treated 
in  a  special  manner. 

A  quantity  of  the  air-dried  leaf-powder  weighing  2.5  kilos  was  thoroughly 
extracted  in  large  i)ercolators  with  ether.  After  distilling  off  the  solvent,  there 
remained  a  viscous  residue  weighing  94  gms.  (dry  weight),  which  consisted  of 
oils,  fats  and  resins.  Instead  of  using  this  entire  extract  it  was  further  analysed  by 
dissolving  in  a  little  alcohol,  mixing  with  prepared  sawdust,  and  completely  drying 
tiie  mass.  This  was  extracted  in  a  Soxhlet  successively  with  {a)  petroleum 
spirit,  (b)  ether,  tc)  alcohol. 

The  petroleum  spirit  extract  was  found  to  be  the  greatest  in  amount :  it  was 
further  subdivided  by  shaking  out  successively  with  (1)  sodium  carbonate,  (2) 
sodium   hydroxide. 

The  weights  of  these  different  portions  finally  obtained  were : — 
(a)   Petroleum  spirit  extract — 

Sodium    carbonate   solution 15  o-ms. 

Sodium  hydroxide  ,,  30 

Petrol,    spirit  .,  20 

(6)   Ether  extract 24 

(c)   Alcohol    extract 5 

94       „ 


440  THE    CHEMICAL    EXAIIIXATIOX     OF     IIACROZAJIIA     SPINALIS, 

These  various  portions  were  divided  into  small  amounts  for  feeding  purposes, 
to  last  about  two  weeks.  Each  portion,  mixed  as  before  with  about  10  gms.  of 
bread  or  biscuit,  was  fed  to  a  rat.     Water  also  was  given  in  each  case. 

All  these  extracts  were  readily  and  completely  eaten.  The  rats  apparently 
enjoyed  the  rations-  and  remained  throughout  the  period  of  two  to  three  weeks 
very  active  and  well.  These  experiments  show  that  nothing  of  the  nature  of 
Lauterer's  poisonous  resins  was   jircsent. 

(iii.)  With  the  aqueous  extract  of  tlie  nuts. — About  1  kiln,  of  the  seeds  was 
made  intj  a  pulp,  and  extracted  with  2  litres  of  water  and  1  cc.  of  toluene. 
After  3  days,  with  frequent  stirring,  it  was  filtered  through  cloth  into  a  tall 
cylinder,  to  allow  the  gi'eater  portion  of  the  starch  to  deposit. 

The  solution  thus  obtained  was  given  to  two  rats,  the  ration  for  each  being 
made  up  of  30  ces.  of  the  fluid,  with  bread  and  biscuit  soaked  in  it.  This  was 
given  daily  for  22  days,  at  the  end  of  which  period  the  two  rats  appeared  quite 
normal  and  active. 

The  supposed  poisonous  principle  said  to  be  removed  fi'om  the  nuts  by  wash- 
ing with  water,  and  which  would  have  been  in  the  above  solution,  was  not  found 
in  these  experiments 

(iv.)  With  the  fresh  nuts. — Nuts  were  fed  to  two  rats,  with  no  other  food,  but 
with  plenty  of  water.  Both  animals  died  of  impaction  within  three  days,  and  no 
other  abnormal  s_\Tuptoms  were  detected. 

In  the  historical  record  given  above  (p.  425),  it  will  be  noticed  that  animals 
were  affected  in  two  different  ways.  (1)  Symptoms  were  rapidly  manifested  with- 
in the  first  three  or  four  days  after  eating  the  Macrozamia.  The  animals  became 
slow  in  their  movements,  dragged  the  hind  limbs,  and  finally  died  of  impaction. 
This  condition  would  include  the  gastro-enteritis  mentioned  l)y  certain  authoi's. 
(2)  Symptoms  wei'c  gradually  produced  after  three  or  four  weeks'  feeding-.  'I'he 
condition  was  entirely  different  from  the  fonner,  and  was  said  to  produce  peri- 
pheral neuritis,  and  partial  paralysis,  etc.  The  animals,  though  incurable,  might 
live  on  if  cared  for.  but  if  not,     they  usually  died  of  starvation. 

The  results  of  the  experiments  with  the  white  rats  were  positive  for  the 
former,  but  entirely  negative  for  the  latter  condition. 

The  symptoms  rie-scribed  for  the  real  Jilacrozamia  poisoning  are  characterised 
by  the  slow  onset  of  the  disease,  but  when  fully  established,  the  disease  has  not 
been  associated  with  any  very  definite  pathological  changes.  These  symjitoms,  in 
a  general  sense,  have  also  been  observed  after  animals  lia\e  fed  for  long  jieriods 
on  certain  other  plants,  for  example,  the  Grasstrees,  the  Darling  Peas,  Lnthiinis, 
Loco  weeds,  etc.,  and  in  none  of  these  has  any  active  poisonous  chemical  compound 
been  identified. 

This  cliemical  investigation  has  shown  that  the  Macrozamia  contains  no  active 
poisonous  principle  which  could  be  isolated  or  identified,  or  any  indiridual  con- 
stituent which  could  be  a.ssociated  with  the  disea.se. 

Summjusy. 

Macrozamia  spiralis,  which  grows  abundantly  along  the  East  Coast  of  New 
South  Wales,  has  been  regai'ded  as  a  poisonous  plant  from  the  earliest  days  of 
the  Colony. 

A  complete  summary  of  its  poisonous  record  is  given. 

The  chemical  composition  of  its  leaves  is  eharaeterised  by  a  large  amount  of 
amorphous  resins. 


to  J 


BY    JAMES    II.   PETKIE.  441 

The  t'ollowing  constituents  were  identified : — 

Formic,  acetic,  valerianic  and  laurie  acids. 

Oleic,  stearic,  and  higher  fatty  acids. 

A  very  volatile  essential  oil. 

A   phytosterol  with   m.p.  132°,   opt  rot.  —  34.5,  and  in.p.  of  acetate   120°   C 

A  jiaraffln,  with  the  properties  of  triaeontane  C30H62,  and  an  oleflne  having 
the  properties  of  uctodecylene. 

The  nuts  contained  39  %  of  starch,  and  much  mucilage. 

In  the  feeding  experiments,  white  rats  were  given,  with  their  ordinary  food, 
(1)  the  crushed  fresh  leaves,  (2)  the  grated  seeds,  (3)  the  rich,  fatty,  and  resinous 
components  extracted  from  the  leaves  by  ether,  and  which  Dr.  Lauterer  stated 
contained  the  poisonous  principle,  (4)  the  aqueous  extracts  of  the  leaves,  and  the 
seeds,  by  which  the  aborigines  believed  the  poison  was  removed. 

The  animals  showed  no  signs  of  being  affected  after  three  weeks'  feeding 
the  material  was  apparently  not  poisonous  to  white  rats.  With  careless  feed- 
ing the  animals  are  easily  killed  by  impaction,  which  is  due  to  the  fibrous  nature 
of  the  material . 

References  to  the  Poisonous  Properties   or  Australian  Cycads 
(Arranged  in   chronological   order  of  publication.) 

1.  Banks. — Jouru.  of  Sir  J.    Banks  on   Cook's  First  Voyage,  1770,  pp.  299, 

313,  E.  coast  of  Aust. ;  p.  421,  Prince's  Is. 

2.  Grey,  G. — Yo'-..  of  Dialects  of  S.W.   Aust.,  Notes  on  Food  of  Aborigines, 

1840,  p.  22. 

3.     Journ.  of  2  Expeds.  of  Discovery  in  N.W.    Aust.,  1841,  vol.  ii., 

p.  61,  295. 

4.  Bennett.— N.S.W.   Med.   Gaz.,  ii.,   1871,  1. 

5.  Mii.FORD.— Proc.   Roy.  Soc.  N.S.W.,   x.,  1876,  295. 

6.  Mueller.— Chem.   and  Drug.,  Melb.,  1883. 

7.  Palmer.— Journ.  Boy.  Soc.  N.S.W.,  xvii.,  1883,  97. 

8.  Moore.— Journ.  Roy."  Soc.  N.S.W.,  xvii.,  1883,  115. 

9.  Bancroft.— The  Queenslander,  1890   (thro.  Turner   (11).) 

10.     Brisbane  Courier,  Oct.  29,  1892. 

11.  Turner.— Agric.  Gaz.  N.S.W.,  iv.,  1893,  158. 

12.  Edwards.— Journ.  Bur.  Agric.  W.A.,  i.,  1894,  225. 

13. Producers'  Gaz.  and  Settlers'  Record,  W.A.,  v.,  1898,  399. 

14.  Maiden.— Agric.  Gaz.  N.S.W.,  iv.,  1893. 

15. „  viii.,  1897,  20. 

16. „  X.,  1899,  738,  1259. 

17.  Lamb.— Agric.  Gaz.  N.S.W.,  vi.,  1895,  505. 

18.  Lauterer.— Proc.  Roy.  Soc.    Q.,  xiv.,  1898. 

19.  Cra wlet.— Producers'  Gaz.  and  Settlers'  Record,  W.A.,  v.,  1898,  399. 

20.  Hunt.— Ann.   Rep.  Dept.  of  Agric,  Q.,  1899,  71. 

21.  Stewart.— Dept.  of  Agi-ic.  N.S.W.,  Misc.  Pub.  No.  344,  1899. 

22.     „  „  ,,  Ann.  Rept.   Stock  Branch,  1900,  p.  20. 

23.  Van  Don  gen. — 1903,  thro.  Wehmer's  Die  Pflanzenstoffen. 

24.  Mann  and  Wallas.— Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  N.S.W.,  xl.,  1906,  xxi. 

25.  Marks— Agric.   Gaz.  N.S.W.,  xsdii.,  1912,  1056. 


442  THE    CHEMICAL   EXAMIN'ATIOX     OF    MACROZAMIA     SPIRALIS. 

26.  Clelant).— Ann.  Rept.   Bur.   of  Mirrobiol.,  1(112,  p.  212. 

27.  Guthrie. — Agxic.  Gaz.  N.S.W.,  x.xviii.,  1917,  G25,  865;  [p.  625  also  ((not- 

ed   in    Turner   (11).] 

28.  Pammel. — Manual  of  Poisonous  Plants,  p.  325. 

29.  EWART. — Weeds  and  Poi.sonous  Plants,  p.  65. 

References  to  Gums  and  Storcli. 

30.  Blackett.^ — Gums.     Aust.  Supp.  to  Cliem.  and  Drug..  May,  1882. 

31.  Maiden. — Macrozamia  gtim.    Pharm.  Joum.,  xxi.,  1890,  7. 

32.  Lauterer. — Macrozamia  gum.     Cbem.  and  Drug,  of  Anstrala-sia,  1890. 

33.  Wagner.— The  Zamia  Palm  of  N.S.W.  and  Q.     Starkefabrikation,  1886. 

34.  Rowley. — The    Coml.    Utilisation    of  Macrozamia   in   W.A.     Joum.    Soc. 

Chem.  Tnd..  35,  1916. 

35.  Harker. — Macrozamia  spiralis   a.s  a    source  of   industrial    alcohol.      Joum 

Inst.  Sc.  &  Ind.,  Melb.,  i.,  No.  8,  1919,  p.  470. 


443 


TWO    NEW    HYMENOPTERA    OF    THE   SUPERFAMILY 
PROCTOTRYPIDAE  FROM  AUSTRALIA. 

By  Alan   P.    Dodd. 

{Communicated  brj  W.  W.  Froggatt,  F.L.S.) 


(^    LIBRAF 


Among  a  small  collection  of  Micro-Hymenoptera  kindly  lent  me  by  Mr.  W. 
W.  Froggatt,  Government  Entomologist  of  New  South  Wales,  the  two  species 
described  herein  were  picked  out  as  new ;  of  these  one  is  of  special  interest,  being 
a  primary  parasite  of  the  Sheep-Maggot  Flies. 

I  am  very  miii^h  indebted  to  Mr.  Froggatt  for  the  loan  of  the  sjjecimens. 
and  also  for  the  data  and  information  contained  in  his  lettei-s. 

Family  DIAPRIIDAE. 

Hemilexomyia,  n. gen . 

?• — In  Kieffer's  table  of  genera  (Genera  Insectorum,  1911),  running  to 
Uemilexis  Foerster,  Paramesius  W^estwood,  and  Spilomicrus  Westwood;  closely 
related  to  all  these  genera  and  combining  many  of  their  characteristics,  but  at 
once  differing  in  the  incised  base  of  the  body  of  the  abdomen,  and  the  very 
long  stigmal  vein ;  Uemilexis  and  Spilovucrus  possess  a  more  or  less  truncate 
abdomen  at  the  apex,  but  in  botli  the.se  the  base  of  the  body  of  the  abdomen  is 
distinctly  raised  from  the  petiole,  whereas  Paramesius,  which  does  not  possess 
the  latter  character,  has  the  apex  of  the  abdomen  narrow  and  pointed.  The 
detailed  generic  characters  are  given  in  the  description  of  the  species. 

Type,  Hemilexomyia  abrupta,  n.sp. 

Hemilexojivia  abrupta,  n.sp. 

?. — Length,  5.5  mm.  Shining  black;  legs,  including  the  coxae,  bright  red; 
antennae  red,  the  apical  half  more  or  less  dusky;  tegulae  red. 

Head  normal ;  smooth  and  shining,  except  for  scattered  small  punctures 
each  bearing  a  long  fine  seta;  viewed  from  above,  sub-rectangular,  about  twice 
as  wide  as  long;  viewed  from  the  side,  the  frons  triangular,  the  antennal  prom- 
inence distinct;  cheeks  broad;  eyes  moderately  large,  giving  off  a  few  long  setae; 
ocelli  large,  close  together.  Antennae  inserted  on  a  prominence  in  centre  of 
frons,  13-jointed;  scape  long  and  slender;  pedicle  and  flagellar  joints  with  scat- 
tered long  pubescence;  pedicel  twice  as  long  as  its  greatest  width:  flagellum 
without  a  distinct  dub,  the  apical  seven  joints  a  little  thickened;  joint  1  cylin- 
drical, one-half  longer  than  pedicel  (in  two  specimens  from  ]\Iarsden  longer  and 
twice  as  long  as  pedicel)  ;  joint  2  one-half  as  long  as  1;  joints  3  and  4  subequal, 


444  TWO    NEW     HYMENOPTERA     OP     THE    SUPERFAMILY    PROCTOTRYPIDAE, 

a  little  shorter  than  2,  joints  5-10  suliequal,  subglubose,  aliuul  as  long-  as  wide; 
apical  joint  conical,  one-third  longer  than  preceding.  Thorax  normal,  twice  as 
long  as  its  greatest  width;  pronotal  neck  short  and  stout,  the  pronotuin  itseli' 
hardly  \'isible  from  above;  scutum  and  scutellum  smootli  and  shining,  with  a  few 
small  sctigerous  punctures;  scutum  almost  as  long  as  its  greatest  width,  broadly 
rounded  anteriorly,  the  parapsidal  furrows  very  deep,  complete,  and  foveate; 
scutellum  longer  than  its  width  at  apex,  subquadrate,  at  base  with  two  large 
deep  almost  circular  foveae,  situated  slightly  obliquely  to  each  other,  each  tra- 
versed by  two  or  three  more  or  less  obscure  earinae,  their  inner  margins  carin- 
ate,  the  narrow  area  between  appearing  as  a  shallow  fovea  (sometimes  there  are 
two  of  these  shallow  foveae) ;  lateral  margins  of  scutellum  without  a  fovea,  the 
posterior  margin  finely  foveate;  postscutellum  conspicuous,  carinate;  median  seg- 
ment long,  rugose,  at  base  with  an  acutely  laised  carina  (from  lateral  aspect 
appearing  as  a  raised  tooth)  which  branches  to  form  laterally  a  distinct  blunt 
tooth  on  either  side,  below  these  teeth  are  the  blunt-toothed  or  subacute  latero- 
posterior  angles,  and  there  is  also  a  blunt  tooth  or  protuberance  on  either  side 
against  the  lateral  margins  anteriorly;  median  segment  jiosteriorly  with  a  short 
stout  neck,  rorewing-s  very  long  and  broad,  extending  a  little  beyond  apex  of 
abdomen;  stained  yellowish;  venation  thick  and  distinct,  fuscous;  submarginal 
vein  well  distant  from  the  costa  which  it  joins  at  half  wing  length;  marginal 
vein  somewhat  thickened,  almost  as  long  as  the  stigmal  vein  which  is  perpendicu- 
lar and  very  long  for  tlie  family;  pale  yellow  lines  indicate  basal,  median,  dis- 
coidal,  recurrent,  and  radial  veins.  Hindwings  two-thirds  as  long  as  the  fore- 
wings,  narrow  slender,  with  a  long  costal  vein.  Petiole  of  abdomen  stout,  a 
little  longer  than  wide,  its  lateral  margins  carinate,  rugose,  and  with  a  paired 
median  carina  that  projects  into  the  incised  abdomen ;  body  of  abdomen  slender, 
about  three  times  as  long  as  its  greatest  width,  conical,  but  the  apex  is  blunt; 
\iewed  from  the  side  gently  convex  above  and  beneath,  and  aljruptly  truncate  at 
apex;  smooth  and  shining,  with  a  very  few  scattered  setae;  consisting  of  one 
segment  only;  anterior  margin  triangularly  incised  to  form  a  short  basal  fovea. 
Legs  slender;  trochanters  long  and  slender;  femora  slender  for  basal  third,  then 
much  thickened ;  tibiae  and  tarsi  slender,  the  latter  5-joint.ed  with  a  pair  of  slen- 
der tarsal  claws;  intermediate  tibiae  a  little  longer  than  their  femora,  their  tarsi  a 
little  longer  than  t'le  tibiae;  posterior  tibiae  plainly  longer  than  their  femora, 
and  a  little  longer  than  their  tai-si,  the  basal  tarsal  joint  as  long  as  2-4  united ; 
legs  pilous,  the  tarsi  spiny;  posterior  tibiae  with  two  apical  spurs. 

Described  from  the  following  series;  three  females  collected  by  L.  Wilson 
at  Mai-sden,  South-west  Riverina,  N.S.W.,  15.5.19in,  and  bred  from  pupae  of 
one  of  the  sheep-maggot  flies;  one  female  lired  from  jiupae  of  Opln/ra  iiifjra 
Wied.,  Uardry,  near  Hay.  N.S.W.,  20.8.101(1,  J.  L.  Froggatt;  three  fcm."iles 
bred  from  pujiae  of  CaViplioni  {NcopoUinnxa)  viUosa  R.D.,  Moree,  N.S.W..  .T. 
L.  Froggatt;  one  female  caught  by  sweeping  pine  scrub,  Grenfell,  X.S.W.,  1918, 
W.  W.  Froggatt.     Thus  the  species  is  well  established  in  the  State. 

In  Farmer's  Bulletin  No.  113,  June,  1917.  of  the  Xcw  South  "Wales  Deiiart- 
ment  of  Agiiculture,  "Sheep-Maggot  Flics,  No.  ."?."  l)y  W.  W.  Froggatt  and  J. 
L.  Froggatt,  on  page  32  the  discovery  of  this  parasite  is  recorded  and  a  general 
description  gix'cn,  and  on  the  opposite  page  \cry  good  fig-iircs  are  gi\en.  The 
following  extract  is  taken  from  this  bulletin  :  "This  is  a  very  dififerent  hymenop- 
teron   from  the  previous  ones    found    attacking  the   maggots   and  pupae    of   the 


BV    ALAN    P.    DODD.  445 

blow-Hies,*  and,  iis  only  about  half  a  dozen  specimens  have  been  secured,  it  is 
not  of  much  economic  importance;  yet,  as  it  is  evidently  a  primary  parasite,  it 
is  well  worth  noticing." 

The  Diapriidae  appear  to  conliue  their  activities  to  Dipterous  host*;,  but  so 
far  this  record  of  their  breeding  is  the  first  in  Australia. 

The  species  is  somewhat  \ariable  in  tlie  relative  length  of  the  pedicel  and 
first  flagellar  joint,  and  in  the  foveae  at  the  base  of  the  seutellum.  One 
female  has  a  consnieuous  thick  protuberance  at  the  apex  of  the  abdomen;  this 
process  is  very  p()ssil)ly  retractile,  which  would  account  for  its  absence  in  the 
other  specimens. 

The  types  and  cotypes  are  in  the  collections  of  Mr.  W.  W.  Frog-gatt ;  one 
cotype  i.s  in   the   author's  collection. 

Family  BELYTIDAE. 

This  family  does  not  seem  to  be  well  represented  in  Australia,  sixteen  spe- 
cies having  been  recorded.  The  species  described  below  differs  considerably  from 
all  the  Australian  forms,  falling  in  the  group  in  which  the  seutellum  is  more  or 
less  spiued  or  toothed,  and  containing  four  South  American  species  described  by 
Kieffer  (Ann.  Soc.  Sci.  Brussels,  xxxiii.,  1909)  in  four  different  genera,  Pros- 
oxylahls  Kieffer,  Monoxylabis  Kieffer,  Aci<Jopf<iliis  Kieffer,  and  Odontopsilus 
Kieffer,  of  which  the  first  alone  is  founded  on  a  female;  the  insect  described 
herewith  shows  some  diversity  in  the  venation  from  all  these,  but  the  autlior  does 
not  deem  it  advisable  to  propose  a  new  genus  for  its  reception. 

Prosoxylabis  pictipennis,  n.sp. 

?. — Lciigth,  3.5mm. 

Head,  thorax  (except  the  scutum),  abdominal  petiole,  and  the  legs  very  deep 
red;  scutum  and  body  of  abdomen  bright  chestnut;  the  first  eight  antennal  joints 
bright  reddish  yellow,  the  apical  seven  black. 

Head  uoi-mal,  subglobose,  the  antennal  in-ominence  \ery  distinct:  from  lateral 
aspect  the  frons  triangular,  covered  with  a  dense  fine  golden  pubescence;  eyes 
moderately  small,  ocelli  small,  close  together.  Antennae  15-jointed;  scape  slender, 
as  long  as  the  four  following  joints,  combined ;  pedicel  short,  a  little  longer  than 
wide;  funicle  joint  1  distinctly  longer,  twice  as  long  as  its  greatest  width;  2-6 
gradually  shortening.  6  as  wide  as  long;  club  7-jointed'  (the  first  club  joint  really 
forms  a  transition  between  the  funicle  and  club),  its  joints  1-6  somewhat  wider 
than  long,  the  apical  joint  twice  as  long  as  the  penultimate.  Thorax  about  twice 
as  long  as  its  gieatest  width;  pronotum  not  visible  from  above;  scutum  plainly 
wider  than  long,  covered  with  long  fine  golden  pubescence,  the  parapsidal  fur- 
rows delicate;  seutellum  on  either  side  of  basal  fovea  with  dense  golden  pub- 
escence, its  disc  with  scattered  pubescence;  basal  fovea  large,  subcircular,  divideil 
by  a  median  carina  that  continues  along  the  disc  to  terminate  in  a  blunt  tubercle 
or  tooth  ])osteriorly ;  postscutellum  and  median  seginent  with  a  dressed  sparse 
pubescence,  the  latter  long.  Forewings  long  and  broad,  extending  well  beyond 
apex  of  abdomen,  marginal  cilia  short ;  discal  cilia  very  dense  and  rather  coarse 
very  deeply  embrowned,  with  a  broad  subhyaline  band  across  the  wing  a  little 
before  the  apex,  a  small    subhyaline    area  just  before  the  marginal  vein,  and    a 

'The  two  other  known  enemies  of  sheep-maggot  flies  are  the  Chalcids  Nasonia  brez'i- 
coniis  Oirault  ami  Saunders,  and  Cha/cis  calliphorae  Froggatt. 


44tj  TWO    Nfc:\V     HYilKXOPTERA     OF     TJIK    >['PK1!FA-\IILY    PROCTOTRVPIDAK. 

similar  area  a  little  beyoud  the  marginal  vein,  both  against  the  costa ;  the  broiul 
band  has  its  proximal  margin  straight,  its  distal  margin  deeply  incised  at  tlic 
middle;  venation  obscure,  consisting  ot  a  submargiiial  vein  which  joins  the  costa 
at  nearly  half  wing  length,  a  short  linear  marginal  vein  continued  in  a  very 
oblique  stigmal  vein;  no  other  veins  visible.  Petiole  of  abdomen  long,  several 
times  as  long  as  wide,  and  half  as  long  as  body  of  abdomen,  carinate  laterally 
and  with  three  dorsal  carinae;  body  of  abdomen  broadly  ovate,  not  much  longer 
than  its  greatest  Avidth,  whollj'  smooth  and  shining,  the  second  segment  (first 
body  segment)  occup\'ing  four-fifths  of  the  suiface,  the  remaining  segments  very 
short  and  transverse.  Legs  nonnal,  the  femora  elavate,  the  tibiae  and  tarsi 
slender. 

Described  from  une  female  labelled  "In  moss.  Mt.  "Wellington,  Tasmania, 
20.2.1902." 

The  paucity  in  the  venation  is  possibly  due  to  the  cloudiness  of  the  wings. 

The  type  is  in  the  collection  of  'Sir.  "W.   W.    Froggatt. 


447 


CYANOGENESIS    IN    PLANTS. 

Part  IV. — The  Hyiuiocyaxic  Acid  of  Hetkrodkxdijox — A  Foddei;  Plaxt  of 

New  Socth  Wales. 

By  James  M.  PExniE,  D.Sc,  F.I.C.,  Linxean  Macle.\y  Fellow  of  the  Society 

IX  Biochemistry. 

(Fruiii   the  I'lii/niological  Laboratory  of  the   Univeraity  of  Is'ychiey.) 

Ileterodeiidroii  oleaefuliu  was  a  tree  little  kninvii  till  the  comiug-  of  the  recent 
great  drought  which  has  devastateil  su  large  an  area  of  the  stock  country. 

In  times  of  plenteous  rain  the  rich  grass-lands  of  the  Western  Plains  yield 
abundance  of  food  for  large  herds  of  sheep  and  cattle.  But  when  the  periodic 
recurrence  of  a  drought  approaches,  the  grass  gradually  disappears,  and  other 
fodder  plants  also  become  scarce.  It  is  then  that  food  for  stock  is  supplemented 
by  cutting  down  tlie  foliage  of  trees  and  mixing  the  latter  with  the  available 
food.  Then  the  time  soon  arrives  when  only  the  foliage  of  trees  is  left  to  feed 
the  starving  animals.  JIauy  of  these  trees  are  evergreen,  and  display  their 
young  fresh  leaves  in  a  tempting  way,  when  all  other  vegetation  has  dried  up 
and  disappeared.  Such  are  the  conditions  under  which  Nature  affords  us  op- 
portunities for  fee.ling  expei'iments  on  a  large  scale,  yet  we  find  the  periods  go 
past  and  the  results  and  observations  are  unrecorded. 

Some  of  these  plants,  the  foliage  of  which  was  used  in  this  way  on  the  large 
stations  by  the  Castlereagh  River  during  the  last  great  drought,  are  gi\en  in  the 
following  list  under  tlieii-  local  names.  They  are  all  evergreen  trees,  and  speci- 
mens have  been  sent  down  at  various  times  for  examination. 

Trees  Used  for  Feedixg  Stock  During  the  Drought  ix  the  West. 

1.  Rosebush — Heterodendron    oleaefolia   Desf.      (Fam.   Sapindaeeae.) 

2.  Whitewood — Atalaya  hemiylaucn   F.   v.  .M.   (Sapindaeeae). 

3.  Wild  Orange — Capparis  Mitchelli  Lindl.  (C'apparidaceae),  also  called  wild 
pomegranate   and  bumble. 

4.  Quinine-tree — Alstonia  constricta  F.  v.  M.    (Apoeynaceae)  . 

5.  Supple  Jack — Ventilago  viminalis  Hook.    (Rharanaceae). 

6.  Wilga — Geijera  parviflnra  Lindl.   (Rutaceae). 

7.  Leopard   AVood — Flindersia  mucidosa  F.  v.  M.   (Rutaceae). 

8.  Myall — Acacia  Cunninghami  Hook.    (Legiiminosae). 

9.  Beef  wood — Crevillea  striata  R.Br.  (Proteaceae). 

10.  Needlebush — lluhea  leucoptera  R.Br.   (Proteaceae). 

11.  Quandona'  or  native  peach — Fusanus  actimiiiaturi  R.Br.      (Santalaccae). 

12.  Sandalwciod — Fiisanns  persicarius  TP.  v.  M.   ( Santalaeeae). 

13.  Belar — Casuariiia   gluuca  Sieb.    (Casuarinae). 

14.  Kurrajong — B rachy chiton  populneus  R.Br.    (Sterculeaceae). 

15.  Box  (Eucalyptus  spp.),  Pine,  Honeysuckle  creeper. 

The  foliage  of  all  the  aliove  trees  formed  good  food  for  sheep  and  cattle,  and 
the   animals  fattened  on    it.     While   on  certain   stations   sheep  would    not  eat  the 


44S  CVAXOGEXESIS    IX    PLANTS, 

leaves  of  some  particular  tree,  such  as  Sandalwood  and  Eucalyptus,  on  a  ueigb- 
bouring-  station  tliey  were  fed  entirely  on  it. 

It  was  observed  by  one  station-owner  that  Supple  Jack  gave  the  best  results, 
although  in  general  the  mixed  foliage  was  most  satisfactory  and  Ijeneticial  to  the 
cattle. 

The  Wild  Orange  was  eaten  by  sheep  and  cattle  with  great  relish:  both  the 
leaves  and  stems  as  thick  as  a  man's  finger  were  eaten  with  no  ill  effects. 

The  foliage  of  some  trees,  such  as  the  Rosebush,  Wild  Orange,  Supple  Jack 
and  Wilga  was  eaten  in  large  quantities,  while  small  quantities  of  other  trees 
like  the  Myalls  satisfied  the  cattle.  The  feeding  of  cattle  and  sheep  with  the 
Rosebush  will  be  described  separately. 

Heterodendron,  the  Rosebush  of  the  Castlereagh,  is  endemic  in  Australia,  and 
grows  plentifully  in  the  Western  and  Northern  Interior  of  New  South  Wales, 
and  also  in  the  other  States.  There  are  only  two  species,  11.  oleaefolia  and  H. 
diversifolia,  the  latter  being  more  confined  to  the  nurtheni  areas  and  Queensland. 

H.  oleaefolia  is  a  large  shrub  in  some  districts,  while  in  others  it  gi-ows  as  a 
tree  to  a  lieight  of  40  feet.  It  is  known  by  many  vernacular  names,  according 
to  the  locality,  and  samples  bearing  some  of  the  following-  names  have  been  re- 
ceived by  the  writer: — Whitewood  (Dubbo),  Rosewood  (Coonamble),  Western 
Rosewood,  Rosebush  ( Coonamble),  Emubush.  Cabbagebush  (Broken  HiU),  Boon- 
ery  tree  (Narrabri).  Dogwood,  Ironwood  (Xymagee).  Bluebnsh  (Bourke  to 
Cobar),  Bullock  liusli  (Broken  Hill).  This  serves  as  a  good  example  of  the  in- 
adecpiacy  of  common  names  for  plants;  but  the  danger  lies,  not  only  in  the  num- 
ber of  such  names,  but  in  the  fact  that  the  same  vernacular  name  is  applied,  in 
another  locality,  to  some  quite  different  plant,  for  example,  Whitewood,  as  in 
the  two  list*.  Nor  do  these  local  names  refer  in  a  single  case  to  the  well-known 
trees  of  the  same  name  growing  in  older  countries;  for  example,  the  ^^'Mltewood 
of  Nortli  America,  t'le  Leopard  wood  and  the  Beefwood  of  South  American  forests, 
and  the  Indian  Rosewood  are  quite  ditt'ercut  trees. 

K'ECOKD   or    SaXJCK-FEEDlXG  WITH    RO.SEBUSII. 

Hetenidriuhoii  has  been  described  by  a  number  of  writers  as  a  goiid  cattle 
fodder,  and  by  one  as  "'the  best  fodder-tree  of  the  West."  Notwithstanding 
these  statements  by  local  authorities  and  others,  a  considerable  mortality  among 
"both  sheep  and  cattle  occurred  in  1915  on  stations  near  the  Castlereagh  River. 
At  Enfield.  400  sheep  died  in  a  single  niglit  after  eating  the  fresh  leaves  of  this 
plant.  The  latter  was  therefore  suspected  and  specimens  were  sent  to  the  writer 
for  examination. 

In  the  beginning  of  1918,  when  the  last  great  drought  commenced,  tlie  mixed 
herbage  was  used  with  apparently  no  bad  results.  Gradually,  as  time  went  on, 
the  trees  other  than  Roselnisli  became  very  scarce,  and  at  last  on  certain  stations 
owners  were  left  with  no  alternative  but  to  use  Rosebush  alone.  In  1919,  on 
Nelia  Station  90  sheep  died;  on  Loyola  station  4  sheep  died,  and  3  cows,  which 
had  eaten  only  a  little  of  the  leaves,  were  very  sick,  but  recovered.  At  Wyreeuui 
station  a  single  branch  of  Rosebush  was  eut  and  fed  to  sheep,  and  C  died.  En- 
field station  kist  9  ))ullocks,  and  Oakstand  station  a  number  of  sheep  tlirough  the 
same  cause.  In  tlic  latter  instance  the  leaves  were  cut  in  the  evening,  .niul  next 
morning  3  shec)i  weiv  found  lying  down  and  l)rentlung  heavily.  Their  e.ai-s  were 
cut,  but  no  Idood  flowed.  Two  died  during  the  morning,  and  tlie  third  was 
treated  by  artificial  rcsjiiratitm,  and  by  putting  salt  in  its  mouth.  It  recovered  a 
little,  and    after  a   few  hours    got  up  and  walked  about.     Tlie    next    morning    it 


Br  JAMES  ir.  PETRIE.  "1-19 

was  seen  tu  <lrag-  the  liind  legs  slightly  but  otherwise  it  was  apparently-  ^\-ell.  It 
died  two  days  afterwards.  There  was  no  other  food  available  Init  the  fresh  leaves 
of  Heterodendron. 

On  the  same  station,  in  1920,  when  the  drought  was  very  severe,  and  the 
stock  were  being-  fed  almost  entirely  on  this  one  plant,  the  animals  died  at  the 
rate  of  one  or  two  each  day.  In  June,  on  Locharino  station,  a  Rosebush  was  cut 
m  the  afternoon  for  15  cattle,  and  towards  evening-  the  whole  1.5  were  ill.  They 
were  treated  for  some  hours  with  warm  water  and  salt,  and  in  a  few  days  1-2  had 
recovered.     In  every  case  the  animals  showed  frothing  at  the  nose  and  mouth. 

The  record  from  Narrabri  district  may  also  be  given.  The  plant  is  known 
here  as  the  "Boonery  tree,"  and  is  much  used  for  feeding-  stock  in  times  of 
drought.  It  is  considered  by  the  stockmen  to  be  a  good  edible  shrub,  and  the 
animals  are  said  to  be  very  fond  of  it.  The  Stock  Inspector  informed  the  writer, 
however,  that  frei|uently  numbers  of  sheep  died  suddenly  when  first  fed  on  the 
leaves,  more  especially  if  rain  fell  at  the  same  time. 

On  one  cattle  station  in  this  district,  in  1919.  a  stock-owner  lost  G  cattle. 
They  died  suddenly,  succumbing  without  a  struggle.  On  another  station  in  the 
same  locality,  a  number  of  cattle  died  suddenly.  They  were  seen  to  eat  the 
suckers,  or  young-  growth  of  the  Boonery  trees,  which  had  been  topped  for 
cattle  food  during-  the  previous  year. 

Prelimixaet  Te.sts. 

In  the  first  samples  which  were  tested  it  was  proved  that  no  poisonous  alka- 
loid or  other  group  of  well-known  active  principles  w'as  present.  However,  on 
allowing  the  crushed  leaves  to  macerate  with  water  for  a  few  hours,  free  hydro- 
cyanic acid  -was  detected  in  the  solution.  The  presence  of  hydrocyanic  acid  was 
confirmed  by  the  almost  iimnediate  change  of  colour  of  the  sodium  picrate  test- 
paper,  and  by  the  formation  of  prussian  blue.  The  powerful  reaction  obtained 
by  testing-  quite  a  small  quantity,  even  a  single  leaf,  was  sufficient  to  indicate 
the  presence  of  a  considerable  amount  of  some  poisonous  eyauogeuetic  compound. 

In  the  list  of  trees  whose  foliage  was  used  for  feeding  stock,  two  only  -were 
found  to  be  cyanogenetic — i.e.,  to  yield  hydrocyanic  acid  when  treated  in  the 
manner  described, — namely,  the  Rosebush  and  Wild  Orange.  In  the  latter,  Cap- 
paris  Mitchell!,  we  have  the  first  record  of  a  cyanogenetic  plant  in  the  family 
Capparidaceae. 

Heterodendron  oleaefolia. — Samples  were  received  from  the  Stock  Inspectors 
at  various  times  and  also  from  a  number  of  station-owners.  They  were  tested 
in  the  following  months,  during  the  period  1915  to  1020. 

January,  Gulargambone. 
«  February,  Narrabri  district. 

May,  Coonamble  district, 
.lune,   Coonamble  district. 
November,  Coonamble  district. 
December,   Gulargambone. 
All  these  sam]iles  were  very  strongly  cyanogenetic. 

That  the  hydrocyanic  acid  was  involved  in  the  constitution  of  some  cyano- 
genetic glucoside  was  shown  by  its  behaviour  towards  enzymes. 

fl)  A  small  quantity  of  the  leaf-powder  was  placed  in  two  bottles  with  strips 
of  sodium  picrate  paper  suspended  from  the  corks:  (ol  to  one  was  added  a  few 
drops  of  chloroform,  and  (b)  the  other  was  left  as  a  control.  The  result  was 
hvdrocvanic  acid  evolved  from  («)    onlv. 


450  c  \  A.\(MiK.\KSIS    IN     PLANTS, 

(2)  The  plant -powiler,  with  suffieient  water  to  cover,  was  phu-cd  iu  two  test- 
tubes.  («)  was  kept  at  40°  C.  for  1  liour;  {h)  was  boiled  for  5  minutes  and  also 
kept  at  40°  for  1  hour,  the  test  i>aper  used  in  eaeh.  The  result  showed  in  (a)  a 
colour  cliange  to  deep  red  within  a  minute,  and  in  (h)  no  colour  reaction  after  "24 
hours,  (c).  To  the  tube  ib)  was  then  added  a  small  speck  of  emulsin  powder 
prepared  from  sweet  almonds,  and  the  mass  again  digested  at  40°  (".  After  a 
few  minutes  the  test-paper  showed  a  deep  red  colour. 

These  experiments  were  done  also  witli  aqueous  extracts  from  the  plant,  tlie 
boiled  solutions  yielding  no  hydrocyanic  acid  till  emulsin  was  added. 

The  plant  therefore  contains  a  g-lucoside  and  an  enzyme,  the  latter  being  al)le 
to  decompose  the  glucpside  with  liberation  of  hydrocyanic  acid,  umler  conditions 
favouring  enzyme  action.  The  glncoside  is  also  decomposed  by  the  emulsin  of 
alniduds. 

CVAXOGKXKTIC    Pr.AXTS     OF    THE    b'AillLY     SAPIXDACEAK. 

In  the  chemical  literature  of  the  cyanogenesis  in  jdants  there  already  exist- 
the  records  of  six  i^lants  of  the  family  Sapiiidacrae  in  which  hydrocyanic  acid  has 
been  obtained.     These  are: — 

Alectryon  excelsum  Gaertn..  a  Xcw  Zealand  tree  (Greshoff). 

Alectryon  tomentoaus    b'adlk.,  a   native    Xcw    South   Wales    tree    (Smith   and 
Whit«). 

Alectryon    coriaceiis    Hadlk.,    ibid. 

Cupania  sp^j.   (Greshoff)  . 

Schleiehera  trijttga  Willd.,  an  East  Indian  plant. 

Ungnadia  speeinsa  Endl.,  a  Mexico  and  Texas  tree  (Cheel  and  Penfold). 
Heterodendron  oleaefolia  added  to  this  list  makes  the  seventh  cyanogenetic   plant 
of  the  Sapindaceue. 

The  only  other  existing  species,  B.  diverfifolia,  has  been  tested  by  the  writer 
in  specimens  from  New  South  Wales  and  Queensland,  but  has  always  u-iven  nega- 
tixe  results,  showing  the  absence  of  any  cyanogenetic  compound. 

ESTIIIATIOX    OF    THE    HtdROCYAXIC    ACID. 

Many  diflieulties  were  met  with  in  attemjiting  to  determine  the  true  amount 
of  hydrocyanic  acid  which  this  [ihiiit  is  capable  of  evolving  under  special  cir- 
cumstances. 

The  enzymes  characteristic  of  the  various  cyanogenetic  plants  are  known  to 
act  differently  in  most  cases,  especially  as  to  their  relative  \elocities  and  the 
position  of  the  equilibrium  point.  These  jdants  also  contain  substances  which 
act  as  inhil)iting  factors  during  the  hydrolysis  of  the  glucoside.  that  is,  which 
oppose  its  decomposition.  There  are  likewise  present  certain  bodies  whose  in- 
fluence tends  to  recombine  the  ])roducts  of  hydrolysis  and  thus  decrease  the 
amount  of  hydrocyanic  acid  available  for  estimation. 

When  the  leaves  of  fresh  i)lants  are  macerated  in  water,  there  is  no  doubt 
that  their  protoplasm  continues  its  ])hysiological  function  for  some  time,  and 
utilises  part  of  the  liberated  hydrocyanic  acid  in  the  synthetic  processes  of  meta- 
bolism. Although  in  a  few  cases  it  has  l)een  shown  that  the  same  glucoside 
occui-s  in  certain  widely  different  ])lants,  such  as  phaseolunatin  in  Beans  and 
Flax  seeds,  gynocardin  iu  Panfjium-  edide  and  Ofiiiocardia  nditnilu.  the  great 
majority  of  the  cyanogenetic  ))lants  probably  contain  different  glucosides.  In 
artificial  hydrolysis  such  as  with  mineral  acids,  etc..  these  glucosides  behave  dif- 
ferentlv  towards  the  hvdrolvsiiig  agent. 


BY  JA3IES  jr.  PETRIE. 


451 


These  few  statements,  to  whieli  otliers  could  be  added,  will  sul'fiee  to  show 
that  no  single  stereotyped  method  can  be  used  for  all  eyanogenetic  plants  in  the 
determination  of  their  hydrocyanic  acid.  Results  of  some  kind  will  be  obtained, 
but  unless  that  particular  method  is  discovered  which  is  entirely  suited  to  the 
plant  under  investigation,  the  results  w-ill  be  remote  from  the  truth.  These  dilfi- 
culties  can  be  surmounted  only  by  conducting  extended  series  of  experiments  to 
determine  the  value  of  these  various  factors,  and  their  influence  on  tlie  amount 
of  hydrocyanic  acid  obtained.  Details  of  such  experiments  on  Heterodeiidron 
form  the  subject  matter  of  this  paper. 

(JUAXTITATIVE     ESTIHATIONS. 

The  Material  Investigated. — For  the  purpose  of  these  experiments  a  c|nantity 
of  the  plant  was  obtained  from  stations  on  the  Castlereagh. 

Sample  i.  was  collected  in  December,  1915,  near  Gulargambone  town,  in  a 
paddock  where  cattle  were  lying  dead  or  dying.     It  was  named  •'Whitewood." 

Sample  ii.  was  collected  in  June  of  1917,  near  Coonamble,  under  the  name 
of  Rosewood.  It  was  described  as  a  valuable  fodder  plant  when  mature,  but  con- 
sidered very  poisonous  to  stock  when  in  the  state  of  young  and  succulent  growth. 

Sample  iii.  was  obtained  from  Coonamble  in  November,  1917.  under  the 
name   of  Rosebush. 

The  samples  ii.  and  iii.  may  tlierefore  be  looked  upon  as  representing  the 
winter  and  summer  growths  of  the  same  year,  just  before  the  commencement  of 
the  drought. 

Sample  iv.  was  obtained  from  Oakstand  Station,  near  Coonamble.  in  Febru- 
ary, 1920,  when  the  drought  was  very  severe. 

The  writer  desires  to  express  his  indebtedness  and  thanks  to  !Mr.  Symons, 
Chief  Inspector  of  Stock,  and  to  Mr.  C.  S.  Campbell,  of  Oakstand  Station,  for 
the  supply  of  plants   for  this  investigation. 

The  General  Method. — The  jdant  material  was  mixed  with  water  and  the 
glucoside  decomposed  by  various  means.  The  hydrocyanic  acid  which  was  li))er- 
ated  was  then  distilled  by  boiling  in  a  steam  or  air  cun-ent  into  sodium  hydroxide 
solution.  This  alkaline  solution  was  evaporated  in  a  vacuum  still  at  a  tempera- 
ture below  70°  C.  to  about  1  ec.  volume.  The  latter  was  converted  into  prussian 
blue,  and  the  tints  observed  in  a  Dubosc(|  colorimeter,  were  compared  with  stan- 
dard Prussian  blues  prepared  from  solutions  of  known  strength  iif  potassium 
cyanide. 

In  some  cases  the  alkaline  solution  of  the  distillate  was  titrated  with  centi- 
normal  silver  nitrate. 

The  processes  by  which  the  glucosiile  may  be  hydrolysed  and  the  hydrocyanic 
acid  set  free  are:— • 

frt)   Boiling  with  water. 

{b)   Boiling  with  mineral  acids    (hydroddoric  and  sulphuric). 

(f)  Maceration  with  water  at  40°  C.  (autolysis). 

((?)   Maceration  with  emulsin  of  sweet  almonds. 
Tliese  processes  have  yielded  widely  differing  results  when  applied  to  the  diffei'ent 
eyanogenetic   plants,   and   investigators  have   discussed  them  in   detail,  with   refer- 
ence to  some  of  the  well-known  fodderplants.  such  as  sorghum. 

A.     Direct  distillation   in    a  current  of  steam. 

The  sample  of  ]iowdered  leaves  was  treated  rapidly  in  the  distillation  flask 
with  250  CCS.  of  boiling  water  in  order  to  destroy  the  enzyme.     It  was  then  boiled 


45-J 


CYANOGENESIS   IX    PLANTS, 


in  a  ciUTent  of  st'am  and  the  distillate  received  in  a  solution  of  sodium  hydrox- 
ide. After  distilling  for  one  hour,  the  contents  of  the  flask  were  acidified  to  5  % 
with  sulphuric  acid,  and  the  distillation  continued.  In  some  cases  the  enzj-me  was 
destroyed  by  treating  the  leaves  directly  with  boiling  5  ':''c  sulphuric  acid  and 
immediate  distillation. 

Besitlts. — The   hydrocyanic  acid    obtained  is    expressed    as    nulli'.;ranis    in   100 
gTams  of  iilant-material  dried  at  100°  C. 

Tablk  a. 

/h'lii'/  tHs/i//afioii  of  /eai'e.s. 


Exp.        Time. 


Particular  treatment. 


HCX. 


Sample  I. 

1 

1st    hr 

containing; 

2nil    .. 

(io   niiJS.    'r 

:ir(l     .. 

HON. 

Distilled   with  water  alone  in  steam  cur. 
,,  with  .5   Or    sulphuric  iicid 

Total  in  H   hrs.,   unfiuished- 


10 


hr. 


Distilled  with  water  alone  in  steam 
with  5   %   sulphuric  acid 


Total  in  41  hrs.,  iinfinished- 


none 
none 
0-'5 

o-r> 

30 

•to 


hr. 


Distilled  with  water  alone  without  steam 
with  .">   %   sulphuric  acirl 


none 
2 

2 
2 
2 

none 


Total  in  5  hrs.,  finished- 


8 


Added  boiliny:  '>   Or    sulphuric,   distilled 
in  current  of  .-iteam 


2 

Total  in  2  hrs. 

tinished — 

J 
none 

3 

5 

I    hr. 

1      ,. 
1      ,. 
1      .. 

Added  boiling  .5  %  hydrochloric, 
in  rapid  aiv-current 

distilled 

S 
1 
I 
none 

Total  in  4  hrs.,  finished- 


13 


Sample  II. 

cc.ntaining 

328  m!,'s.  f^ 

HCN. 


6  ;  1  hr. 
1  .. 
1      ,, 


1    hi 


Distilled  with   water  alone  in  air-current 


.\dded  boilinj;  li   '/r   sulphuric,   distilled 
in  air-current 


Total  in  3  Ins..   unfinished 


BY  JAlIliS   ir.   PETItlK. 


453 


Deductions  from  Table  A. —  (1).  The  glucosidc  in  this  plant  is  not  decom- 
pused  by  lioiliug  with  water.  In  most  cases  no  hydrocyanic  acid  was  obtained, 
and  in  some  a  verv  small  amount  was  distilled  over.  The  maximum  quantity 
thus  obtained  was  2  rags.,  or  about  3  %  of  the  total  acid,  and  was  pro})al)ly  the 
result  of  the  enzyr.ie  acting  for  a  short  interval  Ix^lnre  its  complete  destruction, 
that  is,  before  the  wliole  mass  could  be  raised  to  the  temperature  of  the  boiling 
water. 

(2).  Boiling  with  dilute  acids  likewise  results  in  very  incomplete  decom- 
position. Two  kin  Is  of  results  are  apparent:  in  one  the  hydrocyanic  acid  slowly 
increases  per  hour  (\os.  1,  2  and  7),  in  the  other  the  evolution  comes  to  an  end 
in  the  third  or  fourth  hour  of  boiling  (Xos.  3,  4  and  .5).  Hydrochloric  acid  pro- 
duces more  than  sul]ihuric  acid. 

B.     Aut.oh/sis,  or  Macer(itio)i  nf  the  plcwt  in  icater. 

Here  the  glucoside  comes  in  contact  with  its  own  enzyme,  and  is  dccumjiosed 
with  liberation  of  hydrocyanic  acid.  Into  a  distillation  flask  fitted  with  its  cork 
and  tubes  were  placed  5 — 50  gms.  of  leaves  with  500  ecs.  of  water.  This  was  kept 
in  an  iiu'ubator  at  40°  C.  for  varying  periods,  then  distilled  with  and  witliout 
5  %  sulphuric  acid 

Table  B. 


Aiiiofysis  of  leaves. 
Time  of 
No.       maceration.  Particular  treatment. 


HCN. 

mgs.  % 


Sample  I. 

8 

1 

hr. 

then  distilled  with  sulphuric 

acid 

12 

containing 

9 

3 

,,                               ,, 

2.5 

(10  mgs.  % 

10 

IK 

,  >                               ,, 

33 

HCN. 

11 

1 

day 

, ,                               , , 

4,5 

12 

1 

^. 

with  hydrochloric  acid 

.51 

13 

3 

with  sulphuric 

acid 

40 

14 

5 

,^ 

,, 

40 

1-^ 

8 

" 

,, 

17 

Sample  II. 

1(! 

1 

day 

then  distilled  with  water 

328  mgs.  % 

alone  in   air-current 

July  1917 

120 

HCN. 

17 

1 

,, 

Aug.     ,, 

111 

18 

1 

•• 

•• 

•Oct.      ,, 

111 

Sample  III. 

19 

1 

day 

then  as  in  Sample  ii. 

Nov.  1917 

109 

307  mgs.  % 

20 

1 

,, 

Dec.      ,, 

113 

HCN. 

21 

1 

,, 

Jan.    1918   . 

111 

22 

1 

>• 

Oct.       ,, 

121 

Sample  IV. 

23 

1 

day 

then  as  in  Sample  ii. 

38 

50  rags.'  % 

Deductions  from  Table  B. —  (1).  When  the  leaves  are  allowed  to  stand  at  an 
optimum  temperature,  which  in  the  case  of  most  cyanogenetic  enzymes  is  about 
40°  C,  hydrocyanic  acid  is  set  free  in  amounts  much  greater  than  were  obtained 
with  acid  hydrolysis 

(2).  With  regard  to  the  time  of  maceration,  the  maximum  yield,  as  shown  in 
Nos.  8-15,  was  that  obtained  for  1  day:  45  mgs.  %  when  distilled  with  sulphuric, 
and  51  rag's.  %  when  distilled  with  hydrochloric  acid. 

(3).  Leaves  of  sample  ii.  were  dried  and  jiowdered  at  the  beginning,  and  the 
powder  left  in  an  o])pn  tray.     "When  taken  for  expci'lments  16-18,  it  is  shown  that 


454 


CTAXOdEXKSIS    IX    PLAXTS, 


the  yield  is  practically  the  same  tVom  July  to  October.  Leaves  of  sample  iii. 
were  powdered  separately  for  each  expei-iment,  and  here  again  the  yield  is  almost 
constant  during  the  entire  period  of  one  year. 

(4.)  Sample  ii.,  collected  in  midwinter,  yielded  the  same  amount  of  liydm- 
cyanic  acid  as  the  sample  iii.,  collected  in  the  summer,  in  the  same  locality. 

C.     Auloli/sis  with  added  enzyme. 

The  object  of  these  experiments  was  to  determine  whether  there  existed  in 
the  plant  sufficient  enzyme  for  the  complete  hydrolysis  of  its  giucoside.  It  has 
been  stated  already  that  when  the  plant-enzyme  was  destroyed  by  boiling  water, 
the  giucoside  could  still  be  hydrolysed  by  adding  the  enzyme  prepai-ed  from  sweet 
almonds.     In  these  experiments  "emulsin"  was  added  simply  as  grated  almonds. 

The  method  was  the  same  as  in  the  previous  series. — The  leaf-powder  with  the 
emulsin  added  was  macerated  with  water  in  an  incubator  at  40°  C.  for  1  day, 
then  distilled  by  boiling  in  a  cun-ent  of  air. 

Throughout  series  B  and  C,  the  whole  of  the  liberated  hydi-ocyanic  acid  -was 
obtained  in  li  hour's  distillation. 


Table  C. 
Aii/olrsis  -icitlt  euiii/siii. 


HCN. 


No. 

Pai-tiouliir  tri'^itmcnt. 

mgs.  % 

Sample  1. 

11 

Control— autolysed  without  emulsin 

45 

24 

10  gms.  leaves  autolysed  with  10  gms.  emulsin 

fiO 

Sample  II. 

16 

Control — autolysed  xvithoitt  emulsin 

120 

25 

5  gms.  leaves  autolysed  with    2  gnis.  euuilsin 

1!57 

2H 

5 

2(i2 

27 

10 

328 

Sample  III. 

19 

Control— autolysed  -a-illiout  emulsin 

109 

28 

5  !^ms.  leaves  autolyseil  with    .">  ^ins.   euuilsin 

29-t 

29 

5                                    ,.                      .5             ,, 

297 

30 

10                                    ,.                      5 

30(1 

31 

10                                      .,                     10 

307 

32 

10                                      ,,                     15 

297 

33 

10                                      ,,                     20 

302 

Sample  l.V. 

23 

Control — ci'il/ioiit  emulsin,  autolysed  1  day 

38 

34 

10  gnis.  leaves  autolysed  with  10  gnis.  emulsin 

50 

Deductions  from  'I'able  C. —  (1),  It  is  seen  at  once,  from  the  greatly  inci'Ciised 
yield  of  hydrocyanic  acid  in  all  samples,  that  tlio  jilant  was  deficient  in  its 
enzyme. 

(2.)  The  maximum  amount  was  ol>tained  by  addition  of  30  gms.  of  enmlsin, 
wliidi  liberated  tlii'  very  large  amount  of  hydrocyanic  acid  (No.  27)  coiTesponding 
to  0.328  %  of  the  leaves.  Therefore  by  addition  of  emulsin  during  the  nmcera- 
tion  of  the  leaves  the  yield  of  hydrocyanic  acid  was  increased  alnuist  tlireefold  in 
samples  ii.  and  iii. 

(3) .  The  amount  nt  enzyme  is  important  also.  A  snudl  quantity  was  not 
able  to  liydrolyse  unlimited  amounts  of  giucoside,  for  in  the  case  of  sample  ii., 
Nos.   If)  and   27,  the  lilicraticm  nt  ttic  addHinnal  9  mgs.  nl'  hvdrocvanic  acid  fronj 


BV  JAJIES    jr.    I'KTIUE.  455 

5   gius.    of  leaves  re(iiurt'il    the    enzyme  from  10  giiis.  of   aliiudul    pnwiler.        'fhe 
ratio  of  enzyme  to  ghieoside  was  not  eonstant. 

D.     On  the  existence  of  free   liijilnici/aiiic  acid  in   jilaiits. 

Xumeious  attenn^ts  have  been  made  in  tlie  past  by  various  investigators  to 
determine  what  they  assumed  to  be  the  uncombiued  portion  of  the  hydrocyanic 
acid  in  the  planis.  In  most  of  these  the  methods  used  have  been  shown  to  be 
faultj-.  When  boiling  water  or  dilute  acid  is  poured  on  a  mass  of  leaves  in  a 
flask  the  glucoside  and  enzyme,  both  being  soluble,  gre  brought  into  contact  with 
one  another,  and  some  portion  of  the  mass  will  remain  at  a  temperature  sulfi- 
ciently  low  for  enzyme  action  during  at  least  a  few  seconds.  In  this  initial  period 
enzymes  are  known  to  be  exceedingly  active,  and  so  it  happens  that  vmless  special 
precautions  are  taken  some  hydrocyanic  acid  will  l)e  liberated  in  most  cases. 
Since  it  is  so  difficult  to  destroy  tlie  enzyme  in  plant  leaves  in  this  manner, 
other  substances  have  been  tried  \\liose  presence  will  prevent  enzyme  action. 
The  chief  of  these  is  tartaric  acid . 

Method. — Leaves  were  powdered,  water  with  a  little  tartaric  acid  added,  and 
the  llask  jilaced  in  the  incubator,  at  40°  C,  for  1  day.  In  some,  the  leaves  were 
allowed  to  fall  from  the  gTinding  mill  into  the  tartaric  acid  solution,  in  others  the 
intact  leaves  were  steeped  in  the  solution  for  5  minutes,  tlien  jint  through  the 
mill  in  presence  of  excess  of  solution,  and  the  powder  received  also  iu  tlie  solu- 
tion,    ^laceration  and  distillation  followed  as  previously  described. 

Table   D. 

.-ht/o/vsis  ill  />i-fse/icc'  of  iaiiarir  ariif. 

HCN 
No.  Particular  treatment.  uigs.  % 


Sam]ilr   11. 


16 
.3,5 
.36 


Saiui.lH  III.  '     37 


Control  -ivitlioiit  tartaric  acid  12o 

Macerated  in  1    %    soln.   of  tartaric  acid  4(1 

5   %  ..  I  10 


Leaves  steeped  and  ground  in  o   %   tartaric  acid 
soln.,   distilled  direct  for  2  hrs. 


Deductions  from  Table  D. — The  results  given  in  the  Table  show  that  although 
the  amount  of  hydrocyanic  acid  obtained  is  considerably  reduced  (Nos.  35,  36) 
when  maceration  takes  place  in  presence  of  tartaric  acid,  yet  this  has  not  pre- 
vented a  certain  degree  of  decomposition  from  taking  place.  It  is  only  when  tlie 
leaves  are  kept  in  presence  of  tartaric  acid  during  the  whole  of  the  crushing  and 
bruising  of  their  tissues  that  enzyme  action  is  entirely  pi-evented  (No.  37)  .  Any 
free,  uncomljined  hydrocyanic  acid,  existing  in  the  plant  as  such,  would  have 
distilled  over  from  the  tartaric  acid  solutions. 

Therefore  no  uncombined  hydrocyanic  acid  exists  in  the  leaves  of  Hetern- 
(leiidroii. 

E.      The  influence  of  chloroform  on  antoh/sis. 

In  the  preliminary  testing  of  a  plant  for  hydrocyanic  acid  the  plasmolysis  of 
the  tissues  is  iisually  brought  about  by  chloroform  vapour.  Chloroform  is  also 
often  used  as  a  preservative  of  plants  and  their  extracts  against  the  formation  of 
moulds.     Plants  or    extracts    on  which   moulds    have  been    allowed    to    grow    are 


456  CYAXOOEXKSIS    IN"    PLAXTS, 

valueless  for  these  investigations,  as  it  is  known  that  fungi  can  simulate  many 
enzymes  in  their  action.  For  this  reason  ehlorofonn  is  much  used  in  the  bio- 
ohemical,  laboratory. 

To  test  wliether  chloroform  exerted  any  influence  on  the  action  of  the  enzyme 
during  these  autolysis  experiments  a  number  of  trials  were  made.  To  the  tiask 
containing  the  plant-]iowder  was  added  1  cc.  of  chloroform  dissdlvcd  in  500  ccs. 
of  water.      (The  solubility  of  chloroform  is  1  in  200.) 

Table  E. 

Autolysis  ill  presence  of  ehlorofonn. 

HON 
Xo.  Particular  treatment.  mgs.  fr 

Sample  II.         Ifi  Control — macerated  ivithoiit  chloroform  1  day     '       120 

38  ^Macerated  with  chloi-oform  n-2   '!r    solutimi         I      ,,  "-' 

39  .,  .,  4     ..  79 


The  results  of  a  number  of  experiments  were,  in  general,  the  same  as  those 
lepresented  in  Table  E.  The  yield  of  hydrocyanic  acid  was  considerably  decreased 
by  the  addition  of  1  cc.  of  chloroform  during  the  autolysis. 

F.     Autolysis    of  the  extracted  glucosicle. 

In  some  plants  which  have  been  investigated,  comjilcx  factors  have  been  re- 
cogtiised  whicli  greatly  interfei'e  with  the  proper  action  of  the  enzyme.  The  ditfi- 
eulty  has  been  frequently  overcome  by  first  extractiEg  the  glucoside  with  water 
(ir  alcohol  in  a  Soxhlet  extractor. 

In  the-se  experiments  the  leaves  were  first  treated  ra|iidly  with  boiling  alcohol 
to  destrov  the  enzyme,  and  then  extracted  in  a  Soxhlet  with  ah-nhol.  Aftei-  dis- 
tilling off  the  solvent  the  residue  left  was: — 

In  No.  40  mixed  with  water  and  autolysed  with  emulsin. 

In  No.  41  again  extracted  with  water  in  Soxhlet,  and  the  solution  autolysfd 
with  5  gms.  of  emulsin  for  1  day. 

Table  K. 

Aiiiolysis  after  extraction  of  tlie  ,s:lucoside. 

HCX 
N '.  Particular  treatment.  mgs.  % 


Sain|il''  III.        :ii'     '         Control — plant  autolysed  with  emulsin  for  1   ilay  300 

li>  Extracted  residui'  autolysed  with  emulsin  27-"> 

41  Aqueous  solution  of  extracted  residue  autolyspcl   with 

emulsiu  for  1  <lav  27 1 


Besnlt. — In  the  case  of  Iletemcletidron  the  yield  is  not  increa.sed  by  previous 
extraction  of  the  ';iucoside  and  hydrolysis  of  its  solution. 

Discussion  ok  ■vnv.  Results. 

Table  A.^The  direct  distillation  of  the  leaves  with  water  alone  yields  some- 
times a  trace  of  hydrocyanic  acid  and  sometimes  mme.  Until  recently,  any  hydro- 
cyanic acid  obtained  in  this  numner  wa.s   considered  to  exist   in   the   fi'ee   state  in 


BV  JAMES    -U.    I'ETRIE. 


457 


the  plant,  t'yiiodon  iHcompletus  (blue  touoli  grass),  when  its  enzyme  was  de- 
stroyed by  pouring  on  boiling  water,  and  then  distilled,  yielded  35  %  of  its 
hydrocyanic  acid,  although  it  was  found  subsequently  that  no  free  hydrocyanic 
acid  existed  in  this  grass.  Where  plants  were  distilled,  starting  with  cold  water, 
it  has  frequently  been  found  that  the  whole  of  the  hydrocyanic  acid  was  evolved 
within  half  an  hour,  although  the  enzjTne  must  have  been  destroyed  at  an  early 
stage . 

That  the  hydrocyanic  acid  obtained  iu  this  way  is  not  free  acid  in  the  plant 
tissues  was  proved  later  iu  Table  D.  The  work  of  numerous  investigators  has 
shown  that  enzyme  action  is  very  powerful  during  the  tii-st  few  seconds,  and  it 
is  on  this  account  almost  impossible  to  destroy  instantly  the  enzyme  of  leaves 
by  pouring  ou  boiling  water.  As  the  temperature  of  the  mass  rises  the  activity 
of  the  enzyme  is  lapidly  increased,  and  this  increased  activity  acts  in  opposi- 
tion to  the  destruction  of  the  enzyme,  until  the  latter  by  rise  of  temperature 
overpowers  it.  At  high  temperatures,  therefore,  one  may  obsei-ve  a  great  initial 
velocity  of  enzyme  action,  and  this,  after  a  few  seconds  or  minutes,  comes  to  an 
end.  It  is  generally  found  that  enzyme  action  is  very  incomplete  at  higher 
temperatures.  Dr.  Treub,  late  Director  of  the  Gardens  of  Buitenzorg,  has 
stated  that  this  very  rapid  decomposition  of  the  glucoside  was  of  great  physio- 
logical importance,  as  at  a  sudden  demand  hydrocyanic  acid  could  be  liberated 
and  immediately  utilised  in  the  metabolism  of  the  leaves. 

Direct  distillation  with  acid  gave  varying  figiires,  the  evolution  of  hydro- 
cyanic acid  ranging  from  5  to  25  %  of  the  possiljle  amount.  Some  plants,  such 
as  Sorghum,  Poa  flava,  etc.,  when  treated  in  this  way  yield  the  whole  of  their 
hydrocyanic  acid. 

The  glucoside  of  Heterochndrvii  is  very  incompletely  hydrolysed  by  boiling 
with  dilute  acids. 

T.\BLE  B. — The  plant,  when  autolysed  for  1  day,  and  the  glucoside  decom- 
posed by  its  own  enzyme,  liberated  in  sample  i.,  45  mgs.  %,  in  samples  ii.  and  iii. 
120  mgs.  %,  and  in  sample  iv.  38  mgs.  %.  Numbers  i.  and  iv.  are  equivalent  to 
three  fourths  of  the  total  hydrocyanic  acid  present,  while  ii.  and  iii.  are  only  a 
third. 

These  experiments  show  that  the  leaves  are  deficient  in  enzyme. 

Some  cyanogenetic  plants  such  as  Sorghum.  Pruints  spp.,  Paiiiciilaria  spi»., 
etc.,  yield  much  less  hydrocyanic  acid  after  maceration,  and  this  method  cannot  be 
used  for  the  estimation.  In  these  plants  the  greatest  yield  was  obtained  by  direct 
distillation  with  acid. 

Table  C. — When  the  action  of  the  natural  enzyme  of  the  plant  is  assisted  by 
adding  eniulsin.  the  yield  of  free  hydrocyanic  acid  is  gi-eatly  increased,  the  maxi- 
mum amount  obtained  being  328  mg-s.   %. 

In  similar  investigations,  Guignard  showed  in  the  case  of  Sambucws  nigra 
(the  elder),  that  the  addition  of  emulsin  before  maceration  gave  no  further  in- 
crease. ^'iehoever,  and  his  colleagues,  in  America,  found  the  same  condition  to 
hold  in  tlieir  experiments  on  Tridens  flavus;  and  the  writer  has  found  that  in 
numerous  other  grasses  an  abundance  of  enzyme  existed,  sufficient  to  decompose 
the  whole  of  the  glucoside. 

Treub's  investigations  show  that  emulsin  of  almonds  has  vei-y  little  action  on 
the  cyanogenetic  compounds  of  Phaseolus  lunatiis,  Pangium  edule,  Passiflora 
fju-adranfjiilaris,   Maiiihot,   etc.;  in  certain  other   plants  such  as  Sorghum,  Hevea, 


458  CVAXOliKXES*l.s    IX    I'LAXTS, 

Alocasia,  the  aetiuu  is  ueitlior  regular  uor  abuiKlaut,.  ^vliile  in  numerous  others  the 
enuilsiu  acts  rajiiclly  aud  freely,     llctfrudetidruii  belongs  to  the  latter  group. 

T.vui.K  D. — When  amygdalin  is  boiled  with  dilute  mineral  acids  such  as 
hydrochloric  or  sulphuric,  it  is  hydrol\sed.  When  the  latter  are  replaced  by 
organic  acids  sucli  as  tartaric,  no  deeompositiou  of  the  glucoside  takes  place. 
Tartaric  acid,  like  the  mineral  acids,  has  been  shown  to  prevent  the  action  of 
enzymes  entirely.  For  these  reasons  it  is  used  to  detect  the  presence  of  any 
hydrocyanic  acid  which  may  exist  in  the  uncond)ined  state,  that  is,  not  in  a  gluco- 
side. Various  workers  have  recorded  the  presence  of  noa-glucosidal  hydrocyanic 
acid  in  plants,  but  the  writer  has  not  yet  detected  it  in  a  single  instance. 

Gexeral. —  (a).  There  are  some  plants  in  which  the  cyanogenetic  glucoside 
increases  to  a  maximum  amount  during  the  earlier  and  vigorous  period  of  their 
metabolism.  It  then  gradually  becomes  less  till  towards  the  end  of  the  season  it 
has  dwindled  to  a  relatively  snuill  amount  and  sometimes  has  disappeared  entirely. 
In  such  plants  the  glucoside  is  stored  only  temporarily,  it  is  used  up  during  the 
acti\e  vegetatixe  periods,  and  there  is  none  found  in  the  ripe  seeds. 

Examples  of  these  jilants  are  the  Sorghum,  which  in  the  ripe  stage  is  left 
with  an  amount  of  dhurrin  ef|uivalent  to  about  14  mgs.  %  of  hydrocyanic  acid 
(Brunuich),  and  sometimes  with  none  (Treub)  ;  aud  the  Lotus  of  Egypt,  which 
>ields  345  mgs.  ^o  of  hydrocyanic  acid  during  the  height  of  its  vigorous  growth, 
but  when  its  seeds  are  ri}ie  it  yields  no  hydrocyanic  acid.  Agaiu.  I\il)es  (cur- 
rants)  and  others  gi-adually  lose  their  hydrocyanic  acid  compounds. 

{})).  There  is  another  group  of  cyanogenetic  plants  in  which  the  hydrocyanic 
acid  remains  almost  constant  throughout  the  whole  .period  of  growth.  This  in- 
cludes I'ussifJora  sp)>.,  Samhucus  nigra,  Phuseolus  lunatns  and  Imligofera  yale- 
r/oirle.i.  Although  it  is  diflicult  to  compare  these  plants  with  the  e\ergreen  tree 
Ileterodendron,  it  may  be  noted  from  Table  B  that  the  latter  plant  contains  ])rac- 
tically  the  same  amoimt  of  glucoside  in  winter  as  in  summer. 

(c)  When  cyanogenetic  plants  are  collected  and  spread  out  to  dry.  two 
courses  are  followed:  one  in  which  the  glucoside  gradually  disappears,  the  other 
in  which  it  remains  unchanged  for  very  long  periods. 

As  examples  of  the  first  course  may  be  mentioned  t'ljiiodon  iiicompletiis  (blue 
couch  gi-a.ss),  which  shows  during  four  weeks'  drying  in  the  open  air,  a  gradual  dim- 
inution to  zero;  -Aloeasia  macrorrhiza,  fium  which  no  hydrocyanic  can  be  obtained 
after  a  few  weeks ;  .nnd  Sorghum,  which  loses  about  three-quarters  of  its  glucoside 
under  these  conditions.  As  an  example  of  the  second  course  we  note  from  Table 
B  that  samiile  ii.  during  four  months  remained  almost  constant,  and  sample  iii., 
lying  openly  for  twelve  months  also  remained  about  the  same.  It  may  be  stated 
then  that  though  jilants  like  Sorghum  may  be  rendered  much  less  deleterious  by 
air-drying  or  curing,  the  foliage  of  Ileterodetidroti  cannot  be  treated  in  this  way 
with  any  a<lvautage. 

The  enz_\inc  in  the  dried  leaves  of  Heterodendron  is  apparently  i|uite  inactive 
at  the  ordinary  temperature,  hence  the  constancy  of  the  yield  of  hydrocyanic  acid 
during  long  jicriods  (d'  drying.  In  this  respect  it  differs  from  the  enzymes  of 
most  other  plants—  for  instance.  Brill  found  that  his  samples  of  Pomjium  edule. 
owing  to  the  action  of  a  very  active  enzyme,  continued  to  lose  hydrocyanic  aci  I 
from  the  time  they  were  cut. 

The  quantity  of  hydrocyanic  acid  evolved  from  Heterodendroii  is  relatively 
very  large.      It  nmv  be  conipareil  with  thai    Ironi  some  of  the  richest   cyanogcne- 


BY  JA^r^:s  .\r.  i-ktijik.  459 

tie   i>lants  hitherto  investigatefl.     The  lea\es   of  the   I'dlhiwiiiu-  phiiits    cnutaiii    the 

aiuoiints  stated  in  )iigs.  '^■'c  of  the  dry  luateriah 

HCX 

Paiiyium    edule,    Greshoti 11(10  uig-s.   ^^ 

Taraktoyenos  Blumei,  Treiib 333 

Ileterodendroii  oleaefolin,  this  i>a|)er 328 

Pliaseolii.s  hinafus  (Lima  beans),  Treiib     320 

Gynocurdia  odoratci,  Treub 220 

Indiffofera  (jalegoides^  Treub      154 

Bitter  abnonds   (seeds),  Guignard 150 

Passi flora  II erbertiana  (native  to  N.S.W.),  Treub   ..  143 

Hecea  Brasilieiisis  (Para  rubber  plant),  Treul)   ....  138 

Andropojioii   sorghum,  Dowell 51 

Ci/iiodo)i  ineompletu^    (blue   couch  grass),  Petrie      ..  25 

Calcidation  of  fatal  dose  of  Heterodendron  leaves. 

The  lethal  aniuunt  of  hydrocyanic  acid  is  usually  stated  as  1  nig.  [ler  kilo- 
gram of  body-weight. 

A  man  or  sheen  would  therefore  require  about  (JO  mgs. 

This  amount  is  obtained  from  about  40  bitter  almonds. 

This  amount  is  also  obtained  from  90  gms.  of  fresh  gTeen  leaves  of  Hetero- 
dendron, which  is  equivalent  to  3  ozs.  in  weight,  and  230  fresh  leaves  of  average 
size,  or  to  1  oz,  of  air-dried  leaves. 

A  single  leaf  of  Heterodendron  of  average  size  will  yield  0.35  mg.  of  hydro- 
cyanic acid;  and  1  oz.  weight  of  leaves  which  have  been  cut  and  lying  in  the  sun 
and  air  to  dry,  will  give  sufficient  hydrocyanic  acid  to  poison  a  sheep.  Hetero- 
dendron is  therefore  much  more  poisonous  than  bitter  almonds;  in  fact,  it  is 
more  than  twice  as  strong,  and  thirteen  times  more  so  than  the  blue  couch  gi'ass. 

SU3I1I.\RY. 

Heterodendron  oleaefolia  is  a  native  Australian  e\ergreen  tree,  the  foliage  of 
which  was  much  used  for  cattle-feeding  during  the  drought.  It  contains  a  cyano- 
genetic  glucoside  yielding,  when  hydrolysed,  0.328  %  of  hydrocyanic  acid.  It 
is  therefore  one  of  the  most  poisonous  cyanogenetic  plants  known,  yielding  more 
than  twice  as  much  hydrocyanic  acid  as  bitter  almonds.  One  ounce  of  the  air- 
dried  leaves  forms  a  lethal  amount  for  one  sheep. 

The  leaves  are  invariably  found  to  be  deficient  in  enzyme,  and  required  the 
addition  of  emulsin  in  the  estimation,  to  bring  about  the  comjilete  decomposition 
of  the  glucoside. 


460 


NOTES  UN  AUSTRAL1A.N  TABAXLUAE. 
By  Eustace  W.  Ferguson,  M.B.,  Ch.M.,  and  Gerald  i'.  Hill,  F.E.S. 

The  present  papei'  is  tlie  outcome  of  correspoudence  between  the  two  authors 
on  the  question  of  the  identification  of  specimens  of  Australian  Tabanidae. 

One  of  us  (E.W.F.),  while  in  London,  had  the  opportunity  of  examining 
the  types  of  Australian  Tabanidae  in  the  Natural  Historj'  Branch  of  the  British 
Museum,  and  of  comparing  specimens  with  the  types.  In  many  instances  the 
identifications  were  made  by  Miss  Ricardo.  Authentically  identified  specimens  of 
many  species  were  thus  available,  and  these  have  been  compared  with  such  types 
as  are  in  the  collection  of  the  Australian  Institute  of  Tropical  Medicine  at  Towns- 
viUe. 

The  correspoudence  and  comparison  of  specimens  have  revealed  the  fact  that 
considerable  synonymy  exists  among  lecently  described  species.  Some  of  this 
is  due  to  misidentification  of  previously  described  species,  but  much  is  due  to  too 
much  reliance  having  been  placed  on  slight  variation  in  characters  whidi  can  be 
sliown,  with  long  series,  to  be  variable  within  the  one  species. 

Incidentally  it  has  shown  that  the  groups  suggested  by  Miss  Ricardo  for  the 
division  of  the  genus  Tabanus  are  valueless,  at  any  rate  as  applied  to  Australian 
species.  The  characters  separating  gi-oups  vii.,  viii.,  ix.  and  x.  ai'e  entirely  super- 
ficial, depending  solely  on  clothing,  so  that  the  grouping  of  a  species  is  dependent 
on  the  degree  of  abrasion  of  the  specimen . 

While  the  paper  deals  mainly  with  synonymy,  one  new  sjK'cics  ha-s  been 
described,  and  the  descriptions  of  one  or  two  others  have  liceii  held  up  pending 
the  receipt  of  further  material  or  information. 

We  should  like  to  acknowledge  the  lielp  we  have  received  from  Dr.  (lay  .V. 
K.  Marshall,  Director  of  the  Imperial  Bureau  of  Entomology,  in  cniiiiiai-ing 
specimens  with  types  in  the  British  Museum. 

Dkm()i>l.\tu.s  nicrovittatu.s,  n.sp. 

Closely  allied  to  I),  aiislraliti  Kicardd,  liiil  differing  in  culdiiriitiiiu  (it  the 
abdomen. 

c?.  Face  brown,  with  yellowish-brown  tomcntum  and  rather  sparse  brown 
hairs;  separated  from  cheeks  by  deep  groove;  cheeks  similar;  beard  white.  Palpi 
with  second  joint  long,  somewhat  club-shaped  as  in  D.  aiistralis,  but  black.  Pro- 
boscis comparatively  short.  Antennae  reddish-brown,  second  joint  about  half  the 
length  of  the  first;  third  joint  apparently  8-annulate,  but  anuuli  somewhat  indefin- 
ite and  hard  to  distinguish,  ba.sal  part  somewhat  wider  than  rest  of  joint,  first 
and  second  joints  with  long  dark  hairs.  Eye^  contiguous,  moderately  finely  face- 
ted, bare.  Ocelli  present.  Thorax  dark  brown,  with  brown  tomcntum  and  indis- 
tinct traces  of  3  longitudinal  tomentose  vittae,  the  median  darker,  the  submedian 


BY    EUSTACE    W.    FERGUSOX    AND   G.    F.    IJILL.  461 

more  yellowish  in  :iiiterior  hall',  darker  posteriorly,  the  lateral  margins  with 
similar  yellowish-grey  tomentum;  pubescence  long  and  fine,  gi'eyish  in  colour, 
ratlier  scanty,  denser  posteriorly  and  above  wing  roots.  Sides  dark  brown  with 
long,  silky,  light  gxey  pubescence.  Scutelhtvi  dark  brown,  with  long  grey 
pubescence.  Abdomen  reddish,  with  a  moderately  broad,  median,  black  vitta  ex- 
tending the  length  of  the  abdomen,  and  somewhat  expanded  on  first  segment; 
lateral  borders  with  black  markings  on  3-6  segments;  pubescence  light  brown, 
with  traces  ot  creamy  on  the  segmentations.  Venter  of  a  Ughter  reddish-yellow 
colour,  without  any  black  vitta;  with  fine  greyish  pubescence  and  a  fringe  of 
shelter  fine  creamy  pubescence  along  posterior  margin  of  segments.  Legs  reddish- 
yellow,  tarsi  with  apical  joints  infuseate;  posterior  tibial  spurs  rather  short. 
Winffs  clouded  with  brown,  most  marked  along  the  anterior  border  and  along  the 
cross  veins;  distribution  of  shading  similar  to  1).  auMralis,  but  darker.  Length, 
11.5  mm. 

//ab.— N.S.    Wales:   Kendall.     (Miss  M.   Henry.) 

Desci-ibed  from  two  males  caught  on  flowers  in  garden  on  26th  February  and 
18th  March,  1920.  Both  specimens  have  the  wings  damaged  at  the  tips,  and  it 
is  uncertain  whether  the  first  posterior  cell  is  closed  or  open;  but  it  is  probably 
open  as  in  D.  aitstralis.  Apart  from  the  colour  of  the  abdomen,  which  is  most 
striking,  the  species  can  be  separated  by  the  structure  of  the  7th  tergite.  In  D. 
nigroviltatus  the  apical  bol-der  of  this  segment  is  practically  truncate,  while  in  D. 
australin  the  margin  is  strongly  bisinnate.  the  median  portion  being  produced  in  a 
strongly  rounded  lobe.  The  antenna!  annulations  are  hard  to  distinguish,  in  this 
respect  resembling  D.  cmstralis,  though  the  shape  of  the  annulations  is  slightly 
different  in  the  two  species. 

Ty|ic   ill  Australian  Museum,  Sydney. 

SiLvius  IXDISTINCTUS  Ric. 

Rieardo,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  (8),  xvi.,  (1915),  p.  262;  ,S'.  hilli,  Taylor, 
Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.,  xl.,  Pt.  4,  1915.  p.  806;  S.  borealis,  Taylor,  loc.  cit., 
p.  809. 

Specimens  of  S.  indistinctus  Ric.  were  detennined  by  Miss  Rieardo,  and  are 
uiifiuestionably  the  same  as  6'.  Mlli  Taylor,  a  series  of  which  has  been  examined  Ijy 
both  authors,  and  the  type  by  one  of  us  (G.F.H.).  Mr.  Taylor  was  probably 
misled  in  his  identification  of  S.  indistinctus  (Prop.  Linn.  Soc.  N.  S.  Wales,  1916, 
xli..  Pt.  4,  p.  753)  by  a  specimen  so  identified  by  Mr.  Austen  and  quite  distinct 
from  the  species  as  identified  by  Miss  Rieardo  herself. 

The  species  is  a  variable  one  in  the  colouration  of  both  thorax  and  abdomen 
and  in  the  presence  or  absence  of  the  median  abdominal  spots. 

The  tyjie  of  S-  borealis  has  also  been  examined  and.  though  there  ajipears  to 
lu'  a  very  slight  difference  in  that  the  callus  is  less  bulbous,  we  cannot  regard  it 
as  other  tlian  eonspecific  with  S.  ind^istincliis  Ric. 

SiLVIUS  XOTATU.S   Ric. 

Rieardo.  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  (8),  xvi.,  1915,  p.  264;  Taylor.  Proc.  Linn. 
Soc.  N.S.  Wales,  x]iv.,  Pt.  1,  1919.  p.  43;  ,S'.  psarophanes.  Taylor,  op.  cit.,  xlii., 
Pt.  3.  1917.  p.  520;  ?  S.  fuliginosm,  Taylor,  op.  cit.,  xl.,  Pt.  4.  1915.  p.  810. 

This  appears  to  be  a  very  widespread  species  and  to  a  certain  extent  variable. 
Among  our  specimens  is  one  from  Sea  Lake,  !Mallee  District,  Victoria,  which  was 


462  NOTES    ox    AUSTRALIAN    TABANIDAE. 

compareil  witli  the  type  (K.W.F.)  from  Kalamunda,  Western  Australia,  in  the 
British  Museum. 

We  associate  with  this  specimens  from  Lake  Hattah,  "\'ictoria;  Narrabri, 
N.S.  Wales;  and  Springsure  and  Burnett  River,  (Queensland.  The  New  South 
Wales  and  Queensland  specimens  show  some  slight  difference  in  that  the  forehead 
is  sUghtly  narrower  and  the  antennae  are  rather  lighter.  The  Burnett  River 
specimens  {d,  ?)  were  bred  out  by  Miss  Bancroft  and  bear  a  label: — "Bred  from 
larvae  found  in  wet  sand  at  river  edge,  Burnett  R..  18.11.19."'  They  are  in 
excellent  preservation^  and  the  abdominal  clothing  is  much  more  marked  than  in 
our  other  specimens,  in  which  it  is  somewhat  abraded.  Through  them  we  were 
able  to  associate  Silriits  psarophanes  with  S.  notatus;  the  former  species  being 
identified  with  the  Burnett  River  male.  Males  and  females  of  psarophanes  have 
also  been  bred  out  in  Towiisville  (G.F.H.)  and  correspond  with  the  Springsure 
and  Burnett  River  specimens. 

S.  fuliginosvs  Taylor,  of  which  we  have  examined  the  type  and  compared  it 
with  our  series  of  .S.  notatus,  appears  hardly  separable.  It  is  somewhat  smaller 
and  the  forehead  is  •distinctly  nan-ower  than  in  the  Victorian  specimens,  in  which 
respect  the  New  South  Wales  and  Queensland  specimens  are  intermediate.  The 
antennae  and  legs  are  decidedly  lighter  in  colour  than  in  the  Victorian  specimen, 
but  Iiere  again  it  is  linked  up  by  the  intei-mediate  specimens.  We  are  inclined 
to  regard  it  as  not  being  specifically  distinct,  though  it  may  be  necessary  to  re- 
tain the  name  as  a  subspecies.  Further  specimens  from  the  Northern  Territory 
will  probably  be  necessary  to  settle  the  status  of  S.  fi(h'(}itwsvs. 

Siuius  soRDiDus  Taylor. 

Taylor,  I'roc.  Linn.  Sue.  X.S.  Wales,  xl.,  Pt.  4,  1915,  p.  808;  ^,'.  tabaiiifonnis 
Taylor,  loc.  cit.,  p.  <S13. 

AVe  ha\e  examined  the  types  of  Tayloi's  species  and  other  specimens  from  the 
same  district  (G.F.H. ),  and  cannot  find  any  valid  reason  for  maintaining  tliem 
as  distinct.  The  ty])e  of  S.  tahaviformis  has  more  conspicuous  clothing,  but  the 
type  of  .s'.  sordidiis  is  certainly  considei-ably  abraded.  The  colour  of  the  abdomen 
is  somewhat  lighter  in  tahaiiiformis,  but  the  type  is  apparently  an  immature  speci- 
men. 

In  his  description,  Taylor  states  that  the  inner  margins  of  the  eyes  in  S. 
sordidus  are  parallel,  while  under  S.  tahanifonnis  he  states  that  the  inner  margins 
are  slightly  convergent  towards  the  base.  The  difference,  however,  when  the  two 
types  are  compared  is  inappreciable. 

Tabanus  leucopterus  van  de  Wulp. 

Van  de  Wulp  Tijdsch.  voor  Entom.,  xi..  1868.  p.  98:  T.  (irheohirtiis.  Taylor. 
Proc.  Linn.  Sec.  N.S.  Wales,  xli..  Pt.  4.  1916.  p.  753. 

This  si)ecies  was  originally  described  from  the  Aru  Islands,  and  a  s|icciiiu'ii 
in  the  collection  of  the  South  Anstialiaii  Museum  from  Stewart  River.  Queens- 
land, was  determined  by  Miss  Ricardo.  This  has  been  compared  with  a  series  of 
T.  uriseohirlus  Taylor,  including  the  type,  and  the  species  are  certainly  identical. 
The  series  shows  some  variation  in  size  and  in  the  colouration  of  the  clothing,  a 
specimen  from  Kimberle\  perhaps  i-epi-esenting  a  vaiiety.  but  too  closely  allied 
to  be  separated.  The  sp.iics  appears  to  be  wides|.read  in  the  nortli  of  Au.sfralia 
and   in  the  islands  immediately  to  the  north. 


BY    EUSTACK    W.    FEKGL'SOX    AND   G.    F.    HII.L.  463 

Tabaxus  pallipe.vnis  Mac<i. 

Macijuart.  Dipt.  Exot.,  Suppl.  1,  1844,  p.  IGO ;  Bicardo,  Anu.  Mag.  Nat. 
Hist..  (8),  xiv.,  1914,  p.  397. 

A  species  of  Tahanus  from  the  Burnett  River  District,  Queensland,  bred  out 
from  larvae  by  Mi-s  Bancroft,  is  tentatively  referred  to  T.  palUpennis. 

Following  is  a  detailed  description  of  the  specimens : — 

A  moderately  -mall  species  with  three  well-detined  abdominal  vittae. 

c?.  Face  rather  deeply  sunken,  black,  densely  clothed  with  grey  tomentuni 
and  with  white  puliesctoce;  cheeks  with  grey  tonientum  and  pubescence;  beard 
grey.  Palpi  with  second  joint  short,  oval,  creamy  yellow,  with  mixed  grey  and 
black  pubescence.  Antennae  brown,  the  basal  joints  more  greyish;  first  joint 
broader  and  partially  concealing  second  joint,  the  latter  small,  somewhat  crescen- 
tic,  both  joints  with  a  few,  short,  black  hairs  at  apices;  third  joint  rather  slender, 
the  basal  portion  angulate  but  hardly  toothed  above.  Eyes  large,  contiguous  for 
greater  portion  of  length,  separated  below  to  allow  of  the  appearance  of  a  small 
strongly  nitid  black  callus;  the  upper  two-thirds  of  the  eyes  set  with  moderately 
large  facets,  the  lower  third  with  much  finer  facets. 

Thorax  black  with  median,  submedian  and  sublateral  grey  tomentose  stripes, 
clothed  with  black  erect  pubescence  and  with  rather  scanty,  decumbent,  golden 
pubescence  on  the  grey  stripes ;  sides  clothed  with  gi-ey  tomentum,  with  long,  fine, 
pubescent  tufts,  mingled  dark  and  grey.  Seutellum  dark  brown  with  slight  red- 
dish tinge,  with  black  pubescence  on  dorsum  and  rather  scanty,  golden  hairs  along 
free  margin. 

Abdomen  dark  brown  to  black,  with  three  vittae  of  elongate,  pale  grey,  some- 
what creamy  spots,  the  segmentations  also  narrowly  edged  with  same  colour; 
median  vitta  extending  from  third  segment  to  apex,  spots  elongate,  broader  at 
posterior  margins  of  segments,  forming  a  continuous  vitta;  sublateral  vittae  ex- 
tending from  first  segment  to  apex,  the  vittae  more  interrupted,  the  spots  not 
reaching  the  anterior  border  of  each  segment  and  not  triangiilar  in  shape ;  pubes- 
cence black,  with  a  few  creamy  hairs  on  some  of  the  spots.  Venter  dark  brown, 
segmentations  narrowly  edged  with  grey,  pubescence  black,  gTcy  on  segmentations. 

Legs  dark  brown,  tibiae  lighter  yellowish-brown,  apical  half  of  fore  tibiae 
darkly  infuscate,  tarsi  rather  darker  than  tibiae,  the  anterior  tarsi  black;  pubes- 
cence grey  on  femora  and  liasal  half  of  anterior  tibiae,  black  elsewhere. 

Wings  rather  dark  grey,  with  whitish  areas  in  centres  of  cells,  only  visiljle 
from  certain  direct 'ons  against  a  black  background,  cross  veins  lightly  suffused 
with  brown ;  veins  brown,  stigma  narrow,  fairly  conspicuous ;  appendix  present. 

?.  Resembles  male  in  general  appearance.  Face  not  sunken,  densely  clothed 
with  greyish  tomentum  and  rather  dense,  whitish  pubescence,  cheeks  similar,  beard 
white.  P.ilpi  with  second  joint  short,  very  stout,  apex  not  produced  l)ufc  ratlier 
sharply  pointed,  yellowish  brown,  with  short,  mixed  pale  and  dark  pubescence. 
Antennae  as  in  male.  Forehead  rather  broad,  distinctly  wider  at  vertex  than  an- 
teriorly, densely  clothed  with  grey  tomentum,  with  brownish  tinge  in  places  and 
darker  on  vertex,  pubescence  black  in  centre  and  above,  shorter  and  creamy  at 
sides;  callus  transverse,  reaching  eyes,  black,  tumid  and  shining,  a  second,  round, 
black  callus  in  centre  of  forehead,  occupying  about  half  the  width.  Eyes  with 
facets  uniform,  bare.  Thorax  as  in  male.  Abdomen  witli  median  -s-itta  extending 
to   first   segment,   with   more   distinct,   creamy,   almost    golden    pubescence   on   the 


404  XOTES  ox  AUSTKAI.IAX  TAUAXIDAK, 

vittac.  Neuter  witii  tiiK'  black  pul)r.--<-fiicc'  in  i-uiitrt'  of  the  ><.'giiKMiIs.  grey  at  the 
sides.     Legs  aud  wings  as  in  male. 

Dimenbions:  c?.  ?,  12  mm. 

Bred  from  larvae  found  in  wet  mud,  Cattle  C'nrner,  Wiugtiekl  (GO  niilis  li-dui 
Eidsvold),  November,  1919  (No.  1). 

This  species  is  related  to  T.  rujiiiotuliis  liigot.  liut  dift'ers  in  its  broader-  torju. 
and  broader  forehead  with  larger  secondary  callus,  spotted  wings,  and  in  its  gen- 
eral appearance.  This  species  has  been  placed  under  T.  pallipennis  Mact).,  though 
it  does  not  completely  agree  in  all  details;  in  Macquart's  description  there  are 
said  to  be  three  calli  on  the  front,  the  lower  two  contiguous  and  sometimes  united; 
in  the  iireseut  specimens  there  are  only  two  calli,  unless  the  dark  area  on  the 
vertex  be  regarded  as  a  third  callus,  and  the  middle  one  is  equidistant  from  the 
vertex  and  the  lower  callus.  The  wing^  also  ditt'er  from  the  description;  in  /'. 
pallipennis  they  are  described  as  a  little  greyish,  though  the  name  pallipennis 
would  indicate  a  whitish  winged  species.  Under  a  lens  the  wings  appear  as 
described  above,  but  in  certain  lights  they  appear  decidedly  jjale  and  the  dark 
spots  around  the  cross-veins  are  not  cdnspicuous.  This  pale  appearance  is  more 
marked  in  a  female  recently  received  from  Lake  Hattah,  Victoria  (Nov.,  1919 — 
J.  E.  Dixon)  .  It  is  possible  that  T.  pallipennis  Macq.  is  a  distinct  species,  but 
until  specimens  are  available  agreeing  comjiletely  with  the  description  it  seems 
preferable  to  treat  tliese  specimens  as  belonging  to  Macquart's  species. 

Tabanus  duplonotatus  Ric. 

Ricardo,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  (8),  xiv.,  1914,  p.  39(i;  T.  pa  n-i  callus  us, 
Taylor  (nee  Ricardo),  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.  Wales,  xlii.,  Pt.  3,  1917,  p.  524; 
ibid.,  Rec.  Aust.  Mus.,  xii..  No.  5,  1918,  p.  64. 

This  species  has  been  wrongly  identified  by  Taylor;  we  have  specimens 
compared  with  the  types  of  both  Miss  Ricardo's  species,  and  specimens  identitied 
by  Tayhir  and  recorded  above  as   7'.  pnrric((Iliisus  agree  with  T.  ilnpUniiitatua. 

Tabaxus  iNxoT^VBiLis  Walker. 

Walker,  List  Dipt.  Brit.  Mus.,  Part  1.  1848,  p.  177;  T.  dorsobimaculutus 
Macr].,  Dipt.  Exot.,  suppl.  iv.,  1850,  y.  JS;  Ricardo,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  (8), 
XV.,  1915,  p.  273;  T.  duplonotatns,  Taylor  {nee  Ricardo),  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S. 
Wales,  xli.,  Pt.  4,  1916,  p.    755. 

As  the  species  identified  by  Taylor  as  7'.  duplonotatus  Ric.  did  not  at  all  cor- 
respond with  a  specimen  ccmipared  with  tlu'  ty|ie  (E.W.F.),  specimens  were 
sent  to  London  (G.F.H.)  and  have  l)een  identitied  hy  Dr.  (J.  A.  K.  Mai-shall 
as  '/'.  innolahilis  W;dker. 

Tahaxi's  apbki'ks  Tiiylor. 

Tayha-,  Proc.  Linn.  S,ic.  X.S.  Wales,  xliv..  I'l.  1.  1919.  p.  5(i;  7'.  hatchclori. 
Taylor,  loc.  cit.,  p.  58. 

The  types  of  the  two  siiecies  have  been  very  <  aiefidly  compared  and  we  are 
unable  to  maintain  them  as  rlistinct;  the  i)rincipal  dilference  between  them  is 
that  T.  hatchelori  has  the  wings  slightly  clouded  with  brown  along  the  veins, 
whereas  in  T.  aprepes  the  wing-s  are  practically-  clear.  A  series  from  Burnett 
River,  however,  shows  con.siderable  variation  in  the  amount  of  suffusion,  and  varies 
from     sjiecimens    in     which     the    wings    ai-e    more    stroimly    mai'ked     than     in    T. 


BY  kusta(;e  \v.  FKRr,r,sox  and  (i.  f.  hill.  4Gj 

hatchelori  to  speciiiii'iis  in  wliicli  the  wing's  are  clear.  Tliere  is  also  considerable 
variation  in  tlio  colouration  of  the  abdomen,  i)ossibIy  depending'  on  nuitiirity,  us 
all  of  the  specimens  ai'e  bred.  Both  tyiies  can  be  a))solutely  "u)at<-hed"  among 
the  series. 

Tab.\xus  xeogermaxic'us  Kicardo. 

Kicardo,  Ann.  .Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  (8),  xv.,  1915,  p.  283;  op.  cit.,  (8).  .\i.\., 
1U17,  p.  219;  T.  liilU  Taylor,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.  Wales,  xliv.,  Pt.  1,  1919,  p. 
6i;  T.  j'ugith-us,  Taylor,  luc.  cit.,  ]i.  01. 

The  determination  of  the  above  synonymy  is  based  on  the  comparison  by  one 
of  us  (G.F.H.)  of  specimens  identified  by  jMiss  Kicardo  as  T.  neogermatiicus 
Kic.  with  Taylor's  types.  Taylor  has  placed  his  species  in  two  different  groujis, 
fiifjilivtis  in  Group  ix.  and  liilli  in  Group  x.,  but  the  distinction  between  these  two 
gi'oups  is  often  a  matter  of  aljrasion  and  the  groups  are  not  natural  ones,  in  any 
case,  from  the  description,  liilli  would  appear  to  be  wrongly  placed  in  Group  x., 
as  the  segmentations  are  described  as  greyish.  A  comparison  of  the  two  descrip- 
tions reveals  no  difference  apart  from  differences  in  what  might  be  described  as 
shades  of  colour.  The  determination  in  regard  to  fitgitivus  was  checked  by  the 
examination  liy  both  of  us  of  a  paratype  whicli  is  absolutely  identical  with  the 
specimens  determined  l)y  Miss  Ricardo. 

Tabanus  brevior  Walker. 

Walker,  List  Dipt.,  1,  1848,  p.  188;  T.  cmellusus,  Summei-s,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat. 
Hist.,  (8),  X.,  1912,  p.  226;  Rieardo,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  (8),  xv.,  1915,  p. 
279:  T.  atiiitralis,  Taylor,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.  AYales,  xli.,  Pt.  4,  1916,  p.  257; 
T.  crypserijthrus,  Taylor,  oji.  cit.,  xliv.,  Pt.  1,  1919,  p.  60. 

This  species  li;is  been  misidentitted  in  Australian  collections.  Specimens  of 
T.  australis  sent  to  London  (G.F.H.)  have  been  detei-mined  by  Dr.  G.  A.  K. 
Marshall  and  Mr.  E.  E.  Austen  as  T.  brevior  Walker.  Examination  of  a  short 
series  of  specimens  of  T.  australis  and  T.  criipsert/thrus,  including  specimens 
identified  by  Taylor,  showed  that  the  species  were  identical.  Tlie  types  of  Tay- 
lor's two  species  have  also  been  compared   (G.F.H.). 

Tabaxus    neopalpalls,  nov.  nonien. 

T.  iialpalis.  Tayhu'  iiimii.  praeiicc.].  Pro<-.  Liiiii.  Sue.  X.S.  W.'ilc-^.  xliv., 
Pt.   1,  1919,  p.   116. 

The  name  of  this  s]:)ecies  l)eing'  preoccupied  by  an  Indian  species — T.  palpuUs 
Eicardo  (Records  Indian  Museum,  iv..  No.  vi.,  1911,  p.  212) — we  propcse  the 
ahove  to  replace  it.  The  name  T.  milsoni  Taylor,  is  also  preoccupied  by  7'.  mil- 
soiiix  Ricardo,  but  in  this  instance  we  understand  that  the  name  has  already  liecn 
altered  by  Jlr.   Taylor. 

Tabaxus  xiGRniAxrs  Walker. 

Walker,  List  Dipt..  1,  1848,  p.  183;  T.  IhhUii.'^,  Summers.  Ann.  Mag.  Nat. 
Hist.,  (8),  X.,  1912,  p.  225;  Ricardo,  op.  cit.,  (8),  xv.,  1915,  p.  285;  ?  T.  iJaplwe- 
mis,  Taylor,  Proc.  Linn.   Soc.  N.S.   Wales,  xliv.,  Pt.  1,  1919,  p.  54. 

Comparisons  of  s]iecimens  of  T.  daplweiiKs  Taylor  with  the  descriptions  of  T. 
nigrimanuK  Walk.,  and  T.  hatlhts  Summers,  leaves  no  doubt  in  our  minds  that 
Taylor's  species  is  the  same  as  Walker's.     We  have  thought  it  lietter.  however,  to 


466  XOTES   ox    AVSTEALIAX    TABANIUAK, 

query  the  identifieation  until  a  specimen  of  T.  dapliot'iiun  can  bo  aetually  compared 
•with  the  type  of  T.  nigrimanuf^. 

Tabanus  jiixLscuLUs,  nov.  nomen. 
Tabaiius  minor  Taylor  (iiec  :Mac4uart  I.  Proc  Linn.  Sue.  N.S.    Wales,  xliv., 
Pt.  1,  1919,  p.  64. 

A  change  of  name  is  necessary  for  Taylors  species,  as  T.  minor  has  already 
been  utilised  by  Maeqiiart  (Dipt.  Exnt..  Suppl.  4,  1850.  p.  .S3)  for  a  species  from 
Patagonia. 

Tabaxts  eegis-geoegii  !Macr|nart. 

Maequart,  Dipt.  Exot.,  1,  1838,  p.  132;  Ricardo,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  (8), 
svi.,  1915,  p.  276;  1.  spadix,  Taylor,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.  Wales,  xli.,  Pt. 
4,  1916,  p.  761;  T.  brisbanensis,  Taylor,  op.  cit.,  xlii..  Pt.  3.  1917,  p.  527;  op.  cit., 
xliv.,  Pt.  1,  1919,  p.  67. 

We  ha\e  compared  a  long  series  of  T.  ref/is-georgii  with  specimens  of  T. 
hrishanen^is  Taylor  received  from  the  Queensland  ^Museum,  and  with  the  type  of 
T.  spadix,  and  are  imable  to  discover  any  tangible  differences.  The  species  is  a 
very  variable  one  in  the  colour  of  the  clothing,  in  the  width  of  forehead  and 
shape  of  callus. 

The  Tasmanian  specimens  referred  by  Mr.  Taylor  to  T.  bri-'ibaneiisis  are  evi- 
dently the  species  described  by  one  of  us  (E.W.F.)  as  "T.  daemenensis.  distin- 
guished by  the  facetting  of  the  eyes  in  the  male. 

For  our  identification  of  T.  regis-georgii  we  are  relying  on  Miss  Ricardo's 
determination  of  the  species  in  the  British  Museum.  At  tlie  same  time  it  seems 
unlikely,  though  not  impossible,  tliat  the  range  of  our  east  coast  species  extends 
to  King  George  Sound.  On  the  other  hand  we  have  seen  Victorian  specimens. 
Should  the  species  from  King  George  Sound  prove  to  be  different  it  will  be 
necessary  to  re-establish  the  name  T.  spadix. 

Dasybasis  APPKXDirri.ATA  Mai(|. 

Maequart,  Dipt.  Exot.,  Suppl.  2,  1846.  p.  25.  pi.  1,  fig.  1 ;  Walker.  List  Dipt., 
Pt.  v.,  Suppl.  1.  1854.  p.  267;  Ricardo,  Ann.  :\lag.  Xat.  Hist.,  (7),  xiv..  1904,  p. 
350. 

This  does  not  a]>pear  to  have  been  identified  in  Australian  collections  of  Aus- 
tralian Tabanidae  since  it  was  first  described,  though  Bigot  has  referred  a  second 
species  from  Chili   to  the  genus. 

We  have  specimens  before  us  of  a  species  that  agi'ees  fairly  well  with  both 
generic  and  specific  descriptions  with  the  exception  that  there  are  the  usual  five 
divisions  on  the  tlurd  joint  of  tlio  antennae.  The  dirisions  are  however,  obscure 
and  might  readily  be  miscounted,  and  the  base  of  the  third  joint  is  not  angulate 
but  somewhat  swollen  in  the  middle,  corresponding  in  this  respect  to  Macquart's 
description. 

The  species  is  alHed  tu  '/(dndiii.t  ncntilis  Erichson.  and  7'.  frii;igatti  Ric.  liut 
may  I)e  distinguished  from  buth  by  the  liead  being  sniiiewhat  compressed  antero- 
posteriorly  so  that  the  fcu'eliead  is  relatively  shoi-ter  and  bi-oadcr  than  in  these 
species. 

Walker's  notes  on  the  genus  are  valueless,  as  lie  placed  therein  two  species 
now  referred  to  Pelecorrhynclnts  and  some  of  tlie  generic  characters  given  by  him 

'Description  spnt  for  publication  to  the  Royal  Society  of  Victoria. 


BY  EUSTACE  W.  FERGUSON  AND  G.  F.  HILL. 


467 


are  founded  on  these.  Should  our  identification  prove  correct,  the  genus  Dasy- 
basis  would  have  to  sink  as  a  synonym  of  Tabauus,  as  the  species  is  too  closely 
allied  to  Tahaiius  froggatti  and  T.  gentilis  to  admit  of  separation,  and  these  two 
latter  species  are  oonneeted  by  others  with  the  more  typical  hairy-eyed  species  of 
Tabmuts. 

Stibasoma  hemiptera  Surcouf. 

Bull.  Mus.  nat.  d'Hist.  nat.,  Paris,  No.  2,  1912,  pp.  62-63. 

This  species  seems  to  have  been  quite  overlooked  by  recent  workers  in  Australian 
Tabanidaf.  The  tyjje  had  the  antennae  broken  when  described,  which  leaves  some 
doubt  in  our  minds  as  to  whether  it  is  ascribed  to  the  correct  genus.  On  the 
other  hand  there  are  other  instances  where  South  American  genera  have  been  re- 
corded also  from  Australia. 

The  descriptioji  does  not  tit  any  species  known  to  us. 


468 


DESC'RIPTJONS  OF  NEW   FORMS  OF  BUTTERFLIES    FROM   THE 

SOUTH  PACIFIC. 

Br  G.    A.   Watebhouse,  B.Sc,  B.E.,   F.E.S. 

For  some  time  past  1  have  been  receiving  bvitterflies  from  the  islands  of  the 
South  Pacitic,  and  amongst  them  there  have  been  many  new  records  and  several 
new  races  The  pur])ose  of  this  paper  is  to  record  the  more  impoi-tant  of  these, 
particularly  as  my  friend  Mr.  H.  W.  Siminonds  has  succeeded  in  capturing,  in 
Piji,  some  species  of  liigh  interest.  In  the  Transactions  of  the  Entomological 
Society  of  London,  1004,  I  gave  an  account  of  some  collections  from  Fiji,  and 
Fruhstorfer,  in  Stett.  ent.  Zeit.,  1902,  also  gives  a  list  from  the  same  islands, 
■whilst  in  the  Proceeding's  of  the  Zoological  Society  of  London.  1892.  Mr.  H.  H. 
Druce  gives  a  list  of  the  Liicaeniflne  of  the  South  Pacific.  Besides  the  new  races 
described  below.  Mv.  Siunuonds  was  aide  to  caiitui'c  the  rare  Eidrpix  caphinitls 
Hew. 

XVMPHALINWE. 

Ridepis   pyrrlnis  libcrins,    n.    subsp. 

?.  Above,  this  race  differs  from  sempraiiius  in  l)eing  paler  and  the  orange 
tornal  patch  of  the  liimlwing  is  not  so  prominent. 

Beneatli,  the  forewing  is  paler,  the  dark  l)ar  across  nuddle  of  cell  is  narrower. 
In  tlie  hindwing  the  central  white  area  is  larger,  the  three,  red-brown,  crescent- 
shaped  spots  towards  the  tornus  are  much  smaller,  the  black  sulitcrminal  spots 
are  faint  and    the    orange-brown  terminal  line    is  very    pale. 

7/«6.— Lord  Howe  Is.,  Feb.,  1915.     One  female. 

When  T  received  this  sjiecimen,  I  at  once  recognised  that  a  distinct  race  in- 
habited the  island,  being  nnich  palea'  above  and  the  markings  beneath  being 
obscure.  Its  chief  difference  is  the  great  reduction  of  the  dark  subterminal  spots 
of  the  hindwing  lieiieath.  There  are  two  other  specimens  recorded  from  the  island, 
but  they  seem  to  have  been  lost.  The  late  Mr.  Geo.  "Masters,  who  !i:id  seen 
tliese  specimens,   ahv.-iys  considered   they   were   different    from  sfiii /iriiniii.'i. 

Hypolimnas   hiDpimita.  n.sp. 

(S.  .\}>ovp.  Forewing-  rich  black;  a  broad  disi'al  liand  l)eyond  <'ell,  from 
oosta  to  vein  3,  white  margined  with  iridescent  purple;  a  band  of  four  subapical 
spots,  white;  sometimes  two  small  discal  white  spots  below  vein  3.  Cilia  white, 
at  veins  black.  Hindwing  rich  black;  a  very  large  central  spot,  iridescent 
purple.      Cilia  white,  at   veins  black. 

Be)irath.  Forewing  red-brown;  tornus  shading  to  l)lack;  markings  :is  ;d)ove 
but  wliite  liaiid   not  margineil  |inrple;  lowest,  nf  suba])ical  spots   and   two   towards 


BY    G.    A.    WATERIIOLSK.  469 

tornus  iliisteil  with  pale  uietallic-blue  scales;  a  series  of  iuterrupted  terminal 
liues  white,  towards  tornus  dusted  with  pale  metallit-blue ;  costa  towards  base 
and  upiier  edge  of  cell  pale  metallic-blue,  extending-  as  two  pale  blue  bars  into 
cell,  the  outer  the  larger;  an  irregular  pale  blue  bantl  beyond  end  of  cell.  Cilia 
white,  at  terminations  of  veins  black.  Hindwing  brown;  costa  and  bar  at  end  of 
cell  red-bro\yn;  basal  half  of  wing  dusted  with  white  scales;  discal  series  of 
spots  pale  metallic  lilue;  tornus  black;  a  series  of  broad  tenninal  lines  white,  to- 
wards tornus  pale  metallic-blue :  a  white  line  on  dorsum  near  tornus,  above  which 
is  an  irregular  pale  blue  area.     Cilia  white,  at  terminations  of  veins  black. 

?  as  in  male,  larger,  more  highly  coloured  beneath.  The  pale  metallic  mark- 
ings in  both   sexes   appear  greenish  in  some  directions. 

Hub. — Waidoi,  Fiji.  Four  specimens  caught  by  Mr.  Sinunonds,  May.  July, 
and  August,  1919.  One  male,  Nasogoto.  Navai.  Fiji,  caught  by  Mr.  E.  ,) . 
Goddard.  Feb..  1905. 

This  species  has  puzzled  me  very  much,  coming  as  it  dues  from  a  locality 
where  the  race  of  H.  bolina  is  extremely  variable,  but  the  different  white  band 
above  and  the  different  underside  to  the  hindwing  do  not  place  it  with  bolina,  of 
which  I  have  numbers  of  Fijian  specimens.  Mr.  Simmonds,  who  has  caught 
bolina,  is  confident  it  is  distinct.  He  tells  me  that  it  is  a  purely  mountain  species, 
lives  in  the  rain  forest  and,  like  all  butterflies  in  Fiji,  it  responds  readily  to  the 
fii-st  glimpse  of  sunshine  and  is  only  found  along  the  rivers,  where  they  rise 
rapidly  to  the  mountains.  At  one  time  1  tliought  it  might  be  an  extreme  eastern 
race  of  II.  alimena. 

Issoria  egista  Cram. 

The  following  races  have  been  described  from  the  South  Pacific, — gaberti  from 
Tahiti,  samoana  from  Samoa,  bowdenia  from  Tonga,  sci/llaria  from  Lifu,  Loyalty 
Is.,  and  shortlandica  from  the  Solomoii  Is.  Of  these,  the  race  from  Samoa  is  the 
most  distinct.  To  these  I  now  add  races  from  the  New  Hebrides  and  Fiji. 
From  the  typical  form  from  the  southern  Moluccas,  the  eastern  races  differ  chiefly 
in  their  jialer  upper  sides,  the  nari'ower  dark  liorflers  to  the  wing's  and  the  much 
smaller  dark  spots  on  the  underside. 

Ifisoria  egista   ritieiinifi.  n.   suhsp. 

c?.  Above.  Forewing  bright  orange;  apex  and  termen  narrowly  black;  bar 
beyond  cell  and  subapical  bar  black.  Hin<hving  bright  orange;  tcrnien  narrowly 
black. 

Beneath.  Forewing  orange-red;  a  series  of  cell  bars  brown;  a  whitish  bar 
beyond  end  of  cell;  between  veins  5  and  6  a  large  whitish  spot;  a  discal  series  of 
pale  bluish  lunules  inwardly  edged  brown.  Hindwing  orange-red;  a  series  of 
pale  bluish  lunules  outwardly  edged  brown;  beyond  is  an  indication  of  a  series  of 
brown  dots;  an  interrupted  brown  subterminal  line  from  apex  to  vein  3. 

Hab. — Labasa.  Yanua  Levu.  Fiji,  Mar..  1908,  caught  by  Mr.  R.   N.  Ross. 

This  race  has  much  narrower  dark  borders  to  the  forewings  above  than  the 
Australian  propinqua  or  scyllaria,  and  on  the  under  side  the  pale  discal  spots 
are  more  prominent,  whilst  the  discal  brown  spots  have  almost  disappeared.  It 
is  intermediate  between  scyllaria  and  samoana. 

Issoria  egista  hebridina,  n.  subsp. 

<?.  This  race  occupies  an  intermediate  place  between  intiensis  and  sci/Uaria. 
Above,  the  bordei-s  to  the  wing's  are  not  so  narrow  as  in   vitiensis,  a  discal  series 


470  NEW    FORMS    OF    BUTTERFLIES    FROM    SOUTH    PACIFIC, 

of  brown  spots  is  imlieated  on  the  torewing-,  and  the  general  colour  is  not  quite  so 
bright . 

Beneath,  the  iliseal  series  ot  dark  spots  is  present  on  both  wings  and  the  pale 
spots  are  not  so  prominent  as  in  tlie  Fijian  race.  In  both  hebridina  and  vitiensis 
the  purplish  suffusion  found  on  the  underside  of  several  other  races  is  absent. 
My  specimens  are  from  Vila,  New  Hebrides. 

LYCAENIDAE. 

Deudorix  epijarbas  diovella,  n.subsp. 

d".  Above.  Forewing  black;  a  central  red  patch  below  cell  in  upper  portion 
of  interspace  between  veins  2  and  3,  and  slightly  extending  above  vein  3 ;  a  slight 
red  scaling  on  vein  la  at  one-third  from  base.  Cilia  black,  ilindwing  red; 
costa  broadly  and  base  black;  dorsum  brown;  termen  and  veins  in  red  area  faintly 
black;  anal  lobe  black,  inwardly  bordered  with  red  and  outwardly  with  metallic- 
blue;  tail  very  short,  brown.     Cilia  red,  towards  tornus  black. 

Beneath.  Forewing  In-own;  a  slightly  darker  bar  at  end  of  cell  and  a  much 
darker  brown  discal  band,  both  faintly  edged  whitish;  dorsum  paler.  Cilia  dark 
brown.  Hindwing  brown;  a  slightly  darker  bar  at  end  of  cell  and  an  irregular, 
darker,  broad,  discal  band  narrowly  edged  white;  a  subcaudal  spot  in  area  2 
black,  outwardly  edged  orange  and  inwardly  metallic-blue;  anal  lobe  black,  out- 
wardly edged  metallic-blue,  inwardly  white;  tornus  above  anal  lobe  irregularly 
metallic-blue.     Cilia  dark  brown. 

i/af).— Suva,  Fiji.     Four  males  caught  by  Mr.  Simmonds,  Feb.,  1920. 

Allied  to  diovis  from  Australia  and  woodfordi  from  Guadalcanar,  Solomon 
Is.,  but  with  even  less  red  on  the  forewing  than  the  latter,  the  tail  shorter  than 
that  of  mathewi  from  the  New  Hebrides.  It  agi-ees  with  the  other  eastern  races 
in  not  having  the  black  spot  of  the  anal  lobe  above  completely  ringed  with  colour, 
and  with  the  figure  of  matJiewi  in  having  the  subcaudal  spot  of  hindwing  be- 
neath crowned  with  metallic-blue,  and  not  completely  ringed  with  colour.  This 
capture  by  Mr.  Simmonds  extends  the  range  of  D.  epijarbas  further  eastward 
than  has  hitherto  been  known. 

PAPILIONIDAE. 

Papilio  macleayatiHs   iiisulano.  n.  subsp. 

?.  Above.  Forewing  brown-black;  l)asal  portion  of  cell  and  ddrsiira  at 
ba.se  pale  green;  a  spot  at  end  of  cell,  a  large  subcostal  spot  at  three-fourths 
and  a  smaller  spot  in  base  of  area  4  gi-een ;  a  series  of  large  subterminal  spots 
cream;  base  of  areas  2  and  la  whitish.  Hindwing  brown-black;  hase  green;  rest 
of  basal  half  of  wing  whitish;  a  series  of  subterminal  spots  cream. 

Beneath.  Forewing  as  above,  but  paler;  green  basal  area  larger  and  sub- 
terminal  spots  obscured.  Hindwing  brown ;  basal  half  gi'een,  outwardly  edged 
white;   subterminal  spots  obscure. 

Hab. — Lord  Howe  Island,  where  the  insect  is  not  uncommon,  but  very  diffi- 
cult to  capture. 

This  race  is  readily  recognised  from  that  found  in  Australia  by  the  much 
larger  subterminal  spots  to  both  wings  above.  I  have  now  seen  a  number  of 
similar  specimens,  all  females,  and  there  is  no  difficulty  in  distinguishing  them 
from  typical  macleayanus. 


BV    G.    A.    WATERHOUSE.  471 

HESPERIDAE. 
Badamia  exclamationis  subflava,  n.  subsp. 

3.  Aboce.  l''orewmg  biuwii ;  eosta  lined  yellow-browu ;  a  large  spot  about 
middle  of  cell,  yellowish  hyaline;  a  pair  of  large  discal  spots  in  areas  2  and  3, 
yellowish  hyaline;  sometimes  a  minute  subapical  dot  yellowish  hyaline;  some- 
times an  orange  spot  just  above  middle  of  vein  la.  Cilia  brown.  Hindwing 
brown;  central  area  extending  towai'ds  dorsum,  yellow-brown.  Cilia  yellow- 
browu  . 

Beneath  Forewing  yellow-browu;  hyaline  spots  as  above,  margined  yel- 
lowish ;  area  la  towards  base  brown-black ;  large  patch  towards  tornus  yellowish. 
Cilia  brown.  Hindwing  yellowish-brown;  indications  of  a  paler  discal  band,  end- 
ing above  tornus  in  a  large  yellow  spot;  towards  tomus  broadly  brown-black. 
Cilia  yellowish-brown. 

Hah. — Waidoi,  biji,  two  specimens  caught  by  Jlr.  Simmonds,  Nov.,  1910;  Ba 
Mts.,  Fiji,  two  specimens  caught  by  Mr.  L.  V.  Waterhouse,  .Jan.,  1906. 

This  subspecies  has  a  much  yellower  appearance  than  any  specimens  from 
the  large  number  I  have  from  both  within  and  without  Australia.  Mr.  Simmonds' 
specimens  are  in  fine  condition,  and  he  writes  that  on  a  trip  in  Fiji,  he  saw  this 
skipper  in  company  with  a  number  of  Parata  hiluriata.  Between  6  and  7.30  a.m. 
numbers  of  skippers  were  seen  passing  the  boat ;  the  morning  was  wet,  the  wind 
oflE  shore,  and  the  distance  Ijetween   two  and  four  miles. 


472. 


OKDINAKY  MONTHLY  MEETING, 

27tli  OUTUBEK,  l'J20. 
Mr.    J.    J.    Fletcher,   M.A.,  B.Sc,  President,  in  the   Chair-. 

The  Presideul  aunouueed  the  receipt  of  a  very  valuable  addition  to  the  library, 
of  books  and  pictures  bequeathed  to  the  Society  by  the  late  Mr.  ¥.  M.  Clement*, 
F.L.S.,  F.Z.S. 

The  President  ottered  the  con^-atulatious  ot  members  to  Professor  Sir  Edge- 
worth  David,  K.B.E.,  (in  absentia),  and  Mr.  J.  H.  Campbell,  M.B.E.,  on  the 
Honours  recently  conferred  on  them  by  their  inclusion  in  the  British  Empire 
Order. 

The  President  announced  tliat  the  Council  is  prepared  to  receive  applications 
for  four  Linnean  Macleay  Fellowships,  tenable  for  one  year  from  1st  April,  1921, 
from  qualified  Candidates.  Apphcatious  should  be  lodged  with  the  Secretary, 
who  will  afford  all  necessary  information  to  intending  candidates,  not  later  than 
30th  November,  1920. 

T'he  Donations  and  Exchanges  received  since  the  previous  Monthly  Meeting 
(29tli  September,  1920),  amounting  to  7  Vols.,  (33  Parts  or  Nos.,  1  Bulletin,  5 
Reports  and  18  Pamphlets,  etc.,  received  from  40  Societies  and  Institutions  and 
one  ijrivate  donor,  were  laid  upon  the  table. 

NOTES  AND  EXHIBITS. 

Ml'.  W.  W.  Froggatt  exhibited  a  series  of  Hies  from  India,  including  Vhry- 
somyia  hesziuna  Villeneuve,  C.  flaviceps  Walker,  C.  nijifacies  (=  C.  albiceps 
W.),  C.  nigricepa  Patton,  Lucilia  aerenitisiiiia  Fabr.  and  L.  cruggii  Fatton.  A 
number  of  these  cause  cutaneous  myiasis  in  man  and  animals  in  India.  Also 
specimens  of  Bibio  imitator  from  suburban  gardens. 

Mr.  G.  H.  Hardy  exhibited  a  pair  of  flies,  Chrysomyza  aenea  Fabr.  taken 
in  a  garden  at  Haberfield,  28th  March,  1920.  The  species  is  new  to  the  Australian 
fauna. 

Mr.  Waterhouse  exhibited  the  first  specimen  of  Heteroiiympha  solandri 
Waterh.  reared  from  the  egg.  The  history  of  the  specimen  is  that  a  female  was 
caught  at  Mt.  Kosciusko  on  15th  February,  1920,  and  on  dissection  of  the  ab- 
domen four  eggs  were  obtained;  one  only  was  fertile  and  this  emerged  on  28th 
February  and  was  looked  after  very  carefully;  the  larva  jjupated  at  Sydney  on 
8th  September,  and  a  male  emerged  cm  10th  October,  ahout  three  months  earlier 
than  the  usual  time  of  appearance  at  Mt.  Kosciusko.  The  female  parent,  tiio  cast 
larval  heads  from  tlic  2nd,  3ril,  nud  final  instars  and  the  pupal  skin  wi're  also 
shown . 

(Printed   off  .31st  October,   1920.) 


I'ltdi'.  LiNx.  Soc.  X.s.W.  i:)2(). 


Pl/ATK    Win. 


.iiitviidiilopltylluin  ti/wi'idgt'i ,  n,  gen.  et  sp. 


PrO(;.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1920. 


Plate  xix. 


'iii^li^   r  iSi-*. 


Lower  Carboniferous  Fossils  from  S.E.  Habbinboon. 


Proo.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1920. 


Plate  xx. 


Lower  r'uTlionit'erou.s  Fossils  tVoiri  iS.E.  Hiililiiiiliooii. 


Fiwc.  LiN.v.  Soc.  N.S.W.,  1020. 


PlATK   XXI. 


Lower  Carbunii'eruus  Fossils  from  S.E.  Biilil.iiuliuou. 
Silicitied  Koots  from  nt'iir  Curraljiiljula. 


Piioc.  Lkn.  Soc.  N.S.W.  1920. 


Platis  xxu. 


■S^Ai^Y  (3i^ 


Lowpv  Carliriiiifei'ous  Fossils  fi-rnii  Sonicrton,  HiiMiinlionn  and  Carroll. 


pROC.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W.,  1920. 


Plate    xsni. 


Lower  Carliouiferous  Fossils  from  Somerton  District. 


Prop.  T,in-n.  Soe.  N.S.W.  102(1 


Pl>ATK    XXIV. 


-^^  \. 


V 


1  (X4) 


^^i;«^ 


^•^.^ 


:,:^ 


(XI3) 


(X4) 


I; 


7 


'% 


(xI8) 


^# 


V 


(XI8) 


6       (xl8) 


-•'■\ 


>^k 


A 


(x  18) 


8    \ 


/ 


^-^^"^       (x78) 
FC.  ad  nab  ael 


10 

Lower  Carbouif'proiis  Fossils  from  Halibinboou  and  Mooroowarra ;   and  (tlafiated  Pebbles 
from  Browne's  Creek  and  Rocky  Creek. 


Pnnr.  Liw.  Soo.  N.S.W.  1020. 


Pt.ATR    XW. 


Cai-boniferous  Rocks'from'tlie  Currabubula  Di;trict. 


NOTES    AXD    EXHIBITS.  473 

ilr.  E.  Clieel  exhibited  a  series  of  specimens  collected  iu  the  coastal  district 
from  Sydney  to  the  Upper  Clarence,  also  at  Hill  Top  and  on  the  Blue  Mountains 
including  Boro«/«  ledifotia  J.  Gaz.  ;  B.  ledi folia  vnr.  ninmarinifolia  (B.  rosmar- 
jnifolia  A.  Cunn.)  witli  pure  white  flowers  from  Hill  Top  (E.  Cheel,  July, 
1914),  Bell  (Miss  H.  Greg-son,  Sept.,  1914).  Mount  Wilson  (.1.  H.  Maiden,  Dec., 
1914),  near  Cowan  Station  (W.  F.  Blakely  and  D.  W.  C  Shiress,  Sept.,  1919), 
and  specimens  with  double  flowers  from  Hill  Top  (E.  Clieel,  Aug.,  1915);  B. 
ledifolia  var.  trijiln/Ua  (B.  triphylla  Sieber)  from  Port  Hacking  (W.  Slade, 
Aug.,  1914),  Kurra.iong  Heights  (H.  Dixson,  Sept.,  1897),  National  Park  C^I. 
Bell,  Aug.,  1901),  Woy  Woy  (Miss  A.  C.  Johnstone,  July,  1916),  and  doulile- 
flowered  specimen  from  Lindfield  (E.  G.  Jacobs,  Aug.,  1913);  Boronia  phniata 
Sm.  with  double  flowers  from  Kedfern  (Mrs.  Boyce,  Nov.,  1900)  and  Hornsby 
(W.  r.  Blakely,  Apr.,  1914);  Eriostemon'  latice<ilatus  Gaertn.  with  pure  white 
flowers,  Tomago  (Lady  AVindeyer,  Sept.,  1903),  Kose  Bay  (Oct.,  1906),  Nelson's 
Bay  (J.  L.  Boorman,  Aug.,  1911)  ;  E.  Crowei  F.  v.  M.  with  pure  white  flowers 
from  Hornsby  (W.  F.  Blakely  and  D.  W.  C.  Shiress,  Feb.,  1920);  Keiniedya 
ruhicunda  Vent,  with  greenish-white  flowers,  Wahroonga  (M.  S.  Barnett,  Sept., 
1920);  and  ('<?r<it<ipet(duin  cjuinmiferum  Sm.  with  white  flowers  from  between 
Hornsby  and  Dural   (W.   J.  Pitty,  Dec,  1919). 

Mr.  Cheel  also  exhibited  on  behalf  of  Miss  A.  A.  Brewster  specimens,  and 
a  chart,  showing  doubling  of  flowers  and  deterioration  of  the  stamens  of  Erios- 
temon lanaeolatiis  from  Maroubra  (October,  1920) .  In  one  specimen  the  stamens 
had  multiplied  to  16;  in  the  more  changed  flowers  the  imniber  varied  from  1  to  4, 
and  in  one  case  there  was  left  only  a  single  anther  seated  on  one  of  the  inner 
petals.  In  two  flowers  tlie  pistil  was  absent  and  5  small  petals  were  present  in 
place  of  the  carpels;  in  another  tlie  five  degenerated  carpels  were  partly  green 
and  partly  pink. 

Mr.  -John  Mitchell  exhibited  a  series  of  Sihirian  and  Devonian  brnrhioi.ods 
from  N.S.W. 


474 


REVISION  OF   AUSTRALIAN  LEPIDOPTERX—LIPABIDAE. 

By  A.  Jefperis  Turner.  M.D..  F.E.S. 

Whatever  tlie  cause,  the  study  of  the  Bombycine  Families  of  Lepidoptera  has 
been  strangely  neglect  ed.  No  revision  of  the  world-fauna  of  these  groups  has 
appeared,  although  from  the  smaller  number  of  species  this  would  l>e  an  easier 
task  than  it  has  been  with  the  Noctiddae,  Geometridae,  Pyralidae,  lortricidae, 
and  Tineidae.  A  revision  of  the  genera  is  badly  needed,  and  there  has  been 
even  considerable  confusion  as  to  the  families.  This  perhaps  is  one  of  the  rea- 
sons why  they  have  been  neglected,  though  it  has  been  to  a  large  extent  removed 
by  the  researches  of  Sir  G.  Hampson,  published  in  the  tu'st  volume  of  his  Cata- 
logue of  the  Lepi(kjptera  Phalaenae  and  in  his  Moths  of  India.  Another  dififi- 
eulty  with  regard  to  the  Australian  species  is  that  so  many  of  them  have  been 
described  by  authors  innocent  of  morphological  knowledge,  and  are  therefore 
difficult  of  recognition.  Fortunately,  I  ha\e  been  able  to  examine  many  Aus- 
tralian types  in  the  British  Museum,  and  nearly  all  of  the  older  species  have 
now  been  identified,  and  can  be  referred  to  their  right  positions.  Since  then  I 
have  examined  not  only  my  own  collection  and  that  of  the  Queensland  Museum, 
but  also  many  specimens  sent  to  me  by  Mr.  George  LyeU,  of  Victoria,  by  Mr. 
J.  A.  Kershaw  from  the  National  Museum,  Melbourne,  and  by  Mr.  A.  M.  Lea 
from  the  South  -\ustralian  Museum.  Thanks  to  their  generous  help,  and  to 
the  permission  of  the  Directors  of  these  Museums,  a  very  large  amount  of  ma- 
terial has  been  available  for  the  purposes  of  this  paper. 

Family  LIPARIDAE. 

This  family  has  also  been  known  a-s  the  Li/maiitriadae.  The  older  name  was 
abandoned  under  the  impression  that  the  generic  name  Liparix  Oehs.  was  pre- 
occupied, Imt  it  appears  that  this  preoccupation  was  pre-Linnean,  and  conse- 
quently inoperative.  Formerly  I  enlarged  the  conc-eption  of  the  family  (Trans. 
Ent.  Soc,  1904,  p.  470)  to  include  the  Tlypsidae  and  Anihelidae  as  subfamilies, 
but  I  am  now  of  opinion,  for  reasons  which  will  be  given  presently,  that  the 
three  groups  are  better  regarded  as  three  families. 

The  Liparidae  may  be  defined  as  fdllows: — Tongue  absent.  Antennae  bi- 
pectinate  to  apex  in  d,  and  nearly  always  in  2  also.  Head,  thorax,  abdomen,  and 
femora  hairy.  Forewings  with  1  (usually  known  as  Ic)  absent.  5  approximated  to  4 
at  origin,  8  and  9  always  stalked,  either  from  cell  or  areole.  Hindwings  with 
frenulum  present ;  1  absent,  discocellulars  angled.  ,5  arising  from  below  angle  and 
apjiroximated  to  4,  6  and  7  usually  stalked.  8  approximated  and  usually  con- 
nected with  cell  somewliere  between  i  and  middle,  i-arely  anastomosing. 


BV  A.   JEFFERIS   TUEXEIt.  4lO 

The  absc'Ui-i'  of  a  ttmgm',  thf  aiiproxiiiuitidn  of  the  origin  of  the  second 
branch  of  the  median  (vein  5)  to  the  cubitus,  and  the  connection  of  the  sub- 
costal of  the  hindwing  with  the  cell  about  its  middle,  are  sufficient  to  distinguish 
this  family.  In  all  these  respects  except  the  first  it  agrees  with  the  Hypsidae. 
Its  next  nearest  ally  is  the  Noctuidae,  the  distinguishing  point,  apart  from  tlie 
presence  of  a  tongue,  being  that  in  the  latter  the  subcostal  anastomoses  with  the 
cell  in  the  hindwing  near  its  base.  This  basal  anastomosis  is  present  in  the 
genus  aptly  named  by  Mcyrick  Haplopseiistix  (for  it  is  an  evident  deceiver),  as  to 
whose  correct  position  there  has  been  some  difference  of  opinion.  Tlie  presence 
of  a  tongue,  although  short  and  weakly  developed,  confirms  the  conclusion  that 
Haplopseustis  belongs  to  the  Noctuidae;  for,  although  the  presence  of  a  tong-no 
in  a  primitive  gemis  of  Liparidae  would  be  a  not  impossible  disco\-ery,  the  vena- 
tion of  the  forewing  of  Haplopseustis  shows  that  it  is  not  piimiti\e.  Tlie  con- 
nection between  the  hindwing  cell  and  subcostal  in  this  and  other  families  is 
really  due  to  the  persistence  of  the  first  branch  of  the  radial,  wliicli  has  been 
shortened  by  their  approximation.  Sometimes  the  \eiii  is  not  distinctly  de- 
veloped between  the  approximated  points,  or  there  may  be  an  actual  anastomosis 
as  in  Aeyplias.  In  the  more  primitive  genera  a  typical  areole  is  present  as  in 
most  Xoetuidae.  In  many  cases  this  has  been  lost  by  coalescence,  leaving  7,  8, 
9,  10  stalked,  an  intermediate  condition  being  preserved  in  the  African  genus 
Lacipa,  which  has  a  small  areole  from  which  proceeds  the  common  stalk  of 
these  veins.  But  the  areole  may  also  be  lost  by  the  obsolescence  of  the 
base  of  vein  9,  lea^-ing  10  disconnected,  as  sometimes  occurs  in  Iropoca.  In 
Bedoa  the  areole  becomes  long  and  narrow,  the  allied  Leucoma  from  Europe  and 
Eii-om  differ  from  this  in  10  having  become  disconnected.  There  is  a  tendency 
in  this  family  for  the  obsolescence  of  the  wings  in  the  2;  this  occurs  in  three  of 
our  genera    (f^iiiinh".  Orgyia.  Iropoca). 

The  family  is  a  fairly  large  one,  and  in  Australia  there  are  60  species,  which  I 
refer  to  18  genera.  This  is  a  larger  number  of  species  than  is  found  in  the  Palae- 
aretic  region,  and  in  the  Nearctic  region  the  family  is  still  more  poorly  repre- 
sented. On  the  other  hand  Hampson's  Moths  of  India  contains  a  larger  number, 
and  Janse's  check-list  of  the  Moths  of  Soutli  Africa  records  twice  as  many  spe- 
cies. The  group  is  most  developed  in  warm  regions,  and  most  of  our  species 
are  from  the  coasts  of  North  Australia,  Queensland  and  New  South  Wales. 
Only  seven  species  (Porthesia,  Oligeria,  Aeyplias,  Orgyia)  come  from  South-east 
Australia,  and  onlv  two  (Aeyplias,  Orgyia)  come  from  the  South-west  of  the  con- 
tinent.     Our  genera  may  be  divided  into  three  or  four  natural  groups:— 

1.  Those  witli  a  normal  areole,  Laelia.  Dasychira,  Olene.  Orgyia,  widely  dis- 
tributed genera,  which  are  very  scantily  rejiresented  here,  together  with  the  inono- 
typical  Iropoca  and  Axiologa. 

2.  A  small  gi-oup  in  which  the  areole  tends  to  obsolescence,  first  by  becomina- 
long  and  narrow  as  in  Bedoa,  and  then  by  10  becoming  disconnected  as  in  Eazora 
and  in  the  exotic  genus  Leucoma.     Of  this  we  have  only  two  species. 

3.  A  much  larser  group  in  which  the  areole  has  disappeared  liy  coalescence, 
leaving  7.  8,  9,  10  stalked.  This  may  be  divided  into  (a)  the  Lymaiitria  group, 
containing  also  Eiiome  and  Dura,  and  (h)  the  Euproctis  gi-oup  containing  also 
Heracula,  Habrophylla,  Aeyplias,  Oligeria.  Porthesia,  and  Icta .  This  last  is  the 
only  group  at  all  largely  represented  in  Australia,  where  it  comprises  three- 
fifths  of  the  whole  number  of  species. 


4/0 


KEVISIOX    DP    ATSTUALIAN'     I.KPIDOPTKHA-l.lPAIMUAK, 


1.  Fore  wings  without  areole 2. 

Forewings  with  areole    ( 10  sometimes  disconnected 

in   Iiopoca) 12. 

2.  Forewings  with  7,  S,  9.  10  stalked,  or  9  absent  and 

7,  S.  10  stalked 3. 

Fore-.vings  with  7,  S.  9.  stalked.   10  separate   . .    . .  Jiu~oi\i. 

3.  Hindwings  abbreviated,  cell     i      Ida. 

'  Hindwings  and  cell  normal 4 . 

i.   Hindwings  with  4  absent Porl/icsid. 

Hindwings  with  4  present : o- 

.5.   Hindwings  with  S  anastomosing  with  c=ll  from  J  to  i       6. 

Hindwings    with    S    appru.\imated    and    connected 

with  cell  at  a  point  only <S. 

o.   Forewings  with   9  absent 7. 

Forewings  with  9  present Habrophylla. 

7.   Posterior  tibiae  without  middle-spurs Oligeria. 

Posterior   tibiae   with  middle-spurs      Acyplias 

S.   Forewings  with  7  arising  long  before  10 9. 

Forewings   with    10   arising   before,   or   opposite,   or 

at  least  near  7 10. 

9.   Palpi  short  or   moderate,  porrect  or  oblique    . .     . .  Juipioclis. 

Palpi  long,  erect,  reaching  vertex Heraciila. 

10.  Forewings    with     11    anastomosing     or     connected 

with  12 Dtiya. 

Forewings  with  11  free 11. 

11.  Posterior  tibiae  without  middle-spurs,  V  with  wings 

much  aborted I-'.nonic. 

Posterior    tibiae    with    middle-spurs,    V    with    wings 

normally  developed /.yiiiaiilria. 

12.  Forewings    with    areole   long    and    narrow,    7   from 

about  middle A'edoa. 

Forewings  with  areole  normal,  7  from  its  extremity     13. 

13.  Forewings    with  7.  S,  9    stalked  from  areole,  or    10 

disconnected.  $  apterous 14. 

Forewings  with  7  approximated  or  connate    (\ery 
rarely  short-stalked  i,  'i  with  wings  developed  ..    ..      1-"). 

14.  Posterior   tibiae   without   middle-spurs i)i"yi(t. 

Posterior  tibiae  with  middle-spurs Iropoia. 

1.5     Forewings  with   11  anastomosing  with    12 Axiologa. 

Forewings  with   11  free 16. 

IG.   Palpi  with  terminal  joint  very  short  or  concealed  . .      17. 

Palpi   with   terminal  joint  well-developed I.ailia. 

17.   Abdomen    with    dorsal    crest    on    second    segment, 

palpi  with  second  joint  strongly  dilated Olene. 

Abdomen  without  crests,  palpi  not  dilated /)asyi/iira. 

Gen.   1.      1  r  T  A. 

/(•?((,    Wlk..  List   Lcp.   Uril.    .\Iiis.,    iv..   p.   !)■_>•_'. 

Head  and  lluirax  with  ajuiresscd  hairs;  Irons  thit.  I'alpi  very  slu)rt.  \mr- 
reet;  terminal  joint  minute.  Tiiorax  and  al)douu'n  not  ircstcd ;  abdomen  hairy, 
tuft  in  c?  large.  Tiliial  spurs  short  and  stout;  posterior  tibiae  witli  hotli  pairs 
present.     Forewins;-s  lonu  and  narrow;   without  areole,  2  from    *, ,  3  from  .sliortly 


Br   A.    JEFFKRIS    TUIJN'ER. 


477 


before  angle.  4  and  5  connate  from  angle,  C  irom  upper  angle  nearly  connate 
with  7,  7,  8,  9,  10  stalked.  11  from  shortly  before  angle;  discoeellulars  strongly 
angled  inwards,  hlndwiugs  nearly  as  broad  as  forewings  Imt  much  shorter;  cell 
very  long  (1),  discoeellulars  strongly  oblique.  2  from  %  3  and  4  stalked  from 
angle,  5  curved  at  base  and  somewhat  apiiroximated  to  4,  6  and  7  stalked  from 
upper  angle,  8  anastomosing  or  connected  with  cell  about  middle . 

An  isolated  genus  with  curiously  elongate  forewings  and  alibreviated  hind- 
wings,  almost  zygaeniform. 

Head  orange fulviceps. 

Head  blackish tanaopis. 

1.        ICTA   FULVICEPS. 

Ida  fulviceps  Wlk..  List  Leji.  Brit.  Mus..  iv..  p.  922. 

c?.  28-29  mm  Head  brownish-orange.  Palpi  i;  brownish-orange.  An- 
tennae bro-miish-orange:  pectinations  in  c?  9.  Thorax  dark-fuscous;  tegnlae  and 
extreme  bases  of  patagia  brownish-orange.  Abdomen  dark-fuscous;  tuft  brown- 
ish-orange. Legs  ochreous;  middle  and  posterior  femora  and  tibiae  mostly 
fuscous.  Forewings  narrow-elongate,  costa  straight  to  near  apex,  there  gently 
arched,  apex  rounded,  termen  very  obliquely  rounded;  fuscous;  costal  edge  nar- 
rowly ochreous;  cilia  fuscous.  Hindwings  about  *  length  of  forewings.  termen 
rounded  ;   fuscous ;  cilia  fuscous. 

Two  examples  in  the  British  Museum,  one  labelled  "Australasia,"  the  other 
"New  Holland."  The  locality  requires  confirmation,  but  probably  like  the  fol- 
lowing, it  comes  from  the  north  of  the  continent. 

2.        TCTA    TANAOPIS,    n  .  Sp  . 

TavacoTTic;,  elongate. 

c?.  30  mm.  Head,  palpi,  and  thorax  blackish.  Antennae  blackish;  pectina- 
tions in  c?  10.  Abdomen  reddish-orange;  basal  segment,  a  median  dorsal  line, 
and  underside  blackish.  Legs  blackish.  Forewing's  elongate,  spathulate.  costa 
sinuate,  slightly  concave  to  J,  then  arched,  apex  rounded,  termen  very  obliquely 
rounded,  termen  as  long  as  dorsum;  blackish;  cilia  blackish.  Hindwings  short. 
about  4  length  of  dorsum  of  forewing.  tennen  rounded,  tornus  somewhat  pro- 
jecting; thinly  sealed;  fuscous;  on  dorsum  pale-ochreous ;  cilia  fuscous. 

Type    in  National  Museum.   Melbourne. 

N.Q.  :  riaudie  River,  in  Febmary;  one  specimen  taken  by  ^Mr.  .T.  A.  Ker- 
shaw. 

Gen.  2.     P  o  n  Tii  k  s  i  a. 

Porthesia.  Stph..  111.  Brit.  Ent..  ii.,  1829.  p.   65. 

Palpi  moderate,  porreet;  second  .ioint  sometimes  hairy  beneath;  terminal 
.ioint  very  short.  Thoi-ax  and  abdomen  without  crests;  tuft  lai'ge.  especially  in 
9.  Posterior  tibiae  with  two  pairs  of  spurs.  Forewing-s  without  areole ;  7.  8.  9, 
10  stalked,  7  arising  from  before  10,  6  connate  or  short-stalked  with  the  pre- 
ceding veins.  Hindwings  with  discoeellulars  angled.  3  and  4  coincident.  5  ap- 
proximated or  connate.  6  and  7  stalked.  8  closely  approximated  to  cell  near  or 
beyond  middle,  and  connected  with  it . 

Type.    P.  simili.s  Fuesl.  from  Europe. 


■i'S  nKVISION"    OF    AUSTRALIAN     I.KPIDOPTERA-LIPARIDAK, 

1.  Wings  white 2. 

Wings  more  or  less  ochreous  or  orange 5. 

2.  Dorsal    edge    of     forewings    with     long,    spathulate, 

ochreous  scales 3. 

Dorsal  edge  of  forewings  without  ochreous  scales  ..  4. 

3     Dorsum  of  abdomen  partly  blackish eiil/nsaiia. 

Dorsum  of  abdomen  not  blackish parado.ra. 

4.  Dorsum  of  abdomen,  except  base,  blackish iiielaiiosoiua. 

Dorsum    of   abdomen    ochreous.    bases    of   segments 

fuscous alicua. 

Dorsum  of  abdomen  whitish galactopii. 

5.  Forewings  suffused  with  dark-fuscous    iiielaiiibap/ies. 

Forewings   not   suffused  with  dark-fuscous     6. 

6.  Forewings  without  transverse  lines 7. 

Forewings  with  pale  transverse  lines S. 

7.  Forewings   often    with  pale   terminal  fascia,    termen 

slightly  oblique fiwhrialn. 

Forewings    without    pale     terminal     fascia,    termen 

strongly  oblique xntlioptera. 

S.   Forewings  very  pale  ochreous,  lines  indistinct   ..    ..  acatluirta. 

Forewings  dark-ochreous  or  orange 9. 

9.    Forewings  with  pale  spots  on  termen Irispila. 

Forewings  without  pale  spots lutea. 

3.       PORTHESIA    EUTHYSAXA. 

Porthesia  euthnimui  Turn.,  Trans.  Roy.  See.  S.  Aust.,  xxvi-  ]ii(l2.  p.  175. 

The  sexes   are  similar. 

Q. :  Mount   Tambourine;   N.S.W. :   Ebor. 

5.     Porthesia  paradoxa. 

Cliioiiophu.-<ina  paradoxa  Butl.,  Trans.  Ent.   See.,  1886,  p.  385;  Porthexia  patuihra 
Turn.,  Trans.  Roy.  Soe.,  S.  Aust..  1902,  p.  176. 
There  is  nothing  paradoxical  about  this  species.     I  have  examined   Butler's 
type;  it  has  the  ordinary  structure  of  the  ffenus. 

Q.  :  Rockhampton,  Brisbane,  Mt)nnt  Tambourine,  Coolangatta;  N.S.W. : 
Sydney.  Bnlli. 

5.     Porthesia  melaxcsoma. 

Porthesia  melaiiosoma  Butl..  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  (5),  ix..  p.  87;  I'lirthcda 
mi.iid  Butl.,  loc.  fit..  11.  88. 

c?  $.  .34-40  unn.  Hea<l.  thorax,  and  antennae  white.  P:ilpi  and  pci-tus 
blackisii.  Abdomen  blackish;  dorsum  of  two  ba.sal  segments  white;  apices  of  seg- 
ments on  underside  white;  tuft  in  c?  white,  sometimes  ochreous-tinged.  in  V 
ochreous.  Legs  white;  anterior  and  middle  paii-s  partly  fuscous;  in  c?,  anterior 
tibiae  and  part  of  two  basal  tar.sal  .joints  ochreous.  Wings  white:  in  c?.  costa  of 
forewings  on   underside  suffused   with   fuscous. 

Vic:  Beaconsfield.  Moe,  Gisbcmie,  Forrest;   Tas. :   Launceston. 

f>.     Porthesia  alieva. 

Portheaia   alieiw.  But!..  Trans.   Ent.  Soc,  1886,   p.  386. 

<?.  Head  and  thorax  white.  Palpi  whitish-ochreous.  upper  surface  near 
ba«e  fuscous.  Abdomen  jiale-oclueous;  bases  of  segments  fuscous  on  dorsum; 
beneath  wholly  ochreous.  Wings  white;  underside  of  hindwings  jiartly  ochreous- 
tinged  .  , 


BY  A.   JEFFERIR  TURNER.  479 

These    iiavtieulars  were   noted  from  tlie  British    IMuseum   type.     I  have  seen 
no  other  example. 
Q. :  Peak  Downs. 

7.      PORTHESIA    GALACTOPIS. 

Porthesia  galactopig.  Turn..  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  S.  Aust.,  xxvi.,  1902,  p.  176. 

N.Q.:  Prince  of  Wales  Island,  Cairns,  Mareeba,  Townsville ;  Q. :  Gayndah, 
Brisbane,  Southport,  Coolangatta. 

S.     Porthesia    xuthoptera,  n.sp. 

5o'j6o7t7£po; ,   ta'svny-winged. 

(j'.  24  mm.  'i.  28-38  mm.  Head,  thorax,  palpi,  antennae,  abdomen  and 
legs  oehreous.  Forewings  triangular,  rather  narrow,  termen  strongly  oblique; 
ochreous  without  markings;  cilia  oehreous.     Hindwing-s  similar,  in  c?  paler. 

Differs  from  the  following  in  the  sexes  being  of  the  same  colour. 

N.Q.:  Kuranda.  near  Cairns,  one  2  received  from  Mr.  F.  P.  Dodd;  Stan- 
nary Hills,  one  S,  two  $  received  from  Dr.    T.  Bancroft. 

9.     Porthesia  fijibriata. 

Teara  fimhriata.  Luc  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.   Wales,   1891,  p.  285:  Porthesia  fm- 
briata.  Turn.,   Trans.   Roy.   Soc.   S.   Aust.,  xxvi.,   1902,  p.   176. 

The  primary  character  given  in  the  tabulation  suffices  to  distinguish  only 
the  typical  form  of  the  c?.  There  is  another  form  nearly  as  common,  which  has 
the  forewings  wholly  ochreous.  This  can  be  distinguished  from  .luthoptera  by 
the  forewings  being  proportionately  broader,  with  less  oblique  termen .  The  ?  is 
whitish,  has  narrower  forewing-s,  and    can    scarcely  be    distinguished  from  gatac- 

topis. 

Q. :  Stradbroke  Island,  Coolangatta.     Attached  to  Banksia  serratifolia. 

10.     Porthesia  acatharta. 

Porthesia  acatharta,  Turn.,  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  S.  Aust.,  xxx.,  1906,  p.  124. 

Termen  of  forewing  with  long  spathnlate  ochreous  scales. 
N.A.:  Port  Darwin:  X.Q.:   Cairns. 

11.     Porthesia  TRispiLA,  n .  sp . 
-pioTiiXoi;,  three-spotted. 

c?.  25-27  mm.  Head,  palpi,  and  antennae  pale-ochreous .  Thorax  and 
abdomen  ochreous.  Legs  whitish-ochreous.  Forewings  triangular,  costa  moder- 
ately arched,  apex  rounded,  termen  bowed,  oblique;  pale-ochreous  irrorated,  ex- 
cept towards  costa,  with  brown-f uscons ;  absence  of  irroration  leaves  two  trans- 
verse lines  and  three  terminal  spots;  first  line  from  i  costa  to  beyond  i  dorsum, 
at  first  outwardly-enrved,  then  sinuate:  second  line  from  f  costa  to  beyond  |  dor- 
sum, similar  in  form  to  first  line:  large  pale-ochreous  spots  at  apex,  above  mid- 
termen,  and  above  tornus:  cilia  pale-ochreous,  bases  whitish,  barred  with  fuscous 
on  midtermen  and  tornus.     Hindwings  and  eilia  whitish.     Underside  whitish. 

N.Q.  :  Kuranda,  near  Cairns:  two  specimens  received  from  Mr.  F.  P.  Dodd. 


4S0  REVISION'    OF    AUSTRAMAX     l.KI'IDOPTKRA-LIPARIDAK. 

12.        PORTHKSIA   .MKI.AJIl'.APHES,    11. Sp. 
(xsXatipacpr,; ,   Oark-eyetl. 

6.  28  mm.  HeaJ  ami  tliorax  fuscous,  with  some  oclireous  hairs.  Palpi 
and  antennae  fuseous.  Abdomen  dark-fuseous,  tuft  and  undei-side  oehreous. 
Legs  oehreous  mixed  witli  fuseous.  Forewings  triang-uhir,  costa  gently  arched, 
more  strongly  so  near  base,  apex  rounded,  termen  shghtly  bowed,  ol)li<jue;  oehre- 
ous, thickly  irrorated  with  dark-fuscous;  a  large  basal  patch  mostly  fuscous;  a 
suffused,  fuscous,  subterminal  baud  with  an  acute,  median,  posterior  tooth ;  cilia 
fuscous,  apices  partly  oehreous.  Hindwings  with  termen  rounded;  deep  oehreous, 
with  slight  fuseous  irroration;  cilia  oehreous,  with  some  fuscous  admixture. 
Undereide  oehreous . 

Type   in  Coll.  Lyell. 

Vie.:  Ocean  Grange,  near  Sale,  in  March;,  mw  specimen. 

13.        PORTHESIA    LUTEA. 

Botiihijx  lutea.  Fab.,  Syst.,  Ent.,  p.  574;  Arta.ia  chri/sojiJdla.  Wlk..  List  Lep.  Rrit. 
Mus.,  xxxii.,  p.  334;  Arlcua  iolimtn,  ^[eyr..  Trans.  Rov.  Soc.  S.  Aust., 
XV.,  1891,   p.   194. 

£?.  23-32  mm.  $.  32-3G  mm.  Head,  thora.x,  and  abdomen  orange-yeUow, 
rather  paler  in  $.  Palpi  pale-ochreous,  apices  fuscous.  j^jitennae  orange- 
yellow,  paler  in  ?,  pectinations  fuscous.  Leg-s  orange-yellow;  tarsi  pale-oehreous. 
Forewings  broadly  triangular,  more  elongate  in  ?,  costa  moderately  arched,  apex 
rounded,  termen  slightly  oblique;  orange-yellow,  paler  in  ?;  two  whitish,  slightly 
denticulate,  transverse  lines,  rarely  obsolete;  first  from  r^  costa  to  -j  dorsum, 
angled  outwards  above  middle ;  second  from  |  costa  to  %  dorsum  outwardly  curved, 
slightly  sinuate  towards  dorsum;  cilia  orange-yellow.  Hindwings  and  cilia 
orange-yello\\-. 

lobrota  is  a  much  darker  form,  the  forewing-s  ochreous-brown,  the  himhving's 
fuscous.     Intermediate  examples  occur. 

N.A.:  Pt.  Darwin;  N.Q.:  Cairns.  Atherton,  Stannary  Hills.  Dunk  Tslan.l, 
Ingham,  Towns\-ille;  Q.  :  Rockhampton,  Gympie,  Nambour,  Brisbane,  Stradbroke 
Island.      Also  from  New  Guinea. 

Gen .    3 .      0  l  i  ( ;  k  i;  i  a.    n . gen . 

oXiyTipioq,  sniiUl. 

Palpi  minute.  Antennae  in  c?  short  (less  than  J),  strongly  bipectinate  to 
apex.  Posterior  tibiae  without  middle  s|)urs.  Forewing's  without  areole,  9 
absent  (coincident  with  8),  7,  8,  10  stalked.  Id  arising  before  7.  Hindwings  with 
3  and  4  connate  or  stalked,  5  separate,  0  and  7  stalked,  8  anastomosing  with  cell 
from  before  middle  to  J. 

A  development  of  Aci/phag  distinguished  by  the  uuuute  pal])i  and  Idss  of 
middle-spurs . 

14.     Oliceria  iiemicai-i.a. 

Orgyia  hemicaUn.  Low.,  Trans.   Roy.  Soc.  S.   Aust.,  xxix.,   1905,   p.    17li. 

<S.  18-20  mm.  Head  dark-fuscous;  face  oehreous.  Antennae,  thorax,  and 
abdomen  dark-fuscous.     Leg-s  fuseous;  tibiae  and  tarsi  oehreous.     Forewings  tri- 


BY  A.   JEFFERIS  TURNER. 


481 


angular,  costa  gently  arehetl,  apex  rounded,  terinen  bowed,  strongly  oliliriue,  longer 
thaji  dorsum;  clark- fuscous ;  cilia  oehreous.  Hindwing-s  rather  short,  ternien  slight- 
ly rounded;  orange;  basal  half  fuscous,  the  line  of  junction  irregularly  dentate; 
cilia  orange.     Underside  similar. 

N.S.AV.:  Sydney;  two  specimens  received  from  tlie  late  Mr.  Masters.  A<! 
they  were  taken  many  years  ago  and  bore  no  laliels,  the  locality  needs  eonfirnui- 
tion.     Vic. :  Melbourne . 

Gen.  4.     Ac  y  p  ha  s. 

Acyplws,  Wlk.,  List  Lep.  Brit.  Mus.,  iv.,  p.  798;  Kirby,   Cat.   Moths,   i.,  1892,    ).. 

472;  Anepa,  Swin.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.,  1903,  p.  478. 
/  Palpi  short,  porreet;  second  joint  sometimes  hairy  beneath;  terminal  joint 
minute.  Thorax  and  abdomen  without  crests;  tuft  large,  especially  in  S.  Pos- 
terior tibiae  with  two  pairs  of  spurs.  Forewings  without  areole,  9  absent  (coinci- 
dent with  8),  7,  8,  10  stalked,  10  arising  before  7,  6  approximated,  connate,  or 
short-stalked.  Hindwings  with  <lisc(icellulars  angled,  3,  4,  5  separate,  6  and  7 
stalked,  8  anastomosing  with  cell  from  *  to  5  or  beyond . 

T  y  p  e,  A.  fulviceps  Wlk. 

The  three  genera  Porthesia,  Acijphas,  and  nahrophylla  are  doubtless  deriva- 
tives of  Euproctis,  wliicli  they  resemble  in  general  appearance,  but  there  are  im- 
portant structural  differences.  Acyphas  is  different  from  Euprnctk  in  the  vena- 
tion of  both  wings,  and  there  is  room  for  one  or  more  intermediate  genera .  The 
first  species  ascribed  to  this  genus  by  Walker  appears  to  be  an  Orgijia,  but  I 
opine  that  the  type  was  tixed  by  Kirby,  and  Swinhoe's  name  comes  too  late. 
Although  Acyphas  is  at  present  known  only  from  Australia,  it  is  not  improbable 
that  it  will  be  found  to  have  a  wider  distribution,  when  the  Indo-Malayan  species 
referred  to  Euproctis  are  critically  examined. 

1.   Wings  white  with  or  without  markings 2. 

Wings  not  white 4. 

2     Forewings  in  c?  wholly  white chionilii. 

Forewings  in  S  not  wholly  white 3. 

3 .   Forewings  in  S  with  a  subterminal  oehreous  line  . .  leptotypd. 

Forewings  in  c?  with  a  tornal  fuscous  spot,  or  with  . 

more  or  less  fuscous  suft'usion  at  least  on  underside  leiicovieh 

\.   Wings  oehreous  or  orange amphidetd\^^- ,     ;j»^ 

Wings  fuscous fulviceps.    \^" !\.     ^ 

15.     Acyphas  ciiionitis.  ^ — 

Euj>riictk  cliidiiitis,  Turn.,  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  S.  Aust.,  xxvi..  1902,  p.  177. 
N.Q.:     Cairns     Herberton,     Cardwell ;     Q.:     Eidsvold,    Nambour,    Brisbane, 
Stradbroke  Island,  Mt.   Tambourine;   Vic:  Healesville;  S.A.  :    Adelaide;   AV.A.  : 
Waroona. 

l(i.     Acvpuas   leptotypa. 
Euproctis  leptotypa,  Turn.,   Trans.  Ent.  Soc,  1904,   p.   47.5. 
N.Q.  :     Town:-ville,    from   larvae     feeding    on    Acacia   aidacocarpa     (Dodd), 
Cairns . 

17.     Acyphas  leucojielas. 

Euproctis  leiwomelas  Wlk..  List  Lep.  Brit.  Mus.,  iv.,  p.  838;  Porthesia  anacausta. 

Meyi-.,  Trans.  Roy.  See.  S.  Aust.,  xv.,  1891,  p.  193;  P.  hololenca.  ibid. 

<?.     28-38    mm.     ?.    28-42  mm.     Head,  thorax,    and    abdomen    white.     Palpi 

oehreous  in  c?.  whitish  in  2.     Antennae  white,  pectinations  fuscous.     Pectus  ochre- 


482  REVISION'    OF    AUSTKALIAX     LKPlIlOFTEKA-1-IPARIDAE, 

ous  in  3,  faintly  ochreous-tinged  in  2.  Leg's  wliite ;  anterior  pair  with  coxae  and 
anterior  surface  of  femora  and  tibia  ochreous  in  6.  Forewings  triangular,  costa 
gently  arched,  apex  rounded,  termen  bowed,  slightly  oblique,  more  so  in  ?;  white; 
in  6  sometimes  a  fuscous  spot  at  tornus,  or  whole  apical  and  terminal  area  suf- 
fused with  dark-fuscous;  cilia  white,  in  dark  examples  of  the  S  they  may  be  fus- 
tous.  Hindwings  with  termen  rounded;  white;  in  6  sometimes  with  a  broad 
dark-fuscous  suffusion  over  terminal  half;  cilia  white,  in  dark  examples  of  the 
c?  they  may  be  fuscous.  Underside  white;  in  c?  a  costal  streak  and  apical  blotch 
more  or  less  fuscous,  sometimes  extensively  suffused  with  dark-fuscous  as  on 
upper  side. 

The  c?  is  very  variable  in  the  amount  of  fuscous  suffusion,  but  some  is 
always  present  on  the  underside  of  the  forewing.  This  will  distinguish  it  from 
the  c?  of  A.  chionitis,  which  has  an  ochreous  costal  streak  from  base  on  underside. 

Vic:  Melbourne,  Gisborne.  Mt.  St.  Bernard  (5000ft.);  Tas.:  Hobart,  Swan- 
sea; S.A.  :  Penola. 

18.       ACYPHAS  AMPHIDETA. 

Euproctis  amphideta.  Turn.,  Trans.  Roy.  Roc.  S.  Aust..  xxvi..  1902,  p.  177. 

I  have  not  seen  a  ?. 

N.Q.:  Innisfail,  Athertou,  Townsville. 

19.        ACYPHAS   FULVICEPS. 

Charnidas  fulviceps,  Wlk.,  List  Lep.  Brit.  Mus.,  iv.,  p.  797;  Acifpha^  fwca  Wlk., 
List  Lep.  Brit.   Mus.,  iv.,  p.  798. 

d.  36-40  mm.  Head  and  thorax  orange-oehreous .  Palpi  1;  orange-ochre- 
ous.  Antennae  fuscous,  base  of  stalk  whitish-ochreous;  pectinations  in  d"  16.  Ab- 
domen fuscous.  Legs  fuscous;  anterior  pair,  except  tarsi,  orange-oehreous. 
Forewings  triangular,  costa  gently  anhcd,  apex  rounded,  termen  bowed,  ob- 
lique; fuscous;  cilia  fuscous.  Hindwings  with  termen  rounded;  fuscous;  cilia 
fuscous.     Underside  fuscous. 

Described  from  a  small  series,  including  the  types,  in  tlie  British  Museum. 

Tas. :  Hobart . 

Gen.  5.     H  A  b  ro  p  ii  y  l  i.  a,  n.gen. 

appo<puXXo?,  soft-winged. 
Palpi  short,  pon-ect,  densely  hairy;  terminal  joint  concealed.  Tliorax  and 
abdomen  without  crests.  Posterior  tibiae  with  terminal  spurs  only.  Forewings 
without  areole,  7,  8,  9,  10  stalked,  7  arising  before  10,  6  connate.  Hindwings 
with  discocellulars  angled;  3  and  4  stalked,  5  approximated,  C  and  7  stalked.  8 
anastomosing  with  cell  from  J  to  |. 

A  development   of  Euproctis,  thu   venation   df   the   forewings  being,  that   of 

Euproctis  and  Parthe^ia;  the  former   ha-s   3   and   4   of   the  liindwings  sometimes 

stalked.     In  the  long  anastomosis  of  8  with  cell,  it  differs  from  both,  and  agre." 

with  Ari/plias;  in  the  loss  of  the  middle  spurs  it  differs  from  all  three. 

20.     Habrophylla  etibyzoxa. 

Euproctis  euri/zoiin.  Low.,  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  S.  Aust.  xxvi.,  1902,  p.  213. 

Gen .    G .     E  !•  P  R  o  c  t  i  s. 

Euproctis.  HI).,  Yerz.,  p.  1.59. 

Palpi  moder.ite  or  short,  porrect  or  o)ili(|uely  imrrect  ;  second  Joint  s<imctinii'S 
hairy;   terminal   joint  sliort   or   moderate.      Thor.-ix    and  abdomen    without   crests; 


BT  A.   JEPFERIS  TURXKK.  483 

tuft  large  especially  iu  ?.  Posterior  tibiae  with  two  pairs  of  spurs.  Forewiugs 
without  areole,  7.  8,  9,  10  stalked.  7  arising  from  8  before  10.  fi  ennnate  or  from 
slightly  below  angle.  Hindwings  with  discooellulai-s  angled.  3  and  4  approxi- 
mated, eonnate,  or  stalked.  5  well  sejiarated  at  origin.  6  and  7  stalked,  8  approxi- 
mated or  connected  with  cell  about  middle. 

A  large   genu--.       Tyjie.   E.   chri/fiorrhoea   Lin.    from  Europe. 

1.  Hindwings      wholly      or      partly      ochreous-tinged, 

ochreous  or  orange 2. 

Hindwings  fuscous 17. 

2.  Hindwings  with  fuscous  terminal  band s/t-iwi/iorp/nt. 

Hindwings  without  fuscous  terminal  band 3. 

3.  Hindwings  with  orange  terminal  band subiiobilis. 

Hindwings  without  orange  terminal  band 4. 

4.  Forewings  with  darker  transverse  lines  or  fasciae  ..       5. 
Forewings  without  lines  or  fasciae S. 

5.  Forewings  with  lines  or  fasciae  fuscous 6. 

Forewings    with  lines    or    fasciae  reddish-brown    .  .       7. 

6.  Wings  whitish,  slightly  tinged  with  ochreous  ....  idoiiea. 
Wings  pale-ochreous agaiwpa. 

7.  Forewings  with  postmedian  fascia epaxia. 

Forewings  with  antemedian   fascia /ivinnoHs. 

S.   Wings   unicolorous.   without  markings 9. 

Wings  not  so 12. 

9     Wings  pale  ochreous 10. 

Wings  deep  ochreous 11. 

10.  Forewings  with  costa  and  cilia  darker /Hfifiixa. 'i 

Forewings  with  costa  and  cilia  not  darker epidela-  ? 

11.  Wings  and  abdominal  tuft  ochreous crocea. 

Wings   reddish-ochreous,    abdominal  tuft    whitish..  arrogans. 

12.  Hindwings  with  base  fuscous 13. 

Hindwings  with  base  not  fuscous 14. 

13.  Forewings  whitish-grey /labrosMa.  9 

Forewings  fuscous actor. 'i 

14.  Forewings  unicolorous.  whitish-grey habrostola.i 

Forewings  not  so 1.5 . 

15.  Forewings  with  pale  transverse  lines epidela.  i 

Forewings  without  transverse  lin^s 16. 

16.  Forewings  with  pale  ochreous  terminal  band  ..    ..  ed-ivardsi  {^-Axt). 
Forewings  with  ochreous  spots  only actor.  S 

17.  Hindwings  with  termen  not  whitish IS. 

Hindwings.  with  termen  whitish 20. 

IS.   Fore-  and  hindwings  nearly  unicolorous edwardsi  {yt-Axt'). 

Fore-  and  hindwings  dififering  in  colour 19. 

19.   Forewings  without  transverse  lines prratislis. 

Forewings  with  paler  transverse  lines lucifiiga.  iS 

20-   Forewings  with   complete,   whitish,   terminal  fascia    21. 
Forewings    with    writish    incomplete    fascia    or    ter- 
minal spots 22. 

21 .  Forewings   with   anterior  margin   of  fascia  slightly 

^^■avy baliolalh. 

Forewings  with  anterior  margin  of  fascia  dentate..  marghialis. 

22.  Forewings    with    terminal    spots   not    extending    to 

apex Ihnlyalis. 

Forewings  with   terminal  spots  extending  to  apex  niphobola. 


484  IIKVISIOX    OF    AU.STRALIAX    LEI'IDOPTERA-LIPARIDAE, 

21.       ElPROCTIS    STEXO.UORPllA^    n .  sp . 
aT£vo|jiop90i;,  narrowly  formed. 

c?.  30  mm.  Head  oi-auge.  Palpi  short  (i)  ;  fuscous.  Antennae  ilark-tu-- 
cous.  Thorax  dark-fuscous  tegulae  and  a  posterior  spot  orange.  Ab'louien 
dark-fuscous,  tuft  orauge.  Legs  ochreous;  tibiae  and  tarsi  fuscous.  Forewiugs 
elongate-triangular:  rather  naiTow,  eosta  straight,  apex  pointed,  ternien  bowed, 
strongly  oblique;  dark-fuscous;  an  inwardly  oblique,  orauge-ochreous ,  median 
fascia,  dilated  beneath,  but  not  reaching  eosta;  cilia  fuscous.  Hindwings  ^vith 
termen  slightly  rounded:  3  and  4  connate  or  stalked:  ochreous:  a  fuscous  terminal 
band  narrowing  to  a 'point  at  tornus:  cilia  fuscous:  on  tornus  and  dorsum  ochre- 
ous. Undei-side  similar  but  paler:  a  central  ochreous  suffusion  in  forewings  ex- 
tending on  dorsum  to  base. 

The  wings  narrower  than  in  other  species  of  the  genus,  ami  with  a  different 
fades,  but  a  true  Ewproctis. 

N.A.:  Port  Darwin,  in  Septemljcr:  two  s]iecimens  received  from  Mr.  F.  P. 
Dodd . 

22.      ErPROCTIS    IDOXEA. 

Euproctis  idonea,  Swin.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc,  1903,  p.  4iil. 

I  ha\e  not  seen  this  species. 
N.W.A.:    Sherlock   River. 

23.     Euproctis  aoaxopa,  n.sp. 

ayavtoTTOS,  of  gentle  iippeanince. 

<S.  30-32  mm  Heatl,  antennae,  thorax,  abdomen,  and  legs  pale-ochreous. 
Palpi  moderate  (1),  obliquely  porreet;  pale-ochreous.  Forewing's  oval-triangular, 
eosta  strongly  arched,  apex  round-pointed,  termen  bowed,  oblifjue;  pale-ochreous 
with  a  few  fuscous  scales;  a  dark-fuscous  discal  dot  beneath  eosta  about  middle; 
two,  fine,  fuscous,  transverse  lines;  first  oljsolete  towards  eosta.  angled  outwards 
in  middle,  ending  on  J  doi'sum:  second  from  l)eneath  J  eosta.  sinuate,  ending  on  § 
dorsum;  in  a  second  example  the  median  area  between  lines  is  uniformly  fuscous: 
cilia  pale-ochreous.  Hindwings  with  tennen  strongly  rounded:  3  and  4  connate: 
pale-ochreous:  cilia  pale-ochreous.     Underside  wholly  pale-ochreous. 

N.Q.  :  Evelyn  Scrub,  near  Herberton,  in  November;  three  specimens  received 
from  Mr.  F.  P.  Dodd. 

24.        EfPROCTIS    PYRAl'S'l'lS. 

Kiijirtictis    iiiir((iislis,    .Meyr.,    Ti'aus.    Koy.    Soc.    S.    Aust..    .w..   1801,    |).    104: 
Euproctis  scotocliijta.  Turn..  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  S.   Aust..  xx\i..  1002.  ]>.  17S. 

Hindwings  of  df  with  3  and  4  aitproximated.     The  ?  is  unknnwi,. 
N.A.:   Adehr.de  River;  N.(^:   Cairns.  Townsville. 

25.     Euproctis  LrcmcA. 

Artaxa  lucifuga,  Luc.,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.  Wales,  1892,  p.  250:  Euproctis  chry- 
sophaea.  Turn..  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.   'Wales,  1002,  p.  178;  »ec  Wlk. 

Hindwings  of  <S  with  3  and  4  apiiroximated,  of  $  with   3  and  4  stalkeil.     I 
have  already  described  tiiis  species,  of  which  the  .sexes  are  strikingly  dissimilar. 
N.(|). :  Cairns.  Townsville:  (J.:   Eidsvohl.  Oayndah.  Caloundra.  Brisbane. 


r.V  A.   JEKFEins   TCRXER.  485 

2().     Erri;ocTis    ei'idki.a. 

Euproclis  epUhla.  Tuiii..  Tiiius.   Koy.  Sue.  S.  Aust..  xxx.,  l!)0(i.  \<.  125. 

Hiiulwings  witil  3  ami  4  stalked  iu  buth  sexes. 
N.A.:  Port  Dprwin ;  X.(,>.:  Cairns. 

27.        EUPROCTIS    EPAXIA. 

Euproctis  cpd.iid.  Turn.,  Trans.   Wax.  Soe.  S.  Aust..  1906.  p.  125. 

Hinilwings  witli  .3  ami  4  approximated  or  stalked  in  S .      1  have  not  seen  a  2. 
N.A.:  .^Iel\■ille  Island;  N.(^:  Cairns,  Herbert  on . 

28.     ErpRocTis  hyjixolis,  n.sp. 

uiJ.voAi(;,   worthy  of  praise. 

c?.  40  mm.  Head  oehreous.  Palpi  slender,  rather  long  (21);  ochreous. 
Antennae  oehreous.  Thorax  orange-oehreous.  Abdomen  oehreous,  tuft  grey. 
Legs  oehreous.  Forewings  suboval,  costa  strongly  arehetl,  apes  rounded,  termeu 
bowed,  strongly  oblicjue;  orange-ochreous ;  a  transverse  fa-seia  before  middle  de- 
fiued)  by  pale  lines,  angulated  outwards  above  middle,  above  angle  wider  and 
orange-oehreous,  beneath  angle  narrower,  dark  reddish-brown;  posterior  to  fascia 
the  veins  are  outlined  in  pale  streaks;  a  postmedian  band  of  slight  reddish-browu 
irroration;  cilia  oehreous.  Hindwings  with  termen  rounded;  3,  4,  5,  approxi- 
mated  at   origin;  pale-oehreous;    eilia   pale-oehreous.     Underside    pale-oehreous. 

T  y  p  e  in  Coll.  Lyell. 

N.<^.  :  Kuranda.  near  Cairns,  in  .June;  one  specimen  received  from  All-.  V.  P. 
Dodd. 

29.     Euproctis   subxop.ilis. 

Porthesia  siihnnhih't:,  Snel..  Ti,i<l.  v.  Eiit..  xxiv..  1881.  ]).  128:  Artarn  sinntlaiiy, 
Butl..  Ann.  Mag.  Xat.  Hist.,  (5),  xiii..  1884.  ]>.  200;  Euproctis  erici/iles, 
Turn..  Trans.  Ent.  Soc,  1904,  p.  475. 

Hindwina^  witli  3  and  4  a]>iir(iximated. 

N.(J.  :  Cairns.  Innisfail.     Also  from  Kev  I.  and  Ambovna. 


30.     Euproctis  croce. 


Teara  cnicca.   ^Vlk..   List    Lep.    Brit.    Mus.,   xxxii..    ]).    3.55;    Eupmctis    Icihunlha, 
Turn..  Trans.  Roy.  Sue.  S.   Aust..  xxvi..  1902.  )>.   178. 

c?.  40-45  mm.  S.  52  mm.  Head,  thorax,  and  antennae  deep  oehreous- 
yellow.  sometimes  orange.  Palpi  moderate  (1),  porrect ;  second  joint  not  hairy; 
terminal  joint  moderate;  oehreous.  Abdomen  oehreous  or  orange-ochreous,  dor- 
sum sometimes  suffused  with  fuscous  exeei>t  towards  base,  tuft  oehreous.  Fore- 
wings  triangular,  costa  slightly  arched  in  c?,  more  strongly  in  ?;  apex  rounded, 
termen  bowed,  ol)lique;  deep  ochreous-yellow,  sometimes  ochreous-miuige;  some- 
times with  paler  discal  <lot  beneath  mid-costa ;  cilia  concolorous.  Hindwings  with 
termen  rounded;  3  and  4  apjiroximated.  connate,  or  stalked;  as  forewnig-s  or 
slightly  paler.     Undei-side  oehreous. 

X.A.:  Adelaide  River;  N.Q.:  Innisfail.  Townsville:  Q.  :  Rockhauipton. 
Brisbane.  Mt.   Tambourine.     Also  frcmi  Xew  Guinea. 


48(>  1!K\1SI()N    OK    AI's-|1;a1.IAN'     I,KI'IIK)I'TKRA-1.I1'ARIDAE, 

31.       EUPKOCTIS    ARKCHJAXS. 
.1  ;•/((.(«  urrmjuii^,  Luc,  Proc.  Koy.  Soc.  (/land,  18!)!).  p.  14U ;  Tiini.,  Trau*.  Hoy. 
Soe.    S.    Aust.,  xxvi.,  1902,  p.   IT!);  ^1.  meeki,  Dnice,  Ann.  Mag-.  Nat. 
Hist..  (7),  xii..  100!!.  \i.  222 ;  Eaprddis  (irchida,  Swiii..  Trans.  Ent.  Soc. 
1903,  p.  409. 
Reddish-ochreous ;  abduiuiual  tuft  whitisli.     Hindwings  with  3  and  -i  approxi- 
mated.    One   2  has  a   niinutt'   areole  in   both    t'orewings;   this  is  a    revorsional  ab- 
normality. 

N.(/:  Cooktovvii.  Cairns,  Innistail.  Cai'ilwcll.    Ingham.  Atherton.     Also  from 
New  Guinea. 

32.        EUPROCTIS    HAliROSTOI.A. 

Euproctis  habroalolti.  Turn.,  Trans.  Koy.  Soe.  S.  Aust.,  xxvi.,  1!)02.  p.  179  •. 
Euproctis  pura,  Swiu.,  Trans.,  Ent.  Soe.,  1903,  p.  405. 
c?.  47  mm.  Head,  thorax,  and  antennae  brown-whitish.  Palpi  short  (J), 
|iurreet;  seeon<l  point  somewhat  hairy  beneath,  terminal  point  minute;  ochreous. 
Abdomen  fuseous;  base,  tuft,  and  underside  oehreous.  Legs  ochreous.  Fore- 
wings  triangular,  costa  moderately  arched,  apex  rounded,  termeu  bowed,  oblique: 
brown-whitish:  cilia  brown-whitish.  Hindwings  with  termen  rounded;  3  and  4 
approximated  or  connate;  ochreous-yellow ;  cilia  slightly  paler.  Underside 
ochreous . 

9.     GO   mm.     Palpi    i?.     Hindwings   with  ba.-.al  and  dorsal  an-a  fuscous    lioth 
above  and  beneath,  its  edges  suffused. 

N.Q.:   Townsville;  Q.  :  Rockhampton. 

33.  ECPROCTLS  ACTOR,  n.sp. 
aXTcop,  a  leader. 
(S.  55  nun.  Head  reddish-brown;  face  ochi-eous-f uscous .  Palpi  short  (I), 
|pnrrcct;  terminal  joint  minute;  ochreous-f useoits .  Antennae  ochreous-fuscous . 
Thorax  reddish-brown.  Abdomen  fuseous,  sides  brownish,  tuft  and  under  sur- 
face ochreous.  Legs  pale-ochreous .  Forewings  oval-triangular,  costa  strong! v 
arched  towar<ls  apex;  apex  rounded,  termen  bowed,  oblique;  rather  pale  fuscous: 
an  outwardly-oblique,  oval,  pale-ochreous,  discal  spot  beneath  costa  about  middle: 
a  series  of  lon^tudinal,  oval,  pale-ochreous.  terminal  spots  of  fairly  large  but 
unequal  size,  separated  by  fuscous  or  reddish-brown  lines;  cilia  fuscous.  Hind- 
wings with  termen  strongly  rounded;  3  and  4  ai)proxiniated;  oehreous,  towards 
dorsum  orange-ochreous;  cilia  ochreous.     Underside  wholly  pale-ochreous. 

?.  70  mm.  Head,  thorax,  and  forewings  wholly  fuscous.  Hindwings 
ochreous;  basal  third'  dark-fuscous.     Underside  similar. 

N.Q.;  Kuranda,  near  Cairns,  in  Mareli  (Ic?,  19);  N.S.AV.:  Lismore  (^  9\. 
It  is  quite  possible  tliat  tlic  i>ale  spots  on  forewing  of  (?  are  variable  and  iiicun- 
sti^nt. 

34.     Euproctis  edwardsi. 

Tram,  ahrimhi,  Newm.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  1856,  PI.  18,  f.  10;   Tenra  deficitu.  WlK.. 

List  Lep.  Brit.  Mus.,  xxxii..  p.  352;  Teara  indecora  Wlk..  op.  cit..  p.  353; 

'Team  togata,  Luc,  Proc  Linn.  Soc  N.S.  Wales.  1891,  p.  285. 
c?.     40-50   mm.     Head   and    thorax    orange-ochreous.    ochreous    or    greyish- 
oehreous.     Palpi  and  antennae  pale-ochreous  or  whitish.      Abdomen  dark-fuscous. 
Tuft    and    underside    ochreous.     Legs   pale-ochreous   or    grey.     Forewings   oval- 


BY  A.   JEFFERIS   TURNER.  487 

triansiilar,  costa  straight  tuwards  base,  strongly  arolied  towards  apex;  apex 
rounded,  termen  obliquely  rounded;  pale-grey;  sometimes  with  oehreous  discal 
sjjiit  and  terminal  band,  the  latter  with  irregular  anterior  margin,  sometimes  pro- 
longed along  dorsum ;  cilia  orange-oebreous,  greyish-ochreous  or  grey,  on  dorsum 
long.  Hindwing-s  with  termen  strongly  rounded;  3  and  -i  approximated  or  con- 
nate; oehreous  or  oehreous-grey-whitish,  often  suffused  with  fuscous  towards  base 
and  dorsum;  cilia  ^oncolorous. 

9.  53-5b  mm.  Head,  thorax,  palpi,  antennae,  wings,  abdomen,  and  tuft 
fuscous . 

The  c?  varies  much  in  colouration . 

Q.:  Gayndali.  Brisbane ;  N.S.W.:  Sydney;   S.A.:  Adelaide. 

35.       EUPROCTIS   BAIJOLALIS. 

Urocoma  baliolalis,  Swin.,  Cat.    Oxf.  Mus.,  i.,  p.  215,  PI.  vi.,  f.  7   (1892). 

d"?.  40-48  mm.  Head  thorax,  and  antennae  pale  brownish-fuscous.  Palpi 
short  (i),  porrect;  second  joint  hairy;  terminal  joint  minute;  pale  brownish- 
fuscous.  Abdomen  fuscous  or  dark-fuscous;  tuft  in  d'  brownish,  in 
S  fuscous.  Legs  whitish-brown.  Forewings  rather  narrow,  elongate-oval, 
costa  strongly  arched,  apex  rounded,  termen  bowed,  strongly  oblique;  paie- 
brownish-f uscous ;  a  white  terminal  fascia  suffused  wholly,  or  only  towards  ter- 
men, with  pale  brownish-fuscous,  anterior  edge  of  fascia  wavy;  cilia  whitish, 
tinged  with  pale  brownish-fuscous.  Hiudwings  with  termen  gently  rounded ;  3  and 
4  connate  in  (?,  separate  in  ?;  fuscous;  a  terminal  fascia  and  sometimes  also  costal 
area  whitish;  cilia  whitish.  Underside  pale-fuscous  with  terminal  white  fascia  on 
both  wings,  but  sometimes  forewings  and  costal  area  of  hindwings  are  whitish. 

N.   Q.:  Atherton;  Q.:  Brisbane,  Toowoomba;  Vic:  Kewell  (Jas.  Hill). 

36.       EUPROCTLS   JIARGIXALI.S. 

Triclh?tra  marr/iiinlis,  AVlk.,  List  Lep.  Brit.  Mus.,  iv.,  p.  845. 

d  ?.  44-49  mm.  Head  fuscous  or  dark-fuscous,  sometimes  ochreous-tinged. 
Palpi  short  (J);  fuscous.  Antennae  grey;  pectinations  ochreous-tinged.  Thorax 
fuscous  or  dark-fuscous,  sometimes  ochreous-tinged.  Abdomen  dark-fuscous;  tuft 
pale-ochreous .  Legs  fuscous.  Forewings  elongate-oval,  costa  rather  strongly 
arched,  apex  rounded,  termen  slightly  bowed,  strongly  oblique;  fuscous  with  a 
few  whitish  scales;  a  continuous  terminal  whitish  fascia  from  costa  to  tornus,  its 
anterior  edge  sharply  and  irregularly  dentate,  its  ternunal  edge  more  or  less 
broadly  suffused  with  pale-fuscous;  cilia  pale-fuscous.  Hindwings  with  termen 
only  slightly  rounded;  3  and  4  connate  or  separate;  fuscous;  a  broad  white  ter- 
minal band,  sometimes  prolonged  along  costa,  narrowing  to  a  point  at  tornus; 
cilia  whitish  or  pale-fuscous,  on  tornus  and  dorsum  fuscous. 

Vic:  Grisborne:  Tas.:  ;  S.A.  :  Port  Lincoln. 

37.       EuPROCTIS  LIMRALIS. 

Urocoma  I'lnbrilis,  H-Scli.,  Ausser.  Schmet.,  i..  f.  389. 

d"?. — 42-54  mm.  Head  dark- fuscous ;  face  ochreous-fuscous.  Palpi  1; 
fuscous.  Antennae  whitish,  towards  base  fuscous,  in  ?  fuscous;  pectinations 
ochreous-tinged.         Thorax   dark-fuscous.        Abdomen    dark-fuscous;     tuft    pale- 


488  REVISION    (IF    AfSTRALIAX    LKPIDOPTERA-l.IPAKIDAE^ 

uelireous.  Legs  tuscous.  Forewiug-s  elongate-oval,  costa  latlicr  strongly  arched, 
apex  rounded,  termen  nearly  straight,  strongly  oblique;  dark- tuscous;  a  white 
terminal  faseia,  commencing  in  a  point  beneath  apex  and  gradually  increasing  in 
breadth  to  tornus,  its  anterior  edge  wavy,  its  terminal  edge  broadly  suffused  with 
pale-fuscous ;  cilia  pale-fuscous.  Hindwiugs  with  termen  only  slightly  rounded; 
3  and  4  separate;  fuscous,  a  broad,  white,  terminal  band,  sometimes  produced 
along  eosta,  narrowing  to  a  point  at  tornus,  in  ?  less  pronounced  or  lu'arly  tibsu- 
lete;  cilia  white,  on  tornus  and  dorsum  fuscous,  in  $  sometimes  wholly  tusi-uus. 
Underside  similar. 

Q. :   Toowoomba;  X.S.W. :  Sydney;  Mc.  :  Melbourne. 

38.        El'PROCTIS     XlPllOBOLA. 

Euproctis  niphobcila    Turn.,  Trans.  Roy.  Soe.  S.  Aust.,  xxvi.,  1902,  p.  179. 

The  ?  expands  up  to  51  mm.  Hindwings  with  3  and  4  approximated  or 
stalked.  The  white  terminal  fascia  of  hindwiugs  is  not  only  interrupted  in  5  by 
the  veins,  but  in  both  sexes  is  narrower  than  in  niarcjinalls  and  linibalis. 

N.Q.  :  TownsviUe;  (^.  :  Brisbane,  Toowoomba,  Chinchilla. 

In  the  South  Australian  iluseum  is  a  small  c?  (32  mm.  )  hibellcd  "S.  Aus- 
tralia Guest  Coll.''  with  the  whitish  terminal  s|)ots  obsolclc.  I  Ihjnk  it  is  an 
aberration  of  this  species. 

(tcii.  7.     H  K  i;  A  (•  r  i.  \. 
JleracuUt.  Moore,  i'vw.    Zool.   Sue,    1S()5,  ]).    894;  limps.,  Moths   ind.,    i..    \i.  408 . 

Characters  of  Euproctis  but  pali)i  long.  ere?t,  reaching  vertex.  Type.  II. 
disci ritta  Moore,  from  India. 

39.        HeHACCLA   LBONIXA. 

Jleraculd  iedtinia.  Turn.,  Trans.  Roy.  Soe.  S.   Aust.,  xxvii..   1903.  p.    17. 

N.y.  :  .      The  type  of  this  species  formerly  in  the  (jiiecnshind  .Musctmi 

lias  disappeared.      Tlicrc  is  a  specimen  in  the  British  Museum   irom  Xew   (niiuca. 

Gen.  8.      U  u  i!  a. 

Dani,  iloore,  Lep.  Atk.,  1879,  ji.  5U ;   lliii|is..  Moths  iud..  i.,  |i.  407. 

Palpi  moderate,  ascending,  sometimes  reaching  vertex;  second  joint  long, 
densely  rough-haired  antej-iorly;  terminal  joint  \ery  short.  Thorax  and  abdomen 
without  crests.  Posterior  tibiae  with  two  pail's  of  spurs.  Forewings  without  areole, 
6  from  below  upper  angle  or  short-stalked,  7,  8,  9,  10  stalked,  7  arising  before  10, 
11  anastomosing,  connected,  or  at  least  closely  approximated  to  12.  Hindwings 
with  ti  and  7  separate,  connate  or  stalked,  8  connected  with  cell  slightly  before 
middle . 

This  natural  genus  uuist  be  sepanitiMJ  rnnn  Iniiiiis  Mooi<'.  uliich  has  11  well 
separated  from  12.  Du-sijchiruides  B.-Bak.  ilifl'ers  ijuly  in  ihr  inuiuh",]  hiiiduiiiL:, 
and  is  not  I  think  tenable  as  a  distinct  genus.  T  y  p  e,  l>.  hIIki  .Mooie,  from 
India.      The  genus  is  Papuan,  extending  into  India  and  Australia. 

1.   Termen  of  hindwings  angled 2. 

Termen  of  hindwings  rounded 3. 

2     Forewings  white )iiartiiiiepiiiirl,itii. 

Forewings  ochreous-grey or/irins. 

3.   Hindwings  fuscous [»atti. 

Hindwings  whiti,=h prioiiodesiiia. 


b\  a.  jefferis  turner.  -189 

40.     Dura  marginepuxctata. 
I  mans  murginepunctata,  B.-Bak.,  Nov.  Zool.,  1904.  p.  410. 

i.  35-37  mm.  H^ad  and  thorax  whitish.  Antennae  whitish,  pectinations 
ochreons-brown.  Palpi  moderately  long  (li),  porrect,  with  dense  long  hairs  on 
inferior  surface;  terminal  joint  moderate;  whitish,  external  surface  fuscous.  Ab- 
domen whitish.  Legs  whitish.  Forewings  triangular,  costa  rather  strongly 
arched,  apex  round-pointed,  termen  slightly  bowed,  slightly  oblique;  whitish;  four, 
slender,  dentate,  fuscous,  transverse  lines;  first  from  costa  near  base,  not  reach- 
ing dorsum ;  second  from  l  costa  to  'i  doi-sum ;  third  from  %  costa,  curved  inwards 
in  disc  and  then  downwards  to  f  dorsum  j  fourth  subterminal;  costal  edge  fuscous 
towards  base;  a  faintly  marked,  orbicular,  fuscous  ring  in  disc  before  middle; 
sometimes  a  dark-fuscous  dot  before  middle  of  third  line;  dark-fuscous  costal 
dots  at  commencement  of  lines;  a  terminal  series  of  blackish  dots  between  veins; 
cilia  whitish.  Hindwings  suboblong,  with  a  prominent  rounded  angle  on  vein  3; 
whitish;  sometimes  with  slight  grey  terminal  suffusion,  and  one  or  two,  fuscous, 
terminal  dots  near  angle;  cilia  whitish.     Underside  whitish. 

N.Q.  :  Kuranda,  near  Cairns,  in  November,  December,  and  February;  Ather- 
ton ;  four  specimens.     Also  from  New  Guinea. 

41 .     Dura  ochrias. 

Imains  ocJirIm,  Turn..  Trans.  Roy.,  Soc.  S.   Aust.,  xxx.,  ?90t),  p.  126. 

N.Q.:  Thursday  Island,  one  2  in  Coll.  Lyell,  similar  to  <?  but  much  larger 
(42  mm. ) ;  Caims. 

42.     Ddra   pratti. 

Danychirokles  pratti  B.-Bak.,  Nov.  Zool.,  1904,  p.  406,  PI.  vi.,  f.    7. 

d.  44-46  mm.  Head  and  thorax  whitish.  Antennae  whitish,  pectinations 
ochreous-brown .  Palpi  moderately  long  (1:1),  obliquely  porrect,  rough-haired 
beneath;  terminal  joint  moderate;  whitish,  external  surface,  except  terminal  joint, 
dark-fuscous.  Abdomen  grey  with  some  whitish  admixture,  tuft  whitish.  Legs 
grey-whitish .  Forewings  elongate-triangular,  costa  strongly  arched,  apex  rounded- 
rectangular,  termen  not  oblique,  rounded  beneath;  whitish,  median  area  some- 
times suffused  with  grey;  four  slender,  dentate,  fuscous,  transverse  lines;  first 
near  base ;  second  from  J  costa  to  mid-dorsum ;  third  very  acutely  dentate,  from  t 
costa  to  I  dorsum,  curved  outwards  Ijeneath  costa,  then  strongly  inwards,  then 
downwards;  fourth  subterminal,  with  traces  of  a  fifth  line  beyond  and  parallel; 
a  terminal  series  o'f  fuscous  dots  between  veins;  cilia  whitish.  Hindwings  with 
termen  rounded;  fuscous;  cilia  whitish.  LTnderside  fuscous,  dorsal  and  terminal 
areas  of  forewings  whitish. 

Probably  D.  hicolora  B.-Bak.  and  D.  hniiineostrigata  B.-Bak.  are  conspecific. 

N.Q.:  Kuranda,  near  Cairns,  in  October  and  December;  three  specimens  re- 
ceived from  Mr.  F.  P.  Dodd.     Also  fium  New  Guinea. 

43.  Dura  prionodesma,  n.sp. 
TrpiovoScdtio?,  with  saw-Uke  band. 
<?.  46  mm.  Head  ochreous-whitish.  Falpi  1^;  whitish;  outer  surface  of 
second  joint  partly  dark-fuscous.  Antennae  whitish,  pectinations  pale-grey. 
Thorax  grey-whitish,  tegulae  ochreous-whitish.  Abdomen  whitish-oehreous.  Legs 
whitish-ochreous.  Forewings  triangular,  costa  straight  to  beyond  middle,  thence 
arched,  apex  round-pointed,  termen   slightly    bowed,    oblique;    6    short-stalked,   7 


490  KEMSIOX    OF    Al'tiTRALIAX     LKI'IlKDI'TKliA-LIPARIDAK. 

arising  before  10,  11  anastomosing:  at  a  point  with  12;  grey-wliitisb;  markiiig>> 
fuscous;  a  dot  on  costa  near  base;  an  interrupted  slightly  wavy  line  from  i  eosta 
to  i  dorsum;  a  shyirply  dentate  sinuous  line  from  ij  eosta  to  j  dorsum;  some 
minute  subterminal  and  terminal  dots;  cilia  grey-whitish.  Hindwings  with  t^rmen 
rounded;  whitish,  towards  base  faintly  ochreous-tinged ;  cilia  whitish.  Underside 
whitish . 
"      Type  in  Coll.  Lyell. 

N.A.  :  Port  Darwin  in  November;  one  specimen  received  from  Mr.  F.  P. 
Dodd. 

Gen.  9.     E  x  o  M  e. 

Eiiome,  Wlk.,  List  Lep.  Brit.  Mus.,  iv..  p.  883. 

Palpi  moderate,  porrect;  second  joint  hairy;  tei'minal  .ioint  short.  Thorax 
and  abdomen  without  crests,  tuft  moderate.  Posterior  tibiae  without  middle 
spurs.  Forewings  without  areola,  7,  8,  9,  10  stalked,  10  arising  before  7,  6  ap- 
proximated or  stalked.  Hindwings  with  diseocellulars  angled.  3,  4,  5  separate. 
6  and  7  connate  oi-  stalked,  8  approximated  and  connected  witli  cell  at  about  i.  V 
with  wing's  much  aborted. 

Type,  E.  ampla  Wlk.,  from  India. 

1 .   Hindwings  white,  forewings  without  discal  dot  ....  pelospilu. 

Hindwings   tinged   with    fuscous   or  rosy,   forewings 
with  discal  dot anteniiata. 

44.       EXO.MK    PELOSPILA. 

Lymantria  pelospila.  Tuni.,  Proc.  Koy.  Soc.  Q'land.  xxvii..  1915.   p.  24. 
N.A.  :  Pt.  Darwin. 

45.       ExOilE   AXTEXXATA. 

L  I)  Ill-nil  trill  anteinnita,  Wlk..  List  Lep.  Brit.  Mus..  iv..  881;  Liimaiitria  aurmii, 
Turn.,  Trans.,  Roy.  Soc.  S.  Aust.,  xxvi.,  1902,  p.  181  (inaeocc.l  :  Liinum- 
tria  tumeri,  Swin.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc,  1903.  p.  484. 

The  rosy  suffusion  of  the  hindwings  is  vei-y  variable  in  degree  and  may  lie 
wholly  absent  and  replaced  by  fuscous. 

N.Q.  :  C'ajie  York,  Cairns,  Stannary  Hills,  Townsville;  Q.  :  Brisbane; 
N.S.W. :  Richmond  River. 

Gen.  10.     L  Y  ii  A  X  T  R  I  a. 
Lymantria,   Hb.,   Vei-z.,  p.    160. 

Palpi  moderate  or  short,  poiTect;  second  joint  more  or  less  hairy  beneath; 
terminal  joint  moderate  or  short.  Thorax  and  abdomen  witlrout  crests.  Pos- 
terior tibiae  with  two  pairs  of  spurs.  Forewiug-s  without  areole.  7,  8,  9,  10  stalked. 
10  arising  before,  or  opposite  7.  Hindwings  with  3  and  4  approximated  at 
origin,  6  and  7  connate  or  stalked,  8  ajipiMxinuited  and  connected  with  cell  at,  or 
siiortly  before  middle.     $  with  wings  fully  developed. 

Type,   L.  moiiacha  Lin.,  from  Eurojje. 

1.  Forewings    with   numerous   interrupted,   dark   trans- 
verse lines nephrographa. 

Forewings  with  only  two  transverse  lines 2. 

2.  Forewings  with  discal  spots  whitish hinotata. 

Forewings     with     discal     spots     dark-fuscous     and 

ochreous redmia. 


i!V  A.  .ii;FFKi;r'~  TrKXEif. 


491 


4(i.        LyMANTUIA    XKPIIlICMiKAPHA. 

Liimaiitiia  veiihn,(jruiihii ,  Turn.,  Pnic.   Roy.   Sot-.  Q'land.  xxvii.,   1915.  p.  23. 

Forewin!i:>  with  10  arising  opposite  7.  Hiniluiug-s  with  6  and  7  separate  or 
stalked. 

In  the  type  vein  10  arises  on  one  side  after  7,  but  the  venation' of  this  wing- 
is  al)normal.  vein  7  being  connected  beyond  its  middle  by  a  crossbar  with  8. 

Q.  :  Jit.  Tambourine,  Ivillarney;  N.S.W. :  Dorrigo  (South  Australian  Museum. 
A  ?  example,  wing>  fully  developed,  expanding  82  mm.,  forewings  with  10  aris- 
ing on  one  side  shortly  beyond  7,  on  the  other  side  absent.  It  seems  that  this 
species  is  subject  to  venational  abnormalities.) 

47.  Lysiantkia  reducta. 

Darala  ledncta.  Wlk.,  List  Lep.  Brit.  Mus.,  iv.,  p.  888. 

(?.  40-4.5  mm.  2.  5U-liO  mm.  Head  and  thorax  fuscous.  Antennae  fusc- 
( us,  pectinations  ochreous-tinged.  Palpi  in  c?  1,  in  ?  IJ,  porreet :  second  joint 
hairy  beneath;  terminal  joint  moderately  long;  fuscous,  darker  in  d".  Abdomen 
and  legs  fuscous.  Porewings  elongate-triangular,  costa  strongly  arched,  apex 
rounded,  termen  obliquely  rounded;  10  arising  before  7;  pale  fuscous-grey;  a  suf- 
fused fuscous  spot  on  ba.se  of  costa;  a  wavy  fuscous  line  from  i  costa  to  about 
mid-dorsum;  a  circular,  ochreous,  orbicular  spot  outlined  and  centred  with  dark- 
fuscous;  an  irregular  reniform,  fairly  large,  dark-fuscous  spot,  edged  anteriorly 
and  posteriorlj-  with,  ochreous,  and  this  again  with  fuscous;'  a  slender,  slightly 
dentate,  slightly  sinuate,  fuscous  line  from  3  costa  to  f  dorsum;  some  obscure, 
darker,  terminal  dots;  cilia  iiale  fuscous-grey.  Hindwings  with  termen  only 
slightly  rounded ;  0  and  7  stalked ;  whitish  with  pale-fuscous  terminal  suffusion ; 
in  2  wholly  pale-fuscous ;  a  suffused  fuscous  spot  at  end  of  cell ;  cilia  pale-fuscous. 
Underside  grey-whitish  with  two  fuscous  discal  spots  in  forewings,  one  in  hind- 
wings. 

N.Q.  :  Cairns.  Atlierton :  Q.  :  Gympie,  Xambour.  Brisbane,  Dalby,  Cunua- 
mulla;    N.S.'VT.:  Lismore. 

48.  Lymaxtria    bixotata. 

Leptiioieria  blnotata,  Butl,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc,  1886,  p.  386.  PI.  0.  f.  3. 

c?.  34-38  mm.  2  42-54  mm.  Head  whitish  or  whitish-ochreous.  Palpi  in 
t?  2,  in  2  2i  •  whitish,  outer  surface  of  second  joint  sometimes  fuscous.  Antennae 
whitish-ochreous;  pectinations  in  cJ  16,  in  2  5,  Thorax  whitish,  grey-whitish,  or 
whitish-ochreous.  Abdomen  ochreous-grey-whitish.  Legs  whitish  or  ochreous- 
whitish.  Forewings  elongate-triangular,  in  2  suboval,  costa  gently  arched,  apex 
rounded,  termen  slightly  bowed,  oblique;  grey-whitish  or  whitish-ochreous;  mark- 
ings fuscous  or  grey;  white-centred  discal  spots  at  J  and  middle,  the  former  some- 
times reduced  to  a  dark-fuscous  dot ;  a  fuscous  transverse  line  at  i ;  a  second  line 
from  3  costa  to  *  dorsum,  outwardly  curved  beneath  costa,  then  parallel  to  termen, 
and  sometimes  denticulate,  sometimes  obsolete;  denticulate  subterminal  and  sub- 
marginal  lines  more  or  less  distinct ;  cilia  eoncolorous .  Hindwings  with  termen 
slightly  rounded;  whitish,  grey-whitish,  or  ochreous-whitish ;   cilia   eoncolorous. 

In  the  Port  Darwin  form  the  d'  is  slightly  ochreous-tinged  with  fuscous  mark- 
ings in  forewing.  the  2  gi-ey-whitish  with  grey  marking's.  Butler's  c?  type  from 
Peak  Downs  aiijiroximates  more  to  the  2  form. 

N.A.:   Port  Darwin;  Q.  :  Peak  Downs.     . 


492  REVISION    OF    AUSTRALIAN"     LEPIDOPTF.RA-LIPAIi'IDAE, 

Geu.  11.    E  r  zoR  A. 

Euzora,  Turn..  Proe.  Eoy.  Soc.  (^'land.  x.xvii..  1(115.  p.  '22;   ('iii-(i<jol(i.  MiKire,  Lt'p. 
Atk.,  p.  4G;  Hmps.,  Mollis  IncL,  i.,  p.  489  {prneoec). 

Palpi  very  short,  pon-ect;  sec-ond  joint  hairy  beneath;  terminal  joint  mmutc. 
Thorax  and  abdomen  not  crested,  tuft  small.  Posterior  tibiae  without  middle 
spurs.  Forewings  without  areole,  7,  8,  9  stalked,  9  separating  near  apex.  10  from 
cell.  Hindwing-s  with  3,  4.  5  well  separated  at  origin,  C  and  7  connate  or  short- 
stalked,  8  api>roximatf(l  tn  cell  at  i   or  before  middle. 

4i).    ErzoRA  coLLrcExs. 

Porthesia  collucem,  Luc,  Proe.  Linn.   Soc.  N.S.    Wales,  1889,  p.  1090. 

c?.  29  mm.  2.  35  mm.  Head,  thorax,  and  abdomen  white.  Palpi  J ; 
whitish-ochreous .  Antennae  white;  pectinations,  whitish-ochreous.  Legs  white; 
anterior  femora  in  c?  jiale-ochreous.  Forewings  triangular,  costa  gently  arched, 
apex  round-pointed,  termen  slightly  bowed,  oblique;  lustrous  white;  there  are  no 
true  markings,  but  dwing  to  irregularity  of  surface,  there  appear  to  be  two, 
oblique,  postmodian  bands;  cilia  white.  Hindwings  with  termen  slightly  rounded; 
■white;  cilia  white.     I'nderside  white. 

This  may  be  the  same  a«  clam  Wlk.  from  India. 

N.Q.:    Atherton;Q.:    Brisbane. 

Gen.   12.     Red  o  a. 

Recloa,  Wlk.,  List  Lep.   Hrit.   Mus.,  iv.,  p.   826. 

Palpi  moderate,  obliquely  ptirrect.  thickened  with  appressed  hairs;  terminal 
joint  concealed.  Thorax  and  abdomen  not  crested.  Posterior  tibiae  with  two 
pairs  of  spurs.  Forewings  with  areole  long  and  narrow,  7  from  about  middle  of 
areole.  8  and  9  connate  or  stalked  from  end  of  areole,  10  connate  with  them  from 
end  of  areole.  Hindwings  with  cell  long  (*l,  disct>cellulars  angled,  3  and  4  widely 
separated  at  origin,  5  separate,  (i  and  7  connate  or  stalked,  8  api>roxiniated  and 
connected  with  cell  at  \. 


Bedna  siihiiKirfiiimlci.  Wlk.,  List  Lep.  Hrit.  Mu>;..  iv.,  \i.  S2();  I\til<iti  trniixioif:^ 
Wlk..  Linn.  Soc.  Lond.,  Zool.  vi.,  ]>.  128;  Leitcoma  hippdria,  Swiii.,  Ann. 
Mag.  Nat.  Hist..   (6),  xii.,  p,  214   (1893). 

<S.  37-38  mm.  5.  41-42  mm.  Head  white,  face  orange-ochreous.  Palpi 
1;  orange-ochreous.  inner  surface  and  base  white.  Antennae  wliite.  ))ectinations 
oehreous-tinged.  Thorax  and  abdomen  white.  Leg's  white;  apices  of  tarsi 
ochreons;  anterior  and  middle  pairs  with  a  dark-fuseous  spot  on  tibia  near  base, 
and  another  on  I  ase  of  tarsus.  Forewings  triangidar,  costa  straight,  slightl,\ 
arched  towards  ape.x,  a|)ex  pointed,  termen  nearly  straight,  slightly  obli<|ue; 
lustrous  white  with  ii  striguhifed  appearan<-e  ]>rodueed  by  small  ine(|ualities  of 
surface;  sometimes  a  minute  blackish  dot  at  end  of  cell;  cilia  white.  Hindwings 
with  termen  nearly  straight;   white;  cilia  white.     Underside  white. 

N.Q.:  Cairns,  Townsville.  Also  from  the  Archipelago,  China,  Ceylon,  and 
India. 


BY  A.   JEFFEItIS  TURXER. 


493 


Gen.  13.     Orgy  r  a. 
Onjiiia,  Oclis..  Sehniet.  Eur.,  iii..  p.  208. 

PaliJi  moderate,  porrect,  hairy  beneath;  terminal  joint  minute.  Thorax  with 
a  posterior  crest.  Abdomen  with  a  large  dorsal  orest  on  second  and  sometimes 
a  small  crest  on  third  segment.  Posterior  til)iae  without  middle  spurs.  An- 
terior tarsi  with  dense  tufts  of  hairs.  Forewings  with  areola  present,  7,  8,  9 
stalked  from  areole.  10  separate.  Hindwings  with  3  and  4  connate,  5  well  sep- 
arate at  origin,  6  and  7  stalked,  8  anatomosing  with  cell  at  about  '..  ?  with 
wings  minute  or  absent ;  antennae  short,  serrate . 

Type,  0.  antiqua  Lin.,  from  Europe.  Sir  Geo.  Hampson  has  recently 
substituted  the  name  of  Notolophus  Germar,  which  is  unfortunate,  and  used  the 
name  Orin/ia  for  the  genus  hitherto  known  as  Basychira.  which  seems  mischievous. 
When  a  name  has  been  almost  universally  employed  in  one  sense  for  about  a 
eentuTV,  to  employ  it  in  a  different  sense,  even  if  it  were  not  so  changed  by  the 
adoption  of  an  artificial  mode  of  "fixing  the  type,"  is  to  reduce  nomenclature 
into  confusion.  No  one  can  tell,  unless  he  knows  the  particular  predi- 
lection of  the  author,  what  the  name  used  by  him  really  means. 

1.  Hindwings    yellow   with    blackish    terminal    band  anaiioides 
Hindwings  not  yellow  and  without  terminal  band      '? 

2.  Forewings  with   whitish  apical  blotch athlophora. 

Forewings  without  whitish  blotch australis. 

51.       OR(iVIA   AXARTOIDES. 

Tela  anartoides,  Wlk.,  List  Lep.  Brit.  Mus.,  iv.,  p.  804;  Tela  pusilla,  Butl.,  Ann 
Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  (5),  ix..  1882,  p.  88. 

<S.  22-26  mm.  Head  ochreous.  Palpi  1;  ochreous.  Antennae  fuscous. 
Thorax  fuscous  mixed  with  ochreous,  especially  anteriorly.  Abdomen  dark- 
fuscous.  Leg-s  ochreous;  anterior  and  middle  tibiae  and  tarsi  annulated  with 
dark-fuscous.  Forewings  elongate-triangular,  costa  straight  to  |,  thence  strongly 
arched,  apex  rounded,  termen  nearly  straight,  oblique ;  ochreous-brown ;  a  straight, 
blackish,  sub-basal,  transverse  line;  a  circular  darker  brown  spot,  slenderly  out- 
lined with  pale  scales  just  beyond  this  above  dorsum;  a  fuscous-brown  line  from 
3  costa  to  near  mid-dorsum,  anteriorly  suffused,  posteriorly  acutely  angled  out- 
wards above  middle,  and  from  this  to  dorsum  dentate;  a  few,  scattered,  whitish  scales 
in  mid-disc,  and  a  slender,  oval,  whitish  ring  beyond  middle  representing  reni- 
f orm ;  a  blackish  dentate  line  from  l  costa,  bent  first  outwards,  and  then  strongly  in- 
wards, finally  downwards  to  4  dorsum,  followed  by  a  brown  suffusion;  traces  of  a 
slender,  whitisli,  subterminal  line;  cilia  ochreous-brown  with  bars  of  darker  brown. 
Hindwing-s  with  termen  nearly  straight;  ochreous-yellow ;  a  broad,  blackish,  ter- 
minal fascia;  cilia  ochreous.  Lfnderside  of  forewings  ochreous;  costa  broadly 
suffused  with  fuscous;  a  short,  broad,  blackish,  central  streak  from  ,base;  a 
blackish    postmedian    fascia    not    reaching    dorsum;    of  hindwings  as  upperside. 

S.     Apterous;  clothed  with  dense  hairs,  dark-grey;  antennae  short,  serrate. 

Q. :  Blackbutt  (Tillyard) ;  N.S.W.  :  Sydney;  Vic:  Melbourne;  Tas. :  . 

52.     Orgyia    .\thi,ophora,  n.sp. 
d6Xo9opo(;,  bearing  the  prize. 
c?.    34-38  nun.    Head  and  thorax  pale  ochreous-grey.    Palpi  li ;  ochreous,  upper 
edge  fuscous.  Antennae  pale  fuscous.  Abdomen  whitish-ochreous,  dorsal  crests  fuse- 


4S)4  KF.VISIOX    OF    ArsTRAI.IAX     I.KPIIXIPTEHA-LIPARinAE, 

Oils.  Legs  whitish-ocbreous  anmilatcil  witli  lust-ous.  Forewings  triaugular,  costa 
straight  to  f.  tlieuee  strongly  arched,  apex  roumlwl,  tennen  very  slightly  bowed, 
slightly  ol)li(]ue;  pale  ocbreous-brown :  a  blackish,  obliquely  transverse,  sub-basal 
line;  a  dentate,  fuscous,  transverse  line  from  if  costa  to  t  dorsum,  preceded  by  a 
fine  whitish  line,  and  edged  posteriorly  by  a  narrow  whitish  suffusion;  reniform 
slenderly  outlined  in  whitish,  not  always  distinct;  a  blackish,  finely  dentate  line 
from  I  costa,  bent  inwards  below  middle,  and  then  downwards  to  J  dorsum;  a 
whitish  subapical  blotch,  from  whicli  proceeds  a  slender,  interrupted  whitish  line 
to  a  whitish  spot  above  tornus;  an  indistinct  submarginal  line,  partly  whitish, 
partly  fuscous;  cilia  pale  ochreous-brown.  Hindwings  with  ternien  rounded: 
ochreous-whitish  slightly  suffused  with  fuscous  towards  termen;  cilia  concolorous. 
Underside  of  forewings  pale  ochreous-grey.  costal  area  to  4,  and  a  transverse  line 
at  f  suffusedly  fuseous;  hindwings  wliitisli-ochreous,  a  fuscous  line  from  3  costa 
towards  but  not  reaching  tornus. 

?.     Apterous:  clothed  with  dense  haii's;  antennae  short,  serrate. 

TV.  A.  :  Perth:  3  d  and  2  2  specimens  received  from  TIr.  L.  -T.  Xewnian. 

53.       OeGVIA    AUSTRALIS. 

Orgyta  australis,  Wlk..  List  Lep.  Brit.  !Mus.,  iv.,  p.  787;  Lacicla  postica,  Wlk., 
op.  cit.,  iv..  p.  803;  Orgijia  canifa.^cia,  Wlk.,  up.  eit.,  xxsii.,  p.  325; 
Orgiiia  ceiilaiiica,  Nietner,  Edinb.  New  Phil.  Journ..  xv.,  1864.  p.  34; 
Orgyia  ludellinjii.  Snel..  Tijd.  v.  Ent..  1879.  p.  104,  PI.  8.  f.  5. 

c?.  29-33  mm.  Head,  thorax,  and  antennae  fuscous.  Palpi  IJ;  ochreous- 
wliitish  with  some  fuscous  suffusion.  Al)domen  fuscous,  dorsal  crests  some- 
what darker.  Leg's  ochreous-whitish;  anterior  and  middle  pairs  annulated  with 
fuscous.  Forewings  triangular,  costa  moderately  arched,  more  strongly  towards 
apex,  apex  round  ])ointed.  termen  straight,  oblique;  pale-brown;  sometimes  indi- 
cations of  a  sub-basal,  transverse,  fuscous  line;  a  dentate,  fuscous,  transverse 
line  from  i  costa  to  |  dorsum;  a  second  line  from  f  costa,  at  firet  outwards,  then 
bent  strongly  inwai-ds.  and  again  downwards  to  |  dorsum;  the  included  median 
area  is  suffused  with  whitish,  and  contains  a  brownish  i-eniform  spot,  partly  out- 
lined with  fuscous;  an  obscure,  whitish,  subterminal  line  preceded  by  two  or  three 
short,  longitudinal,  fuscous  streaks  in  costal  area  and  followed  by  s<ime  fuscous 
suffusion;  a  slender  interrupted,  submarginal.  fuscous  line;  cilia  brown.  Hind- 
winu's  with  termen   gently  rounded;  fuscous;  cilia  fuscous.      Underside  fuscous. 

9.     Apterous;  covered  with  dense  grey  hairs;  antennae  short,  serrate. 

This  description  refei-s  to  Bris!)ane  example.  Males  from  Port  Darwin  and 
Cairns  are  rather  smaller  (22-28  una.),  the  markings  less  distinct,  and  the  me- 
dian band  infusca^ed.  obscuring  oi-  covering  tlie  whitish   area. 

N.A.:  Port  Darwin;  N.Q.:  Cairns.  Townsville;  Q.  :  Brisbane:  X.S.W.: 
Sydney.      Also   from  the  Ai-chipelago.  Formosa.  Ceyhm.  and  India. 

Gen.  14.     T  R  o  I'  0  ('  A. 

Ir(ijiiic((.  Turn..  Trans.  Ent.   Soc.  1904.  ]i.  477. 

Palpi  moderately  long,  porrect,  with  dense  long  hairs  beueatii;  terminal  .jouil 
short.  Thorax  with  a  posterior  crest.  Abdomen  without  crests  but  densely  ;-ov- 
ered  with  lonu'  hair;.  Posterior  tibiae  with  two  pairs  of  spurs.  Forewings  with 
areole  usuallv  iiresent.  7.  8,  9  stalked   from  areole,  connecting  bar  between  10  and 


BY    A.    JEFFERIS   TURNER.  495 

Uieir  eomiuon  stalk  somotimes  imperfectly  or  not  developed.  Hindwings  with  3 
and  4  approximated  or  connate.  0  and  7  connate,  8  connected  with  cell  at  or  shortly 
before  middle.  ?  with  wing-s  absent;  antennae  very  short,  serrate;  posterior 
tibiae  without  middle  spurs. 

The  following  species,  the  only  one  at  present  referred  to  the  genus, 
sliows  considerable  variability  in  the  venation.  When  the  areole  is 
absent,  the  position  of  the  lost  connecting  bar  is  shown  by  a  slight  devia- 
tion and  thickenins:  of  the  two  adjacent  veins.  I  have  one  very  abnormai  speci- 
men in  which  (1)  in  the  right  forewing  the  areole  is  absent,  but  indicated  as  just 
stated,  (2)  in  the  left  forewing  the  areole  is  more  elongate  than  usual  and  7  is 
connate  from  its  narrow  extremity,  (3)  in  the  left  hindwing  3.  4.  5  are  stalked, 
in  the  right  hindwing  3  and  4  are  coincident,  3  and  5  stalked;  but  both  hindwings 
are  smaller  than  usual,  and  the  right  has  a  pathological  notch  near  tornus.  The 
9  is  much  degraded,  and   densely  covered  throughout   with   long  hairs. 

.54.    Ieopoca  rotdxdata. 
Team   rotundata,  Wlk..  List   Lep.  Brit.   Mus.,   iv.,  p.  851. 

<S.  45-50  mm.  Head  grey-whitish.  Palpi  1];  dark-f useous .  Antennae 
whitish  iiToratecl  with  fuscous,  pectinations  brownish.  Thorax  grey-whitish,  crest 
fuscous  with  some  brownish  hairs.  Abdomen  ochreous-brown,  base  of  dorsum 
fuscous,  underside  grey-whitish.  Legs  grey-whitish;  anterior  and  middle  tibiae 
annulated  with  dark-f  useous.  Forewings  triangular,  costa  straight  to  near  ajiex, 
then  strongly  arched,  apex  rounded,  termen  oblic|uely  rounded ;  grey-whitish ; 
markings  dark-fuscous ;  a  basal  patch  extending  to  i,  its  posterior  edge  dentate  on 
margins  and  middle,  its  centre  irregularly  suffused  with  grey-whitish;  a  denticu- 
late tran.sverse  line  from  J  costa,  curved  first  outwardly,  then  inwardly,  ending 
on  dorsum  before  tornus;  a  dentate  and  blotched  line  near  and  parallel  to  this, 
thickened  to  a  blotch  beneath  costa.  again  in  middle,  and  thickened  towards  doi'- 
sum;  cilia  grey-whitish.  Hindwing-s .  with  termen  rounded;  fuscous  with  whitish 
suffusion;    cilia  whitish.     Underside   grey  whitish. 

?.  Wholly  apterous.  Head,  thorax,  and  abdomen  covered  with  dense,  long, 
grey-whitish  hairs.  Antennae  very  short,  slightly  dentate.  Leg's  whitish-ochre- 
ous,  posterior  tibiae  without  middle   spurs. 

Q.:  Brisbane,  Toowooniba.  Both  sexes  from  ]>upaei  found  under  1)ark  of 
Eucahiptus;  N.S.W.:  .Jervis  Bay.  near  Nowi-a;  a  series  of  six  <?  and  one  S 
bred  from  the  larvae  by  Mr.  Moss-Robinson;  Vic:  Beechworth,  Gisborne. 

Gen.  15.     A  x  I  o  l  o  G  a. 
Axiolopa.  Turn..    Trans.    Ent.  Soc.   1904.  p.  477. 

Palpi  moderate,  hairy,  porrect.  Antennae  well  pectinated  in  5.  Thorax  and 
abdomen  not  crested;  base  of  abdomen  densely  haiiy  above.  Posterior  til)iae 
with  two  pairs  of  spui-s.  Forewings  with  10  connected  with  8,  9  opposite  7  to 
form  an  areole,  11  anastomosing  shortly  with  12.  Hindwings  with  &  approxi- 
mated at  base  with  4,  6  and  7  short-stalked,  8  anastomosing  with  cell  before 
middle. 

As  I  have  no  material  for  examination,  I  have  transcribed  my  former  diag- 
nosis.    Type,   A.  pura  Luc. 

53.      AxiOLOCiA    PURA. 

Teara  pura,  Luc,  Proc  Roy.  Soc  Q'land,  1891,  p.  75. 


49C  REVIJSIOX    OF    AUSTRALIAN'     LKIMDOPTERA-LIPARIDAE, 

Gen.  IG.     Olek  e. 
Olene,  Hb.,  Ziiti-.,  ii.,  p.  19;  Hmps.,  Moths  Ind.,  i.,  p.  45'J. 

Falpi  rather  long,  obli(juely  porrect ;  set-ond  joint  greatly  thickened  by  dense 
long  hairs  anteriorly;  terminal  joint  minute,  concealed.  Thorax  with  a  small 
posterior  crest.  Abdomen  with  a  large  doi-sal  crest  on  second  segment.  Pos- 
terior tibiae  with  two  pairs  of  spurs.  Anterior  tibiae  densely  hairy,  tarsi  also 
haii-y.  Forewings  with  areole  present,  8  and  9  stalked  from  areole,  7  connrtte 
or  closely  approximate,  10  well  separate.  Hindwing-s  with  3  and  4  approximated 
at  origin,  5  from  shortly  above  angle  of  cell.  (!  and  7  stalked.  8  ajiproximated  and 
connected  with  cell  at  \   or   before   middle. 

Nearly  allied  to  Dasychira,  from  which  it  differs  in  the  pronounced  abdominal 
crest  and  strongly  dilated  palpi.     T  y  p  e,  O.  mendosa  Hb. 

5() .  Olen'e  mexdosa. 
Oletie  mendosa,  Hb..  Zutr.,  ii.,  p.  19,  f.  293,  294;  Antipha  basalis,  Wlk..  List  Lep. 
Brit.  Mus.,  iv.,  p.  806;  Moda  ficsiformis,  TVlk.,  op.  cit.,  v..  p.  1070; 
Rilia  lanceolata,  Wlk.,  op.  cit.,  v.,  p.  1075;  Dasychira  hasalis,  Wlk., 
op.  cit..  xxxii..  p.  362;  Dasychira  dirisu,  Wlk.,  op.  cit.,  xxxii.,  p.  363; 
Dasychira  distinyuevda,  Wlk.,  op.  cit.,  xxxii..  p.  435;  Olene  basivitta, 
Wlk..  np.  cit.,  xxxii.,  p.  436;  Dasychira  saivantn,  Moore.  Lep.  E.I.  Co., 
p.  340;  Tiirriga  invasa,  Wlk..  Char.   Undesc.   Lep..   p.  15. 

c?.  28-44  mm.  Head,  thorax,  palpi,  and  abdomen  brownisli-grcy.  Abdo- 
men grey-whitish,  crest  fuscous-brown.  Legs  gre\--wliitish  mixed,  especially  tai-si. 
with  brown  and  fuscous.  Forewing-s  triangular,  costa  rather  strongly  arched, 
apex  rounded,  termen  very  slightly  bowed,  slightly  oblii|ue;  brownish-gi-ey ;  mark- 
ings fuscous;  a  sub-basal  transverse  line;  a  slightly  dentate  line  from  \  costa  to 
f  dorsum ;  renif orm  partly  outlined  with  fuscous  or  whitish ;  a  dentate  line  from  | 
costa,  at  first  outwardly  curved,  then  bent  inwards  to  beneath  reniform,  and  again 
bent  to  end  on  *  dorsum:  an  interrupted  sul)marginal  line;  sometimes  a  large  d.ark- 
fuseous  spot  just  posterior  to  sub-basal  line;  sometimes  a  whitish  spot  in  the  same 
situation;  sometimes  whole  of  costal  half  of  wing  suffused  with  whitish;  cilia 
brownish-gi-ey,  sometimes  with  fuscous  bai-s.  Hindwings  with  termen  rounded; 
oehreous-grey-whitish ;    cilia  concolorous. 

?.  50-60  mm.  Forewings  elongate-triangular,  costa  strongly  arched,  ajiex 
rounded,  termen  sinuate,  strongly  oblique ;  brownish,  median  area  partly  suffused 
witli  whitish;  sub-basal  line  obsolete;  a  suffused  fuscous  streak  on  fold  from  base; 
a  short,  fuscous,  subcostal  streak  from  about  s,  not  reaching  termen;  sometimes  a 
small  ajjical  whitish  suffusion. 

The  sexes  differ  and  the  c?  is  varialjjo.  but  the  species  is  always  easily  recog- 
nisable. T  have  also  several  dwarfed  ?.  .34-40  mm.,  pale-ochreous,  with  markings 
nearly  obsolete. 

N.A.  :  Pt.  Dai-win;  N.Q.:  Cooktown,  Cairns,  Ingham,  Townsville;  Q.: 
Rockhampton,  Duaringa.  Brisbane.     Also   from   Java,  Ceylon,   and   India. 

Gen.  17.    Dasychira. 

Dasychira,  Stpli..  111.  Brit.  Ent.  Haust..  ii..  p.  ,58. 

Palpi  rather  hmg,  porrect,  hairy  beneath ;  terminal  joint  short  or  concealed. 
Thorax  with  a  small  posterior  crest.  Al)domen  with  dense  long  hairs  at  Ijase  of 
dorsum  but  no  true  crest.     Posterior    tibiae  with    two  pairs    of  spurs.     Anterior 


BY   A.    JEFI'ERrS   TURNER. 


497 


tibiae  and  tarsi  densely  hairy.  Forewings  with  areole  present,  8  and  !)  stalked 
from  ai-eole,  7  connate  or  closely  approximated  at  origin,  10  well  separate. 
Hindwings  with  3  and  4  approximated  or  connate,  5  from  shortly  above  lower 
angla  of  cell,  6  and  7  stalked,  8  approximated  and  connected  with  cell  at  J  or 
shortly  before  middle. 

Type,  D.  pudihuiida  Lin.  from  Europe.  A  lars;e  aenus.  well  represented  in 
Indo-Malaya  and  Africa;  but  in  Australia  by  only  three  species,  two  of  which 
have  a  wide  range  outside  the  Australian  region. 

1.   Hindwings  with   dorsal  area  deep-ochreous Iwrsfieldi. 

Hindwings   uniformly  ochreous-whitish 2. 

2.   Forewings    whitish    with    fuscous-brown    postmedian 

blotch ostraciinj. 

Forewings  pale-ochreous  with  fuscous  median  streak  securis. 

57.  Dastchira  horspieldi. 

Dasychira  Iwrsfieldi,  Saund.,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc  1851,  p.  162;  Da.'iychira.  ijrotei, 
Moore,  Lep.  E.I.  Co.,  p.  338;  Da.'<i/chira  arga,  Moore,  Lep.  E.I.  Co., 
p.  339;  DasycTiira  kansalia,  Moore,  Proc.  Zool.  Soc,  1879,  p.  401;  Dasy- 
chira nilgirica,  Hmps.,  111.  Het.,  viii.,  p.  58,  PI.  141,  f.  13,  14;  Teora 
farenoides.  Luc,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Q'land,  1892,  p.  75. 

<S.  45-48  mm.  Head  white.  Palpi  about  1;  white,  upper  part  of  outer 
surface  blackish.  Antennae  white,  pectinations  ochreous-brown .  Thorax  white 
with  a  few  fuscous  scales,  crest  mixed  with  fuscous  and  brownish.  Abdomen 
deep-ochreous,  underside  and  tuft  whitish.  Legs  whitish;  tibiae  and  tarsi  with 
blackish  dots  on  dorsum.  Forewings  elongate-oval,  costa  straight  to  near  apex, 
thence  arched,  apex  rounded,  termen  obliquely  rounded;  white,  sometimes  partly 
grey-whitish:  slender  lines  and  a  few  scattered  scales  fuscous;  an  irregularly, 
dentate,  sub-basal  line;  a  slightly  dentate  line  from  |  costa  to  mid-dorsum;  reni- 
form  slenderly  outlined  with  fuscous;  a  denticulate  line  from  J  costa  to  tornus; 
an  interrupted,  irregularly  dentate,  subterminal  line;  a  submarginal  line,  discon- 
tinuous on  veins,  the  terminal  ends  of  which  are  also  fuscous;  cilia  whitish  or 
gi-ey-whitish  irrorated  with  fuscous.  Hindwings  with  termen  rounded;  deep- 
ochreous,  paler  towards  termen ;  sometimes  a  terminal  band  of  fuscous  suffusion ; 
cilia  whitish  sometimes  mixed  with  fuscous.  Underside  whitish  with  some  ochre- 
ous  suffusion  on  basal  area  of  forewings  and  dorsal  area  of  hindwings;  erescentic 
fuscous  discal  marks  on  both  wings,  sometimes  also  fuscous  postmedian  lines. 

?.  98  mm.  Forewings  with  costa  rather  strongly  arched;  markings  more 
suffused.     Hindwings  whitish  with  a  suffused  dorsal   ochreous  blotch. 

N.Q.:  Cairns.  Innisfail,  Townsville;  Q.:  Brisbane.  Also  from  Java,  Malay 
Peninsula,   Ceylon,    and    India. 

58.  Dasychira  ostracina. 

Laelia  ostracinu.  Turn..  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  S.   Aust..  1902,  p.  181. 

The  type,  which  is  the  only  example  I  have  seen,  is  a  9  in  poor  condition,  but 
there  appears  to  be  a  large  reniform  spot  outlined  with  fuscous  and  with  a 
central  fuscous  mark  preceding  the  postmedian  blotch  on  forewing.  The  correct 
locality  is  Cape  York 


498  REVISION'    or    .ilSTRALIAX    I.EPIDOPTERA-T.lPAlilDAE, 

59.     Dasychira  secoris. 

Psalis  secuns,  Hb..  Zutr..  ii.,  p.  19,  f.  291.  292;  Moore,  Lep.  Ceyl..  ii.,  PI.  115, 
f.  1;  Arestha  (intica,  Wlk.,  List  Lep.  Brit.  Mns.,  iv.,  p.  805;  Rigema 
fcdcatu,  AVlk.,  op.  cit.,  xxxii.,  p.  437;  Bigenia  facta ,  Wlk.,  op.  cit.,  xxxii., 
p.  438;  Anticyra  approximata,  Wlk.,   op.   cit.,  xxxii.,   p.  440. 

^.  40-40  mm.  Head  and  thorax  whitish-oclireous.  Pal])!  3;  pale-oclirfous 
•with  some  dark-fuseous  irroratiun  on  outer  surface.  Antennae  whitish,  pectina- 
tions pale- fuscous.  Abdomen  whitish.  Legs  ochreous-whitish;  anterior  jiair 
pale-fuscous.  Forewings  elongate-oval,  eosta  rather  strongly  aix-hed,  apex  round- 
pointed,  termen  obliquely  rounded;  oehreous-brown-vrhitish  with  a  very  tew. 
scattered,  dark-fuseous  scales;  a  broadly  suffused,  fuscous,  median  streak  from 
base  becoming  indistinct  in  disc;  dorsal  area  with  slight  fuscous  suffusion;  cilia 
pale-fuscous.  Hindwings  with  termen  slightly  rounded;  ochreous-whitish;  cilia 
ochreous-whitish.     Underside  ochreous-whitish . 

The  only  V  I  have  seen  is  one  from  South  Africa  sent  me  Ijy  !Mr.  A.  .1.  T. 
.Tanse.  It  has  the  forewing's  narrower  than  the  c?,  costa  more  strongly  arched, 
apex  acutely  pointed,  termen  more  oblif|ue;  the  central  streak  more  pronounced 
and  expanded  on  termen . 

N.Q.:  Cairns;  Q. :  Rockhmiipton,  Dunriilga,  P)risbane.  Also  from  .Java. 
Ceylon,  India,  and  Africa. 

Gen.  18.     L  a  e  l  i  a. 
LaeHa,   Stph.,   Syst.   Cat.   Brit.   Ins.,   ii.,  p.   52. 

Antennae  in  c?  well-developed  with  very  long  pectinations;  in  ?  al>breviate<l 
with  very  short  pectinations.  Palpi  rather  long,  porrect;  second  .ioint  with  dense 
long  hairs  beneath;  terminal  joint  long  (about  i)  .  Thorax  and  abdomen  witliout 
crests.  Posterior  tibiae  with  two  pairs  of  spurs.  Anterior  tibiae  densely  hairy, 
tarsi  also  hairy.  Forewings  with  areole  present,  8  and  9  stalked  from  areole,  7 
connate  or  rarely  short-stalked,  10  well  separate.  Hindwings  with  3,  4,  5  separ- 
ate, 6  and  7  stalked,  8  approximated  and  connected  witli  cell  at  about  I. 

T  y  p  e,  L.  coe)iosa  Hb.  from  Europe.  A  genus  of  some  size  in  the  Indo- 
Malayan  and  African  regions.  It  differs  from  Dasychira  in  the  much  longer  ter- 
minal joint  of  palpi,  and  absence  of  any  thoracic  crest. 

60.    Laelia  obsoleta. 

Bnmhyx  obsoleta.  Fab.,  Ent.  Syst.,  iii.  (1),  p.  403;  Laelia  ercmaea,  Mcyr..  Trans. 
Roy.  Soc.  S.   Aust.,  xv.,  1891,  p.  193. 

c7.  30-43  mm.  Head  oehreous.  Palpi  3;  ochreous.  Antennae  ochreous- 
whitish;  pectinations  very  long,  fuscous.  Thorax  and  abdomen  ochreous-whitish. 
Legs  ochreous.  Forewings  triang-ular.  costa  straight,  ajicx  rounded-rectangular, 
termen  straight,  scarcely  oblique;  ochreous-whitish,  with  slight  fuscous  tinge; 
cilia  whitish.  Hindwings  with  termen  very  slightly  rounded;  as  forewings. 
Underside  similar. 

2.  38-44  mm.  I'alpi  2.  Antennae  sliort :  pectinations  very  slioit  (1).  Ab- 
domen with  tuft  and  umlei-side  whitish.  AVing<  witFmut  luscous  tinge;  forewings 
with  costa  moderately  arched. 

N.Q. :  Cliunlie  River,  Cairns,  llcrbcrtim ;  Q. :  Dnariniia,  Xainbour.  T^iilsliane, 
l\rt.   T.ambounne;  N.S.W.:    Sydney. 


PV    A.    .IKKFKI.'IS    TURXER. 


499 


Species    Hiirecmjiiised   nr    in-iniijln    referred   to    the    fdinitij. 

(il.     Anm.  e.iolelu,  Swin.,  Cat.  ()xt.  Mus.,  i.,  p.  197.     Perhaps  mit  Australian. 

()2.     Porthesia  ?  irrurat((^  Luc,  Proc.  Roy.   Soc.  Q'land,  1892.  p.  77. 

(i.3.     Artaxa  compacta,  Luc,  Trans.  Nat.  Hist.  Soc  Q'land,  1894,  ]i.  lOti. 

Ii4.     Artaxa  itsta,  Luc,  Proc  Roy.  Soc  Q'land,  1901,  p.  7G. 

fl.5.      Kuproctis  peloiles,  Low.,  Proc  Roy.  Soc  S.  Aust.,  xvii.,  189.3,  p.  159.     Pn 

bably  a  synonym  of  Epicoma  tristis  Lew.     (Notodontidae) . 
6().      Teara   erehodes,  Low.,   Trans.   Roy.    Sof.    S.   Aust.,   xvi.,   1892,   p.   14. 

synonym  of  Ochror/aster  contraria  Wlk.  {Notodontidae.) 
07.      Teara  coralliphora.  Low.,  Proc  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.  Wales,  1900,  p.  32. 
68.      Orgi/ia  retinopepla.  Low.,  Trans.  Roy.   Soc  S.   Aust.,  1905,  p.  170. 
09.      Ocneria  heJiaspis.  Meyr.,   Trans.  Roy.   Soc   S.   Aust.,  xv.,  1891,  ii.  192. 

have  not  seen  this  species. 

IxDEx  TO  Genera. 


No. 

No. 

No. 

No. 

Aeyphas 

i 

Euproctis 

(> 

Iropoca 

14 

Orgyia 

13 

AxiolOfja 

15 

Euzora 

11 

Laelia 

18 

Porthesia 

2 

Dasychira 

17 

Habrophylla 

.") 

Lymantria 

10 

Redoa 

12 

Dura 

8 

Heracula 

7 

Oleue 

16 

Enonie 

9 

Icta 

1 

Oliijeria 

•■i 

In'dex  to  Species.    * 
Synonyms  and   unrecognised   species   in  italic; 


No. 

No. 

No. 

No. 

acatharta 

10 

crocea 

30 

idonea 

22 

pelodcs 

65 

actor 

3.S 

dejicita 

34 

indecora 

34 

pelospila 

44 

aganopa 

23 

distingiienda 

56 

iiivaia 

56 

postica 

53 

aliena 

Ii 

divisa 

.56 

iobroia 

13 

pratti 

42 

aiiiphideta 

18 

edwardsi 

.34 

irrorata 

62 

prionodesma 

43 

anacaiis/ii 

17 

epaxia 

27 

lanceolata 

.56 

pura 

55 

anartoides 

51 

epidela 

26 

leonina 

39 

pitra 

32 

antennata 

45 

erehodes 

66 

leptotypa 

16 

piisilla 

51 

antic  a 

59 

cricydes 

29 

leueomelas 

17 

pyraiistis 

24 

approxiinata 

.59 

creniaea 

60 

liinbalis 

37 

reducta 

47 

aniada 

31 

euryzoua 

20 

lucifuga 

25 

retinopepla 

68 

arga 

57 

euthysana 

3 

liidekiiio;ii 

53 

i-otundata 

54 

arrofians 

31 

exoleta 

61 

lutea 

13 

sazvanta 

56 

athlophora 

52 

falcata 

59 

marginalis 

36 

scotocliyta 

24 

aurora 

45 

farenoides 

57 

marginepunctata 

40 

securis 

59 

austraUs 

53 

fulviceps 

1.19 

iiieeki 

31 

sitiitiluii.s 

29 

baliolalis 

35 

fusca 

19 

melambaphes 

12 

stenomorpha 

21 

hasalis 

56 

fusiforinis 

56 

melanosoma 

.5 

subraarginata 

.50 

basivUta 

56 

galactopis 

7 

inendosa 

56 

subnobilis 

29 

binotata 

48 

grotei 

57 

Dii.vta 

5 

facta 

59 

caiiifascia 

53 

habrostola 

32 

nephrographa 

46 

tanaopis 

2 

ceylanica 

53 

heliaspis 

69 

nilfiirica 

57 

togaia 

34 

chionitis 

15 

hemicalla 

14 

uiphobola 

38 

traiisiens 

.50 

chrysopJiaca 

25 

hipparia 

50 

obsoleta 

60 

trispila 

11 

clirysophila 

13 

holoUuca 

17 

ochrias 

41 

turiwri 

45 

collucens 

49 

Iwloxutha 

30 

ostracina 

58 

iista 

64 

compacta 

63 

horsfieldi 

57 

panabra 

4 

xuthoptera 

8 

coralliphora 

67 

hyiimolis 

28 

paradoxa 

4 

5(10 


A  NEW  AVIAN  TREMATODE. 

By  Eleanor  E.  Chase,  B.Sc,  Demoxstbatoe  ix  Zoologv,  UNi\-ERSiTy 

OF  Sydney. 

(Commnnicated  by  Professor  S.  J.  Johnston,  B.A.,  D.  Sc.) 
(Pliile   xxvi.;   and   cue   Text-figure.) 

I.VTItODl'CTlO.V. 

The  presence  of  Holastopiiim  as  an  endoparasite  of  herons  has  been  i-ecorded 
by  two  authoi's.  Brandes  (1891,  p.  594)  records'  H.  corini  Xitzsch  and  U.  cinc- 
tum  Brandes  from  various  species  of  Ardea.  Johnston  (1904,  p.  112)  described, 
under  the  name  of  Holostomum  simjAex,  a  trematode  frojn  the  intestine  of  the 
white-fronted  heron  yotoplioyx  novae-lioUandiae,  collected  dt  Creel  Bay.  Broken 
Bay,  N.S.W. 

I  record  here  the  occurrence  of  another  species  of  Holostomum  in  this  heron, 
my  description  being  based  on  three  pieseived  specimens,  one  of  which  had  been 
mounted  whole,  and  two  sectioned  by  Prof.  S.  J.  Johnston,  who  had  collected 
them  at  Terrigal,  N.S.W.  The  limited  and  imperfect  nature  of  the  material, 
and,  in  particular,  the  lack  of  living  sjieciniens  has  prevented  more  than  a  sum- 
mary description  being  given. 

Description  of  tiik  New  Species. 

Family    I10L()ST0:\rATinAE. 

SubfamUv  HOLOSTOMEAE. 

Genus  H  o  i,  o  s  t  o  ji  r  m    Nitzsch. 

Hoi.osTOllUJi  repkxs,  n.sp.      (PI.  xxvi..  fiijs.  1-5.) 

External  Characters. — 11.  re  pens  is  0  mm.  in  lenjith  and  shows  tiie  umuiI 
divnsion  into  two  regions,  not  well  marked  otf  from  one  another,  the  anterior  2  mm. 
and  the  posterior  4  mm.  long.  The  latter  is  narrower  than  the  anterior  regiun, 
the  diameter  increasing  towards  the  posterior  end,  and  being  gi-eatest  in  tlie 
region  of  the  testes,  where  it  exceeds  the  width  of  the  fore  part  of  the  body.  In 
preserved  specimens  the  dorsal  surface  has  a  concave  curvature,  owing  to  the 
contracted  condition  of  the  dorsal  loniiitudinal   nuiscle   band>. 


BY    ELEAXOt;    K.    ('HASE. 


501 


The  dingiug  plug  exfciuls  a  sbort  distance  I)eyoiul  tlie  margin  of  the  beaker- 
shaped  anterior  region,  and  the  genital  papilla  also  projects  a  short  distance 
from  the   bursa  posteriorly.     (Text-flg.   1.) 


f^eg.  iiL.  lit 


Text. fig. 1. — Holosliiiuiii  ripiiis,  ii.sp. 


In  all  the  described  species  of  Hnlostomum,  the  oral  sucker  and  tlie  pharynx 
are  both  well-defined  structures,  but  in  H.  repens  only  one  cavity  with  thick  mus- 
cular walls  is  found  in  connection  with  the  mouth.  With  the  limited  amount 
of  material  at  my  disposal,  a  difBeulty  has  been  experienced  in  determining 
whether  this  structui'e  represents  an  oral  sucker,  or  pharynx,  or  a  union  of  the 
two.     In  the  -Trematoda    the  absence  of  a   pliai-ynx  is    not  common,  ;dtb(]ugh    it 


502  A    XKW    A\  IAN    THK.MATUDE, 

does  occur  in  some  yeuera,  e.g.,  Ooryuderu,  but  here  the  couclusiou  is  I'ureed  upon 
me  that  the  pharynx  is  present,  and  that  no  distinct  oral  sucker  is  represented. 
The  posterior  sucker,  (1.133  mm.  long-.  0.095  mm.  broad,  with  thickness  of  wall. 
0.038  mni.,  opens  into  the  narrow  cavity  between  the  doisal  body  wall  and  the 
median   process  of  the  clinging  plug. 

The  Clinging  Plug. — The  clinging  jjlug  comprises  (1)  a  main  ovoid  mass, 
larger  basally,  divided  into  two  lateral  lobes  by  an  oblique  septum  running  from 
the  dorsal  body  wall  at  half  its  length  anteriorly  to  the  ventral  wall  at  its  hinder 
level  posteriorly.  In  this  septum  lun  the  two  branches  of  the  alimentary  canal 
and  certain  large  excretory  spaces  (PI.  xsvi.,  fig.  4,  int.  ex.).  Anteriorly  the 
mass  projects  forward  as  two  smaller  lateral  lobes,  which  end  a  little  forward  of 
the  narrowest  diameter  of  the  cup  (PI.  sxvi.,  tig.  3,  d.  ic.)  :  (.2)  a  median  process 
attached  to  the  dorsal  body  wall  anterior  to  the  main  lobes,  narrowing  distally, 
and  enlarging  into  two  small  flattened  lobes,  capable  of  being  bent  over  towards 
the  ventral  wall  (PI.  xx\"i..  tig.  3,  m.d.p.),  but,  when  extended,  reaching  to  the 
boi-der  of  the  cup;  (3)  a  lamellar  fold  arising  from  the  ventral  body  wall  at  the 
anterior  level  of  the  main  mass,  and  expanding  on  both  sides  to  form  a  collar 
embracing  the  median  jjrocess,  and  the  doi'sal  and  ventral  processes  next  men^ 
tioned  (PI.  xxvi.,  fig.  3,  r.ic.) ;  (4)  a  capitate  process  arising  from  the  base  of  the 
median  lobe  dorsally  and  extending  forwards  to  the  level' of  the  cup  margin  (PI. 
xxvi.,  fig.  3,  pr2)  ;  and  (5)  a  similar  larger  ventral  process  arising  at  the  base  of 
the  lamellar  fold,  and  projecting  forwards  to  the  same  distance  (PI.  xxvi.,  fig.  3. 
pn). 

The  main  ovoid  mass  of  the  plug  arises  from  the  dorsal  Ijody  wall  pos- 
terior to  the  narrowest  regri<m  of  the  cup  (PI.  xxvi.,  fig.  3) .  It  is  divided  into  two 
lateral  lobes,  into  which  muscle  fibres  pass  through  the  base  of  attachment  from 
l)<)tli  an  anterior  and  posterior  direction.  Vitelline  glands  are  found  throughout 
this  division  of  the  i)lug.  but  do  not  occur  in  any  of  the  other  pi'ocesses. 

The  large  gland  spoken  of  by  Brandes  (1891,  p.  3t)0l  as  secreting  a  corrod- 
ing substance,  is  situated  just  behind  the  base  of  attachment  of  this  main  doi'sal 
mass  (Pi.  xxvi.,  fig.  2,  gl.).  The  aiTangement  of  the  follicles  of  the  gland  point 
to  the  fact  that  the  secretion  is  carried  fonvard  by  a  number  of  fine  ducts,  but 
no  connection  can  be  traced  between  this  gland  ^ind  certain  ducts  containing  a 
definite  secretion,  whicli  appear  at  the  posterior  extremity  of  the  main  mass  of 
the  plug,  and  run  forward  in  the  accessory  processes. 

The  cup  in  which  the  plug  lies  occupies  almost  one  third  of  the  total  body 
length,  and  is  divided  posteriorly  into  two  lateral  cavities  by  the  obliiiue  sei)tum 
before  mentioned  (PI.  xxvi.,  fig.  4,  c.c). 

Miiscidature. — Lying  directly  below  the  cuticle  are  two  layers  of  nuisde 
fibres,  an  outer  circular,  and  an  iiuier  longitudinal  layer.  In  addition,  definite 
strands  of  oblique  nuisde  extend  tl.rouuh  tlie  parencliyma  from  tlie  outer  to  t\n- 
inner  wall  of  the  cup. 

The  region  of  the  ventral  sucker  is  very  nuiscular.  and  it  is  liere  that  thi- 
two  main  dorsal  longitudinal  bamls  of  nuisde  have  their  origin.  These  band> 
run  back  below  tlie  dorsal  surface  to  tlie  i«)sterior  end  of  the  body,  and  adil 
greatly  to  tiie  efifectiveness  of  the  ])liig  as  explained  l)y  lirandes  (1891,  ji.  5591. 
Contraction  of  these  fibres  causes  a  sharpening  of  the  angle  between  the  anterior 
and  posterior  i-egions.  and  tlie  pressure  of  the  individnal  jiarts  of  the  iiiui;  ai;ain>t 
one  another. 


BY    ELEANOl!    K.    CUAt^E.  503 

The  dursal  median  iirui-ess  of  the  clingiug  ijlug  has  nuuieruus  tibres  at  its 
base,  and  the  bifid  extremity  is  capable  of  being  bent  back  on  itself  by  the  eon- 
traction  of  the  fibres  contained  within  these  lobes  (PI.  xxvi.,  fig.  3,  m.d.p.). 

There  is  a  strong  layer  of  circular  muscle  in  the  parenchyma  of  the  wall 
surrounding  the  main  ovoid  mass  of  the  plug,  and  it  is  continuous  with  the  fibres, 
which  run  into  the  septum  dividing  the  cavity  of  the  cup   (PI.  xxvi.,  fig's,  2,  4  cm.). 

Alimentary  Canal. — Owing  to  the  absence  of  a  definite  oral  sucker  as  stated 
above,  the  mouth  leads  directly  into  a  pharynx  0.114:  mm.  long,  0.057  mm. 
broad,  with  thickness  of  wall  0.019  mm. 

The  intestine  is  dorsal  in  jjosition  in  fore  part  of  the  body,  but  (PI.  xxvi., 
fig.  4,  int.)  shows  the  two  limbs  crossing  over  in  the  septum  to  take  up  a  ventral 
position  in  the  posterior  cylindrical  region  (PI.  xxvi.,  fig.  5,  int.). 

Excretory  System. — There  is  a  ramifying  system  of  excretory  vessels,  but  with 
the  present  imperfect  specimens  I  am  unable  to  give  a  detailed  account  of  their 
distribution . 

Reproductive  System. — The  reproductive  system  of  H.  repens  is  very  similar 
to  the  description  given  by  Brandes  (1891.  p.  590,  PI.  xli.,  fig.  1)  for  //.  variahile. 
The  genital  organs  are,  however,  confined  to  the  posterior  third  of  the  animal. 
The  uterus,  with  the  exception  of  its  connection  with  the  vesicula  seminalis,  has 
the  same  relations  as  in  H.  variahile.  In  the  latter  the  vesicula  seminalis  opens 
into  the  uterus  at  the  base  of  the  genital  papilla,  whereas  in  H.  repens  it- joins 
the  female  duct  near  the  extremity  of  the  papilla   (PI.  xx\'i.,  fig.  1). 

The  eggs  are  large,  0.095  x   0.07(5  mm.;  0.133  X   0.095  mm. 

There  are  numerous  vitelline  glands,  which  extend  into  the  anterior  region, 
and  are  found  in  the  two  swollen  masses  of  the  dorsal  wall  of  the  plug  (PL  xxvi., 
fig.  2,  v.g.).  In  the  region  of  the  reproductive  organs,  the  follicles  are  confined 
to  a  ventral  position,  but  they  do  occur  dorsally  both  in  front  of  and  behind  these 
organs. 

Affinitie.^:. — //.  variahile  Xitzsch,  according  to  Brandes  (1891.  p.  590,  PI.  xli.. 
fig.  1),  is  closely  allied  to  H.  repens  in  the  general  arrangement  of  the  organs,  but 
in  shape  U.  repens  is  considerably  more  elongated,  and  the  plug  occupies  a  much 
greater  proportion  of  the  body.  Holostomum  simplex  Johnston  (1904,  p.  112, 
PI.  vii.,  figs.  1-3),  from  the  same  host,  has  somewhat  the  same  fonn,  but  the 
clinging  plug  is  of  a  simpler  tyiie.  In  no  other  species  described  have  I  found 
the  absence  ol  oral  sucker  noted. 

Host. — Fi'om  the  intestine  of  Xotophoyx  twvae-hnllandiae,  collected  at  Terri- 
gal,  N.S.W. 

Type   Ko.  Vr.544  in  the  Australian  iluseum,  Sydney. 

References. 

Braxdes.     1888.      Uber   das    Genus   lldlostdinHni    Xitzsch.    Zool.   Anz.,   xi.,   pp. 

424-426. 
1891.     Die  familie  der  Holostomiden .     Zool.  Jahrh.,  v.,  pp.  549-G04, 

PI.  xxxix.-xli. 
"DujAEDlx.     1845.     Histoire  naturelle  des  Helminthes  ou  vers  intestinaux.     Paris. 
Johnston.     1904.     On    some    species    of  Holostomidae   from  Australian   Birds. 

Proc.  Linn.  Soe.  N.S.  Wales.,  xxix.,  pp.  108-116,  PL  v.-vii. 
LiNTOX.     1892.     Notes  on  Avian  Entozoa.     Proc.  U.S.  Nat.  Mm.,  xv.,  pp.  87-113. 

PL  iv.-viii. 


504  .  A    NEW   AVIAN   TREIIATODE, 

Explanation  or  Plate  xxvi. 
Holostomum  repens,  n.sp. 

Fig.    1. — Reconstruction  of  posterior  region,  showing  relations  of  tlie  leproductive  organs. 
Fig.  2. — Transverse  section  through  the  main  lateral  lobes  of  the  dorsal  w:ill  of  the  plug. 
Pig.  3. — Reconstruction  of  anterior  region,  showing  various  processes  of  the  clinging  plug. 
Fig.  4. — Transverse  section  through  the  posterior  region  of  the  cup. 
Fig.  5. — Transverse  section  through  the  testes,  shell  gland,  uterus,  vas  deferens. 

Explanation  of  Lettering  for  Text  Fk.ire  axu  Plate. 

b.c.  bursa  copulatrix;  c.c.  cavity  of  cup;  on.  circular  muscle;  c.p,  clinging  plug;" 
d.hn.  dorsal  longitudinal  muscle;  d.2v.  dorsal  wall  of  plug  ;  e.g.  eggs  ;  eg.  in  lit.  eggs  in 
uterus;  ex.  excretory  vessel;  gl.  gland;  g.p.  genital  pajjilla ;  inl.  intestine;  Ic.  laurer's 
canal;  It.  lobes  of  testis;  m.d.p.  median  dorsal  process  of  plug;  m.v.d.  single  unpaired 
vitelline  duct ;  oi>.  ovary;  oot.  ootype;  ovid.  oviduct;  ph.  pharynx;  pr,.  process  arising 
from  base  of  ventral  lamellar  wall ;  /r^.  process  arising  from  base  of  median  dorsal  lobe ; 
r.a.u.  receptaculum  seminis  uterinum  ;  ih.g.  shell  gland ;  t ,.  anterior  testis  ;  t^.  posterior 
testis  ;  td.  transverse  yolk  duct :  ut.  uterus ;  vd.  vas  deferens ;  v.g:  vitelline  glands ; 
v.s.  ventral  sucker;  I'.sein.  vesicula  seminalis;  v.u\  ventral  lamellar  wall  of  plug; 
y.r.  yolk  reservoir. 


505 


STUDIES  IN  LIFE-HISTORIES   OF  AUSTRALIAN  DIPTERA 
BRACHYCERA. 

Part  i.     Stratiomyiidae. 

No.  1.     Metoponia  rubriceps  Macquart. 

By  Vera  Irwin-Smith,  B.Sc,  F.L.S.,  Linnean  Macleay  Fellow  of  the 

Society  in  Zoology. 

(Plates  xsvii.-xxviii.,  and  23  text-figures.) 

Introduction. 

During-  the  jiast  twelve  months  I  have  had  the  opportunity  of  collecting,  in 
the  neighbourhood  of  Sydney,  many  soil-inhabiting  dipterous  larvae,  belonging, 
for  the  most  part,  to  the  section  Braehycera.  Of  these,  I  have  succeeded  in  rear- 
ing through  to  the  imago,  species  of  the  families  Stratiomyiidae,  Mydaidae,  Tab- 
anidae,  Asilidae,  Therevidae,  and  Bombylidae.  and  to  the  pupal  stage,  many  other, 
as  yet  unidentified,  species. 

Very  little  work  has  been  d(UK%  in  any  part  of  the  world,  on  the  early  stages 
of  the  Braohyoera,  and  the  Australian  forms  have ,  been,  up  to  the  present  time, 
almost  entirely  unknown .  The  material  now  collected  is  therefore  of  considerable  im- 
portance, as  affording  an  opportunity  of  studying  the  life  histories  of  these  files. 
Many  gaps  yet  remain  to  be  tilled.  In  no  case  has  it  been  possible  to  observe 
all  stages  in  the  development,  but  it  is  hoped  that  the  preliminary  study  of  the 
data  obtained  will  prove  useful  as  a  basis  for  later,  more  extensive,  investigations. 
The  present  paper  is  intended  as  the  first  of  a  series  dealing  with  the  biology  of 
the  group,  arranged  in  the  order  of  the  families . 

The  Stratiomyiidae,  usually  placed  by  taxonomists  at  the  beginning  of  the 
Braehycera  series,  are  of  special  interest  because  of  the  peculiar,  intermediate 
position  which  they  occupy,  in  their  mode  of  development,  between  the  two  great 
sub-orders  of  Diptera,  distinguished  Ijy  Brauer  under  the  names  Orthorrhapha 
and   Cyclorrhapha. 

Although  classed  with  the  Orthorrhapha,  and  developing  a  more  or  less  perfect 
"pupa  obtecta,"  they  pass  the  entire  pupal  period  within  the  last  larval  skin, 
which  constitutes  a  h&rd,  protective  case,  recalling  the  "puparium"  of  the  Cyclorr- 
hapha. And  the  opening  up  of  this  case,  at  the  emergence  of  the  fly,  is  in  the 
form  of  a  combination  of  the  straight  dorsal  split  of  the  Orthorrhapha,  and  the 
anterior   circular   split    of   the  Cvclorriiaplia. 

A  discussion  of  the  significance  of  these  characters  is  outside  the  scope  of  the 
present  work.  Bat  the  Stratiomyiidae  have  been  taken  first,  both  on  account  of 
the  usually  accepted  position  of  the  family,  and  because  the  abundance  and  ac- 
cessibility of  the  material  makes  possible  a  fuller  investigation  of  the  life-liistory 
of  one  of  this  gi-oup,  than  is  the  case  with  the  majority  of  the  other  families 
studied . 


506  STUDIES    IN    LIFE-HISTORIES   01"   AUSTRALIAN-    UIPTERA    nKACHYCERA^    1.. 

I  wish  here  to  acknowledge  my  imlebteduess  to  Mr.  G.  H.  Hardy,  who  is 
at  present  engaged  ou  the  taxonomic  study  of  the  species,  Metopunia  rubriceps 
Macq.  with  which  this  paper  deals.  It  was  his  observation  and  identification  of 
the  fiy  in  Sydney,  in  1919,  which  afforded  me  the  opportunity  of  studying  its 
life-history,  and  1  owe  to  him  many  helpful  suggestions,  and  assistance  with  sys- 
tematic work  and  with  literature.  I  have  also  to  thank  Mr.  C.  Hedley,  Acting 
Curator  of  the  Australian  iluseum,  for  the  facilities  afforded  me  at  the  Museum 
for  carrying  out  the  investigation;  and  members  of  the  Museum  staff,  generally, 
lor  their  constant  helpfulness  during  the  progi-ess  of  the  work.  To  my  mother 
I  owe  the  preservation  of  living  larvae  over  a  period  of  two  months,  when, 
through  illness  and  an  enforced  absence  from  Sydney,  ^  was  unable  to  attend 
to  them  myself.  For  the  execution  of  Plate  xxvii.,  in  collaboration  with  myself, 
1  have  to  thank  my  friend.  Miss  Edith  Horrocks. 

Historical. 

At  the  end  of  this  paper  1  append  a  list,  with  accompanying  bibliography,  of 
ail  the  species  of  tSlratiomyiidae  which  have  been  recorded  in  the  early  stages. 
The  latest  list  of  this  kind,  of  which  I  am  aware,  was  published  by  Brauer  in 
1883,  nearly  forty  years  ago.  In  addition  to  being  now  very  much  out  of  date, 
its  value  is  impaired  by  the  incomplete  way  in  which  the  references  are  quoted, 
and  the  lack  of  dates,  and  of  a  bibliography.  Nevertheless,  I  have  found  it  of 
great  service,  in  the  preparation  of  a  revised  and  more  up-to-date  list,  and 
have  taken  from  it  many  references  which  I  have  had  no  opportunity  of  seeing 
elsewliere.  The  bibliography,  which  I  have  added,  has  been  extended  to  cover, 
as  far  as  possible,  all  works  dealing  in  any  way  with  the  biology  of  the  Stratio- 
viyiidae.  Here  again  I  have  been  obbged  to  rely  on  earlier  workers,  and  on 
catalogues  such  as  those  of  the  Royal  Society  and  the  British  Museum,  and  the 
Zoological  Record,  for  many  references,  since  a  large  part  of  the  literature 
(juoted  is  not  available  to  me.  But  I  have  endeavoured  to  make  it  as  accurate 
as  possible  by  a  comparison  of  records  in  the  various  catalogues.  Arranged  in 
chronological  order,  and  with  explanatory  notes,  it  forms  in  itself  a  brief  his- 
torical review  of  all  the  work  done  to  date  ou  this  subject.  In  appearance  this 
is  of  considerable  bulk,  but  its  scope  is  limited.  Certainly,  more  attention  has 
been  paid  to  the  early  stages  of  the  Stratiomyiidae  than  to  those  of  any  other 
family  of  the  Brachycera.  Stratiomyid  larvae  seem  to  lie  plentiful  in  most  parts 
of  the  world,  and  very  often  live  under  conditions  which  excite  interest,  or  where 
they  are  readily  found.  But  in  many  instances  the  reference  to  them  consists 
merely  of  a  record  of  their  occurrence,  and  habitat,  with  or  witiiout  a  brief  de-  ■ 
scription  of  the  larva.  Thus  Packard  (1871).  Lucas  (1879),  and  Griffith  (1882) 
note  their  occurrence  in  the  salt  water,  and  hot  water  of  lakes  and  springs; 
Pearson  (1882),,  the  finding  of  a  larva  on  a  very  exposed  ])art  of  an  ocean 
lieach,  Florentin  (1899),  a  great  mass  of  them  in  excessively  saline  pools  in 
Lorraine,  Markel  (1844),  tlieir  association  with  a  nest  of  ants.  The  larvae 
which  liave  been  most  frequently  recorded  and  described  are  those  living  in  water, 
especially  the  gener:i  Odontomyia  and  Stratiomyia ;  and  of  these  the  species  Stra- 
tlomyia  chamaeleon  L.  has  received  the  most  attention.  Being  easily  obtainable, 
these  species  have  been  used  by  workers  engaged  in  a  study  of  the  comparative 
anatomy  of  the  larvae  of  various  insects,  notably  l)v  Kunckel  d'llerculais  (1879), 
and  Viallanes  (1882   18851  .     Rut  the  descripti<ms  have  been,  as  a  rule,  confined 


BV  VERA  IRWIX  SMITH.  507 

to  special  organs,  and  no  att(-'mi)t  has  been  made  to  give  a  general  and  complete 
account  oi'  the  larval  morphology  and  the  metamorphosis  of  any  of  the  Stratio- 
myiidae.  Portions  of  the  nervous  system  have  been  described,  in  this  way,  by 
Kunckel  d'Herculais  (1879),  Viallanes  (1882,  1885),  and  Henneguy  and  Binet 
(18'J-J);  the  integument,  by  Leydig  (1860),  Viallanes  (1882),  and  Plotnikow 
(1904)  ;  the  malpighiau  vessels,  by  Vaney  (1900)  ;  the  pharynx,  by  Vaney  (1902) 
and  Jusbaschjauz  (1910),  and  the  head  and  mouth  parts,  by  Becker  (1910)  . 
The  most  important  work  on  the  development  is  that  of  Jusbaschjanz  (1910), 
who  deals  in  great  histological  detail  with  the  development  of  the  imaginal  discs, 
etc. ;  but  he  gives  no  account  of  the  general  metamorphosis .  He  explains  that 
such  an  account  would  require  a  much  richer  material  than  he  had  at  his  disposal 
at  the  time,  and  that  he  had  not  succeeded  in  getting  many  pupal  stages,  the 
few  pupae  he  obtained  being  all  in  the  later  phases  of  development.  He  pro- 
poses to  deal  more  completely,  in  a  later  work,  with  the  phenomena  of  meta- 
morphosis and  development;  but,  if  the  promised  work  has  appeared,  it  has  not 
been  accessible  to  me,  and  I  have  found  no  record  of  it  in  the  catalogues.  I 
have  not  seen  Swammerdam's  book  (1737),  but,  according  to  Jusbaschjanz,  he 
describes  the  metamorphosis  of  Stratiomi/s  chamaeleon  with  an  accuracy  remark- 
able in  such  an  early  work.  Good  descriptions  of  the  external  features  of  larvae 
exist  in  various  papers  dealing  with  individual  species;  but  the  most  important 
works,  from  a  systematic  point  of  view,  are  those  of  Brauer  (1883),  and  Lund- 
beck  (1907) .  Although  Brauer  deals  with  dipterous  larvae  in  general,  his  work 
is  very  comprehensive  in  character.  After  discussing  the  value  of  larval  charac- 
ters in  classification,  and  the  metamorphosis  of  the  different  groups,  he  gives  a 
section  on  the  characters  of  the  sub-orders  and  families,  followed,  in  the  case  of  the 
Stratiomi/iidae.  by  a  systematic  table  (p.  23)  of  the  larval  characters  of  the  dif- 
ferent genera.  Lundbeck,  in  his  valuable  work  on  Danish  Diptera,  supplies  a 
description  of  the  larvae  under  the  heading  of  each  genus  of  the  Stratiomyiidae,. 
and  finishes  with  a  svTioptic  table  (p.  74)  of  the  larvae  of  all  Danish  genera. 

Little  or  nothing  is  known  of  the  life-histories,  or  even  of  the  larvae,  of  the 
Australian  Stratiomt/iidae.  The  only  published  record  of  the  early  stages  of  any 
of  this  group,  which  I  have  been  able  to  find,  is  that  of  Froggatt  (1896),  which 
relates  to  Ephippiuni  alhitarsifi    (?)   Bigot. 

Observations  on  thh  life-history  of  Metoponia  rubrioeps  Macq. 

For  a  few  weeks  in  the  spring,  and  again  in  the  autumn,  this  species  makes 
its  appearance,  in  fairly  considerable  numbers,  over  grassy  areas  in  the  neigh- 
bourhood of  Sydney.  Well  cultivated  lawns  seem  to  be  specially  favoured 
haunts,  and  the  flies,  which  are  small,  with  feeble  powers  of  flight,  are  usually 
found  on,  or  about,  the  grass.  They  seldom  rise  far  above  the  gi-ound,  though 
in  the  autumn  of  this  year,  one  female  specimen  was  captured  on  a  window  of 
the  third  floor  of  the  Australian  Museum.  Like  most  Stratiorayids,  they  are  sluggish 
in  their  habits,  and  remain  for  long  periods  at  rest  on  the  grass  blades,  where 
they  are  easily  caught  by  inverting  a  glass  tube  over  them.  Mr.  G.  H.  Hardy 
informs  me  that  he  has  taken  specimens  from  the  middle  of  March  to  the  end 
of  April,  and  in  the  early  part  of  November,  but  has  never  seen  them  at  other 
times  of  the  year. 

The  present  investigation  into  the  life-history  was  begun  in  May,  1919,  when 
I  received  from  Mr.  Hardy  a  specimen  tube  containing  a  cluster  of  eggs  on  a 
grass  blade,  with  the  information  that  they  were  deposited  by  Metoponia   rubri- 


508 


STUDIES    IX    LIFK-IUf^TORIKS    OF   .U'sTUALIAN    DIPTKRA    BRACHYCERA,    1., 


ceps  witliiii  a  lew  liuiirs  (if  her  capture  on  the  morning  of  the  IGth  April. 
Owing  to  an  aeeiJontal  delay  in  transmission,  they  did  not  reach  me  for  nearly 
three  weeks,  during  which  time  they  had  become  shrivelled  and  dry,  and,  though 
kept  undisturbed  for  another  month,  they  failed  to  hatch  out. 

Attempts  to  seciu'e  further  batches  of  eggs,  by  confining  the  two  sexes  '.n 
breeding  cage*  containing  grass  sods,  all  proved  unsuccessful.  It  was  found  that 
the  flies,  for  the  most  part,  remained  nK)tionless  in  the  one  position  from  the 
time  they  were  put  into  the  cage  until  their  death,  a  period  varying  from  three 
to   ten   days;   and  no  case  of  ovijiosition    was  observed. 

In  the  following  November  Mr.  Hardy  directed  my  attention  to  the  re- 
appearance of  M.  rubriceps  on  a  grass  plot  behind  the  Australian  Museum,  with 
the  suggestion  that  this  might  prove  a  natural  breeding  ground  for  it. 


Te.\t-fif;.l.  Larva  of  Metoponiix  rubriceps  Macq.     Dorsal  view,     (x  10). 
Text-fig. 2.  ,,  .,  Ventral  view,      (x  10). 

Text-fig.3.  M.   rubriceps.       9   emerging  from  larval  skin,      (x  6J). 

Text-fig. 4.  Hf.  rubriceps.     Empty  larval  skin  of  f;^.     (x  6J). 

Text-fig. 4(7.  Detached  'hoail  cap'  of  larval  skin,      (x  lij). 


Here  a  small  sloping  bank  thirty  feet  long  by  twelve  feet  wide,  in  the  middle 
of  an  asjihalted  courtyard,  has  been  formed  by  laying  down  sandy  black  loam, 
to  a  depth  of  one  to  two  feet,  on  a  rubble  foundation  of  broken  bricks  and 
stones,  and  planted  with  paspalum  and  coucli  grass,  interspersed  with  dandelion 
plants  and    other    weeds.     It   is  kept    well    tended,  and    always  contains   a    fair 


BY    VERA    IRWIX    SMITH.  509 

amount  of  moisture,  so  that  tlie  grass  grows  well,  with  thick  rhizomes  and  closely 
matted   roots. 

On  the  Ttli  November  a  small  portion  of  this  turf  was  dug  up,  and  a  search 
made  for  larvae  in  soil  spread  out  over  a  white  concrete  path.  Together  with 
numerous  Hymenopteron  and  Coleopteron  larvae,  and  some  cocoons  of  wasps, 
and  Syrphid  flies,  some  twenty-eight  larvae  were  found,  of  an  undoubtedly  Stra- 
tiomyid  type,  ranging  in  size  from  5  to  11  mm.  (Text-flgs.l  and  2)  .  Fourteen 
of  these  were  kept  alive,  and  confined  together  in  a  small  cylindrical  glass  pot, 
containing  an  inch  or  two  or  soil,  and  some  small  grass  sods,  and  covered  witii  a 
glass  lid.  As  the  grass  decayed,  fresh  sods  were  put  in  at  intervals  of  two  or 
three  weeks,  and  a  few  drops  of  water  added  with  them,  so  that  the  soil  was  kept 
just  slightly  damp.  Five  months  later  most  of  the  larvae  were  still  alive,  but 
showed  very  little  increase  in  size. 

On  the  morning  of  tlie  13tli  April  a  male  Metoponia  rubriceps  was  found  to 
have  emerged.  This  date  corresponded  closely  with  that  on  which  the  tlies  had 
been  observed  first  on  the  Museum  lawn  in  the  previous  year.  Accordingly,  on 
the  following  morning,  a  visit  was  paid  to  the  spot  from  which  the  larvae  had 
been  taken.  Here,  large  numbers  of  imagines,  both  males  and  females,  were 
found  already  out,  swarming  above  the  grass  in  fairly  rapid  flight,  the  unusual 
activity  l)eing  due,  probably,  to  a  period  of  warm  sunshine  following  several 
days'  rain.  From  Mr.  Hardy  I  learnt  that  a  few  individuals  had  first  appeared 
a  week  or  two  before,  but  tliat  they  had  not  become  numerous  until  within  a 
few  days  of  this  time. 

Larvae  were  found  to  be  jiresent  in  the  soil  in  much  greater  numbers  than 
had  been  observed  in  the  previous  November.  A  rough  searcii  tlirough  turf 
taken  from  an  area  less  than  two  feet  sf|uare  revealed  eighty-five  larvae,  in  all 
stages  of  development,  from  lar\ae  3.2  nmi.  long,  to  fully  developed  iiujiae  in 
larval  skins  8  to  11  mm.  long.  Two  female  imagines  were  found  just  in  the 
act  of  emerging,  and  were  killed  and  Hxed  in  this  position,  half  way  out  of  the 
larval  skin  (Text-fig.  3).  These  were  both  taken  just  at  the  surface  of  the 
soil.  In  the  same  position,  among  exposed  rhizomes,  were  many  empty  caseS; 
all  showing  a  clean-cut,  circular,  aperture  at  one  end,  and  measuring  from  7  to 
11  mm.  long.  In  several  instances  the  anterior  extremity,  forming  a  lid-like  cap 
to  the  case,  was  still  lightly  attached  to  it  on  the  ventral  side  (Text-fig  4),  but 
broke  away  with  the  slightest  movement    (Text-fig.  4a). 

The  vertical  levels,  in  the  soil,  from  which  larvae  of  different  sizes  were  ob- 
tained, were  carefully  noted.  The  fully  grown  larvae  were  all  found  almost  on 
the  surface,  about  the  junctions  of  stems  and  roots,  mostly  wedged  in  between  the 
thicker  rhizomes,  especially  of  the  paspalum  grass.  In  colour,  and  seginented 
appearance,  these  bear  a  rather  striking  resemblance  to  the  larvae.  From  this 
level,  down  to  one  to  two  inches  below  the  surface,  fifty  of  the  larger  larvae 
were  taken.  At  a  slightly  lower  level,  three  to  four  inches  down,  among  the 
finer  grass  rootlets,  were  smaller  larvae,  always  in  close  association  with  the 
grass.  Several  were  found  attached  l)y  the  head-capsule  to  roots,  and  one,  removed 
from  the  soil  with  its  head  buried  in  the  root  of  a  dandelion  plant,  remained  in 
this  position  for  several  hours.  About  eighteen  inches  below  the  surface,  the 
sub-soil  and  rubble  foundation  of  the  lawn  were  reached.  No  larvae  were  found 
at,  or  below,  this  depth,  and  only  a  very  few  at  the  ten-inch  level.  These  last 
were  of  medium  size,  from  5  to  8  mm.   long. 


510  STUDIES    IX    LIFE-IIISTORIES    OF   AUSTRALIAN    DIPTERA    BRACHYCERA,    I., 

For  the  next  two  or  three  weeks  Hies  continued  to  emerge  in  the  large  glass 
jar,  containing  grass  sods,  iu  which  these  larvae  were  confined.  They  made 
tlieir  appearance  successively  on  the  19th,  23rd,  and  30th  April,  anil  3rd  and 
4th  May.  With  the  exception  of  two  females  on  the  23rd,  these  were  all  males. 
By  this  time  most  of  the  remaining  larvae  of  the  larger  size  had  been  chloro- 
formed and  dissected.  Some  twenty  of  them  were  found  in  various  stages  of 
pupation  within  the  larval  skin;  the  rest  still  retained  the  unaltered  larval  struc- 
ture. 

On  the  30th  April,  a  second  imago,  a  male,  emerged  from  among  the  larvae 
collected  in  the  previous  November.  These  two  are  the  only  ones  of  this  collec- 
tion which  have  emerged  to  date  (September,  1920).  Six  of  the  larvae  are  still 
alive,  but  none  of  them  show   any  signs  of  pupating  as  yet. 

After  an  interval  of  one  month,  on  the  13th  May,  the  ^Museum  lawn  was 
again  examined.  Imagines  were  now  very  scarce,  only  one  male  and  two  females 
being  observed.  There  was  a  corresponding  scarcity  of  mature  larvae  in  the 
soil,  but  numerous  empty  larval  skins  were  found  on,  or  close  to,  the  surface. 
In  the  deeper  levels,  among  the  terminal  rootlets  of  the  grass,  smaller  larvae 
were  still  plentiful.  Over  forty  were  collected  in  a  few  spadefuls  of  earth,  the 
smallest  of  them  being  barely  2  mm.  long,  while  others  ranged  up  to  6  and  7  mm. 
A  few  larger  larvae  were  found  closer  to  the  surface.  Of  these,  three  were  found 
to  contain  female  pupae,  two  of  them  being  dead,  and  already  beginning  to  decay. 
From  a  fourth,  a  dead  and  dried,  but  fully-formed  male  imago  was  taken. 

It  seemed  evident  that  the  smaller  larvae  belonged  to  one  or  several  younger 
generations  which  were  burrowing  down  to  pass  the  winter  at  deeper  levels,  as 
the  mature  larvae  migi-ated  to  the  surface  to  pupate.  But  it  was  necessary  to 
follow  them  up,  later  on  in  the  winter,  in  order  to  find  out  just  what  had  Ijecome 
of  them.  Accordingly,  on  the  3rd  August,  another  examination  of  the  lawn  was 
made.  On  this  occasion  the  soil  was  very  damp  after  five  or  six  weeks'  con- 
tinual rain,  and  only  a  small  area  of  gi-ound,  about  the  size  of  the  surface  of  the 
spade,  was  dug  up.  No  larvae  were  found  close  to  the  surface,  but  eighteen, 
varying  in  size  from  5  to  11  mm.,  were  found  among  the  terminal  rootlets,  at  a 
depth  of  three  or  four  inches,  four  larvae,  from  5  to  8.5  nuu..  a  little  lower 
down,  and  three  from  7  to  8.5  mm.  at  a  slightly  greater  depth. 

It  will  thus  be  seen  that  larvae  of  very  varying  sizes  occur  at  aU  periods  of 
the  year,  and  that  except  when  they  are  about  to  pupate,  most  of  the  larvae 
are  found  always  at  a  depth  of  two  or  three  inches  below  the  surface. 

Living  lar\ae  of  all  sizes,  from  4  to  9  mm.,  and  of  all  collections,  from  No- 
vember onwards,  are  still  being  kept  under  observation,  though  a  good  many 
have  died  or  been  lost,  owing  to  the  predations  of  rats  and  mice,  which  infest 
the  laboratories  of  the  Macleay  Museum,  and  appear  to  have  developed  a  taste 
for  fly  larvae.  On  several  occasions  glass  pots  left  overnight  uncovered,  or  with 
loosely-fitting  covers,  have  been  fomid  in  the  mcjrning  witli  the  soil  ovcrfnnnMl, 
and  all  the  larvae  gone. 

lAfe-cjicle. 

Fargeau  and  Scivillc,  as  early  as  1825,  (|Uoting  Macquart's  description  of 
Paehygaster  ater,  made  the  statement  that  the  larvae  require  more  than  a  year 
for  their  complete  development.  And  West  wood  (1S40)  says  that  the  larva  of 
Clitellaria  cpliippium  found  by  Van  Roser,  although  more  tluan  half-grown  when 
found,  was  two  years  in  arriving  at  the  perfect  state.  Later  writers  appear  to 
have  paid  very  little  attention  to  this  question  of  the  period  occupied  in   the  life- 


RY    VERA    IRWIX    SMITH.  511 

cycle  of  any  of  the  titratiomi/iidae.  Jlost  of  them  content  themselves  with  rather 
vague  statements,  as.  for  instance,  -that  "the  larvae  hibernate,  and  development 
takes  place  in  the  spring-  and  summer."'  Tragardh,  in  his  description  of  Paclii/- 
(jatiter  miiiuti.'-sima  (1914)  makes  the  observation  that  during  the  summer  only 
small  larvae  can  be  found,  from  which  fact  the  deduction  is  drawn  that  only  one 
generation  is  produced  annually,  which  hibernates  in  the  larva-stage,  conforming 
to  the  aeeount  given  by  Perris  (1870)  concerning  Pachygaster  pini.  Cros,  in  his 
interesting  observations  on  the  larval  habits  of  Stratiornyia  anubis  (1911),  records 
that,  of  a  dozen  larvae  collected  on  the  22nd  October,  1903,  four  yielded  ima- 
gines in  the  following  June,  while  from  twenty-six  larvae  collected  on  the  31st 
December,  1909,  hve  flies  were  obtained  successively  on  the  25th  .June,  and  on 
the  4th  July,  1910.  But  he  gives  no  account  of  the  fate  of  the  remainder  of 
the  larvae. 

Xonc  of  the  larvae  of  Metoponia  riibriceps  have  grown  very  much  during 
their  period  in  captivity,  and  some  time  must  elapse  before  it  is  23ossible  to  de- 
termine the  normal  time  occupied  in  larval  development.  However,  it  is  already 
clear  that,  although  two  broods  of  flies  appear  annually,  the  larval  period  re- 
quires more  than  six  months  for  its  completion,  and  very  probable  that  it  re- 
quires considerably  longer  than  twelve  months.  This  may  be  deduced  from  the 
very  slow  gi-owth  of  larvae  in  captivity,  and  the  fact  that  larvae,  already  more 
than  half-grown  when  taken  in  November,  show  no  sign  of  pupating  in  the  fol- 
lowing Sejitember.  Although  it  is  not  safe  to  arrive  at  definite  conclusions  from 
larvae  kept  under  abnormal  conditions,  these  conclusions  are  borne  out  by  obser- 
vations in  the  field,  since  small  larvae  are  found  at  all  times  of  the  year,  and 
larvae  less  than  5  mm.  long  five  months  after  the  last  appearance  of  the  adult 
flies.  The  smallest  larva  found,  being  only  a  little  more  than  twice  the  size  ot 
the  egg,  was  probably  still  in  the  first  larval  instar  when  taken,  one  month  after 
the  appearance  of  the  imagines.  It  seems  reasonable  to  assume  that  larvae  of 
this,  and  ]ierhaps  the  3  and  4  mm.  lengtli.  hatched  from  the  egg  during  the  sea- 
son in  which  they  were  taken. 

Unfortunately,  no  eggs  were  found  in  natural  conditions,  and,  though  several 
batches  were  obtained  from  females  captured  in  glass  tubes  during  the  past 
autumn,  none  of  them  hatched  out. 

^'arious  methods  of  keeping  them  were  adopted — on  damp  blotting  paper 
over  a  layer  of  damp  soil,  in  a  covered  glass  pot;  on  growing  rhizomes  of  paspa- 
lum  grass ;  directly  on  damp  soil ;  or  kept  in  the  tube  in  which  they  were  de- 
posited. In  most  cases  they  were  covered  up  from  the  light,  and  care  was  taken 
to  prevent  them  from  becoming  completely  dry.  Under  drj-  conditions  they  soon 
shrivelled  up,  while,  when  conditions  were  at  all  damp,  the  eggs  were  continuous- 
ly thickly  coated  with  fine  beads  of  moisture,  and  many  of  them  were  found  to 
be  infested  with  fungus  after  a  short  time.  However,  a  fair  number  retained 
their  normal  sliape  and  appearance  for  ten  weeks  or  more,  but  in  no  case  did 
they  show  any  sign  of  development.  It  is  possible  that  all  these  eggs  were  in- 
fertile . 

Ovipositinn. 

Gravid-looking  females  taken  during  the  morning,  between  10  and  11  o'clock. 
usually  oviposited  vei-y  rapidly,  the  egg-laying  being  finished  before  midday. 
Usually  the  eggs  were  laid  on  the  side  of  the  glass  tube,  sometimes  on  cotton- 
wool.    In   one  instance  they  were  placed  in  a  single,  fairly  even   row,  along  the 


512 


STUDIES    IN   LIFE-HISTORIES   OF  AUSTRALIAN-    DIPTERA   BRACHTCERA,   1., 


side  of  the  vessel,  adheriug  tu  one  anollier  laterally,  and  to  the  vessel  liy  means 
of  a  stieky  substance  with  wliich  they  are  coated  (Text-fig.  5a).  But  all  the 
others  laid  in  tubes,  as  well  as  those  obtained  in  the  single  instance  in  which 
one  female  oviposited  on  soil  in  a  Ijreeding  cage,  formed  one  or  two  clumps, 
the  eggs  being-  jiiled  up  iriegularly  on  one  anotlier,  though  often  remaining  in 
contact  at  the  pole  (Text-tiy.  5?'). 


Text-figs. P-8.    Posterior  end  of  larva  of 
RI.  rubriceps. 

Fig. 6.  Lateral  view.     Fig."   Dorsal 
view.     Fig.8.   Ventral  view,  (x  10). 

Text-fig. 5.  a.  Egg  cluster  ^[.  ruhriceps.  (x  5); 
^,  eg^  cluster.  (xlO);  c,  single  egg.  (x.32); 
d,  sculpturing  on  chorion  of  egg.    (x  19.S) . 

The  number  of  eggs  dei)osited.  in  each  case,  by  four  females  was  carefully 
counted.  The  numbers  were,  respectively,  130,  lli3,  l(i4,  and  181.  If  these 
tigures  represent  anything  like  the  normal  nund)er,  the  fecundity  of  this  species 
is  much  lower  than  is  the  case  with  Strdtiiniii/io  clnnnaeleun  Beg.,  for  which  Mik 
(1896)    gives  the  figure   630. 

The  Eijcj. 

Tiie  eggs  are  opaque  white  in  colour,  and  elongated  oval  in  outline,  slightly 
broader  at  one  end  tlian  the  other  (Text-fig.  5c )  .  They  measure  from  .80  to  .88 
mm.  lu  length,  and  .22  to  .27  nun.  in  diameter.  The  chorion  is  thin,  and  its 
surface  shows  a  very  delicate  sculpturing  in  the  form  of  an  irregular  network 
of  raised  lines  enclosing  polygonal-sluiped  spaces  (Text-fig.  5rf).  This  marking 
can  only  be  seen  under  high  magnification,  and  when  the  chorion  is  torn  away,  or 
freed  fi'oin  the  internal  contents  of  the  eggs  by  clearing.  Treatment  with  caustic 
potash,  or  willi  clearing  agents,  such  as  clove  and  cedar  oil,  did  not  give  good 
results,  but  more  sicccss  was  obtained  when  the  eggs  were  immersed  in  chloro- 
form, an<l  afterwards  cleared  in  xyjnl.  Tlu^y  tlien  mounted  fairly  well  in  Canada 
balsaiii. 

F.cdiis'ix. 

1  ha\('  liein  umililc  l<>  dctermiiu'  the  total  Muml)er  of  ccdyses  occurring  during 
the  larval  ])eriiid.  Oiilv  niic  of  tlu-  larvae  kept  in  the  laboratory  has  been  ob- 
served to  mnult   Iwice.  once  on  tlii'  3ril   December,  and    the    second    time  on    the 


nv    \KRA    IRWIN    SMITH.  513 

8th  June,  when  8.2  mm.  long.  A  single  moulting  occurred  in  a  number  of 
cases  among  the  larvae  taken  in  April  and  May.  The  majority  of  these  were  at 
the  7  mm.  stage,  but  tliere  were  a  few  at  ti,  8,  9,  and  9.5  mm.  Whether  these 
leugtiis  represent  successive  instars.  there  is  not  yet  sufficient  evidence  to  prove. 

All  the  larvae  escape  from  the  old  skin  in  much  the  same  way.  Before 
moulting  the  skin  liecomes  dry  and  withered  looking,  much  softer  than  when 
functional,  and  a  lighter  colour.  The  process,  which  usually  occupies  about  an 
hour,  begins  by  a  splitting  of  the  moult  skin,  along  one  side,  from  the  third  to  the 
ninth  or  tenth  segment,  tile  larva  slowly  moving  from  side  to  side,  and  contract- 
ing. The  skin  of  the  anal  region  remains  intact,  and  that  of  the  anterior  end 
is  split  off  entire,  between  the  thii'd  and  fourth  segments.  Frequently  the  larva 
emerges  from  the  posterior  portion  with  its  head  still  enclosed  in  this  anterior 
"cap,"  which  is  subsequently  shed.  The  empty  moult  skin  stands  out  stiffly, 
retaining  the  same  size  and  shape  as  when  the  larva  is  still  enclosed  in  it . 

The  new  larva'  skin  is  a  delicate  white  or  creamy  colour,  its  surface  flecked 
with  glistening  particles,  and  showing  the  typical  hexagonal  pattern  very  dis- 
tinctly. It  assumes  a  brownish  tinge  only  very  slowly,  and  is  still  light  in  colour 
at  the  end  of  several  weeks.  Older  larvae  show  the  more  normal  grey-brown 
colour,  which  tones  very  well  with  the  soil  in  which  they  live.  The  coating  of 
particles  of  dirt  which  invests  most  of  them  increases  this  resemblance  to  their 
environment. 

Pupation. 

During  the  period  of  pupation  the  larval  skin  becomes  much  darker,  and  as- 
sumes a  dry,  rigid  appearance,  by  which  the  condition  is  easily  recognised, 
although  there  is  no  change  in  outward  fonn .  Larval  skins  of  male  jiupae  mea- 
sure from  7  to  8  mm.,  those  of  females  from  10  to  11  mm.  For  some  time  be- 
fore the  emerg'enco  of  the  adult  fly  the  pupating  larva  is  quite  motionless,  and 
to  all  appearances  dead.  One  found  in  this  condition  on  the  13th  April,  did 
not  emerge  until  the  30th  April,  so  that  the  pupal  stage  occupies  at  least  eighteen 
days.  This  is  a  longer  period  than  is  given  by  .Jusbasehjanz,  who  states  that 
the  pupal  stage  lasts  eleven  to  thirteen  days. 

Larval  Ii(ihit.'<. 

The  larvae  are  all  extremely  sluggisli  in  their  movements.  Usually  they  re- 
main quite  immobile  for  Hve  or  ten  minutes  after  being  disturbed;  then  begin 
slow  movements  of  contraction,  and,  if  lying  ventral  side  uppermost,  roll  over, 
and  crawl  slowly  and  stiffly  along,  seeking  to  take  cover  beneath  the  soil,  a  pro- 
cess which  occupies  half  an  hour  or  more.  On  a  hard  surface,  or  a  layer  of 
soil  too  thin  to  burrow  into,  their  rate  of  progression  is  of  the  order  of  5  to  10 
mm.  in  ten  minutes.  Larvae  conflneil  in  glass  pots  in  the  laboratory  are  usually 
found  wedged  amony'  the  roots  of  grass  soon  after  the  fresh  sods  are  put  in  with 
them,  and  sometimes  adhering  to  a  root  by  the  head  capsule.  It  is  evident  that 
their  main,  if  not  only,  source  of  nourishment  is  in  the  juices  of  the  living  plant- 
But  I  have  never  been  able  to  detect  any  scars,  or  perforations,  or  other  evidences 
of  injury  on  the  roots,  and,  even  where  the  larvae  are  yery  numerous,  the  grass 
which  harbours  them  shows  no  ill-eft'ects  from  their  presence.  While  living 
normally  in  soil  in  which  a  fair  degree  of  moisture  is  present,  they  are  able  to 
sustain  life  in  much  drier  conditions.  Individuals  left  for  twenty-four  hours  or 
more,   without   soil,   in   a   dry   Petri   dish,   showed    no   ill-effects   from   the   experi- 


514  .STUDIES    iX    LIFE-HISTORIES    OF    AISTRALIAX    DIPTERA    BRACHYCERA,    i.. 

ence.  Others,  covereil  witli  a  thin  hiyer  of  sandy  soil,  which,  owing  to  evapora- 
tion, soon  became  quite  dry,  were  still  alive,  and  quite  healthy  after  several  days. 
But  larvae  which  had  been  placed  in  small  porous  flower  pots,  planted  with  grass, 
were  found  rjuite  dead,  dry  and  shrivelled,  together  with  the  grass,  when,  owing 
to  a  week's  enforced  neglect,  the  soil  had  been  allowed  to  become  dry  and  caked 
hard.  Returned  to  damp  conditions  none  of  them  showed  any  signs  of  reaniina- 
tion.  In  their  powers  of  resistance  to  desiccation,  therefore,  they  are  strikingly 
different  from  the  aquatic  species  of  Stratiomyia  observed  by  Cros  (1911),  and 
by  Laker  (1880).  The  former  records  having  kept  larvae  of  Stratiomyia 
anubis  in  a  phial  containing  15  mm.  depth  of  completely  dry  sand  for  seven 
months  l)efore  the  emergence  of  the  imago.  And  Laker  found  a  living  larva 
of  a  Stratiomyia  sp.  in  the  dry  sand  at  the  bottom  of  a  box  formerly  used  as 
an  aquarium,  after  it  had  been  emptied  of  water,  and  stored  in  a  cellar  for  fully 
three  months. 

Description  of  the  larva. 

The  larvae  are  very  similar  in  general  appearance  to  those  of  the  genus 
Sargus  Fabr.,  as  described  by  Brauer  (1883),  and  Lundbeek  (1907).  But  the 
Sargus  larva,  like  those  of  all  other  Stratiomyids,  is  said  to  have  only  eleven 
post-cephalic  segments,  whereas  a  lateral  view  of  Metoponia  ruhricepa  shows  that 
twehe  segments  are  actually  present.  From  a  dorsal  aspect  only  eleven  seg- 
ments are  seen  (Text-fig.  1),  and  in  ventral  view  another  segment  is  not  readily 
distinguishable.  But,  when  viewed  laterally,  it  is  seen  that  what  appears  to  be 
the  terminal  segment,  consists,  really,  of  the  imperfectly  fused  eleventh  and 
twelfth,  the  twelfth  segment  being  directed  ventrally,  and  di^'ided  off  from  the 
eleventh  by  a  very  oblique   line    (Text-fig.  G). 

The  segments  are  all  much  broader  than  long,  and  of  uniform  width  from 
the  second  to  the  tenth;  the  terminal  segments  are  slightly  narrower.  The  bodv 
is  elongate,  and,  in  the  older  larvae,  flattened  dorso-ventrally.  Younger  larvae 
are  more  nearly  cylindrical,  larvae  of  4  mm.  length  having  a  lateral  diameter 
of  1.0  mm.,  and  a  dorso-ventral  of  .93  mm.,  whereas  the  corresponding  propor- 
tions in  a  larva  of  9  mm.  length  are  2 . 0  and  1 . 6  mm .  In  transverse  section 
the  segments  have  the  shape  of  a  bi-convex  lens,  with  the  lateral  edges  expanded 
into  tumid  ridges,  marked  off  from  the  main  body,  on  both  surfaces,  by  a  shal- 
low groove.  The  eleventh  segment  is  somewhat  spatulate,  with  a  median  and 
two  lateral  convexities  on  the  dorsal  surface  (Text-figs.  1  and  15).  Between 
the  segments,  the  body  is  slightly  constricted,  and,  in  contraction,  the  segments 
.ire  imbricated,  overlapping  from  behind  forward  in  front  of  the  fourth  segment. 
and  in  the  reverse  direction  from  the  fourth  backward.  The  incisure  between 
the  tenth  and  eleventh  segments  is  strongly  arched  forwards  (Text-fig.  1). 

At  the  anterior  extremity  is  sit\iated  the  dark  brown,  strongly  chitiniscd 
head,  which  can  be  retracted  into  the  first  thoracic  segment. 

Integument. — The  whole  body  is  invested  in  a  thick,  firm  integument  of  the 
typical  stratiomyid  type,  consisting  of  large  hexagonal  plates,  separated  by 
granular  areas,  w'lich  cause  a  grating  sound  when  scratched  with  the  point  of  a 
needle  (Text-fig.  9)  This  armoured  coat  is  strongly  impregnated  with  car- 
bonate of  lime.  Fixation  in  Carl's  fluid,  containing  glacial  acetic  acid,  gives 
rise  to  a  rapid  and  long  continued  evolution  of  gas,  proved,  with  baryta  water, 
to  be  CO2.  Along  the  posterior  nuirgin  of  each  segment  (Text-fig.  10)  are 
two  or  three    transverse    rows    of  specially    differentiated   amber-coloured    plates 


BY    VERA    IRWIX    SMITH. 


515 


(pi),  which  probal)ly  mark  the  points  of  insertion,  internally,  of  the  segmental 
muscles,  as  described  by  Viallanes  (1882,  p.  7)  .  Similar  plates  are  numerous 
on  the    eleventh  segment,  and    in    the    reaion    of  the  anus.     The  latter    is  in  the 


^mw^  9 


Text-fig.9.  Spii-acle  of  abdominal  segment,  and  portion  of  the  integument  surround- 
ing it.      (x210). 

Text-fig.  10.  View  of  lateral  ridge  of  a  segment,  showing  spiracle  on  dorsal  side,  and 
arrangement  of  lateral  bristles,      (x  18). 

Text-fig. 11.      Portion  of  a  bristle,  broken  off  its  base /'/^^.      (x  210). 

form  of  a  longitudinal  slit,  with  thick,  stroni;:ly  chitinised  lips,  situated  medianly 
on  the  ventral  surface  of  the  end  segment.  From  it  a  deep  groove  runs  back- 
wards to  connect  with  a  terminal  transverse  split   (Text-flgs.  2,  8)  . 

Bristles. — Long,  stiff,  black  hairs,  or,  rather,  bristles,  are  present  orr  all  the 
segments.  They  are  very  brittle,  and  are  easily  broken  off  at  the  base,  so  that 
their  regular  arrangement  on  the  body  is  best  seen  on  a  freshly-moulted  speci- 
men. In  cross-section  they  are  circular,  and  each  consists  of  an  outer  brownish- 
coloured  sheath  enclosing  a  dark  solid  core,  which  extends  almost  to  the  tip 
(Text-fig.  11) .  Most  of  them  taper  to  a  fine  point.  As  in  the  larvae  of  the 
genera  Sargus,  Chloromyia,  Microchrysa,  and  in  Pachygaster  minutissima  Zetr., 
and  Xylomyia  maculata  Wied.,  each  abdominal  segment  from  the  first  to  the 
seventh  bears  a  transverse  row  of  six,  equally  long,  backwardly  directed  bristles 
on  each  surface.  The  dorsal  bail's  are  slightly  longer  than  the  ventral,  the 
average  lengths  in  larvae  of  2  mm.  width  being  about  0.7  and  0.6  mm.  respect- 
ively. On  the  dorsal  surface  they  all  slope  inward,  towards  the  mid-dorsal  Ime; 
those  on  the  ventral  surface  form  groups  of  three  on  each  side,  the  three  con- 
verging posteriorly  (Text-fig.  8).  On  each  of  the  lateral  ridges  of  the  same 
abdominal  segments  is  a  group  of  four  bristles,  in  two  rows,  set  diagonally 
across  the  ridge,  and  sloping  upwards  and  backwards  from  the  dorsal  side  (Te.xt- 
fig.  10).  The  two  of  the  anterior  row  are  short  and  blunt;  the  other  two, 
which  are  arrangeil  alternately  with  them,  are  more  than  twice  as  long,  and 
sharply  pointed.  They  are  usually  longer  than  the  other  body  bristles,  and  in- 
crease in  length  posteriorly,  the  longest  of  them,  on  the  seventh  abdominal  seg- 
ment, measuring  0.8  or  0.9  mm.  There  is  a  pair  of  short  pointed  bristles 
on  the  middle  of  the  dorsal  surface  of  the  eighth  segment,  a  longer  pair  on  its 
lateral  ridges,  and  a  transverse  row  of  four  on  the  ventral  surface.  The  lower 
of  the  two     lateral     bristles  is  inserted    just     at     the    end  of  the  terminal    split. 


516 


STUDIES    IX    LIFE-HISTORIES    OF    AUSTRALIAN"    DIPTERA   BRACIIYCEKA,    1., 


Close  to  the  anus,  ou  each  side,  ami  directed  towards  it,  is  a  single  short  bristle. 
Further  back  a  jiair  of  bristles  is  situated  on  tiie  ridge  ou  eacli  side  of  the  anal 
groove,  and  another  pair  on  the  terminal  apex  ot  the  ridge,  where  it  Ixiunds  uie 
transverse  split  (Text-fig.   8). 

Among  these  large  bristles  there  occur  on  the  body  a  few  very  small  colour- 
less bristles,  about  0.05  mm.  long.  Eight  of  them  are  in  constant  a.ssocuitioii 
with  the  bristles  bounding  the  transverse  split,  in  which  the  aperture  of  tracheal 
chamber  u]iens.  Two  are  inserted  above  and  two  below  the  aperture,  one  close 
beside  the  bristle  at  the  angle  of  tlie  split,  and  one  between  each  pair  of  apical 
bristles  (Text-fig.  7) .  A  similar  hair  occurs  laterally  on  both  surfaces  of  every 
segment,  just  beyond   and  below  the  outermost  bristles  of  the  transvei'se   rows. 


Text-tig. 12.     Anterior  end  of  l:irv;i.     Ventral  view,      (x  12). 
Text-fig.i;i.  ,.  ,,  Dorsal  view,      (x  12). 

Text-fig.  14.      Prothoracic  spiracle.  Surface  view,      (x  112). 

Text-fig.  15.     View  looking  down  ou  posterior  end  of  larva,    (x  22).    /,  terminid  groove  ; 
s,  spiracular  aperture;  i7,  anus;  D,  dorsal  surface;  V,  ventral  surface. 


The  arrangement  of  the  bristles  on  the  thoracic  segments  is  somew-hat  dif- 
ferent. On  the  dorsal  surface  of  tiie  fii'st  segment  there  are  two  transverse  rows, 
with  four  small  bristles  in  the  first  row,  six  in  the  second  (Text-fig.  13).  Meso- 
and  nieta-thoracic  segments  each  bear  the  usual  row  of  six  on  the  dorsal  surface. 
But  on  the  ventral  surfaces  of  tlie  tlu'ee  segments  there  are  only  four.  On  the 
prothoraeic  segment  these  are  arranged  in  two  rows,  on  meso-  and  meta-thorax 
in  a  single  row,  with  the  two  outer  bristles  directed  forwards  instead  of  back- 
wards (Text -fig.  12)  .  The  lateral  ridges  bear  each  only  a  single  pair  of  long 
bristles,  but  a  small  colourless  hair,  siuiilnr  to  the  other  microscopic  liairs  on 
the  bodv,   is  also  present. 

Except  in  the  relative  length  of  llic  bristles,  the  smallest  larvae  found  (2 
to  3  mm.)  are  exactly  similai"  to  tlie  fully-develo|ied  larvae.  The  bristles  are 
proportionally  much  longer  in  the  younger  larvae,  and  give  them  a  distinctly 
hairy  appearance.  The  two  long  bristles  of  the  lateral  ridges  are  specially  well 
developed,  while  the  two  smaller  ones  are   very  minute. 

The  Head. — The  head  is  short,  and  broadly  conical,  having  a  basal  width 
of  0.48  mm.,  and  a  length  of  0.,57  mm.  in  larvae  of  8  mm.  length.  It  is  deep 
yellowish-brown  in  colour,  darkest  in  front,  where  it  is  most  strongly  cliitinised, 
and  divided  into  a  uiedian  and  two  lateral  lolies  (PI.  xxvii..  figs.  1,  2)  .  The 
median  lobe  terminates   in  a  small,  cylindrical   process,  with   smooth   surface,  and 


BY    VERA    IRWIX    .SJIITII.  517 

l)luntly  roiindeil  tij).      Tlu'  lateral   lohfs  are  situated   some  ilistaiice  tuvtlier   back, 
0.15  mm.    behind  the  median  process.     They  are  short,  broad,  rounded  "bosses," 
with  rugose  surface,    composed    of  thick,  dark  chitin.     Behind  them,  in  the  pos- 
terior third  of  the  head,  there  is,  in  the  clear',  membranous  area  on  each  side,  a 
prominent  eye-swelling,  bounded  by  a  semi-circular  membrane.     The  greater  part 
of  the  upper  surface  of  the   head   is  covered   by   a   broad   sclerite,  presenting  an 
irregular  series   of  transverse   ridges,   with  two  specially  prominent  ones  on  each 
side    (PI.  xxvii.,   fig.   1).     In  front  of  each   of  these   is   a  small  bristle.     Another 
very  small  bristle  is  situated  on  each  side  of  the  median  process.     At  the  base  of 
the  eye-swelling   on    both    dorsal    and    ventral  sides  is  a  stout    prominent    hair, 
about  0.32  mm.  long.     The  ventral  hair  is   accompanied   by  another  very  small 
one.     Two    smaller  bristles,    of    unequal  lengih,  are   situated  in    front    of    them, 
close  to  the  ventral  base  of  the  lateral   "boss."     On    either   side   of  the  mid- ven- 
tral  line,  on    a    level    with    the  lateral    "bosses,"    is  another  small   bristle,  and  a 
similar  pair  is  situated  further  back,  towards  the  base  of  the  head.      There  are, 
thus,  six  pairs  of  Ijristles  on  the  ventral  surface,  and  four  jDairs  on  the  doi-sal 
surface.     All  the  bri.stles  appear  to  he  sensory  in   character,  but  none   of  them 
correspond  to  the  jointed  antennae  which  are  said  to  be  present  on  the  heads  of 
Stratiomyid  larvae.     If  true  antennae  exist  I  have  not  been  able  to  detect  them. 
In  the  figure  whicli  Brauer  gives  of  a  Sargus  larval  head,  he  marks  the  lateral 
lobe  "Fuhler,"  but  in  the  Metoponia  head  this  is  clearly  a  portion  of  the  chitinous 
skeleton.       However,  there  is,  on  the  ventral  base  of  each  lateral  lobe,  a  curious  struc- 
ture having  much  the  appearance  of  a  spiracle.     It  is  in  the  form  of  a  shallow, 
cup-shaped  projection,  with   a  row    of  tooth-like    processes    projecting   from   its 
inner  margin,  into  its  cavity  (PI.  xxvii.,  fig.  2) . 

The  mouth  parts  are  small,  and  dilfleult  to  distinguish,  on  account  of  the 
dark  colour  and  density  of  this  part  of  the  chitinous  skeleton.  They  consist  of 
the  median  process,  which  probably  corresponds  with  the  structure  called  by 
Becker  (1910)  the  upper  lip,  and  two  pairs  of  small,  pointed  scale-like  processes 
lying  close  against  its  under  side  (PI.  xxvii.,  fig.  2).  The  two  inner  processes 
arc  bent  over  towards  each  other  at  the  tip,  and  so  are  somewhat  hook-shajsed ;  the 
outer  are  sharply  ]5ointed.  In  structure  and  arrangement,  these  mouth  parts 
differ  considerably  from  those  described  by  Becker  and  others  for  Stratiomyid 
larvae,  and  will  be  considered  more  fully  in  a  later  paper. 

Stigmata. — The  two  prothoracic  spiracles,  situated  close  to  the  lateral  mar- 
gins of  the  segment,  are  large  and  prominent,  dark  brown  in  colour,  and  slightly 
salient.  They  appear  to  be  exactly  similar  to  those  of  Patliygaster  minutissima, 
as  described  by  Tragardh  (1914).  Two  narrow  oval  slits  open  on  a  flat  surface, 
with  a  regular  rounded  outline,  below  which  lies  a  larger  area  of  chitin,  of  dis- 
tinctive shape,  shown  in  Text-fig.  14.  A  pair  of  very  small  spiracles  is  situ- 
ated on  the  meta-thoracic  and  the  first  to  the  seventh  abdominal  segments,  in  the 
lateral  grooves,  a  little  in  front  of  the  middle  of  the  segment.  They  are  of 
simple  structure,  having  a  triangular  aperture,  bounded  Ijy  a  dark  brown  circular 
area  (Text-fig.  9)  .  The  two  main  tracheal  trunks  terminate  internally,  in  the 
last  segment,  in  large  spiracles,  which  open  into  a  median  pear-shaped  air 
chamber.  This  communicates  with  the  exterior  by  a  narrow  aperture  with 
chitinous  lips,  situated  at  the  bottom  of  the  deep  transverse  split  at  the  posterior 
end  (Text-fig.  15).  If  the  supposition  that  a  twelfth  segment  is  really  present, 
is  correct,  this  split  would  represent  the  dorsal  incisure  between  the  eleventh  and 


518  STUDIES   IN   LIFE-HISTORIES   OE  AUSTRALIAN   DIPTERA  BRACHYCERA,   i., 

twelfth  segint'iits,  and  the  jjositidu  of  the  posterior  spiracles  would  eorrespoiid  with 
that  in  which  they  are  usually  fouud  in  dipterous  larvae  ha^^ing  twelve  segments. 

Pupal  metamorphosis. 

In  this  paper  I  do  not  propose  to  do  more  than  indicate  in  a  general  way 
the  external  features  of  the  development  of  the  pupa. 

Jusbaschjanz  (1910)  has  studied,  in  great  histological  detail,  the  metamor- 
phosis of  various  internal  organs  in  the  larva,  but  says  very  little  about  the 
pupa,  and,  so  far  as  1  am  aware,  no  description  exists  of  the  stages  in  the 
gradual  change  of  form  during  its  growth  from  the  larva. 

As  the  pupa  is  hidden  inside  the  old  larval  skin  during  the  whole  course  of 
its  development,  it  is  necessary  to  remove  the  skin  in  order  to  study  it.  At  a 
very  early  stage  in  its  metamorphosis,  the  pupa  comes  to  lie  free  inside  the 
skin,  surrounded  by  a  watery  fluid,  and  retaining  its  connection  with  the  skin 
only  by  means  of  the  stigmata  on  each  segment  Its  removal,  therefore,  is  an 
easy  matter,  and  is  rendered  still  easier  by  the  existence  of  lines  of  weakness  in 
the  skin  at  the  points  where  it  is  subsequently  split  open  by  the  emerging  fly. 
Old,  empty  larval  skins  show  the  lines  of  cleavage  very  well.  By  a  clean, 
circular  cut  round  the  upper  part  of  the  second  thoracic  segment,  the  portion  of 
the  case  anterior  to  this  is  separated  ofi  in  the  form  of  a  sort  of  "head-cap.'' 
In  the  mid-dorsal  line,  the  circular  cut  dips  to  form  a  sUght  angle,  and  from 
this  point  a  straight  split  extends  down  to  the  ujiper  part  of  the  first  abdonunal 
segment,  wbei'e  it  meets  a  second  transverse  split  extending  nearly  across  the 
full  width  of  the  dorsal  wall.  After  the  emergence  of  the  fly,  the  edges  of  these 
splits  fit  closely  and  evenly  together,  owing  to  the  rigidity  of  the  walls,  so  that 
the  skin  has  the  appearance  of  an  entire  ease,  with  a  circular  aperture  at  one 
end    (Text-fig.   4)  .   ' 

These  natural  lines  of  cleavage  are  found  to  be  present  from  the  earliest 
stages  of  pupation.  The  "head-cap"  is  easily  removed  by  light  pressure  with  the 
point  of  a  needle^  and  a  similar  pressure  opens  up  segments  two  to  four,  mid- 
dorsally,  in  a  longitudinal  direction,  then  circularly  round  the  fourth  segment 
(Text-fig.  16),  so  that  this  portion  of  the  skin,  forming  a  "thoracic  band'"  can 
be  stripped  off  in  a  single  piece.  By  carefully  cutting  along  the  mid-dorsal  line 
of  the  abdominal  larval  skin,  the  pupa  can  be  removed,  still  enclosed  in  a  deli- 
cate   transparent   Dupal   membrane. 

In  the  earliest  stage  of  a  female  pupa  removed  in  this  way  (PL  xxvii.,  fig.  3) 
pupal  head  and  thorax  have  become  differentiated,  but  the  abdominal  segments 
still  retain  the  larval  shajie.  and  differ  from  those  of  the  larva  only  in  the  char- 
acter of  tlie  integument,  and  in  the  presence  of  stout,  projecting  spiracles  with 
brown  chitinised  tips.  With  this  exception,  the  entire  pupa  is  very  soft,  and 
pure  white.  No  trace  remains  of  the  hexagonal  armoured  plates  of  the  larval 
skin,  or  of  the  bristles,  or  other  integumental  structures.  The  enclosing  mem- 
brane fits  closely  over  the  body,  and,  except  where  it  is  raised  into  "blisters" 
over   developing   appendages,  it  is   not  apparent. 

The  position  of  the  mouth  parts  is  indicated  by  blister-like  swellings  of  this 
character.  Already  well  defined  at  this  early  stage,  they  form,  at  later  stages, 
much  more  conspicuous  features  of  the  pupal  head,  than  do  the  moutli  parts  on 
the  adult. 

The  iliree  tiioracic  segments  arc  still  distinct,  and  the  appendages  of  each 
are  folded  closely  against  its  ventral  surface,  and  do  not  extend  beyond  the  seg- 


BY    VEltA    IRWIX    SMITH. 


519 


ment  from  which  they  originate.  In  the  specimen  shown  in  PI.  xxvii.,  tigs.  3 
and  4,  the  appendages  had  been  stretched  out  for  examination,  and  had  not  com- 
pletely resumed  their  normal  closely-packed  condition  when  figured.  The  seg- 
ments of  the  antennae  and  the  limbs  are  indicated  only  by  faint  grooves  in  the 
uniform,  tinely-granular,  white  matter  of  which  all  the  appendages  are  composed 
at  this  stage. 

The  halteres  are  relatively  much  larger  than  in  the  imago,  and  appear 
clearly  as  the  rudiments  of  meta-thoracic  wings  (PI.  xxvii.,  %.  4). 

The  first  appearance  of  colour  on  the  body  is  in  the  region  of  the  eye  rudi- 
ments. These  soft,  white,  rounded  prominences  assume  a  yellowish  tinge  about 
the  same  time  that  the  thoracic  appendages,  still  white  and  indistinctly  divided 
into  segments,  unfold,  and  extend  down  over  the  ventral  surface  of  the  body. 
As  the  eyes  deepen  in  colour,  the  yellow  tinge  extends  over  that  part  of  the 
head  which  is  orange-coloured  in  the  adult  female. 


Text-fig. 16.     Diagram  showing  way  in  which  larval  case  of  pupa  is  opened  up.    (x  11). 
Text-figs.  17-20.     Metamorphoses  of  posterior  end  of  larva  during, pupation,      (x  12). 

Fig. 17.    Lateral  view  of  early  stage.     Pig. 18.   Ventral  view  of  later  stage. 

Figs.  19-20.  More  advanced  puirae,  lateral  views.     7th  sp.,  spiracle  of  7tli 

abdominal  segment. 


At  this  stage  the  terminal  abdominal  segment  loses  its  larval  character,  and 
becomes  slightly  bilobed  at  the  tip  (Text-fig.  18),  while  a  bilobed  protuberance 
gTOws  out  from  its  ventral  surface.  The  latter  probably  originates  from  the 
upper,  or  eighth  abdominal  segment,  while  the  bilobed  tip  belongs  to  the  ninth 
(fused)    segment. 

The  development  of  this  terminal,  or  fused  eighth  and  ninth  segment,  into 
the  external  genitalia  of  the  adult  fly,  is  the  most  noticeable  feature  of  later  pupal 
growtlr.  It  has  been  followed  out  in  more  detail  in  the  female  than  in  the  male, 
and  is  shown  in  Text-figs.  17  to  20.  The  male  pupae  secured  did  not  show  the 
same  range  of  developmental  stages,  but  eight  distinct  abdominal  segments  are 
present  in  all. 

Other  changes  take  the  form  of  depositions  of  colouring  matter,  and  of 
chitin  in  various  parts  of  the  body,  as  the  segments  of  the  appendages  become 
more  clearly  defined ;  and  the  outgrowth  of  hairs  on  these  segments,  and  of  a 
fine  pubescence  on  the  abdomen  (PI.  xxvii.,  fig.  6).  The  wing  sheaths  lie  flat 
against  the  ventral  surface  of  the  body,  and  cover  the  first  and  second  abdominal 


520 


STLUIES    IN    LIFK-HISTOKIE.S    OF    AILSTHALIAN    DIPTERA    ISRACHYCERA,    1., 


segments.  Within  tlieni  the  much  crumpled  and  folded  wings  can  be  seen,  very 
dark  in  colour.  The  lirst  pair  of  legs  extentls  down  to  the  tip  of  the  wing,  the 
second  pair  to  the  middle  of  the  third  segment,  and  the  third  pair  almost  to  the 
fifth  segment.  The  limb  sheaths  lit  loosely  over  them,  and  are  slightly  constrict- 
ed at  the  level  of  each  joint. 

The  form  of  the  sheaths  for  the  mouth  parts  is  shown  in  PI.  ssvii.,  fig.  7. 
They  consist  of  four  thin- walled  vesicles,  two  central,  upper  and  lower,  with 
enlarged  bilobed  extremities,  and  a  narrower  one  on  each  side,  bluntly  rounded 
at  its  extremity,  and  with  a  small  secondary  lobe  attached  to  its'  upper  surface. 
Through  their  walls  it  is  jtossible  to  see  portions  of  the  developing  mouth  parts, 
at  first  pale  yellow  in  colour,  later  darkening  to  a  deep  brown.  There  is  a 
certain  amount  of  rigidity  in  the  pupal  skin,  so  that  the  vesicles  retain  their 
shape  unsupported  by  the  underlying  organs,  these  being  much  smaller  than  their 
covering.  When  the  latter  is  removed  it  is  found  that  the  lateral  vesicles  enclose 
the  maxillary  palps,  and  the  lower  median  vesicle  the  "proboscis,"  its  bilobed 
extremity  forming  the  sheath  for  the  labellae.  The  parts  enclosed  by  the  upper 
vesicle    are    very   small    and   inconspicuous,    but    a    careful    examination    of   them 


Text-fig. 21.     Mouth  parts  of  pupa  tlissected  out  from  pupal  slieath,   surface  view,    (x  57). 

Text-fig. 21(;.  Labrum  epipliaryux  of  same. 

Text-tig. 22.     Back  view  of  the  same. 

Text-fig. 23.     Portion  of  sheath  of  mouth  parts,  showing;  enclosed  labrum-epipharynx,  and 

palp. 
fr.cl.,  f ronto-clypeus ;    l.cp.,  labrum-epipliaryux  ;    ///>.,  hypopharyux  ;    in. p.,  maxillary 
palp;  pli ,  pharynx;   lab,  labella. 


when  dissected  out  (as  shown  in  Text-figs,  lil,  22)  reveals  the  presence  oT  most 
of  the  structures  described  by  Peterson  (1916),  and  shown  in  his  figures  of 
Stratiomyia  apicula.  Within  the  proximal  end  of  the  vesicle  is  a  small  saddle- 
shaped  piece  of  ehitin,  the  fronto-cly))eus,  which  supjiorts.  on  its  lower,  invei-ted 
V-shaped  nuirgiu,  a  triangidar,  beak-like  process,  projecting  outward  from  tlu! 
face,  the  labrum-epipharynx  (Text-fig.  21h).  In  the  i)upa,  the  line  ol'  juiu-tion 
between  the  constituent  parts  is  still  visible,  and  the  underlying  epipharynx  is 
clearly  distinguishable  from  tlie  lal)rum.  I>ying  below  this  structure,  and  still 
quite  separate  from    it.  is  the   lliin    grcKivcd    hypopharyux.      In   the    inuigo     (PI. 


BY   VERA    IKWIN    SlIITH. 


521 


xxvii.,  tig  8 J  its  basal  portion  is  united  with  the  labnim-epipliaryux,  to  form  the 
basi-proboscis,  and  tlie  ireu  distal  end  is  scarcely  distinguishable. 

The  tip  of  the  labrum-epipharynx,  in  the  pupa,  does  not  reach  beyond  the 
proximal  half  of  the  slieath  enclosing  it  (Text-tig.  23),  and  the  existence  of  the 
enlarged,  bilobed,  distal  portion  is  puzzling.  No  structure  is  contained  within 
it  at  any  stage  of  development.  The  double  nature  of  the  sheath  enclosing  the 
maxillary  palp  is  also  peculiar,  but  seems  to  suggest  the  presence,  originally,  of 
well-developed  maxillae,  with   their  galeae  and   laeiniae. 

Between  the  lateral  sheaths,  just  below  tiie  upper  median  one,  there  are,  in 
the  very  early  pupa!  stage  tigured  in  PI.  xxvii.,  tigs.  3  and  4,  two  small,  tliin, 
needle-like,  chitin  pieces,  whicii  are  not  enclosed  in  sheaths.  These  structures, 
which  do  not  appear  in  later  stages,  would  seem,  from  their  position,  to  repre- 
sent rudimentary  mandibles,  though  no  trace  of  mandibles  exists  in  the  imago. 

Other  swellings  of  the  pupal  skin,  for  which  no  apparent  reason  exists, 
occur  on  the  head.  A  small  double  vesicle  is  situated  l)etween  the  base  of  the 
antennae,  and  the  sheaths  for  the  mouth  parts  (PI.  xxvii.,  fig.  7).  .Just  below 
the  eye  on  each  side,  in  the  position  of  the  gena,  is, a  prominent,  downwardly- 
projecting,  hollow  vesicle. 

Stigmata. — A  pair  of  lateral  spiracles  is  present  on  each  abdominal  seg- 
ment from  the  tirst  to  the  seventh.  The  iirst  six  pairs  are  very  prominent  from 
the  earliest  stages  of  pupal  development,  and  are  of  compli(;ated  structure. 
The  greater  ijortion  of  eacli  one  lies  outside  the  body  wall,  in  the  region  lietween 
it  and  the  pupal  skin,  which  is  here  raised  into  a  sharp  peak,  and  strengthened 
by  a  funnel-shaped  piece  of  chitin.  The  wide  mouth  of  the  funnel  faces  in- 
wards, and  serves  to  protect  the  underlying  stigmatie  apparatus.  This  consists 
of  a  pear-shaped  bulb  with  thick  muscular  walls,  penetrated  by  a  fine  lumen, 
and  terminating  in  a  long  slender  tube,  with  strongly  chitinised  walls,  wiiich 
runs  through  the  neck  of  the  funnel,  and  extends  out  to  the  larval  skin  ( Text- 
fig.  19)  .  The  tip  of  the  spiracle  appears  on  tiie  outer  surface  of  the  larval  skin 
as  a  dark  brow-n  projection  in  the  region  of  the  larval  stigma.  A  slender  tra- 
cheal tube,  g-iven  off  from  the  base  of  the  bulb,  and  opening  independently  on 
the  pupal  skin,  is  probably  the  original  larval  tracheal  tulte,  the  pupal  sjiiracle 
being  a  secondary  growth.  These  structures  will  be  considered  more  fully  in  a 
later  paper,  dealing  with  the  tracheal  system  of  larva  and  pupa.  A  trachea  of 
the  ordinary  type  connects  the  base  of  the  stigmatie  bulb  with  a  circular  aperture 
in  the  body  wall.  Shortly  before  the  emergence  of  the  imago,  this  tube  becomes 
detached  from  the  body,  and  the  whole  stigmatie  apparatus  is  left  behind  in  the 
pupal  skin  (PI.  xxvii.,  fig.  9).  The  only  trace  of  it  which  remains  on  the  body, 
is  a  wide,  deep  hole,  with  chitin  rim,  on  the  lateral  margin  of  each  segment 
(Text-fig.  20). 

The  spiracles  of  the  seventh  )iupal  segment  differ  from  the  rest.  They  pro- 
ject very  little  beyond  the  body,  and  are  of  simple  structure,  lacking  the  gi'eat 
development  of  chitin  supports .  The  reason  for  this  is  seen  when  the  larval  skin 
is  dissected  away  from  the  dorsal  wall  of  the  pupa  (PI.  xxvii.,  fig.  5)  .  The  first 
six  alidominal  segments  correspond  exactly  with  the  segments  of  the  larva,  and 
are  in  close  contact  with  the  larval  walls  in  tlie  region  of  the  spiracles.  But 
the  terminal  segments  undergo  a  considerable  change  in  size  and  shape  during 
metamorphosis,  becoming  telescoped  to  a  certain  extent,  and  reduced  in  width; 
so  that  a  wide  space  is  left  round  the  posterior  end  of  the  pupa,  and  the  seventh 
pair  of  spiracles  is  not  opposite  the  corresponding  pair  in  the  larval  skin,  and 
cannot  reach  the  exterior  to  function  in  lireathing. 


5'22  STUDIES   IX   LIFE-HISTORIES   OF  AUSTRALIAN    DIPTERA   BRACHYCERA,   1., 

All  the  figures,  for  both  Plate  and  Text-figures,  were  drawn  at  stage  level, 
with  the  help  of  Zeiss  camera  lueida.  and  Zeiss  and  Reiehart  oculars  and  ob- 
jectives. 

Type  specimens  of  larva,  and  male  and  female  pupae  and  bred  specimens  of 
both  spring  and  autumn  broods  have  been  deposited  in  the  Australian  Museum, 
Sydney.     [Specimens  Nos.  K 4330-1^08.] 

Figures  of  bred  specimens,  both  male  and  female,  are  shown  on  Plate  xxviii. 

List  of  the  Species  of  STKATioiiniDAE  which  have  beex  Observed  in  the 
Earlier  Stages,  with  References  to  the  Literature  Relatixo  to  These. 

[To  avoid  unnecessary  repetition  the  authors  ai'e  quoted  here  only  with  date 
and  page  of  work.  Thi'  complete  reference  will  l)e  found  in  the  lit-erature  list  at 
the  end,  which  is  arranged  in  chronological  order.  The  names  of  the  species  are 
those  given  in  the  descriptions  referred  to.  No  attempt  has  been  made  to  deal 
%vith  synonjTiiy.] 
Beris  chalybeata  Forst.— Walker,  1851,  pp.  11,  12;   Schiner,  18U4,  p.  24;  Brauer, 

1883,  p.  58;  Lundbeck,  1907,  p.  GU. 
Beris  .spp.— Williston,  1908,  p.  165;  VerraU,  1909,  p.  199. 
Chloromyia  formosa  Scopoli.— Lundbeck,  1907,  pp.  U5-U6,  fig.  26;  Yerrall,  1909, 

p.   189. 
Chorisops    [Acti>ia)    tibialis  Meigeu. — HandHrsch,  1883,  pp.    243-245,   fig's.    1-4; 

Brauer,  1883,  p.  58;  Lundbeck,  1907,  p.  70;  VerraU,  1909,  p.  204. 
Chrysomyia  formosa  Zett. — von  Roser,  1834,  p.  267;  Cornelius   (Sargus  formosus 

Schrank),  1860,  pp.  202-204,  t.  ii.;  Brauer,  1883,  pp.  58  and  23. 
Chrysomyia  polita  Linnaeus.^Reaumur,  1742,  t.   14,  fig.  6;  von  Roser,  1834,  p. 

267:  Bouche,  1834,  p.  49;   Scholz,  1848, -pp.  1-3,  10;  Beling,  1882,  p. 

188;  Brauer,  1883,  p.  58. 
CUtellaria  ephippiiim  Fabricius.- — Meigen,  1818.  iii.,  p.  130;   von  Roser,  1834.  p. 

267;  Westwood,  1840,  p.  533,  fig.  127,  8;  Zeller,  1842;   Markel,  1844.  pp. 

266,  478-480;  Scholz,  1848  (?);  Jaennicke,  1866,  p.  226;  Brauer.  1883, 

p.  58  {Ephippium  thoracium)  ;  VerraU.  1909,  p.  S3. 
Ephippium  alUtarsis  (?)  Bigot.— Froggatt,  1896,  p.  84,  PI.  ix.,  figs.  12,  13. 
Geosarpmi  (Sargus)   spp. — Williston,  1908,  p.  165. 
Hermetia  albitarsis  Fab. — Brauer,  1883.  p.  58. 
Hermetia  illucens   L.— Bellardi.  1861,  p.  26;   Brauer,  1883.   jk    58;  Dunn.   1916, 

pp.  59-61. 
Hermetia  spp. — Williston,  1908.  ]>.  165. 
Hoplodonta  viridula  Fabricius. — Lundbeck,  1907,  pp.  57-58. 
Microchrysu  polita  Linnaeus. — Lundbeck,  1907,  p.  67;  VerraU.  1000,  p.   192. 
Microchrjisa  spp. — Lundljeck,  1907.  ]i.  67. 
Myioehrysa   spp. — Williston,    1908,  p.    165. 
Nemotelus  pantherinns  L. — Lundbeck.  1907,  p.  26,  fig.  7. 
Nemobelus  uliginosun  Linnaeus. — Halidav,   1857,  p.   194;   Brauer.  1883.   pp.  58, 

23. 
Nemotelus  spp.— Lundbeck.  1907.  pp.  2.3-24;  Williston.  1908.  ]..  165. 
Odontomi/ia.  angulntn  Panz. — Lundlieck,  1907,    p.   56. 
Oihiiitomiiia  argevtata  Fabricius. — ZeUer.  1842.  col.  807;  Zeller.  1846.  iii.;  Lund- 

l)eck,  1907,  p.  51. 
Odontomi/ia  hydroleon  Linnaeus. — De  Geer,  1778.  vi.,  PI.  9.  fig.  4;  Brauer,  1883, 

pp.  58,  23. 


BY    VEHA    IRWIN    SMITH.  523 

Odontomyia   ornata   Meigcn. — Reaumur,    1742,   PI.    25;    Zeller,   1842;    Jaennicke, 

18(i(),  p.   218;  Brauer,   188.3,   p.   58,   %.  23c;  Lundbeck,  1907,  p.  54,  figs. 

20-21;  Verrall,  1909,  p.  143. 
Odontomyia  tigrina  Fabr. — Lundbeck,  1907,   p.  50;   Jusbaschjanz,   1910,  p.  685. 
Odontomyia    viridiila    Fabricius. — Seholz,    1848,   p.    34;    Brauer,   1883,   p.     58; 

Jusbasehjsuz,  1910,   p.  685. 
Odontomyia  spp.— Lundbeck,  1907.  p.  48;  Williston,  1908,  p.  165;  Verrall,  1909, 

p.  130. 
Oxycera  meigenii  Staeg'. — Heeger,  1856,  p.  335;  Brauer,  1883,  p.  58. 
Oxycera  morrisii  Curtis. — Haliday,  1857,  p.  193;  Verrall,  1909,  p.  102. 
Oxycera  triliniata  Linnaeus. — Heeger,  1856,  p.  335:  Brauer,  1883,  p.  58;   Lund- 
beck, 1907,  pj).  31-32,  34,  flg.  14. 
Oxycera  spp.— Bremi.  1846,  col.  164;  Halidav.  1857.  p.  193,  PI.  11;  Brauer,  1883. 

p.    23. 
Paclvygaster  ater  Panz. — Meigen,  1818,  vi..  p.  344;  vii.,  p.  104;  Macquart,  1823; 

St.  Fargeau,  1825,  p.  779;  Schilling,  1829,  p.  94;  Seholz,  1848,  p.   1-3, 

19;  Dufour,  1841,  p.  264;  Heeger,  1853,  fig.;  Brauer,  1883,  p.  58;  Verrall, 

1909,  p.   71. 
Pachygaster  leachii  Curtis.— Perris.   1870,   p.   212;    1876,   p.   180;   Verrall,  1909, 

p.  78. 
Pachygaster  meromelas  Dufour. — Dufour,  1841,  pp.  264-266,  figs.  17-19. 
Pachygaster  minutlssimus  Zett.— Zetterstedt,  1851,  viii.,  p,  2961;  Brauer,  1883,  i>. 

58;  Lundbeck,   1907    (P.    minutissima).  p.  21;  Tragardh,  1914,   pp.   192- 

196,  figs.  3-5;  Verrall,  1909,  p.  68. 
Pachygaster  orbitalis  Wahl. — Verrall,  1909,  p.  75,  flg.  99. 

Pachygaster  pini,  Ferris . —Perris,  1870,  p.  210,  ten  figs.  ;  Brauer,  1883,  p.  58. 
Pachygaster  tarsalis  Zett. — Lundbeck,  1907,   pp.   20,   22,    flo-   4-    Verrall    1909    p 

72,  fig.  100. 
Pachygaster  spp.— Westwood,  1840,  p.  532,  figs.   127,  129;   Zetterstedt,  1851,  viii., 

p.  2961;  Brauer,  1883,  pp.  58,  23;  Williston,  1908,  p.  165;  Verrall,  1909, 

p.   66. 

Sargtis  hipunctatus  Scopoli.— Reaumui-,  1742,  p.  59,  PL  14,  fig.  4.  PI.  22,  fio-s  5-8- 
Brauer,  1883,  p.  58,  fig.  24.  ,     ^  •         , 

Sargus  ciiprarius  Linnaeus.— Lyonet.  1832.  PI.  17.  fig-s.  21-24,  29;  Bouehe,  1834. 
p.  48,  PI.  4,  figs.  31-36;  von  Roser.  1834.  p.  267;  Westwood,  1840.  p.  533. 
fig.  127,  10;  Dufour,  1846  (Comptes  rendus),  p.  318-319;  Beling,  1882. 
p.  187;  Brauer,  1883,  p.  58;  Lundbeck,  1907,  p.  61;  Verrall,  1909,"p.  184.' 

SargiA^s  flavipes  Meigen. — Lundbeck.   1907,   p.  64. 

Sargus  formostis  Schrank. — Cornelius.  1860.  pp.  202-204.  PI.  2. 

Sargus  iridatus  Scop. — Lundbeck,  1907,   p.  62,  fig.   24. 

Sargus  spp.— Perris.  1870,  p.  206;  Lundbeck,  1907,  p.  60;  Verrall,  1909.  p.  165. 

Stratiomya  anubis  Wiedem. — Cros,  1911.  pp.  99-103.  figs. 

Stratiomys  chamaeleon  Linnaeus.— Frisch.  1720.  p.  10;  Swammerdam,  1737.  Pis 
39.  40,  41;  Reaumur,  1742,  PI.  22;  Sparmen,  1804;  Schrank!,  1793.  pp.' 
7-25,  PI.  3,  figs.  1-9;  Geoffroy.  Entom..  ii.,  p.  17;  Westwood,  1840.  p. 
532;  Leydig.  1860.  p.  157.  fig.;  Leydig,  1861,  p.  39;  Brauer.  1883.  p 
58,  figs.  22.  24;  Mik,  1896,  pp.  110-111;  Florentin,  1899,  p.  274;  Jus- 
baschjanz. 1910.  p.  685;  Fanthom  and  Porter,  1913,  pp.  609-620  PI  xli  • 
VerraU.  1909.  p.  152.  '       '' 


524  STUDIKS    l.\    I.IKK-IIIS'WHIKS    OK   AUSTRALIAN    DIPTKKA    IIHACHYOERA,    i., 

Straliomii'm  fdtuni'iUi  Meij;eii. — Fautlioni  ami  Porter,  1913,  p.  (J0!J-(i20,  PI.  .\li. 

Stratiumyia  >^pp-—  Lunilbefk    1!)U7,  pp.  14-15,  41,  74. 

atratiomyii  fiircato  Fabr. — Zetti'rstfdt,  1851,  i.,  p.  135;  Brauer,  1883,     p.  57,  lig. 

23a;  Lundlieek,  l'J07,  p.  44,  tig.  17. 
Stratiomys    longicornis    Scop. — Scholz,  1848,  p.   34;   Friedenfels,    1880,    p.  1G4; 

Brauer,  1883,  p.  57,  tig.  'I'ih;  Heuneguy  and  Bmet,  18!>2,  Isi.,  pp.  309- 
316,  PI.  G;  Lundbeck.  1907,  p.  43;  Cros,  1911.  p.  101. 
Stratiomys  strigata  Meigen  [nee   Fabrioius)  =  S.  riparia. — Kawall,  18(37,  p.  124. 
Stratiomys  striyuvu. — Henneguy  and  Buiet,  1892,  cxiv.,  pp.  430-432. 
sinitiomys   spp.    (Habitat)  .^Packard,   1871,   p.   102;   also   in    Amer.   Nat.,   ii.; 

Lucas,  1879,  p.  142;  Laker,  1880,  pp.  107-108;  Bronguiart,  1881,  p.  419; 

Grifflth   and  Packard.  1882,   pp.  599-000;   Pearson,  1884,  p.  1287;    .John- 
son, 1895,  p.  229;  Williston,  1908,  p.  105. 
Stratiomys  >^))p.    (,Miir])liol.). — Kunckel   d'Herculais,  1879,   pp.  491-494;  Viallane.s, 

1885.  pp.   75-78;  Vaney.  191)0.   p.  300. 
Stratiomys  spp.  —  Shinji.  1901,  p.  479. 
Subula  citripes  Dufour. — Dufour,  1840.  (Sue.  Kiit.  Fr.).  ]>.  47;  Dulmir.  1847.  ])p. 

7-8,  vi..  PI.  xvii..  fig.  12. 
SiiliiiUi  iiKiculdta  Said. — Wesiuael,  1837,  Ann.    Soc.    Knt .   Fr.,  vi.,  p.   89;  West- 
wood,  1840.  p.  534;  DutV.ur.  1847;   Zettersteilt.  1851.   i..   )).   130;  Brauer. 

188.3,  p.  59;  Austen.  1899    (Xylomyiu  muctduia),  pp.  181-190;   Lundbeck. 

1907,  p.  82;  Gorhani,  1899,   (Ent.  :\I().   Mag.),  p.    71;  Verrall,  1909,  p. 

223. 
Siibula  (Xylophayus)    muryituila   Meigen. — Wesmael.    1837    (Bruxelles).  pp.  320- 

322;  1837   (Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Fr.).  p.  90;  Frcniep.  Xotizen.  1838.  vi.,  col. 

39-40;  Scholz.  1848,  pp.  1-3,  8-19,  49;  Dufour,  1847,  p.  13,  PI.  xvii.,  lig. 

13;  Verrall,  1909   [Xylomyia  maryinata).  p.  227. 
Snhida  piiUi]>p-<  Locw. — Townsend,  1893.  p.  I(i3. 
Subula   (Xylophagns)   riirict   Meigen. — von  Roser,  1828.  ]).  188;  Westwood,   1840. 

p.     -534,  tig.  127,  14;  Heeger.  1858,  p.  307;  Brauer,  1883,  p.  59. 
Xylomyia    {Subula  Meig.)  spp. — Lundbeck.  1907.  pp.   79-80. 
Zabracliia  polita  Co(|uill. — .loinison,  1900,  PI.   1.  fig.  8. 
Zabraclria  spp.— AVilliston.  1908.  p.  105. 

T/ITKUATIRK    DkAI.INc;     WITH     THE    BlOI.OCV     OF     THK     StDATIO.MVIIDAE. 

Arranger]  in  chronolngicnl   artier. 

1720.      h'Riscii,  J.    L. — Beschreibnng   vnn    nlKily    luseclcii    in   Teutchland,   nebst 
nutzliclien    Annierkungen    ....   vim    iliesen    ....    inlandisclien 
Gewurnie.     Berlin,  i.,  .5.  )).  ]0. 
{Stya/ioinys  c/iatnaelcoii ,  larva). 

17.37.      SwAJi.MKFJMA.M.    -T . — Biblia  naturae.     1737-1738.      London.   1758.   I'ls. 

[Strafioniys  (/niiiidt/foi/,  larva.     Structure  and  biography  described  accur- 
ately and  in  detail  with  figures  under  the  name  .Isi/tis). 

1742.      Reai'mii;,  K' .   A.    F.  —  Memoires   pour  servir   ii    I'histoire  iles   insectes.     4 
vols.     I'aris.  iv.,  pis. 
(Slralioiiiyiidae,  larvae). 

1778.     De  Gker. — Memoires  pour  servir  ;\  I'liistnire  des  Insectes.     7  vols.     Stock- 
holm,    vi.,  I'l.  9,  tig.  4. 
(Odonloiin  ill  hydioleoii,  larva). 


Di-   VERA   IRWIN-    SMITH.  525 

1793.      SCHRANK. — Beitrau'     zur     Naturyi'scliiclite     der    Stratiomi/x     cliumaelenn. 

Katurforscher  StiicI,-,  xxv'n.,  pp.  7-"25.  tab.  iii.,  fig.  1-9. 
1801.     Sp.\Rjr.\x. — Splirift  fl.  selnvedisfheii  Akad. 

{Stiatiomys  c/iamaeleou ,  larva). 
1822.      Meigex,  J.  W. — Systematisflie  IScsi-lnvihiuii;  der  l>ekaniiti'ii   I'jm'(i|)aisflieii 

ZwciHu'Teliuvn  Tnsektoii.     Haiiiii.  iii.,  p.  130;  vi.,  p.  344:  \ii.,  |i.  104. 

(F.p)nppiuiii  thoraciuui,  J'ar/irs^ns/er  sj>y>.) 
1823-1827.     MAcyr ART.— Dipt,  dii  Noid  de  Fraiiee.     Lille,  Travaiix,  1823-24,  pp. 

59-244;  1825,  pp.  324-499;   1820-27,   iip.  213-201.     LlUe,  Mem.  Soc. 

Sci.,  1827-28,  pp.  149-371;  1833,  pp    137-368. 

{Pac/iygaster  sp.  larva). 
1825.      St.  Fargeau  and   Serville. — Les  larvcs  du  ^'a]>|-)(>ll   Lat.   Fahr.     [Pacln/- 

f/«.s/pr  Meig'.,  Maoq.]      Eiiciichipedie  nic'tliudique,  x.,  p.  779. 

(Larvae  received  from  Carcel  l)y   Macquart  and  described  by  him.     His  des- 
cription quoted). 
1828;     Vox     RosKR. — Beitrage    zur    Naturg-.    d.     Gatt.     XijlophtKjnx.     Xctlnrwiss. 

Ahhandl.,  Stuttgart  u.  Tubingen,  ii..   Heft.   2,   p.   1S8. 

(Larva  of  Xylotnyia  varia  ( Xylopbagus  varius)  described) . 
1829.     ScHii.Lixo.— Entomol.  Beitrg.,  i..  p.  94,  Tab.  8,  fig.  8. 

(Larvae  of  Pacliygaster  ater  under  the  bark  of  Pinus  silvestris). 
1832.     Lvoxet,    Pierre. — Recherclies  sur    rAiiatomie    et    les   Metaiu(n-phoses    do 

difterentes      especes     d'Tnsectes.        Ouvrage    posthum.     publie      par 

M.W.   de  Haan,  Paris,  J.  Balliere,  580  pp.,  54  Plan;-iie.'^. 

{Sargus  cuprarius  larva,  t.  .wii.,  figs.  21-24,  29). 

{See  also   Pons,   Mm.  Hist.   Nat.,  Mem.,   xviii.,    1829,  pp.    233-312, 

377-457;  xix.,  1830,  ])p.  57-131,  341-455;  xx.,  1832,  pp.  1-41.) 
1834.     Bouche,    p.    F. — Naturgescliiclite    der  Insekten,    besonders   ilirer    ersten 

zustande  als  Larven  und     Puppen.     Berlin. 

(C/irysoinyia  polita,  larva,  i.,  p.49.  Sargus  cuprarius). 
1834.     Vox  RosER. — Wurttemb.  ('(irrespondbl.,  i.,  p.  267. 

(Larvae  of  Chrysomyia  polita,  and  CIt.  forinosa  under  stones;  liphippiuin 

thoraciuui  larva;  Sargus  cuprarius  h\,v\A). 
1837a.   We.smael,  Coxstaxtix. — Sur   les  metamorphoses  d'un   Xylopliage.     (Suh- 

ula    marrjiHata).     Bull.  Acad.   Sci.  Brii.celles,  iv.,  pp.  320-322. 

(Also   in   Froriep.  Notizev.  vi..   1838.  col.  39-40.) 
1837^1.     Wesmael,  Cox-staxtix. — .1)/);.    ,S(ic.  Kiit.    i'r..    \i..    P.nll.  Entomol.    p. 

Ixxxix-xe. 

{Subula  ( Xv/o)iiyia)  u/aigiiin/a  Mj;.,  or  Suhu!a  tiiacu/a/a  larva). 

1840.  Westwood. — Introduction  to  tlie  Mndcrn   Classification  of  Insects,    ii.,  pp. 

532-534 

(Preparatory  sta;^es  of  Subu/a  iiiacu/afa  found  in  dry  rotten  tree  in  the  Xew 
Forest  and  imago  reared,  lipliippium  thoraciuni  larva,  p.  533,  fig.  127,  8. 
Pacliygaster  spp.,  p. 532,  fig.  127,  9.     Sargus  cuprarius,  p.  533). 

1841.  DuPOUE,  Leox'. — Note   sur  la  laivc  du   Pacliygaster  meroinelas,  insecte   de 

I'ordre  de.';  Dipteres.  Aim.  Sci.  Xal.,  Zool.,  ser.  2..  xvi.,  pp.  2G4-266, 
figs.  17-19. 

1842.  Zeller.— "Dipterologische   Beitrage."     Oken,  7s/.s,  xi..  col.  807-847. 

(Odoii/oiiiyia  argeiitata,  Larve  in  feuchten  Erlengeholzen,  Herbst,  Winter 
und  Friihjahr  unter  faulem  Laube,  Taubnesseln  u.  a.  Vegetabilien.  Epliip- 
piuui  thoracium  larva,   Odontomyia  ornala  larva). 


5'2ti  STUDIES    IX    LIFF>I1IST()RIKS    OF    AUSTRALIAX    DIPTERA    I5RAC1I VCERA.    1., 

1844.     Markel.  Friedrick. — Beitrage  zur   Kenntniss   der  unter   Anifisen  lebeden 
Insekten.     Germar's  Zeitisch.   f.  Ent.,   iii.,  1841,  pp.  203-225;    Ibid., 
v.,  1844,   pp.   193-271.     Ucbcr  die   Larve  von    CliteUnriii    rphippium. 
Ibid.,  v..  pp.  478-481). 
{Rphippium  ihoraciiiin  with  Formica  fuligiuoid). 

1846.  Bremi. — Beitiag  zur  Kunde  der  Dipteren.     Oken,  Isx^,  iii.,  n<\.  1(34-175. 

(Oxycera  spp.  larvae). 
1846a.  DlTOUR,     Leon. — Sur    uiie    c-olonie    d'insectes     vivant     ilaiis     Tulcere    de 

rOrmeau.     Comptes  rendus  Acad.  Paris,  xxii.,  pp.  318-319. 

(Larvae  of  Sarins  cupraritts)  ■ 
1846b.    DuFOTR,  L  — Queltiue  chose  sur  le  Bruchyopa  bicohir  et  le  Subidaria  cit- 

ripes.     Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Fr.,  ser  2,  iv.,  p.  xlvii. 

(Subula  ci/ripeslnrva). 

1847.  DuFOUR,    L. — Histoire    des     Metamorphosts    du     Stibula    citripes     et     de 

quelques  autres  especes  de  ce  genre  de  Dipteres.  A)iii.  Sci.  Sat., 
Zool.,  ser.  3.,  vii.,  pp.  5-14,  PI.  xvii. 

1848.  SOHOLZ,  H. — Ueber  den    Aufenthalt    der   Dipteren    wahrcnd  ihrer    ersten 

Stande.     Ent.  Zeit.  r.  Breslau,  iv..  pp.  1-34. 

{S!ralioinvs  longiiornis,  larve  in  Pfiitzen,  p.  34;  C/irj'SOi>iyia  poli/ii  la,rve 
in  Kuhdiinser,  p.  1-.3,  10;  Ephippiuiii  thoraciiim,  ?  Odontomyia  vitidula, 
Pachygaster  ater). 

1851.     Walker. — Dipt.  Brit.  i.  [probably    Inseeta  Britanniea.  Diptera,  3  vols.]. 
(Larva  (?)  of  Beris  chalybeata,  pp. 11-12). 

1851.     Zetterstedt,  J.   W. — Diptera  Seandinaviae.     Lund.,  i.,  viii. 
(Larvae  of  Slralouiyiidae). 

1853.     Heegee,  Eexest. — Beitrage    zur  Naturgesebiehte  der  Tnsei-ten — Als    Beit- 
rage   zur  Fauna   Oesterreiehs.     Sitz.  k.  Akad.     ll'iss.    Wien,   x..  pp. 
7-30,  161-178.460-481. 
(Figure  of  Pachygastcr  aler). 

1856.  Heeger,  E. — Neue  Metaniorphosen  einiger  Dipteren.     Sitz.  k.  Akad.  Wiss. 

ir/ifw,  XX.,  pp.  335-350. 

(Oxyceya  meigciiii,  0.ry.  triliniata). 

1857.  Haliday,  a.  H.— -Va«.  hist,  review,  iv.,  pp.  177-196.     On  some  remaining 

blanks  in  the  natural  history  of  the  native  Diptera  (Larvae).  List 
of  the  genera  and  speeies  of  British.  Diptera,  the  earlier  stages  of 
which  are  more  or  less  perfectly  known,  with  references  to  the  prin- 
cipal authorities,  pp.  188-195.  Additional  note  on  the  metamor- 
phosis of  some  speeies  of  Diptera,  hitherto  undescribed,  or  known 
but  imperfectly.     Proc,  pp.   192-196. 

1858.  Heeger.    E. — Beitrage  zur  Naturgesebiehte  der   Insecten.     Sitz.  k.  Akad. 

Wiss.  ^]^ietl.  xxsi.,  pp.  295-309.      {Subnla  i^aria,  p.  307.) 
1860.     Leydig,  Franz. — Uber  Kalkablagerung  in  der  Haut  der  Insecten.     Larve 
von  Stratiomys  cliamaclcoii.     Arcli.  f.  Saturtj.,  xxvi..  jip.  157-160. 

1860.  Cornelius. — Zur   Ernahrung  und  Entwickelung  der   Larven  von   Sargus 

formosus  Schrank.    Ent.  Zeit.  Stett.,  xxi.,  pp.  202-204,  t.  ii. 

1861.  Letdig,  Franz.—  Berlin.  Ent.   Zeit.,  v.,  p.  xxxix. 

(.St)-atio>iiys  spp.  larvae). 


BY    VERA    IRWiy    SJIITH.  527 

ISlil.     Bellardi,     Luigi. — Sagi;io    <li    Dittt'roloyia     Messicana.        Mem.    Acead 

Torino,  six.,  pp.  201-278. 

{Hcrinctia  illucens  larvae  numerous  in  closets). 
18(j4.      ScHiNEK. — Fauna  Austrica.    (Diptera).     Vienna,    2  vols. 

(Larva  of  Berts  c/talybeata,i.,  p.  24). 
1866.     Jaennicke. — Beitrage     zur    Kenntniss    der    europaisehen     Stratiomyitlen, 

Xylopbagiden,  iind  Coenomyiden.  sowie  Nachtrag  zn  den  Tabaniden, 

Bed.  Eiit.  Zeit.,  x.,  p.  218. 

{Odontomyia  ornata   bred  from  a   larva   found  in    water   near  Frankfort. 

Larva  of  Kpliipfiiuiu  //mraciitin  taken  by  von  Heyden  in  a  nest  of  Fonnica 

fuligiiiosa,  p.  22(5). 
1807.     Kawall. — Miscellanea  entomologica.    Stett.  Ent.  Zeit.,  xxviii.,  pp.  117-124. 

(Transformations  of  Stralioiiiys  strigata  briefly   described,  p.  124.     Larva 

found  among  black  ants  in  an  old  fallen  Piniis  sylt'estris). 

1870.  Ferris. — Histoire  des  Insectes  du  Pin  maritime.     Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  Fr.,  ser. 

4,  X. 

{Pachygaster  pini  larva,  p.  210). 

1871.  Packard. — The  larvae  of  an    unknown  Stratiomys  found    in  salt    water, 

t'lear   Lake,    California.     Amer.    Jour.    Sci.    Arts,  New   Haven.    (3), 

vii.,  p.  102.     (See  also  Amer.  Nat.,  ii.). 
1876.      Ganin. — Materialen   zur  Kenntniss   der  post  embryonalen    Entwickelungs- 

geschichte  der   Insekten.     Protukolle  der  Sitzungen   der  Sektion  fur 

die  Zoologie  und  vergleichende  Anatomie  der  5.     Versammlung  rus- 

sisclier  Naturforscher   und  Aerzte  in  Warschaic,  Sept.    1876,  Mitge- 

teilt  von  Hoyer. 

(S/ratiomys  compared  with  Aiilhoiiiyia). 
1879.     Lucas. — Larvae  of  Strdtlomijs  sp.  living  in  hot  water  in  Euboea,  and  very 

tenacious  of  life.     Bull.  Soc.  Ent.  Fr.,  (5),  ix.,  p.  cxlii. 

1879.  KuNCKEL    d'HERCULAis,     .J. — Rechercbes     morpbologiques    et    zoologiques 

sur   le    systems   nerveux   des    Insectes   dipteres.     Comptes    Rendu.'t, 

Ixxxix.,  pp.  491-494. 

(Includes  larvae  of  Slratio)iiyi!dae). 

1880.  Laker,  A.    G.—Entomol.,  xiii..  pp.  167-168. 

(Larvae  of  Siraiioinys  in  winter.     Habits) . 

1880.  FREiDExrELS,   E.   vox. — Ueber  Artemia  salina   und  andere  Bewobner    der 

Sooknteicbe  in  Salzburg.     Mitth.   d.  Siebenburg  Vereiiis  f.  Nattirw. 
in  Hermannst.,  xxx.,  pp.  112-178,  PI. 
(Larvae  of  S/ra/ioiiiys  /ongh'ortiis,  p. 1(54). 

1881.  Brongxiart. — Note  sur  les  Tuts  quaternaires  de  Bernouville,  pres  Gisors. 

BhU.  Soc.  Geol.  France,  (.3),  viii.,  p.  419. 
(Larva  of  Siraiioniys  found). 

1882.  ViALLAXES,   H. — Note    sur    les  terminaisons    uerveuses  sensitives    des   in- 

sectes.    Bull.  Soc.  Philom.,   (7),  vi.,  pp.  94-98. 
(Nerves  in  skin  of  larva  of  Stratioiiiyia  described) . 
1882.     ViALLAXES,  H. — Recbercbes  sur  I'Histologie  des  Insectes,  et  sur  les  pbeno- 
menes     bistologiijues     qui     aceompagnent    le      developpement     post- 
embryonnaire  de  ces  animaux.     Ann.  Sci.  Xat..  (Zool. ),  xiv..  1,  pp. 
1-348,  PI.  iv. 

(Includes  an  account  of  integument,  nerve  terminations,  etc.,  of  S/nxiioiiivs 

larvae) . 

(See  also  Bibl.  Ecule,  xxvi.,  3,  p.  348,  PI.  xviii.). 


'>-S  STfDlKS    ].V    LIFF.-HISTORIES   OF    AT-STRALIAN    DIPTERA    IIRACU  VCKItA.    i.. 

1882.     Griffith  and  Packard. — Larvae  of  Stratiomi/ia  sj).  fdund  in  aliot  spring 

in   Colorado.     Amer.  Nat.,  xvi.,   pp.  599-000. 
1882.     Bkaukr,   V. — Die    Zweifliiaer   des     Kaiserlielien    Aluseums    zu     Wien.    ii. 

Denkschr.  k.  Akad.    ir/>.v.   iri?«,  xliv..  pp.  59-110.  Taf.  i.,  ii. 

(Discusses  classification  for  Xylopkagus  and  Siihlila,  based  on  study  of  the 

larvae,  pp. 61-62). 
1882.     Ostex-Sacken. — On  F'rot'essor  Urauer's  pai)er:  Versiicii  .einer  Cliaracteris- 

tik  der  Gattungen  der  Notucantlien  1882.      Berlin.  Ent.  Zeit..  xxvi., 

ji .   3G5 . 

(Prom  arguments  diawn  from  the  imaj^ines,  larvae,  mode  of  pupation,  and 

nervous  system  of  the  larvae,  determines  the  correct  classification  of  Suhu/a, 

etc.). 

1882.  Belixg. — Beitra;;-    znr    Metamorphose    zweiHugeliger     Insecteu     aus     den 

Familien   Tabanidae,   Leptidae,    Asilidae.    Empidae.    Dolieliopididae, 
und  Syrpliidae.     Arch.  f.  Naturf/.,  48.  2.  i)p.  187-240. 
(Includes  larva  of  Sargus  cuprarius  and  Chrysoiiiyia  polita,  p.118). 

1883.  Brauer,   F. — Die   Zweifluger   des   Kaiserlielien    Museums    zu    Wien.     iii. 

Systematise-he  Studieu  auf  Grundlage  der  Dipterenlarven,  nehst 
einer  Zusammenstellung  \on  Beispielen  aus  der  Literatur  uber  dies- 
elben  nnd  Beschreilmng  nener  Forinen.  Denkschr.  k.  Akcuh  Wiss. 
Wien.,  xlvii.,  pp.  1-100.  Pis.  i.-iv. 

(A  ilctailed  statement  of  the  characters  of  the  larvae  of  the  various  sections 
in  Slraiioniyiidae,  even  to  genera,  pp.22-2.S). 

1883.     PEAR.SOX. — Amer.  Nat.,  xvii.,  p.  1287. 

{Strat iomy.'i  larva  occurring  in  sea  water) . 

1883.     Haxdlirsch. —  Vcrli.  .:.-b.  Ge^.  Wien,  .xxxiii.,  pp.  243-245.  Hgs.   1-4. 

{^C/iorisops  (.-Ictiiui)  lihin/is  Meig.  larva  described  and  figured,  with  remarks 
on  the  larvae  of  allied  genera) . 

1885.  VlALLAXES,  H. — Sur  la  structure  interne  du  ganglion  optique  dc  quelques 
larves  de  Dipteres  (Musca,  Eristalin,  Stratiomijs).  Bull.  Soc.  Philnm., 
(7),  ix.,  pp.  75-78.  See  also  Ann.  Sci.  Nat.,  (6),  xix.,  Art.  4.  pp. 
1-34,  Pis.  i.  and  ii.  Etudes  histologiques  et  organologiques  sur  les 
centres  nerveux  et  les  organes  des  sens  des  animaux  articules. 
Troisieme  memoire:  Le  ganglion  opti(|ue  de  ffuehiues  larves  de  Dip- 
teres (i1/i(.scf(,  Eristali'^,  Stratinmiis)  . 

1892.  Henneguy,  F.  and  Bixet,  A. — Contribution  a  I'etude  mieroscopique  du 
systeme  nerveux  larvaire  de  S'trntiomi/x  lonriirornis.  Ann.  Soc.  Ent. 
Er..  Ixi..  ]ip.  309-310.  PI.  vi. 

1892.  Hexnec.uv,   F.    and   Bixet,   A. — Structure   du   systenu;   nerveux   larvaire 

de  la  Stratinmys  strigoaa.  (.'nmptes  Ttendun,  exiv.,  ])p.  430-432. 
(Sunnnary  in  .Toiirn.  h'o/i.  Micr.  Soc.  1892.  |i.   350.1 

1893.  TowxsExn.— is:«(.  News,  Philad..  p.  103. 

{Suhiila  pa/lipes  larva  described) . 
1895.     Jonx.sox. — A  review  of  the  Stratiom/iia  and  Oilonloniiiia  of  North  America. 

Trans.  Amer.  Ent.  Soc,  xxii..  pp.  227-278.  Pis.  iii.    ind  i\ 

(Jiarvae  of  Slralio»!yia  in  thermal  springs) . 
1890.      Froggatt. — The   entomology    of   the   gra.ss    tree    {Xnnthorrhoea)  .      Prnc. 

Linn.  Soc.  N.S.W..  1890.  pp.  74-87.  Fl.  ix. 

(Larva  and  metamorphosis  of  Eplnppinm  albitarsis,  p.8t,  figs.  12  and  i:{). 


P.V    VB:itA    IRWIN'    SMITH.  529 

1806.      ■Miic. — DilitoroIoErisclie  IMiseellon    (2  series),  vii.     Ueber  die  Friiclibarkpit 

von   Stratiomi/ia   chamwleon    Deg.    pp.   110-111.      Wien   Ent.   Zeit., 

XV.,  pp.  100-114. 
ISi'O.      Florextix. — Etudes  siir  la   Faune  des  Mares  salees  de  Lorraine.      Ann. 

Sci.  Nat.,   (Zool.),  X..  pp.   209-340.     Insects,  pp.  274-270. 

(Larval  habits  of  Slra/iomys  chameleon ,  p.  274). 

1899.  ArSTEK,  E.    E. — On  the  preliminaiy  sta^:es  and  mode  of  escape  of  the 

imago  of  the  Dijiterous  genus  Xiihimjiiri  Rond.  {Suhiihi  ]Mg.  et. 
(met.)  with  sjiecial  refei'ence  to  X>ilom>ila  maculata  F.,  and  on  the 
systematic  |iositi(iii  of  the  genus.  Ami.  Mag.  Nat.  flist.  (vii.).  iii., 
pp.  181-190. 

(Xyloiiiyia  represents  a  primitive,  ancestral  form  of  Stralioiiiyiidae  ifiven  off 
from  the  common  stem  after  the  evolution  of  the  characteristic  type  of  larva 
and  mode  of  pupation,  but  before  the  assumption  on  the  part  of  the  imatto 
of  the  equally  characteristic  features  (venation,  spurless  tibiae)  exhibited  by 
tlie  more  specialised  types  of  the  family). 

1900.  Y.iXEV,   V. — Note   sur   les   tul)es   de   Malpighi    des   larves   de   Stratiomys. 

Bull  ,Soc.  Ent.  France,  p.  360. 

1901.  SH.iRP.— Camb.  Nat.  Hist.,  vi.,  p.   479. 

(Larva  of  Stratioiiiyiidae). 

1902.  ^'axey,  C. — Contributions  a  I'etude  des  larves  et  des  metamorphoses  des 

Dipteres.     Ann.  I'liir.  L/ion.,  N.S.  1,  Fasc.  9,  178  pp.,  4  Plates. 
1904.     Plotxikow. — Ueber  die  Ilautung  und  uber  eiuige  Elementc  dcr  Haut  bei 

den  Insekten.     Zeitschr.  f.  Wi^s.  Zool.,  Ix.xvi. 
1906.     JOHXSOX. — Notes  on  some  dipterous  larvae.     Psi/clie.  Boston,  Mass.,  xui. 

(Larva  of  Zabrac/iia  polila,  pi.  1,  fig.  8). 
1007.     LrxDBECK.  TV. — Diptera  Daniea,  Pt.  1,  pp.  13-75. 

(Stratioiiiyiidae.     General    account  of  e^ga,   larvae  and  pupae,   pp.  14-15. 

Synoptic  table  of  Danish  larvae,  p. 74). 
1908.      WiLLisTOX,  S.   \\  . — Manual  of  North   American   Diptera.      New   Haven, 

3rd  edit.,  p.    165. 

Eggs,  larvae  and  pupae  of  Stratioiiiyiidae.     Habitat. 

1009.  T'err.^ll,   G.    H. — British   flies,   \o\.    v.    Strutiomyidae    and     succeeding 

families  of  the  Diptera  hrachycera  of  Great  Britain.  London. 
(1-780).     "Metamorphoses"  by  D.    Sharp,  pp.  31-30. 

1910.  Becker. — Zur    Kenntniss  der    Mundteile    und   des    Kopfes  der    Dipteren 

Larven.     Zool.  Jahrb.  Anat.,  xxix.,  pp.  281-314,  PI.  18,  figs.  19,  20. 

1010.  JusBA.sCHJAXZ.   S. — Zur   Kenntniss  der    naeh  embryonalen    Entwiekelung 

der  Stratiomyiden .     Jenaische  Zeitscli.,  xlvi.,  pp.  681-736.  3  Taf. 

1911.  Cros. — Notes   sur   les  larves   de   Stratiomys   aiiuhis   Wiedemann.      Feuille 

jeunes  natural.,  Paris,  xli.,  pp.  99-103. 

1913.  Faxthoji    and   Porter. — Kerpetomonas   stratiomyiae,    n.si>.,    a    flagellate 

parasite  of  the  flies  Stratiomyia  chameleon  and  S.  potainida,  with 
remarks  on  the  biology  of  the  hosts.  Ann.  Trop.  Med'.  Liverpool, 
vii..  pp.  609-020.  Pl.  xli. 

1914.  Tragardh,  I. — Skog-sentomologiska  bidrag  1-5.     Entom.   Tidskrift,  Upp- 

sala, XXXV.,  pp.  188-200.  Pacliyya-^ter  miniitissima  Zett.,  en  under 
bark  levende  stratiomvid.  pp.  102-106.  figs.  3-5.  English  summajj 
p.  208. 

/ 


^,;;^A»5.    v; 


530  STUDIES   IN    LIFE-HISTORIES   OF    AUSTR.VLIAX    DIPTERA    BRACHYCERA,    !. 

1916.     Peterson,    Alvah. — The   head-capsule   ami     mouth    parts     of    Diptera. 

Illinois  Biol.  Monog.,  iii..  2.  pp.   1-112. 
1916.     Dunn,  L.    H. — Ilermetia  illucens   breeding  in   a   human   cadaver.      Eitt. 

News,  Fhilad.,  ssvii.,  pp.  59-61. 


Explanation  of  Plates  xxvii.-xxvin, 

Plate  xxvii. 

Metamorphosis  of  IMetoponia  rubriceps  Macq. 

Fig.  1.  Head  of  larva,  dorsal   view.     X    45. 

Fig.  2.  The   same,   ventral   view.     X    45. 

Fig.  3.'  Pupa;  early  stage.    Ventral  view.     X    14. 

Fig.  4-  The  same,  lateral  view.     X    14. 

Fig.  5.  Dorsal  wall  of  larval  case  cut  away  to  show  the  enclosed  pupa.     X   7. 

Pig.  6.  Pupa;    Fairly   advanced  stage.     X   14. 

Fig.  7.  Head  of  pupa,  enveloped  in   pupal  sheath.     X    28. 

Fag.  8.  Mouth  parts  of  imago.     X   28. 

Fig.  9.  Posterior  end  of  pupal  sheath,  removed  from  lar\-al  case.     ^   9. 

Plate  xxviii. 

Metopoaia  rubriceps  llacquart. 

Fig.  1.  Bred  specimen  of  male.  Emerged  .April.  Natural  size,  5.3  mm.  long 
from  head  to  tip  of  tail. 

Fig.  2.  Bred  specimen  of  female,  drawn  two  days  after  emergence,  in  Xovember. 
Abdomen  extended  to  much  greater  length  than  is  found  in  most  cap- 
tured specimens.     Natural  size,  14  mm.  long  from  head  to  tip  of  tail. 

Fig.  3.  Abdomen  of  a  captured  female,  dorsal  view,  showing  the  more  usual 
appearance. 


531 

ORDINARY  MONTHLY  MEETING. 
24th  November,  1920. 
Mr.  .].   J.  Fletther,  M.A.,  B.Se..  President,  in  the  Chair. 

Dr.  JiRi  YlCTOR  Daxes,  Consul  General  of  the  Caefko.sIo\  ak  Republic,  40 
Bayswater  Road,  Darlinghurst,  Miss  Marguerite  Henry,  B.Sc,  "Derwent," 
Oxford  St.,  Epping,  and  Miss  Margaret  Helena  O'Dwyer,  B.Sc,  "Elstorie," 
Copelaud  St.,  Beeeroft,  were  elected  Ordinary  Members  of  the  Society. 

Candidates  for  Linnean  Macleay  Fellowships,  11)21-22,  were  reminded  that 
applications  must  be  lodged  with  the  Secretary  not  later  than  Tuesday,  30th  inst. 

The  Donations  and  Exchanges  received  since  the  previous  Monthly  Meeting 
(27thOctober.  1920)  amounting  tot)  Vols.,  188  Parts  or  Nos.,  42  Bulletins  and  5 
Reports,  received  from  40  Societies  and  Institutions  and  3  private  donors,  were 
laid  upon  tlie  table. 

NOTES  AND  EXHIBITS. 

Mr.  Fred  Turner  exhibited  and  offered  observations  on  a  specimen  of  Lolium 
iemulentum  Linn.,  wliieh  he  bad  received  for  determination  from  Mr.  R.  Baird, 
Multagoona,  Darling  River,  vho  had  never  hitherto  seen  it  growing  in  the  dis- 
trict. The  seeds  of  this  exotic  gi'ass  are  considered  injurious,  and  if  eaten  are 
said  to  produce  drowsiness,  lieadaehe,  and  vertigo.  According  to  Sir  J.  D. 
Hooker  and  the  Revd.  Canon  Tristram,  "this  species  is  identical  with  the  'Tares' 
of  Scripture,  and  is  one  of  the  worst  weeds  in  the  wheat  crops  of  Palestine,  and 
the  only  grass  with  a  poisonous  seed." 

Mr.  W.  W.  Froggatt  exhibited  specimens  of  the  Bag  Shelter  or  Boree 
!Moth.  Teara  contraria,  showing  the  masses  of  eggs  covered  with  the  down  off  the 
tips  of  their  bodies.  One  of  the  egg  masses  contained  a  number  of  eggs  of  a 
parasitic  moth,  the  larvae  of  which  feed  upon  the  eggs  of  the  Boree  Moth  and 
pupate  under  the  cover  of  the  egg  down.  The  larvae  of  this  Bag  Shelter  Moth 
ever\-  year  strip  the  foliage  from  thousands  of  Boree  trees,  Acacia  pendula,  one 
of  the  most  valuable  fodder  trees  in  Australia. 

Mr.  G.  A.  AYaterhouse  exhibited  Tlsi/ilioiie  rawiisleiii  c?  and  T.  ahenna  5 
which  he  had  paired,  together  with  3  c?  and  2  $  obtained  from  this  cross  and 
also  two  small  families  obtained  by  pairing  these  first  generation  specimens.  One 
family  consisted  of  3  c?.  1  $  ,  and  the  other  of  1  c?,  2  ?.  Also  four  specimens  of 
the  iirst  generation  obtained  by  crossing  T.  abeo)ia  c?  with  T.  ravrunleyi  ?.  Also 
Heteront/mpha  mirifica  and  H.  paradelplia  reared  from  larvae,  together  with  dead 
pupae    of  both    species. 

Mr.  H.  J.  Carter  exhibited  (i)  specimens  of  eacli  of  the  six  Australian 
genera  of  Chalcophorinae  (Bupresticlne).  These  six  genera  were  at  an  earlier 
period  all  classed  as  Chalcoplinra  though  they  are  clearly  differentiated  in  modem 
work;  (ii.)  specimens  of  three  closely  allied  CiipTiogastra.  concerning  two  of 
which  there  is  some  confusion  in  Kerreman's  "Monographic":  (iii.)  Ci/rioides 
ser-spilota  Carter  recently  collected  by  'Sir.  H.  W.  Brown  on  the  .Tohnstonc 
River,  Q. ;  (iv.)  an  example  of  a  new  genus  taken  by  Dr.  E.  W.  Ferguson  at 
Fort  Macquaric  and  (v.)  a  new  species  of  Stigmodem  from  the  Blue  Mts. 

Dr.  A.  B.  Walkoni  exhibited  a  number  of  seeds  a.ssociated  with  Glos/topteris 
in  rocks  of  Permo-Carboniferous  age  from  Three-mile  Creek,  on  the  Bowen 
Coalfield.    Queensland. 

Mr.  .J.  J.  Fletcher  exhibited  specimens  of  Persnoiiin  hicida  R.Br.,  from 
the  Lane  Cove  district,  being  portions  of  the  only  two  plants,  both  solitary,  he 
had  ever  seen  growing.  The  opinion  was  expressed  (hat  this  species  needs  fur- 
ther investigation. 


532 


A  REVISION  OF  THE  CHIROMYZINI  (DIPTERA). 

l!v  G.  H.  Hahuy 

(Plates  xxix.-xxx.) 

INIiss  Inviu  Smith's  paper  on  the  hirva  uf  Mtin/joiiia  rKhrirepf  Macfiiiart,  has 
made  it  necessary  to  study  the  genus  and  its  allies  in  a  more  comprehensive 
manner  than  has  been  done  hitherto,  so  that  the  position  of  the  species  may  be 
adequately  determined  and  the  genus  may  be  disting-uished  from  the  allied  genera 
of  the  World . 

The  literature  on  the  group  of  StrntioniijiiiUie,  here  placed  in  the  tribe  Chiro- 
myzini,  shows  considerable  disagreement  of  ideas  concerning  the  relative  value 
of  characters  hitherto  used  for  grouping  the  species  into  genera,  so  the  system 
independently  adopted  here  was  based  on  the  study  of  Australian  forms  only. 

Attention  is  drawn  to  the  fact  tliat  various  genera  hitherto  proposed  were 
founded  uj^on  venation  characters,  in  accordance  with  the  usual  custom  of 
grouping  the  StratiomyiirJae,  but  such  a  treatment  is  not  only  impossible  with  the 
species  under  discussion,  as  shown  in  this  study,  but  also  will  have  to  be  aban- 
doned as  a  main  factor  in  grrouping  other  species  of  Stratiovu/iidae  before  a 
natural  classification   of  the  family  can  be  attained . 

It  is  scarcely  to  be  expected  that  any  alteration  will  l)e  made  upon  the  prin- 
ciples underlying  the  present  scheme  of  treating  the  genera  under  the  tribe  Chiro- 
myzini,  but  it  is  possible  that  the  genus  Chiromyza  is  divisible  into  two  groups, 
formed  according  to  whether  the  eyes  of  the  male  are  contiguous  or  separated,  but 
this  development,  for  obvious  reasons,  cannot  be  undertaken  in  this  paper. 

A  list  of  species  jilaced  in  this  tribe  is  as  follows: — 
METOlfixiA  ^[aci|uart.      (Synonyms. — Ituipiis  Walker:  and    Criptoheri^   White.) 
ruhrici'p.'i    ^facouart.     [Syn. — fitirii-apiit  Walker,    drupectius   Walker.    Iierben- 
ceoN  White],  ( X(-w  Soulli  Wales.  X'ictoria  and  ?  Tasmania ). /yfHi/)if(,  n.sp.  (Xew 
South   Wales). 
Chirojiyza  WiedeiiKinn.      ( Synonyins. — XemiDiorphti  Ma<-(|u:nt :    .'  Nonaeris   Wal- 
ker:    JTi/liiriis     Philippi:     Ldiiariix    I'liihiipi;    /.((iiiiriinis    Endevlcin:     and 
M.^ld/iiiiiid   White,  tier  ^laciiuart.) 
rittata    Wiedemann    (P.razil),    ocliraceri  Wiedemann    (South    America),    /(fs- 
cana    Witdemann      (Central    and    South    America),     leptiformia    Mactiuart 
{ViTazi\).  aiislnilis  Macquart  (Australia),  pn.wrt  Walker  (Tasmania).    ?  tran- 
seq)(fi  Walker   (South   Amciica).   r/p/H«  Bigot   (?  Australia).  iraM.>.p/  Philippi 
(riiile).  jHiMs/cH)  Philii>pi    (Chile).  ;)rtro(7(,'.rf(  Enderlein   (Chile). 


BY    C.   ir.   JIAFJIIY.  533 

Uncertain  generic  positiox. 

grandicornis  Hordy    [XeiK/iiiorplia),    (Tusnuuiia). 

BOREOIDES,  u.gen. 

subidatiiri    n.sp.    (New  South  Wales,  Victoria,  aiitl  ?  Tasmania). 

Allognosta  Osten-Sacken.  (Synonyms. — Metoponia  Loew,  ner  .Mai-(|uail  anrl 
Anucautlioberis  Brunetti.) 
fuscitarsia  Say  [Syn. — dorsalis  Say,  brevis  Walker,  IiUu  Walker,  pallipea 
Wiedeiiiann]  ( Unilei!  States  of  America),  obscuriventris  Loew  (Canada), 
si  milts  Loew  (United  States  of  America),  vagans  Loew  [Syn. — iiiermis  Bru- 
netti] (Europe  and  Asia),  crassitarsis  de  Meyere  (Java),  crassa  de  Meyere 
(Java),  barbieUinii  Bezzi  (Brazil),  assamerisis  Brunetti  (Assam). 
Of  the  above  twenty-three  species  the  flrst  fifteen  belong  to  the  Chiromyzini, 

and  the  eight  species  under  the  genus  Allognosta  probably  belong  to  the  same 

tribe. 

T  desire  to  record  my  thanlcs  to  Mr.  J.  A.  Kershaw,  of  the  National  Museum, 

Melbourne,    for  the  loan  of  specimens  of   Chiromyzini   under  bis   charge,   which 

included  the  manuscript  species,  Boreomyia  subulata   Walker     also  to  Miss  Irwin 

Smith  and  Dr     E.   W.    Fero-uson    who  have  afforded    me    every    np])(irtunity  to 

examine   specimens  in  their  collections. 

Tribe  CHIROMYZINI. 

Definition. — The  antennae  are  situated  low  down  on  the  head,  ai-e  short,  and 
are  composed  of  three  short  joints,  the  third  of  which  consists  of  several  segments 
which  ai'e  fused  or  almost  fused,  so  that  they  are  found  not  to  foi'm  independent 
segments  when  dissected;  the  face  recedes.  The  scutellum  is  without  spines  and 
its  contour  is  smooth.  The  abdomen  contains  seven  segments* ;  the  male  has  the 
genitalia  exposed,  and  the  female  has  a  protensive  ovipositor  containing  a  pair  of 
cerci.  The  wings,  when  at  rest,  lie  horizontally  and  partly  overlap  above  the 
abdomen;  they  have  a  venation  which  is  variable  in  each  species;  at  most  the 
wings  <-ontain  a  full  complement  of  veins  occurring  in  the  family  Stratiomyiidae, 
or  certain  veins  consisting  of  the  upper  branch  of  the  cubital  fork,  the  third 
posterior  vein,  and  the  cross-vein  between  the  second  and  fourth  posterior  veins 
may  be  partly  or  completely  obsolete.  The  tifth  ]3osterior  vein  issues  from  the 
second  basal  cell  and  joins  the  anal  vein  considerably  before  it  reaches  the  wing 
margin.     The  female  is  apterous  in  one  genus. 

Notes. — The  tribe  Chiromyzini  is  adopted  here  as  the  characters  of  the  genera 
placed  under  it  are  not  of  sufficient  importance  to  wan-ant  their  isolation  from 
the  subfamily  Beridinae.  Osten-Sacken  made  a  family  of  the  genus  Chiromi/za, 
and  Kertesz,  in  his  catalogue,  treats  it  as  a  typical  form  of  a  subfamily  under 
the  family  Coenomiiiidae  bnt  does  not  associate  the  genus  Allognosta  with  it.  The 
genus  Allognosta  is  not  known  to  me  but  judging'  from  the  chai-acters  ]>ublislied 
it  appears  that  the  species  placed  under  it  belong  to  the  tribe  defined  above. 

Key  to  the  genera  of  the   tribe  Chiromgsini. 

I.   The  eyes  separated  in  both  sexes;  the  two  basal  joints  of  the  antennae  equal  in 

length,  the  third  joint  of  the  male  four  times  the  length  of  the  second  and 

of   the    female   only    twice    the   length:    the    male    with    wings,    the   female 

apterous Boreoides,   n.gen. 

•All  the  works  dealing  with  Beridinae  seen  by  the  writer  state  that  the  abdomen  has 
seven  visible  segments;  actually,  however,  there  are  eight  visible  in  the  female, 
not  including  the  apical  one,  usnally  referred  to  as  the  ovipositor  and  which 
contains  the  cerci. 


534  A   RKVISION    OF    THE    CHIROMTZIXI     (DIPTERA), 

Both  sexes  with  wings,  other  characters  variable 2. 

2.   The  male  with  contiguous  or  separated  eyes:   the  antennae  with  the  basal  joints 
about  equal  in  length,  the  third  joint  about  twice  the  length  of  the  second. 

Clii>-0)ity~a  Wiedfiuann . 
The  male  with  contiguous  eyes;   the  antennae  with  the  basal  joints  variable  in 
proportion,  the  third  joint  four  times  the  length  of  the  second. 

Metoponia  Macquart. 

Genus  M  E  T  O  P  0  X  I  A  Macquart . 

Metoponia,  Macquart,  Dipt.  Exot.,  suppl.    2,  1847,  p.    28;   Walker,  List  Dipt. 

Brit.  Mus.,  v.,  suppl.  1,  1854,  p.   112;  Osten-Sacken,  Berl.  Ent.   Zeit.. 

xxvii.,  1883,  p.   297;  White,  Proe.   Roy.    Soc.   Tas.,  1914,  p.   46;  and 

191G,  p.  2G0;  Hardy,  Proe.  Roy.   Soc.   Tas.,  1920,  p.  34. 
Inopus,  Walker,  Ins .  Saund .  Dipt.,  1850,  p .  2 ;  List  Dipt .  Brit .  Mus.,  v.,  suppl . 

1,  1854,  p.  112;  Osten-Sacken.  Berl.  Ent.  Zeit.,  xxvii.,  1883,  p.  296. 
Cryptoberis,  White,   Proe.  Linn.   Soc.  N.   S.   Wales,  xli.,  1916,  p.  73. 

Definition. — The  eyes  are  contiguous  in  the  male  and  widely  separated  in  the 
female.  The  auteunae  do  not  exceed  the  length  uf  the  head:  the  tirst  joint  may  be 
s  the  length  of  the  third  or  considerably  less,  the  second  joint  is  short;  the  third 
joint  is  rather  long,  at  least  four  times  the  length  of  the  second.  The  abdomen 
is  depressed  in  both  sexes,  and  normal  in  shape.  The  venation  is  variable;  the 
radial  vein  may  issue  from  the  first  basal  cell,  or  it  may  branch  off  the  cubital 
vein  at  a  little  distance  from  the  basal  cell;  the  upper  branch  of  the  cubital  vein 
is  usually  present,  but  may  be  absent  in  isolated  specimens;  the  diseal  e«ll  has 
three  posterior  veins  issuing  from  it,  all  of  which  reach  the  wing  border.  The 
first  and  second  posterior  veins  may  issue  separately  from  the  diseal  cell  or  from 
a  point,  or  they  may  be  stalked;  these  characters  are  variable  within  a  species. 
The  third  posterior  vein  is  never  present;  the  fourth  is  normal;  the  fifth  issues 
from  the  second  basal  cell  and  joins  the  anal  cell  considerably  before  it  reaches  the 
wing  margin. 

Metoponia  rubriceps  Macq\uirt.    (Plate  xxix..  figs.  5.  B. ) 

Metoponia  rubriceps,    Macquart,    Dipt.  Exot.,    suppl.  2,  1847,    p.  28.   I'l.    i.,    fig. 

4;  and  .suppl.  3,  1848,  p.  15;  Walker,  List  Dipt.  Brit.  Mus.,  v.,  supj)!. 

1,    1854,  p.   113;  Osten-Sacken,  Berl.   Ent.   Zeit.,  xxvii.,  1883,  p.   297; 

White,  Proe.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.,  1914,  p.  46;  and  Proe.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.  Wales, 

xli.,  1916,   1).   75;  Hardy.  Proe.   Roy.   Soc.   Tas..  1920,  p.   34.  text-fig.   1: 

Smith.  Proe.   Linn.   Soc.  N.S.  Wales,  xlv.,  1920,  p.  505,  PI.   xxvii.-xxviii. 
Chiromijza  flavicaput,  Walker,  Ins.  Saund.  Dipt.,  1852,  p.  163. 
Cryptoberis  herbescens,  White,  Proe.   Linn.   Soc.  N.S.   Wales,  xli.,  1916,  p.   97. 

text-fig .   1 . 
f  Inopus  despectns,  Walker,  Ins.   Saund.   Dipt.,  1850,  p.  2,  PI.   i.,  fig.    7;  List 

Dipt.  Brit.  Mus.,  v.,  suppl.  1,  1854,  p.  112  (dispectus) . 
Si/>ionymy. — The  reasons  for  considering  that  Cryptoberis  herbescens  White 
is  identical  with  Metopotiia  rubriceps  Macquart  have  been  dealt  with  in  my  paper 
in  the  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  Tasmania,  1920,  and  no  further  com- 
ment is  needed  here.  The  illustration  of  Inopus  despectus  Walker  shows  that 
the  upiier  branch  of  the  cubital  veiti  is  mis«;ing,  which  character  is  rare  in  Meto- 
ponia rubriceps,  but  the  other  characters  agree  so  well  with  this  common  species 
that  tile  generic  position  is  beyond  dispute;  the  basal  joint  of  the  antennae,  which 


BY    G.    H.    HARDY.  535 

is  about  as  long  as  the  third,  and  the  radial  vein  issuing  from  the  first  basal  cell, 
agree  with  this  species. 

Characters. — This  species,  in  which  the  female  is  usually  black  and  the  head 
red  and  the  male  brown  or  somewhat  blackish,  never  with  red,  has  the  antennae 
with  the  first  and  second  joints  together  about  equal  in  length  to  the  third,  the  iirst 
rather  long,  and  the  second  joint  al)out  one  quarter  the  lengih  of  the  third.  The 
ladial  vein  invr.riably  issues   from  the   first  basal  cell. 

D.escription. — (?.  The  head  is  black,  the  eyes  are  contiguous  and  have  a  little 
•pubescence.  The  antennae  are  black,  the  first  joint  is  long,  about  three  times  the 
length  of  the  second,  the  second  joint  is  about  as  long  as  broad,  the  third  'joint  is 
four  times  the  lengfli  of  the  second.  [The  text-fig.  1,  in  the  Proc.  Roy.  Soc. 
Tasm.,  1920,  ji.  35.  shows  the  antennae  drawn  from  a  micro-slide.]  The  thorax 
and  scutellum  are  black  and  have  some  black  pubescence  and  depressed  yellowish 
tomentum.  The  abdomen  is  black  and  contains  denser  pubescence;  there  are 
seven  segments  and  exposed  genitalia  which  conform  in  shape  with  those  of  other 
species  of  Beridinae.  The  anterior  coxae  are  black,  and  the  remainder  of  the  legs 
are  yellowish,  slightly  stained  fuscous.  The  wings  are  obscurely  fumed  and  the 
halteres  are  similarly  coloured. 

S.  The  head  is  red  with  some  short  pubescence,  the  ocelli  and  the  eyes  are 
black :  the  latter  have  a  little  pubescence.  The  antennae  are  black,  sometimes  red 
at  the  base,  and  conform  in  proportions  to  those  of  the  male.  The  thorax  and 
scutellum  are  black  with  short  pubescence,  and  sometimes  tracings  of  lighter  mark- 
ings can  be  seen  laterally.  The  abdomen  is  depressed,  black,  and  usually  with  a 
thin  light  border  at  the  extreme  lateral  edges.  There  are  seven  abdominal  seg- 
ments, the  ovipositor  (the  eighth  segment)  bearing  a  pair  of  eerci;  in  the  speci- 
men described  and  illustrated  here  the  ovipositor  contains  a  small,  inflated,  yellow, 
ventral  .sack  which  can  be  detected  bulging  on  each  side.  The  abdomen  contain'^ 
short  pubescence.  The  legs  are  variable  in  colour,  they  are  usually  reddish  and 
n  uch  stained  with  black ;  in  the  specimen  illustrated  the  anterior  coxae  are  red — 
the  intermediate  and  posterior  coxae  black;  the  trochanters  are  reddish,  the  basal 
half  of  the  femora  is  black,  the  apical  half  red;  the  middle  third  of  the  tibiae  is 
black,  the  base  and  apex  reddish ;  the  tarsi  have  the  base  of  the  first  and  second 
joints  red,  the  pulvilli  and  the  basal  half  of  the  claws  red,  the  remainder  black. 
Tlie  wings  are  rather  strongly  fumed  and  the  halteres  are   similarly  coloured. 

Hah. — New  South  "Wales:  Sydney.  (51  c?.  20  ?.)  Specimens  have  also  been 
seen  from  Victoria,  but  are  not  available  for  study  at  the  time  of  writing  this 
paper.  Macquart  adds  Tasmania  as  a  locality,  but  specimens  from  this  State 
do  not  seem  to  be  represented  in  recent  collections. 

Metoponia  gemina,  n.sp.    (Plate  xxix.,  figs.  1-4. ) 

Characters. — In  this  species  the  female  has  a  red  head  and  the  remainder 
is  usually  blackish,  with  a  brownish  scutellum;  the  male  is  brown  or  blackish  with 
a  lighter  brown  scutellum,  and  also  often  the  second  and  third  abdominal  seg- 
ments are  of  a  lighter  brown  dorsally.  The  first  joint  of  the  antennae  is  but 
little  longer  than  the  second,  and  the  third  joint  four  times  the  length  of  the 
second;  the  radial  vein  of  the  wdng  branches  from  beyond  the  base  of  the  cubital 
vein.  The  head  differs  in  shape  from  that  of  M.  riihriceps  when  seen  dorsally. 
the  face  appears  to  be  more  prominent. 

Description. — S.     The  head  is  red,   with  the   ocellar  tubercle   and   the  eyes 


536  A   REVISION'   OF    THB    C'HIHOMyzlN  1    (DIPTERA), 

black.  Seen  dorsallv  tlie  iieai!  is  coiis|)ii_niimsly  more  prominent  iR'tween  the  eyes 
than  in  Metopuuiu  rubriceits  Maequart.  The  tiist  joint  of  the  antennae  is  about 
twice  the  length  of  the  secontl,  and  the  tliird  joint  is  missing. 

The  thorax,  seutellum  and  abdomen  are  as  in  M.  rubrieeps;  they  are  black 
with  a  dull  yellowish  tinge  on  the  post-alar  callus,  which  character  is  also  often 
present  in  M.  rubrieeps;  this  colour  extends  on  to  the  seutellum  and  fonns  an 
apical  margin  in  the  holotype  only. 

The  legs,  as  in  M.  rubricep.-:,  are  red  and  nuii-h  stained  with   black. 

The  wings  are  fuscous  and  liave  the  radial  vein  branching  from  the  base  or 
fslightly'  beyond  the  base  of  the  cubital  vein,  wliich  is  forked  at,  or  beyond,  the 
middle  of  its  length .  _  The  first  and  second  posterior  veins  issue  from  the  discal 
cell  separately. 

S.  This  sex  is  blackish  in  cohnir  and  has  a  yellnwisli  tomentum;  the  eyes  are 
contiguous,  the  ocellar  and  antennal  triangles  are  \ eiy  small,  the  latter  reddish ; 
the  epistoma  is  yellowisli.  The  antennae  are  re<ldish  or  yellowish  and  much 
stained  with  fuscous.  Seen  dorsally,  the  shape  of  the  head  anteriorly  is  arched 
and  not  flat  as  in  M.  rubrieeps. 

The  thorax  is  black  and  has  depressed  yellow  liairs,  tiie  liumeral  -and  jjost- 
aiar  calli  and  the  seutellum  are  ochraceous. 

The  abdomen  is  black,  l)nt  the  first  and  second  segments  may  contain  a  con- 
spicuous area  of  yellowish  brown ;  the  genitalia  are  yellowisli . 

The  legs  are  yellowish  and  similar  to  those  of  the  male -of  M.  rubrieeps. 

The  wing's  are  fuscous  and  have  the  radial  vein  branching  from  near  the 
base  to  about  one-sixth  the  length  of  the  cubital  vein  which  is  forked  at  about 
two-thirds  of  its  length.  Tlie  first  and  second  posterior  veins  issue  from  the 
discal  cell  separately  or  from  a  point,  or  they  may  be  stalked. 

Length. — ^.  6 — 7  mm.  i  ?.  10  mm. 

Hab. — New  South  Wales:.  Leura,  Blue  Mountains.  ;\Iincli.  1020,  coHected  by 
Dr.   A.  Maclean. 

Type. — The  holotype  5  and  the  allotyjie  c?  were  presented  to  the  Australian 
Museum  by  Dr.  E.  ^Y .  Ferguson.  The  i)aratypes.  (3  d',  1  V)  are  in  Dr.  Fer- 
guson's collection. 

Genus   C  h  i  r  o  ii  v  z  a   Wie<lemann . 

Chiromyza.  Wiedemann,  Nova  Dipt.    Gen.,   1820,  ]>.    19;   and   Auss.   zweiil.   Ins., 

i.,  1828,  p.  237;  Bigot,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  France.    (5).  ix.,  1879,  p.  185. 
Xenomorphu,  Maci|uart.  Dipt.   Exot.,  i.,   1,  1838,  ]^.  193;   and  i.,  2,  1839,  ]i.  190; 

Hardy,  Froc.   Roy.   Soc.   Tas.,  1920,  p.   37. 
Larjurn'i,     Phillppi,    Verb.    z.-b.   Ges.   AVien..    xv.,    18(>,5,     ji.     728    { ])icoc<iipicd )  ; 

Osten-Saeken,  Berl.   Ent.   Zeit.,  xxvi.,  1882,  pp.   3C(),  3(58  and  3§0. 
llijlorus,  Philii3i)i,  loc.  cit.,  p.  728:  Osten-Sacken,  Inc.  cit.,  i>)).  3(58  and  380. 
Lagarinus,  Enderlein,    Zool.    Anz.,    xlii.,  1913,  p.  251;    Krober,    Wvtsman's  Gen. 

Ins.,  fa.sc.  IGl,  1914,  p.  13. 
Metaponia,  White,    {nee  Macquart),   Pnn-.    Linn.    Soc.    X.S.    Widcs.   xli..   101(1, 

p.   74. 
f  Noiiacris,  Walker,  Ins.   Saund.   Dipt.,  i.,  1850,  p.   7;  Osten-Sacken,  I'.erl.   Ent, 

Zeit.,  xxvii.,  188.3,  p.    296. 
Sijnonijmii. — Tlie  genus  CJiirnnn/ui  Wiedemann  was  founded  ujioii  a  Brazilian 


BY    C.     h.     HARDY. 


537 


speeies,  C.  vittata,  in  which  the  upper  branch  of  the  cubital  fork  and  tlie  third 
posterior  vein  are  obsolete,  and  the  discal  cell  is  complete. 

The  genus  Xenvmvrpha  Macquart  was  founded  upon  a  species,  X.  leptiformis, 
in  which  only  the  upper  branch  of  the  cubital  fork  was  obsolete,  that  is,  the  third 
posterior  vein  wa-s  present,  otherwise  the  characters  are  identical  with  Wiede- 
mann's species.  Australian  specimens  show  variations  in  which  the  upper  branch 
of  the  cubital  vein  may  be  present  or  absent  and  the  discal  cell  may  be  partly 
open,  and  finally  the  third  posterior  vein  may  be  absent,  but  such  an  occurrence 
is  rare. 

The  genus  Uiilirrua  Philippi  was  founded  on  a  Chilian  species,  //.  krausei, 
in  which  the  thinl  posterior  vein  is  absent.  Australian  specimens  conform  to 
this  and  individual  specimens  with  the  discal  cell  partly  open  are  rather  common, 
thus  showin.^-  a  connecting  link  with  Lugarus;  the  upper  branch  of  the  eutiital 
fork  is  also  sometimes  absent  and  in  this  way  unites  Lagarus  with  the  typical 
Chiromyza. 

The  genus  Lagarhnt^  Enderlein  was  proposed  for  a  Chilian  species,  L.  para- 
doxus, which  conformed  in  the  characters  to  Lagarus  (preoccupied).  Enderlein 
placed  Lagarus  as  a  synonym  of  his  new  genus  Lagariniis  and  erroneously  re- 
moved the  group  to  tiie  family  Scenopidae.  Krober  copied  Enderlein's  description 
and  appended  it  to  the  end  of  his  revision  of  the  genera  of  Scenopidae  without 
comment . 

Tiie  characters  of  the  genus  Metoponia.  given  by  White,  conform  to  the 
Xenumorpha  of  Macquart. 

The  following  key  will  make  the  relation  between  these  various  species  clear. — 

1.  Speciies  with  four  posterior  veins 2. 

Species  with  five  posterior  veins,  the  third  of  which  is  stunted   . .    Xenornorpha. 

2.  The  discal  cell  open,  all  traces  of  the  cross  vein  closing  the  discal  cell  obsolete. 

Lagarus  and  Lagariiuis. 
The   discal   cell  closed,  or  at  least  the   vein   that  closes   the   discal   cell  is   indi- 
cated   '^  ■ 

3.  The  cubital  vein  forked Hy/oius. 

The  cubital  vein  simple Chiroinyza. 

These  differences  of  character  are  variations  that  grade  into  each  other  and 
are  of  less  than  specific  value. 

In  the  original  description,  the  genus  Nonacris  Walker  is  described  as  having 
the  antennae  seven  segmented  and  the  second  joint  much  longer  than  the  first, 
but  Osteu-Sacken  states  that  the  type,  X.  trausequa,  from  South  America,  appeai-s 
to  be  a  Chiromyza  as  he  could  not  find  any  difference. 

Definition. — The  eyes  are  contiguous  or  separated  in  tlie  male  and  widely 
separated  in  the  female;  the  antennae  are  shorter  than  the  head,  the  first  joint 
is  short,  the  second  about  the  same  size,  and  the  third  scarcely  exceeds  the  length 
of  the  two  basal  joints  united;  a  species  described  as  Xenornorpha  grandicornis 
Hardy,  has  the  third  joint  considerably  longer  and  does  not  belong  to  this  genus 
as  defined  here.  The  abdomen  of  the  male  is  depressed;  the  genitalia  conform  to 
those  of  other  genera  of  the  Beridinae.  The  female  has  the  basal  segments  of  the 
abdomen  distended  and  the  apical  segments  attenuated ;  there  are  four  distended 
segments  and  three  narrow  elongate  segments,  at  the  apex  of  which  is  the  pro- 
t-ensive  ovipositor,  the  true  eighth  segment,  which  bears  a  pair  of  cerci.  Both 
sexes  have  wings;  the  venation  is  very  variable  within  a  species,  more  so  than  in 


538  A   REVISION   OF    THE    CHIROMYZIS'I    (dIPTEBA), 

the  geiius  Metoponia.  The  radial  vein  invariably  issues  from  the  first  basal  cell; 
the  upper  branch  of  the  cubital  vein  may  be  present  or  obsolete;  the  discal  cell 
may  be  open  or  closed  and  is  short;  three  posterior  veins  issue  from  the  discal 
cell  and  often  another,  but  stunted  vein,  the  true  third  posterior  vein,  is  also  pre- 
sent; the  first  and  second  posterior  veins  may  issue  from  tlie  discal  cell  separately, 
or  from  a  point,  or  they  may  be  stalked;  these  characters  are  variable  within  a 
species.  The  fifth  posterior  vein  issues  from  the  second  basal  cell  and  joins 
the  anal  vein  considerably  before  it  reaches  the  wing  margin. 

Chibomyia  vittata  Wiedemann . 

Chiromyia  vittata,  Wiedemann,  Nova  Dipt.   Gen.,  1820,  p.    20,  fig.   8,  ?.     (For 
further  references  see  Kertesz,  Cat.   Dipt.,  iii..  1908,  pp.   144-5.) 
Note. — Schiner  gives  X.  leptiformis  Macquart  as  a  synonym  of  this  species. 

Chiromyza  ochracea  Wiedemann. 

Chiromyza  ochracea,  Wiedemann,  loc.  cit.,  p.  20,  c?.  (For  further  references  see 
Kertesz,  loc.  cit.) 

Chiromyza  fuscana  Wiedemann. 

CJiiromy^a  fuscana,  Wiedemann,  Dipt.  Exot.,  1821.  ji.  115,  ?.  (For  further 
references  see  Kertesz,  loc.  cit.) 

Chiromyza  leptiformis  Macquart. 

Xenomorpha  leptiformis  Macquart,  Dipt.  Exot.,  i.,  1,  1838,  p.   193,   PI.   xxiii.,  fig. 
1    (?) ;  and  i.,  2,  1839,  p.  190  (d")  ;   Walker,  List    Dipt.   Brit.  Mus.,   v.. 
suppl.  1,  1854,  p.  66. 
Note. — Schiner  gives  this  as  a  synonym  of  C.  vittata  Wiedemann. 

Chiromyza  australis  Macquart.     (Plate  xxx.,  figs.  12-16.) 

Xenomorpha  australis,  Macquart,  Dipt.  Exot.,  suppl.  4,  1850,  p.  54,  PI.  iii.,  fig. 
7;  Williston,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  Fbilad.,  xv.,  1888,  p.  244;  Hardy,  Proc. 
Roy.  Soc.  Tas.,  1920,  p.  38,  text-fig.  2. 

Characters. — This  species  has  already  been  fully  described,  but  it  is  subject 
to  considerable  variation  in  wing  venation  and  colour  markings.  The  eyes  are 
separated  in  both  sexes;  the  wings  have  a  very  complete  venation,  but  the  upper 
branch  of  the  cubital  fork  may  be  partly  or  completely  absent;  the  third  pos- 
terior vein  is  almost  invariably  indicated  by  a  stunted  vein  which  is  variable 
in  length,  and  in  one  specimen  the  cross-vein  between  the  second  and  third  pos- 
terior veins  is  obsolete.  The  illustration  is  taken  from  one  of  the  series  of  speci- 
mens from  Gisborne  already  described   by  nie. 

Macquart  described  the  male  as  having  rather  thick  posterior  tarsi,  which 
character  applies  better  to  Ch.  prisca,  whilst  the  drawing  shows  the  eyes  separated 
in  the  male,  and  a  stunted  third  posterior  vein  which  conforms  to  the  species 
idefatified   here. 

//a6.— New  South  Wales  and  Victoria.     (6  <i,8  9.) 

1  Chiromyza  transequa  Walker. 

Nonacris  transequa.  Walker,  Ins.   Saund.  Dipt.,  1852,  p.  7. 

Chiromyza  transequa,  Osten-Sackcn.  P>erl.  Ent.  Zeit.,  xxvi..  1882.   p.  368. 


BY    G.     H.     HARDY.  539 

Chiromyza   prisca  Walker.     (Plate   .xxix.,   figs.  7-11.) 

Chiromyia  prisca.  Walker,   Ins.   Saund.   Dipt.,  1852,  p.  162. 
3f.etoponia  prisca,  Hardy,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Tas.,  1920,  p.  36. 

Characters. — Eyes  contiguous  in  the  male,  separated  in  the  female;  the  wings 
have  a  variable  venation,  in  which  the  upper  branch  of  the  cubital  vein  is  pre- 
sent or  obsolete,  the  first  and  second  posterior  veins  may  be  stalked,  or  issue 
from  the  discal  cell  from  a  point  or  independently;  the  third  posterior  vein  is 
obsolete;  the  transverse  vein  between  the  second  and  fourth  posterior  veins  may 
be  incomplete,  making  the  discal  cell  partly  open,  and  in  one  ease  which  is 
illustrated  (Plate  xxix.,  fig.  7)  the  second  basal  cell  is  also  partly  open  by  a 
similarly  incomplete  cross-vein.     In  the  male  the  posterior  tarsi  are  thickened. 

Note. — Walkers  type  from  Tasmania  is  evidently  a  male  and  is  not  ade- 
quately enough  described  for  its  identity  to  be  positively  determined ;  the  only 
species  known  from  that  State  that  appeai-s  to  approach  Walker's  description 
was  subsequently  identified  and  described  as  Metoponia  prisca,  but  the  identifi- 
cation is  not  a  satisfactory  one. 

Chiromyza  vicina  Bigot. 

Chiromyza  vicina,  Bigot,  Ann.  Soc.  Ent.  France,    (5),  ix.,  1879,  p.  200  (2). 
Metoponia  vicina,  Kertesz,  Cat.  Dipt.,  iii.,  1908,  p.  115. 

Note. — The  position  of  this  species  is  open  to  doubt,  but  as  it  was  described 
from  a  female,  it  cannot  belong  to  the  genus  Boreoides,  and  its  colour  does  not 
agree  with  the  known  species  under  the  genus  Metoponia.  The  inadequate  de- 
scription reads  like  that  of  a  typical  female  Chiromyza,  and  its  habitat  is  queried 
Australia. 

Chiromyza  krausei  Piiilippi. 

Hylorus  krausei,  Philippi,  Verb.  z.-b.  Ges.  Wien.,  xv..  1865,  p.  728,  PI.  xxvi.,  fig. 
33  (c?) ;  Osten-Sacken,  Berl.  Ent.  Zeit.,  xxvi.,  1882,  p.  368;  Hunter, 
Trans.  Amer.  Entom.  Soc.  Philad.,  xxvii.,  1901,  p.  133. 

Chiromyza    pauslbni  Philippi. 

Lagarus  pausleni,  PWlippi,  Verb.  z.-b.  Ges.  Wien,  xv.,  1865,  p.  728   (?)  ;  Hunter, 

Trans.  Amer.  Ent.  Soc.  Philad.,  xxvii.,  1901,  p.  132. 
Lagarinus  pausleni,  Enderlein,  Zool.  Anz.,  xlii.,  1913,  p.  253. 

Chiromyza    paradoxa  Enderlein. 

Lagarinus  paradoxus,  Enderlein,  Zool.  Anz.,  xlii.,  1913,  p.  252,  figs.  1  and  2  (c?)  . 

Species  of  uncertain  generic  position. 

Xenomorpha  grandicornis  Hardy. 

Xenomorpha  grandicornis.  Hardy,  Proc.  Roy.   Soc.  Tas.,  1920,  p.  39,  text-fig.  3. 

Genus  B  0  R  B  o  I  D  E  s,  n . gen . 

Boreomyia,  Walker,  MS.  name. 

Definition. — T);e  eyes  are  separated  in  both  sexes;  the  antennae  have  "the 
two  basal  joints  of  equal  length  and  the  third  joint  about  twice  the  length  of  the 
basal  joints   united    in  the   male,    and  about   the   same  length  as  the  basal  joints 


540  A    UKVISION    lIK    TIIK    ( 'II  1  KILM  VZl  \  1     (  IH  I'TKHA  )  , 

united  in  the  female-.  Tiie  abdomen  is  depressed  in  the  male,  and  in  the  female 
the  four  basal  segments  are  distended  and  the  apical  segments  attenuated.  The 
wings  of  the  male  contain  a  complete  or  almost  complete  venation;  the  upper 
branch  of  the  cubital  fork  and  the  stunted  third  i)osterior  vein  nuiy  be  absent. 
The  female  is  aptt-rous. 

Etymology. — A  female  specimen  in  tlie  National  Musium,  Mcll)ourne,  bears 
a  label  in  Walker's  handwriting  identifying  the  species  as  Boreomyia  nubulaia, 
and.  in  consequence,  tiie  species  has  been  rather  well  known  under  that  name. 
It  appears  tliat  the  name  has  not  been  published,  and  Dr.  Ferguson  informs  me 
that  he  tailed  to  And  a  specimen  of  the  species  in  the  British  Museum,  on 
which  account  it  is  reasonable  to  suppose  that  the  specimen  labelled  by  Walker 
and  now  before  me,  was'  intended  to  be  the  type  of  a  new  species.  The  name 
Boreomyia  is  preoccupied  by  Boriomyia  Banks.  1906,  a  North  American  Neurop- 
teron  of  the  family  llemerobiidae,  and,  moreover,  the  strict  meaning  of  the 
name^is  scarcely  applicable  to  the  species  under  discussion.  Boreomyia  would 
mean  '■norlhern  Hy"  accordina'  to  its  derivation,  and  this  does  not  appear  to  \w 
the  meaning  intended  by  Walker,  who  evidently  noted  the  shape  superficially  re- 
sembling the  Panorpid  genus  Boreus  and  intended  in  his  name  to  convey  the 
meaning  BoreusMy.  The  name  is  modified  here  to  Boreoides,  meaning  "like 
Boreus." 

HOKEOIDKS    sUBUl.ATi:s,    n.sp.      (Plate  XXX.,  figs.   17-22.) 

Boreomyia  yubtilata.  Walker,  MS.   name. 

Description. — The  female  is  much  infiated  and  apterous;  the  male  is  winge<l, 
more  or  less  uniforndy  coloured  brownish,  and  is  slender  in  build. 

c?.  The  front  is  on^  fifth  the  width  of  the  head,  parallel-sided  and  bulges 
slightly;  the  ocellar  tubercle  is  very  slightly  raised,  and  anterior  to  tins  a  median 
dejiression  I'eaches  the  antennae.  The  antennae  have  their  two  basal  joints  equal 
in  length,  and  the  third  joint  twice  the  length  of  the  basal  joints  united,  and 
obscurely  annulated.  The  face  is  small  and  the  oral  aperture  is  shallow  and  wide, 
and  beneath  it  can  be  detected  the  minute  mouth  between  the  small  palpi.  The 
thorax  and  seutelium  are  normal,  the  former  often  stained  with  fuscous.  The 
abdomen  is  rather  long  and  slender,  depressed,  and  consists  of  seven  segments. 
The  exjiGsed  genitalia  conform  in  shape  to  those  of  other  species  of  the  Bcri- 
dinae.     The  legs  are  light  brown  in  colour,  long  and  slender. 

?.  The  front  is  about  (me-third  the  maximum  width  of  the  liead,  is  unitorin- 
ly  wide,  and  bulges  considerably.  The  ocellar  tubercle  is  but  slightly  raised, 
and  anterior  to  this  there  is  a  ]>air  ol  large  prominences  divided  by  a  deep 
median  depression  whicli  reaches  the  base  of  the  antennae;  the  front  contains 
conspicuous  yellowish  pubescence  anteriorly.  The  antennae  are  situated  low  on 
the  head  and  close  together;  the  two  basal  joints  are  about  ('(lual  in  length;  the 
third  joint  is  eciual  to  the  basal  joints  together;  the  apical  half  of  the  third  joint 
is  obscurely  annulated  and  three  or  four  divisions  c:in  be  seen.  The  oral  aper- 
ture is  shallow  and  wide,  and  it  contains  a  tubercle  occupying  a  larger  portion 
of  its  area;  below  the  tubende,  a  minute  mouth  can  be  detected  between  the  small 
palpi. 

■  The  tiiorax  anteriorly  is  i»s  wide  as  the  head,  but  widens  (■onsid<'ral)ly  to- 
wards the  abdomen;  it  is  glabrous  and  shining,  but  contains  a  little  golden  to- 
mentum   dorsally.      The    sculcllum    is    flattened  so  that   it   lies    like  a   plate    upon 


BY    <!.     n.     HARDY.  541 

the  metanotuni,  whioh  is  also  depressed  hut  wrinkled,  and  separates  the  scutellum 
from  the  abdomen .  Laterally  tlie  thorax  is  normal,  and  ventrally  it  is  almost 
entirely  concealed  by  the  coxae.  The  wings  and  halteres  are  obsolete,  but  there 
are  minute  prominences  indicating  the  position  where  these  appendages  should  be. 

The  abdomen  normally  is  large  and  distended,  but  in  some  specimens  it  is 
shrivelled  and  no  larger  than  that  of  the  head  and  thorax  combined.  There  are 
four  distended  segments  followed  by  three  elongate  narrow  segments,  at  the 
apex  of  which  the  ovipositor  (the  eighth  segment)  protrudes  and  contains  a  pair 
of  cerci.  In  all  the  specimens  the  abdomen  shows  tendencies  to  shrivel,  an(i 
in  some  specimens  dark  bands  are  to  be  seen  on  the  three  basal  segments  and 
dark  longitudiral  stripes  on  the  apical  segments.  In  the  holotype  the  apex  of 
the  first  dorsal  segment  has  a  thin  transverse  apical  band,  the  second  and  tliird 
segments  have  a  broader  central  band  and  the  fourth  to  seventh  segments  have  a 
pair  of  black  stripes.  The  ventre  has  tracings  of  corresponding  bands  and 
stripes  more  or  less  visible;  in  dark  specimens  these  markings  are  more  or  less 
obliterated . 

The  legs  are  long  and  have  fiieir  anterior  coxae  very  broad,  covering  half 
the  lengih  on  the  ventral  side  and  almost  touching  the  intermediate  coxae  which 
are  normal.  The  posterior  coxae  are  situated  at  the  distance  of  their  own  width 
from  the  intermediate  coxae  and  are  normal ;  the  legs  contain  a  minute  pubes- 
cence. 

Length.— d.  8-10  mm.;   5  15-25  mm. 

Hah. — There  are  35  d"  and  24  2  from  New  South  Wales  and  Victoria.  Vic- 
toria :  the  labelled  specimens  invariably  indicate  May  as  the  month  of  occur- 
rence and  the  localities  are  Western  District,  Myer's  Creek,  Brigiiton,  Mordialloc 
and  Portland;  and  Mount  Buifalo,  males  only,  taken  by  Miss  Irwin  Smith,  19th 
February,  192(1.  New  South  Wales  specimens  are  from  Mount  Kosciusko,  females 
only,  taken  by  Dr.  E.  W.  Ferguson,  February,  1920;  females  from  Bago  Forest, 
in  the  Australian  Museum,  taken  by  ('.  Kosegger;  and  males  labelled  Moonbar 
and  Kosciusko,  3000ft  ,  taken  by  Helms  in  March,  1889,  are  also  in  the  Australian 
Museum.  Tasmania:  specimens  from  this  State  taken  on  the  summit  of  Mt. 
Wellington,  and  one  taken  by  Mr.  ('.  E.  Cole  near  Bellerive,  Hobart,  im- 
dqubtedly  belong  to  this  species,  but  unfortunately  they  are  not  available  for 
study  at  the  tir.ie  of  writing  this  paper, 

Ti/pe. — The  holotype  ?  and  the  allotype  c?  are  in  the  National  Museum,  Mel- 
l)ourne;  paratypes  will  be  found  in  various  collections,  including  that  of  the 
Australian    Museum , 

Genus   A  L  L  o  G  N  o  s  T  A    Ostcn-Sacken. 

Metoponia.  Loew,  nee   Macquart.   Dipt.  Faun.  Sud.   Afr.,  i.,   I860,  p.  1. 
Allognosta,  Osten-Sacken,  Berl.  Ent.  Zeit.,  xxvii.,  1883,  p.  297;  Bezzi,  Deut.  Ent. 

Zeit.,  1908.  p.  470;  Coquillett.  Proc.  U.S.  Nat.  Mus.,  xxxvii.,  1910,  p.  ,505; 

Brunetti.  Faun.  Brit.  Ind.,  Dipt.  Braehy.,  i.,  1920,  p.  93. 
Anacanthoheris,  Brunetti.  Ree.  Ind.  Mus.,  vii,,  1912,  p.  45(i. 

Characters. — A  definition  of  this  genus  has  been  published  by  Brunetti,  1920, 
who,  apparently,  based  it  on  the  two  species  known  to  him.  The  illustration 
given  by  Brunetti  in  the  same  work  represents  A.  vagans  Loew,  and  the  figure  of 
the  antennae  shows  the  third  joint  to  be  four  times  the  length,  of  the  second; 
both  the  figure  and  the  description  give  eight  annulations  to  the  third  .joint.  The 
abdomen  of  the  male  is  shown  to  be  considerably  wider  than  the  thorax,  but  the 


542  A  REVisiOK  or  the  chiromyzini  (diptera). 

text  states  "slig:htly  wider."'  The  female  specimen  is  described  as  having  the 
sixth  abdominal  sequent  distinctly  narrower  than  the  fifth,  and  the  seventh  and 
eighth  narrower  than   the  sixth,  which  character  is  typical   of  the   Chiromyzini. 

The  genus  Allognosta  can  be  distinguished  from  the  genus  Metopon/ia  by  the 
abdomen  of  the  male  which  is  wider  than  the  thorax  and  also  relatively  shorter 
than  in  all  other  genera  of  the  Chiromyzini. 

In  Metoponia  there  are  only  seven  annulations  to  the  third  antennal  joint 
(Macquart  gives  eight);  in  AUognosta  these  annulations  are  stated  to  be  eight, 
but  the  character  requires  confirmation. 

The  following  list  contains  the  references  to  the  original  descriptions  of  the 

species  placed  under  the  genus  AUognosta  to  which  are  added  the  references  from 

works  published  subsequent  to  those  given  in  Kertesz's  catalogue. 

fuscitarsis,  Say,  Jouni.    Acad.  Nat.    Se.    Pliilad.,   iii..  1823,  p.    20   {Beris);  Bezzi, 

Deut.  Ent.  Zeit.,  1908,  p.  474.     [United   States  of  America.] 

dorsalis,  Say,  in  Long's  Exped.  St.  Peter's  River,  ii.,  appendix,  1824,  p.  377 

[Sargus] 
pallipes.  Wiedemann,  Auss.  Zweifl.  Ins.,  ii.,  1830,  p.  41    (Sargus)  . 
lata,  Walker,  List  Dipt.  Brit.  Mus.,  i.,  1848,  p.  127;  v.,  suppl.  1,  1854,  p.  10 

(Beris ) . 
brevis.  Walker.  List  Dipt.   Brit.   Mus.,   i.,   1848,  ]i.   127   (Beris);   v..  snp])l.   1, 
1854,  p.  10   (Bens). 
similis,  Loew,  Berl.  Ent.  Zeit.,  vii.,  1863,  p.  299,  d'  (Metoponia) ;  Bezzi,  Deut.  Ent. 

Zeit.,  1908,  p.  474.     [United  States  of  America.] 
ohseuriventris,  Loew,   Berl.    Ent.   Zeit.,  vii.,   18()3,  p.  299,   9    ( Metoponia)  ;   Bezzi, 

Deuv.  Ent.  Zeit.,  1908,  p.  474.     [Canada.] 
vagans,    Loew,   Beschreib.   Europ.   Dipt.,    iii.,    1873,    p.    71    (^[etopofiia)  ;    Bezzi, 
Deut.  Ent.  Zeit.,  1908,  p.  474.     Brunetti,  Faun.  Brit.  Ind.,  Dipt.  Brachy., 
i.,  p.  94,  PI.  1,  figs.  25-26,  c?.     [Europe.  Asia.] 
inermis.  Brunetti,  Rec.  Ind.  Mus.,  vii.,  1912,  p.  455,  c7.      (f  AUognosta — Ana- 
canthoheris)       [India.] 
harhieUinii,  Bezzi,  Deut.   Ent.   Zeit.,  1908.   p.  472.      [Brazil.] 
crassitarsis,  de  Meyere.  Tijdschr.  Ent.,  Ivi.,  suppl.,  1913   (1914).  \>.  19.      [,Iava.] 
erassa,  de  Meyere,  Ti.idschr.  Ent..  Ivi.,  suppl.,  1913   (1914),  p.  20.      [.lava.]      . 
oi'samerhsis^  Brunett-.  Fauna  Brit.  Ind.,  Dipt.  Brachy.,  i.,  1920,  p.  95.      [Assam.] 

Explanation  op    Pi.atks  .\,\ix.-xxx. 
Plate  xxi.\. 

Pigs.1-4. — Meiop07!ia  gemi7ia,n.sp.     1.  female,    from  holotype;    2.  male,    from   allotype; 

3.  head  of   female  holotype ;  4.  antenna  from  a  paratype  male. 
Figs. 5-6. — Afetopoitia  riihricifis  Macquart.     .5.  head,  male;  6.  antenna. 
Pigs. 7-11. — C/iiroiiiy~a  prisca    Wallcer.     7,   female;   8,    head  of   female   seen    anteriorly; 

9,  antenna  of  female;   10,  male;    11,  head  of  male  seen  anteriorly. 

Plate  XXX. 

Figs.12-16. — Chiroviyza  aiistra/is  Macquart.  12,  female;  l.S,  head  of  female  seen  anter- 
iorly ;   14,  antenna  of  female  ;    1.5,  male;    1(5.  head  of  male  seen  anterioily. 

Figs.17-22. — Boreoides  subiihita,  u.sp.  17,  female;  18.  head  of  fem.ale  .seen  anteriorly; 
19,  antenna  of  female;  20,  male;  '21,  head  of  male  seen  anteriorly;  [22,  antenna  of 
male. 


543 


SOME  NEW  BRACHIOPODS  FROM  THE  MIDDLE  PALAEOZOIC  ROCKS 
OF  NEW  SOUTH  WALES. 

By  John  Mitchell,  latk  Principal  of  the  Technical  College  and  School  of 

Mines,  Newcastle. 

(Plate  xxxi.) 

The  fossils  dealt  with  in  the  present  paper  represent  seven  genera  and  as 
many  separate  speeies  of  brachiopods.  One  genus  and  four  of  the  species  are 
new.  Three  of  the  genera  are  typically  Silurian;  one  (Merista)  is  characteristic 
of  Middle  Devonian,  and  the  range  of  the  proposed  new  genus  Molongia  remains 
to  be  ascertained.  Two  of  the  species  have  previously  l)een  recorded  from  this 
State,  viz.,  Betzia  salteri  Sowerby,  by  de  Koninck  from  Yarralumla,  and  Orthis 
striatula  Schloth.  by  W.  S.  Dun.  From  a  palaeontological  point  of  view,  per- 
haps the  most  important  of  the  species  under  notice  is  Merista  plebe'ia.  because 
it  is  so  typically  an  index  of  middle  Devonian  age  in  Europe,  and  in  North 
America;  in  these  countries  it  has  but  a  limited  vertical  range  For  this  reason 
it  should  be  very  helpful  in  correlating  the  sedimentary  rocks  in  which  it  occurs, 
however  distant  apart  they  may  be.  With  regard  to  this  fossil  it  is  to  be  noted 
that,  although  its  existence  was,  apparently,  only  a  short  one  geologically,  its 
distribution  was  world-wide,  and  these  remarks  apply  to  its  a-ssoeiate  Orthis 
striatula  Schloth. ;  in  Australia,  just  as  in  Europe,  these  two  fossils  are  associates, 
and  lielp  to  confirm  the  assumption  that  the  rocks  in  this  State,  from  which  they 
have  been  collected  in  association,  are  approximately  of  Devonian  age.  and,^  in 
that  case,  they  would  appear  to  form  an  inlier  surrounded  by  rocks  of  Carbonif- 
erous age,  portions  of  which  have  recently  been  discussed  and  described  (Thess 
Proceedings,  xlv..  1920,  Pt.  2,  pp.  285-316).  From  the  same  limestone  have 
been  gathered  a  few  Sprrifers,  one  of  which  is  near  if  not  identical  with  5.  pitt- 
mani  Dun  and  considered  by  him  to  be  of  Devonian  age.  The  pentamerid,  B. 
m.olongensis,  resembles  in  shape  juvenile  forms  of  Barrandella  linpuifer  var.  wil- 
kinsoni  Eth.,  but  in  the  latter  the  umbo  of  the  ventral  valve  is  always  much  more 
strongly  developed  and  overhanging  than  it  is  in  the  former;  and  in  the  latter, 
too,  the  length  always,  at  all  stages  of  growth,  exceeds  the  width,  while  in  the 
former  the  values  of  these  dimensions  are  reversed.  The  Molong  fossil  occurs 
with  Atrypoittea  australis  and  A.  angusta  Mitch,  and   Dun.     Etheridge's  species 


544  NEW   BRAt'HIOFOUS   FROM    THK   MIDDI.K    PALAEOZOIC    ROC'KS,    N.S.W., 

occurs  with  these  same  Atrypids  at  Hatton's  Corner  in  the  Bi)unyonj^ian  Beds 
but  the  Hatton's  Corner  species  has  not  yet  been  obtained  from  the  Moloner  Beds. 

Spirifer  houningensis  is  very  characteristic  of  the  Lower  Trih)bite  Beds  of 
the  Bounyongian  Series,  and  is  also  one  of  the  few  individuals  of  the  fauna  of  these 
lower  beds  which  survive  to  app.?ar  in  the  Middle  Trilobite  Beds. 

If  the  suspected  occurrence  of  the  genus  Seminula  should  be  i)roved  an  ac- 
tuality in  this  Gunneubene  limestone  patch,  an  uiiusiuU  cDinininirlinsj  of  Devonian 
and  Carboniferous  genera  would  be  the  result . 

It  may  not  be  out  of  place  here  to  remark  how  vi'ry  iMi])nrtaiit  a  help  it 
would  be  towards  the  completion  of  a  satisfactory  geological  survey  of  the  State, 
if  full  and  systematic  palaeontographies  were  made  of  the  stratified  rocks  of 
Moloug,  Wellington,  and  Orange  in  conjunction  with  tliose  of  the  Bounyongian 
Beds.  Besides,  a  work  of  this  kind  would  without  doubt  result  in  many  valuable 
palaeontological  discoveries  being  made;  for  the  .stratified  rocks  of  these  localities 
are  not  to  be  suri)assed  for  fossiliferous  wealth. 

Family  MERISTELLIDAE  Waagen. 

Merista  plebeia  Sowerby.    (Plate  xxxi.,  tigs.  13.) 

Spec.  Char. — Shell  biconvex,  subtriangular,  valves  about  equally  convex, 
smooth.  Pedicle  valve  a  good  deal  deeper  than  the  brachial  one,  strongly  convex 
especially  in  front  of  the  umbo;  anteriorly  depressed  umlione  pi'ominent,  incurved 
apically,  truncated  by  a  circular  foramen.  Brachial  valve  slightly  more  convex 
than  the  pedicle  valve;  in  some  specimens  a  very  inconspicuous  fold  is  present; 
umbo  modeiately  prominent,  strongly  incurved,  and  overhung  by  that  of  the 
pedicle  valve;  a  well  developed  septum  present.  Hinge  line  mildly  arcuate. 
Cardinal  angles  l)luiit.  Lateral  and  front  margins  very  mildly  sinuate.  Only 
a  small  portion  of  the  brachidium  has  been  observed  in  one  specimen. 

Diuieiisiotis. — Four  individuals  gave  tlic  following  measurements: — 
Length  18.7  mm.  Width  18.7  mm.  Depth  11.7  mm. 

17.3  ..       17.3  „        10.2 

,,        15.fi  „       15.2  „  n.4 

„        15.6  „       15.2  „  0.4 

But  while  these  four  specimens  yielded  fairly  constant  piniiortions  for  tlie 
three  dimensions  tlie  following  did  not: — 

Length  LM.lt  mm.  Width  17.2  mm.  Deptli   12. .5  mm. 

20.85  „       18.23  ,.        12.5 

21.9  „      21. n  „       

These  variable  dimensions  do  not  afford  int'onnaticn  of  much  value  in  de- 
termining' its  specific  position. 

f)I>s. — The  form  now  dealt  witli  licars  close  rdationsliip  exteinally  to  ."If 
vleheia  Sow.  sp.  and  to  If.  lenncfseeimis  Hall  and  Clarke,  yet  diffeis  in  some 
respects  from  both. 

Dimensionally,  the  adult  specimens  of  .1/.  plebeia  and  the  local  form  closely 
agree  in  size  as  is  sluiwn  by  a  comiiarison  of  the  measurements  of  the  two  forms. 
The  dimensions  of  .1/.  plebeia  given  by  Davidson  for  two  specimens  arc  (Brit. 
Fos.s.  Brach..  iii.    1804-71.  PI.  iii..  figs.  2-10)- 

Length  18.75  mm.        Widtli  20.8  mm.  Dci.th  10.4   ,„;n. 

20.8  ,.       10.5  .,        12.5 


r,v  JOHN'  MiTCi[i';i.i..  545 

The  longtli  ami  ilt'plh  oi  the  latter  speciiueu  arc  practically  iduntioal  with  the 
similar  measurements  of  one  of  the  two  large  specimens  of  the  local  forms  given 
ahove.  In  the  case  of  the  former  species  sometimes  the  length  is  greater  than  the 
width  and  sometiiiieis  the  reverse;  in  the  latter,  the  length  is  always  greater  than 
or  equal  to  the  width,  as  far  as  nuiy  he  determined  from  the  specimens  at  present 
available.  In  (uitline  and  external  features,  adult  specimens  of  the  two  shells 
are  not  sejjarable,  and  if  the  specific  determination  of  the  local  shells  were  to  be 
made  after  a  comparison  with  the  adult  specimens  of  M.  pleheia  Sow.,  I  would 
without  hesitation  place  it  with  that  species,  but  the  youthful  forms  of  the  British 
(Plymouth)  species,  as  represented  in  figs.  7-8  (loc.  cit.)  are  unlike  any  of  the 
youthful  specimens  of  our  form.  Further  the  umbo  and  beak  of  the  pedicle 
valve  of  the  local  form  seem  more  prominent  than  are*  these  pai'ts  of  the  British 
species.      These  slight  differences  may  hardly  justify  the  separation  of  the  two. 

The  relationship  between  M.  tennesseensis  Hall  and  Clarke,  ajid  ours  is  also 
close.  The  largest  specimens  figured  by  Hall  and  Clarke  (Nat.  Hist.  N.Y.,  Pal. 
18()4,  Vol.  iii.,  Brach.  ii.,  PI.  xlii.,  figs.  1-0)  have  length  15.6  mm.,  width  14.75, 
depth  9.4  mm. 

In  figure  5  thi'  length  and  width  are  15. (J  mms.  for  each  dimension.  By 
referring  to  the  dimensions  given  above  for  local  shells,  the  close  agreement  of 
some  of  them  will  be  plain.  Therefore,  from  dimensional  evidence,  these  two 
might  be  placed  together;  but  M.  tenmsseemis,  .iudging  from  the  figures,  was 
smaller,  and  possessed  a  more  conspicuous  sulcus  in  the  pedicle  valve  than  the 
New  South  AVales  type.  The  valve  margins,  lateral  and  anterior,  of  the  latter 
are  more  sinuous  than  they  are  in  the  former. 

After  full  consideration  it  seems  to  me  that  the  Australian  type  might  be 
placed  with  either  the  British  M.  pleheia  or  tlie  American  M.  tennesseensis  Hall 
and  Clarke,  but  appears  to  be  nearer  the  former  than  the  latter;  therefore  it  is 
placed  with  that  species,  though  the  immature  specimens  of  our  form  do  not 
appear  to  exactly  agree  with  the  similar  British  ones. 

As  far  as  I  am  aware  this  brachiopod  has  not  previously  been  recorded  from 
this  State.     In  England  it  occurs  plentifully  in  rocks  of  middle  Devonian  age. 

The  specimens  here  described  and  figured  were  collected  from  a  mass  of  lime- 
stone within  an  extrusion  of  trachyte  at  the  base  of  Bulga  Hill,  Tulcumbah,  near 
Carroll,  on  the  property  of  Mr.  John  Tydd.  The  geological  age  is,  doubtless, 
middle  Devonian.  A  brachiopod  which,  outwardly,  bears  a  strong  resemblance 
to  the  shells  above  described,  was  collected  by  the  writer  from  Cave  Flat,  near 
the  junction  of  the  Murrunibidgee  and  Goodradigbee  Rivers,  from  rocks  which 
are  referred  to  as  lower  in  middle  Devonian. 

Family  SPIRIFERIDAE. 

Spirifer  bowningeksis,  n.sp.    (Plate  xxxi.,  figs.  21-22.) 

Spec.  Chars. — Shell  transversely  subelliptic,  radially  strongly  ribbed,  and 
finely  and  densely  striated.  Pedicle  valve  strongly  convex,  possesses  ten  to  twelve 
folds,  sulcus  dee])  and  very  wide  anteriorly,  umbo  prominent,  beak  pointed,  in- 
curved, and  somewhat  obscuring  the  area;  folds  abutting  the  sulcus  very  pro- 
minent. Brachial  valve  mildly  convex,  has  ten  folds  exclusive  of  the  medial  one 
which  is  prominent,  and  medially  traversed  by  a  shallow  wide  sinus;  beak  not 
conspicuous.     Hinge    line    long,  straight,  almost   as    long    as    the    greatest  width 


546  NEW  BKACHIOPODS  FROM    THE   MIDDLE    PALAEOZOIC    ROCKS,  S.S.W., 

of  the  shell;   area  short,   narrow,   and   usually   contracted   by   pressure;   cardinal 
angles  mildly  rounded.      Front  margin  strongly  sinuate. 

Dimensions. — Length  18  mm.,  width  29.7  mm.,  depth  12.5  mm. 
Length  21.9  mm.,  width  32.8  mm.,  depth  15.6  mm. 

The  first  of  these  measurements  is  of  a  very  perfect  specimen  three-fourths 
grown.  The  other  is  of  an  adult  specimen.  The  different  dimensions  do  not 
seem  to  bear  proportional  relations  in  either  case. 

Obs. — This  Spirifer  belongs  to  Hall  and  Clarke's  group  I.  Radiati,  and  sec- 
tion 1,  Pauciplicata  of  that  group,  approaching  closely  to  ,S.  radiatus  and  S. 
plicatellus  Sowerby  externally;  but  more  to  the  latter  than  the  former,  more  espe- 
cially to  the  Swedish  representatives  of  the  species.  In  a  less  degree  it  resembles 
5.  eudora  Hall,  from  the  Niagara  formations;  but  dimensionally  is  very  different. 
Both  S.  radiatus  and  N.  plicatella  differ  from  the  local  species  in  the  absence  of  a 
medial  sinus  on  the  fold  of  the  brachial  valve.  The  radial  ribs  of  the  former 
are  not  prominent,  and  diminish  in  this  respect  as  they  approach  the  umbo  in 
the  latter;  they  are  very  prominent  throughout  their  length,  except,  in  the  case 
of  the  outer  rib  or  two  on  each  valve.  The  hinge  lines  and  areas  of 
the  two  species  are  much  alike.  In  adult  specimens  of  the  Bowning 
one  there  are  constantly  six  ribs  on  each  side  of  the  sulcus  on  the  pedicle  valve; 
and  on  each  side  of  the  medial  fold  of  the  brachial  valve,  the  ribs  are  five.  In 
the  case  of  S.  plicatella  Sow.  the  ribs  on  the  similar  parts  seem  to  be  more  variable 
in  number  and  in  prominence.  The  two  are  easily  separable  from  each  other. 
and  the  same  may  be  said  of  S.  radiattis  and  the  local  one. 

This  Spirifer  is  very  characteristic  of  the  Lower  Trilobite  Beds  of  the  Bown- 
ing Series,  where  it  is  common  and  has  very  few  other  Spirifers  for  associates, 
but  instead,  numerous  trilobites,  among  which  are  Od-ontopleura  bowningensis  E. 
and  M.,  O.  parinssirrm  E.  and  M.,  Ceratocephala  rngdesi  E.  and  M.,  Sphaer- 
exochus  mirus  Beyrich,  Stauroceplinlus  murchisoni  Barr..  etc. 

It  is  one  of  the  few  representative  members  of  the  fauna  of  the  Lower  Trilo- 
bite Beds  that  pass  upward  into  the  Middle  Trilobite  Bods;  and  probably  sur- 
vives to  the  lower  Devonian  period,  for  some  fragments  of  a  Spirifer  near  to.  if 
not  identical  with  it,  have  been  collected  from  the  limestones  near  the  junction  of 
the  Goodradigbee  and  Murrumbidgee  Rivers. 

Loc.  and  horizon. — Lower  and  Middle  Trilobite  Beds,  Bowning,  Parish  of 
Bowning,  Countv  Harden,  N.S.W.  Upper  Silurian — Wenlock  or  Barrande's  etage 
E. 

M  o  LO  X  r,  I  A,  n.gen. 

The  Bowning  and  Molong  districts  of  New  South  "Wales  yield  a  Spiriferoid 
Brachiopod  which  T  have  been  unable  to  place  in  any  of  the  genera  of  this  large 
group.  It  possesses  a  well-defined  smooth  sulcus  in  the  pedicle  valve  and  an 
eciually  distinct  median  fold  in  the  brachial  valve:  the  spiralia  too  are  very  like 
those  of  true  Spirifers.  But  they  have  no  cardinal  area,  neither  is  an  open 
delthyrium  present;  but,  instead,  there  is  a  foramen  truncating  the  apex  of  the 
])edicle  beak.  It  seems  not  distantly  related  to  Hall's  genus  Trematospira,  but 
it  lacks  some  of  the  essential  features  of  that  genus,  for  instance,  its  shell  is 
imperforate  and  within  the  sulcus  of  the  pedicle  valve  there  are  no  folds.  Failing 
to  be  satisfied  that  it  can  be  i)laced  in  any  existing  genus,  a  new  genus  is  proposed 
for  its  reception . 


BY    JOHN    MITCHELL.  547 

Gen.  char. — Shell  imperforate;  umbo  of  pedicl*  valve  prominent,  incurved, 
depressed,  and  truncated  by  a  circular  foramen;  cardinal  area  absent;  hinge-line 
straig-ht  or  nearly  so;  spiralia  spiriferoid.  Other  internal  structures  not  ob- 
served. 

Genotype,  Molongia  elegans,  n.sp. 

MoLONGiA  ELEGANS  H . sp .     (Plate  xxxi.,  figs.  6-8,  12.) 

Spec.  char. — Valves  strongly  convex,  the  pedicle  valve  more  so  than  the  other. 
Pedicle  valve  subrhomboidal,  sulcus  deep,  smooth  and  wide,  and  on  each  side  of 
it  are  four  radial  ribs,  all  of  which  are  prominent,  except  the  one  on  each  side 
adjacent  to  the  cardinal  angles.  Umbo  prominent,  incurved,  truncated  by  a  cir- 
cular forapaen  and  resting  on  the  umbo  of  the  brachial  valve,  or  nearly  so.  Brachial 
,  valve  subquadrate,  medial  fold  prominent  and  medially  traversed  by  a  narrow, 
shallow  sinus;  the  lateral  folds  agree  in  number  and  character  with  those  of  the 
ventral  valve,  and  alternate  with  them,  thus  giving  to  the  lateral  margins  a  zig- 
zag outline:  umVjo  moderately  prominent,  and  fills  up  the  delthyrium.  Hinge- 
line  straight,  or  almost  so,  and  reaches  to  the  cardinal  angles  which  are  nearly 
rectangular  in  perfect  and  mature  specimens.  Hinge-line  elevated.  The  whole 
surface  of  the  shell  is  traversed  by  faint,  undulating,  concentric  growth-lines. 

Ohs. — This  fossil  in  several  respects  is  very  spiriferoid.  and  in  other  features 
it  approaches  forms  of  Trematospira. 

Loc.  and  horizon. — About  eight  miles  west  of  Molong,  Parish  of  Bomey, 
County  Wellington;  Bowning,  Parish  of  Bowning,  County  Harden.  In  both 
localities  it  is  a.ssociated  with  Atrjjponlea  auatraUf;  Mitchell  and  Dun.  Appar- 
ently Upper  Silurian . 

Family  RETZIIDAE. 

Retzia  salteri  Davidson.      (Plate  xxxi.,  figs.  4-5.) 

Terebratula  salteri,  Dav.,  Bull.  Soc.  Geol.  France,  2nd  ser..  vol.  v.,  1848, 
p  331,  PI.  iii..  tig.  31;  Bet~~ia  salteri,  Schmidt,  Sil.  Form.  Ehsland,  etc.,  1858, 
p.  212;  Salter,  Siluria,  2nd.  edit.,  1859,  p.  250,  Foss.  57,  fig.  7;  H.  hai/lei,  Lind- 
strom,  Gottlands  Brachiop.,  Of  vers.  K.  Vet.-Akad.,  Forhandl.,  1860,  p.  337; 
K.  salteri,  de  Koninck,  Mem.  Geol.   Surv.  N.   S.  Wales,  Pal.,  No.  6,  1898,  p.  27. 

Spec.  char. — Shell  e(|ually  and  strongly  convex,  oval ;  valvjs  almost  of  equal 
size  and  each  medially  depressed.  In  the  depressed  part  of  the  pedicle  valve  are 
two  less  robust  ribs  than  those  on  the  lateral  parts  of  the  valve,  and,  in  the  corre- 
sponding depression  of  the  brachial  valve,  there  is  one  such  rib  even  less  distinct 
than  those  of  the  pedicle  valve.  On  each  side  of  these  depressed  ribs,  in  each 
valve  there  are  ten,  simple  and  relatively  strong  ribs,  making  a  total  of  twenty  two 
and  twenty  one  on  the  pedicle  and  lirachial  valves,  respectively.  The  umbo  of  the 
pedicle  valve  is  only  moderately  prominent,  incurved  and  apically  truncated  by 
a  foramen.  The  unibonal  parts  of  each  are  strongly  inflated.  Hinge  line  short 
and  arcuate.  Deltidial  plates  obscured.  Margins  practically  non-sinuate.  On 
one  side  of  our  solitary  specimen  which  is  weathered  the  spiral  lamellae  are  suffi- 
ciently exposed  to  show  that  they  possess  the  characteristics  of  the  genus.  The 
concentric  growth  lines  are  fine,  numerous  and  a.sperate. 

Dimensiom. — Length,  5.25,  width,  fi  and  depth,  3  lines  respectively.  These 
measurements   agree   fairly   closely  with   those   given   by   Davidson   for  7?.   salteri 


548  NEW   BRACIIIOPOnS   PROM    THK   MIDDI.K    PALAEOZOIC    ROCKS,   N.S.W., 

and  its   varieties,  R.  bouckardii.  ami    A',    hai/ln   (Brit.    Foss.  Bracb.,   iii.,  pp.    126- 
128.). 

Obs. — The  form  liere  described  a^ees  witb  R.  salteri  Dav.  in  (i.)  valves 
equally  convex;  (ii.)  small  incurved  beak;  (iii.)  medial  radial  ribs  finer  and  at  a 
lower  level  tban  tlie  lateral  ribs;  (iv.)  strong  convexity  of  the  valves;  (y. )  bavins: 
in  the  ventral  valve  a  low  narrow  sinus  extending  from  tlie  beak  to  the  front 
margin;  (vi.)  valves  ornamented  with  fine  eimoentric  lines;  (vii.)  having  the 
front  margin  slightly  indented;  (viii.)  having  the  central  ribs  smaller  and  at  a 
lower  level  than  the  lateral  ones.  It  differs  from  that  species  in  the  depressed 
central  area  having  fewer  ribs  and  a  smaller  number  of  lateral  ribs.  With  R. 
bouchardii,  it  agrees  in  being  almost  as  long  as  wide,  and  in  the  number  and 
character  of  the  lateral  ribs.  It  appears  to  differ  from  that  species  in  having 
only  two  depressed  central  ribs  in  the  ventral  valve  and  one  in  the  dorsal  valve. 
The  local  specimen  is  smaller;  this  lias  little  significance  when  only  a  single  speci- 
men is  available  for  comparison.  Were  I  convinced  that  R.  Imnchardii  was 
an  established  variety  of  7?.  salteri  I  would  not  hesitate  to  place  our  form  with 
that  variety.  Salter,  Lindstrom,  and  de  Koninck  considered  that  7?.  boitchardii 
and  R.  hai/Iei  of  Ilavidson  were  inseparable  from  R.  salteri. 

de  Koninck  (Mem.  Geol.  Surv.  N.S.W.,  Pal.  G,  p.  27)  recorded  the  species 
from  Yarralumla,  N.S.W.,  and  gave  an  outline  of  Davidson's  description  of  the 
species,  which  he  applied  to  the  Yarralumla  form ;  he  did  not  figure  it.  but  stated 
that  it  exactly  agreed  with  Davidson's  fig.  27a,  PI.  xii.  Our  fossil  closely  re- 
sembles fig.  29  of  the  same  ]ilate,  that  is,  the  varietal  form  R.  houfhardii  Dav. 

The  specimens  ilealt  with  by  de  Koninck  were  destroyed  by  fire  in  18S2.  Tlie 
occurrence  of  the  genus  R.etzia  in  Australia  adds  another  to  the  list  of  brachiopods 
which  have  a  world-wide  distribution  which,  in  the  case  of  this  gcmis.  appears  to 
have  been  accomplished  in  a  relatively  sliort  geological  period . 

Ldc.  and  hnriznn. —  The  limestone  bed  of  Tiimestone  Creek,  beneath  the  Lower 
Trilobite  Beds  of  Downing- Yass  series.  Parish  of  Derrengullen,  County  King. 
Upper  Silurian   (=  Wenlock) . 

This  fossil  was  found  associated  with  Farosites  qnllilatidird  Linn.,  /■'.  Imiiallica 
Gold..  F.  multitahulata,  Sphaere.rorhiis  xiirus,  Atri/pa  reticularis  Linn.,  .1.  pulchrn 
M.  and  Dun,  etc. 

Family  PRXTAMERIDAE. 

P> AKi.-ANDELLA  iroLOKGEX.sis,  u.sp.     (Plate  xxxi..  figs     0-11  .  ) 

Spec.  char. — Sliell  sul)pentagounl  to  suliti-iaiigular.  small,  smooth,  biconvex. 
Pedicle  valve  strongly  convex,  es))ecially  in  the  umbonal  region,  umbone  promin- 
ent, beak  sluirt,  depressed,  gently  incurved,  but  not  overhanging  the  beak  of  the 
brachial  vahe;  me<lial  sinus  wide  and  shallow  (in  some  s]ieciuiens  being  hardly 
visible,  and  in  some,  where  it  is  more  pronounced,  there  are  traces  of  one  or  two 
faint  folds  within  it,  and  on  the  shells  of  young  individuals  neither  sinus  nor 
opposing  fold  is  pri^senl  )  ;  anteriorly  mildly  to  moderately  sinuating  the  brachial 
valve.  Brachial  valve  relatively  small,  moderately  convex  near  the  umbo,  laterally 
and  anteriorly  n\ore  or  less  depressed,  fold  varies  much  in  prominence,  corre- 
spciuding  in  this  res]iect  with  the  sulcus  of  the  opposing  valve  in  some  individuals; 
anteriorly  its  prominence  is  increased  by  the  sliell  surface  on  each  side  of  it  being 
depressed    (a   feature   coirniion    to    R.    linpuifera     Sow.),    umbo    moderately    pro- 


BY    JOHN    MITCHKM..  549 

minent,  beak  small,  always  visible.     Hinge  line  straight   or  very  mildly   artiiate, 
cardinal  angles  rounded.      The  septa  are  short. 

Dimensions  of  adult  individuals. — 

Length  10.5  mm.  Width  13.5  mm.  Depth.     8.3  mm. 

„  8.3  „       12.  „  7. 

„       10.4  „       13.  „         8.3 

.        10.4  „       12.  „  7.8 

These  measurements  are  fairly  proportional. 

Obs. — In  some  respects  this  species  resembles  youthful  individuals  of  B. 
linguifera  var.  u-ilkiiisorii  Eth.  Jr.,  and  is  suggestive  of  having  been  derived  from 
t!)at  species  by  the  arrest  of  its  development  in  the  early  stages  of  growth,  but 
at  no  stage  of  development  can  the  one  form  be  mistaken  for  the  other.  Dimen- 
sionally  they  are  widely  different, — the  one  seldom  reaching  a  length  of  10.5 
mm.  and  only  rarely  exceeding  13  mm.  in  width,  while  the  other  may  reach  25  mm. 
for  each  of  these  dimensions.  The  width  in  tlie  Molong  species  is  always  much 
{Teater  than  the  length,  but  in  the  other  the  width  only  very  slightly  exceeds  the 
/ongth.  This  fossil  occurs  in  clusters,  numbering  hundreds  of  individuals  occa- 
sionally in  a  cluster  in  a  massive  bed  of  grey  limestone  associated  with  Atrypoidea 
australis  Mitch,  and  Dun,  A.  angusta  Mitchell  and  Dun,  Leptaena  rhomboidalin 
Wilckens,  etc. 

Loc.  and  horizon. — Some  eight  miles  west  of  Molong,  Parish  of  Bomey, 
("ounty  Wellington.     Probably  Upper  Silurian. 

SlEBKRELLA    GLABRA,  n  .  Sp  .      (Plat*   XXxi.,  flgS.    13-15.) 

Spec.  Chars. — Shell  smooth,  thick,  subpentagonal  or  subquadrate  according 
to  stage  of  growth,  concentric  lines  faintly  visible  on  some  specimens.  Pedicle 
valve  very  convex,  umbo  very  tumid  and  prominent  in  adult  specimens.  Beak 
acutely  pointed,  incurved  and  strongly  depressed  on  to  that  of  the  brachial  valve. 
Fold  only  moderately  conspicuous,  originating  just  in  front  of  the  umbonal  region 
and  terminating  with  a  straight  edge  at  the  anterior  sinus.  Hinge  line  wide,  car- 
dinal angles  high  and  rounded.  Brachial  valve  only  moderately  convex  in  the 
posterior  half,  laterally  flat  to  subeoncave;  sinus  wide,  shallow  and  moderately 
indenting  the  opposing  valve. 

Dimensions  (adult  specimens). — Length,  21,  21.9  mm.;  width.  21,  20.8  mm.; 
depth,  16.5,  13.0  mm.;  (specimen  of  medium  growth),  length  15.6,  width  18.7, 
depth  8.8  mm. 

From  these  measurements  the  development  of  the  shell  would  appear  to  have 
been  very  variable  in  different  individuals,  or  rather  at  different  stages  of  growth. 

06.*.— This  shell  is  different  from  the  old  Sieherella  (Pentamerus)  ijaleatus 
in  several  particulars,  so  evident  that  their  enumeration  is  unnecessary.  The 
radial  ribbing  characteristic  of  the  genus  is  practically  absent  fi;om  the  Australian 
species,  for  the  only  traces  found  on  it  are  very  faint  folds  on  each  side  of  the 
sinus  anteriorly,  and  an  equally  faint  and  hardly  visible  fold  on  the  medial  part 
of  this  sinus. 

Specifleally,  as  far  as  my  knowledge  enables  me  to  judge,  the  species  here 
described  has  no  very  close  relation  among  the  species  occurring  in  Europe  and 
America. 

Up  to  the  stage  of  medium  growth,  the  umbo  of  the  pedicle  valve  of  .?. 
glabra  is  not  prominent,   and   the  beak  does  not   overhang  that  of  the   brachial 


550  NEW   BKACIIIOPODS   PBOM    THE   MIDDLE    PALAEOZOIC    ROCKS,   N.S.W., 

valve ;  but  from  that  to  the  adult  stage  the  umbo  and  umbonal  regions  strongly 
develop;  and  so  throw  the  pedicle  valve  beak  on  to  that  of  the  brachial  valve. 

In  the  classification  of  this  brachiopod  1  have  adopted  the  divisions  proposed 
by  Hall  for  galeatiform  pentamerids  (Pal.  N.Y.,  Vol.  viii.,  Brach.,  ii.,  1894,  pp. 
240  and  247). 

Loc.  and  horizon. — Hatton's  Corner,  Yass  River,  Parish  of  Hume,  County 
Murray,  associated  with  Barrandella  [Clorinda)  linguifera  var.  wilkinsoni  Eth. 
Junr.,  Atrypa  reticularis  Linn.,  Hhiiopht/llum  interpwnctalum  de  Kou.,  Kncrinurus 
mitchelli  Foerste,  etc.     Uj^per  Silurian  (Wenlock). 

Family  ORTHIDAE. 

Orthis  ( Schizophoria )  striatula  Sowerby.      (Plate  xxxi.,  figs.  l('-20.) 

Spec.  Chars. — Outline  subcircular  or  subelliptic,  transversely  biconvex,  sur- 
face densely  covered  with  fine  radial  striae  which  increase  in  number  anteriorly 
with  the  growth  of  the  shell  by  dichotomy  and  occasional  interpolations;  at  in- 
tervals the  larger  striae  open  to  the  surface  and  discontinue.  All  the  striae  along 
their  whole  length  are  surmounted  by  slight  asperities ;  concentric  growth  lines 
faint  except  anteriorly.  Pedicle  valve  distinctly  convex  except  anteriorly,  where 
it  becomes  depressed,  and  in  senile  shells  a  distinct  sulcus  is  formed ;  beak  only 
slightly  incurved  and  higher  than  that  of  the  brachial  valve.  Brachial  valve  more 
convex  than  pedicle,  beak  incurved.  Cardinal  area  of  moderate  length,  triangu- 
lar, elevated  in  each  valve.  Delthyrium  conspicuous.  Cardinal  angles  rounded. 
Anterior  margin  in  immature  shells  very  mildly  sinuate;  rather  strongly  in  some 
of  full  growth . 

Dimensions  (mature  and  nearly  mature  specimens). — 

Length  20.3  mm.  Width  23.4  mm.         Depth  15.6  mm. 

20.3  „       23.3  „        12.5 

17.2  „       22. (i  „        11 

„        17.2  „       22.7  „        12.5 

20.7  •         „       25.0  „        12.5 

These  measurements  show  proportionate  relations  more  or  less,  for  the  three 
dimensions.  The  first,  which  has  the  greatest  thickness,  has  also  the  appearance 
of  greatest  age;  it  would  appear  that  depth  continued  to  increase  after  the  other 
dimensions  had  reached  their  full  development. 

Ohs. — Some  ])alaeontoIogists  have  contended  that  O.  (Sch.)  striatula,  is 
idiMitical  with  (>.  (iSch.)  resupinata;  but  a  larger  number  recognise  its  specific 
rank.  The  Australian  representatives  of  the  species  are  of  smaller  size  than  the 
European  and  North  American  forms;  but  agree  with  them  in  external  features. 
The  local  O.  {Sch.)  striatula  has  only  half  the  width  and  length  of  the  local  0. 
(Sch.)  resupinata  Martin,  but  in  depth  often  exceeds  the  latter,  in  the  case  of  full 
grown  specimens,  ami  is  mu(^h  more  convex.  In  no  instance  have  I  noticed  the 
anterior  marginal  sinus  so  pronounced  in  the  latter  as  it  is  in  the  former  when 
the  shells  are  of  mature  growth.  The  muscular  scars  of  the  former,  as  far  as 
my  observations  have  enabled  me  to  decide,  are  less  distinct  than  are  those  in  the 
latter,  and  in  other  respects  the  scars  appear  to  differ.  The  local  fossil  seems 
nearer  in  form  and  dimensions  to  the  North  American  form  than  to  the  British 
one. 

The  specimens  here  dealt  with  occur  in  association  with  Merista  plebeia 
Sowerby;  and  in  th:\l   respect  agree  with  the  European  and  North  American  a.sso- 


BY    JOHN    MITCHELL.  551 

ciations.  Other  associates  are  some  Spirifers,  one  of  which  has  a  strong  re- 
semblance to  S.  pittmani  Dun,  and  with  what  appears  to  be  a  species  of  the  genus 
Seminula  which  would  be  an   unexpected  associate. 

Loc.  and  horizon. — Tydd's  farm,  Tulcumbali,  Parish  of  Gunnenbene,  County 
Nandewar.  If  judged  from  the  presence  of  Merista  plebeia,  the  horizon  would 
certainly  be  declared  Middle  Devonian;  but  sliould  the  presence  of  Seminula 
be  proved,  then  the  geological  horizon  of  the  rocks  from  which  the  fossils  were 
obtained  will  be  a  matter  for  reconsideration. 


ITXPLANATION  OF  PLATE  XXXI. 

FigsA-S. ^Meris/a  /i/efieia  Sowerby.     Ventral,  brachial  and  profile  views  of  mature  speci- 
mens. 
Figs. 4-5. — Ret::ia  salleri  Davidson.     Ventral  aspect  and   weathered  side  of  a  specimen. 

In  the  latter  six  turns  of  a  spiral  are  exposed. 
Figs. 6-8  and  H.-^Molongia  elegans  Mitchell.     Dorsal,  ventral,  and  profile  views  of  three 

mature  specimens  (x  2);   Fig. 12  has  the  dorsal  valve  removed  to  show  the  spires, 

enlarged.    . 
'F\<!,s.^-n.~Barrandel/a  moloiigetiis  Mitchell.     Dorsal,  ventral,  and  front  views  of  three 

nearly  mature  specimens  (x  2). 
FiasA^-l^.—Sieberi'lla  glabra  Mitchell.    Dorsal,  ventral,  and  front  views.    Figs. 13  and  14 

are  of  adult  specimens.  Fig.  15  represents  a  shell  of  medium  size. 
Pigs. 16-20.— 6'/-///7.r  (Sc/iizop/ioria)  slrialiila  Schloth.     In  figs.  16-19  the  ventral,  oblique, 

front  and  cardinal  aspects  are  shown.     Fig.  20  is  the  part  of  a  cast  to  show  the 

muscular  scars  of  the  pedicle  valve,   (x  3). 
Figs. 21-22. —5/>w-;/fr  boK'tiingensis  Mitchell.       Fig.  22    shows   a   specimen   three-fourths 

grown  (x  i),  and  fig.  21  is  part  of  a  valve   (x  3J  to  show  the  radial  striae,  etc. 


552 


NEMATODE  PARASITES  OF  THE  DOMESTIC  PIGEON    [CULUMBA 
LIVIA  DOMESTICA)    IN   AUSTRALIA. 

By  Vera  Irwin-Smith,  B.Sc,  F.L.S.,  Linnean  Maci.eay  Fellow  of  tub 

Society  in  Zooi.OGY. 

(Nineteen  Text-figures.) 

The  only  Nematode  hitherto  recorded  from  tlie  dtJiuestic  j)igeoii  in  Australia,  is 
Ascartd'ia  (•oliimhae  Gmelin  (lleterakis  maculosa  Kud.).  T.  Harvey  .Johnston 
reported  the  presence  of  this  parasite  in  New  South  Wales  in  1909  and  1910,  and 
recently  (1918)  gave  a  description  of  specimens  found  in  Queensland.  An  earlier 
reference  hy  Krefft  (1871)  to  Ascaris  sp.  is  stated  by  Professor  Johnston  to  refer 
to  the  same  species. 

The  material  dealt  with  in  the  present  paper  comprises  three  distinct  species, 
two  of  which  are  new  for  this  part  of  the  w-orld.  One  of  them  has  been  found 
l)reviously,  only  in  America,  and  the  original  description  of  it  is  contained  in  a 
circular  of  the  Bureau  of  Animal  Industry,  U.S.A..  which  is  now  out  of  print, 
and  therefore  difficult  to  obtain.  In  view  of  tiiis,  and  of  the  verj'  varying  de- 
scripti(ms  and  unsatisfactory  figures  contained  in  most  of  the  existing  records  of 
the  other  species  concerned,  I  have  thought  it  desirable  to  give  fairly  full  notes 
and  drawings  of  the  specimens  examined  here. 

The  (lassification  adopted  is  tliat  used  by  Stiles  and  llassall  (1905),  Railliet 
and  Henry  (1914),  and  Hall  (191()),  to  whose  work  tlie  reader  is  referi-ed  for  super- 
family,  family,  and  subfamily  diagnoses. 

For  the  material  examined  I  am  indebted  to  Dr.  S.  Dodd.  and  Di.  .1.  H. 
(Teland . 

Early  in  1919  several  pigeons,  dying  and  dead,  were  sent  to  Dr.  Dodd,  at  the 
A'eterinary  School  of  the  Univei-sity  of  Sydney,  to  a.scertain  the  cause  of  the  mor- 
tality anumg  the  Hock.  In  the  post-mortem  examination,  small  filiform  worms 
were  found  in  fair  numbers  throughout  the  length  of  the  intestines;  but  the  walls 
of  the  alimentary  canal  appeared  to  be  in  a  perfectly  healthy  condition,  and  it  is 
doubtful  whether  the  worms  were  a  ccmtributory  cause  of  the  deaths.  Dr.  Dodd 
informs  me  that  poisoning  was  suspected,  aii<l  that  there  were  no  more  deaths 
after  steps  were  taken  to  prevent  this. 


BY    VERA   IRWIN    SMITH.  553 

The  small  worms  found  comprised  two  species  of  Nematodes,  which,  on  super- 
ficial examination,  are  very  much  alike,  though  belongring  to  two  distinct  families, — 
TrichinelUdae  and  Tricltostrongylidae.  Apparently,  Nematodes  of  the  latter  family 
are  not  at  all  common  in  pigeons .  None  were  recorded  until  1904,  when  Stevenson 
found  one  species  in  considerable  numbers  in  the  intestines  of  a  flock  of  fancy 
pigeons  at  Washing-ton,  and  described  it  under  the  name  of  Strongylus  quadri- 
radiatus.  He  states  that  a  single  specimen  contained  in  the  helminthologieal  col- 
lection of  the  U.S.  National  Museum,  which  was  collected  by  Hassall  at  Washing- 
ton in  1892,  belongs  to  the  same  species.  I  have  not  been  able  to  find  any  re- 
cords of  later  observations  of  this  worm.  All  the  more  recent  references'  relate 
to  Stevenson's  description.  But  examination  of  the  specimens  found  here  shows 
them  to  be  identical  with  Stevenson's  species. 

In  his  original  description,  Stevenson  observed  that  he  retained,  merely  tem- 
porarily, the  generic  name  Strongylus  (properly  limited  to  the  Sclerostomes), 
pending  an  extensive  revision  of  the  whole  gToup.  By  means  of  a  diagnostic 
table  he  compared  the  new  parasite  with  the  three  species  S.  pergracilis,  S.  nodu- 
laris, and  S.  tenuis,  which  he  considered  closely  allied  forms.  In  the  following 
year  (1905)  Loos  established  the  genus  Tricliostrongyluf  to  include  four  species 
separated  from  the  old  genus  Strongylus,  and  in  1909  Shipley  added  the  species 
Tr.  pergracilis,  Tr.  nodularis,  and  Tr.  tenuis,  and  suggested  that  Strongylus 
quadriradiatus  was  possibly  also  a  Trieliostrongylus.  But  Ransom  (1911)  pointed 
out  that  Strongylus  nodularis,  and  S.  quadriradiatus  differed  widely  from  the 
type,  and  should  be  excluded  from  the  new  genus,  and  in  1912  Neveu-Lemairc  in- 
cluded the  latter  in  his  work  under  the  name  Strongylus  1  qvadriradiatus,  wjith 
the  note  "Ce  strongyle  appartient  certainement  h  la  sous-famillie  des  Trieho- 
strongylinae,  mais  le  nom  generique  de  strongyhis  ne  lui  eonvient  pas;  sa  de- 
nomination n'est  done   que  provisoire." 

Stevenson's  species  certainly  does  not  belong  to  the  genus  Trichostrongylus, 
outstanding  differences  from  the  type  being  the  relative  sizes  and  positions  of 
the  bursal  rays,  the  form  of  the  spicules,  and  the  vesicular  swelling  of  the  cuticle 
of  the  head.  Eight  other  genera  have  been  included  in  the  sub-family  Tricho- 
strongylinae,  but  the  present  species  does  not  conform  to  the  description  of  any 
one  of  them.  It  thei-efore  becomes  necessary  to  establish  for  it  a  new  genus,  for 
which  I  propose  the  name  Cephalostrongylus. 

Superfamily    STEONGTLOIDEA   -Weinland,    1858. 

Family  TRICHOSTRONGYLIDAE  Railliet,  1915. 

< 

Subfamily  TRICHOSTRONGYLINAE  Leiper,    1908. 
Genus  C  e  p  h  a  l  o  s  t  r  o  n  «  y  l  ii  s,  n.g. 

Generic  diagnosis. — Cuticle  enveloping  cephalic  end  inflated  to  form  a  vesicu- 
lar enlargement.  Mouth  simple,  no  papillae.  Bursa  bilobed,  supported  by  six 
paired  rays  and  one  median  unpaired  ray;  the  two  ventral  rays  close  together  and 
parallel,  curved  ventrally  at  the  tips,  thicker  than  any  of  the  other  rays ;  the  three 
lateral  rays  arising  from  a  common  stem,  but  mutually  divergent;  externo-dorsal 
ray  thinner  and  shorter  than  the  lateral  rays,  given  off  from  the  base  of  the 
doi-sal  ray;  dorsal  ray  still  shorter,  but  thicker,  shortly  bifurcated  at  the  ex- 
tremity, the  outer  branches  being  a  little  longer  than  the  inner,  each  of  which  is 


554 


XEMATODE     PARASITES    OF    THE     DOMESTIC     PIGEON', 


again  biluroated .  Two  three-pointed  spicules,  short  and  thick,  joined  by  a 
membrane  to  form  a  tube;  a  star-shaped  chitinous  piece  with  four  rays,  the  two 
lateral  rays  curved  forward,  surrounding  the  spicules  when  they  are  protruded. 
A  pair  of  prebureal  papillae.  Anterior  half  of  female  body  tUiform.  Vulva  in 
posterior  fourth  of  body. 

Type  species,  CephalostrongyJus  quadriradiatus  Stevenson,  1904. 

Cephalostrongylus  quadriradiatus  Stevenson. 

1904,  Strongyliis  quadriradiatus,  Stevenson,  Bur.  Anim.  Industry,  Washing- 
ton. Circular  47,  10  tig's. — 1905,  Neumann-Macqueen,  Parasites  Dom.  Anim.,  2nd 
edit.,  p.  414. — 1909,  Trichustrungylvs  qwadriradiaiw,  Shipley,  Pi'oc.  Zool.  Soc. 
London,  p.  335. — 1911,  Strongrjlwi  quadriradiatus,  Ransom,  Fjoc.  U.S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  xli.,  p.  363. — 1912.  Neveu-Lemaire,  Parasif.  Anim.  Dom.,  Paris,  ))p. 
718-719. 

The  specimens  in  this  collection  agree  closely  with  the  description  given  by 
Stevenson,  though  tlie  dimensions  are  all  somewhat  smaller.  They  were  reddish 
in  colour  when  first  collected,  and  many  of  the  females  were  spirally  coiled, 
especially  towards  tlie   anterior  end,   which,  being  long  and   filifoi'm,   gave  them 


Text-figs.  1-3. — Cephalostrongylus    quadriradiatus. 
1.    Anterior   end.     (x  230),      2.  Region  of  genital  pore  ^^.;>. J  of  female,  showing 
ovijector  (ut.)  and  oviduct  (ovi.)  ix  140);  3.  Posterior  end,  female,  an.,  anus. 
(x322). 

a  superficial  resemblance  to  the  Tricliiiicllids  found  with  them.  The  peculiar, 
four-rayed,  chitinous  piece  connected  with  I  lie  siiicules,  to  which  the  species  owes 
its  name,  is  just  as  figured  by  Stevenson.     The  vesicular  swelling  of  the  cuticle 


BY    VERA   IRWIN    SMITH. 


555 


at  the  cephalic  end  is  still  visible  in  most  of  the  preserved  specimens,  and  does 
not  appear  to  have  shrunk  at  all  in  the  glycerine  jelly  mounts  from  which  the 
measurements  and  drawing  (Text-tig.  1)  were  made.  Males  measured  from 
6.2  to  6.8  mm.  long,  with  a  maximum  wituh,  in  front  of  the  caudal  bursa,  of 
0.072  to  0.083  mm.  ;  females,  12.3  to  16.2  mm.  long,  with  a  maximum  width  of 
0.143  mm.  in  the  region  of  the  genital  pore.  Cephalic  swelling,  0.093  to  0.104 
mm.  long  and  0.046  to  0.052  mm.  broad;  oesophagus,  0.352  to  0.400  mm.  in  the 
male,  0.430  to  0.510  mm.  in  the  female,  with  an  average  width  of  0.020  mm.  ; 
nerve  ring,  0.230  to  0.260  mm.,  and  excretory  pore,  0.268  mm.  from  anterior  end. 
The  diameter  of  the  body  just  behind  the  cephalic  enlargement  is  0.040  mm.  in 
males,  0.049  mm.  in  females.  The  female  genital  aperture  is  situated  2.25  to 
3.33  mm.  and  anal  aperture  0.140  to  0.156  mm.  from  tip  of  tail.  The  cuticle 
is  marked  by  a  fine  transverse  striation  at  intervals  of  0.0015  mm.,  except  on  the 
anterior  swelling,  where  the  striae  are  much  coarser.  Stevenson  describes  only 
longitudinal  markings,  which  are  also  visible  on  these  specimens.  The  terminal 
portions  of  the  two  divergent  uteri,  which  form  the  ovijectors,  differ  slightly  from 
the  figures  given  by  Stevenson.  Each  consists  of  three  parts  (Text-fig.  2);  the 
first,  opening  at  the  vulva  with  very  thick  muscular  walls,  is  about  0.220  mm. 
long,  and  is  separated  by  a  sphincter,  in  the  form  of  a  prominent,  ring,  from  a 


Text-figs. 4-6. — Cephalostrongylus  quadriradiatus. 
Posterior  end  of  male,  side  view,   (x  200)  ;   5.    The  same,    dorsal   view.     (x200). 
j'.Z'.,  ventre- ventral  ray ;    I. v.,  latero-ventral   ray;     f./. ,  externo-Iateral  ray; 
ni.L,  medio-lateral  ray;   p. I.,  postero-lateral   ray;    e.d.,    externo-dorsal  ray ; 
d.r,,  dorsal  ray;    6,  male  spicules  and  chitinous  support,   (x  380). 


narrower,  but  still  muscular  part  0.117  mm.  long,  which  is  continuous  with  the 
uterus.  Eggs  contained  in  this  part  of  the  uterus  measure  0.067  by  0.039  mm., 
and  are  still  in  the  early  stages  of  segmentation .     The  genital  pore  is  a  transverse 


556  NEMATODE     PARASri'ES    OF    TlIK     DOMESTIC     PIGEON, 

slit  U.04U  iiim.  wide.  The  boily  is  U.U44  uuu.  iu  diameter  id  the  anus.  Be- 
hind it  the  slender  tail  (Text-fig.  3)  ends  bluntly;  the  fine  terminal  spine  which 
it  bears,  is  about  0.015  mm.  long,  and  penetrates  the  cuticle  to  connect  with  the 
internal  protoplasm.      It  appears  to  te  hollow,  and  of  a  glandular  nature. 

Each  lobe  of  the  male  bursa  (Text-figs.  4,  5)'  measures  about  0.143  mm.  in 
width,  and  0.130  to  0.170  mm.  in  depth.  The  tips  of  the  two  ventral  rays  are 
only  0.006  mm.  apart.  Of  the  lateral  rays,  the  externo-lateral  is  the  longest, 
and  is  curved  \entrally,  its  tip  being  some  distance  from  the  margin  of  the 
bursa,  and  0.034  mm.  from  that  of  the  latero-ventral .  The  distance  between 
the  posterolateral  and  externo-dorsal  is  a  little  less,  0.028  mm.  The  distances 
between  the  tips  of  the  lateral  rays  are  greater,  0.04fl  mm.  between  postero-  and 
medio-lateral,  and  twice  as  much  between  medio-  and  externo-lateral.  The  pre- 
bursal  papillae  are  0.013  mm.  long,  and  are  situated  laterally,  0.052  mm.  in 
front  of  the  base  of  the  bursa.  The  two  equal  spicules  (Text-flg.  6)  measure 
0.148  mm.  long,  and  taper  distally  to  end  in  three  slender  pointed  branches, 
which  are  surrounded  by  the  chitinous  supporting  piece,  0.041  mm.  long. 

Stevenson  states  that  this  worm,  when  present  in  large  numbers,  causes  a 
debilitating  diarrhoea,  and  general  disorder  of  the  nutritive  functions  of  the  host 
bird  This  he  thinks  to  be  due  both  to  a  loss  of  blood,  and  to  the  piercing  of 
the  mucosa,  leaving  open  channels  for  fatal  infection  with  bacteria.  Shipley 
(1909")  includes  the  species  in  his  list  (p.  335)  of  those  harmful  to  birds,  and 
Ncumaiin-l\facqneen  (1905).  and  Neveu-Jjcmaire  (1912).  referring  evidently  to 
Stevenson's  statement,  both  record  it  as  producing  grave  disorders,  bacterial  in- 
fection, catarrh,  and  profuse  diarrhoea. 

But  in  this  case  there  was  no  evidence  that  the  worm,  though  present  in  fairly 
large  numbers,  caused  any  harmful  effect.  The  walls  of  the  intestine  were  not 
in  nn  inflamed  catarrhal  condition,  and.  as  already  stated,  ajipeared  to  bo  perfectly 
healthy . 

Family  TRICHINELLTDAE   Stiles  and   Cvaiio,  1910. 

Subfamily  TRICHURINAE    Ransom.    1911. 

Genus  Capillakia  Zeder,  1800 . 

Generic  diag)!osis  (from  Hall  1916).— Body  very  slender,  capillary:  anterior, 
oesophageal  portion  of  body  shorter  than,  or  rarely  equal  to  the  posterior  portion 
of  body.  Bacillary  band  dorsal,  ventral,  or  lateral,  or  absent.  Oesophagus  long 
and  slender,  gradually  increasing  in  size  posteriorly.  Spicule  long  and  slender,  sur- 
rounded by  a  sheath  which  may  present  a  smooth  outer  surface  when  evaginated, 
or  a  surface  armed  with  spines.  Tail  of  male  may  or  may  not  be  provided  with 
membranous  wings,  and  a  membranous  bursa-like  structure,  these  being  usually  in- 
conspicuous when  present.  \'ulva  located  near  the  base  of  the  oesophagus.  Eggs 
lemon  shaped,  with  the  usual  opercular  plugs. 

Type  species,  Capillaria  tumida  Zecler,  1803  (=  Tritiioicp/ia/iis  ana/is  Sclirank. 
1790  =   Trichosoina  hrevicolle  Kudolplii,   1819). 

This  genus,  established  by  Zedcr  to  include  forms  characterised  by  a  filiform 
l)ody,  with  a  very  slender  anterior  part  merging  almost  insciisildy  into  a  I'ather 
tliicker  posterior  jtart,  was  renamed  Tricluisowa  b.y  Rudolidii  in  1819.  Tt  is  under 
this  name  that  most  of  its  species  have  since  been  described,  the  original  name 
being  re-established  by  Stiles  and  Hassall  only  in  1905,  when  they  published  their 
"Determination  of  Generic  Types,  and  a  List  of  Roundworm  Genera." 


BY    VERA   IRWIN    SMITH.  557 

Most  of  the  descriptions  of  species  are  very  meag're  aud  unsatisfactory.  In 
1845  Bellingham  remarked  tliat  "as  the  species  are  all  exceedingly  small,  and 
resemble  each  other  very  closely  (almost  the  only  difference  being  a  little  greater 
or  less  thickness  of  body),  and  as  the  male  and  female  are  not  always  found  to- 
gether, it  is  very  difficult  to  determine  the  species  accurately."  Later  hehuinth- 
ologists  seem  to  have  experienced  the  same  difficulty,  and  a  good  deal  of  confusion 
still  exists  in  regard  to  specific  diagnosis. 

However,  only  one  species  of  Capillaria  has  been  recorded  from  pigeons, 
namely,  Capillaria  columbae,  and  the  worms  found  here  have  been  identified  as 
belonging  to  this  species.  Bellingham  did  not  give  any  name  or  description  to 
the  Nematode  which  he  found  in  the  small  intestine  of  C'olumba  livia  in  Ireland, 
but  it  was  probably  the  same  worm.  Dujardin,  who  states  that  several  specimens 
had  been  sent  to  the  Museum  of  Paris  from  the  Museum,  of  Vienna,  and  were 
described  by  him  for  the  first  time,  supplies  the  description  (1845)  which  has 
been  repeated,  or  closely  followed,  in  nearly  all  subsequent  records.  In  Vienna, 
according  to  Dujardin,  it  was  found  nine  times  in  245  in  the  large  intestine  of 
C'olumba  domestica.  Neumann  records  it  as  a  frequent  and  abundant  species  in  the 
small  intestine  of  this  pigeon,  and  quotes  Pauly  and  Zurn  as  stating  that  it  often 
determines  an  intense  intestinal  catarrh,  which  leads  to  anaemia,  and  consump- 
tion. Neveu-Lemaire  also  refers  to  a  "trichosomosis"  of  the  pigeon  caused  by 
its  presence,  which  had  been  studied  both  by  Tartakowski  and  Pauly  and  Zurn. 
He  says  that,  at  an  autopsy  of  an  infected  bird,  the  intestinal  mucosa  was  found 
to  be  greyish,  tumefied,  and  covered  witli  red  striae  and  petechiae. 

None  of  these  symptoms  were  observed  in  the  bird,  from  which  tho  present 
specimens  were  obtained,  though  they  were  found  in  fair  numliers  throughout 
the  intestines. 

Capillaria  colujibae  Rudolphi. 

Triclwsoma  coliimhne,  Cat.  Ent.  Vind.  Msc. — ISlil.  Riidol|ihi,  Synops..  p. 
15.— 1845.  Bellingham,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  xiv..  p.  477.— 1845,  Calodiiim 
tenue,  Dujardin,  Hist.  Nat.  de  Helm.,  p.  28. — 1851,  Trichosomum  [Calodium) 
tenuissimwm  Diesing,  Syst.  Helm.,  ii.  pp.  256,  257. — 1861,  Calodium  tenue, 
Molin  II.  sottor.  d.  Acrofalli,  Mem.  Instit.  Veneto,  ix.,  p.  192. — 1803.  Trich- 
osomum lenuissimum.,  Eberth,  Nemat.  Untersuch.,  Leipzig,  p.  56,  tab.  vi..  fig.  2. 
— 1878,  Linstow,  Compend.  d.  Helm.,  p.  119.— 1883.  Pauly  and  Zurn,  Deutsche 
Zeitschr.  f.  Thiermed.,  ix.,  p.  200.— 1886.  Leidy,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Philad.,  p. 
310.— 1890.  Stossich,  Boll.  Soc.  Adriat.  Sc.  Nat..  Trieste,  xii.,  p.  12.— 1895, 
Eailliet,  Traite  Zool.  Med.  et  Agric,  2nd  edit.,  pp.  485-486.-1898,  Trichosoma 
columbae.  Stossich,  Program,  civ.  Scuola  reale  super.,  Trieste. — 1899,  Trichosoma 
teriuissimum,  Perroncito,  Giorn.  R.  Soc.  Acad,  veterin.  ital..  xlviii..  n.  38,  p. 
889. — 1901.  Tartakowski,  Arehiv.  veter.  Nauk.  p.  1045. — 1905,  Neumann-Mac- 
queen,  Parasites  and  Par.  Diseases  Dom.  Anim.,  2nd  edit.,  p.  414. — 1906.  Bar- 
bagallo.  Boll.  Soc.  ciilto.  sc.  med.-natur.  Cagliari.  ii..  n.  4,  p.  143. — 1912,  Parona, 
L'Elmint.  Italiana.  ii..  p.  118. — 1912.  TricJiosomum  columbae,  Neveu-Lemaire. 
Parasit.  Anim.  Dom.,  Paris,  pp.  764-765. — 1914.  CapiUaria  dujardin! ,  Travassos, 
Brazil-Medico,  xxviii..  p.  429. — 1915.  Travassos.  Rio  de  .Taneiro.  Mem.  Instit. 
Oswaldo  Craz,  vii..  pp.  153.  160. 

Found  in  about  equal  numbers  with  Ceplialostrongylus  columbae  in  the  in- 
testines of  the  same  bird.      The  measurements  correspond  fairly  closely  with  those 


558 


NEMATODE    PARASITES   OF    THE    DOMESTIC    PIGEON^ 


given  by  Dujardin.  The  males  are  from  8.4  to  11.7  mm.  long,  and  the  anterior 
part,  occupied  by  the  oesophag-us,  is  a  little  less  than  half  the  total  length,  in 
a  specimen  9.7  mm.  long  the  proportions  being  -4.64  :  5.06.  The  females  mea- 
sure from  13  to  16.24  mm.,  an<l  the  relative  lengths  of  anterior  and  posterior 
portions  6.24  :  10.  The  diameter  at  the  anterior  end  is  about  0.006  mm.  In 
a  male  of  11.3  mm.,  the  maximum  diameter  is  0.049,  at  the  posterior  extremity 
0.028,  at  the  base  of  the  oesophagus  0.039,  and  about  the  middle  of  the  oeso- 
phagus 0.026  mm.  The  spicule.  1.44  mm.  long,  has  an  almost  uniform  width 
of  0.007  mm.,  but  is  swollen  at  its  anterior  extremity  into  a  hollow  open  knob 
0.020  mm.  wide  (Text-fig.  13) .  At  its  posterior  extremity  it  is  bluntly  rounded 
(Text-fig.  14).  It  is  enclosed  in  a  sheath  which  is  very  distinctly  marked  with 
transverse  striae  at  intervals  of  0.002  mm.  in  the  posterior  'part,  the  striae  be- 


Text-fit;s.7-14. — Capi/laria  colimihac. 
Anterior  end.  (x  230).  8.  Posterior  end  of  female,  (x  230),  <;h.  ,  amis;  9.  Pos- 
terior end  of  male,  (x  230)  ;  10.  Kegion  of  junction  of  oesophaj^us  (oe.)  and 
intestine  (int.),  (x  2.30).  i6.,bacillary  band;  /.,  lumen  of  oesophagus;  «., 
nucleus;  11.  Vagina  and  uterus,  containing  eggs,  (x  140)  ;  12.  Egg  in 
terus.  (x  230)  ;  13.  Anterior  end  of  male  spicule,  (x  230)  ;  It.  Posterior  end 
of  spicule,  in  sheath,   (x  230). 


coming  fuier.  and  more  indefinite  towards  the  anterior  end.  In  a  few  specimens 
a  considcralile  portion  of  the  sheath  is  everted,  and  the  si)icule  is  projecting,  but 
in  the  majority  the  spicule  is  withdrawn  some  distance  into  the  interior  of  the 
body.  It  shows  delicate.  l>ut  iiTegular,  eross  markings.  The  doacal  aperture 
is  tierminal,  and  is  |irovided  with  a  small  bursa-like  stnicture,  consisting  of  two 
lateral  lobular  projections  of  the  internal  piotoida-smic  substance,  connected  by  a 
delicate  membrane.  Travassos  states  it  In  lie  tlircc-lolx'd,  and  in  side  view  it  has 
this  appearance  (Text-fig.   9)  . 

In  the  females  the  maximum  diameter  is  0.060  to  0.067  mm.,  at  the  ba,se  of 
the  oesophagus  0.049  mm.,  middle  of  oesophagus  0.036  mm.,  and  at  posterior 
extremity,  which  is  bluntly  rounded   (Text-fig.  8),  0.030  mm.     The  anus  is  sub- 


BY   VERA  IRWIN   SMITH.  550 

terminal,  and  the  vulva  opens  on  a  very  slight  prominence  0.026  mm.  behind  the 
junction  of  oesophagus  and  intestine.  The  muscular  vagina  into  which  it  leads 
is  0.224  mm.  long  (Text-fig.  11)  .  The  eggs  nearest  to  it  measure  0.044  by  0.023 
mm.  There  are  two  lateral  bacillary  bands  extending  along  the  whole  length 
of  the  body  (Text-fig.  .10)  .  In  both  sexes  the  width  is  from  ;1  to  J  the  diameter 
of  the  body.  The  spots  on  their  surface,  corresponding  to  unicellular  glands,  are 
irregularly  distributed,  and  vary  in  size.  According  to  Jagerskiold  (1901)  these 
glands  replace  the  ordinai-y  Nematode  excretory  system  in  this  family.  The 
general  structure  of  CapiUaria  columb(ie  corresponds  very  closely  with  the  de- 
scription given  Ijy  Sliii^ley  (1909)  of  Trichosomicm  longicolle.  The  cells  of  the 
"cellular  body"  or  oesophagiis  (Text-fig.  10)  are  from  0.096  to  0.143  mm.  long, 
and  are  marked,  by  circular  constrictions,  into  a  series  of  from  8  to  12  segments. 
An  oval  nucleus  (n.)  0.  023  by  0.018  mm.  in  size,  is  centrally  situated  in  each 
cell,  and  the  very  fine  lumen  of  the  oesophagus  (Text-fig.  10,2)  extends  through 
the  middle  of  the  single  row  of  cells.  Two  lobes  can  be  seen  of  the  glandular 
body  situated  at  the  junction  of  oesophagus  and  intestine. 

In  1914  Railliet  and  Henry  separated  the  sub-family  Ileterakinae  from  the 
family  Ascaridae,  and  raised  it  to  family  rank,  including  in  it  all  polymyarian 
Nematodes  in  which  a  pre-anal  sucker  is  present  in  the  male.  In  this  family 
they  included  Dujardin's  old  sub-genus  of  Ascaris,  Ascaridia,  which  had  been 
united  by  Schneider,  and  all  subsequent  workers,  with  the  genus  Heterakis.  The 
species  found  in  different  Columbiformes  and  commonly  known  as  Heterakis 
maculosa  forms  one  of  the  thirty-four  species  enumerated  by  them  as  belonging 
to  this  genus. 

According  to  tliis  classification,  its  systematic  position  is  as  follows: — 

Family  HBTERAKIDAE  Railliet  and  Henry,  1914. 

Genus  A  s  C  A  R  I  D  I  .\   Dujardin,  1845. 

Species  Ascaridia  columbae  Gmelin.   1789. 

Generic  diagnosis  (from  Railliet  and  Henry  1914). — Mouth  with  three  lips. 
Oesophagus  club-shaped,  without  bulb.  Generally  two  lateral  membranes.  .Male 
with  feeble  caudal  wings;  spicules  equal  or  sub-equal,  without  accessory  piece; 
preanal  sucker  slightly  projecting,  rounded,  with  horny  ring:  papillae  relatively 
large.  Female  with  vulva  towards  the  middle  of  the  body;  uteri  divergent;  eggs 
with   thick  .shell,   with   a  clear  granulation  inside  the  shell,  at  one  of  the  poles. 

Ascaridia  columbae  Gmelin. 

1782,  Ascaris  teres,  Goeze,  Naturg.,  p.  84,  PI.  1.  fig.  6. — 1789,  Ascaris 
columbae,  Gmelin,  Syst.  Natur.,  p.  3034. — 1809.  Ascaris  maculosa,  Rudolphi, 
Entoz.,  ii.,  1,  p.  158.  PI.  1,  figs.  14,  16.— 1802,  Rudolphi,  Wiedem.  Arch.,  ii.,  2, 
p.  22. — 1819,  Rudolphi,  Synops.,  p.  45. — Bremser,  Icones  helm.,  PI.  iv.,  figs. 
25-28.— 1842.  Civinini,  Catal.,  Lucca.- 1844,  Bellingham,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist., 
xiii.,  p.  170. — 1845,  Ascaridia  columbae,  Dujardin,  Hist.  Nat.  d.  Helm.,  p.  219. 
—1851,  Diesing,  Syst.  Helm.,  ii.,  pp.  182-183.-1861,  Diesing,  Sitz.  k.  Akad. 
Wien,  xlii.  (Revis.  d.  Nemat.),  p.  666. — 1857,  Ascaris  teres,  Prestal,  Allgem. 
deutsch.  naturh.  Zeitg.,  iii.,  p.  353. — 1858,  Leuckart,  Trochel's  Arch.,  ii.,  p.  108. 
— 1866,  Heterakis  maculosa,  Schneider,  Monogr.  d.  Nemat.,  p.  72,  tab.  iii.,  fig. 
11,  text-flg.— 1871,  Ascaris  sp.,  Krefft,  Trans.   Ent.   Soc,  N.S.W.,  2,  p.  212.— 


560  NEMATODE     PARASITES    OF    THE     DOMESTIC     PIGEON, 

1878.  Eeterakis  maculosa,  Linstow,  Compeud.  d.  Helm.,  p.  119. — 1868,  Ascaris 
maculusa,  Unterbergei-,  Oest.  Viert.  f.  wiss.  Veterin.,  p.  38. — 1877,  Ueterakis 
VHiculosa,  Ereolaui,  Mem.  accad.  sc.  istit.  Bologna,  ser.  3,  vii.,  pp.  465-467. — 
1877,  Bassi,  II.  med.  veterin.,  Torino,  vi.,  4,  pp.  232-236,  and  in  Giorn.  mod. 
veterin.  praetica,  Tdiino. — 1887,  Parona,  Ann.  Mus.  civ.  Geneva,  xxiv.,  ser.  2. 
IV.,  pp.  275,  483.— 1889,  Linstow,  Comp.  d.  Helm.,  Nacbt.,  p.  43.— 1890.  Stos- 
sicli.  Boll.  See.  adriat.,  Sc.  nat.,  xii.,  p.  49. — 1891,  Stossich,  Boll.  Soc.  adriat.. 
xiii.,  p.  109.— 1892,  Neumann,  Traite  d.  malad.  para.sit.,  2nd  edit.— 1893,  Stos- 
sich, Boll.  Soc.  adriat.,  xiv..  p.  83. — 1895,  Railliet.  Traite  d.  zool.  med.  et.  agric, 
2nd  edit.,  pp.  406-407. — 1898,  Stossich.  Progr.  civ.  Scuola  reale  super.,  Trieste. 
—1899,  Linstow,  Mitt.  Zool.  Samm.  Mus.  Berl..  1  (2),  p.  11,  taf.  11,  fig.  17.— 
1896,  Galli-Valerio,  Manuale  pai-assit.,  Milano. — 1901,  GaUi-Valerio,  Bull.  Soc, 
Vaudoise  Se.  Nat.,  xxxvii.,  p.  343. — 1901.  Messner,  Zeitsehr.  f.  Flpisch  u.  Milch 
hygiene,  xi.,  p.  241. — 1902,  Perroncito,  I  parassiti,  2nd  edit.,  p.  380. — 1902, 
Lisi.  II  nuo  Ercolani,  Pisa,  an.  vii.,  p.  211. — 1005.  Stiles  and  Hassall.  Bur. 
Anim.  Indust.,  Bull.,  79,  p.  118. — 1905,  Neumanu-Mac(iueen,  Parasit.,  2n<l  edit., 
pp.  413-414. — 1904,  Sabrazes  and  Salm,  Gaz.  hebd.  d.  se.  med.  de  Bordeaux,  p. 
117. — 1906,  Barbagallo,  Boll.  Soe.  eulto.  Sc.  med.-natur.  Cagliari,  an.  xi..  p. 
143. — 1907,  Neumann,  F'ara.sites  et  mal.  parasit.  des  oiseaux  dom.,  pp.  146-148. — 
1907.  Alessandrini,  Boll.  Soc.  Zool.  ital..  Roma.  ser.  2.  viii..  pp.  220-224.— 
1907.  Alessandrini.  Ann.  d'Igieue.  Roma,  n.s..xvii.,  pp. 323-329.  1  tab.— 1909. 
Alessandrini,  Ann.  d'Igiene  speriment.,  Roma,  p.  497. — 1909,  Hautefeuille. 
Amiens  Bull  Soe.  Linn.,  xix..  No.  392.  pp.  429-431.— 1912.  Neveu-Lcmaire, 
Parasitol.  Anim.  Dom..  Paris,  pp.  677-679. — 1909,  Johnston.  Free.  Linu.  Soc. 
N.S.  "Wales,  xxxiv..  p.  412.-1910,  .Johnston,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  N.S.W..  xliv., 
p.  121. — 1911,  Wolffhugel,  Rev.  d.  Centro  Est.  de  Agi-onomia  y  Vet.,  Buenos 
Aires,  p.  78.-1912,  Johnston.  Rep.  Gov.  Bur.  Microbiol.  N.S.W..  ii.,  p.  1.35. 
— 1912.  Ascariih'a  maculosa,  Railliet  and  Henry,  Bull.  Soc.  Pathol,  exot.,  v..  No.  4, 
p.  251. — 1913.  Ascaridia  columhae,  Trava.ssos,  Mem.  d.  Instit.  Oswaldo  Cruz,  v., 
3.  pp.  289,  291.  PI.  28.  fig.  16.-1914.  AscaricUa  maculosa.  Railliet  and  Henry, 
IXo  Congres  Internat.  d.  Zool..  Rennes,  p.  678. — 1918.  Ascaridia  cnhdiihac, 
Johnston.  TMeni.  Queensland  Mus..  vi..  pp.  171-174. 

In  the  same  bird  which  harboured  C  epltalustrongyhts  quadri  radial  us  and 
Capilhiria  columhae  were  two  large  specimens,  apparently  of  this  worm.  One 
was  inadvertently  thrown  out  wath  the  faeces,  and  the  other  consists  of  the  pos- 
terior half.  only,  of  a  female. 

More  recently.  Dr.  Cleland  handed  me  a  phial  containing  a  large  number  of 
preserved  specimens  of  this  species.  He  informs  me  that  they  were  found  in 
great  numbers,  closely  packed,  in  the  intestines  of  some  young  squabs,  sent  to  the 
Board  of  Health  for  post-mortem  examination,  and  were  considered  to  have  caused 
their  death. 

Dr.  Harvey  .Johnston  says  (1018.  p.  171):  "The  parasite  was  found  in 
several  Brisbane  i^geons.  occurring  in  some  of  them  in  considerable  number,  many 
of  the  worms  reaching  a  large  size." 

Tn  other  parts  of  the  world  it  is  a  common  parasite  of  the  pigeon,  and  is 
well  known  as  the  cause  of  a  serious,  and  often  fatal,  lielminthiasis.  especially  in 
the  case  of  young  s(|uabs;  b>it  it  has  evidently  not  been  noted,  hitherto,  as  the 
cause  of  mortality  among  pigeons  in  this  State.  Inquiries  from  the  manager  of 
a  large  squab  company  in   Sydney  elicited   the  infornintion   th;it   several    squabs. 


BY   VERA  IRWIN   SMITH. 


561 


ranging  in  age  from  three  to  four  weeks,  had  died  within  a  few  months  from  an 
unknown  cause,  and  the  symptoms  described  seem  to  point  to  the  presence  of  this 
worm.  In  view  of  the  importance  of  the  industry  of  squab  raising,  and  the  pos- 
sibility of  successful  anti-helminthic  treatment,  it  is  desirable  that  all  cases  of  the 
occurrence  of  the  worm  should  be  carefully  noted.  In  1868  Unterberger  called 
attention  to  the  pathological  effects   of   the   parasite,   and   various   writers   since, 


Text-figs. 1.5-19. — Ascaridia  columbae.  (x  38). 
15.   Posterior  end  of  male,  ventral  view ;    16.  Tlio  same,  lateral  view,  s.,  sucker; .«;>., 
spicule;   a.,  anus;   17.  Anterior  end,   showing  the  three   lips;    18.   Posterior 
end  of  female,  a.,  anus;  b.,  corpuscles  in  interior  of  body;   19.  Eggs,   (x  38). 


including  Hautefeuille  and  Alessandrini,  have  dealt  with  the  same  subject.  The 
results  of  their  researches,  and  the  treatment  adopted  to  cope  with  the  disease,  are 
given  in  most  modem  text-books  on  helminth  parasitology. 

It  seems  probable  that  the  worm  is  of  fairly  general  occurrence  in  pigeons, 
but  only  occasionally  in  such  numbers  as  to  give  rise  to  morbid  conditions.  Early 
helminthologists,  descriliing  this  Nematode,  make  no  mention  of  any  disease  caused 
by  it.         ^ 

Some  measurements  of  the  specimens  found  here  are : — 

Males,  29  to  31  mm.  long.  Females,  31  to  37  mm.  Maximum  diameter,  1.3 
to  1.6  mm.  Diameter  at  base  of  lips  0.22  to  0.32  mm.  Anus  in  female  1.20 
mm.  from  tip  of  tail,  in  male  0.40  to  0.51  mm.  Preanal  sucker  0.20  by  0.16 
mm.  Spicules  1.7  to  1.9  mm.  long.  Eggs  0.048  by  0.072  mm.  The  number 
and  arrangement  of  the  papillae  on  the  male  tail  are  shown  in  Text-figs.  15  and 
16.  The  characteristic,  large  "orbicular  corpuscles"  in  the  interior  of  the  female 
body,  mentioned  by  Dujardin.  from  which  the  specific  name  maculosa  was  derived, 
are  very  noticeable  (Text-fig.  18  b) . 

Literature. 

1907.     Alessakdrixi. — Sopra  una  epizoozia  nei  piccioni  da  Heterakis  maculosa. 

Ann.  Igieue  Soma,  n.s.  xvii.,  pp.  323-329,  1  tav. 
1845.     Bellingham,   O. — Catalogue  of  Irish  Entozoa,  with   obser%'ations.     Ann. 

Mag.  Nat.  Hixt..  xiii..  pp.  101-105,  167-174. 


562  NEMATODE     PARASITES    OF    THE     DOMESTIC     PIGEON, 

1851.     DiESiNG,  K. — Systema  lielinintlium .   Viiulobonae.  Vol.   ii.,  pp.  77-360. 
1845.     DujABDiN,  r. — Histoire  naturelle  des  helmintlies  ou  vers  intestinaux.  Paris. 
1916.     Hall,  M. — Noraatode  parasites  of  the  orders  Rodentia,  Lagomorpha.  anl 

Hyraeoidea.     Pruc.  U.S.  Nat.  Mus.,  50.  pp.  1-258,  1  PI. 
1896.     Hassall. — Check  list  of  the   animal  parasites  of  pigeons.      U.S.   Dept. 

Agric,  Bur.  Anim.  Industry,  Circ.  15. 

1908.  Hautepeuille. — Entente    vermineuse    epidemique    des    pigeons.      Amiens 

Bull.  Soc.  linn.,  xix..  No.  392.  pp.  429-431. 
1901.     Jagerskiold,  L. — Weitere  Beitrage  zur  Kenntniss  der  Nematoden.   Chap- 
ter  4.     Hautdiiisen    bei    dem   Nematoden.     Knngl.   Xr.     \'el.-Aka(i. 
Handlingar,  xxxv.,  No.  2,  pp.  1-80. 

1909.  Johnston,    T.    Harvey. — Notes    and    Exhibits.      Proc.    Linn.    Soc.    X.S. 

Wales,  xxxiv.,  p.  412. 

1910.  Johnston,    T.    H. — On    Australian    Avian    Entozoa.      Proc.    Boy.    Soc. 

N.S.^y.,x\i\■.,  pp.  84-122. 

1912.  Johnston,  T.  H. — On  Australian  Avian  Entozoa.  Bep.  Gov.  Bur. 
Microbiol,  N.S.W.,  ii.,  pp.  122-130. 

1918.  Johnston,  T.  H. — The  Endopara-sites  of  the  Domestic  Pigeon  in  Queens- 
land.    Mem.  Queensland  Mu.s.,  vi.,  pp.  168-174. 

1871.     Krefpt. — On   Au.stralian   Entozoa.      Trans.  Ent.   Soc.   .^'..S'.ir.,  ii.,  p.   212. 

1878.      Linstow,  0.   von. — Compendium  der  Helrainthologie.   Hannover. 

1889.  Linstow,  0.   von. — Compendium  der  Helminthologie .   Nachtrag. 

1905.  Neumann-Macqdeen. — Parasites  and  Parasitic  Diseases  of  Douiest.  Ani- 
mals.   2nd  edition. 

1912.  Neveu-Lemaire,  M. — Parasitologie  des  Aniiuaux  domestiques.  Maladies 
parasitaires  non  bacteriennes .     Paris. 

1912.  Parona,  C. — L'elmintologia  italiana  da  suoi  primi  tempi  all'anno  1910. 
Vol.  i.   Bibliografia.     Vol.  ii.    Storia,  sistematiea,  corologia. 

1895.  RaHjLiet,  a. — Traite  de  zoologie  raedicale  et  agricole.  2e.  ed.  Paris. 
Nemathelminthes,  pp .  385-571 . 

1912.  Railliet,  a.  and  Henry,  A. — Quelques  Nematodes  parasites  des  Reptiles. 
Bull.  Soc.  Pathologic  CTotique,  v.,   (4),  pp.   251-259,  3  figs. 

1914.  Railliet  and  Henry. — Essai  de  classification  des  "Heterakidae."  Bep. 
9th  Congres  internat.  de  zool.,  Rennes,  pp.  674-682. 

1911.  Ransom,  B. — Two   new   species  of  parasitic  nematodes.     Proc.    U.S.  Xat. 

Mus.,  xli.,  pp.  363-369. 
1866.      Schneider,   A. — Monographic  der  Nematoden.     Berlin. 
1909.      SiiiPLKY,    A.     E. — The    Threadworms    (Nematoda)    ot    the     Red    Grouse 

{Lagopus  scoticus).     Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  Lorid.,  i..  ]i]).  335-350.     Pis. 

48-55. 

1904.  Stevenson. — A   new    parasite    (Strongi/liis    iinadriradialiis,   n.sp.)     found 

in  the  jiigeon.     Preliminary   report.      U.S.  Dcjil.   .lyric.  Bur.   .{nini. 
Undtuilry,  Circ.  47. 

1905.  Stiles  and  Has.sall. — The  determination  of  generic  types,  and  a  list  of 

round  worm  genera,  with  tlicir  original  and  type  species.     U.S.  Dept. 
Agric,  Bur.  Anim.  Indusl..  Bull.   711. 

1890.  Stossich,  M. — 11  genere  Trichosoma  Rudolphi.  Lavoro  monografieo.    Boll. 

Soc.  adriat.  Sc.  nat.   Trieste,  xii.,  pp.  3-36. 


BY    VERA   IRWIN    SMITH.  5(33 

1899.     Stossich,   M. — Strongylidae.   Lavoro   monogi-afico.     Boll.   Soc.   adriat.   Sc. 

Nat.  Trieste,  xix.,  pp.   55-152. 
1913.      Travassos,   L. — Sobre  es   espeeies  brazileiras  da  subfamilia   Heterakinae 

Railliet  and    HeniT.     Mem.  Instit.  Osvaldo  Cruz,  v.    (3),    pp.    271- 

318,  P'.K  27-31,  figs.  1-35. 
1915.     Travassos,  L. — Coiitribuicao  para  o  coubecimento  da  fauna  helmintolojica 

brazileira.     v.   Sobi'e    as    espeeies  brasileiras  do    genero   Capillaria 

Zeder.,  1800.     Mem.  Instit.  Osiraldo  Cruz,  vii.  (2),  pp.  146-172,  Pis 

23-26,  flgs.  1-14. 
1868.     Unterbergep. — Ueber  Vorkommen  und  Entwicklung  von  Ascaris  macidosn. 

Oesterr.  Vierteljahrssclir.  fur  unssensch.  V eterinarkunde,  Wien,  p.  38. 
1911.     WoLFPHUGEL. — Los   Zooparasitos  de  los  Animales  Domesticos  en  la  Re- 

publioa  Argentina.     Bevista  Centr.  Estud.  Agron.  Y.  V,eter.,  Buenos 

Ayres.  pp.  1-108,  Nematodes  pp.  49-79. 


564 


A  FEW  NOTES  ON   THE   BOTANY   OF   LORD  HOWE   ISLAND. 

(Sixth  paper.*) 

Br  J.  H.  Maidex^  I.S.O.,  F.R.S.,  F.L.S.,  Government  Botanist  and 
Director  of  the  Botanic  Gardens,  Sydney. 

Since  the  publication  of  my  last  paper,  the  following  have  appeared : — 

1.  "A  revised  list  of  Norfolk  Island  flora,  with  some  notes  on  the  species," 
by  Robert  M.  Laiug.   Trans.  N.Z.  Inst.,  xlvii.,  1915. 

2.  "The  vegetation  and  flora  of  Lord  Howe  Island,"  by  W.  R.  B.  Oliver, 
Trans.  N.Z.  Inst.,  xlix,  1917,  94.  Free  access  was  given  Mr.  Oliver  to  the  Lord 
Howe  and  Norfolk  Islands  collections  in  the  National  Herbarium,  Sydney,  when 
he  was  preparing  his  paper. 

Mr.  J.  L.  Boorm.an  paid  a  \-isit  to  Lord  Howe  Island  from  February  to 
April  of  the  present  year,  on  business  of  the  Board  of  Control  of  tlie  Island,  and 
took  the  opportunity  of  making  botanical  collections  for  the  National  Herbaiium, 
Sydney. 

The  vast  majority  of  the  plants  he  brought  have  already  l)een  recorded,  but 
the  following  presumably  indigenous  species  are  believed   to  be  new  records : — 

1.   Malcastnim  tricuspidatum   A.   Gray.     2.   Erythraea   cmstralis  R.Br. 

I  am  aware  that  there  may  be  a  difference  of  opinion  as  to  whether  they 
are  truly  indigenous,  judging  from  observations  in  regard  to  the  Norfolk  Island 
flora  (see  Laing). 

He  collected  Mesembryanthemum  australe  Sol.,  recorded  by  Oliver,  p.  137; 
also  Kyllinga  monocephala  Rottb.  (Oliver,  p.  128). 

Messrs.  H.  T.  Wilson  and  E.  King  brought  specimens  of  Adiantuin  for- 
mosum  R.Br,  (name  confirmed  by  Mr.  T.  Whitelegge)  from  the  south-^est 
slope  of  the  Island,  locally  known  as  the  "Little  Slope,"  near  the  salt  water. 
"Grows  2  ft.  6  inches,  and  very  strong,  and  not  noticed  before."  This  fern  does 
not  appear  to  liave  been  previously   recorded   from  the  Island. 

Mr.  Boorman  brought  specimens  of  a  variegated  Palm,  and  in  view  of  the 
fact  that  variegation  is  not  a  common  chai-aeter  in  the  Family,  it  is  worthy  of 
record.  The  plant  is  Howea  Forsteriana  Becc,  and  a  pleasing  parallel  variega- 
tion extends  throu'j:hout  the  plant,  affecting  both  rachises  and  leaflets.  The 
tree  (the  only  one  on  the  Island),  is  about  30  feet  high,,  and  i)rol)ably  30  or  40 
years  of  age.     It  is  growing  at  Erskine  Valley,  near  the  Burnt  Hut. 

•Previous  reference,  These  Proceedings,  xxxix.,  1914,  p.377. 


BT    J.    H.   MAIDEX. 


565 


Oliver  (p.  129)  draws  attention  to  Hybrids  of  Howea.  I  have  had  some  of 
these  plants  under  observation  since  1910,  but  hesitated  to  jjublish  anything,  as 
I  desired  to  keep  them  under  observation.  My  original  plants  came  from  the 
holding  the  late  Edward  King,  who  had  four  trees.  Five  additional  plants 
(from  the  same  locality)  were  obtained  from  the  late  Rev.  AV.  W.  Watts  in 
September,  1916. 

Mr.  Boorman  reports  that  during  his  exploration  of  the  more  coastal  areas 
of  the  Island,  he  met  with  several  additional  instances  of  hybrid  Howeas,  more 
particularly  at  the  north  end  of  the  Island  in  the  vioinity  of  the  rifle-range;  also 
on  property  occupied  by  a  Mr.  Campbell  Stevens,  and  by  Mr.  Thompson  ad- 
jacent. They  all  appeared  to  be  of  the  same  character  as  those  on  Deep  Creek 
to  the  south-west  of  the  Island,  already  refeiTcd  to. 

I  contrasted  the  hybrids  in  1916  with  H.  Belmorea»a  and  H.  Forsteriana  as 
follows : — 


H.   Belmoreana. 


2.    H.  Forsteriana. 


3.   Hybrid. 


(a)  Leaf  segments  con- 
verging upwards. 

(b)  Fruit   spikes    elon- 
gated   { individual ) . 


(c)  Fruits  plump,  pro- 
duced into  a  shortly 
truncate  apex. 


(a)  Drooping. 


(b)  Fruit  spikes  shorter 
than  those  of  H.  Bel- 
moreana (clustered  at 
the  base,  from  3  to  8.) 


(c)  Longer  and  narrower 
than  those  of  H.  Bel- 
moreana, the  truncate 
apex  not  produced. 


(a)  and  (b)  Leaf  seg- 
ments and  fruiting 
spikes  as  in  i?.  Bel- 
moreana, and  its  fruits 
barely  separable  from 
that  species .  The  mid- 
rib of  the  leaf  has  the 
leaflets  (segments) 

converging  upwards, 
but  not  quite  so  curly 
as   H.   Belmoreana. 

(c)  Colour  of  fruits  duU 
carrnine  lake  (Plate 
106,  shade  4),  with  a 
base  of  cherry  red 
(Dauthenay's  Reper- 
toire de  Couleurs, 
Plate  91,  shade  3). 


Mr.  5).  N.  W^rd  (18th  August,  1920)  reports  on  these  hybrid  Hoiveas  as 
follows : — 

"They  are  verv  variable  in  size,  habit  and  colour  of  stem.  Five  are  still  in  pots 
in  the  small  bush  house.  The  five  planted  out  in  November.  1916  have  grown  well; 
two  of  these  are  in  the  palm  bed  in  section  9  in  the  Lower  Garden,  one  in  bed  25 
near  the  Keieleeria  japonica  tree,  and  one  in  bed  20  in  the  Middle  Garden.  The 
other  is  on  the  western  side  of  the  creek.   Upper  Garden. 

Of  the  four  planted  eleven  months  later,  onlj'  one  is  alive  and  that  is  doing 
badly  in  bed  A,  lawn  22,  Lower  Garden,  These  were  planted  on  low  lying  ground, 
very  wet  in  winter,  and  while  these  conditions  suit  some  palms  they  did  not  suit 
these  hybrids,"  ■  ' 

The  following  introduced  plants  collected  by  Mr.  Boorman  appear  to  be  new 
records : — 


566  A    FEW   XOTES   OX   THE   BOTANY  OF  LORD    HOWE   ISLAND. 

COMPOSITAE. — Ageratum  conyzoides  L.  (Garden  escape);  Galinsoga  paryi- 
flora  Cav.;  Aster  sub ulatim  Micbx. ;  Eupatoriiim  catinabinum  L. 

Crucifebae. — Sisymbrium   officinale  L. 

Labiatae. — Stachys  arvensis  L. 

SoLAXACEAE. — Datura  Stramunium  L. ;  Nicotiaiia  alata  Liiik  and  Otto  (Gar- 
den escape). 

Umbelliferae. — Daucus  bracliiatus  Sieb. 

LiLiACEAE. — Asparagus  plumosus  var.  nanus  Baker  (Garden  escape).  (Not 
in  flower  or  fruit,  ftnd  therefore  subject  to  confirmation.  Its  tough  stems  point  it 
out  as  likely  to  become  a  pest.) 

Gramineae. — Dactyloctenium  aegyptiacum  Willd. 


5(57 


SPECIAL  GENERAL  MEETING. 

14th  June,  1920. 

In  Commemoration  of  the  Centenary  of  the  Birth  of  Sib  William  Macleat. 

Mr.  J.  .).  Fletcher,  M.A.,  B.Se.,  President,  in  the  Chair. 

Presidential  Address, 

"THE  SOCIETY'S  HERITAGE  FROM  THE  MACLEAYS." 

Yesterday  (Sunday,  13th  June)  was  the  centenary  of  Sir  William  Maeleay's 
birth.  At  that  time  George  iv.  was  King.  The  Princess  Alexandrina  Victoria, 
afterwards  Queen  Victoria,  was  an  infant  about  thirteen  months  old.  "Science 
all  over  the  world"  was  about  to  lose  "its  Nestor,"  Sir  Joseph  Banks,  whose 
splendid  labours  ended  six  days  later  (on  .June  19th,  1820)  .  William  Sharp 
Macleay,  cousin  of  William,  had  published  his  first  contribution  to  scientific  know- 
ledge. Part  i.  of  the  Hor*  Entomologieae,  in  the  preceding  year,  1819.  Part  ii. 
of  the  same  work  was  published  in  the  year  following  (1821),  so  that  William 
Macleay  was  bom  in  the  interval  between  the  issue  of  the  two  Parts. 

Coming  nearer  home — Sydney,  the  first  British  settlement  in  Australia,  had 
been  founded  a  few  months  over  thirty-two  years.  Major-General  Laehlan  Mac- 
quarie  was  Governor  of  New  South  Wales.  Not  (juite  five  years  before,  the  ex- 
plorations of  Blaxland,  Lawson  and  Wentworth,  and  later  of  Evans,  and  the 
subsequent  construction  of  a  road  over  the  Blue  Mountains  by  William  Cox,  had 
made  it  possible  for  the  Governor,  "accompanied  by  his  lady,  and  followed  by  a 
numerous  retinue,"  including  J.  W.  Lewin,  artist,  to  jpurney  to  Bathurst  Plains, 
and  fix  upon  the  site  for  the  township  of  Bathurst.  Railways,  telegraphs, 
steamers,  penny  postage  and  postage  stamps  were  then  unknown. 

Of  the  century  now  ended,  into  which  William  Macleay  was  born,  he  spent 
about  eighteen  years  and  nine  months  in  Scotland,  his  native  land,  and  on  the 
voyage  out  to  Australia.  For  nearly  fifty-three  years  he  resided  in  New  South 
Wales,  except  for  a  few  months  on  his  expedition  to  New  Guinea  in  1875.  His 
fruitful  labours  ended  somewhat  more  than  twenty-eight  years  ago. 

Sir  William  Macleay,  by  his  example  and  influence,  and  by  his  own  efforts 
during  a  period  of  about  seventeen  years,  and  by  his  benefactions,  largely  made 
the  Linnean  Society  of  New  South  Wales  possible  in  its  present  developed  form. 
The  sustained  co-operation  and  help  of  a  long  succession  of  members,  extending 
over  a  period  of  more  than  forty-five  years,  have  contributed  to  make  it  what  it 
is  to-day.  A  question  in  which  we  are  interested,  and  that  may  be  asked  in  a 
legitimate  way.  is :  How  came  he  to  be  so  interested  in  science  as  to  become  first  of 


508  president's  address. 

all  a  scientific-  worker;  and  then  later  on,  to  undertake  the  role  of  benefactor  and 
promoter  of  Natural  History,  in  the  broad  sense,  in  New  South  Wales?  What 
were  the  elemental  circumstanees  which  shaped  his  career,  from  a  scientific  stand- 
point? 

Unfortunately  we  have  no  autobiographical  information,  and  very  little  in 
the  way  of  biographical  details,  which  will  supply  satisfactory  answers  to  these 
([uestions.  Nevertheless,  there  are  some  records  of  important  facts,  which,  when 
one  knows  how  to  correlate  them,  will  supply  an  outline  of  the  story  of  his  scien- 
tific life.  These  will  be  considered  later  in  their  proper  place.  Just  at  the 
present  stage,  it  suffices  to  say  that,  when  the  facts  are  appreciated,  it  is  realised 
that  William  Macleay  does  not  stand  alone;  but  tliat,  primarily,  he  was  largely 
the  product  of  family  influence  and  example;  and  the  last  and  youngest  of  a 
succession  of  Macleays  interested  in  science,  in  which,  under  the  circumstances, 
it  was  natural  that  he  should  take  his  place.  For  this  reason  alone,  the  Society 
is  interested  in  the  Macleays.     But  there  are  other  reasons  also. 

The  Society's  Hall,  which  it  owes  to  the  generosity  of  Sir  William,  is  lucated 
on  part  of  the  old  garden,  which  was  laid  out  by  Alexander  Macleay  about  ninety- 
two  years  ago.  The  old  home  is  in  the  immediate  neighbourhood.  Many  dis- 
tinguished visitors,  who  knew  the  occupants  of  Elizabeth  Bay  House,  have  left 
records  of  their  ^'isits  and  experiences. 

Alexander  Macleay  may  be  called  the  "Father  of  Zoology"  in  Australia.  He 
brought  liis  collection  of  insects  and  his  library  with  him  from  England  in  1825. 
and  ended  his  days  here.  When  he  left  England,  his  collection  was  considered  to 
be  the  finest  in  the  possession  of  a  private  individual.  Tlie  amalgamated  collec- 
tions of  Alexander  Macleay,  W .  S .  Macleay,  and  William  Macleay  were  presented 
to  the  University  of  Sydney  in  1889,  to  form  the  nucleus  of  the  Macleay  ]\[useum. 
I  may  remind  you  that  one  of  the  conditions  attached  to  the  gift  was — "That  the 
[Macleay]  Museum  should  be  made  easily  accessible  to  students  of  Natural 
History  and  members  of  the  Linnean  Society  of  New  South  Wales." 

The  Macleays  were  uninterruptedly  associated  with  the  Linnean  Society  of 
London,  as  Fellows,  for  a  period  of  ninety-seven  years  (1794-1891),  and  for 
twenty-seven  years  Alexander  Macleay  was  Secretary.  For  about  forty-seven  years 
they  were  Members  of  the  governing  body  of  the  Australian  Museum  or  of  its 
forerunner,  the  Colonial   Museum. 

The  Society  has  interesting  memorials  of  all  of  them,  as  well  as  of  some  of 
their  scientific  and  other  friends  and  contemporaries. 

The  two  branches  of  the  family  in  which  we  are  interested  have  now  come 
to  an  end,  in  the  direct  line.  In  the  sense  in  which  I  mean  it,  the  Society  may  be 
considered  to  have  inherited  tlie  family  scientific  tinditions.  as  well  as  some  of  the 
family  possessions. 

The  original  sources  of  information  of  a  biographical  character  concerning  A. 
and  W.  S.  Macleav  are  brief  obituary  notices  wliich  w-ere  published  in  the  Sridney 
Morning  Herald,  and  the  memorial  notices  of  them,  as  Fellows,  communicated  to 
the  Linnean  Society  of  London.  Later  notes  in  various  Biographical  Dictionaries 
or  elsewhere,  are  based  on  one  or  other  of  these,  usually  the  second.  It  is  pos- 
sible to  amplify  tliese  to  some  extent  in  respect  of  matters  in  which  we  are 
specially  interested,  but  tlie  sources  of  information  are  fnigmentary  and  scattered. 
Anytliing  like  detailed  formal  biographies,  or  even  satisfadoiy  bioLiiniihicnl 
sketches,  are  not  possible,  from  a  lack  of  adequate  material. 


THK  society's  HERITAGE  FROM  THE  MACLEAYS.  569 

It  is  to  be  remembered,  too,  that  the  Macleays  were  interested  in  Science  lor 
its  own  sake,  and  as  a  study  to  be  cultivated  in  their  leisure  hours.  Less  than  a 
century  ago,  an  interest  in  Zoology  was  a  good  asset  for  a  hobby,  especially 
for  a  man  of  means  and  leisure,  but  an  unfruitful  one  for  embarking  on  a 
professional  career.  One  of  a  later  generation  who  ventured  to  make  the  ex- 
periment, Edward  Forbes  (1815-54),  almost  repented  of  his  choice  of  Zoology  as 
a  profession.  Writing  to  his  friend  Thompson  in  January,  1847,  he  said:  "The, 
more  I  see,  the  more  I  am  convinced,  that  no  man  should  take  up  Science  as  his 
profession,  unless  he  has  some  independence  to  fall  back  on."  (Memoir  of 
Edward  Forbes,  F.R.S.,  by  G.  Wilson  and  A.   Geikie,  p.  410,  1861.) 

A  lack  of  uniformity  in  the  mode  of  spelling  the  family  surname  wiU  be 
noticeable.  By  the  members  of  the  family  in  the  old  days,  MacLeay  was  the 
customary  way ;  but,  in  their  later  years,  both  W .  S .  and  William  Macleay  signed 
their  names  in  the  manner  to  which  we  are  accustomed.  By  writers  outside  the 
family,  the  name  was  sometimes  written  McLeay  or  M'Leay. 

W.  S.  Macleay's  Christian  names  were  William  Sharp,  and  not  William 
Sharpe,  as  so  often  printed. 

Alexander   Macleay,  F.R.S.,   F.L.S. 

Born  in  the  County  of  Ross,  June  24th,  1767 — Chief  Clerk  of  the  Prisoners 
of  War  OflSce,  1795 — Head  of  the  Department  of  Correspondence  of  the 
Transport  Board,  1797— Secretary  of  the  Board,  1806-1818— Colonial  Secre- 
tary of  New  South  Wales,  1825-1836— First  Speaker  of  the  Legislative 
Council,  1843-46— Died  in  Sydney,  July  19th,  1848. 

No  definite  record  of  the  beginning  of  Alexander  Macleay's  interest  in 
Entomology  is  available.  But  his  election  to  the  Linnean  Society,  in  1794,  offers 
a  suggestive  clue.  The  inaugural  meeting  of  the  Society,  convened  by  Dr.  J.  E. 
Smith,  the  possessor  of  the  Linnean  collections,  was  held  on  26th  February,  1788, 
seven  Naturalists  being  present,  one  of  whom  was  Thomas  Marsham.  At  the 
second  meeting,  on  18th  March,  six  gentlemen  were  present.  The  roll  of  the 
foundation  members  was  made  up  consisting  of  twenty  ordinary  Fellows,  includ- 
ing the  Rev .  William  Kirby,  three  Honorary  Fellows,  including  Sir  Joseph  Banks, 
and  eleven  Associates.  Dr.  J.  E.  Smith  was  elected  President,  and  T.  Marsham 
Secretary.  At  the  third  meeting,  "at  the  Opening  of  the  Linnean  Society,"  on 
8th  April,  the  President  delivered  a  "Discourse  on  the  Rise  and  Progress  of 
Natural  History." 

A.  Macleay  was  elected  a  Fellow  of  the  Society  about  six  years  afterwards, 
in  1794.  In  the  absence  of  more  exact  information,  his  election  may  be  taken  to 
imply  an  awakening  interest  in  natural  history,  and  particularly  entomology. 
It  is  probably  true  that  his  friendship  with  Marsham  and  Kirby  spurred  his 
pursuit  of  entomology;  just  as,  at  a  later  period,  "close  relations"  with  Kirby 
and  Spence,  and  Alexander  Macleay,  are  said  to  have  spurred  W.  J.  Hooker's 
pursuit  of  entomology  in  his  early  days,  before  he  devoted  himself  entirely  to 
botany.  In  1798,  Marsham  retired  from  the  position  of  Secretary,  and  was 
appointed  Treasurer;  while  A.  Macleay  succeeded  him  as  Secretary.  His  service 
in  this  capacity  lasted  for  twenty-seven  years,  until  May,  1825.  when  he  resigned, 
in  consequence  of  his  contemplated  removal  to  Australia,  to  fill  the  position  of 
Colonial  Secretary  of  New  South  Wales. 


570  PRESIDENT  S   ADDRESS. 

We  have,  unfortunately,  no  autobiogi-aphical  details  of  liis  experiences  as 
Secretary  of  the  Linnean  Society,  or  of  the  eminent  scientific  men  of  the  day 
whom  he  came  to  know;  and  very  little  can  bo  gleaned  from  the  Society's  printed 
records.  Xor,  beyond  the  bare  statement  of  his  official  connection  with  the  Trans- 
port Board,  have  any  details  of  his  work  in  that  direction  come  down  to  us. 

The  obituary  notice  of  Alexander  Macleay  read  at  the  Anniversary  Meetiug 
of  the  Linnean  Society  of  London,  24th  May,  1849,  subsequently  printed  in  the 
Proceedings  (Vol.  ii.,  p.  45),  brief  as  it  is,  is  the  most  complete  biographical 
sketch  at  present  available.  In  this  it  is  stated  that — "As  a  naturalist,  Mr. 
MacLeay  devoted  himself  almost  exclusively  to  the  study  of  insects,  of  which  he 
had  formed,  previous  to  his  quitting  England,  the  iinest  and  most  extensive  col- 
lection then  existing  in  the  possession  of  a  private  individual.  Of  this  great  class 
of  animals  he  possessed  an  intimate  knowledge,  without,  however,  having  pub- 
lished anything  on  the  subject,  although  he  had  made  preparations  for  a  mono- 
graph  of  the  singular  genus  Paiu'isun,  in  which  his  cabinet  was  peculiarly   rich." 

The  history  of  the  collection  is  brieily  but  imperfectly  given  in  Barff's  "Short 
Historical  Account  of  the  University  of  Sydney"  (1902) .  To  this  I  shall  refer 
later.  I  am  now  able  to  give  a  more  complete  account  of  it.  In  outline,  but  the 
particulars  wiU  be  given  in  chronological  order  as  far  as  possible,  the  collection 
at  the  time  of  its  arrival  in  Australia,  in  1826,  represented  the  British  or  Euro- 
pean insects  collected  by  Alexander  and  W .  S .  Macleay  themselves,  of  the  results 
of  exchanges  with  their  friends,  of  specimens  purchased  from  at  lea.'^t  six  noted 
private  collections,  in  one  ca.se  during  the  owners  lifetime,  or  in  the  others  on 
the  dispersal  of  their  collections  by  sale  after  the  decease  of  the  owners,  and  of 
acquisitions  of  specimens  from  Brazil,  India,  North  Africa,  Australia,  and  else- 
where, some  of  them  possibly  donations,  but  the  details  of  their  acquisition  are 
wanting.  The  fragmentary  history  of  A.  Macleay's  collection  is  the  most  im- 
portant source  of  information  we  have  about  the  development  of  his  interest  in 
zoology. 

Thomas  Marsham  (ob.  1819),  and  the  Rev.  William  Ivirby  (1759-1850), 
Rector  of  Barham,  near  Ipswich,  in  Suffolk,  seem  to  have  been  the  two  earliest 
scientific  friends  of  Alexander  Macleay,  who  profoundly  influenced  him.  They 
were  both  senior  in  age,  and  as  Fellows  of  the  Linnean  Society,  keen  entomologists, 
and  owners  of  important  collections.  Marsham's  collection  was  eventually  sold 
in  1819,  a  few  months  before  his  decease;  Kirby's  was  presented  to  the  Entomolo- 
gical Society  soon  after  its  foundation,  in  1833.  As  Kirby  lived  in  the  country, 
when  railways  were  unknown,  his  visits  to  London  were  infrequent;  but  he  corre- 
sponded regularly  with  his  scientific  friends.  His  biography,  "Life  of  the  Rev. 
Wm.  Kirby,"  by  John  Freeman,  now  a  scarce  book,  was  )>ublished  in  1852. 
This  is  the  only  available  source  of  information  about  mucii  that  relates  to  Alex- 
ander Macleay  tliat  is  of  interest  to  us.  I  have  been  glad  to  make  use  of  it.  an<l 
gratefully  acknowledge  my  indebtedness. 

A  very  interesting  account  of  an  entomological  excursion  by  Marsham  and 
Kirby  into  the  Isle  of  Ely,  Northamptonshire,  and  home  by  Huntingdonshire, 
Cambridge,  and  Norwich,  in  July,  1797,  is  given  in  Freeman's  "Life."  Brief 
reference  is  also  made  to  an  entomological  excursion  l)y  Kirby,  Marsliam,  and 
Alexander  Macleay ;  but  neither  the  date  nor  scientific  details  are  given. 

But  a  letter,  to  Kirby,  dated  "Transport  Office,  5th  Novemlx-r,  1802."  is  of 
the  gi-eatest  interest,  because  it  is  the  earliest  record,  by  himself,  of  his  interest 


THE  society's  HERITAGE  PEOM   THE   MACLEAYS.  571 

in  entomology  that  ^ve  have,  written  after  his  return  from  a  visit  to  Scotland : 
"Jly  dear  Friend, — I  return  you  my  best  thanks  for  your  letter,  which  I  would 
have  answered  from  Caithness,  if  I  had  met  with  anything  worth  communicating. 
But  I  could  only  tell  you  of  my  being-  prevented  from  looking  after  insects  by 
continued  rains,  snow,  and  high  winds,  during  the  whole  of  my  stay  in  the  county. 
Indeed,  so  bad  a  season  was  never  known ;  and  a  more  serious  consequence 
than  my  entomological  disappointment  is,  that  the  crop  of  oats  in  Caithness  has 
almost  entirely  failed.  Notwithstanding  the  unfavourable  state  of  the  weather, 
however,  I  was  much  gratified  by  my  visit  to  the  north.  I  had  reason  to  believe 
that  very  considerable  improvement  had  been  made  in  my  native  county  during 
the  sixteen  years  I  had  been  absent;  but,  I  assure  you,  I  found  the  county  im- 
proved far  beyond  my  most  sanguine  expectations."      .... 

"In  order  that  I  might  see  as  much  as  possible  of  the  north  of  Scotland,  I 
\isited  the  Orkney-  Islands,  and  the  north  coast  of  Scotland,  as  far  as  Cape 
Wrath."     .      .      .'     . 

"Through  the  whole  of  my  travels,  I  lost  no  oppoitunity  of  collecting  insects. 
Indeed,  I  collected  almost  every  one  that  I  saw.  I  have,  in  the  whole,  about  250 
or  300  specimens,  but  they  are  not  yet  arrived  here ;  and  I  know  not  whether  there 
be  anything  new.  There  are  very  few  Hymenoptera.  If  there  be  any  duplicates 
worth  your  having,  they  are  yours." 

The  offer  of  duplicates  of  Hymenoptera  recalls  the  fact  that,  in  the  early  part 
of  the  year,  one  of  Kirby's  many  contributions  to  science  had  been  published, 
■'Monographia  Apum  Anglise,"  Ipswich,  1802. 

Alexander  Macleay's  collection  thus  probably  began  with  British  insects  which 
he  himself  collected,  or  obtained  by  exchange  with  his  entomological  friends. 
The  earliest  published  reference  to  his  active  interest  in  exotic  insects  known  to 
me  is  to  be  found  in  a  "Memoir  of  Dru  Drury,"  contained  in  Vol.  xv.,  of  "The 
Naturalist's  Library,"  presumably  written  by  the  Editor,  Sir  WiUiam  Jardine 
(1846) .  The  writer  says:  "An  individual  to  whom  Drury  showed  much  kindness, 
in  the  hope  of  being  supplied  through  his  means  with  the  insects  of  New  South 
Wales,  was  J.  Vi .  Lewin,  author  of  a  small,  but  original,  and  really  valuable 
work,  entitled  "A  Natural  History  of  the  Lepidopterous  Insects  of  New  South 
Wales."  It  appears  from  Lewin's  letters  that  he  was  in  a  great  measure  illiterate, 
and  had  been  subjected  to  many  difficulties  so  that  it  was  a  good  while  before  he 
could  do  much  towards  the  fulfilment  of  Drury's  wishes.  They  continued,  how- 
ever, to  communicate  with  each  other  for  a  considerable  time;  Di-ury  supplying 
goods  to  no  small  amount,  which  were  to  be  repaid  in  insects.  In  his  necessities, 
Lewin  is  not  backward  in  his  demands  on  the  liberality  of  his  friend,  who  sup- 
plied him,  among  many  other  miscellaneous  articles,  with  the  copperplates  on 
which  he  engraved  his  insects  and  birds,  and  even  with  the  paper  for  printing 
them.  Thomas  Marsham,  author  of  the  Entomologia  Britannica,  and  Alexander 
Macleay,  afterwards  united  with  Druiy  in  advancing  money  to  Lewin  while  he 
was  at  Botany  Bay,  expecting  the  value  to  be  returned  to  them  in  insects." 

Dru  Drury  [172,5-1804]  was  a  very  remarkable  man,  a  goldsmith,  silversmith, 
and  cutler,  and  one  of  the  "most  zealous  and  successful  collectors  of  insects  that 
ever  prosecuted  the  study  in  this  country."  He  was  also  the  author  of  "Illustra- 
tions of  Exotic  Entomology,"  3  vols.  (1770-82),  "in  which  be  made  the  most  in- 
teresting objects  of  his  collection  known  to  the  public." 

After  his  death,  the  collection  was  sold,  the  sale  lasting  for  three  days  (May 
23-25, 1805) .     Professor  J.  0.  Westwood  issued  a  second  edition  of  the  "Illustra- 


572  president's  address. 

tions"  (3  vols.,  1837),  and,  in  the  preface,  he  gives  the  names  of  the  purchasers 
of  some  of  the  lots,  and  the  prices  paid,  as  an  interesting  record.  Among  those 
given,  Mr.  Macleay  was  the  purchaser  of  Lot  64,  ''Papiliu  claviger  and  five 
others  (£7/10/)";  Lot  104,  "Thirteen  species  of  the  Buprestis  genus  (£8)"; 
Lot  112,  "Cetonia  hamata,  nitens^  grandis,  Scarabaeus  festivus,  and  12  others 
(£17)";  and  Lot  123,  "A  variety  of  small  insects  of  the  Mordella,  Forficula,  and 
other  genera,  among  which  are  Diopsis  lehneumonia,  and  also  a  species  of 
Paussus,   37  specimens    (£7)." 

The  first  published  reference  to  Alexander  Macleay's  collection,  that  I  know 
of,  is  to  be  found  in  the  Preface  to  "An  Epitome  of  the  Natural  History  of  the 
Insects  of  New  Holland,  New  Zealand,  New  Guinea,  Otaheite,  and  other  Islands 
in  the  Indian,  Southern  and  Pacific  Oceans;  with  Descriptions  and  one  hundred 
and  fifty-three  beautifully-coloured  Plates  of  the  more  splendid,  beautiful,  and 
interesting  Insects,  hitherto  discovered  in  those  Countries,"  &c. :  By  E .  Donovan, 
F.L.S.,  published  in  1805.  Besides  specimens  in  Sir  Joseph  Banks'  collection, 
and  in  his  own,  some  of  them  purchased  at  the  sale  of  Drury's  Collection,  "The 
author  has  also  further  to  acknowledge  the  benefit  he  has  derived  from  inspecting 
two  other  cabinets  of  celebrity  in  this  country,  without  the  assistance  of  which 
the  present  illustration  would  have  been  far  less  copious  and  interesting  than  it  is 
at  this  time:  these  are  the  cabinets  of  Mr.  FranciUon,  and  that  of  A.  Macleay, 
Esq.,  to  both  of  whom  he  begs  leave  to  express  his  warmest  thanks  for  this  testi- 
mony of  their  friendship."  The  copy  of  this  rare  book  in  the  Society's  library 
was  purchased  and  presented  by  Sir  William  Macleay,  the  only  copy  of  it  which 
he  had  seen. 

Another  letter  from  A.  Macleay  to  Kirby,  dated  20th  February,  1805,  is  of 
very  special  interest.  The  writer  says:  "I  have  been  describing  eighteen  Botany 
Bay  Lepidopterous  insects  which  are  about  to  be  published  by  Lewin,  with  all 
their  changes  and  natural  history.  Amongst  them  there  is  a  most  distinct  new 
genus  (in  my  opinion),  which  I  propose  to  name  Nycterobius  from  NuxTopoj3io<; 
Noctu  victum  quaerens.  The  caterpillars  form  for  themselves  holes  in 
the  trunks  of  trees,  where  they  hide  themselves  in  the  daytime:  at  night,  they 
come  out  and  gnaw  off  leaves,  which  they  drag  to  their  holes;  and  when  they 
have  provided  a  sufficiency  for  the  nest  day's  consumption,  they  retire  and  feed 
leisurely,  with  their  heads  towards  the  mouth  of  the  hole,  which  is  covered  by  a 
curious  contrivance.      .      .      .     Pray  when  shall  we  see  you  in  town?" 

The  first  edition  of  Lewin's  book,  entitled  "A  Natural  History  of  the  Lepi- 
dopterous Insects  of  New  South  Wales.  Collected,  engraved,  and  faithfully 
painted  after  Nature.  By  John  William  Lewin,  A.L.S.,  late  of  Parramatta,  New 
South  Wales.  Illustrated  with  18  Plates  (small  4to),"  was  published  in  London 
in  the  same  year,  1805.  Some  time  before  its  publication,  however,  a  circular 
entitled  "Proposals  for  publishing  by  subscription  a  small  work  of  Phatena  In- 
sects of  New  South  Wales"  had  been  distributed.  A  second  edition,  with  an  addi- 
tional plate,  was  issued  in  1822.  The  book  was  dedicated  to  the  Right  Hon. 
Lady  Arden,  "in  grateful  remembrance  of  that  goodness  which  gave  the  author 
an  opportunity  of  employing  his  talent,  as  it  were,  in  a  new  world."  As  already 
mentioned.  Drury,  Marshara,  and  Macleay  also  assisted  Lewin. 

J.  W.  Lewin  and  Thomas  Lewin  were  the  sons  of  William  Lewin,  F.L.S. 
(ob.  c.  1795) .  the  "best  zoological  painter,  and  one  of  the  most  practical  natural- 
ists of  his  day"  (Swainson),  and  author  of  "The  Birds  of  Great  Britain"  (7  vols.. 


THE  society's  heritage  from  the  macleats.  573 

1789-95;  second  edition,  8  vols,  4to.,  1796-1801),  "The  Insects  of  Great  Britain" 
(1  vol.,  4to.,  containing  the  Papilios  only,  1795),  and  of  a  paper,  "Observations 
respecting  some  rare  British  Insects"  (Trans.  Linn.  Soc,  Vol.  iii.,  1797) ;  and  a 
contemporary  of  Dru  Drury,  and  A.  Macleay.  Drury  was  always  on  the  lookout 
for  opportunities  of  getting  into  touch  with  intending  travellers  and  others  about 
to  visit  foreign  countries.  In  1771,  with  the  financial  co-operation  of  Sir  Joseph 
Banks,  the  Duchess  of  Portland  and  some  others,  he  had  enabled  Henry  Smeath- 
man  to  go  to  Africa  as  a  travelling  naturalist  and  collector.  With  his  know- 
ledge of  the  Lewin  family,  he  was  able  to  get  into  touch  with  J.  W.  Lewin  be- 
fore the  latter  left  for  Australia. 

J.  W.  Lewin  ai'rived  in  Sydney  in  1800.  The  plates  for  his  book  were  en- 
graved and  coloured  by  himself  in  1803,  in  Parramatta.  They  were  the  earliest 
engravings  produced  in  Australia.  The  text  was  printed  in  London,  bound  up 
with  the  plates  as  sent  home  to  his  brother  Thomas  Lewin,  and  issued  as  a  book 
in  1805.  But  with  the  plates,  J.  W.  Lewin  sent  home  a  made-up  complete  copy, 
with  a  title-page  and  some  text  in  manuscript,  as  far  as  he  could  complete  it.  This 
copy,  together  with  the  original  coloured  drawings  of  some  of  the  larvse  and  pupae, 
were  afterwards  acquired  by  Alexander  Macleay,  and  are  now  in  the  Society's  pos- 
session. Possibly  examples  of  the  perfect  insects,  and  a  letter  of  supplementary 
information  may  also  have  been  sent;  but  if  so,  there  is  no  available  record  of 
them.  A  comparison  of  the  original  copy  with  the  book  as  published,  explains 
what  is  stated  in  Macleay's  letter  to  Kirby. 

J.  W.  Lewin  was  an  artist,  a  good  observer,  and  a  practical  entomologist, 
but  without  technical  knowledge,  and  without  books.  The  text,  as  he  sent  it  to 
England,  was  insufficient,  and  not  in  a  suitable  form  for  publication.  It  con- 
sisted merely  of  the  explanations  of  the  figures,  more  or  less  copious,  of  the 
larv«  and  their  habits,  but  without  descriptions  of  the  perfect  insects,  to  which 
only  fanciful  vernacular  names  were  given.  The  title-page  was  "Natural  History 
of  Eighteen  Nondescript  Moths  with  Descriptions,"  &e. 

Thomas  Lewin  was  an  artist,  and  had  not  quite  all  the  necessary  technical 
knowledge  to  enable  him  to  supply  the  deficiencies  in  the  text,  as  written  by  his 
brother,  notwithstanding  the  statement  in  the  last  sentence  of  the  Preface :  "Of 
the  style  of  the  publication,  and  the  aiTangement  of  the  subject,  we  can  only 
say,  being  well  instructed  in  the  Field  of  Nature,  we  have  endeavoured  to  render 
the  book  useful."  As  Editor  of  the  contemplated  book,  therefore,  he  sought  the 
advice  and  assistance  of  the  President  and  Secretary  of  the  Linnean  Society,  as 
narrated  in  the  Preface :  "And  all  that  was  left  for  us  to  do  was  merely  to  define 
the  genus,  and  name  the  "individual  in  some  cases,  which  we  have  done  sometimes 
from  the  plant  on  which  the  insect  is  found;  and  for  the  names  of  those  plants 
we  make  our  acknowledgments  to  the  learned  President  of  the  Linnean  Society, 
Dr.  Smith,  and  also  acknowledge  the  kind  observations  of  the  Secretary  of  the 
Linnean  Society,  Alexander  Macleay,  Esq.,  for  whose  abilities  as  an  Entomologist, 
we  have  the  highest  respect,  though  we  cannot  avoid  differing  greatly  from  him  on 
some  points."  Dr.  Smith  supplied  the  names  of  the  food-plants,  as  well  as  ha 
could,  for  some  of  them  were  without  flowers  or  fruits.  A.  Macleay  offered,  or 
consented  after  being  asked,  to  draw  up  the  necessary  technical  descriptions  of 
the  perfect  insects,  with  the  addition  of  binomial  names;  and,  judging  from  his 
letter  to  Kirby,  did  so.  What,  then,  were  the  points  on  which  Thomas  Lewin,  as 
editor  of  the  book,  differed  from  him? 


574  president's  address. 

On  the  eviclenee,  it  seems  to  be  a  reasonable  conclusion  that  Dr.  Smith  and 
A.  JIacleay  successfully  opposed  the  publication  of  nondescript  insects,  and 
that  T.  LewLn  accepted  and  made  use  of  the  technical  descriptions;  but  that, 
■wishing  to  keep  the  naming  of  the  insects  as  much  as  possible  in  his  own  hands, 
he  did  not  accept  al!  the  binomial  names  proposed  by  Mr.  Macleay,  and  altered 
some  at  least  of  them  to  suit  his  own  ideas.  The  proposed  new  generic  name 
did  not  get  into  print;  and  A.  Macleay  certainly  cannot  be  held  responsible  for 
the  specific  names  of  Sphinx  Ardenia,  Tortrix  Australqna,  and  especially  that 
of  the  insect  now  known  as  Charagia  lignivora  Lewin,  but  described  and  figured 
in  Plate  xvi.,  and  referred  to  in  the  index,  as  Hepialus  Ligniveren.  Nor  is  the 
expression  "Noctua  Hepialus"  likely  to  have  been  his,  in  the  statement — "The 
larvaa  of  this  beautiful  Noctua  Hepialus  feeds"  (sic),  &c.  From  these,  and  other 
peculiarities,  T.  Lewin  seems  to  have  been  responsible  for  the  form  in  which  all 
the  text,  except  the  technical  descriptions  and  tlie  sectional  names,  finally  ap- 
peared . 

Another  relic  of  J.  "W.  Lewin  acquired  by  A.  Macleay  was  what  seem  to 
be  first  impressions  of  three  of  the  plates  of  Lewin's  "Birds  of  New  Holland," 
the  first  edition  of  which  wa.s  published  in  1808.  The  plates  are  roughly  bound- 
up  with  three  pages  of  text  in  manuscript,  without  binomial  names,  or  descriptions 
which  an  ornithologist  would  consider  satisfactory.  They  were  perhaps  intended 
as  a  sort  of  prospectus  for  possible  subscribers  to  the  work. 

Some  very  interesting  information  about  Alexander  Macleay's  entomological 
acquisitions  are  given  in  a  letter  from  Kirby  to  his  friend  Spenee,  in  a  letter  of 
date    September  24th.  1806:   "I    have  boxes    [of  insects]     from   Haworth    and 

[W.   J.]   Hooker  to  name In   London,   I  went   over  Sir  Joseph's 

[Banks]  Staphylini;  but  there  was  nothing  very  remarkable  among  them,  except 
S.  aureus,  which  is  of  the  same  family  with  S.  murinus,  &c.  I  found  several  non- 
descript species  in  Mr.  M'Lcay's  cabinet,  which  he  purchased  from  the  Leverian 
Museum,  and  one  large  and  blue  one  from  old  Drury's  ealiinet.  And  the  ]iiece 
of  entomological  news  I  can  tell  you — that  ]\I'Leay  has  purchased  all  Donovan's 
foreign  insects,  a  most  valuable  addition  to  his  collection,  which,  in  value,  falls 
not  far  short  of  Franeillon's."  [p.  281.]  These  are  the  only  records  of  purchases 
from  the  two  collections  mentioned  that  I  know  of.  Sir  Ashton  Lever,  who  lived 
at  Alkington,  near  Manchester,  brought  his  collection  to  London  about  1775,  where  i 
it  was  opened  to  the  public.  Tt  was  subsequently  disposed  of  by  lottery  in  1785, 
and  came  into  the  possession 'of  Mr.  Pai-kinson.  It  was  eventually  sold  by  auc- 
tion in  180(5,  the  sale  lasting  about  a  month.  It  was  a  celebrated  collection  in  its 
day,  and  the  sale  attracted  much  attention.  Some  of  the  specimens  had  been 
presented  to  Lever  by  Captain  Cook. 

Alexander  Macleay's  Collection  was  supplemented  by  extensive  purchases 
from  the  collections  of  Mr.  Francillon  and  Mr.  Marsliam,  in  the  years  1818  and 
1819.  We  have,  in  the  Society's  library,  ^^Ir.  Macleay's  copies  of  the  sale- 
catalogues  of  these  collections,  with  MS.  notes,  possibly  representing  his  purchases. 
I  have  been  unable  to  find  any  biographical  details  respecting  these  two  entomolo- 
gists. 

The  Francillon  Collection,  a  celebrated  one  in  its  day,  was  sold  by  auction,  in 
.Tune,  1818,  shortly  after  the  owner's  decease.  Charles  Lyell,  the  geologist,  was 
interested  in  entomology  in  his  younger  days.  In  a  letter  to  liis  father,  written 
from  Yarmouth,  on  .Tuly  20tli.  1S17.   after  a   visit  to   London,   lie  says:   "I  visited 


THE  society's   heritage  from    the    3IACLEAYS.  575 

the  cast   of  Phidias   and   (talking  ot  thing's   on  a   gi'and  scale)    the  elephant  at 

Exeter  Change;  also  Bullock's  Museum Saw  the  whole  of  Tran- 

cillon's  collection  of  British  and  foreign  insects,  the  finest  in  the  world  .... 
Let  those  who  wish  to  have  an  idea  of  the  magnificence  of  Nature,  visit  the  ele- 
phant, those  who  wish  to  judge  of  her  varietas  insatiabilis,  see  FrancUlon's  col- 
lection" [Life,  Letters,  and  Journals,  Vol.  i.,  pp.  40-41,  1881].  The  Catalogue 
speaks  of  it  as  undoubtedly  "the  most  magnificent  Cabinet  of  Insects  that  has 
e^•er  been  brought  to  sale  in  this  country;  containing  many  unique  and  remark- 
able Specimens,  and  generally  in  a  high  state  of  Preservation."  The  sale  lasted 
eight  days,  and  realised  £725/11/6.  The  collection  was  offered  in  122  lots,  con- 
tained in  72  drawers,  in  three  cabinets,  of  64,  36,  and  24  drawers.  One  feature  of 
the  collection  of  interest  is,  that  it  contained  specimens  collected  and  presented  to 
the  owner,  by  Surgeon-General  John  White,  who  came  out  to  Australia  with  the 
First  Fleet,  under  Captain  Phillip,  in  January,  1788. 

Freeman,  Kirby's  biographer,  gives  some  very  interesting  details  about  the 
sale  of  Francillon's  collection.  Kirby  attended  the  sale:  "He  made  some  con- 
siderable additions  to  his  treasures,  though  not  nearly  to  the  extent  of  his  friend 
Mr.  [A.]  McLeay,  who  purchased  little  short  of  half  the  collection.  Mr.  W. 
[S.]  McLeay  thus  notices  the  circumstances  [in  a  letter  to  Kirby] — 'I  understand, 
from  my  father,  that  you  are  one  of  the  soiols  of  the  sale  of  Mr.  Francillon's 
cabinet,  giving  it  life,  activity,  and,  above  all,  value.  I  suppose  you  have  added 
extensively  to  your  collection :  as  for  my  father,  he  has  made  his  as  brilliant  for 
the  amateur  as  it  is  instructive  for  the  entomological  student,  but  to  arrange  it, 
'hie  labor,  hoe  opus  est.'  The  French  Museum  has  been  prevailed  on  to  let  my 
father  have  one  of  the  Hexodous;  so  that  now  he  will  have  every  described  genus 
of  Latreille's  family  of  Lamellieomes'  "  [p.  349]. 

Mr.  Marsham's  collection  was  sold  by  auction  in  September.  1810,  about 
two  months  before  his  decease  on  26th  November  following.  The  owner  was 
a  foundation  member  of  the  Linnean  Society,  the  first  Secretary  (1788-98),  and 
Treasurer  from  1798-1816.  He  was  the  author  of  the  "Entomologica  Britannica," 
of  which  only  the  first  volume  (Coleoptera)  was  published  (1802)  ;  and  of  nine 
entomological  papers  contributed  to  the  Transactions  of  the  Linnean  Society. 
His  collection  was  !.n  important  one,  though  not  so  extensive  as  Francillon's. 
The  sale  lasted  for  three  days.  The  collection  was  offered  in  115  lots,  contained 
in  36  drawers,  in  two  cabinets,  each  of  24  drawers.  The  cabinet  of  British  in- 
sects, described  in  the  Ent.  Brit,  was  offered  separately  in  one  lot.  Twenty-eight 
additional  lots,  including  the  two  cabinets,  five  boxes  of  insects,  a  microscope,  and 
sundries,  were  also  offered.  But  beyond  some  pencil  entries  of  prices  in  A.  Mac- 
leay's  copy  of  the  catalogue,  no  further  information  is  available. 

Another  important  collection,  from  which  Alexander  Macleay  purchased 
specimens,  was  that  of  General  Thomas  Davies,  of  the  Royal  Artillery,  "well 
known  as  a  most  accurate  observer  of  nature,  and  an  indefatigable  collector  of  her 
treasures,  as  well  as  a  most  admirable  painter  of  them"  [Kirby  and  Spence, 
Introd.  to  Entom.,  i.,  108].  W.  S.  Macleay,  in  his  paper  on  the  "Annulosa  of 
South  Africa"  (p.  74),  published  in  London  in  1838,  shortly  before  he  left  for 
Australia,  says  of  CerapteruR  latipes  [Paussidre] — "The  original  specimen  which 
General  Davies  sent  to  Swcderus  for  description  is  now  in  my  collection,  my 
father  having  purchased  it  at  the  sale  of  the  General's  museum."  But  neither 
the  sale-catalogue  nor  anv  further  information  are  available. 


576  president's  address. 

General  Davies  was  interested  in  birds  as  well  as  insects;  and  he  described, 
with  a  coloured  figure,  the  Lyre-bird  ol'  Australia,  in  his  paper  "Description  of 
Maenura  superba,  a  Bird  of  New  South  Wales,"  Trans.  Linn.  Soc,  Vol.  vi.,  1802, 
p.  207. 

Another  important  addition  to  the  Macleay  Collection  was  the  specimens  of 
insects  and  some  miscellaneous  invertebrata  collected  by  Captain  P.  P.  King. 
These  are  referred  to  by  W.  S.  Macleay  in  his  paper,  "On  the  Structure  of  the 
Tarsus  in  the  Tetramerous  and  Trimerous  Coleoptera"  [Trans.  Linn.  Soc,  Vol.  xv., 
p.  68]  in  these  words: — "I  had  scarcely,  however,  corrected  the  press  of  the  first 
number  of  that  work  [Annulosa  Javanica],  when  Captain  King  of  the  Navy,  ona 
of  those  enterprising  and  accomplished  navigators  who  at  the  present  moment 
confer  so  much  honour  on  our  country,  requested  me  to  examine  the  insects  which 
he  had  collected  during  his  late  expedition  to  explore  the  coasts  of  New  Holland." 
The  record  of  this  collection,  comprising  192  species  of  insects,  of  which  81  were 
described  as  new,  four  species  of  Arachnida,  and  about  30  of  marine  inverte- 
brata, collected,  under  great  drawbacks,  by  Captain  P.  P.  King  during  his  sur- 
vey of  the  Intertropical  and  Western  Coasts  of  Australia  between  the  years 
1818  and  1822,  is  given  in  King's  "Narrative  of  a  Survey,"  &c.  [Vol.  ii..  Appen- 
dix, p.  438,  1827].  The  collection  was  apparently  presented  to  W.  S.  Macleay 
by  Captain  King.  In  his  paper  on  "The  Genera  and  Species  of  the  Amycteridae," 
communicated  to  the  Entomological  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  by  William 
Macleay,  on  7th  August,  1865,  the  author  says  that  the  insects  originally  described 
by  W.  S.  Macleay  in  the  work  above  cited,  "are  in  the  late  Mr.  [W.  S.] 
MacLea/s  collection  now  in  my  possession"  [Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.  Wales,  Vol. 
i.,  p.  267].  The  rest  of  Captain  King's  collection  was  apparently  presented  either 
to  the  British  Museum  or  to  the  Museum  of  the  Linnean  Society  [Trans.  Linn. 
Soc,  xiv.,  p.  603].. 

A.  Macleay's  collection  of  sale-catalogues  comprises  five  others  besides  the  two 
mentioned — one  of  the  "collection  of  insects  of  a  gentleman  well-known  for  his 
knowledge  of  Nat.  History"  [name  not  given]  sold  in  June,  1814;  two  of  the 
three  parts  of  the  Catalogue  of  Bullock's  London  Museum,  sold  in  April-May, 
1819,  the  sale  lasting  for  eighteen  days;  the  catalogue  of  the  duplicates  from  Mr. 
Stephens'  collection,  sold  in  May,  1825;  and  W.  S.  Macleay's  copy  of  the  South 
African  Sluseum  [vertebrates,  especially  birds,  and  anthropological  specimens] 
sold  in  June,  1838.  The  first  and  second  of  these  have  marginal  notes  in  i)eucil. 
and  may  indicate  purchases. 

Numerous  specimens  in  Alexander  Macleay's  coUection  were  described,  and,  in 
some  cases,  figured,  while  in  his  possession ;  but  others  had  become  type-speci- 
mens before  he  acquired  them.  Donovan,  iu  his  "Epitome"  (1805)  described 
and  figured  certain  species,  as  already  mentioned.  At  a  later  date,  descriptions, 
sometimes  with  figures,  of  specimens  in  the  Macleay  Collection  were  published  by 
Dr.  W.  E.  Leach  in  his  "Zoological  Miscellany"  (3  vols.,  1814-17);  by  E.  Dono- 
van,  in  the  Naturalist's  Repository  (Vols,  i.-ui.,  1823-25);  by  N.  A.  Vigors,  in 
a  series  of  papers  entitled  "Descriptions  of  some  rare,  interesting,  or  hitherto 
uncharacterized  subjects  of  Zoology,"  in  the  Zoological  Journal,  Vol.  i.,  pp.  413 
et  seq.,  537  et  seq.;  Vol.  ii.,  pp  238  et  seq.;  514  et  seq.  (1825-26)  ;  and  especially 
by  W.  S.  Macleay,  in  the  Horse  Entomologicae  (1819-21). 

The  specimens,  mostly  of  Australian  species,  described  by  Dr.  Leach  from 
Alexander  Macleay's  collection,  in   addition  to  birds  (one,  Polophil-u,i  phasianus, 


THE  society's  heritage  from  the  macleats.  577 

an  Australian  species),  included  a  Volute  (F.  lineata)  and  various  insects  from 
Australia,  including  Phasma  violescens  (figured  from  the  splendid  collection  of 
Mr.  Macleay)  ;  Myrmelemi  erythrocephala,  Mantis  Australiae,  Nymphes  myrme- 
leonides,  Hipparchia  Banksiae,  and  Papilio  Macleayanus,  "named  after  my  much 
esteemed  friend,  Alexander  Macleay,  Esq.,  Secretary  of  the  Linnean  Society,  to 
whom  I  cannot  suflBciently  express  my  full  sense  of  his  repeated  marks  of  kind- 
ness and  friendship";  one  species  from  New  Caledonia;  and  one  or  two  from  un- 
certain localities. 

The  insects  described  by  Vigors  included  specimens  collected  in  the  vicinity 
of  Madras,  and  brought  to  England  by  Major  Sale,  of  the  East  India  Company's 
service;  others  from  North  Africa,  collected  by  Captain  Lyon,  R.N.,  the  com- 
panion of  Mr.  Ritchie,  who  died  at  Mourzouk,  on  20th  November,  1819;  and  some 
from  Brazil,  collected  by  Mr.   Such. 

In  the  first  part  of  the  Horse  Entomological  (1819),  W.  S.  Macleay  men- 
tions that  his  father  possessed  a  cabinet  containing  nearly  1800  species  of  the 
Linnean  genus  Scarahaeus;  and  the  study  of  these,  mainly,  resulted  in  his  first 
contribution  to  knowledge.  Specimens  were  described  or  recorded  from  Northern 
and  Southern  Europe,  North  Africa,  Cape  of  Good  Hope,  Mauritius,  Isle  of 
Bourbon,  India,  East  India,  China,  Java,  North  America,  Georgia,  South 
America,  Brazil,  Demerara,  Cayenne,  Trinidad,  Jamaica,  Australasia,  New  Hol- 
land, and  Van  Dienian's  Land.  The  material  studied  in  the  second  part  was  in 
other  collections,  chiefly  that  of  the  British  Museum. 

As  evidence  that  Alexander  Macleay's  official  connection  with  the  Linneaa 
Society  had  broadened  his  interest  in  Natural  History,  it  is  interesting  to  note 
that  this  was  not  wholly  confined  to  insects.  At  one  time  he  seems  to  have 
had  a  collection  of  South  American  bird-skins.  This  is  referred  to  by  two 
writers.  Dr.  Leach  says  of  Laniux  lineatus :  "This  elegant  bird,  which  is  figured 
from  Mr.  MacLeay's  collection,  inhabits  Berbice"  [Naturalists'  Miscellany,  Vol.  i., 
p.  22,  1817] .         ' 

Mr.  G.  Such,  of  Magdalen  Hall,  Oxford,  who  had  resided  for  some  time  in 
Brazil,  in  describing  a  new  species  of  the  family  Laniadae,  Thamnophilus  macu- 
latiis,  says  of  it :  "I  had  originally  conceived  that  my  specimen  was  the  first  which 
had  been  brought  to  England ;  but  I  found  a  second  in  Mr.  MacLeay's  collection. 
Its  chief  difference,  as  has  been  pointed  out  to  me  by  Mr.  W.  S. 
MacLeay,"  &c.  [Zoological  Journal,  i.,  p.  557] .  In  both  these  cases  the  speci- 
mens referred  to  were  probably  included  in  the  first  two  of  Alexander  Macleay's 
donations  to  the  Museum  of  the  Linnean  Society — "34  Birds  from  Berbice  [Trans. 
Linn.  Soc,  vol.  x.,  p.  413,  1811] ;  and  "11  specimens  of  Birds  from  New  South 
Wales,  not  before  in  the  Society's  collection"  [Vol.  xii.,  p.  598,  1818].  This  and 
his  third  donation  of  "Two  specimens  of  Quadrupeds,  and  six  Birds  from  New 
South  Wales,"  as  recorded  in  Vol  xiii.,  p.  636,  1822,  show  that  he  was  in  receipt 
of  specimens  from  Australia,  other  than  insects,  from  undisclosed  sources,  even 
at  this  early  period. 

Except  for  a  few  specimens  which  W.  S.  Macleay  needed  to  retain  for  study, 
the  Macleay  Collection,  as  it  was  brought  out  to  Australia  by  Alexander  Macleay, 
in  1825,  comprised  British  insects  collected  by  A.  Macleay;  British  or  other 
European  insects  collected  by  W.  S.  Macleay;  gifts  from  or  exchanges  with  their 
friends;  specimens  purchased  from  at  least  six  important  private  collections  [Dru 
Drury's,    Ashton    Lever's    (Parkinson's),  E.    Donovan's,    Francillon's,   Marsham's, 


578  president's  address. 

General  Davies',  and  possibly  some  others] ;  and  acquisitions  of  sj^eeimens  Irom 
Brazil,  India,  North  Africa,  Australia,  and  elsewhere,  possibly  some  of  them 
donations,  but  the  records  of  them  are  indefinite.  As  mentioned  later,  some 
specimens  were  left  with  W.  S.  Maeleay  to  enable  him  to  continue  his  work  on 
them.     These  were  afterwards  brought  to  Australia  by  him  in  1839. 

With  the  removal  of  the  Maeleay  Collection  to  Australia,  the  most  important 
private  entomological  collections  in  England  seem  to  have  been  the  Rev.  F.  W. 
Hope's,   Tvirby's,  Stephen's,   Haworth's,  Westwood's,   and  Melley's. 

Kirby  and  Spence,  authors  of  the  well-known  ''Introduction  to  Entomology," 
thus  express  their  appreciation  of  the  Maeleay  Collection  and  of  the  owner's  en- 
couragement: "To  Alexander  MacLeay,  Esq.,  they  are  under  particular  obliga- 
tions for  the*  warm  interest  he  has  all  along  taken  in  the  work,  the  judicious  adv^ice 
he  has  on  many  occasions  given,  the  free  access  in  which  he  has  indulged  the 
authors  to  his  unrivalled  cabinet  and  well-stored  library,  and  the  numerous  other 
attentions  and  accommodations  by  which  he  has  materially  assisted  them  in  its 
progress"  [first  ed.,  p.  xxi.,  1815] . 

Alexander  Macleay's  ofiicial  connection  with  the  Linnean  Society  must  have 
stimulated  and  -widened  his  interest  in  Natural  History,  and,  at  the  same  time, 
have  brought  him  into  personal  contact  with  many  of  the  eminent  men  of  the 
day.  He  was  elected  a  Fellow  of  the  Royal  Society  in  1809,  when  Sir  Joseph 
Banks  was  President;  and  to  the  Council  in  1824,  when  Sir  Humphry  Davy  was 
President.  Sir  Stamford  Raffles,  first  President  of  the  Zoological  Society,  was 
also  a  member  of  the  Council  at  this  time.  Macleay's  friends  of  whom  we  have 
records,  besides  the  entomologists  Kirby  and  Marsham,  included  Robert  Brown, 
and  Sir  James  E.  Smith,  Founder  and  President  of  the  Linnean  Society. 

Robert  Brown  (1773-1858)  had  collected  zoological  specimens,  including  in- 
sects, as  well  as  botanical  material,  during  his  visit  to  Australia  and  Tasmania. 
We  may  be  sure,  therefore,  that  before  accepting  the  offer  of  an  appointment  in 
Australia,  A.  Maeleay  had  discussed  the  prospects  with  the  great  botanist.  The 
fact  that  he  brought  his  collection  with  him  seems  to  show"  that  the  fauna  was  one 
of  the  attractions  to  migrate.  The  records  of  their  friendship  are  meagre,  but  in- 
dicative of  warm  regard.  R.  Brown  named  the  new  genus,  Macleai/a,  in  honour 
of  hLs  much  valued  friend,  in  1826.  Our  Society  is  fortunate  in  having  in  the 
library  four  reprints  of  papers  by  Robert  Brown,  with  inscriptions  to  Alex. 
McLeay,  Esq.,  from  his  "affectionate  friend"  or  from  his  "attached  friend." 

A  pleasing  record  of  Alexander  Macleay's  friendship  with  Sir  .James  E. 
Smith  is  given  in  the  Proceeding's  of  the  Linnean  Society.  1872-73,  p.  i.  At  the 
meeting  of  the  Society  held  on  November  7th,  1872.  Mr.  G.  Beutham,  President, 
in  the  chair — ''The  President  read  two  letters,  in  her  own  hand,  from  Lady 
Smith  (now  in  her  100th  year),  offering  for  the  acceptance  of  the  Society,  seventy- 
four  letters,  addressed  to  its  Founder  by  the  late  Alexander  M'Leay,  Esq.,  Secre- 
tary to  the  Society  from  1798-1825.  The  letters  were  accompanied  by  a  photo- 
graph from  the  portrait  of  Lady  Smith,  taken  by  Opie  in  1798,  signed,  and  bear- 
ing the  date  of  her  birth.  May  11,  1793.  Resolved,  that  tlie  Special  Thanks  of  the 
Society  l)e  presented  to  Lady  Smitli  for  this  very  valnahle  and  acceptable  dona- 
tion."' The  number  of  the  letters  is  perhaps  to  be  accounted  for  by  the  fact,  that 
Sir  .Tames  Smith's  home  was  in  Norwich,  tho\igh  for  some  time  he  occupied  a 
house  in  London. 

After  the  death  of  W.  S.  Maeleay,  in  J.nnuaiT.  18()5.  his  brother,  (Jeorge 
Maeleay,  inherited  the  family  heirlooms.     At  a  meeting  of  the  Linnean  Societv,  on 


THE  SOCIETT'S    heritage  prom    the    ilACLEAYS.  579 

December  16tb,  188G— "The  President  [W.  Carruthers,  F.R.S.]  announeed  that 
Sir  George  MacLeay,  K.C.M.G.,  F.L.S.,  bad  presented  to  the  Society  a  framed 
•water-colonr  portrait  of  the  Rev.  William  Kirby,  F.L.S.,  the  distinguished 
entomologist;  also  the  manuscripts  and  correspondence  of  his  father,  Alexander 
MacLeay  (elected  P.L.S.  1794),  for  many  years  Secretary  to  the  Society"  [Pro- 
ceedings, 188(1-87.  p.  ()].  But  these  have  not  so  far  been  utilised  for  biographical 
purposes . 

In  anticipation  of  this  evening's  meeting,  I  wrote  to  the  Council  of  the  Linnean 
Society  of  London  some  time  ago,  pointing  out  the  scanty  documentary  details  of 
the  early  scientific  life  of  Alexander  and  W.  S.  Macleay  available  to  us  here  in 
Australia,  and  that  we  were  without  a  portrait  of  any  kind  of  W.  S.  Macleay; 
and,  at  the  same  time,  asking  if  the  Coimcil  would  be  good  enough  to  spare  me 
copies  of  any  documents  that  would  be  of  special  interest  in  connection  with  our 
celebration  of  the  centenary  of  Sir  William  Macleay's  birth.  I  have  pleasure  in 
recording  my  indebtedness,  and  cordial  thanks,  both  to  the  Council  and  to  Dr.  B. 
Daydon  .Jackson,  General  Secretary,  who  has  kindly  sent  me  copies  of  five  very 
interesting  letters,  and  a  photograph  of  the  bust  of  W.  S.  Macleay  in  the  Society's 
possession. 

One  of  the  letters  referred  to,  from  Sir  .James  E.  Smith  [1759-1828]  to 
Alexander  Macleay,  dated  "Norwich,  March  13th,  1825,"  was  apparently  written 
in  reply  to  a  letter  announcing  the  writer's  acceptance  of  the  appointment  of 
Colonial  Secretary  of  New  South  Wales,  and  of  his  contemplated  departure  to 
the  antipodes.     The  portion  of  the  letter  of  most  interest  to  us  is  as  follows: — 

"My  dear  Friend, — Now  that  I  have  got  through  the  irksome  correspondence 
that  so  much  opprest  me — (rendered  most  irksome,  I  assure  you,  by  the  con- 
tinual association  of  your  departure,  which  weighed  like  a  millstone  upon  my 
heart),  I  may  indulge  in  more  pleasant  writing.  I  am  not  a  man  of  compli- 
ments, but  your  wide  removal,  as  it  were  to  another  world  (and  it  may  really  be 
so  with  respect  to  me),  seems  to  excuse  and  indeed  require  an  opening  of  heart 
between  us.  I  am  happy  to  recall  the  31  years  [1794-1825]  to  which  you  advert, 
and  to  say  with  all  sincerity,  that  so  far  from  misunderstanding  or  coolness,  I 
have  ever  felt  the  warmest  estimation  for  your  character,  the  most  grateful  sensi- 
bility to  your  constant  active  friendship  and  attention.  I  have  always  known 
where  to  find  you,  and  was  always  sure  you  would  do  the  kindest  and  most 
judicious  thing.  Judge  then  if  I  can  part  with  you  unmoved,  or  if  I  can  avoid 
being  warmly  interested  for  all  that  belongs  to  you ! — I  speak  now  not  with  much 
reference  to  our  Society,  for  which  you  have  done  so  much.  I  trust  we  shall 
choose  no  unworthy  successor  to  you — and  as  to  yourself,  I  would  not  suggest 
gloomy  ideas  of  your  great  undertaking,  which  I  trust  will  be  advantageous,  as  it 
is  certainly  highly  honourable.  It  must  on  some  accounts  be  delightful  to  you, 
and  as  a  naturalist  I  almost  envy  you.  For  the  sake  of  the  public  I  am  well 
persuaded  I  ought  to  rejoice.  May  God  preserve  your  life  to  do  all  the  good 
you  can,  and  to  benefit  your  family,  who  I  am  confident  will  be  worthy  of  you. 
Let  me,  my  valued  friend,  urge  one  thing  especially.  Take  the  utmost  care  of 
your  health — do  not  work  too  hard,  or  expose  yourself  to  anything  which  ex- 
perienced people  think  hazardous.     If   you   feel  well   and  strong,  spare  yourself, 

that  you  may  do  the  more  good I  hope  your  portrait  will  be  well 

done.    We  shall  gratify  ourselves  by  it,  more  than  we  honour  you 

Farewell  my  excellent  friend — I  need  not  say  how  often  I  shall  think  of  you,  nor 
how  entirely  I  am  ever  yours,  J.  E.   Smith." 


580  president's  address. 

The  portrait  referred  to  was  painted  in  oils  by  Sir  Thomas  Lawrence,  P.R.A., 
and  presented  by  subscribing  Fellows  to  the  Linnean  Society.  A  steel  engraving 
reproduced  from  this  portrait  by  C .  Fox  was  subsequently  issued.  The  late  Lady 
Macleay  was  good  enough  to  g^ve  me  three  copies  of  the  engraving.  One  is  hung 
in  the  Society's  Hall.  The  other  two,  I  presented  to  the  Australian  Museum  and 
the  Public  Library. 

A  report  of  the  Anniversary  Meeting  of  the  Linnean  Society,  held  on  24th 
May,  1825,  concludes  thus:  "The  Society  afterwards  dined  at  the  Freemason's 
Tavern,  where  the  presence  of  Sir  J.  E.  Smith  in  improved  health  added  much 
to  the  enjoyment  of  the  day.  Addresses  on  subjects  interesting  to  cultivators  of 
Natural  History  were  delivered  by  various  members,  and  other  men  of  science; 
amongst  others,  by  tha  venerable  Bishop  of  Carlisle,  Lord  Stanley,  the  Rev.  Df. 
Fleming,  and  the  respective  Presidents  of  the  Horticultural  and  Geological  Socie- 
ties. Numerous  expressions  of  resp6ct  and  cordial  esteem  were  called  forth  to- 
wards the  late  Secretary  of  the  Society,  Alexander  MacLeay,  Esq.,  F.R.S.,  on  the 
occasion  of  his  quitting  this  country  for  a  time,  to  occupy  the  important  station  of 
Colonial  Secretary  in  New  South  Wales"  [Zoological  Journal,  Vol.  ii.,  p.  278] . 

At  the  next  meeting,  on  June  7th,  1825,  it  is  recorded  that — "On  the  retire- 
ment of  Alexander  MacLeay,  Esq.^  F.R.S.,  &c.,  from  the  office  of  Secretary  of 
the  Society,  the  following  Minute,  recommended  by  the  Council  was  adopted  by 
the  General  Meeting  of  the  above  date,  \\z. — The  Linnean  Society  of  London 
take  the  earliest  opportunity  after  the  retirement  of  Alexander  MacLeay,  Esq., 
from  the  Secretaryship  of  the  Society,  to  record  upon  their  Minutes  the  high 
estimation  in  which  he  is  held  by  them  on  account  of  twenty-seven  years  of  un- 
remitted and  unrequited  labour  devoted  to  the  interests  of  science;  and  that  in 
quitting  for  a  tune  this  sphere  of  usefulness  to  fill  an  honourable  station  in  a  dis- 
tant country,  he  carries  with  hiir  the  cordial  esteem  and  sincere  regret  of  this 
Society." 

There  is  very  little,  in  the  way  of  records  of  his  own,  of  Alexander  Macleay's 
interest  in  the  fauna  and  flora  after  his  arrival  in  Australia  in  January,  1826. 
But  evidence  of  it  is  afforded  by  his  donations  of  zoological  and  botanical  speci- 
mens to  the  Linnean  Society's  Museum,  and  a  donation  to  the  Zoological  Society; 
and,  locally,  by  his  active  interest  in  the  Colonial  Museum,  later  the  Australian 
Museum.  Vigors  and  Horsfield  had  completed  the  first  part  of  an  important 
paper,  entitled  "Catalogue  of  the  New  Holland  Birds  in  the  Collection  of  the 
Linnean  Society"  [read  on  June  21st,  1825],  shortly  before  A.  Macleay  left  Lon- 
don. "In  the  introductory  remarks  to  this  paper,  the  authors  express  their  confi- 
dent expectation  that  the  deficiency  of  our  knowledge  of  the  habits  of  the  Birds 
of  Australia,  will  be  in  great  measure  supplied  by  the  researches  of  Mr.  A. 
MacLeay  during  his  future  residence  in  that  interesting  country''  [Zool.  .Tourn.,  ii., 
p.  279].  Mr.  Macleay's  official  duties  and  other  engagements  left  him  little 
time  for  studying  the  habits  of  Australian  birds,  as  was  aftei-wards  done  by  John 
Gould  and  Gilbert;  but  he  did  what  he  could  in  the  way  of  sending  specimens  for 
the  Linnean  collection,  as  follows : — "41  skins  of  Birds  from  New  Holland ;  54 
skins  of  Birds.  2  spp.  of  Squalus,  and  a  skull  of  a  third,  and  of  a  species  of 
Delphinus  [Trans.,  Vol.  xv.,  p.  533  (1827)]— 34  skins  of  Birds,  one  Bat  [Trans., 
Vol.  xvi.,  p.  794  (1829-33)]— A  Collection  of  Bird-Skins  and  Insects  from  New 
Holland  [Trans.,  Vol.  xvii.,  p.  597] — Specimens  of  126  species  of  Fruits  and 
Seeds  indigenous  to  New  South  Wales  [Trans.,  Vol.  xx.,  p.  505]. 


THE  society's  HERITAGE  PROM   THE   MACLEAYS.  581 

At  a  meeting  of  the  Zoological  Society  of  London,  on  May  12th,  1835 — "A 
letter  was  read,  addressed  to  the  Secretary  by  A.  MacLeay,  Esq.,  Colonial  Secre- 
tary, New  South  Wales,  dated  Sydney,  October  25,  1834.  It  stated  that  the 
writer  had,  in  consequence  of  the  application  made  to  him,  set  on  foot  inquiries 
respecting  that  interesting  Bird  of  New  Zealand,  the  Apteryx  Australis  Shaw,  and 
that  he  had  succeeded  in  obtaining  a  skin  of  it  (destitute,  however,  of  the  legs), 
which  he  had  forwarded  to  the  Society.  The  specimen  was  exhibited,  and  further 
particulars  given  [Proc.  Zool.  Soc,  iii.,  p.  61].  The  notice  ends  thus: — "He  con- 
cludes by  expressing  his  intention  of  forwarding  to  the  Society  the  white-fleshed 
Pigeon  of  the  Colony,  which,  he  conceives,  would  be  a  great  acquisition  in  Eng- 
land: it  is  certainly,  he  says,  far  superior  to  Partridge." 

Shortly  before  his  decease,  the  late  Mr.  R.  Etheridge,  Junr.,  Director  and 
Curator  of  the  Australian  Museum,  completed  his  inquiries  into  the  early  history 
of  the  Museum,  from  official  and  other  records.  His  paper,  in  two  Parts,  is 
entitled  "The  Australian  Museum:  Fragments  of  its  early  History,"  for  unfor- 
tunately the  earliest  records  are  not  as  complete  as  could  be  wished .  But  he  was 
able  to  show  that  "a  Museum,  therefore,  was  evidently  resolved  on  as  early  as 
1827,"  and  "that  a  Museum  of  some  kind  was  established  between  the  years 
1827-9."  He  also  says:  "Whatever  connection  the  Honbl.  Alexander  Macleay 
had  with  the  inception  of  the  Australian  Museum,  there  can  be  no  doubt  of  his 
long  and  lasting  interest  in  the  establishment;  the  old  minutes  prove  this"'  [Re- 
•  cords  of  the  Australian  Museum,  Vol.  xi.,  p.  67  (1916) ;  xii.,  p.  339  (1919)]. 

In  the  obituary  notice  of  Mr.  Alexander  Macleay,  which  appeared  in  the  Syd- 
ney Morning  Herald  of  July  26th,  1848,  the  day  after  the  funeral,  it  is  stated 
that — "He  was  always  active  in  the  management  of  colonial  institutions :  he  was 
President  of  the  Australian  Subscription  Library,  of  the  Benevolent  Society  and 
the  Infirmary;  and  was  the  founder  of  the  Australian  Museum."  This  statement 
is  repeated  in  Flanagan's  "History  of  New  South  Wales  [Vol.  ii.,  p.  192  (1862)]. 

In  regard  to  the  location  of  the  Colonial  Museum  in  its  early  days,  Mr. 
Etheridge  says:  "It  has  been  stated  that  the  Museum  occupied  'a  small  room 
attached  to  the  Legislative  Council'  [quoted  from  Fowles,  "Sydney  in  1848,"  p. 
83],  but  like  other  of  Fowles'  statements,  lacks  confirmation,  as  I  have  been 
unable  to  find  any  evidence  in  support"  [p.  342] .  Confirmatory  evidence  is  to  be 
had  however.  For  example,  The  Sydney  Herald,  No.  19,  November  21st,  1831,  p. 
4,  records  the  fact  that — "The  Sydney  Museum  has  been  removed  from  the  Old 
Post  Office  in  Bent-street,  to  the  spacious  rooms  over  the  Council  Chamber  in 
Macquarie  street."  And  it  was  there  that  Dr.  George  Bennett  first  saw  it,  in 
August,  1832 — "In  company  with  a  friend,  I  visited  the  Colonial  Museum,  which 
i"?  arranged  for  the  present  in  a  small  room,  assigned  for  the  purpose,  in  the 
CouneU-House,  and  which  had  been  recently  established  in  Sydney." 

From  Mrs.  Boswell's  narrative,  it  appears  that  Alexander  Macleay  spent  his 
eightieth  birthday  (June  24th,  1847)  at  Port  Macquarie,  during  a  visit  to  Major 
and  Mrs.  Innes.  It  is  mentioned  that  the  visitor  could  speak  Gaelic  quite  well, 
that  he  was  much  pleased  at  being  musically  welcomed,  on  his  arrival,  by  a  piper, 
who  used  to  play  for  the  special  delectation  of  the  guest  as  opportunity  offered, 
and  that  Mr.  Macleay  was  entertained  at  luncheon  on  his  birthday. 

Mrs.  Macleay,  bom  13th  March,  1769,  died  a  few  weeks  later,  on  13th 
August,  1847,  after  a  happy  union  of  more  than  fifty  years.  Her  husband's  long 
and  useful  life  ended  less  than   a   year   afterwards,  on  19th    July,  1848,   in   his 


582  president's  address. 

eighty-second  year.  His  end  was  hastened  by  a  severe  shock  received  in  a  car- 
riage accident,  when  returning  from  a  visit  to  Government  House.  The  horses 
took  fright,  and  got  out  of  control  just  as  they  were  about  to  pass  through  the 
entrance-gates  to  Macquarie  street,  and  the  caiTiage  collided  with  one  of  the  stone 
pillars.  By  bis  own  request,  Mr.  Macleay  was  removed  to  "Tivoli,"  Rose  Bay, 
the  residence  of  his  son-in-law,  Captain  W.  J.  Dumaresque;  but,  at  his  advanced 
age,  his  recovery  was  hopeless.  In  the  obituarj'  notice  in  the  Sydney  Morning  ■ 
Herald  of  July  26th.  1848,  the  day  after  the  obsequies,  it  is  stated  that — "There 
was  a  very  large  attendance  at  the  funeral,  the  number  of  carriages  being  fifty. 
Among  those  present  were — the  Commander  of  the  Forces,  the  three  Judges,  and 
nearly  the  whole  of  the  Government  officers,  and  a  large  number  of  old  colonists 
of  all  classes.  The  pall-bearers  were  the  Colonial  Secretary,  the  Colonial  Treasurer, 
Colonel  Gordon,  Mr.  Baker,  Attorney-General,  Mr.  Macpherson,  Mr.  Mitchell,  and 
Mr.  Campbell.  .  .  .  Mr.  M'Leay  was  a  man  almost  universally  respected, 
and  has  descended  into  the  grave  fuU  of  years  and  full  of  honour;  and  from  his 
consistent  character,  we  may  feel  sure  he  has  gone  to  his  reward." 

Alexander  Macleay  seems  to  have  been  a  man  of  an  attractive  personality, 
and  to  have  had  many  warm  friends,  both  in  England  and  in  Australia.  He  did 
not  escape  hostile  criticism  in  party  poHtieal  matters  in  this  part  of  the  world,  at 
a  time  when  the  Emancipist  question,  among  others,  evoked  much  bitterness.  But 
as  a  man  of  probity,  who  had  the  welfare  of  the  infant  Australia  at  heart,  there 
are  numerous  eloquent  tributes  to  his  ability  and  worthiness,  on  record.  On  his 
retirement  from  the  office  of  Colonial  Secretary,  he  was  the  recipient  of  two  ad- 
dresses expressive  of  esteem  and  regret — one  from  550  of  his  felhjw-colonists,  who 
also  requested  his  acceptance  of  a  piece  of  plate,  in  further  proof  of  personal 
regard ;  the  other,  from  twenty-fiv^  gentlemen  who  had  been  otflcially  associated 
with  him  in  public  life,  and  who  asked  "that  you  will  do  us  the  favour  to  allow 
your  portrait  to  be  taken  at  our  expense,  for  the  purpose  of  being 
placed  in  some  appropriate  situation  in  the  colony,  as  a  lasting  memorial  of  our 
regard  and  esteem  for  your  private  worth,  and  of  the  grateful  sense  entertained 
by  us,  of  the  co-operation  we  have  always  experienced  from  you,  in  conducting 
the  business  of  our  respective  departments.''  The  order  for  the  piece  of  plate  was 
sent  to  England;  and  a  very  handsome  centre-ornament  for  the  dinner-table  was 
selected,  on  which  were  engraved  the  Arms  of  the  Colony,  and  of  the  Royal  Burgh 
of  Wick,  by  the  special  permission  of  the  respective  Authorities,  as  well  as  the 
Arms  of  the  recipient.  This  was  sent  out  to  Australia  and  presented  in  due 
course.  There  is  a  copy  of  a  rare  pamphlet  in  the  Mitchell  Library,  giving  the 
details  of  the  gift,  with  an  illustration;  and  bound  up  with  it  is  a  litliographic 
plate  of  the  plant  Maeleaya  cordata  R.Br.  The  piece  of  plate  was  probably 
taken  to  England  by  Sir  George  Macleay,  after  the  death  of  W.  S.  Macleay.  I 
have  not  been  able  to  ascertain  the  history  of  the  contemplated  portrait,  or.  if 
painted,  where  it  was  or  is  located  unless  it  be  in  some  Government  building.  Or 
it  may  be  the  portrait  now  hanging  in  the  Curator's  room  at  the  Australian 
JIuseum,  whose  histoi'v  is'vmrecorded.  If  so,  it  may  have  been  presented  to  the 
Museum  by  George  Macleay  when  he  revisited  Australia  (before  187G) . 

The  family  tomb,  without  inscriptions  save  the  surnames  Macleay  and  Har- 
rington in  large  letters,  and  the  family  crests,  is  in  the  same  enclosure  witli  that 
of  Captain  W.  J.  Dumaresque  in  what  used  to  be  known  as  the  Cauiperdown 
Cemetery — which  was  opened   when   the  Devonshire-street  Cemetery  was   closed — 


THE  society's  heritage  from  the  macleays.  583 

in  proximity  to  St.  Stephen's  Church,  Newtown.  But  there  are  cenotaphs  to  the 
memories  of  Alexander  and  Mrs.  Macleay,  of  Mrs.  Harrington,  eldest  daughter 
and  wife  of  Mr.  T.  C.  Harring-ton,  Assistant  Colonial  Secretary,  and  of  W.  S, 
Macleay,  as  well  as  of  Captain  Dumaresque,  in  St.  James'  Church,  King-street. 

Elizabeth  Bat  House  and  the  Garden. 

After  his  arrival  in  Sydney  on  January  3rd,  1826,  Mi-.  Alexander  Macleay 
occupied  the  middle  one  of  the  three  otiflfial  residences  on  the  south  side  of  Bridge- 
street.  The  late  Judge  Forbes  contributed  a  letter  to  the  Sydney  Morning  Herald 
of  March  17,  1899,  entitled  "Old  Government  House,  Sydney,"  in  which  he  re- 
corded his  recollections  of  old  Sydney.  He  was  the  son  of  the  first  Chief 
Justice  of  New  South  Wales,  and  came  to  Sydney,  a  child  of  four  yeai-s,  with  his 
father  in  1823.     The  Judge  wrote :  "My  father  lived  in  a  house  which  stood  in 

the  centre  of  the  site  of   the   present    Lands  Office Bridge-street. 

which  ran  from  George-street  up  to  Government  House  gate  (the  gate  of  that 
time),  after  passing  Bent-street  (which  it  joined  then  at  the  same  place  as  now) 
had,  on  the  south  side  of  it,  four  detached  houses,  built  in  a  row,  and  going  from 
Georo-e-street  towards  the  Government  House  gate.  The  first  of  these  you  came 
to  was  that  in  which  my  father  lived,  bounded  on  the  south  and  west  by  Bent- 
street;  next  to  it  was  the  house  which  was  the  residence  of  Alexander  Macleay, 
the  Colonial  Secretary;  and  next  to  that  was  another  house,  the  residence  of  Mr. 
Lithgow,  Auditor-General  and  Collector  of  Internal  Revenue;  (that  house  is  now 
standing,  having  a  large  native  tigtree  growing  in  the  front  of  it)  [since  de- 
molished to  make  way  for  the  present  Education  Department  Building] ;  and  next 
to  that  was  the  Guard-house  close  to  Government  House  gate.  The  first  three 
houses  mentioned,  viz.,  my  father's,  Macleay's,  and  Lithgow's,  had  gardens  in 
front  and  yards  at  the  back,  and  were  divided  by  walls  from  one  another.  The 
Guard-house  was  close  to  the  gate  of  Government  House,  and  Government  House 
was  about  30  or  40  yards  to  the  east  of  it,  which  fixes  the  site  at  the  place  where 
the  plate  with  the  inscription  on  it  was  lately  found.  I  was  often  at  Government 
House  when  Sir  Thomas  Brisbane  was  there,  and  also  when  Darling  and  Bourke 
were  Governors,  and  I  know  the  localities  well,  and  remember  them  perfectly." 

Another  early  notice  of  the  Macleay's  first  house  is  to  be  found  in  an  article 
entitled  "A  Journal  of  Early  Australia,"  contributed  to  the  Sydney  Morning 
Herald  of  August  30th,  1911,  by  Miss  Mary  Salmon.  This  is  a  review  of  a  small 
volume,  with  the  title,  "Some  Recollections  of  My  Early  Days.  By  [Mrs.]  A.  A. 
CD.  Boswell,"  printed  for  private  circulation  only  among  friends  and  relatives. 
There  is  a  copy  of  it  in  the  Mitchell  Library.  The  authoress  was  born  in  1826  at 
"Yarrows,"  in  Bathurst,  and  was  living  in  Scotland  when  Miss  Salmon's  article 
was  written.  Mrs.  Boswell  was  the  daughter  of  Mr.  George  Innes,  who  came  to 
Australia  in  1823  with  his  brother.  Captain  Archibald  Clunes  Innes.  The  fol- 
lowing is  Mrs.  BosweU's  account: — "Early  in  1834,  I  found  myself  at  school  in 
Bridge-street,  under  the  care  of  Mrs.  Evans  and  her  friend  and  partner,  Miss 
Ferris.  Mr.  Evans  (he  was  George  W.  Evans,  who  had  been  deputy  surveyor 
when  he  made  the  remarkable  discovery  of  the  plains  beyond  the  Blue  Mountains, 
which  led  to  a  road  to  Bathurst)  had  a  bookseller  and  stationer's  shop,  and  we 
used  the  rest  of  the  house,  which  was  thought  handsome,  and  in  a  fashionable 
street.  Our  house  faced  the  old  Government  stores  or  depot,  and  close  by 
flov.ed  the  Tank  Stream,  now  arched  and  made  into  the  main  drain  of  that  part 


584  president's  address. 

of  the  populous  city.  We  were  quite  close  to  the  old  Government  House  and 
Macquarie-place,  where  lived  the  leading  Government  oflScials.  These  houses  were 
back  from  the  street,  and  had  pretty  gardens  and  deep  verandahs,  shaded  by 
climbing  roses  and  other  flowering  plants.  I  do  not  remember  ever  being  in 
Government  House,  but  I  made  many  happy  visits  to  our  kind  friends,  Mr.  and 
Mrs.  Macleay  at  Macquarie-place.  He  was  Colonial  Secretary,  and  one  of  his 
daughters  [Margaret]  had  been  married  to  my  uncle,  Major  Innes,  of  Lake  Innes, 
Port  Macquarie.  Miss  Macleay  (Mrs.  Harrington)  wanted  to  adopt  and  educate 
me.     She  died  a  few  weeks  after  her  marriage,  in  1836." 

Among  the  relics  of  W.  S.  Macleay  is  a  small  pencil-drawing  of  the  resi- 
dence in  Bridge-street,  made  by  Miss  Macleay,  with  her  signature  on  the  back . 
This  was  probably  sent  to  her  brother  in  Cuba,  before  1836.  I  exhibit  this,  to- 
gether with  the  photograph  of  a  pencil-drawing  of  the  same  house  by  the  artist 
Conrad  Martens.  The  original  of  the  latter  is  in  possession  of  the  Royal  Society 
of  Tasmania.  By  the  kind  permission  of  the  Coimeil,  Mr.  Clive  Lord,  the  Secre- 
tary, has  been  able  to  furnish  me  with  the  photograph  of  this  interesting  drawing. 

In  a  letter  from  Mrs .  Eliza  Macleay,  in  Sydney,  to  her  son,  W .  S .  Macleay, 
in  Cuba,  undated  but  written  on  paper  with  watermark  1824  [from  internal 
evidence  written  about  June,  1827]  slie  says:  "We  have  been  very  unsettled  in 
our  house  ever  since  we  got  in  to  it,  which  was  the  first  night  of  our  arrival  [Janu- 
ary 3rd,  1826] ;  in  the  first  place,  it  was  much  too  small  for  us,  which,  on  proper 
representation  was  ordered  to  have  two  bedrooms  and  two  smaller  rooms  built 
over  the  library,  and  eating-room,  and  a  verandah  added,  which  has  now  been 
about  ten  months  and  not  nearly  finished,  so  slow  do  the  prisoner-workmen  get  on ; 
and  when  you  consider  what  sort  of  people  they  are,  you  may  suppose  we  cannot 
feel  very  comfortable  while  they  are  about.  They  contrived,  I  must  say  through 
the  carelessness  of  our  free  servants,  to  carry  off  sixty  pounds'  worth   of  plate, 

which  we  could  never  hear  the  least  account  of  since Your  father 

has  little  time  to  think  of  family-affairs,  his  whole  time  being  occu- 
pied with  Government  business.  We  have  now  been  here  a  year  and  a-half,  and, 
during  that  time,  I  think  he  has  not  been  absent  from  Sydney  above  ten  days ;  the 
very  little  recreation  that  he  has  consists  of  his  going  out  before  breakfast  or  after 
five  o'clock,  sometimes  to  a  place  called  Elizabeth  Bay,  of  which  he  has  got  a  grant 
of  between  fifty  and  sixty  acres,  where  he  is  making  a  garden,  and  [hopes  at] 
some  future  time  to  build  a  house;  he  is  now  building  stabling,  and  has  built  a 
gardener's  cottage." 

[For  the  copy  of  this  extremely  interesting  letter,  kindly  forwarded  by  Dr. 
Daydon  Jackson,  I  am  indebted  to  t'e  Council  of  the  Linnean  Society  of  London.] 

Mr.  J.  A.  Dowling  has  recently  given  a  very  interesting  account  of  the  early 
settlement  of  the  eastern  suburbs  contiguous  to  the  harbour  and  the  city.  The 
author  points  out  that,  as  shown  in  Roe's  map  of  Sydney  (1822).  Darlinghurst, 
including  Woolloomooloo,  used  to  be  called  Henrietta  Town,  and  was  a  reserve 
set  apart  for  the  Bl;:cks.  The  name  wa.-^  given  by  Governor  ]\Ia"'|uarie.  after  the 
first  Christian  name  of  his  wife.  Elizabeth  Bay  and  Elizabeth  Point  were  also 
named  by  the  Governor  after  the  second  Christian  name  of  the  same  lady. 

Of  the  grant  to  Alexander  Macleay,  Mr.  Dowling  says:  "The  Macleay  pro- 
perty was  fifty-four  acres  in  extent,  and  was  granted  to  Mr.  Alexander  !Maoleay 
by  Governor  Darling  in  1828.  who.  in  a  despatch  to  the  Right  Hon.  William 
Huskisson,  dated  the  28th    of    March,    1828.    stated:  'The  land    granted  to  Mr. 


THE  society's  heritage  prom  the  macleays.  585 

Maeleay  at  Elizabeth  Bay,  a  mile  and  a  half  from  Sydney,  was  for  the  purpose  of 
erecting  a  family  house  and  eultiv.-iting  a  garden.  Mr.  Macleay's  knowledge  as  a 
horticulturist  is  likely  to  prove  beneficial  to  the  colony.  He  has  already  spent  a 
considerable  sum  on  the  improvement  and  cultivation  of  his  gi'ounds  and  in  erect- 
ing a  stable  and  other  offices  preparatory  to  building  a  house,  which  it  is  his  in- 
tention shortly  to  commence.  From  the  manner  in  which  he  has  entered  into 
this  undertaking  and  the  scale  on  which  he  has  commenced  to  settle  and  stock  the 
land  he  has  received  for  agricultural  purposes  (the  usual  grant  of  2500  acres), 
he  will  no  doubt  prove  an  important  acquisition  to  the  colony.  In  this  respect 
alone,  the  capital  which  he  has  already  vested  in  stock,  and  is  still  continuing 
to  expend,  being  considerable.'  ....  The  formal  gTant  was  dated  19th 
October,  1831."  ["Potts'  Point.  Darling  Point  and  Neighbourhood,  in  the  Early 
Days,"  by  .J.  A.  Darling,  Journ.  Proc.  Aust.  Historical  Soc,  Vol.  ii.,  190G,  Part 
3,  p.  55  (1909).] 

The  conditions  on  which  the  grant  was  made  were  loyally  fulfilled,  and  there 
is  ample  evidence  that  the  expectations  of  the  value  of  his  horticultural  know- 
ledge were  realised. 

Alexander  Maeleay  seems  to  have  been  interested  in  liorticulture  before  he 
came  to  Australia.  Robert  Brown  contributed  a  botanical  supplement  to  the 
"Narrative  of  Travels  and  Discoveries  in  North  and  Central  Africa,  by  Denliam 
and  Clapperton,"  published  in  1826  [Reprinted  in  R.  Brown's  Collected  Works, 
Vol.  i.,  p.  270],  from  which  I  quote  the  following:  "Respecting  Bocconia  cordata, 
though  it  is  so  closely  allied  to  Bocconia  as  to  afford  an  excellent  argument  in 
favour  of  the  hypothesis  in  question,  it  is  still  sufficiently  different,  especially  in 
its  polyspermous  ovarium,  to  constitute  a  distinct  genus,  to  which  I  have  given 
the  name  (Macleaya  cordata)  of  my  much  valued  friend,  Alexander  Maeleay, 
Esq.,  Secretary  to  the  Colony  of  New  South  Wales,  whose  merits  as  a  general 
naturalist,  a  profoimd  entomologist,  and  a  practical  botanist,  are  well  known." 

Mr.  Maeleay  may  have  brought  out  to  Australia  with  him  plants  or  seeds 
from  England,  as  he  certainly  did  from  Rio  Janeiro,  where  the  vessel  called  on  the 
voyage  out,  as  mentioned  in  Di'.  Bennett's  account  of  his  visit  to  Elizabeth  Bay  in 
1832  [po^tea'].  We  have  no  family  record  of  the  progress  of  the  garden  later 
than  Mi-s.  Macleay's  letter  written  in  June,  1827,  until  about  1836,  when  Mr 
Maeleay  began  to  keep  separate  records,  in  two  small  books,  of  the  plants  and 
seeds  which  he  obtained,  and  of  the  sources  from  which  they  came. 

But  most  interesting  references  to  the  garden  by  three  visitors — Allan  Cun- 
ningham, Dr.  George  Bennett,  and  James  Backhouse — during  the  intervening 
period,  are  available.  These  accounts  show  that  much  progress  had  been  made  in 
clearing,  laying  out,  and  planting  the  originally  sterile  area  of  Hawkesbury  Sand- 
stone. 

Allan  Cunningham  visited  Elizabeth  Bay  in  1830,  and  again  in  1831,  just 
before  leaving  for  England  in  the  ship  "The  Forth"  on  February  25th,  1831.  The 
following  is  his  account: — "I  now  left  Parraraatta,  and  accompanied  by  a  friend, 
reached  Sydney  in  the  afternoon,  where  T  learnt  that  the  departure  of  the  ship  was 
postponed  until  the  16th  [February,  1831].  This  gave  me  more  time  to  settle 
certain  matters  of  business  in  Sydney,  as  also  to  call  on  several  friends  living  at 
this  port,  and  among  them  was  Mr.  Maeleay,  our  worthy  colonial  secretary,  whom 
I  accompanied  to  his  retreat  on  the  shores  of  Elizabeth  Bay,  where  I  was  not  a 
little   delighted    to  find   so  much  had  been  done   in    planting    and  improving   the 


586  president's  address. 

sterile  ground  amidst  high  sandstone  rocks  since  X  visited  the  Bay  last  year. 
.  .  .  .  As  there  were  several  plants  of  [Calostemma  album]  in  the  garden, 
where  it  periodically  puts  forth  its  small  white  flowers,  Mr.  Macleay  presented 
me  with  four  bulbs  for  Kew,  so  that  the  royal  gardens  will  soon  boast  of  possess- 
ing a  fourth  species  of  this  genus,  so  nearly  related  to  Pancratium.  [Hooker's 
London  Journal  of  Botany,  Vol.  i.,  p.  126.] 

Dr.  George  Bennett  visited  Sydney  in  1829,  and  a  second  time,  in  August, 
1832.  Shortly  after  he  journeyed  to  Elizabeth  Bay,  of  which  he  says: — "In 
company  with  my  friend,  Lieutenant  Bretoa,  R.N.,  I  visited  Elizabeth  Bay,  about 
two  miles  distant  from  Sydney,  and  the  property  of  the  Honourable  Alexander 
Macleay.  The  situation  is  beautiful,  being  in  a  retired  bay  or  cove  of  Port  Jack- 
son, and  the  garden  and  farm  is  near  the  sea.  This  spot,  naturally  of  the  most 
sterile  description,  has  been  rendered,  at  a  great  expense  and  perseverance,  in  some 
degree  productive  as  a  nursery  for  rare  trees,  shrubs,  and  plants,  from  all  parts 
of  the  world.  We  were  much  gratified  with  the  valuable  and  rare  specimens  the 
garden  contained,  and  surjjrised  that  a  spot  possessed  of  no  natural  advantages 
should  have  been  rendered,  comparatively,  a  little  paradise.  In  the  garden,  a 
species  of  cactus  was  pointed  eut  to  me  by  the  gardener,  Mr.  Henderson,  which 
Mr.  Macleay  had  brought  some  years  ago  from  Rio  Janeiro."  Then  follow  par- 
ticulars of  the  teratological  fruits  of  this  plant.  [Wanderings  in  New  South 
Wales,  &e..  Vol.  i.,  p.  71  (1834)]. 

James  Backhouse,  the  Quaker  missionary,  in  his  "Narrative  of  a  Visit  to 
the  Australian  Colonies"  (1843),  thus  describes  his  experience:  "January  15th, 
1835 — We  [including  his  colleagues,  D.  and  C.  Wheeler,  and  G.  W.  Walker] 
walked  to  Elizabeth  Bay,  and  met  the  Colonial  Secretary,  at  his  beautiful  garden, 
which  is  formed  on  a  rocky  slope,  on  the  margin  of  Port  Jackson,  of  which  it 
commands  a  fine  \'iew.  Here  are  cultivated,  specimens  of  many  of  the  interesting 
trees  and  shrubs  of  this  Colony,  along  with  others  from  various  parts  of  the  world, 
intermixed  with  some  growing  in  their  native  localities.  .  .  .  The  walks  at 
this  place  are  judiciously  accommodated  to  the  inequalities  of  the  sinuous  l)ay, 
and  are  continued  round  a  point  covered  with  native  bush.  Peaches  are  ripe  in 
the  open  ground  in  abundance,  and  liberty  to  partake  of  them  freely  was  kindly 
given,  by  the  open-hearted  proprietor.  Dendrobhim  speciosum  and  D.  linguiforme, 
remarkable  plants  of  the  Orchis  tribe,  are  wild  here,  upon  the  rocks,  and  7>.  tetra- 
gonnm.  is  naturalised  on  a  branch  of  Avicennia  to  meat  of:  a,  covered  with  oyster- 
shells,  and  suspended  in  a  tree  near  the  shore.  A  fine  patch  of  the  Elks-liorn 
Fern,  Acrosticum  alciconie,  retains  its  native  station  on  a  rocky  point  in  the 
garden"  [p.  239]. 

Returning  now  to  the  family  records  relating  to  the  garden,  one  of  the  two 
books  already  mentioned,  has,  on  the  title-page,  the  entry  "Plants  received  at 
Elizabetli  Bay."  The  watermark  of  the  paper  of  this  book  is  1833.  The  first 
four  entries  are  not  dated.  The  first  of  these  is  a  list  of  thirty-three  species,  in- 
cluding four  of  Magnolia,  and  six  varieties  of  Camellia  japonica,  received  from 
the  Messrs.  Loddige,  of  Hackney,  the  well-known  nurserymen  of  that  time. — No.  2, 
three  species  of  Diplarrlwena  morea  and  Sarcochilus  falcatus,  from  Van  Dieman's 
Land;  and  Alsophila  aii-'^traHs  from  Norfolk  Island,  received  from  Mr.  J.  Back-_ 
house,  whose  visit  to  Australia  lasted  from  1832  to  1838. — No.  3.  twelve  species, 
from  Jlessrs.  Loddige. — No.  4,  eighteen  species  (two  unnamed),  from  Mr.  W. 
Macarthur,  Camden. — No.   5.  (itii  Ai)ril.  1836.   four   species,  also  from  Mr.    W. 


THE  society's  heritage  from  the  macleays.  587 

Macartbur. — No.  G,  not  dated,  thirteen  species  (tive  undetermined),  "From  China, 
Mr.  Jones."  Below  the  last  entry  appears  the  date,  1835,  followed  by  a  list  of 
twelve  additional  species  from  the  same  source. — No.  7,  twelve  varieties  of  Dahlia. 
"From  Mr.  J.  B.  Richards.  London,  27th  April,  1836."— No.  8,  seven  species  ,  in- 
eludiuy  three  of  Passiflora,  and  five  varieties  of  Chrysanthemum  sinense  from 
Messre.  Loddige,  Feb.  7,  1827  [?  1837]. — No.  9,  thirteen  species  from  Mr.  W. 
Macarthur,  March,  1837.  This  is  of  interest  because  it  shows  that,  at  this  early 
period,  the  horticulturists  were  trying  to  cultivate  native  plants  in  their  gardens, 
three  of  the  plants  in  the  list  being  Bauera  rubioides,  Eriostemon  sp..  and  Boronia 
sp. — No.  10.  eight  species  "From  Valparaiso,  Mr.  [Allan]  Cunninghame.  March, 
1838." — No.  11,  nineteen  species  from  Camden  and  Brownlow  Hill,  August,  1837, 
— No.  12,  forty-seven  species  of  "Bulbs  from  Captain  Farquand  Campbell,  from 
Cape  of  Good  Hope,  March,  1838,"  and  three  species  of  Pelargonium. — No.  13, 
nineteen  species  from  Mr.  W.  Macarthur,  May,  1838. — No.  14,  not  dated,  is  a 
single  entry  of  Huon  Pine  from  Capt.  Drinkwater  Bethune,  H.M.S.  Conway. — 
No.  15,  also  a  single  entry  of  Amaryllis,  from  Miss  Macarthur,  27tli  August, 
1838. — No.  16  is  very  interesting.  "From  Capt.  [Charles]  Sturt,  December,  1838, 
a  large  collection  of  Bulbs  collected  on  his  late  journey  in  South  Australia." — No. 
17  is  a  list  of  "Plants  brought  by  W.  S.  Maeleay,  per  Royal  George,  March, 
1839,"  which  may  have  been  supplied  by  Loddige.  These  comprise  forty-six 
species,  beginning  with  five  species  of  Magnolia,  and  ending  with  Verbena  Melin- 
dris.  A  number  of  "Cape  of  Good  Hope  Bulbs"  (particulars  not  given),  as  well 
as  an  assortment  of  seeds,  were  also  brought  from  the  Cape  by  W.  S.  Maeleay. 
At  a  later  date,  some  of  the  entries  had  a  Hne  drawn  across  them,  and  the  word 
"Dead"  written  opposite  to  them. — No.  18,  two  species  from  Mr.  W.  Macarthur, 
April,  1839. — Nos.  19-21,  apparently  received  in  the  same  month,  merely  record 
collections  received,  without  particulars,  from  Mr.  Cloete,  Baron  Ludwig,  and 
Mr.  Gordon. — No.  22,  sixteen  species  received  from  Dr.  Wallich,  of  Calcutta, 
May.  1839.  All  the  foregoing  records  are  in  the  handwriting  of  Alexander 
Maeleay.  The  continuation  of  the  records  was  written  by  W.  S.  Maeleay. — No. 
23,  forty-five  species  from  Mr.  Wm.  Macarthur,  August,  1840. — No.  24,  seventy- 
two  species  from  Dr.  WaUich,  Calcutta.  October,  1840. — No.  25,  thirty-eight 
species,  including  Maeleay  a  cordata  R.Br.,  from  Loddige,  January,  1840. — No. 
26,  and  last,  seventy-two  species  "from  Mr.  Backhouse,  1843."  Mr.  Maiden,  in 
his  biographical  notice  of  William  Carron.  says  that  — "His  daughter  informs  me 
that  he  arrived  in  Sydney  in  1843.  in  charge  of  plants  for  one  of  the  Macleays." 
[Joum.  Proe.  R.  Soe.  N.S.  Wales,  xlii.,  p.  95.]  The  collection  from  Mr.  Back- 
house would,  therefore,  be  the  one  he  took  charge  of.  A  number  of  blank  pages 
follow  the  last  entry.  Then  comes  a  long  list  (9 J  pages)  of  "Desiderata  of 
Plants,"  in  Alexander  MaeleaVs  wi'iting.  At  a  later  date,  some  of  tlie  plants 
were  obtained.  The  names  of  these  are  crossed  out,  and  the  dates  of  receipt,  and 
sometimes  the  initials  of  the  senders,  are  written  in  the  margin.  This  is  followed 
by  a  table  of  the  "Subgenera  of  Dendrohium"  in  W.  S.  MaeleaVs  writing.  Then, 
after  more  blank  pages,  at  the  end,  is  a  list  of  "Epiphytal  Orchids."  forty-two 
species,  in  W .  S .  Macleay's  writing. 

The  entries  in  the  Seed-book  are  by  years,  and  numbered  throughout.  They 
are  in  the  handwriting  of  a  lady,  presumably  one  of  A.  Macleay's  daughters,  or 
in  his  own,  or  in  that  of  W.  S.  Maeleay.  For  the  years  1836-43  (both  inclusive) 
the  number  of  separate  entries  of  seeds  is  886,  347,  502,  498,  317.  101.  39,  186; 


588  president's  address. 

and  for  the  years  1845.  1851  and  1853,  the  numbers  are  184,  133,  93  (there  are  no 
records  for  1844  and  1852)  ;  total,  380(i.  These  inelude  seeds  for  the  orchard  and 
kitchen-garden,  as  well  as  for  the  flower-garden.  Some  species  ai'e  not  named. 
The  seeds  were  received  from  England,  Madeira,  Mauritius,  India  (Ciilcutta, 
Madras,  Neilgherry  Hills),  China.  Java,  East  Indies,  Brazil,  Bolivia,  Chili,  Val- 
paraiso, Tahiti,  Sandwich  Island'*,  Society  Islands,  Cape  of  Good  Hope,  Australia 
(seeds  of  native  plants  from  many  localities).  Van  Dieman's  Land,  New  Zealand, 
and  Norfolk  Island.  W.  S.  Macleay  brought  with  him  seeds  of  89  species  from 
England;  and  of  107  species  (including  tive  species  of  Erica,  five  of  Leucadendron, 
and  six  of  Protea)   from  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope. 

These  records  are  of  interest  as  conti'ibutions  to  the  early  horticultural  annals 
of  New  South  Wales  It  is  worth  mentioning  that  the  Botanic  Gardens  in  Sydney 
were  first  opened  to  the  public  in  1831,  and  on  Sundays  in  1838. 

Taking  into  account  Alexander  Macleay's  efforts  to  foster  horticulture  in  the 
early  days,  as  represented  by  the  foregoing  records  of  his  efforts  to  obtain  plants 
and  seeds,  and  also  that  the  garden  was  in  charge  of  an  expert  gardener,  Mr. 
Hendei'son,  it  is  not  sui-prisiug  that  visitors  were  delighted  with  what  they  saw, 
when  the  garden  was  well  established  and  at  its  best.  Of  some  of  these,  of  a  later 
date  than  those  already  mentioned,  there  are  records. 

The  first  is  a  very  brief  luitice  of  Allan  Cunningham's  third  visit  to  Elizabeth 
Bay,  in  a  letter  to  Heward.  dated  November  lOth.  1838:  "How  fine  GreviUea 
rohuata  (forty  feet  high)  is  at  this  time  [in  the  Botanic  Gardens],  and  at  Mr, 
Macleay's  at  Elizabeth  Bay,  it  is  a  mass  of  orange  blossoms  [Hooker's  London 
Journ..  Bot.,  Vol.  i.,  p.  286] . 

H.M.SS.  "Erebus"  and  "Terror,"  under  the  command  of  Captain  James 
Clark  Ross,  visited  Sydney  in  1841,  their  stay  lasting  from  July  7th  to  August 
5th.  Dr.  .Joseph  Dalton  Hooker  was  Assistant  Surgeon  and  Botanist  attached  to 
the  "Erebus."  The  following  brief  notice  of  this  visit  from  "An  account  of  the 
Voyage  of  the  Erebus  and  Terror"  by  his  father,  based  on  his  letters  sent  home 
during  the  voyage,  which  appeared  in  the  London  Journal  of  Botany"  [Vol.  ii.,  p. 
272,  1843] — "A  short  time  only  was  allowed  here  [Hobart,  after  the  return  from 
the  Antarctic]  for  tiie  needful  refreshment  and  rei)airs,  when  the  'Erebus'  and 
'Terror'  sailed  for  Sydney,  where  numerous  excureions  were  made  and  plants  col- 
lected, though  few  of  these  could  have  the  charm  of  novelty;  and  after  much  kind- 
ness received  from  Messrs.  M'Leay  (father  and  son)  they  then  pursued  their 
course  to  the  Bay  of  Islands,  New  Zealand." 

The  recent  publication  of  the  "Life  and  Letters  of  Sir  .Joseph  Dalton  Hooker, 
O.M.,  G.S.I..  ba-sed  on  materials  collected  and  aiTunged  by  Lady  Hooker;  by 
Leonard  Huxley"  (lfll8),  is  of  very  g'reat  value,  not  only  from  the  intrinsic  in- 
terest of  the  book,  but  because  it  supplements  and  completes  the  set  of  the  three 
biographies  which  relate  to  the  inauguration  of  modern  ideas  of  evolution,  namely 
"The  Life  and  Letters  of  Charles  Darwin.  Edited  by  his  son,  Francis  Darwin" 
(Second  Edition,  1887),  and  the  "Life  and  Letters  of  Thomas  Henry  Huxley. 
By  his  son,  Leonard  Huxley"  (1st  Edition,  1000").  This  gives  fuller  particulars 
about  Hookers  visit  to  Sydney,  tliough  nothing  is  said  about  the  numerous  excur- 
sions and  the  collecting  of  plants  nor  are  the  Botanic  Gardens  mentioned.  The 
following  extract  [Vol.  i.,  p.  120]  contains  the  earliest  reference  to  Elizabeth  Bay 
House  known  to  me :  "From  Tasmania,  a  short  visit  was  paid  to  Sydney  in  connec- 
tion with  the  magnetic  observatory,  la-sting  from  .July  7th  to  August  5,1841.     Syd- 


THE  society's  heritage  from  the  macleats.  589 

ney  in  those  days,  only  one  year  since  the  importation  of  convicts  had  ceased,  could 
boast  no  shops  finer  than  the  Hobart  Town  ones;  round  the  beautiful  harbour' 
stood  a  few  tine  houses,  in  particular  the  new  Government  House,  still  uninhabited, 
built  in  the  Elizabethan  style,  the  new  Custom  House,  and  Mr.  M'Leay's  house 
with  its  garden  full  of  interesting  plants."  ....  "A  long  visit  to  M'Leay's 
o-arden  proved  it  to  be  a  botanist's  paradise.  My  surprise  was  unl)ounded  at  the 
natural  beauties  of  the  spot,  the  inimitable  taste  with  which  the  grounds  were  laid 
out.  and  the  number  and  rarity  of  the  plants  which  were  collected  together.  .  . 
The  interior  of  the  house,  a  striking  specimen  of  Colonial  architecture,  the  indi- 
vidual trees  and  creepers,  flowers  and  shrubs,  the  revival  of  nature  when  the 
rain  ceased,  and  a  few  insects  came  out,  the  Diamond  birds  flitted  from  tree  to  tree, 
and  the  large  Sea  Eagle  or  Osprey  left  his  lovely  lair  and  commenced  wheelmg 
over  the  calm  waters  of  the  bay,  and  beyond  the  bay  'a  rocky  precipice  christened 
Sunium,  on  which  it  is  the  intention  to  buihl  a  temple' — all  this  is  fully  set  forth 
in  the  Journal,  with  one  very  homely  touch  as  to  'Mr.  William's  workshop' :  'The 
smell  of  camphor  and  specimens,  so  well  known  to  me  at  home,  reminded  me 
strongly  of  olden  times,  especially  as  I  found  everything  in  the  inimitable  mixture 
of  confusion  and  order  in  which  Mr.  [R.]  Brown's  shop  at  the  Museum  and  his 
rooms  in  Deane-street  are  wont  to  be.'  "  .  .  .  .  "The  record  of  tlie  visit 
ends  with  the  entry  for  August  5th :  'at  11  a.m.  sailing  down  Port  Jackson  along 
the  cold-looking  sandstone  cliffs,  leaving  Sydney  with  few  regrets  but  leaving  Mr. 
McLeay's  fine  establishment  where  there  was  much  to  see.' " 

A  most  interesting  account  of  a  visit  to  Elizabeth  Bay  by  Mrs.  Robert  Lowe, 
towards  the  end  of  1842  or  early  in  1843,  is  thus  recorded  in  Patchett  Martin's 
"Life  and  Letters  of  Viscount  Sherbrooke,  Vol.  i.,  p.  162  (1893)  :  "A  few  days  ago 
T  saw  one  of  the  most  perfect  places  I  ever  saw  in  my  life,  belonging  to  Mr. 
Macleay.  How  I  longed  that  Mrs.  Sherbrooke  could  but  see  this  splendid  sight. 
The  drive  to  the  house  is  cut  through  rocks  covered  with  the  splendid  wild  shrubs 
and  flowers  of  this  country,  and  here  and  there  an  immense  primeval  tree;  the 
house  is  built  of  white  stone,  and  looks  like  a  nobleman's  place.  Mr.  Macleay 
took  us  through  the  gi-ounds;  they  were  along  the  side  of  the  water.  In  this  gar- 
den are  the  plants  of  every  climate — flowers  and  trees  from  Rio,  the  West  Indies, 
the  East  Indies,  China,  and  even  England.  The  bulbs  from  the  Cape  are  splendid, 
and  unless  you  could  see  them,  you  would  n(5t  believe  how  beautiful  the  roses  are 
here.  The  orange-trees,  lemons,  citrons,  gua\as  are  immense,  and  the  jiomegranate 
is  now  in  full  flower.  Mr.  ]\Iacleay  lias  also  an  immense  collection  from  New 
Zealand.  I  must  not  omit  some  drawbacks  to  this  lovely  garden :  it  is  too  dry,  and 
the  plants  grow  out  of  a  white,  sandy  soil.  I  must  admit  a  few  English  showers 
would  improve  it.  As  we  went  along  the  wild  walks,  cut  through  the  woods,  the 
native  trees,  covered  with  flowers,  the  ^^ews  of  rock,  trees,  and  water  were  en- 
chanting.    The  bays  are  innumerable,  and  resemble  the  Scotch  salt-water  locks." 

Sir  George  ^laeleay.  then  resident  in  England,  inherited  the  jiroperty  at 
Elizabeth  Bay,  after  the  death  of  his  elder  brother,  W.  S.  Macleay.  in  January, 
1865.  The  subsequent  history  of  the  old  garden  is  l)riefly  told  by  Robert  Lowe''5 
biographer  in  these  words:  "The  beautifully  situated  home  of  the  scholar  and 
naturalist  is  now  no  more,  and  on  the  site  of  its  grounds  stand  the  villas  and  houses 
of  a  'genteel'  suburb.  Sir  George  Macleay,  when  showing  me  a  picture  of  the 
house  and  grounds  said :  My  brotlier  would  never  Iiave  consented  to  its  demoli- 
tion; but  Sir  Henry  Parkes  thought  fit  to  tax  the  land  exorbitantly,  with  the  view 


690  president's  address. 

of  "Ijurstiug  up''  such  estates  near  Sydney,  and  I  at  length  was  forced  to  subdivide 
it,  and  let  it  out  on  lease.  But  my  brother,'  he  added,  'however  much  it  might  have 
added  to  his  income,  would  never  have  allowed  a  tree  or  shrub  to  be  removed.' " 
[Life  and  Letters  of  Viscount  Sherbrooke,  Vol.  i.,  p.  103,  footnote.] 

This  statement  is  one  aspect  of  an  old  story — the  ine\'itably  increasing  pres- 
sure, due  to  the  expansion  of  a  young  and  steadily  growing  city  and  its  suburbs, 
on  the  open  spaces  within  or  contiguous  to  their  boundaries,  necessitating  the  sub- 
ordination of  private  interests  to  general  needs.  The  wi-iter  of  the  remarks  quoted 
slightly  misunderstood  his  informant.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  Elizabeth  Bay  House, 
surrounded  by  a  much  circumscribed  garden,  was  left  intact.  But,  by  the  forma- 
tion of  new  streets,  including  Ithaca  Road,  Billyard  Avenue,  and  Onslow  Avenue, 
the  outlying  portion  of  the  original  garden  was  cut  off  from  the  remnant  adjacent 
to  the  house,  subdivided,  and  let  on  long  leases  in  1875,  as  the  entail  could  not  be 
cut  off  during  the  lifetime  of  any  male  member  of  the  family.  In  the  meantime, 
as  soon  as  circumstances  permitted.  Sir  William  Macleay  became  the  tenant  on 
long  lease,  of  the  house  and  of  some  of  the  allotments  bounded  by  Ithaca  Road  and 
Billyard  Avenue,  on  two  of  which  the  Society's  Hall  now  stands.  His  occupancy 
of  the  house  lasted  for  the  rest  of  his  lifetime,  until  December  1891 ;  and,  there- 
after. Lady  Macleay's  continued  until  her  decease  in  August,  1903.  With  the  ex- 
ception of  one  year,  when  the  house  was  sublet  furnished  during  Lady  Macleay's 
absence  in  England,  after  Sir  William's  death,  the  old  house  was  continuously 
occupied  by  members  of  the  family,  from  1837  to  1903.  The  fate  of  the  old 
garden  lias  been  similar  to  that  of  many  others  in  Sydney  and  its  neighbourhood. 
But  under  the  circumstances  of  the  case,  its  history  and  associations  are  wortliy  of 
record.  The  picture  referred  to  may  have  been  painted  by  Conrad  Martens,  for 
the  view  of  the  house  and  grounds  from  slightly  different  standpoints  at  Darling 
Point  was  a  favourite  one  of  this  well-known  artist.  By  the  kindness  of  the 
Council  of  the  Royal  Society  of  Tasmania  and  Mr.  Clive  Lord  I  am  able  to  exhibit  a 
photograph  of  a  pencil  drawing  of  Elizabeth  Bay  House  taken  from  Darling  Point, 
by  Conrad  Martens. 

But  Alexander  Macleay  was  not  interested  in  horticulture  only  so  far  as 
the  garden  at  Elizabeth  Bay  was  coneenied.  In  the  letter  from  Mre.  Macleay  to 
her  son  W.  S.  Macleay,  from  which  I  have  already  quoted,  she  says  [about  June, 
1827]:  "Your  Father  will  soon  become  a  large  landed  proprietor  here;  he  has 
[purchased  15,000  acres  about  40  miles  out  of  Sydney;  and  he  has  got  a  son  of 
David  Brodie's  for  an  overseer  there."  The  property  here  referred  to  comprised 
Brownlow  Hill,  near  Camden,  and  Glendarewel  farm  attached  to  Brownlow  Hill, 
as  mentioned  by  Captain  Sturt  in  the  account  of  his  second  expedition  "to  follow 
the  waters  of  the  Morumbidgee  "     ["Two  Exjieditions,"  Vol.  ii.,  pp.  9  and  11.] 

Mr.  A.  Macleay's  efforts  to  develop  horticulture  were  not  confined  to  Elizabeth 
Bay,  but  were  extended  to  Brownlow  Hill.  Mr.  .T.  Backhouse  records,  in  his 
"Narrative."  under  date  October  19th,  183(i— "Departing  from  .Tarvis  Field  [the 
residence  of  the  Police-magistrate]  we  ....  proceeded  throngli  open 
grassy-forest,  to  the  Cow-pastures,  where,  at  Bruwnlowe  Hill,  we  were  welcomed 
by  George  and  James  M'Leay,  sons  of  our  kind  friend  the  Colonial  Secretary. 
.  We  visited  the  agricultural  establishment  of  the  ^VI'Leays,  on  the 
Mount  Hunter  Creek,  where  they  have  a  garden,  producing  Oranges.  Apples, 
Loquats,  Pears,  Plums.  Cherries.  Figs.  ^lulben-ies,  ]\redlars.  Raspberries,  Straw- 
berries, and  Gooseberries,  and  where  Roses  are  in  gi'eat  profusion." 


THE  society's  heritage  from   the  MACIjEATS.  591 

George  Macleay  subsequently  became  the  owner  of  the  Brownlow  Hill  pro- 
perty, and  it  was  his  home  until  his  return  to  England  in  1859.  In  a  letter  to  his 
mother,  written  from  Brownlow  Hill  on  June  5th,  1857,  the  Governor,  Sir  William 
Denison,  who  had  visited  George  Macleay  there  on  two  previous  occasions,  says — 
"The  j)lace  where  we  are  stopping  is  very  prettily  situated  on  a  curious  flat-topped 
knoll,  rising  out  of  a  plain  by  the  side  of  a  brook;  the  soil  is  beautiful;  I  never 
saw  such  a  growth  either  of  flowers  or  fruit-trees  as  is  shown  in  a  garden  whicli 
has  just  been  made  in  the  alluvial  soil  of  the  flat."  [Varieties  of  Vice-Regal  Life, 
Vol.  i.,  p.  385,  1870.] 

Additional  testimony  is  afforded  by  a  reprint  of  a  lecture  delivered  at  the 
Sydney  School  of  Arts,  in  1834,  bv  Mr.  Thomas  Shepherd.  This  pioneer  nursery- 
man and  horticulturist  arrived  in  Sydney  on  February  12th,  1826.  He  received 
a  grant  of  land,  at  what  is  now  Chijipendale,  from  Governor  Darling,  to  enable 
him  to  establish  a  public  nursery  and  fruit-garden,  long  afterwards  known  as  the 
Darling  Nursery.  In  giving  an  account  of  his  early  experiences,  Mr.  Shepherd 
said :  "About  this  time  [January,  1827]  I  began  to  collect  stock  for  budding  and 
gi-afting  fruit-trees  upon;  and  also  other  plants  of  various  kinds,  to  commence 
the  nureery.  Mr.  "William  Macarthur,  of  Camden,  furnished  me  with  a  choice 
collection  of  gTafts  and  trees.  Mr.  Alexander  Macleay,  of  Elizabeth  Bay,  wa-s 
also  a  benefactor  in  supplying  me  with  numerous  species  and  varieties  of  fruit, 
ornamental  trees,  shrubs,  and  flower-roots;  and  it  is  to  these  two  gentlemen  that 
the  early  settlers  were  principally  indebted  for  the  numerous  varieties  of  fruit  and 
other  trees  raised  in  those  days."  ["In  tlie  'Tliirties' :  A  Pioneer  Gardener,"  by 
A. P.O.     In  "On  the  Land"   column,   Siidneii  Morning  Herald,  .luly  2nd,  1913.] 

Elizabeth  Bay  House  apparently  was  not  occupied  until  after  Mr.  Macleay's 
retirement  from  the  position  of  Colonial  Secretary.  In  the  Mitchell  Library  there 
is  a  copy  of  a  "catalogue  of  an  extensive  and  valuable  library  of  nearly  4000 
volumes,  comprising  the  major  part  of  the  well-selected  Library  of  Alexander 
McLeay,  Esqr..  M.C.,  who  is  removing  to  the  country,"  to  be  sold  by  auction  in  1-4 
April  [the  year  not  given,  probably  1837].  This  may  be  taken  to  indicate  that 
the  removal  from  Bridge  Street  to  Elizabeth  Bay  was  carried  out  soon  after.  At 
this  time  Alexander  Macleay  was  in  his  70th  year.  The  expenditure  on  the  Eliza- 
beth Bay  property  amounted  to  not  less  than  £10,000 ;  and-  the  successful  way  in 
which  the  garden  had  been  developed  is  said  to  have  given  a  marked  stimulus  to 
ornamental  gardening  in   Sydney. 

William  Sharp  Macleay,  M.A.,  F.L.S. 

Eldest  son  of  Alexander  Macleay,  born  in  London,  July  21st,  1792 — Edu- 
cated at  AVestminster,  and  Trinity  College,  Cambridge — On  leaving  the  Uni- 
versity, appointed  Attache  to  the  British  Embassy  in  France:  subsequently 
Secretary  to  the  Board  for  liquidating  British  claims  on  the  French  Govern- 
ment, established  at  the  peace  of  1815 — 1825,  Commissioner  of  Arbitration  to 
the  Mixed  British  and  Spanish  Court  of  Commission  for  the  Abolition  of  the 
Slave  Trade  established  at  Havana,  Cuba :  1830,  Commissary  Judge  of  the 
same  Court :  1836,  Judge  of  the  Mixed  British  and  Spanish  Court  of  Justice 
established  under  the  Treaty  of  1835—1836,  returned  to  England;  1837,  re- 
tired from  the  Public  Service,  upon  a  pension — 1838.  left  England  for  Aus- 
tralia with  his  cousins  William  and  John,  arriving  in  Sydney  in  March,  1839 — 
1865,  died  in  Sydney,  on  .lanuary  26th :  buried  in  the  family  tomb  in  Camper- 
down  Cemetery:  cenotaph  in  St.  James'   Church. 


f)92  president's  address. 

Among  the  sources  of  our  interest  in  W.  S.  Macleay.  the  following;  may  be 
particularised.  In  due  time  he  succeeded  to  the  collection  of  liis  father,  added 
considerably  to  it,  and  eventually  passed  on  the  joint  collections  to  William  Mac- 
leay. He  had  worked  up  the  Scarabaeiilae  in  his  father's  collection ;  also  Captain 
P.  P.  King's  collection  of  Australian  Annulosa.  The  results  of  his  work  and 
of  his  influence  are  contributions  to  a  not  unimportant,  Pre-Dar\vinian,  English 
chapter  in  the  history  of  Zoology.  He  was  universally  recognised  as  the  leading 
representative  of  Zoology  resident  in  Sydney  from  1839  up  to  the  time  of  his 
death  in  1865.  But  a  special  source  of  interest  is  that  he  was  the  guide  and 
mentor  of  William  Macleay;  and  a  most  potent  influence  in  starting  his  coiisin 
on  the  first  stage  of  his  career,  as  a  working  entomologist,  preparatory  to  becom- 
ing a  member  of  the  succession.  And  finally,  we  lia\e  a  very  interesting  series 
of  memorials  of  him. 

The  two  original  sources  of  biograpliical  information  concerning  W.  S. 
Macleay  that  we  have  are  an  obituary  notice  published  in  the  Stidtie/i  Moniivij 
Herald  of  January  .SOth,  1865;  and  the  memorial  sketch  communicated  by  the 
Senior  Secretary,  at  the  Anniversary  Meeting  of  the  Linnean  Society  of  London, 
on  May  24th,  1865  [Journ.,  Zool.,  ix.,  Proc,  p-c.].  Later  notices  in  Biographical 
Dictionaries  are  based  on  one  or  other  of  these.  The  first  wa.s  utilised  by  the 
Rev.  R.  L.  King  in  the  preparation  of  his  first  Presidential  Address  to  the  Ento- 
mological Society  of  New  South  Wales,  on  .January  30th,  1865  [Trans.  Ent.  Soc. 
N.S.  Wales,  Vol.  i.,  p.  xliii.].  Mr.  King  adds:  "The  following  memoir  I  have 
taken  principally  from  a  notice  which  Las  lately  appeared  from  the. pen  of  an  old 
friend."  This  would  be,  almo.st  certainly,  the  Rev.  W.  B.  Clarke,  probably 
after  a  consultation  with  William  Macleay.  ISIr.  Clarke  was  one  of  the  oldest 
and  closest  Australian  scientific  friends  of  W.  S.  Macleay.  Their  acquaintance 
probably  began  at  the  meeting  of  the  British  Association  for  the  Advancement  of 
Science  at  Liverpool,  in  1837,  when  both  were  thinking  of  migrating  to  Australia. 

The  biographical  sketch  communicated  to  the  Linnean  Society,  from  internal 
evidence,  was  apparently  drawn  up  by  Mr.  Busk,  Senior  Secretary,  after  consul- 
tation with  George  Macleay,  possibly  also  with  Professor  Huxley.  George  Mac- 
leay. at  this  time,  was  a  Member  of  the  Council,  and  would  have  received  full 
particulars  of  W.  S.  Jlacleay's  decease  from  William  Macleay. 

W.  S.  Macleay  graduated  with  hououi's  at  Trinity  College,  Cambridge,  in 
1814.  His  University  career  seems  to  have  been  without  direct  influence  on  his 
interest  in  Natural  History,  as  might  be  expected  from  his  own  remarks  on  the 
backward  state  of  Zoology  in  England  in  his  day.  Of  this,  he  says:  "Well  may 
the  foreigner  who  beholds  our  learned  establishments  so  splendidly  endowed,  note, 
among  the  most  remarkable  circumstances  atten<ling  them,  that  in  none  whatever 
should  there  be  a  zoological  chair.  It  is  not  for  me  to  enter  into  the  causes  of  this, 
else  it  were  desirable  to  know  why  plants  should  have  been  deemed  worthy  of 
attention,  while  animals  have  been  utterly  neglected.  .  .  .  It  is  true  that 
there  are  profe.ssoi-s  of  Natural  History  in  three  of  our  Northern  Universities. 
But  we  must  not  conceal  the  fact  that  a  professorship  of  Natural 
History  is  necessarily  charged  with  duties  that  give  ample  employment  in  Paris 
to  thirteen  professoi-s  with  their  numerous  assistants.  I  have  ventured  to  give 
this  humiliating  picture  of  the  state  of  zoological  instruction  in  Great  Britain,  be- 
cause there  are  persons  who  affect  surprise,  that  in  that  science  which  relates  to 
the  animated  works  of  God.  FrancP  should  taki'  precedence  over  a  nation  incom- 
parably more  religious"   [Hor.  Ent.  p.  457.  footnote]. 


THE  society's  heritage  prom  the  macleays.  593 

What  awakened  aud  developed  W.  S.  Macleay's  interest  in  Zoology  seems 
primarily  to  have  been  his  father's  example,  influence,  and  tine  collection  of  in- 
sects; and,  secondarily.  Ins  sojourn  in  Paris,  where  he  had  the  opportunity  of 
meeting  Cuvier,  Latreille,  and  other  distinguished  naturalists  of  that  time,  as  well 
as  of  apineciating  the  importance  of  the  magnificent  establishment  of  the  Jardiu 
des  Plantes. 

It  is  quite  possible  to  understand,  from  his  own  record,  what  W .  S .  Macleay's 
aims  were;  and,  from  the  modern  standpoint,  to  estimate  fairly  what  was  amiss  in 
his  method  of  trying  to  realise  them,  if  Huxley's  notable  maxim  be  kept  in  mind, 
that  "the  ablest  of  us  is  a  cliild  of  his  time,  profiting  by  one  set  of  influences, 
limited  by  another." 

W.  S.  Macleay  had  profited  by  his  intercourse  with  the  French  naturalists  in 
that,  as  a  Zoologist,  his  status  had  improved,  his  horizon  had  enlarged,  and  his 
standpoint  had  advanced.  Dr.  Leach,  Keeper  of  the  Natural  History  of  the  British 
Museum,  in  succession  to  Dr.  G.  Shaw,  from  1813-21,  who  was  older  than  W.  S. 
Macleay,  is  said  to  have  been  the  British  naturalist  who  "opened  the  eyes  of 
English  zoologists  to  the  importance  of  those  principles  which  had  long  guided 
the  French  naturalists."  W.  S.  Macleay  supported  him  in  this  respect.  In  the 
Horae  Entomologicae,  he  recognised  that,  until  the  last  few  years,  England  stood 
still  at  the  bottom  of  the  steps  where  Linnaeus  had  left  her,  while  her  neighbours 
were  advancing  rapidly  towards  the  entrance  of  the  temple.  He,  therefore,  en- 
deavoured to  pursue  the  example  set  by  the  new  school  of  naturalists.  He  ac- 
knowledges hi.;;  indebtedness  to  the  labours  of  Cuvier,  Lamarck,  Latreille,  and 
Savigny.  and  refers  to  Latreille  as  the  father  of  entomology.  He  recognised,  also, 
more  clearly  than  his  contemporaries  did,  that  there  was  a  profound  difference  be- 
tween affinity  and  analogj'. 

But  as  a  systematiser — the  propounder  of  principles,  and  of  a  system,  of 
classification — his  limitations,  apart  from  the  imperfections  of  the  knowledge  of 
his  time,  and  from  the  fact  that  he  was  a  private  individual,  unattached  to  a  teach- 
ing-institution or  a  museum,  cultivating  an  interest  in  natural  history  in  his 
leisure-hours,  came  in  no  small  degree  from  his  English  traditions  and  nurture, 
from  the  earlier  influence  of  the  Time-Spirit  of  the  land  of  his  birth.  For  it  was 
in  England,  in  his  day,  that  the  views  respecting  the  significance  of  the  Natural 
System,  which  he  advocated,  chiefly  prevailed. 

In  his  paper  "Remarks  on  the  Comparative  Anatomy  of  certain  Birds  of 
Cuba,"  read  to  the  Linnean  Society  of  London  on  November  21,  1826,  W.  S. 
Macleay  says:  "If  it  be  well  said  by  M.  Cuvier,  that  the  natural  history  of  an 
ainmal  is  the  knowledge  of  everything  that  regards  that  animal — then  Natural 
History,  as  a  science,  is  only  studied  in  effect  when  we  are  engaged  in  the  pursint 
of  the  natural  system"  (p.  13).  W.  S.  Macleay  was  a  naturalist  in  the  special 
sense  that  the  primary  and  avowed  object  of  his  studies  was  the  pursuit  of  the 
natural  system.  Descriptive  zoology,  therefore,  to  him,  was  but  a  means  to  that 
end;  otherwise,  it  had  little  or  no  attraction  for  him;  and,  unless  for  special  rea- 
sons, he  did  not  attempt  it.  It  was  the  philosophical  side  of  the  subject  that 
appealed  to  him  so  strongly.  But  what  is  the  natural  system?  He  recurs  again 
and  again  to  the  theme,  either  in  stating  his  own  case,  or  in  criticising  the  views 
of  others.  For  example,  in  the  Preface  to  the  Horae  Ent.,  p.  xiii.,  he  says :  "Thus 
it  requires  neither  talent  nor  ingenuity  to  invent  an  artificial  system,  and  there 
may  be  as  many  hundreds  of  such  as  there  are  heads  to  devise  them ;  but  of  natural 


594  president's  address. 

systems  there  is  and  can  be  only  one.  Finally,  the  former  is  the  miserable  resource 
of  the  feeble  mind  of  man,  unable  to  comprehend  in  one  view  the  innumerable 
works  of  the  creation;  whereas  the  natural  system  is  the  plan  of  creation  itself, 
the  work  of  an  all-wise,  all-powerful  Deity." 

In  his  last  paper  "Annulosa  of  South  Africa,"'  before  leaving  England 
(1838),  he  says  (p.  52)  :  "It  must  not  be  supposed,  however,  that  I  offer  this  essay 
as  perfect  and  complete,  or  that  I  absurdly  pretend,  as  some  have  most  unjustly 
laid  to  my  charge,  to  have  positively  arrived  at  the  Natural  System.  I  merely 
publish  this  paper  on  Cetoniidae  as  another,  and  perhaps  closer  approximation  to 
that  Divine  plan,  which,  every  hour  I  have  devoted  to  nature,  whether  in  tropical 
forests  or  in  the  museums  of  Eur(;pe,  has  shown  to  be  the  branch  of  natural 
history  most  worthy  of  being  studied  by  rational  beings.  But  the  truth  is  that 
this  divine  plan  is  not  one  particular  branch  of  natural  history,  but  the  study  of 
of  every  branch.  It  is  the  whole,  of  which  it  necessarily  includes  the  knowledge 
every  branch  of  natural  history  is  but  a  part,  and  which  I  shall  ever  regard  with 
gratitude,  as  having  been  the  source  of  many  moments  of  the  purest  pleasure 
while  my  residence  was  in  an  unhealthy  climate.'' 

Such  views  as  these  were  entirely  in  keeping  with  the  English  Time-Spirit  of 
the  day.  They  were  fostered  by  some  of  the  cun-ent  English  literature  of  the 
time,  notably  a  book  entitled  "The  Wisdom  of  God  manifested  in  the  Works  of 
the  Creator,"  written  by  John  Ray  (1628-1705).  the  "fatlier  of  modern  zoology,'' 
a  divine  as  well  as  a  naturalist.  It  was  a  very  popular  book  a  century  ago.  W. 
S.  Macleay  quotes  from  it  approvingly  more  than  once  in  the  Horae  Entomolo- 
g^eae  (pp.  468,  488).  Another  treatise  breathing  the  same  pious  spirit  was  the 
"Reflections  on  the  Study  of  Nature:  translated  from  the  Latin  of  the  cele- 
brated Linnaeus,"  by  Dr.  J.  E.  Smith,  President  of  the  Linnean  Society,  and 
issued  together  with  liis  Inaugural  Address  to  the  Society,  and  some  of  his  smaller 
botanical  papers,  in  one  volume,  entitled  "Tracts  relating  to  Natural  History,"  in 
1798.  In  due  time  there  followed  the  "Bridgewater  Treatises  on  the  Power, 
Wisdom,  and  Goodness  of  God  as  manifested  in  the  Creation"  (numerous  vol- 
umes by  various  authors),  and  Paley's  "Natural  Theology." 

The  incentive  to  begin  active  work,  with  a  view  to  publication,  came  (luite 
simply.  The  tirst  edition  of  Cuvier's  "Regne  Animal,"  in  4  vols.,  was  published  in 
1817.  while  W.  S.  Macleay  was  officially  resident  in  Paris.  The  entomological 
portion  of  this  important  work  was  contributed  by  Latreille,  who  therein  "applied 
the  name  of  Lamelli comes  to  an  artificial  division  comprising  all  the  insects  which 
compose  the  genera  Luoarius  and  Scarahaeux^  as  they  were  left  by  Linnaeus  in  his 
last  edition  of  the  Systema  Naturae."  W.  S.  Macleay,  therefore,  decided  to 
revise  the  group,  as  his  father's  cabinet  contained  representatives  of  nearly  1800 
species  of  the  Linnean  genus  Searabaeics ;  and,  as  an  additional  qualification  for 
undertaking  the  work,  he  had  had  the  good  fortune  to  visit  almost  every  collection 
of  note  in  Europe,  excepting  those  of  Vienna  and  Berlin.  The  results  of  this 
investigation  were  published,  as  a  separate  work,  in  London,  Part  i.  in  1819.  and 
Part  ii.  in  1821.  under  the  title  of  "Hora^  Entomologicae :  or  Essays  on  the 
Annulose  Animals,  Part  i.,  containing  general  Observations  on  the  Geograpliy 
Manners,  and  Natural  .MTinities  of  the  Insects  whicli  compose  the  Genus  Sccira- 
baeun  of  Linnaeus;  to  which  are  added  a  few  incidental  Remarks  on  the  Genera 
Lucanus  and  Hister  of  the  same  author.  With  an  Appendix  and  Plates."  A 
second  part  was  published  two  years  after,  in  1821,  under  the  title  "Part  ii.:  .Vn 


THE  society's  HERITAGE  TROM  THE  MACLEATS.  595 

attempt  to  ascertain  the  Rank  and  Situation  which  the  celebrated  Egyptian  In- 
sect, Scarabaeus  sacer,  holds  among'  Organised  Beings." 

These  two  contributions  to  knowledge,  in  some  respects  perhaps  his  most 
important  ones,  were  something  more  than  merely  entomological  treatises,  as  the 
Title  and  Sub-titles  might  be  taken  to  indicate.  The  arrangement  of  the  Lamelli- 
ccii-n  Insects  in  the  first  part  was  the  result  of  rigid  analysis,  whereby  the  author 
arrived  at  some  new  principles  of  classification.  These,  in  the  second  part,  were 
applied  to  an  arrangement  of  the  entire  animal  kingdom,  chiefly  deduced  trom 
synthetical  investigation,  and  confined,  moreover,  to  the  larger  and  more  important 
groups,  as  pointed  out  by  Jen>Tis.  But  in  the  course  of  his  synthetical  investiga- 
tion, the  author  finds  occasion  to  discuss  the  great  problems  of  Philosophy,  as  they 
present  themselves  to  the  philosophical  Theist. 

W.  S.  Maeleay's  new  principles  of  classification  were  incidentally  treated  of, 
but  not  formulated  by  him.  This  was  afterwards  done  by  the  Eev.  L.  Jenyns, 
in  a  valuable  "Report  on  the  Recent  Progiess  and  Present  State  of  Zoology," 
covering  the  period  from  the  publication  of  the  fii'st  edition  of  Cuvier's  "Regne 
Animal"  (1817)  to  date,  drawn  up  at  the  request  of  the  Section  for  Natural  His- 
tory of  the  British  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science,  and  included  in 
the  "Report  of  the  Fourth  Meeting  held  at  Edinburgh  in  1834"  [pp.  143-251. 
especially  pp.  152-155,  et  seq.  (1835)].  The  writer  ably  and  fairly  reviews  W.  S. 
Maeleay's  views  on  classification,  gives  references  to  the  work  of  the  new  school 
of  English  zoologists  [including,  besides  Macleay,  Kirby,  Vigors,  Swainson,  Hors- 
field.  and  .7.  E.  Gray],  and  enables  the  reader  to  understand  the  zoological  Time- 
Spirit  of  the  period.  He  thus  formally  states  Maeleay's  new  principles: — "Mr. 
MacLeay  [in  the  Hor.  Ent.]  announced  some  new  principles  connected  with  the 
classification  of  animals,  which,  from  the  circumstance  of  their  having  led  to  a 
peculiar  school  of  zoologists  in  England  it  will  be  necessary  to  consider  a  little 
more  in  detail.  The  most  important  of  these  principles*  [Footnote — *  It  may  be 
observed  that  Mr.  MacLeay  has  nowhere  formally  stated  these  principles  as  above. 
They  are  only  gathered  from  what  he  has  written  on  the  subject.]  are:  (1st)  That 
all  natural  gi'oups,  of  whatever  denomination,  return  into  themselves,  forming 
circles;  (2ndly).  That  each  of  these  circular  groups  is  resolvable  into  exactly  five 
otliers;  (Srdly),  That  these  five  gi'oups  always  admit  of  a  binary  arrange- 
ment, two  of  them  t'eing  what  he  calls  typical,  the  other  three  aberrant;  (4thly) 
That  while  proximate  groups  in  any  circle  are  connected  by  relations  of  affinity, 
corresponding  groups  in  two  contiguous  circles  are  connected  by  relations  of 
analogy.  Mr.  Macleay  has  also  observed  [Hor.  Ent.  p.  518]  that,  in  almost  e\-ery 
group,  one  of  the  five  minor  gToup.s  into  which  it  is  resolvable,  bears  a  re- 
semblance to  all  the  rest;  or,  more  strictly  speaking,  consists  of  types  which  re- 
present those  of  each  of  the  four  other  groups,  together  with  a  type  peculiar  to 
itself."  These  views  came  to  be  known  as  the  "Quinary  System"  or  tlie  "Circular 
and  Quinary  System." 

Jen>T[s  came  to  the  conclusion  that  AV.  S.  iMadeay  had  pointed  out  more 
exactly  than  others  the  difference  between  affinity  and  analogy  in  natural  history; 
and  that  he  was  also  the  first  to  establish  by  proof  circular  affinities.  He  then 
proceeds:  ""Whatever  of  error  there  may  be  in  the  rest  of  his  views,  whatever 
modifications  already  have  been,  or  may  yet  further  be  made  in  them,  by  tlie  help 
of  the  above  principles  he  appeai-s  to  have  approached  nearer  than  any  before 
him  to  the  true  natural  system,  and  (as  has  already  been  twice  observed)    [Kirby, 


59G  president's  address. 

Introd.  to  Eutom.,  "^'ol.  iv.,  p.  359;  and  Swaiuson,  Fu.  Bor.-Ain.,  part  2,  p.  xlvi.] 
been  enabled  to  reconcile  facts  which  upon  no  other  plan  can  be  reconciled."' 

Ten  years  later,  H.  E.  Strickland  communicated  a  ''Report  on  the  Recent 
Progress  and  Present  State  of  Ornithology"  at  the  Fourteenth  Meeting  of  the 
British  Association  held  at  York  in  1844  [Fourteenth  Report,  pp.  17()-2'2l].  Tliis 
also  is  a  valuable  report.  It  is  of  special  interest,  because  it  includes  a  critical 
review  of  the  Quinary  Theory,  and  of  the  work  of  Vigors  and  Swaiuson  as  ex- 
ponents of  it.  At  the  same  time,  it  illustrates  the  insuperable  difficulty  of  finding 
a  scientific  meaning  of  affinity  under  the  influence  of  the  creation-hypothesis. 
Strickland  rejects  the  Quinary  System  "as  a  theory  which  the  most  careful  in- 
ductions and    the    most  vuiprejudiced  reasonings  of    subsequent    naturalists    have 

shown  to  have  no  claim  to  our  adoption  as  a  general  law The  point 

at  issue  is  this, — whether  or  not  it  formed  a  part  of  the  plan  of  Creative  Wisdom, 
when  engaged  in  peopling  the  earth  with  living  beings,  that  when  arranged  into 
abstract  groups  conformably  with  their  characters,  they  should  follow  any  regular 
geometrical  or  numerical  law."  After  much  interesting  argument,  too  lengthy  to 
quote,  he  concludes  that  irregidarity  and  not  synuuetry  may  be  expected  to  char- 
acterise the  natural  system;  ami  that  this  view  is  more  consistent  with  the  benevo- 
lence of  an  all-wise  Creator. 

Strickland,  renewing  Vigoi-s'  paper  on  "The  Natural  Affinities  that  connect 
the  Orders  and  Families  of  Birds"  [Trans.  Linn.  Soc,  Vol.  xiv.]  says:  "This 
treatise  abounds  with  original  observations  and  philosophical  references,  but  un- 
fortunately they  are  apjilied  in  support  of  a  tlieory  which  the  most  careful  induc- 
tions and  the  most  unprejudiced  reasonings  of  subsequent  naturalists  have  shown 

to  have  no  claim  to  our  adoption  as  a  general  law The  application 

by  Mr.  Vigors  of  these  novel  and  singular  doctrines  to  the  class  of  birds  contri- 
buted in  no  small  degree  to  the  advancement  of  ornithological  science;  for,  how- 
ever erroneous  a  theory  may  be,  yet  the  researches  which  are  entered  upon  with 
a  view  to  its  support  or  refutation  invariably  advance  the  cause  of  truth.  Alchemy 
was  the  parent  of  chemistry,  astrology  of  astronomy,  and  quinarianisni  has  at  least 
been  one  of  the  foster-parents  of  philosophical  zoology." 

Reviewing  Swainson's  "Classification  of  Birds"  foi'ming  part  of  Lardner's 
Cyclopaedia  (1830-37).  Strickland  says  of  Swainson's  method,  that  it  is  "only  a 
modification  of  the  quinary  theory,  originally  propounded  by  IMacleay  and  further 
developed  by  Vigors.  In  following  Jlr.  Swainsun  into  the  details  of  his  method, 
we  miss  the  philosophical  spirit  and  logical  though  not  always  well-founded  rea- 
soning of  the  last  two  authoi-s.  Firmly  wedded  to  a  theory,  he  is  driven,  in  apply- 
ing it  to  facts,  to  the  most  forced  and  fanciful  conclusions.  Compelled  to  show 
that  the  components  of  every  group  assume  a  circular  figure,  that  they  amount  in 
the  aggregate  to  a  definite  number,  into  which  each  of  them  is  again  subdivisible, 
and  that  there  is  a  system  of  nnalnr/ical  representation  between  the  corresponding 
members  of  every  circle,  which  forms  the  sole  test  of  its  conformity  to  the  natural 
arrangement,  we  need  not  wonder  at  the  difficulties  with  which  our  author  is  beset; 
and  we  may  certainly  admire  the  ingenuity  with  which  he  has  grapi)led  with  the 
Protean  forms  of  nature,  and  forced  them  into  an  apparent  coincidence  with  a  pre- 
determined system.  I  need  not  follow  out  the  details  of  this  Procrustean  process, 
having  already  treated  of  it  elsewhere"  [p.  17,5.  Reprinted  in  ''Memoirs  of  Hugh 
Edwin  Strickland."  By  Sir  William  -Tardine  (1848).  This  .also  includes  a  Selec- 
tion  from   Strickland's   scientific   writings] . 


THE  society's  heritage  from  the  macleays.  597- 

But  Swainson  did  not  confine  his  attention  to  the  application  of  the  Quinai-y 
System,  as  modified  by  himself  to  the  cla;isification  of  Birds.  He  narrates,  in  his 
autobiogi-aphy,  included  in  one  of  his  books,  how,  under  financial  stress,  he  be- 
came a  "professional  author,"  and,  as  such,  the  contributor  of  about  a  dozen  popu- 
lar textbooks  on  Natural  History,  to  Lardner's  "Cabinet  of  Natural  History," 
later  "The  Cabinet  Cyclopaedia,"  during  the  years  1834-40.  In  some  of  these  he 
applied  his  views  to  the  classification  of  Quadrupeds,  Reptiles  and  Fishes,  Mol- 
lusea,  and  Insecta,  as  well  as  to  the  Principles  of  Classification  and  cognate  mat- 
ters. He  became,  in  this  way,  the  most  voluminous  expoimder  of  the  Quinary 
System.  His  books  contain  much  useful  information,  but  they  are  also  open  to 
Strickland's  objection  to  the  fanciful  way  in  which  he  forced  the  Protean  forms  of 
nature  into  an  apparent  coincidence  with  a  predetermined  system. 

These  quotations  are  given  because,  without  a  knowledge  of  what  they  repre- 
sent, it  is  difficult  to  understand  the  condensed  statements  about  W.  S. 
Macleay's  work,  as  given  in  the  Obituary  Notices,  to  which  reference  has  been 
made.  A'igors,  and  especially  Swainsun,  were  the  "injudicious  friends"  referred 
to  by  Mr.  Busk. 

Other  Pre-Darwinian  reviewers  or  critics  of  Macleay's  system  besides  those 
mentioned,  include  Kirby  and  Speuee  [Introduction  to  Entomology.  Fifth  Edi- 
tion (1828),  Vol.  iii.,  p.  12;  Vol.  iv.,  p.  477],  E.  Newman  [Entomological  Maga- 
zine, Vol.  v..  p.  ix.,  1838],  J.  O.  Westwood  [Arcana  Entomologica,  Vol.  i.,  p.  188, 
1845],  W.  Whewell  [History  of  the  Inductive  Sciences,  Vol.  iii.,  p.  295,  1857],  and 
Louis  Agassiz  [Essay  on  Classification,  p.  234,  1859]. 

In  his  obituary  notice  of  W.  S.  Macleay,  Mr.  Busk  remarks:  "It  would  be 
out  of  place  here  to  enter  into  an  analysis  or  criticism  of  this  work  [The  Hor. 
Ent.],  in  which,  however,  it  may  be  said  are  contained  some  of  the  most  important 
speculations  as  to  the  affinities  or  relations  of  various  gi-oups  of  animals  to  each 
other  ever  offered  to  the  world,  and  of  which  it  is  almost  impossible  to  overrate 
the  suggestive  value.  Speculative  ideas,  however,  of  such  a  general  kind,  even  in 
the  hands  of  their  author,  are  apt  to  be  earned  too  far  in  their  application,  ami, 
when  they  fall  into  those  of  other  speculators  of  less  information  and  less  capacity, 
can  hardly  fail  to  be  grossly  misused.  This  has  been  the  case  with  Mr.  MacLeay'3 
ideas;  and  thus,  as  observed  by  the  author  of  a  notice  in  the  'Reader,'  of  his 
labours,  the  name  of  the  'circular  system'  and  of  'quinarianism'  became  almost 
bywords,  and  the  work  of  one  of  the  most  thoughtful  and  original  of  English 
biologists  sank  at  one  time  into  most  unmerited  neglect." 

It  is  a  reasonable,  and  very  probably  a  correct  surmise,  that  tlie  notice  of 
W.  S.  Macleay  in  the  "Reader"  referred  to  by  Mr.  Busk,  was  written  by  Huxley. 
Particulars  of  Huxley's  association  with  the  "Reader."  as  promoter  and  editor-in- 
chief,  are  given  in  the  "Life  and  Letters"  of  Huxley  [Vol.  i.,  p.  305] .  This 
weekly  journal  was  established  after  the  quarterly  Natural  History  Review  was 
given  up,  and  lasted  from  1863-66.  It  was  the  foreiimner  of  the  current 
"Nature,"  established  in  1869.  As  far  as  one  can  judge*  Huxley  was  the  only  one 
of  those  associated  with  the  management  of  the  "Reader'  who  had  personally 
known  W.  S.  Macleay.  If  so.  his  notice  was  his  last  tribute  to  the  Sydney 
friend  of  1847-50.     Unfortunately  no  copy  of  the  "Reader"  is  available  in  Sydney. 

W.  S.  Macleay  did  reply  to  minor  critics,  like  Bicheno  and  Fleming,  on 
such  subjects  as  Systems  in  the  abstract.  Natural.  Artificial,  or  Dichotomons.  But 
how  was  the  finite  mind  of  man  to  grapple  successfully  with  such  supernatural 


598  president's  address. 

problems  as  symmetry  in  the  natural  system  versus  irregularity,  as  judicative  o£ 
the  benevolence  of  an  all- wise  Creator? 

His  only  reply  to  Swainson  is  contained  in  his  paper  on  the  "Natural  System 
of  Fishes,"  dated  Elizabeth  Bay,  near  Sydney,  September  12ti,  1840,  sent  as  a  letter 
to  Dr.  J.  McClelland,  of  Calcutta,  published  in  the  Calcutta  Journal  of  Nat.  Hist., 
July,  1841,  and  republished  in  the  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  Vol.  ix.,  p.  197  (1842). 
In  this,  he  says:  "I  assure  you  that  your  excellent  work  on  Cyprinidae  has  afford- 
ed me  the  greatest  delight,  and  the  more  so,  inasmuch  as  I  am  convinced  natural 
arrangement  is  always  best  tested  by  accurate  analysis,  and  also  inasmuch  as  1 
am  not  by  any  means  satisfied  with  Swainson's  arrangement  of  Fishes.  As  from 
ever\'thing  Swainson  writes  there  is  information  to  be  derived,  so  I  assure  you, 

his  little  volume  on  Reptiles  and  Fishes  has  not  been  lost  on  me I 

am  often  afraid  of  tmsting  myself  to  Mr.  Swainson's  method  of  drawing  analo- 
gies  between    things   in   themselves    wide  apart The   nearer    two 

groups  are  in  general  structure,  the  more  striking  their  parallel  analogies  will  be; 
and  therefore  I  think,  that  by  comparing  fish  witli  fish,  we  may  obtain  more 
striking  analogies  than  by  comparing  them,  as  Swainson  does,  with  Mammalia, 
birds,  or  insects;  at  all  events,  we  shall  have  less  reason  to  distrust  the  efforts  of  a 
fertile  imagination.  Still  I  am  far  from  denying  that  such  analogies  as  he 
delights  in  exist  in  nature.  I  only  say  that  they  are  dangerous  things  to  deal 
with,  and  that  in  his  hands  they  often  become  far-fetched  and  even  ludicrous" 
(pp.  203,  204). 

Professor  Ray  Lankester,  in  his  valuable  Essay  on  "the  History  and  Scope  of 
Zoology,"  points  out  that  the  history  of  Zoology  as  a  science  is  the  history  of  the 
great  biological  doctrine  of  organic  evolution  as  put  forward,  on  a  new  basis,  by 
Charles  Darwin  in  his  "Origin  of  Species,"  published  in  the  year  1859.  It  is  a 
long  and  involved  story,  and  some  of  the  details  are  still  in  question. 

W.  S.  Macleay's  published  work  covers  the  period  1819-47.  Therefore,  in 
time,  as  well  as  in  character,  in  so  far  as  it  has  to  do  with  the  significance  of  the 
natural  system  and  with  the  principles  of  classification,  it  is  pre-Darwinian. 

What  was  needed  then,  no  less  than  when  Darwin  offered  it,  in  1859,  was  what 
Huxley  said:  "That  which  we  were  looking  for,  and  could  not  find,  was  a  hypo- 
thesis respecting  the  origin  of  known  organic  forms,  which  assumed  the  operation 
of  no  causes  but  such  as  cnuld  be  proved  to  be  netually  at  work.  We  wanted  not 
to  pin  our  faith  to  that  or  any  other  speculation,  but  to  get  hold  of  clear  and 
definite  conceptions  which  could  be  brought  face  to  face  with  facts  and  have  their 
validity  tested.  The  'Origin'  provided  us  with  the  working-hypothesis  we  sought. 
Moreover,  it  did  the  immense  service  of  freeing  us  for  ever  from  the  dilemma — 
refuse  to  accept  the  creation-hypothesis,  and  what  have  you  to  propose  that  can 
be  accepted  by  any  cautious  reasoner?"  [Darwin's  "Life,"  Vol.  ii.,  p.  197]. 

In  offering  his  working-hypothesis,  Darwin  first  grouped  his  predecessors: 
"Naturalists  try  to  arrange  the  species,  genera,  and  families  in  each  class,  on  what 
is  called  the  Natural  System.  But  what  is  meant  by  this  system?  Some  authorj 
look  at  it  merely  as  a  scheme  for  arranging  together  those  living  objects  which 
are  most  alike,  and  for  separating  tho.se  which  are  most  unlike;  or  as  an  artificial 
means  for  enumerating,  as  briefly  as  possible,  general  propositions. 
But  many  naturalists  think  that  something  more  is  meant  by  the  Natural  System; 
they  believe  that  it  reveals  the  plan  of  the  Creator;  but  unless  it  be  specified  whe- 
ther in  order,  time  or  space,  or  what  else  is  meant  by  the  plan  of  the  Creator,  it 


THE  society's  heritage  FROM  THE   MACLEAYS.  599 

seems  to  me  that  nothing  is  thus  added  to  our  knowledge.  ...  I  believe 
that  something  more  is  included ;  and  that  propinquity  of  descent — the  only 
known  cause  of  the  similarity  of  organic  beings — is  the  bond,  hidden  as  it  is  by 
various  degrees  of  moditication,  which  is  partially  revealed  to  us  by  our  classifi- 
cations"  [Origin  of  Species,  p.  413,  I860]. 

The  first  group  included  the  French  school,  led  by  Cuvier,  and  also  other  Con- 
tinental zoologists.  The  second  comprised  the  English  zoologists  who  concerned 
themselves  with  the  pursuit  of  the  natural  system  in  the  first  half  of  the  last 
century,  among  w  hom  W.  S.  Madeay  was  pre-eminent.  It  included  also  Louis  Agassiz, 
a  great  teacher  and  an  eminent  naturalist,  whose  "Essay  on  Classification"  was 
published  in  England  as  a  separate  work  in  1859,  the  year  in  which  Dai-win's 
"Origin  of  Species"  was  issued. 

After  grouping  his  predecessors,  Darwin  presented  his  working-hypothesis 
in  the  following  words : — "All  the  foregoing  rules  and  aids  and  diftieulties  in  classi- 
fication are  explained,  if  I  do  not  greatly  deceive  myself,  on  the  view  that  the 
natural  system  is  founded  on  descent  witli  modification ;  that  the  characters  which 
naturalists  consider  as  showing  true  affinity  between  any  two  or  more  species,  are 
those  which  have  been  inherited  from  a  common  parent,  and,  in  so  far,  all  true 
classification  is  genealogical;  that  community  of  descent  is  the  hidden  bond  which 
naturalists  have  been  unconsciously  seeking,  and  not  some  unknown  plan  of  crea- 
tion,  or   the  enunciation   of   general  propositions,  and  the    putting   together    anrt 

separating   objects  more  or   less  alike On  my   view    of  characters 

being  of  real  importance  for  classification,  only  in  so  far  as  they  reveal  descent, 
we  can  clearly  understand  why  analogical  or  adaptive  characters,  although  of  the 
utmost  importance  to  the  welfare  of  the  being,  are  almost  valueless  to  the  system- 
atist.  For  animals,  belonging  to  two  most  distinct  lines  of  descent,  may  readily 
become  adapted  to  similar  conditions,  and  thus  assume  a  close  external  resemb- 
lance; but  such  resemblances  will  not  reveal — will  rather  tend  to  conceal  their 
blood-relationship  to  their  proper  lines  of  descent"  [Origin  of  Species,  pp.  421, 
426] . 

Viewed  in  the  light  of  these  illuminating  propositions,  it  is  obvious  that  the 
Circular  and  Quinary  System  did  not  fulfil  the  requirements  of  a  working  hypo- 
thesis, such  as  was  needed.  It  was  an  artificial  system,  the  fruit  of  philosophical 
speculation.  "Within  its  limitations,  and  frt«m  the  particular  standpoint  from 
which  it  was  attempted,  the  Horae  Entomologicae  was  thoughtfully  and  ably  writ- 
ten; and  a  stimulating  contribution  to  the  English  scientific  literature  of  the 
time.  The  defects  of  tlie  principles  and  of  the  system  were  the  inherent  scientific 
weakness  of  the  foundation  on  which  they  were  based.  They  were  the  product  of 
a  studied  attempt  to  develop  the  Natural  System  under  the  influence  of  the 
creation-hypothesis — in  the  belief  that  "the  Natural  System  is  the  plan  of  creation 
itself,  the  work  of  an  all-wise  all-powerful  Deity."  This  assumed  the  operation 
of  causes  outside  the  domain  of  science,  involving  the  obscuration  of  both  thd 
need,  and  the  possibility  of  finding  a  scientific  meaning  of  natural  affinity,  and 
all  that  it  connotes.  The  author's  conceptions  of  circular  affinities,  of  quinary 
groups,  and  of  no  true  affinities  unconnected  with  relations  of  analog^-,  were 
speculative  ideas  without  a  scientific  basis;  because,  in  the  belief  that  devisers  of 
systems  were  merely  endeavouring  to  translate  the  thoughts  of  the  Creator  into 
human  language,  affinity  and  analogy  could  be  interpreted  only  in  terms  of  some- 
thing supernatural  and  beyond  the  domain  of  science. 


too  president's  address. 

W.  S.  Macleay's  views  had  apparently,  not  profouudly  changed  up  to  the 
time  that  Huxley  said  tarewell  to  liim  in  Sydney,  in  Jlay,  1850.  Huxley's  seconii 
letter  to  Macleay,  the  only  one  which  has  come  down  to  us,  was  written  on  Novem- 
ber 9th,  1851,  just  a  year  after  the  "Rattlesnake"  was  paid  off,  after  her  return  to 
England.  In  this,  Huxley  writes :  "1  am  every  day  becoming  more  and  mors 
certain  that  you  were  on  the  right  track  thii-ty  years  ago  in  your  views  of  the 
order  and  symmetry  to  be  traced  in  the  true  natural  system."  These  were  not 
empty  words  merely  intended  to  please.  The  reference  to  "thirty  years  ago," 
signities  1821,  the  year  in  which  the  second  part  of  the  Horae  Entomologicae  was 
published.  The  extract  quoted  reveals  the  fact  that  Huxley  had  read  the  book, 
possibly  on  the  homeward  voyage,  as  he  had  an  absorbing  source  of  interest,  apart 
from  science,  to  claim  his  attention  during  his  brief  periodical  visits  to  Sydney. 
Macleay  had  some  spare  copies  of  his  book,  and  probably  gave  one  to  Huxley, 
perhaps  as  a  parting  gift.  Moreover,  in  1851,  Huxley  could  write  as  he  did.  be- 
cause, though  he  may  have  given  up  the  "Pentateuehal  cosmogony,"  he  could  still 
say,  at  this  time :  "But  my  mind  was  unbiassed  in  respect  of  any  doctrine  which 
presented  itself,  if  it  professed  to  be  based  on  purely  philosophical  and  scientific 
rea.soning."  When  the  letter  was  written,  Huxley  was  still  an,  Assistant-Surgeon 
in  the  Navy,  on  leave,  in  order  to  prepare  bis  scientific  work  for  publication. 
His  future  prospects  were  very  uncertain;  and,  so  early  in  his  career,  he  had  not 
as  yet  been  brought  into  serious  contact  with  the  Species-question.  "My  last 
letter,"  he  says,  "is,  I  am  afraid,  nine  or  ten  months  old,  but  here  in  England,  the 
fighting  and  scratching  to  keep  your  place  in  the  crowd  exclude  almost  all  other 
thoughts.  When  I  last  wrote,  I  was  but  on  the  edge  of  the  crush  at  the  pit-door 
of  this  great  fools'  theatre — now   I  have  worked  my  way  into  it   and   through  it, 

and  am,  I  hope,  not  far  from  the  check-takers In  the  meanwhile, 

I  have  not  been  idle,  as  I  hope  to  show  you  by  the  various  papers  enclosed  with 
this."  It  was  after  this,  but  before  the  publication  of  the  "Origin,"  that,  as  his 
biographer  says,  he  took  up  "a  thoroughly  agnostic  attitude  with  regard  to  the 
species-question,  for  he  could  not  accept  the  creational  theory,  yet  sought  in  vain 
among  the  transmutationists  for  any  cause  adequate  to  produce  transmutation." 
Or,  in  his  own  words,  "I  imagine  that  most  of  those  of  my  contemporaries  who 
thought  seriously  about  the  matter,  were  very  much  in  my  own  state  of  mind — in- 
clined to  say  to  both  Mosaists  and  Evolutionists,  "a  plague  on  both  your  houses!" 
and  disposed  to  turn  aside  from  an  interminable  and  apparently  fruitless  discus- 
sion, tu  labour  in  the  fertile  fields  of  ascertainable  fact"   [Life  and  Letters.] 

It  is  a  matter  of  history  that  Darwin's  "Origin"  made  no  favourable  appeal 
for  consideration  as  a  working-hypothesis  for  the  solution  of  scientific  problems, 
either  to  Agassiz  or  to  W.  S.  Macleay.  not  to  speak  of  many  others;  and  merely 
presented  itself  as  a  menace  to  their  religious  beliefs.  But  how  few  there  were, 
who  merely  from  a  perusal  of  the  book,  without,  or  even  witli.  verbal  or  epistolary 
explanations  from  the  author,  were  ready  to  accept  it  at  its  face-value? 

It  is  not  surprising,  therefore,  that  the  receipt  of  a  copy  of  Darwin's  "Origin" 
sent  by  Mrs.  Lowe,  with  a  request  for  an  expression  of  his  opinion  about  it, 
should  furnish  W .  S .  Macleay  with  an  opportunity  only  for  a  theological  discus- 
sion. In  his  repjy  to  Robert  Lowe,  he  says  [May.  ]8()0]  :  "It  is  lucky  for  me 
therefore,  that  both  yon  and  Airs.  Lowe  have  given  me  the  subject  of  this  letter 
im  asking  me  for  my  opinion  of  Darwin's  book.  To  me,  now  on  the  verge  of 
the  tomb,  I  must  confess  the  subject  of  it  is  more  interesting  than  either  the  ex- 


THE  SOCIETY  S   HERITAGE  FROM   THE   MACLEAYS. 


601 


teiision  of  British  commerce  or  even  the  extension  of  national  education.  Tliis 
question  is  no  less  than  'What  am  I?'  'What  is  manf,  a  created  being  under  the 
direct  government  of  his  Creator,  or  only  an  accidental  sprout  of  some  primordial 
type  that  was  the  common  progenitor  of  both  animals  and  vegetables.  The 
theologian  has  no  doubt  answered  those  (juestions,  but  leaving  the  Mosaic  account 
of  the  Creation  to  Doctors  of  Divinity,  the  naturalist  tinds  himself  on  the  horns  of 
a  dilemma.  For,  either  from  the  facts  he  observes,  he  must  believe  in  a  special 
creation  of  organised  species,  which  creation  has  been  progressive  and  is  now  in 
full  operation,  or  he  must  adopt  some  such  view^  as  that  of  Darwin,  viz.,  that  the 
primordial  cell  of   life  has   been   constantly  sprouting  forth  of  itself   by  'natural 

selection"  into   all   the  various   forms  of  animals  and   vegetables 1 

am  myself  so  far  a  Pantheist  that  I  see  God  in  everything:  but  then  1  believe  in 
His  special  Providence,  and  that  he  is  the  constant  and  active  sole  Creator  and 
all-wise  Administrator  of  the  Universe"  [Life  and  letters  of  the  Right  Hon. 
Robert  Lowe,  Viscount  Sherbrooke,  Vol.  ii.,  p.  204  (1893)]. 

It  is  to  be  remembered,  of  course,  that  the  letter  was  a  private  one,  not  in- 
tended for  publication. 

From  the  foregoing,  it  is  evident  that  the  words  which  Sachs  applies  to  the 
contemporary  botanists,  are  also  applicable  to  the  zoologists: — "It  is  easy  to 
understand  why  the  first  feeble  attempts  at  a  theory  of  descent  encountered  such 
obstinate,  nay  fanatical  opposition  from  professed  systematists,  who  looked  upon 
the  system  as  something  above  nature,  a  component  part  of  their  religion"  [History 
of  Botany,  p.  Ill] . 

It  is  not  necessary  to  enter  into  details  respecting  W.  S.  Macleay's  published 
papers.  Work  done  from  upwards  of  seventy  years  to  more  than  a  century  ago, 
whether  relating  to  the  significance  of  the  natural  system,  to  the  morphology  of 
insects,  or  to  descriptive  zoology,  is  now  chiefly  of  historic  interest,  because,  smce 
then,  all  branches  of  knowledge  have  progressed.  Twenty-six  papers — not  includ- 
ing the  Horae  Entomologicae,  Aunulosa  .Javanica,  Annulosa  of  New  Holland,  col- 
lected by  Captain  P.  P.  King,  and  the  Annulosa  of  South  Africa,  which  were  not 
published  by  Societies — are  listed  in  the  Royal  Society's  Catalogue  of  Scientific 
Papers,  Vol.  iv.     The  entire  series  can  be  consulted  in  the  Society's  library. 

W.  S.  Macleay  left  England  for  Cuba  in  October,  1825,  to  take  up  his 
duties  in  connection  with  the  Mixed  British  and  Spanish  Court  of  Commission  for 
the  Abolition  of  the  Slave  Trade  established  at  the  Havana.  His  residence  m 
Cuba  lasted  from  December,  1825  to  early  in  the  year  1836. 

At  a  Meeting  of  the  Zoological  Club  on  February  14th,  1826,  "Mr.  Vigors 
read  some  extracts  from  a  letter  which  he  had  received  from  W .  S .  Macleay, 
Esqr.,  F.L.S.,  from  the  Havannah,  December  27th,  1825.  The  extracts  con- 
sisted of  Ornithological  observations  made  by  tliat  gentleman,  during  his  voyage 
from  England  to  the  Island  of  Cuba,  in  the  months  of  October,  November,  and 
December,  1825 ;  including  remarks  on  the  Ornithology  of  the  Islands  of  Madeira, 
Teneriffe  and  St.  Jago;  as  also  a  few  cursory  observations  made  at  Barbadoes, 
Martinique,  and  off  fhe  coast  of  St.  Domingo,  on  the  same  subject"  [Zoological 
Journal,  Vol.  ii.,  p.  553,  1826]. 

With  the  exception  of  one  interesting  letter  to  his  friend  Kirby.  dated  Janu- 
ary 3rd,  1827,  about  a  year  after  his  arrival,  few  particulars  of  this  period  of  his 
life  are  available,  except  what  can  be  gleaned  from  casual  remarks  in  some  of  his 
papers.     To  Kirby,  he  wrote:  "I  fear  that  you  will  imagine  that,  by  crossing  the 


L  I  B  R  A  R 


602  pkesident's  address. 

Atlautie,  I  have  forgotten  my  old  friends;  but  the  fact  is  that  I  was  unwilling 
to  wiite  to  you  until  I  had  carefully  studied  the  "Introduction'  [Kirby  and  Spenee's 
Introduction  to  Entomology]  and  had  enabled  myself  to  give  you  some  opinion 
upon  this  very  useful  and  laborious  work,  for  which  I  beg  leave  to  return  you 
best  thanks.  It  contains,  indeed  much  information  quite  new  to  me;  and  although 
we  differ  in  some  important  points,  time.  I  have  no  doubt,  will  set  all  things  right. 
"The  climate  has,  I  thank  God,  hitherto  agreed  with  me  much  better  than 
that  of  England :  but  there  is  a  languor  attendant  upon  every  kind  of  exertion, 
which  makes  reading  or  study  here  a  very  different  thing  from  what  it  is  in 
England. 

"This  is  a  good  ])!ace  for  Wading  Birds,  Lizards,  Butterflies,  and  Sphinges, 
but  apparently  nothing  else. 

"I  live  in  the  country,  where  I  have  a  large  house  and  garden;  this  is  my 
pi'ineipal  amusement,  as  I  take  great  pleasure  in  cultivating  Orchideae,  particu- 
larly those  which  are  parasitical  on  trees.  The  disagreeables  are  ants,  scorpions, 
mygales,  and  musquetoes.  The  latter  were  quite  a  pest  on  my  first  arrival  within 
the  tropics;  but  now  I  mind  them  about  as  much  as  I  did  gnats  in  England."' 
Then  follow  some  particulars  of  his  having  been  stung  by  an  immense  scorpion 
and  a  large  wasp  [Freeman's  Life  of  Kirby,  p.  422]. 

This  letter  is  of  special  interest,  because  of  the  reference  to  his  interest  in 
horticulture.  The  garden  would  be  at  Guanabanacoa.  For  in  his  description  of 
a  curious  spider  with  two  eyes,  Nops  Guanabanacoae,  g.et  sp.n.,  in  the  Annals 
of  Nat.  History  [Vol.  ii..  No.  7,  p.  1,  1839]  published  after  his  return  to  England, 
he  says — "the  trivial  name  of  this  remarkable  spider  will  serve  to  commemorate 
Guanabanacoa,  the  place  where  first  I  found  it,  a  place  in  which  I  long  resided, 
devoting  many  deliglitful  hours  to  the  science  of  natural  history." 

Natural  history  soon  began  to  claim  his  attention  in  his  leisure,  but  in  the 
absence  of  any  other  records,  the  particulars  have  to  be  gleaned  from  his  own 
papers,  or  from  those  who  recorded  or  described  the  collections  or  specimens  he 
sent  to  England. 

Specimens  of  lizards,  bats,  and  of  forty-five  species  of  birds  were  seut  to 
England,  exhibited  at  meetings  of  the  Zoological  Club  of  the  Linnean  Society,  and 
recorded  by  Bell,  Horsfield,  and  Vigors  in  the  Zoological  Journal  [Vol.  iii.,  pp. 
235,  236,  and  434  (1828)] .  J.  E.  Gray,  at  a  later  date,  described  a  collection  of 
Cuban  bats  sent  by  W.  S.  Macleay ;  and  he  mentions  also  a  foetal  specimen  of  a 
dolphin  [Ann.  Nat!  Hist.,  Vol.  iv.,"Sept.,  1839,  p.  16]. 

The  curious  rodent,  Capromiis,  birds,  and  Annulosa,  especially  interested  W. 
S.  Macleay.  His  acquisition  of  a  co]iy  of  Oviedo's  book  "Historia  general  de  las 
'Indias,' "  the  oldest  and  one  of  the  rarest  and  best  books  on  the  Natural  History 
of  the  West  Indies,  published  in  1547,  led  him  to '  take  an  interest  in  the  remark- 
able rodents  referable  to  the  genus  Capromi/K.  In  the  first  of  two  notes  about 
them,  published  in  the  Zoological  .Journal  [Vols,  iv.,  269;  v.,  179,  1829-30]  he 
says:  "Having  now  three  species  of  Copmnuis  alive  in  my  garden,  and  ready  to 
be  sent  by  the  first  opportunity  to  the  Zoological  Society,  I  shall  avail  myself  of 
the  information  to  be  found  in  Oviedo,  to  correct  some  of  the  absurd  errors  which 
have  been  lately  propagated  on  the  sub.i'ect  of  this  genus."  He  records  also  his 
own  observations  on  the  animals  in  their  native  haunts.  It  appears,  from  the 
second  note,  that  he  sent  five  living  specimens  by  the  "Aurora  Frigate,"  hut  that 
they  did  not  survive  the  voyage. 


THE  society's  heritage  from   the  3IACLEAYS.  003 

One  of  the  papers  sent  home  duriiig-  bis  residence  in  Cuba  was  entitled 
"Remarks  on  the  Comparative  Anatomy  of  certain  Birds  of  Cuba,  with  a  view 
to  their  respective  places  in  the  System  of  Nature."  [Trans.  Linn.  Soc,  Vol.  xvi., 
Part  i.,  p.  149] .  But,  as  remarked  in  a  lengthy  review  of  the  paper  in  the  Zoo- 
logical .Journal  [^'ol.  iv.,  p.  483],  "of  comparative  anatomy  they  contain  but  little, 
and  appear  rather  to  be  designed  as  prefatory  observations  introductory  to  ana- 
tomical notices  which  are  intended  hereafter  to  be  given.''  It  was  the  author's  in- 
tention to  examine  anatomically  particular  genera,  which  were  not  within  the 
i-each  of  naturalists  at  borne;  but  the  supplementary  details  were  never  published. 

No  papers  dealing  especially  with  Cuban  insects  were  published  by  W.  S. 
Macleay.  But  among  our  memorials  of  him  there  are  thirty-nine  water-colour 
drawings  of  lepidopterous  larvae,  from  which  he  may  have  bred  the  perfect  insects. 
Besides  these,  there  are  a  number  of  pencil  or  pen  and  ink  sketches  of  lepidoptera, 
scorpions,  ticks,  and  mites. 

After  his  return  to  England,  he  contributed  a  short  paper  "On  some  new 
Forms  of  Arachnida,"  to  the  Annals  of  Natural  History  [Vol.  ii..  No.  7,  Sept., 
1838]  in  which  he  described  and  figured  the  types  of  four  new  genera,  and  the 
type  of  a  new  subgenus  of  Dufour's  genus  S'eIetio2^s.  Four  of  the  species  were 
Cuban,  and  one  Indian.  These  particular  species  were  selected  for  their  singular 
ity  "out  of  a  great  variety  of  new  forms  in  my  cabinet,"  "in  order  to  prove  how 
little  is  as  yet  known  of  even  that  part  of  the  class  Arachnida  which  has  been 
the  most  studied,  namely  Spiders" ;  and  thus  to  enable  him  to  re-define  the 
Order  Araneidea. 

Poultun  [Essays  on  Evolution,  Chap.  viii..  p.  220,  1908]  has  pointed  out  that 
"W.  S.  Macleay,  in  his  Hor.  Ent.  alluded  to  certain  cases  which  are  now  included 
under  Mimicrj',  viz.,  the  likeness  of  some  Diptera  to  Hymenoptera,  and  inter- 
preted them,  together  with  many  other  resemblances  of  structure  and  life-history, 
by  the  principle  of  Analogy,  as  distinct  from  Affinity  in  Nature  [Pt.  ii.,  p.  365]." 
In  the  paper  above  referred  to,  W.  S.  Macleay  described  an  Indian  spider,  in  ap- 
pearance resembling  an  ant,  as  the  type  of  the  new  genus  Mi/rmaracline,  of  which 
he  says :  "Nothing  is  certainly  known  with  respect  to  the  manners  of  these  curious 
spiders,  but  I  suppose  from  analogy,  that  they  may  eventually  be  found  to  feed  on 
ants.  It  has  long  been  known  that  the  Voluceltae  in  their  larva  state  live  in  tbe 
nests  of  the  Bombi  they  so  much  resemble;  and  I  have  discovered  that  the  larvae 
of  those  tropical  Bomhi/lii  which  have  such  a  bee-like  form  live  on  the  larvae 
of  the  bees  they  so  strikingly  represent.  Perhaps,  in  like  manner,  the  object  of 
nature  in  giving  such  a  striking  form  to  this  spider  is  to  deceive  the  ants  on 
which  they  prey"    (p.  12). 

Only  the  most  meagre  record  of  W.  S.  Maeleay's  experiences  as  a  collector, 
before  he  went  to  Cuba,  has  come  down  to  us.  One  cannot  believe  that  the 
attractions  of  Combe  Wood,  "classical  ground  to  entomologists"  (Lyell),  Wimble- 
don Common,  Battersea  Fields,  and  other  favourite  localities  for  the  entomolo- 
gical collector  resident  in  London  a  century  ago,  were  unappreciated  either  by  him 
or  his  father.  Probably,  too,  during  his  undergraduate  days,  he  may  have  had  ex- 
periences like  those  of  Charles  Darwin  about  seventeen  years  later,  in  collecting 
insects  in  the  neighbourhood  of  Cambridge,  and  in  having  fellow-students  who 
shared  his  interest. 

Nevertheless  the  solitary  record  of  a  collecting  excursion  before  he  left  Eng- 
land in  1825.  known  to  me,  is  a  casual  remark  in  the  Horae  Entomologicae  (Part 


604  president's  address. 

i.,  p.  02) — "Mr.  Kirby  mentions  in  the  introduction  to  Eutomologj',  his  having 
Hound  these  insects  [Troges]  on  a  ram's  horn.  I  was  myself  present  in  the  forest 
of  Fontainebleau,  with  the  last-mentioned  entomologist,  when  he  took  a  specimen 
of  Jroj  from  off  a  horse's  scull  "  This  was  in  June,  1817.  Kirby,  in  a  letter  to 
his  friend  Sutton,  has  given  an  account  of  his  first  visit  to  Paris,  of  his  introduc- 
tion to  Latreille,  and  of  W.  S.   Macleay's  kindness  and  helpfulness  to  him. 

It  is  evident  that  W.  S.  Macleay  had  the  opportunity  of  making  a  good  col- 
lection of  the  Cuban  groups  in  which  he  was  interested,  sufficient  not  only  for  his 
own  requirements,  but  for  purposes  of  exchange  with  his  scientific  friends ;  as  well 
as  of  supplementing  it,  to  some  extent,  at  the  places  which  he  visited  on  the 
voyages  outwards  and  homewards. 

He  does  not  appear  to  have  had  a  separate  collection  of  his  own  prior  to  his 
departure  for  Cuba  in  1825.  Any  specimens  which  came  into  his  possession, 
whether  as  the  results  of  his  own  collecting,  or  as  gifts  or  exchanges,  were  added 
to  the  paternal  collection.  But  just  before  the  time  of  parting  came,  his  father 
allowed  him  to  take  over  such  specimens  as  he  was  particularly  interested  in,  as  an 
aid  to  work  he  may  have  had  in  hand,  or  in  prospect.  These  .^ormed  the  nucleus 
of  the  collection  he  eventually  brought  out  to  Australia  in  1838.  Some  of  the 
items,  as  well  iis  some  of  his  records  of  observational  zoologj-,  are  mentioned  in 
his  paper  "On  the  Annulosa  of  Sov/th  Africa."  On  p.  22,  he  says — "I  have  found 
Diplognatlia  Gagales  common  at  Porto  Praya  in  the  Cape  de  Verds;  but  I  cannot 
say  that  it  is  a  llower-freciuenting  insect,  as  I  never  met  with  it  except  in  the 
cocoa-nut  groves  below  the  town,  and  always  on  the  foliage  of  the  underwood 
which  grows  beneath  the  Palms."  On  p.  54  he  refers  to  "the  Decapods  of 
my  own  collection."  On  p.  63,  he  remarks — "It  becomes  necessary  to 
point  out  the  families  of  a  stirps  [Grapsina]  which  is  very  common  in  warm  cli- 
mates, and  the  study  of  whose  manners  afforded  me  much  amusement  whilst  I 
reside<l  in  the  West  Indies."  On  p.  65,  of  a  crab,  he  adds — "I  have  found  in 
CJuba  the  species  of  Sesarma  to  live  generally  under  stones  on  the  banks  of  the 
nniddy  mouths  of  rivers."  And  on  p.  66,  of  another  crab,  he  says — "The  type 
of  this  genus  is  the  Grapstos  rurieola  of  Degeer,  a  crab  whose  manners  are  de- 
tailed by  me  in  the  fu'st  volume  of  the  Transactions  of  the  Zoological  Society. 
Also  on  p.  67 — "I  liave  taken  abundance  [of  yeutilograpsus  mi>iutuj:  Fabr.]  in  the 
Atlantic  Ocean,  adhering  to  the  gulf-weed." 

After  his  return  to  England,  W.  S.  Macleay  undertook  the  description  of  the 
Annulosa,  chiefly  collected  during  an  Expedition  into  the  Interior  of  South  Africa, 
under  the  direction  of  Dr.  Andrew  Smith,  in  the  yeai-s  1834.  1835,  and  1836;  fitted 
out  by  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope  Association  for  exploring  Central  Africa.  The 
first  portion  only  of  his  intended  contribution  was  published,  in  1838,  shortly  l)c- 
fore  his  departure  for  Australia.  In  the  preface  (p.  1)  he  says — "It  may  be 
well  that  I  should  mention  here  my  having  lately  acfjuired,  by  purchase,  the  very 
extensive  collection  of  Annulosa  made  by  M.  Verreaux  during  liis  long  residence 
at  the  Cape,  and  also  his  manuscript  notes  on  the  species  collected .  Perhaps  there- 
fore no  nat\iralist  is  better  provided  than  T  am  with  those  materials  wliich  are 
necessary  to  enal)lc  us  to  form  accurate  notions  of  South  African  entomology. 
Upon  this  subject  also,  my  pei-sonal  acquaintance  with  the  habits  of  many  exotic 
genera,  may  to  a  certain  degree  be  brfiught  to  bear." 

Early  in  the  year  1836,  after  completing  more  than  ten  yeai-s'  service,  W.  S. 
Macleay  set  out  on  his  return  to  England.      On  the  way,   he  visited   the  United 


THE  society's  heritage  from  the  macleays.  605 

States.  This  gave  liim  the  opportunity  of  getting  into  touch  with  American  ento- 
mologists, of  doing  some  collecting,  and  the  chance  of  entering  into  exchanges; 
and  led  up  to  his  election  as  a  Corresponding  Member  of  the  Academy  of  Natural 
Sciences  of  Philadelphia.  His  own  brief  record  of  this  visit  is  given  in  the 
"Annulosa  of  Soutii  Africa"  (p.  17)  in  the  following  words: — "The  species  of 
Cremastocheilus  are  not  common.  In  company  with  Dr.  Pickering,  and  Mr.  Titian 
Peale,  I  found  G.  castaneae  of  Keck,  in  June,  1836,  on  the  banks  of  the  Delaware, 
on  the  New  Jersey  side,  opposite  Philadelphia.  These  singular  beetles  are  never 
found  except  flying,  like  Cicindelae,  over  the  sand  which  there  lines  the  bank  of 
that  noble  river." 

Soon  after  his  arrival  in  England  in  the  autumn  of  1836,  W.  S.  Macleay  was 
presented  at  Court,  as  a  mark  of  approbation  of  the  way  in  which  he  had  carried 
out  his  responsible  official  duties  in  Cuba. 

He  soon  received  a  welcome  back  into  scientific  circles  in  London.  In  1837, 
he  was  elected  to  the  Council  of  the  Linnean  Society.  The  Lord  Bishop  oZ 
Norwich,  Dr.  Stanley,  father  of  Dean  Stanley,  and  of  Captain  Owen  Stanley,  was 
President.  Among  the  Members  of  Council  were  J.  J.  Bennett  of  the  British 
Museum,  George  Bentham,  Robert  Brown,  the  Earl  of  Derby,  President  of  the 
Zoological  Society,  Dr.  Horsfield,  and  Richard  Owen. 

In  the  same  year,  he  was  elected  to  the  Council  of  the  Zoological  Society. 
Thomas  Bell  and  Richard  Owen  were  Members  of  the  Council  at  this  time.  We 
have  some  interesting  relics  of  W .  S .  Macleay's  connection  with  the  Society,  in 
the  shape  of  notices  to  attend  Council  or  other  meetings,  signed  by  W.  H . 
TaiTell  as  secretary;  and  proofs  of  two  papers  submitted  to  him  as  a  member 
of  the  Publication  Committee. 

About  the  same  time,  too,  W.  S.  Macleay  was  elected  to  the  Council  of  the 
British  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Siience,  and  President  of  Section  D  at 
the  meeting  of  the  Association  held  at  Liverpool  in  September,  1837.  The  Earl 
of  Burlington  was  President,  but  the  Address  was  delivered  by  Professor  Traill. 
The  Presidents  of  Sections  were:  Sec.  A,  Sir  David  Brewster;  Sec.  B,  Dr. 
Faraday;  See.  C,  Professor  A.  Sedg-wick;  Sec.  D  (Botany  and  Zoology),  W, 
Sharp  Macleay:  and  Sec.  E,  Professor  Clark.  The  Vice-Presidents  of  Sec.  D. 
were  Dr.  Richardson,  Professor  Graham,  and  Professor  Lindley;  and  the  Secre- 
taries, Professor  Bahington,  W.  Swainson.  and  the  Rev.  L.  Jen\Tis.  No  papers 
of  particular  interest  to  us  were  communicated  to  Section  D.  But  .John  Gould 
exhibited  coloured  drawings  of  Australian  and  New  Zealand  birds;  and  W.  S. 
Macleay  and  the  Rev.  F.  W.  Hope  described  some  insects  from  the  fine  collec- 
tion of  Mr.  Melly,  then  resident  in  Liverpool.  It  was  a  very  successful  and  in- 
teresting meeting,  as  described  by  R.  Murchison,  General  Secretary',  in  a  letter  to 
his  wife  ["Life  of  Sir  Roderick  Murchison,"  Vol.  i..  p.  238].  The  Rev.  W.  B. 
Clarke  attended ;  and  he,  .lohn  Gould,  who  left  England  for  Tasmania  in  1838.  and 
W .   S .  Macleay  had  the  opportunity  of  meeting  again  in  Sydney  in  1839. 

After  the  "Beagle"  had  completed  lier  voyage,  and  W.  S.  Macleay  bad  re- 
turned to  England  from  Cuba,  Charles  Darwin  and  he  seem  to  have  met,  in  1836 
or  early  in  1837.  For,  in  a  letter  dated  April  10th,  1837,  written  by  Darwin  to 
the  Rev.  L.  Jen.\-ns,  he  says — "During  the  last  week  several  of  the  zoologists  of 
this  place  [London]  have  been  urging  me  to  consider  the  possibility  of  publishing 
the  'Zoology  of  the  Beagle's  Voyage'  on  some  uniform  plan.  Mr.  [W.  S,] 
Macleay  has  taken  a  gi'eat  deal  of  interest  in  the  subject,  and  maintains  that  such 


606  president's  address. 

a  publication  is  very  tlesirable  because  it  keeps  together  a  series  of  observations 
made  respecting  animals  inliabiting  the  same  part  of  the  world,  and  allows  any 
future  traveller  taking  them  with  him"  ["Life,"  Vol.  i.,  p.  281]. 

The  concluding  sentence  of  the  "Annulosa  of  South  Africa''  contains  the 
first  announcement  of  W.  S.  Madeay's  intended  visit  to  Australia — "1  hope,  how- 
ever, as  I  am  about  to  visit  Australia,  soon  to  be  able  to  make  myself  master  of 
the  economy  of  these  insects  [Australian  Paussi],  and  alsu  to  publish  a  correct 
representation  of  the  parts  of  the  mouth"  (p.  75). 

A  more  deflnice  statement  about  his  contemplated  departure,  and  a  request 
for  exchanges  of  specimens,  is  to  be  found  in  a  letter  from  W .  S .  Macleay  to  his 
friend  .Tohn  McClelland,  Assistant  Surgeon,  Bengal  Medical  Service,  at  Calcutta. 
The  latter,  wishing  to  make  known  Macleay's  wishes  for  exchanges,  appended  the 
following  extract  from  the  letter  to  his  own  paper  on  "Indian  Cyprinidae."  which 
was  communicatetl  to  the  Asiatic  Society  of  Bengal,  on  5th  September,  1838,  sub- 
sequently printed  in  Vol.  xix.,  Part  ii.,  of  the  Asiatic  Researches,  and  reprinted  in 
the  Annals  and  Magazine  of  Natural  History  [Vol.  viii.,  1842,  p.  199] — "Mr. 
MaeLeay  writes  from  London,  12th  August,  1838:  'I  am  now  on  the  eve  of  em- 
barking for  Sydney,  where  I  intend  to  remain  for  the  next  three  or  four  yeare ;  and 
what  I  would  ask  of  you  is.  to  exchange  invertel)rated  animals,  collected  in  India, 
as  the  Annelida,  Annulosa,  Cirripedes.  Radiata,  and  Acrita.  for  other  objects  col- 
lected in  New  Holland;  insects,  spiders,  and  crustaeea  of  India  I  at  present  desire 
above  all,  and  shall  feel  obliged  by  any  notes  on  their  metamorphoses  or  oeconomy. 
With  regard  to  such  notes,  I  need  not  say  I  shall  bear  in  mind  the  axiom  '-Suum 
cuique."  If  you  will  point  out  your  particular  desiderata  in  natural  history,  I 
will  endeavour  to  add  to  your  collections.'  "  By  way  of  commending  the  request, 
Dr.  McClelland  adds — "Considering  the  intimate  intercourse  now  established  be- 
tween Calcutta  and  Sydney,  it  is  to  be  hoped  that  an  appeal  to  India  from  such  a 
quarter  will  not  be  made  in  vain,  and  that  all  who  are  interested  in  the  advance- 
ment of  natural  history  will  collect  and  forward  wliatever  objects  their  particular 
localities  may  afford,  with  a  view  to  facilitate  the  researches  of  the  illustrious 
author  of  'Horae  Entoraologicae.'  " 

Some  interesting  details  relating  to  this  period  are  furaished  by  two  letters 
among  the  W.  S.  Macleay  relics,  from  Edward  Macarthur,  eldest  son  of  John 
Macarthur  of  Camden,  and  afterwards  Major-General  Sir  Edward  Macarthur. 
One  of  these,  dated,  "Thui-sday,  4  Ja.ny."  [?  1838]  is  an  intimation  that  his  bro- 
ther, possibly  James,  and  his  cousin,  Captain  Macarthur,  were  intending  to  call  on 
W.  S.  Macleay;  that  the  latter,  who  had  been  appointed  to  conduct  the 
new  settlement  on  the  north  shore  of  New  Holland  [Port  Essington],  was 
desirous  of  taking  out  a  good  selection  of  plants,  especially  such  as  were 
of  commercial  value,  suitable  for  cultivation  in  the  tropics;  and  ask- 
ing W.  S.  Macleay  if  he  would  supply  a  list  of  desirable  plants.  The 
interview,  doubtless,  took  place,  and  we  may  be  sure  that  W.  S.  Macleay  did  his 
best  to  siipply  a  list  of  plants,  l)ased  mainly  (m  his  experiences  in  Cuba. 

The  second,  unfortunately  not  dated,  Inif.  probably  written  in  July,  1838,  is 
as  follows — "I  believe  that  I  have  found,  at  length,  the  sort  of  ship  we  want.  If 
you  could  call  on  me  to-morrow,  about  eleven,  we  might  talk  it  over.  It  is  very 
necessary  that  your  friends  should  inform  yon.  whether  they  will  accompany  you ; 
for,  on  the  1st  of  August,  the  owner  of  the  ship  is  to  have  a  positive  answer  from 
me Believe  me,  verv  trulv  vours.  Edw.  Macarthur." 


THE  society's  heritage  tbom  the  macleays. 


607 


What  is  here  meant  seems  to  be,  either  that  Maearthur,  or  perhaps  his  bro- 
ther James,  was  arranging  to  return  to  Australia  as  soon  as  he  could  hear  of  a 
suitable  ship,  and  that  W.  S.  Macleay  was  hoping  to  accompany  him  as  a  fellow- 
passenger.  Or  it  may,  perhaps,  have  meant  tliat  he  had  merely  undertaken,  on 
W.  S.  Macleay's  liohnlf,  to  make  inquiries  for  a  suitable  ship  for  the  latter  and  liis 
friends,  his  cousins,  William  and  John.  W.  S.  Macleay  was  prepared  to  depart 
in  August,  as  appears  from  his  letter  to  Dr.  McClelland,  written  on  August  12th, 
1838,  "I  am  now  on  the  eve  of  embarking  for  Sydney,"  meaning  approximately, 
and  not  on  the  following  day.  But  the  cousins  were  not  ready  to  sail  so  soon, 
possibly  on  account  of  the  last  illness  of  tlieir  mother,  or  of  .John's  delicate  health. 
The  Plant-book  gives  the  date  of  receipt  of  the  plants  brought  by  W .  S .  Macleay, 
per  Royal  George,  as  March,  1839.  Allowing  four  months  for  the  voyage,  the 
embarkation  of  the  party  must  have  been  postponed  from  August  to  November  or 
early  in  December,  1838. 

W.  S.  Macleay's  motives  for  \isiting  Australia,  besides  a  desire  to  rejoin  his 
relatives,  from  whom  he  had  been  separated  for  more  than  twelve  years,  may  very 
well  have  been  to  give  the  climate  a  trial,  as  that  of  England  did  not  suit  his 
health  after  ten  years'  residence  in  the  tropics;  and  to  see  something  of  the 
wonderful  fauna  and  flora,  under  very  favourable  conditions.  After  some  experi- 
ence, the  attractiveness  of  the  mild  and  sunny  climate,  of  congenial  friends,  of  the 
beautiful  garden,  and  of  the  harbour  and  the  bush  close  at  hand,  irresistibly  ap- 
pealed to  him ;  the  idea  of  remaining  for  three  or  four  years  only  was  given  up,  and 
Sydney  became  his  permanent  home  for  the  rest  of  his  life.  Indeed,  he  never 
seems  to  have  left  it,  except  to  visit  Brownlow  Hill,  and  possibly  Illawarra.  He 
would  certainly  never  have  left  Australia  wliile  Robert  Lowe  was  a  resident  of 
Sydney   (1842-50). 

W.  S.  Macleay  and  his  two  cousins  arrived  in  Sydney  in  March,  1839.  Other 
notable  arrivals  in  the  same  year  were  the  Rev.  W.  B.  Clarke,  Mr.  John  Rae, 
end  Mr.,  afterwards  Sir  Alfred  Stephen  (from  Tasmania),  all  three  of  whom 
spent  the  rest  of  their  days  in  Sydney ;  and  John  Gould,  and  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Charles 
Meredith,  who  came  as  visitors. 

After  his  ari'ival  in  Sydney,  W.  S.  Macleay  seems  to  have  been  most  at- 
tracted by  the  marine  fauna.  This  is  not  surprising,  as  he  had  never  before  been 
so  favourably  situated  for  marine  collecting  and  study.  Tow-netting,  dredging, 
and  shore-collecting  could  be  carried  out  under  most  favourable  conditions. 
The  fishermen  used  to  draw  their  nets  on  the  sandy  beach  at  the  bottom  of  the 
garden;  and  it  was  easy  to  get  into  touch  with  them,  for  the  supply  of  remark- 
able or  other  specimens  desired,  that  they  might  capture.  It  was  from  this  source, 
evidently,  that  the  sea-snake,  offered  to  Dr.  Cantor,  was  obtained. 

The  first  contribution  to  Science  after  his  arrival  was  a  paper  on  the  "Natural 
arrangement  of  Fishes,"  sent  as  a  letter  to  his  friend  Dr.  McClelland,  in  Cal- 
cutta, dated  12th  September,  1840.  This  was  published  in  the  Calcutta  .Journal  of 
Natural  History  for  July.  1841;  and  reprinted  in  the  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  Vol, 
is.,  p.  197  (1842).  It  was  written  partly  to  express  W.  S.  Macleay's  apprecia- 
tion of  McClelland's  paper  on  Indian  Cyprinidae,  to  which  family  the  author  had 
applied  Macleay's  principles  of  classification ;  partly  to  apply  liis  principles  to 
the  classification  of  Fishes  in  general;  and  partly  because  he  was  not  satisfied 
with  Swainson's  arrangement.  His  objections  to  Swainson's  methods  liave  been 
•luoted  above.  A  number  of  outline  sketches  of  Sydney  fishes  among  the  W.  S 
Macleay  relies  were  probably  made  in  the  preparation  of  the  paper. 


608  president's  address. 

In  concluding  his  letter,  W.  S.  Macleav  says  of  himself — "I  am  sorry  that  I 
have  not  been  able  as  yet  to  get  any  Cyprinidae  from  our  New  Holland  rivers;  but 
I  attribute  it  to  my  own  residence  so  far  from  any  river,  not  to  the  absence  of 
them.  I  am  promised  by  friends,  who  have  better  opportunities,  the  result  of 
their  researches;  but  I  receive  nothing,  as  they  know  not  how  to  catch  the  minute 
fish  of  the  river.  However,  I  intend  to  try  the  Nepean  River  myself  when  I  go 
down  there,  which  I  soon  propose  to  do  [this  would  be  near  Brownlow  Hill].  In 
the  meantime  my  residence  on  the  sea-side  enables  me  to  increase  my  collection  of 
marine  genera,  and  if  there  be  any  you  wish  for,  1  shall  be  most  happy  to  send 
them.  A  thousand  thanks  for  your  kind  method  of  heating  up  for  insects  to  be 
sent  me  from  India.  I  shall  be  happy  to  pay  any  fair  price  for  the  collector's 
time  and  trouble.  Tell  Dr.  Cantor  that  I  depend  on  him  to  increase  my  collection 
of  Annulose  animals,  and  that  I  hope  he  will  soon  write  to  me.  Tell  him  also  that 
I  have  got  a  marine  serpent  of  the  genus  Pelamys,  caught  in  the  mouth  of  Port 
Jackson  harbour,  the  only  one  our  fishermen  have  ever  seen.  If  he  wishes  for  it, 
it  is  at  his  service;  for  he  knows  infinitely  more  of  .Serpents  than  I  do,  and  my 
grand  desire  is,  to  increase  my  collection  of  Annulose  animals ....  I  shall  write 
you  on  Echinidae  in  my  next,  and  send  you  some  the  vei-y  first  opportunity."  It 
was  not  known  at  this  time  tliat  the  family  Cyprinidae  is  not  represented  in  the 
Austrahan   fauna.     But  several   species  have  been  introduced. 

I  do  not  know  what  collections  W.  S.  Macleay  may  have  received  from  India 
as  the  result  of  his  offer  to  Dr.  McClelland.  But  among  the  memorials  of  W .  S . 
Macleay  are  four  beautiful  coloured  drawings  of  Indian  spiders,  two  of  the  sexes 
of  a  remarkable  antlike  spider  Myrmecarachne  macleay i  Cantor;  and  three  of  re- 
markable Membracid  insects,  with  remarks  on  the  back  of  the  drawings  signed 
Theo  Cantor,  Calcutta,  May-June,  1841.  These  were  e^ddently  sent  to  him  by  Dr. 
Cantor;  but  I  have  not  been  able  to  find  out  in  what  Journal  the  original  descrip- 
tions of  these  were  published.  We  have  also  several  reprints  of  Dr.  Cantor's 
papers,  but  no  letters  from  him,  or  from  Dr.  McClelland. 

Another  interesting  scrap  of  information  is  the  following  notice  of  a  letter 
to  the  editor  of  the  Annals  and  Magazine  of  Natural  History  [Vol.  viii.,  No.  48, 
September  1841,  p.  153].— "Mr.  W.  K.  Macleay  writes  from  Sydney.  April  28, 
1841,  that  he  is  much  occupied  with  Natural  History,  and  making  large  additions 
to  his  collection.  He  gratifies  us  with  good  accounts  of  the  health  of  his  excellent 
father,  who  is  always  most  affectionately  remembered  here.     R.T."[aylor] . 

John  Gould,  accompanied  by  Jlrs.  Gould,  left  England  for  Tasmania  in  May, 
1838,  in  order  to  study  the  birds  of  Australia;  and  returned  to  England  in  August, 
1840.  After  spending  some  months  in  Tasmania,  he  visited  New  South  Wales  in 
1839-40,  and  South  Australia.  In  the  Preface  to  the  "Birds  of  Australia,"  he 
records  his  best  thanks  for  kindness  and  help  during  his  stay  in  New  South 
Wales,  among  others,  to  Alexander  and  W.  S.  MacLeay,  Esqs.  Gould  probably 
visited  Sydney  at  least  twice,  before  setting  out  to  collect,  with  Gilbert,  in  the 
interior,  and  after  returning.  The  letter  which  he  conveyed  to  Shuckard  was 
dated  April,  1840.  During  one  of  the  visits,  W.  S.  Macleay  furnished  Gould 
with  the  description,  and  possibly  showed  him  specimens,  of  a  nest-building  rat, 
which  he  named  Hapalotis  arboricola,  in  the  belief  that  it  was  indigenous,  as  it 
was  not  uncommon  in  the  garden.  The  description  was  afterwards  published  in 
the  Introduction  to  Gould's  "Mammals  of  Australia,"  p.  xxxv..  1863. 
Mr.   E.    H.   Waitc  suhsei|ueiitly  gave  full  particuhirs  of  the  remarkiihlc  habits  of 


THE  society's  heritage  from  tiik  macleays.  609 

this  rat  [Proc.  Zool.  Soc,  1897,  p.  857].  By  Mr.  0.  Thomas,  this  rat  is  re- 
garded as  a  variety  of  the  Black  Rat,  Mus  rattus  [see,  an  appendix  to  Waite's 
paper] . 

I  have  already  referred  to  the  visit  of  H.M.SS.  "Erebus"  and  "Terror"  to 
Sydney,  from  7th  July  to  5th  August,  1841.  Dr.  J.  D.  Hooker,  Assistant- 
Surgeon  and  Botanist,  in  a  letter  to  his  father,  says  of  W.  S.  Macleay  that, 
"Twice  the  naturalist  came  on  board  the  'Erebus'  and  spent  all  day  looking  over 
the  Southern  collections.  He  is  delighted  with  my  drawings  of  sea-animals,  of 
which  many  are  entirely  new;  I  must,  however,  redouble  my  efforts  on  that  head, 
little  as  I  care  about  them,  as  I  hear  that  the  Americans  [U.S.  Exploring  Expedi- 
tion, 1838-42,  in  command  of  Commodore  Wilkes]  have  done  much  during  their 
voyage  to  them,  and  that,  McLeay  says,  is  the  only  thing  they  have  done."  Captain 
P.  P.  King  also  visited  the  ship  to  see  the  collections.  Some  of  the  shells  he 
"recognised  as  South  American,  especially  the  small  yellow  bivalves  from  tbe, 
Macvocystis"  ["Life",  Vol.  i.,  pp.  121-122]. 

Within  two  years  after  W.  S.  Macleay's  arrival  in  Sydney,  he  made  the 
acquaintance  of  Dr.  James  Stuart.  Their  friendship  had  a  sequel,  in  which  the  So- 
ciety is  directly  interested.  I  have  not  been  able  to  learn  anything  more  about  this 
worthy  man  than  is  given  by  W.  S.  Macleay  himself,  in  the  following  extracts  [date 
not  given] — "J.  Stuart,  Esq.,  is  a  surgeon  in  the  army,  who  has  been  frequently 
employed  by  the  Colonial  Government  in  superintending  the  quarantine  to  which 
vessels  arriving  unhealthily  in  Port  Jackson  are  subjected .  .  .  .  Here  [at  Spring 
Cove]  they  remain  under  the  care  of  a  surgeon  for  the  neeessai-y  period ;  and  Mr. 
Stuart,  who  has  often  undertaken  this  painful  charge,  has,  by  means  of  his  ad- 
mirable skill  in  drawing  objects  of  natural  history,  and  his  powers  of  accurate 
observation,  been  enabled  to  employ  to  the  advantage  of  every  department  of 
science  those  spare  hours  which  otherwise,  in  the  midst  of  contagion  and  disease, 
would  have  proved  so  dreary." 

'From  among  several  great  novelties  which  I  have  found  in  his  collection  of 
drawings,  I  have  selected  the  representation  (nat.  size)  here  given,  PI.  vii.,  of  a 
quadruped  which  I  shall  call  Antechinus  Stuartii,  and  of  which  Mr.  Stuart  killed 
one  male  specimen  at  Spring  Cove  in  August,  1837.  As  this  specimen  has  been 
unfortunately  lost,  and  I  have  never  seen  it,  I  am  obliged  to  describe  it  from  his 
notes,  hoping  that  the  attention  of  naturalists  will  be  drawn  to  the  animal,  and 
that  some  further  knowledge  may  soon  be  ac(|uired  with  respect  to  the  habits  and 
structure  of  the  species."  Then  follows  a  description  based  on  Dr.  Stuart's  notes 
[Ann.  Mag.,  viii.,  p.  242,  1842] . 

Shortly  afterwards,  under  date  9th  August,  1841,  W.  S.  Macleay  sent  a  note 
to  the  same  Journal  [viii.,  p.  337]  giving  "Additional  particulars  respecting 
Antechinus  Stuartii,  a  new  Marsupial  Quadruped."  In  this  he  says — "Since  I 
wrote  to  you  concerning  what  I  had  reason  at  that  time  to  think  might  possibly 
prove  to  be  a  new  quadruped  belonging  to  the  group  of  Insectlvora,  I  have  had 
an  opportunity  of  examining  a  skeleton,  now  in  the  possession  of  Major  Christie, 
and  which  Mr.  Stuart  himself  had  prepared  at  the  time  the  animal  was  killed. 
This  skeleton,  by  the  presence  of  the  marsupial  bones,  distinctly  shows  that  the 
quadruped  in  f|uestion  belongs  to  the  group  Marsupialia.  It  also  demonstrates 
that  there  was  an  important  error  in  the  dental  formula  as  given  me  in  the  manu- 
script of  Mr.  Stuart, — the  very  error,  indeed,  that  led  me  to  think  that  the 
animal  might  eventually  be  found  to  belong  to  the  Insectivora."     The  dental  for- 


610  president's  address. 

inula  was  correoted,  and  recognised  as  that  of  Phascogale  [Phascolnr/ah]  '•from 
which  genus  our  animal  differs  in  the  three  lateral  incisors  of  the  upper  jaw  being 
of  equal  size,  and  also  in  the  pseudomolars  being  all  of  equal  size."  But  there 
is  no  record  of  W.  S.  Macleays  "hopes  of  soon  possessing  a  specimen  from 
Spring  Cove,  when  I  shall  be  liable  to  determine  how  far  this  animal 
differs  from  the  genus  Phascogale,  or  whether  it  may  not  be  safely 
assigned  to  it."  Thomas,  in  the  British  Museum  Catalogue  of  Mareupials, 
reduces  Antechinus  Stuartii  Macleay  to  a  synonym  of  Phascologale  flavipes 
Waterhouse.  Nevertheless,  Krefft  (1871)  still  retained  both  Maeleay's  genus  and 
the  species. 

Under  date  5th  July.  1847,  W.  S.  Macleay  sent  a  letter  to  the  Sychueii  Morn- 
ing Herald,  entitled  "On  the  skull  now  exhibited  at  the  Colonial  Museum  of  Syd- 
ney, as  that  of  the  'Bunyip'."  The  skull  had  been  sent  to  him  for  report  by  the 
Speaker  of  the  Legislative  Council  [Dr.,  afterwards  Sir  Charles  Nicholson]  to 
•whom  it  had  been  forwarded  by  Mr.  Edward  Curr  of  Port  Phillip,  as  that  of  tho 
so-called  Bunyip  or  Kine  Pratie.  He  was  induced  to  send  the  description  of  it 
for  publication,  "as  another  and  still  more  extraordinary  skull  in  my  ])ossession 
offers  very  considerable  means  for  throwing  light  on  the  subject.''  After  de- 
scribing the  skull  sent  by  Dr.  Nicholson,  he  proceeds — "I  have,  however,  I  repeat, 
in  my  possession  the  skull  of  a  foetus  of  a  mare,  which  was  found  floating  on  the 
River  Hawkesbury,  in  the  year  1841.  This  skull  was  prepared  by  the  lamented 
late  Dr.  Stewart  [Dr.  Stuart],  and  he  has  made  drawings  and  notes  of  it,  which 
I  intend  before  long  to  publish,  with  his  other  observations  on  various  branches 
of  natural  historv'."  The  letter  concludes  with  the  statement — "In  my  judgment, 
however,  the  animal  is  not  new,  and  this  skull,  when  compared  with  the  one  from 
the  Havvkesbury  only  serves  to  show  the  extreme  limits  between  which  all 
monstrous  variation   of  the  place  of  the  eyes  in  the  horse  can  possibly  occur." 

From  this  letter,  it  appears  that  Dr.  Stuart  died  before  July,  1847,  but  I 
have  not  been  able  to  ascertain  exactly  when.  Also  that  his  drawings  and  notes 
were  then  in  the  possession  of  W.  S.  Macleay;  for  they  were  a  bequest  from  the 
artist. 

While  the  drawings  were  in  the  possession  of  W.  S.  Macleay,  they  were 
shown  to  the  Governor,  Sir  William  Denison,  under  the  circumstances  narrated 
in  a  letter  to  his  son,  dated  6th  February,  1859 — "I  told  you  in  my  last  letter,  that 
Sir  Daniel  Cooper  and  I  were  about  to  send  a  schooner  down  the  coast  to  trawl 
for  fish  and  dredge  for  shells.  .  .  Great  excitement  has  been  caused  in  tlie  Legis- 
lative Assembly  by  the  production  of  a  tortoise,  which  was  said  to  have  been  found 
alive  in  a  cavity  in  the  rock  13  feet  under  gi-ound,  and  4  feet  from  the  surface  of 
the  rock,  by  the  men  employed  upon  the  railway  cutting.  The  Speaker  sent  it  to 
me,  and  I  took  it  to  Mr.  W.  [S.]  Macleay,  who  pronounced  it  to  be  a  young 
specimen  of  the  'Emys  longicoUis,'  or  long-necked  tortoise,  which  is  common  in 
this   country.      There   must  have  been  a  crevice   in  the  stone,   through   which  tlie 

animal  had  penetrated  into  its  receptacle When  I  went  to  Mr.  ilacleay 

to  ask  him  about  the  tortoise,  he  showed  us  a  set  of  drawings  of  Australian  fish, 
many  of  which,  he  said,  were  to  be  caught  in  Middle  Harbor,  so  we  had  decided 
to  go  down  and  ti-y  for  them  both  with  hook  and  line  and  the  seine;  but  a 
southerly  wind  set  in,  which  made  it  impracticable  to  get  into  Middle  Harhoiir 
with  any  comfort,  and  as  the  fish  never  bite  in  a  southerly  wind,  we  gave  up  our 
expedition"  [Varieties  of  Vice-Regal  Life,  Vol.  ii.,  p.  458]. 


THE  society's  heritage  from  the  macleays.  ■  611 

Tbe  Stuart  Drawings  were  iulierited  by  George  Maeleay  from  his  brother, 
and  by  him  were  taken  to  England  on  the  termination  of  his  visit  to  Australia, 
after  W.  S.  Macleay's  death.  George  Maeleay  eventually  presented  them  to 
William  Maeleay  in  the  year  1887.  I  was  present  when  the  bos  containing 
them  was  opened  by  Mr.  Masters.  After  going  over  the  contents  carefully,  Sir 
William  handed  them  over  to  me  for  the  Society;  and  until  Dr.  Walkom  relieved 
me,  I  had  had  charge  of  them  ever  since.  There  are  161  drawings,  all  water- 
colour  sketclies.  with  the  exception  of  live  pencil  or  crayon  drawings — Mammals, 
13;  Birds,  35;  Reptiles,  6;  Amphibia,  1;  Fishes,  82;  Crastacea,  8;  Mollusca,  13; 
Ecbinoderms,  2;  Insects,  1. 

Now  that  I  know  the  complete  history  of  them,  I  hope  to  contribute  a  paper 
giving  a  complete  list  of  them,  aS  soon  as  I  can  enlist  the  help  of  an  ichthyolo- 
gist to  name  the  fishes  for  me.  With  the  Stuart  drawings  also  came  the  rare 
coloured  jiortrait  of  Linnaeus  in  his  Lapland  dress,  published  by  Dr.  Thornton 
in  .June,  1805.  reproduced  from  a  painting  by  Hoffmann,  now  framed  and  hung 
in  the  Hall;  and  a  good  watercolour  drawing  of  the  rare  Marsupial,  Chaeropus 
ecaiulatus,  by  Gerard  Kreti't.  The  entire  collection  was  insured  by  George  Mae- 
leay for  the  sum  of  £200,  when  it  was  sent  out. 

Another  short  paper,  entitled  "On  doubts  respecting  the  existence  of  Bird- 
Catching  Spiders,"'  dated  Elizabeth  Bay,  -July  8th,  1841.  also  appeared  in  the 
eighth  volume  of  the  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  p.  324.  This  was  written  in  correction 
of  a  mis-statement  in  the  "History  and  Natural  Arrangement  of  Insects"  (1840), 
by  Swainson,  in  collaboration  with  W.  E.  Shuckard,  a  copy  of  which  W.  S. 
Maeleay  had  recently  received.  Speaking  of  the  large  and  powerful  gi'ound- 
spiders  of  the  genus  Mygale,  Shuckard  say.s — "The  fact  has  been  doubted,  of  these 
catching  birds  in  their  nets,  and  feeding  upon  them;  but  the  probability  of  this 
has  been  substantiated  and  confirmed  by  a  communication  we  have  recently  re- 
ceived from  W.  S.  Maeleay,  Esq.,  who  informs  us,  that  in  the  vicinity  of  Syd- 
ney, N.S.W.,  he  has  met  with  a  true  bird-catching  spider, — having  himself  found 
one  of  the  Epeiridae  actually  devouring  the  young  of  a  Gasterops,  that  had,  no 
doubt,  lately  flown  from  the  nest;  and  which  is  not  a  solitary  instance,  as  his 
father,  A.  MacLeay.  Esq..  had  previously  observed  a  similar  fact.  He  there- 
fore retracts  his  observations  upon  Mygale  in  the  Zoological  Transactions;  for 
here,  evidently,  is  a  spider  which  feeds  upon  the  juices  of  a  warm-blooded  animal." 
He  adds  in  a  footnote — "From  a  letter  to  me  dated  7th  April,  1840,  brought  by 
Mr.  Gould  from  Sydney." 

In  reply  to  this,  W.  S.  Maeleay  pointed  out  in  his  paper,  that  the  correct 
name  of  the  bird  was  Zosterops  dorsalis;  that  the  spider  was  a  species  of  the 
Epeiridae.  and  not  of  Mygale;  and  that  the  reason  for  mentioning  the  circum- 
stance, when  writing  to  Shuckard  on  another  subject,  was,  that  he  was  "anxious, 
from  the  love  of  tmth,  to  retract  a  remark  which  I  had  made  in  a  paper  of 
mine  printed  in  the  Transactions  of  the  Zoological  Society,  some  years  before, 
namely  that  'I  disbelieved  the  existence  of  any  bird-catching  spider.'  "  But  he 
still  held  to  the  belief  that  no  Mygale  can  catch  birds  in  its  net.  The  observations 
of  Bates,  however,  without  being  conclu.sive,  cast  some  doubt  on  this  opinion 
[Naturalist  on  the  River  Amazon,  p.  83,  1879] . 

The  four  papers  contained  in  the  Ann.  >Iag.  Nat.  Hist.,  Vols.  viii.  and  ix. 
(1842),  from  which  I  have  quoted,  are  W.  S.  Macleay's  only  contributions  to 
science  published  in   England  after  his  removal  to   Australia.     Two   others   were 


612  president's  address. 

commuiiicated  as  letters  to  the  Sydney  Morning  Herald,  of  July  5th,  and  December 
2nd,  1847.  One,  descriptive  of  the  skull  of  the  so-called  Bunyip,  has  already  been 
mentioned  in  speaking  of  Dr.  J.  Stuart.  It  was  reprinted  in  the  Tasmanian 
Journal  of  Science,  Vol.  iii.,  p.  275,  1849.  The  second,  descriptive  of  some  bones 
of  the  Diprotodon,  was  written  in  response  to  a  request  from  the  Rev.  W.  B. 
Clarke;  and  is  referred  to  later  on  These  six  communications,  unfortunately,  re- 
present all  the  author's  own  printed  records  of  his  scientiiic  work  during  his  re- 
sidence in  Sydney,  that  we  have.  Particulars  of  what  he  actually  succeeded  in 
adding  to  the  Macleay  Collection  are  even  more  incomplete. 

Information  relating  to  his  correspondence  with  scientific  friends  in  England 
is  very  meagre.  He  certainly  sent  specimens  to  the  Rev.  T.  W.  Hope,  but  all 
that  is  known  to  me  about  them  is,  that  when  describing  Scarites  (Scaraphites) 
MacLeaii.  J.  0.  West  wood  adds — "Mr.  Hope  informs  me  that  Mr.  [W.  S.] 
MacLeay  has  named  this  section  in  his  manuscripts  Scaraphites,  and  that  he  has 
discovered  a  new  species  on  the  east  coast  of  New  South  Wales,  at  Elizabeth 
Bay,  where  it  was  found  many  feet  deep  in  the  earth,  whilst  trenching  in  sandy 
soil  to  form  a  Pinetum.  I  would  suggest  that  it  should  be  named  in  honour  of 
its   discoverer.    .    .    .  Mr.    MacLeay   has   recently    forwarded   to    Mr.     Hope   a 

Carenum,    under  the  name  of  C.    4-punctatnin It    is    a  native  of  New 

South  Wales,  and  was  found  under  stones  at  Illawarre''  {sic)  [Arcana  Eutomo- 
logica.  Vol.  i.,  pp.  157,  158] . 

He  also  corresponded  with  Jolm  Blackwall.  tlie  British  authority  on  Spiders, 
in  his  day.  A  most  friendly  letter  from  the  latter,  dated  November  18th,  1856, 
in  reply  to  one  from  W.  S.  Macleay  of  date  July  2nd.,  asking  for  specimens  of 
certain  British  species  of  spiders,  and  for  a  good  method  of  preser\'ing  Arachnida 
so  as  to  retain  tlieir  colours,  is  the  only  record  available.  The  requests  were  com- 
plied with  as  far  as  possible,  with  an  offer  of  future  help  in  supplying  additional 
material,  if  desired.  A  list  of  specimensi  of  thirty  species  sent  by  post,  by  the 
same  mail  as  his  letter,  is  given.  And  a  copy  of  his  "List  of  Species  of  Araneida 
at  present  known  to  inhabit  Great  Britain,''  was  enclosed. 

With  the  exception  of  W.  E.  Shuckard,  mentioned  above,  there  are  no 
other  available  records  of  correspondence  with  English  scientitic  friends  among  the 
relics  of  W.  S.  Macleay.  But  this  is  hardly  a  matter  of  surprise,  as  I  shall  point 
out  later  on,  in  speaking  of  George  and  of  William  Macleay. 

For  any  other  particulars  of  W.  S.  Macleay's  life  in  Australia,  we  are 
almost  entirely  dependent  on  the  records  of  his  friendship  with  Robert  Lowe,  who 
was  a  barrister  and  a  politician,  but  not  a  man  of  science,  as  given  in  Patchett  ■ 
Martin's  "Life  and  Letters  of  the  Right  Honourable  Robert  Lowe,  Viscount  Sher- 
brooke"  (2  vols.,  1893'),  who  lived  in  Sydney  from  1842-50;  the  published  or  un- 
published records  of  casual  or  periodical  visitors  to  Sydne.v.  who  were  interested  in 
science,  including  Huxley,  or  of  resident  friends,  scientific  or  otherwise;  and  on 
the  official  or  other  records  of  his  association  with  the  Australian  JMuseum.  as  a 
Trustee. 

Apart  from  purely  scientific  matters,  Robert  Lowe's  biography  is  tlie  most 
important  self-contained  source  of  information  about  W.  S.  Macleay  as  a  private 
individual,  a  man  of  ability  and  a  scholar,  a  brilliant  conversationalist,  an  in- 
.spirer  of  friendship  to  those  who  knew  him  intimately,  and  shared  his  interests; 
and,  though  keeping  aloof  from  direct  participation  in  politics,  a  colonist  interest- 
ed in  the  progress  of  Australia,  and   a  believer  in   her  future   possil)ilities.     This 


THE  society's  HERITAGE  FROM   THE     MACLEAYS. 


613 


well-written  book,  therefore,  is  a  most  important  supplement  to  the  published 
Obituary  Notices  of  W.  S.  Macleay. 

Robert  Lowe  (1811-1892)  arrived  in  Sydney  in  October,  1842,  when  he  was 
in  his  31st  year.  He  had  graduated,  with  first-class  honours,  at  Oxford  in  1833 ; 
was  a  private  tutor  thereafter  until  he  began  to  study  for  the  Bar,  Fellow  of 
Magdalen  in  1835;  ajid  was  called  to  the  Bar  in  1842,  and  shortly  after  saOed  for 
Australia,  with  his  wife,  to  whom  he  was  married  in  1836.  Robert  Lowe  was  an 
albino,  and  his  eyes  were  unprotected  by  a-pigmentum  nigi-um.  Three  medical  men, 
whom  he  had  consulted,  infonned  him  that  he  would  become  blind  in  seven  years, 
and  recommended  him  to  follow  some  out-of-door  employment  in  Australia  or 
New  Zealand.  Hence  his  migi-ation  to  New  South  Wales.  Shortly  after  his 
arrival,  as  he  found  that  his  eyes  were  prejudicially  affected  by  the  glare  of  the 
Australian  suuuner,  he  consulted  a  doctor,  who  cupped  him,  and  advised  him  that 
it  was  absolutely  necessai-y  to  discontinue  his  practice  of  the  law.  To  add  to  his 
depression,  he  was  forbidden  to  read.  He  says,  in  his  unfinished  autobiographical 
sketch,  in  reference  to  these  trials — "However,  in  this  the  lowest  ebb  of  my 
fortunes,  I  found  several  alleviations.  The  principal  was  the  extraordinary  good 
fortune  which  gave  me  the  acquaintance,  and  I  am  proud  to  say,  the  friendship, 
of  Mr.  William  [S.]  Macleay.  He  had  been  secretary  at  Paris  for  claims  of 
English  subjects,  and  aftei-wards  had  been  a  commissioner  for  the  extinction  of 
the  slave  trade  at  Cuba.  He  was  an  excellent  classical  scholar,  he  knew  more 
of  modern  history  and  biogi-aphy  than  anyone  with  whom  I  was  ever  acquainted, 
and  in  addition  to  all  this  he  was  a  profoundly  scientific  man,  thoroughly  conver- 
sant with  Zoology  and  entomology.  An  excellent  companion,  with  a  store  of 
caustic  wit,  he  reminded  me  continually  of  the  best  part  of  Scott's  Antiquary. 
It  fell  to  my  lot  to  do  him  some  service  from  which  he  never  knew  how  to  be  suffi- 
ciently grateful.  It  would  have  been  a  good  find  to  meet  with  such  a  person 
anywhere,  but  in  a  remote  colony  it  was  a  good  fortune  for  which  one  could  not 
be  sufficiently  srateful.  I  have  not  seen  and  shall  not  see  his  like  again"  ["Life," 
i.,p.41]. 

Of  this.  Lowe's  biographer  says — "Such  is  Lord  Sherbrooke's  tribute  to 
William  Sharpe  (sic)  Macleay,  his  most  cherished  Australian  friend,  who  fully 
returned   his  affection,  and  whose   admiration  for  his   gTeat   abilities,   indomitable 

courage,  and  personal  worth  was  unbounded It  is  not  difficult  to  imagine 

what  a  solace  the  conversation  of  so  cultivated  a  man  must  have  been  to  one  who 
felt  that,  despite  hie  own  great  powers  and  grasp  of  mind,  his  career,  from  im- 
pending blindness,  was  about  to  close  before  it  had  well  begun"  [Vol.  i.,  p.  183]. 

The  following  extracts  are  of  great  interest: — "It  must  be  frankly  admitted 
that  Mrs.  Lowe's  letters  of  this  period  [1845]  are  not  very  complimentary  to 
the  society  of  Sydney.  But  she  thoroughly  appreciated  the  high  qualities  of 
the  one  or  two  intim.ate  friends  whom  they  saw  frequently  at  Nelson  Bay.  Of 
these  she  specially  mentions  three:  Sir  Thomas  Mitchell,  W.  S.  Macleay,  and 
Sir  Alfred  Stephen 

"Sir  Thomas  Mitchell,  Sir  Alfred  Stephen,  William  Sharpe  Macleay,  and  the 
future  Lord  Sherbrooke,  sitting  together,  as  tliey  frequently  did  at  Nelson  Bay, 
all  in  the  full  vigour  of  their  rare  conversational  powers,  would  have  been  con- 
sidered a  distinguished  greup  in  any  city  in  the  world.  Lord  Sherbrooke  always 
declared,  though  in  after  years  he  was  intimate  with  the  cleverest  and  most  cul- 
tured men  in  England,  that  he  had  met  no   one  whose  conversation   was  more 


614  presiuext's  address. 

varied  and  charming:  than  William  Macdcay's.  With  such  companidiis.  one  could 
DOt  be  said  to  be  out  of  the  only  world  worth  living  in — the  world  of  ideas — 
and  the  leisure  hours  which  Robert  Lowe  enjoyed  with  these  old  colonial  friends, 
within  sight  and  sound  of  the  'wide  Pacific,'  were  among'st  the  happiest  of  his 
life"'   (p.   -280-287). 

"Also  in  these  first  years  [after  the  return  to  England]  he  [Robert  Lowe] 
received  much  Australian  intelligence  from  the  pen  of  his  trusted  and  intimate 
friend  in  Svdney.  the  late  William  [S.]  Macleay.  At  parting  they  made  a  kind 
of  loose  compact  that  they  would  regularly  exchange  the  experiences  and  im- 
pressions of  their  widely-sundered  lives;  and  this  was  done  as  far  as  possible 
until  Macleay's  death  in  1805.  Of  this  correspondence  but  a  very  small  portion 
has  been  preserved,  and  of  that,  only  a  mere  fraction  in  any  way  concerns  this 
narrative," 

"Like  all  men  of  that  highly  refined  and  cultured  type,  Macleay  was  of  a  re- 
ser\'ed  nature,  as  well  as  of  very  studious  habits,  and  admitted  few  to  the  inner 
sanctuary  of  his  feelings.  But  he  had  an  afi'ection.  surpassing  that  of  a  brother, 
for  Robert  Lowe,  and  he  felt  also  a  great  liking  and  admiration  for  the  courage 
and  wifely  devotion  of  Mrs.  Lowe.  His  beloved  Elizabeth  Bay  was  never  to 
iiim  altogether  tlie  same  after  the  departure  of  the  young  English  barrister  and 
his  wife  vho  liad  so  strangely  dropped  into  the  orbit  of  his  retired  existence" 
[Vol.  ii.,  p.  92]. 

Extracts  from,  or  summaries  of,  some  of  W.  S.  Macleay's  letters,  relating 
to  political  or  social  matters,  are  given,  as  well  as  a  few  letters  of  special  in- 
terest to  us.  Mrs.  Lowe's  description  of  Elizabeth  Bay  House  and  the  garden, 
as  well  as  a  portion  of  W.  S.  Macleay's  letter  about  Darwin's  "Origin  of 
Species,"  have  been  quoted  above.  His  last  letter,  written  about  three  months 
before  his  death,  is  given  in  its  chronological  place,  in  concluding  my  remarks. 

An  interesting  memento  of  Robert  Lowe's  friendship  with  W.  S.  Macleay, 
among  the  relies  of  the  latter  is  a  copy  of  the  famous  macaronic  poem  which 
Lowe  composed  on  the  visit  of  Queen  Victoria — then  the  Princess  Victoria — and 
her  mother,  the  Duchess  of  Kent,  to  Oxford^  in  1833.  The  author  was  then  an 
undergraduate.  The  poem  is  reprinted  in  Lowe's  "Life,"  with  interesting  com- 
ments [Vol  i.,  p.  86] .  Copies  are  now  extremely  rare,  and  the  biogi-apher  had 
.some  difHeultv  in  borrowing  one.  for,  he  says,  "Lord  Sherbrooke  had  indeed  lost 
his  own  copy."  I  think  it  is  extremely  probable,  that  Lord  Sheibrooke  forgot 
that  he  had  given  his  own  copy  to  W.  S.  Macleay.  The  poem  was  published 
anonymously,  but  on  the  title-page  of  our  copy  is  inscribed  "a  Roberto  Lowe, 
A.M."  in  the  author's  handwriting,  as  I  think. 

Among  other  most  pleasant  interludes  in  W.  S.  IMaeleay's  life  in  Aus- 
tralia, special  mention  may  be  made  of  his  friendly  intercourse  with  Lieutenant 
J.  B.  Emery,  of  H.M.S.  "Beagle,"  in  command  of  Captain  Lort  Stokes;  As- 
sistant-Surgeon Huxley,  of  H.M.S.  "Rattlesnake";  and  Surgeon  F.  Rayner, 
and  Assistant  Surgeon  J.  Denis  Macdonald,  of  H.M.S.  "Herald,"  in  command 
of  Captain  Denhaiu.  These  were  all  periodical  visitors  to  Sydney  during  the 
time  tlieir  vessels  were  on  the  Australian   Station. 

Lieuterant  J.  B.  Emery,  of  H.M.S.  "Beagle,'"  in  command  of  Captaiis 
Stokes,  was  interested  in  Zoology,  as  well  as  the  Surgeon,  Dr.  Bynoe,  who  col- 
lected birds  and  mammals  more  particularly.  While  the  "Beagle"  was  at  Port 
Darwin  in  September  (12tli),  1830.  Cai)tnin  Stokes  records  that— "On  this  beach. 


THE  society's   heritage  PROit   THE   MACLEAYS.  615 

several  unsuccessful  hauls  were  made  with  the  seine,  though  a  few  rare  aad 
curious  fish  were  taken,  which  Lieutenant  Emery  added  to  his  collection  of 
coloured  drawings  of  Australian  fish;  some  of  them  will  be  found  in  the  appen- 
dix to  this  vohime."  Also  during  the  visit  to  Western  Port,  in  Victoria  (Janu- 
ary 10-19th,  1839)— "A  few  rare  insects  were  collected  by  Mr.  Emery"  [Stokes' 
"Discoveries  in  Australia,"  2  vols.,  1846]  .  One  letter,  undated,  from  Lieutenant 
Emery  to  W.  S.  Macleay,  is  included  among  the  relics  of  W.  S.  Macleay.  This 
returns  thanks,  in  the  name  of  the  mess,  for  two  baskets  of  delicious  fruit.  The 
writer  also  accepts  an  invitation  to  dinner  on  the  following  Wednesday.  The 
letter  concludes  with — "Please  to  make  my  respects  to  your  Brother." 

Thomas  Henry  Huxley  (1825-95),  Assistant-Surgeon  of  H.M  S.  "Rattle- 
snake," in  command  of  Captain  Owen  Stanley,  arrived  in  Port  Jackson  on  July 
16,  1847.  His  biographer  says  of  him — "He  had  not  had,  so  far,  much  oppor- 
tunity of  entering  the  so.cial  world;  but  his  visit  to  Sydney  gave  him  an  oppor- 
tunity of  entering  a  good  society  to  which  his  commission  in  the  navy  was  a  suffi- 
cient introduction.  He  was  eager  to  find  friendships  if  he  could,  for  his  reserve 
was  anything  but  misanthropic.  It  was  not  long  before  he  made  the  acquaint- 
ance of  WiOiam  [S.]  Macleay,  a  naturalist  of  wide  research  and  great  specula- 
tive ability;  and  struck  up  a  close  friendship  with  William  Fanning,  one  of  the 
leading  merchants  of  the  town"  ["Life  and  Letters,"  (3  vols).    Vol.  i.,  p.  52]. 

In  a  letter  to  his  sister,  March  21,  1848,  Huxley  wrote— "I  found  it  exceed- 
ingly disagreeable  to  come  to  a  great  place  like  Sydney  and  think  that  there 
was  not  a  soul  who  cared  whether  I  was  alive  or  dead,  so  I  determined  to  go  into 
what  society  was  to  be  had  and  see  if  I  could  not  pick  up  a  friend  or  two 
among  the  multitude  of  the  empty  and  frivolous.  I  am  happy  to  say  that  I 
have  had  more  success  than  I   hoped  for  or  deserved,  and  there  are   now  two  or 

three  houses  where  I  can  go  and  feel  myself  at  home  at  all  times I  am 

getting  on  capitally  at  present.  Habit,  inclination,  and  now  a  sense  of  duty 
keep  me  at  work,  and  tlie  nature  of  our  cruise  affords  me  opportunities  such  as 
none  but  a  blind  man  would  fail  to  make  use  of.  I  have  sent  two  or  three  papers 
home  already  to  be  published,  which  I  have  great  hopes  will  throw  light  upon 
some  hitherto  obscure  branches  of  natural  history,  and  I  have  just  finished  a 
more  important  one,  which  I  intend  to  get  read  at  the  Royal  Society.  The 
other  day  I  submitted  it  to  William  [S.]  Macleay  (the  celebrated  propounder  of 
the  Quinary  system),  who  has  a  beautiful  place  near  Sydney,  and  I  hear,  'werry 
much  approves  what  I  have  done'  "  [Life,  Vol.  i..  p.  54] . 

In  a  letter  to  his  mother,  from  Sydney,  Feb.  1,  1849,  Huxley  wrote — "If 
my  various  papers  meet  with  any  success,  I  may  perhaps  be  able  to  leave  the  ser- 
vice [after  liis  return  to  England] .  At  present,  however,  I  have  not  heard  a 
word  of  anything  I  have  sent.  Professor  Forbes  has,  I  believe,  published  some 
of  Macgillivray's  letters  to  him,  but  he  has  apparently  forgotten  to  write  to 
Macgillivray  himself  or  to  me.  So  1  sliall  certainly  send  him  nothing  more, 
especially  as  Mr.  [W.  S.]  Macleay  (of  this  place,  and  a  great  man  in  the 
naturalist  world)  has  offered  to  get  anything  of  mine  sent  to  the  Zoological 
Societv"   ["Life."  Vol.  i.,  p.  57] . 

The  publication  of  Huxley's  important  paper  on  the  "Oceanic  Hydrozoa" 
was  unfortunately  delayed  through  lack  of  official  support,  and  was  ultimately 
issued  by  the  Ray  Society  in  1859.  The  author,  in  the  preface  (p.  viii. ) 
says — "T  made  a  g'ood  many  observations  during  our  cruise,  and  sent  home  sev- 


LIBRA 

I 


616  president's  address. 

eral  papers  to  the  Linnean  and  Royal  Societies;  but  of  these  doves,  or  rather 
ravens,  which  left  my  ark,  i  had  heard  absolutely  nothing  up  to  the  time  of  my 
return;  and,  save  for  the  always  kind  and  hearty  encouragement  of  the  cele- 
brated William  [S.]  MacLeay,  whenever  our  return  to  Sydney  took  me  withm 
reach  of  his  hospitality,  1  know  not  whether  1  should  have  had  the  courage  to 
continue  labours  which  might,  so  far  as  I  knew,  be  valueless.'' 

The  "Rattlesnake"  wa-s  absent  from  England  almost  four  years,  and  her 
stay  in  Australian  waters  lasted  nearly  three,  about  eleven  months  of  this  period 
being  spent  in  Port  Jackson.  After  his  return  to  England,  Huxley  redeemed 
his  promise  to  write  to  W  S .  Macleay.  His  first  letter  is  merely  mentioned  in 
the  "Life."  But  the  second,  dated  November  9th,  1851,  a  long  and  very  interest- 
ing letter,  amounting  to  nearly  six  printed  pages,  is  given  almost  in  full.  In 
this,  he  gives  a  detailed  account  of  the  scientific  news  of  the  day,  and  of  his 
own  work.  Of  himself  he  says — "Had  the  Sydney  Uijiversity  been  carried  out 
as  originally  proposed,  I  should  certainly  have  become  a  candidate  for  the 
Natural  History  Chair.  I  know  no  finer  field  for  exertion  for  any  naturalist 
than  Sydney  Harbour  itself.  Should  such  a  Professorship  be  hereafter  estab- 
lished, I  trust  ,'ou  will  jog  the  memory  of  my  Australian_  friends  in  my  belialf . 
....  Believe  me,  I  have  not  forgotten,  nor  ever  shall  forget,  your  kindness 
to  me  at  a  time  when  a  little  appreciation  and  encouragement  were  more  grate- 
ful to  me  and  of  more  service  than  they  will  perhaps  ever  be  again.     I  have  done 

my  best  to  justify  you I  send  copies  of  all  the  papers  I  have  published, 

with  one  exception,  of  which  I  have  none  separate.  Of  the  Royal  Society 
papers,  I  sent  a  double  set.  Will  you  be  good  enough  to  give  one,  with  my 
kind  regards  and  remembrances  to  Dr.  Nicholson?  ....  I  shall  be  very  glad 
if  you  can  find  time  to  write"   ["Life,"  Vol.  i..  p.  132] . 

All  that  Huxley  has  to  say  about,  or  in  his  letter  to,  W.  S.  Macleay  goes 
to  show  that  he  was  very  favourably  impressed  by  his  friendly  intercourse  with 
file  Sydney  naturalist;  and  very  appreciative  of  the  advice  and  help  that  the 
latter  was  always  ready  to  give.  For  it  may  be  mentioned,  that  there  was  no 
scientific  library  for  the  naturalist  on  board  the  ship,  though  Captain  Stanley 
had  asked,  but  in  vain,  for  some  money  to  provide  one. 

I  regret  that  the  obituary  notice  of  W.  S.  Macleay  in  the  "Reader,"  which, 
I  think,  was  Huxley's  last  tribute  to  his  old  friend,  cannot  be  consulted  in  any  cf 
our  libraries. 

•  An  interesting  memento  of  Huxley's  intercourse  with  W .  S .  Macleay, 
among  the  relics  of  the  latter,  is  a  pencil-sketch  of  a  pelagic  Tunicate  {Appoidi- 
eularia),  by  W.  S.  Macleay,  with  the  legend — "This  animal,  forming  a  link  be- 
tween Ascidia  and  Salpa,  was  found  in  Torres  Straits  by  Mr.  Huxley,  who  caught 
it  in  his  towing-net,  swimming  with  the  long,  transparent  tail."  Apparently  the 
sketch  was  made  from  a  specimen  given  to  him  by  its  captor. 

No  complete  narrative  of  the  voyages  of  H.M.S.  "Herald,"  employed  on 
Surveying  Service  in  the  South- Western  Pacific,  was  pul'lished,  pad  it  is  diffi- 
cult to  follow  the  itinerary.  But  the  "Herald"  visited  Sydney  in  1858,  and 
several  times  before  and  after  this  year.  Surgeon  Rayner  was  interested  in,  and 
collected  insects  and  other  land-animals,  but  he  did  not  publish  any  papers. 
After  his  return  to  England,  Mr.  Adam  White  exhil)ited  portion  of  Dr.  Kayner's 
collection  at  a  meeting  of  the  Entomological  Society  of  London,  on  November 
4th,  1861 .      This  exhibit   iiichuled  specimens   from  Aneiteum,   New  Hebrides,  and 


THE  society's  heritage  from  the  macleays.  617 

Lord  Howe.  Island.  On  bis  visits  to  Elizabeth  Bay,  Dr.  Kayner  would  have 
much  to  show  to,  and  to  discuss  with  W.  S.  Macleay.  Dr.  Rayner  was  also  a 
friend  oi  William  Macleay,  and  used  to  accompany  him  on  collecting  excursions, 
as  narrated  later  on. 

Dr.  J .  Denis  Macdonald  was  interested  in  marine  organisms,  and  the 
author  of  thirty-five  papere  listed  in  the  Royal  Society's  Catalogue,  and  covering 
the  period  1853-63.  Some  of  these  were  sent  home  for  publication  while  he  was 
on  the  Australian  Station.  In  one  of  them,  "On  the  Anatomy  of  Eurybia 
GaKdichaudi,''  he  gives  a  synopsis  of  the  Pteropoda,  of  which  he  says — "This 
table  is  advanced  with  a  little  more  confidence,  as  it  has  benefited  by  the  revising 
hand  of  Mr.  W.  S.  Macleay"  [Trans.  Linn.  Soc,  xxii.,  p.  248,  read  Feb.  18th, 
1858].  The  relics  of  W.  S.  Macleay  include  a  water-colour  sketch  of  the  re- 
markable, pelagic,  footless  slug,  Phyllirlioe  Peronii,  described  by  Dr.  Macdonald. 
This  is  signed  and  dated  September,  1854.  He,  too,  would  have  much  to  show, 
and  to  talk  about,  whenever  the  return  of  the  ship  to  Sydney  enabled  him  to  visit 
Elizabeth  Bay. 

Captain  Denham,  Dr.  Rayner,  and  Dr.  Macdonald  were  elected  Honorary 
Correspondents  of  the  Australian  Museum  in  .Tuly,  1857,  as  noted  in  Ethcridge's 
History,  wherein  it  is  stated  that — "All  these  gentlemen  liad  performed  excellent 
investigations  in  marine  life,  and  the  Museum  gained  much  benefit  thereby" 
(p.  385). 

Dr.  W.  Stimpson,  Naturalist  on  the  U.S.N.  "Vincennes,"  under  the  com- 
mand of  Captain  John  Rogers,  visited  Sydney,  December  26th,  1S53,  to  January 
8th,  1854,  and  recorded  his  experiences,  unpublished  during  his  lifetime,  Init 
since  published  by  Mr.  C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.  ["The  Australian  Journal  of  Dr.  AV. 
Stimpson.  Zoologi.st."  With  an  Introduction  by  C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.  Journ. 
Proc.  R.  Soc.  N.S.  Wales,  Vol.  xlviii.,  p.  140,  1914].  After  visiting  the  Aus- 
tralian Museum,  when  Mr.  Wall  was  Curator,  on  December  31st,  1853,  Dr. 
Stimpson  records  that  "we  went  to  see  Mi-.  [W.  S.]  Maclet;y,  who  lives  in  a 
large  house,  having  extensive  grounds,  situated  beyond  the  town  of  WooIIoomoo- 
loo  He  treated  us  with  kindness  and  showed  us  his  fine  collection  of  insects, 
and  the  plants  of  his  fine  garden.  He  appeared  to  care  little  for  marine  inver- 
tebrata,  and  on  the  whole  I  was  not  much  interested  by  my  visit.  He  is  a  man  of 
immense  general  infonnation,  having  a  remarkable  memory,  and  is  equally 
versed  in  zoology  and  botany.  He  is  now  about  80  [?  60]  years  of  age,  and  his 
working  days  are  over." 

William  Swainson  seems  to  have  visited  Sydney  about  1851  or  1853.  But  no 
particulars  of  his  visit  are  available.  He  finally  settled  periuantntly  in  New 
Zealand . 

Dr.  W.  H.  Harvey,  the  Algologist,  on  his  world-wide  quest  for  seaweeds, 
spent  some  time  in  Sydney,  in  May,  1855.  On  May  12th,  he  records— "Visited 
Mr.  [W.  S.]  McLeay,  the  celebrated  entomologist,  and  author  of  what  is  called 
"the  circular  system,"  of  wliieh  (once  upon  a  time)  I  was  an  admirer.  He  has 
a  fine  house  in  a  beautiful  park  of  sixty  acres,  all  within  the  city  of  Sydney. 
He  cultivates  many  rare  trees,  shrubs,  and  plants,  and  from  his  grounds  there 
are  charming  prosnects"  [Memoir  of  W.  H.  Harvev,  M  D  F  R  S  p  '^ill 
1869.]  .     .    .,    J  .   -.    , 

The  Austrian  Frigate,  "Novara,"  on  a  circumnavigating  cruise,  visited  Syd- 
ney   in   1858,    remaining    from  November  5th    to  December   7th.      The  historian 


618  president's  address. 

of  the  expedition,  Dr.  Karl  Scherzer,  says — [p.  14]  ....  ''Among  the  ex- 
cursions in  the  immediate  neighbourhood  of  Sydney,  we  at  onee  selected  a  visit 
to  the  well-known  naturalist,  Mr.  [W.  S.]  Maeleay,  who  resides  at  a  beautiful 
estate  near  Elizabeth  Hay.  In  his  beautiful  garden,  one  sees  the  most  interesting 
plants  of  Australia  side  by  side  with  splenditl  specimens  from  all  other  parts  of 
the  world.  A  stroll  through  the  extensive  grounds  derives  a  double  iutere-st 
when  in  company  with  its  highly-cultivated  proprietor,  and  we  are  the  more 
grateful  for  this  good  fortune,  as  the  venerable  old  gentleman  [set.  6G]  lives  in 
strict  seclusion"  [Narrative  of  the  Circumnavigation  of  tiie  Globe  by  the  Austrian 
Frigate  "Novara."  By  Dr.  Karl  Sclierzer,  English  Edition.  Vol.  iii.,  p.  16, 
1863] . 

Seientitic  or  otiwr  friends  of  W.  S.  Madeay,  who  lesided  for  some  time 
or  permanently  in  Australia,  and  of  whom  there  are  records  or  mementos  of  some 
kind,  most  of  these  forming  part  of  the  memorials  of  liim,  may  next  be  men- 
tioned. These  include,  besides  Dr.  James  Stuart,  to  whom  reference  has  already 
been  made — Mrs.  .1.  S.  Calvert  [nee  Louisa  Atkinson),  Dr.  George  Bennett, 
Rev.  W.  B.  Clarke.  Sir  William  Denison.  Rear- Admiral  P.  P.  King,  Dr.  L. 
Leiehhardt,  Sir  William  Macarthur,  Baron  von  Mueller,  Sir  Charles  Nicholson. 
Mr.  A.  W.  Scott  and  his  accomplished  daughters,  Harriet  (Mis.  C.  W.  Mor- 
gan), and  Helena  (Mrs.  Edward  Forde)  of  Ash  Lsland,  Mr.  Justice  Therry, 
Dr.  John  Vaughan  Thompson,  and  tlie  Rev.  Dr.  Woolls.  Sir  Thomas  Mitchell  and 
Sir  Alfred  Stephen  are  referred  to  in  the  extracts  given  from  Robert  Lowe's 
biography . 

Miss  Louisa  Atkinson  (Mrs.  J.  S.  Calvert)  [1834-72]  lived  at  "Fernhurst," 
Kurrajong  Heights,  before  her  marriage,  in  1870.  She  collected  plants  for  Dr. 
Woolls  and  Baron  von  Mueller,  and  many  of  them  are  recorded  in  the  Baron's 
"Fragmenta,"  or  in  the  "Flora  Australiensis."  Mr.  Maiden  lias  given  a  bio- 
graphical notice  and  a  portrait  of  this  accomplished  woman  in  his  pajier  "Records 
of  Australian  Botanists — (a)  General,  (h)  New  South  Wales"  [Journ.  Proc.  R. 
Soc.  N.S.  Wales,  Vol.  xlii..  1908,  p.  83].  Miss  Atkinson  was  also  interested 
in  "Vegetable  Caterpillars,"  and  corresponded  with  W.  S.  Maeleay  on  the  sub- 
ject. In  a  letter  to  Miss  Scott  of  Ash  Island,  dated  July  23rd,  1861,  referred  to 
again  later  on,  W.  S.  Maeleay  wrote — "I  know  two  species  of  Sphaeria  that 
grow  from  the  Charagiae  of  this  Colony,  and  a  Lady-friend  of  mine,  who  is  a 
capital  botanist,  though  no  entomologist,  is  now  preparing  a  work  on  the  New 
Holland  species  of  Sphaeria,  which  she  is  studying  in  the  country."  The  Lady- 
friend  referred  to  was  Miss  Louisa  Atkinson.  Her  \nsiting-card,  and  some 
"Notes  on  the  Sphaeria  and  Grub,"  written  after  a  visit  to  Mount  Tomah,  in 
search  of  specimens,  on  April  22nd  [year  not  given]  are  included  among  rlie 
relics  of  W.  S.  Maeleay.  Miss  Atkinson  says  in  her  Notes,  that  she  and  her 
comi^anion  dug  up  rbout  eighteen  vegetal)le  caterpillars,  but  they  were  old  ones, 
not  in  good  condition,  as  no  fre.sh  ones  seemed  to  have  develojied  since  her  last 
researches . 

Most  of  W.  S.  Macleay's  scientific  friends  in  Sydney  were  nieiiil)ers  of 
the  governing  body  of  the  Australian  Museum.  In  those  early  days,  when  there 
was  no  scientific  Society  specially  concerned  with  biology,  the  (^otonial  Museum. 
later  the  Australian  Museum,  was  the  rallying-ground  for  natur.alists,  especiallv 
those  interested  in  zoology;  and  the  Meetings  of  the  Committee  or  of  tlie  Board 
brought  them  together  and  kept  them  in  touch. 


THE  society's  heritage  from  the  MACLEAYS.  619 

Dr.  Georgo  Bennett  (1804-93)  paid  two  visits  to  Sydney  as  medieal  oflieer 
of  passenger-ships  in  1829-32.  Finally  lie  settled  in  Sydney  in  1836,  and  began 
to  practise  medicine .  Very  soon  after  be  became  officially  connected  with  the 
Colonial  Museum,  later  the  Australian  Museum .  His  official  record  is :  Director, 
Superintendent,  Zoologist,  Curator,  previous  to  1841,  Hon.  Secretary  (1836?), 
July  1838-41,  Committeeman  (1836?)  1838-53,  Elective  Trustee,  1853-74  (Etlier- 
idge )  .  W .  S .  Mudeay  was  a  Committeeman  from  1841-53,  and  an  Elective 
Trustee  from  1853  until  his  resignation  in  18()2,  on  account  of  ill-health.  Both 
Dr.   Bennett  and  W.    S.  Macleay  had  known  Professor  Owen  in  London. 

There  is  a  reference  to  Dr.  Bennett  in  W.  S.  Madeay's  letter  to  Miss 
Scott,  quoted  later  on.  There  is  no  memento  of  him  among  the  memorials  of 
W.   S.  Macleay. 

But  the  Society  has  some  very  interesting  memorials  ef  him,  in  the  shape 
of  vakiable  books,  all  with  book-plates,  purchased  by  the  Council,  at  the  sale  of 
his  fine  library,  after  his  decease.  One  of  these  is  J.  D.  Hookers  "Flora  Novae 
Zealandiae"  being  the  second  section  of  "The  Botany  of  the  Antarctic  Voyage  of 
H.M.  Discovery  Ships  "Erebus"  and  "Terror,"  i839-43,  &c."  This  would  be 
the  copy  to  which  J.  C.  Bidwill  refers  in  a  letter  to  Captain  P.  P.  Iving,  dated 
February  8th,  1846 — "1  was  much  delighted  at  looking  over  the  Flora  Antarctica 
at  Dr.  Bennett's,  not  the  less  so  as  I  see  that  in  it  I  have  credit  done  me  for 
my  early  discoveries  in  New  Zealand"  [Maiden,  "Records  of  Australian  Botanists," 
p.  89].  Another  scarce  and  valuable  purchase  was  a  set,  complete  except  for 
one  volume,  of  the  Botanical  Journals,  in  four  successive  series,  published  by 
Sir  William  J.  Hooker,  1830-57  (23  vols.).  Four  of  the  volumes  of  the  last 
series.  Hooker's  London  Journal  of  Botany,  have  original  letters,  from  Sir  W. 
J.  Hooker  to  Dr.  Bennett,  pasted  in  at  the  front  oi-  back,  one  in  each  volume. 
The  first,  not  dated,  relates  to  Vegetable  Ivory;  the  second,  November  29th,  1852, 
is  about  the  Rice-paper  Plant;  the  third,  November  27th,  1857,  returns  thanks 
for  Macrozamia-seeds  sent  in  salt-water,  and  reports  that  Dr.  Harvey  is  working 
at  Kew;  and  the  fourth,  June  1st,  1859,  is  an  invitation  to  Kew  Gardens,  when 
Dr.   Bennett  was  visiting  England. 

The  Rev.  W.  B.  Clarke  (1798-1878).  M.A.,  F.R.S..  F.G.S.,  the  "Father 
of  Australian  Geology,"  and  W.  S.  Macleay  attended  tlie  meeting  of  the  British 
Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science  at  Liverpool,  in  1837;  and  both  ar- 
rived in  Sydney  in  the  same  year,  1839.  On  his  arrival,  Mr.  Clarke  was  ap- 
pointed to  take  charge  of  the  King's  School,  Parramatta;  he  was  afterwards 
Rector  of  Willoughby,  1846-70.  He  vevy  soon  l)ecame  interested  in  the  Aus- 
tralian Museum,  the  record  of  bis  official  connection  therewith  being — Secretary 
1839-41;  Secretary  and  Curator,  1841-42;  Committeeman,  1839-53;  Elective  Tru.s- 
tee,  185.3-74  (Etheridge)  .  The  long  association  of  Mr.  Clarke  and  W.  S. 
Macleay  with  the  governing  body  of  the  Australian  Museum  provided  them 
with  abundant  opportunities  of  meeting. 

There  is  but  one  letter  to  W.  S.  Macleay,  dated  from  St.  Leonards,  29th 
November,  1847,  among  his  memorials,  which  begins — "Had  not  this  blessed  rain 
kept  me  at  home,  to  recruit  after  the  fatigue  of  living  till  it  came,  I  intended 
to  call  on  you  to  talk  over  Turner's  Diprotodon.  He  has  requested  me  to  draw 
up  a  notice,  to  help  him.  I  have  done  so,  but  with  much  misgiving;  and  I  have 
put  to  it  my  initials,  that  no  one  else  may  be  blamed  if  I  am  wrong.  I  have  taken 
the    liberty    of    calling    on    you  to    give  the   public   a    benefit — I    hope    you   will 


620  president's  address. 

'honour  the  bill.'""  W .  S.  Macleay  complied  with  the  request  by  sending  a  Umg 
letter,  "On  the  Bones  brought  to  Sydney  by  Mr.  Turner,"  dated  December  2nd, 
1847,  to  the  Sydney  Morning  Herald .  This,  together  with  Mr.  Clarke's  letter, 
and  one  by  Dr.  L.  Leichhardt  on  the  same  subject,  were  afterwards  republished 
by  Mr.  Clarke  as  an  appendix  to  his  Report,  No.  x.  [Further  Papers  relative 
to  the  Discovery  of  Gold  in  Australia,  p.  38,  1855] . 

Owen's  original  description  of  the  genus  Diprotodon  was  based  on  a  very 
iDcomplete  series  of  specimens,  including  a  molar  tooth,  and  portions  of  broken 
bones  of  various  parts  of  the  skeleton .  Turner's  specimens  were  more  complete, 
and  included  a  shattered  skull,  which  Mr.  ^Yall  of  the  Museum,  with  the  co- 
operation of  Mr.  Clarke  and  Dr.  Leichhardt,  succeeded  in  putting  together;  this 
measured  four  feet  in  length  from  the  frontal  bone  to  the  occiput.  The  pelvis 
was  incomplete,  and  the  marsupial  bones  were  missing.  W.  S.  Macleay,  in  hia 
lengthy  account,  gave  the  dental  formula,  compared  it  with  that  of  oilier  mar- 
supials, and  discussed  the  relationship  of  Diprotodon.  His  conclusion  wa.s — "Hut 
this  collection  is  above  all  interesting,  as  proving  the  trutli  of  Professor  Owen's 
suggestion,  that  there  formerly  existed  in  the  Australian  wilds  a  marsupiid 
Pachyderm,  thus  serving  to  complete  that  series  of  analogies  .which  quadrupeds 
with  marsupial  bones  bear  to  the  several  classes  of  placental  mammalia.' 

Turner's  collection  of  bones  was  afterwards  sold,  sent  to  London,  and 
subsequently  described  and  figured  by  Professor  Owen. 

Mr.  Clarke  conducted  the  burial  service  at  the  funeral  of  W.  S.  Macleay, 
on  January  28th,  1865.  An  obituary  ncitice  appeared  in  the  Sydney  Morning 
Herald  of  January  30th.  The  Rev.  R.  L.  King,  in  his  Presidential  Address  to 
the  Entomological  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  refers  to  this  as  from  the  pen 
of   an  old   friend.  It  is,   I   think,   almost   certain  that  it  was  written  by   Mr. 

Clarke,  perhaps  after  consultation  witli  William  Macleay.  It  is  much  to  be  re- 
gretted that  no  "Life  an<l  Letters'"  iif  this  eminent  Australian  pioneer  in  geology 
has  been  published. 

Sir  William  Denison,  the  Governor  General,  has  recorded  two  visits  to  W. 
S.  Macleay,  in  his  "Varieties  of  Vice-Regal  Life."  Mr.  Dea.s  Thomson's  position 
as  Colonial  Secretary  was  about  to  lapse,  on  the  eve  of  the  inauguration  of 
Responsible  Government ;  and  the  (luestion  for  his  Excellency  to  settle  was,  who 
should  be  asked  to  be  Premier.  Sir  William,  in  a  letter  to  Mr.  Deas  Thomson, 
dated  January  15th,  1856,  said  [Vol.  i.,  p.  332]— "I  paid  a  visit  to  Mr.  [W. 
S.]  Macleay  yesterday,  and  had  a  long  conversation  with  him  on  political  matters, 
of  which  I  give  you  the  substance,  as  it  will  serve  to  show  you  the  views  enter- 
tained by  a  man  like  him,  not  actually  engaged  in  the  strife  of  party 

In  tlie  first  place,  great  anxiety  was  expressed  tliat  you  should  take  the  lead,  mid 
constitute  the  Government:  it  was  said  that  all  expected  you  to  do  so;  that  the 
Government    would    be    placed   in    great    difficulty    without    your    knowledge   and 

experience  to  keep  things  steady The  conclusion  of  tlie  whole  matter  is, 

that  I  very  much  wish  you  to  form  a  Government,  and  assist  nie  in  working  out 
the  experiment  wliich  is  about  to  be  made."  Air.  Deas  Thomson,  however,  could 
not  see  his  way  to  accept  the  Governor's  offer.  Mr.  Stuart  Donaldson  wius  sent 
for,  and  subsequently  formed  the  fii-st  Ministry,  Mr.  Deas  Thomson  being  ap- 
pointed President  of  the  Legislative  Council. 

On  his  second  visit  on  Febniary  6th,  1850,  [Vol,  i.,  p.  458]  to  show  Mr.  W. 
S.  Macleay  a  tortoise  sent  to  liim  by  the  Speaker  of  the  Legislative  Assembly, 
Sir  William  saw  the  Stuart  Drawings,  as  noted  above. 


THE  society's  heritage  from  the  macleays.  021 

Captain,  afterwards  Kear-Admiral  Piiillip  Parker  King  (1793-1850)  was  an 
old  friend  of  W.  S.  Macleay.  They  had  met  in  London  before  1820.  At 
Captain  King's  request,  W.  S.  Macleay  described  the  collection  of  Annulosa 
accumulated  by  the  former,  during  his  survey  of  the  Inter-tropical  and  Western 
Coasts  of  Australia  l)etween  the  years  1818  and  1822  [King-'s  "Narrative,"  Vol. 
ii.,  Appendix,  [).  138.  1827]  .  CaptaiA  King  was  a  Committeeman  or  a  Trustee 
of  the  Colonial  or  Australian  Museum  for  many  yeai-s,  from  1830  onwards. 

Rear-Admiral  King  is  another  distinguished  Australian,  born  in  Norfolk 
Island,  of  whom,  unfortunately,  no  "Life  and  Letters"  has  been  published.  A 
very  interesting  biographical  notice  of  this  eminent  man,  by  the  late  Mr.  H.  C. 
Kussell,  will  be  found  in  the  First  Report  of  the  Australasian  Association  for  tlie 
Advancement  of  Science  (p.  48).  In  addition  to  what  is  therein  stated,  it  may 
be  pointed  out  that  Captain  King  became  very  interested  in  zoology  during  his 
survey  of  the  Southern  Coasts  of  South  America,  1820-30.  The  results  of  some 
of  his  observations,  dated  July  8th,  1827,  were  sent  to  Mr.  Vigors,  who  published 
them,  under  the  title  of  "Extracts  from  a  letter  addressed  by  Captain  Phillip 
Parker  King,  R.N..  F.R.S.  and  L.S..  to  N.  A.  Vigors,  Esq.,  on  the  Animals 
of  the  Straits  of  Magellan,"  in  the  Zoological  Journal,  [Vol.  iii.,  pp.  422-432; 
Vol.  iv.,  pp.  91-105].  He  was  also  the  joint  author  of  another  paper,  "De- 
scription of  the  Cirrhipeda,  Conchifera  and  Mollusea,  in  a  collection  formed  by 
the  Officers  of  H.M.S.  Adventure  and  Beagle  employed  between  the  years  1826 
and  1830  in  surveying  the  Southern  Coasts  of  South  America,  including  the 
Straits  of  Magalhaens  and  the  Coast  of  Tierra  del  Fuego.  By  Captain  Phillip  P. 
King,  R.N.,  F.R.S.,  &c.,  assisted  by  AV.  J.  Bmderip,  Esq.,  F.R.S.,  &c."  This 
paper  likewise  was  published  in  the  Zoological  Journal,  Vol.  v.,  p.   332,  18,35. 

The  existence  of  these  papers  helps  to  explain  why,  like  W.  S.  Macleay, 
Captain  King  visited  the  "Erebus"  in  Port  Jackson,  to  see  Dr.  J.  D.  Hooker's 
Southern  collections,  and  his  drawings  of  sea-animals,  as  already  mentioned.  He 
also  contributed  an  article  on  "The  Antarctic  Expedition  of  Discovery"  to  the 
Sydney  Herald  of  August  19th,  1841,  a  fortnight  after  the  "Erebus"  and  "Terror" 
sailed  from  Port  Jackson  for  New  Zealand .  This  gives  an  account  of  the  doings 
of  the  Expedition  up  to  the  time  of  its  arrival  in  Port  Jackson.  A  reprint  of 
this  article,  no  doubt  presented  to  W.  S.  Macleay  by  the  writer,  is  included 
among  tlie  memorials  of  the  former. 

Another  interesting  relic  is  portion  of  a  letter  from  Captain  King  to  W.  S. 
Macleay,  dated  June  4th,  1842.  The  address  is  not  mentioned,  but  it  would  be 
Tahlee,  Port  Stephens,  where  Captain  King  resided  from  1839-48,  and  then  re- 
moved to  Sydney.  The  writer  says — "I  have  found  here  to-day  a  sp.  of  Latr. 
genus  Mictyris  running  on  the  sand  at  low  tide.  The  above  [a  pencil-sketch  of 
a  crab]  is,  no  doubt,  a  bad  resemblance,  but  it  will  serve  to  show  nearly  what 
it  is,  and  whether  it  is  of  use  to  your  collection.  The  carapace  is  a  dull  blue, 
and  the  sides  a  yellow  fawn  colour.  T  believe  I  am  right  in  assigning  it  to 
Latreille's  genus  Mictyris.     I  have  him  in  spirits,  at  your  disposal,  if  wanted." 

Other  interesting  relics  are  three  rare  pamphlets,  being  the  first,  second,  and 
fourth  of  the  series  mentioned  by  Mr.  Russell  as  printed  at  Captain  King's  own 
private  printing-press,  when  he  resided  at  Tahlee.  These  relate  to  the  specific 
gravity  of  sea-water,  and  to  meteorological  or  astronomical  observations.  W.  S. 
Macleay's  three  copies  have  inscriptions  by  the  author. 


b-'li  PRESIDENT  S   ALlDRESS. 

A  very  interesting  memento  of  Captain  King,  in  the  Society's  library,  is  the 
copy  of  J.  D.  Hooker's  "Flora  Autarctiea"  being  Section  i.  of  "The  Botany  of 
the  Antarctic  Voyage,"  inscribed  and  presented  to  him  by  the  author.  This  was 
subsequently  handed  over  to  his  eldest  sou,  Phillip  Gidley  King,  who  generously 
gave  it  to  the  Society  in  1882,  when  the  Council  was  trying  to  repla<-e  the  original 
lilirary  destrnyed  in  the  Garden  Palace  Fire. 

The  Honourable  Phillip  Gidley  King,  M.L.C.,  (1817-1904)  was  an  Original 
Member  of  the  Society,  and,  for  six  years,  a  Member  of  the  Council .  An 
obituary  notice  uf  liini,  which  includes  his  own  account  of  his  experiences  as 
cabin-mate  of  Charles  Darwin  on  tlie  voyage  of  the  "Beagle,"  and  as  his  com- 
panion on  some  of  Darwin's  land-excursions,  will  be  found  in  the  Society's  Pro- 
ceedings, 1905,  p.  5.  Darwin  paid  a  visit  to  Captain  King,  at  "Dunheved,"  St. 
Marj''s,  on  his  return-journey  from  Bathurst,  in  January,  183(5. 

The  Rev.  Robert  Lethbridge  King,  second  son  of  Kenr- Admiral  King,  was  a 
valued  friend  and  correspondent  of  both  W.  S.  Macleay,  and  William  Macleay; 
and  a  keen  entomologist.  The  memorials  of  W.  S.  Macleay  include  an  excellent 
pencil-sketch  by  Mr.  King,  of  a  remarkable  Pselaphid  beetle,  initialled,  and 
dated,  Parramatta,  A]iril  4,  1858;  and  a  very  interesting  letter  dated  July  28th, 
1859,  in  which  Mr.  King  says — "I  send  you  a  sketch  in  pen-and-ink  [on  p.  3  of 
the  letter]  of  two  ferns  in  my  friend,  Mr.  Woolls'  herbarium:  Do  you  recognise 
them  as  South  Sea  Islanders?  I  should  be  very  glad  to  introduce  Mr.  W.  to 
you,  that  he  might  have  a  look  over  your  garden.  He  is  taking  a  very  great 
interest  in  the  science,  and  has  a  good  knowledge  of  our  Parramatta  ferns.  I 
think  a  trip  to  Elizabeth  Bay  would  encourage  him — if  you  will  allow  me  to 
introduce  him.  I  have  had  the  Eucnhiiitus  fibibulu,-'  (1  think)  in  flower  in  my 
garden .  Gen .  Macarthur  gavH  me  a  small  plant  2  years  ago .  It  is  now  12ft . 
I  think  I  wi'ote  you  before  of  the  change  of  leaf — from  sessile  and  amplexicaul, 
and  opposite,  to  peduncled  (?)  and  alternate."  Dr.  Woolls  was  duly  introduced, 
and  became  W.  S.  Maeleay's  friend  and  correspondent. 

In  Mr.  King's  ]>aper  on  Pselaphidae.  in  the  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.  Wales 
(Vol.  i.,  p.  54),  he  described  several  species  from  specimens  found  by  W.  S. 
Macleay  in  his  garden  at  Elizabetli  Bay,  and  acknowledges  his  indebtedness  for 
them.  He  mentions  also  that  he  had  found  a  single  specimen  of  one  of  them 
on  the  sea-beach  in  the  same  locality. 

Dr.  Leichliardt  presented  some  insects  to  W.  S.  Macleay,  as  mentioned  in 
one  of  William  Maeleay's  papers.  But  this  is  all  the  available  information 
about  their  intercourse. 

Sir  AVilliam  Macarthur  (1800-82)  of  ("aniden  was  a  ti-iend  of  all  the 
Macleays.  He  exchanged  plants  with  Alexander  Macleay.  and  afterwards  with 
W.  S.  Macleay.  He  was  a  neighbour  of  George  Macleay  at  Brownlow  Hill,  for 
more  than  thirty-one  years.  Both  of  them,  as  well  as  James  Macarthur,  and 
others,  were  Magistrates  in  the  ilistrict  of  Camden  and  Nni-ellan.  He  was  also 
a  friend  of  William  Macleay.  Details  of  their  friendship  arc  given  later.  Sir 
William  Macarthur  was  an  Original  Member  and  the  first  Vice-President  of  our 
Society.  Captain  Arthur  Onslow,  R.N.,  grandson,  on  his  mother's  side,  of 
Alexander  Macleay,  married  the  dangliter  of  .Tames  Macarthur,  of  Camden,  in  1867. 

W.  S.  Macleay  corresponded  with  Baron  von  Mueller,  but  no  letters  are  avail- 
sble.  The  Baron,  in  the  Eucalyptographia,  und(>r  E.  Foflscliiamt,  refers  to  some  re- 


THE  society's  heritage  prom  the  macleats.  623 

marks  by  W.  S.  Macleay,  oh  the  possible  hybridisation  of  Euealypts  by  birds.  These 
must  have  been  coiimmnicated  by  k'tter  to  the  Baron ;  as  I  cannot  iind  any  refer- 
ence to  the  subject  by  W.  S.  Macleay  in  print.  The  remarks  are  quoted,  with 
coumients,  by  Dr.  Woolls,  in  his  "Contribution  to  the  Flora  of  Australia"  (p.  219), 
and  in  his  "Lectures  on  the  Vegetable  Kingdom,"  (p.  05)  .  And  also  by  Mr. 
Maiden  in  his  paper  "On  Hybridisation  in  the  Genus  Eiu-alyptus"'  [Report  of  the 
U\inedin  Meeting  Aust.  Assoc.  Adv.  Science,  .January,  1!)(I4,  )>  298].  Presenta- 
tion-copies of  some  of  the  early  numbers  of  the  "Fragmenta,"'  and  of  the  ''Plants 
of  Victoria,"  duly  inscribed,  are  included  in  our  series  of  memorials  of  W.  S. 
Macleay . 

Di-.,  afterwards  Sir  Charles  Nicholson  was  a  friend  of  all  the  Macleays.  He 
came  to  Sydney  in  1834,  and  practised  medicine.  He  was  elected  Speaker  of 
the  Legislative  Council  on  the  retirement  of  Alexander  Macleay  in  1846.  He 
was  also  I'hancellor  of  the  University  of  Sydney.  One  of  the  extracts  given 
above  relates  how  Dr.  Nicholson,  as  Speaker,  sent  the  skull  of  the  supposed 
Bunyip  to  W.  H.  Macleay.  He  is  also  mentioned  in  Huxley's  letter  to  W.  S. 
Macleay . 

A  very  interesting  memento  of  Dr.  Nicholson,  included  among  the  memorials, 
is  a  letter  dated  only  May  15tli  [probably  1859,  and  written  in  Sydney]  to  W.  S. 
Macleay,  in  which  he  says — "In  speaking  to  you  the  other  day  about  the  Native 
Bee,  I  mentioned  a  conversation  I  had  with  a  Mr.  Lubbock  [when  Dr.  Nicholson 
was  on  a  visit  to  Englanil,  in  tlie  ]>revious  year],  wlio  read  a  ]>aper  at  the  British 
Association  on  some  subject  connected  with  the  economy  of  the  Bee,  which,  I 
believe,  was  regarded  as  one  of  the  most  original  Essays  brought  forward .  I 
send  you  his  pamphlet,  which  pray  keep. 

"I  shall  be  obliged  if  you  can  intimate  to  me  how  1  (■(juld  manage  to  procure 

specimens   illustrative   of  Mr.    Lubbock's   favorite   study If  you   would 

also  give  me  any  infomiation  on  the  points  referred  to  in  the  accompanying  note, 
I  could  send  it  to  him." 

The  accompanying  note  by  John  Lubbock,  afterwards  Lord  Avebury,  was 
written  to  Sir  Charles  Nicholson,  from  London  October  12th,  1858.  At  this  time, 
Lubbock's  home  was  at  High  Elms,  close  to  Down,  where  Charles  Darwin,  whom 
Lubbock  regarded  as  "his  father  in  science,"  resided  from  1842  onwards.  The 
note  is  as  follows — 
•'My  Dear  Sir  Charles, 

"If  I  remember  right  you  told  me  on  that  pleasant  afternoon  we  spent  at 
Cookridge,  that  the  Wild  bee  of  Australia  has  a  sting  without  barbs,  and  that  it 
is  being  exterminated  by  the  Common  Hive  Bee. 

"Since  then,  these  two  facts  struck  me  as  being  very  interesting,  and  I  there- 
fore repeated  tliem  to  Mr.  Darwin,  saying,  at  the  same  time,  tliat  I  was  not  quite 
certain  whether  I  had  understood  you  correctly. 

"Mr.  Darwin  has  asked  [me]  to  write  to  you,  and  enquire  whether  my 
memory  is  correct,  and  if  so  whether  you  would  kindly  allow  him  to  mention  the 
facts,  giving  you  as  his  authority. 

"He  would  also  like  to  know  in  what  districts  especially  tliis  destruction  of 
the  Australian  bee  is  taking  place;  and  whether  it  is  effected  by  the  Hive  bee 
actually  attacking  tlie  Australian  species,  or,  as  Mr.  Darwin  presumes  to  be  the 
ease,  by  the  appropriation  by  the  Hive  Bee  of  so  much  food  that  too  little  is  left 
for  the  Aboriginal  species. 


624  presidext's  address. 

"Mr.  Darwio  would  also  be  very  much  obligetl  if  you  could  send  him  a  few 
specimens  of  the  latter." 

"I  hope  you  will  e.xc-use  the  trouble  I  am  giving  you,  and  believe  me,  dear 
Sir  Charles,  Yours  very  truly,    John  Lubbock." 

W.  S.  Maeleay,  doubtless,  did  his  best  to  answer  these  questions.  He  could 
possibly  have  answered  tiie  first  one.  and  could  have  supplied  specimens  of  native 
bees.  But  the  second  one  was  probably  unanswerable,  for  lack  of  information. 
Hive  bees  arc  said  to  have  been  introduced  at  Sydney,  about  1S22,  and  at  Hathurst 
in  1839  and  1842,  as  mentioned  in  Henniker  Heaton's  "Australian  Dictionary  of 
Dates"  (p.  39).  I  commend  both  Lubbock's  questions  to  the  notice  of  Members, 
as  worthy  of  modern  investigation . 

Sir  Charles  Nicholson  was  a  Trustee  of  the  Australian  Museum  for  some 
years.  Both  he  and  \V.  S.  Maeleay,  together  with  J.  H.  Plunkett.  as  Chair- 
man, were  the  C'ommissionei's  of  National  Education  in  Sydney,  in  1848.  There 
is,  among  the  relics  of  W.  S.  Maeleay,  his  copy  of  the  "Begulations  and  Direc- 
tions to  be  attended  to  in  making  application  to  the  Commissioners  of  National 
Education,  for  and  towards  the  building  of  School  Houses  or  for  the  support  of 
Schools."  These  signed  by  the  three  Commi.ssioners,  as  above,  were  issued,  with 
a  preface,  dated  i\Iay  10th,  1848,  by  the  Colonial  Secretary,  E.   Deas  Thomson. 

Alexander  Walter  Scott  (1800-83),  and  his  accomplished  daughters,  Harriet 
(Mrs.  Cosby  W.  Morgan)  and  Helena  (Mrs.  Edward  Forde),  lived  for  a  number 
of  years  at  Ash  Island,  Hunter  River,  but  removed  to  Sydney  about  1862.  They 
were  the  authors  of  that  most  meritorious  work  "Australian  Tjcpidoptera  and  their 
Transformations,  drawn  from  the  Life  by  Harriet  and  Helena  Scott,  with  De- 
scriptions, General  and  Systematic,  by  A.  W.  Scott,  M.A.,  Ash  Island,  Hunter 
River,  New  South  Wales."  of  which  Vol.  i.,  comprising  Parts  i.-iii.,  was  pub- 
lished in  London  in  1864.  Vol.  ii.,  Parts  i.-iv..  with  an  amended  title,  was  pub- 
lished in  Sydney,  in  1890-93,  by  the  Trustees  of  the  Australian  Museum,  who 
had  purchased  the  unpublished  matter,  after  the  death  of  Mr.  Scott  in  1883.  The 
second  and  last  volume  was  edited  and  re\'ised  by  Arthur  Sidney  OUiff  and 
Helena  Forde. 

The  Seotts  were  friends  and  correspondents  of  W.  S.  Maeleay.  and  there 
are  several  acknowledgments  of  advice  and  help,  in  regard  to  literature,  to  him 
in  the  first  volume.  He  was  gi-eatly  interested  in  their  work,  not  only  for  its 
intrinsic  merit,  but  because  they  were  continuing  from  a  more  modern  standpoint 
the  investigations  begun  by  J.  W.  Lewin,  in  his  "Lepidopterous  Insects  of  New 
South  Wales"  (1805),  and  also  because  they  were  illustrating  the  life-histories 
of  some  of  the  Lepidoptera  described  by  him,  in  1827.  from  Captain  P.  P.  King's 
Australian  collection . 

The  only  original,  unpublislied  letter  written  by  W.  S.  Maeleay.  that  I  have 
seen,  is  one  to  Miss  Scott,  dated  .July  23rd,  1861 .  For  this.  I  am  indebted  to 
the  thought  fulness  and  kindness  of  the  late  Mrs.  M.  A.  .7.  Shaw,  cousin  and 
residuary  legatee  of  the  late  Mrs.  Forde.  The  purport  of  this  letter,  of  four 
closely  written  pages,  is  explained  by  the  concluding  words,  "T  have  now  told  you 
pretty  well  all  T  know  about  Charagia." 

Up  to  this  time,  four  species  of  the  genus  h.ad  been  described  and  re-described 
by  Lewin  and  various  European  entomologists,  but  the  synon^Tiiy  was  involved 
and  complicated.        Miss  Scott  had  obtained  a  firth  species,  which  she  thought  wa-s 


THE  society's   HL'UITAGE  PROM    THE   MACLEAYS.  625 

riew,  but  bad  not  tlie  necessary  literature  at  band  to  enable  ber  to  settle  tbe  point. 
She,  therefore,  appealed  to  W.  S.  Maeleay  tor  his  advice,  and  tbe  letter  is  bis 
reply.  Alter  explaining  the  characteristics  and  synonymy  of  tbe  four  known 
species,  the  letter  proceeds — "You  have  g-ot  a  new  and  fifth  species  under  tbe 
name  of  C.  Bamsayi  Kamsay  Mss .  ;  and  my  cousin  has  given  me  the  ?  of  another 
quite  new  and  sixth  species  from  King  George's  Sound,  under  the  name  of  Charagia 
scripta,  Maeleay  Junr.  Mss.  It  has  the  silver  spots  like  letters,  and  small  instead 
of  being  large  and  round  as  in  C.  Ramsayi.  My  cousin  will,  I  am  sure,  be  happy 
to  show  you  d".?.  larva  and  chrysalis  of  this  K.  G.  Sound  species.  He  has  the 
larvae  now  alive  in  the  roots  of  a  Leptospermum." 

Mr.  Scott  afterwards  contributed  a  monograph  "On  tbe  genus  Charagia  of 
Walker,"  at  a  Meeting  of  the  Entomological  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  lield 
on  September  2nd,  1807,  in  which  be  described  four  new  species,  including  C. 
Bamsayii  and  C.  scripta  [Trans.,  Vol.  ii.,  p.  25]  . 

Tbe  letter  continues — "The  larvae  of  all  the  species  of  Charagia,  when  they 
die  in  tbe  earth,  give  forth  different  species  of  a  fungus  called  Sphaeria.  At 
least  tbe  Sphaeria  Eoherti  [Sobertsii]  of  Hooker,  a  well-known  species  which 
proceeds  from  C.  virescens,  is  altogether  different  from  the  Sphaeria  Atkinsonae 
Maeleay  Mss.  of  this  Colony.  Indeed,  I  know  two  species  of  Sphaeria  that  grow 
from  the  Charagiae  of  this  Colony,  and  a  Lady-friend  of  mine,  who  is  a  capital 
botanist,  though  no  entomologist,  is  now  preparing  a  work  on  tbe  New  Holland 
species  of  Sphaeria,  which  she  is  studying  in  the  country.  Dr.  Bennett  is  quite 
wrong,  as  I  told  him,  in  thinking  that  it  was  tbe  Sphaeria  Eoherti  [i.e.,  tbe  New 
Zealand  species]  which  you  found  at  Ash  Island.  It  nmst  have  been  some  other 
species,  and  you  had  better  let  me  see  it." 

Tbe  belief  here  expressed  that  the  lignivorous  larvae  of  the  species  of  Charagia, 
which  live  in  the  tunnels  excavated  by  them  in  the  stems  and  branch&s  of  Banksia 
and  other  shrubs,  were  victimised  by  tbe  fungus  Sphaeria  or  Cordi/ceps,  though 
generally  accepted  at  that  time,  was  incorrect.  Mr.  Scott,  in  1864,  showed  that 
it  was  the  root-feeding  caterpillars  of  species  of  Pielus,  etc.,  wliicb  pass  some  time 
underground,  that  serve  as  the  hosts  of  Cordyceps.  This  was  pointed  out  in  tbe 
late  Mr.  A.  S.  Olliff's  paper  on  "Australian  Entomophytes,"  in  the  Agricultural 
Gazette  of  N.S.  Wales  for  June,  1895.  One  of  the  two  species  from  Mount 
Tomah,  in  which  Miss  Atkinson  was  interested,  is  therein  described  as  Cordyceps 
Selkirki,  sp.n.,  the  other  being  identified  as  C.  Gunnii  Berkeley.  But  tbe  host 
of  tbe  species  from  Asli  Island,  described  as  C.  scottiamts.  was  shown  to  be  the 
larva  of  a  Lucanid  beetle. 

The  memorials  of  W.  S.  Maeleay  include  fourteen  beautiful  water-colour 
drawings — seven  of  Ash  Island  spiders,  six  of  Lepidoptera,  and  one  of  tbe  Vege- 
table Caterpillar  found  by  them;  and  one  pen-and-ink  sketch  of  two  species  of 
Ticks.  The  drawings  were  all  done  by  one  or  other  of  the  sisters,  most  of  them 
by  Helena.  They  are  nearly  all  signed,  or  initialled,  and  dated,  and  were  done 
during  the  period  1852-64.  With  the  exception  of  two  dated  Sydney,  1864,  the 
others  were  done  at  Ash  Island.  These  were  sent  from  time  to  time  to  W.  S. 
Maeleay  by  tbe  Misses  Scott.  They  were  carefully  treasured,  and  are  as  fresh 
almost  as  when  they  were  done.  The  letter  quoted  above  is,  unfortunately,  the 
only  one  that  has  been  preserved. 

I  bad  the  pleasure  of  knowing  Mrs.  Forde  during  the  later  years  of  her  life. 


626  president's  address. 

She  was  a  vt-ry  gifted  woman,  keenly  interested  in  seienee.  and  with  a  memory 
well  stored  with  reeolleetions  of  old  times.  1  regret  now  that  I  did  not  ask  her 
to  give  me  some  notes  of  her  reminiscences  of  W.  S.  Macleay.  She  told  me 
that,  when  living  at  Ash  Island,  her  sister  and  she  used  to  come  to  Sydney  for 
periodical  holidays;  that  W.  S.  Macleay  used  always  to  invite  them  to  Elizabeth 
Bay;  and,  because  they  were  interested  in  entomology,  that  he  used  to  take  delight 
in  showing  them  the  most  attractive  and  beautiful  specimens  in  his  cabinets. 

We  have  portraits  of  Mr.  Scott,  and  of  Mrs.  Forde,  but  I  have  not  been 
able  to  get  one  of  Mrs .  Morgan .  Mrs .  Forde,  the  last  of  the  family,  died  on 
November  24th,  1910,  at  Parramatta,  at  the  advanced  age  of  nearly  fourscore.  An 
obituary  notice  of  her,  with  references  to  her  sister,  will  be  found  in  the  Society's 
Proceedings,  1911,  p.  9. 

Mr.  Justice  Therry  (1800-74),  of  the  Supreme  Court  of  New  South  Wales 
(1846-59),  author  of  "Reminiscences  of  Thirty  Years'  Residence  in  New  South 
Wales  and  Victoria"  (1863),  thus  refers  to  W.  S.  Macleay,  in  his  book  (p.  35). 
— On  a  slope  at  the  ea.stern  [?  southern]  side  of  a  very  snug  little  bay,  with  a 
lawn  of  English  meadow-like  verdure  in  front,  stands  the  mansion  of  Mr.  W. 
fS.]  McLeay — a  name  known  to  Europe  for  the  scientific  acquirements  of  its 
occupant.  As  a  botanist  and  entomologist,  he  holds  a  place  in  the  foremost  rank. 
There,  to  the  friends  who  visit  him  he  pours  forth,  with  a  memory  quite  astonish- 
ing, the  stores  of  a  varied  and  extensive  knowledge  from  his  encyclopaedic  mind. 
Those  who  have  the  good  fortune  to  know  this  accomplislied  sehnlar,  will,  like  the 
writer,  regard  their  visits  to  Elizabeth  Bay  amongst  the  most  agreeable  reminis- 
cences of  New  Soutli  Wales."  Some  appreciative  references  to  Alexander  Macleay 
are  also  contained  in  this  book. 

Among  the  memorials  of  W.  S.  Macleay  there  is  a  pampldet,  inscribed  by 
the  author,  entitled  "Letter  to  the  Right  Hon.  W.  E.  Gladstone.  M.P.;  with  the 
Address  to  the  Jury  by  His  Honor  Mr.  Justice  Therry  at  the  Opening  of  the 
First  Circuit  Court,  at  Brisbane,  Moreton  Bay,  May  13,  1850;  and  his  Speech  at 
the  Dinner  given  to  the  Judge  and  Members  of  the  Circuit,  by  the  Magistracy 
and  Gentry  of  the  District"   (8vo,  Sydney,  1850). 

Dr.  John  Vaughan  Thompson  (1779-1847)  was  appointed  De)mty  Inspector- 
General  of  Hospitals  in  Sydney  on  April  1st,  1836.  Tlis  naniu  appears  among 
those  of  the  gentlemen  appointed  "A  Committee  of  Supeiintendence  of  tlie  Aus- 
tralian Museum  and  Botanical  Garden,"  on  June  14th,  1836,  as  printed  in  the 
Sydney  Gazette.  Dr.  Tiiompson  was  a  distinguished  zoologist.  He  was  an  army 
surgeon,  who,  when  stationed  at  Cork,  in  1830,  took  to  the  study  of  marine  In- 
vertebrata  by  the  aid  of  the  microscope.  "Thompson  made  three  great  discoveries, 
which  seem  to  have  fallen  in  his  way  in  the  most  natural  and  sini))le  manner,  but 
must  be  regarded  really  as  the  outcome  of  extraordinary  genius.  He  showed  that 
the  organisms  like  Flustra  are  not  hydroid  Polyps,  but  of  a  more  complex  struc- 
ture resembling  Molluscs,  and  he  gave  them  the  name  'Polyzoa.'  He  discovered 
the  Pfntaerivua  e-urnfiaeus,  and  showed  that  it  was  the  larval  form  of  the  Feather- 
Star  Antedon  (Comatula) .  He  upset  Cuvier's  retention  of  the  Cirripedes  among 
Mollusca,  and  his  subsequent  treatment  of  them  as  an  isolated  class,  by  showing 
that  they  begin  life  as  free-swimming  Crusta<-ea  identical  with  the  young  forms 
of  other  Crustacea."  [Ray  Lankcst^r,  "The  History  and  Scope  of  Zoology,  p. 
335,  in  his  volume  entitled  "The  Advancement  of  Science:  Occasional  Essays  and 
Addresses,"  London.  1890]. 


TUE  society's  herita(1e  from  the  macleats.  027 

The  results  of  the  three  researches  mentioned,  were  puhlished  separately  hy 
the  author,  with  the  title  "Zoological  Researches  and  Illustrations;  or  Natural 
History  of  nondescript  or  imperfectly  known  Animals,  in  a  series  of  Memoirs, 
illustrated  hy  numerous  figures."  Five  Memoirs  at  least  were  published  at  Cork 
about  1830  or  later.  The  memorials  of  W.  S.  Macleay  include  four  of  these, 
the  first  one  bearing  the  inscription  "W.  S.  McLeay,  Esquire,  with  the  Author's 
Compliments."     The  others  are  without  covers. 

W.  S.  Macleay  appreciatively  refers  at  length  to  Thompson's  observations  on 
Ci-ustaceous  animals  in  the  second  portion  of  the  "Annulosa  of  South  Africa,"  "On 
the  Hrachyurous  Decapod  Crustacea,"'  p.  53.  In  a  footnote  he  says — "The  credit 
(if  confirming  Thompson's  observatu'ns  belongs  to  my  friend  Captain  Ducane  [Du 
Cane],  R.N.,  who  has  made  at  Southampton  most  interesting  observations  on  the 
Metamorphosis  of  Crustacea,  which  1  trust  he  will  soon  give  to  the  Public"  [as  he 
did,  in  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  1839].  Among  the  memorials  of  AV.  S.  Macleay, 
there  is  a  sketch  of  two  larval  shrimps,  signed  "C.D.C.,  Southampton,  April  30th, 
1838,"  sent  to  him  by  his  friend. 

After  Dr.  J.  V.  Thompson  came  to  Sydney  in  183G.  there  is  no  record  of  any 
interest,  on  his  part,  in  the  Port  Jrckson  fauna.  He  was  the  author  of  numerous 
papers,  of  which  nineteen,  not  including  the  "Zoological  Researches,"  are  listed 
in  the  Royal  Society's  Catalogue.  The  last  four  were  apparently  written  in 
Sydney,  but  published  in  India,  Agric.  Soc.  Journal,  Vols.  i..  ii.,  iv.,  184'2-45. 
These  relate  to  the  culture  of  cotton  and  sugar-cane.  The  Journal  containing 
them  is  not  to  be  found  in  Sydney  libraries. 

Dr.  Thompson  was  known  to  Alexander  Macleay  as  a  contributor  of  papers 
to,  and  a  Fellow  of,  the  Linnean  Society  as  early  as  1808.  He  was  also  the  donor 
of  seeds  of  Cotton  to  A.  Macleay  in  Sydney,  as  shown  in  the  Seed-book. 
Though  often  mentioned  in  text-books,  I  have  never  seen  any  reference  to  Dr. 
Thompson  as  a  distinguished  zoologist  resident  in  Sydney,  in  any  Australian 
pul)licatiou .  He  died  in  Sydney  in  1847.  The  following  brief  obituary  notice 
appeared  in  the  Sydney  Morning  Herald  on  January  2(5th. — "At  his  residence, 
Liverpool  Street,  Sydney,  on  Thursday  21st  instant,  John  Vaughan  Thompson, 
Es<i.,  for  several  years  Deputy  Inspector  General  of  Hospitals  in  New  South 
Wales  [1836-44],  in  his  63rd  year,  after  long-continued  illness — distinguished  for 
his  acciuirements  in  zoology  and  botany — possessing  talents  of  no  conmion  order — 
and  estimable  in  evei-y  relative  duty  of  life — he  is  deeply  lamented  by  his  afflicted 
family,  to  whom  his  loss  is  irreparable." 

Dr.  J.  F.  Watson,  in  his  "History  of  the  Sydney  Hospital,  1811-1911"  says 
that  Dr.  Thompson  was  an  unsuccessful  administrator,  and  that  he  was  sui)er- 
seded  in  1844.  This  need  not  obscure  his  fine  recoi-d  of  work,  as  given  in  the 
National  Dictionary  of  Biogi-aphy. 

The  Rev.  Dr.  Woolls  (1814-1893),  referred  to  as  Mr.  Woolls  in  the  Rev. 
K.  L.  King's  letter  to  W.  S.  Macleay,  in  1859,  had  not  been  ordained  to  Holy 
Orders  at  that  time.  The  introduction  to  W.  S.  Macleay,  suggested  by  Mr. 
King,  was  duly  made,  and  thereafter  they  fre(|uently  corresponded,  and  Dr. 
Woolls  paid  visits.  There  are  several  references  to  W.  S.  Macleay  in  Dr. 
Woolls'  two  book^.  One  of  them  records  the  fact  that  W.  S.  Macleay  had 
collected  Dendrobium  cucumerimim  near  Brownlow  Hill,  growing  on  the  swamp- 
oak;  and  another  that  he  believed  that   Corijsauthe^  hicalcarata  had  been  found 


628  president's  address. 

near  Sydney  tliougli  Dr.  Woolls  bail  not  succeeded  in  finding  it.  It  was  also 
through  Dr.  Woolls,  probably,  that  Miss  Atkinson  came  to  know  W.  S.  Macleay. 
There  are  many  references  to  her  in  Dr.  Woolls'  two  books;  as  there  are  also  to 
the  Misses  Seott,  as  well  as  a  chapter  in  one  of  them  on  "The  Botany  of  Ash 
Island." 

The  writer  of  the  Obituary  Notice  of  Mr.  W.  S.  Macleay,  which  appeared 
in  the  Sydney  Morning  Herald,  probably  the  Rev.  W.  B.  Clarke,  says  that  he 
was  the  life  and  soul  of  the  Museum.  But  I  have  no  information  about  his  a.sso- 
ciation  with  the  Australian  Museum,  which  will  enable  me  to  add  to  what  is 
given  in  Etheridge's  article.  "The  Australian  Museum :  Fragments  of  its  Early 
History,"  namely — "Eor  twenty  years  or  more,  that  eminent  Natiu-alist,  William 
Sharp  Macleay,  gave  his  best  energies  to  the  welfare  of  the  Institution.  Com- 
mitteeman from  1841  to  1853.  Elective  Trustee  from  1853  onwards,  ill-health 
compelled  him  to  resign  in  January  1862.  The  Board  presented  him  with  an  ad- 
dress," a  copy  of  which  is  given  (Records  of  the  Australian  Museum.  Vol.  .xii., 
No.  12,  p.  394,  1919].  But  we  have  some  interesting  relics  of  his  connection 
with  the  Museum.  These  include  his  father's  copy  of  the  now  rare  "Catalogue 
of  the  Specimens  of  Natural  History  and  Miscellaneous  Curiosities  deposited  in 
the  Australian  Museum."  compiled  by  the  Secretary,  George  Bennett,  F.L.S., 
and  published  in  1837.  This  was  apparently  an  official  copy,  as  it  is  inscribed, 
not  in  his  own  handwriting,  "Alex.  McLeay,  Es(|."  It  was  subsequently  corrected, 
supplemented,  and  brought  up  to  date,  in  so  far  as  it  relates  to  mammals  and 
birds,  by  W.  S.  Macleay,  the  alterations  and  additions  being  in  his  handwriting. 
Charles  Coxen,  of  Yarrundi,  donor  of  many  specimens  recorded  in  the  Catalogue, 
wa.s  .John  Gould's  brother-in-law.  Other  relics  are  three  letters  about  scientific 
or  Museum  matters  from  three  successive  officei-s,  S .  R .  Pittard,  G .  F .  Angas, 
and  G.  Krefft,  the  first  and  last  Curators,  and  the  second.  Secretary  for  some  time. 

Of  W.  S.  Maeleay's  declining  days,  Lowe's  biographer  says — "In  1865 
occurred  two  events  which,  although  hardly  unexpected,  were  in  their  different 
ways  and  degrees  a  source  of  sorrow  to  Robert  Lowe.  These  were  the  death  of 
his  much-valued  Australian  friend.  William  Sbarpe  Macleay.  and  tliat  of  his  great 
political  chief,  Lord  Palmerston.  Lowe  had  kept  up  an  intermittent  corrcsjtond- 
euce  with  Macleay  ever  since  he  left  Sydney,  but  latterly  it  had  become  painfully 
evident  to  him  that  the  quaint  old  philosopher  of  Elizabeth  Bay  was  fast  de- 
clining. He  had.  indeed,  received  warning  from  others  tliat  the  death  of  liis  old 
friend  was  impending"   [Vol.   ii..  p.   236]. 

W.  S.  Maeleay's  last  letter  to  Robert  Lowe  wa.s  dated,  Elizabeth  Bay.  21 
September,  1864.  In  this,  the  writer  said,  concerning  himself — "As  to  my  health, 
it  remains  in  statu  quo;  although  I  think  that  I  am  getting  on  the  whole  weaker. 
At  times  I  am  quite  prostrated,  and  at  times  I  am  again  more  lively.  I  never 
was  what  you  would  call  a  decided  beauty:  but  if  you  -vreve  to  see  me  now,  you 
would  not  know  the  ugly,  lanky,  thin,  scraggy,  toothless  individual  who  is  now 
writing  to  assure  you  that  the  immaterial  part  of  him  remains  still  the  same, 
and  that  it  has  no  friends  on  earth  to  which  it  is  more  attached  than  to  you 
and  your  sensible,  kind  lady.  So  I  suljscribe  myself  ever.  Your  most  affectionate 
friend,  W.   S.  Macleay."     [Vol.  ii..  p.  234] 

Death  ended  his  sufferings  on  .Tanuary  26tb.  1S65.  in  his  seventy-third  year. 
An  obituary  notice  appeared   in  the   Sydney   Morning  Herald   of  30th   January. 


THE  society's  heritage  from  the  macleays.  629 

The  Rev.  R.  L.  Kang,  in  his  Presidential  Address  to  the  Entoraologieal  Society 
of  New  South  Wales,  on  January  30th,  1865  [Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  N.S.  Wales,  Vol. 
i.,  p.  xliii.]  quotes  extensively  from  the  notice  referred  to,  and  also  supplements 
it.  He  refers  to  it  as  "from  the  pen  of  an  old  friend" — probably  the  Rev.  W. 
B.   Clarke,  written  perhaps,  after  consultation  with  William  Macleay. 

The  cenotaph  to  his  memory  in  St.  .James'  Church,  is  above  that  in  memory 
of  his  sister,  Mi's.  Harrington;  but  rather  too  high  for  close  scrutiny.  Below  a 
medallion-portrait,  head  and  shoulders,  side-view,  is  the  tersely  appropriate  in- 
scription : — 

GULIELMUS  SH.\RP  MACLEAY. 

NATURAE    INDAGATOR    INDEFESSUS 

IXTERPBESQUE    EBUDITDS    ACUTISSIMUSQUE. 

VIXIT  ANNOS  LXSII.      DECESSIT  DIE  XXVI. 

JAN.    A.D.    ilDCCC'LXV. 

It  is,  I  think,  a  reasonable  conclusion  that  the  marble  portion,  with  the  por- 
trait and  inscription,  was  prepared  in  England,  brought  out  by  George  Macleay, 
and  its  erection  arranged  for  while  he  was  revisiting  Australia  between  18G9  and 
1874.  In  that  ease,  it  is  also  a  reasonable  supposition  that  the  inscription  was 
drawn  up  by  Robert  Lowe  at  George  Macleay's  request. 

By  several  writers,  W.  S.  Macleay,  in  his  later  years  in  Australia,  is  spoken 
of  as  a  recluse.  An  explanation  of  what  this  was  intended  to  mean,  is  not  hard 
to  find.  He  was  naturally  reserved;  and  his  life  in  Cuba  must  have  been  rather 
a  lonely  one,  as  he  could  have  had  but  few  English  friends,  w'ho  shared  his  tastes 
and  interests.  This  would  lead  to  habits  of  self-dependence,  and  to  his  finding 
recreation  and  solace  in  his  books,  in  his  scientific  work  and  collecting,  and  in  his 
garden  and  culture  of  orchids.  The  tropical  climate  prejudicially  affected  his 
health,  and  seems  to  have  prematurely  aged  him,  as  is  evident  from  the  remarks 
of  Dr.  Stimpson  and  Dr.  Scherzer,  quoted  above.  Long  before  the  onset  of 
diabetes,  which  caused  his  last  lingering  illness,  he  suffered  from  gout;  and,  no 
doubt,  like  Adam  Sedgwick,  the  geologist,  and  other  sufferers  from  this  complaint, 
he  found  that  gout  was  not  conducive  to  amiability.  But  his  friendship  with 
Lowe,  Huxley,  and  others  shows  that  he  was  no  misanthrope  or  hermit,  when  the 
environment  was  congenial.  There  is  abundant  evidence  also  that,  as  some  have 
testified,  he  was  always  ready  to  advise  and  help  those  who  were  genuinely  in- 
terested in  science,  and  sought  his  assistance  in  a  proper  manner.  W.  S.  Macleay 
did  not  marry. 

W.  S.  Macleay's  collection,  as  he  brought  it  to  Australia  in  1839,  comprised 
the  specimens  left  with  him  by  his  father  for  study;  what  he  may  have  collected 
or  obtained  by  exchange  or  gift  in  Cuba,  or  at  Philadelphia  and  the  other  ports 
of  call  on  the  outward  and  homeward  voyages ;  and  what  he  may  have  acquired 
in  England,  after  his  return,  by  exchange  or  otherwise;  and  especially  Verreaux's 
South  African  collection  of  insects,  which  he  purchased.  Details  of  what  he 
added  to  his  collection  after  he  came  to  Australia  are  not  available.  Sir  William 
Macleay,  in  writing  to  the  Chancellor  of  the  University  of  Sydney  in  1874,  said 
that  the  joint  collections  of  A.  and  W.  S.  Macleay  amounted  to  480  drawers, 
and  his  own  to  320  drawers.  But  in  addition  to  the  specimens  in  the  cabinets, 
there  were  a  number  of  dry  specimens  on  shelves.      These  are  referred  to  later. 


630  presidknt's  address. 

Sir  George  Macleay,  K.C.M.G..  F.L.S. 

Third  sou  of  Alexaiulei'  Macleay,  born  in  London  in  1809,  edueatod  at  West- 
minster, resident  in  Australia  lor  more  tlian  thirty  years,  removed  to  England  in 
1859,  died  at  Mentone,  June  26th,  1891. 

George  Macleay  came  out  to  Australia  with  his  father,  or  soon  after,  but  I 
am  not  sure  which.  He  and  his  younger  brother  James  were  in  charge  of  their 
father's  property  at  Brownlow  Hill  and  the  farm  at  Glendarewel  attached  to  it, 
near  Camden,  in  1829.  The  first  record  of  George  in  print  is  a.s  the  coniiianion 
of  Captain  Charles  Start  on  his  "Expedition  down  the  Morumbidgee  and  Murray 
Rivers  in  1829-30."  The  details  of  this  adventurous  undertaking  were  given  in  an 
"Official  Keport  to  the  Colonial  Government,"  which  appeared  in  the  Sydney 
Gazette  in  May  1830;  and  more  fully  in  Sturt's  Narrative  of  the  Expedition, 
published  in  London  in  1833,  second  edition  1834,  as  the  second  volume  of  the 
work  entitled  "Two  Expeditions  into  the  Interior  of  Southern  Australia,  1828-31." 
The  first  volume  gives  the  account  of  the  expedition  which  resulted  in  the  dis- 
covery of  the  Darling,  in  1829. 

Sturt,  in  his  Narrative,  speaks  in  the  highest  terms  of  Macleay.  He  men- 
tions "the  generous  feelings  that  had  prompted  McLeay  to  participate  in  every 
danger  with  me" ;  and,  "it  was  sufficiently  evident  to  me,  that  the  men  were  too 
much  exhausted  to  perform  the  task  tliat  was  before  them  without  ii-ssistance  [on 
the  return-journey  against  the  stream],  and  that  it  would  be  necessary  both  for 
McLeay  and  myself  to  take  our  share  of  labour  at  the  oars.  Tiie  cheerfulness 
and  satisfaction  that  my  young  friend  evinced  at  the  opportunity  that  w;is  thus 
afforded  iiim  of  making  himself  useful,  and  of  relieving  those  under  him  from 
some  portion  of  their  toil,  at  the  same  time  that  they  increa.sed  my  sincere  esteem 
for  him,  were  nothing  more  than  what  I  expected  from  one  who  had  endeavoured 
by  every  means  in  his  power  to  contribute  to  the  success  of  that  enterprise  upon 
which  he  had  embarked." 

Their  association  during  this  adventurous  excursion  was  tlie  beginning  of  a 
warm  and  lifelong  friendship .  Sturt's  home  for  some  years  was  at  Bargo  Brush, 
and  afterwards  at  Varroville  near  Liverpool,  so  that  their  neighbourly  intercourse 
continued.  From  1839-53  he  resided  in  South  Australia,  and  then  returned  to 
England,  where  he  and  Macleay  renewed  their  friendship. 

Mrs.  Napier  George  Sturt's  biography  of  her  father-in-law,  "Life  of  Charles 
Sturt,  sometime  Captain  39tii  Regiment,  .and  Australian  Explorer"  (London, 
1899)  gives  numerous  extracts  from  Sturt's  lettei-s  to  Macleay.  The  last  of  them, 
dated  June  8th,  1869,  was  a  sympathetic  reply  to  one  from  his  friend,  announcing 
the  serious  illness  of  his  wife,  who  suffered  from  bronchitic  trouble,  and  that 
alarming  symptoms  had  supervened.  Sturt  died  peacefully,  while  he  was  alone, 
eight  days  Inter,  on  ,Iune  16th.      Mrs.   George  Macleay  died  shortly  after. 

Another  early  notice  of  George  Macleay  and  his  brother  James,  is  given  in  a 
recently  j)ublished,  most  interesting  book,  "Some  Early  Records  of  the  Macarthurs 
of  Camden.  Edited  by  Sibella  Macarthur  Onslow'"  (1914).  In  a  letter  dated 
Camden,  December  27th,  1830,  written  by  Mrs.  John  Macarthur  to  her  eldest 
son,  Edward,  then  in  England,  she  narrates  bow  two  expected  visitors,  friends  of 
her  son,  lost  their  way,  were  out  in  the  bush  all  night  in  pouring  rain,  and — 
"in  the  morning  they  made  their  way  to  the  al)ode  of  the  young  McLeays  [Brown- 
low  Hill] — apropos,  these  young  McLeays  are  very  agreeable  neighbours  of  Wil- 


THE  society's  heritage  from  the  macleays.  631 

liain — they  come  here  frequently — having  beeu  well  educated  and  really  are  well 
conducted — lively  and  conversant,  with  the  manners  of  the  times,  their  society 
tends  to  enliven  the  atmosphere  around  Camden,  where  the  topics  of  tlie  day  are 
brought  forward  in  an  agreeable  mannei' — from  their  father's  situation  as  Colonial 
Secretary  and  the  correspondence  witli  their  sisters — they  hear  early  of  all  Eng- 
lish intelligence''  (p.  46"2)  .  Reference  is  also  made  to  Sturt's  expedition,  the 
members  of  which  had  returned  to  Sydney  a  few  months  before  the  letter  was 
written.  Slie  also  adds  that  "the  younger  brother,  James,  is  going  an  interesting 
voyage — The  Comet  a  King's  ship  sails  from  here  to  Pitcairn  Island  for  the  pur- 
pose of  removing  the  Islanders  to  Otaheite — Mr.  .James  McLeay  and  Capt.  Wal- 
pole  of  the  39th  go  in  the  Comet  as  a  little  voyage  of  curiosity ' and  amusement. 

If  .James  went  in  the  "Comet,"  he  returned  again  to  Sydney,  because  he  was 
still  at  Brownlow  Hill  at  the  time  of  Mr.  Backhouse's  visit  in  1836,  as  already 
mentioned.  He  did  eventually  go  back  to  England,  entered  the  Foreign  Office, 
was  Secretary  and  Registrar  to  the  mixed  British  and  Portuguese  Commission 
for  the  Suppression  of  the  Slave  Trade  at  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope  (1843-58), 
and  died  in  London  in  October,  189"2,  aged  81  years. 

George  Macleaywas  about  eleven  years  older  than  his  cousin  William.  They 
were  always  great  friends,  and  corresponded  as  long  as  both  were  alive  and  well. 
They  were  elected  to  Parliament  in  the  same  year,  1854,  George  a.s  Member  for 
the  Murrumbidgee  in  the  Legislative  Council,  afterwards  the  Legislative  Assembly, 
when  a  Constitution  was  granted  in  1855;  and  \Villiam  as  the  Member  for  the 
Laclilan  and  Lower  Darling.  After  George's  removal  to  England  in  1859, 
William  succeeded  him  as  Member  for  the  Murrumbidgee. 

The  list  of  gentlemen  appointed  "A  Committee  of  Superintendence  of  the 
Australian  Museum  and  Botanical  Garden,"  dated  June  14th,  1830,  and  pub- 
lished in  the  Government  Gazette,  183(),  includes  the  name  of  George  Maeleay. 
Later  on,  he  became  an  Elective  Trustee.  Tliere  are  a  number  of  references  to 
him,  in  that  capacity,  in  Etheridge's  History.  In  February,  1859,  he  resigned, 
in  consequence  of  his  removal  to  England.  "On  March  3rd,  1859,  a  resolution 
was  passed  commissioning  George  Maeleay,  in  conjunction  with  Professor  Owen, 
to  select  a  suitable  person,"  as  Curator,  in  succession  to  Mr.  Wall,  who  had  re- 
tired. This  resulted  in  the  appointment  of  Mr.  S.  R.  Pittard,  M.R.C.S., 
who  took  up  his  duties  in  February,  18G0. 

George  Maeleay.  being  then  young,  was  one  of  the  few  Members  of  the 
Committee  of  1836,  who  was  not  a  Fellow  of  the  Linnean  Society.  It  is  very 
interesting  to  note  how  punctilious  Alexander  Maeleay  was  in  enlisting  the  co- 
operation of  all  the  available  old  "Linneans" — to  use  an  expression  once  em- 
ployed by  Mr.  Bentham — in  carrying  out  scientific  enterprises. 

He  was  elected  F.L.S.  on  January  12th,  1860,  soon  after  his  return  to  Eng- 
land; and  a  Member  of  the  Council  on  May  24th,  1864.  His  gift  of  his  father's 
portrait  of  Kirby,  and  his  MSS.,  and  correspondence,  in  1886;  and  his  bequest  of 
the  bust  of  W.    S.   Maeleay  to  the  Society,  have  already  been  mentioned. 

George  Macleay's  permanent  home  was  in  the  country  at  Brownlow  Hill, 
near  Camden,  the  latter  40  miles  from  Sydney,  on  what  was  then  tlie  Great  South 
Road.  He  was  specially  interested  ini  farming  and  horticulture.  Though  not  a 
working  zoologist,  he  had  a  general  interest  in  zoology,  whfch  was  enlivened  and 
fostered  by  his  father's  and  brother's  influence,  the  opportunities  afforded  by  a 


632  president's  address. 

country-life  for  observing  and  eolleeting,  and  his  connection  with  the  Australian 
Museum  as  a  Trustee  from  1836-59.  He  collected  specimens  on  Sturt's  Expedi- 
tion; he  also  added  to  his  father's  collection,  though  there  is  only  one  quite  in- 
cidental record  of  it. 

Sturt  says  in  his  Narrative  of  the  Expedition — "McLeay,  who  was  always  in- 
defatigable in  his  pursuit  after  subjects  of  natural  history,  shot  a  cockatoo,  a 
new  species,  hereabouts"  (p.  6'2) .  He  says  also  that — "1  have  already  mentioned 
that  shortly  after  we  first  entered  the  !\Iurray.  liocks  of  a  new  paroquet  passed 

over  our  heads They  always  kept  too  high  to  be  fired  at,  but  on  our 

return,  hereabouts,  we  succeeded  in  killing  one.  It  made  a  good  addition  to  our 
scanty  stock  of  subjects  of  natural  history.  It  is  impossible  to  conceive  how 
few  of  the  feathered  tribe  frequent  these  distant  and  lonely  regions.  The  com- 
mon white  cockatoo  is  the  most  numerous,  and  there  are  also  a  few  pigeons;  but 
other  birds  descend  only  for  water,  and  are  soon  again  upon  the  wing.  Our 
botanical  specimens  were  as  scanty  as  our  zoological,  indeed  the  expedition  may, 
as  regards  lliese  two  particulars,  almost  be  said  to  have  been  unproductive"  (p. 
188). 

This  report  is  not  surprising.  The  journey  of  1700  miles  in  a  whale-boat 
was  twice  as  long  as  was  expected,  by  reason  of  the  failure  of  the  arrangements 
for  the  return  of  the  party  by  sea.  There  was  a  shortage  of  provisions,  rowing 
against  the  stream  was  very  laborious  in  the  weakened  condition  of  the  men,  and 
a  crowded  boat  did  not  offer  satisfactory  room  for  the  stowage  of  specimens. 

The  only  reference  to  George  Macleay's  collecting  for  his  father,  that  I  have 
seen,  is  to  be  found  in  the  "Annulosa  of  South  Africa"  (p.  75) .  W.  S.  Macleay 
says,  of  Arthroptenis  MacLeaii  Don. — "The  only  known  specimen  of  this  species 
was  purchased  by  my  father  at  the  sale  of  Mr.  Francillon's  museum.  None  of 
the  authors  who  have  written  on  the  species  ever  saw  it,  except  Donovan,  who 
was  its  first  describer  in  his  work  on  the  "Insects  of  New  Holland."  There  is 
another  species  of  Arthropteni.'i,  which  T  have  seen  in  the  valuable  collection  of 

my   friend,   Mr.    John    Curtis T    am    ignorant   which    of   these   two   my 

brother,  Mr.  George  MacLeay  has  lately  found,  or  whether  his  discovery  may 
not  prove,  on  comparison,  to  be  still  a  third  species.  But  I  learn,  by  a  letter 
from  my  father,  that  my  brother,  'in  one  of  his  late  excursions  into  the  interior 
of  New  South  Wales,  discovered  several  specimens  of  •Cerapterus  MacLeaii' 
in  the  nests  of  ants,  and,  moreover,  remarked,  tliat  when  alive  they  had  the  power 
of  exploding,  after  the  manner  of  Brachini.'  " 

George  Macleay  at  one  time  had  a  station  on  the  Murrumbidgee .  He  may 
have  collected  the  specimens  mentioned  above  in  visiting  this  locality.  He 
would  have  had  no  trouble  in  making  a  good  collection  in  the  Camden  district. 
But  insect-collecting  is  not  mentioned  in  Sturt's  Narrative. 

Sir  William  Denison  and  members  of  his  family  paid  three  visits  to  Brown- 
low  Hill  in  1855,  1856,  and  1857.     I  liave  already  referred  to  one  of  these. 

George  Macleay  revisited  Australia  for  a  time  after  the  death  of  Iiis  brother, 
W.  S.  Macleay,  but  I  have  not  been  able  toi  ascertain  exactly  when.  Professor 
Huxley  read  a  paper  "On  Ceratndtis  forsteri.  with  Observations  on  the  Classi- 
fication of  Fishes"  at  a  Meeting  of  the  Zoological  Society  of  London,  on  January 
4th,  1876,  in  which  he  said — "Two  specimens  of  Ceratodus  forsteri  have  come  into 
my  possession  within  the  last  two  years.  The  first  was  kindly  placed  at  my 
disposal  by  the  Secretary  of  this  Society  some  time  ago;  but  I  was  unwilling  to 


THE  SOCIETT'S  HERITAGE  FROM   THE   MACLEAYS.  033 

dissect  it  until  1  had  a  seennd.  This  desideratum  was  supplied  by  my  friend 
Sir  George  MaeLeay,  who,  on  a  recent  visit  to  Australia,  was  kind  enough  to 
undertake  to  obtain  a  Ceratodus  for  me,  and  fulfilled  his*  promise  by  sending  me 
a  very  fine  and  well-preserved  fish,  rather  lai-ger  than  the  first"  [Proc.,  1876,  p.  24] . 
W.  S.  Macleay,  who  was  unmarried,  died  in  January,  1865.  George  was 
his  residuaiy  legatee,  and  inherited,  among  other  possessions,  the  Elizabeth  Bay 
property,  the  family  heirlooms,  and  his  brother's  library  and  papers,  but  not  the 
Maeleay  Collections,  which  passed  to  William.  The  object  of  George's  visit  to 
Sydney  was  to  put  his  Australian  affairs  in  order.  Mrs.  George  Macleay  died 
in  1869.  I  have  in  my  possession  William  Maeleay 's  journals  for  several  years, 
commencing  with  1874.  George's  visit  ended  before  this,  as  there  is  no  reference 
to  it;  but  ttiere  is  a  record  on  July  25th,  1874,  that  "Brazier  finished  packing  the 
books  to-day,  thirteen  cases  in  all.  There  are  still  a  large  number  of  books 
remaining  on  the  shelves,  but  as  I  have  no  more  cases,  I  shall  not  have  any  more 
packed  at  present."  The  books  here  referred  to  were  packed  for  shipment  to 
England  to  George  Macleay,  and  the  others  were  to  follow.  These  represented 
the  balance  of  W.  S.  Macleay's  library  after  the  books  which  George  gave  to 
William,  had  been  taken  out.  An  earlier  notice  is  offered  by  the  entry  on  July 
22nd — "Brazier  commenced  packing  up  the  books  1  am  sending  home  to  George 
Macleay."  And  one  of  July  28th,  records,  "Brazier  has  been  making  lists  of  the 
books  given  me  by  my  cousin  George."  His  visit  to  Australia,  therefore,  seems 
to  have  been  made  after  1869  and  before  1874. 

But  in  addition  to  the  books,  mostly  entomological,  G«orge  gave  his  cousin 
the  letters,  drawings,  with  the  exception  of  the  Stuart  collection  of  drawings  sent 
out  from  England  as  a  gift  in  1887,  pamphlets,  or  memoranda,  which  I  have  so 
frequently  spoken  of,  in  the  course  of  my  remarks,  as  the  relics  or  memorials  of 
W.  S.  Macleay.  These  were  put  away  in  the  library,  and,  after  he  was  rather 
abruptly  and  completely  prostrated  by  the  onset  of  his  last  illness,  forgotten  by 
Sir  William.  Everything  in  the  house  at  the  time  of  his  decease  was  be- 
queathed to  his  widow.  When  the  time  came  for  clearing-up  the  house.  Lady 
Macleay  very  kindly  handed  them  over  to  me,  as  Sir  William's  executor  and 
trustee,  who  was  interested  in  Natural  History.  This  meeting  has  given  me  an 
opportunity  that  I  had  been  looking  for,  of  exhibiting  and  recording  these  in- 
teresting relics  and  memorials  of  the  Madeays,  preparatory  to  handing  them  over 
to  my  successor,  as  the  Society's  custodian  of  them. 

The  rest  of  W.  S.  Macleay's  papers,  including  letters  from  Lowe,  Huxley, 
and  probably  many  others,  as  well  as  any  MS.  records  of  work  that  there  may 
have  been,  were  presumably  taken  to  England  by  George  Macleay. 

The  concluding  portion  of  Mr.  Busk's  Obituary  Notice  of  W.  S.  Macleay  is 
as  follows — "After  his  retirement  to  Australia,  I  am  not  aware  that  Mr.  MacLeay 
published  anything;  but  he  has  left,  as  I  am  informed,  a  large  collection  of  MSS. 
on  all  subjects  of  natural  history,  which,  as  greatly  to  the  advantage  of  science, 
it  would  be  extremely  desirable  should  be  carefully  examined,  and  those  among 
them  fitted  for  tlie  purpose,  published.  There  is  reason,  I  believe,  to  hope  that 
this  may  be  done,  and  that  we  may.  as  in  foiTner  days,  again  see  the  pages  of  the 
'Linnean  Transactions'  graced  by  articles  bearing  the  honoured  name  of  William 
Sharp  Macleay." 

The  Notic*  was  written  by  Mr.  Busk  in  May  1865.  apparently  after  con- 
sultation with  George  Macleay.  who  was  then  a  Member  of  the  Council;  perhaps 


634  president's  address. 

also  with  Professor  Huxley,  who,  as  I  think,  was  the  author  of  the  notice  in  the 
"Header,"  from  which  Mr.  Busk  quotes.  By  this  time,  George  Macleay  would 
have  received  particulars  of  W.  S.  Madeay's  decease  from  William  Macleay. 
The  information  supplied  to  Mr.  Busk  by  George  Macleay  would  be  based  mainly 
on  recollections  of  his  intercourse  witli  his  brother  up  to  the  year  1859,  supple- 
mented by  anything  William  Macleay  might  have  communicated  by  letter.  Per- 
haps Huxley  could  speak  of  the  work  W .  S .  Macleay  was  interested  in  during  his 
visits  in  1847-50.  Mr.  Busk's  hope  of  future  results  was  based  on  tlie  fact  that 
George  Macleay  was  his  brother's  heir,  and  that  it  was  necessary  for  him  to  revisit 
Sydney  as  soon  as  possible,  to  deal  with  his  Australian  interests.  The  delicate 
health  of  his  wife  up  to  the  time  of  her  death  in  1809,  postponed  this  visit  for 
about  four  years. 

Prom  what  has  been  said  above,  it  wiU  be  seen  that  the  four  papers  published 
in  England  or  Calcutta,  after  W.  S.  Macleay  came  to  Australia,  and  the  two 
letters  published  in  Sydney,  were  overlooked  by  Mr.  Busk.  These  communica- 
tions, however,  were  not  entomological.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  only  published 
records  of  his  own,  indicative  of  his  interest  in  Australian  insects  after  his  arrival 
in  Australia,  beyond  what  has  been  stated  above  in  speaking  of  his  correspondence 
with  the  Rev.  F.  W\  Hope,  are  some  observations  given  by  Mr.  Hope  in  a  Post- 
script to  his  paper,  "Observations  on  the  Stenochoridae  of  New  Holland,  with 
Descriptions  of  new  Genera  and  Species  of  that  Family,"  read  to  the  Zoological 
Society  on  June  23rd,  1840,  [Trans.  Zool.  Soc.  Vol.  iii.,  p.  187],  but  the  publica- 
tion of  this  was  delayed  for  some  time.  And  some  observations  on  an  exhibit, 
communicated  by  the  Hon.  Secretary,  on  his  behalf  at  a  Meeting  of  the  Entomo- 
logical Society  of  New  South  Wales  on  October  3rd,  1864.  Both  these  records 
will  be  considered  later,  when  I  come  to  speak  of  the  history  of  the  latter  Society. 

In  the  concluding  sentence  of  his  paper  on  the  "Annulosa  of  South  Africa" 
(1838)  W.  S.  Macleay  said  of  the  Paiissidae — "I  hope,  however,  as  I  am  about 
to  visit  Australia,  soon  to  be  able  to  make  myself  master  of  the  oeconomy  of  these 
interesting  insects,  and  also  to  publish  a  correct  representation  of  the  parts  of  the 
mouth." 

In  his  letter  "On  the  SkuU  now  exhibited  at  the  Colonial  Museum  of  Sydney 
as  that  of  the  Bunyip,"  he  said,  speaking  of  the  teratologieal  skull  of  a  foal  found 
floating  in  the  Hawkesbury  then  in  his  possession — "This  skull  was  prepared  by 
the  lamented  late  Dr.  Stewart  [Stuart],  and  he  has  made  drawings  and  notes  of  it. 
■which  I  intend  before  long  to  publish,  with  his  other  observations  on  various 
branches  of  natural  history." 

Mr.  Hope,  in  the  paper  on  Stenochoridae,  just  mentioned,  says  of  Meropachi/s 
MacLeaii,  n .  sp . , — "This  beautifully  sericeous  insect  is  named  in  honour  of  William 
Sharpe  Macleay,  Esq.,  from  whom  we  may  shortly  expect  some  valuable  communi- 
cations relating  to  the  entomology  of  Australia." 

Nevertheless,  neither  W.  S.  Madeay's  intentions,  nor  Hope's  expectation, 
came  to  fruition. 

Swainson's  classifieatory  and  other  aberrations  may  perhaps  have  exercised 
some  inhibitory  influence  on  any  inclination,  W.  S.  Macleay  otherwise  may  have 
had,  to  continue  his  literary  efforts;  and  to  this,  the  state  of  his  health  may  also 
have  contributed.  But  if  he  did  put  pen  to  paper  on  the  subject  of  Australian 
insects  or  Dr.  Stuart's  notes,  and  did  not  subsequently  destroy  the  results,  George 
Macleay,  perhaps  after  consultation  with  William,  became  the  arbiter  of  tlieir  dis- 
posal, and  dealt  with  whatever  there  may  have  been,   as  he  thought   lit.     Mr. 


THE  society's  HERITAGE  FROM   THE   MACLEAYS.  635 

Busk's  hope  was  not  realised.  The  memorials  of  W.  S.  Macleay,  which  George 
Macleay  left  with  William,  comprise  nothing:  at  all  in  the  shape  of  original 
observations  or  publishable  matter,  nor  do  they  include  Dr.  Stuart's  notes. 

After  his  arrival  in  England,  George  Macleay  purchased  a  beautiful  house 
and  grounds,  known  as  Pendell  Court,  at  Bletchingly,  Surrey,  which  became  his 
home  for  the  rest  of  his  life.  An  illustrated  account  of  Pendell  Court,  and  of 
the  garden,  tropical  house,  fernery,  stoves,  orchid-houses,  and  aquaria,  signed  F. 
"W.  H.,  appeared  in  "The  Garden,"  for  February  5th,  1881,  as  one  of  a  series 
of  articles  on  "Country  Seats  and  Gardens  of  Great  Britain."  Mr.  Maiden  has 
kindly  given  me  the  copy  of  this  article,  which  is  exhibited  to-night.  This  will 
be  added  to  the  other  mementos  of  George  Macleay. 

Sir  George  Macleay  died,  without  issue,  at  Mentone  on  June  26th,  1891,  in  his 
82nd  year,  about  six  months  before  his  cousin  William.  His  first  wife  died  at 
Pendell  Court  in  1869.  His  second  wife,  a  Tasmanian  lady,  died  in  England,  as 
recently  as  1919. 

Mi-s.  Forde,  who  was  good  enough  to  let  me  have  the  portrait  of  Sir  George 
Macleay.  which  has  been  hung  in  the  Society's  Hall  for  some  years  now,  told  me 
that  she  corresponded  with  him  almost  up  to  the  last.  And  she  added,  that  he 
was  always  her  good  and  kind  friend . 

Before  leaving  for  England  in  1859,  or  while  on  his  visit  to  Sydney  between 
the  years  1870  and  1874,  George  Macleay  disposed  of  his  property  at  Brownlow 
Hill  to  Mr.  F.  W.  Downes,  and  it  has  been  in  possession  of  the  family  ever  since. 
Mr.  Downes,  to  whose  memory  there  is  a  cenotaph  in  the  old  Church  at  Cobbity, 
died  in  1917.  By  the  kind  pemiission  of  Mi-s.  Downes — to  whom,  and  to  her 
son,  for  his  kindly  guidance,  I  desire  to  record  our  cordial  thanks — my  friend  and 
fellow-member,  Mr.  Charles  W.  Smith,  and  I  were  able  to  visit  Brownlow  Hill 
last  December.  Having  a  knowledge  of  Sir  William  Denison's  and  James  Back- 
house's descriptions  of  George  Madeay's  old  home,  and  a  somewhat  faded  photo- 
graph among  the  relics  of  W.  S.  Macleay,  probably  taken  sixty  or  seventy  years 
ago,  we  had  no  difficulty  in  realising  where  we  were,  or  the  interest  of  what  we 
had  come  to  see.  Unfortunately  it  began  to  rain  just  as  we  arrived,  which  pre- 
vented a  closer  inspection  of  the  interesting  plants  and  trees  in  the  garden .  Allow- 
ing for  the  lapse  of  time,  and  for  the  fact  that  the  maintenance  of  an  extensive 
garden  is  a  much  more  expensive  hobby  now  than  it  used  to  be  in  the  good  old 
days,  the  old  home  and  the  garden  have  been  consistently  kept  up,  and  are  mucli 
as  they  used  to  be.  The  "genteel  cottage,"  as  Mr.  Backhouse  regarded  it  in  1836, 
was  possibly  enlarged  about  the  time  of  George  Macleay's  marriage  to  Miss  Bar- 
bara Innes  in  1842,  and  may  have  been  added  to  since.  A  mute  but  eloquent 
historic  link  with  the  past  is  the  old  sundial  in  the  upper  garden,  close  to  the 
house,  probably  a  gift  from  some  friend.  On  the  four  corners  of  the  dial  are 
engraved  ths  words — "George  Macleay  Esq. — Brownlow  Hill — near  Camden — 
New  South  Wales."  In  the  centre,  below  the  gnomon  is  the  date,  "1836."  And 
below  this  again — "anno  eoloniae  xlviii." 

The  date  recalls  the  fact,  that  1836  was  the  year  in  which  James  Backhouse 
and  his  colleagues  spent  three  days  at  Brownlow  HiU,  with  George  and  James 
Macleay,  visiting  Camden  Park  twice  during  their  stay.  Under  date  October  21st, 
Mr .  Backhouse  records — "I  walked  into  the  forest  by  moonlight,  along  with  George 
McLeay,  to  see  the  Opossums." 

(To  be  covcluded,  with  Illustratio^is,  in  the  next  Part  of  the  Proceedings.) 


636 


DONATIONS  AND  EXCHANGES. 

Received  during  the  period  27th  November,  1919,  to  24th  November,  1920. 

(From  the  respective  Societies^  etc.,  uiileas  otherwise  tnentioned.) 

Accra. 

Geological  Survey  op  the  Gold  Coast  of  W.  Africa. —  Report  for  the  Year 

lillS  (1919). 

Adelaide. 

Depahtment  or  Mines:  Geological  Survey  of  S.  Australia. — Review  of 

Mining  Operations  in  the  State  oi'  South  Australia  during  the  Half-years 

ended  December  31st,  1919,  and  June  30th,  1920,  Nos.  31,  32  (1920) . 
Public  Library,  iMu.seum,  etc.,  op  South  Australia. — Records  of  the  S.A 

Museum,  i.,  3    (1920)  ;   Report  of  the  Board   of  Governors  for  1918-19 

(1919). 
Roy'al  Society   of   South  Australia. — Transactions  and  Proceedings,  xliii. 

(1919). 
Woods  and  Forests  Department  op  South  Australia. — Annual  Progress 

Report  upon  State  Forest  Administration  for  the  Year  1918-19   (1919). 

By  W.  Gill,  F.L.S.,  F.R.H.S.,  Conservator  of  Forests. 

Ann  Arbor. 

American  Microscopical   Society. — Transactions,  xxxviii..  1,  3.  4    (1919) ; 

xxxix.,  1-2   (1920). 
Michigan  Academy  op  Science. — Twentieth  ■  Annual  Report   (1918). 
University  of  Michigan:  Museum  of  Zoology. — Miscellaneous  Publications 

Nos.  5-6  (1918);  Occasional  Papers,  Nos.  57-61   (1918)    (T.p.  &  c.   for 

Nor.   36-61);  Nos.   62-64   (1918-1919). 

Auckland. 

Auckland  Institute  and  Museum. — Annual  Report  1919-20  (1920);  Trans- 
actions and  Proceedings,  N.Z.  Institute,  lii.  (1920). 

Baltimore. 

Johns  Hopkins  University. — University  Circular — New  Series  1917,  Nos. 
2-10;  1918,  1-10;  1919,  1-10;  1920,  1  (1917-1920). 

Maryland  Geological  Survey. — General  Report,  x.  (1918);  Report  on  Anne 
Anindel  County,  with  4  Maps  (1917) ;  Report  on  the  Qeologj-  and 
Palaeontology  of  Maryland — Upper  Cretaceous   (2  Vols.),   (1916). 


DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES.  637 

Basle. 

Naturporschende  Gesellschaft  in  Basel.— Verbandlungen,  xxx.  (1910) . 

Batavia. 

KONiNKLiJKE  Natuurkundige  Veeeeniging  IN  Nkderl.-Indie. — Aflevering, 
1  (Het  Idjeu-Hoogland,  Monogi-apbie  v.);  Natuurkundig  Tijdschrift 
voor  Nederlandsch-Indk,  Ixsvii.-lxxx.,  1   (1918-1920). 

Berkeley. 

Univek.sit\-  of  California. — Publications. — Botaii/i,  vi..  19;  vii.,  6-9;  viii., 
1-2  (1919-1920)  .—Entomologi/,  iii..  1  (1919)  .—Geologi/,  xii.,  1,  2  and  4 
(1919-1920)  .—Zoology,  xix.,  4,  8-12;  xx.,  5-6;  xxi..  3-5;  xxii.,  pp.  1-292. 
(1919-19201.— University  Bulletin,  3rd  Series,  xiii.,  5  (List  of  Publica- 
tions. Nov.  1919)    (1919). 

Bern. 

Njiturforschende  Gesellschaft. — Verbandlungen,  191{),  i.-ii. ;  1917;  1918. 
(1916-19) . 

Birmingham. 

Birmingham  Natural  History  and  Philosophical  Societv. — Annual  Re- 
ports for  1918  and  1919  (1919-1920)  ;  List  of  Members,  1919,  1920  (1919- 
1920);  Proceedings,  xiv.,  2-3   (1917-1919). 

Boston,  Mass. 

American  Academy  op  Arts  and  Sciences. — Proceedings,  xlix.,  12,  (T.p.  & 
c):  1.,  4-13,  (T.p.  &  c);  li.,  1-14  (T.p.  &  c);  Iii.,  1-13,  (T.p.  & 
c;  liii..  1-10,  (T.p.  &  c):  liv.,  1-6  (T.p.  &  c):  Iv.,  1.   (1914-1919). 

Brisbane. 

Department  of  Agriculture  and  Stock. — Botany  Bulletin,  No.  xxii.  (1920) ; 

Queensland  Agricultural  Journal,  xii.,  6;  xiii.,  1-6  (T.p.  &  c.)  ;  xiv.,  1-5 

(1919-1920). 
Geological  Survey  of  Queensland. — Publications,  Nos.   265,  267   (1920); 

Four  Reprints,  Publication  No.    268  in  Part,   Articles  1-4  in  Industrial 

Minerals,   (1920). 
Queensland  Museum. — Memoirs,  vii.,  1  (1920) . 
Royal  Society  of  Queensland. — Abstract  of  Proceedings.  26/7/20,  30/8/20, 

27/9/20.    (1920);  Proceedings,  xxxi.,  1919  (1920). 

Brooklyn,  N.Y. 

Botanical  Society  of  America. — American  Journal  of  Botany,  vii.,  4  (1920). 
Brooklyn  In.stitute  of  Arts  and  Sciences. — Brooklyn  Museum  Quarterly, 
(T.p.  &  e.)  for  V.    (1918);  vi.  1-2.,  (1919). 

Brussels. 

Academie  Royalk  de  Belgique.— Bulletin,  1914,  2-12  (T.p.  &  c);  Bulletin 
de  la  Classe  des  Sciences,  1919,  Nos.  6-12  (T.p.  &  c.)  ;  1920,  Nos.  1-3 
(1919-1920)  ;  1915.  Communications  presentees  a  la  Classe  en  1915;  1919, 
1-5  (1914-1919):  Tables  Generales,  1899-1910;  1911-1914  (1919).  Apercu 
Historinue  et  Travaux  (1772-1904)    (1914).     Catalogue  Onomastique  des 


638  DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES. 

Accroissemeuts  de  la  Bibliothequc,  Sciences  1883-1014  (1919).  Fonda- 
tions  Academiques  (1919).  Rapport  Succinct  sur  I'Etat  du  Palais  des 
Academies  apres  le  Depart  des  Allemands  (1919).  Tables  des  Notices 
Biographiques  publiees  dans  I'annuaire  (1835-1919),  (19]9) . 

ACADEMIE  ROTALE  DES  SCIENCES,  DES  LeTTRES  ET  DES  BeAUX-Art.S  DE  BeLGIQDE. 

— Annuaire  de  I'Aeademie,  81e-85e  Annees   (1915-1919),   (1919). 
Societe  ENTOiiOLOGiQUE  DE  Belgique.- — Aimales,  Iviii.,  (1914-1919). 
Societe  Rotale  Zoologique  et  Malaoologique  de  Belgique. — Annales,  xlviii.. 

(Vol.    Jub.    1863-1913);    xJix.;    Supplement   to   xlix.    (Morphologic    des 

Frotozoaires),   (1914). 

Budapest. 

Museum  Nationale  Hungaricum. — Annales,  xii.,  2  (T.p.  &  c.)  (1914); 
xiii.,  2  (T.p.  &c.)   (1915);  xiv.,  1-3  (T.p.  &  c.)    (1916). 

Buenos  Aires. 

SociEDAD  Argentina  des  Ciencias  Naturales. — Boletin,  i..  7  (1914) ;  Hevista 
"Physis",  ii.,  11   (1916) . 

Caen. 

Societe  Linneenne  de  Normandie. — Bulletin,  6th  Ser..  vii.-ix.   (1914-1919) . 

Calcutta. 

Geological  Survey  op  India. — Memoirs,  xlvii.,  pt.  1   (1920) ;  Palaeontologia 

Indica,  N.S.,  \-ii.,  Mem.   No.   1   (1920);  Records,  1.,  3-4   (T.p.   &  c); 

li.,  1   (1919-1920) . 
Indian  Museum. — Memoirs,  vii.,  2-3  (1919);  Records,  xvi.,  5-7  (T.p.  &  c.) 

(1919) ;   xvii.,    (1920) ;   xviii.,  1-3    (1919-1920)  ;   xix.,   1-2    (1920)  ;   xx., 

(1920). 

Cambridge,  England. 

Cambridge  Pnn.osoPHiCAL  Society. — Proceeding?;,  xix..  6  (T.p.  &  c.) 
(1920)  ;   Transactions,  xxii.,  15-21    (1919-1920) . 

Cambridge,  Mass. 

Museum  of  Compar.\tive  Zoology  at  Harvard  College. — Annual  Report 
of  the  Director,  1918-19  (1919)  ;  Bulletin,  Ixii.,  12.  13.  15  (T.p.  &  c); 
Ixiii.,  1,  6,  7,  8,  9  (T.p.  &  e.)   (1919-1920). 

Cape  Town. 

Royal  Society  of  South  Africa. — Transactions,   viii.,  1-3  (1919-1920). 

South  African  Museum. — Annual  Report  for  years  ending  31st  December, 
1918,  1919  (1920):  Annals,  xiv..  4;  xvii.,  4-5  (1920);  Olivier's  Insects, 
2.  "Entomologie";  "Science  in  South  Africa"  (1915);  Transactions  of 
the  South  African  Philosophical  Society,  v.,  "On-Iiids.'   (1888). 

Chicago. 

Field  Museum  of  Natural  History. — Report  Series,  v.,  5  (Publication  No. 
205)    (1920). 

Christchurch,  N.Z. 

Philosophical  Institute  op  Canterbury. — Transactions  New  Zealand  In- 
stitute, li.-lii.   (1919-1920)  . 


DONATIONS   AND    EXCHANGES.  639 

Christiania. 

KoNGKLicE   NoRSKE    Frederikis    Unhersitet. — Arcliiv    for    Mathematik    og 

Naturvidenskab,  T.p.   &  e.   for  xxxi.  ;  xxsii.,  1-4   (T.p.   &  c.)    (1911); 

xxxiii.,  1-4  (T.p.  &  c.)    (1912);  xxxiv.,  1-4  (T.p.  &  c.)    (1914-1917); 

sxsv.,  1-4  (T.p.  &  c.)   (1917);  xxxvi.,  1-2  (1919). 
ViDENSMAPS    Selskapet    I    Chkistiania. — Fordhandlinger,   Aar   1910,    1917, 

1918    (1917,    1918,    1919)  ;    Skrifter    i    Matematisk — Naturvidenskabelig 

IClasse,  1916,  1  &  2,  1917.  1918  (1917,  1918,  1919) . 

Cincinnati,  Ohio. 

Llotd  Library.— Bibliographical  Contributions,  iii.,  2-7  (1917-1918) ;  Myeol- 
ogieal  Notes,  Nos.  39-47  (1915-17)  ;  Synopsis  of  the  Stipitate  Stereums; 
Synopsis  of  the  genus  Cladoderris  (1913) . 

Coldspring  Harbour,  N.Y. 

Carnegie  Institution  of  Washington  :  Department  of  Experimental 
Evolution. — Annual  Report  of  the  Director,  1919  (Reprint  from  the 
Year  Book.  1919)    (1920). 

Colombo. 

Colombo  Museum. — Spolia  Zeylaniea,  T.p.  &  c.  for  x.;  xi.,  41,  42.  (1919- 
1920) . 

Columbus,  Ohio. 

American    Chemical    Society. — Journal    of    Industrial     and     Engineering 

Chemisti-y,  xi.,  7-12   (T.p.   &  c);  xii..  1-7,  9,  10   (1919-1920). 
Ohio  Academy  of  Science  and  Ohio  State  University  Scientific  Society. 
—Ohio  Journal  of  Science,  xx.,  1-8,  T.p.  &  c.    (1919-1920.). 

Copenhagen. 

AcAiiKMiE  Royale  des  Sciences  et  des  Lettres  de  Danemark. — Biologiske 

Meddolelser  i.,  13  (T.p.  &  c.)  ;  ii.,  1  (1919). 
Universitets  Zoologiske  Museum. — Danish  Ingolf  Expedition,  v.,  8  (1919) ; 

iii.,  6  (1920);  Publications  Nos.  4-12  (1920). 
Darwin,  N".T. 

Department  of  Mines  of  the  Northern  Territory  of  AnsTRALU. — Bulletin 

of  the  Northern  Territory,  No.  19  (1919). 

Dublin. 

Royal  Dublin  Society. — Economic  Proceedings,  ii.,  14  (1919) ;  Scientific 
Proceedings,  N.S.,  xv.,  Nos.  35-48  (1919-1920) . 

Dunedin,  N.Z. 

Otago  Institute. — Transactions  and  Proceedings  New  Zealand  Institute,  Ii. 
(1919). 

Durban. 

Durban  Museum.— Annals,  i.,  1-5  (T.p.  &  c);  ii.,  1-6  (1914-1920). 

East  Lansing,  Michigan. 

Michigan  State  Agricultural  College  and  Experiment  Station,  Bac- 
teriological Laboratories. — Report  of  the  Bactei-iologist,  1918  (1919) ; 
Technical  Bulletin  No.  41  (1918),  (1919);  One  Reprint  "An  Anaerobic 
Culture  Volumeter"  (Northnip)  (1918);  One  Reprint  "The  True  Soil 
Solution"  (Northnip)    (1918). 


640  DOXATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES. 

Edinburgh. 

Royal  Physical  Society. — Proceeding:s,  xx..  4  (1919). 

Royal  Society  ok  Edinburgh. — Prof-eedings,  xxxix..  2-3  (T.p.  &  f.);  xl.,  1 
(1919-1920);  Transartions,  lii.,  3   (1920). 

Firenze. 

SociETA  ExTOMOLOGiCA  Ttaliana. — Bullettino.  1.,  1918.   (1919). 

Frankfurt  on  Main. 

Senokienbergische  Naturforschende  Gesellsciiaft  in  Frankfurt  a.  M. — 
Abhandl.,  Bd.  xxxv..  Heft  2  (1918):  xxxvi..  Heft  1,  2,  and  3  (1914- 
1918):  Bericht.  1914,  No.  45.  1-4  (T.p.  &  c.)  (1914);  1915,  No.  46 
(1916):  1916,  No.  47  (1918);  1917,  No.  48  (1918);  1918,  No.  49,  1-2 
(1919). 

Freiburg,  I.B. 

N-\turforschende  Gesellschaft. — Berichte.  xxi.,  1-2;  xxii.,  1  (1915-16, 
1919) . 

Geneva. 

Societe  de  Physique  et  d'Histoire  Naturelle  de  Geneve. — Compte  Rendu, 
xxxvi..  3  (T.p.  &  c);  xxxvii.,  1-2  (1919-1920);  Memoires,  xxxix.,  3-4 
(1920) . 

Granville,  Ohio. 

Dexisox  University. — Bulletin  of  the  Scientifie  Laljoratories.  T.p.  &  c. 
for  xviii.  (1915-1916);  xix.,  pp.  1-64  (No.  3);  pp.  65-146  (1919). 

Haarlem.. 

Nederlandsche  Entomologische  Vereeniging. — Entomolofrisolie  Berichten, 
v.,  Nos.  97-114  (1917-1920)  :  Tijdsehrift  voor  Entomoloarie,  Ixii..  3-4 
(T.p.  &  c.)   and  Siipplfmcnt,  .1:hi  .    1920;  Ixiii..  1-2   (1920). 

Halifax,  N.S. 

N'ova  Scotian  Institute  op  Science. — Proceedings  and  Transactions,  xiv.,  4 

(1917-1918). 

Hamilton,  Canada. 

Hamilton  Associ.ation.— .Journal  and  Proceedings,  No.  xxix..  Sessions  1912- 
13  to  1917-18  (1919) . 

Helsingfors. 

SociETAs  PRO  Fauna  et  Flora  Fexnica. — \cU\.  xxxix. -xliv.  (1914-1919); 
Meddelanden.  Haftet  xl.-xliv.    (1914-1918). 

Societe  df.s  Sciences  de  Pinlande. — Acta,  xliii..  1  (1918)  :  \)v..  2.  4  (1915)  ; 
xlvi..  1.  3-8  (1914-1918);  xlvii.  (1  Vol.):  xlviii..  1-4  (1916-1919); 
Bidrag.  Ixxiv.,  2,  T.p.  &  c.  Ixxvii.,  1-5  (T.p.  &  e.)  (191.5-1919); 
Ixxviii..  2,  4-6,  T.p.  &  c.  (1919);  Ixxix.,  2  (1920);  Lefnadsteckning, 
1914  (1916);  Minnesord,  1914  (1915);  Minnestal,  (3  parts)  1913.  1915 
(191.5-1916);  Ofversigt.  Ivii.,  1914-1915  C;  Iviii..  1915-1916  A;  lis., 
1916-1917  A,  C;  Ix.,  1917-1918  A  (191.5-1919);  Ix.,  (1917-1918)  C, 
(1919):  Ixi..  A.  Haftet  1-2  (1918-1919). 


DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES.  641 

Hobart. 

Field  Nati-r.^lists'  Club  of  Tasmania.— "Easter  Camp-out,   1920;  General 

Report,  Botanical  Notes,  Geological  Notes"   (10201  . 
Geological   Survey   of  Ta,smania.— Bulletin   Nos.    30.   31    (1919);   Mineral 

Resources   No.  6  (1919);  Record  No.  5  (1919);  Report  No.  8  (1919). 
Royal  Society  of  TASiL^NiA. — Papers  and  Prnceedings  for  the  Year  1919 

(1920). 

Honolulu,  T.H. 

Bernice  Pauahi  Bishop  Museum. — Memoirs,  vi.,  1-2  (1919) . 

Johannesburg. 

South  African  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science. — South 
African  Journal  of  Science,  x^'.,  8;  xvi.,  1-4  (1919-1920). 

La  Plata. 

MusEO  DE  LA  Plata.— Revista,  xix.,  1-2  (1913-1915);  xx.,  (1913);  xxi., 
(1915);  xxii.,  (1913);  xxiii.,  1-2   (1915-1916);  xxiv..  1,  2   (1916-19). 

Liege. 

SociETE  Geologique  de  Belgique. — Annales  xl.,  4  (T.p.  &  c);  xli.,  1-3 
(T.p.  &  c);  xlii.,  1-3  (1914-1920);  Bibliographie  s'eologique  du  Bassin 
du  Congo.  By  J.  Cornet;  Publications  relatives  au  Congo  Beige,  etc., 
Annexe  xl.,  4;  xli.,  1-2;  xlii.,  1-2  (1914-1920). 

Liverpool. 

Liverpool  Biological  Society. — Proceedings  and  Transactions,  xxxiii.,  Ses- 
sion 1018-1919  (1919). 

London. 

Board  of  Agriculture  and  Fisheries. — Journal  of  the  Board  of  Agriculture, 

xxvi.,  7-12  (1919-1920) ;  xxvii.,  1-7  (1920) . 
British  Museum  (Natural  History)  . — Economic  Series,  Nos.  0,  10  (1919)  ; 

Studies  on  Acari,  No.  1.   (1919) . 
Geological  Society. — Quarterly  Journal,  Ixxiv.,  4;  Isxv.,  1-4   (T.p.   &  c.) 

(1019-1920);  List,  June  1020   (1020). 
Linnean  Society.— Journal .    Botany,  xliv.,  Nos.    295-299    (1917-1919);  No. 

300   (1920);  xlv..  No.   301    (1920);  Zoology,  xxxiii.,  224   (T.p.    &  c); 

xxxiv.,  225-227  (1918-1920);  List  1919-1920   (Nov.   1919);  Proceedings. 

131st  Session  (1918-1919)   (1919). 
Royal    Bot.^nic    Gardens,    Kew. — Bulletin    of    Miscellaneous    Information, 

1918,  1919   (1918,  1919) . 
Royal   Microscopical  Society. — Journal,   1919,  3-4    (T.p.    &  o.)    (1919); 

1920,  1-2  (1920) . 
RoY.tL  Society. — Philosophical  Transactions.   Series  B.   eeix.,  Nos.   B.   362- 

371,    (T.p.    &  c);   ccx.,   Nos.    B.    372-375    (1919-1920);   Proceedings, 

Series  B.,  xci..  Nos.  B.  636-640  (1910-1020). 
Zoological    Society. — Abstract    of   P'roceeding-s,   Nos.    170.    106-207    (1919- 

1920);  Proceedings,  1916.,  3-4;  1917.,  1-4;  1918..  1-4;  1019.,  1-4.   (1916- 

1920) . 


642  DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES. 

Lyon. 

SociETE  BoTANiQUE  DE  Lyon. — Annales,  xl.  (1915-1918),  (1920). 

Madrid. 

Real  Sociedad  Espanola  de  Historia  Natural. — Boletin,  xix.,  7-8;  xx.,  1-4 
(1919-1920);  Memorias,  xi.,  2-3  (1919). 

Manchester. 

CoNciiOLOGiCAL  Society  op  Great  Britain  and  Ireland. — Journal  of  Conch- 
ology,  xiii.,  1-12  (T.p.  &  e. )  ;  xiv.,  1-12  (T.p.  &  c. ) ;  x\-.,  1-10  (T.p.  & 
c);  xvi.,  1-4  (1910-1920). 

University  or  Manchester,  Manchester  Museum. — Museum  Publication, 
Nos.  82,  83   (1919). 

Manila,  P.I. 

Bureau  of  Forestry. — Annujrt  Report  of  the  Director  of  Forestry  of  the 

Philippine  Islands  for  the  year  ended  December  31st,  1918   (1919). 
Bureau  or  Science  op  the  Government  op  the  Philippine  Islands. — ■ 

Philippine  .Journal  of  Science,  xiv.,  5-6  (T.p.  &  c);  xv.,  1-6;  xvi.,  1-5 

(1919-1920). 

Marseilles. 

Faculte  des  Sciences  de  Marseille. — Annales,  xxii.,  1-4;  xxiii.,  1-4;  ixiv., 

1-2  (1913-1917). 
Musee  d'Histoire  Naturelle. — Annales,  rvi.   (1917). 

Massachusetts. 

Tufts  College.— Tufts  College  Studies,  iv.,  7-8;  v.,  1  (1918-1919). 

Melbourne. 

Australian   Journal  of  Pharmacy,  xxxiv.,  Nos.   407-408;   New   Series,  i., 

1-10   (1919-1920).     From  the  Publisher. 
Commonwealth  Bureau  of  Census  and  Statistics. — Official  Year  Book  of 

the  Commonwealth  of  Australia.  No.   12   (1919). 
Commonwealth  Institute  of  Science  and  Industry. — Bulletin,  Nos.    16, 

18  (1919-1920)  ;  "Science  and  Industry,"  i.,  7-8;  ii.,  1-9  (1919-1920) . 
Department  of  Agriculture  of  Victoria. — Journal,  xvii.,  11-12;  x\'iii.,  1-7 

(1919-1920). 
Field  Naturalists'  Club  op  Victoria. — "Victoi-ian  Naturalist,"  xxxvi.,  8-12 

(T.p.  &  c.)  ;  xxxvii.,  1-7  (1919-1920) . 
RoYAi,  Australasian  Ornithologists'  Union. — "The  Emu,"  xix.,  3-4  (T.p. 

<x  c);  XX.,  1  (1920). 
Royal  Society  op  Victoria. — Annual  Report  of  the  Council  for  the  year 

1919   (1920);  Proceedings,  N.S.   xxxii.,  1-2   (T.p.   &  c.)    (1919-1920). 
University  op  Melbourne. — Calendar,  1920  (1919). 

Mexico. 

Instituto  Geolot.k'o  de  Mexico.— Anales,  Nos.  ti,  7,  8  (1919-1920);  Boletin, 
Nos.  18,  10  (1919). 

Milwaukee. 

Public  Museum.- Bulletin,  i.,  1-4  (T.p.  &  e.);  ii.,  1-2;  iii..  No.  1  (1910- 
20). 


DONATIONS    AND    P:XCHANGES.  643 

Modena. 

La  Nuova  NOTARISU. — From  the  Editor,  Vr.  G.  B.  De  Toni,  Ser.  xxviii., 
Genn.-Apr. ;  Lugl.-Ott.  (1917)  ;  xxxi.,  Genu..  Apr.-Ott.,  1920  (1920) . 

Monaco. 

L'lxsTiTUT  OcEANOGRAPHiQUE  DE  MoNACO. — Bulletin,  Nop.  356-362  (T.p. 
&  c);  Nos.  363-367.    (1919-1920). 

New  Haven,  Conn. 

Connecticut  Academy  of  Arts  and  Sciences. — Memoirs, '  iii. ;  vi.  (1911, 
1919);  Transactions,  T.p.  &  c.  for  xx.  (1916);  xxi.,  pp.  145-200,  315- 
442  (1917);  xxii.,  pp.  1-248;  xxiii.,  pp.   1-241   (1917-1920). 

New  York. 

American    GeooraphiC-U,   Society. — Geograpbioal    Review,   viii.,   2-6    (T.p. 

&  e.)   (1919) ;  ix.,  1-4;  x.,  1-2  (1920) . 
American  Museum  of  Natural  Hi.story. — Bulletin,  xxsvii. ;  xxxviii.   (1917- 

1918);   Memoirs,  N.S.,  ii.,  1-2;   iii.,  1    (1918);   "Natural  History,"  xx.. 

1-2  (1920). 
New  York  Academy  of  Sciences. — Annals,  xxvii.,  pp.  245-336  (T.p.  &  c.) ; 

xxviii..  pp.  1-166  (1917-1919) . 

Nictheroy,  E.  do  Rio. 

EscoLA  Superior  de  Agricultura  e  Medicina  Veterinaria. —  Archivos,  iii., 
1-2  (1920). 

Ottawa. 

Geological  Survey  of  Canada. — Memoirs,  Nos.  11 1,  114,  115  (1919).  117 
(1920);  Munition  Resources  Commission.  Final  Report  of  tlie  Work 
of  the  Commission  Nov.  1915  to  Mar.  1919  inclusive  (1920) ;  Summary 
Report  for  1918,  Farts  C,  D,  F.  G  (1919) ;  1919,  Parts  B,  D.  G  (1920) . 

International  Institute  Branch,  Department  of  Agriculture. — Agricul- 
tural Gazette  of  Canada,  vi..  2,  10  (1919) ;  vii..  4-9  (1920) . 

Royal  Society-  of  Canada. — List.  Transactions  and  Proceedings,  Third  Series, 
xiii..  Sections  i.-v.  (T.p.  &  c.  complete)  1919    (1920). 

Oxford. 

Radclipfe  Library,  Oxford  University  Museum. — Catalogue  of  the  Books 
added  during  1919   (1920)  . 

Palo  Alto,  Cal. 

Leland  Stanford  .Junior  University. — Publications  (Trustees'  Series),  Nos. 
32-33  (1917-1918);  (University  Series),  Nos.  30-35  (1918-1919);  Uni- 
versity Bulletin,  Third  Series,  No.   1   (1918). 

Paris. 

Journal  de  Conchyliologie,  Ixiv.,  3-4  (1919-1920). 

Museum  National  d'Histoire  Natcrelle. — Bulletin,  Annee   1917,  Nos.  2-7 

(T.p.  &  c);  1918,  1-7  (T.p.  &  c.)  ;  1919,  1-3  (1917-1919);  Catalogaie 

des  Coleoptere  de  la  Region  Malgache  (1917) . 


644  DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES. 

SociETE  Ektomologique  de   France. — Bulletin,   1919,   Nos.    15-21    (1919) ; 

1920,  1-4,  (Supplement  1920),  5-14  (1920). 
SociETE    ZoOLOGiQUE    DE   Frakce. — Bulletin,    .\lii.    (1917);    Memoirs,    xxvii. 

(1918). 

Pavia. 

IxsTiTi'TO  BoTANico  dell'Universita  de  Pavia. — Atti,  Serie  ii.,  xvi.  (1916)  ; 
xvii..  1-5   (1920) . 

Perth. 

Geological  Survey  of  Western  Australia. — Annual  Progress  Report  for 
the  year  1918  (1919) ;  1919  (1920) ;  Bulletin,  No.  75  (1917) . 

Government  Statistician,  Western  Australia. — Quarterly  Statistical  Ab- 
stract, Nos.   216-218   (1920). 

Royal  Society  of  Western  Australia. — Journal  and  Proceedings,  v.  (1918- 
1919);  vi.,  1  (1920). 

Philadelphia. 

Academy  op  Natural  Sciences. — Entomological  News,  and  Proceedings  of 
the  Entomological  Section  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences,  xxx., 
8-10  (T.p.  &  c);  xxxi..  1-8  (1919-1920);  Proceedings.  Ixx..  3  (T.p. 
&c.);  Ixxi.,  1  (1919). 

American  Philosophical  Society. — Proceedings,  Ivii.,  7  (T.p.  &  c):  Iviii., 
1-5,  7,  T.p.  &  c.   (1918-1919). 

WiSTAR  Institute  op  An.\tomy  and  Biology. — Journal  of  Experimental 
Zoology,  XXX.,  1-4  (T.p.  &  c);  xxxi.,  1-2  (1920);  Journal  of  Mor- 
phologj-,  xxxiii.,  1-2  (T.p.  &  c);  xxxiv.,  1,  2   (1919-1920). 

ZooLOr.icAL  Society  of  Philadelphia. — Forty-eighth  Annual  Report  of  the 
Board  of  Directors,  1919  (1920) . 

Plymouth. 

Marine  Biological  Association  of  the  United  Kingdom. — Journal,  N.S., 
xii.,  2  (.July.  1920). 

Portici. 

Laboratorio  di  Zoologia  Generale  e  Agraria  della  R.  Scuola  Super- 
lORE  d'Agricoltura. — BoUetino,  xiii.  (1919) . 

Pusa. 

Agricultural  Research  Instituti-,. — Memoii-s  of  the  Department  of  Agri- 
culture in  India — Botanical  Series,  T.p.  &  c.  for  ix.;  x.,  2-5  (1919); 
Entomological  Series.  Bulletin,  Nos.  90  (1919),  92,  95  (1920);  v.,  5-6; 
vii.,  1-2  (1920)  ;  Report  on  the  Progress  of  Agriculture  in  India,  1918- 
1919.  0920);  Scientific  Reports  for  the  year  1918-1919  (1919). 

Richmond,  N.S.W. 

Hawkesbury  Agricultural  College. — H.A.C.  Journal,  xvi.,  12;  xvii.,  1-9 
(1919-1920). 

Rio  de  Janeiro. 

Instituto  Oswaldo  Cruz. — Memoria.«;,  T.p.  &  c.  for  viii..  x.;  xi..  1  (1919). 
MusEU  Nacional  do  Rio  de  Janeiro. — Relatorio  (Prof.  Bruno  Lobo),  Anno 
de  1919  (1920). 


DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES.  645 

Riverside,  CaL 

Graduate  School  of  Tropical  Agriculture,  and  Citrus  Experiment  Sta- 
tion (College  of  Agriculture,  University  of  California). — 10  Reprints, 
Papers  54-59,  61,  63,  65,  68  and  3  Publications  (Agricultural  Sciences, 
Vol.  2.,  4;  4.,  3  and  Entomology,  Vol.  3..  1)   (1919-1920) . 

San  Francisco. 

Calitoknia  Academy  of  Sciences. — Proceedings,  Fourth  Series,  ii.,  Pt. 
ii.,  Nos.  13-16  (1919);  vii.,  (T.p.  &  c);  viii..  5-9  (1917-1919);  ix.,  1-8 
(1919) . 

Sao  Paulo. 

MusEU  Paulista. — Revista,  viii.  (1911);  xi.  (1919);  and  one  Reprint  from 
xi.,  (p.  579  to  end)   (1919). 

Spokane. 

Department  of  Aoriculture  :  Laboratory  of  Forest  Pathology. — Re- 
prints (7)  from  the  Journal  of  Agricidtural  Research,  ii.,  2;  iv.,  1,  3,  4; 
vi.,  8;  X.,  2;  xii.,  11  (1914-1918)  .—Reprint  from  "Mytologia,"  xi.,  2 
(1919). — Reprints  (2)  from  "Phv-topathology."  iv.,  5;  viii.,  2  (1914, 
1918).— U.S.  Department  of  Agriculture,  Bulletin.  Nos.  212,  658,  722, 
799  (1915-1919). 

Stockholm. 

Entomologiska  Foreningen  i  Stockholm. — Entomologisk  Tidskrift,  si.,  1, 
2-4  (1919). 

Sydney. 

Australian  Museum. — Annual  Report,  1918-1919   (1919);  Records,  xii.,  12; 

xiii.,  1-2  (1919-1920). 
Botanic  Gardens  and  Domains. — Annual  Report  for  1918  (1920);  Critical 

Revision  of  the  Genus  Eucalyptus,  iv.,  9-10  (T.p.  &  c);  v.,  1-3  (1919- 

1920).     By  J.    H.   Maiden,  Government  Botanist,  &c. 
Bureau  of  Statistics. — Official  Year  Book  of  New  South  Wales,  1918,  8-18, 

Index  (1919-1920) ;  1919,  1-8  (1920)  ;  Statesman's  Year  Book  1919. 
Department  of  Agriculture,  N.S.W. — Agricultural  Gazette  of  New  South 

Wales.  XXX.,  12  (T.p.  &  c);  xxxi.,  1-11  (1919-1920);  Science  Bulletin, 

No.  17  (1920). 
Department  of  Mines. — Annual  Reports  for  years  1917,  1919  (1918,  1920)  ; 

Mineral  Resources,  No.   29  (1919). 
Department  op  Public  Health. — Report  of  the  Director-General  for  the 

Y^ear  1918  (1920) . 
Education  Department. — Education  Gazette  of  New  South  Wales,  xiii.,  12 

(T.p.   &  c);  xiv.,  2-11;  and  two  Supplements.   (1919-1920). 
Education  Department:   Teachers'  College. — Records    of    the    Education 

Society.  No.  41  (1919)  ;  Teaeher.s'  College  Calendar,  1920  (1920)  . 
Education  Department:   Technical  Education  Branch. — Annual   Report 

1918  (1919)  ;  Technical  Gazette  of  N.S.W.,  x.,  pt.  1  (1920)  . 
Forestry  Commission  op  New  South  Wales. — Annual  Report  of  the  Fores- 
try  Commission   for  year  ended   30th     .Tune.    1920    (1920);     Australian 

Forestry  Journal,  ii.,  12;  iii.,  1-10  (1919-1920) ;  Bulletin  No.  14  "Botany 


646  DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES. 

of  the  Pilliga  Scrub,  N.S.W."  (1920);  "Forest  Flora  of  N.S.W."  By 
J.  H.  Maiden,  Government  Botanist,  &c.,  vii.,  3  (1920);  Report,  1918- 
1919  (1920). 

New  South  Wales  Naturalists'  Society. — "Australian  Naturalist,"  iv., 
8-12  (1919-1920). 

Public  Libeaky  of  New  South  Wales. — Reports  of  the  Trustees  for  the 
Years  1918,  1919   (1920) . 

Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales. — Journal  and  Proceedings,  liii.,  1919 
(1919) . 

Royal  Zoological  Society  of  New  Southt  Wales. — "Australian  Zoologist," 
i.,  7-8  (1919-1920) . 

"Scientific  Austr.\lian,"  xxv.,  2-4;  xxvi.,  1  (1919-1920).  From  the  Pub- 
lisher {Peter  G.  Tait)  . 

State  Fisheeies,  Chief  Secretary's  Department. — Annual  Report  for 
Year  1918   (1919) . 

Taihoku,  Formosa. 

Bureau  op  Forestry  Industries,  Government  op  Formosa. — Icones  Plan- 
tarum  Formosanarum,  ix.    (1920) . 

Tokyo. 

College  op  Science,  Imperial  University  op  Tokyo. — Journal,  xxsix.,  6, 
10,  11  (T.p.  &  c);  si.,  (T.p.  &  c);  xli.,  4-6;  xliii.,  1-li  (1917-1920). 

Tokyo  Zoological  Society. — Annotationes  Zoologieae  Japonenses,  ix.,  5 
(1920) . 

Toronto. 

Royal  Canadian  Institute. — Transactions,    xii.,  2  (1920). 

Tring,  Herts. 

ZooLOuiCAL  Museum. — Novitates  Zoologicae,  xxvi.,  2-3  (T.p.  &  c);  xxvii., 
1  (1920). 

Trondhjem. 

Kongelige  Noiiske  Videnskabers  SelsiuAB. — Aarsberetning  for  191G,  1917 
(1917-1918);  Skrifter,  1916,  Vols,  i.,  ii.  (1916-1917);  1917  (1920). 

Tucson. 

Desert  Laboratory;  Department  op  Botanical  Research  (Carnegie  Insti- 
tution of  Washington)  . — 7  Reprints  and  3  Annual  Reports  (1915,  1918, 
1919),    (1915-1920). 

Tunis. 

Institut  Pasteur  de  Tunis. — Archives,  xi.,  2-3  (1919-1920). 

Turin. 

MusEO  de  Zoologia  etc.,  della  R.  Universita  di  Torino. — BoUetino.  sxx., 

Nos.  692-707;  .xxxi.,  708-717;  xxxii.,  718-724;  xxxiii.,  725-730  (101.5- 
1918) . 

Upsala. 

The  University  of  Upsala. — Bulletin  of  the  Geological  Institution,  xvi. 
(1909). 


DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES.  647 

Urbana,  111. 

University  op  Illinois. — Illinois  Biological  Monographs,  iv.,  1-3  (1917-1918). 

Vienna. 

K.K.  Naturhistorische  Hofmuseum. — Annalen,  xxviii.,  1-4;  xxix.,  1-4; 
XXX.,  1-4;  xxsi.,  1-4;  xxxii.,  1-4;  xxxiii.  (1914-1920). 

Washington. 

Bureau  of  American  Ethnology. — Bulletin,  Nos.  59,  60,  part  i.,  64,  65,  69, 
70  (W18-1919) ;  Thirty-second  Annual  Report,  1910-1911  (1918)  ;  Thirty- 
third  Annual  Report,  1911-1912  (1919) . 

National  Academy  or  Sciences. — Bulletin  of  the  National  Research  Council, 
i.,  pt.  1,  No.  1  (1919) ;  Proceedings,  v.,  10-12  (1919) ;  vi.,  1-7  (1920). 

Smithsonian  Institution. — Annual  Report,  1916-1917  (1919) . 

U.S.  Department  of  Agriculture. — Bulletin,  Nos.  737,  746,  796,  804,  805, 
807,  808,  809,  812,  833,  834,  838,  841,  875,  893  (1919-1920) ;  Department 
Circular,  No.  79  (1920);  Entomological  Reprints  (10)  from  the  Journal 
of  Agricultural  Research,  iii.,  5  (1915)  ;  xv.,  3  (1918)  ;  xviii.,  3,  6,  8 
(two),  9  (three)  ;  xix.,  1  (1920)  ;  Farmers'  Bulletin,  Nos.  650.  675,  739. 
801,  1061,  1070,  1074,  1076,  1086,  1094,  1101,  1104  (1919-1920)  ;  Report 
of  the  Entomologist,  1918-1919  (1919) ;  Year  Book,  1919  (1920) . 

U.S.  Geological  Survey.— Bulletin,  Nos.  640  K-L,  641  J,  L,  656,  658,  660 
C,  661  B-G,  662-672,  676-8,  681  (2),  683-5,  687-8,  690,  Pt.  1  (T.p.  & 
c),  090  E,  691  D-G,  I-M,  692-4,  696,  698-9,  710  A-E,  711  A-D  (1917-20) ; 
Mineral  Resources,  1915,  i.,  11,  15-18,  21,  23,  26,  28;  ii.,  18,  25,  27,  28, 
30,  31;  1916,  i.,  1,  1  A,  4,  6-8,  10,  13,  20,  24-27;  ii.,  1,  2,  6,  8,  13,  14,  17, 
18,  20,  21,  23,  29,  35;  1917,  i.,  1  A-B,  4,  6-8,  10-20,  22;  ii.,  3,  4,  9-19, 
22-35;  1918,  i.,  1-9,  11,  12,  21,  23,  24;  ii.,  1-13.  15  (1916-1920);  Pre- 
liminary Report  for  1918  (1919);  Professional  Papers,  101,  104,  107, 
108  A,  B,  E,  K,  109-10,  112-115,  117,  120  G,  I,  125  A-C  (1917-1920)  ; 
Water  Supply  Papers,  389,  390  (two),  402-4,  406-15,  417-424,  425  B-E, 
426-436,  438,  440-3,  446,  450  A-B,  454-5,  457,  485   (1916-1920) . 

U.S.  National  Museum. — Annual  Report  for  Year  ending  June  30th,  1919 
(1920);  Bulletin,  Nos.  50,  pt.  viii.;  100,  Vol.  3;  103  (1919):  108 
(1920);  110  (1920);  Contributions  from  the  U.S.  National  Herbarium, 
XX.,  8-9  (1920)  ;  xxi.,  (complete)  (1919) ;  xxii.,  1-2  (1920)  ;  Proceedings, 
liv.  (1919). 

Wellington,  N.Z. 

Department  of  Mines;  Nevt  Zealand  Geological  Survey.— Bulletin,  Nos. 

21,  22,  Ft.  1   (1919-20)  ;   Reprints    (6)    from  New  Zealand  Journal  of 

Science  and  Technology,  ii.,  1,  pp.  33-35,  43-50;  ii.,  2,  pp.  112-120;  ii., 

3,  pp.  198-209;  ii.,  6,  pp.  380-392,  393-399  (1919). 
New  Zealand  Board  of  Science  and  Art. — N.Z.   Journal  of  Science  and 

Technology,  ii.,  6  (T.p.  &  c. )  ;  iii.,  1-2  (1919-1920)  . 
New  Zealand  Institute. — Transactions  and  Proceedings,  Iii.   (1920) . 

private  donors    (and  authors,  unless  otherwise  stated') . 
Bonaparte,  Le  Prince.  Paris.— "Notes  Pteridologiques."    Ease.  viii.  (1919) . 
Dehaut,  E.  G.— "Contributions  a  I'Etude  de  la  Vie  Vertebree  Insulaire  dans 

la  Region  Mediterraneenne  Occidentale  et  particulierement  en  Sardaigne 

et  en  Corse  (1920). 


648  DONATIONS    AND    EXCHANGES. 

DixsON,  T.  Storie,  M.B.,  Ch.M.,  Sydney,  (donor).— "Plantae  Medicinales." 
3  Volumes.     By  Mees  v.  Esenbeck.    1828. 

Froggatt,  W.  W.,  F.L.S.,  Sydney. — Department  of  Apiculture.  Entomol- 
ogieal  Branch,  Misoellaneou.s  Publications,  Nos.  2057,  2065,  2069,  2075, 
2182,  2192,  2195,  2231,  2235,  2240,  2248. 

Guppv,  H.  B. — One  Reprint,  "Fossil  Botany  in  the  We.stern  World:  An  Ap- 
preciation."    (Amer.   Journ.   Sei.,  xlix.,  May,  1920.) 

Haswbll,  Professor  W.  A.,  Sydney  (donor).  —  (1)  "Historia  Naturalis  et 
Medica  Latorum  Lumbrieorum  intra  Hominem  et  alia  Animalia.""  By 
Danielis  Clerici,  M.D.  (Geneva,  1715) .  (2)  "Beitrage  zur  Kenntniss  der 
Niedern  Thiere."  By  Karl  Ernst  v.  Baer.  (3)  "Bopyro  et  Nereide  Com- 
mcntationes  Anatoiuico-Physiologicae  Duae."  By  Henrici  Rathke.  (Riga, 
1837).  (4)  "Aniinalibus  Quibusdam  e  ("lasso  Verinium  Linnaeana  in 
Circumnavigatione  Terrae  auspicante  Comite  N.  Romanzoff  Duce  Ottone 
de  Kotzebue."  Annie  1815,  1816,  1817,  1818.  Peracta.  By  Adelbertus 
de  Chamisso.      (Berlin.  1819) . 

Janet,  C,  Paris. —Two  Pamphlets,  (1)  "Sur  la  Phylogene.se  de  I'Ortho- 
bionte,"  (Limoges,  1916)  .  (2)  ''Sur  le  Botnjdiiim  (jrauulatum,''  (Lim- 
oges, 1918) . 

Lord,  C.  E.,  Hobart. — Three  Reprints:  "Studies  of  Tasmanian  Cetacea." 
Parts  iii.-iv.  "Studies  in  Tasmanian  Mammals,  Living  and  Extinct." 
No.   1.    (1920). 

Lord,  C.  E..  and  Scott,  H.  H.,  Hobart. — Two  Reprints;  "Studies  in  Tas- 
manian Mammals,  Living  and  Extinct.'  Nos.  1-2  (Papers  and  Proc. 
Roy.  Soc.  Tasmania,  1920). 

Mjoberg,  Dr.  E.,  Stockholm  (donor). — Eleven  Reprints  of  Papers,  entitled 
"Results  of  Dr.  Mjoberg's  Swedish  Scientific  Expeditions  to  Australia, 
1910-13."  By  various  authors.  (K.  Sv.  Vetenskaps  Akad.,  Arkiv  for 
Zoologie,  x.-xi. ;  xii.,  15;  xiii.,  2  &  8;  Handlingar,  lix..  4;  Ix.,  4  (1916- 
1920). 

OSEORN,  Professor  T.  G.  B.,  One  Reprint;  "Some  Observntions  on  the  Tuber 
of  Phi/Uoglossum."     (Ann.  Bot.,  xxxiii.,  Oct.  1919). 

Sloane,  T.  G.  (donor). — "Genera  Insectorum."  Fascicule  82.  Coleoptera- 
Coleoptera  adephaga.     By  von  Dr.   Walther  Horn  (1915). 

Smith,  Dr.  R.  Greig,  Sydney  (donor). — County  of  Northumberland,  Edu- 
cation Committee  County  Agricultural  Experiment  Station,  Cockle  Park 
—Bulletin,  Nos.  22-24,  2"7,  29,  31,  32  (1915-1920)  .—"Chemical  Engineer- 
ing and  Mining  Review,"  x.,  Nos.  109,  (Index  to  ix.).  Ill,  115-121 
(1917-1918);  xi.,  Nos.  122-132  (1918-1919);  xii..  Nos.  133-135,  137, 
138  (1919-1920).— Dove  Marine  Laboratory,  Cullercoats,  Northumber- 
land. Report  for  year  ending  .June  30th  1919.  N.S.,  No.  viii.  (1919). 
— Papers  and  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  Tasmania  for  the 
years  1911,  1917,  1919;  Annual  Report  of  the  Royal  Society  of  Ta.«Biania 
for  the  year  1911. 

Vettch,  R.,  "b.Sc,  F.E.S..  Fiji.— Agricultural  Report  No.  4,  of  the  Colonial 
Sug.ir  Refining  Co.,  Ltd..  Fiji  ("The  Cane  Beetle  Borer  in  Fiji"')  .  (Syd- 
ney, 1919). 


649 


LIST    OF    MEMBERS,  1920. 
Ordinary  Members. 

1905  Allen,  Edmund,  c/o  Resident  Engineer,  Yeulba,  Queensland. 

1906  Anderson,   Charles,  M-A.,   D.Sc,   Australian  Museum,  College   St.,   Sydney. 

1899  Andrews,   Ernest    Clayton,   B.A.,    F.G.S.,    Geological   Survey,   Department    of 

Mines,  Sydney. 

1912  Aurousseau,  Marcel,  B.Sc,  c/o  Geo-Physical  Laboratory,  Carnegie  Institution 

of  Washington,  Washington,  D.C.,  US. A. 

1913  Badham,  Charles,  B-Sc,  M.B.,  Kendall,  N.S.W. 

1888     Baker,  Richard,  Thomas,  F.L.S.,  Technological  Museum,  Sydney. 

1919  Barnett,  Marcus    Stanley,    c/o  Colonial  Sugar    Refining    Co.,   Ltd.,    O'Connell 

Street,  Sydney. 

1907  Benson,   Professor  Wilham  Noel,   B.A.,  D.Sc,   F.G.S.,   University  of  Otago, 

Dunedin,  N.Z. 

1911  Bickford,  Ernest  I.,    F.L.S.,    "Locksley,"  Greville   Street,    Randwick. 

1920  Blakely,  William  Paris,  Botanic  Gardens,  Sydney. 

1912  Breakwell,  Ernest,  B.A.,  B.Sc,  Botanic  Gardens,  Sydney. 

1914  Bretnall,  Reginald  Wheeler,  Australian  Museum,  College  Street,  Sydney. 
1912  Brewster,  Miss  Agnes.  Girls'  High  School,  Sydney. 

1900  Broelemann,   Henry  W.,   Boite   22,  a  Pau    (Basses-Pyrenees),   France. 

1919  Broughton,   Miss  Eileen   Marjorie,   B.Sc,  "Riverview,"   Glenfield,   N.S.W. 

1911  Browne,  Wilham  Rowan,  B.Sc,  Geology  Dept.,  University  of  Sydney 

1920  Burkitt,   Arthur  Neville   St.    George    Handcock,    M.B.,  B.Sc,    Medical    School, 

University  of   Sydney. 
1910     Burrell.  Harrv.  19  Doncaster  Avenue,  Kensington. 
1910     Burrell,  Mrs.  Harry,  19  Doncaster  Avenue,  Kensington. 

1912  Cadell.  Miss  Myall,  "Bohemia,"  Ci-emome  Road,  Cremorne. 
1899  Cambage,  Richard  Hind,  L.S..  F.L.S.,  Park  Road,  Burwood. 

1901  Campbell,  John  Honevford.  M.B.E..  Royal  Mint,  Sydney. 
1899  Carne,   Toseph  Edmund,  F.G.S.,  Beecroft  Road,  Beecroft. 

1905     Carne,   Walter  Mervyn.    Hawkesbury  Agricultural    College,  Richmond,  N.S.W. 
1890     Carson,  Duncan,  c/-  Winchcombe,  Carson,  Ltd.,  Bridge  St.,  Sydney. 

1903  Carter,  H.   J.,  B.A.,  F.Ei.S.,  "Garrawillah,"  Kintore  St.,  Wahroonga. 

1912  Cayzer,  Albert,  B,Sc..  University  of  Queensland,  Brisbane,  Q. 

1904  Chapman,   Professor   Henry  G.,   M.D.,   B.S.,   Medical    School,     University    of 

Sydney. 

1899  Cheel,  Edwin,  Botanic  Gardens,  Sydney. 

1920     Clarke,  Harry   Flockton,  c/o  Colonial  Sugar  Refining  Co.,   Ltd.,  O'Connell  St., 

Svdney . 
1901     Cleland,  Professor  John  Burton,  M.D..  Ch.M.,  The  University,  Adelaide,  S.A. 
1916     CoUins,  Miss  Marjorie  Lsabel,  B.Sc,  Havilah  St.,  Chatswood. 

1908  Cotton,  Leo  Arthur,  M.A.,  D.Sc,  Geologv   Dept.,    University   of   Sydney. 

1900  Crago,  W.  H.,  M.D.,  185  Macquarie  Street,  Sydney. 

1913  Crouch,  Miss  Naomi,  Hereford  House,  Glebe  Point  Road.  Glebe. 


650  LIST    OF    MEMBERS,    1920. 

1920    Danes,  Dr.  Jiri  Victor,  Consul-General  of  the  Czechoslovak  Republic,  40  Bays- 
water  Road,   Darlinghurst. 

1885  David,  Sir  Tannatt  William  Edgeworth,  K.B.E..  C.M.G.,  D.S.O.,  B.A.,  D.Sc, 

F.R.S.,  Universitj-  of  Sydnev. 
1883     Deaiie,  Henry,  M.A.,  F.L.S.,  -Sl.Inst.C.E.,  "Campsie."  14  Mercer  Road,  Mal- 
vern, Melbourne,  Victoria. 

1916  Deer   Miss  Margaret,  B.A.,  B.Sc.  Montana  Flats,  Cremorne. 

1913  Dixon,  Jacob  Robert  L.,  M.R.C.S.,  L.R.C.P.,  Medical  School,   University  of 

Svdney. 
1887     Dixson,  Hugh,  J. P.,  100  The  Strand,  Sydney. 
1881     Dixson,  Thonias  Storie,  M.B.,  Ch.M.,  215  Macquarie  Street,  Sydney. 

1918  Dodd,  Frederick  Parkhurst,  Kuranda,  North  Queensland. 
1894     Dun,  William  S.,  Department  of  Mines,  Sydney. 

1920     Dwyer,  Rt.   Rev.   Joseph  Wilfrid,  Bishop  of  Wagga,  Wagga  Wagga,  N.S.W. 

1920     Elston,  Albert  H..  F.E.S.,  50  Lef-vre  Terrace.  North  Adelaide,  S.A. 

1914  Enrigh't,  Walter  John.   B.A.,  West  Maitland,  N.S.W. 

1908    Ferguson,  Eustace  William,  M.B.,  Ch.M.,  Bureau  of  Microbiology,  Macquarie 
Street,  Svdney. 

1919  Ferriss,  Clarence  Victor,  B.Sc,  "Hedera,"  Beauchamp  Road.  Matraville. 
1908     Finckh,  H.  E.,  "Hermes,"  100  Raglan  Street.  Mosman. 

1881     Fletcher,  Joseph  J..  M.A.,  B.Sc,  Woolwich  Road,  Woolwich. 

1908  Flynn,  Professor  Theodore  Thomson,  B.Sc,  University  of  Tasmania,  Hobart. 

tas. 

1920  Friend,  Norman  Bartlett,  42  Pile  Street,  Dulwich  Hill. 

1911  Froggatt,  John  Lewis,  B.Sc,  Dept.  of  Agriculture,   Brisbane. 

1886  Froggatt,  Walter  W..  F.L.S.,  Agricultural  Museum,  George  St.  North,  Sydney. 
1920     Furst,  Henbert  Charles,  Lin  wood  Avenue,  Killara. 

1915  Gilder,  Percy  George,  c/-  Sydney  Morning  Herald,  Pitt  St.,  Sydney. 

1918  Gillies,  Clvde  Douglas,   M.Sc,  61   Wellington  Street,   Windsor,  Victoria. 

1912  Goldfinch,'  Gilbert  M.,  "Lvndhurst,"   Salisbury   Road,   Rose  Bay. 
1899     Grant,  Robert.  24  Edward  Street,  Woollahra. 

1911     Greenwood,  William  Frederick  Neville,  c/-  Colonial  Sugar  Refining  Co.,  Ltd.. 
Lautoka,   Fiji. 

1910  Griffiths,  Edward,  B.Sc,  Dept.  of  Agriculture,  136  Lower  George  St.,  Svdnev. 
1901     Gurney,  William  B.,  F.E.S..  Dept.  of  Agriculture,  George  St.  North,  Sydney. 

1911  Hacker,  Henrv,  Queensland  Museum,  Bowen  Park,  Brisbane,  Q. 

1909  Hall,  E.   Cuth'bert.  M.D.,  Ch.M..  George  Street.  Parramatta. 

1919  Hall.  Leslie  Lionel.  Kareela  Road.  Cremorne. 

1897  Halligan.  Gerald  H.,  P.G.S.,  Avenue  Road,  Hunter's  Hill. 

1909  Hallmann,  Edward  Francis,  B.Sc,  75  Hereford  Street.   Fore,st  Lodge. 

1915  Hamblin.  Charles  Oswald.  B.Sc,  "Glengarth,"  51  West  Street,  Petersham. 

1899  Hamilton.  Arthur  Andrew.   Botanic  Garden.s.  Sydney. 

1885  Hamilton.  Alexander  G.,  "Tanandra,"  Hercules  Street,  Chatswood. 

1917  Hardy,  G.   H.    Hurlestone. 

1905     Harrison,  Launcelot,   B.Sc,  Zoologv   Dept..   Universitv  of  Svdnev. 

1879     Haswell,    Profes.sor     William     Aitcheson.     M..^..    D.Sc.    F.R.S.,    "Mimihau," 

Woollahra  Point. 
1911     Haviland,    The    Venerable    Archdeacon    F.    E..     The     Rectory,     Coonamble, 

N.S.W. 
1891     Hedley.  Charles,  F.L.S..  Australian  Museum.  College  St.,  Svdnev. 

1920  Henry,   Marguerite,   B.Sc,   "Derwent,"   Oxford  St.,   Epping. 

1909     Henry,  Max,    D.S.O.,    M.R.C.V.S..   B.V.Sc.    Coram    Cottage,  Essex  Street, 
Epping . 

1913  Hill,  Gerald  F.,  F.E.S..  c/-  Australian  Institute  of  Tropical  Medicine,  Towns- 

ville,  Queensland. 


LIST   OP    MEMBERS,   1920.  651 

]892     Hill,   Professor   James    P..    D.Sc,    F.L.S.,    University    College,   Gower   Street, 

London,  W.C,  England. 
1916     Hinder,  Miss  Eleanor  Marv,  B.Sc,  "Satichie,"  Clifford  Street,  Mosman. 

1916  Hindmarsh.   Miss   Ellen  Margaret,   B.Sc,   Medical  School,  The  University  of 

Sydney . 

1918  Hopson,  John,  Jr.,  "Dalkeith,"  Eccleston,  N.S.W. 
1907     Hull,  A.  F.   Basset,  Bo.\  704,  G.P.O.,  Sydney. 

1892  Hynes,  Miss  Sarah,  B.A.,  "Isis,"  Soudan  Street,   Rand  wick. 

1920    Ick-Hewins,  Edwin  Theophilus  Jesse.  M.B.,  B.S.,   Dunedoo,  N.S.W. 
1912     Irby,  Llewellyn  George.  Forest  Branch,  Lands  Dept.,  Hobart,  Tasmania. 

1912  Jackson,  Sidney  William,  M.R.A.O.U.,  Belltrees,  via  Scone,  N.S.W. 

1917  Jacobs,  Ernest  G.,  "Maranta,"  Henry  Street,  Ashfield. 

1903  Jensen,  Harald  Ingemann,  D.Sc,  Queensland  Geological  Survey,  George  St., 

Brisbane,  Q. 
1899    Johnston,   Professor  Stephen  Jason,   B.A.,   D.Sc,   Zoology   Dept.,   University 

of   Sydney. 
1907    Johnston,  Professor  Thomas  Harvey,  M.A.,  D.Sc,  University  of  Queensland, 

Brisbane,  Q. 

1907     Kaleski,  Robert.  "The  Hill."  Liverpool,  N.S.W. 

1906  Laseron,  Charles  Francis,  Technological  Museum,  Sydney. 

1913  Lawson,  Professor  A.  Anstruther,  D.Sc,  F.R.S.E.,   Botany  Dept.,   University 

of   Sydnev. 
1S92     Lea,  Arthur  .M.,   F.E.S.,    241  Young  Street,  Unley,  Adelaide,  S.A. 
1915     Le  Plastrier,  Miss  Constance  Emilv  Marv,  "Carinyah,"  Provincial  Road.  Lind- 

field. 

1910  Le  Souef,  A.   S.,  C.M.Z.S.,  Zoological  Gardens,  Taronga  Park,  Mosman. 

1911  Longman,  Heber  A.,  Queensland  Museum,  Bowen  Park,  Brisbane,  Q. 
1891     Lower,  Oswald  B.,  F.E.S.,  Bartley  Crescent,  Wayville,   S.A. 

1893  Lucas,  A.   H.  S.,  M.A.,  B.Sc,  Sydney  Grammar  School,  College  St.,  Sydney. 

1919  McCarthy,  T.,  Bertram  Street,  Mortlake. 

1907  McCulloch,  Allan  R.,  Austrahan  Museum,  College  Street,  Sydney. 
1907     McDonnough,  Thomas,  L.S.,   "Iluka,"  Hamilton  Street,   Randwick. 

1917     McKeown,    Keith  CoUingwood,  Office  of  the  Water  Conser\-ation  and  Irriga- 
tion Commission,  Leeton.  N.S.W. 

1911  Mackinnon.  Ewen.  B.Sc,  Commonwealth  Institute  of  Science  and  Industry, 

391  Bourke  St.,  Melbourne. 

1883  Maiden,  J.   Henry,  I.S.O.,  F.R.S.,  F.L.S.,  F.C.S..  Botanic  Gardens,  Sydney. 
1905     Mawson,  Sir  Douglas,  B.E..  D.Sc,  The  Universitv,  Adelaide,  S.A. 

1902  May,  W.  L.,  Forest  Hill.  Sandford.  Tasmania. 

1884  Mitchell  John,  10  High  Street,  Waratah,  N.S.W. 

1904  Murdoch.  R.,  Wanganui,  New  Zealand. 

1920  Musgrave.  Anthony,  Australian  Museum,  College  St.,  Sydney. 
1888  Musson,  Charles  T..  "Kia-ora,"  Nelson  Street,  Gordon. 

1913     Newman.    Le.slie    John    William,    "Walthamstowe,"    Bernard     St      Claremont 

Perth.  W.A. 
1920     Noble,   Robert  Jackson.  B.Sc,  Agr.,   "Arleston."   Wallace  St.,   Burwood. 

1912  North,  David  Sutherland,  c/-  Colonial  Sugar  Refining  Co..  Ltd.,  O'Connell  St., 

Sydney. 

1912     O'Callaghan,   M.    A.,   Dairy  Branch,   Dept.   of  Agriculture,    140  George   Street 

North,   Sydney. 
1920     O'Dwyer.  Margaret  Helena,  Copeland  St..   Beecroft. 
1910     Oliver,  W.   Reginald  B.,  Dominion  Museum,  Wellington,  N.Z. 


652  LIST   OP    MEMBERS,   1920. 

1904  Petrie,  James  Matthew,  D.Sc,  F.l.C,  Medical  School,  University   of  Sydney. 
1920     Pincombe,    Torrington    Hawke,    B.A.,     Public     School,     Mayfield,    WarataJi, 

N.S.W. 
1916     Pinkerton,  Miss  Ethel  Corry,  B.Sc,  Ashford  Street,  Ashfield. 

1908  Playfair,  George  Israel,  Queensland  Hotel,  Lismore,  N.S.W. 

1902     Potts,    Henrv    William,    F.C.S.,    F.L.S.,    Hawkesbury     Agricultural     College, 
Richmond,'  N.S.W. 

1918  Priestley,  Henry,  M.D.,  B.Sc.  Medical  School,  University  of  Sydney. 

1910  Pulleine,  Robert  Henry,  M.B.,  3  North  Terrace,  Adelaide,  S.A. 

1906  Rodway,  Leonard,  C.M.G.,  Government  Botanist,  Macquarie  St.,  Hobart,  Tas. 

1919  Scammell,  George  Vance,  18  Middle  Head  Road,  Mosman. 
1918    Sherrie,  Miss  Heather,  B.Sc.,  Ben  Boyd  Road,  Neutral  Bay. 

1911  Shirley,  John,  D.Sc,  Queensland  Museum,  Brisbane,  Q. 
1887    Sloane,  Thomas  G.,  Moorilla,  Young.  N.S.W. 

1899     Smith,  Charles  Walter.  M.Inst.C.E.,  336  Miller  Street,  North  Sydney. 

1909  Smith,  G.    P.    Darnell,  D.Sc,    F.l.C,  F.C.S.,  Agricultural    Museum,    George 

St.   North,  Sydney. 

1899  Smith,  Henry  George,  F.C.S.,  Technological  Museum,  Sydney. 
1898     Smith,  R.  Greig,  D.Sc,  Linnean  Hall,  Elizabeth  Bay. 

1916  Smith,  Miss  Vera  Irwin.  B.Sc,   "Cora  Lynn."  Point  Road,  Woolwich. 

1898  Stead,  David  G.,  "Boongarre,"  Pacific  St.,  Watson's  Bay. 

1886  Steel.  Thomas.  "Rock  Bank."  Stephen  Street,  Pennant  Hills. 

1905  Stokes.  Edward  Sutherland,  M.B.,  Ch.M..  Dept.  of  Water  Supply  and  Sewer- 

age, 341  Pitt  Street,  Sydney. 
1911     Sulman,  Miss  Florence,  "Burrangong,"  McMahon's  Point. 
1904    Sussmilch,  C.   A.,  F.G.S.,  Technical  College,  Newcastle,  N.S.W. 

1920  Taylor,  Augustus  Selwyn,  Geological  Survey  of  N.S.W.,  Sydnev. 

1907  Taylor,  Frank   H.,  c/-  Box   137.  G.P.O..  Sydney. 

1920     Tebbutt,   Arthur   Hamilton.   M.B..    18.5   Macquarie  Street.  Svdnev. 

1916  Tilley,  Cecil  Edgar,  B.Sc,  Geology  Dept.,  University  of  Sydney. 

1904    Tillyard,    Robin    John,    D.Sc,    M.A.,    P.L.S,    F.E.S.,     Cawthron     Institute, 

Nelson,  New   Zealand. 
1902     Turner,  A.   Jefferis,  M.D..  F.E.S.,  Wickham  Terrace.  Brisbane,  Q. 

1891  Turner,   Fred.,  F.L.S.,   F.R.H.S..  "Oakhurst,"  Chatswood. 

1904    Turner,    Rowland   E.,    F.E.S.,   F.Z.S.,    c/-    Standard    Bank   of  S.     Africa. 
Capetown. 

1917  Veitch.   Robert,  B.Sc.  c/-  Colonial  Sugar  Refining   Co.,  Ltd.,    Lautoka  Mill. 

Lautoka,  Fiji. 

1900  Walker,    Commander   John    James.    M.A.,    F.L.S.,    F.E.S..    R.N..    "Aorangi," 

Lonsdale  Road,  Summertown,  Oxford,  England. 

1909  Walkom,  Arthur  Bache.  D.Sc,  Linnean  Hall,  Elizabeth  Bav. 

1911     Waxdlaw,    Henry    Sloane    Halcro,    D.Sc.    Phy.siology     Dept..     University     of 

Sydney. 
1897     Waterhouse,    Gustavus   Athol,    B.Sc,    B.E..    F.E.S.,    Royal    Mint,    Macquarie 

St.,  Sydney. 
1911     Watt.  Professor  Robert  Dickie,  M.A..  B.Sc.  Univer.sitv  of  Sydney. 
1916     Welch,  William.  F.R.G.S.,  "Roto-iti."  Bovie  Street,  Mosman. 
1916     White,  Cvril  Tenison.  101  Main  Street.  Kangaroo  Point.  Brisbane    Q. 

1910  White,   Henry  Luke,  Belltrees.  Soone.  N.S.W. 

1892  Wilson,  Professor  James  T.,  M.B..  Ch.M..  F.R.S.,  Department  of  Anatomy, 

The  New  Museums,  Cambridg-e,  England. 
Jmn     Woolnough^  Walter  George,  D.Sc,  F.G.S.,  University  of  Svdnev. 
1910    Wymark,  Frederick,  89  Castlereagh  Street    Svdnev 


LIST    OF    MEMBERS,    1920.  653 

HoNOKARY  Members. 
1897     De  Toni,  Dr.  G.  B..  R.   Orto  Botanico  di  Modena.  Italy. 

Corresponding  Members. 

1888    Bale,  W.   M.,  F.R.M.S..  63  Walpole  Street.  Kew,  Melbourne,  Victoria. 

1884     Bell,  Professor  F.   Jeffrey,   M.A.,   British  Museum    (Natural   History),   Crom- 
well Road,  London,  S.W.  7..  Encrland. 

1902     McAlpine,  D.,  Government  Vegetable  Pathologist,   Dept.   of  Agriculture,  Mel- 
bourne, Victoria. 

1902     Meyrick,   Edward,   B.A.,    F.R.S.,   F.Z.S.,   Thornhanger,    Marlborough,   Wilts., 
England. 

1888    Pearson,  W.  H. 

1901     Raffrav,  A.,  Consulat  General  de  France.  6  Piazza  Madama,  Rome,  Italy. 
Sanger,  E.   B. 

1893     Spencer,   Professor  Sir  W.    Baldwin.   K.C.M.G.,   D.Sc.  F.R.S..   The   Univer- 
sity, Melbourne,  Victoria. 

Members  ELErxED  Since  the  I.ssue  op  the  L.^.st  List  (19131    Who  Have 

Died  or  Resigned. 

1916  Bennett,  Alfred  L.,  "Oaklands,"  The  Oaks,  near  Camden. 

1913  Fry,  Dene  B.,  Northcote  Rd.,  Lindfield.     [Killed  in  action.   1917.1 

1913  Harrison,  Berkeley.  Cudgera  Park,  Burringbar.  N.S.W. 

1916  Rosebv,  Miss  Mabel,   B.A..   "Redlands,"  Mi'litarv  Road.   Neutral  Bav. 

1915  Stephens,    Harry,    B.Sc,    Agr.,    "Erith."    Citv    Road,    Darlington.      [Killed   ia 

action,  1917.1 

1913  Turnbull,  Alex.   H..  Wellington,  N.Z, 

191.5  Williams.  Arthur  W.,  Byron  Ray,  N.S.W. 


(1920.) 


(o)    GENERAL   INDEX. 


Acacias,  flowering  branches,  reversion- 
shoots  and  seedlings,  exhibited,  204. 
— so-called  Phyllodes  of  the  Aus- 
tralian Phyllodineous,  24. 

Alexander,  C.  P.,  An  undescribed 
species  of  Clytucosmus  Skuse,  183. 

Amaranta  macrocarpus,  exhibited, 
179. 

Andrews,  E.  C,  congratulations  to,  7. 

Anthurium  Andreanum,  exhibited,  204 
— chelseiensis,  exhibited,  204. 

Apoda  xi/lomeli  on  waratah,  exhibited, 
318. 

Aroids,  exhibited,  204. 

Asilid-ae,  Australian  flies  of  the  family, 
185. 

Asilinae,  male  genitalia  of  some  rob- 
berflies  belonging  to  the  sub-familv, 
250. 

Atrypidae  of  N.S.W.,  266. 

Australasian  Association  for  Advance- 
ment of  Science,  13. 

Australian  Carabidae,  320 — Coleop- 
tera.  new  species  of,  375 — Delpha- 
cidae,  new  genus  of,  181 — Diptera 
Brachycera,  505 — flies  of  the  family 
Asilidae,  185 — Lepidoptera,  474  — 
plants,  resin-seereting  glands  in 
some,  329 — Siillidae,  EusylUdae  and 
Autoh/tidae.  90 — Tahanidae,  460 — 
Tenehrionidae,  222. 

Autoh/tidae,  Australian.  90. 

Avian,  a  new,  Trematode,  500. 


Bag-moth  (Metura  rhmgata),  exhibit- 
ed, 318. 

Bagshelter  Moth,  exhibited,  531. 

Balance  Slieet,  etc.,  1919.  47-50. 

Benson,  W.  N.,  Dun,  W.  S.,  and 
Browne,  W.  R..  The  Geology  and 
Petrology  of  the  Great  Serpentine 
Belt  of  N.S.W..  Part  ix.,  285.  337, 
405. 

Bihio  imitator,  exhibited,  472. 

Binellia  tni/loriana,  exhibited,  203. 


Birds  trapped  by  Pisonia  Brunoniana, 
180. 

Blakely,  W.  F.,  elected  a  member,  179 
— see  Exhibits. 

Boree  :Moth,  exhibited,  531 . 

Borunia  ledifolia,  exliibited,  473 — ledi- 
folia  var.  rosmarinifolia,  with  double 
flowers,  exhibited,  473 — with  white 
flowere,  exhibited,  473 — ledifolia 
var.  triphylla,  exhibited,  473 — with 
double  flowers,  exhibited,  473 — pin- 
nata,  with  double  flowei-s,  exhibited, 
473 — serrulata,  var.  exhil)ited,  404 
— serrulata  x  B.  floribunda.  hybrid 
form  exhibited,  404. 

Botanic  Gardens,  Notes  from,  260. 

Botany  of  Lord  Howe  Is.,  few  notes 
on,  564. 

Brachiopods  from  Middle  Palaeozoic 
Rocks  of  N.S.W.,  543— Silurian 
•and  Devonian,  from  N.S.W.,  ex- 
hibited, 473. 

Bracliyccra,  Life  Histories  of  Aus- 
tralian Diptera.  505. 

Brachi/scelis  viiDiita  on  branch  of 
Eucahiptu.-<  faliqna,  exhibited,  319. 

Brewster.  Agnes  A.,  see  Exhibits. 

Broken  Hill,  Technical  Commission  of 
Inquiry  into  prevalence  of  disease 
among  mine-workers.  14. 

Browne,  W.  R.,  see  Benson,  Dun  and 
Browne. 

Buprestidae,  iii'w  genus  and  species, 
222 

Burkitt,  A.  N.  St.  G.  H..  elected  a 
member,  179. 

Bii.tia  uatai/,  seed  of.  with  twin  seed- 
lings, exhibited.  319. 

Butterflies,  new  forms  of.  from  the 
South  Pacific.  468. 

Caltistemoti  r>ach i/ph filltts ,  two  forms 
exhibited,  221 — viminalis,  two  forms 
exhibited.  221. 

Campbell,   .1.   H.,  congratulations  to, 

472. 


INDEX. 


U. 


Carabidae  of  Tasmania,  113 — which 
raiisre  beyond  Australia  and  its  de- 
pendent  Islands,  320. 

C'arbunit'eioiis  limestone  fossils  from 
N.S.W.,  364. 

Carter,  H.  J.,  Notes  on  some  new 
Australian  Tenebrionidae,  with  de- 
scriptions of  new  species, — also  of 
a  new  genus  and  species  of  Bupres- 
tidae.  222 — see  Exhibits. 

Ceratopetalum  gummiferum,  with 
white  Howers,  exhibited,  473. 

Chaetodacus  tri/oni,  exhibited.  203. 

Chalcophoritiae,  exhibited,  531. 

Chapman,  F.,  Lower  Carboniferous 
Limestone  fossils  from  N.S.W.,  364. 

Chapman,  II.  G.,  elected  a  vice-presi- 
dent, 179. 

Chase,  Eleanor  E.,  A  new  Avian  Tre- 
matode,  500. 

Cheel,  E.,  see  Exhibits. 

Chemical  Examination  of  ilacrozamia 
spiralis,  424. 

Chiromyzini,   Revision  of,  532. 

Chromatism,  Aroids  illustrating,  204. 

Chri/somi/ia  bezziava,  exhibited,  472 — 
du.r.  exhibited,  203 — flai'iceps,  ex- 
hibited, 472 — niqriceps,  exliibited, 
472— rufifaacies.  exliibited.  203,  472 
—  varipes,  exhibited,  203. 

Chnisomyza  aenea,  exhibited.  472. 

Clarke,  H.   P.,  elected  a  member,  179. 

Cleland,  .J.   B.,  congratulations  to,  7. 

Clements,  F.  M.,  bequest  of  books 
and  pictures,  472 — reference  to 
death,  318. 

Clytneosmivs,  undescribed  species  of, 
183. 

Coccid  galls  nn  Eucali/ptus  saliqna, 
exhibited,  319. 

Cocos  1/ataii,  seed  of,  exhibited,  319. 

Coleoptera,  new  species  of  Australian, 
,375. 

Collins,  Marjorie  T.,  appointed  Lin- 
nean  Macleay  Fellow  in  Botany,  10 
— Certain  Variations  of  the  Sporo- 
cyst  in  a  species  of  Saprnler/nia, 
277 — On  the  structure  of  the  resin- 
secrctinsr  elands  in  some  Australian 
plants,  329. 

Columbn  livln  domestica  Nematode 
parasites   of,  in   Australia,  552. 

Concretion,  exhibited,  404. 

Cotton,  L.  A.,  congratulations  to,  203 
— letter  returning  tlianks,  221. 

Crepis  setosa.  exhibited,  318. 

Cup  moth  on  Waratah.  exhibited.  318. 

Currabubula  District.  Geology'.  Pal- 
aeontolocv  .nnd  Petrocraphv  of.  28.5, 
337,  405.' 


Cyanogenesis  in   Plants,  iv.,  447. 
Cjiphopaslra,    exhibited,    531. 
Cyrioides  sex-spilota,  exhibited,  531 . 

Danes,  J.  V.,  elected  a  member,  531. 
David,  Sir  Edgcworth,  cniigratulations 

to.  472. 
Delphacidac,    Australian,    new    genus 

of,  181. 
Dental  incrustations  and  the  so-called 

gold  plating  of  sheep's  teeth,  324. 
Devonian  Brachiopods  from  N.S.W., 

exhibited,  473. 
Diptera  Bracliyccra,  Life  Histories  of 

Australian,  505. 
Dixson,  T.   Storie.,  congratulations  to, 

7. 
Dodd,  A.    P.,  Two  new  Hymenoptera 

of  superfamily  P roctotri/pidae  from 

Australia,  443. 
Donations    and    Exchanges,    51,    179, 
203,  221,  265,  318,  404,  472,  531. 
Drought,  remarks  on,  in  Presidential 

Address,  15. 
Dun.  W.    S.,  see  Mitchell  and  Dun— 

see  Benson.  Dun,  and  Browne. 
Dwver.  .T.  W..  elected  a  member,  179. 

Elections.  47,  179,  203,  265.  318,  404, 
.531. 

Elston,  A.   H.,  elected  a  member,  179. 

Epacris  purpurascens.  double  flower- 
ed, exhibited,  404. 

Erigernti  liii.ifoUiis.  living  plants  ex- 
hibited, 404. 

Eriostemon  Croirei,  with  white  flow- 
ers, exhibited,  473 — lanceolatus, 
showing  double  flowers  and  deterior- 
ation of  stamens,  exhibited,  473 — 
with  white  flowers,  exhil)ited.  473. 

Etheridge.  R..  .Ir..  Obituary  notice,  5. 

EiccaliiptHs  saligna,  stunted  branch, 
with  cluster  of  galls,  exhibited.  319. 

Eupatorium  qlnndulosum,  exhibited, 
318. 

Ewprosopia  puuctifacies,  exhibited, 
203. 

EusgUidae.   Australian.   90. 

Exhibits:— 

Blakely,  W.  P..  Eupatorium  glati- 
dulnsHin  and  Crepis  setosa,  318 — 
hybrid  form,  Bornnia  serrulate  x 
B.  fhribinida  and  variety  of  B. 
serrulata.  404. 

Brewster,  Agnes  A..  Eriostemon 
lanceolatus  showing  double  flow- 
ers and  deterioration  of  stamens, 
473. 


INDEX. 


Exhibits : — 

Carter,  H.  J.,  Six  Australian  gen- 
era of  Chalcophorinae,  531 — 
Three  closely-alhed  dyphoijastra, 
531 — Cyrioides  sex-spilola,  531 — 
New  species  of  Stigmodera,  531 
New  sfenus  from  Port  Macquarie, 
531.  ^ 

Cheel,  E.,  Ceratopetalum  gummi- 
ferum  with  white  flowers,  473 — 
Double-fioweriiig  peach-tree  (Pru- 
nu»  persica  var.  dianthi  flora). 
203 — Erigeron  litiifoliiis,  living- 
plants  of,  404 — specimens  of  wild 
strawberry,  Fragraria  indica,  404 
— Kennedi/a  ruhicunda  with  afreen- 
ish-wliite  flowers,  473 — Leaf  and 
fruits  of  Pisovia  Briinoniana,  180 
— rare  lichen  from  Mt.  Kosciusko, 
265 — species  of  Boronia  with 
double  flowers,  473 — species  of 
Bormiia  with  white  flowers,  473 — 
two  distinct  forms  of  CaUistemon 
viminnlis.  221 — two  forms  of  CaU 
listenxin  pacliuyihiiUw),  221 — 
white  flowerinsr  Eriostemon  lance- 
olatiis  and  E.  Croicei,  473. 

Ferguson,  E.  W.,  imasjo  .and  larvae 
of  niuscid  fly,  265. 

Fletcher,  .7.  ,J.,  lenf  of  Jacarand-a 
ovalifoUa,  204 — flowering  bran- 
ches, reversion  shoots;  and  seed- 
lings of  Acacias,  204 — specimens 
of  Persoonia  lucida,  531 — stunted 
branch  of  Eucali/phift  sn/i^na  with 
cluster  of  female  galls,  319. 

Froggatt,  .1.  L.,  Marti/)iia  lutea,  a 
noxious  weed  in  part-s  of  Queens- 
land, 180. 

Froggatt,  W.  W..  Bag  Shelter  or 
Boree  Moth  ( Team  contraria) , 
531 — Cup  Moth  {Apnda  xglo- 
meli)  on  Waratah,  318 — series  of 
flies  from  India,  472 — Bibio  imi- 
tator. 472 — Tobacco  thrips  from 
the  Tamworth  District,  180. 

Hamilton,  A.  A.,  Aroids  illustr.at- 
ing  Chromatism,  Virescence  and 
Multiplication  of  spathes,  204 — 
seed  of  Bidin  i/alnii  which  had 
produced  twin  seedlings,  .319. 

Hardy,  G.  H.,  pair  of  flies,  Chry- 
aomgsn  aenea,  472. 

Hynes,  Sarah.,  concretion,  404. 

Jacol)S,  E.  G..  Evarris  pHrpuras- 
cens  showing  double  flowers,  404. 


Exhibits  :— 

McCulloch.    A.     R.,    collection    of 

fishe-s,  203. 
Mitchell,  J.,  Silurian  and  Devonian 
brachiopods  from  N.S.W..  473. 

Smith,  Vera  Irwin,  common  bag 
moth  (Metnra  elongata)  ;  its 
method  of  progression  on  vertical 
pane  of  glass,  318. 

Steel,  T.,  pin  embedded  in  liver  of 
fowl,  318. 

Taylor,  F.  H.,  sheep  maggot-flies 
and  fruit  fly  pests,  203. 

Turner,  F.,  Amaratttus  marcocarpus 
aiid  Boerhaavia  diffusa  from 
Wootton  Station,  Upper  Hunter, 
179 — Remarks  on  Stipa  aristi- 
glumis  from  Liverpool  Plains  and 
Aviaacantha  muricata  in  Brewar- 
rina  District,  179-180 — specimen 
of  Lolium  temiiletitum,  531. 

Walkom,  A.  B.,  Seeds  associated 
with   Glosgopteris,  531. 

Watorhouse,  G.  A.,  First  and  .sec- 
ond generations  of  crosses  of 
Tisiphone  aheona  and  T.  rawns- 
leyi,  531 — Ileteront/mpha  mirifica 
and  R.  paradelpha  reared  from 
larvae,  531 — Five  Butterflies  rear- 
ed from  d"  Tisiphone  rawnsleyi 
mated  with  ?  T.  abeona.  221— 
Ileterongmpha  solandri  reared 
from  egg,  472. 

Ferguson,  E.  W.,  see  Exhibits — and 
Hill,  G.  F.,  Notes  on  Australian 
Tabanidae,  460. 

Fishes,  small  collection  of,  exhibited, 
203. 

Fletclier.  J.  .1.,  On  the  correct  inter- 
pretation of  the  so-called  Phyllodes 
of  Australian  Phyllodineous  Aca- 
cias, 24 — Presidential  Address,  1 — 
The  Society's  Heritage  from  the 
Madcays.  507 — see  Exhibits. 

Flies,  Australian,  of  the  family  Asili- 
dae,  185 — from  India,  exhibited, 
472. 

Fossils,  Lower  Carboniferous  Lime- 
stone, from  N.S.W.,  .364. 

Fowl,  pin  embedded  in  liver  of,  ex- 
hibited, 318. 

Fragraria  ivdica.  exhibited,  404. 

Friend,  N.  B.,  elected  a  member,  318. 

Fruggatt,  .T.   L.,  see  Exhibits. 


INDEX. 


Frogg'att,  W.    \V.,  elected  a  \-ice-pre- 

sident,  17f) — see  Exhibits. 
Fiirst,  H.   v.,  elected  a  member,  404. 

Galls  oil  biancli  of  EucaU/ptus  saligna, 
exhibited,  319. 

Gellatly,  P.  M.,  Obituary,  G. 

Genitalia,  male,  of  some  robber-flies 
belonging  to  the  Asilinae,  250. 

Geologv  and  Petrology  of  Great  Ser- 
pentine Belt  of  NVS.W.,  Part  ix., 
285,  337,  405. 

Glands,  resin-secreting,  in  some  Aus- 
tralian plants,  329. 

Glossopteris.  seeds  associated  with,  ex- 
hibited, 531. 

"Gold-plating"   of  sheep's  teeth,  324. 

Hamilton,  A.  A.,  Notes  from  the  Bo- 
tanic Gardens.  Sydney,  260 — see 
Exhibits. 

,  A.  G.,  elected  a  vice-presi- 
dent, 179. 

Hardy,  G.  H.,  Australian  Flies  of  the 
Family  Asiliilae,  185 — On  the  male 
genitalia  of  some  robber-flies  be- 
longing to  the  subfamily  Asilinae, 
250 — Revision  of  the  Chiromvzini 
(Diptera),  532— see  Exliibits. 

Haswell,  W.  A.,  Australian  Syllidae, 
Eiisi/Uidae  and  Autolytidae,  00. 

Hedley,  C,  elected  a  \-ice-president, 
179! 

Henry,  Marguerite,  elected  a  member, 
531. 

Heterodendrnn.  Hydrocyanic  Aeid  of. 
447. 

Heteroni/mpha  mirifica.  exhibited,  531 
— paradelpha.  exhibited,  531 —  so- 
londri,  reared  from  egg,  exhibited, 
472. 

Hill,  G.  F.,  see  Ferguson  and  Hill. 

Honour  Koll,  3 — Invitation  to  sub- 
scribe to.  170 — unveiled.  210. 

Hybrid  form,  Bnronia  serrnlatn  x  B. 
florihimda.  exhibited,  404. 

Hydrocyanic  acid  of  Heterodendron. 
447.  ■ 

Hymenoptera,  Two  new,  of  the  super- 
familv  Prnctotn/pidae  from  Aus- 
tralia', 443. 

Hymes.  j\riss  S.,  resolution  re  Rowan 
Collection  of  Paintings.  47 — see  Ex- 
hibits . 

lek-Hewins,  E.  T.  .7.,  elected  a  mem- 
ber. 404. 

Institute  of  Patholosical  Research, 
establishment  of,  203. 

International  Research  Council,  pro- 
posed, 11. 


Jacaranda  ovalifoUa,  exhibited,  204. 
Jacobs,  E.   G.,  see  Exhibits. 

Kennedya  rubicunda,  with  gi'eenish- 
white  flowers,  exhibited,  473. 

Lea,  A.  M.,  Descriptions  of  new  spe- 
cies of  Australian  Coleoptera,  Part 
xvi.,  375. 

Lepidoptera,  Australian,  474. 

Liclien  from  Mt.  Kosciusko,  exhibited, 
2(i5. 

Life  Histories  of  Australian  Diptera 
Brachycera,  i.,  505. 

Linnean  Macleay  Fellowships,  an- 
nouncement, 472,  531 . 

Lip(tridae,  Revision  of,  474. 

Lolium  temtilentum,  exhibited,  531 . 

Lord  Howe  Is.,  Notes  on  botany  of, 
564. 

Lower  Carboniferous  Limestone  Fos- 
sils from  N.S.W.,  364. 

Lucilia  craggii,  exhibited,  472 —  fueina, 
exhibited,  203 — serenissima,  exhibit- 
ed, 472— Solaia.  exhibited,  203. 

Macleay  Centenary  Meeting,  218 — 
date  announced,  179. 

Macleays,  The  Society's  Heritage  from, 
567." 

Macrozamia  spiralis,  chemical  exam- 
ination of,  424. 

Maiden,  J.  H.,  Few  notes  on  the 
Botany  of  Lord  Howe  Is.,  564. 

Martt/nia  lutea,  exhibited,  180. 

McCulloeh.  A.   R.,  see  Exhibits. 

Members,  List  of,  649. 

Metoponia  rubriceps,  505. 

Metitra  elongata,  exhibited,  318. 

Mitchell,  .1.,  New  Brachiopods  from 
Middle  Palaeozoic  Rocks  of  N.S.W., 
543— see  Exhibits—  and  Dun.  W. 
S.,  The  Atriipidae  of  N.S.W.,  with 
references  to  those  recorded  from 
other  States  of  Australia,  266. 

Muir.  F.,  New  genus  of  Australian 
Delphacidae,  181. 

Muscid  fly,  imago  and  larvae,  exhibit- 
ed, 265. 

Nematode  Parasites  of  domestic 
pigeon  in  Australia,  552. 

NeopoUenia  papua,  exhibited,  203. 

Neuropteroid  Insects  of  Hot  Springs 
Region.  N.Z.,  in  relation  to  problem 
of  Trout  Food,  205. 

New  South  Wales.  Lower  Carbonifer- 
ous Limestone  Fossils  from,  364 — 
New  Brachiopods  from  Middle  Pal- 
aeozoic Rocks.  543. 


INDEX. 


Noble,  K.  J.,  elected  a  member,  203. 
Notes  from  the  Botanic  Gardens,  Syd- 
ney, 260. 

O'Dwyer,  Margaret  11..  elected  a  mem- 
ber, 531. 
Ophyra  analis,  esbibited,  203. 

Pacific,  New  forms  of  Butterflies  from 
the  South,  468. 

Fauorpoid  complex.  Additions  and 
corrections  to  Part  3.,  214. 

Pan-Pacitic   Science  Congress,   265. 

Parasites,  Nematode,  of  domestic 
pigeon  in  Australia,  552. 

Peach-tree,  double-flowering,  exhibit- 
ed, 203. 

Persoania  lucUla,  exhibited,  531. 

Petrie,  J.  M..  Linnean  Macleay  Fel- 
low in  Biochemistry:  ("yanogenesis 
in  Plants,  iv.  The  Hydrocyanic  Acid 
of  Heterodendron,  447 — re-ajjpoint- 
ed  1920-21,  10 — summary  of  year's 
work,  8 — The  chemical  Examination 
of  Macrozamia  spiralis,  424. 

Pliyllodes.  On  the  correct  interpreta- 
tion of  so-called,  of  Australian 
Fhyllodineous  Acacias,  24. 

Pigeon,  Domestic,  Nematode  parasites 
of,  in  Australia,  552. 

Pincombe,  T.  H.,  elected  a  member, 
179. 

Pisonia  Brunoniana,  exhibited,  180. 

Presidential  Address,  by  J.  J.  Flet- 
cher, 1 . 

Proceedings,  change  of  size,  7. 

Priictotnipidae,  Two  new  Hymenop- 
tera  of  superfamily,  443. 

Prntius  persica  var.  dianthiflora,  ex- 
hibited, 203. 

Pi/rellia  naronea,  exhibited,  203. 

Rainbow,  W.    .7.,  Obituary  notice,  5. 

Resin-secreting  glands  in  some  Aus- 
tralian plants,  329. 

R<»vision  of  Australian  Lepidoptera — 
Liparidne.  474 — of  the  Chiromvzini, 
532. 

Pichardia  nfricana.  exhibited.  204 — 
Elliottimia  x  Pentlandii,  exhibited, 
204. 

Robber-flics,  male  genitalia  of  some. 
2,50. 

Roi)iness  in  Wiittle  Bark  Infusions,  52. 

Rowan  Collection  of  Painting?:.  47. 

Saprolefinia.  Variation.s  of    sporocyst 

in  a  species  of,  277. 
Reeds     associated     with     Gluf^snpteris. 

exhibited,  .531. 


Serpentine  Belt  of  N.S.W.,  Fart  ix., 
285,  337,  405. 

Sheep's  teeth,  "gold-plating"  of,  324. 

Silurian  Brachiopods  from  N.S.W., 
exhibited,  473. 

Sloane,  T.  G.,  Carabidae  of  Ta.smania. 
113 — List  of  species  of  Australian 
Carabidae  which  range  beyond  Aus- 
tralia and  its  dependent  Islands. 
320. 

Smith,  R.  Greig,  Macleay  Bacteriol- 
ogist to  the  Society:  Ropiness  in 
Wattle  Bark  Infusions,  52 — sum- 
mary of  year's  work,  8. 

Smith,  Vera  Irwin,  Linnean  Macleay 
Fellow  in  Zoology:  Life  Histories  of 
Australian  Diptera  Brachycera.  i . 
SIratiomijiidae,  50.5 — Nematode  Par- 
asites of  the  domestic  pigeon  in 
Australia,  552 — re-appointed  1920- 
21,  10 — summary  of  year's  work, 
10 — see  Exhibits. 

Spathes,  multiplication  of,  in  Aroids, 
204. 

Sporocyst,  variations  of,  in  Saproleg- 
nia,  277. 

Stamens,  deterioration  of,  in  Erios- 
temon  lancenlatus,  exhibited,  473. 

Steel,  T.,  On  dental  incrustations  and 
so-called  "gold-plating"  of  sheep's 
teeth,   324— see   Exhibits. 

Stephens,  Harry,  Obituary  notice,  4. 

Stifjmodera,  new  species,  exhibited, 
531. 

Stratiomi/iidae,  .505. 

Strawberry,  specimens  of  wild,  ex- 
hibited, 404. 

Stuart,  Professor  T.  P.  A..  Oliituary 
notice,  5. 

Si/Uidar,  Austr.-dian.  00. 

Tabanidac,  Notes  on  Australian.  460. 

Tasmania,  Carabidae  of,  113. 

Tavlor.  A.   S.,  dected  a  member,  179. 

Taylor,  F.   H.,  see  Exhibits. 

Teara  cmilraria.  exhibited,  531. 

Tebbutf,  Dr.  A.  II.  elected  a  mem- 
ber. 265. 

Teeth,  sheep's,  "gold-plating"  of.  324. 

Tenebrionidae,  Australian,  222. 

Thrips  striatit.^.  exhibited.  180. 

Tillyard.  R.  .!..  Linnean  Macleay  Fel- 
low in  Zoology :  Panorpoid  complex. 
Additions  and  corrections  to  Part 
3.,  214 — Report  on  Neuropteroid 
Insects  of  Hot  Springs  Region, 
N.Z..  in  relation  to  problem  of  trout 
food.  205 — summary  of  year's  work, 
8. 

Tisipfiniir     ahroiid.     I'xhibited.     221  — 


INDEX. 


rawnslei/i,  exhibited,  221 — rawnsleyi 
X  T.  abeona.  exhibited,  531. 

Trematode,  A  new  avian,  500. 

Trout  food,  Neuropteroid  Insects  of 
TTot  Sprinars  Region,  N.Z.,  in  rela- 
tion to,  205. 

Turner.  A.  .7.,  Revision  of  Australian 
Lepidoptera-Ljpnrf'rfoc,    474. 

Turner,  F.,  see  Exhibits. 

Variations  of  the  sporocyst  in  a  spe- 
cies of  Saprolegnia,  271 . 
Virescenee,  Aroids  illustrating,  204. 

Walkom,  A.  B.,  appointment  as  Sec- 
retary, 11 — see  Exhibits. 


Waratah,  Cup  Moth  (Apoda  xylomeli) 

on,  exhibited,  318. 
Wardlaw,  H.  S.  H.,  Linnean  Macleay 

Fellow  in  Physiology:   summary  of 

year's  work,  9. 
Waterhouse,    G.    A.,    Descriptions    of 

new  forms   of  Butterflies   from   the 

South  Pacific,  468— see  Exhibits. 
Wattle   Bark   Infusions,   Ropiness   in, 

52. 
Watts,    W.    W.,   reference   to    death, 

404. 
Wilson,   Prof.   J.    T.,   congratulations 

to,  219— unveils  Honour  Roll.  219. 


TU. 


(b)  BIOLOGICAL  INDEX. 
Synonyms   are  printed   in   italics:  new     names  in  small  capitils. 


Page. 

Abaeetus     156 

Abax  reichei     ■  ■    ■  ■     ItJO 

Abraeits 377 

Acacia 25,  331 

acauthocarpa  .'.       30 

alata 31 

armata    33,  329,  331- 

333 

aulaeocarpa 

.     481 

Baileyana   .  .    . 

.       37 

BidwiUi      ..    . 

.       38 

Burkitti      .  .     . 

.       30 

buxifolia    . .    . 

.       43 

eultiata      . .    . 

.       33 

Cunninghami   . 

.     447 

cyanopliyUa 

.       38 

dealbata      . .    . 

.       38 

decipiens     . .   . 

.       33 

decurrens     35,  37,  43 

discolor     29,    35,    37, 

204 

dodonaefolia    . .     331 

elata     

37 

excelsa 

.       31 

exsudans    . .    . .     331 

falcata   . .    32,  33,  39 

floribunda  ....       45 

Gilbeiti      ....       38 

hetcrophylla.    31,    43- 

45 

implexa   . .    . .   31,  33 

implexa  (?)     . .       40 

Jonesii 37 

juniperina        . .     319 

leprosa  . .  42,  43,  331 

leptoclada  ....       33 

Lindleyi      ....       38 

linifolia      ..    .i       32 

longrifolia    . .  33,  38-9 

maeradenia       .  .       37 

melanoxvlon,    31,    33, 

38,  43,  45 

niTrtifoHa,    32-3,    39, 

43 

Oswald)      ....       30 

pachycarpa      .  .        38 

pcndula      .  .    .  .     531 

podalvriaofolia  33.  40 

polybotrya       . .       33 

piMunosa     . .    . 

37 

pvcnantha,      43,      :)2, 
329.  331,  333 
rubida   .  .    .  .  31,  43-4 


Page 
Acacia  rupicola     329,  331 

salicina 26 

suaveolens    .  .    33,    39 
suberosa     . .  38 

uncinata     ....       45 
verniciHua   329.  331-2 
verticillata    . .    30,  39 
Acblya  ....  278-9,  281-4 

Acidopsilus 445 

Acroniopus 378 

Actina  tibialis  .  .  522,  528 
Aetinoconcbus   plano- 

sulcata  .  .  290,  351,  369 

Actinocrinidae  . .    . .     342 

Actinocrimis  sp.     . .     342 

Acupalpus    mastersi      137 

piceus    ....  321,  323 

Acypbas    .  .    475-6,   480-2 

ampbideta     . .     481-2 

chionitis   . .    . .     481-2 

fulviceps  . .    . .    481-2 

ftisea 482 

leptotypa   . .    . .     481 
leucomelas  ....     481 

Addaea 214 

AdeUiiiae     ....  232,  246 

Adelium 238 

anpilatum  ....     232 
angiilienlle        .  .      232 

bicolor 232 

brevicome  .  .    .  .     247 

ealosomoides  232,  246 

POLITUII       . .     . .      247 

rea:ulare      .  .    .  .     247 

seytalicum  ....     232 

Adelotopus  ....  116,  177 

baemorrboidalis,  177-8 

scolytides  ....   177-8 

tasmani    . .    . .    177-8 

Adiantum   formosum     564 

Aepbnidins  adeloides     .322 

Ageratum  eonyzoides    566 

Agonica 130 

ovalipexnis  . .  131 
SIMSONI  . .  . .  1.30-1 
Agoxicini  ....  119,  129 
AgoTioobila  ....  170,  174 
biguttata  .  .  .  .  174-G 
BlifACm.ATA       . .      174 

binotata  . .  174-5,  322 
corticnlis    .  .     ■  ■     174 

curtula 17} 

fen**trata  ....  174-5 


Page. 

Agouocbila  flindersi 

174-5 
plagiata  .  .  . .  174-5 
sinuosa      . .    . .    174-5 

\'ittula 175 

AgTiini 115,  117 

Ailantlius  glandulosa       36 

Albizzia 331 

Alectryon  coriaceus  450 
excelsum  . .  . .  450 
tomentosus  .  .  450 
Aleoebara  puberula  375 
Allognosta  ..  533.  541-2 
assamensis  533,  542 
baibiellinii      533,  542 

brevis 542 

erassa  . .  . .  533,  542 
crassitarsis  533,  542 
dorsalis  ....  533,  542 
fuscitarsis  .  .  533,  542 
inermis  ....  533,  542 

lata 533.  542 

obscuriventris  533, 542 
pallipes  ....  533,  542 
similis  ....  533,  542 
vagans   . .    533,  541-2 

Alocasia 458 

macrorrhiza      .  .     458 

Alphitdbins 226 

liLAIRI 225 

XAMIAPHILA        ■  ■        225 

Alstonia  constricta.  .     447 

Alveolites 365-6 

septosa .'!(>6 

Amarinae 116 

Amblygiiatbus  minutus  136 
Ambl'yosyllis    ..     ..    108-9 

granosa 109 

madeirensis      .  .      108 

spectabilis  . .    . .     108 

Amblv.<;tomus,     115,     131, 

135 

coxvExtJs  . .    . .     136 

giittatus 321 

indiciis 321 

mctallir-ns   .  .    .  .     320 

niger 136 

ovalis 136-7 

parvus 136 

stenolopboides  . .    ,321 

AniblyteTns 152^3 

bre\-is     178 

(•nrtns    ....  153,  155 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Amblytelus  ciirtus  var. 

vittata 155 

NIGER 153-4 

plac'idus  . .  153,  155 
siMSONi  . .  . .  153-4 
STRIATUS      .  .    ■  ■      153 

Ameletus 208 

Amphibia  pallipes  ■  ■  321 
Amvcjdalophyllum  341 
etiiebidgei  2s)u,  339 
Anacanthoberis  533,  541-2 
Anchoruenmi    . .    120,   lt>4 

Anc'homenus 164 

margineUus  . .  164 
Anehonderini  .  .  .  .  116 
Aiicijrona  arnica     ■  ■     377 

vesca 37  < 

Andropogou  sorghum    459 

Aiieimites 337 

ovata 297 

Anemia 225 

CAULOBIOIDES     .  .        224 

denticulata       . .     224 

sardoa 224 

Anisacantha  muricata    189 
Anisodactvlns  discoideus 

115 

Anisotarsus 115 

Anomites   resupinata     345 
Anomotarus    .  .    170,    176 

aeneus 176 

Anoplosi/llis  fulva  •  ■     102 

Anthelidae 474 

Anthemis 333 

Antbicidae   ....   379,  380 

Anthious  albanyensis    380 

australis      ■  ■    ■  ■     381 

exiguus 381 

glabricollis        ■  ■     381 

hesperi 380 

immaculatus     . .     380 

inflatus 380 

intricatus    .  .    .  .     379 

krefftii 381 

mastersi  ■  ■  ■  ■  380 
myrteus  .  .  . .  381 
nitidissimus  . .  381 
ovipennis  ■  ■  ■  ■  370 
propinqims       ■  ■     381 

rarus 381 

seydmaenoides         380 

similiff 3°" 

xerophikis  ....      381 

Antbiini 117 

Antbomyia 527 

Anthurium  Andreannm 

204 

chelseiensis       . .     204 

Anticyra  approximata  498 


Page. 
Antipha   basalis      ■  ■     496 

Apasis 242 

Aplanes     . .     278-9,  281-4 
Apoda  xylomeli      . .     318 

Apotominae 116 

Apotomini 120 

Apotomus     116 

ApropbyUum  ballense  341 
Areliaeocalamites,         292, 
297,  337 
Archichauloides  dubi- 

tatiis 206 

Are»llia  antica  •  -   •  •     498 

Argutor  holomelanus    158 

niticUpenn/is     ■  ■     158 

Aroa  exoleta     . .    . .     499 

Arsipoda 401 

Artaxa  arrogans  ■  ■  48C 
clurysophila  ,■  ■  480 
(•ompacta  . .    .  .     499 

iobrota 480 

ludfuga      .  ■    ■  ■     484 

meek't 486 

simulans     ■  ■    ■  ■     485 

usta 499 

Arytera 329 

Asearidia      559 

columbae,     552,    559, 

560-1 

maculosa     •  -    •  ■     560 

Ascaristeres 559 

columbae  •  ■  ■  ■  559 
maculosa  ■  ■   ■  ■  559-60 

sp 559 

Asilidae 185,  505 

Asilinae.     186,  190,  250-1 

Asilus 251,  524 

aeutang-ulus  189-90 
alcetas    ..    252,  257-9 

alicis     195 

alligans   .  .  189.  256-7 

amiicla 255 

amythaon  ■  •    ■  ■     258 

aniilco 196 

armatus     ■  ■    ■  ■  195-G 

aureus 251 

australis  .  .  .  .  189 
belzebulb,  >. .  . .  189 
blasio  ....  252,  257-8 

centlw 255 

cilicatus  .  .  .  .  189 
eoedicius  .  .  .  .  189 
cognatus  ■  ■  ■  ■  195 
erabroniformis  189 
<fiscuUens   ■  ■    ■  •     255 

elieitus 189 

exilis  ....  188-9,  201 
feriferus     . .    . .     189 


Page. 

Asilus  ferrugineiven- 

tris 189,  252-4 

filiferus  ....  188,  201 
fraternus  .  .  .  .  193 
fulvipubesceuce      189 

(iENITALIS    ....    251-3 

hyaguis 254 

inglorius  252,  255-6 
jacksonii  ■  •  ■  ■  258 
laticornis  . .  . .  189 
longiventris  . .  189 
luctificus  . .  . .  193 
malleolus  252,  255-6 
margitis  . .  . .  199 
maiicus      . .    . .     189 

maso 258 

mistipes  ■  ■  ■  ■  202 
murinus  252-3,  257-8 
nigrinus  . .  .  .  189 
tiigritarsis  ■  ■  ■  ■  258 
obumbratus  . .  189 
pelago    ..    252,  255-6 

planus 256 

regius  ....  189,  251 
rubrithorax  . .  252-3 
rufiventris  252,  256-7 
rufoeoxatus  .  .  189 
rufometatarsis  189, 
196 
rufotarsis  .  .  .  196 
sericeiventris  ■  ■  256 
setifemoratus  195-6 
sydneensis  ....  258 
sydneyensis,  252,  257-8 
tasmaniaes  .  .  ..  258 
trach-alus  ■  .  ■  ■  259 
Hnilineatus  ....  255 
varifemoratus  .  .  189 
villaticus     ....     201 

mttipes 195 

Asparagus  plumosus 
var .  nanus     . .    . .     566 

Aspbalus      230 

Aster  subnlatus      . .     566 

Atalava  heraiglauea.  .    447 

Atalophlebia      ....     208 

Athtiris  planosulcatus    351 

Athvris  rovssii  ....     354 

Atrvpa.  266,  268-70,  272-5 

aspera  . .   , ,  267,  274 

desquamata,  266,  268, 

271,  274 

DUNTROONENSIS        266, 

270 

ERECTIROSTRIS         266-8 

fimbriata    .  .     .  .     274 
beadii  var.  angliea  271 

bvstrix 274 

marginalis    266,  268-9 


IX. 


TNDEZ. 


Page. 

Atrypa  plicatella  26ii,  271 

PULCHRA.  2t)6,  270,  5-48 

reticularis,         266-71, 

273,  548,  55'i 

reticularis  var.  as- 

pera 207 

reticularis  var.  de- 
currens    .  .    .  .     274 

sp. 274 

spinosa 274 

Atrypidae   . .    . .   266,  272 

Atrypoidea  ....  266,  271 

ANGUSTA,      266,      273, 

543,  549 

AUSTRALis,  266.  272-3, 

543,  547,  549 

Aur.truperla   cyreue       207 

Autolvtidae 90 

Autolytus 109 

paehycerus       . .     109 
A\dculopecten    gran- 

osus 290,  356 

knockonensis    . .     356 

sp 290-1,  350 

Axiologa  ....  475-6,  495 

pura 495 

Axynaon    championi    249 

Baceharis 333 

Bacillus     coli     com- 
munis    54 

Bacterium   acaeiae. .  86 
Atherstonei  ....  85-6 
metarabinum    .  .  86 
Badamia       exclama- 
tion is  SUBFLAVA   .  •  471 
Banksia     serratifolia  479 
Barran<lella  linguifer  548 
linguit'er  var.  wil- 
kinsoni,    267,  543, 
549-50 

MOLONGENSIS  543,  548 

Basolia 117 

BaifJea    koninckii    ■  ■     3.58 

Bellcrophon 309 

cf.   liiulcus,  290.  359- 
60 

eostatus :     360 

sp 290,  359-01) 

Belytidae 445 

Bembidiini   ..    ..   119,  151 

Beml)idium 151 

bipai-titum  ....     144 

dubium 151 

europs 321 

haniil'erum  ....     321 

hobarti 173 

opulontum  ....     321 
riverinae     ■  ■    ■  ■     321 


Page. 

Bembidium  secaloides    144 

Beridinae,   533,   535,   537, 

540 

Beris  b  re  vis 542 

clialybeata,  522,  526-7 
fuacitarsis  ■  ■    ■  ■     542 

lata 5-42 

sp 522 

Bibio  imitator  .  .  . .  472 
Binellia  tayloriana. .  203 
Boerhaavia  diffusa.  .     179 

Bolbopbanes 231 

Bombylidau 505 

Bumbi/x  lutea   ■  ■    ■  ■     480 

obsoleta 498 

BoKEOiDES  . .   . .  533,  540 
suBULATus  . .  533,  640 

Boreomyia 539 

subidata     ■  ■  533,  540 
Boronia  Uoribunda.  .     404 
lediiolia      .  .    .  .     473 
ledifolia  var.  ros- 

marinifolia  . .     473 
ledifolia  var.   tri- 
phylla     ....     473 

pinnata 473 

rosmarinifolia  473 
serrulata  ....  404 
serrulata  var.  . .  404 
triphylla  ....  473 
Braeliycliiton   popul- 

neus 447 

Bracbydema 139 

tasmaniae  .  .  .  .  139 
vicloriae     ■  •    ■  ■     139 

Brachylaena 333 

Bracbvninae 116 

Bracbynini  ....  115,  120 
Bracbyscelis   munita      319 

Brises 231 

Bronteus  jenkinsi  .  .  267 
Broscini   . .    115,  119,  124 

Bn/axis 376 

Bryeopia.  223,  237-9,  246 
angulata  ....  247 
cheesmani  ....  246-7 
coelioidos  .  .  238,  247 
COMATA  . .  . .  244,  246 
crenaticollis  245,  247 
diemeneusis    .  .    237-8 

dubia     247 

femorata  .  .  . .  247 
G[.OBicx)LLi.s  .  .  244-5 
globulosa  . .  . .  247 
HEXAGONA    237,  245-7 

i,EAi 245,247 

longipes      .  .    .  .     247 

minor 247 

minuta  ....  237,  246 


Page. 

Bryeopia  momlicornis   247 

OBTUSA 245-7 

picta      247 

pilosella  .  .  237,  245-6 
punctatissima  .  .     247 

taylori 247 

tuberculifera  .  .  247 
Buprestidae  ....  222,  531 
Butia  yatay 319 

Cabasa  pulchella  . .  185-6 
Tubrithorax  •  ■  185-6 
rufi thorax  ....  185 
venno 185 

Cactoerinus 342 

•'.    BROWNE!      293,    342 

ectypus 342 

Cadmus  fasciaticollis    382 

Caedius   .. 223 

spbaeroides      . .     223 

tuberculatum     ■■     223 

Caesalpinia  Gilliesii     33-4 

Cafiui)  amblyterus  ■  •     375 

laeus 375 

Calamites     ....   297,  315 
C alamo pora  tenieisepta  341 

Calliandra 35 

portoricensis  . .  34 
Callipbora  villosa  . .  444 
Callistemon  pachy- 

pbyUus     ..    ..■  ..     221 

virainalis     .  .    .  .     221 

Calodium  tenue  ....     557 

teiiuisshnum     ■  •     557 

Calosoma  australe  •  •     124 

grandipenne     ■  ■     124 

oceanicum  . .  124,  320 

scbaveri      . .    . .     124 

Wal'keri     . .   124,  320 

Calyptogonia  . .    . .     121 

ATER        ....    114,    121 

Camarotechia  sussmil- 

chi 269 

Caninia 368 

Capillaria 5.50 

eolumbae  ....  557-00 
dujardini    .  .    .  .     557 

tuniida 550 

Capi>aris  Mitebelli       447, 
449 

Carabidae 323 

apertae  ....  119,  124 

biperforatae        115-7, 

120,  166 

clausae  ....  118.  121 

coniunctae  115-6,  119, 

124 

disiunetae   115-6,  118. 

121 


INDKX. 


X. 


Page. 
Carabidae  uniperforatae 

115-7,  119,   124 

Carabinae 116 

Cai-abini   . .   117,  119,  124 

Carabus 117 

Caragola 492 

Cardiotborax    .  .    232,   237 
aeutaugulus      .  .     232 

aeneus 232 

aeripennis  .  .  .  .  232 
alternatus  . .  234-5 
coeruleo-niger  232,  234 
constrictus  ....  232 
EXCISICOLLIS  . .  236 
bumeralis  .  .  .  .  235-6 
macleai/ensis  ■  •  232 
MARGINATUS  .  •  233 
METALLICUS       .  .    234-5 

quadridentatus.  .  236 
REGULARIS  ....  234-5 
UNDULATICOSTIS         235 

walekenaerii   .  .    233-4 

Carenides 122-3 

Carenum      123 

laevigatum  .  .  123 
laevipenne  ....  123 
morosum  .  .  .  .  173 
politulum  .  .   123,  178 

CarpoL-apsa 216 

Carpophilus  convexi- 

usculus 377 

Cassia  Candolleana   32,  36 

Casuarina  glauca    .  .     447 

Catadromus  ....  152,  164 

elseyi   ....   114,  321 

f  impressus     ■ .     320 

lacordaiiei  ....     164 

tenebrioides      .  .     321 

Catascopuh  australas- 

iae 322 

elegans 322 

Catopherus  corpulen- 

tus 249 

Celaenephes  parallelus  322 

Ceneus 159 

chalybeipennis        162 

Cenogmus   . .    . .   131,  135 

rotundicollis     .  .     135 

Cephalostrongylds     553 

columbae    .  .     .  .     557 

quadriradiatus    554-5, 

_  560 

Ceratocephala  vogdesi 

270,  546 
Ceratopetalum  giim- 

miferum 473 

Cerdistus  australis     188-9, 

201 

sydneyensis    . .    191-2 


Page. 

Chaetetes  ....  286,  364-0 

petrupolitanus         365 

septosus      . .    . .     366 

SPINULIPERUS  290, 

365-6 
Cbaetodacus  tryoni  203 
Chalcis  caUiphorae. .  445 
Cbaleopbora  . .  . .  531 
Cbalcopborinae. .  . .  531 
Cbaleupterus  cairnsi     249 

cupreus 249 

cupriventris      ■  ■     249 

rusticus 249 

setosus 249 

smaragdulus  .  .  249 
C'har7iidas  fulvicepa  482 
Chionophasma  para- 

doxa 478 

Cbiromyia  prisca    ■  ■     539 

vittata 538 

Chiromyza  532,  534,  536-7, 
539 
australis  . .  532,  538 
flavicaput  ■  ■  .  .  534 
t'uscana  ....  532,  538 
krausei  ....  532,  539 
leptit'ormis  532,  538 
ochracea  .  .  532,  538 
paradoxa  .  .  532,  539 
pausleni  . .  532,  539 
prisca  . .  532,  538-9 
transequa  .  .  532,  538 
viciiia  .  .  .  .  532,  539 
vittata  ....  532,  537 

Chiromyzini 533 

Chlaeniinae 116 

Chlaeniini      115,  117,   120 

Chlaenioidius    .  .    152,   164 

herbaceus    ■  ■    ■  ■     322 

meUiei 322 

prolixus    .  .    164,   321 

Chlaenius 117 

australis  . .  . .  178 
binotatus  ■  ■  ■  ■  322 
flavi.guttatus     . .     322 

hamifer 322 

raaculiger  .  .  .  .  322 
ophonoides  .  .  322 
queenslandiciis        322 

Chloromyia 515 

formosa      .  .    .  .     522 

Chonetes   aspinosa        290, 

343 

comoides     . .    . .     343 

hardrensis     293,   343, 

368 

laaruessiana     369,  371 

papilionacea      369-71 

Chorisops  tibialis  522,  528 


333-4 
382 
472 
472 
203 
472 
525 
472 

525-6,  528 
. .  203,  472 

..  ..     203 


522, 


Page. 

Choristites  mosquensis 

348 

Cbrysantbemum 

Cbrysomelidae   . 

Cbrysomyia  albiceps 
bezziana 
dux  .... 
tlaviceps 
formosa    . 
nigriceps 
polita.  .    . 
rut'ifacies 
varipes  . . 

Cbrvsomyza  aenea. .  472 

Chylnus  ....  124,  128-9 

ater 129. 

Cillenum 151 

mastersi      . .    . .  151 

Cleistopora 368 

Clitellaria  epbippium  510, 
522 

Clivina 122 

angustula   ■  •    ■  ■  123 

australasiae      . .  320 

deplanata   ■  ■    ■  ■  123 

dilutipes   . .    123,  320 
dilutipes  var.  tas- 

maniensis    . .   122-3 

discoidalis  . .   . .  122 

dorsalis       . .    . .  122 

epbippiata  ....  320 

eximia 320 

felix 320 

beterogena      .  .    122-3 

lepida   ....    123,  178 

misella 123 

suturalis     . .    .  .  122 

vagans 122-3 

verticalls     .  ■    ■  ■  122 

Cliviuides 122 

Clorinda  linquifera 

var.   wilkinsoni    ■  ■  550 

Clvtoeosmus 183 

belmsi 183 

TILLYARDI     .  .     .  .  183 

Coccinellidae      . .    .  .  400 

Cocos  yatay 319 

Coelostomus   picipes  321 

Coenobius 403 

inconstans  ....  401 

INSUTLICOLA . .     .  .  402 

LONGICORNIS      .  .  401 

parvoniger       . .  401 

spissus 402 

Coenomyiidae    . .    . .  533 

Coleoptera 115 

Coloburiscus      ....  208 

bumeralis    . .    . .  208 

Colpodes  lafertei    ..  322 


INDEX. 


Page. 
Colpodes  submetallicus  322 

viohiceus  .  .  .  .  322 
Columba  domestica. .     557 

livia ■  •      557 

livia    domestiea       552 

Compositae  ....  329,  333 

Conoeardiuin  sp.  290,  354 

Conularia  sp.       290,  294. 

3152 

Convexae     2G3 

Convza   altissima    . .     404 

"Naudinii  . .  . .  404 
Coptoearpns      .  .    . .     168 

australis  . .  . .  1G8 
Cosmodiscus  rubripic- 

tus 322 

Cossidae 215 

Cratocerini 117 

Creagris  labrosus  . .  322 
Crepis  setosa  . .  .  .  318-9 
Crispata  ulstrix  . .  351 
Crocodilus  porosus. .  328 
Cryptoheris    .  ■    532,    534 

herbescens  ■ ■  ■  ■  534 
Ctenodactylini  .  .  120,  105 
Ctenodonta  sp.  290,  353 
Cuneipectini      .  .    .  .     119 

Cupania  sp 450 

Cyathaxonia  .  .  .  .  341 
Cyathopbyllum  ....  270 
Cyeas    . .' 424 

cireinalis     .  .    .  .     425 

media 425 

revoluta  .  .  .  .  425 
Cycloidotrypa        .  •     306 

.\usTRALis  ■ .  290,  367 
Cyclorrbaplia    .  .     .  .     505 

Cyclotrypa 367 

Cynodon  incompletus  457-9 
Cvphaleinae      .  .     .  .     231 

C'yria 222 

Cyrioides 222 

.sex-spilota  222,  531 
Cyrtina 268 

carbonaria  ....  370 
Cyrtoeeras     287,  290,  363 


Dactylina  arctioa    .  .     265 
Daetyloctenium  aegyp- 

tiaeum 566 

Daedrosis  223,  237-9,  243 
amhifjua  ■  ■  238,  240 
aiifjulata     ■  ■    ■  ■     238 

ANTENNAI.IS  238-40 

apiformis   ■  •    •  ■     238 

crenato-striata        238, 

240 

hirsuta 238 

interrupta  ....     238 


Daedrosis  monticola 


Page. 
238, 
240 
238 

237-8 
491 
467 
466 


pi/fjmaea 
victoriae    ■  ■     ■ 

Darala  reducta  ■  ■ 

Dasybasis    . .     .  .     , 
appendioulata 

Dasvcbiia   475-6,  496,  498 

'arga 497 

basalis 496 

distinguenda    ■  ■     496 

divisa 496 

grotei 497 


ht)rsfleldi    . .     .  . 

497 

kant^alia      ■  ■    ■  • 

497 

nilqirica      .  .    ■  ■ 

497 

ostraeina    . .     .  . 

497 

pudibunda  .... 

497 

satrnnta       ■  ■    •  ■ 

496 

securis 

497-8 

Dasyehiroides     . .    . . 

488 

pratti 

489 

Dasypogoninae  .... 

185 

Dam/poqon  niqritarsi<<   258 

ptdchpUus   ■  ■    ■  ■ 

185 

rubrilliDrax 

185 

veiiiio 

185 

Datura  Stramonium 

306 

Daucus  l)raebiatus  .  . 

566 

Daviesiella  cf.  como- 

ides 

.343 

Deleatidiiim 

208 

Delpbacidae       . .     .  . 

181 

Delpbaeini 

181 

Demoplatiis  australis 

460-1 

NIGROVITTATUS 

460-1 

Dentalium  sp.    ..    290,363 

Deudorix   epijarbas 

470 

epii'arbas  diovella  470 

epiiarbas  diovis 

470 

epiiarl)as  mathewi  470 

epiiarba.s  Wood- 

fordi  

470 

Diabatieus   .  .    .  .   17 

1,  176 

australis     .  .     .  . 

17i) 

pauper 

178 

Diapliornmerus  115, 

131-3. 

320 

amaroides  .  .  13 

2.  178 

australasiae 

178 

edwardsi      .  .    .  . 

132 

iiielanarius 

320 

perater    . .     .  . 

132-3 

qu.adrioollis     .  . 

132-3 

reetangulus 

132 

VIRIDIPENNIS    .  . 

132-3 

Diapriidae  ....  443,  445 

Dihnnoptiyllnm      368.   370 

Dicranonous  (pieens- 

l.indicus 

322 

Page. 

Dicra-speda 322 

nitida 322 

Dicrochile 166-7 

br«vicollis    ....     168 

goryi 168 

minuta 168 

punctipennis  168,  178 
(luadricollis    .  .    167-8 
ventralis      .  .    .  .      114 
Dictyophorodelphax      181 
DiCTYU-ApLANES    ■  •    281-4 
Dictyuchus    ..    ..    278-84 
Dielasma  hastatum        368 
saeculum     . .    . .     368 
sac'culum  var.  amy- 
gdala,   ..    290,  345, 
347,  369 
saeculum  var.  has- 
tata      . .    290.   294, 
346-7.  369 

sp 290 

Dilwynnia 385 

Dinoria 237 

coelioides  237,  246-7 
picta     . .     237,  246-7 

sp 246 

Diphyphyllum  sp.  290,  341 
Diplacodes  bipunetata  208 

Diptera 183 

Ditropidus 400 

abdominalis  .  .  396 
aciculatus  .  .  . .  388 
amabilis  . .  . .  382 
antennarius  .  .  383 
apicitlavus  .  .  394 
armatus  . .  . .  396 
aurielialceus  .  .  382 
baccaeformis  ■  ■  383-4 
bimaculatus  . .  392 
brevieollis   ....     399 

BRDNEIPEXNIS  .  .  399 
CAERULEUS    ....       397 

canescens  ....  386 
CARiyATICEP.S    . .       395 

ekalcetis      . .    . .  389 

elypealis     ....  397 

eoelistis      ....  396 

c.ognatus     . .    . .  396 

comans 387 

eoneolor     ....   396-7 

eongenitus  ....  396 

convexiuseulus  387 

OORIACEDS    . .    . .  397 

eornutus    .  .    385.  389 

eostatus    . .    388.  397 

dimidiatus  ....  382 

distinsruendus  . .  389 

doriae 386 

elegantulus    .  .    383-4 


INDEX. 


V         Page. 

Ditropidus  facialis 

398 

faseiatus  .  .  386,  391-2 

faseiatus  vai-. 

PIC'TIPBS  . .    ■  • 

38() 

frontalis     .  .    .  . 

397 

GENICULATUS    .  . 

391 

gymnopterus    .  . 

39  i 

imperialis   .  .    .  . 

389 

lilPUXCTICOLLIS 

393 

indistiuctus 

390 

IXSIGNIS      .  .      .  . 

394 

insularis     . .    . . 

389 

intonsus      .  .    .  . 

391 

iacobvi    384,  399 

,  400 

laevicoUis       382, 

390 

laminatus    .  .    .  . 

388 

lateralis      •  ■    ■  ■ 

389 

LATICOLLIS    .  ■    •  . 

393 

LATIFRONS    .  .     .  . 

390 

k'litulus      . .    . . 

388 

LOBICOLLIS    .... 

396 

maculicollis 

387 

mandibularis    .  . 

392 

melasomus  .... 

397 

METALLICUS 

394 

MIRUS 

392 

nigricollis   .  .    .  . 

389 

nigripennis 

389 

ochroijus    . .     . . 

382 

odewahnii  . .    . . 

383 

ornatus  

385 

puberulus   .  .    . . 

387 

Ijubescens   .  .    .  . 

391 

pubicollis   .  .   387 

391 

pulehellus   .  .    .  . 

385 

punoticollis 

397 

pnnctulum      387, 

398 

PYGIDIALIS    .... 

39b 

fiuadratipennis 

396 

rotundiformis  .  . 

398 

ruficollis     .  .     .  . 

385 

RUFIMANUS 

398 

seitulus 

390 

SCULPTIPENNLS 

399 

seminulum  .  .    . . 

397 

serenus 

385 

sobrinns    .  .    390 

397 

striatopunctatus 

390 

subaeneus   .  .    . . 

388 

SUBARJIATDS    .  . 

396-7 

suhmetalleseens 

390 

subsimilis    .  .    .  . 

389 

SLTBSUTURALIS 

399 

tibialis 

386 

TRAXQUILLUS     .  . 

398 

tropicus       .  .     .  . 

397 

vagans  

398 

venustus      .  .    .  . 

390 

vicanus      .  .    . . 

399 

Page. 

nitropidus  vigilans  396 
viridiaeiieus  .  .  394 
wlntei 391 

Dodonaea   viseosa     329-30 

Dolichochtis  tetra- 

stigma 322 

Drimostoma  alpestris    157 

lielmsi 157 

montanum  .  .  156-7 
tasmanica   .  .    .  .     142 

Dryptinae 116 

Dryptini 115,  120 

Dufourea  madrepori- 
formis 265 

Dura 475-6,  488 

alba 488 

bieolora  .  .  .  .  489 
brunneostrigata  489 
marginepunetata 

488-9 

ochrias 488-9 

pratti 488-9 

pRioxoDESiiA       488-9 

Dvseolus  australis     153-4, 

178 

dilatatus  .  .  153-4,  178 

Di/smaclnis  ricdis  186,  189 

Dystrieliotliorax  .  .  153 
iilaeidus      .  .    .  .     155 


Eccoptogenius  feron- 

oides' 162 

Ectroma 168-9 

Ectyehe  semi-bullata  248 

tuberculipennis     '  248 
Edmondia  sp.   .  .   290,  353 

Egini 116 

Eblersia 101 

ferrughien  ....     101 
Eklonia   .' 91,  108 

radiata 102 

Elaphodes  ....  387,  400-1 

irAEMOERHOIDALIS 

400 

HALTICOIDES       .  .       401 
RHIZOBIODES        .  .       400 

vulpinus     .  .    .  .     392 

Elaphrinae 116 

Elateridae 378-9 

Embolophora     .  .    .  .      181 
Encrinurus  duntroon- 

ensis     271 

mitchelli  267.  270.  550 
silverdalensis   .  .     270 

Enome 475-6.  490 

ampla 490 

antennata   .  .    .  .     490 
pelospila    . .    . .     490 


Page. 
Entada   ........     331 

Entolium    aviculatuin 

290-1,  356 

sp 290,  356 

Epacris  purpuraseens   404 
Epbippium   albitarsis 

507,  522,  528 

tlioraeium  522,  525-7 
Epicoma  tristis  ....  499 
Epistomentis      .  .    .  .     222 

Epuraea 377 

Eremopbila 334 

latifolia  .  .  329,  335-6 
Eremostaehvs   lacin- 

iata  . .  . .' 319 

Erigeron 404 

linifolius  .  .  .  .  404 
Eriostemon   Crowei       473 

laiieeolatus  . .  473 
Erythraea  australis  564 
Eucalyptus  coriaeea       175 

saligna 319 

sp 447 

Eucnemidae 378 

Eudalia 322 

Eulepis  caphontis  .  .     468 

pyrrhus  Tiberius    468 

sempronius  .  .  468 
Euompbalus      . .     .  .     369 

CARROLLENSIS  290,  360 

cera    . .    . .    290,   360 

pentangulatus        290, 

360 

sp 290 

Eupatorium  canna- 

binum 566 

glandulosum  .  .  318 
Euphyllodineae       . .       33 

Euploea 216 

Euproctis        475-6.  481-2, 

484,  488 

ACTOR   ....   483,  486 

AGANOPA      ....   483-4 

amphideta  ....     482 

arclada 486 

arrogans  . .  483,  486 
baliolalis  . .  483,  487 
chrijsophaea  ■  ■  484 
chrysorrhoea  . .  483 
croeea  ....  483,  485 
edwardsi  .  .  483,  486 
epaxia  ....  483,  485 
epidela  ....  483,  485 
ericydes  .  .  .  .  485 
euryzona  ■  ■  ■  .  482 
habrostola  483,  486 
holoxutha  ■  .  .  .  485 
HYMNOLis  . .  483,  485 
idonea 483-4 


Page. 
Euproctis  limbalis       483, 

487-8 
lueifuga  . .  . .  483-4 
marginalis  483,  487-8 
niphuhola  .  .   483,  488 

pelodes 49<J 

pura 48() 

pyraustis  .  .  .  .  483-1 
scotochi/ta  ....     484 

STEXOMORPJIA        483-4 

subiiul)ilis  . .  483,  485 
Euprosopia  puucti- 

facies 203 

Eurylyclmus     . .   124,  128 

femoralis    . .    . .     128 

Eurymedusa  picta     101-2, 

107 

Eurysyllis 102 

tuberculata       .  .     102 
Euthenarus  ....  132,  138 

comes 139 

NIGEIiLUS     .  .      .  .       138 

promptus    . .    .  .     138 

Euschemon 216 

Eusyllidae    .  .     .  .    90,   102 

Eusvllis 100 

Euzora    ....    475-1),  492 

claia     492 

coUuc-ens     ....     492 

Exogonea     90 

Exogoneae  .  .    .  .   102,  107 

Favosites     270 

basaltica     . .    .  .     548 

gothlandica      .  .     548 

multitabulata    .  .     548 

Fenestella  sp.   .  .  293,  342 

Feronia    vilis    .  .     .  .     162 

Filicium 329 

Fistulipora  incrustans  300 

MiCROSCOPiCA  290,  3C(i 

P'lindfisia   maculosa      447 

Floiibundae 261 

Forraiea  t'ulig-inosa  526-7 
Fornax  parvoniger  378 
Fragraria  indica  . .  404 
Fusanus  acuminatns  447 
persicarius       . .     447 

Galinsoga  parviflora  566 
Gattiohi  sp'ectahill^  108-9 
Geijera  parviflora  .  .  447 
Geometridae      .  .    .  .     474 

Geosargus  sp 522 

Girvanella  290,  338.  364-5 
Glaphyropyga  austral- 

iasiae 189 

Glossopteris       291-2,  301, 
306,  309.  311,  315.  .531 


INDEX. 

Page. 

Gnathaphanus     131-2,  320 

adelaidae    .  .    .  .     132 

lierbaceus    .  .    .  .     114 

impressipennis        320 

liciuoides    . .     . .     320 

philippensis      .  .     320 

Gnathosyilis  zonata         90 

Goraphoceras  sp.  290,  3(>3 

Goodeniaeeae    .  .     .  .     329 

Gorgodera     502 

Gosseletina  australis 

290,  357-8 
australis  var. 

ALTA  ....  290,  357 

MACKAYI    .  .    290.    358 

scOTTi       .  .    290,   358 

Granigerinae    .  .     .  .     116 

Grapbiptcrini    .  .     .  .      117 

Grevillea  punieea  var. 

CRASSIFOLIA    .  .     .  .      261 

Grevillia  striata      .  .     447 

Gynocardia  odorata     450, 

459 

Gyroceras   .  .    . .   290,  363 

Habrophyi.la  475-6,  481-2 
euryzona    .  .     .  .     482 

Hakea  leucoptera  .  .  447 
mierocarpa       .  .     261 

saligna 262 

saligna  var.  an- 

GUl^IFOLIA     .  .       261 

Hallopora  fruticosa 

290,  367 

Haplaner    .  .    .  .    131.  137 

velox 137 

Haplopseustis    .  .    . .  475 

Haplosyllis 100 

Haptoncura  ocularis  377 

Haptoncus  tetragomis  377 

Harpalinae 116 

Harpaliiii  .  .    115.  119,  131 

Harpalus 139 

(ilteniaiis     .  .    .  .  320 

australis      ....  135 

illawarensin       .  .  132 

inornatus     .  .    .  .  135 

melanarius        .  .  320 

moestus 134 

patnteldides      .  .  132 

promptus   ■  ■    .  .  138 

quadraticolUx   .  .  160 

ratidiemeiisis    .  .  132 

verticalis    .  .     .  .  137 

vestigia  lis   ....  178 

Helaeinae 231 

Hclacus   frenclii      .  .  229 

gilesi 229 

LATiroLiua       . .  229 


^F  Page. 

Heliehrysum  semipap- 
posum  .  .    .  .   329,  333-4 

Heliolites 270 

Helluoiiiui 120 

Hemerobiidae     ....     540 

Hemilexis     443 

Hehilexojivia  ....     443 

ABRUPTA        .  .     •  •       443 

Hemimetabola   .  .    .  .     206 

Heracula  ....  475-6,  488 

discivitta     ....     488 

leonina 488 

Hermetia  albitarsis        522 
illucens  ....  522,  527 

sp.   . .  • 522 

Hesperidae 471 

Heterakinac 559 

Heterakis 559 

maculosa    552,  559-60 

Heterodendioii  448-9,  451, 

455-9 

diversifolia     448,  450 

oleaefolia    447-50,  459 

Heteroneura    . .    . .    215-6 

Heteronympha  rairifica  531 

paradelplia       .  .     531 

solandri      .  .     .  .     472 

Hevea     457 

brasiliensis  .  .  459 
liexaerinidae  .  .  .  .  291 
Hexagouella      .  .     .  .     366 

Hiletini 115 

Hispalis 135 

Histeridae 377 

Hololeius  nitidulus        322 
Holometabola     ....     206 
Holoparamecus    caul- 
arum   378 

Holostomatidae       .  .     500 

Holostomum     .  .    .  .   500-1 

cinctum  .  .     500 

cornu     500 

REPEXS  .  .  500-1,  503 
simplex  ..  .500,  503 
variabile     .  .    .  .     503 

Ilotnaiuta 376 

Homoptora 181-2 

Honuitbes 164-5 

elegans 165 

emarginatus  .  .  165 
guttit'er      .  .    . .     165 

mi  cans 165 

NIGER 165 

purvicollis  .  .  .  .  165 
rotundatus       . .     178 

serieeus 165 

vicimit'!  .  .  .  .  165 
Iloplodonta  viridula  522 
Hormochilus 159 


INDEX. 


Page. 
Horinochilus  monoch- 

rous     162 

Howea 565 

Belinoreana  . .  565 
Forsteriana     . .  564-5 

Humea 334 

cassiuiacea     329,  333 

Hydiophilidae  . .    . .     116 

Hydropsyche  colonica  209 

Hfllorus   .  .    .  .    532,  536-7 

Krausei      ■  ■   537,  539 

Hyocis 223 

bakewelli    .  .   223,  225 

bicolor 223 

mxOR 225 

nigTa 225 

occidentaUa       ■  ■     223 

pallida 223 

pubescens   . '.    . .     223 

siib-paiallela    .  .     223 

varieqata    ■  ■    ■  ■     2j:3 

Hvolites   sp.    . .    290,   363 

Hypaulas 230 

Hypharpas   . .   131,  133-4 

aereus 134-5 

australis  .  .  134-5,  320 
inornatus  . ■  ■  ■  134 
latiiisculus  ....  134-5 
moestus  . .  . .  134-5 
noi.ae-hollandiae     134 

peroni 134-5 

puncticauda    ■  ■    134-5 

Hypoliiuua.s  alimena     469 

bolina 469 

INOPINATA    ....       468 

Hypsidae 474-5 

Iclithybotus   liudsoni  207 

Icta   '. 475-0 

fulviceps     . .    . .  477 

TAXAOPIS      . .    . .  477 

Idacarabus 139 

llavipes 178 

troglodytes       .  .  178 

Idius 171 

moestus 172 

Imaus 488 

marqinepunctata  489 

ochrias  .  ■    ■ .   ■  ■  489 

Indigofera  galegoides 

458-9 

Inopus 532,  534 

despeetus    .  .    .  .  534 

Iropoca   . .    .  .    475-6,  494 

rotuiidata    .  .    .  .  495 

Isolepis  supina  ....  260 

Issoria   egista    .  .     .  .  469 

egista  bowdenia  469 

egista  gaberti  . .  469 


Page. 

issoria  egista  hebri- 

DiNA 469-70 

egista  propiuqua  469 
egista  samoana  469 
egista  scyllaria  469 
egista  shortlandica  469 
egista  viTiENSis 

469-70 

ftamus 186,  259 

alcetas 259 

planiceps  .  .  .  .  196 
si/dnei/ensis      .  .     258 

Ixodea 334 

acbilleoides  329,  333  1 

Jacaranda 35,  41 

ovalifolia     . .  34,  204 

Keiinedya  rubieuiida  473 
Keteleeria  japouica  565 
Kocbia  striata  290,  353 
Koninekophyllum  .  .  341 
inopinatum  .  .  341 
KyUinga  monoeepbala  564 

Lacida  postica  ■  ■    ■  ■     494 

Laeijaa 475 

Lacon  alternans      ■  ■     379 

guttatus      . .    . .     379 

macidatus   ■  .    ■  ■     379 

variabilis    .  .    .  .     379 

Lacordairei  anchomen- 

oides 178 

ericiisoui     .  .    .  .     178 

Lacordairia     .  .    .  .     166-7 

argiituroides     .  .     167 

ealatiioides       .  .     167 

Laelia 475-6,  498 

coenosa 498 

eremaea      ■  ■    ■  ■     498 

obsoleta      ..    ..     498 

ustracina     ■  ■    ■  ■     497 

Laemostenus      . .    .  ._    164 

fomplanatus  llv,  1G4 

Lagarinus     .  .     532,   536-7 

paradoxus  ■  ■  537,  539 

pausleni      .  .     .  .     539 

Lagarus   ■  ■    ■  •   532,  536-7 

pausleni     .  ■    ■  ■     539 

Lathridiidae 378 

Latbyrus 33,  440 

Lebia  calida      ■  .    ■  ■     169 

civica     169 

pieipennis  .  .    .  .     322 

Lebiinae 116 

Lebiini 120,  170 

Lebiomorpha     ■  ■    ■  ■  168-9 

eiviea     169 

Lecanonteriis    .  .     . .     137 


Page. 

Lecanomerus  maryin- 

atus 137 

nitidus 137 

Leguminoseae     .  .     329-30 

Leiopteria  australis      290, 
356 

Leperina  burnettensis  377 

cirrosa 377 

mastersi 37'^ 

Lepidodendron  ....  289 
australe  .  .  291,  315 
veltbeimiamiin        315 

Lepidosperma  Xeesii  261 
quadrangulata  261 
tetraquetrum    .  .     261 

Leptaena  analoga  369-71 
rhomboidalis    .  .     549 

Leptoeeridae    .  .    205,   209 

Leptocneria  binotata     491 

Leptogastrus  .  .  .  .  238-9 
apiformis  .  .  .  .  239 
CYANEUS  .  .  .  .  239 
mastersi  ....   238-40 

OCCIDENTALLS     .  .        239 

Leptolegnia         277-9,  281, 
284 
Leptoperlidae     .  .    .  .     207 
Leptopodus  suljgaga- 

tinus 178 

Leptospermnin  .  .    .  .     166 
Lestignathus      .  .    . .     166 

I'ursor 166-7 

FOVEATU.S    .  .     .  .      166 

sini.soni 166-7 

Leucciiiia 475 

hipparia      .  .    .  .     492 

Liburnia 181 

Licininae IIG 

Licinini    .  .    115,   120,   106 
Licinoma     .  .    223,  237-40 
AEREA     . .     240-2,  244 
aerea  var.  com- 

boyneiisis  . .  241 
angusticollis  241,  244 
APASioiDES  241-2,  244 
c'ommoda  ....  244 
('Vclocollis  .  .  .  .  243 
eiata  . .  .  .  238.  243 
gilesi     243 

MEBIDIANA        242,    244 

monticola  238,  241, 
244 
nitida  237-8,  241,  243 
nitidissima  .  .  243 
nodulosa  .  .  .  .  243 
pallipes  ....  243-4 
puncta-latera  .  .  238, 
240,  244 
sylvieola  .  .  .  .  244 
tasraanica  . .    . .     243 


otv. 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Licinoina  truncata  243-1 

victoriae     . .    . .     243 

violacea  238,  241,  243 

Lininastis  pilosus    . .     321 

Lipandae 474-5 

Lithobtrotioii     34(1-1,    3(34, 
367,    370 

sp 2U0,  339 

stanvL'llfcnsu  . .  341 
Littoriiia  jilusa  .  .  3()2 
Lolium  tcmuk'iitLim  531 
Lorocerinae       .  .    .  .      IK) 

Loxaudius      152 

sagatiiuis       152,    178 

Loxonema 3ti!J 

Loxonema  ?  289,  29il,  302 

babbinboonensis    290, 

362 

lefevrei 29(1 

rus'ifera      .  .    .  .     362 

sp 290,  3(i2 

Liu'iiia   eras's'ii        .  .     472 

I'ucina 203 

serenissinia  .  .  472 
sericata      . .     .  .     203 

solaia 203 

Lycaeiiidae     .  .      468.   470 

Lfichnus 128-9 

titraiiiiulutiis     .  .     129 

strintiduh    ....     129 

Lyinantria     .  .    475-().    490 

antennatu   .  .    .  .     490 

inirursL 49(.- 

binotata  .  .  .  .  490-1 
inonai-iia  .  .  .  .  490 
nt'))hrcis-raiilKi  490-1 
reducta     .  .     .  .    490-1 

tiirneri 490 

Lymantriadae    ....     474 

Macliiinuf  atitilcu   ■  .      196 

Maci-oclifilus  Hlosus 

289-90,    362 
sp 290 

Macrochiliiia      .  .    .  .     291 

iMacroperas 239 

Mai'i'opus  gi}i-anteus      328 

luaior 328 

rufus 328 

MaiTozamia  424-9.  432, 
439-40 
Fi-azeri  . .  .  .  42()-S 
Miquclii  .  .  .  .  42()-7 
PcrowL.kiana  .  .  426 
spiralis   .  .  424-9,  44U 

Mallophora  nig^itarsis 

258 

Malvastrum  trieuspi- 

datuni 564 

Maiin'iri'ra  indica    .  .     319 


Page. 
Maiiiiiot 457 

utilissima    .  .    .  .     '42r3 

Martiiiia  sp 29i 

Martynia  lutea        .  .      180 

Masoreinae 116 

Mecodema  tasmaiucuui 

129 
Mecoptera.  . .  116,  20() 
Mecyclotborax . .    . .   152-3 

ambiouiis  .  .  . .  153 
Mecynotarsus  ziczae  381 
Megaloptpra  . .  . .  206 
Meqarislerus    .  .      .  .     135 

indicus 321 

stenolophoidcs  321 
Melaleuca    leueadeii- 

dron  var.  albida  221 
Mclanodiscus  .  .  .  .  329 
Menearchu.s    . .    .  .     229 

impresso-sulcatus 

230 
Menephilus  eoerulescens 

231 

LONGICOLLI.S       .  .       231 

Merista 543 

plel>eia      543-5,  550-1 
tennesseensis  . .  5-14-5 

Meri.stina 266 

australis    .  .     .  .     272 

tiimida 272 

Merizodim      . .    119,    139 

Merizodu'; 139 

ansiistieollis  .  .  139 
MesembryantliPinuni 

australe  .  .  .  .  564 
Metoponia  517,  532-4. 
53(i.  538-9,  541-2 
despectu^  .  .  .  .  532 
flaviccifiut  ....  532 
GEMIXA  .  .  532,  535 
herbescens  .  .  532 
obscurireiilria.  .      542 

prisca 539 

rubriceps      .  .     506-9. 
511-2.  514.  532,  .534-6 

similis 542 

rufians ,542 

ricina ,539 

Mctriitii 117 

Metriiis 117 

Metura  clnnsata     .  .     318 
Michelinia  tenniscpta 

290,  341,  369 

sp 290 

Micrixys 116 

Microclirysa      .  .     .  .     515 

polila 522 

sp 522 

Mici-njestes     ..     170,     176 
Imnii'i'alis    .  .    .  .      176 


Page. 

Alierolestcs  yarrae         176 

Misadopini  115,  119,  121 

152 

Mimosa 36,  331 

ilimoseae  .  .    32,  33,    36, 

329-31 

Mist-eliis  morioformis    322 

MoLONGiA  . .    . .  543,  546 

ELEGANS 547 

Monoci'epidius  ulijicola 

379 
aphiloides  . .  . .  379 
breviceps    . .    .  .     379 

dolosiic 379 

eveillardi    ....     379 
manterai     .  .     .  .     379 

minor 379 

rubicundus  . .  370 
Montic'ulipora  ....  366 
Monoxylabis  .  .  .  .  445 
jMorio   lona:ipciiuis. .     321 

Morioniuae 116 

Mormolycini 117 

Morova 214-6 

subfaseiata    . .     214-5 

Mourlonia 357 

ORNATA     . .    290,    357 

sp.     ..  290,  357,  359 

Murehisonia   sp.  290,   360 

Mydaidae 505 

Mviocbrvsa   sp.      .  .     522 
Mvopori'iieae. .  329,  334-5 
Myoponim  ....  334,  336 
serratiim     .  .    .  .     335 
serratuui  var.   in- 
sulare   ....   329,  335 
serratum  var.  vis- 
(•o.sum. .    .  .   329,  335 
]\Iystropomus  snb- 

costahis      .  .    .  .     117 

Nasouia   brevieoniis      445 

Naticopsis 369 

brevispiia  .  .  290,  361 
alobosa.  .  .  .  290,  361 
ODLiQUA  .  .  290,  362 
Nemnfjlossa  . .  132.  13 1' 
atriceps      .  .     .  .     138 

l)icolor 137 

l)rpvis 137 

mastersi      .  .    .  .      137 

iniiioi- 138 

oim-sA    ..     ..     137-8 

tasmanica  ....  137-8 

verticalis    .  .     .  .     137 

Nematodes  pul)esfi'iis    378 

Nemotehis  pantlierinus 

522 

sp. .522 

uliainosus  . .    . .     522 


INDEX. 


XVI. 


Page. 

Neoitamus  . .    185-6,  189, 

197,  251,  259 

abditus    ....    189-91 

alcetas 259 

armatus  . .  187,  189, 
194-5,  197 
australis  . .  187,  189 
hrunneus  .  .  18G,  195 
calii/hwsus  .  .  199 
clanpes  .  .  187.  189, 
197-8 
cyauiuuh,  . .  . .  186 
flivar'catus  .  .  189 
flavicinc'tus  189,  19!^ 
fraternus  189,  193-4 
gibbonsi  . .  .  .  189 
(/raminii  .  .  .  .  202 
liyalipennis  .  .  189 
maculata    .  .     .  .     197 

3IACULATOIDE,-5    .  .    189, 

197-8 
maculatus  ....  201 
margitis  . .  189,  198-9 
mistiwes  . .  . .  202 
planiceps  .  .  .  .  196 
SETOSUS  189,  199-200 
si/dneyensis  189,  19] 
258 

varius 193 

vittipes    ..    186,   189, 

194-5 

volaticus     ....     187 

vulgatus  . .  193-5,  197 

Xeopolliiioaa   villonn      444 

Nicotiana  alata      . .     566 

Nioda   fusifonnis   .  .     496 

Nissolia 33 

Nitella     205,  209 

Nitidulidae 377 

Noctuidae 474-5 

No)iacri)<  ....  532,  536-7 
transBQua.  .  .  .  537-8 
Notauatolica  ....  209 
Notodontidae  .  .  .  .  499 
Nutolea  limhuta  .  .  249 
Notononius  .  ..  152,  163 
chalybeus   .  .    .  .     163 

p((ues 115 

pnral'elomorplius  115 
liliilippi  .  .  .  .  163 
pnlitiilus  ....  163 
tiibeiii  andus    .  .     163 

Nnt<>ilhilu!< 135 

Notoiibovx  iiovat'- 

hollandiae  .  .   500,  503 
Nuculana  sp      . .  290,  353 

Ochros'aster  contraria  499 

Ochrus    33 

Ocneria  heliaspis    .  .     499 


Page. 

Ocnodus  lus'iibi'is    .  .     378 

tridentatus       . .     378 

Udacauthinae    .  .     .  .     116 

Odacanthiui  116,  120,  164 

Odonata 206 

Odoiitomyia 506 

angulata  ....  522 
arsentat;'  .  .  522,  525 
bydroleoii  .  .  522,  524 
ornala    523,  525,  527 

sp 523 

ti^^rina 523 

viridula    ..    523,  526 

Odontopleura  liowninf;- 

eusis    .  .    .  .    270,   546 

parvissima      270,   546 

Odontopsilus     .  .    .  .     445 

Odontosyllis.  .   .  .  105,  107 

ctenostoma       .  .     106 

detecta    .  .    105-6,   108 

lulguiaiis   .  .    .  .     107 

freycinftensis  .  .     107 

glaiidulusa.  .     .  .     107 

livalina       . .    . .     106 

suteri    .      . .  102,  107 

vire-scens     .  .    .  .     106 

Oecetis 209 

unioolor      .  .    .  .     209 

Olene 475-6,  496 

bojiinittn     .  .    .  .     496 

mendosa     .  .     .  .     496 

Oligebia  ....  475-6,  480 

heiuicalla     ....     480 

Olins-a 209 

Oinmatiiis    teris      .  .     186 

pilosus        .  .     .  .     186 

Omolipus  coernlens       249 

cyaneipeniiis    .  .     249 

gnesioides  .  .    .  .     240 

PUNCTATO- 

KULCATUS   .  .      249 

Omopbroniiiae         .  .  116 

Oniseis'aster       .  .    .  .  208 

Oodes 139,  1118 

modestus     ....  168 

Oodinae 116 

Oodini  ..  115,  120,  168 
Oopterus..    ..    139,  141-2 

flivinoides        .  .  139 

Opliryostei'inis  159 

Opliyra  analis  .  .    .  .  203 

nigra 444 

Orbiciilnifli'a    iiitida  369 

Oroa  gladiator        .  .  328 

Orgyia   ..     ..   475-6,  493 

anartoides         .  .  493 

antiqua      .  .     .  .  493 

ATHLOPHORA       .  .        493 

australis.  .  .  .  493-4 
canifascia   .  .    .  .     494 


Page. 

Urgyia   cei/lanka    ■  ■     494 

luilekinnii         .  .     494 

retinopepla      .  .     499 

Orthis   australis  290,   293, 

346 

micheUui    . .    . .     346 

resupinata  290,    293, 

345,   368,  370,  550 

striatula   . .     543.  550 

Orthoceras    sp.      291,    363 

Ortbogonini 117 

Ortborrliapba     ....     505 

Ortbotetes  crcnistria     290, 

293,  342-3,  368 

Ospidus  ........     231 

chrysomeloides     231-2 

gibljus 232 

MAJOR      . .    . .      231-2 

paropsoides   . .    231-2 
Oxalis   ........       25 

Oxyeera  meigenii  523,  526 
monlsii      .  .    .  .     523 

sp 523,  526 

triliniata  .  .  523,  526 
Oxfipoda  atialis  .  .  375 
Ozaenini 117-8 

Paehygaster  atfr  510,  523, 
525-G 

leach  ii 523 

meromelas.  .     .  .      523 

minutissima  611,  515, 

517 

minutissimus    . .     523 

orbitalis    . .     . .     523 

pini   . .  511,  523,  527 
sp.   . .   . .   . .  523,  525 

tarsalis       .  .     .  .     523 

Patliytraebelus  ob- 

iong-us 320 

Famborini 119 

Panageinae       .  .     .  .     116 

Panageini 120 

Panageus     116 

Panenka  miiltiradiata   355 

PORTEHi  ....  290,  355 

Pangium  edule    425,    450, 

457-9 

Panicularia    s|).      .  .     457 

Papilio  maclpayanus     470 

raacleayaniis  in- 

SULANA        .  .     . .      470 

Papilionidae 470 

Parkia 331 

P'arallelodciji      .  .    .  .      353 

argutiis 353 

CARNEi  ....  290,  353 
Paramesius  .  .  .  .  443 
Parata  bilmiata  .  .  471 
Paromalus  planieeps    377 


xvu. 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Paromalus  uinbilicatus  STT 

victoriae     . .    .  .     377 

Paisonsia 214 

Passillora  lierbertiana 

459 
quadransularis       457 

sp 45S 

Pelecini 115 

Pelecorrliyiu-ljus      .  .     407 

Pelophik' 114 

Pentaji'oiiicii       .  .    .  .     17() 

olivaceus>     ....     322 

vittata         . .     .  .     323 

vittipenmsi      17b,  323 

Pentagonicini   . .  120,  17ti 

Peiitamerus  f/aleatus     549 

Pehcoderjius.  .  ..   139-40 

NICiER 140 

Percosoma  .  .  .  .  124,129 
carenoides  ....  120 
siilc-ipenne  ....     129 

Perigona 145 

australica  .  .    .  .     322 

nigTiceps     ....     322 

Perigoninae      .  .    .  .     IIG 

Perlaria 200 

Persoonia  lucida  .  .  531 
Phaermis  fasciciilata  224 
Plianerotrema  aus- 

tralis  -  .  .  .  290,  359 
australis  var.  alta 

290,  359 

BLRINDU V. 

Fhasc'olarttus  (.■iiicreus 

328 
Pliascolomys  mitchelU  328 
Phaseolus  lunatus  . .  457-9 

Pheidole     370 

Phei-sita  ....  152,  150-7 
australi.s  .  .  .  .  157-8 
CONVEXA    ....    157-8 

helmsi 157 

melbournensis.  .  157 
montaiia  .  .  .  .  157 
TASM.iNIC.\  . .  157 
PhilUpsia  grandis  .  .  363 
robusta  ....  290,  363 

sp 294,  363 

Philonthus  aciieus  . .     375 

chaliibeipr)iniy        375 

Philophloeus  .  .  170-1,  173 

australis     .  .    .  .      172 

BTVITTATUS        .  .     172-3 

(•onft-rtus  ....  1 73 
distingui'iidus  171-2 
eucalypti  .  .  ..  171-2 
eucalypti  var  . 

ta.snianica  .  .  172 
inoestus  .  .  .  .  172 
myrmei'iipbiliis    172-3 


Page. 
Pbilupbloeus  obtusus  172-3 
urnatus  . .  .  .  172 
SlMSONi  . .  .  .  172-3 
Sydney ensis  . .  173 
truncatus  .  .  . .  172 
Pblaeudiomiis   plagiatus 

322 

Pbysocratopbini      .  .     120 

Pinopbilus  grandieeps  375 

mastursi      .  .    .  .     375 

trapeziis     . .    . .     375 

Pinus    sdvestris  525,    527 

Pionuj-vHis     . .     90-1,    94, 

103-4 

eompacta     .  .    .  .   90-1 

divarieata  .  .    .  .     104 

MELAENONEPHEA 

103-4 

weismannoides  104 

weissuianni       .  .  104 

Pisonia   Brununiana  180 

Plagiotelum  irinum  105 

opale.seens      .  .     105-0 

Planetes     113 

australis     . .    .  .  113 

Planipennia      . .    . .  200 

Platyceras  sp.  .  .  290.  302 

Platycilibe  brevis   .  .  220 

INTEGRICOLLI.S.  .        220 
Plat  1/ nun    mart/iiiicolii,^ 

322 

Plati/soma 377 

bipunetatum  .  .  377 
completum  . .  377 
eonvexiiiscuhuu  377 
Pleetoptera  .  .  .  .  200 
Plectroscelis  .  .  .  .  401 
Plerop/n/Utim  culloii  338 
Pleurotoniaria  sp.  .  .     290 

Poa  flava      457 

Poecilus  iridescens.  .     103 
iridi))ennis        .  .     103 
Polyehaeta   pbancro- 

cepbala 90 

Polt/deris  brevicdiiils     151 

Polylobus 370 

apicalis 370 

fmifjicdlK  .  .  .  .  37!) 
longulus  .  .  .  .  370 
pallidipennis  .  .  370 
pnlUdiiiniiior    .  .      370 

tenuis 370 

Pol II m a,s- <Ms  paradoxus 

102 
Polysticbus  .  .  .  .  113 
Polvstigiiia  vittieolle  378 
Ponera  lutea  ....  381 
Poi-cellia  pearsi  290,  358 
Porthosia  .  .  475-7,  48-2 
acatharta   ....  478-9 


Page. 
Portbesia  ciieua  .  .  478 
anacauiia  .  ■  .  .  481. 
collucenn  .  .  .  .  492 
eutbysana  . .  .  .  478 
tiuibnata  .  .  .  .  478-9 
galactopis  ....  478-9 
hololeuca  .  .  .  .  481 
irrorata  . .  .  .  499 
lutea    ....    478,  480 

MELAMBAPHES  478. 

480 

melanosoma     . .     47S 

mi.ita 478 

paraduxa  .  .  . .  478 
similis 477 

nubnobilm  .  .  .  .  485 
TEISPILA  .  .  .  .  478-9 
XUTHOPTERA    .  .     4<8-9 

Posiduuiella.  .    .  .  -.  .     354 

sp 290,  349,  35-t 

subsulcata  ....     354 

Potamopyrgus    sp.        200 

Procoidulia    grayi        208 
smitbii 208 

Produotus   aculeatus     370 
burlinatonensis       370 

eora 370 

fimbriatus  .  .  .  .  370 
Hemingii  .  .  .  .  370 
giganteus  . .  . .  343 
bemispbericus  290, 
343.  308 
bcmispbaericus 

var.  giganteus    343 

longispinus    293,  344, 

368 

muricatus      290,  344, 

308 

punctatus  . .    . .     370 

pustulosus     290,  344, 

368 

seabrieulus       .  .     370 

semiretieidalus       290, 

344-5,  308 

sp 290 

undatus      .  .    . .     370 

Fromaebus 250 

doddi 250-1 

Proinceoderus    .  .     .  .      124 

l)!U<!si 125 

bruuuieornis   .  .   124-0 
bruuiiieornis  var. 

ovicollis  ....  126 
cordicollis  .  .  125 
CUPRESCEN.S     125.  127 

c^JR\^PEs. .     ..    125-0 

deqener 125 

elegans 125 

gibbosuo    ....    125-0 
LONGUS.  .  .  .    125,  127 


INDEX. 


Page. 
Promecoderus  mastersi 

12G 
modestus  . .  Il25,  178 
ovicolli^ 120 

PLEBIUS     .  .      125,     128 

subdepressiis  125, 

128,  178 

tasmanieus    .  .    124-5 

127-8 

viridiaeneiis    .  .   124-5 

Prosopogmus   .  .    152,  159 

austrinus    . .     .  .     159 

boisduvali     .  .     159-60 

ooracinus.  .     .  .    160-2 

delicatulus.  .  160,  162 

f  oveipennis      160, 162 

harpaloides      .  .     159 

insperatus  ....     160 

LEAI 159-60 

monocbrous  160,  162 
uamoyensis  .  .  160 
nitidipennis  .  .  160 
occidentalis  .  .  160 
oudiformis  .  .  160,  162 

PUNCTIFERUS     159,  161 

quadraticollis  .  .      160 

reiebei 160 

rubic'oniis  .  .  .  .  159 
suspecta  .  .  .  .  160 
TASMANICU.S  159,  161 
yarrensib    .  .  159,  162 

Prosoxylabis      . .    . .     445 
PiCTiPENXis     . .     445 

Prostanthera  Behriana 

263 

debilis 264 

DENSA 263 

marifolia  .  .  .  .  26^! 
rhombe?.      .  .    .  .     263 

saxicola 263 

saxicola  var.  maior 

264 
saxicola  var. 

MONTANA       . .      263 

Prunus  persica  var. 

dianthiflora  . .     203 
sp 457 

Psali-t   securh    .  .    .  .      498 

Pselaphidae 376 

P.SEUDEMBOLOPHORA         181 
M.A.CLEAYI    .  .     .  .    181-2 

Pseiidoceneus    . .  152,  163 

solicitus 163 

P'seudomorpbini     120,  177 
Pseudozaena  orientalis 

117 

Psilonothvs 135-6 

ovalis 136 

Psychina 217 

Pteroctrtu.s  ....  139-41 
globosus  ....   141-2 


Page. 
Pteroeyi-tus  rubescens 

141-2 

STRIATULUS     .  .       141-2 

tasmanieus     .  .     141-2 
Pterogmus     119,  152,  155 

RUFIPES 156 

Pterohelaeus 227 

abdominalis      .  .  227 

agoniis 227 

areanus      .  .     .  .  228 

bagotensis  ....  227 

broadhursti      . .  227 

dispar 227 

dispersus    .  .    .  .  227 

f  rat  emus    .  .    .  .  227 

geminatus      .  .  227 

hepalicus    .      .  .  227 

IXTERRBPTUS    .  .    227-8 

memnnnius .  .  227,  229 
NODICOSTLS  .  .  228 
OBLONors'  ....     228 

ovalis 227 

pascoei  .  .  .  .  227 
peltatus      .  .     .  .     227 

)iiceus 227-8 

planus 227 

pruinosiK   .  .    .  .     227 

raucus 228 

servus 227 

sub  -  pun  ct  at  us  227 

tenuistriatus     .  .     227 
tristis    .  .     .  .    227,229 
Pteronites  subpittmani 

290,  353 
tanipteroides  290,  353 
Pteropbyllum  .  .  .  .  424 
Pterostichinae  ....  116 
F'terostiehini  113,  115, 
119,  152 
Pternsticlins  coracinus 

162 

diemenensis      .  .      162 

Ptero.sydiie  arborea       181 

Pterosiillis    formosu       108 

madeirensis.     .  .     109 

plectorliyncho       108-9 

spectahilis         .  .      108 

Ptycomphalina   sp.        290 

Ptvcomplialus   . .    .  .     356 

CULLEXI    . .   290,   356 

Puqnax    pleurodon        346 

Pultenaea 385 

ferrug-inea.  .     .  .      262 

villosa        . .     .  .     262 

villosa    var.    latifnlia 

262 

Pvf-nooentria     .  .     .  .     209 

Pvralidae  .  .      .  .     474 

Pvrnlidid.Tp    .  .     .  .     216-7 

Pvrellia   naronea    .  .     203 

Pyronota   festiva    .  .     205 


Pagt\ 
Pythiopsis    . .    277-9,   284 


Quedius  ruticollis 


375 


Redoa. .  ..  475-6,  492 
subuiarginata.  .  492 
transiens     .  .    .  .     492 

Retii'ularia    lineata        370 

Betzia  batilei  ....  547-8 
boucbardii  .  .  548 
cf.  ulstrix  .  .  290,  351 
salteri    . .    543,   547-8 

Rbabdotoitamus  . .  186 
brunneus    .  .  186,  195 

claripes 197 

qraminis    .  .     .  .      202 

iautus 189 

lividus  .  .  .  .  189 
■mistipes  .  .  .  .  202 
rusticanus  . .  189 
volaticiis     ....     189 

Rbabdotus  ....  152,  162 
floridus  . .  .  .  162 
reflexus  .  .  . .  162 
reflexus  var.  florida 

162 

Rliacopteris       292,    298-9, 

315,  337 

intermedia      .  .    297-8 

roemeri 298 

Bhipidomella  australis 

346 

Rhizobius   ventralis       400 

Rhizophvllum    inter- 

punetatum      167,  550 

Rbodoneura  .  .  214,  216 
scitaria 214 

Rbopalocera      .  .     .  .     217 

Rhyncbonella   .  .  268,  287 

cuboides    .  .     .  .     275 

pleurodon      275,  290, 

346,   368-9 

sp 290,  346 

Rhytidoaiiatluis      . .     152 

Rbytisternus  .  .  152,  164 
cvathodenis  . .  164 
liopleurus  .  .  .  .  164 
miser  .  .  . .  164,  323 
rusrifrons    .  .    .  .     323 

Rirhardia   afrieana        204 
Elliottiana        .  .     204 
Ellinttirt)'n     x 
Pentlandii  ....     204 

Ttiqema  falcafn  .  .  498 
tacta 498 

Pilin    laiicenlafa       .  .      496 

Robinia  psendacacia       32, 
36 

Ei/ba.ris  acanthnsterna 

376 


XIX. 

Page. 

Rybaxis   atriceps    . .     376 

electrioa     .  .     .  .     370 

Sambuc-us  nisra    .  .   457-8 

Sangninolites  sp.  290,  352 

TRIRADIATU.S    290,    352 

Sapindaeeae    . .    329,   450 

SaprolesTiia     277-9,  281-2 

284 

TImrcti      ..    ..     27 1 

SaprolegTiiaeeae    . .    277-8 

Sar^s 515,  517 

bipunctatus. .    ..  523 

euprarius    523,  525-6, 

528 

tlavipes 523 

lormosuf    .  .     .  .     523 

iridalus 523 

pallives 542 

sp 522-3 

Sarotliroerepis  ....  168-9 
benefica  .  .    . .    169-70 

calida 169 

civica 169-70 

corticalis  .  .  .  .  160 
gravis  ....  169-70 
infuscatu  .  .  .  .  169 
inquinata.  .  .  .  169-70 
luctuosa  . .  .  .  169 
posticialis   ....     1 69 

suavis 169 

Scaldia   depressa    . .     35P 

sp 290,  356 

Scarabaeidae     . .    . .     3^8 

Searaphites.  .    . .  123,  129 

rotundipennis.  .      123 

Scaritinae 116 

Searitini       117,    119,    122 

Scenopidae 537 

ScheUirienella  crenistria 

342-3 
Schiaopfioria  resupi)iata 

345,  550 

.'itri((tHhi    .  .     .  .     550 

Scliloirliera    tri.juua       450 

Sclioenus   Mourei     .  .      260 

Scirpus  siipimis      .  .     260 

Seopodes     176 

aterrimus  .  .    .  .  176-7 

boops 17(i-7 

fla\'ipes  .  .  .  .  176-7 
griffitbi  ..  ..  176-7 
intermedinfi  .  .  177 
lineatus  .  .  .  .  177 
si<rillatus  ....  17ti-7 
aifdneyenuls  .  .  177 
tasinanicus  .  .  176-7 
Spirotrana  crpnifollis  233 
doritieollis   ....     2.33 

MIXOR 248 

proxima      . .    . .     248 


INDEX. 

Pas'P. 
Soirotrana  vieina  . .  248 
Seminula  368-9,  544,  551 
subtilita  290,  352,  369 
Sericustoiuatidae  .  .  209 
SiebtTplla  galeatus        549 

GLABRA 549 

Silphomor]_iba     IKi,  177-8 
deoipiens    .  .     .  .      178 

dubia 178 

tasmanica  . .    .  .     178 

Silvius   borealis       .  .     461 

fidiginosiis    .  .    461-2 

hilli 461 

indistinctus      . .     461 

notatus 461-2 

psarophanes  . .  461-2 

sordidus     . .    . .     462 

tabaniformis    .  .     462 

Siraodontus    152,  156,  158 

aeneipennis    .  .    158-9 

australis    .  .    .  .    158-9 

convexus    . .    . .     159 

elongatus    . .    . .     158 

holomelanus     . .     158 

murrayanus     .  .     159 

orthomoidps    158,  178 

transf  U2:a .  .     .  .   158-9 

Sii'i'lias  limbatus     .  .     249 

Sisvmbriuiii  ollicinalp    56() 

Sorghum 457 

Soronia    ampbotiformis 

377 

Spatbella  s)i.   . .   290,  355 

Sphaerexopbus  minis  546, 

548 

Spilomierus 443 

Spirifpra  bisulpata  290, 
294,  347,  369 
BOWNiNGEysis  544-5 
convoUita  .  .  .  .  350 
da\-idis  .  .  .  290,  347 
'<1uplipipostata  290, 
,348 
dnplicostaia     . .     369 

pudora 54(1 

r.rsuperaiis  .  .  351 
Immerosa  .  .  .  .  348 
mosqupiisis  290,  348, 
369 
piiiU-ui.-  290.  348-9. 
369 
pingiiis  var.  elox- 

GATA  ....  290,  349 
jiinsruis   var. 

rotnndatxs  .  .  348 
pittmaiii  .  .  .  .  551 
phiDDfulrdla  ■  ■  351 
idipatella  .  .  .  .  .546 
radiatiis  .  .  .  .  546 
vppdi      349 


Page. 

Spirifera  sp.    ..   290,  294 

striata         290,    347-8 

350,  369 

STRIATO-COXVOLCTA 

290,350 
subpittmaiii  .  .  543 
ya.ssensis  .  .  .  .  268 
Spirit'erina  cristata  371 
insculpta  294,  351 
369 
octopHcata  .  .  370 
papibonacea     .  .     371 

Sporades 143-4 

spxpunctafus    .  .     l-H 

Sporozoa 95 

Staehys  arvensis  .  .  566 
StapbyHiiidap  . .  375-6 
Stauroc*pbabis  imu- 

ohisoni  .  .  .  .  546 
Stpuolopbns  diugo  321 
grandieep.s  . .  321 
pallipps  . .  .  .  321 
piceus..  ..  321,  323 
quinque-pustulatus 

321 

rob  list  us     .  .     .  .     321 

sexualis    .  .      .  .     323 

sniaras'dubis     .  .     321 

Stpnoinorplins   .  .    .  .      115 

Stpnnppria    prasina       207 

Stibasoma    bemiptera   467 

Stiebonotus       .  .     .  .     121 

Wi 122 

piceus 122 

Stigmodera 531 

aenpionrnis  .  .  223 
Rtipa  aristighimis  .  .  179 
Stomonaxiis  striaticolHs 

321 

wtraparonus      .  .    .  .     309 

clvmpnoides     . .     361 

DAViDis     .  .     290,   361 

Strntiomvia  506,   514. 

527-8 

anubis  ..    ..  511,  523 

apioula .520 

obamaplpon     506,  512 
potamidn    .  .    .  .     524 

sp 524 

Stratiomviidap  505-7.  511. 
524,  526-9,  532 

Strationiys .527-8 

pbamaelpon  507,  523-5 

fnroata 524 

longirnrnis  ,524,  526-7 

sp. .524,  .526 

strigata. .   . .  .524,  .527 
strigosa      ,  .     .  .     524 
Strpptorb^^lPbus  prpnis- 
tria   var.  senilis     343 


INDEX. 


XX. 


Pag'i. 

Strongvlus 553 

nodularis  .  .  .  .  553 
pergraoilis  .  .  553 
quadniadiatus     553-4 

tenuis 553 

Sti'.Nchnos  Atherstouei    85 

Subula 528 

citripes  .  .  .  524,  520 
maculata  . .  . .  524-5 
marginata  ....  524-5 
pallipes  . .  524,  528 
varia  . .    . .  524,  52u 

SylUdfe 90-1 

SyUidea 90-1,  107 

Syllides 102 

longicirrata      .  .     102 

lonqocirrata     .  .     102 

Syringothr.is   .  .    3(j8,  370 

exsuperans     290,  351 

Syllis    90-2.    94,  97,    100, 

104 

annanJi 94 

AUGBNERI    ....         98 

closterobranchia  90-7 
closterohranchia  var. 

91 

compacta    ....  91 

corru9cans  .  .  99 
coruscans     ■  ■   99,  100 

divaricata  .  .    .  .  104 

djiboutiensis     .  .  100 

exilis     91 

ferrueinea        .  .  101 

flumensi';    .  .     .  .  94 

.s^raf'ili^ 97 

hexaqonifera    •  ■  91 

byaliua 91 

kinbergiana      .  .  98 

Innqissuna         .  .  97 

lussinensis        . .  94 

niaciooeras       . .  91 

inonilifnrrais    .  .  91 

niqropunctata  91 

nnrmtnnica      .  .  104 

ochracea      .  .    .  .  102 

PARTfRIENS  .  .  97-8 
PECTINANS    .  .     .  .    93-5 

prolifera.  .    .  .  94,  104 

PUNCTl"LATA       ■  .  96 

spongirnia  .  .  .  .  100 
td'-viaefiirmis  .  .  101 
TRUXrATA  .  .  .  .  94-5 
val•ip!:■.^ta  .  .  Ol-.'i,  98 
vivipara  ....  98 
zebra 101 

Tabanidac  460,  466-7,  505 

Tabanus 460,  463 

aprepes 464 

australis     .      . .     465 


Page. 

Tabanus  badius 

.     465 

batchelori  .  .   . 

.  464-5 

brevior   .... 

.     465 

briabanensis 

.     466 

criipserqthrv^   . 

.     465 

daphoenus 

465-6 

diemcnensis 

.     466 

dorsobimaculat 

(s    464 

duplonotatus    . 

.     464 

frogKatti    .  .    . 

466-7 

fuqitivus     .  .    . 

.     465 

gentilis   .... 

466-7 

qriseohirsutus  . 

.     462 

hdU 

.     465 

innotabilis  . .   . 

.     464 

leucopteius 

.     462 

milsoni 

.     465 

milsonis      .  .    . 

.     465 

minor 

.     466 

MINU-CULUS      . 

.     46(i 

neogernianieus 

465 

NEOPALPALI.S      . 

.     465 

nigTinianus     .  . 

465-6 

pallipennis    .  . 

463-4 

palpalis      .  .    . 

.     465 

parvicalloswi    . 

.     464 

regis-georgii    . 

.     466 

ruflnotatus 

.     464 

spadix.       .  .     . 

.     466 

Tachys 

.     151 

bifoveatus 

.     151 

brevicornis 

.     151 

captus 

.     151 

flindei-si'      .  .     . 

.     151 

semistriatus 

.     151 

setiqer 

.     321 

triangularis 

.     321 

Taraktogenos  Blumei    459 

Teara  contraria 

.     531 

corallipliora     . 

.     499 

crocea   .     . .     . 

.     485 

deficila       .  .     . 

.     486 

edirardsi     .  .    . 

.     486 

erebndei'     .  .     ■ 

.     499 

farennides 

.     497 

fimbriatu     .  .    . 

.     479 

ivdec'ira     .  .     . 

.     486 

vura 

.     495 

rottuitdata.  .     . 

.     495 

toqato 

.     486 

Tecomn  cnnensis     . 

.       36 

radiean?     .  .     . 

.       .'56 

Tela   nnartdidf. 

.     493 

.    puxiUn 

.     493 

Te>iehrloivd„c  .  .    223.  230 

Tenebrioninac.  .     . 

230-1 

Teraphus      .... 

.     156 

Teraphif!       ...     . 

.     1.56 

arqutnroides     . 

.     157 

melbournensis. 

.      157 

Page. 
Terebra 362 

Terebratula    ainimdala 

347; 
hast  at  u  .  .  .  .  346 
pleurodon  ■  ■    ■  ■     346 

salteri 54/ 

subtilita      .  .    .  .     352 

ulstrix        .  .     .  .     351 

Tereticaules      . .     . .     261 

Tetragonoderini    120,    168 

Thamniscus  sp.     290,  342 

T)ienarotes 137 

bicolor 137 

discoidalis       138,  178 

metallicus.  .      .  .     320 

Thenarotidnis    .  .    .  .     135 

Therapis 156 

Therevidae 505 

Thoe  fusiformii  .  .  91 
Thoraeophenis  .  .  237 
Thrips   striatus        .  .      180 

Thyrididae 215-7 

Tineidae      474 

Tipulidae 183 

Tisiphone  abeona  221,  531 
rawnsleyi  .  .  221,  531 
Tortricidae  .  .  .  .  474 
Tortrieina  .  .  .  .  217 
Trechini    ....   119,   143-4 

Trechodes 143-5 

Trechus   ..     ..    138,  143-6 

ater 145 

atriceps      . .    . .     145 

AUSTBINUS        144,    147 

baldiensis  .  .  144,  150 
bipartitum      144,  150 

BLACKBURNI     144,    149 

BREVINOTATUS  144. 

148-9 

CARTERT  .  .  143,  147 
CASTELNAUl       .  .       143. 

145-6 
concolor      .  .    .  .      145 

coxi 144.  147 

diemenensis  143,  llii 
gibbipennis  144,  1511 
LEAl     ..     ..    143,145 

LONGINOTATUR  144, 

148-9 

MACLEAYI    .  .    144,    150 

monolobus  .  .  148 
nitens  .  .  144.  149-50 
PACiFici.';  143.  145-6 
ROBUSTU.s  143,  145-6 
rufllabris  . .  . .  145 
scapularis  . .  148 
simsoni  . .  144,  147-8 
solidior  .  .  .  .  146 
subornatellns  143, 

145,  147 


XXI. 


INDEX. 


Ti-cehus  tiibiuaniae 


Page. 

14-i, 

14'J-5U 

vR'tunae    .  .    143,.   147 

Trematosspua.  .     .  .    a4()-7 

Tribakis     auslraiis.  .     377 

teae     377 

Ti-K-betra  niarsinalis  487 
T.'icliinellulae  .  .  .  .  553 
Trichoceuhulua   anal  its 

551) 
.  . .  186 
.  .  .  .  •_'0() 
.  . .  551) 
....  556 
....  557 
(inuicolle 


Ti'icboitamus 

Trichoptera.  . 

Triehosoiiia 
brevwoUe 
columbae 

Tricbasomum 


tenwssiinum 
Tricbostronsylii  lae 
Tric'bostror.uylinae 
Tricbosti'ons.yhis     . 

nodularis  . .     . 

pergracilis 

quadriradialus 

tenuis  ...  . 
Tridens  Havus  .  .  . 
Trisonotliops.  . 

lineata 

lons'iplasa 


Tris'onotbops   ))acitioa  171 

vitti)>ennis.  .  . 
Trinufleus  ehirkui . 
Triplectidi 


178 

271 

209 

Trocboceras    sp.   2LIU,    363 


559 
557 
553 
553 
553 
553 
553 
554 
553 
457 
170-1 
178 
178 


Trcgo^itidae 
Trupi(loft'i)bakis 
Trypauusyllis    . 

krui'niii.  .    . 

nchardi 

tac'uiaelonuis. 

zebra      .  .    101 
'I'l'vplasma    .  .    . 

sp 290 

'I'urri(/a    iinufid 
Typosyllis      .  .    90 

pulvinata    .  . 

truncata    .  . 

Ulomoides   .  .    .  . 
Ungnadia  spesiosa 
Urocomu   baliolalia 

limbaUfi 
Uropetala    carovei 

Ventilas'o   viuiinali; 
Vertebraria.  .    . 


Pa-e. 
377 

181 
101 
101 
101 
101 

:,  107 

270 
341 
496 

93-9 
95 

94-6 

225 
450 
487 
487 
208 

447 
306 


Wingia 216 

Wurtbenia  f  eaiialieuhUa 
357 

Xantbocnemis  zelandica 

208 
Xantbophaea  . .  .  .  170 
angustubi  . .  . .  178 
bracbinoderus  170-1 
infuscata  .  .  .  .  170 
pilulosa      .  .     .  .      171 


Page. 
Xautliiipbaea  setosa  17U-1 

vitlala 171 

Xautburrbuea  .  .      .  .      425 

XenoiiKirplia       532,  536-7 

UH-sl rails     .  .     .  .     538 

yiaiidieornis  533,  537 

539 

if  Ijlifo  rutin     ■  ■     537-8 

Xyleiites 216 

Xybiuiyia 529 

inai-ulata    .  .     .  .     515 
iiiurt/iiiuta        .  .     525 

sp 524 

varia 525 

Xylopbagus       .  .    . .     528 
murqinata  ■  ■    ■  ■     524 

laria 524 

varitid 525 

Yvania  koniiK-kii  291,  358 

Zabraebia  pulita  524,  529 

sp 524 

Zabrinae      116 

Zamia   ..    ..    ..    226,  424 

Praseri       .  /    .  .  425 

iutesrifolia       .  .  425 

muricata    .  .     . .  425 

Zapbrentis..    ..    292,  368 

fulleui    290,  293,  338 

sp.    .      290,    293,  339 

suiiipbuens     290,  338 

Zu))iiin 120 

Zygacnidae 217 


(Printed  off  1st  March,   1921.) 


Ptoc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.8.W.,  1920. 


PlATK    XXVI. 


E.  E.  Chase,  del 


Holostomnvi  repens,  n.sjj. 


Feoc.  Lin-x.  Soc.   N.bW.,1920. 


Plate  xx\ii. 


Metainoi-phosis  of  Mclopoiiia  luhriccps  Macq. 


a 

E-i 

< 


73 


J 
o 

73 


^^  .«iiiiP^!(^^ 


fs 


■&■ 


pROC  LiNx.  Soc.   N.S.W.,  1920. 


Pr^ATE    XXIX. 


1-4  Metoponia  geinina,  n.sp.         5-6  J/,  ritbriceps  Macq.         7-11    Cliironiyza  prisfa  Walker/j|_,, 


Feoc.  Linn.  Soc.   N  S.W.,  192U. 


Plate  xxx. 


(A) 

13 


12-16  Cliiroinrza  australis  Macq.  17-22  Borcoides  subulala,  n.sp. 


pROC.  LiNx.  Soc.  N.S.W.,  11)20. 


PlATK     XXXI. 


10 


13 


14 


^, 


r 


15 


16 


17 


18 


19 


20  ^^^^ 


21  22 

Jliildle  Pnlaeozoie  Brachiopods  from  New  South  Wales. 


(Issued  25th  June,  1920.) 


f/J^      Vol.  XLV. 
/I  Part  1. 


Ui 


No.  177. 


'THE 


PROCEEDINGS 


OF     PHE 


LinnEfin  Society 


OF 


New    South    Wales 

For  the  Year 

1  9  2  O 

FAUT  I.  (pp.  1-184.) 

CONTAINING     PAPERS    READ    IN 

MAItVil-APBlL    [ill   part). 
WITH    THIRTEEN    PLATES 

[Plates  i.-xiii.] 


St  d  ne  y : 

printed  and  published  for  the  society  by 

THE  SYDNEY  AND  MELBOURNE  PUBLISHING  CO..  LTD., 
11   Wilmot   Street,   Sydney, 

AND 

SOLD   BY  THE  SOCIETY. 


1920. 


PRICE      10/9 


Agenl  ill  Europe  : 

Messrs.  Dulau  &  Co.,  34-36  Margaret  St.,  Cavendish  Square. 
]^fy  London,  W. 


d 


NOTICE. 


With 'the  exception  of  Volumes  I.-VI.  of  the  Proceedings — of  whii-b  the  Society's 
stock  was  totally  destroyed  in  the  Garden  Palace  Fire — the  Publications  of  the 
Liuuean  Society  of  N.S.W.  may  be  obtained  at  the  Society's  Hall,  Ithaca  Road, 
Elizabeth  Bay,  Sydney,  or  from  Dulau  &  Co.,  34-3C  Mai-garet  St.,  Cavendish 
Stjuare,  London,  W.,  at  the  following  prices: — 

FIRST  SERIES. 

Proceedings  for   1882,  Vol.   VII.— Part   1,  7s.   6d.;    Part  2,   10s.;    Part  3,   5s.; 

Part  4,  10s. 
Proceedings  for  1883,  Vol     VIII.— Part  1,  10s.;   Part  2,  5s.;   Part  3,  7s.;   Part 

4,  8s. 
Proceedings  for  1884,  Vol.  IX.— Part  1,  8s.;   Part  2,  12s.;  Part  3,  £1  5s.;  Part 

4,  £1  5s.  - 

Proceedings  for  1885,  Vol.  X.— Part  1,  12s.  ;  Part  2,  7s    6d. ;  Part  3,  15s. ;  Part 

4,  17s.  6d. 

SECOND  SERIES. 

Proceedings  for   1886,   Vol.    I.— Part   1,    10s.    6d'. ;    Part  2,    12s.;    Part  3.   13s.; 

Part  4,  12s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1887,  Vol.   Il.^Part  1.  7s.;   Part  2,  8s.;   Part  3,  12s.;   Part  4, 

£1  7s.        i 
Proceedings  for  ISSS,  Vol.  III.— Part  1,  los. ;   Part  2.  £1  4s.;  Part  3,  £1;   Part 

4.  18s. 
Proceedings  for  1889,  Vol.   IV.— Part  l^lls.;   Part  2.  16s.;   Part  3,  19s.;   Part 

4,  lis. 
Proceedings  for  1890,  Vol.  V.— Part  1,  lis. ;  Part  2,  9s. ;  Part  3,  9s. ;  Part  4,  9s. 
Proceedings  for  1891,  Vol.  VI.— Part  1,  10s. ;  Part  2,  9s.  6d. ;  Part  3,  17s. ;,  Part 

4,  7s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1892,  Vol.  VII.— Part  1,  6s.  6d.;   Part  2,  4s     6d.;  Part  3,  Ss. : 

Part  4,  8s. 
Proceedings  for  1893,  Vol.  VIII.— Part  1,  5s.;   Part  2.  lis.;   Part  3,  6s.:   Part 

4.  9s. 
Proceedings  for  1894,  Vol.   IX.— Part  1.  12s.;   Part  2.  12s.;   Part  3,  13s.:   Part 

4,  Ks. 
Proceedings  for   189.5,  Vol.    X.— Part   1,   los.;    Part  2,  Ss.   6d.  ;    Part  3,   10s.. 

Supplement,  Is.  6d.;  Part  4,  12s. 


Proceedings  for  1896.— Part  1.  9s. ;  Supplement,  2s.  6d.  ;  Part  2,  6s.  6d. ;  Part  3, 

7s.  6d.:  Part  4.  £1  7s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1897.— Part  1,  10s. ;  Part  2,  8s.  6d. ;  Part  3,  9s.  ;  Part  4,  12s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1898.- Part  1,  3s.  ;  Part  2,  6s. ;  Part  3.  12s. ;  Part  4.  14s. 
Proceedings  for  1899.— Part  1,  12s.  6d. ;  Part  2,  12s.  :  Part  3,  10s.  ;  Part  4,  10s.  6d. 


Proceedings  for  1900— Part  1,  Ss. ;  Part  2,  10s.  6d. ;   Part  3,  10s.  6d. ;  Part  4. 

17s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1901.— Part  1,  10s. ;  Part  2.  9s. ;  Part  .3,  os.;  Part  4,  17s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1902.— Part  1,  7s. ;  Part  2,  7s.  6d. ;  Part  3,  7s.  6d. ;  Supplement, 

3s.  ;  Part  4,  15s. 
Proceedings  for  1903.— Part  1,  9s.;  Part  2,  12s.  6d. ;   Part  3,  14s.:  Part  4,  15s. 
Proceedings  for"  1904.— Part  1,  10s.  ;  Part  2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3.  9s.;  Part  4,  10s. 
Proceedings  for  1905.— Part  1,  with  Supplement,  7s.;  Part  2,  10s.;  Part  3,  12s. 

6d.  ;  Part  4,  with  Supplement,  10s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for   1906.— Part   1,   12s.   6d. ;   Part  2,   12s.   6d. ;   Part  3,   12s.   6d.; 

Part  4,  15s. 
Proceedings  for  1907.— Part  1,  Ss.  ;  Part  2,  8s.  6d. ;  Part  3,  15s. ;  Part  4,  ISs. 
Proceedings  for  1908.— Part  1,  7s.;  Part  2,  9s.;  Part  3.  14s.;  Part  4,  12s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1909.— Part  1,  12s.;  Part  2,  17s.;  Part  3,  14s.;  Part  4,  16s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1910.— Part  l,,lls. ;  Part  2,  Us. ;  Part  3,  7s. ;  Part  4,  12s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1911.— Part  1,  9s.   6d.  ;   Part  2,  9s.   6d.;  Part  3,  9s.   6d. ;  Part 

4,  10s. 
Proceedings  for  1912.— Part  1,  Ss.  6d.:  Part  2,  25s.:  Part  3,  12s.  6d.;  Part  4,  15s. 
Proceedings  for  1913.— Part  1,  14s.  :  Part  2,  7s.  6d. ;  Part  3,  6s. ;  Part  4.  13s. 
Proceedings  for  1914.— Part  1,  13s.;  Part  2,  17s.;  Part  3,  25s.;  Part  4,  19s. 
Proceedings  for  1915.— Part  1,  17s.;  Part  2,  12s.  6d. ;  Part  3,  10s.;  Part  4,  lis. 
Proceedings  for  1916.— Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2,  12s.;  Part  3,  15s.;  Part  4,  19s. 
Proceedings  for  1917.— Part  1,  14s.;  Part  2,  9s.;   Part  3,  12s.  ed.;  Part  4,  16s.  9d. 
Proceedings  for  1918.— Part  1,  20s.;  Part  2,  14s.;  Part  3,  21s.;  Part  4.  19s. 
Proceedmgs  for   1919.— Part   1,   12s.    Od.  ;    Part  2,   lis.   6d. ;    Part  3,   17s.    6d.; 

Part  4,  13s. 
Proceedings  for  1920.— Part  1,  10s.  9d. 


The  Macleay  Memorial  Volume' [issued  October  13th,  1893].  Ro.yal  4to  ,  ll 
and  308  pages,  with  Portrait,  and  forty-two  plates.     Price  £3  3s.        ^ 

Descriptive  Catalogue  of  Australian  Fishes.  By  William  Maeleay,  F.L.S. 
F.L.S.   [1881].    A  few  copies  only.     Price  £1  net. 

The  Transactions  op  the  Entomological  Society  op  New  South  Wales,. 
2  vols.,  8vo.  [Vol,  I,  five  Parts,  1863-6G;  Vol.  ii.,  five  Parts,  1809-73;  all  pub- 
lislied],  price  £2,  net,  are  also  obtainable,  but  neither  the  Parts  nor  the  Volumes 
are  sold  separately. 


FR0CDEDING5,  1920.  PART  1 


CONTENTS. 

PAGES. 

Presidential    Address,  delivered    at   the  Forty-fifth    Annual   Meeting, 

31st  March,  1920,  l)y  J.J.  Fletcher.  M.'a.,  B.Sc.  (Plates  i.-viii.)  1-47 

Kopiness  in   Wattle  Bark    Infusions.     By    R.    GREiG-SinTH,    D.Sc, 

Macleay  Bacteriologist  to  the  Society.     (Plate  ix.)    52-89 

Australian  Syllidae,   Eusyllidae,  and  Autolytidae.     By  W.   A.   Has- 

WELL,  M.A.,   D.Sc,   P.R.S.,   Emeritus   Professor  of  Biologj\  the  ^ 

University  of  Sydney.     (Plates  s.-xiii.) 90-112 

The  Cardbidae  of  Tasmania.     By  TliOHAS  G.  Sloane.     (Four  Text- 

fi.gures.) 113-178 

A  New  Genus  of  Australian  Delphacidae  (Homoptera).  By  F.  Muir, 
F.E.S.  (Cominunicated  by  E.  TF.  Ferytison.  M.B.,  Ch.M.) 
(One  Text-figure) . 181-182 

An  Undescribed  Species  of  Clytocosmu$  Skuse.  By  C.  P.  Alexander, 
Ph.D.  (Communicated  by  R.  J.  Tillyard,  M.A.,  D.Sc.  F.L.S., 
F.E.S.)    183-1S4 

Hon.  Treasurer's  Balance  Sheet 48-50 

Elections  and  Announcements 47,  51,  179 

Notes  and  Exhibits 179-180 


(Issued   16th  August,  1920.) 


f/n^      Vol.  XLV. 


Part  •_'.  No.  178. 

THE 

PROCEEDINGS 


Linnmn  Society 


OF 


New    South    Wales 

For  the  Year 

19  20 

PAHT  n.  {pp.  iSo-.":!?.) 

CONTAINING     PAPERS    READ     IN 

APRIL  (i»  part)— JULY. 

WITH     FIVE    PLATES 

[Plates  xiv.-xviitt.j 


S  Y  D  N  E  ir : 
PRINTED  AND  PUBLISHED  FOB    THE  SOCIETY    nr 

THE  SYDNEY  AND  MELBOURNE  PUBLISHING  CO.,  LTD., 
11   Wilmot  Street,   Sydney, 

AND 

SOLD  BY  THE  SOCIETY. 


1920. 


PRICE      7/6 


Agent  m  Europe . 


\l  Messrs.  Ddlau  &  Co.,  34-36  Margaret  St.,  Cavendish  Square.  .1/ 

^fy  .  London,  W.  Vj(^ 


NOTICE. 


With  the  exception  of  Volumes  I.- VI.  of  the  Proceedings — of  which  the  Society's 
stock  was  totally  destroyed  in  the  Garden  Palace  Fire — the  Publications  of  the 
Linnean  Society  of  N.S.W.  may  be  obtained  at  the  Society's  Hall,  Ithaca  Road, 
Elizabeth  Bay,  Sydney,  or  from  Dulau  &  Co.,  34-36  Margaret  St.,  Cavendish 
Square,  London.  W.,  at  the  following  prices: — 

FIRST  SERIES. 

Proceedings  for   1882,  Vol.   VII.— Part   1,  7s.   6d.  ;    Part  2,   10s.;    Part  3,   5s.; 

Part  4    10s. 
Proceedings' for  1883,  Vol.   VIII.— Part  1,  IDs.;   Part  2,  5s.:   Part  3,  7s.;   Part 

4,  8s. 
Proceedings  for  1884,  Vol.  IX.— Part  1,  8s.;   Part  2,  12s.;  Part  3,  £1  5s.;  Part 

4.  £1  5s. 
,  Proceedings  for  1885,  Vol.  X.— Part  1.  12s. ;  Part  2,  7s.  6d.  :  Part  3,  15s. ;  Part 

4,  17s.  6d. 

SECOND  SERIES. 

Proceedings  for   1886,   Vol.    I.— Part   1,   IDs.    6d.;    Part  2,    12s.;    Part  3,   13s.; 

Part  4,  12s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1887,  Vol.   II.— Part  1,  7s.;   Part  2,  8s.;   Part  3,  12s.;   Part  4 

£1  7s. 
Proceedings  for  1888,  Vol.  III.— Part  1.  15s.;   Part  2,  £1  4s.;  Part  3,  £1;   Part 

4,  18s.  , 

Proceedings  for  1889.  Vol.   IV.— Part  1,  lis.;   Part  2,  16s.;   Part  3,  19s.;   Part 

4.  lis. 
Proceedings  for  1890.  Vol.  V.— Part  1,  lis. ;  Part  2.  9s. ;  Part  3,  9s. ;  Part  4,  9s. 
Proceedings  for  1891,  Vol.  VI.— Part  1,  10s. :  Part  2,  9s.  6d.  ;  Part  3,  17s.  ;  Part 

4,  7s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1892,  Vol.   VII  — Part  1,  6e.   6d.  ;   Part  2,  4s     6d.:   Part  3,  8s.; 

Part  4,  8s. 
Proceedings  for  1893,  Vol.   VIII.— Part  1,  .5s.;   Part  2,  lis.;  Part  3,  6s.;   Part 

4   9s. 
Proceedings  for  1894.  Vol.   IX.— Part  1.  12s.;   Part  2,  12s.;   Part  3,   13s.;   Part 

4,  8s. 
Proceedings  for   189.'>.   Vol.    X.— Part   1,   15s.;    Part  2,  Ss.    6d.;    Part  3.   10s.. 

Supplement,  Is.  6d.;  Part  4,  12s. 


Proceedings  for  1896.— Part  1,  9s. ;  Supplement,  2s.  6d. ;  Part  2,  6s.  6d.  :  Part  3, 

7s.  6d.;  Part  4,  £1  7s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1897.— Part  1,  10s. ;  Part  2.  8s.  6d. ;  Part  3,  9s. ;  Part  4,  12s.  6d. 
Proceeding.-;  for  1898.— Part  1,  3s.  ;  Part  2,  6s. :  Part  3.  12s. ;  Part  4,  14s. 
Proceedings  for  1899.— Part  1.  12s.  6d. ;  Part  2,  12s.  ;  Part  3.  10s.  ;  Part  4,  10s.  6d. 


BY   W    N.  BEXSON,  W.  S.  DtJX^  AND  W.   B.  BROWNE. 


317 


21.  Jaquet,  J.   B. — The  Irou  Ore  Deposits  of  New  South  Wales.     Mem.  (ieol. 

Surv.  N.S.W.,  vi.,  1901,  pp.  63-71. 

22.  De  Geer. — A  Geochrouology  of  the  last  12,000  yeais.     Compte  K«u(lu.     Cou- 

gres  Geol.     Iiiternat.    (Stockholm),  1910,  pp.  241-253. 
-See  ((/.so  Sayles,  R.  W. — "The  Squantum  Tillite."     Bull.  Mus.  Comp. 
Zool.    Harvard,    Ivi.,  No.  2,  pp.    141-175;   Seasonal  Deposition    in 
Aqueo-glacial   Deposits.     Mem.    Mils.  Cump.  Zool.    Harvard,  xlvii., 
No.  1.  1919. 

23.  Benson,  W.   N. — The  Geology  and    Petrology  of  the  Great  Serpentine  Belt 

of  N.S.W.     Part  iii.     These  Proceedings,  xxxviii.,  1913,  pp.  G62- 
724. 

24.  Anderson,  E     M.  and  Radley,  E.  G. — The  Pitclistones  of  Mu)l  and  their 

Genesis.     (Juart.  .Journ.  Geol.  Soc,  Ixxi.,  1915,  pp.  205-217. 

25.  Harker,  a. — The  Tertiary  Igneous  Rock.s  of  Skye.     Memoirs    Geo!.   Survey 

of  Great  Britain,  1904. 
2().   Ben,son.  W    N. — The  Geolouy  and  Petrology  of  the  Great  Serpentine  Belt 
of  N.S.TV.     Part   \-ii.     These  Proceedings,   xliii.,  1918,  p.    320. 

27.  Gilbert,  G.   K. — The  Geology  of  the  Henry  Mountains,  1877,  pp.  135-8. 

28.  Benson,  W.  N.^The  Geology  and  Petrology  of  the  Great  Serpentine  Belt 

of  N.S.W.     Part  v.     These  Proceedings,  xl..  1915,  pp.  ,540-B24. 

29.  Part  ii.,  Ibid.,  xx-xviii.,  1913.  pp.  569-596. 

29a.   Andrews,  E.  C. — The  (}eographicaI  Unity  of  Eastern  Australia.     Prne.  Hoy. 

Soc.  N.S;W..  sliv.,  1910.  pp.  420-480. 
29b.   . Notes  on  a  Model  of  New  England.     Ibid.,  xlvi..  1912,  pp.   143-1.55 

(and  several  other  papers  by  the  same  author). 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES  XVII.-XVTIff. 

Plate  xvii. — Geolo<jical  Map  of  the  Ciu-rabiiViulii  District.    . 
Plate  xviia.— Topographical  Map  of  the  Ciirrabnbula  District. 


PROCEEDINGS.   1920.  PART  1 


CONTENTS. 


PA0E8. 


Descriptions  ot  Australian  Flies  of  the  family  A^llidae  [Diptera], 
with  synon>niis  and  notes.  By  G.  H.  Hardv.  (Sixteen  Text- 
figures)      185-202 

Report  on  the  Neuropteroid  Insects  of  the  Hot  Springs  Region, 
N.Z.,  in  relation  to  the  problem  of  Trout  Food.  By  R.  J. 
TiLLYARD,  M.A.,  D.Sc,  F.L.S.,  F.E.S.,  Linnean  Macleay  Fellow 
of  the  Society  in  Zoology.     (Two  Text-figures) 205-213 

The  Panorpoid  Complex.  Additions  and  Corrections  to  Part  3. 
By  R.  J.  Tn-LTARD,  M.A.,  D.Sc,  F.L.S.,  F.E.S.,  Linnean  Mac- 
leay Fellow  of  the  Society  in  Zoology.     (One  Text-figure.)    . .  214-217 

Notes  on  Some  Australian  Tenebrionidae,  with  descriptions  of  new 
species; — also  of  a  new  genus  and  species  of  Buprestidae.  By 
H.  J.  Carter,  B.A..  F.E.S.     (Fourteen  Text -figures)       ....  222-249 

On  the  male  Genitalia  of  some  Robber-flies  belonging  to  the  sub- 
family AsUinac  [Diptera]  By  G.  H.  Harby.  (Twelve  Text- 
figure.O    ...      1 ' 250-259 

Notes  from  the  Botanic  Gardens,  Sydney.    By  A.  A.  Hamilton  . .  260-2b4 

The  Atrypidae  of  New  South  Wales,  with  references  to  those  re- 
corded from  other  States  of  Australia.  By  J.  Mitchell  and 
W.    S.   Dux.     (Plates   xiv.-xvi,,   and  Five  Text-figures.) ....  266-276 

Note  on  certain  variations  ot  the  Sporoeyst  in  a  species  of  Sapro- 
Jegnia  By  Maejorie  I.  Collins,  B.Sc.  Linnean  Macleay  Fel- 
low of  the  Society  in  Botany.     (Eleven  Text-figures.)      ....  277-284 

The  Geology  and  Petrologj-  of  the  Great  Serpentine  Belt  of  New 
Soutii  Wales.  Part  ix.  The  Geology-.  Palaeontology  and 
Petrogi-aphy  of  tlie  Currabubula  District,  with  notes  on  ad- 
jacent regions.  By  Professor  W.  N.  Bekson,  B.A.,  D.Sc, 
F.G.S.,  W.  S.  Dux.  and  W.  R.  Browke,  B.Sc.  Section  A.— 
General  Geology  (\V.  N.  Benson).)  (Plates  xvii.-xviia.  and 
Xine  Text-figures.) 285-317 

Special  General  Meeting  (Macleay  Cenliiiary) 218-220 

Elections   and    Aunouiicenicnts 203, 221,  265 

Notes  and  Exhibits 203-4,  221,  265 


CORRKiKNDUM. 

Proceedings,  1920,  Part.   I. 
Page  43,  for  line  48  (fourth  from  bottom)  read  whether,  if  one   pair  of  pinna<; 
persbts  at  a  certain  stage    that  pair  is  always  the  » 


(Issued  8th  November,  1920.) 


^Js"       Vol.  XLV. 
Part  3. 


f 


kVi 


No.  179. 


"■^v^ 

^i\1 


THE 


PROCEEDINGS 


OF    THE 


LiMMEnN  Society 


OF 


New    South    Wales 

Fob  thk  Year 

1920 

PAUT  III.  (pp.  317-472.) 

CONTAINING     PAPERS    READ    IN 

AUGUST— OCTOBER    {in  part). 
WITH- EIGHT    PLATES 

[Plates  xviii.-xxv.] 


S  r  D  N  K  1'  : 

Feinted  and  published  for  the  society  by 

THE  SYDNEY  AND  MELBOURNE  PUBLISHING  CO.,  LTD., 
11   Wilmot  Street,   Sydney, 

AND 

SOLD   BY  THE  SOCIETY. 


1920. 


PRICE      9/ 


^- 


Agent  in  Europe : 

Messrs.  Dulau  &  Co.,  34-36  Margaret  St.,  Cavendish  Square, 
^fy/  London,  W. 


vll 


The  Linnean  Society  of  New  South  Wales. 

LIST  OF  THE  OFFICERS  AND  COUNCIL,   1920^1. 

President : 

J.   J.   Fletcher,  M.A.,  B.Sc. 
Vice-Presidents : 
Professor  H.  G.  Chapman,  M.D.,  B.S.         A.  G.  Hamilton. 
W.  W.   Froggatt,  F.L.S.  C.  Hedley,  F.L.S. 

Hon.  Treasurer:  J.  H.  Campbell,  M.B.E.,  Royal  Mint,  Sydney. 
Secretary:  A.  B.  Walkom,  D.Sc. 

Council : 
R.   T.    Baker,  F.L.S.  A.   G.   Hamilton. 

R.    H.    Cambage    F.L.S.  Professor   W.  A.   Haswell,    M.A.,    D.Sc, 

J.  H.  Campbell.'M.B.E.  F.R.S- 

J.  E.  Carne,  F.G.S.  C.    Hedley,   F-L.S. 

H.  J-  Carter,  B.A.,   F.E.S.  A.  F.  Basset  Hull.   , 

Professor  H.  G.  Chapman,  M.D.,  B.S.  A.  H.  S.  Lucas,  M.A.,  B.Sc. 

Sir  T.    W.    Edgeworth  David,   K.B.E.,     J.  H.  Maiden,  I.S.O.    F.R.S. 

C.M.G.,  D.S.O.,  BA.,  D.Sc,  F.R.S.     t.  Steel. 
T.    Storie   Dixson,   M.B.,   Ch.M.  A.  B.  Walkom,  D.Sc. 

J.  J.  Fletcher,  M.A.,  B-Sc  G.    A.    Waterhouse,   B.Sc,   B.E.    F.E.S- 

W.  W.   Froggatt,  F.L.S. 

Auditor:  F.    H.  Rayment,  FjC.P.A. 


NOTICE. 


With  the  exception  of  Volumes  I.-VI.  of  the  Proceedings — of  which  the  Soeietjf's 
stock  was  totally  destroyed  in  the  Garden  Palace  Fire — the  Publications  of  the 
Linnean  Society  of  N.S.W.  may  be  obtained  at  the  Society's  Hall,  Ithaca  Road, 
Elizabeth  Bay,  Sydney,  or  from  Dulau  &  Co.,  34-36  Margaret  St.,  Cavendish 
Square,  London,  W.,  at  the  following  prices: — 

FIRST  SERIES. 

Proceedings  for   1882.  Vol.   VII.— Part   1,  7s.   6d.:    Part  2,   10s7;    Part  3,   5s.  ^ 

Part  4,  10s. 
Proceedings  for  1883,  Vol.   VIII.— Part  1,  10s.;   Part  2,  5s.;   Part  3,  7s.;   Part 

4.  8s. 
Proceedings  for  1884,  Vol.   IX.— Part  1,  8s.;  Part  2,  12s.:  Part  3,  £1  5s.;  Part 

4,  £1  OS. 
Proceedings  for  1885,  Vol.   X.— Part  1.  12s.;  Part  2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3,  15s. ;  Part 

4,  17s.  6d. 

SECOND  SERIES. 

Proceedings  for   1886,   Vol.    I.— Part   1,   10s.   6d. ;    Part  2,    12s.;    Part  3,   13s.: 

Part  4,  12s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1887,  Vol.   II.— Part  1,  7s.;   Part  2,  8s.;   Part  3,  12s.:   Part  4 

£1  7s. 
Proceedings  for  1888,  Vol.   III.— Part  1,  15s.;   Part  2,  £1  4s.:  Part  3,  £1:   Part 

4,  18s. 


Proceedings  for  1889,  Vol.   IV.— Part  1,  lis.;   Part  2,  16s.;   Part  3,  19s.;   Part 

4,  lis. 
Proceedings  for  1890,  Vol.  V.— Part  1,  lis. ;  Part  2,  9s.  ;  Part  3,  9s. ;  Part  4,  9s. 
Proceedings  for  1891,  Vol.  VI.— Part  1, 10s. ;  Part  2,  9s.  6d. ;  Part  3,  17s.  ;  Part 

4,  7s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1892,  Vol.   VII.— Part  1,  6s.  6d. ;  Part  2,  4s.  6d.  ;  Part  3,  8s.; 

Part  4,  8s. 
Proceedings  for  1893,  Vol.   VIII.— Part  1,  5s.;   Part  2,  lis.;   Part  3,  6s.;   Part 

4  9s. 
Proceedings  for  1894,  Vol.   IX.— Part  1,  12s.;   Part  2,  12s.;   Part  3,  13s.;   Part 

4,  8s. 
Proceedings  for   1895,  Vol.    X.— Part   1,   15s.;    Part  2,   8s.    6d. ;    Part  3,   10s., 

Supplement.  Is.  6d. ;  Part  4,  12s. 
Proceedings  for  1896.— Part  1,  9s. ;  Supplement,  2s.  6d. ;  Part  2,  6s.  6d. ;  Part  3, 

7s    6d.;  Part  4,  £1  7s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1897.— Part  1,  10s. ;  Part  2,  8s.  6d. ;  Part  3,  9s.  i  Part  4,  12s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1898.— Part  1,  3s.  ;  Part  2,  6s. ;  Part  3,  12s. ;  Part  4,  14s. 
Proceedings  for  1899.— Part  1,  12s.  6d.  ■,  Part  2,  12s. ;  Part  3,  10s.  ;  Part  4,  10s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1900— Part  1,  8s.;   Part  2,  10s.  6d. ;  Part  3,  10s.   6d.  ;  Part  4. 

17s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1901.— Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2.  9s.;  Part  3,  5s.;  Part  4,  17s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1902.— Part  1,  7s. ;  Part  2,  7s.  6d. ;  Part  3,  7s.  6d. ;  Supplement, 

3s.  ;  Part  4,  15s. 
Proceedings  for  1903.— Part  1,  9s.:  Part  2,  12s.  6d. ;   Part  3,  14s.;   Part  4,  15s. 
Proceedings  for  1904.— Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2,  7s.  6d. ;  Part  3,  9s.;  Part  4,  10s. 
Proceedings  for  1905.— Part  1,  with  Supplement,  7s.;  Part  2,  10s.;  Part  3,  12s. 

6d. ;  Part  4,  with  Supplement,  10s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for   1906.— Part   1,   12s.   6d.;   Part  2,   12s.   6d. ;   Part  3,   12s.   6d.; 

Part  4,  15s. 
Proceedings  for  1907.— Part  1,  8s.  ;  Part  2,  8s.  6d. ;  Part  3,  15s. ;  Part  4,  18s. 
Proceedings  for  1908.— Part  1,  7s. ;,  Part  2,  9s.;  Part  3,  14s.;  Part  4,  12s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1909.— Part  1,  12s. ;  Part  2,  its. ;  Part  3,  14s.  ;  Part  4,  16s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1910.— Part  1,  lis. ;  Part  2,  lis. ;  Part  3,  7s. ;  Part  4,  12s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1911.— Part  1,  9s.   6d.;  Part  2,  9s.   6d. ;  Part  3,  9s.  6d. ;  Part 

4,  10s. 
Proceedings  for  1912.— Part  1.  8s.  6d.;  Part  2,  25s.;  Part  3,  12s.  6d.;  Part  4,  15s. 
Proceedings  for  1913.— Part  1,  14s.;  Part  2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3,  6s.;  Part  4,  13s. 
Proceedings  for  1914.— Part  1,  13s.;  Part  2,  17s.;  Part  3,  25s.;  Part  4,  19s. 
Proceedings  for  1915.— Part  1,  17s.;  Part  2,  12s.  6d.  ;  Part  3,  10s.;  Part  4,  lis. 
Proceedings  for  1916.— Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2,  12s.;  Part  3,  15s.;  Part  4,  19s. 
Proceedings  for  1917.— Part  1.  14s.;  Part  2,  9s.;  Part  3,  12s.  6d.;  Part  4,  16s.  9d. 
Proceedings  for  1918.— Part  1,  20s.;  Part  2,  14s. ;  Part  3,  21s.;  Part  4,  19s. 
Proceedings  for  1919.— Part   1,   12s.    6d.  ;    Part  2,   lis     6d. ;    Part  3,   17s.   6d.; 

Part  4,  13s. 
Proceedings  for  1920.— Part  1,  10s.    9d.:  Part  2,  7s,  6d.;    Part  3,  9s. 


The  Macleay  Memorial  Volume  [issued  October  13th,  1893].  Royal  4to.,  li. 
and  308  pages,  with  Portrait,  and  forty-two  plates.     Price  £3  3s. 

Descriptive  Catalogue  of  Australian  Fishes.  By  William  Macleay,  F.L.S. 
P.L.S.  [1881].    A  few  copies  only.    Price  £1  net. 

The  Transactions  op  the  Entomological  Society  of  New  South  Wales,. 
2  vols.,  8vo.  [Vol.  I,  five  Parts,  1863-66;  Vol.  ii.,  five  Parts,  1869-73;  all  pub- 
lished], price  £2,  net,  are  also  obtainable,  but  neither  the  Parts  nor  the  Volumes 
are  sold  separately. 


PROCEEDINGS,   1920.  PART  3 


CONTENTS. 

Pages. 
A  List  of  the  Species  of  Australian  Carabidcw  which  range  beyond  Aus- 
tralia and  its  Dependent  Islands .     By  Thomas  G.  Si>oane 320-323 

On   dental  incrustations   and   the   so-called   "Gold-Plating"    of   Sheep's 

Teeth.    By  Thos.  Steei ^ 324-328 

On  the  Structure  of  the  Resin-secreting  Glands  in  some  Australian  Plants. 
By  Marjobie  I.  Collins,  B.Sc,  Linnean  Macleay  Fellow  of  the 
Society  in  Botany.      (Twelve  Text-figures.) 329-336 

The  Geology  and  Petrology  of  the  Great  Serpentine  Belt  of  New  South 
Wales.  Part  ix.  The  Geology,  Palaeontology  and  Petrography 
of  the  Currabubula  District,  with  Notes  on  Adjacent  Regions.  By 
Professor  W.  N.  Benson,  B.A.,  D.Sc,  F.G.S.,  W.  S.  Dux,  and 
"W.  R.  Browne,  B.Sc. 

Section  B. — Palaeontology.      (W.    S.   Dun  and  W.  N.   Benson). 
Appendix  by  F.  Chapman,  A.L.S.     ( Plates  xviii.-xxiv. ;  and  Eight 

Text-figures. ) 337-374 

Section  C.—Peh-ography.      (W.   R.  Browne).      (Plate  xxv.).    ..     405-423 

Descriptions  of  New  Species  of  Australian  Coleoptera.     Part  xvi.     By 

Arthur  M.  Lea,  F.E.S 375-403 

The  Chemical  Examination  of  Macrogamia  spiralis.  By  James  M. 
Petrie,  D.Sc,  F.I.C.  Linnean  Macleay  Fellow  of  the  Society  in 
Biochemistrj' • 424442 

Two  New  Hymenoptera  of  the  Superfamily  Proctotrypidae  from  Aus- 
tralia. By  Alax  p.  Dodd.  (Communicated  by  W.  TF.  Frongatt, 
F.L.S.) ■. ■..   ..     443-44P 

Cyanogenesis  in  Plants.  Part  iv.  The  Hydrocyanic  Acid  of  Hetero- 
dendron- — A  Fodder  Plant  of  New  South  Wales.  By  James  M. 
Petrie,  D.Sc,  F.I.C,  Linnean  Macleay  Fellow  of  the  Society  in 
Biochemistry 447-459 

Notes   (m   Australian    Tahanidae.     By   Eust.-vce  W.    Ferguson,   ^I.B., 

Ch.M.,  and  Gerald  F.  Hn^L,  F.E.S 460-467 

Descriptions  of  New  Forms  of  Butterflies  from  the  South  Pacific.     By 

G.  A.  Waterhouse,  B.Sc,  B.E.,  F.E.S 468-471 

Elections  and  Announcements 318,  404,  472 

Notes  and  Exhibits 318-9,  404,  472 


(Issiced  7th  March,  1921.) 


f/l^         Vol.  XLV. 
'^^  Part  4. 


f 


% 


No.  180. 


THE 


PROCEEDINGS 


OF    THE 


LinriEnri  Society 


OF 


New   .South    Wales 

Fob  the  Year 

1920 

VAV.T  ir.   {pp.  473-653,  i.-xxi.) 

CONTAINING     PAPERS    READ     IN 

OCTOBER  (in  part)~~NOVEMBER. 
WITH    SIX    PLATES 
[Plates  xxvi .  -xxxi .  ] 


Sydney: 

printed  and  published  foe  the  sooiett  by 

THE  SYDNEY  AND  MELBOURNE  PUBLISHING  CO.,  LTD.. 

11   Wilmot   Street,   Sydney, 

AND 

SOLD   BY  THE  SOCIETY. 


1921. 


PRICE      11/ 


Agent  in  Europe  : 

. .  Messrs.  Dulau  &  Co.,  34-36  Margaret  St.,  Cavendish  Square.  ,  I J 

l^J^  London,  W.  \jJ!^ 

7i^^ ^IK 


The  Linnean  Society  of  New  South  Wales. 

LIST  OF  THE  OFFICERS  AND  COUNCIL,  1920-21. 
Prasideat: 
J.   J.   Fletcher,  M.A.,  B.Sc. 
Vice-Presidents : 
Professor  H.  G.  Chapman,  M.D.,  B.S.       A.  G.  Hamilton. 
W.  W.   Froggatt,  F.L.S-  C.  Hedley.  F.L.S. 

Hon.  Treasurer:  J.  H.  Campbell,  M.B.E.,  Royal  Mint,  Sydney. 
Secretary:  A.  B.  WaUcom,  D.Sc. 

Council: 
R.   T.   Baker,  F.L.S.  A.  G.  Hamilton. 

R.    H.    Cambage    F.L.S.  Professor   W.  A.  Haswell,    MA..,    D.Sc, 

J.  H.  CampbeU.  M.B.E.  F.R.S. 

J.  E.  Carne,  F.G.S.  C.    Hedley,  F.L.S. 

H.  J.  Carter,  B.A.,  F.E.S.  A.  F.  Basset  Hull. 

Prof«ssor  H.  G.  Chapman,  M.D.,  B.S.  A.   H.   S.  Lucas,  MA..,  B.Sc. 

Sir  T.    W.    Edgeworth  David,  K.B.E..     j.  h.  Maiden,  I.S.O.    F.R.S. 

C.M.G.,  D.SO.,  BA.,  D.Sc,  F.R.S.     t.  Steel. 
T.    Storie   Dixson,   M.B.,   Ch.M.  a.  B.  WaUcom,  D.Sc 

J.   J.  Fletcher,  MA..,  B-Sc  G.    A.    Waterhouse,   B.Sc,  B.E.    F.E.S. 

W.  W.   Froggatt.  F.L.S. 

Auditor:  F.   H.  Ravment,  F.C.P.A. 


NOTICE. 


With  the  exception  of  Volumes  I.-VI.  of  the  Proceedings — of  which  the  Society's 
stock  was  totally  destroyed  in  the  Garden  Palace  Fire — the  Publications  of  the 
Linnean  Society  of  N.S.W.  may  be  obtained  at  the  Society's  HaU,  Ithaca  Road, 
Elizabeth  Bay,  Sydney,  or  from  Dulau  &  Co.,  34-36  Margaret  St.,  Cavendish 
Square,  London,  W.,  at  the  following  prices : — 

FIRST  SERIES. 

Proceedings  for  1882,  Vol.    VII.— Part   1,  7s.   6d.;    Part  2,   10s.;   Part  3,  5s. > 

Part  4,  10s. 
Proceedings  for  1883,  Vol.   VIII.— Part  1,  10s.;   Part  2,  5s,;   Part  3,  7s.;  Part 

4,  8s. 
Proceedings  for  1884,  Vol.  IX.— Part  1,  Ss. ;  Part  2,  12s.;  Part  3,  £1  5s.;  Part 

4,  £1  5s. 
Proceedings  for  1885,  Vol.  X.— Part  1,  12s.;  Part  2,  7s    6d. ;  Part  3,  15s.-  Part 

4,  17s.  6d. 

SECOND  SERIES. 

Proceedings  for  1886,  Vol.   I.— Part  1,   IDs.   6d.;    Part  2,   12s.;   Part  3,   13s.; 

Part  4,  12s.  6ci. 
Proceedings  for  1887,  Vol.   II.— Part  1.  7s.;  Part  2,  8s.;  Part  3,  12s.;  Part  4 

£1  7s. 
Proceedings  for  1888,  Vol.   III.— Part  1,  15s.:   Part  2,  £1  4s.;  Part  3,  £1;   Part 

4,  18s. 


Proceedings  for  1S89,  Vol.  IV.— Part  1,   lis.;   Part  2.  16s.;   Part  3,  19s.;   Part 

4,  lis. 
Proceedings  for  1S90,  Vol.  V.— Part  1,  Us. ;  Part  2,  9s. :  Part  3,  9s. ;  Part  4,  9s. 
Proceedings  for  1891,  Vol.  VI.— Part  1,10s.;  Part  2,  9s.  6d.;  Part  3,  17s. ;  Part 

4,  7s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1892,  Vol.   VII.— Part  1,  6s.  6d.;  Part  2,  4s,  6d.;  Part  3,  Ss. ; 

Part  4,  Ss. 
Proceedings  for  1893,  Vol.   VIII.— Part  1,  5s.;   Part  2,  lis.;   Part  3,  6s.;  Part 

4,  9s. 
Proceedings  for  1894,  Vol.   IX.— Part  1,  12s.;   Part  2,  12s.;   Part  3,   13s.;   Part 

4.  Ss. 
Proceedings  for   lS9b,  Vol.    X.— Part   1,   15s.;    Part  2,  8s.    6d.;    Part  3,    10s.. 

Supplement,  Is.  6d.;  Part  4,  12s. 
Proceedings  for  1896.— Part  1,  9s. ;  Supplement,  2s.  6d.  ;  Part  2,  6s.  6d. ;  Part  3, 

7s    6d.;  Part  4,  £1  7s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1S97.— Part  1,  10s. ;  Part  2,  Ss.  6d. ;  Part  3,  9s. ;  Part  4,  12s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1898.- Part  1,  3s.  ;  Part  2,  6s. ;  Part  3,  12s. ;  Part  4,  14s. 
Proceedings  for  1899.— Part  1,  12s.  6d. ;  Part  2,  12s. ;  Part  3,  10s.  :  Part  4,  10s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for   1900  —Part  1,  Ss.  ;  Part  2,  10s.  6d.  ;   Part  3.  10s.   6d. ;   Part  4. 

17s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1901.— Part  1,  10s.  ;  Part  2   9s.  ;  Part  3,  5s.;  Part  4,  17s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1902.— Part  1,  7s. ;  Part  2,  7s.  6d. ;  Part  3,  7s.  6d. ;  Supplement, 

3s. ;  Part  4,  15s. 
Proceedings  for  1903.— Part  1,  9s.;  Part  2,  12s.  6d.  ;   Part  3,  14s.;   Part  4,  15s. 
Proceedings  for  1904.— Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3,  9s.;  Part  4,  10s. 
Proceedings  for  1905.— Part  1,  with  Supplement,  7s.;  Part  2,  10s.;  Part  3,  12s. 

6d.  ;  Part  4,  with  Supplement,  10s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for   1906.— Part   1,   12s.    6d. ;    Part  2,   12s.   6d. ;    Part  3,    12s.   6d. ; 

Part  4,  15s. 
Proceedings  for  1907.— Part  1,  8s.  ;  Part  2,  Ss.  6d. ;  Part  3,  15s. ;  Part  4,  ISs. 
Proceedings  for  190S.— Part  1,  7s.;  Part  2,  9s.;  Part  3,  14s.;  Part  4,  12s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1909.— Part  1,  12s.;  Part  2,  17s.;  Part  3,  14s.;  Part  4,  16s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1910.— Part  1,  lis. ;  Part  2,  Us. ;  Part  3,  7s. ;  Part  4,  12s.  6d. 
Proceedings  for  1911.— Part  1,  9s.   6d.;  Part  2,  9s.   6d.;  Part  3,  9s.  6d. ;  Part 

4,  10s. 
Proceedings  for  1912.— Part  1.  Ss.  6d.;  Part  2^  25s.;  Part  3,  12s.  6d.;  Part  4,  15s. 
Proceedings  for  1913.— Part  1,  14s.;  Part  2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3,  6s.;  Part  4,  13s. 
Proceedings  for  1914.— Part  1,  13s.;  Part  2,  17s.;  Part  3,  25s.;  Part  4    19s. 
Proceedings  for  1915.— Part  1,  17s.;  Part  2,  12s.  6d.  ;  Part  3,  10s.;  Part  4,  lis. 
Proceedings  for  1916.— Part  1,  10s.;  Part  2,  12s.;  Part  3,  15s.;  Part  4,  19s. 
Proceedings  for  1917.— Part  1,  14s.;  Part  2,  9s.;  Part  3,  12s.  6d.;  Part  4,  16s.  9d. 
Proceedings  for  1918.— Part  1,  20s.;  Part  2,  14s.;  Part  3,  21s.;  Part  4,  19s. 
Proceedings  for   1919.— Part   1,   12s.    6d.  ;    Part  2,   lis     6d. ;    Part  3,   17s.   6d.; 

Part  4,  13s. 

Proceedings  for  1920.— Part  1,  10s.    9d.;  Part  2,  7s.  6d.;  Part  3,  9s.;   Part  4,   lis. 


The  MACLE.\r  Memorial  Volume  [issued  October  13th,  1893].  Ro3'al  4to  ,  li. 
and  308  pages,  with  Portrait,  and  forty-two  plates.     Price  £3  3s. 

Descriptive  Catalogue  or  Australian  Fishes.  By  William  Macleay,  F.L.S. 
F.L.S.   [1881].     A  few  copies  only.     Price  £1  net. 

The  Transactions  op  the  Entomological  Society  op  New  South  Wales. 
2  vols.,  8vo.  [Vol  J,  five  Parts,  1863-66;  Vol.  ii.,  five  Parts,  1869-73;  all  pub- 
lished], price  £2,  net.  are  also  ol)tainable,  limt  neither  the  Parts  nor  the  Volumes 
are  sold  separately. 


PROCEEDINGS.   1920.  PART  4 


CONTENTS. 

Pages. 

Revision     of     AH.«traliau    Lepiftopteia— i/par/r/nc.        By    A.    .leffei-is 

Turner,  M.D..  r.E.S.    .. 474-499 

A  new  Avian  Trematode.  By  Eleanor  E.  Chase,  B.Se.,  Demonstrator 
in  Zoology,  University  of  Sydney.  (Communicated  hij  Professor 
S.  J.  Johnston,  B.A.,  D.Sc.)   (Plate  xsvi.,  and  one  Text-figure. )    ..     500-504 

Studies  in  Life-histories  of  Australian  Diptera  Braehyeera.  Part  i. 
Stratiomyiidae.  No.  1.  Metoponia  riihrlceps  Macquart.  By 
Vera  Irwin-Smith,  B.Se.,  F.L.S..  Linnean  Maeleay  Fellow  of  the 
Society  in  Zoologj'.  (Plates  xrsii.-xxviii..  and  Twenty-three  Text- 
figiues.) 505-530 

A  Revision  of  the  Chiromyziui  (Diptera).     By  G.  H.  Hardy.      (Plates 

xxix.-xxx.) 532-542 

Some  new  Brachiopods  from  the  Middle  Palaeozoic  Rocks  of  New  South 
Wales.  By  John  Mitchell,  late  Principal  of  the  Technical  College 
and  School  of  Mines,  Newcastle.     (Plate  xxxi. ) 543-551 

Nematode  Parasites  of  the  Domestic  Pigeon  (Columba  livia  dcmestica) 
in  Australia.  By  Vera  Irwin-Smith,  B.Sc,  F.L.S.,  Linnean 
Maeleay  Fellow  of  the  Society  in  Zoology.     (Nineteen  Text-figures.)     552-563 

A  Few  Notes  on  the  Botany  of  Lord  Howe  Island.  (Sixth  Paper. )  By 
J.  "H.  Maiden,  I.S.6.,  F.R.S.,  F.L.S.,  Government  Botanist  and 
Directoi-  of  the  Botanic  Gardens,  Sydney 564-566 

The  Society's  Heritage  from  the  Macleays.  Address  by  the  President, 
J.  .1.  Fletcher,  M.A.,  B.Sc,  at  tlie  Special  General  Meeting.  14th 
June,  1920 '.  .  .   .  .     5G7-635 

Donations  and  Exchanges 636-648 

List  of  Members,  1920 649-653 

Notes  and  Exhibits  .  . 473,  531 

Elections  and  Announcements 531 

Title-page i. 

^  Contents iii. 

Corrigenda vi. 

List  of  New  Tribal  and  Generic  Names vi. 

List  of  Plates vii. 

Index i.-xsd. 


MHl,  WHOl    l.IHHAHV 


UH    lADR    E